PREFACE.

—=>———

Our aspirations on launching a fifth annual volume of the

Journal into the ocean of literature are no longer tremulous

from a diffident anxiety as to its reception ; the tide of popular

favor, or at least the diminutive wave of it which reaches the

secluded estuary of oriental research, has buoyed us up with the

most flattering encouragement, and an increasing body of con-

stituents has still pressed forward to freight our humble bark

with the productions of their industry and talent. To extract

any of the too complimentary phrases of our correspondents

in Paris, Vienna, and London, would be egotism ; and we must

not forget that a proportion of their praise may be merely

stimulatory—inciting us to take advantage of the golden op-

portunities commanded by our position at the emporium, to

amass a rich cargo for their more deliberate and erudite dis-

cussion hereafter. Our errors also have not escaped their due

measure of criticism, but even thus they have been productive

of a good effect in drawing forth more correct information

from other sources. The commerce in which we are engaged,

to continue the metaphor in the terms of a late French prospec-

tus, ‘* multipliera le capital de la science comme I’autre com-

merce multiplie celui du numeraire.”

However we may thus boast of having added to the stock

of knowledge, we fear the ‘* capital du numeraire” has but little

connection, beyond the analogy, with the out-turn of our spe-

culation ; although, if the pecuniary prospects of the Journal

are not much bettered this year, we have none to blame but

ourselves for the unpromising aspect of our account current !

By increasing the letter-press more than 100 pages, and the

plates in proportion, we felt we were exceeding the bounds of

caution; yet we could not resist the attempt to keep pace with

the communications entrusted to us for publication, even at

V1 PREFACE.

some sacrifice and risk. Had our edition been sufficiently ex-

tensive to allow a large reserve for future sale, there might

have been hopes of retrievyement—but the 500 copies have all

disappeared, and of our early volumes it is almost impossible

now to procure acopy. ‘The only method, then, left to meet

this difficulty, is to levy a heavier assessment on our supporters

for the future; and to this step, however reluctantly, we shall

be obliged to resort from the beginning of the year 1837, still

always adhering to our engagement of giving the maximum

of matter for our means, and reminding our subscribers that

we are not in fact heightening our charge, but enlarging our

work ; seeing that from 32 pages we have gradually augment-

ed the monthly quota to 80, a quantity which experience has

proved to be more than can be covered by a rupee subscrip-

tion. Our rates from 1837, therefore, will be 14 rupee per

number to subscribers, and two rupees to others. The pecuni-

ary details on which this measure is founded areas follows:

PAYMENTS. 1836. RECEIPTs.

Co.’s Rs. A. P. Co.’s Rs. A. P.

To Balance due Ist Jan... 675 3 7 By Collections in 1836,.. 4319 00

To Establishment one yean 175 70 By Asiatic Society for co-

To ie ae 143 14 3 pies supplied to Mem-

To Binding, .... wet a 209) 14 57, bers in 1835, .---- 1088 00

To Printer’s Bill dis- By sale in England,... 336 8 0

charged, .... 4277 96

To Engravings and Litho-

gyaphs,'.. saace« aces) LeOGn ome

7047 12 0 5743 91

OUTSTANDINGS. DEPENDENCIES.

To printing Bills unpaid By Subscriptions due for

for AB AG.) a eitt spr piace ea pe 1836, in Calcutta, .... 960 13 3

Ditto Mofussil, ........ 1100 00

Ditto Memb. As. Soc. 1284 00

Ditto, Madras, .. 05.22.50 1044 do 0

Ditto Bombay, ........ 830 3 9

Ditto Ceylon, .......... 183 10 7

12,268 12 0 10,880 38

Loss, supposing all the outstanding claims realizable, .....,.. 1,388 8 0

If, in our last volume, we could not refrain from noticing, as

the most prominent object of interest in its contents, the sus-

pension of oriental publications by the British Indian Govern-

ment, and the general discouragement under which oriental

studies were doomed to languish; we must not on the present

occasion omit to make honorable mention of the patronage and

PREFACE. Vil

_ favor which has once more dawned upon science and literature

in India under the present administration. The proceedings

of the Asiatic Society, last year so full of painful discussion

and unsuccessful appeal, this year shine forth with tokens of

distinguished consideration. Consulted on the merit of pro-

positions connected with historical research in the Peninsula

and in Ceylon, its recommendations have met that attention

which dignifies its proceedings, and tends more than any thing

else to render it a substantive and useful institution. The

sanction of its auspices has been courted, and has been ex-

tended beneficially to publications of great magnitude and im-

portance. It has itself engaged in a new sphere of operations,

devolved upon it by the discussions of last year, which pro-

mises, by a judicious combination with the sister Societies

of France and England, to become equally advantageous to

the European scholar, and profitable to itself. The Society

of Paris has been the foremost to volunteer its co-operation in

the completion of the series of suspended oriental works; but we

have reason to know that the Royal Asiatic Society of London

has not espoused their cause less warmly or less successfully,

although the unavoidable delays of references to high antho-

rities have prevented our yet reaping the fruits of their influ-

ence and intercession.

Many will consider with ourselves that the publication of

a full edition of the oriental classics is a perfectly legitimate

branch of labour for an Asiatic Society, and they may hope

to see it permanently continued under endowment and protec-

tion of the Government itself—It may indeed be regarded

as a judicious modification of one of the earliest intentions of

the institution promulgated in July, 1806, but hitherto left a

dead letter on its minutes, ‘* that a series of volumes, to be

entitled Bistiorneca Astarica, be published by the Society

distinct from the Asiatic Researches, containing translations of

short works in the Asiatic languages, and extracts and de-

scriptive accounts of books of greater length, gradually extend-

ing to all Asiatic books deposited in the Society’s library, and

even to all works extant in the languages of Asia.”

The translation and critical examination of Oriental works at

the present day can be better undertaken by the distinguished

Viil PREFACE.

professors and philologists of Europe, and the only department

of which we can hope to relieve them, with any chance of

success, is the collection and correct printing of original texts

through the supervision of our native Pandits and Manlavis.

We therefore hope to see fresh volumes put in hand now

that the series transferred by the Committee of Education is

so nearly completed; and we would respectfully suggest, that

the Government should make over to the Society all of the

Sanscrit, Arabic, and Persian works that have hitherto issued

from the Education Press, in order that one system of distri-

bution and sale may be regulated for the whole series; and

that, under the name of the BrstiorHeca Astatica, this body

of Indian classicai lore may be encouraged and regarded in the

light of a national undertaking, entrusted merely to the vigi-

lant superintendence of the Society as the appropriate organ

of their publication.

But we are dwelling too long on a favorite project, and have

but little space left to allude to the equally prosperous for-

tune of the natural sciences during the present year. The

sincere votary of science cannot have witnessed without plea-

surable anticipations the introduction, altogether novel in this

country, of the delightful and instructive experiments of na-

tural philosophy among the social recreations of Government

House. At these parties may be kindled into action many

a dormant disposition to cultivate the sciences that has hither-

to but wanted such astimulus; and the community at large

may learn to appreciate the studies they have been accustom-

ed to eschew as vain or recondite, by witnessing their practi-

cal application and attractions. We have heard it suggest-

ed as an improvement on the plan adopted by the illustrious

Patron of the Society, to hold these soirées directly at the Socie-

ty’smuseum, where the objects to be explained or exhibited might

be prepared more at leisure, and where they would remain

classified with others in the same collection ;—others again

have advocated the giving of a more decidedly lectural character

to the evening’s exposition. In London, where the President of

the Royal Society holds similar meetings, his visitors are already:

well grounded in the subjects treated of, and need but a glance at

dny new invention or experiment to comprehend its drift: but’

‘PREFACE. ib.

in India the majority have not enjoyed the same opportunities,

and their curiosity is merely raised without hope of entire

satisfaction. But against this view it may be urged that a

monthly lecture would be but a tardy mode of communicating

knowledge, more especially if the subject were to be changed

on each occasion. A course of lectures might be a good suc-

cedaneum to the system, but the spirit of the monthly re-union

must be general and exhibitory, to answer the object intended.

Again we are insensibly falling into a review of matters be-

yond the proper scope of a Preface, which should confine itself

to the contents of the volume it precedes, or to the mutual

concerns of the editor and his constituents.

On the cover of more than one monthly Journal we have

already explained to what extent we have been enabled to

increase the number and accuracy of our lithographed plates

this year, by putting in requisition the talents of our mofussil

friends. When the facilities of drawing on transfer paper for

lithographic printing become more generally known, we may

expect still further advantage from its adoption by travellers,

engineers, botanists, and naturalists, who are, or ought to be,

artists also. It is now known from actual experience that a

transfer drawing, packed in a tin roll, may be subjected to a

journey of 1000 miles, either in the hottest or the dampest

period of the year with impunity. Most of the imperfections

in the plates of the Sewalik fossils are due to want of care in

passing them on to the stone, rather than to imperfections in

the original drawings.

Some confusion has arisen this year, in the numbering

and placing of the plates, from continual and unavoidable

postponements which it is needless to particularize. One

plate (of the Bhitart inscription) has been reserved for the

ensuing volume, that full justice may be done to the able

elucidation of its important contents. And here we may be

allowed a moment’s exultation at the highly curious train of

discovery, connected with this monument, which has been

developed in the pages of the Journal. Not only has a dynasty

before wholly unknown to the Indian historian, been traced by

coins and inscriptions through seven generations in its own

line, but two collateral alliances with other reigning princes

x PREFACE.

have been brought to light: while extracts from ancient Chinese

authors, independently scrutinized in Europe, have helped to

determine their exact chronological epoch.

In numismatic research discovery has been no less rife. The

theory of a Grecian origin has been extended to various other

series of Hindu coins—and the only one (the Vardha series)

which remained of a doubtful source, has recently been traced

in a most satisfactory manner to the Sassanian coinage of Per-

sia, as will hereafter be shewn. We may here correct an ignorant

error into which we have fallen in describing the legend of

Doctor Swryry’s coin of AcaTrHoctra—giving the epithet

Qcorporn, as if derived from tpepw instead of tperw ; to this our at-

tention has been called by several correspondents—and we there-

fore thus conspicuously acknowledge our blunder. The true

meaning of the epithet (written @cotperov though united to

Bacthiccas) we conceive to be “ godly-dispositioned.”

We must also caution our readers against implicitly adopting

our version of the Bactro-Pehlevi character—for we are now in

possession of the comparative ‘alphabet lithographed by M.

Jacaorer, which differs in many respects from our system,

grounding it upon the Syriac instead of the Zend.—Not having

yet seen the author’s memoir on the subject, we are unable to

make known his system, although we cannot doubt its supe-

riority to our crude attempt.

In fossil geology one immense step has been made this year,

by the discovery of the remains of a quadrumanous animal,

the nearest approach to the human being that has yet been

found ina fossil state in company with the extinct monsters

of primeval antiquity. This important addition has enriched the

Dadupur museum; but no less interesting have been the addi-

tions to its worthy rival the museum of Seharanpur. It is per-

haps right to explain how it has happened that the papers of

Lieuts. Baxer and Duranp have mostly appeared in the jour-

nal, while those of Dr. Fatconrr and Captain CautTLry have

graced the new volume of the Researches. ‘This selection was

made from no difference in the relative value of these most

interesting papers, but solely to accommodate best the draw-

ings which accompanied them. We hope at some future

period, to see the whole series collected together into a com-

PREFACE. Xi

plete and luxurious work on the fossil osteology of the Hima-

layan range; but such an undertaking should await the explo-

ration of the whole line, and should be made a national con-

cern. At present the great fear is, lest the quantity of speci-

mens dispersed in private collections on all sides, may deprive

us of many fragments requisite to work out the forms of the

curious new animals disinterred from this vast cemetery of the

ancient world.

We have partly redeemed our promise to our meteorological

contributors: sufficiently so, we hope, to revive their exertions,

and procure us a combined series of observations in different

parts of India for the coming year, more extended than the

comparative tables we have now published. We regret having

been unable to supply Barometers to the numerous applicants

who have volunteered to use them. The duty now levied on

philosophical instruments, will tend still more to check their

importation.

Our readers will now readily excuse the absence of articles

on the progress of the sciences in Europe, since that depart-

ment has been zealously pursued by another periodical of ex-

tensive circulation, in consequence partly of our neglect of it ;

and a third rival has recently entered the field under promis-

ing and powerful auspices. These have so fully made known

many local inventions of scientific interest, that we have less

regretted our inability to find space for their re-insertion. We

would, on no account, however, wish to confine our pages to

subjects more strictly Indian; on the contrary, we shall ever

study to infuse into them a pleasing variety of original informa-

tion on all subjects, of man’s performance or nature’s produc-

tion, within the wide range prescribed to us by our allegiance to

the Asiatic Society.

justi oth te ° 2 pli

f Cee old Sea b Iyer) Tf

aoa: hattor fit Vi shear,

{

ant

rok

‘

} a

-igege 10

Laabies

reese ns

Gee

MGS Peegee!

re : Ca

ee via oat % a4 wh

net, ‘syigisd Matersaly 4 i : it ee 1 ie d

mo ® + r ‘ bei.

ae id ' / bys A i an

art on SI SS aaa en aiid ae eee “ie gp

¥ ‘ 4 are {5 ge ib ware vi ’

; ; ¥ reso es

> Ee

1 Pe aed MVS a

Lee "Ye PELL NN EGE.

~te fice LD AT, Yu te 4

ms i XO

sit SFR daben tet

Fie Re ed ow A She TE

: i ; 4, ‘ ‘ ’ i « 4"

Rath BRE, Vise Ob OPO tee

+ ' js \ pie q n ” sy)

vee O¥R OW Pel ,TLQSAGLS Sats

4 proart ‘ ‘t nba Ai:

aha) Thak Bo ac ad dia eg ROMY

é re { t fa)

PVG IL Ww -Tis : he ist)

, i < F - e Py ;

Ltd ati § } | etait

i a

bi’ f Mi x2!

Le ites

* ss eed > +

a Al a 3 tig

, > }

i e

7 ™.

—- » é zt

Fe ap by - ~_—

Pie 6

‘

e ‘

F i

‘

¥ st yi

MEMBERS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, 1836.

[To whom the Journal is forwarded at the Society’s cost.

The Right Honorable GrorGe, Lord AvucKLAND, Governor General of India,

Patron.

The Honorable Sir CHARLES THEOPHILUS METCALFE, Bart. K. C. B. Lieut.-

Governor, Western Provinces.

The Honorable Sir EnywarpD RYAN, Chief Justice, President, two copies.

The Lord Bishop of Calcutta.

The Honorable Colonel W. Morison.

The Honorable T. B. MACAULAY.

The Honorable Sir J. P. GRANT, Vice-President.

The Honorable Sir B. MALKIN, Vice-President.

The Honorable Sir Henry Fanet, Commander-in-Chief.

The Rev. W. H. Miu, D. D. Principal of Bishop’s College, Vice-President.

H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Vice-President.

W. H. MacnaGuren, Esq. Vice-President.

Ordinary Members Resident in India.

Adam, W. Esq.

Anbury, Col. Sir Thos. C. B. Engineers.

Avdall, J. Esq.

Bagshaw, R. J. Esq.

Baillie, N. B. E. Esq.

Baker, Lieut. W. E. Engineers.

Bateman, Rev. J.

Bell, J. Esq.

Benson, W. H. Esq,

Binny, C. Esq.

Blundell, E. A. Esq.

Briggs, Col. J.

Bramley, Dr. M. J.

Bruce, W. Esq.

Burney, Col. H.

, H. Esq.

Bushby, G. A. Esq.

Burnes, Lieut. A.

Cameron, C. H. Esq.

Caulfield, Lieut.-Col. J.

Cautley, Capt. P. T.

Colvin, J. R. Esq.

, A. Esq.

, Lieut.-Col. J. Engineers.

Corbyn, F. Esq.

Cunningham, Capt. A. Engineers.

Dent, W. Esq.

Dobbs, A. Esq.

D’Oyly, Sir Charles, Bart.

Drummond, Dr, A.

Durand, Lieut. H. M. Engineers.

Dwarkanath Tagore, Babu.

Egerton, C. C. Esq.

Ellis, Capt, E. S.

Evans, Dr. George.

_ Everest, Major G.

' Ewer, W. Esq.

Falconer, Dr. H.

Foley, Capt. W. [retired.]

Forbes, Captain W. N. Engineers.

Frith, R. J. Esq.

Gordon, G. J. Esq.

Grant, W. Esq.

, J. P. Esq.

Hare, D. Esq.

Hodgson, B. H. Esq.

Jackson, Dr. A. N,

Langstaff, J. Esq.

Lloyd, Capt. R.

Loch, G. Esq.

Low, Lieut.-Col. J.

Macfarlan, D. Esq.

Macleod, Capt.

Macleod, J. M. Esq.

Macqueen, Rev. J.

McClintock, G. F. Esq.

McClelland, Dr. J.

Mansell, C. G. Esq.

Manuk, M. Esq.

Martin, C. R. Esq.

, W. Esq.

May, J. S. Esq.

Melville, Honorable W. L.

Mackenzie, W. Esq.

Montriou, Lieut. C.

Neave, J. Esq.

Nott, Chas. Augustus, Esq.

Pearson, Dr. J.

Pemberton, Capt. R. B.

Prinsep, C. R. Esq.

, James, Sec. A. S.

Phayre, Lieut. A.

Qabir Uddin, Shah.

Radhacaunt Deb, Babu.

Ramcomul Sen, Babu.

Ravenshaw, E. C. Esq.

Russomoy Dutt, Babu.

Ross, D. Esq.

Sage, Capt. W.

Seppings, J. M. Esq.

Stacy, Lieut.-Col. L. R.

Stocqueler, J. H. Esq.

Strong, F. P. Esq.

Stewart, Dr. D,

Tahawur Jung, Nuwab.

Taylor, Capt. E. G.

, T. J. Esq.

Thomason, J. Esq.

Trevelyan, C. E. Esq.

Trotter, J. Esq.

, A. Esq.

Tickell, Lt. S.

Wade, Capt. C. M.

Wilcox, Capt. J. R.

Wallich, N. Esq.

White, Capt. S. M.

Walters, H. Esq.

Associate Members, (Subscribers.)

Brownlow,

Piddington, H.

Dean, E. Delhi Canal Dep.

Dawe, W. ditto.

Tregear, Vincent, Juanpore.

SUBSCRIBERS,

[Who are not Members of the Asiatic Society, 1836. ]

The Honorable the Court of Directors, (by the Secretary to Government, Generai

Department.) ONE COPY,

Abbott, Lt. J. care of T. Ostell, Esq.

Abercrombie, Lieut. W. Engrs. Messrs

Watson and Co.

Agra Bock Club, Agra.

Allen, J. Esq. Calcutta.

Anderson, G. M. Esq. Caleutta,

Anderson, Lt. Seharunpur.

Artillery Book Club, Dum-Dum.

Bannister, Dr. W. Calcutta.

Barlow, J. H. Esq. Contai.

Batten, J. H. Esq. Almorah.

Barrow, H. Esq. Calcutta.

Beatson, Lieut.-Col. W. S. Calcutta.

Beckett, J. O. Esq. Coel.

Bedford, Capt. J. care of Lyalland Co.

Calcutta.

Bell, Dr. H. P. Calcutta.

Bengal Club, ditto.

Benares Book Club.

Beresford, H. Esq. Purneah.

Betts, C. Esq. Calcutta.

Bird, R. M. Esq. Allahabad.

Blake, Capt. B., care of A. Smith, Esq.

Calcutta.

, Lieut. M. T., 56th, Bancoorah.

Boileau, Capt. J. T. Engineers, Bareilly.

, Lieut, A. H. E. Engineers, G.

T. S. Camp near Bancoorah.

Book Club, 24th N. I. care of Mr. T.

Ostell.

Book Club, 13th Regt. care of ditto.

Bonham, Capt. Arracan.

Borradaile, H. Esq. Calcutta.

Boulderson, H.S. Esq. Futtevghur.

, S. M. Esq. Bareilly.

Boutrous, F. Esq.

Bridgman, J. H. Esq. Goruckpore.

Brown, Capt. W. Seharanpur.

, G. F. Esq. Juanpore.

Brodie, Lieut. T. Assam.

Browne, Lt. A. Meerut.

Burkinyoung, Lt. Benares.

Butter, Dr. D. Sultanpur, Oude.

Byrn, W. Esq. Calcutta.

Calcutta Periodical Book Society.

Campbell, Dr. D. Mirzapur.

———, Dr. A. Nipal.

, J. Esq. Cawnpore.

, Dr. A. Moulmein.

Carte, Dr. W. E. Hansi.

Conolly, Lieut, E. B. care of T. Ostell,

Calcutta.

Conoylal Tagore, Babu, Calcutta.

Cope, Gunner, Meerut.

Cordier, Capt. Governor ofChandernagore.

Cracroft, W. Esq. Dacca.

Crawfurd, W. Esq. Banda.

——, J. Esq. Caleutta.

Crommelin, Capt. A.Engrs.Barrackpore.

Cunningham, Lt.J.D. Eng. Berhampore.

Currie, F. Esq. Ghazipore.

Curators of the Public Library, Calcutta.

Chunar Book Club, care of T. Ostell, Esq.

Calcutta.

Cartwright, Capt. Agra.

Davidson, Capt. J. E. Lucknow,

Debudé, Capt. H. Engrs. Delhi.

Dixon, Capt. C. G. Ajmere.

Dorin, J. A. Esq. ditto.

Douglas, H. Esq. Patna.

Drummond, Capt. J. G. Allahabad.

Dunlop, Lieut.-Col. W. Calcutta.

Edgeworth, M. P. Esq. Ambala.

Editor Calcutta Courier.

Elliot, J. B. Esq. Patna.

, H. M. Esq. Meerut.

Erskine, D. Esq. Elambazar.

Everest, Rev. R.

Fagan, Lieut. G. H. Neemuch.

, C. W. Esq. Seeonee, Jabbalpur.

Fane, W. Esq. Allahabad.

Fergusson, J. Esq. Calcutta.

Fiddes, Col. T. Muttra.

Finck, C. C.

Finnis, Capt. J. Dinapore.

Fisher, Lieut. T. Kachar.

Fitzgerald, Capt. W. R. Engrs. Caleutta.

Fordyce, Lieut. J. Goruckpore.

Forster, Lieut. R. W. Shekawati.

Fraser, H. Esq. Delhi.

, A. Esq. ditto.

, C. A. Esq. Futtehgurh.

, T. S. Esq. care of Messrs. Lyall,

Matheson and Co.

Garden, Dr. A. Calcutta.

Gerard, Capt. P. Subatoo.

Gordon, R. Esq. Calcutta.

Gorton, W. Esq. Benares.

Grant, J. W. Esq. Calcutta.

, Dr. J. ditto.

Gray, E. Esq. Calcutta.

Greenlaw, C. B. Esq. ditto.

Gubbins, C. Esq. Delhi.

Hamilton, H. C. Esq. Bhagulpore.

Harding, Ben. Esq. Calcutta.

Harris, F. Esq. ditto.

Hart, T. B. Esq. 47th Regt. England.

Harrington, Lieut. J. care of T. Ostel,

Esq.

SUBSCRIBERS.

Hasted, G. Esq. Benares.

Hearsty, Major J. B. Com. 2nd Local

Horse, Sagur.

Homfray, J. Esq. care of Messrs. Jessop

and Co. Calcutta.

Hone, Lieut. H. Secrole.

Howrah Dock Company, Calcutta.

Hutchinson, Major G. Engrs. ditto.

Hutton, Lieut. T. Agra.

Hugel, Baron, care of Messrs. Lyall,

Matheson and Co.

Hyderabad Book Society, Hyderabad.

Heatly, S. G. Esq. Calcutta.

Inglis, R. Esq. Calcutta.

Irvine, Major A. Engrs. C. B. Calcutta.

Jenkins, Capt. Francis, Assam.

Jones, J. T. Esq. Bancock.

Johnson, W. B. Esq. Patna.

Kali Kissen, Maharaja, Bahadur, Cal.

Kean, Dr. Arch. Moorshedabad.

Kasipersaud Ghose, Babu, Calcutta.

Kittoe, Lieut. Barrackpore.

Kirkpatrick, W. Calcutta.

Laing, J. W. Esq. Simlah.

Lamb, Dr. Geo. Dacca.

Lambert, W. Esq. Allahabad.

Laughman, R. J. Esq. Dumow,

Lindsay, Col. A. Dum-Dum.

Liston, D. Goruckpore.

Lloyd, Major W. A. Rungpore.

Lowther, R. Esq. Allahabad.

Lumsden, Capt. J. Futteyghur.

Macdonald, Lieut. R. Sagur.

Macdowall, W. Esq. Rungpore.

MacGregor, Dr. W. L. Loodianah.

Macleod, Col. D. Engrs. Caleutta.

Macleod, D. F. Esq. Seeonee.

Manson, Capt. J. Bittour.

Marshall, Capt. G. T. Calcutta.

Martin, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Martin, Lieut. R. Engrs. Burdwan.

Masters, W. Esq. Calcutta,

Masson, C. care of C. E. Trevelyan, Esq.

Mackay, Rev. W.S. Calcutta.

Mackinnon, D.C. Allyghur.

McCosh, Dr. J. Assam.

Milner, Capt. E. T. care of Messrs. R

C. Jenkins and Co,

Military Board, Calcutta.

Money, W. E. Esq Seharunpur.

Moore, H. Esq. care of T. Ostell,

Montgomery, Dr. W. Penang.

Morley, C. Esq. Calcutta.

Morris, G. J. Esq. Patna.

Mouat, Lt. Sir J. A. Bt. Engrs.Caleutta.

Muller, A. Esq. Calcutta.

Murray, Capt. H. R. Noacolly.

Mozafferpore Book Club, Tirhat,

Millet, F. Esq. Calcutta.

Military Library Society, Mhow.

Mussooree Book Club.

Mohun Lal, Munshi.

Esq.

Napier, Lieut. R. Engrs. Messrs. Cantor

and Co.

Nicolson, Capt. M. Jubbulpore.

———-_, S. Esq. Calcutta.

Officers, 12th Regt. N. I. Kurnal.

———, 73rd N. I. Barrackpore.

-————, 12th Regt. N. I. Allahabad.

22nd Regt. N.I. Nusseerabad,

Oglander, Lieut.-Col. Ghazipore.

Ommaney, Lieut. E. L. Engrs. Agra,

- , M. C. Esq. Baitool,

O’Shaughnessy, W. B., Prof. Med. Col.

Calcutta.

Parental Academic Institution, Calcutta.

Parker, H. M. Esq. ditto,

Persidh Narain Sing, Babu, Benares.

Pigg, T. Esq. Calcutta.

Playfair, Dr. Geo. Meerut.

Poole, Col. C. ditto.

Presgrave, Col. D. ditto.

Prowett, N. H. E, Esq. Seharunpur.

—_—.

Rajkrishna Mukarjy, Hazareebagh.

Ranken, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Rattray, R. H. Esq. Calcutta,

Renny, Lieut. T. Engrs, Camp near Si-

tapore.

Ross, Capt. B. Gwalior.

Row, Dr. J. Barrackpore.

Reid, Dr. A. Boolundshuhr.

Sale, Lieut. T. H. Allahabad.

Sanders, Capt. E. Engrs. Calcutta.

Sandys, T. Esq. Patna,

Satchwell, Capt. J. Agra.

Saunders, J. O. B. Esq. Allyghur.

Sevestre, Robt. Esq. Calcutta.

Siddons, Lieut. Engrs. Chittagong.

es at cee Esq. Calcutta,

aw, 1. A. Esq. care of Messrs. B

and Co, Calcutta, oe

Sleeman, Capt. W. H. Jabbulpore.

Sloane, W. Esq. Tirhoot.

Smith, Col. T. P. Agra.

, S. and Co. Calcutta.

, Capt. E. J. Engrs, Allahabad.

Smyth, Capt. W. H, Engrs. ditto.

Speed, D. W. H. Esq. ditto.

Spiers, A. Esq. care of Messrs.

and Co.

Spiers, Col. A. Ajmere.

Spilsbury, Dr. G. G. Jabbulpore.

Stainforth, F. Esq. Goruckpore.

Stevenson, Dr. W. Lucknow.

Stewart, — Esq. care of Messrs. Muller,

Ritchie and Co. ¥

Stokes, Dr. J. Humeerpore.

Swiney, Dr. J. Calcutta.

Sylhet Light Infantry Book Club, Sylhet.

Syttasharan Ghoshal, Calcutta,

Stevenson, Dr. W. Malacca.

Tandy, H. Esq. Agra Press,

Thomas, E. T. Esq. Almorah.

Thompson, Capt. G. Engrs. Hazaribagh

————, Capt. J, Engrs. Calcutta,

Colvin

XV1

Thoresby, Capt. C. Jeypore.

Thornton, J. Esq. Azimghur.

Tickell, Col. R. Engrs. Barrackpore.

Trail, G. W. Esq. Kemaon.

Tremenhere, Lieut. G. B. Engrs.Delhi.

Trotter, R. Esq. Gyah.

Turner, T. J. Esq. Futteyghur.

Wdny, C. G. Esq. Calcutta.

Warner, Capt. J. H. Bauleah.

Waugh, Lieut. A.H. Engrs. Dehra Doon.

SUBSCRIBERS.

Wells, F. O. Esq. Allahabad.

Western, Lieut. J. R. Engrs. Delhi.

White, Rev. E. Cawnpore.

Wilkinson, W. Esq. Pooree.

, Capt. T. Hazaribagh.

—, L. Esq. Assistant Resident;

Bhopal.

Wise, Dr. T, A. care of T. Ostell, Esq.

—., J. P. Esq. Dacca.

Wooburn, Dr. D. Sherghatty.

Woollaston, M. W. Esq. Delhi.

Subscribers at Bombay, &e.

The Bombay Asiatie Society.

Editor Bombay Literary Gaz.

A. Burn, Esq. Assist. Surgeon, Akulcote.

Capt. A. Burnes, Kutch.

R. C. Chambers, Esq. Surat.

Capt. Thos. Jervis, Engineers, Bombay.

J.S. Law, Esq. Surat.

Dr. J. McNeil, with the Persian Em-

bassy, vii Bombay.

J.J. Malvery, Esq. Bombay.

C. Moorhead, Esq. Mahabaleshwur Hills.

Dr. J. McLennan, Bombay.

Capt. R. Mignan, ditto.

Rugghonauth Hurry Chundjee, Bombay.

Dr. Geo. Smytton, ditto.

Lt. R. Shortrede, Poona.

Shreecreestra Wassoodewjee, Chief Sez

eretary’s Office, Bombay.

Hon’ble J. Sutherland, ditto.

Captain G. Twemlow, Arungabad.

W. Wathen, Esq. Bombay.

R. G. Noton, Esq. Bombay.

Lieut. G. H. Hebbert.

Colonel Pottinger, Kutch.

Lieut. Fulljames, Gogo.

Subscribers at Madras.

Dr. Baikie, Neelgheries.

Lieut. J. Braddock, Madras.

Lieut. Balfour.

R. Cole, Esq.

Col. W. Cullen.

Lieut, T. Ditmas.

H.S. Fleming, Esq.

J. M. Heath, Esq.

Madras Club.

Dr. Benza.

Lieut. J. Campbell.

J. Dalmahoy, Esq,

Major Derville.

Lieut.-Col. Frith.

A. Gnaty, Esq.

Rev. H. Harper.

Lieut.-Col. Monteith, Engineers.

J. Thomson, Esq.

Capt. G. A. Underwood, Engrs.

Col. J. S. Fraser.

W. Gilchrist, Esq.

Lieut. S. Macpherson.

Dr. J. G. Malcolmson.

J.C. Morris, Esq.

Hon’ble W. Oliver.

J. B. Pharoah, Esq.

T. G. Taylor, Esq. H. C. Astronomer:

Dr. J. Mouat, Bangalore.

Subscribers in England.

Lieut. J. S. Burt, Engineers.

Sir Charles Grey.

J. F. Royle, Esq.

W. Saunders, Esq.

G. Swinton, Esq.

J. Stephenson, Esq.

Subscribers in Ceylon.

The Hon’ble G. Turnour.

The Hon’ble Granville.

The Kandy Library.

Capt. Forbes.

Rey. Mr. Clough.

Periodical works with which the Journal is interchanged.

Prof. Jameson’s Edinburgh Journal of Science.

The Philosophical Magazine.

The Metropolitan.

Chinese Repository.

Asiatic Journal of London.

Monthly Journal, edited by S. Smith and Co. Calcutta.

United Service Journal, ditto by J. H. Stocqueler, Esq.

Literary Journal of the Madras Asiatic Society.

Calcutta Christion Observer.

The Journal of the Philadelphia Natural History Society.

The Journal is circulated to all learned Societies entitled to receive a copy of the

Asiatic Society’s Researches.

CONTENTS.

No. 49.—JANUARY. Page

I.—Second Memoir on the Ancient Coins found at Beghrdm, in the Kohistan

of Kabul. By Charles Masson, oc bc Aan |

II.— Quotations from original Sanscrit. authorities in brent and illustration

of Mr. Hodgson’s sketch of Buddhism, 2 ee

III.—Sivatherium Giganteum, a new Fossil Wiadelve Genus, from the Valley

of the Markanda, in the Sivalik branch of the Sub-Himaélayan Mountains.

By Hugh Falconer, M. D., Superintendent Botanical Garden, Sehdranpur,

and Captain P. T. Catiey Superintendent Doab Canal, me 36

1V.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and Wet- bulb

Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 21st and 22nd of December, 1835,

by Mr. H. Barrow, Astr. and Math, Inst.-maker to the H. C. ee 51

V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, an ate ie Be

VI -—Meteorological Register, de -» 60

No. 50. _FEBRUARY..

I.—Account of Rumbdéwe, one of the States in the interior of Malacca. By

Lieut. T. J. Newbold, 23rd Regt. Madras Native Infantry, 5e wa GY

IJ.— Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities in proof and illustration of

Mr. Hodgson’s Sketch of Buddhism, : e2 ae Some yh

IJI.—Notes explanatory of a Collection of Gedlogical Specimens from the

country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. By J. G. Malcolmson, Assist-

ant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, Pl. V. as 96

IV.—Description of a New Species of Columba. By B. H. Hiedecbu Bisa

Resident in Népal, 2% “- oe ae ah 122

V.— Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ae ar se -. 124

VI.—Meteorological Register, a at ay 5c Jo. 126

No. 51.—MARCH.

I.—Memoir of the Life and Writings of St. Nierses Clajensis, surnamed the

Graceful, Pontiff of Armenia. By Johannes Avdall, ave -- 129

II.—Discovery of Buddhist Images with Deva-nagari Inscriptions at Tagoung,

the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By Colonel H. Burney, Re-

sident at Ava, 3 - nts -- 157

I1I.—On the preparation of Opium ia the China market : gritten't in March

1835, and then communicated to the Benares and Behdr Agencies. By

D. Butter, M. D., Surgeon 63rd B. N. I., late Opium Examiner of the

Benares Agency, J 5A 165

1V.—Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones presented to the reas

Society’s Museum, by Colonel Colvin, 179

V.—Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Cashmir in 1836. By the ey adel 184

VI.—Note on an Inscription at Bamién. By Mr. C. Masson, 53 -. 188

VII.—Proceeding of the Asiatic Society, fc ae see 159

VIII.—Meteorological Register, AK de cin wan 192

XVIll CONTENTS.

Page

No. 52.—APRIL.

I.—Account of the Mountain Tribes on the extreme N.E. Frontier of Bengal.

By J. McCosh, Civil Assistant Surgeon, Goalp4ra, . 193

IIl.—On the method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof x St. Peter's

Church in Fort William, illustrated by a Section, (Plate V.) ze 2208

IlI.—Statistical, Agricultural, and Revenue Return of Muthra District, made

up to 1st October, 1835. By Capt. R. Wroughton, Rev. Surveyor, -. 216

IV.—Notes on the State of the Arts of Cotton Spinning, Weaving, Printing,

and Dyeing in Nepal. By Dr. A. Campbell, attached to the Residency, .. 219

V.—Summary Description of some New Species of Falconide. By B. H.

Hodgson, Esq. ae > os oe ie +. 227

VI.—Synoptical Description of eis New Animals, enumerated in the

Catalogue of Nipalese Mammals. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. . 231

VII.—Note on the occasional existence of fresh-water on the surface of the

ocean. By Mr. C. Brownlow, i ae 239

VIII.—Note on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Bavicr!. ¢ or +h Elaphoides and Bah-

raiya of Hodgson, ee . sts +. 240

IX.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Tieng ounce, and Wet-bulb

Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 21st and 22nd of March, 1836. By

Mr. H. Barrow, H.C. Mathematical Instrument-maker, ae +. 243

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, se ae i e+ 245

XI.—Miscellaneous :—

1.—Postscript to the Account of the Wild Goat of Nepél, printed in the

Sept. No. of the Journal, page 490. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 73 | 254

2.—Notice of the Basilosaurus, a new marine fossil Saurian, ‘discovered

in America. By H. Piddington, Esq. “5 s 5: ats SE

3.—The Balloon, a de ae so aie oe 255

XII.—Meteorological Register, au a. <- he e- 256

No. 53.—MAY.

I.—Johdéle and its former Dependencies of Jompdédle Gominchi. By Lieut.

J. F. Newbold, A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. GS . 257

IJ.—Interpretation of the Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner, aces in

Assam, and presented to the Asiatic Society by Captain Bogle. By M.

Alexander Csoma Korés. [See Pl. VI. fig. 3.] - » 264

IiI.—Note on some of the Indo-Scythic Coins found by Mr. C. Mave at

Beghrdém, in the Kohistan of Kébul. By Johannes Avdall, Esq. M.A. S. 266

IV.—Notes on the Geology, &c. of the Country in the Neighbourhood of

Maulamyeng (vulg. Moulmein). By Capt. W. Foley, a +. 269

V.—On the Revolution of the Seasons. By the Rev. R. Everest, 56 saree ys) |

VI.—Recent Discovery of Fossil Bones in Perim Island, in the Cambay Gulph.

By Baron Hugel and Mr. Geo. Fulljames, -. 288

VII.—Vable of Sub-Himalayan Fossil Genera, in the Didier Collection. By

Lieuts. W. EB. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, -- 291

VIII.—Note on the Teeth of the Mastodon a dents etroites of the Siwélik

Hills. By Captain P. T. Cautley, Pl. XI. se at 904

IX.—Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. By Dr. J. Mouat, Medical

Surgeon, 13th Dragoons, Ge = -- . 296

X.— Meteorological Observations taken every hour, at Bangalore, in the Bigs

pital of H. M. 13th Dragoons, from 6 A. M. of the 21st to 6 Pp. M. of the

22nd March, 1836, inclusive, in conformity with Sir W. Herschel’s in-

structions. By the same, are ae oe e- 298

CONTENTS. xix

Page

XI.—Horary Observations taken at DAddpur, in conformity with Sir John

Herschel’s Circular. By Col. Colvin, Lieut. Baker, and Lieut. Durand,

Engineers, : ee on oe ne ». 299

XII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, . 302

XI1I.—Address read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal reece SOeiRey,

on the 27th January, 1836. By the Rev. John Wilson, President, -. 304

XIV.—Miscellaneous :—

1.—On the Canis Vulpes montana, or Hill Fox. By J. T. Pearson, Asst.

Surg., Cur. Mus. As. Soc. ae fe ce 313

2.—On the Soil suitable for Cotton, wobAcUe seo and the Tea ita

By H. Piddington, ae Jip . we -. 314

3.—Action of Copper on Ink, sc 50 50 Bue

4,—Suspension Bridge at Fribourg in Swithenand: Ac ss

XV.—Meteorological Register, oe ee as ee -. 320

No. 54.—JUNE.

I.--Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities, with an attempt to fix

the dates of the appearance of the last four ; being those of the Maha

Bhadra Kalpa, (or Present Age.) By Captain J. Forbes, H. M. 78th

Highlanders, fat ele se a eal

IJ.—Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. By Johannes Avdall,

Esq., M. A. S. a no os oe +. 331

III1.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, ra 58 . 340

1V.—Descriptive Catalogue of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Testacea, chiefly ffm

the North-east Frontier of Bengal. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B.C. 5S. .. 350

V.—Description of two new species belonging to a new form of the Meruline

Group of Birds, with indication of their generic character. By B. H.

Hodgson, Esq. Resident in Nepal, off as Gosectets]

ViI.—On a New Genus of the Meropide. By the same, cc -. 360

VII.—On a New Piscatory Genus of the Strigine Family. By the same, -. 362

ViII.—Report of the Society of Arts on Specimens of Rice, Wool, &c. from

Nepal and Assam,

cE On a -» 365

IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic ‘Santetag ae a 44 -- 369

X.—Meteorological Register, Bs fa 5c ve °. 376

No. 55.—JULY.

I.—Translation of a Tamba Patra, which was found in a field of the village of

Piplianagar in the Shujdlpur Pargané by a Krisén engaged in ploughing,

and presented to Mr. L. Wilkinson, the Political Agent at Bhopal by the

Jagirdaér, Se 377

II.—Note on the white satin sinlvolderdd: Scarfs of the Tibetan Priests.

By Major T. H. A. Lloyd. Witha translation of the motto on the margin

of one presented to the Asiatic Society. By Alex. Csoma KoGrdsi, «. 39a

II1.—Note on the origin of the Armenian Era, and the reformation of the

Haican Kalendar. By Johannes Avdall, Esq. M. A. S. 46 384

1V.—Conjectures on the march of Alexander. By M. Court, ancien éleve a

Vécole militaire de St. Cyr. Sa Bly

V.—Experimental Researches on the Hetreseious of the Wet- bulb Hygro-

meter. By James Prinsep, F. R. S. Sec. As. Soc. -- 396

VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, va es -. 433

VII,— Miscellaneous, aie +. 439

VIII.—Meteorological Revister: oe e+ 440

XX CONTENTS.

Page

No. 56.—AU GUST.

I.—Extracts from the Mohit (the Ocean), a Turkish work on Navigation,

in the Indian Seas. Translated and communicated by Joseph Von Ham-

mer, Baron Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, and Professor of Oriental Lan-

guages at Vienna, Hon. Memb. As. Soc. &c. &c.. o. 441

{1.—Extracts translated from a Memoir on a Map of Eeshavar a the coun-

try comprised between the Indus and the Hydaspes, the Peucelaotis and

Taxila of ancient geography. By M. A. Court, in the service of Maha-

réja Ranjit Singh, oy oe Be -. 468

1II.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inaevintiames Wibasmaphen, by James Prinsep,

Sec. &c. oe ae : 482

1V.—Sub-Himélayan Fossil Remains of the. DédGpur ‘Colleehan By Tews.

W. E. Baker and H. M, Durand, Engineers, sie Be -. 486

V.—Note on the States of Pérak, Srimenanti, and other States in the Malay

Peninsula. By T. J. Newbold, Lieut., A. D, C. to Brigadier General

Wilson, C. B. ote : a a5 SS =s 905

V1I.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Sevier or ee = -. 509

VII.—Meteorological Register, c oe ac oe +. 520

No. 57. _SEPTEMBER,

I.—Examination of some points of Buddhist Chronology. By the Hon.

George Turnour, Ceylon Civil Service, : ey HF -. §21

1].—Third Memoir on the ancient Coins Fistor at the site called Begh-

ram in the Kohistan of K4bul. By Mr. Charles Masson, ote SCY

III.—New varieties of Bactrian Coins, engraved as Plate XXXV. from Mr.

Masson’s Drawings and other sources. By James Prinsep, Sec. . 548

{V.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by Jas. Prinsep,

Sec. &c. &c. ae oe ae S05 -. 554

V.—Sketch of the State of Maar, Malay Beniisale By T. J. Newbold,

Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. ie -. 561

VI.—Note on the discovery of a relic of Grecian Sculpture in Upper India.

By Lieut.-Col. L. R. Stacy. Plate XXXI. Au s: 7. 907

VII.—Description of some Grasses which form part of the Vegetation in the

Jheels of the District of Sylhet. By William Griffith, Esq. Assistant

Surgeon, Madras Establishment, c s Oi TO

VIII.—Notes on Delhi Point, Pulo-Tinghie, ee and on some Pelagic Fossil

remains, found in the rocks of Pulo-Lédah. By Wm. Bland, Esq. Sur-

geon, H. M. S. Wolf, ve : ° «. 575

1X.—Fossil Remains of the smaller Caron from the Sub- Himalayas. By

Lieut. W. E. Baker and Lieut. H. M. Durand, Engineers, os «- 579

X.—Continuation of a Paper (Journal, May, 1835), on the Heights of the

Barometer as affected by the position of the Moon. By the Rey. R.

Everest, oo se os is e- 585

XI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Sosiety, ae dc ac e- 587

XII.—Meteorological Register, o6 SC se e» 600

No. 58. — OCTOBER.

I.—An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenasserim

Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D. Richardson,

Esq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim provinces. By

E. A. Blundell, Esq. Commissioner, c = ae -- 601

II.—Outline of Political and Commercial Relations with the Native States

on the Eastern and Western Coasts, Malay Peninsula. By T. J.

Newbold, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Wilson, C. B. -» 626

CONTENTS. Xxi1

Page

III.—A brief account of Masid, known by the name of Farid Shakarganj,

or Shakarbér. By Munshi Mohan Ll, so =- 635

IV.—New varieties of the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic Series of Gone and their

imitations. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &c. de ac -» 639

V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by James Prin-

sep, Secretary As. Soc. &c. Ax ; -. 657

VI.—Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the DAddipur Collection, rs Lieuts.

W. E. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, ae - 661

VII.—Note on the occurrence of Volcanic Scoria in the ‘Senthiers Peninsula.

By Lieut. J. T, Newbold, A. D. C. ae 5 -. 670

VIII.—Postscript to the account of Ursitaxus, panked 3 in the 19th Vol. of

Researches As. Soc. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. = Js -. 671

IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, : oe aa OZ

X.—A General Statement of the Labors and Brneeedines of the Expedition

to the Euphrates, under the command of eset Chesney, Royal Ar-

tillery, F. R.S. 42 Ae ae de sb -. 675

XI.—The Governor General’s Conversazioné, as A oe 682

X1II.—Meteorological Register, ae sik O8 -. 684

No. 59. _NOVEMBER. F

I.—Notice of the Vallabhi dynasty of Saurashtra ; extracted from the Bud-

dhist records of the Chinese. By M. Eugene Jacquet, Member of the As.

Soc. of Paris, ate 6 ahs -» 685

II.—An account of some of the Petty States lying arch ‘of the meneaetin

Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D. Richardson,

Esq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim Provinces, By

E. A. Blundell, Esq., Commissioner, a6 -. 688

III.—Notes on the Antiquities of Bamian. By C. saa aaons be 407

IV.—New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins, engraved as Plate XLIX.

By James Prinsep, Sec. &c. o ws - «- 720

V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, Webeeraphed: By James

Prinsep, Sec. &c. ae . - . e- 724

VI.—Some remarks on the development of Pollen. By William Grit, As-

sistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment, ue SRV EY!

VII.—Sub-HimAélayan Fossil Remains of the Dadipur Collection. By Lieuts.

W. E. Baker and H. M. Durand, Engineers, . 739

VIII.—Descriptive Catalogue of a collection of Land and Preah water Shells,

chiefly contained in the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By W. H. Benson,

Esq. B.C. S. ar a ws sc Sc -» 741

IX.—Note on Zoological Sénidindute? By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. soy viEM

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, <° o. 60 e» 753

XI.—Meteorological Register, 55 56 on aoO

No. 60. DECEMBER.

I.—Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan, and a small portion of Guze-

rat and Kattywar. By Charles Lush, M. D. c 3 =) LOL

1I.—Note on Mastodons of the Sewaliks. By Capt. P. 7. Gauiley. Superin-

tendent of the Doab Canal. Pl. XL. Ae Basie 1

III.—Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. By B. H. Sandgions Esq.

1.—Indication of a new Genus of Insessorial Birds, ne oO

2.—Indication of a new Genus of Waders, belonging to the piaitaniatic

Family, a ee oe are aha

3.—Indication of a new Genus of the Falconide, oh Be) aE

xxl CONTENTS.

Page

4.—Indication of a new Genus of the Picide, with description of the type.

A new species, also, of two new species of the Genus Sins Seer fwle)

5.—New species of Hirundinide, a5 Ped to

1V.—Description of the Shell and Animal of Nematenes a new Genus of

Mollusca, inhabiting situations subject to alternations of fresh and brack-

ish water. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B. C. S. : -. 781

V.—Note on the Genus Pterocyclos of Mr. Benson and So deauilonas of Mr.

Pearson. By Dr. William Bland, 5G ago lee

VI.—Note on the Nautical Instruments of the hegbe. By James Prinsep, Sec. 754

VII.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed. By ditto, .. «- 795

VII1.—Description of Uch-Sharif. By Munshi Mohan Lal. Be -- 796

IX.—Specimens of the Soil and Salt from the Samar, or Sambhur lake salt-

works. Collected by Lieut. Arthur ronen and analyzed by Mr. J.

Stephenson, : : ae Toe

X.—Remarks ona scilention of Pianal made at t Sadiya, Upper nseae, from

April to September, 1836. By William Griffith, Assistant Surgeon,

Madras Establishment, on duty in Upper Assam, Si vise OOO

XI.—Note on a Remnant of the Hun Nation. [Vide Chap. 26 of ‘the ‘« Decline

and Fall of the Roman Empire’’ under the head of ‘ Original Seat of the

Huns.’’] By Captain W. Foley, = ao Sls

XII.—Table shewing the breadth of the river - Satlaj sae the oe of its current

at different stages, from Harrike Pattan to its junction with the Indus at

Mithankot, oe <0, Oe

XIII.—A Comparative view of the daily range slot the Baswbeeon in i dittaent

parts of India. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. &c. . os O16

XIV.—Postscript to the Memoir on the Depr ession of the Wet- bulb Thermo-

meter published in the July number. By the same, .. ae -. 828

XV.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, se ae ae ete

XVI.—Meteorological Register, Se a <¢ -. 836

ERRATA.

In the Journal for May, 1834, page 253, for ‘ 58°’ read ‘ minus 58°.’

In the No. for Dec. 1835, page 655 et. seq. the title of the Usbeck chief is print-

ed WaAugG, instead of Wana, or —S3),. The term is rendered by the Missiona-

ries regulus, and is perhaps equivalent to Raja under the Mughal governments.

In the same volume, page 615, for ‘ Zenophon’ read ‘ Xenophon.’

Page 30 line 2 of note, for ‘ preferred,’ read ‘ postponed.’

(et passim) for ‘ Sangata,’ read ‘ Saugata.’

Page 30 line 3 of note, insert ‘ this’ before ‘ appears.’

”?

» dl

9, 32

» 34

», 36

pra

” 42

” 44

9 47

”? 57

” 49

yy 72

ate:

» 49

” 79

oe 80

7) OO

x. 80

An. ats

he (els!

Se LOW

og LOE

», 170

3) 172

pa IAs)

TRLAG

au vO

+ LAD

», 196

Sire

13 299

3, 200

Me es

9, 202

5, 204

i a

» 204

a ae

> 264

”

99 265

”

9 for ‘ exotic,’ read ‘ the exotic origin of Buddhism.’

18 for ‘ Boddhi,’ read ‘ Bodhi.’

8 for ‘ Sraxaka,’ read ‘ Sravaka.’

6 of note, for ‘ E. G. Elplinstone,’ read ‘ e. g. Elphinstone.’

29 for ‘ shells,’ read ‘ cells.’

21 erase ‘ on’ after the semi-colon.

44 for ‘ palatial,’ read ‘ palatine.’

27 for ‘ this,’ read ‘ these.’

48 for ‘ in vertical plates,’ read ‘ into vertical plates.’

1 for ‘ insymmetrical,’ read ‘ unsymmetrical.’

23 for ‘ circle,’ read ‘ arch.’

6 for ‘as,’ read ‘ so.’

4 from bottom, in note, for end, read ‘ ens.’

1 of note, dele the brackets.

23 after ‘ percipient powers,’ add the words, ‘ the Karmika tenets

amount to idealism.’

4 from bottom, for ‘ Bauddhy,’ read.‘ Bauddha.’

15 jor ‘ existence,’ read ‘ assistance.’

26 for ‘ by,’ read ‘ but.’

3 of the note, put the stop defore the word Sutra.

1 and 3 of the note, for ‘ Dharmadya,’ read ‘ Dharmodya.’

Col. Burney’s notice of Tagoung, for ‘ being,’ read ‘ building.’

10 for ‘ tiers,’ read ‘ tears.’

32 for ‘ obstructed,’ read ‘ abstracted.’

37 and elsewhere, for ‘ venous,’ read ‘ vinous.’

35 for ‘ mass,’ read ‘ mare,’

foot note, ditto ditto.

19 for ‘ extraction,’ read ‘ extractive.’

1 for ‘ paséwa, converted,’ read ‘ paséwa-converted.’

12 for ‘ same,’ read ‘ Lama.’

13 for ‘ Bis Bisa,’ read ‘ Bisa.’

14 omit cut.

29 for ‘ lines,’ read ‘ Hills.’

36 for ‘ Busa,’ read ‘ Bisa,’ (in all.)

18 for ‘ country,’ read province.’

33 jor ‘ the spirit,’ read ‘ that spirit.’

34 for ‘ Bennet,’ read ‘ Burnett.’

11 for ‘ stones,’ read ‘ stone.’

— for ‘ Off,’ read ‘ out.’

1 for 5 read Bs

3. NONSAN VANS

eh 3 Q4

4 HL QL

foo zy

1 Bh ke

“a an

12 @& @& °

13 leave out the word a

At the bottom for Bu read 43° Y i

XXIV ERRATA.

Page 265 line 11, of the Tibetan text for khed, read khyed.

», 228 ,, 3 from below, for ‘ speculated’ read ‘ operculated.’

», 235 5, 19 insert the full stop (now after only) after ‘ presume.’

», 443 ,, 31 insert ‘ at’ before ‘ Cape Guarda fui.’

St) », 32 for ‘inch’ read ‘ inches.’

», 391 ,, 11 from bottom, for ‘ satures,’ read ‘ sutures.’

3, 3093 ,, 18 ditto, for ‘ Hylvoides,’ read ‘ Styloides.’

» — 9», & ditto, for ‘ confortissime,’ read ‘ confertissime.’

», 304 ,, 19 from top, for ‘ malassan,’ read ‘ Malayan.’

» — » 3» from bottom, for ‘ Gangetica,’ read ‘ faciata.’

», 900 ,, 7 from top, for « ditto,’ read ‘ ditto.’ 3

— ,, 22 ditto, for ‘ instructis,’ read ‘ instructa.” ——

5, 356 ,, 5 ditto, (and in note,) for ‘ tabular,’ read ‘ tubular.’

% ——- 9, 23 ditto, for ‘ operation,’ read ‘ operculum.’

» 3097 ,, 2 from bottom, after sinus, insert to form a closed circle,

the horns.

1» —- 5, 6 ditto, (note,) for ‘ Pesticia,’ read ‘ Justicia.’

», 398 ,, 2 from top, for ‘ tabular,’ read ‘ tubular.’

» —— 4, 13 ditto, for ‘ Demarara,’ read ‘ Demerara.’

» 418 ,, 8 after about, insert 27.

», 420 in heading of lower table, for increment d+ rs d, read

dx —d.

0 30

» 421 ,, 2 for simply, d — read simply, d —

»» In heading of lower table, under Barometer supply p.

424 line 3 for ‘ of wet-bulb,’ read ‘ of the wet-bulb thermometer.’

» 721 ,, 13 for ‘the god-nourisher,’ read ‘ the heavenly-minded,’ and

cancel the subsequent remarks.

» 723 ,, 24 for ‘ General Arnold,’ read ‘ Dr. Gerard.’

Capt. CunnincGHam having pointed out that the pin the legend of the Sa-

mudra-gupta coin described in Vol. iv. p. 635, as dpati rurha, has an r sub-

joined; we have again sought in the dictionary for a better explanation of the

epithet and have found it in the word wyfqcy: apratiratha, * the warrior.’

Page 742 line 14 from top, for ‘ behind,’ read ‘ beyond.’

», 744 ,, 1 from bottom, for ‘ Butta,’ read ‘ Bulla.’

» 748 ,, 7 from bottom, for ‘ spora,’ read ‘ spira.’

ipa igh 5 from do., jor ‘ ingrescente,’ read ‘ nigrescente.’ et

» 750 ,, 19 from top, for ‘ salcis,’ read ‘ sulcis,’ and for ‘ vinls, read

* binis.’

» — » 7 from bottom, for ‘ carino,’ read ‘ carina,’ and for ‘ com-

presso,’ read ‘ compressa.’

LIST OF PLATES

Page

Prare I. Sivatherium Giganteum, folded,..cncvercencercricensssrcrre 48

IJ. III. IV. Masson’s Bactrian Coins and Symbols,.cvvewcnne 24

V. Geology of Hyderabad, mwrnnwarnnoneecereccercare pieseenen OT

WT? Section of Sti Peter's Chut chy ses cancion cierctgeenannnvecna: 198

VI. (bis) Buddhist image from Tagoung, XC. -0-esenenrcercere 241

VII. Nisaétus Nipalensis, 1 -anccmncasnrseserenercecrcsracerenreececere sees 227

VIII. Geology of Moulmein, ..--meacesenne palace ter eine b ee saasncere aches 280

IX. Facsimile of inscriptions at Chunar and Kemaon, ~....~. 342

X. Ditto of inscriptions at Wara and Moulmein, ~~. -.00« 340

XI. Mastodon Angustidens, folded, woeweornrernacncecrcerceercences ~ 296

XII. Large Map of Taxila, folded, ~.-rsencnue cE nha 469

XIII. (Caret.)

XIV. Diurnal motion of the Barometer, win rnncrnsenenrncrrrrnene ~~ $16

XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. Fossil Rhinoceros of the Sine

BDA WY CS cee a og caer re ov ne eng evar anevers rentesacseresaane emacs GOL

XX. Buddhist sculpture from the Panjab, +0. ccvccenerrenccerence 482

XXI. Curves of maximum Depression, ..rcrccewarcenrenensencenee 408

XXII. depression under varying pressure, 0.0. we ALL

DROLET, VOssia PLOCONa) ree cicntentcnerscrneecncnncnecdee Sec er ne esas noc 572

Pee Zizamia- and Potamochloa, onc ncccnancenncsecoccowverssoreniecceccce sacs 570

XXV. (Caret.)

MORV 1. Cultrumenis Plavipess cierececcrnces xeomcaninan nvancimonnsncnrsccsen: 264

XXVI. Seal from Asirgarh—Bronze head, cnc nnmecnvsererecerensere 486

XXVII. Fossil Carnivora of the Sub-Himélayas, nrc varevvacce 580

XXVIII. XXIX. Ceylon inscriptions, 20. cccmeonmeveen 554 and 556

XXX. Tridents in Garhwal with inscriptions, ~rcmeeernwenvence 486

XXXI. Inscription at Buddha Gaya, 0. srmcsseeaecenenansvecece Pecemeeese OOF

XXXII. Bhitari inscription (will appear in Vol. VI.)

XXXIII, Inscription in Asiatic Society’s museum, w..scnwenncccsee 124

XXXIV. Seoni inscription, two plates, ~ crerean raccene ve Soentonms Sion TOG

XXXIV. Fossil Sus of Sub-Himélayas, on rcvanmncnncevenervcerrcencee 661

XXXV. (bis) Miscellaneous Bactrian Coins, ~worccrvewnnnccecene 548

XXXVI. Statue of Silenus, ....22--~~ eer ee neat nnceteceen OCT

XXXVI. (bis) Connection of Mithraic with Hindu Coins, ...W.... 639

PEM VALE. CaniGuy CONS; iccpncencnrmacaronenansnas Se eee ape care Ae sanrrateroneconces sa GAD

PIPER LX, SOcond Series CONTINUED 5 once nccccnncaceannosorcoseccsevorercersesrcevoceceee GOA

XL. Fossil Mastodons of Siwaliks, «0 .nwsnrwenecace coventar wecesonneua E61

ALI. Map of Richardson’s route, .ccnceversevsewercocorensvenesecetenscore 605

XLII. (Caret.)

XLIII. Development of Pollen, folded, w.ssccsomsersecceccerervcen sevevoe, 138

XXVi

XLIV.

XLV.

XLVI.

XLVIII.

XLIX.

LIST OF PLATES,

Names of Places dn: Burm@se, * cm ncvesccciniansnmecenonecsmrentnte.

(bis) Teeth of fossil Sus, 2 snccera ntieetaierncevinrateniewetoeee nrerarases

(Caret.)

Bactirian “Couns so cock ca sed nt cena neces

Fossil Quadrumana of Sub-Himdlayas, vc crccerersearecorce

Arabic Nautetal sonst imi Gints, 6 cccsiecoteccecee sins psincing cocoa acnaneeteegs

IVT ea iwi PA oR gen ec tc ct nce ec oar ome fe hes

Page .

601

664

720

740

784

794

Owing to the continual postponement of papers this year, and to the

lithographer having numbered his plates without reference to the engrav-

ings, many numbers have been given twice over, and the whole occur

very irregularly. They will be found, however, correctly placed in the

monthly numbers, with exception of Cultrunguis flavipes, which must be

shifted to page 364—and of the plate circulated with the February Jour-

nal which belongs to the preceding volume, Pl, LIV., along with the cor-

rected catalogue of plates of that volume.

JOURNAL

Poe ASL ATIC SOCTE TY.

No. 49.—January, 1836.

I.—Second Memoir on the Ancient Coins found at Beghram, in the

Kohistdn of Kabul. By Cuarres Masson.

I had the pleasure last year to submit a Memoir on the coins dis-

covered at Beghram, and now beg to offer a second, containing the

results of my collection of the present year from the same place: the

observations which these coins suggest I shall preface by a few remarks,

tending to illustrate the locality of the spot where they are found, as

well as some other points connected with it.

I shall also submit, in this Memoir, the results of discoveries in

other places, made during the year, so far as they refer to numismatolo-

gy; in the hope to contribute to farther elucidation of the history of

the countries from which I write. 1

The dasht or plain of Beghrdm bears N. 15 E. from the modern city

of Kabul, distant by computation eighteen ordinary kos; and as the

line of road has few sinuosities or deflections, the direct distance may

probably be about twenty-five British miles. It is situated at the south-

east point of the level country of the Kohistdn, in an angle formed by

the approach of a lofty and extensive mountain range, radiating from the

superior line of the Caucasus on the one side, and by the inferior range

of Sidh Koh on the other. The former range separates the Kohistdn

from the populous valley of Nijrow, and the latter, commencing about

15 miles east of Kabul, gradually sinks into the plain of Beghrdm. East

of the Sidh Koh is a hilly, not mountainous, tract, called Koh Safi,

which intervenes between it and the extensive valleys of Taghow.

Through the open space extending from west to east, between these

two hill ranges, flows the river formed by the junction of the streams of

2 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan.

Ghorband and Panjshir, and which forms the northern boundary of the

site of Beghrédm. Through this space also leads the high road from

the Kohistan to Nijrow, Taghow, Laghmdn, and Jeldlabid. The dasht of

Beghrdm is comprised in an extensive district of the Kohistan called

Khwojeh Keddrt ; to the north, the plain has an abrupt descent into the

cultivated lands and pastures of the Baltéi Khele and Karindat Khan

Khele families, which at the north-western point interpose between it

and the river for the extent of perhaps a mile, or until the river leaves

the base of a singular eminence called Abdullah Burj, which from the

vast mounds on its summit was undoubtedly an appurtenance of the

ancient city. East of this eminence another small space of cultivated

lands, with two or three castles, called Karahfché, interposes between a

curvature in the direction of the abrupt boundary of the dasAt, and the

direct course of the river; east of K«rdhtchi rises a low detached hill,

called Koh Butcher, which has an extent eastward of about a mile and

half, intruding for that distance between the level dasht and the river ;

at the eastern extremity of Aoh Butcher is one of those remarkable

structures we call topes. Parallel to Koh Butcher, on the opposite side

of the river, are the castles and cultivated lands called Muhammad Rakhi,

and beyond them a sterile sandy tract gradually ascending to a celebrat-

ed hill and Zedrat, named Khwojeh Raig Rawdn, and thence to the

superior hill range before mentioned ; east of Koh Butcher, the level plain

extends for about a mile, until the same character of abrupt termina-

tion sinks it into the low lands of Julghar, where we find numerous

castles, much cultivated land, and as the name Ju/ghar implies, a large

extent of chaman or pasture. The lands of Jilghar, to the east, from the

boundary of the dasht of Beghrdm, to the south, its boundary may be

considered the stream called the river of Koh Damdn, which after

flowing along the eastern portion of Koh Damidn, and receiving what

may be spared after the irrigation of the lands from the streams of

Shakr Darrah, Beydak, Tugah, Istalif, &c. falls into the joint river of

Gharband and Panjshir at a point below Jilghar. Beyond the river

of Koh Daman, a barren sandy soil ascends to the skirts to the Siah Koh

and Koh Saft. Among the topographical features of the dasht of

Beghram may be noted three small black hills or eminences, detached from

each other, which in a line, and contiguous to each other, arise from the

surface of the soil a little north of the river of Koh Damdn. To the

west of Beghrdm are the level lands of Mahighir ; at the north west angle

of the plain is the small village of Killah Boland, where reside about

seven Hindi traders, some of them men of large capitals; and at the

south-west angle are three castles called Killah Yezbashi, distant from

Killah Boland about four miles. From Killah Boland to Jiilghar a.

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 3

distance occurs of four and half to five miles; from Jiilghar to the skirts

of the Sidh Koh, about six miles; from the termination of Koh Siah to

Killah Yezbashi may be also about six miles, and from Killah Vezbashi

to Killah Boland about four miles, as just noted. The whole of the

intermediate space between these points, and even beyond them to the

south-east and south-west, is covered with fragments of pottery, lumps

of dross iron, &c. and here are found the coins, seals, rings, &c. which

so much excite our curiosity. Notwithstanding the vast numbers of

such reliques discovered on this extent of plain, we have hardly any

other evidence that a city once stood on it, so complete and universal

has been the destruction of its buildings. But in many places, we may

discover, on digging about the depth of a yard, lines of cement, which

seem to denote the outlines of structures, and their apartments; on the

edge of the plain, where it abruptly sinks into the low lands of Balti

Khele, from Killah Boland to Karahicht, is a line of artificial mounds;

on the summit of the eminence called Abdullah Burj are also some

extraordinary mounds, as before noted, and contiguous to the south

is a large square described by alike surprising mounds; on one side

of this square, the last year, a portion sank or subsided, and disclosed

that these mounds were formed or constructed of huge unburnt bricks,

two spans square and one span in thickness. This circumstance also

enabled me to ascertain that the original breadth of these stupendous

walls, for such we must conclude them to have been, could not have

been less than sixty feet; probably much more. Among the mounds

near Killah Boland is a large tumulus, probably a sepulchre, which

appears to have been coated with thin squares of white marble; and

near it, in a hollow formed in the soil, is a large square stone, which the

Muhammedans call Sang-Rustam, or the stone of Rustam, and which the

Hindis, without knowing why, reverence so far as to pay occasional

visits to it, light lamps, and daub it with Sindiir or red lead. In the

Muhammedan burial ground of Killah Boland is a fragment of sculptured

green stone, made to serve as the head-stone to a grave; about four

feet thereof is above ground, and we were told as much more was

concealed below ; this is a relique of the ancient city, and we meet with

another larger but plain green stone, applied to a similar purpose, in a

burial ground called Shahidan, or the place of martyrs, under Koh Butcher.

In a Zearat at Chartkir is also a fragment of sculptured green stone ;

and it is remarkable that all the fragments of stone which we discover,

and which we may suppose to have reference to the ancient city, are of

the same species of colored stone. The traditions of the country assert

the city of Beghrdm to have been overwhelmed by some natural catas-

trophe, and while we vouch not for the fact, the entire demolition of the

B 2

4 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (JAN.

place, with the fact of the outlines of buildings discoverable beneath the

surface, seem not to discountenance the tradition. It is not however

improbable that this city, like many others, may owe its destruction to the

implacable rage of the barbarous and ruthless Geneuiz, who like Arriza

described himself as the “ Ghazb Khudd,” or ‘‘Scourge of God.” That it

existed for some time after the Muhammedan invasion of these countries

is evidenced by the numerous coins of the Caliphs found on its site.

That it ceased to exist at the period of Trmvu’r’s expedition into India,

we have negative proof furnished by his historian SHerirupDIN, who

informs us, that Timu’r, in his progress from Anderab to Kabul, encamped

on the plain of Baran (the modern Bayan, certainly) and that while there, he

directed a canal to be cut, which was called Mahighir, by which means,

the country, before desolate and unproductive, became fertile and full of

gardens. The lands thus restored to cultivation, the conqueror apportion-

ed among sundry of his followers. The canal of Mahighir exists at this

day, with the same name it received in the time of Trmv’r. A considerable

village, about one mile west of Beghrdm, hasasimilar appellation. This

canal, derived from the river of Ghorband, at the point where it issues from

the hills into the level country, irrigates the lands of Bdydn and Mahi-

ghir, and has a course of about ten miles. Had the city of Beghram

then existed, these lands immediately to the west of it, would not have

been waste and neglected, neither would Trmv’r have found it necessary

to cut his canal, as the city when existing must have been supplied

with water from the same source, that is, from the river of Ghorband ;

and from the same point, that is, at its exit from the hills into the level

country; and the canals supplying the city must have been directed

through these very lands of Bdydn and Mahighir, which Timv’r found

waste and desolate. The courres of the ancient canals of Beghram are

now very evident, from the parallel lines of embankments still to be

traced. The site of Beghram has, to the north, the river formed by the

junction of the Ghorband and Panjshir streams, and to the south, the

river of Koh Daman; but neither of these rivers are applicable to the

irrigation of the circumjacent soil, the former flowing in low lands,

perhaps one hundred and fifty feet below the level of the plain, and

the latter scantily furnished with water flowing in a sunken bed. It

may be farther noted, with reference to Timvu’r’s colonization of Mahi-

ghtr, that the habitants of the district of Khwojeh Keddri, while for-

getful as to whom their forefathers owed their settlement in this

country, acknowledge their Turki descent, and alone of all the inhabi-

tants of the Kohistan speak the Turki language. We might expect

to detect a notice of Beghram in the Arabian records of the early caliphs,

in the histories of the Ghaznavi emperors, and in those of GmneuHiz

Kuan.

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 5

That Beghrdm was once a capital city is evidenced by its fope, a

sepulchral monument of departed royalty; while a second, situated in

Tope Darah, about nine miles west, may probably be referred to it, as

may perhaps a third found at Alisah/, at the gorge of the valley of

Nijrow, distant about 12 miles east. The appellation Beghrdm must also

be considered indicative of the pre-eminence of the city it characterizes ;

undoubtedly signifying the chief city or metropolis. About three miles

east of Kabul, we have a village and extensive pasture retaining this name,

which indicates the site of the capital in which Kappuis and his lineage

ruled, and whose topes we behold on the skirts of the neighbouring

hills. Near Jeldldbdd, a spot called Beghram, about a mile and half

west of the present town, denotes the site of the ancient Nysa; or, if the

position of that city admit of controversy, of Nagara; its successor in

rank and consequence. Near Peshdwar we have a spot called Beghrdm,

pointing out the site of the original city; and that this epithet of emi-

nence and distinction was continued, up to a recent date, to the city of

Peshdwer, we learn from Ba’ser and Asut Fazu.

We have indications in the Kohistan of Kdbul of two etlier ancient

cities, which were undoubtedly considerable ones, but which we cannot

suppose to have rivalled Beghrim in extent or importance. The

principal of these is found in Perwan, about eight miles N. 19 W. of

Beghram, and consequently that distance nearer to the grand range of

Caucasus, under whose inferior hills it is in fact situated. The second

is found at Korahtass, alittle east of the famed hill, and Zedrat Khwojeh,

Raig Ruwan, distant from Beghrém about six miles N. 48 E. There

are also many other spots in various parts of the Kohistan which exhibit

sufficient evidences of their ancient population and importance; but

these must be considered to have been towns, not cities. In the valley

of Panjshir we have more considerable indications, and we are enabled

to identify three very extensive sites of ancient cities; but which, from

the character of the country, and the limited extent of its resources, we

can hardly suppose to have flourished at the same epoch. In the

Koh Daman of Kabul, or the country intervening between that city and

the Kohistan, we discover two very important sites, which unquestionably

refer to once capital cities: both occur in a direct line from Beghram to

Kabul, under the low hill ranges which bound Koh Daman to the east,

and contiguously also east to the river of Koh Daman ; the first com-

mences about eight miles from Beghrdm, and is known by the name of

Tartrung-Zar; the second is about the same distance farther on, and

has no particular name, but is east of the seignorial castles of Luchi

Khan, and the village of Korinder: at this site we find a tope, an

indubitable evidence of royalty, and connected with it is a stupendous

6 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. [Jawn.

artificial mound on the west bank of the river, constructed with elaborate

care: the base appears originally to have been surrounded with a magni-

ficent trench, supplied by the stream with water. Here no doubt was

some important structure, a palace or citadel. At this day the summit

is crowned with dilapidated mud walls of modern construction, and the

spot is known by the name of Killah Rajput. In the district of Ghor-

band, west of the great hill range, which radiating from the Hindi Kosh,

or Caucasus, forms the western boundary of Koh Damdn, we have very

many important vestiges of antiquity, both in the principal valley and

in its dependencies, particularly in one of them named Fendékistan:

we have reasons to believe that coins are found there in considerable

numbers, and that there are some interesting mounds; but as we have

not seen this spot, we refrain from speculating upon its character.

We have thus enumerated the principal ancient sites of cities in Koh

Damdn and Kohistan, both as shewing the former importance and

illustrating the capabilities of these fine countries, and as exhibiting the

fluctuations, in ancient times, of the seat of royalty in them. Beghram,

Perwan, Tartrung-Zar, and Killah Rajput have no doubt in succession

been the abodes of sovereigns, as have most probably Panjshér and

Korahtass. Our minuteness may moreover be excused, because in this

part of the country we expect to detect the site of Alexandria ad

Caucasum, or ad calcem Caucasi. It may be remarked, with reference to

the sites of Beghram and Perwdn, that the former is called by the

Hindis of the country ‘ Balram,’ and is asserted by them to have been the

residence of Raja Bat; the latter they call Milwdn, and assert to have

been the capital of Raja Minwan. Muitwan may bea Hindu appellation,

but it has been also assumed by Muhammedans.

We have it not in our power to consult the ancient authorities, who

have noticed Alexandria ad Caucasum, or probably its site might have

been definitely fixed; but when we know that it was also called Nauldbi

or Nilabi, from being situated on or near the river Nauldbi or Nildb, we

have no difficulty in seeking for its position, being acquainted with the

geographical features of this part of Asia. The name Niladi could only

have been conferred on the river of Ghorband, or on that of Panjshir, or

to both, after their confluence; in the latter event, we are brought to

the site of Beghram without the chance of error. The rivers of Ghor-

band and Panjshir unite at a spot called Tokchi, bearing north a little

west of Beghram, distant about a mile and half or two miles, and near

the place called Inchdér, which is inserted in the map accompanying the

Honorable Mr. Expuinstone’s work. JInchor is a solitary castle, pic-

turesquely seated amid a large extent of fine chaman or pasture land.

From its source the river of Ghorband, which is also that of Bamian,

1836. ] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. a

has a greater extent of course than that of Panjshir ; but the latter is

the more considerable stream. Atthe point where the river of Panjshir

issues from the hills into the level country of the Kohistdn, is a spot now

called Nildb; also at the very site of Beghram after its union with the

Ghorband river, the united stream has the same name, in both instances

derived from the great depth of the water, and its consequent limpid

and blue appearance. In the valley of Ghorband is a spot called Nilad,

which now by some contradiction is conferred upon the land adjacent

to the river, and not upon the river itself. I incline to consider the

river of Ghorband to be the Niladi of our ancient authors, and if it be

found that the Nauldbi of Protemy, Straso, or Puiny, the writers who

have probably mentioned it, be conducted by Drapsaca or Drashtoca,

which may be concluded to be the modern Bamian, we can have no

doubt of the fact, and the merit of being considered the site of Alexan-

dria ad Caucasum, or ad calcem Caucasi, can only be contested by two

sites, that of Nilad, in the valley of Ghorband, and that of Beghram. Near

Nilab, in Ghorband, we find the remains of a most stupendous fortress;

but however valuable as a military post, it does not seem calculated to

have been the site of a large city. Beghram, on the contrary, possesses

every advantage of situation, and would in these days, if revived, bid

fairer to realize its pristine prosperity, than any other site in these coun-

tries. With the term Alexandria ad calcem Caucasi, the situation of

Nildb would precisely agree, and we learn also that the city so called

was near the cave of PrometnEus. This appears to have been justly

located by Wirorp, near the pass of Shibr ; and we find at Ferinjal, a

dependency of Ghorband, between it and Bamian, or near Shibr, a most

extraordinary cave, which we would fain believe to be that of Promsz-

THEUS. With the term Alexandria ad Caucasum, the site of Beghrdm

would sufficiently coincide ; while its distance from the cave of Ferinjal,

or that of PromETHEUS, is not so great as to violate propriety in its

being termed contiguous, while its propinquity to the base of Hindu

Kosh, or Caucasus, would seem to justify its being entitled Alexandria

ad calcem Caucast. That ALEXANDER established not merely a military

post, but founded a large city, we ascertain, when we learn from Curttus,

that he peopled it with no less then seven thousand menials of his army,

besides a number, of course considerable, but not mentioned, of his

military followers, and are distinctly informed, that the city in question

became a large and flourishing one. No doubt, if this part of Asia

were to come under European control, the re-edification of Beghram

would be deemed a necessary measure, for a considerable city at this

spot would not only provide for the due submission of the half-obedient

8 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan.

tribes of the Kohistdn, but would secure the allegiance of those abso-

lutely in rebellion or independence, as of Panjshir, Nijrow, Taghow, &c.

It is impossible to cast a retrospective view over the regions of Afghd-

nistan and Turkistan, to behold the cities still in existence, and the sites

of such as have yielded to the vicissitudes of fortune, which owe and

owed their foundation to ALEXANDER THE GREAT, without paying the

tribute of homage and admiration to his genius and foresight. Above

twenty centuries have elapsed, since the hero of Macedon marched in

his triumphant career from the shores of the Bosphorus to the banks of

the Hyphasis, subjecting the intermediate nations, but rendering his

conquests legitimate, by promoting the civilization and prosperity of

the vanquished. A premature death permitted not posterity to wonder

at the prodigy of an universal monarchy, which he alone of all mankind

seemed talented to have erected and maintained. No conqueror had

ever views so magnificent and enlightened, and none ever left behind

him so many evidences of his fame. Of the numerous cities which he

founded, many are at this day the capitals of the countries where they

are found; and many of those no longer existing would assuredly be

revived, were these parts of Asia under a government desirous to effect

their amelioration. The selection of Mittun by the British Government

of India for their mart on the Indus, while the most eligible spot that

could have been chosen, was also a tribute of respect to the memory of

the illustrious ALEXANDER; for there can be no doubt that Mittun

indicates the site of the Alexandria that he founded at the junction of the

united streams of the Panjdb with the Indus, and which he predicted, from

the advantages of position, would become a large and flourishing city.

It may be that Mzttun under British auspices may realize the prophecy

applied by the hero to his Alexandria.

To return from this digression to the question of the site of Alexandria ad

Caucasum or ad calcem Caucasi, we can only refer it to two spots, Ni/db in

Ghorband, and Beghrdém : \ incline to prefer the latter, from the superiority

of its local advantages, and from the certainty of its having been a large

and flourishing city, as Alexandria is represented to have become. In favor

of Nilab may perhaps be adduced the itinerary of Diognrrxs and Baton,

the surveying officers of ALEXANDER, as preserved by.PLiny. We there

find the measured distance from the capital of Arachosia to Ortospanum

stated to be 250 miles, and from Ortospanum to Alexandria, 50 miles.

The capital of Arachosia was unquestionably in the vicinity of the

modern Kdndahar, and Ortospanum, although by some considered

Ghazni, may safely be referred to Kébul, when we find in Protemy that

it was also called Cabura, the first approximation to the present name

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 9

Kabul, which we detect in our ancient geographers. The distance

between the modern cities of Kabul and Kandahar, agreeably to admea-

surements made under the Chaghatai Emperors of India, is ninety-two

Jeribi koss, or nearly 210 British miles; the miles of Puiny are no

doubt Roman ones, which were, I believe, a little less than our British

statute ones: this slight difference will not however compensate for the

excess in the distance fixed by ALEXANDER’s officers; but there are

reasons to suspect that the ancient capital of Arachosia was situated

some eighteen or twenty miles west of the modern Kandahar, at the

base of a hill called Panchvahi, where traditions affirm a large city

once flourished, and of which there is abundant proof in the huge mounds

to be observed there. The ancient city of Kabul, which I infer to

have been Ortospanum, was seated also some three or four miles east of

the modern one; the distances here gained, with the difference between

British and Roman miles on two hundred and fifty of the latter, (if

they be, as above assumed, less,) will reconcile the measurements of

the officers of ALEXANDER with those of the Chaghatai Emperors, and

we can have little doubt but that Ortospanum is represented by the

present Kabul. From Kabul to Beghrdm, the distance is not certainly

more than twenty-seven British miles; but from Kabul to Nilab of

Ghorband, the distance is nearly, if not fully, fifty miles, coinciding with

the account of Diognerrs and Baron. It may however be observed,

that different copies of Purny have in this instance various numbers, so

that we feel perplexed to select the genuine ones; fifty I believe to be

the least mentioned, and I have calculated with it, supposing it the

more probable one. The same itinerary gives the distance between

Alexandria ad Caucasum and Peucalaotis, stated to be 227 Roman

miles: this latter place has generally been located near the modern

Peshawar ; from Kdbul to Peshawar are estimated 112 ordinary koss,

which, calculated at one mile and half each, yield nearly 170 miles,

Beghrdm will be nearly equidistant from Peshawar with Kdbul, therefore

the distance noted in the itinerary will coincide rather with the locality

of Niléb, which may be about 30 British miles from Beghrdm, and

~ consequently 200 or more British miles from Peshdwar, equivalent

perhaps to 227 Roman miles. But I do not feel confident that Peucalaotis

has been justly referred to the site of Peshawar. It appears to have

been the name of a province, the capital of which was Peucela; in these

terms we detect a considerable affinity to the modern appellation Puekoli,

applied toa district with capital of the same name east of the Indus, and

above Attock, which in ancient times included a considerable territory

west of the Indus. It is not certain that ALEXANDER visited the

immediate vicinity of Peshdwar, although Hzeruzstion will have done

10 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (Jan.

so; and it is probable that he crossed the Indus above Attock, or at a

point in the modern district of Puekoli, perhaps the ancient Peucolaotis.

A similarity of denomination may not always be depended upon, but

when combined with other accordances, it becomes, as D’ANVILLE

expresses it, ‘“‘ un moyen de convenance.’”’ I shall close my specu-

lations on the site of Beghram, by remarking, that ALEXANDER in his

march from Bactra to Alexandria ad Caucasum will have arrived at it

by the route of Bamidn and Shibr, because ARRIAN informs us, that he

passed Drapsaca on the road, which can hardly be mistaken for the

former of those places. ALEXANDER crossed the Hindi Kosh or Cauca-

sus in the month of May; when, supposing the seasons and climate of

these countries to have been the same as at present, any other route

over that mountain range was impracticable. The route from Bamidn

to Ghorband is passable to kdfilas at all seasons of the year, and is no

doubt the high road; but it has been closed during the last twenty-five

years, by the insurrection of the Shaikh Ali Hazdrehs, who inhabit the

small extent of country between Ghorband and Shibr. The route of

Bamidn will have conducted ALEXANDER either to Nildb or Beghram;

and these observations would have been unnecessary, had it not been

supposed by some that his starting place was Anderdb: this assumption

does not however seem warranted, and if grounded on the route that

Timv’R followed, it should have been recollected that the Tartar conqueror

crossed the Indian Caucasus in the month of July.

It had been my intention this year to have secured every coin of

every description that should be picked up from the dusht of Beghriim,

and this purpose would probably have been effected, had I not been

compelled to be absent at Jeldldbdd. A young man was however

despatched thither, with recommendatory letters to my friends in the

Kohistdn, and to him was confided the collection of all he might be able

to procure. On my eventually reaching Kaddul, the young man joined

with 1320 coins, from the appearance of which it was evident he had

selected, and not, as ordered, taken all that were offered. It also

appeared, that in consequence of the distracted political state of the

Kohistdn in the spring, the Afghdn pastoral families had not as usual

visited the plains of Beghram at an early season. In the autumn, more-

over, from apprehensions of a rising in this part of the country, the

Afghans sent their flocks to the Saf? hills, the persons tending which

are the principal finders of these coins. Under these unfavorable

circumstances, I twice repaired to Beghram, and at various intervals

despatched my young men, and the total result of our collection this

year was five silver and 1900 copper coins. These are of course generally

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 11

of the same description and types as those illustrated in my Memoir of

last year; but a few were procured of novel types, and a few altogether

new, among which one or two may be deemed valuable. It is my object

in this Memoir to detail these fresh discoveries, and to offer such remarks

upon them, and the topics they involve, as may arise upon their consi-

deration. My stay at Jelulabdd was, during the season of the year,

unfavorable for the collection of coins; yet, independently of those

extracted from topes, were procured 248 copper coins, among which

two or three are novel ones, to be noted in their place.

Subsequent to my arrival in Kabul, I purchased in the bazar there, six

golden, 176 silver, and 142 copper coins: some of these are important?

ones. I had also the fortune to secure a large parcel of silver Bactrians,

a deposit discovered in the Hazdrehjat: among these are coins of a type

likely to excite some interest.

The coins extracted from the various topes opened this year, may

also be deemed interesting, from the positive connection they have with

the monuments enclosing them ; and valuable, from their superior pre-

servation, having in many instances been inserted new; and presenting

specimens as perfect and intelligible as we may hope to procure.

I shall observe in this Memoir nearly the order adopted in my

preceding one, with reference to classification and the succession of

series, making however such modifications and distinctions as further

discoveries seem to warrant.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.

Class, Grecian Series, No. 1.—Coins of the recorded Kings of Bactria.

As during the last year, we are without any evidence of THropotus

I. and Tuxoportus II., the two first Bactrian kings ; and that their sway

was confined to Bactriana proper, or the regions north of the Indian

Caucasus, is confirmed by the non-discovery of their coins at Beghrdm.

This fact can scarcely be doubted, when we have historical evidence, that

a distinct and powerful kingdom existed, under SopHaGasENus, in the

Paropamisan range, at the time of the expedition of ANtiocuus Maenus.

This year has yielded five copper coins of Eutuypemus, the third

Bactrian king; one was procured at Jeldlubdd; the four others from

Beghram: their discovery seems to prove the extension of this monarch’s

rule south of the Caucasus—a fact countenanced by probability, and the

slight historical evidences we have of him. The solitary coin found at

Jelélabad does not afford proof positive that Eurnyprmus governed there

also, both because there is no certainty where coins purchased in bazars

were produced; and it is not impossible but that it may have found its

way there from Beghram, as the Afghan shepherds, resident on its plain

during the summer, migrate to Lughman and the vicinity of Jeldlddud,

i2 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (Jan.

during the winter ; and the few coins they may bring with them, they

disperse among the dealers in the small towns, as their trifling wants

of oil, tobacco, &c. mayinducethem. Evuruypsmus being denominated

of Magnesia, it may be questioned, in what manner he ascended the

Bactrian throne, whether by the right of lawful succession, or of success-

ful usurpation. At all events, he appears to have been a sovereign of

great talents, worthy of his exalted rank.

Of ArozLopotus, besides a large number of copper coins, we have

this year procured five silver quadrangular coins, the type varying from

those already known.

® Of the celebrated ManANDER, this season has afforded us some copper

coins of novel types, and a large number of silver drachmas and hemi-

drachmas, presenting alike some varieties in the types: we found not

one of this prince’s coins at Jelaldbéd, where we indeed met with two

of ApoLLovotus, but decline to draw inferences from solitary specimens.

When we consider the coincidences observable on the coins of

Mewnanper and Aro..opotus, some of which have even the same figures

on the reverses with the resemblance of their features; and when we

find them conjointly commemorated by Arrian and Troeus, the only

two ancient authors who have recorded the latter’s name, we feel every

inclination to conjecture that the ties of consanguinity must have

connected them. As APpoLLopoTus is previously named by both these

authorities, he may be supposed to have been the father, or perhaps

elder brother, of MenanpER; and that he preceded the latter in sove-

reignty would seem nearly certain, being borne out by every circum-

stance attending the coins we discover. That the reigns of both these

princes was of considerable duration is evidenced by the numerous

coins we find, and by the variety of types they exhibit, proving them

to have been struck at different periods. The busts of Aro.tuopotus

on the two or three coins hitherto found, which exhibit them, have an

extremely youthful appearance; and the portraits of Menanper display

the transition from youth to manhood. That ApoLLtopotrus reigned in

Bactriana proper, we doubt with Bayer, although his pretensions have

been advocated by Colonel Top. That he was the son of Eurnypremus,

we think certain, and that he was the father or elder brother of MEnan-

DER, we think probable, and assuredly his predecessor; that he governed

in the provinces south of Bactriana is certam, and there, according to

the suggestions of ScuiEGEL, I incline to locate his original kingdom

and that of Mzenanper; that this kingdom may have included some of

the provinces of Bactriana Latior, or the regions immediately north of

the Caucasus, is very probable, and would justify its monarchs’ being

styled kings of Bactria by their historians. How far this kingdom

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 13

extended eastward, we may not be able now to determine; but the

non-discovery of the coins of ApotLoporus at Jelalabdd (holding two

or three specimens procured from bazars, but found no one knows

where, no exception to the remark) seems to prove that in his time an

independent power must have existed there: this receives farther proof

when we meet not there with the coins of his successor MenanpeEr, which

abound so numerously at Beghrém. As ApouLoporus certainly invaded

India, we may suppose him, without prejudice to the kingdom of Nysa,

to have marched by the route of Khouram, Banna, and Multdn to the

Hyphasis, on exactly the same route that was followed by Timvu/R; and

in corroboration thereof, we find him brought to the Hyphasis, where he

re-edified the city of Sangdla under the name of Huthydemia. There

can be little doubt but that Sangdla owed its revival to APoLLODOTUS.

That it sprang into new consideration under the auspices of a son of

EvuTHYDEMUS, can scarcely be questioned, and every circumstance seems

to point out that son to have been Apottopotus. The coin discovered

by Dr. Swiney, which bears the epithet Philopater, not a little confirms

this fact. Mrnanper, whether the son or brother of AroLLopotus,

seems fairly entitled to be considered his successor. This prince followed

up the Indian conquests, while he preserved his dominion in the provinces

south of Bactriana; but these latter, on his decease, probably will have

been assumed by Evcrartipss the I., or the Great, king of Bactriana

proper. Mrnanper, we know, was interrupted in his warlike operation

by death; but when, and where, is not recorded by history, which has

been alike faithless to the actions of one of the most illustrious sove-

reigns that ever held a sceptre.

The coins of Eucratipes [., so numerously found at Beghrim, are not

to be discovered at Jelélébéd any more than those of ApoLLopotus and

MENANDER, considering always a single specimen no evidence that

coins of that species were once current there, but rather that they were

not: this circumstance farther substantiates the existence of an inde-

pendent monarchy at Nysa, and that it was sufficiently powerful

to maintain its integrity inviolate; for Eucratiprs was no doubt a

warlike and ambitious prince.

Before adverting farther to Evcraripes, we may be excused in

offering two or three observations as to Demerrrivs, a recorded son of

EvurnypeEmus, and employed by him in his negociations with ANTIocHUS.

If he stand simply recorded as a son, it neither proves that he was the

elder son, although probable, or, that he was the only son. As it was

probably by his means that Euvruypremus subverted the kingdom of

Gas, in the Paropamisan range—an event which could not have occurred

until the close of the reign of EuraypEmus; as SOPHAGASENUS, the father

14 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan.

of Gas, was his cotemporary at the period of the expedition of Anrti-

OcHUS, we may suppose that Demerrius retained the sovereignty of

the countries he conquered, and extended his conquests in Arachosia,

now thrown open to his arms. Accordingly, in a route of Istporus of

Charox the name of a city, Demetrias of Arachosia, occurs, which

would seem referred with justice by ScHLEGEL to the son of Eurny-

peMus, and which points out the direction of his empire. Without

power of reference to the route of Isrporus, in which the name Deme-

trias occurs, we may observe, should it be found in any of those

from the western provinces, as Ariana, &c. to the eastern ones on the

Indus, we should incline to place it in the valley of the Turnek, between

Kandahér and Mokur, in the country now inhabited by the Thoki

Gulzyes, where we have evidences that a powerful capital once existed,

which may have been that of Demerrius. The attack of Demetrius,

or his son, of the same name, upon EvucratipEs may have arisen from

the irksomeness naturally to be felt at the vicinity of a powerful and

ambitious prince, who, by the extension of his empire, had sufficiently

evinced his desire of aggrandizement. History, which records Demzrrivus

as the aggressor in this war, also records that Evcratipss had possessed

himself of Ariana, and we find that he was also master of the regions

south of the Indian Caucasus, thus pressing upon the confines of Arachosia

at the two extreme points of east and west. Aggression on the point of

Demetrius may therefore have been a measure of necessity, or even of

prudence, it being certainly more politic to aggress than to be reduced

to repel aggression. It has not been our fortune to meet with a coin of

Demetrius, or to be acquainted with the type of that procured by Baron

Myenporrr at Bokhara; but unless the reverse be decidedly Bactrian, a

bust adorned with the skin of an elephant would not be sufficient evidence,

in our estimation, to allow its appropriation to the son of EurHypEmus.

Thave a letter from M. Martin Honicsercer, from Bokhdra, by which

I learn that he has also procured there a coin of Demerrius, but he

has not described its character. It may be noted that these two coins of

Demetrius, the only ones, we believe, hitherto discovered*, have been

elicited at Bokhdrd. Among the coins obtained by M. HoniepercEr

at. Bokhdrd, and which he thought worthy of enumeration, probably

as being both Greek and silver ones, are transcribed in his memorandum,

1 Vasileos Antiochu.

1 Vasileos Dimitriu.

1 Vasileos Megalu Hiokraksu.

3 Vasileos Euthidimu.

5 Eucratides.

* Thereisa beautiful little Demetriusin the Venturacollection; see vol 1V.—Ep.

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 15

As Demetrius did not succeed his father in Bactriana proper, and

reasons may be alledged for suspecting that ApoLLoporus also did not,

the question naturally arises, to whom are we to assign the empire of

Bactriana in the interval between the demise of Eurnyprmvs and the

accession of EvcratipEs—a space of fourteen years according to the

table of Scutecet. I have mentioned the discovery of a parcel of

Bactrian drachmas and hemi-drachmas in the Hazdrehjdt, which we

purchased from a Hindi at Charrukar, who some three years since re-

ceived them from a Hazaureh. I have not yet been able to ascer-

tain the spot, or under what circumstances these coins were found.

The parcel, 120 in number, comprised seven quadrangular silver coins

of ApoLLoporus, 108 silver coins of Mrenanpemr, and five silver coins

of AnTrmacuus. The day preceding that on which this parcel of

coins came into my possession, I received from the dushts of Beghrdm,

a silver coin of the same last-named prince, Anrimacuus. The

beauty of the coins of Anrimacuus, the excellence of their execution

and designs, with the purity of the Greek characters of the legend,

allow us not to place this prince subsequent to Eucratiprs, whose

coins in these particulars they surpass. Among 5000 or more copper

coms, procured from the dasht of Beghrdm, we have not discover-

ed one of AnTIMAcHUS, and the detection of a single silver coin does

not seem to afford evidence that he ruled there, when the absence of

his copper coins seem to prove that he did not. Where then must he

be placed? We feel the inclination to conjecture him to have been the

son and successor of Eurnypgemus in Bactriana proper. The reverses

on the coins of ApoLLopotus and Mrenanner are not strictly Bactrian, or

in relative connection with those we discover on those of the undoubted

kings of Bactriana, Eurnypemusand Evcratipss; the horseman in charge

on the reverses of those of ANTIMACcHUs is So, and forms the link between

the horse at speed on the coins of Eurayprmus, and the two horsemen

in charge on those of Evcratipes. The monograms on the coins of

ANTIMACHUS coincide with some on the coins of MzenanpeEr, and if we

can suppose them to be numerical ones (which however I affirm not to

be certain) suggest the opinion that they were cotemporaneous princes,

it bemg possible both were deduced from a common era. We feel

perplexed when we are only allowed by the table of ScuurcEL, an

interval of fourteen years, and when we have three princes who may

claim to have reigned between EvrnHypremus and EucratipEs ; it may

however be suspected that the accession to sovereignty of the latter,

unless historically fixed, is antedated ten years. No one of the very many

coins of this prince we meet with, presents a monogram clearly nume-

rical, which yields a higher number than 85; while the highest number

16 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdém. (Jan.

found is 108, as preserved on the silver didrachma in the Earl of Pem-

BROKE’s cabinet, noted by PinkERTON and indicating the close of his reign.

Neither do the features of EucraTipEs, as preserved on his coins, exhibit the

striking variation of youth to manhood observed on those of MENANDER,

and do not authorize us to allow so long a reign as 35 years. I incline

to date his accession at the epoch 84, of the Bactrian era, and to fix the

duration of his reign to 25 years: thus gaining between it and the

demise of Evrnyprmus an interval of twenty-four years; but even this

increased interval does not suffice for the reigns of ApotLopotus, Mz-

NANDER, and ANTimacHuS. ‘Those of the two former, particularly of

MENANDER, were certainly of some duration, as evidenced by their

numerous coims of various types discovered. Apoxtiopotus, from the

youthful bust displayed on his coins, may be inferred to have died young ;

but Menanper, we think, must be allowed to have attained mature

manhood, or the age of forty to forty-five years: while his numerous

coins, shewing the traits of extreme youth, seem to attest his accession

to sovereignty at an early period of his life, and consequently confirm

the length of his reign. Many of the coins of both these princes have

alphabetical monograms, which, if accepted as numeral ones, may assist

us in our conjectures. Onthe copper coins of Menanper we find HA or

81, which can only refer to the Bactrian era. On the silver coin found

by Colonel Top, we find Ia or 14, which can only refer to his individual

reign. HB or 82 is also found on the coins of Menanner, which brings

us nearly to the number indicated by HE or 85, the lowest number to

be found on the coins of Eucratipes. That this prince succeeded Mzn-

ANDER in the government of the countries immediately south of the

Caucasus appears unquestionable; but it was most likely by forcible

assumption : for had he been the lawful successor of MenanpeER, he was

not of a character to have relinquished his Indian possessions, where

it would appear almost certain he did not reign: these observations

are necessary, because the adoption of a monogram by MEenanper, which

may be supposed to indicate the Bactrian era, might induce an opinion

that he was the predecessor of Eucratipzs in Bactriana proper; while

other circumstances we have noted seem to prove that he was not,

independently of the ambiguous nature of the monograms themselves.

The age depicted on the busts of APpoLLoportus, and on those of the early

coins of MENANDER, seem so nearly to agree, that while we would fain

consider the latter as the successor of the former, we can scarcely

suppose him the son, and our alternative is to conjecture him the bro-

ther. If Msenanper be admitted to have reigned in Bactria, we fancy

ApoLLopotvus must be also; and it may be granted that their joint reigns

might conveniently fill the interval between EutHypemus and Evcra-

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. 17

TivEs of twenty-four years, if our calculation thereof be conceded; but

when we find the principal scenes of the military operations of these

princes were in India, joined with other circumstances, as well as the dis-

covery of the coins of ANTIMAcuHus, the probability appears to be that

they ruled originally, as before advanced, in the regions immediately north

and south of the Indian Caucasus. Euruypsmus, a monarch of great

capacity, would appear to have been fortunate in his sons, (possibly by

various mothers, for polygamy was a vice, according to Currtus, that

the Greeks adopted from the barbarians,) by whose means he extended

his territories, and greatly increased the dignity of the Bactrian empire.

It may be supposed that he apportioned his empire amongst his sons,

allowing them te retain the countries they had individually subjected:

thus we may account for the kingdom of Demerrius in Arachosia; for

that of ApotLopotus and Mrenanper in Bactriana Latior and the regions

south of the Caucasus ; and we may perhaps be allowed to consider ANTI-

mMAcHus as the eldest son and successor of his father in Bactriana

proper. . That this distribution of power was agreeable to the parties

concerned, we may conjecture, when, in absence of direct information,

there are grounds for belief that no war originated between them. The

epoch of ANTIMACHUS cannot, we suspect, were only the excellence of

his coins adduced, be dated posterior to that of Eucratipus; after whose

death, the knowledge of Grecian arts and sciences may naturally be

supposed to have declined: indeed the copper coins of Eucraripxs

himself, although a powerful monarch, exhibit a striking inferiority of

execution, compared with those of KutrHypsemus, which the coins of

AntTimacuus ‘tival. We may suppose the reign of KurnypEemus to

have been tke most brilliant of the Bactrian monarchy, or that in which

the Grecian arts were most cultivated and flourishing.

1 amnotallowed to place ANTIMAcHUs priorto APoLLopoTus ; forI have

shewn how strong are the latter prince’s claims to be considered the foun-

der of Huthydemia, which, if admitted, decide him to have been the son

of Eurnypemus. Neither can we place him subsequent to MENANDER,

because we have indubitable proof that Eucratipes, by some means or

other, succeeded Munanper, in the rule of the countries dependent on

Bactria ad Caucasum : had ANtImacuus governed there, his coins would

certainly have been found at Beghram, with those of Eurnyprmus, who

must have preceded him, and of Euvcraripes, who must have followed

him, and in common with those of Apottopotus and Mrenanper. Nei-

ther did he succeed Mrmnanper in the sovereignty of his Indian con-

quests; for ther his coins would have exhibited Indian characters on

the reverses, rather than Bactrian ones: there can be no doubt but that

the coins of ANTIMAcHUS are genuine Bactrians. Convinced that

18 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. (JAN.

ANTIMACHUS must have reigned posterior to HutHypEmus, and anterior

to Evcratipes, while he could neither have preceded Aprotiopotus,

nor succeeded MunanpeER, we have no alternative but to place his reign

between the two former princes, and to suppose him cotemporary with

the two latter: thus nearly yielding decisive proof that he was the son

and successor of EurHyprmus in Bactriana proper.

To omit no circumstances likely to throw light upon the subjects

under discussion, I advert to the nature and character of the deposit of

Bactrian coins, which yielded five of ANTIMACHUs, seven of APOLLODO-

Tus, and 108 of Mznanper; for matters apparently trivial may some-

times furnish valuable hints. A person, from some motive or other, con-

ceals a sum of money, the coins of which he will possess the larger

number are those of the reigning prince; it is however easy to imagine

that he may have a few of the prince who preceded in rule, and a few of

any neighbouring or cotemporary sovereign. The person, who made

the deposit thus preserved for us, we may presume, did so in the reign

of Mrenanper, which accounts for the notable proportion of that prince’s

coins ; the few of ApoLLopotus seem to point him out as the predecessor

of Menanoper, and the fewer of ANTIMACHUSs intimate, that he was a

neighbouring and cotemporary prince. The length to which I have

carried my observations on these coins, and the topics they involve, might

justify my being taxed with prolixity, did they not relate to a subject

so interesting and intricate as that of Bactrian history; and I shall

conclude them by inserting a new table of the reigns and successions of

the Bactrian sovereigns, agreeably to the suppositions, the probability

of which I have advocated.

TABLE.

TheodotusI. established his sovereignty B.C. 255, reigued 12 years---- Ito 12ofBactrianzra:

Theodotus 11. began to reign ------++-- B.C, 243, reigned 23 years---- 32 to 350f do.

Euthydemus began to reign ---------+-- B.C. 220, reigned 25 years---- 35 to 60o0f do.

Antimachus began to reign ---++-+++-++ B.C. 195, reigned 24 years:--- 60 to 840f do.

Eucratides began to reign --------++--+- B.C. 171, reigned 25 years---- 84 to 1090f do.

Successor of Eucratides began to reign-- B.C. 146, reigned years unknown,109 to period unknown,

Note.—The period B.C. 125, fixed for the destruction of the empire, liable to much distrust-

I continue to discover the coins of Evcratipes in the same numbers,

but have met with none of new types. I have noted that this monarch’s

coins are not found east of Kdbul, affording the presumption that his

sway did not extend thither.

Among the coins collected this year, I have not discovered one by

which we can identify the successor of Evcratipus; but among the

new which may claim to be considered Bactrian, we have one with the

classical name of DiomepEs. |

We are also without any trace of Hetioctes, who would appear to

have no claim to be introduced among the early Bactrian sovereigns;

1836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 19

but if the coin discovered of him be clearly Bactrian, which the reverse

probably would decide, he may still be admitted his rank among the

later sovereigns of the Bactrian dynasty, or among those arising from

its destruction.

We have this year procured intelligible specimens, which enable me

to decipher some of those left in doubt nm my Memoir of last year;

and have fallen upon twe or three altogether new, from the characters

on the reverse, might be considered Bactrian; at all events, they are

Greek, and 1 submit my opinion on them in the succeeding observations.

With so many coins before us of princes who have move or less pre-

tensions of bemg Bactrian sovereigns, we may feel tempted to doubt

whether the Grecian authority in Bactriana was subverted by the Getz

at so early a period as that assigned, unless the fact be supported by the

fullest historical evidence. It may be, the recorded subversion amounted

to no more than a temporary inroad of barbarians, which may have

indeed involved the loss of royalty in the family of Eucratipss, and

its assumption by some fortunate leader, who repelled the invasion; the

probability appears to be that the Greek power in Bactriana, in the

first instance, weakened by the incursions of the Getz and other Scy-

thic tribes, was ultimately annihilated by the overgrown empire of

Parthia. But a Greek authority must have existed to a much later

period in the countries west of the Indus, which would appear to have

been finally subverted by the Sakyan princes, who had established them-

selves in the regions east of the Indus. Without attaching extraordinary

importance to the hyperbolical strains of a Carmen Seculare, we may

observe, that Horace, who flourished about the commencement of the

Christian zra, enumerates among the objects of sufficient magnitude to

engage the attention of Aveustus, the Bactrian empire, which we would

have to have been destroyed above 120 years before the time he wrote :—

‘“‘ Tu civitatem quis deceat status

Curas, et orbis solicitus, times

Quid Seres, et regnata Cyro

Bactra parent, Tanaisque discors.”’

Class Grecian—Series 2. Unrecorded Kings of Bactria.

1 have thought proper to include in this general series all the coins, of

whatever description, which may have Bactrian characters on the reverse

legends. I by no means however wish to assert that all these princes

ruled in Bactriana proper, perhaps no one of them did so. This series

at present includes Antimacuus, Hermaus L., II., [11., Diomepss, An-

TILAKIDES, Austus*, ADELPHORTES, PaLERKES, BasiIList, ALOUOKENES,

AzvI.,II., Demerrivs, (?) and three other coins among the unidentified

* Lysius.—ED. + AziLisos.—ED.

Dee

20 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdém. (Jan.

ones, or in all seventeen names: of these I am willing to transfer

Antimacuus to the regular Bactrian dynasty, Hermazus L,, II., to the

dynasty of ApotLopotus and Menanoper, and ApELPHoRTES, BasiLis,

and Azo, to a dynasty which I hope to prove, one day, to have existed

distinctly at Massaga.

Class Grecian—Series 3. Coins of AGaTHociss, PANTALEON, &c.

This year yielded me the same proportion of the coins of these princes,

and I suspect we have found two other coins, which, with reference to

the characters, may be classed with them, viz. Nos. 30 and 32 of the

Greek coins now enumerated: if this be correct, we shall have five princes

of this series.

Class Grecian—Series 4. Coins of the Nysean Kings.

Of these kings we have the topes or cenotaphs at Jeldlabdd: there

appear to have been two great families; that of Hzermxus and his descen-

dants, whose coins are distinguished by the figure of Hercutss, with his

club on the reverse, and those of the princes, whose coins have a

horseman on the obverse, and the figure of Cerss on the reverse: to

these must unquestionably be added the great king whose coins bear

the legend BAZIAEVC BASIAEWN SOrHP MErAC, and I make no doubt

UnappHerros: the latter family is the more ancient; and if our views

are right, came originally from Massaga. There are thirteen topes cer-

tainly, perhaps fourteen, at Jeldldbdd, which may safely be referred to

these princes ; five or six to the family of Hzrmzus, and the remainder

to that of the others ; if three of these be not the topes of saints, rather

than of kings: this I infer from their position on eminences, and the

absence of coins with the relics found in them.

Note.—Of the prince whose coinage is delineated as fig. 37 in the

Jast Memoir, I have procured many other coins: but none enabling

me to identify his name: these coins, like the former, all from Beghrdém.

Class Indo-Scythic—Series 1 and 2. Coins of KanERKos amd Kappuis.

I have discovered that the topes of Kabul refer to the families of these

princes, as do a number of topes near Chaharbag, or Jeldlibdd ; but

these latter I very much suspect to be duplicates of the former. This

year has given us a number of golden medals of these princes, which

are noted below.

I have not been yet enabled to locate the capital of the princes

whose coins form the other series of this class.

Recapitulation of Greek coins collected from Beghram, 1834.

Copper of Buthydemus, .. 06.05.50. 00 cece eledses (3

Apollodotus:). ii BNadabe sia tidhelaleio siden WoL

Menander;,:).,cite ne sattadcy cotrweebiesccs) 06

HLUCTatideS snc ariscuee ee eielon sicinetaotesne cau

Diomedess ssc ssaeeaceonkecs eae 1

Adelphortes; <siseree' sires. wiere shah: om ae. sts 1

1836.} Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrém. 21

METOUCH, GSS cio DOO CIOE OC UROOID Crome 5

Termes I} <)Saiinn cseetens coumerwny OF

lermige nis: une seta ret ast ate aete 5

Hercules typeyt 22's cisin eis le )5.9°e2. vine Ged

Wier anye cs cate tas alae Slee <i dica ne GAOT,

Wad PieETOSs ccs. cals ase on see csiseees, FO

Lysius,

Heath ageless, «.</dsis.¢<\oajdae sas aes ey Le

BanitsleOn’,cj-\ee\s:= \sis'« iedilolelatsis Sanane 2

Pie A MC's acct. a cienaie <siiehupa ae cles ae aa

As fig. 37 of Memoir 1833,......+-+.+. « 4

Small Nyszeans, ......c000 seescceee- 24

Total, 790 Greek copper coins.

Silver coin (drachma) of Antimachus, .. 1

Total, 791 Greek coins.

ANALYSIS OF CoINS.

[With the present memoir Mr. Masson furnished drawings of all the coins

here enumerated. Many of them however having been already figured in the

plates published with our notes on the Ventura collection in June last, we have

thought it unnecessary to lithograph the whole, and have consequently

made selection of those only which are new types, or have more legible iuscrip-

tions than our own. The text, in justice to the author we, have inserted entire,

merely substituting the word No. for Fig. and given a second reference to the

plates where such as are new will be found.—Eb.]

Series lst.—Recorded Kings of Bactria.

EButhydemus.

No. 1. Obverse.—Bearded bust. [Pl. II. fig. 1.]

Reverse.—Horse at speed. Legend Greek BASIAEQNS EYOTAHMOY,

No. 2. Obverse.—Bearded bust. (Fig. 2.) =

Reverse.—Not represented, same as preceding figure.

No. 1. is one of three coins of the same type, two procured from Beghr4ém,

and one from Jelélabad. These are the curious coins with a concave obverse,

which were noted in my last Memoir of last year, having then one unrecog-

nizable specimen from Beghram. The first intelligible specimen was obtained

at Jelaélabad, on which I was delighted to find the name of EurHypemus. Fig, 2

is a single specimen from Beghram, the obverse not concave.

Apollodotus.

Nos. 3, 4, and 5. Obverses.—Figure of Elephant. Legend Greek BASIAEQS

ATIOAAOAOTOY SQTHPOY, (Fig. 3; see vol. iv. Pl. XXVI. fig. 5.)

Reverses.—Figure of Brahminical Cow. Legend Bactrian.

These Figures represent the types found among seven silver coins of ApoL-

LODOTUS, comprised in a parcel of 121 Bactrian silver coins, purchased from an

individual at Kdébul, but discovered in the Hazaurehj4t. These coins essentially

agree, the monograms only varying.

This year’s researches has elicited a circular copper coin of this prince, but

not represented, being of similar type with his quadrangular coins.

22 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrim. [Jan.

Menander.

No. 6. (Fig. 4.) Obverse.—Bust, the head bound with fillet or diadem. Le-

gend Greek BASIAEQNS ZQTHPOYT MENANAPOY.

Reverse. —Warrior, standing to left; right hand upraised, holding a bundle of

darts ; left hand holding forth an embossed shield. Monogrammical characters on

either side of the feet. Legend Bactrian.

This fine silver coin was purchased at Kabul.

Nos. 7 to 11. (Figs. 6, 8.) Obverses.—Busts. Legends as preceding.

Reverses.—As in preceding Figure. Legend Bactrian.

These types are selected from 110 silver coins of this prince procured this

year, one received as a present in Kabul, one procured at Beghrdm, and 108

procured with the seven of APoLLopotus just noted. These coins essentially

agree, varying principally in the head-dress and position of the busts, and in the

position of the figures on the reverses. Figs. 9 and 10 are distinguished by the

spear or javelin in the right hand, and the nakedness of the bust : the monogram-

mical characters on these coins vary much, andit is remarkable that scarcely any

two of the 108 coins found in one parcel appear to have been struck with the

same die, the differences in them, however slight, being conclusive as to that fact :

it may farther be observed, that copper coins of MeNANDER are to be found, exhi-

biting all the types and monogrammical characters to be found on these silver ones.

No. 12. (Fig. 5.) Obverse.—Bust. Legend Greek, as preceding figs,

Reverse.—Fish. (Dolphin ?) Legend Bactrian.

This fine copper coin was procured from Beghrdm, the monogrammical cha-

racters fal Hi :

No. 13. (Fig. 7.) Obverse.—Whaeel or emblematical figure. Legend Greek, as

preceding figs.

Reverse.—Palm branch. Legend Bactrian.

This small copper coin, a single specimen was procured from Beghrdm, the

monogrammical characters IZ are to be found on the silver coins noted above,

as fig. 8.

Class Grecian—Series 2. Unrecorded Kings of Bactria.

Antimachus.

No. 14. (Fig. 9.) Obverse.—Helmeted and winged female (Victory ? ) standing

to the left, holding in extended right hand a palm branch. Legend Greek BASI-

AEQS NIKH@OPOT ANTIMAXOY. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXI. fig. 3.)

Reverse.—Mounted warrior at speed. Legend Bactrian.

This fine silver coin is one of six silver coins of similar type and size pro-

cured this year, one from Beghrdm, and five in the same parcel as the 108 of

MENANDER and seven of Arotiopotus before noticed. The monogram

on the obverse, is also to be met with on the coins of Menanper; as fig. 9 of

these plates. Were this monogram interpretable, we should have no difficulty

in definitely appropriating these coins.

Hermeus.

No. 15. Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet and diadem. Legend Greek

BASIAEQS SQTHPOY EPMAIOY. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXIV.)

Reverse.— Figure of Jueirer enthroned. Legend Bactrian.

No. 16. ( Fig. 11.) Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet or diadem. Legend

Greek, as preceding figure.

‘d 836.] Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 23

Reverse.—Figure of Jupirer enthroned, with eagle or bird of Jove perched

on extended right hand. Legend Bactrian.

These two fine silver coins were purchased at Kabul. I have to apologize

for having in my memoir of last year, asserted an opinion that HerMaus was

the founder of the Greek Nysaan dynasty of kings ; although it is certain that

he ruled there, (that is at Nysa,) and even more easterly, as is evidenced by his

numerous coins found both at Jelalabéd and Peshawar. The Bactrian characters

on the reverses of this prince’s coins, were not then noted with the attention

they ought to have been. And the discovery since of two of his silver coins,

(those now delineated,) and a single copper coin corresponding to No. 15,

compel us to form other ideas of this prince, and authorize us to consider him,

at least for the present, as one of the regular Bactrian dynastry. The enthroned

figure on the reverse of No. 16, with the bird of Jove seated on the hand, we

presume, admits not a doubt, that the figure itself is intended to represent Jupt-

wER ; and the similar figures on the reverses of the copper coins of this prince,

although not manifestly exhibiting the eagle, may be supposed to personify the

same deity, and not Hercuves as before imagined. It seems probable, that the

figures on the reverses of the silver coins of EutuypDEMUs may be intended to

indicate Jurirer. The copper coins, we had previously found, of HeErmzxuvus,

have very pointed features, and pourtray a prince considerably advanced in years—

the two silver coins now before us, with the single copper coin discovered this

year, exhibit the features of youth, and justify us in concluding that his reign

commenced when he was young, as the great proportion of the copper coins jus-

tify the conclusion, that it terminated at an advanced period of his life. We may

fairly allow to this prince a reign of twenty-four or twenty-five years, a term

which would accurately fill up the period between the demise of EUrHyYDEMUS

and the succession of EucRATIDES, or, of that, from the demise of EucRATIDES,

to the alleged destruction of the Bactrian empire by the Gera; but a consider-

ation of the general style of the execution of the coins of Hermaus, (although

the two coins now under notice are beautiful ones, especially No. 16,) will scarcely

allow us to intrude him as the successor of EUTHYDEMUS: it is fair, however, to

observe, that the coins of the two princes bear the same figures on the reverses,

and that the forms of both are circular. Neither are we willing to admit him to

have been the successor of Eucratipves, for he would appear to have enjoyed

a large reign, which we hardly suppose a prince who was alike a parricide would

have done. It would be gratifying to detect the successor of EucRATIDES in

Bactriana proper, and amongst the whole of the coins discovered at Beghrém,

holding their execution as the token of their precedence or antiquity, we find

none which have equal pretensions with those of Herm aus: but this only proves,

that he succeeded to his authority in the Caucasian provinces, and this is what

we suspect to have been the case; for when we observe his superior silver coin-

age, when we are satisfied that his reign was long, and that his dominions ex-

tended to the Indus, or beyond that of EucraTipEs, we repeat we can scarcely

believe this powerful prince, and (if we judge from his portrait) beneficent one,

to have been the parricide of his father, or him who was vanquished by the Ger.

The silver coin (No. 16), exhibits a strong resemblance to the silver coin of

MENANDER, (No. 6), as does the bust in form and features ; the legend is also

similarly arranged. These circumstances may perhaps sanction an inquiry, whe-

ther HenmMa&vus may not have been the son and successor of MBNANDER, depriy-

24 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. [Jan.

ed of his Caucasian provinces by EucRATIDES on the death of his father, and

recovering them after the murder of this prince, during the anarchy that then

naturally prevailed. It is however more probable, as we have before hinted, that

EvcrRATIDES committed this act of aggression when MENANDER was still living,

and this seems corroborated by all the coins of Hermaus found at Beghrém

displaying an aged prince, while the coins before us prove, that he also ruled

when young ; whence we infer, that he must originally have reigned elsewhere,

and as we find that his coins are met with very far eastward, we may presume

that his original seat of empire was in that quarter, and that from thence he

marched to the Caucasus, when the death of Eucratipzs allowed him the op-

portunity : and in confirmation of which we find, that the Beghr4m coins of this

prince refer to the latter part of his reign. The proportion of his copper coins

. found at Beghram, may also guide us in our estimate of the duration of his reign

there. EucRATIDES, we suppose, reigned 24 years; in 1833, we found 70 of his

coins, and in 1834, 92, or 162 for 2 years; in 1833, we found of the coins of

Hermus 34, and in 1834, 31, or 65 for 2 years. Now by the common rule o

three process, if 162 yield 24, 65 will yield 94+, say 10 years for the reign of

Herm aus at Beghram: but we find that he must have reigned much longer some-

where else, which seems to verify the inferences we have before drawn; and as,

we hope, in ANTIMACHUS we have found a son and successor for EuTHYDEMUS,

so we hope that in Hermaus we have discovered the son and successor of ME-

NANDER. The difference in the execution of the coins of this prince and of other

Bactrian kings, as well as the striking diversity in the purity of the Greek cha-

racters, may perhaps be accounted for by supposing, that the better coins are

those struck at the metropolitan mints, where Greek artists would be found, and

that the inferior ones were struck at provincial mints, where, if Greek artists

were not to be procured, the more expert native ones would be employed. We

have discussed at some length the merits of the coins of Hermaus, but let us

mislead no one ; on subjects so difficult as these Bactrian coins, much is still left

to conjecture, and at present, little more can be done than to expose the difficul-

ties that attend them. '

Diomedes.

No. 17. (Fig.10.) Obverse.—Two erect figures, standing to the front, right hands

holding spears, swords by the side. Legend Greek IA€N2.QTHPOS AIOMHAOY.

Reverse.—Humped cow. Legend Bactrian.

This is the type of a single quadrangular copper coin procured this year from

Beghram, fortunately presenting without doubt in the legend, the nomen and

cognomen. DiomepxEs Sorer. The monogram on the reverse /4j; is also found

on the coins of ANTIMACHUS and APOLLODOTUS.

Antilakides.

No. 18. Obverse.—Bust, the hair of the head behind, bound into a kind of

pod resembling a bag-wig. Legend Greek, obscure, but undoubtedly BASIAEQS

NIKH®OPOY ANTIAAKIAOY. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXVI. fig. 10.)

Reverse.—Two conical emblems, with two palm branches fixed between them.

Legend Bactrian. This is a single specimen, (as to the circular form of the coin,)

procured this year from Beghram. The coin no doubt refers to the same prince

whose coins are delineated in figs. 13 and 14, of Series 2, Class Grecian, of my

last year’s memoir. The features of the prince on this coin are much younger than

those marked on the quadrangular coins, and the monogram varies, being yet.

BAZIAENS

eraaasareose aa

Gosi =

AVY $a

ANS

apdutiarseoe? Ss

BACIAEWMC<

CAAs

MANHPKDY sey

iVHAICeF

JB. Fassins Lith!Press. Calcutta.

ae we a ,

- dee a esis on

a 5

fh s .

oy 24

lene tg om a

hi nae rhe. qe AL. - Fat

Goins of the NyswanKings

95°

r ine Ad &

2 eP

de,

acet 68

SB. Tassins Lith¥ Press. Caleta.

Monogrammucal and Symbotical Characters of Bactrian Coins.

ig ue

AL LLALA.K. 100.

of SilverCoins Menander of Copper Coins

SCP PARLE A A BEB WTH. R$

ee:

Hermes IT. B: ae

Hermes II.

4 os ?

a aera

:* “

YY he Lennie Couns

peer:

Of the Indo Scythic Guns

STB. Tassin's Lith’ Press. Calcutta.

Sw eee ee. ee

0 ~~ i ae ee

ali icacatate =

}

y; SL otay teiMiksot wiee ts pores rene on sedeanlae atehy re

1836.) Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghram. 25

=-The characters on the legend are pure Bactrian, as are those on the coins of

Avsius (Lystvs), figs. 15 and 16, of Series 2, Class Grecian, of last year.

Hermeus.

No. 19. (Fig. 12.) Obverse.—Bust, with tuft or pod on top of head. Legend

Greek, BAZIAEQNS SQNTHPOS EPMAIOY.

Reverse.—Horse. Legend Bactrian.

The type of this coin was given in our memoir of last year (fig. 38). The pre-

sent year we procured a more perfect specimen from Jelalibad: the coin is cer-

tainly Bactrian, judging by the characters on the legend of the reverse, and the

pod on the head of the bust, together with the nature of the reverse, seem to

militate against the opinion, that this coin may represent the quadrangular coin-

age of Hurmaus before noticed.

Adelphortes.

Nos. 20, 21. (Figs. 13, 14.) Odverse.—Mounted warrior. Legend Greek,

BASIAEQS STIAATPIOY AIKAIOY AAEASOPTOY. (See vol. iv. Pl.XXI. fig. 9.)

Reverse.—Seated female deity, with mace or truncheon in right hand. Legend

Bactrian.

This type was represented last year as fig. 44. Jelalabad this year yielded two

fair specimens, from which the Greek legend is undoubtedly as above inserted ;

the reverse legend is as manifestly Bactrian.

Palerkes.

No. 22. (Fig. 15.) Obverse.—Standing figure with trident in right hand. Legend

Greek,.... BASIAEWN MEFAADY MAAHPKOY. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXI. fig. 9)

Reverse.—Seated figure. Legend Bactrian.

This type was represented last year as fig. 40. A more perfect specimen pro-

cured this year from K4bul, identifies the legend to be as above cited, the word

BAZIAEWS being undoubtedly the one not plain.

Basilis (Azilisos.)

No. 23. (Fig. 16.) Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek.... portion legible

ETAAoY. AZIACoY.

Reverse.—Elephant. Legend Bactrian.

This is a single specimen procured at Kabul, the legend entire would probably

have been BACIAEWC BACIAEWN METAAc® BACIAICoY.

Alouokenou (Qy.) (Megalou Nonou ?)

No. 24. (Fig 17.) Obverse.—Figure of Hurcues erect, with club. Legend

Greek, obscure. (Seevol.iv. Pl. XXI. fig. 10.)

Reverse.—Infantry soldier, holding wreathe in right hand, and armed with

sword, spear and shield. Legend Bactrian.

This type was presented last year, as figs. 39 and 43. We have not discovered a

single coin of this type during the present year, but introduce this figure here

from the probability, on referring to the specimen we held, that the name of the

prince was AAOTOKHNOT ; the only doubt is as regards the letters KHN.

Asou (Azou.)

No. 25. Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek, portion visible BASIAEQ....

E.... AAOY ASOT. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXII. fig. 9.)

Reverse.—Humped cow. Legend Bactrian.

This is one of two specimens procured at Kébul; the entire legend would

undoubtedly be BAZIAEQS BAZIAEQN METAAOY A>OYr.

26 Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. (Jan.

No. 26. Obverse.—Humped bull, with monogram over the hump, and another

under the head. Legend Greek, obscure. (See vol. iv. Pl. XXII. figs. 1, 2, 3.)

Reverse.— Monstrous animal, with symbolical monogram over the back. Legend,

characters doubtful.

One of three specimens procured at Jelalébad; the legend is in pure Greek

characters, and by comparison is undoubtedly BASIAENS BASIAEQN METAAOY

AzOY. The characters on the reverse legend I apprehend not to be Bactrian,

but rather Nyszean. The monograms on these coins vary : one specimen gives the

form i over the hump of the bull, and this coincides with the monogram on

No. 25, with fia over the animal on the reverse: this form oceurs on No. 23.

Unidentified Coins.

No. 27. Obverse.—Elephant. Legend defaced. (Vol. iv, Pl. XXI. fig. 11.)

Reverse.—Seated figure with trident. Legend defaced.

This is a single specimen from Kabul. In absence of the legend, it may be

pronounced Greek.

No. 28. Obverse.—Rampant lion. Legend Greek, obscure.

Reverse.—Humped bull. Legend Bactrian. (Omitted by mistake; like Azos coin.)

This type was represented last year ; the present has afforded no new specimen,

and we introduce it again, that it may not be lost sight of, and because we sus-

pect part of the legend to bear the character AHME®O. We at first inclined to

read it AHMHTPIOY, but we presume the character €, which is decisively plain,

will not allow it.

No. 29. (Pl. II. fig. 18.) Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet or diadem.

Legend Greek, portion legible OHTOPO.

Reverse.—Enthroned figure, probably Jupiter. Legend Bactrian.

This is a single specimen from Beghrém, which had nearly given us the name

of another Greek king, for after the insertion of the word BASIAEQS, there

will be only room for one or two letters more, the first O may perhaps be a A.

No. 30. (Fig. 19.) Obverse.—Helmed bust, bearded.

Reverse.—Standing figure. Legend, unknown characters.

This is a single specimen from Beghram ; the characters on the reverse are

singular, and may have some affinity with those on the coins of AGATHOCLES

and PANTALEON.

No. 31. (Fig. 20.) Obverse.—Bust, head bound with fillet or diadem. Legend

Greek, but defaced.

This is a single specimen from Beghram. A fragment of a coin, the reverse

quite smoothed.

No. 32. (Fig. 21.) Reverse.—Figure erect, legend, unknown characters.

This is a single specimen from Beghram, the obverse had been hammered

smooth: the characters, besides being singular, appear to vary on either side of

the inscription ; those to the right resemble the legends of AGATHOocLEs and

PANTALEON.

Class Grecian—Series No. 4. Coins of Nysean Kings.

Nos. 33 to 40. (Figs. 23 to 29.) Obverses.—Busts, head bound with fillet or

diadem. Legends Greek, but illegible.

These figures represent the types of the very numerous coins of this descrip-

tion found, which have invariably on the reverse an erect figure of HERCULES,

resting on his club. They are given to shew the varieties of the legends, as well

1836.) Memoir on the Ancient Coins of Beghrdm. 27

as their incompreheusibility. Of all the coins of this class those of HERMaus are

Only intelligible (figs. 24 and 25, of our last year’s memoir), and this prince seems

to be entitled to be held the first of the line. From a tope at Jelalabad we

extracted ten copper coins similar to fig. 40. The princes of this family appear

to have been numerous. At Jeldlabdd we have five, if not six topes to be referred

to them.

No. 41. (Fig. 30.) Obverse.—Horseman. Legend Greek, but obscure, portion

visible OAIAIII2Z1.

Reverse.—Female figure. Legend Nyszan.

Single specimen from Kabul. The horseman on the obverse, and the legend

on the reverse, enable us to refer this coin to the Greek Nyszan dynasty, but

‘the legend is too difficult for interpretation.

Class Indo-Scythic—Series Nos. 1 and 2.

Pi. ll. Fig. 1. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the right. Sceptre in right

hand, four-pronged monogram behind the head. Legend Greek BACIAEVC OOH-

MO KAASICHC.

This is one of six golden medals of the same prince, extracted from a tope at

Gool Durrah near Kabul. The reverse is not given, in no wise differing from that

delineated in memoir of last year, fig. 24 of Indo-Scythic coins. The six medals

essentially agree ; but as the position of the bust varies, and there are other

trivial but unimportant differences observable on all of them, they will have

been struck at various times.

Fig. 2. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the left. Sceptre in right hand.

Legend Greek characters, PAO NANO PAO OOHPKI KOPANO.

Reverse.—Deity or saint looking to the right, lines of glory around the head,

four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend Greek, NANA.

' This golden medal was found in the same tope with the preceding one and

the next to be described. The reverse NANA, enables us immediately to iden-

tify the prince as one of the Kanerkos family. The nature of the legend has been

so fully displayed in the Journal of the Asiatic Society, that it becomes needless

to dwell on it.

Fig. 3. Obverse.—Bust of king looking to the left. Sceptre in right hand.

Legend Greek, probably same as on preceding coin, portion legible PAOOOKH-

PKIKO PANO.

Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint looking to the right. Right hand extended,

four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend Greek HIIPO. (? Mithro.)

This golden coin found with the preceding ones noted in same tope.

Fig. 4. Obverse.—Erect figure of prince looking to the left, right hand in act

of sacrificing upon an altar, left hand holding staff. Legend Greek NANOPAOKA

NHPKIKOPA ....

Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint looking to the right, with four-pronged

symbol on right hand of, and other in front of, the figure. Legend Greek

NANAPAO.

Gold coin purchased in Kabul, the addition of PAO on the obverse legend

may be noted clearly, from position indicating holy.

Fig. 5. Obverse.—Helmed bust of prince, looking to the left, head surrounded

with circles of glory. Sceptre in either hand. Legend Greek PAONANO

PAOOOVOKIKOPA.

Reverse.—Figure of Deity or saint standing to the left, circles of glory around

28 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Jan.

the head, right hand extended, four-pronged figure in front of figure. Legend

Greek APO,

Gold medal purchased in Kédul. This coin is interesting from the fine bust on

the obverse, and from the new legend on the reverse*.

No. 6. Obverse.—Figure of prince clad in mail, in act of sacrifice, left hand

supporting tridental staff. Legend characters intended for Greek PONOPOO

BONOOPOVOBOKO. (See observations on Kadphises Coins of vol. 111.)

Reverse.—Female figure, standing by side of cow. Legend apparently intend-

ed for OPNO,

No. 7. Obverse.—Same as preceding. Legend probably intended for RAO

NONO POOBO RAONOKO NONO. (See ditto.)

Reverse.—Same as preceding. Legend probably OPNO. (Doubtless OKPO.)

These two go!d coins were purchased at Kabul. They appear to be the gold

coins of the prince whose copper coinage is delineated in fig. 12, Indo-Seythic

coins of last year.

No. 8. Obdverse.—Seated figure. Legend Greek, portion legible KOPANO.

Reverse.—Deity or saint, looking to the right. Four-pronged symbol in front

of figure. Legend Greek NANA. (See vol. iv. Pl. LI. jigs. 4, 13.)

No. 9. Obverse.—Seated figure as in preceding. Legend illegible. (Do. fig. 5.)

Reverse.—Deity or saint, looking to the left, with wreath in extended right

hand. Four-pronged symbol in front of figure. Legend not apparent.

These coins (copper) were procured at Kabul, and introduced because, with

reference to the seated figure on the obverse, they were of a type different from

any we met with last year, although they clearly refer to the KanERKos family.

Little need be remarked upon these Indo-Scythic coins, which appear to be

likely to become more intelligible: suffice it to say, that eight topes in the

neighbourhood of K4bul, at least, may be referred to princes of these families of

KaNERKOS and KappuHis.

Sassanian Coins.

At the foot of Plate III. are inserted a few specimens out of the 187 silver

coins of this class, extracted from the principal Tope of Hiddah, near Jelélabad.

The majority were small coins, like fig. 6.

Monograms.

Plate IV. comprises all the varieties of monogram hitherto observed on the

coins of APoLLopotus, Menanper, EvcraTives and their descendants. Most

of them are at once perceived to be combinations of Greek letters ; but whether

used as expressive of dates, or as the initials of the die-engraver or mint-master

of the day, is not yet determined, although that they are the latter seems the

more probable conjecture. The later symbols on the Indo-Scythic and Leonine

coins, &c. are of a different class, and do not seem formed from alphabetical

combinations.

IJ.—Quotations from original Sanscrit authorities in proof and illustration

of Mr. Hopvason’s sketch of Buddhism.

{The following paper has been printed in the Transactions of the London

Asiatic Society; but, from accidental circumstances to which it is not necessary

further to allude, somewhat inaccurately.

* Probably this is a transposition of the letters of AOPO.—Ep.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 29

The shortest way of amending these errors, and supplying at the same time

some further information calculated to make the paper more generally intelligible,

is to reprint it at Calcutta, This the author has, accordingly, now enabled us

to do, the new information being given in the shape of additional notes, which

it would indeed have been scarcely worth while to print separately from the

text to which they refer. It is not our custom to republish articles already

printed, and we do so nowonly under express invitation from the author, whose

researches in Buddhism, aided by local advantages possessed by no other writer,

it is of the highest importance to have correctly reported and preserved.—Ep.]

PREFACE.

Several distinguished orientalists having, whilst they applauded the

novelty and importance of the information conveyed by my Sketch of

Buddhism*, called upon me for proofs, I have been induced to prepare

for publication the following translation of significant passages from

the ancient books of the Sangatas, which still are extant in Nepdl in

the original Sanscrit.

These extracts were made for me (whilst I was collecting the workst

in question) some years ago by Amirta Nanpa Banpya, the most

learned Buddhist then, or now, living in this country; they formed the

materials from which chiefly ] drew my sketch; and they would have

been long since communicated to the public, had the translator felt

sufficiently confident of his powers, or sufficiently assured that enlight-

ened Europeans could be brought to tolerate the ‘ingens indigestaque

moles’ of these ‘original authorities ;’ which however, in the present

instance, are original in afar higher and better sense than those of

De K6rés, or even of Upuam. Without stopping to question whether

the sages who formed the Bauddha system of philosophy and religion

used Sanscrit or high Prdcrit, or both, or seeking to determine the

consequent pretension of Mr. Upuam’s authorities to be considered

original}, it may be safely said, that those of Mr. Dz Koros can support

no claims of the kind.

* Transactions of the Royal Asiatic Society of London ;—necnon, Transactions

of Bengal Society, vol. xvi.

+ The collection comprises, besides 60 volumes in Sanscrit, procured in Nepdl,

the very names of which had previously been unknown, some 250 volumes, in

the language of Tibet, which were obtained from Lassa and Digarcht. But for

the existence of the latter at Calcutta, Mr. De Korés’s attainments in Tidctan

lore had been comparatively useless. The former or Sanscrit books of Nepdl

are the authorities reliedon in this paper. Since the first collection was made

in Nepdl, very many new works in the Sanscrit language lave been discovered

and are yet daily under discovery. The probability now is, that the entire Kahgyur

and Stangyvr may be recovered, in the original language. The whole series has

been obtained in that of Tibet, 327 large volumes.

+ These authorities however, even if allowed to be original, appear to consist

entirely of childish legends. I allude to the three published volumes, The

30 Quotations from original Sanscrit (JAN.

The native works which the latter gentleman relies on are avowedly

Tibetan translations of my Sanscrit originals, and whoever will duly

reflect upon the dark and profound abstractions, and the infinite simally-

multiplied and microscopically-distinguished personifications of Bud-

dhism, may well doubt whether the language of Tibet does or can

adequately sustain the weight that has been laid upon it.

Sanscrit, like its cognate Greek, may be characterised as a speech

‘* capable of giving a soul to the objects of sense, and body to the

abstractions of metaphysics.” But, as the Tibetan language can have

no pretensions to a like power, those who are aware that the Sangatas

taxed the whole powers of the Sanscrit to embody in words their sys-

tem, will cautiously reserve, I apprehend, for the Bauddha books still

extant in the classical language of India, the title of original authorities.

From such works, which, though now found only in Nepdl, were com-

posed in the plains of India before the dispersion of the sect, I have

drawn the accompanying extracts ; and though the merits of the

*‘ doing into English” may be small indeed, they will yet, I hope, be

borne up by the paramount and (as I suspect) unique authority and

originality of my “ original authorities,” a phrase which, by the way,

has been somewhat invidiously, as well as laxly used and applied in

certain quarters.

received hypothesisis that the philosophers of Ayudhya and Magadha, (the acknow-

ledged founders of Buddhism) preferred the use of Sanscrit to that of Pracrit,

in the original exposition of their subtle system, appears to me as absurd as it

does probable that their successors, as Missionaries, resorted to Pracrit versions

of the original Sanscrit authorities, in propagating the system in the remotest

parts of the continent and in Ceylon. On this ground, I presume the Pracrit

works of Ceylon and Ava to be translations, not originals :—a presumption so

reasonable that nothing but the production from Ceylon or Ava of original

Pracrit works, comparable in importance with the Sanscrit books discovered in

Nepal, will suffice to shake it in my mind. Sir W. Jonss I believe to be the

author of the assertion, that the Buddhists committed their system to high

Pracrit or Pali; and so long at least as there were no Sanscrit works of the sect

forthcoming, the presumption was not wholly unreasonable. It is, however, so

now. And Sir W. Jones was not unaware that Magadha or Bihar was the

original head-quarters of Buddhism, nor that the best Sanscrit lexicon extant

was the work of a Bauddha; nor that the Brahmans themselves acknowledged

the pre-eminent literary merits of their heterodox adversaries.

But for his Brdhminical bias therefore, Sir W1LL1AM might have come at the

truth, that the Bauddha philosophers employed the classical language.

Sir WiLL1AM was further aware, that the old Bauddha inscriptions of Gayd,

Sanchi, Carli, &c. are Sauscrit, not Pracrit. To me this last circumstance is

decisive against the hypothesis in question. Throughout Madhya Des and the

Upper Deccan, the numerous monuments of the Buddhists bear inscriptions in

Sanscrit, and Sanscrit only. The Pali inscription at Gayd is recent, and avowedly

the work of Burmese. [It is chiefly Burmese, not Pali.—Ep.] .

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 31

It is still, I observe, questioned amongst us, whether Brdhmanism or

Buddhism be the more ancient creed, as well as whether the latter be of

Indian or extra Indian growth. The Buddhists themselves have no

doubts upon either point. They unhesitatingly concede the palm of

superior antiquity to their rivals and persecutors the Brahmans ; nor

do they in any part of the world hesitate in pointing to India as the

cradle of their faith.

Formerly we might be pardoned for building fine-spun theories of

exotic upon the African locks of BuppHa’s images: but surely it is

now somewhat too late*, in the face of the abundant direct evidence

which we possess, against the exotic theory, to go in quest of presump-

tions to the time-out-of-mind illiterate Scythians, in order to give to

them the glory of originating a system built upon the most subtle phi-

losophy, and all the copious original records of which are inshrined in

Sanscrit}, a language which, whencesoever primevally derived, had been,

when Buddhism appeared, for ages proper to the Indian continent.

The Buddhists make no serious pretensions to a very high antiquity :

never hint at an extra Indian origin.

Saxkya Sinua is, avowedly, Kshetriya; and, if his six predecessors

had really any historical existence, the books which affirm it, affirm too,

that all the six were of Brahmanical or Kshetriyalineage. Sangata

books treating on the subject of caste never call in question the antique

fact of a fourfold division of the Hindu people, but only give a more

liberal interpretation to it than the carrent Brahmanical one of their

dayt. The Chinese, the Mongols, the Tibetans, the Indo-Chinese, the

Ceylonese and other Indian Islanders, all point to India as the father-

land of their creed. The records of Buddhism in Nepal and in Tibet,

in both of which countries the people and their mother-tongues are of

the Mongol stock, are still either Sanserit or avowed translations from

it by Indian pandits. Nor is there a single record or monument of

this faith in existence, which bears intrinsic or extrinsic evidence of an

extra Indian origin§.

* Recent discoveries make it more and more certain, that the cave temples of

the Western Coast and its vicinity, are exclusively Bauddha. Every part of India

is illustrated by splendid remains of Buddhism.

t The difference betweenhigh Pracrit and Sanscrit, could not affect this ques-

tion, though it were conceded that the founders of Buddhism used the former

and not the latter—a concession however, which should not be facilely made,

and to which I wholly demur.

¢ See the Bauddha disputation on caste. Royal Asiatic Society’s Transactions.

§ See Crawrurp’s remarks on the purély Indian character of all the great

sculptural and architectural monuments of Buddhism in Java. Also Barrow’s

remarks to the same effect in his travels in China. The Chinese Pusd, is Vis-

varupyd Prajnd or the polyform type of Diva Natura. See Oriental Quarterly

82 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Jan.

The speculations of a writer of Sir W. Jonzs’s day (Mr. Joinvitzz),

tending to prove argumentatively, from the characters of Buddhism

and Brdhmanism, the superior antiquity of the former, have been lately

revived (see Asiatic Journal No. CLX.) with applause. But besides

that fine drawn presumptions are idle in the face of such a mass of

direct evidence as we now possess, the reasonings of JoINVILLE appear

to me altogether based on errors of fact. Buddhism (to hazard a

character in few words), is monastic asceticism in morals, philosophical

scepticism in religion; and whilst ecclesiastical history all over the

world affords abundant instances of such a state of things resulting

from gross abuse of the religious sanction, that ample chronicle gives

us no one instance of it as a primitive system of belief. Here is a

legitimate inference from sound premises. But that Buddhism was, in

truth, a reform or heresy, and not an original system, can be proved by

the most abundant direct evidence both of friends and of enemies. The

oldest Sangata works incessantly allude to the existing superstition as

the Murcharya or way of the serpent, contradistinguishing their reform-

ation thereof as the Bdéddhi-charya or way of wise; and the Brahma-

nical impugners of those works (who, upon so plain a fact, could not

lie), invariably speak of Buddhism as a notorious heresy.

An inconsiderable section of the Sangatas alone, ever held the bold

doctrine of mortal souls: and the Swabhavika denial of a creation of

matter by the fiat of an absolutely immaterial being springs, not out of

the obesity of barbarian dulness, but out of the over refinement of

philosophical ratiocination. JoInviuun’s idea of the speculative tenets

of Buddhism is utterly erroneous. Many of them are bad indeed:

but they are of philosophy all compact, profoundly and painfully

subtle-sceptical too, rather than atheistically dogmatic.

At the risk of being somewhat miscellaneous in this preface, I must

allude to another point. The lamented Apzn Remusar sent me, just

before he died, a copy of his essay on the Sangata doctrine of the Triad ;

and Mr. Upuam, I find, has deduced from Remusat’s interpretation of

that doctrine, the inference (which he supports by reference to sundry

expressions in the sacred books of Ceylon), that I am in error in deny-

Magazine, No. xiy. pp. 218—222, for proofs of the fact that numberless Bauddha

remains have been mistaken for Brahmanical by our antiquaries, and even by the

natives. In the same work I have proved this in reference to CRawFurRp’s Ar-

chipelago, Oriental Quarterly, No. xvi. pp. 232, 235.

Yet, no sooner had I shown, from original authorities, how thoroughly Indian

Buddhism is, than it was immediately exclaimed ‘oh! this is Nepdlese corrup-

tion ! these are merely popular grafts from Brahmanism.’ The very same charac-

ter belongs to the oldest monuments of Buddhism extant, in India and beyond

it; and I have traced that character to the highest scriptural authorities.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 33

ing that Buddhism, in its first, and most characteristic form, admits

the distinction of Clerus et Laicus. It is difficult expressly to define

that distinction ; but it may be seen in all its breadth in brdhmanism

and in Popery ; whilst in Islamism, and in the most enthusiastic of the

Christian sects, which sprung out of the Reformation, it is wholly lost.

According to my view, Apostolic Christianity recognised it not*; the

congregation of the faithful, the Church, was a society of peers, of

brethren in the faith, all essentially equal, in gifts, as in place and

character. On earth, there were no indispensable mediators, no exclu-

sive professional ones; and such alone I understand to be priests.

Again, genuine monachism all over the world, I hold to be, in its own

nature, essentially opposed to the distinction of clergyman and layman,

though we all know that monastic institutions no sooner are rendered

matters of public law and of extensive popular prevalence, than, ex vi

necessitatis, the distinction in question is superinduced upon them, by

the major part of the monks laicising, and the rest becoming clergyt.

There are limits to the number of those whom the public can support

in idleness : and whoso would eat the bread of the public must perform

some duty to the public. Yet who can doubt that the true monk, whe-

ther ccenobite or solitary, is he who abandons the world to save his

own soul ; as the true clergyman is he who mixes with the world to

save the souls of others ? The latter in respect to the people or laics has

a distinctive function, and, it may be also an exclusive one : the former

has no function at all. Amongst entirely monastic sects, then, the

exclusive character of priest is objectless and absurd: and who that has

glanced an eye over ecclesiastical history knows not that in proportion

as sects are enthusiastic, they reject and hate, (though nothing tainted

with monachism) the exclusive pretensions of the clergy! Whoever

has been able to go along with me in the above reflections can need only

to be told that primitive Puddhism was entirely monastic, and of an

unboundedly enthusiastical genius}, to be satisfied that it did not recog-

nise the distinction in question. But if, being suspicious of the validity

* TI would not be understood to lay stress on this opinion, which is merely

adduced to illustrate my argument.

+ History informs us that, soon after monachism supervened upon our holy

and eminently social religion, there were in Egypt as many monks almost as

peasants. Some of these monks necessarily laicised, and the rest became clergy.

The community of the Gosdins, aud several others, of strictly ascetical origin,

exhibit the same necessary change after the sects had become numerously followed.

{ Its distinguishing doctrine is that finite mind can be enlarged to infinite; all

the schools uphold this towering tenet, postponing all others to it. As for the

scepticism of the Swabhavikas relative to those transcendent marvels, creation

and providence, it is sufficient to prove its remoteness from ‘‘ flat Atheism,”’ sim-

ply to point to the coewistence of the cardinal tenet first named.

34 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Jan.

of argumentative inferences, he demand of me simple facts, here they

are. In the Sata Sahasrika, Prajna Paramitd, or Racha Bhagavati, and

also in the nine Dharmas (the oldest and highest written authorities), it is

affirmed more or less directly, or is clearly deducible from the context,

in a thousand passages (for the subject is not expressly treated), that the

only true followers of Buppua are monks, the majority bemg ccenobites,

the rest, solitaries. The fullest enumeration of these followers (Bhikshu

Sraxaka or Srdmana, Chailaka, and Arhata or Arhana or Arhanta)

proves them to have been all monks, tonsured, subject to the usual

vows, (nature teaching to all mankind that wealth, women and power,

are the grand tempters,) resident in monasteries (Vihdr) or in deserts,

and essentially peers, though of course acknowledging the claims of

superior wisdom and piety. The true church, the congregation of the

faithful, is constantly said to consist of such only; and I am greatly

mistaken indeed if the church in this sense be synonymous with the

clergy ; or, if the primitive church of Buppua recognised an absolutely

distinct body such as we (i. e. Catholics, Lutherans, and Kirkmen)

ordinarily mean when we speak of the latter. The first mention of an

exclusive, professional active, minister of religion, or priest, in the

Bauddha books, is in those of a comparatively recent date, and not of

scriptural authority. Therein the Vajra Achdrya (for so he is called)

first appears arrayed with the ordinary attributes of a priest. But his

character is anomalous, as is that of every thing about him; and the

learned Bauddhas of Nepal at the present day universally admit the

falling off from the true faith. We have in these books, Bhikshus

Sravakas, Chailaks, and Sdkya-Vansikas*, bound by their primitive

rules for ten days (in memory of the olden time) and then released from

them; tonsured, yet married ; ostensibly monks, but really citizens of

the world.

From any of the above, the Vajra Acharya, is drawn indiscriminately ;

he keeps the keys of the no longer open treasury ; and he is surrounded

* An inscription at Carli identifies the splendid Salivdhana with the head of

the Saka tribe, which is that of Saxya Sinna. The Sékya-Vansikas, or people

of the race of Sakga, appeared in Nepdl as refugees from Brahman bigotry, some

time after Buddhism had been planted in these hills. Sdékya is universally allowed

to have been the son of king SuppHopana, sovereign of Magadha or Bihar. He

is said to have been born in the ‘‘ Asthan of Kapila Muni,’’ at Ganga Sagar,

according to some; in Oude, as others say. His birth place was not necessarily

within his father’s kingdom. He may have been born when his father was on

a pilgrimage to the shrine of the Saint Karina. Sa’xya died, according to my

authorities, in Assam, and left one son named RanuLA BHapRaA. The Sakas were

Kshetriyds of the solar line, according to Bauddha authorities: nor is it any

proof of the contrary that they appear not in the Bréhmanical genealogies. See

note in the sequel.

1835.] Authorities on Buddhism. 35

with untonsured followers, who now present themselves for the first time.

I pretend not to trace with historical nicety all the changes which

marked the progress of Buddhism as a public institute ani creed of

millions up to the period of the dispersion : but I am well aware, that the

primitive doctrines were not, because they could not be, rigidly adhered

to, when what I hold to have been at first the closet speculation of

some philosophers, had become the dominant creed of large kingdoms.

That the latter character was, however, assumed by Buddhism in the

plains of India, long before the dispersion, seems certain ; and, as many

persons may urge that the thing in question is the dominant public

institute, not the closet speculation, and that whatever discipline pre-

vailed before the dispersion must be held for primitive and orthodox, I

can only observe that the ancient books of the Sangatas, whilst they

glance-at such changes as I have adverted to, do so in the language of

censure; and that upon the whole, I still strongly incline to the opinion

that genuine or primitive Buddhism (so I cautiously phrased it, origi-

nally) rejected the distinction of Clerus et Laicus; that the use of the

word priest by Upnam, is generally inaccurate ; and that the Sangha

of the Buddhist triad ought to have been invariably rendered by

Remusat into ‘ congregation of the faithful’ or ‘ church,’ and never into

‘clergy’ or ‘priesthood.’ Remusat indeed seems to consider (Observa-

tions, 28-9, and 32), these phrases as synonymous ; and yet the question

which their discrimination involves is one which, in respect to our own

religion, has been fiercely agitated for hundreds of years ; and still, by

the very shades of that discrimination, chiefly marks the subsisting

distinction between the various Churches of Christ !

Following the authority he has relied on, Mr. Upuam was at liberty,

therefore, to adopt a sense which would consist with my interpretation

of phrases such as he alluded to, and which, of course, I found copiously

scattered over the works I consulted. I always rendered them advisedly

into English, so as to exclude the idea of a priesthood, because I had

previously satisfied myself, by separate inquiry and reflection, that that

cardinal tenet was repugnant to the genius of the creed, and repudiated

by its primitive teachers. This important point may have been wrongly

determined by me ; but assuredly the determination of it upon such

grounds as Mr. Upuawm’s is perfectly futile. Such words as Arhanta

and Bandya, (which, by the way, are the correct forms of the Burmese

Rahatun and the Chinese Bonze,) no more necessarily mean, priest, clergy,

than do the Latin, fideles and milites, as applied to Christianity ; and as

for the word Sangha, it is indisputable that it does not mean literally

priest*, and that it does mean literally congregation.

* Observations, p. 29.

F 2

36 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Jan.

If, as Remusar and UrHam appear to insist is the case, every monas-

tic follower of Buppwa be a priest, then Bandya or Bonze* must be

rendered into English by the word ‘ clergyman.’ But there will still

remain as much difference between Bandya and Sangha as, in Christian

estimation, between an ordinary parson of the present day, and one of

the inspired primitive professors. Of old, the spirit descended upon all

alike ; and Sangha was this hallowed and gifted congregation. But

the glory has passed away, and the term been long sanctified and set

apart. So has, in part, and for similar reasons, the word Arhata. But

Bandya, as a generic title, and Bhikshu, Srdvaka, and Chailaka, as spe-

eific ones, are still every-day names of every-day people, priests, if it

must be so, but, as I conceive, ascetics or monks merely. In the thick

night of ignorance and superstition which still envelopes Tibet, the

people fancy they yet behold Arhatas in the persons of their divine

Ldémas. No such imagination however possesses the heads of the fol-

lowers of Buddha in Nepal, Ceylon, or extra Gangetic India; though

in the last mentioned country the mame Arhata is popularly applied to

the modern order of the clergy, an order growing there, as in Nepdi, (if

my opinions be sound) out of that deviation from the primitive genius

and type of the system which resulted necessarily from its popular dif-

fusion as the rule of life and practice of whole nations.

In conclusion I would observe, that, in my apprehension, Remusat’s

interpretation of the various senses of the Triadic doctrine is neither

* The possible meaning of this word has employed in vain the sagacity of

sundry critics. In its proper form of Bandya, it is pure Sanserit, signifying «

person entitled to reverence, and is derived from Bandana.

Equally curious and instructive is it to find in the Sanserit records of Buddhism

the solution of so many enigmas collected by travellers from all parts of Asia;

E. G. E: purnsTone’s mound is a genuine Chaitya, and its proper name is

Manikdlaya, or the place of the precious relic, The mound is a tomb temple.

The ‘ tumuli eorum Christi altaria’ of the poet, is more true of Buddhism than

even of the most perverted model of Christianity ; the cause being probably the

same, originally, in reference to both creeds, viz. persecution and martyrdom,

with consequent divine honours to the sufferers. The Bauddhas, however, have

in this matter gone a step further in the descending scale of representative

adoration than the Catholics ; for they worship the mere image of that structure

which is devoted to the inshrining of the relics of their saints ; they worship the

architectural model or form of the Chaitya.

The Chaitya of SamMBuu NaTH in Nepdl is affirmed to cover Jyoti rupya

SwaYAMBAU, or the self-existent, in the form of flame: nor was there ever any

thing exclusive of theism in the connexion of tomb and temple: for Chaityas

were always dedicated to the celestial Buddhas, not only in Nepdl, but in the

plains of India, as the Chaityas of Sanchi, of Gy4, and of Bag, demonstrate. The

Dhyani Buddhas appear in the oldest monuments of the continent and islands,

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 37

very complete, nor very accurate. In a religious point of view, by the

first member is understood the founder of the creed, and all who, follow-

ing his steps, have reached the full rank of a Maha Yunika Buddha; by

the second, the law or scriptures of the sect; and by the third, the

congregation of the faithful, or primitive church, or body of original

disciples, or even, any and every assemblage of true, i. e. of conventual

ascetical observers of the law, past or present.

In a philosophical light, the precedence of Buddha or of Dharma

indicates the theistic or atheistic school. With the former, buddha is

intellectual essence*, the efficient cause of all, and uncerived. Dharma

is material essencet, the plastic cause, and underived, a co-equal by unity

with Buddha ; or else the plastic cause, as before, but dependent and

derived from Buddha. Sangha is derived from, and compounded of,

Buddha and Dharma, is their collective energy in the state of action ;

the immediate operative cause of creation, its type or its agent}. With

the latter or atheistic school, Dharma is Diva natura, matter as the sole

entity, invested with intrinsic activity and intelligence, the efficient and

material cause of all.

Buddha is derivative from Dharma, is the active and intelligent force

of nature, first put off from it and then operating upon it. Sangha is

the result of that operation ; is embryotic creation, the type and sum of

all specific forms, which are spontaneously evolved from the union of

Buddha with Dharma§. The above are the principal distinctions, others

there are which I cannot venture here to dwell on.

With regard to Remusat’s remark, ‘‘ ou voit que les trois noms sont

placés sur le méme niveau, comme les trois representations des méme

étres dans les planches de M. Hopeson avec cette difference que sur

celles-ci, Sanga est a droite, et Dharma a gauche,’ I may just add, that

the placing of Sangha to the right is a merely ritual technicality,

conformable to the pujd of the Dakshinichars||, and that all the philo-

sophers and religionists are agreed in postponing Sangha to Dharma.

* Bodhanatmaka iti Buddha, ‘ the intellectual essence is BuppDHA.’

+ Dhéranatmaka iti Dharma, ‘ the holding, sustaining or containing substance

is Dharma.’ Agam, Prakriteswari iti Prajna, ‘ the material goddess is Prdjna,”

one of the names of DuArma. The word Prajna is compounded of the intensive

prefix pra, and jnyana wisdom, or jna to know. It imports the supreme wisdony

of nature. Dharma is the universal substratum, is that which supports all forny

and quality in the versatile world.

t Samudayatmika iti Sangha, ‘the multitudinous essence is Sangha :’ multi-

tude is the diagnosis of the versatile universe, as unity is of that of abstraction.

§ Prajnaupaytmakany Jaggata.

|| The theistic sects so call themselves, styling their opposites, the Swabhavikas

and Prajnikas, Vimachars. Tne Pauranikas, too, often designate the Tantrikas

by the latter name, which is equivalent to left-handed.

38 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan.

I possess very many drawings exhibiting the arrangement mentioned

by Remusar ; but all subservient to mere ritual purposes, and conse-

quently worthy of no serious attention. The Matantara, or variorum

text of the pujarts of the present day, displays an infinite variety of

formulz*, illustrated by corresponding sculptural and pictorial devices,

embodied in those works, and transferred from them to the walls and

interior of temples existing all over the valley of Nepal.

[To be continued.]

II1.—Sivatherium Giganteum, a new Fossil Ruminant Genus, from the

Valley of the Markanda, in the Sivdlik branch of the Sub-Himdlayan

Mountains. By Hucu Fanconsr, M. D. Superintendent Botanical

Garden, Sehdranpur, and Captain P. T. Cautiny, Superintendent

Doab Canal.

[The fossil here described is of such importance that we make no apology for

reprinting the following article entire from the outcoming volume of the Physical

Researches of the Society, having prepared the engraving of the head, so as to serve

both editions : it should be remarked, in regard to the engraving, that the figure of

the palate and teeth is on rather a larger scale than the rest.—ED. |

The fossil which we are about to describe forms a new accession to

extinct Zoology. This circumstance alone would give much interest to

it. But in addition, the large size, surpassing the rhinocreos ; the family

of Mammalia to which it belongs; and the forms of structure which it

exhibits; render the Sivatherium one of the most remarkable of the past

tenants of the globe, that have hitherto been detected in the more recent

strata.

Of the numerous fossil mammiferous genera discovered and established

by Cuvimr, all were confined to the Pachydermata. The species belonging

to other families have all their living representatives on the earth. Among

the Ruminantia, no remarkable deviation from existing types has hitherto

been discovered, the fossil being closely allied to living species. The

isolated position, however, of the Giraffe and the Camelide, made it

probable, that certain genera had become extinct, which formed the

connecting links between those and the other genera of the family, and

further between the Ruminantia and the Pachydermata. Inthe Sivathe-

riumt we have a ruminant of this description connecting the family with

* See the classified enumeration of tke principal objects of Buddha worship

appended to this paper. Appendix B.

+ We have named the fossil, Sivatherium, from Siva, the Hindt god, and @npiov

bellua. The Sivdlik or Sub-Himalayan range of hills, is considered in the Hindu

mythology, as the Litiah or edge of the roof of Stva’s dwelling in the Himdlaya,

and hence they are called the Siva-ala or Sib-ala, which by an easy transition of

sound became the Sewdlik of the English. The fossil has been discovered in a tract

which may be included in the Sewdlik range, and we have given the name of Siva-

therium to it, to commemorate this remarkable formation so rich in new animals.

Another derivation of the name of the hills, as explained by the Mahant or High

Priest at Dehra, is as follows:

Sewalik a corruption of Siva-wdla, aname given to the tract of mountains between

the Jumna and Ganges, from having been the residence of Iswara SIva and his son

Gane's, who under the form of an Elephant had charge of the Westerly portion

from the village of Ditdhli to the Jumna, which portion is also called Gangaja, gaja

being in Hindi an Elephant. That portion Eastward from Dédhli, or between that

village and Haridwar, is called Deodhar, from its being the especial residence of Deota

or Iswara SIVA: the whole tract however between the Jumna and Ganges is called

Siva-ala, or the habitation of Siva: unde der. Sewdlik.

1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 39

the Pachydermata, and at the same time so marked by individual pecu-

liarities as to be without an analogue in its order. :

The fossil remain of the Sivatherium, from which our description is

taken, is a remarkably perfect head. When discovered, it was fortunately

so completely enveloped by a mass of stone, that although it had long been

exposed to be acted upon as a boulder in a water-course, all the more

important parts of structure had been preserved. The block might have

been passed over, but for an edging of the teeth in relief from it, which

gave promise of something additional concealed. After much labour, the

hard crystalline covering of stone was so successfully removed, that the

huge head now stands out with a couple of horns between the orbits, broken

only near their tips, and the nasal bones projected in a free arch, high

above the chaffron. All the molars on both sides of the jaw are present

and singularly perfect. The only mutilation is at the vertex of the

cranium, where the plane of the occipital meets that of the brow: and

at the muzzle, which is truncated a little way in front of the first molar.

The only parts which are still concealed, are a portion of the occipital,

the zygomatic fosse on both sides, and the base of the cranium over the

sphcenoid bone.

The form of the head is so singular and grotesque, that the first glance

at it strikes one with surprise. The prominent features are—Ist, the great

size, approaching that of the elephant : 2d, the immense developement and

width of the cranium behind the orbits: 3d, the two divergent osseous

cores for horns starting out from the brow between the orbits: 4th, the

form and direction of the nasal bones, rising with great prominence out of

the chaffron, and overhanging the external nostrils in a pointed arch:

5th, the great massiveness, width and shortness of the face forward from

the orbits: 6th, the great angle at which the grinding plane of the

molars deviates upwards from that of the base of the skull.

Viewed in lateral profile, the form and direction of the horns, and the

rise and sweep in the bones of the nose, give a character to the head

widely differing from that of any other animal. The nose looks something

like that of the rhinoceros ; but the resemblance is deceptive, and only

owing to the muzzle being truncated. Seen from in front, the head is some-

what wedge-shaped, the greatest width being at the vertex and thence

gradually compressed towards the muzzle ; with contraction only at two

points behind the orbits and under the molars. The zygomatic arches are

almost concealed, and nowise prominent: the brow is broad, and flat, and

swelling laterally into two convexities; the orbits are wide apart, and

have the appearance of being thrown far forward, from the great produc-

tion of the frontal upwards. There are no crest or ridges: the surface of

the cranium is smooth, the lines are in curves, with no angularity.

From the vertex to the root of the nose, the plane of the brow is ina

straight line, with a slight rise between the horns. The accompanying

drawings will at once give a better idea of the form than any description.

Now in detail of individual parts; and to commence with the most

important and characteristic, the teeth:

There are six molars on either side of the upper jaw. The third of the

series, or last milk molar, has given place to the corresponding permanent

tooth, the detrition of which and of the last molar is well advanced, and

indicates the animal to have been more than adult.

The teeth are in every respect those of a ruminant, with some slight

individual peculiarities.

The three posterior or double molars are composed of two portions or

semi-cylinders, each of which incloses, when partially worn down, a double

crescent of enamel, the convexity of which is turned inwards. The last

molar, as is normal in ruminants, has no additional complication, like that

40 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan.

in the corresponding tooth of the lower jaw. The plane of grinding slopes

from the outer margin inwards, The general form is exactly that of an

ox or camel, on a large scale. The ridges of enamel are unequally in

relief, and the hollows between them unequally scooped. Each semi-

cylinder has its outer surface, in horizontal section, formed of three salient

knuckles, with two intermediate sinuses; and its inner surface, of a

simple arch or curve. But there are certain peculiarities by which the

teeth differ from those of other ruminants.

In correspondence with the shortness of jaw, the width of the teeth is

much greater in proportion to the length than is usual in the family: the

width of the third and fourth molars being to the length as 2.24 and 2.2

to 1.55 and 1.68 inches, respectively : and the average width of the whole

series being to the length as 2.13 to 1.76 inches. Their form is less

prismatic: the base of the shaft swelling out into a bulge or collar, from

which the inner surface slopes outward as it rises: so that the coronal

becomes somewhat contracted ; in the third molar, the width at the coronal

is 1.93, at the bulge of the shaft 2.24. The ridges and hollows on the

outer surface descend less upon the shaft, and disappear upon the bulge.

There are no accessary pillars on the furrow of junction at the inner side.

The crescentic plates of enamel have a character which distinguishes them

from all known ruminants: the inner crescent, instead of sweeping in a

nearly simple curve, runs zig-zag-wise in large sinuous flexures, somewhat

resembling the form in the Elasmotherium.

The three double molars differ from each other only in their relative

states of wearing. The antepenultimate, being most worn, has the

crescentic plates less curved, more approximate and less distinct: the

penultimate and last molars are less worn, and have the markings more

distinct.

The three anterior or simple molars have the usual form, which holds

in Ruminantia, a single semi-cylinder, with but one pair of crescents. The

first one is much worn and partly mutilated: the second is more entire,

having been a shorter time in use, and finely exhibits the flexuous curves

in the sweep of the enamel of the inner crescent : the last one has the sim-

ple form of the permanent tooth, which replaces the last milk molar: it

also shews the wavy form of the enamel.

Regarding the position of the teeth in the jaw ; the last four molars,

viz. the three permanent and the last of replacement, run in a straight

line, and on the opposite sides are parallel and equi-distant : the two

anterior ones are suddenly directed inwards, so as to be a good deal

approximated. If the two first molars were not thus inflected, the opposite

lines of teeth would form exactly two sides ofa square: the length of the

line of teeth, and the intervals between the outer surfaces of the four last

molars, being almost equal, viz. 9.8 and 9.9 inches respectively.

The plane of detrition of the whole series of molars from rear to front

is not horizontal, but in a slight curve, and directed upwards at a consider.

able angle with the base of the skull: so that when the head is placed, so

as to rest upon the occipital condyles and the last molars, a plane through

these points is cut by a chord along the curve of detrition of the whole

series of molars at an angle of about 45°. Thisis one of the marked

characters about the head:

Dimensions of the Teeth. Length. Breadth.

Inches. Inches.

I PEI RTO TATE Ov oq pomonnodoodoodmoooNod or odoot oo. — 2.35

Penultimate GADMismee at Wen cteletotentele ste vievcllee © ele stele 425 82,20 2.38

-Antepenultimate do. ....... Voleiecott’s) slevereby chee ie: ciabatta stole svete 1.68 2.20

Last simple molars 510) sccheis's eaverereie thas wx olen 4s Yovaereis teiauele ea» 2.24

Second do. dos. seis. bie cine Sonosdcagoeone Ie Soeanaad 1.70 1.95

BAYSC TGs COG « wieiclesis orc in eaten ae cite victctetnieieManiafevnlclalaieici ns lane 1.90

1836.]} a new Fossil Genus of the Sivalik range. 41

Outer Inner

Surfaces. Surfaces.

Interval between the surfaces of last molar,..........+.«. 9.9 5.5

Do. do. do. UNIV LOGLAT tere ote crete cre She 5.5

Do. do. do. SECONMAUGO LM satin sie steers 8.4 4.5

Do. do. do. FSC COs acs ails Sats, ae 6.4 3.2

Space occupied by the line of molars 9.8 inches.

Bones of the Head and Face.—From the age of the animal to which the

head had belonged, the bones had become anchylosed at their commis-

sures, so that every trace of suture has disappeared, and their limits and

connections are not distinguishable.

The frontal is broad and flat, and slightly concave at its upper half.

It expands laterally into two considerable swellings at the vertex, and

sweeps down to join the temporals in an ample curve ; and with no angu-

larity. It becomes narrower forwards, to behind the orbits; and then

expands again in sending off an apophysis to join with the malar bone,

and complete the posterior circuit of the orbit. The width of the bone

where narrowest, behind the orbit, is very great, being 16.2 inches. Partly

between and partly to the rear of the orbits, there arise by a broad base,

passing insensibly into the frontal, two short thick conical processes. They

taper rapidly to a point, a little way below which they are mutilated in

the fossil. They start so erect from the brow, that their axis is perpen-

dicular to their basement; and they diverge at a considerable angle, From

their base upwards they are free from any rugosities, their surface being

smooth and even. They are evidently the osseous cores of two intra-

orbital horns. From their position and size they form one of the most

remarkable features in the head. The connections of the frontal are no-

where distinguishable, no mark of a suture remaining. At the upper end

of the bone the skull is fractured, and the structure of the bone is exposed.

The internal and outer plates are seen tobe widely separated, and the

interval to be occupied by large shells, formed by an expansion of the diploe

into plates, as in the elephant. The interval exceeds 23 inches in the

occipital. On the left side of the frontal, the swelling at the vertex, has its

upper lamina of bone removed, and the cast of the cells exhibits a surface

of almond-shaped or oblong eminences, with smooth hollows between.

The temporal is greatly concealed by a quantity of the stony matrix,

which has not been removed fromthe temporal fossa. No trace of the

squamous suture remains to mark its limits and connection with the fron-

tal. The inferior processes of the bone about the auditory foramen have

been destroyed, or are concealed by stone. The zygomatic process is long,

and runs forward to join the corresponding apophysis of the jugal bone,

with little prominence or convexity. A line produced along it would pass

in front, through the tuberosities of the maxillaries, and to the rear along

the upper margin of the occipital condyles. The process is stout and

thick. The temporal fossa is very long, and rather shallow. It doesnot

rise up high on the side of the cranium : it is overarched by the cylinder-

like sides of the frontal bone. The position and form of the articulating

surface with the lower jaw are concealed by stone which has not been

removed,

-There is nothing in the fossil to enable us to determine the form and

limits of the parietal bones ; the cranium being chiefly mutilated in

the region which they occupy. But they appear to have had the same

form and character as in the ox: to have been intimately united with

the occipitals, and to have joined with the frontal at the upper angle

of the skull.

The form and characters of the occipital are very marked. It occu.

pies a large space, having width proportioned to that of the frontal, and

considerable height. It is expanded laterally into two ale, which com=

42. Description of the Siwatherium, (Jan.

mence at the upper margin of the foramen magnum, and proceed upwards

and outwards. These ale are smooth, and are hollowed out downwards and

outwards from near the condyles towards the mastoid region of the tem-

oral. Their inner or axine margins proceed in a ridge arising from the

border of the occipital foramen, diverging from each other nearly at right

angles, and enclose a large triangular fossa into which they descend

abruptly. This fossa is chiefly occupied by stone inthe fossil, but it does

not appear shallow, and seems a modification of the same structure as in

the elephant. There is no appearance of an occipital crest or protube-

rance. The bone is mutilated at the sides towards the junction with the

temporals. Both here and at its upper fractured margin its structure is

seen to be formed of large cells with the diploe expanded into plates, and

the outer and inner lamine wide apart. This character is very marked

at its upper margin, where its cells appear to join on with those of the

frontal. The condyles are very large, and fortunately very perfect in the

fossil; the longest diameter of each is 4.4 inches, and the distance measured

across the foramen magnum, from their outer angles, is 7.4 inches: dimen-

sions exceeding those of the elephant. Their form is exactly as in the

Ruminantia, viz. their outer surface composed of two convexities meeting

at a rounded angle: one in the line of the long axis, stretching obliquely

backwards from the anterior border of the foramen magnum ; on the other

forwards and upwards from the posterior margin, their line of commissure

being in the direction of the transverse diameter of the foramen. ‘The lat-

ter is also of large size, its antero-posterior diameter being 2.3 inches, and

the transverse diameter 2.6 inches. The large dimensions of the foramen

and condyles must entail a corresponding developement in the vertebre,

and modify the form of the neck and anterior extremities.

The sphenoidal bone, and all the parts along the base of the skull from

the occipital foramen to the palate, are either removed, or so concealed by

stone, as to give no characters for description.

The part of the brow from which the nasal bones commence is not dis-

tinguishable. The suture connecting them with the frontal is completely

obliterated: and it is not seen whether they run up into a sinus in that

bone, or how they join on with it, Between the horns there is a rise in

the brow, which sinks again a little forward. A short way in advance of

a line connecting the anterior angles of the orbits, there is another rise in

the brow. From this point, which may be considered their base, the nasal

bones commence ascending from the plane of the brow, at a considerable

angle. They are broad and well arched at their base, and proceed for-

ward with a convex outline, getting rapidly narrower, to terminate in a

point curved downwards, which overhangs the external nostrils. For a

considerable part of their length they are joined to the maxillaries :

but. forwards from the point where they commence narrowing, their lower

edge is free and separated from the maxillaries by a wide sinus: so that

viewed in lateral profile their form very much resembles the upper

mandible of a hawk, detached from the lower. Unluckily in the fossil,

the anterior margins of the maxillaries are mutilated, so that the exact

length of the nasal bone that was free from connection with them cannot

be determined. As the fossil stands, about four inches of the lower edge

of the nasals, measured along the curve, are free. The same mutilation

prevents its being seen how near the incisives approached the nasals,

with which they do not appear to have been joined. This point is one of

great importance, from the structure it implies in the soft parts about the

nose. The height and form of the nasal bones, are the most remarkable

feature in the head: viewed from above they are seen to taper rapidly

from a broad base toa sharp point ; and the vertical height of their most

eonvex part above the brow at their base, is 32 inches.

1836. } a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 43

The form of the maxillaries is strongly marked in two respects : 1st,

their shortness compared with their great width and depth: 2nd, in the

upward direction of the line of alveoli from the last molar forwards,

giving the appearance (with the licence of language intended to convey

an idea of resemblance without implying more) as if the face had been

pushed upwards to correspond with the rise in the nasals ; or fixed on at

an angle with the base of the cranium. ‘The tendency to shortness of the

jaw was observed in the dimensions of the teeth, the molars being compres-

sed, and their width exceeding their length to an extent not usual in the

Ruminantia. The width apart, between the maxillaries, was noticed be-

fore; the interval, between the outer surfaces of the alveoli, equalling the

space in length occupied by the line of molars. The cheek tuberosities

are very large and prominent, their diameter at the base being 2 inches,

and the width of the jaw over them being 12.2 inches, whereas at the

alveoli it is but 9.8 inches. They are situated over the third and fourth

molars; and proceeding up from them towards the malar, there is an in-

distinct ridge on the bone. The infra-orbitary foramen is of large size,

its vertical diameter being 1.2 inch; it is placed over the first molar, as in

the ox and deer tribe. The muzzle portion of the bone is broken off at

about 2.8 inches from the Ist molar, from the alveolar margin of which,

to the surface of the diastema, there is an abrupt sink of 1.7 inch. The

muzzle is here contracted to 5.8 inches, and forwards at the truncated

part te about 4.1. The palatine arch is convex from rear to front, and

concave across. No trace of the palatine foramina remains, nor of the

suture with the proper palatine bones. The sphceno-palatine apophyses

and all back to the foramen magnum* are either removed or concealed

in stone. In front, the mutilation of the bone, at the muzzle, does not

allow it to be seen, how the incisive bones were connected with the maxil-

laries : but it appears that they did not reach so high on the maxillaries

as the union of the latter with the nasals. The same cause has rendered

obscure the connexions of the maxillaries with the nasals, and the depth

and size of the nasal echancrure or sinus.

The jugal bone is deep, massive and rather prominent. Its lower

border falls off abruptly in a hollow descending on the maxillaries : the

upper enters largely into the formation of the orbit. The posterior orbital

process unites with a corresponding apophysis of the frontal, to complete

the circuit of the orbit behind. The zygomatic apophysis is stout and

thick, and rather flat. No part of the arch, either in the temporal or

jugal portions, is prominent: the interval between the most salient points

being greatly less than the hind part of the cranium, and slightly less than

the width between the bodies of the jugals.

The extent and form of the lachrymals, cannot be made out, as there

is no trace of asuture remaining. Upon the fossil, the surface of the la-

chrymary region passes smoothly into that of the adjoining bones. There

is no perforation of the lower and anterior margin of the orbit by lachry-

mary foramina, nor any hollow below it indicating an infra-orbital or

lachrymary sinus. It may be also added, what was omitted before, that

there is no trace of a superciliary foramen upon the frontal.

The orbits are placed far forwards, in consequence of the great pro-

duction of the cranium upwards, and the shortness of the bones of the face.

Their position is also rather low, their centre being about 3.6 inches

below the plane of the brow. From a little injury done in chiseling off

the stone, the form or circle of the different orbits does not exactly cor-

respond. In the one of the left side, which is the more perfect, the long

* With the exception of a portion of the basilary region, which resembles that of

the Ruminants.

a 2

44 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan.

axis makes a small angle with that of the plane of the brow: the antero-

posterior diameter is 3.3 inches, and the vertical 2.7 inches. There is no

prominence or inequality in the rim of the orbits, as in the Ruminantia.

The plane of therim is very oblique: the interval between the upper or

frontal margins of the two orbits being 12.2 inches, and that of the lower

or molar margin 16.2 inches.

* Dimensions of the Skull of the Sivatherium Giganteum.

Eng. Inches, Métres.

From the anterior margin of the foramen magnum to the alveolus of

TStHimolaicy Leste sae cle eeteratMeraittes elec Diaamteitls siisetcn is cles ae 18.85 .478

From do. to the truncated extremity oltihemauzzles si. . eoak. eels 20.6 -5268

From do. to the posterior margin of the last molar, ............. 10.3 +262

From the tip of the nasals to the upper fractured margin of the cra-

Myltins Ghisaqn bo dooORooNS Bis ates Mere tose in valts ovelerstalevescyepetarsiigeia aie Vata begs sierare 18.0 -4568

From do. do. to do. ALONE Lhe CULVE Ny. cctetislee teic etree oe 19.0 +4822

From do. do. along the curve, to where the nasal arch begins to

MISE ENO MU MEIE DROW, cela “sabels ie arcystale el erat Me eteisu ate ovate iciche rate ets ereetore BS 7.8 .198

From the latter point to the fractured margin of the cranium, .... 11,2 -284

From the tip of the nasals to a chord across the tips of the horns,.. 8.5 216

From the anterior angle, right orbit, to the first molar,. Rs eleveleterecomeinte 9.9 .251

From the posterior do. do. to the fr actur ed margin of the cranium, 12.1 -3075

Width of cranium at the vertex (mutilation at left side restored),

AD OUTIL Taio -sloreds lorcle) atetelatalstacatastolavel thle oteicherehels ota cere Teatelatetastcte ste 22.0 -559

Do. between the orbits, upper borders,. vie efuwie Chale wjeieljele aie \scis)s) se aN -3095

PD O's. cspeyeinte's wate ercxe dos, lower sborGersrc. carmen pres tories BPs averse 16.2 .4108

Do. behind ‘the orbits at the contraction of the frontal, . a ynuo fejleve “ore, sail OES -3705

Do. between the middle of the zygomatic arches, ...........-2ee0. 16.4 -4168

Do. between the vodies of the malar bones,.............0cceee oe 16.62 .422

Do. base of the skull behind the mastoid processes (mutilated on

OLE ASHCS Sy teshsle jeter etal otel's)alet=)ie she koe! ietaloleletetint olla l~ ces et seeetoueote uae oe 19.5 -496

Do. between the cheek calern aie of thepmaxillaries,f... .c:ec:-c miele 2S -3095

Do. of muzzle portion of the maxillaries in front of the first molar, 5.8 -149

Wo: of do. where truncated (partly restored); .... <5 +0 cas. 6 cate ; 4.1 .104

Do. between the outer surfaces of the horns at their base, bie eeretate 12.5 .312

Dots: cdo. 24. dotiinacturedtipstof@ibto, (46%. ssc eemielae oe 2 ) W365 01847

Perpendicular from a chord across tips of do. to the brow, ........ 4.2 165

Depth from the convexity of the occipital condyles to middle of fron-

TAM eT Med ve AMOS 5 checks «sel sisiel sales ioloue olesabeleteiadere cots oenetaieie ue mira Ree tote 11.9 -302

Do. from the body of the sphcenoidal to do. between the horns,.. 9.94 .252

Do. from middle of the palate between the 3rd and 4th molars do. at

POOLE) NaASals') 1. seis. Kio TotebeteNclaepale sy eteteuetome tatieteas hele stencieree 7.52 .192

Do. from posterior surface last molar to extremity of the nasals, .. 13.0 +331

Do. from grinding surface penultimate molar to root of the nasals, 10.3 - 262

Do, from the convexity near the tip of the nasals to the palatial sur-

face. in front of the fest MOlatewes «cis ee eee eps co ccis sles ors cle sible ete 5.53 14

Depth from middle of the ale of the occipital to the swell at vertex

OFALOME ALG NY Holey ni eiewlesclerciolele iwi olateelstee ete l ale iekcrete hilerreiehvota ewer ieee 8.98 .228

Do. from inferior margin of the orbit to grinding surface 5th molar, 7.3 -186

Do. from the grinding surface lst molar to edge of the palate in

RO NAOT Mie PASTS OG SOG Gold 36 SS obo case ESBS BOSU As Hass 2.6 -066

Space from the anterior angle of orbit to tip of the nasals, Sderuiden 10.2 2595

Antero-posterior diameter Leth OTUs ver oer ce ore tet ene sc nietee eine 3.3 .084

Vertical do. COTM GOERS ar ae 27 - 0685

Antero-posterior diameter of the foramen magnum, .............. 2.3 -058

Transverse do. Osi ioiese se isieicieiest elas hate nel oe stol iby 2.6 -066

Monrydiameter Of cachiCOndyle) ss lestetarcle te lsoea.oleis eis ehen Irn iets diets alates 4.4 «112

SHOES ORFEPANSVETSE CO. OF COscscricmnics os cece e cine comiote ceca. 2.4 0603

Interval between the external angles of do. measured across the

POMANVEM, se nnets (vers hehe c crete Mere dia telerelelotclolerciarcustels Rime cieteretapocanels!¢ SM fc 188

Among a quantity of bones collected in the neighbourhood of the spot

in which the skull was found, there is a fragment of the lower jaw of a

very large ruminant, which we ‘have no doubt belonged to the Sivatherium:;

* To facilitate comparison with the large animals described in CuyiER’S Osse-

men Fossiles, the dimensions are also given in French measure.

1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 45

and it is even not improbable that it came from the same individual with

the head described. It consists of the hind portion of the right jaw, broken

off at the anterior third of the last molar. The coronoid apophysis, the

condyle, with the corresponding part of the ramus, and a portion of the

angle are also removed. The two posterior thirds only, of the last molar

remain ; the grinding surface partly mutilated, but sufficiently distinct to

show the crescentic plates of enamel, and prove that the tooth belonged to

aruminant. The outline of the jaw in vertical section, is a compressed

ellipse, and the outer surface more convex than the inner. The bone

thins off, on the inner side towards the angle of the jaw, into a large and

well marked muscular hollow: and running up from the latter, upon the

ramus towards the foramen of the artery, there is a well defined furrow, as

in the Ruminantia. The surface of the tooth is covered with very small

rugosities, and striz, as in the upper molars ofthe head. It had been

composed of three semi-cylinders, as is normal in the family, and the

advanced state of its wearing proves the animal from which it proceeded

to have been more than adult.

The form and relative proportions of the jaw agree very closely with

those of the corresponding parts ofa buffalo. The dimensions compared

with those of the buffalo and camel are thus:

Sivatherium. Buffalo. Camel.

Depth of the jaw from the alveolus last molar,.... 4.95inch. 2.65inch. 2.70inch.

(Greatest thickness Of dO. Fi. .f. 1. ss. es wees cs 2.3 1.05 1.4

Widthotmiddle: of last molar, . 6... ssc es eels 1:35 0.64 0.76

Length of posterior 2d of do. ........e. ce ecee ce 2alg 0.95 1.15

No known ruminant, fossil or existing, has a jaw of such large size ;

the average dimensions above given being more than double those of a

Buffalo, which measured in length of head 19.2 inches (.489 métres) ; and

exceeding those of the corresponding parts of the rhinoceros. We have

therefore no hesitation in referring the fragment to the Sivatherium

Giganteum.

The above comprises all that we know regarding the osteology of the

head from an actual examination of the parts. We have not been so for-

tunate hitherto, as to meet with any other remain, comprising the anterior

part of the muzzle either of the upper or lower jaw*. We shall now pro-

ceed to deduce the form of the deficient parts, and the structure of the

head generally, to the extent that may be legitimately inferred, from the

data of which we are in possession.

Notwithstanding the singularly perfect condition of the head, for an

organic remain of such enormous size, we cannot but regret the mutilation

at the muzzle and vertex, as it throws a doubt uponsome very interesting

points of structure in the Sivatherium: lst, the presence or absence of

- incisive and canine teeth in the upper jaw, and their number and character

if present ; 2nd, the number and extent of the bones which enter into the

basis of the external nostrils ; and 3rd, the presence or absence of two

horns on the vertex, besides the two intra-orbital ones.

* In a note received from Captain CAuTLEY while this paper is in the press, that

gentleman mentions the discovery of a portion of the skeleton of a Sivatherium in

another part of the hills: See Journal As. Soc. Vol. IV. ‘‘ During my recent trip

to the Siwdliks near the Pinjér valley, the field of Messrs. BAKER and DuRAND’S

labours, I regretted much my inability to obtain the dimensions of one of the most

superb fossils I suppose that ever wasfound. It was unfortunately discovered and

excavated by a party of work people employed by agentleman with whom 1 was

unacquainted; and although I saw the fossil when in the rock, I was prevented from

getting the measurements afterwards. This specimen appeared to consist of the

femur and tibia, with the tarsal, metatarsal, and phalanges of our Sivatherium.’’ It

is much to be regretted that such an opportunity should have been lost of adding to

the information already acquired of this new and gigantic Ruminant.—Sec,

46 Description of the Sivatherium, [Jan.

Regarding the first point, we have nothing sufficient to guide us with

certainty to a conclusion, as there are ruminants both with and without

incisives and canines in the upperjaw; andthe Sivatherium differs most

materially in structure from both sections. But there are two conditions

of analogy which render it probable that there were no incisives. 1. In all

ruminants which have the molars in a contiguous and normal series, and

which have horns on the brow, there are no incisive teeth. In the camel

and its congeners, where the anterior molars is unsymmetrical and separat-

ed from the rest of the series by an interval, incisives are present in the

upper jaw. The Sivatherium had horns, and its molars were in a conti-

guous series: it is therefore probable that it had no incisives. Regarding

the canines there is no clue to a conjecture, as there are species in the same

genus of ruminants both with and without them. 2. ‘The extent and

connections of the incisive bones are points of great interest, from the kind

of developement which they imply in the soft parts appended to them.

In most of the horned ruminantia, the incisives run up by a narrow

apophysis along the anterior margins of the maxillary bones, and join on

to a portion of the sides of the nasals ; so that the bony basis of the exter-

nal nostrils is formed of but two pairs of bones, the nasals and the incisives.

In the camel, the apophyses of the incisives terminate upon the maxilla-

ries without reaching the nasals, and there are three pairs of bones to the

external nostrils, the nasals, maxillaries and incisives. But neither in

the horned ruminants, nor in the camel and its congeners, do the bones of

the nose rise out of the plane of the brow with any remarkable degree of

saliency, nor are their lower margins free to any great extent towards the

apex. They are long slips of bone, with nearly parallel edges, running

between the upper borders of the maxillaries, and joined to the ascending

process of the incisive bone, near their extremity, or connected only with

the maxillaries ; but in neither case projecting so as to form any consider-

able re-entering angle, or sinus, with these bones.

In our fossil, the form and connections of the nasal bones, are very

different. Instead of running forward inthe same plane with the brow,

they rise from it at a rounded angle of about 130°, an amount of saliency

without example among ruminants, and exceeding what holds in the rhi-

noceros, tapir, and paleotherium, the only herbivorous animals with this

sort of structure. Instead of being in nearly parallel slips, they are broad

and well arched at their base, and converge rapidly to a sharp tip, which is

hooked downwards, over-arching the external nostrils. Along a consider-

able portion of their length they are unconnected with the adjoining bones,

their lower margins being free and so wide apart from the maxillaries, as

to leave a gap or sinus of considerable length and depth in the bony

parietes of the nostrils. The exact extent to which they are free, is un-

luckily not shown in the fossil, as the anterior margin of the maxillaries is

mutilated on both sides, and the connection with the incisives destroyed.

But as the nasal bones shoot forward beyond the mutilated edge of the

maxillaries, this circumstance, together with their well defined outline and

symmetry on both sides of the fossil, and their rapid convergence to a

point with some convexity, leaves not a doubt that they were free to a

great extent and unconnected with the incisives,

Now to determine the conditions in the fleshy parts, which the structure

in the bony parietes of the nostrils entails.

The analogies are to be sought for in the ruminantia and pachydermata.

The remarkable saliency of the bones of the nose, in the Sivatherium,

has no parallel, in known ruminants, to guide us; and the connection of the

nasals with the incisives, or the reverse, does not imply any important

difference in structure inthe family. Inthe Bovine section, the Ox and

the Buffalo have the nasals and incisives connected: whereas they are

1836. ] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivdlik range. 47

separate in the Y4ék* and Aurochs. In the Camel, they are also separate,

and this animal has greater mobility in the upper lip than is found in other

ruminants.

In the Pachydermata, both these conditions of structure are present

and wanting in different genera ; and their presence or absence is accom-

panied with very important differences in the form of the corresponding

soft parts. It is therefore in this family that we are to look for an expla-

nation of what is found in the Sivatherium.

In the Elephant and Mastodon, the Tapir, Rhinoceros, and Palzothe-

rium, there are three pairs of bones to the external nostrils ; the nasals,

the maxillaries, and incisivest. In all these animals, the upper lip is

highly developed, so as to be prehensile, as in the Rhinoceros, or extended

into a trunk, as in the Elephant and Tapir ; the amount of developement

being accompanied with corresponding difference in the position and form

of the nasal bones. In the Rhinoceros, they are long and thick, extending

to the point of the muzzle, and of great strength to support the horns of

the animal: and the upper lip is broad, thick, and very mobile, but little

elongated. In the Elephant, they are very short, and the incisives enor-

mously developed for the insertion of the tusks, and the trunk is of great

length. In the Tapir, they are short and free, except at the base, and pro-

jected high above the maxillaries ; and the structure is accompanied by a

well developed trunk. Inthe other Pachydermatous genera, there are but

two pairs of bones to the external nostrils, the nasals and the incisives :

the latter running up so as to join on with the former ; and the nasals,

instead of being short and salient, with a sinus laterally between them and

the maxillaries, are long, and run forward, united to the maxillaries, more

or less resembling the nearly parallel slips of the Ruminantia. Of this

genera, the Horse has the upper lip endowed with considerable mobility ;

and the lower end of the nasals is at the same time free to a small extent.

In all the other genera, there is nothing resembling a prehensile organ in

the upper lip.

In the Sivatherium, the same kind of structure holds, as is found in the

Pachydermata with trunks. Of these it most nearly resembles the Tapir.

It differs chiefly in the bones of the nose being larger and more salient

from the Chaffron ; and in there being less width and depth to the naso-

maxillary sinus, than the Tapir exhibits. But as the essential points of

structure are alike in both, there is no doubt that the Sivatherium was

invested with a trunk like the Tapir.

This conclusion is further borne out by other analogies, although more

indirect than that afforded by the nasal bones.

ist.—The large size of the infra-orbitary foramen. In the fossil, the

exact dimensions are indistinct, from the margin having been injured in

the chiseling off of the matrix of stone: the vertical diameter we make

out to be 1.2 inch, which perhaps may be somewhat greater than the truth ;

but any thing approaching this size, would indicate a large nerve for

transmission, and a highly developed condition of the upper lip.

2nd.-—The external plate of the bones of the cranium is widely separated

from the inner, by an expansion of the diploe in vertical plates, forming

large cells, as in the cranium of the Elephant : and the occipital is ex-

panded laterally into ale, with a considerale hollow between, as in the

Elephant. Both these conditions are modifications of structure, adapted

for supplying an extensive surface for muscular attachment, and imply a

thick fleshy neck, with limited range of motion ; and, in more remote

sequence, go to prove the necessity of a trunk.

* CuvieR. Ossemens Fossiles, tome iv. p. 131.

+ Cuvigr. Ossemens Fossiles, tome iii. p. 29.

48 Description of the Sivatherium, (Jan.

3rd.—The very large size of the occipital condyles, which are greater

both in proportion, and in actual measurement, than those of the Elephant,

the interval between their outer angles, taken across the occipital foramen,

being 7.4 inches. The atlas, and the rest of the series of cervical verte.

bre, must have been of proportionate diameter to receive and sustain the

condyles, and surrounded by a large mass of flesh. Both these circum.

stances would tend greatly to limit the range of motion of the head and

neck. But to suit the herbivorous habits of the animal, it must have had

some other mode of reaching its food; or the vertebrae must have been

elongated in a ratio to their diameter, sufficient to admit of free motion to

the neck. In the latter case, the neck must have been of great length, and

to support it andthe load of muscles about it, an immense developement

would be required in the spinal apophysis of the dorsal vertebre, and in

the whole anterior extremity, with an unwieldy form of the body generally.

It is therefore more probable that the vertebra were condensed, as in the

Elephant, and the neck short and thick, admitting of limited motion to the

head: circumstances indirectly corroborating the existence of a trunk,

4th.—The face is short, broad, and massive, to an extent not found in

the Ruminantia, and somewhat resembling that of the Elephant, and suit-

able for the attachment of a trunk.

Next with regard to the horns :—

There can be no doubt, that the two thick, short, and conical processes

between the orbits, were the cores of horns, resembling those of the

Bovine and Antilopine sections of the Ruminantia. They are smooth, and

run evenly into the brow without any burr. The horny sheaths which

they bore, must have been straight, thick, and not much elongated. None

of the bicorned Ruminantia have horns placed in the same way, exactly

between and over the orbits: they have them more or less to the rear.

The only ruminant which has horns similar in position is the four-horned

Antelope* of Hindustan, which differs only in having its anterior pair of

horns a little more in advance of the orbits, than occurs in the Sivatherium.

The correspondence of the two at once suggest the question, “ had the

Sivatherium also two additional horns on the vertex?” The cranium in

the fossil is mutilated across at the vertex, so as to deprive us of direct

evidence on the point, but the following reasons render the supposition at

least probable :

1st.—As above stated, in the bi-cavicorned Ruminantia, the osseous cores

are placed more or less to the rear of the orbits.

2nd.—In such known species as have four horns, the supplementary pair

is between the orbits, and the normal pair well back upon the frontal.

3rd.—In the Bovine section of Ruminantia, the frontal is contracted

behind the orbits, and upwards from the contraction, it is expanded again

into two swellings, at the lateral angles of the vertex, which run into the

bases of the osseous cores of the horns. This conformation does not exist

in such of the Ruminantia as want horns, or as have them approximated on

the brow. It is present in tke Sivatherium.

On either supposition, the intra-orbitary horns are a remarkable feature

in the fossil: and if they were a solitary pair on the head, the structure,

from their position, would perhaps be more singular, than if there had

been two additional horns behind.

Now to estimate the length of the deficient portion of the muzzle, and

the entire length of the head :—

In most of the Ruminantia, where the molars are in a contiguous unin-

terrupted series, the interval from the first molar to the anterior border of

the incisive bones is nearly equal to the space occupied by the molars ; in

some greater, in some a little less, and generally the latter. In other

* The Tetracerus or Antilope Quadricornis and Chekara of authors.

SIVAT HE RIUM

on a scale of one - seventh

"94 ty Capt pat

Elth oct y Jes Ainsep Je m Lvace

Pldtig Te

CGICANTEUM.

of the orupinal.

Wi ihe

WH |

| i

‘

=== Zi

td N

Hn : (==

| SSS

Sie —$

1 >);

yy i ——

| if

| Hi

iH) }

had WH Ht

1836.] a new Fossil Genus of the Sivalik range. 49

Ruminautia, such as the Camelide, where the anterior molars are insym-

metrical with the others, and separated from them by being placed in the

middle of the diasteme, this ratio does not hold ; the space from the first

molar to the margin of the incisives being less than the line of molars. In

the Sivatherium, the molars are in a contiguous series, and if on this ana-

logy we deduce the length of the muzzle, we get nearly 10 inches for the

space from the first molar to the point of the incisives ; and 28.85 inches

for the whole length of the head, from the border of the occipital foramen

to the margin of the incisives ; these dimensions may be a little excessive,

but we believe them not to be far out, as the muzzle would still be short

for the width of the face, in a ruminant.

The orbits next come to be considered. The size and position of the

eye form a distinguishing feature between the Ruminantia and the Pachy-

dermata. In the former, it is large and full, inthe latter, smaller and sunk.

en ; and the expression of the face is more heavy in consequence. Inthe

Sivatherium the orbit is considerably smaller in proportion to the size of

the head than in existing ruminants. It is also placed more forward in the

face, and lower under the level of the brow. The rim is not raised and

prominent, as in the Ruminantia, and the plane of it is oblique: the inter-

val between the orbits at their upper margin being 12.2 inches, and at the

lower, 16.2 inches. The longitudinal diameter exceeds the vertical in the

ratio of 5 to 4 nearly, the long axis being nearly in a line from the naso-

maxillary sinus across the hind limb of the zygomatic circle. From the

above we infer that the eye was smaller and less prominent than in ex-

isting ruminants: and that the expression of the face was heavier and

more ignoble, although less so than in the Pachydermata, excepting the

horse ; also that the direction of vision was considerably forwards, as well

as lateral, and that it was cut off towards the rear.

This closes what we have been led to infer regarding the organs of the

head. With respect to the rest of the skeleton, we have nothing to offer,

as we are not at present possessed of any other remains which we can with

certainty refer to the Sivatherium*. Among a quantity of bonest collected

from the same neighbourhood with the head fossil, there are three singu-

larly perfect specimens of the lower portions of the extremities of a large

ruminant, belonging to three legs of one individual. They greatly ex-

ceed the size of any known ruminant, and excepting the Sivatherium

Giganteum, there is no other ascertained animal of the order, in our col-

lection, of proportionate size to them. We forbear from further noticing

them at present, as they appear small in comparison for our fossil: and

besides, there are indications in our collection, in teeth and other remains,

of other large ruminants, different from the one we have described.

The form of the vertebra, and more especially of the carpi and tarsi,

are points of great interest, to be ascertained ; as we may expect modifi-

cations of the usual type adapted to the large size of the animal. From

its bulk and armed head, few animals could be strong enough to contend

with it, and we may expect that its extremities were constructed more to

give support, than for rapidity of motion. But, in the rich harvest which

we still hope to reap in the valleys of the Warkanda, it is probable that

specimens to illustrate the greater part of the osteology of the Sivatherium

will at no very distant period be found.

* See Note to page 17.—SEc. ;

+ We note here a very perfect cervical vertebre of a Ruminant in our possession,

which must have belonged to an animal of proportions equal to that of the Sivathe-

rium, but from certain characters, we are inclined to suspect that it is allied to some

other gigantic species of Ruminant, of the existence of which we have already

tolerable certainty. Of the existence of the Elk, and a species of Camelide, Lieut.

Baker of the Engineers has shewn us ample proof.

50 Description of the Swatherium, &c. [Jan.

The structure of the teeth suggests an idea regarding the peculiarities

of the herbivorous habits of the animal. In the description it was noticed

that the inner central plate of enamel ran in a flexuous sweep, somewhat

resembling what is seen in the Elasmotherium, an arrangement evidently

intended to increase the grinding power of the teeth. It may hence be

inferred, that the food of the Sivatherium was less herbaceous than that

of existing horned ruminants, and derived from leaves and twigs: or that

as in the horse, the food was more completely masticated, the digestive

organs less complicated, the body less bulky, and the necessity of regur-

gitation from the stomach less marked than in the present Ruminantia.

The following dimensions, contrasted with those of the Elephant and

Rhinoceros, will afford a tolerably accurate idea of the size of the Siva-

therium. They are characteristic, although not numerous :-—

“Indian 1-horned

Elephant. Sivatherium. Rhinoceros.

From margin of foramen magnum to the first

HUIOUAT tere isiere octavo cecas\rapatate ois /atsie cole rare egeieeere 23.10 inch. 18.85 inch. 24.9 inch.

Greatest width of the cranium,............ 26.0 22.0 12.05

Do. do. of face between the malar bones,.... 18.5 16.62 9.20

Greatest depth of the skull, ...... 5.0005 ees 17.80 11.9 11.05

Long diameter of the foramen magnum, .... 2.55 2.6 2.6

SING od.95)4c Gl, SShaos Oasis 1 Ontcilremenes 2.4 2.3 1.5

Average of the above, ............ siainio Oeicig 15.06 12.38 10.22

If the view which we have taken of the fossil be correct, the Sivathe-

rium was a very remarkable animal, and it fills up an important blank in

the interval between the Ruminantia and Pachydermata. That it wasa

ruminant, the teeth and horns most clearly establish ; and the structure

which we have inferred of the upper lip, the osteology of the face, and the

size and position of the orbit, approximate it to the Pachydermata. The

circumstance of any thing approaching a proboscis is so abnormal for a ru-

minant, that at the first view, it might raise a doubt, regarding the correct-

ness of the ordinal position assigned to the fossil ; but when we inquire

further, the difficulty ceases.

In the Pachydermata, there are genera with a trunk, and others with-

out a trace of it. This organ is therefore not essential to the constitution

of the order, but accidental to the size of the head, or habits of the animal

in certain genera. ‘Thus in the Elephant, nature has given ashort neck

to support the huge head, the enormous tusks and the large grinding

apparatus of the animal; and by such an arrangement, the construction of

the rest of the frame is saved from the disturbance which a long neck

would have entailed. But as the lever of the head became shortened, some

other method of reaching its food became necessary; and a trunk was

appended to the mouth. We have only to apply analogous conditions to a

ruminant, and a trunk is equally required. In fact, the Camel exhibits a

rudimentary form of this organ, under different circumstances. The upper

lip is cleft ; each of the divisions is separately movable and extensible,

so as to be an excellent organ of touch.

The fossil was discovered near the Markanda river, in one of the small

valleys which stretch between the Kydérda-din and the valley of Pinjér, in

the Sivdlik or sub-Himélayan belt of hills, associated with bones of the

fossil Elephant, Mastodon, Rhinoceros, Hippopotamus, &c. So far as our

researches yet go, the Sivatherium was not numerous. Compared with the

Mastodon and Hippopotamus, (H. Sitvd/ensis, Nobis, a new species cha-

racterized by having six incisors in either jaw ;) it was very rare.

Northern Doéb, Sept. 15, 1835.

1836. ] Horary Observations of the Barometer, &c. 51

IV.—Horary Observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and Wet-bulb

Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 2\st and 22nd of December,

1835, by Mr. H. Barrow, Astr. and Math. Inst.-maker to the H. C.

[Having ourselves inadvertently omitted the hourly observations appointed

by the Meteorological Association at the Cape to be taken on the above day,

we are most happy in being able to supply the omission from Mr. BaRRrow’s

higher than Mr. B.’s, that quantity must be added to the Bar. indications at 32°

(in col. 7) to produce an accordance.—ED. ]

The barometer and wet-bulb thermometer were in a large room to

the north, the doors and windows of which were open during the whole

time. In the reductions* ‘030 has been used as the constant for capili-

ary attraction, and it is only necessary to add that the barometer is of

the mountain construction, with a screw at the bottom to bring the

surface of the mercury to zero.

(Calcutta mean time.)

Attach- | Exter- { Barome-|Depression

1835. Barome-jed Ther-|/Wet-bulb nal ter re-| of Wet-| =

Date. | -HOUF-| ter. mome-} Thermo-|Thermo.| duced | bulbTher-| 2 3

ter. meter. |meter. | to 32°. | mometer. 5 ae

21 Dec. 6 A.M./30,006 65,0 63,0 55,0 29,937 2,0 H. B.

4 ,024 62,2 61,0 963 Se hee a So

8 ,038 64,0 62,0 62,0 972 2,0 |H. B.

9 ,068 66,7 | 63,0 66,0 5993 3,7

10 ,070 68,3 63,9 69,5 ,991 4,4

1] ,054 69,8 64,0 71,6 971 5,8

Noon. ,030 70,1 63,9 72,2 1946 6,2

1 ~ 429,990 70,9 62,5 73,1 1903 8,4

2 974 Wil 62,0 73,2 ,887 9,1

3 972 71,6 62,2 73,5 883 9,4

4 1972 71,0 | 62,1 72,0 ,885 8,9

6 1989 69,2 63,7 66,2 ,907 5,5

7 30,012 68,0 64,5 64,0 1934 3,5

8 »028 67,0 64,5 63,1 953 2,5

9 037 67,0 64,0 62,0 »962 3,0

10 ,040 66,3 64,0 60,8 »967 2,3

ll ,030 66,0 63,5 59,5 7958 2,5

22nd. Midnight.| ,016 65,4 63,0 59,1 »946 2,4

2 ,000 65,0 63,0 58,0 1931 2,0

3 29,984 64,0 62,0 58,0 1918 2,0

4 982 64,0 62,0 57,0 ,916 2,0

5 986 62,8 61,8 57,0 ,924 1,0 Kk. B.

6 30,012 62,9 61,5 57,0 949 1,4

7 ,016 62,2 61,0 57,2 955 1,2

8 036 63,2 61,8 61,0 972 1,4 H. B.

9 ,064 67,0 62,0 66,9 5989 5,0

10 06S 69,1 63,5 70,5 1987 5,6

11 ,040 70,5 63,0 73,0 1954 7,5

Noon, ,020 71,9 63,0 74,0 5930 8,9.

1 000 72,2 63,0 75,0 ,909 9,2

2 29,980 72,1 63,0 75,3 ,890 9,1

3 968 72,9 63,9 75,3 875 9,0

+ ,972 72,3 63,0 73,5 ,881 9,3

5 ,977 71,9 | 63,0 71,0 ,887 8,9

6 30,000 70,5 63,6 67,5 914 6,9

* Of column 3, but not of column 7, which is fortunate, as we do not apply.

any correction for capillarity in our own register.—Eb.

H 2

52 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Jan.

V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 6th January, 1836.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryavy, President, in the chair.

Sir Cuaruss D’Ovty, Bart.; E. A. Bhunpewz, Esq. and Dr. H. Fat.

CONER, proposed at the last meeting were duly elected members.

The meeting then proceeded to the annual election of office-bearers,

when by scrutiny of names,

The Rev. Dr. Mitt, W. H. Macnacuten, Esq. Sir J. P. Grant, and

Sir B. Mauxrn, were chosen Vice-Presidents for the ensuing year ; and

Messrs. H. T. Prinsep, J. R. Convin, C. E. Trevetyan, C. H. Cameron,

D. Hare, Ram Comun Sen, Captains Forses and Pemperton, and Dr.

Pearson, members of the Committee of Papers.

The Secretary communicated the results of the past year’s proceedings.

The number of new members added to the list in 1835 had been,

Ordinary, Members, < weisjatel-\eletereloini<i-csateteeralls rete sickle

ASSOclate me MbEMS sates sererelte re tine tice cee heen ore ee

The loss by death, one; by departure to Europe, three; and with-

drawals Ones, Wall yn tote cite\otlelolctatoiaie!= ele=lololeielelliet sleleleet-fetaisrags is -aitet ae

The financial operations of the year were as follows :—

ELOHOLALY, WAEMDENS i. c ereierel «evi shareiore tel = laeletete ells enstate

PAYMENTS. REcEIPTS.

To House Establishment andcon- R. A. P. Wa PB

tingencies from Ist Nov. 1834, to By Balance of last year’s account, 3,101 10 4

30th NOV. 1835, --nrannnrnenenenenene 2,868 8 10 | By Quarterly Collections and ad-

To Salary of Curator, and Museum mission fees, realized ,—w-erweere 5,157 0 0

contingent, from 1st May to 30th By two Dividends on the estate of

NOV. 1835, warncnnnenennnncevenrnrrnre 1,478 3 4 Mackintosh and CO.wwwwrneoee 71712 9

To Copies of the Journal supplied By Sale of Researches, w-nerreernre 22 7 0

to members to 3lst Dec. ~v--- 1,056 0 0

To Printing 500 copies of Index, ~ 1,210 0 0

To Ditto, 400 ditto, catalogue of

Library Asiatic Society,—~~-~-~ 240 0 0

To Binding charges, mwwrww~wnene 48910 0

To Building Repairs, ~~--—~~~ 1,175 8 9

To Purchase of a Cabinet, ~-~~-~ 100 0 0

To Balance in Bank of Bengal, ~.— 38015 2

Sa. Rs. 8,998 14 1 Sa. Rs. 8,998 14 1

Subscriptions due (partly irrecover- R. A. P.

ADLC, ) wm rerrnennnnnennrgraccrrnerencen, 2,436 0 0

Interest of Govt. Paper not drawn, 1,417 1 11

thus leaving an available balance, without encroaching on the capital stock, of

about 3,000 rupees to meet the expences of the current year, besides the quar-

terly subscriptions, which by a resolution of the 6th November will henceforth

be collected in Company’s rupees.

The separate account of the publication of Oriental works from the date of

their transfer from the Committee of Public Iastruction was as follows:

PAYMENTS. RECEIPTS.

R. A, P. ReeR:

To Pundits for correcting press, -- 139 0 0 | By Sale of Sanscrit Books, ~~ 909 0 0

To Maulavis for ditto, ~~~. 217 0 0 | By Dittoof Arabic ditto, ~~--- 584 8 0

To Binding charges, paper, &c... 10010 9

To Printing prospectus, &c. ~--~--- 21 8 0

To Postage, nxn revere rererere 38.15 0

To Freight and Package, &c. --.-~ 46 2 8

563 674 8

By Subscriptions not collected, for ?

works delivered to the parties, 7,403 0 0

To Printer’s bills, due to 3lst Dec.

1 from Aug. to 30th Oct. ~~~ 2,623 9

2 from ist Nov. to 3lst Dec... 1,069 7

8 for binding and covers, ~~~. 454 0

——_

Total, Sa. Rs. 4,710 5 5 Total, Sa. Rs. 8,077 8 0

een

ee eee

1836.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 53

leaving a profit of Sa. Rs. 3,367 2 7 upon the year’s operations, to meet the

current printing expences, in addition to the chance of further sale of the works

now completed.

The ordinary publications of the Society during the past year, had been

confined to the Index of the first 18 volumes of Researches, and a new edition of

the Library Catalogue.

On the 6th May, it was resolved to give additional attention to the Society’s

museum of Natural History. A Curator and establishment were appointed, and

measures were taken to accommodate the museum of antiquities, models, images,

&c. in the gallery around the staircase, leaving the lower suite of apartments

entirely open for objects of Natural History.

To the gallery also was added the fine collection of pictures, munificently

presented by the sons of the late Mr. Home, one of the oldest members of the

Society. These alterations and the preparation of Mineral Cabinets had

enhanced considerably the year’s expences, but the good effect had amply com-

pensated. To the museum of fossil remains, some splendid additions had been

conferred by Colonel Burney, Colonel Cotvin, and Mr. Dean, and the col-

lection of recent Osteology and of birds had been properly arranged and classified.

A catalogue raisonnée had simultaneously been prepared by the Curator which

would hereafter be submitted to the Committee of Papers for publication. In

the mean time the strenuous assistance of members and friends of the institution

was solicited to render the Society’s museum worthy of public attention.

The resolution of the Government to make over the library of the College of

Fort William to the ‘‘ Public Library’’ lately instituted in Calcutta was coupled

with areservation of all the works exclusively oriental of which it is known that

the College possesses a very extensive and valuable collection, comprising the

whole library of Trppu Suura’n. These, it was generally understood, the Govern-

ment would be willing to transfer to the Asiatic Society should a request be ex-

pressed by this body to obtain them. As their possession would necessarily in-

yolve an increase of establishment, the Committee of Papers had hitherto hesitated

making any application on the subject, but it was evidently desirable that such an

opportunity of enriching its collection should be hailed with eager desire by a

body devoted to the cultivation and study of Indian literature and history.

Library.

Two books in manuscript and six maps in the Burmese character, together

with thirteen sketches and maps in the Assamese character were present-

ed by Colonel G. Coorer, 34th Regt, N, I.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 25—by the Editors.

The Meteorological Register for Nov., 1835—by the Surveyor General.

On the salutary effects of the Convolvulus Nil upon the human con-

stitution. M. 8.—by G. Cooper, Esq. the Author.

A Prospectus of an intended publication “ Corpus Inscriptionum Indi-

carum,” by M. Evucene Jacauert, Paris, was submitted for the information

of members, and intending subscribers.

[Published on the cover of the November number. ]

Museum.

One bow, a bird-cage, eleven arrows of sorts, and a specimen of the

capper coin in use amongst the Chodrs ; together with an Assam arrow-

head for killing tigers, were presented by G. Coorrr, Esq.

54 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (JAN.

A bit of petrified tamarind from Trieweurry on the Coromandel Coast,

and a vulture, ( Vultur Ponticerianus, ) and a Mandarin’s cap, were present-

ed by Dr. L. Buruint, for T. F. De Cruze, Esq.

A Pavooye ( Acridotheres Malabaricus) was presented by Mr. J. Sre-

PHENSON.

Read a letter from J. Bout, Esq. forwarding for inspection an animal

called ‘‘ the Slow Lemur” described in the 4th volume of the Asiatic

Researches, by the late Sir Wint1am Jonws, and giving some further parti-

culars of his habits.

Literary.

The Secretary apprized the meeting that he has received from Mr.

W.H.Smouxr, the box of papers of the late Mr. Moorcrort, which

were in possession of the late W. Fraser, Esq. and which he was willing

to place at the disposal of the Society, on the conditions expressed by the

deceased: viz. that any profit accruing from their publication should go

to the benefit of Mr. Moorcrort’s relatives in England.

The Society entirely concurring in this view resolved, that they should

be immediately forwarded to Professor Wiuson in England, to be made

use of along with the former manuscripts, on the conditions specified.

A letter from the Vicar Apostolic of Cochin China, was read, request-

ing the Society to forward the specimen of the Dictionary, which he

regretted to hear could not be printed in Calcutta, to the Oriental Trans-

lation Fund in England, in case that body should be inclined to patronize

its publication.

A letter was read from Captain C. M. Wank, transmitting a second

memoir by Mr. Cuartes Masson, on the ancient coins discovered at

Beghrém in the Kohistan, at Jelalabad and Kabul.

The memoir had been detained in Capt. Wanpk’s possession, since the month

of June last, in consequence of some official correspondence with Col. Porrin-

GER to whom the coins to which it relates have been finally forwarded for the

Bombay Government.

The present memoir adds the names of DiomepgEs, PALERKOS, ALOUOKENES (?)

to those already known, and gives some valuable information on the sites of

the Alexandria ad calcem Caveasi, &c. It is published at length in the present

number.

Wednesday Evening, the 3rd February, 1836.

Sir Epwarp Ryawn, President, in the chair.

Lieut.-Col. J. Convin, Engrs., Lieut.-Col. L. R. Sracy, Joun NEave,

Esq. C. 8., and Lieut. A. Cunnrnenam, were proposed as Members by Mr.

James Prinsep, seconded by Sir Epwarp Ryan.

Rajah Viszaya Govinpa Smvena Behadur of Purnea was also proposed

by Mr. James Prinsep, seconded by Koomar Rapuacant Des.

Read, aletter from Mr. E. A. Buunpe1, acknowledging his election as

a Member of the Society.

Read the following letter from His Highness Prince Esrernazy, Ambas-

sador of His Imperial Majesty the Emperor of Austria at the British Court:

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 55

‘* London, August 4, 1835.

‘“ Str,

‘‘In reply to the letter you addressed to me on the 25th January last, I have

the honor to acknowledge the receipt of the boxes containing each twenty-five

copies of a Tibetan Dictionary and Grammar, prepared for publication by the

Hungarian Traveller Mr. AteExaANDER Csoma K6rdésy, and printed at the

expence of the British Indian Government, under the auspices of the Asiatic

Society.

““These fifty copies being destined by Mr. Kérésy to be presented by the

different public Institutions of His imperial Majesty’s dominions, I lose no time

in assuring you, that the learned Author’s intentions shall be faithfully fulfilled.

“The enclosed letters and the Oriental works you have sent to the Antic Coun-

cellor Von Hammer, have also been forwarded to their destination.

‘* T have not failed to inform my Government of the liberality with which the

Indian Government has replaced the sum of 300 ducats, transmitted through

this Embassy to Mr. Csoma pg Kériés, which had been lost by the failure of

Messrs. ALEXANDER and Co., and anticipating its intentions, I seize with great

pleasure this opportunity to express to you, and through your means to the

Indian Government, as well as to the Asiatic Society, the high sense I entertain

of the kind protection afforded to my learned countryman in His Britannic

Majesty’s dominions in India. Allow me to offer my sincerest thanks for such

generous conduct.

‘¢ | have the honor to be, &c.

‘“¢ ESTERHAZY.”’

Copy of this letter was directed to be communicated to the Government and

to Mr. Csoma Kérisy, who left Calcutta a short time since on a tour through

Tirhut and to the west of India.

Read a letter from H. Cuamimr, Esq., Chief Secretary to the Govt. of

Fort St. George, directing that the Sixty Copies of 4th, 5th, and 6th

volumes of Fatawa Alemgiri, subscribed for by the Madras Govt.

should be forwarded, and enclosing remittance for the same.

Also similar letters from the Register of the Sadar Dewani, and the

Secretary of the College Council of Fort William.

Library.

Read a letter from F. Manrcet, Esq., Secretary to the Societé de Phy-

sique de Geneve, forwarding vols. 5 and 6 of their Transactions for pre-.

sentation to the Society, and requesting an interchange of publications.

Read a letter from M. Brovusss, Secretary to the Royal Academy of

Arts, Sciences, &c. at Bordeaux, acknowledging the receipt of vols. 17

and 18, Asiatic Researches, and of a copy of M. Csoma pr Ko6ris’s Tibe-

tan Dictionary and Grammar, and forwarding for presentation to the

Society, a copy of its Transactions from 1819 to 1834, inclusive, 5 vols.

handsomely bound.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, Nos. I and If, for 1836—by

F. Corbyn, Esq.

Report on the State of Education in Bengal, presented by Messrs.

Wiis and Earzz, on behalf of Rev. Mr. Apa.

&6 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. | [Jan.

Two copies of a Sketch of the Solar System, translated into Bengali, by

Maha Rajah Kaur Kissen Behadur, and presented by the translator.

Meteorological Register for December, 1835—by the Surveyor General.

Museum.

The Secretary presented on the part of his Excellency General Burma

Sinua, Minister to the Rajah of Nepal:

Two elaborate drawings of Kathmandu, and of a temple and bridge in

the hills. A richly ornamentally Kukri and Khonta: two large elephant’s

tusks, and three pods of musk.

A model as large as life, of a native carrying a bullock on his shoulders

was presented by Dr. F. Corbyn.

Literary and Antiquities.

The Secretary read the following extracts from the correspondence of

Mr. Viene, from little Tibet and from Cashmir, of which valley this traveller

is stated to have made a beautiful series of drawings, and an accurate pa-

noramic view, which will be much prized in Europe.

‘* Iskardo, 10th September, 1835.

‘¢T have now been in this very wild and extraordinary place four days, and am

pleased with every thing. I set off from Cashmir by boat to Bundurpur, seeing

every thing done myself to prevent delay, and took leave of the Governor about

12 o’clock. We had a merry glide of it till night, when the musquitoes became

exceedingly numerous and troubleseme ; arrived at Bundurpur on the great lake

the next morning, and heard the agreeable intelligence that a mounted guard of

10 men were awaiting my arrival in AHMAD SHAn’s frontier. I spent the rest

of the day in a visit to the Shumladier hill, and the next morning we were fairly

off. At that station I was joined by NAasim Kuan, the same man that had eaten

your salt for a month and some days, with a letter from AnmMap SHan. He

told me he had been waiting three days in the neighbourhood, not liking to make

his appearance among the Sikhs. I like the man much, he is very intelligent and

amusing. What a glorious view we had on the second morning, two-thirds of

Cashmir and towards Tibet, one mountain in particular of immense height, totally

covered with snow from the shoulders upward, named ‘‘ Diarmul.’’

‘‘In three days we reached Guress, a very pretty valley, a little higher than

Cashmir, entirely surrounded by the loftiest mountains, but bare; merely growing

back wheat, vetches, and barley. After leaving Guress, we passed a place which

a few men could defend against an army ; where the Sikhs and Tibetans fought

two days. Further on after passing over a most desolate country, I was met by

Aumap SHAu’s son. I had heard there were some marauders in the neighbour-

hood, but did not really imagine there was any truth in the account. However,

the young Rajah, a very intelligent young fellow, assured me there were, and that

his father had sent him to protect me. Imagine the wildness of this scene.

Discordant but not altogether unmilitary music gave notice of his approach, and

at last, he appeared with some forty sepoys, and led horses. The next morning,

we marched in company with him, while the approach of the thieves was hourly

expected. They had but one way to come, and when we arrived near the-scene

of action, I observed parties stationed in different places on the mountains, to

prevent all escape. Suddenly an alarm was sounded, and gave notice of their

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 57

approach, and the thieves were soon surrounded, and cut up. AHMAD SHAH

was there in person. I met him on the field of battle. He said he was so happy

at having destroyed the robbers, and seeing me there, that if he were at Iskardo,

he did not know what he should do to manifest his joy. We all sat down in a

large ring. His sepoys shewing their wounds, and I administered pills, to keep

off fever. Of the thieves some returned, 72 killed, 15 escaped ; but I don’t think

there were so many. They treated the wounded men horribly. The enemy came

from the neighbourhood of Peshaur, and were driving off men, women, and cattle.

I am delighted with the old Rajah. He appears to have some excellent English

ideas about him, and enjoyed the scene amazingly. The book, said to have been

written by the old Missionary, does not, he assures me, exist. He shewed me an

Armenian Testament that he had bought of some pedlar, which probably gave

rise to the report. His faith in the theory of his descent from ALEXANDER is

strong. He talks freely of every thing in and about the country, and has sent

out men to procure me all kinds of curiosities. We make an excursion to a hot

spring on the road to Yarkand in a day or two, and shall have some shikar, &c.

I shall quit this extraordinary place, (a vale partly desert, washed by the Attock,

a noble stream, quarter mile wide, some 15 miles long, and surrounded by bare

rugged mountains on every side, of vast height,) in about 12 days or so: the snow

will then begin to fall. I expect acold march of it. Heis very proud of his rock

crystal, of which I can bring away as much as I please. As to the productions

of the valley, I am making myself fully master of them. He refuses no sort of

information. The fort is on a rock covered with alluvial soil, raised in the very

centre of the valley, from the bed of what was once most likely a lake. In size,

shape, and appearance, washed on two sides of the river, it bears some resem-

blance to Subathu ; as to the works, a few shells for the wood, and round shot for

the stone, would destroy them ina few hours. It would be ridiculous (certain

death) to attempt going to Yarkand. Since Moorcrort was at Ladakh, they

have got the picture of an Englishman, so I am assured, painted on the wall,

that all who see one may know him. Yarkand is about a month’s march—a

harkara could go in 12 days. Iam going to a classical sort of equestrian sport

in a day or two, such as I was happy to hear remarked was played in the time of

IsKANDER. It had struck me that the course was precisely the shape of the course

of CARACALLA at Rome.’’

* Cashmir, 23rd October, 1835.

‘‘Here I am safe and well; arrived yesterday after a very severe march of

25 days from Iskardo, over as rough roads, if they deserve the name, as can be

seen any where, I have with me four Yaks and all kinds of things. I hope to

start hence in about 10 days, and shall come the shortest road to Léhor. So

pray oblige me by making some arrangements about the Indus. I should like to

hire a boat, men, &c. It must be big enough to carry my Yaks. They are not

tall but heavy. I expect Baron Hucex here in two or three days, and suspect I

shall have a very narrow escape of stopping another year in India, but must do

every thing I can to get off in time.”

‘6 Cashmir, 30th October, 1835.

‘‘ I wrote to you a few days ago, to mention my safe return, but forget to send

the enclosed inscriptions. Pray post them off at your earliest convenience to

Csoma DE Kérés, author of the Tibetan Dictionary, or some person compe-

tent to undertake their examination and réquest a translation, if possible, and

soon; with my compliments. J began my panoramic view from the Tukht

I °

58 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Jan,

yesterday, the weather continues fine. There is nothing new to communicate,

excepting that I hear the Baron is coming the Jamma road, and cannot be far off

now. I must be at Bombay by the middle of January.’’

Of the inscriptions alluded to in the last extract, one at least is in clear Tibetan

characters, and will be doubtless easily decyphered by M. Csoma pr Kérés, to

whom they will be sent at Malda.

The Baron Hucex had deviated from his proposed tour after ascending the

pass from Bundurpur to Iskardo into little Tibet, on account of the advanced

season ; he had since joined M. Vigne at Labor.

The Rey. Mr. Bateman, in a letter from Bombay, communicated a fac-

simile of an inscription, supposed to be in Cufic characters, found by Cap-

tain Tuomas Jervis, at the village of Wara, in the Southern Konkan ; the

original stone of which he had presented to the Bombay Literary Society.

The inscription is apparently in the elongated form of Nagari character, found

on the coins of the Saurashtra group. (See Journal, vol. iv. Pl. XLIX. p. 684,)

and may in time be made out.

Mr. Traitix, Commissioner of Kemaon, presented further facsimiles of

the inscriptions at Bagéswar, near Almorah, which were made over to the

Rey. Dr. Mitt, V. P. for examination.

Read an extract of a private letter from Lieut. A. CunnineHam,

Engineers.

Lieut. C. pointed out, iu reference to the motto APAOXPO on one of General

VENTURA’S coins (fig. 9 of Pl. XXXVIII. vol. iv.) that the same name might

be traced on the coin depicted as fig. 6, Pl. I. vol. xvii. of the Researches, of which he

possessed a more legible duplicate: thus forming the most perfect link between

the Indo-Scythic and Canouj coins. The cornucopia is borne by both the stand-

ing and sitting females of this type.

An anonymous address ‘to the Members of the Asiatic Society,”

signed “ Vertras,” Hobart Town, Vandieman’s Land, September, 1835,

developed a new theory of the origin of the Yugas of the Hindus, and

called upon the Society to examine the subject more closely.

Whatever may be thought of the address, which from its want of authentica-

tion cannot be noticed, it is satisfactory to find the Society’s Researches made

the subject of study in the new colony.

Physical.

Lieut.-Col. Convin presented on the part of Lieutenants Baxer and

Duranp, three fossils from the Dadupur collection, of great interest.

1. Part of the jaw of a rhinoceros, with two milch teeth attached.

2. The molar tooth of a camel; of which new fossil genus, they possess now

the entire head. (See Journal for December, 1835.)

3. A very distinct head of a fish.

To these Colonel Corvin added, on his own part, four fragments of the

fossil shell of a tortoise, of gigantic dimensions.

The same officer presented on the part of Lieutenant Baker, a series

of the fossil shells from the stratum of blue marl, underlying hard sand,

gravel, and yellow sand, inclined at an angle of 45° in the low range of

hills at the head of the Delhi Canal. A sketch of the strata accompanied.

A note from Mr. B. H. OTE called the Society’s attention to a paper

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 59

and drawing of a new species of Columba, submitted to the Society several

years since, of which by some inadvertence no notice had been taken. |

A duplicate of the article was now furnished.

It appears that the bird is described as new by the Zoological Society in 1832,

thus depriving the author here of the priority of discovery and publication.

Specimens of Cinnyris Mahrattensis and Rynchoea Capensis—presented

by M. Boucnez.

A specimen of Raia Thouriniana—presented by Captain Luoyp, Indian

Navy.

Specimens of Squalus Zygoena and Maximus—presented by Mr. F. Suaw,

of the Surveying Vessel Flora.

A collection of skins of birds, of snakes, fishes, Crustacea and Mollusca—

presented by Lieut. Monrriov, Indian Navy, and Mr. F. Suaw.

This collection was received ouly a few days ago but the following genera and

species have been determined.

Birds, the Genera, Dicrurus, Ardea, and Carbo: Snakes, Dryinus and Hy-

drophis: Fishes, Trichiurus, Polynemis, Golieides, Pleuronectes, Tetradon,

Clupea, Chanda, and Pimelodes: Crustacea, Sepia, Loligo, and Monoculus :

Shells, Balanus, Pholas, Psammotea, Arca, Cardium, Cytherea, Venus, Ceri-

thium, Turritella, Pyrula, Nerita, Neritina, Ampullaria, Dolium, Cassis, Oliva,

Rotella, and Calyptreea.

Of these genera, the following species have been ascertained: Dicrurus Indi-

cus, Trichiurus Argenteus, Polynemus Paradiseus, Golieides Rubicunda, Plen-

ronectes Pan, Tetradon Patoca, Clupea Aclara, Chanda Ruconius, Pimelodes Etor ;

Monoculus Polyphemus ; Balanus Striatus, Pholas Orientalis, Cerithium Teles-

copium, and Sulcatum ; Pyrula Vespertilio, Dolum Pomum, and Cassis Areola.

The Python Amethystina, presented some months ago by Mr. CueEine, died

during the very cold weather of last month. He changed his skin at the begin-

ning of December, and refused to eat afterwards ; remaining in a semi-torpid

condition till the coming on of the (for this country) extreme cold of the middle

of January.

A collection of skins of birds—presented by W. D. Smitu, Esq.

A memoir by Messrs. Fatconer and Caut ey, on the peculiarities of two

new species of fossil Hippopotamus, found in the Siwdélik range, was read.

The great distinction between the Hippopotamus of the sub-Himdlayas and

the fossils described by Cuvier, and also the existing animal of South Africa,

consists in its having six incisor teeth, in lieu of four. This marked difference

has led the authors to a subdivision of the genus into Heraprotodon and Tetra-

protodon. The former comprising the two or more varieties hitherto discovered

in India, in a fossil state. Their account will appear in the outcoming volume

of the Physical Researches.

A series of Geological specimens from the Shekhawéti country, were

presented by Mr. Faxconer.

A memoir on a Geological collection made in the country between

Hyderabad and Nagpur, and presented to the Society by the collector,

Dr. Maucotmsoy, with a descriptive map, was submitted.

[This will shortly be published in the Journal.]

l Register.

*ca

—Meteorologi

op op op

op ‘aug *Ino]9

*1B9]9 “Azey “doy

“nuns *17MuNd *1v9[9

op “Azey *Apno[o

op OV op

“ara op *yva[d

“1yQuMs op op

op op op

op *re9[9 op

op *Azey op

op op op

op op ~Soy

op op op

op op *ASS0¥

op op “read

op op “yD

op op op

op op “30x

op op op

op op *1va[9

op “Iea[o op

op “aug “WA

‘1ea]9 *1ea[o op

*1ynuns *Azey op

op “ead op

*1Ra[o op op

‘nuns “Azey op

*aeao “Bao BP O22) fy)

Lad —

° oS

Ks > &

. z &

PCHOLEY

a oO "1

“Mm “MU ‘ou

“M “os ‘ou

“MS "MS “MN

“ag “AA “a

“MS AN “a

“MU *“M ‘oO

“MS ‘Oo a 6)

a ‘u ‘oO

M te ie

‘u *u °O

“u “MU bd 0)

"MU *MU ‘ou

‘u “MU "0

‘u “MU fo}

“MU “MU “u

“MU “MU ‘oO

‘a *MU ‘oO

“MU “mu ‘u

‘u “u *O

“MU “MU *O

*“u “u “u

“MU "MU ‘Oo

"MU “MU “mM

“MU “3 “0

“MU "MU “MS

ou *0u me)

*ou “ou “MoM

‘u ‘u “MO

"ou "ou bd # §

“u *u au

hen oS =

Ms) > 5

FS Ff 5

“pul

uleYy

c‘18 |e'er

068 [0°29

Sug (8°89

on 7

oOfTg

8°9P

6°S?

9°67

OL?

G97

0°67

P'Sh

Plt

9‘0P

8°68

Z‘EP

colt

8 iBao

= (255

=] Ben

=e ae

*SsaWolXg

a}auUIOWIIEY FL,

191819903)

| 69

*19j9NI0I13

-AyY eH

mes

NQ Ato

moo cy

aoa an

4 =

ama SS

"woIsh

"JIC §,2l[seT

Of 01

—

a= aN A

ee ~

Cee ee a

x see —

Coerceecs

MOCORACSMIMIAARASATONMSADTMMHOA

a aA As

1G et et SHS SO ICD

Rig es Oroonmo

Lan!

*ssoideq *L

“W 40 HI

8°89

L‘8L

eel

‘eZ

6BL

P69

1°69

L‘L9

086s

GOL

GIL

0°29

£°S9

6°G9

ee a)

Vermt

“rte Ul 13}

aumouliey L

e0L‘0

£28

88°

968°

Pols

TeL‘

1696

£99'

Gz9‘

T19‘

109°

oe9*

Leg‘

ool‘

119°

699°

*poonpap

‘ual *sby

SEM JI—Uoptes [LorULJOg oY} UT peuIOy Ay[ernjeu sem ad1 ‘YIgT ay} yoIYSIU ay) UC ‘ported Suoy AISA @ 103 BIpuy ut p

Ors.

961°

O8t'

093°

898°

966°

Gres

‘A *d f 7@ SUOT}VAIOSIO

966°

086‘

610‘

800‘

86‘

86°

6165

9866

006‘

£865

616‘

B16‘

906‘

66‘

66 ‘

966‘

8265

946‘

8165

668°

26°

P16:

096‘

016

G8 (0°L | S°L | 6°99] IP9O\ZIh0 {090'ha\*ueayy

‘ ¢ €

‘ ol LOL , , {err 1€

G8 | ‘LZ | 2‘9 | LOL] 6PLS loge’ |set 08

16 | ZS | 9° | 869] OLS \9ab* Bar‘ 66

v6 | 1° | L*h | 9°89) $69* orbs IIITS 82

88 | BL | €°9 | 6°S9| GE9* l09P. 660‘ 1K

$8 | 6°L | LZ | L‘G9| 29% |ecps seo‘ 9%

68 | 0°9 | 8°¢ ee Le9° \6pR‘ on o%

I'L} 16 £80 £3

L°6 | L°99 ogo‘ &@

Le \ $699 £605 BS

98 | £9 | 1°9 | 69] 06S‘ \9er* |9z0' 13

#8 | €°Z | e*Z | e°€9) SLE° j9eh* {8005 02

€8 | PZ | 18 | e°69| OSS laps s Iseu‘ 61

OL | 0°6T| GOT} 6629] 098° l96%* |9c0‘ 81

BIT] ‘99 id LI

6L | 0°8 | 98 | 1°F9| 06S‘ Is6rS |880‘ 9L

LL | 0°6 | 92 | 1°99] G29 |OFPS [290° ro

18 | 0°8 | 9°Z | 9‘¢9| 8E9° IsGe* j9e0‘ tI

6L | &'8 Be 6°99] GE9° | IFS a el

8°01) 8°E9 I cae

#8 | 0° | 0'8 | g*c9| 029‘ IsaH‘ 80S Il

66 | 1°89 810. | Or

8 | 69 | 6'8 | 9*¢9| OG9* lar’ |eL0‘ 6

8Z | £°8 | 8 | g*99] 989% |9Ge° cen" 8

8 | 8°2 | aL | 1°99] EL9° |4PE* lOG0S L

88 | 0°9 | L‘¢ | e*g9) SL9* |Z7E* 610‘ 9

a6 | Lh | 8b | peo] OILS Iaee* |oroe g

68 | &°S | Eg | e*g9| 989% juLe* j9c0% 7

B9 | 2°69 090 | ¢

G6 | °S | 1°¢ | e*g9| 989°0|ZcE* 800° 4

00L| 0°29 00°62} T

(ic) oe ap Son

SE) 25) Pel g3 ee | eS lobe

Ba] S) oF] wo] E° orimpoel <

e| > _| 54) 9 ad SET oO

a So Lome} oS @ 4 pw a Fh

® 3 RA) Eo) FS) oe Sal a

aged elie a ehh sch Nee @ >

4] Ries] 9 alesse! (Ek

"MW “Vv OT 8 SUOT}EAIOSGO =

9881 ‘Asonune, fo yuo ay2 “of ‘vjqnIjnQ ‘20fQ hossp ay} qo yday ‘4aysthaxy 70916070.100]9 fT

*y}10U ay} 03 seovfd r9y30 pue NYT, ut ynsHUeTd

aouUatiadxa Y}UOU ySapfod ay} Uaeq sey sIUT,

JOURNAL

fir ASETEATIC SOCIETY.

No. 50.—February, 1836.

I.—Account of Rumbéwe, one of the States in the Interior of Malacca.

By Lieut. J. F. Newsoup, 23rd Regt. Madras Native Infantry.

Rumbéwe has generally been accounted by the Portuguese and

Dutch Governments at Malaccaas the principal of the states in the

interior ; but their ideas, like our own, until of late years, of the

relative situation of these states, both political and geograpical, appear

to have been very erroneous. At the present time, indeed, much

interesting matter remains in obscurity, and must remain until the

peninsula has been more thoroughly explored.

These notions of the superiority of Rumbdwe over the sister state

arose probably from the circumstances of its proximity to, and early

connexion with, Naning ; and from that of its capital being the crown-

ing place of the deputed sovereign from Menangkdbowe.

Tradition ascribes its name to a large Marabéwe tree, anciently

growing near its western frontier, on one of the banks of the Mara-

béwe stream, not far from its embouchement into the Rumbdéwe branch

of the Lingie river.

There was a small hamlet here, when I visited the place in 1832,

consisting of four or five Malay houses. The word Marabdwe is

supposed to have been corrupted into Rumbowe.

The area of Rumbéwe proper, not including the dependencies, is said

not to be quite so spacious as that of Naning. The nearest point of

its frontier is distant about 25 miles N. W. from the town of Malacca.

Boundaries.—It is bounded towards the N. E. by Srimindnti and

Stingie Ujong ; towards the south, by part of Naning and Johdle ; to the

west, by part of Naning and Salengore, and to the east, by part of

Sriminanti and Johéle.

62 Account of Rumbowe, one of the (Fes.

The boundary marks with Srimindnti are the mountains of Lépat,

Cdjang, and Guinong tijoh ; with Singie Ujong, Bukit Augim, part of

the right branch of the Lingie river, and Parentian tingth ; with Naning* ;

with Johdle, the hill of Bukit Pabet ; and with Salangore, the Lingie

river.

Rumbéwe contains two divisions, viz. Rumbéwe Uli and Rumbdéwe

Ilir ; each under its four Sukids, who are all subject to the control of

one Panghili.

The Lingie river forms the channel of communication, by water,

of Rumbéwe with the straits of Malacca, into which it falls about eight

miles to the eastward of Cape Rachddo. This river is about 450 yards

broad, and takes a north-by-easterly course into the interior, to the

distance of about six miles, when it divides into two branches. The one

to the left, called Battang Pennar, goes up to Lingie, and the Siingie

Ujong tin mines, taking a N. W. by N. course; and the one to the

right, called Battang Pendgie, takes a N. E. by E. course, to Bander,

in Rumbowe. It has its rise among the mountains of this state. The

three principal posts of Rumbdwe are situated on the banks of Battang

Penagie ; viz. Sempong, six miles from the mouth at the point of the

river’s bifurcation; Padds, on the right bank, five or six miles further

up; and Bander, about eight miles beyond Padis.

The river, up to Sempong, is navigable for vessels of 125 tons,

ranging from 33 to 7 fathoms, high-water, and vessels of nine tons may

pass up, without much difficulty, to Padds ; and to Lingie, on the other

branch.

In entering the mouth of the river care must be taken to avoid the

eastern bank, in consequence of hidden rocks, which run off to sea.

The channel near the western bank is deep and safe.

Regarding Padds, the following remarks are extracted from some

notes taken during a trip up the river in 1833. Two or three miles

in advance of Ramoan China Kechil, on the right bank of the river,

on the summit of a small hill commanding it, is Raja Aut’s (the Lang

de pertiian Besar) stockaded house. The place is named Padds, froma

small stream that flows into the river about a quarter of a mile nearer

Sempong. The river, several hundred yards above and below Padas,

had been partially blocked up by large trees felled completely across,

In one place we passed through a formidable chevaux de frise of point-

ed stakes, bound together, and running from bank to bank.

On this part of the river the stockade bears most: it is most

judiciously placed to annoy an enemy passing up with so many

obstacles in his course. We contrived to get over them with consi-

* See paper on Naning, vol. IV. 297.

-1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 63

derable difficulty, although the trees had since been cut in two, and

broken down. At high-water, they might however be readily passed.

The river was blockaded in this fashion during the Naning distur-

bances, and the engineer on this occasion was no other than our friend

in the boat, the Laks-amdna of Rumbéwe. Sempong, as before stated,

is situated at the point of the river’s bifurcation. In 1833, it consisted

only of two or three huts; in the foremost of which was a small

battery, consisting of seven swivels, and an iron 3-pr. of sufficient range

to command both branches of the river. It is the place selected by the

Rumbéowe chiefs to levy the duty on the tin passing down from Sdngie

Ujong.

At the close of 1833, and commencement of 1834, many fugitives

settled here, in consequence of the disturbances at Lingie, together with

a small colony from Sumatra, under a Panglima named Kammer. ‘The

place is now strongly stockaded by the Jang de pertuan Mida Savap

Sapan, by whom every encouragement is held out to settlers.

Population.— Rumbéwe, including Kroh and Tamping, contains about

9,000 inhabitants. The principal places are Bander, Se-npong, Chembong,

Kaling, and Battu Ampar. Chembong, with its environs, is said to contain

about 600 houses, and drives a petty trade in timber, dammer, and

wax, which are bartered for opium, cloths, iron utensils, and tobacco.

Chembong is the residence of the Panghili of Rumbéwe ; Bander,

Padas, and Sempong those of the Iang de pertians.

Besides Malays are several aboriginal tribes inhabiting the steeps

of the mountains, and the forests, who subsist principally by hunting.

The natives give them the general appellation of Orang Benia, people

of the soil or country.

They are subdivided into several tribes: among the most remarkable

of which are the Udai, Sakkye, Jakiéin, and Rayet Utan. I have seen

several specimens of the two last, but do not perceive any material

dissimilarity between them, save that the latter, by enjoying freer

intercourse with the Malays, have become more civilized; at least, as

far as a shew of dress and ornaments is implicated.

_ They differ much from the descriptions given of the Semang in the

interior of Quedah, and the thick-lipped, woolly-haired Papian. ‘Their

features are of the Malay caste; their hair sometimes straight, like that

of the generality of Asiatics, but more frequently curling ; at the same

time, very different from the frizzly locks of the African.

Their stature is shorter, but they do not differ much in complexion

from the Malay.

' The Malays entertain a high estimation of the skill of those singular

tribes in medicine, and the knowledge of the virtues of herbs, roots,

K 2

64 Account of Rumbéwe, one of the [Fes.

plants, &c. investing their sages, Piyongs, even with supernatural

powers, such as the Tiijoh Besawye, &c.

These tribes are to be found over the whole of the interior of this

part of the peninsula, particularly in Ulé Colang, Sungie Ujong, Johéle,

Jompéle, Jellabu, Uli Maar, and Segimet. They are skilled in the com-

position of the celebrated upas poison, with which they tip the points

of their arrows. The Sdmpitan, along tube, through which the poison-

ed darts are blown, and a spear, are their favorite weapons. The cloth

that encircles their loins is made from the fibrous bark of the Terrap

tree:

The influence of their Botins, or chiefs over the election of the Pan-

ghili of Séngie Ujong, has been mentioned. In Johile, they exert a

similar power. It may be also remarked here, that in Rumbdwe there

are two distinctions of the high Malayan tribe called Bidoanda, viz.

Bédoanda Jakiin, and Bédodnda Jawa. The Panghilis of all these

states must necessarily be of one of these two tribes.

Government.—Rumbdwe was formerly under the immediate sway of

its Panghalu and Ampat Siké ; but of latter days, the Jang de pertian

Miida claims equal, if not superior power to the Panghili.

The first chief who assumed the title of Jang de pertian Mida of

Rumbéwe was Raja Assit, the son of the second Menangkabéwe prince

Raja Avit; he was appointed by the then Jang de pertian Besdr (his

son-in-law Raja Iram), with the concurrence of the Panghalis of the

four states ; and it is stated, had assigned to him, as a subsistence,

two-sixths of the duty levied on the tin passing down the river from

Svingie Ujong, (the duty was then 2 dls. per bhar,) and the revenues of

the districts of Kroh and Tampin, near the foot of the mountain of

that name.

In 1812, Assiz was driven out of Rumbéwe, as previously mentioned,

by the Panghili and Sukids, assisted by Raja Aut; and died in

Naning in 1814 or 15. Raja Aus supplanted him; but, being

elected as Jang de-perttian Besar in 1832, was succeeded in the Miida-

ship by his son-in-law, the present chief, Sayap SaBan.

This office being an mnovation on ancient usage is, consequently,

secretly disliked by the Malays, especially where its privileges are so

ill defined and unsettled; and one in which right would appear syno-

nymous with might.

Another change within the last few years has taken place in the

constitution of this state ; instead of the council of the Ampat, or four,

Sitikis, it consists now of eight, or the Suku Iang de-lépan; who, with

the Panghili, now form a deliberative body, like the Archons of

Athens, of nine.

1836. ] States in the Interior of Malacca. 65

The Panghili is alternately elected from the two tribes, Bédounda

Jakéin and Bédodnda Jawa. The following circumstances, according

to tradition, led to this custom:

“When the king of Johore appointed nine Panghilis over the

nine Negris in the interior of Malacca, the heads of the leading tribes

in Rumbéwe, viz. those of the Bodoanda Jakén and Jawa, disputed

regarding the superiority of their respective claims to the honor. His

Highness of Johore, after due deliberation, came to the decision that

the selection of a Panghili should not be made from one tribe exclu-

sively, but that each should have the privilege alternately.”

This judgment, we are assured, gave entire satisfaction, and at all

events, seems to have been adhered to in subsequent elections.

lt must not be omitted here to state, that the title of Lélah Mdha-

rdja was given by the king to the Panghilis of the tribe Bédounda

Jakién, and that of Sédia Rdjato those of the Bédodnda Jawa; with

the exception of this custom, the office of Panghili is hereditary,

agreeably to the law of Perpati Sabatang prevailing in Menangkdbowe,

and provided the heir be not insane or an imbecile. The present

Panghili is of the tribe Bédoanda Jakin, he succeeded his predecessor

Bahdgo, of the tribe Bédodnda Jawa, in 1819.

Sukis.—Under the Panghéliarethe eight Sivkis, or heads of the tribes,

into which the population of Rumbdwe is divided; and who act as

their representatives in councils of state, where like the former Skis

of Naning and Svingie Ujong, they possess considerable influence.

Nothing of any public importance can be agreed on without their

concurrence ; and their unanimous vote on disputed points bears down

that of the Panghili. The Jang de-pertéan Besar and Muda always

exert more or less influence over their councils. The signature of the

Sukis is necessary to the ratification of any treaty, or other similar

public document.

Formerly there were only four Sékus who had share in the councils,

viz. those of Rumbéwe Ilir ; but latterly those of Rumbdéwe Uli have

been admitted, as alluded to above. This change was effected by the

policy of the two Jang de-pertians, in order to lessen the influence of

the Panghéli and former Sikis, and to increase their own.

The names of the tribes and titles of the individuals who represent

them are as follow:

Rumbéwe Ilir. ( Rumbéwe Uli.

Tribes. Heads of tribes. Tribes. Heads of Tribes. _

Battu Ampar, ..... Gompar Mahér§ja. Paya Kamba Darrat, .... Sama Raja.

Paya Kamba Barrat,.. . Méra Bongsa. Battu Ballang,.............+. Andika.

VEGIHCAl, oclas ets coe Sangsfira Pahléwan. | | Sa Melongang,........... Mendalika,

Tiga Nénik, ....... Bongsa de Balang. J | Sri Lummah,...... Senda Maharaja.

To this list may be added the names of four inferior tribes, which:

66 - - Account of Rumbéwe, one of the [F rs.

being scanty in number, and most of them of foreign origin, are repre-

sented by the heads of the more important tribes, viz. Tiga, Battu,

Anak Malacca, Anak Achi, (children of Malacca and Achin,) and Tan-

nah Dattar. ‘The Bododnda tribes are represented by the Panghiilis.

Malays, strangers to Rumbowe, while residing there, are amenable to

the head of the tribe to which they belong. Settlers are immediately

classed in their respective tribes. Those from Menangkdbdwe generally

enter that of Battu Ampar, which is the principal of the five tribes that

originally emigrated from Menangkabowe ; viz. those of Muncal, Bdttu

Ballang, Tiga Battu, and Tannah Dattar.

A man marrying into another tribe becomes a member of that of

the woman, as also the children.

Some of the tribes have peculiar privileges; it is said that the

Bédodndas, though guilty of the highest crimes, are exempt from capital

punishment ; banishment and fines being the only penalty to which

they are liable. The circumstance of the Panghilids of the independ-

ant states being necessarily Bédoandas has already been adverted to*.

Although the Malays, like the Greeks and Romans, entertain the

highest veneration for old age, still the claims of descent supersede

those conferred by years, particularly with regard to the heads of

tribes, who have precedence in the councils of the state, conformably

to the rank of the tribe they represent. An instance of this, and the

power sometimes exercised by the Sikis in election, fell under my own

observation. At Svingie Sipat, on the frontier of Rumbdwe, in 1833,

among the assembly of Malay chiefs there, I observed a boy, whose

dress and weapons betokened some rank, and to whom a considerable

degree of deference was shewn by the natives. On inquiring, I found

him to be the head of the principal tribe, and that, although a younger

brother, he had been elected by the Sukas as the head of his tribe or

clan, in consequence of his elder brother’s imbecility. This boy affixed

his name, or rather his mark, (for neither he nor any of his seven

compeers could write,) immediately after the Panghili of Rumbéwe,

before the rest of the Sékés, some of whom were venerable old men,

and grown grey in office.

Mantris.—There are two Mantris in Rumbdwe, viz. Surou Raja, and

Anvixa Mantri, both of the tribe Bédodnda Jawa.

Their functions are ill defined, but are principally, I believe, to assist

the chiefs with their advice.

* The division of the people of these states into tribes, some of which bear

the names of places in Menangkabéwe, is a strong additional proof of their

origin.

1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 67

They have no vote in councils, and their influence must be almost

entirely personal.

Laksdmana.—The Laksdmanasare also two, Passar and Kuatis. The

navigation of the river and maritime matters are entrusted to these

officers.

Panglimas.—The war-chiefs, or Panglimas, are four in number, viz.

two Panglima Prangs, Panp1xa Raja, and Panglima Dallam. Their

duties are similar to those of the former Panglimas of Naning.

Pertéma.—There is another officer, appointed by the Jang de pertiéian

Besar, whose functions, fortunately for the liege subjects of Rumbdwe,

are seldom called into exercise. This is the Pertdma, or executioner.

The modes of putting criminals to death are generally confined to the

Panchong ‘eo and Sdlang pls.

The former is decapitation: the latter has been already described.

Passing up the Rumbdwe river, on some high ground on the left bank

between Sempong and Padas, a leafless, blighted tree was pointed out

to me by one of the Laksdmanas who stated the foot of it to be the

place where criminals, subjects of Rumbdwe, were put to death by

Sdlang pu.

Religion.—The inhabitants of Rumbowe, like those of the other states

of the interior, with the exception of the aborigines, profess the tenets

of Islém. They are divided into seven Miikuns, or parishes, to each of

which is attached a mosque, with distinct establishments of priests, as

in Naning.

A Kazi named Ha’s1 Hasuim Sri Lummau presides over the whole.

The religious customs, fasts, and festivals are similar to those observed

in Naning.

Visit to Rumbéwe.—As Rumbéwe has seldom been penetrated by Eu-

ropeans, the following memoranda, from my note book, of a visit paid

to the chiefs at its capital, Bander, in 1832, by the then Governor of

the Straits, the-Honorable Mr. Ispetson, and Brigadier Witson, C.

B. may not perhaps be wholly devoid of interest.

Early on the morning of the 21st October, I joined from camp at

Alorgajeh, the Governor’s suite at Tabu, the principal village of

Naning, and late the residence of the ex-Panghtili Duout Sayan.

After breakfasting under one of the thatched quarters that had es-

caped the pioneer’s axe and brand on the late evacuation of this out-

post, the party started on horseback along a foot-path, through a wood-

ed country with the Rumbéwe hills on the right, to Chirdna pitih, the

last village of Naning. This was formerly a populous place. And the

residence of the ex-Panghiili’s sons, but we found it now entirely de-

serted, and its houses falling into rapid decay and ruin. Here it was

68 Account of Rumbdéwe, one of the [Fes.

stated that Duoit Saran had a manufactory for gun-powder during his

late resistance to the Company’s troops.

Leaving Chirdna pitih to the left,the path abruptly turns to the right,

over or rather through a muddy sdwah, and leads towards the foot of

Gunong Tampin. Along the skirt of this mountain, through a dense

forest, the party had to travel in Indian file, the narrow foot-path being

in several places blocked up by large forest trees lying across to Qabar

Feringt, or the Frank’s grave, which is a mere mound in the jungle.

This is one of the boundary marks of the Rumbéwe and Naning territo-

ries, and is traditionally said to be the grave of a Portuguese officer,

slain by the natives in one of those frequent skirmishes which took

place between the followers of the gallant ALBuquERQUE and the “ re-

bellious Menangkabéwes.”’ The path to Céndéng, from Qabar Feringi,

lay through the jungle at the foot of the Rumbdéwe range, and gradually

improved as we approached that village. Cdéndéng is a populous hamlet,

the first in the Rumbowe side of the boundary line, and is situated at the

foot of the mountain of Génong Rumbéwe, on whose steep sides, amidst

luxuriant forests, appeared singular patches of partially cleared ground,

and a few rude huts, the habitation of the lords of the woods and rocks,

the Jakins. None of their sylvan eminences however, nor their

attendant Hamadryades, condescended to favor the party with their

appearance.

From Céndéng to Pddang Léko, the forest decreased in size and

denseness, and here and there were traces of clearing and cultivation.

A few small verdant patches, not deserving the name of plains, and

two or three rivulets, were passed through. The distance from Céndéng

to Padang Loko is about three miles.

From Padang Léko to Ligon, the roadis bad, passing for the most

‘part over heavy rice-grounds. The cultivation increased progressively

as the belt of forest, the natural boundary between Naning and Rumbéwe,

was left behind, until we reached the banks of the Rumbowe river at

Lagon. This stream was just fordable ; its waters muddy, and evident-

ly swoln by the rains.

After passing by a miserable path over a very extensive and well

cultivated sheet of rice-ground, where the horses were frequently up

to the saddle flaps in mud, fording another stream, and crossing a

broad swampy plain, from the grassy tufts of which flew the startled

lapwing and whistling plover, the cavalcade halted before the mud fort

of Bander. From its gate issued a motley crowd of well-dressed

Malays, brandishing spears, muskets, pemurasses, (a sort of blunder-

buss,) and umbrellas of state, white and yellow, headed by the Muda

of Rumbdwe, and one of the sons of the Lang de pertian Besar, Raja Aut.

1836.] States in the Interior of Malacca. 69

The Governor, and Brigadier Witson, were received by these chiefs

with every demonstration of welcome and respect, conducted into the

fort, and ushered by Raja Aut into a large temporary building, appa-

rently erected for the occasion, opposite the Raja’s primitive palace of

thatch.

A salute from the fort jinjals was then fired, much to the discomfi-

ture of one of the pieces, which, possibly from not being accustomed

to powder, burst into divers rust-incrusted fragments.

Refreshments were served in, on a large flat tray; they consisted

principally of dried fruits, dates, conserves, and sweetmeats, in which,

as usual, sugar and oil were manifestly predominant. These were

placed on small China dishes, and a number of minute cups of the

same material, filled with the steaming infusion of Souchong, fresh from

China, sans sucre et sans lait, were warmly pressed upon us.

In the evening, Raja Ai introduced two antique ladies, dressed

with almost more than Spartan simplicity. The one his mother, the

Princess Dowager TuAnxku Purr, and the other, his venerated kins-

woman, his aunt. These ogresses of high degree would have rivalled

in flow of language and exuberance of gesticulation the most vivacious

dowagers, date 1770, Madame pu Drrranp always excepted.

TuAnxu Purtn is represented to be a woman of strong masculine

mind, and to have considerable influence over her son Raja Aut.

The fort of Bander consists of low mud walls, now covered with

grass, inclosing a space of ground about 80 yards square.

Around and outside of the walls runs a strong and high palisade.

Six high cavaliers of wood, roofed in with atap, overlook the faces of

the work. On each of their platforms two iron guns are mounted,

except on that over the gate-way, where there is a serviceable brass

gun, bearing the mark of the Dutch East India Company; the date

1756, A. D. and the maker’s name, Perer SEsst.

Besides the 12 guns in the cavaliers, were 18 or 20 jinjals lying

about the parapets. The houses of the RAja and his personal attend-

ants are within the area comprised by the fort walls.

After passing the night on mattresses and pillows, covered with dirty

red silk, embroidered in gold, and which had evidently been abstracted

from the Zendna, the party left Bander early on the following

morning.

The Governor and Brigadier Wison proceeded en route to Malacca

via Pddas and the Lingie river. Lieut. Batrour, of the Madras Artil-

lery, and myself, returned by Brissé, to camp, which we reached the

same evening.

70 Account of Rumbéwe, one of the Malacca States. {Fes.

Sayap Skzan, the present Lang de pertian Mida of Rumbéwe, is the

son of an Arab named Sayap Israutm by his concubine Sri Kamis, a

Malay slave girl, a Khdna-zada of Zain-up-Din, formerly Capitan

Maliyu in Malacca. He is a native of Chembong in Rumbéwe, whither

his father, a rigid zealot, had proceeded to promulgate and expound

the tenets of the Koran. ¢

His son, Sayap SABAN, principally resided in Rumbdéwe, but occa-

sionally at Malacca. Being naturally ambitious, he early sought to

connect himself by marriage with the ruling families in Rumbdwe, and

Siac, in Sumatra. He first married a daughter of the Lang de perttan

Mida of Jallabu, Raja Sapun, a son of the second Menangkabdowe

prince, Raja Apit. He then crossed the straits, and obtained the

hand of one of the Siac chief’s daughters. His next matrimonial con-

nexions were with Raja Aut’s family.

Sayap SABAN is young, active, and intriguing; but at present well

disposed to the British Government. Without the bigotry of his father

he entertains a thorough contempt for the apathetic opium-eating

Malay chiefs, his colleagues in power. He has a taste for war, and

proved of great service in placing his father-in-law, Raja Ati, over

the heads of his competitors. His activity both for and against the

troops in the Naning expeditions are well known.

By his own talents and address, the religious influence of his father,

and from his Arab extraction, a circumstance to which the Malays

invariably pay great deference and respect, and his high connexions, in

the securing of which he has shewn great tact and forethought, this

adventurer has risen to the Mada-ship of Rumbéwe, and is now aspiring

to the entire sovereignty of the states in the interior.

Brnniz, the present Panghili of Rumbdwe, is an elderly, grave person,

with an unpleasing cast of features purely Malayan. He is at heart

inimical to the claims of the Mada and Raja Aut. During the dis-

turbances at Lingie, in 1833, he shamefully deserted his stockade,

leaving it with several guns, and a quantity of ammunition, in the

hands of the vassal chief Karas; not without being strongly sus-

pected of having received a considerable bribe for this piece of treachery.

He assisted the ex-Panghili of Naning during the time he was in

arms against Government. BrEnnIE is addicted to opium-eating, and

like other Malays of this class, is. not, as experience has shewn, proof

against the temptations of a bribe coming in the shape of this fasci-

nating drug.

Among the Svkdés, few are men of any talent or worthy of any

particular notice. PakKar, an aspirant to the Panghili-ship, and Surow

1836.] Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities. 71

Raja, one of the Mantris, are much looked up to by the Malays, with

whom their opinions and councils have considerable influence.

I had an opportunity of hearing a very long improviso speech from

the latter of these Malayan Ciceros, at Siingie Sipat, on the boundary

question. His position, unlike that of European orators, was a squat-

ting one, on his hams, with the knees pliantly folded in front. The

style of his address, like that of the generality of Asiatics, was grave

and pompous; but the flow of his words easy and unbroken, except by

a few little attentions bestowed on his betel-pounder ( Godik), by which

his right-hand was kept in almost continual motion.

The speech, however, was so long, that the Panghili of Rumbéwe

was fairly snoring before the customary Ah, bagitu lah ! announced

the finale of the effusion. Touching the gift of eloquence, I have

observed that the Malays of the interior have generally a better and

freer manner of expressing themselves than those of the coast; the

language in which they clothe their sentiments is far more figurative,

and full of metaphors, drawn from natural objects, and cannot fail to

strike the hearer as highly pleasing and simply poetical. Their popular

traditions are seldom put to writing, beng committed to memory by

some of their elders, and sometimes by old Malay ladies of rank, who

are regarded by the simple natives, much in the light of a casket

containing a valuable gem. Many of their customs are singular and

peculiar, and deserving of more attention than has hitherto been paid

them.

11.— Quotations from Original Sanscrit Authorities in proof and illustration

of Mr. Hopeson’s Sketch of Buddhism.

[Continued from page 38.]

QUOTATIONS.

The Swabhavika Doctrine.

1. All things are governed or perfected by Swabhdva* : I too am

governed by Swabhdva. (Ashta Sahasrika.)

2. Itis proper for the worshipper at the time of worship to reflect

thus: Iam Nirlipt+, and the object of my worship is Nirlipt; I am

that God (Iswara) to whom I address myself. Thus meditating, the

worshipper should make puja to all the celestials: for example, to

Vajra Satwa Buddha, let him pay his adorations, first, by recollecting

that all things with their Vija mantras came from Swabhdva in this or-

* Swa, own, and bhdva, nature. Idiosyncrasis.

+ Intact and intangible, independent.

cds. 2

72 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Frs.

der :—from the vija* of the letter Y, air, from that of the letter R, fire ;

from that of the letter V, or B, water, and from that of the letter L,

earth ; and from that of the letter S, Mount Suméraz. On the summit

of Sumer is a lotos of precious stones, and above the lotos, a moon

crescent, upon which sits, supremely exalted, Vajra Satwa. And as

all (other) things proceed from Swabhdva, as also does Vajra Satwa,

thence called the self-existentt. (Puja kand.)

3. All things and beings (in the versatile universe) which are alike

perishable, false as a dream, treacherous as a mirage, proceed, according

to some, from Swabhdva, (nature,) and according to others, from God,

(Iswara ;) and hence it is said, that Swabhava and Iswara are essentially

one, differing only in name}. (Ashta Sahasrika.)

4. At the general dissolution of all things, the four elements shall

be absorbed in Sdénydkar-Akdsh (sheer space) in this order: Earth

in water, water in fire, fire in air, and air in Akdsh, and Akash in

Siunyata, and Sinydta in Tathata§, and Tathata in Buddha, (which

Maha Stnydta||) and Buddha in Bhavana, and Bhdvana in Swabhdva.

And when existence is again envolved, each shall in the inverse order,

progress from the other. From that Swabhava, which communicates

its property of infinity to Akash, proceeded into being, in Akdsh, the

letter A. and the rest of the letters ; and from the letters, Adi Buddha]

and the other Buddhas ; and from the Buddhas, the Bodhi-Satwas, and

from them the five elements, with their Vija Mantras. Such is the

Swabhdvika Sansar ; which Sansdr (universe) constantly revolves between

Pravritti and Nirvriiti, like a potter’s wheel. (Divya Avadan.)

* Root, radix, seed.

+ This may teach us caution in the interpretation of terms. I understand the

dogma to announce, that infinite intelligence is as much a part of the system of

nature as finite. The mystic allusion to the alphabet imports nothing more

than its being the indispensable instrument and means of knowledge or wisdom,

which the Buddhists believe man has the capacity of perfecting up to the stand.

ard of infinity.

t See the note on No. 3, on the Yatnika system.

§ Tathata, says the comment, is Satya Juyan ; and Bhdvana is Bhdva or Satta,

i. e. sheer entity.

|| See note on quotation 1 of the section A’di Buddha.

§ Here again I might repeat the caution and remark at quotation 2. I have

elsewhere observed, that Swabhavika texts, differently interpreted, form the basis

of the Aiswarixa doctrine, as well as that the Buddhas of the Swabhavikas, who

derive their capacity of identifying themselves with the first cause from nature,

which is that cause, are as largely gifted as the Buddhas of the Aiswarikas, deriv-

ing the same capacity from A’di Buddha, who is that cause. See remarks on

Remusat apud Journal of Bengal Asiatic Society, Nos. 32, 33, and 34.

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 73

5. Maha Sinydta is, according to some, Swabhdva, and, according

to others, Jswara; it is like the ethereal expanse, and self-sustained.

In that, Maha Sinydta, the letter A, which the Vija Mantra of Updya*,

and the chief of all the Vizja Mantras of the letters, became manifest.

(Rucha Bhdgavati.)

6. Some say creation is from God: if so, what is the use of Yatna

or of Karma t+? That which made all things, will preserve and destroy

them; that which governs Nirvritti, governs Pravritti also. (Buddha

Charitrakévya. )

7. The sandal tree freely communicates its fragrance to him who

tears off its bark. Who is not delighted with its odour? It is from

Swabhava. (Kalpalata.)

8. The elephant’s cub, if he find not leafless and thorny creepers

in the green wood, becomes thin. The crow avoids the ripe mangot.

The cause is still Swabhdva. (Do.)

9. Who sharpened the thorn? Who gave their varied forms,

colours, and habits to the deer kind, and to the birds? Swabhdva/ It

is not according to the will (tchchha) of any; and if there be no desire

or intention, there can be no intender or designer§. (Buddha Charitra.)

10. The conch, which is worthy of all praise, bright as the moon,

rated first among excellent things, and which is benevolent to all

sentient beings, though it be itself insensate, yields its melodious

music, purely by reason of Swabhdva. (Kalpalata.)

11. That hands and feet, and belly and back, and head, in fine,

organs of whatever kind, are found in the womb, the wise have attri-

* Upaya, the expedient, the energy of nature in a state of activity. See the

note on No. 6, of the section A’di Sangha.

t+ See the note on quotation 9 of this head. Yatna and Karma may here be

rendered by intellect and morality.

t These are assumed facts in Natural History; but not correct.

§ Here is plainly announced that denial of self-consciousness or personality

in the causa causarum which constitutes the great defect of the Swabhdvika

philosophy: and if this denial amount to atheism, the Swabhavikas are, for the

most part, atheists ; their denial also of a moral ruler of the universe being a neces-

sary sequel to it. Excepting, however, a small and mean sect of them, they all

affirm eternal necessary entity ; nor do any of them reject the soul’s existence be-

yond the grave, or the doctrine of atonement. Still NewTon’s is, upon the whole,

the right judgment, ‘ Deus sine providentia et dominio nihil est nisi fatum et

natura.’ The Swdébhavika attempts to deify nature are but a sad confusion of

cause and effect. But, in a serious religious point of view, I fail to perceive

any superiority possessed by the immaterial pantheism of Brahmans over the

material pantheism of the Buddhists. Metempsychosis and absorption ara

common to both,

74 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Fes.

buted to Swabhava ; and the union of the soul or life (A’tma) with body,

is also Swabhava. (Buddha Charitra Kavya.)

12. From Swabhdva (nature) all things proceeded; by Swabhdva

all things are preserved. All their differences of structure and of habits

are from Swabhava: and from Swabhava comes their destruction. All

things are regulated (suddha) by Swabhava. Swabhdva is known as

the Supreme. (Puja kand,—from the Rucha Bhagavati, where the sub-

stance is found in sundry passages).

13. Akash is Swabhavika, because it is established, governed, per-

fected (suddha) by its own force or nature. All things are absorbed in

it: it is uncreated or eternal; it is revealed by its own force; it is

the essence (A'tma*) of creation, preservation, and destruction ; it is the

essence of the five elements; it is infinite; it is intellectual essence

(Bodhandtmika). The five colours are proper to it; and the five

Buddhas ; and the letters. It is Sénydta; self-supported; omnipre-

sent: to its essence belong both Pravritti and Nirvritti. This Akdsh,

which is omnipresent, and essentially intellectual}, because infinite things

are absorbed into it, is declared to be infinite. From the infinite nature

of this Akash were produced all moving things, each in its own time,

in due procession from another, and with its proper difference of form

and habits. From the secret aature of Akdsh proceeded likewise,

together with the Viz Mantra of each one, air with its own mobility ;

and from air, fire with its own heat; and from fire, water with its

intrinsical coldness ; and from water, earth with its own proper solidity

or heaviness; and from earth, Mount Suméru with its own substance

of gold, or with its own sustaining power (Dhdtwdtmika) ; and from

Sumeru, all the various kinds of trees and vegetables; and from‘ them,

all the variety of colours, shapes, flavours, and fragrances, in leaves,

flowers, and fruits. Each derived its essential property (as of fire to

burn) from itself; and the order of its procession into existence from

the one precedent, by virtue of Swabhdva, operating in time. The

several manners of going peculiar to the six classes of animate beings

(four-legged, two-legged, &c.), and their several modes of birth, (ovi-

* One comment on the comment says, A’tma here means sthén or dlaya, i. e.

the wbi of creation, &c.

+ Akdsh is here understood as synonymous with Smydfta, that is, as the

elemental state of all things, the universal ubi and modus of primal entity, in a

state of abstraction from all specific forms: and it is worthy of note, that amidst

these prima! principles, intelligence has admission. It is therefore affirmed to

be a necessary end, or eternal portion of the system of nature, though separated

from self-consciousness or personality. In the same manner, Prdjna, the sum

of all things, Diva natura, is declared to be eternal, and essentially intelligent,

though a material principle.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 75

parous, &c.*) all proceeded from Swabhiva. From the Swabhiva of

each mansion or habitat (Bhavana) resulted the differences existing

between the several abodes of all the six orders of animate beings.

The existence of the foetus in the womb proceeds from the Swabhiva of

the union of male and female; and its gradual growth and assumption

of flesh, bones, skin, and organs, is caused by the joint energy of the

Swabhdva of the foetus, and that of time, or the Swabhdva of the foetus,

operating in time. The procession of all things from birth, through gra-

dual increase, to maturity ; and thence, through gradual decay, to death,

results spontaneously from the nature of each being; as do the differ-

ences appropriated to the faculties of the senses and of the mind, and

to those external things and internal, which are perceived by them.

Speech and sustenance from dressed food in mankind, and the want of

speech and the eating of grass in quadrupeds, together with the birth

of birds from eggs, of insects from sweat, and of the Gods (Devatds)

without parentage of any sort : all these marvels proceed from Swabhdva,

(Comment on the Puja kand, quotation 12.)

The Aiswarika System.

1. The self-existent God is the sum of perfections, infinite, eternal,

without members or passions; one with all things (in Pravritti), and

separate from all things (in Nirvritti), infiniformed and formless, the

essence of Pravritti and of Nirvrittit. (Swayambhi Purina.)

2. He whose image is Sdnydta, who is like a cypher or point,

infinite, unsustained (in Nirvritti), and sustained (in Pravritti), whose

essence is Nirvrittt, of whom all things are forms (in Pravritti), and

who is yet formless (in Nirvritti), who is the [swara, the first intellectual

essence, the A’di Buddha, was revealed by his own will. This self-

* By etcetera, understand always (more Brahmanorum). That Buddhism forms

an integral part of the Indian philosophy is sufficiently proved by the multitude

of terms and classifications common to it, and to Bréhmanism. The theogony

and cosmogony of the latter are expressly those of the former, with sundry addi-

tions only, which serve to prove the posteriority of date, and schismatical seces-

sion, of the Buddhists. M. Cousin, in his course of philosophy, notices the

absence of a sceptical schoo] amongst the Indian philosophers. Buddhism, when

fully explained, will supply the desideratum; and I would here notice the

precipitation with which we are now constantly drawing general conclusions

relative to the scope of Indian speculation, from a knowledge of the Bréhmanical

writings only—writings equalled or surpassed in number and value by those of

the Budddists, Jains, and other dissenters from the existing orthodox system of

Vydsa and Sankara A’chirya, _ '

+ Pravritti, the versatile universe; Nirvritti, its opposite, this world and the

next. Pravritti is compounded of Pra, an intensitive, aud vritti, action, occu-

pation, from the root vd, to blow as the wind; Niruritti, of Nir,a privative, and

vritti, as before.

76 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fes.

existent is he whom all know as the only true Being; and, though

the state of Nirvritti be his proper and enduring state, yet, for the

sake of Pravritti, (creation), having become Pancha-jnydndtmika, he

produced the five Buddhas thus ; from Suvi-suddha-dharma-dhdtuja jnyan,

Vairo chana, the supremely wise, from whom proceed the element of

earth, the sight, and colours; and from Adarshana-jnyan, Akshobhya,

from whom proceed the element of water, the faculty of hearing, and

all sounds; and from Pratyavekshana-jnydn, Ratna Sambhava, from

whom proceed the element of fire, the sense of smell, and all odours;

and from Samta-jnyan, Amitdbha, from whom proceed the element of

air, the sense of taste, and all savours; and from Krityanushtha-jnydn,

Amogha Siddha, from whom proceed the element of ether, the faculty

of touch, and all the sensible properties of outward things dependent

thereon. All these five Buddhas are Pravritti kémang, or the authors

of creation. They possess the five jnyans, the five colours, the five

mudras, and the five vehicles*. The five elements, five senses, and

five respective objects of sense, are forms of themt. And these five

Buddhas each produced a Bodhi-Satwa, (for the detail, see Asiatic

Society’s Transactions, vol. xvi.) The five Bodhi-Satwas are Srishti-

kamang, or the immediate agents of creation; and each, in his turn,

having become Sarvaguna, (invested with all qualities, or invested with

the three gunas,) produced all things by his fiat. (Comment on quot. 1.)

3. All things existent (in the versatile universe) proceed from some

cause (hétu): that cause is the Tathdgata} (Adi Buddha); and that

* See Appendix A.

+ The five Dhyani Buddhas are said ta be Pancha Bhita, Pancha Indriya, and

Pancha Ayatan dkar. Hence my conjecture that they are mere personifications,

according to a theistic theory of the phenomena of the sensible world. The

6th Dhydni Buddha is, in like manner, the icon and source of the 6th sense, and

its object, or Manasa ani Dharma, i. e. the sentient principle, soul of the senses,

or internal sense, and moral and intellectual phenomena. In the above passage,

however, the association of the five elements is not the most accredited one, which

(for example) associates hearing and sounds to Akash.

+ This important word is compounded of Tatha, thus, and gata, gone or got,

and is explained in three ways. Ist, thus got or obtained, viz. the rank of a

Tathdgata, obtained by observance of the rules prescribed for the acquisition of

perfect wisdom, of which acquisition, total cessation of births isthe efficient con-

sequence. 2nd, thus gone, viz. the mundane existence of the Tathagata, gone so

as never to return, mortal births having been closed, and Nirvritti obtained, by

perfection of knowledge. 3rd, gone in the same manner as it or they (birth or

births) came; the sceptical and necessitarian conclusion of those who held that

both metempsychosis and absorption are beyond our intellect (as objects of

knowledge), and independent of our efforts (as objects of desire and aversion—as

contingencies to which we are liable) ; and that that which causes births, causes

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 77

which is the cause of (versatile) existence is the cause of the cessation

or extinction of all (such) existence: so said Sdkya Sinha. (Bhadra

Kalpavadan.)

4, Body is compounded of the five elements : soul, which animates

it, is an enamation from the self-existent. (Swayambhu purdna.)

5. Those who have suffered many torments in this life, and have

even burned in hell, shall, if they piously serve the Trt Ratna (or Triad),

escape from the evils of both. (Avadin Kalpalatd.)

6. Susanovu (a Raja of Benares) was childless. He devoted himself

to the worship of [swara (A’di Buddha) ; and by the grace of Iswara

a sugar-cane was produced from his semen, from which a son was born

to him. The race* remains to this day, and is called Ixsuava Axv.

_ (Avadan Kalpalata.)

likewise (proprio vigore) the ultimate cessation of them. The epithet Tathdgata,

therefore, can only be applied to A’di Buddha, the self-existent, whois never

incarnated, in a figurative, or at least a restricted, sense;—cessation of human

births being the essence of what it implies. I have seen the question and

answer, ‘ what is the Tathagata? It does not come again,’ proposed and solved

by the Raksha Bhagavati, in the very spirit and almost in the words of the Vedas.

One of a thousand proofs that have occurred to me how thoroughly Indian

Buddhism is. Tathagata, thus gone, cr gone as he came, as applied to A’di

Buddha, alludes to his voluntary secession from the versatile world into that of

abstraction, of which no mortal can predicate more than that his departure and

his advent are alike simple results of kis volition. Some authors substitute this

interpretation, exclusively applicable to A’di Buddha, for the third sceptical and

general interpretation above given. The synonyme Sugata, or ‘ wellgone, for

ever quit of versatile existence,’ yet further illustrates the ordinary meaning of

the word Tathdgata, as well as the ultimate scope and genius of the Buddhist

religion, of which the end is, freedom from metempsychosis ; andthe means, perfect

and absolute enlightenment of the understanding, and consequent discovery

of the grand secret of nature. What that grand secret, that ultimate truth, that

single reality, is, whether all is God, or God is all, seems to be the sole propo-

situm of the oriental philosophic religionists, who have all alike sought to

discover it by taking the high priori road. That God is all, appears to be the

prevalent and dogmatic determination of the Brahmanists ; that all is God, the

preferential but sceptical solution of the Buddhists; and, in a large view, I

believe it would be difficult to indicate any further essential difference between

their theoretic systems, both, as I conceive, the unquestionable growth of the

Indian soil, and both founded upon transcendental speculations, conducted in

the very same style and manner.

* That of Sakya Sinha, and said by the Buddhists to belong to the solar line

of Indian Princes. Nor is it any proof of the contrary, that the Paurdnika

genealogies exhibit no trace of this race. Those genealogies have been altered

again and again, to suit current prejudices or partialities. The Brdhmans who

78 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fee.

7. When all was void, perfect void, (Sunya, Maha Siinya) the trili-

teral syllable Awm became manifest, the first created, the ineffably

splendid, surrounded by all the radical letters (Vija Akshara), as by a

necklace. In that Aum, he who is present in all things, formless and

passionless, and who possesses the Tri Ratna, was produced by his

own will. To him I make adoration. (Swayambhu purdna).

The Karmika System.

1. From the union of Updya and Prajna*, arose Manas, the lord

of the senses, and from Manas proceeded the ten virtues and the ten

vices; so said Sdkya Sinha. (Divya Avadan. }

2. The being of all things is derived from belief, reliance, (pratyaya,)

in this order : from false knowledge, delusive impression ; from delusive

impression, general notions ; from them, particulars ; from them, the

six seats (or outward objects) of the senses; from them, contact; from

it, definite sensation and perception; from it, thirst or desire; from it,

embryotic (physical) existence ; from it, birth or actual physical exist-

ence; from it, all the distinctions of genus and species among animate

things; from them, decay and death, after the manner and period

peculiar to each. Such is the procession of all things into existence

from Avidya, or delusion: and in the inverse order to that of their

procession, they retrograde into non-existence. And the egress and

regress are both Karmas, wherefore this system is called Kdrmika.

(Sdkya to his disciples in the Racha Bhagavati. )

3. The existence of the versatile world is derived sheerly from

fancy or imagination, or belief in its reality ; and this false notion is

the first Karma of Manas, or first act of the sentient principle, as yet

unindividualized ? and unembodied. This belief of the unembodied sen-

tient principle in the reality of a mirage is attended with a longing

after it, and a conviction of its worth and reality; which longing is

called Sanscar, and constitutes the second Karma of Manas. When

Sanscdr becomes excessive incipient individual, consciousness arises

(third Karma) ; thence proceeds an organised and definite, but arche-

typal body, the seat of that consciousness, (fourth Karma ;) from the

last results the existence of [the six sensible and cognizable properties

of] natural} objects, moral and physical, (fifth Karma.) When the

obliterated throughout India every vestige of the splendid and extensive litera-

ture of the Buddhas, would have little scruple in expunging from their own sacred

books the royal lineage of the great founder of Buddhism.

* See the note on quotation 6 of the section A’di Sangha. Also the note on

quotation 1 of the Yatnika system.

t+ So I render, after much inquiry, the Shad Ayatan, or six seats of the senses

external and internal; and which are in detail as follows: Rupa, Savda, Ganda,

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 79

archetypally embodied sentient principle comes to exercise itself on

these properties of things, then definite perception or knowledge is

produced, as that this is white, the other, black; this is right, the

other wrong, (sixth Karma.) Thence arises desire or worldly affection

in the archetypal body, (seventh Karma,) which leads to corporeal

conception, (eighth,) and that to physical birth, (ninth.) From birth

result the varieties of genus and species distinguishing animated nature,

(tenth Karma,) and thence come decay and death in the time and

manner peculiar to each, (eleventh and final Karma.) Such is the evolu-

tion of all things in Pravritti; opposed to which is Nirvritti, and the

Rasa, Sparsa, Dharma. There is an obvious difficulty as to Sparsa, and some

also asto Dharma. The whole category of the Ayatans expresses outward things :

and after much investigation, I gather, that under Rupa is comprised not only

colour, but form too, so far as its discrimination (or, in Kaérmika terms, its

existence) depends on sight; and that ali other unspecified properties of body

are referred to Sparsa, which therefore includes not only temperature, roughness,

and smoothness, and hardness, and its opposite, but also gravity, and even extend-

ed figure, though not extension in the abstract.

Here we have not merely the secondary or sensible properties of matter, but

also the primary ones ; and, as the ewistence of the Ayatans or outward objects

perceived, is said to be derived from the Indriyds, (or from Mdnas, which is their

collective energy,) in other words, to be derived from the sheer exercise of the

percipient powers. Nor is there any difficulty thence arising in reference to the

Kérmika doctrine, which clearly affirms that theory by its derivation of all things

from Pratyaya (belief), or from Avidya (ignorance). But the Indriydés and

Ayatdns, with their necessary connexion, (and, possibly, also, the making Avidya

the source of all things,) belong likewise to one section at least of the Swabhd-

vika school; aud, in regard to it, it will require a nice hand to exhibit this

Berkleyan notion existing co-ordinately with the leading tenet of the Swabhdvikas.

In the way of explanation I may observe, first, that the denial of material entity

involved in the Indriyé and Ayatan theory (as in that of Avidya) respects solely

the versatile world of Pravritti, or of specific forms merely, and does not touch

the Nirvrittika state of formative powers and of primal substances, to which

latter, in that condition, the qualities of gravity, and even of extended figure, in

any sense cognizable by human faculties, are denied, at the same time, that the

real and even eternal existence of those substances, in that state, is affirmed.

Second, though Dharma, the sixth Ayatdn, be rendered by virtue, the appro-

priated object of the internal sense, it must be remembered, that most of the

Swabhdvikas, whilst they deny a moral ruler of the universe, affirm the existence

of morality as a part of the system of nature. Others again (the minority) of

the Swabhdvikas reject the sixth Indriya, and sixth Ayatdn, and, with them, the

sixth Dhydni Buddha, or Vajrad Satwa, who, by the way, is the Magnus Apollo

of the Tdntrikds, a sect the mystic and obscene character of whose ritual is

redeemed by its unusually explicit enunciation and acknowledgment of a ‘* God

above all.’’

The published explanations of the procession of all things from Avidya appear

to me irreconcilably to conflict with the ideal basis of the theory. ’

mM 2

80 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Frs.

recurrence of Nirvritti is the sheer consequence of the abandonment

of all absurd ideas respecting the reality and stability of Pravritti, or,

which is the same thing, the abandonment of Avidya: for, when

Avidya is relinquished or overcome, Sanscéra and all the rest of the

Karmas or acts of the sentient principle, vanish with it; and also, of

course, all mundane things and existences, which are thence only

derived. Now, therefore, we see that Prauritti or the versatile world

is the consequence of affection for a shadow, in the belief that it is a

substance; and Nirvritti is the consequence of an abandonment of all

such affection and belief. And Pravritti and Nirvritti, which divide

the universe, are Karmas; wherefore the system is called Kdrmika.

(Comment on Quotation 2.)

4. Since the world is produced by the Karma of Manas, or sheer

act of the sentient principle, it is therefore called Karmika. The

manner of procession of all things into existence is thus. From the

union of Updya and of Prdéjna, Manas proceeded; and from Manas,

Avidya; and from Avidya, Sansedr ; and from Sanscdr, Viynydna; and

from Vijnydna, Namaripa ; and from Ndmartpa, the Shad Ayatan* ;

and from them, Vedana; and from it, Trishna; and from it, Upadin ;

and from it, Bhava; and from it, Jati; and from it, Jaramarana. And

from Jdtirupya Manas, (i. e. the sentient principle in organized animate

beings) emanated the ten virtues and ten vices. And as men’s words

and deeds partake of the character of the one or the other, is their

lot disposed, felicity being inseparably bound to virtue, and misery to

vice, by the very nature of Karma.

Such is the procession of all things into existence from Manas

through Avidyd ; and when Avidyd ceases, all the rest cease with it.

Now, since Avidyd is a false knowledge, and is also the medium of all

mundane existence, when it ceases, the world vanishes; and Manas,

relieved from its illusion, is absorbed into Updya Prajnat. Pravritti is

the state of things under the influence of Avidyd ; and the cessation of

Avidya is Nirvritti: Pravritti and Nirvritii are both Karmas. (Another

comment on quotation 2.)

* i. e. colour, odour, savour, sound, the properties dependent on touch, (which

are hardness, and its opposite, temperature, roughness and smoothness, and also

I believe gravity and extended figure,) and lastly, right and wrong. They are called

the seats of the six senses, the five ordinary, and oneinternal. In this quotation

I have purposely retained the original terms. Their import may be gathered

from the immediately preceding quotations and note, which the curious may

compare with Mr. CoLesrookn’s explication. See his paper on the Bauddhy

philosophy, apud Trans. Roy. As. Socy. quarto vol.

t The Vamdachdras say into Prajna Updya: see note on quotation 6 of the

section’ A’di Sangha.

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 81

5. The actions of a man’s former births constitute his destiny™.

(Punya paroda. )

6. He who has received from nature such wisdom as to read his

own heart, and those of all others, even he cannot erase the characters

which Vidhatrit has written on his forehead. (Avadan Kalpalatd.)

7. As the faithful servant walks behind his master when he walks,

and stands behind him when he stands, so every animate being is

bound in the chains of Karma. . (Ditto.)

8. Karma accompanies every one, every where, every instant,

through the forest, and across the ocean, and over the highest moun-

tains, into the heaven of Indra, and into Pdtdla (hell); and no power

can stay it. (Ditto.)

9. Kawn&u, son of king Asoxa’, because in one birth he plucked

out the golden eyes from a Chaityat, had his own eyes plucked out in

the next; and because he in that birth bestowed a pair of golden eyes

on a Chaitya, received himself in the succeeding birth eyes of unequal-

led splendour. (Avadan Kalpalata.)

10. Sa’xya Sinwa’s son, named Ra’HutaA BHaApRA, remained six

yearsin the womb ofhismother Yasopra. Thepainandanxiety of mother

and son were caused by the Karmas of their former births. (Ditto.)

11. Although I had required (Sdhkya speaks of himself) a perfect

body, still, even in this body, defect again appeared ; because I had yet

to expiate a small residue of the sins of former births. (Lallita Vistara.)

The Ydtnika System.

1. Iswara (A’di Buddha) produced Yatna from Prajna§ ; and the

cause of Pravritti and Nirvritti is Yatna ; and all the difficulties that

* Daivyd, identified with A’ di Buddhaby thetheistic, and with Fate, by the atheis-

tic doctors. The precise equivalent of the maxim itselfis our ‘ conduct is fate.’

+ Bramha, but here understood to be Karma.

t+ Chaitya is the name of the tomb temples or relic-consecrated churches of

the Buddhists. The essential part of the structure is the lower hemisphere :

above this asquare basement or Toran always supports the acutely conical or

pyramidal superstructure, and on all four sides of that basement two eyes are

placed. Wherever the lower hemisphere is found, is indisputable evidence

of Buddhism, e. g. ‘the topes’ of Manikdlaya and of Peshawar. In nicies at

the base of the hemisphere are frequently enshrined four of the five Diydni

Buddhas, one opposite to each cardinal point. Akshobhya occupies the eastern

nich ; Ratna sambhdva, the southern; Amitabha, the western, aud Amog/asidiha,

the northern. Vairochana, the first Dhydni Buddha, is supposed to occupy the

centre, invisibly. Sometimes, however, he appears visibly, being placed at the

right-hand of Akshobhya.

§ This, as I conceive, is an attempt to remedy that cardinal defect of the

older Swdbhdévika school, viz. the denial of personality, and conscious power

_and wisdom in the first cause. To the same effect is the Karmika assertion,

82 Quotations from original Sanscrit [Fes.

occur in the affairs of this world and the next are vanquished by Yatna

(or conscious intellectual effort). (Divya Avadan.)

2. That above mentioned Jswara, by means of Yatna, produced the

five Jnydns, whence sprang the five Buddhas. The five Buddhas, in

like manner, (i. e. by means of Yatna,) produced the five Bodhi satwas :

and they again, by the same means, created the greater Devatds from

their bodies, and the lesser ones, from the hairs of their bodies. In

like manner, Brauma’ created the three Lokas* and all moving and

motionless things. Among mortals, all difficulties are overcome by

Yatna ; for example, those of the sea by ships, those of illness by medi-

cine, those of travelling by equipages—and want of paper, by prepared

skin and bark of trees. And as all our worldly obstacles are removed

by Yatna, so the wisdom which wins Nirvritti for us is the result of

Yatna; because by it alone are charity and the rest of the virtues ac-

quired. Since therefore all the goods of this world and of the next

depend upon Yatna, Sa’kya SinnA wandered from region to region to

teach mankind that cardinal truth. (Comment on Quotation 1.)

3. That A’di Buddha, whom the Swabhdvikas call Swabhdva, and the

Aiswarikas, Iswarat, produced a Bodhi satwa, who, having migrated

through the three worlds, and through all six forms of animate exis-

tence, and experienced the goods and evils of every state of being,

appeared, at last, as Sukya Sinha, to teach mankind the real sources of

happiness and misery, and the doctrines of the four schools of philo-

sophy{; and then, by means of Yatna, having obtained Bodhi-jnyan,

and having fulfilled all the Pdramitds (transcendental virtues), he at

length became Nirvdn. (Divya Avadan.)

4. Sa’kya Sinna, having emanated from that self-existent which,

according to some, is Swabhdva, and according to others, is Iswara,

was produced for the purpose of preserving all creatures. He first

adopted the Pravritti Marga (secular character), and in several births

exercised Yatna and Karma, reaping the fruits of his actions in all the

three worlds. He then exercised Yatna and Karma in the Niruritti

that Manas proceeded from the union of Updya and Prajna. Karma I under-

stand to mean conscious moral effort, and Yatna, conscious intellectual effort,

Their admission in respect to human nature implies its free will, as their assig-

nation to the divine nature implies its personality.

* The celestial, terrene, and infernal divisions of the versatile universe.

+ Passages of this entirely pyrrhonic tenure incessantly recur in the oldest

and highest authorities of the Buddhists; hence the assertion of the preface

that Sugatism is rather sceptical than atheistically dogmatic.

t Expressly called in the comment the Swobhdwika, Aiswérika, Yatnikd, and

Karmika systems. I find no authority in Sangata books for the Brahminical

nomenclature of the Bauddha philosophical schools.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 83

Marga (ascetical or monastic character) essaying a release from this

mortal coil, fulfilling the ten virtues from the Satya to the Dwdpara

Yuga, till at last, in the Kali Yuga, having completely freed himself

from sublunary cares, having become a Bhikshuka*, and gone to Buddh

Gyd, he rejected and reviled the Braéhmanical penance, did all sorts of

true penance for six years under the tree of knowledge on banks of the

Niranjana river ; conquered the Namuchimarat, obtained Bodhi-jnyuan,

became the most perfect of the Buddhas, seated himself among the Bodhi

satwas, (Ananda ‘ Bhikshw’ and the rest,) granted wisdom to the simple,

fulfilled the desires of millions of people, and gave Nate to them

and to himself. (Lallita Vistdra.)

5. <A hare fell in with a tiger: by means of Yatna the hare threw

the tiger into a well. Hence it appears that Yatna prevails over phy-

sical force, knowledge, and the Mantras. (Bhadra Kalpavadan.)

6. Nara Srinua (Raja of Benares) was a monster of cruelty. Sarra

Swima Raja, by means of Yatna, compelled him to deliver up 100

Rajkumdrs, whom Nara Sinua had destined for a sacrifice to the gods.

(Bhadra Kalpavadan.)

7. Supwana KumAra found a beautiful daughter of a horse-faced

Raja named Dru’ma. By means of Yatna he carried her off, and kept

her ; and was immortalized for the exploit. (Swayambhu Purdna.)

A’di Buddha.

1. Know that when, in the beginning, all was perfect void (Mahé-

sunydta§), and the five elements were not, then A’di Buddha, the stain-

less, was revealed in the form of flame or light.

* Mendicant : one of the four regular orders of the Bauddhas.—See the Preface.

+ A Daitya of Kdnchanapara, personification of the principle of evil. Bodhi-

jnyan is the wisdom of Buddhism. ANANDA was one of the first and ablest of

Sa’kya’s disciples. The first code of Buddhism is attributed to him.

+ Emancipation, absorption.

§ The doctrine of Sunydta is the darkest corner of the metaphysical laby-

rinth. 18 kinds of Sunydta are enumerated in the Raksha Bhagavati. I under-

stand it to mean generally space, which some of our philosophers have held to

be plenum, others a vacuum. In the transcendental sense of the Buddhists, it

signifies not merely the universal ubi, but also the modus existendi of all things

in the state of quiescence and abstraction from phenomenal being. The Bud-

dhisis have eternised matter or nature in that state. The energy of nature ever

as, but is not ever everted ; and when not ewerted, it is considered to be void of

all those qualities which necessarily imply perishableness. Most of the Bud-

dhists deem (upon different grounds) all phenomena to be as purely illusory as

do the Vedantists. The phenomena of the latter are sheer energies of God;

those of the former are sheer energies of Nature, deified and substituted for God.

See note on quot. A’di Sangha. The Aiswarikas put their A’di Buddha in place

of the nature of the older Swobhdvikas. See Journal of As. Soc. No. 33, Art. 1.

&4 Quotations from Original Sanscrit [Fzs.

2. Hein whom are the three gunas, who is the Maha Mirti and

the Visvariipa (form of all things), became manifest: he is the self-

existent great Buddha, the A’di nath, the Maheswara.

3. He is the cause of all existences in the three worlds; the cause

of their well being also. From his profound meditation (Dhydn), the

universe was produced by him.

4. He is the self-existent, the Jswara, the sum of perfections, the

infinite, void of members or passions: all things are types of him, and

yet he was no type: he is the form of all things, and yet formless.

5. He is without parts, shapeless, self-sustained, void of pain and

care, eternal and not eternal*; him I salute. (Kéranda Vyiiha.)

6. A'di Buddha is without beginning. He is perfect, pure within,

the essence of the wisdom of thatness, or absolute truth. He knows all

the past. His words are ever the same.

7. Heis without second. He is omnipresent. He is Natratmya

lion to the Kiitirtha deert. (Nam sangiti.)

8. I make salutation to A’di Buddha, who is one and sole in the

universe ; who gives every one Bodhi-jnydn ; whose name is Updya ; who

became manifest in the greatest Sunydta, as the letter A. Who is the

Tathagata ; who is known only to those who have attained the wisdom

of absolute truth. (Ditto.)

9. As in the mirror we mortals see our forms reflected, so 4'di

Buddha is known (in Pravritti) by the 32 lakshanas and 80 anuvinjanas.

(Ditto.)

10. As the rainbow, by means of its five colours, forewarns mortals

of the coming weather, so does A’di Buddha admonish the world of its

good and evil actions by means of his five essential colours{. (Ditto.)

* One in Nirvritti ; the other in Pravritti ; and so of all the preceding con-

trasted epithets. Niérvritti is quiescence and abstraction: Pravritti, action and

concretion. All the schools admit these two modes, and thus solve the difficulty

of different properties existing in cause and in effects.

+ Comment says, that Nairatmyais ‘ Sarva Dharmandm nirabhas lakshanang ;’

and that Tirtha means Moksha, and Kétirtha, any perversion of the doctrine

of Moksha, as to say it consists in absorption into Brahm: and it explains the

whole thus, ‘ He thunders in the ears of all those who misinterpret Moksha,

there is no true Moksha, but Sunydta.’ Another comment gives the sense thus,

dividing the sentence into two parts, ‘ There is no atma (life or soul) without

him: he alarms the wicked as the lion the deer.’ The first commentator is a

Swobhdvika ; the second, an Aiswarika one.

~ White, blue, yellow, red, and green, assigned to the five Dhyani Buddhas.

For a detail of the Jakshanas, anuvinjanas, balas, basitas, &c. of the neighbour-

ing quotations, see Appendix A.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 85

11. A’di Buddha delights in making happy every sentient being ; he

tenderly loves those who serve him. His majesty fills all with reve-

rence and awe. He is the assuager of pain and grief. (Ditto.)

12. He is the possessor of the 10 virtues; the giver of the 10 vir-

tues : the lord of the 10 heavens ; lerd of the Universe: present in the

10 heavens. (Ditto.)

13. By reason of the 10 jnydns, his soul is enlightened. He too is

the enlightener of the 10 jnydns. He has 10 forms and 10 significa-

tions, and 10 strengths, and 10 basitas. He is omnipresent, the chief

of the Munis. (Ditto.)

14. He has five bodies, and five juydus, and five sights; is the

mukat of the five Buddhas, without partner. (Ditto.)

15. He is the creator of all the Buddhas: the chief of the Bodhi-

satwas are cherished by him. He is the creator of Prajnd, and of the

world; himself unmade. Aliter, he made the world by the existence of

Prajna ; himself unmade. He is the author of virtue, the destroyer of

all things*. (Ditto.)

16. He is the essence of all essences. He is the Vajra-dtma. He

is the instantly-produced lord of the universe; the creator of Akdsh.

He assumes the form of fire, by reason of the Prajnya-rupi-jnyan, to

consume the straw of ignorance. (Ditto.)

A’di Prajna, or Dharma.

1. I salute that Prajna Paramita, who by reason of her omniscience

causes the tranquillity-seeking Sravakast to obtain absorption ; who, by

her knowledge of all the ways of action, causes each to go in the path

suited to his genius, of whom wise men have said, that the external and

internal diversities belonging to all animate nature, as produced by her,

who is the mother of Buddha (Buddha Matra) of that Buddha to whose

service all the Srdvakas and Bodhi-satwas dedicate themselves. (Pan-

chavingsati Sahasrika. )

2. First air, then fire, then water, then earth{, and in the centre of

earth, Suméru, the sides of which are the residence of the 33 millions

* The comment on this passage is very full, and very curious, in as much as it

reduces many of these supreme deities to mere parts of speech. Here is the

summing up of the comment: ‘ He (A’di Buddha) is the instructor of the Bud-

dhas and of the Bodhi-satwas. He is known by the knowledge of spiritual

wisdom. He is the creator and destroyer of all things, the fountain of virtue.’

Spiritual wisdom is stated to consist of Sila, Samddhi, Prdjnd, Vimtkhti, and

Jnydn.

+ Name of one of the ascetical orders of Buddhists. See Preface.

t In this enumeration of material elements, Akdsh is omitted: but it is men-

tioned, and most emphatically, in quo. 4, as in the 50 other places quoted. In

86 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fes.

of gods (Devatds), and above these, upon a Lotos of precious stones,

sustaining the mansion of the moon (or a moon-crescent) sits Prdjnd

Paramita, in the Lallita-dsan manner* ; Prdjnd, the mother of all the

gods (Prasi-bhagavatang), and without beginning or end, (anddyant.)

( Bhadra Kalpavaddn.)

3. I make salutation to the Prajnd Devi, who is the Prajna Paramita,

the Prajna rupa, the Nir rupa, andthe universal mother. (Puja kand.)

4. Thou Prajna art, like Akash, intact and intangible; thou art

above all human wants; thou art established by thy own power. He

who devoutly serves thee serves the Tathagata also. (Ashta Sahasrika.)

5. Thou mighty object of my worship! thou Prajna, art the sum of

all good qualities; and Buddha is the Gari of the world. The wise

make no distinction between thee and Buddha. (Ashta Sahasrika.)

6. O thou who art merciful to thy worshippers, the benevolent,

knowing thee to be the source of Bauddha excellence, attain perfect

happiness by the worship of thee! (Ditto.)

7. Those Buddhas who are merciful, and the Giirds of the world, all

such Buddhas are thy children. Thou art all good, and the universal

mother (Sakaljagat Pita Mahi). (Ditto.)

8. Every Buddha assembling his disciples instructs them how from

unity thou becomest multiformed and many named. (Ditto.)

9. Thou comest not from any place, thou goest not to any place.

Do the wise nowhere find theet ? (Ditto.)

10. The Buddhas, Pratyéka Buddhas, and Srdavakast, have all de-

voutly served thee. By thee alone is absorption obtained. These are

truths revealed in all Shdstras. (Ditto.)

11. What tongue can utter thy praises, thou of whose being (or

manifestation) there is no cause by thy own will. No Purdna hath

revealed any attribute by which thou mayest certainly be known. (Ditto.)

12. When all was Sunydta, Prdajnd Devi was revealed out of Akdsh

with the letter U; Prajnd, the mother of all the Buddhas and Bodhi-

satwas, in whose heart Dharma ever resides; Prdjnd, who is without

the world and the world’s wisdom, full of the wisdom of absolute truth :

like manner, the five elements are frequently mentioned, without allusion to the

6th, which however occurs in fit places. Omission of this sort is no denial.

* i. e. one leg tucked under the other, advanced and resting on the bow of

the moon-crescent.

+ The force of the question is this, the wise certainly find thee.

t The Buddhas are of three grades: the highest is Maha Ydna, the medial,

Pratycéka, and the lowest, Sravdka. These three grades are called collectively

the Tri-Ydna, or three chariots, bearing their possessors to transcendental glory.

1836. ] Authorities on Buddhism. 87

the giver and the ikon of that wisdom; the ever living (Sanatanzt) ;

the inscrutable; the mother of Buddha*. (Puja kand.)

13. O Prdjné Dévi! thou art the mother (Janani) of all the Bud-

has, the grandmother of the Bodhi-satwas, and great grandmother of

all (other) creatures! thou art the goddess (Isdénz). (Ditto.)

14. Thou, Sri Bhagavati Dévi Prajna, art the sum of all the sci-

ences, the mother of all the Buddhas, the enlightener of Bodhi-jnydn,

the light of the universe! (Gunakdranda Vyiha.)

15. The humbler of the pride of Namuchi-mara, and of all proud

ones : the giver of the quality of Satya ; the possessor of all the sciences,

the Lakshmi; the protector of all mortals, such is the Dharma Ratna.

(Ditto.)

16. All that the Buddhas have said, as contained in the Mahd Yana

Sétra and the rest of the Satras, is also Dharma Ratnat. (Ditto.)

17. Because Buddha sits on the brow, the splendour thence derived

to thy form illuminates all the ethereal expanse, and sheds over the

three worlds the light of a million of suns, the four Devatds, Brahma,

Vishnu, Mahésa, and Indra, are oppressed beneath thy feet, which is ad-

vanced in the Alir-Asan. O Arya Tard! he who shall meditate on thee

in this form shall be relieved from all future births. (Saraké Dhardt.)

18. Thy manifestation, say some of the wise, is thus, from the

roots of the hairs of thy body sprang Akash, heaven, earth, and hades,

together with their inhabitants, the greater Devatds, the lesser, the

Daityas, the Siddhds, Gandharbas, and Nagas. So too (from thy hairs),

wonderful to tell! were produced the various mansions. of the Buddhas,

together with the thousands of Buddhas who occupy them§. From

thy own being were formed all moving and motionless things without

exception. (Ditto.)

19. Salutation to Prajna Dévi, from whom, in the form of desire,

* Sugatja, which the Vdmdachadrs render, ‘ of whom Buddha was born ;?

the Dakshindchars, ‘ born of Buddha,’ or goer to Buddha, as wife to husband.

+ Hence the scriptures are worshipped as forms of A’di Dharma Siétra, means

literally thread (of discourse), aphorism. Sédkya, like other Indian sages, taught

orally, and it is doubtful if he himself reduced his doctrines to a written code,

thongh the great scriptures of the sect are now generally attributed to him.

Sitra is now the title of the dvo%s of highest authority among the Bauddhas.

t+ Composed by Sarvajna Mitrapada of Kashmir, and in very high esteem,

though not of scriptural authority.

§ These thousands of Buddhas of immortal mould are somewhat opposed to

the so called simplicity of Buddhism !! whatever were the primitive doctrines

of Sékya, it is certain that the system attributed to him, and now found in the

written authorities of the sect, is the very antipodes of simplicity.

N 2

88 Quotations fram original Sanscrit [Fus.

the production of the world was excellently obtained*, who is beauti-

ful as the full moon, the mother of A’di Buddha, (Jinindra Matra,) and

wife of (the other) Buddha, who is imperishable as adamant. (Sddhana

Mala.)

20. That Yoni, from which the world was made manifest, is the

Trikonakar Yantra. In the midst of the Yantra or trikon (triangle) is a

bindé (point, cypher) : from that bind, A'di Prdjnd revealed herself by

her own will. From one side of the triangle A’di Prajnd produced

Buddha, and from another side, Dharma, and from the third side,

Sangha. That A’di Prdjnd is the mother of that Buddha who issued

from the first side ; and Dharma, who issued from the second side, is

the wife of the Buddha of the first side, and the mother of the other

Buddhas. (Comment on quotation 19.)

21. Salutation to Prdéjnd Puramitd, the infinite, who, when all was

void, was revealed by her own will, out of the letter U. Prdjnd, the Sakti

of Updya, the sustainer of all things, (Dharmiki) the mother of the

world, (Jagat-métra ;) the Dhyénr ipa, the mother of the Buddhas. The

modesty of women is a form of her, and the prosperity of all earthly

things. She is the wisdom of mortals, and the ease, and the joy, and

the emancipation, and the knowledge. Prdjndé is present every where.

(Sadhana Maia.)

Adi Sangha.

1. That A’mitabha, by virtue of his Samta-jnydn, created the Bodhi-

satwa named Padma-pdni, and committed to his hands the Jotost.

(Gunakaranda Vyiiha.)

* Dharmadya-sangata Kamrupini, variously rendered, ‘ well got from the rise

of virtue,’ ‘ well got from the rise or origin of the world;’ also as in text, Dhar-

madya, the source of all things, signifies likewise the Voni, of which the type

is atriangle. See 20. The triangle is a familiar symbol in temples of the Buddha

Saktis, and of the Triad. f, The point in the midst represents either

A’di Buddha or A’di Prajna, according to the theistic or atheistic tendency of

his opinions who uses it. Our commentator is of the Vamdchér or Atheistic

school, and such also is his text.

+ Type of creative power. <A’mitabha is the 4th Dhyani or celestial Buddha:

Padma-péni is his Afon and executive minister. Padma-péni is the presens Divus

and creator of the ewisting system of worlds. Hence his identification with the

third member of the Triad. He is figured as a graceful youth, erect, and bearing:

in either hand a Jotos and a jewel. The last circumstance explains the meaning

of the celebrated Shadakshari Mantra, or six-lettered invocation of him, viz. —

Om! Mane padme hom! of which so many corrupt versions and more corrupt

interpretations have appeared from Chinese, Tibetan, Japanese, Mongolese,

and other sources. The mantra in question is one of three, addressed to the

several members of the Triad. But the presens Divus, whether he be Augustus

or Padma-pdni, is every thing with the many. Hence the notoriety of this

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 89

2. From between his (Padma-pdni’s) shoulders sprang Brahma ;

from his forehead, Maha Déva ; from his two eyes, the sun and moon ;

from his mouth, the air; from his teeth, Saraswati; from his belly,

Varuna; from his knees, Lakshmi; from his feet, the earth; from his

navel, water; from the roots of his hair, the Jndras and other Devatds.

(Ditto.)

3. For the sake of obtaining Nirvritti, I devote myself to the feet of

Sangha, who, having assumed the three Guzas, created the three worlds.

(Puja kand.)

4. He (Padma-pdni) is the possessor of Satya Dharma, the Bodhi-

satwa, the lord of the world, the Mahd-satwa, the master of all the

Dharmas. (Gunakdaranda Vyiha).

5. The lord of all worlds, (Sarvalokadhipa,) the Sri-man, the Dharma

Rija, the Lokéswara, sprang from A’di Buddha* (Jinatmuja.) Such is

he whom men know for the Sangha Ratna. (Ditto.)

6. From the union of the essences of Upéya and of Prdjnat pro-

ceeded the world, which is Sangha.

mantra, whilst the others are hardly ever heard of, and have thus remained

unknown to our travellers.

* From A’mitabha Buddha immediately : mediately from A’di Buddha.

+ Such is the Aiswarika reading. The Prdjnikas read ‘from the union of

Prajna and Updya.’

With the former, Updya is A’di Buddha, the efficient and plastic cause, or

only the former; and Prdjndis A’di Dharma, plastic cause, a biunity with

Buddha, or only a product. With the latter, Updya is the energy of Prdjna,

the universal material cause.

The original aphorism, as I believe, is, ‘ Prdjnoupayatmakang jagata,’ which

I thus translate: ‘ From the universal material principle, in a state of activity,

proceeded the world.’ This original Sutra has, however, undergone two trans-

formations to suit it to the respective doctrines of the Triadic Aiswarikas andof the

Karmikas. The version of the former is, Updyprdjnamakang sangha ; that of the

latter is, Updyprajnatmakang manasa. Of both, the Updya isidentical with A’ di

Buddha, and the Prdjnd with A’di Dharma. But the result—the unsophisti-

cated jagat of the Prdjnikas, became A’di Sangha, a creator, with the Aiswarikas ;

and Manasa, the sentient principle in man, the first production, and producer

of all other things, with the Karmikas. Avidya, or the condition of mundane

things and existences, is an illusion, alike with the Prdjnikas and with the

Kédrmikas. But, whilst the former consider Avidya tbe universal affection of

the material and immediate cause of all things whatever ; the latter regard Avidya

as an affection of manas merely, which they hold to be an immaterial principle

and the mediate cause of all things else, A’di Buddha being their final cause.

The phenomena of both are homogeneous and unreal: but the Prdjnikas derive

them, directly, from a material source—the Kdrmikas, indirectly, from an

immaterial fount. Oursober European thoughts and languages can scarcely

90 Quotations from original Sanscrit (Fes.

P. S. With regard to the consistency or otherwise of the view of

the subject taken in the sketch of Buddhism, with the general tenor of

the foregone quotations, 1 would observe, that the ideal theory involved

in the Prajnika, Swabhdvika, and in the Karmika doctrines, was omit-

ted by me in the sketch, from some then remaining hesitation as to

its real drift, as well as its connexion with those schools, and no

other. Upon this exclusive connexion I have still some doubt. For

the rest, I retain unchanged the opinions expressed in the sketch, that

the Karmika and Ydtnika schools are more recent than the others—

that they owe their origin to attempts to qualify the extravagant quiet-

ism of the primitive Swabhdvikas, and even of the Aiswarikas—and

that their contradistinguishing mark is the preference given by them

respectively to morals, or to intellect, with a view to final beautitude.

The assertion of the Ashtasahasrika, that Swabhava, or nature absolutely

disposes of us, not less than the assertion of others, that an immaterial

abstraction so disposes of us, very logically leads the author of the

Buddha Charitra to deny the use of virtue or intellect. To oppose

these ancient notions was, I conceive, the especial object of those who,

by laying due stress on Karma and Yatna, gave rise to the Karmika

and Yatnika schools. But that these latter entertained such just and

adequate notions of God’s providence, or man’s free will, as we are

familiar with, it is not necessary to suppose, and is altogether impro-

bable. None such they could entertain if, as I believe, they adopted

the more general principles of their predecessors. The ideal theory

or denial of the reality of the versatile world, has, in some of its

numerous phrases, a philosophical foundation ; but its prevalence and

popularity among the Buddhists are ascribable principally to that enthu-

siastic contempt of action for which these quietists are so remarkable.

Their passionate love of abstractions is another prop of this theory.

cope with such extravagancies as these: but it would seem we must call the one

doctrine material, the other, immaterial, idealism.

The phenomena of the Prdjnikas are sheer energies of matter, those of the

Karmikas, are sheer (human) perceptions. The notions of the former rest on

general grounds—those of the latter, on particular ones, or (as it has been

phrased) upon the putting the world into a man’s self; the Greek ‘ panton

metron anthropos.’

Erratum in No. 49, January, 1836, ;

Page 30, line 2 of note, for ‘ preferred,’ ead * postponed,’

»» (et passim) for ‘ Sangata,’ read ‘ Saugata.’

1836. j Authorities on Buddhism. — 91

APPENDIX A.

Detailed Enumeration of some of the principal Attributes of A’p1 Buppua, re-

Serred to in the proceeding Quatations under that Head.

aifareaarts |

SaleasiwTZagTar &

aifafeaqiiuqiaaat %

BTM TTHA ITs AGA z

BTAWUTHT SATA & BAR<aT Y.

Siea fear ¢ gaaufaa © Wawa =

wsaagizal ¢€ waltraat ve

CHAHTAT YY WITNSAT

arunaafargqar 2 srraway Qe

Waal Ta Qy gefauranatiaa ve

BUPGAHATSAT fasqaraaraat yc

guzaesat ye fauiaciaar ze

CTACATAT RQ Byufcawaar

saulufncear Xe wHafseaT ke

WMACA RY fFeeqal Xf WaTAAT 9

waeaa VS SAaHraafAaT ve

uafacsemat 2° Gaqaftmemar 2h

afanaaaat 3k

aatta asratte |

giaateat ( fawaqant & qaaaar 2

adafeat 2 wagarafear 4 wefacat ¢

faatafacat 9 weaenat = afawnuica ¢

feefamramfaat to atafamrnafaar 3%

<afaaramfaat 22 saufamratfaar 22

gefauafaat ve ~aieafaar fy

wsaamfaat (¢ ZAMNAAT Yo WemMAar we

WAgamsat Ye Wraaraat eo Wearsar Ry

fanamraar ke ouf<tymasaat 22

SYMRASIMNAA RL WAMAAT vy

fangawar ke BMAtaraaT xo

SAMA Re VRTSMaAT ee

TACHTAT Bo YAHMAAT By

Sfawmiayaaat ee fafafatnarmiaar 22

eaigtgat ee wegfsat 24

wuagtad ec aawafaar eo

92 Quotations from original Sanscrit

aMcafwar ex gsafamanafrar ec

wansiufenat vo whyaqeracar 22

QYUMATATAMAAT eR

AMASMGRATIUWA ve

fevauifusfaa ee witcarfwafear ey

sraaqaiwefaat ed aarqaaqaqaar vo

farasfafaareat es wafsieat ee

aafaear yo Haafsrarear ay

TalHEAT YR BAYCVTAAMATAT Ye

BuSyaT we MWeyaT wy Weewat ue

WHSEA YO BWaydeyar we quarfeaar ue

Nirwana ¢e fawisaaaT €%

faqqa@at ¢2 Ghadanawewaaar ¢3

wiyaaaat ge Wenger eh arena ¢¢

WaaasstTa ¢o WaRWaT ea

aaueaatigaar ge suftaregeat oe

TYMMSAT OY GIUCLVAATAT OF

BVaCIeMANaT oy TaaawaT o8

wgaral 9% Bsafwarawar og

Hqywatar oo OBcfwawar oa

aaspaainaieatsteatfwaeaaar o¢ co

wa qurta |

aa to dts 2 Ta 8 TH 8 wa yu

Sx UTefaat |

zm oy we 8 ais & Te 8 wa Y.

Gat ¢ Way os aw = yfufe ¢ Wer ve

za aaatta |

gafat % faae & suTATT & atau 8

gave 4. wfwqet ¢< tia 9

arent S waaTHT aaa

ea Bratt |

=: RTA Q aqeaaa » fatranra 2

aga & YAN & Bana ¢ wdefaar o

wifanadt FC Wa € BawMeyad yo

SATAHTRT |

afaarart: § HEAT & QwrHt: 2

aTATHIT: 8 BAUR: % wWeamefstryrac ¢

arafatrarae: © uafafatrarar: =

aarti: ¢ vfaafatrararc: Qe

[Fes.

1836. } Authorities on Buddhism.

Sarat: |

STUY & BIATY & WaTATS 2

C SELLS >

Vay 2 AWAY Y RA € BATTY 9

La ~ s . NN

amy cS eqenmsy ¢ WAAAY Yo

ex qatfa |

QNBAaMIas ( Rafawawaqs x

aaagqaaad 2 aafagiuraqrs 2

Barfequawcsaarey &

aqanfasfauamard = ¢

wie faa vats sarufa San Baete

waaay o yifraarafamadd =

sqafiaaat ¢€ Waadywiadd eo

Za afaat: |

ara farer fauafeat 2 ufeercafwat 2

vagina 2 ufaafwar 4 saafwat ¢

ufaafaafaar 9 sfwuraafwar =

Haatea ¢ Waafwat ye

Ta AAT: |

waaay: &% dara: & faarwara: 2

azwgaanry: & Waray 8

Ta wa |

Waa: 8 aaa R ready: =e feray ez

qaqd 4

xfaqeraatfeaarar: |

WT Btrewryat Frayer |

wqagaa w. afeireayat z

Bwuaaesuyal 8 Wayarwyar ev

AVIA Y Wawel ¢ WHAT ©

BIIUya = yaaa ¢«

BAARMA Yo WAAHITMAT VY

Tarawa YX WaNAMAAT ve

SIITATAT (8 HAISGHWYAT Vy

SUIT (CF BMAALAZA ro

BUFSHIRYaT UY

adiat fants aya: SaUAAT Ve

SIGTLYA x

94 Quotations from original Sanscrit {Frr.

APPENDIX B.

Classified Enumeration of the principal Objects of Bauddha Worship.

Ekamndya.

Upaya.

‘Adi- Buddha.

Maha-Vairochana.

Ekamndyt.

Prajna.

Prajna-paramita.

Dwaydmndya.

1. 2,

Upaya. Prajna, { Root of theistic doctrine.

1. 2.

Prajna. Upaya, { Root of atheistic ditto.

Trayamndaya.

2. iG 3.

Dharma. Buddha. Sangha.

2. I. 3.

Sangha. Buddha. Dharma.

ie 2. ae

Buddha. Dharma. Sangha.

Pancha-Buddhamnaya.

4. 2. 1. 3. 5.

Amitabha, Akshobhya. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Amoghasiddha.

Pancha-Prajndmnayl.

4. 2. hs 3. 5.

P4ndara. Lochan4. Vajradhdtwisvari. Mdémaki, Tara.

Pancha-Sanghamndya.

4. 2. ite 3. 5.

Padmapani. Vajrapani. Samantabhadra. Ratnapdni, Viswapani.

Pancha-Sangha- Pr ajnamndyt.

4. 2. 1. 3. 5.

Bhrikuti-taré. Ugratéré. Sitataraé. Ratnatara. Viswatdra.

Matdntara-Pancha-Buddhdmndaya.

ile 2. 3. 4. 5.

Vairochana. Akshobhya. Ratnasambhava. Amitdbha. Amoghasiddha.

Matdntara-Pancha-Prajndmndyt.

We 245 ° 4. 5-

Vajradh4twisvart. Lochané. MAmakt. Pandaré. Tard.

Matdntara-Pancha-Sanghamnaya.

1. 2. 3. 4, 5.

Samantabhadra. Vajrapdni. Ratnapdni. Padmapéni. Viswapani.

Matdntara-Pancha-Sangha-Prajndmndyt.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Sitatéré. Ugratdré. Ratnatéré. Bhrikutitéra. Visvatard.

Matdntara-Pancha-Buddhamndya.

4. 2. 1. 3. 5.

Amitabha. Amoghasiddha. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Akshobhya.

Matdntara-Pancha-Prajndmndyt.

4. 2. ile 3. 5.

Tara. Mdémaki. Vajradhdtwisvari. Pdndar4. Lochana.

Shad-A’mndya-Buddhah.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Vairochana. Akshobhya. Ratnasambhaya. Amitabha, Amoghasiddha. Vajrasatwa.

1836.] Authorities on Buddhism. 95

Shat-Prajndmndyt.

Ve 2. Se 4, 5. 6. 4

Vajradhétwisvari. Lochan4. Mémaki. Pdndaré. Tara. Vajrasatwatmika.

Shat-Sanghdmnaya.

}. 2. 3. 4, . .

Samantabhadra. Vajrapdni. Ratnapani. Padmap4ni. Viswapéni. Ghantapani.

Ménushtya-Sapta-Buddhamnaya.

1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. Te

Vipasyi. Sikhi. Viswabhaé. Kak@tsanda. Kanakamuni. Kasyapa. S4kyasinha.

Matdntara-Mdnushtya-Sapta-Buddhamndya.

6. 4. 2. es 3. 5. le

Kasyapa. Kakftsanda. Sikhi. Vipasyi. Viswabhf. Kanakamuni. S4kyasinha.

Prajnd-Misrita-Dhydni-Nava-Buddhdmndya.

2. 1. Bie

Akshobhya. Vairochana-Vajradhatwisvari. Ratnasambhava.

8. 6. 4. = 5. ie 9.

Pindaré. Lochana. Amitaébha. Amoghasiddha. Maémaki. Tara.

Dhydni-Nava-Buddhdinndya.

4, 2. Te ‘ 3. 5.

Amitabha. Akshobhya. Vairochana. Ratnasambhava. Amochasiddha.

8. 6. 7. 9.

Vajradharma, Vajrasatwa. Vajraraja. Vajrakarma.

DhyGni-Nava-Prajndmnayt.

4. 2. 1B 3. 5.

Péndaré. Lochandé. Vajradhdtwisvari. Mdmaki. Tara.

8. . . :

Dharmavajrini. VajrasatwAtmika. Ratnavajrini. MKarmavajrini.

DhyGni-Nava-Sanghamndyah.

4. ° 1. 3. 5.

Padmapdni. Vajrapdni. Samantabhadra. Ratnapani. Viswapéni.

8. 6. 7. 9.

Dharmapani. Ghantapdni. Manipani. Karmapani.

Misrita-Nava-Buddhémndydndm ete Misrita-Nava-Sanghamndydh.

2. . oe

Maitreya. Avalokiteswara. Gaganaganja.

6. 4, 5. ilo

Manjughosha, Samantabhadra. Vajrapani. Sarva-nivarana-vishkambhi.

5. 9.

Kshitigarbha. Khagarbha.

Misrita-Nava-Buddhamndyanam ete Nava-Dharmamndyéth Paustakah Buddha- Dhar -

ma-sangha-Mandale Péijanakrame étan Milam.

2. 1. 3.

Gandavyaha. Prajn4-piramitaé. Dasabhimiswara.

6. ; 4. . B

Saddharmapundarika. Samadhiréja. Lankavatira. Tathagataguhyaka.

8. .

Lalita-vistara. Suvarna-prabha.

Nava-Bodhisatwa-Sangha-Prajndmndyah.

4. 2. l. 3. 5.

Sitataéra. Maitrayani. Bhrikutitéra. Pushpatara. Ekajata.

8. 6. 7- g.

Dipataré. Vdgiswari. DhGpatar4. Gandhatara.

Nava- Devt-Prajndmnayt.

2. ie a 8. 4.

Vajravidérini. Vasundharé. Ganapati-hridayé. Maérichi. Ushnisha-vijaya.

4 8. 9.

Parnasavari. Grahamatriké. Pratyangiré. Dhwajdgrakeyfri.

oO. 2

96 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fxs.

Misrita-Nava-Dharmamnayah.

4. 7 le 3. 5.

Pandaré. Lochané. Vajradh4twiswari. Mémaki. Tara.

Ss. 6. 7. 9.

Pratyangiré. Vajrasatwatmiké. Vasundharé. Guhyeswari.

Manushiya-Nava-Buddhaémnayah.

4. 2. 1. 3.. 5.

Sikhi Ratnagarbha. Dipankara. Vipasyi. Viswabht.

8. 6 e 7 ° 9.

Kasyapa. Kakutsanda. Kanakamuni. Sékyasinha.

Mdanushtyé-Nava-Buddhdémndydi.

die 2. 3. 4. 5.

Dipankara. Ratnagarbha. Vipasyi. Sikhi. Viswabha.

6. A 8. .

Kakutsanda. Keene! Kasyapa. Seine

Ménushtya-Nava-Prajnémnéayt.

I. 2. 3. 4, 5.

Jwalavati. Lakshanavati. Vipasyanti. Sikhdémélini. Viswadhara,

6. : 8. Ee

Kakudvati.. Kianithancandlint) Mahidhara. Scan

Nava Bhikshu-Sanghamndyah.

1. 2. 3. 4. :

Pradipeswara. Ratnaraja. Mahamati. Ratnadharé. A'kdsaganja.

6. : 8. ;

Sakalamangala. Kanakaraja. Dharmodara,. Pe

Iti Srt-Ekamndydadi-Navaémndya-DevatéGh Samaptdah.

N.B. The authority for these details is the Dharma Sangraha, or catalogue

raisonné of the terminology of Bauddha system of philosophy and religion.

III.—Notes explanatory of a Collection of Geological Specimens from

the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. By J. G. Maucoumson,

Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment. Pl. V.

I had the pleasure of forwarding from Madras, a selection of geolo-

gicalspecimens, collected in May, 1833, between the cities of Hyderabad

and Nagpur. I regret, that circumstances prevented my doing this

sooner, and that the notes in explanation of the localities whence they

' were obtained, must now be short and imperfect ; I hope, however,

that the specimens themselves will be of use in illustrating the geology

of a tract of country hitherto undescribed, and which connects the

formations of the south-east of the Deccan, with those in the neigh-

bourhood of the valley of the Narbada.

From my inability to identify, describe, and figure the numerous

fossils, discovered in the tract of country between the Godavery

and the town of Hinganghat, 47 miles south of Nagpur, and the

importance of these, in reference to the questions as to the relative

age of the great trap formation of the Deccan, and of the west of

India, and the clayslate formation of Voysxry, with its associated sand-

stone*, and the periods of elevation of the granitic rocks, on which

* See his account of the diamond mines of Banganapilly.—As. Res. xviii.

SDULES20fFT Ob GP FEE SIZE IMI HAM

5 sone c Ly, YALA Gee YL Pe a

ake PIOPI TLOIU POUT YY POOH) WY, my Gs pop vy "G f 0 Ae aiaine

& durg yp hy Wy (RS nee AER Ka Yu ‘P00

LIRILE | SIP PYYOPOY #% * # A Dy rose ee Wy A soon, om s eS :

, YOY, = DAP IWAG

pa es pun 3 Z cm OR aM eg :

EE (f A

202, Ltes Y Wy Me Ly GTypos oe

WILID LP SIQIY* DLO ID YO] GL Z. 2 Ayn 4, ge NY 18s 2

. z} iy \ NM

app.teuLopbitoo ITHALOIYOD fO . poyoyr Simi Hi ii tue” esoae ae

MYoUuLly, fopranurve, = ~ yg “Faso

bs of Puro- LISQUYLD $f Yepuryy© Se Wy; e < 2un song. 2

(brogug- why 2) 210Y PIN BLO UL] PIY EF cponpunsy° sink ‘wie, lo 2

PaUTYy UWOLy cL AYRU00LLTIYNA aS Hys332g WNW 3 4 7 iy,

2 bo 5 “ . on OW 7p Ws) AN {2 oh? ., Sy ee

9EBF re SG de IDE) a POUL TY) © Hye Z ¢ é Wy, Ay g yerk yee Ny

4S =

JIVIDYU0 SPPSSOTOUILOYY We apotinn LD % Oe shy,

Ee. bi

prepanap

nobruscog

wood9¥y

_ aos

fc MLO pel )

yen F gn

A Id APA 7

1836.} the Country between. Hyderabad and Nagpur. 97

they appear universally to rest; I am induced, contrary to my former

intention, to take to England with me, those specimens of which

there are no duplicates. The separation of the collection would greatly

lessen its value, by depriving me of the opportunity of comparing,

with each other, and with arranged collections, the fragments of those

of which duplicates were not preserved, and of thus restoring the

fossils of which no perfect specimen was found. A selection of the

most perfect were, also, sent to Mr. Lyrxt, but as he considers it

requisite that numerous species should be ascertained previous to

arriving at any conclusion as to the age of the fossiliferous rocks, it

may be for the advantage of Indian geology, to submit the rest of the

specimens to him; and on the characters being determined, to return

a portion of them to India. There are, however, a sufficient number

of duplicates to illustrate the outlines of the geology of the interesting

tract of country referred to, and to connect the singular phenomena

observed, with others, to the west and east of the route, and in the

countries of the peninsula to the south, and the Bengal provinces to

the north. The outline map includes several places, inserted in the

plans published along with Dr. Vorsry’s papers and Captain JenxK1n’s

Account of the Mineralogy of Nagpur, p. 199, of the 18th volume of

the Asiatic Researches; the interval between which, it will assist in

filling up. I shall seldom use mineralogical terms, except I have had

an opportunity of comparing the specimens with those collected by

persons well acquainted with the science; and when they do occur,

an examination of the specimens will afford the means of correcting

any errors that may be fallen into. The geological relations of the

Strata were ascertained with as much care as the nature of the country

permitted, and no exertion was spared in tracing them as far as pos-

sible, both on the plains, at the foot of the hills, and their most

inaccessible summits. My avocations however were unfavourable, and

a person more at leisure would find an ample field to reward his labours.

He must, however, be prepared to pursue his examinations in the height

of the hot season, when the grass and wood jungle are less luxuriant,

and the plains free from their covering of jawdré and other grain.

Some account has already been published* of the country between

Masulipatam and Hyderabad, on which I had not an opportunity of

making many observations. One or two points, however, deserve to

- be noticed, as the specimens collected in this part of the‘route are

similar to those found north of Hyderabad as far as Nirmal, and throw

some light on appearances on which important inferences have been

too hastily founded.

* Asiatic Researches, vol. xviii.

98 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs.

At page 70, volume il. of the Guranines tn ScIEnce, a desire is

expressed by a gentleman at home, stated to be of high scientific

acquirements, that specimens should be collected from the face of the

hill of Beirwarah, where it has been cut through by the Kistnah

river; and the author of the queries seems to be impressed with a

belief, that a lake had formerly existed some way above it, towards

Warapilly. The distance, however, between the Warapilly ghat and

Beirwarah, is considerable; and I do not think, that there are any

decided appearances at the former of the blue limestone of the clay-

slate formation™ having constituted the margin of a lake. The strata

at the upper part of the rising ground to the north of the river are as

hard as those lower in the valley, or on the opposite bank. A specimen

of this rock, of a pure white color, and of great hardness, which I broke

from the summit of the ascent above Warapilly, well known to travel-

lers from the difficulty of riding over the large smooth slabs of marble,

and which would have been admirably adapted for lithographic purposes,

had it been free from minute crystals of quartz, was sent to you about

three years ago by Captain Smiru of the Madras Engineers. The

junction of this rock with the granite to the north, could not be

seen, the country being flat, and covered with lowjungle. Jaspers and

fragments of trap are found in the bed of the river, and the granite to

the north is intersected by numerous dykes of greenstone, usually run-

ning from 8. E. by E. to N. W. by W. To the south of the river,

the country is lower, and for some way beyond the town of Dachapilly,

the limestone, usually dipping slightly to the south, continues to be

the surface rock ; which, whenever I have met with it, onthe Kistnah,

at Cuddapah, near Auk, and the diamond mines of Banganapilly, and

at Tarputri in Bellary, or in the neighbourhood of the Wurdah, affords

the best indications of success to experiments in boring ; copious springs

spontaneously rising from it, or being lost in the interstices between

its nearly horizontal strata.

At Beirwarah, the river Kistnah appears to have cut a channel

through the short ridge of hills, which terminates on either side in

rather precipitous cliffs, and admits the stream into the great alluvial

plains extending to the mouths of the Kistnah and Godavery. Above,

the country has much the appearance of having once been an exten-

sive lake, the bottom of which now forms the rich plain extending to

Condapilly to the N. W., and Munglegherry to the south of the river. It

* IT use this term of Dr. Voysny, but think its adoption more objectionable

than argillaceous limestone, used by Colonel CuLLEN in the Madras Transac-

tions. It would be better to characterise it as ‘‘ blue limestone,”’ ‘‘ Cuddapak

limestone,’’ or other term involving no opinion as to its geological relations.

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 99

is probably here, that Captain Hurgert’s correspondent observed that

the “hardness and composition of the rock appeared to differ, accord-

ing to the pressure they have been subjected to.” I believe, that, spe-

cimens of the rocks of the bottom of the hill, have been sent to the

Asiatic Society by Dr. Bunza, and that they are composed of the pecu-

liar gneiss of the coast. Felspar is common, and some of the varieties

possess considerable beauty. There are the remains of a rock pagoda

cut ina mass of compact felspar, above the road, leading along the

edge of the precipice over the river, portions of which have fallen, the

natural fissures of the rock exposing it to this kind of decay. On the

top of the hill the soft friable white rock, No. 2*, is found, and is carried

away by the natives for the purpose of whitening the walls of their

houses. It corresponds exactly with specimens from Vizagapatam,

described as gneiss by Hrynz, and containing imperfect garnets. It

is not, however, either its site as lying above other rocks, or its ex-

posed situation, that has led to its decay, so much as the composition of

the ridge where the edges of the strata rise to the south. The strata

dip at a very considerable angle a little to the south of east. A care-

ful survey of the hills from the summit shows, that they are short

insulated ranges, such as are found over the Circars and other tracts,

rising from a level country; and that had a lake existed in the plain

above, every slight rise of the river would have carried its waters

round their shoulders to the north and south. The rise in the line of

bearing of the strata of the hill north of the river, and the appearance

of that to the south, do not support the opinion that the lake was

drained by the river deepening its channel. I do not know whether

it can be supposed to derive any support from a tale told of the river

god (Krishna) having induced the patron of the hill, who seems to be

a form of Shiva, to permit him to get his head through, and that then

he forced a passage. The granitic hills of Condapilly are seen a few

miles to the N. W.; and in the midst of the plain, rising out of it

like an island, are some great masses of hornblende rock, No. 6; and

Dr. Benza informs me that he saw dykes of the same kind of green-

stone passing through the gneiss at Beirwarah. A mile and a half

further on the road to Hyderabad is a quarry of granitic rock, devoid

of hornblende, and containing only a very little felspar and a few scat-

tered garnets. A little beyond this, the rocks assume the decided cha-

racters of the great granite formation of the Deccan, with which Dr.

Voysny’s papers have made your readers acquainted. The geological

structure of the Circars is in nothing so peculiar, as in the extensive

* The numbers refer to specimens deposited in the Society’s Cabinet.—Ep.

100 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs.

distribution of the singular sandstone-like gneiss described by Huyne;

and which, in hand specimens, it is often impossible to distinguish

from the sandstone also found in many localities: and I do not know

a more interesting subject of inquiry, than that of ascertaining whe-

ther this singular rock is metamorphic, and the sandstone altered by

the intrusion of the great masses of porphyry so commonly found

near these equivocal rocks, and by the numerous greenstone dykes and

masses scattered over the whole of these districts. The diamond mines

of Mulavelly are at no great distance from Condapilly, to the right of

the road, situated in a basin between hills covered with jungle. The

sides of which, one-third from the top, were found by Dr. W. Davip-

son to be strewed with a sandstone conglomerate; but he was pre-

vented getting to the top by the approach of night. Fragments of

this are found in the gravel, of which I believe specimens have already

been sent to the Society, intermixed with much kankar: and from

some pits in the valley, most of the lime used in the district is pro-

cured. The soil of the country on the Hyderabad Military road, after

leaving the alluvial plain above Beirwarah, is formed of decomposed

granite, but contains much lime. This admixture, and the kankar

nodules, are probably of recent origin; as I observed, in a valley to the

right of the road north of the hill fort of Yeralagundah, about 18 miles

from Beirwarah, a stream trickling over granite rocks, and depositing

lime on all the branches and rocks around. Some pieces of stone of

considerable size have thus been formed, and recent specimens, con-

taining remains of branches, or of grass, easily crumble to pieces, and

are carried away by the stream. The source of the spring I was pre-

vented from ascertaining, by the approach of night; and as an excuse

for leaving this and other interesting circumstances unexplored, I

must state, that being in Medical charge of the European regiment,

during a sickly season, I could not command my own time of marching,

or sufficient leisure.

The character of the granite of the Deccan continues well marked

throughout the remaining part of the route to Hyderabad, and dykes

and imbedded masses of a fine crystalline greenstone or hornblende

rock of great hardness are frequently seen. These last have occasion-

ally irregular shapes, and in one or two instances, that of the italic

or other irregular curve; and near Secunderabad, they appear to be

connected with the dykes, in the neighbourhood of which they are

found. It was also frequently observed, that the various substances

entering into the composition of the granite in the neighbourhood of

these dykes or masses, formed very large and distinct crystals; and

the imbedded greenstone, though often intimately united with the

1836.) the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 101

granite, was in others more loosely connected, and easily separated by

the progress of decomposition, leaving rounded cavities in the rock.

A circumstance of more importance, however, is the occurrence of

the beds of kankar in this tract, being, as far as I have observed, al-

ways near some of the greenstone dykes or beds, and frequently under

or intermingled with masses of granite, which is in a rapid state of

decay: these are usually rounded, partly from the progress of decom-

position, and sometimes from the tendency to concentric forms, which

it occasionally undoubtedly assumes. The small detritus is in some

places accumulated to a great depth, and it has been stated by Dr.

Curistiz, that this debris is, at a considerable depth, again consoli-

dated by pressure. In the Edinburgh Journal of Science, 1828-29, this

is also mentioned asa fact, common to the rocks of other parts of

India. With every respect for his authority, I cannot avoid the con-

viction, that the inference was founded on imperfect observation, and

that it has since been employed in Europe, in support of an ill-founded

theory.

No. 15, is ‘* Mhurrum” or gravel found in deepening a well at

Bolaram, (six miles from Secunderabad,) upwards of 50 feet deep,

during the very dry season of 1832, and is not in the slightest degree

consolidated. A loose block, which had resisted decomposition, was

found above it, and contains mica, (No. 15,) a rare ingredient in the

granite of Hyderabad. Much of the debris at Secunderabad is, how-

ever, consolidated by lime, which is seen to agglutinate the fragments,

or to pass in vein-like lines or nodules through the gravel. Occa-

sionally there are only a few fragments of quartz or felspar scattered

through the kankar, or they appear to be inserted into the surface, as

in No: 10, which is extremely hard. Generally, however, the agglu-

tinated gravel is friable, and the cement less obvious. The debris is

also sometimes united into pulverulent masses, by the oxidation of the

iron contained in the sienite ; but this takes place at the surface, and

seldom acquires any great degree of hardness. Specimens of the

granite in the neighbourhood of Hyderabad are numbered 14; and

the appearance of the surface of that polished by the continual passage

of hyenas, in the entrance of the caverns formed in the pile of gneiss

or granite of the “ Chita hill,’ near the cantonment, has been

described in the 1st volume of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, (No.

12.) The greenstone occasionally has distinct crystals of felspar

scattered through it, without the porphyry thus formed, losing the

remarkable degree of toughness possessed by the black rock; but, as

observed by Sir H. Davy, the decomposition of the felspar is more

_rapid than of the other parts, (No. 19.) The greenstone is familiarly

102 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes.

known by the name of “‘ black granite,” and forms, when finely polish-

ed, the beautiful tombstones of the Golconda mausoleums, and the

pillars of that in which Hyper and Tippu Suxtrawn are deposited, at

Seringapatam. The remarkable quartz veins in the neighbourhood of

Hyderabad have been described by Voysry and Curisriz ; it is there-

fore only necessary to mention, that they occasionally exhibit a more

or less regular crystallization, and at the same time, acquire the fine

tints of the amethyst. It is seldom that they are sufficiently regular

and perfect for the purposes of the lapidary; such specimens were,

however, discovered a few years ago, close to the European barracks,

and at a little distance from a great greenstone dyke, but not in direct

contact with the quartz bed containing the crystals, which, on the

contrary, passes into the ordinary sienitic granite of the country. The

colour of the amethystine quartz seems to be derived from magnetic iron

ore, which is disseminated in grains both through the milky quartz

and the granite, amongst which they are found, and has not been noticed

elsewhere in the neighbourhood. The amethystine quartz was again

met with 60 miles north of Secunderabad, near Bekantrpettah, in loose

masses, along with that variety of laterite found near Beder, and

described by Voysry, and which is seen along the coasts of Malabar

and at Boranghur in the Southern Concan resting on basalt. The rising

ground on which they were found is composed of granite; but the

country around is of a black trap soil, and numerous low flat ranges

of basaltic hills are seen to the north, the east, and the west. A vein

of white quartz is also met with as at Secunderabad, but the specimens

differ, in containing irregular shaped geodes of agate, lined with crys-

tals, or a red opake mamillary quartz, approaching to calcedony. The

iron in these is usually imperfectly mixed with the quartz, and from

the appearances above described, and the quartz having in several

specimens been changed into a red jasper, the surrounding trap may

be supposed to have altered the rocks. The colouring matter seems

to have been afforded by the laterite, which is found in the neighbour-

hood apparently in dykes, and in contact with the quartz which inter-

sects the granite: but there being no section, and the water-worn

surface only being visible, no evidence could here be obtained, in

support of any of the opinions entertained by geologists, relative to

this singular formation. The amethysts are also found south of Jan-

ganapilly, and at Kamareddypettah, and Mr. W. GeppEs met with

them, of a greenish yellow tinge, south of Balcondah.

Granite Tract between Hyderabad and the Nirmul Hills.

The valleys and some plains about Bekanirpettah are composed of

black soil, mixed with calcedonies, &c.; and to the west of the road

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 103

are some flat hills, which | had not an opportunity of examining.

They corresponded in their steep sides and flat summits with the trap

hills to be presently described, and Mr. Grppzs informed me, that

they are formed of amygdaloidal trap, based on decaying granite. With

these interruptions, the granite continues to Kamareddypettah, but

the mamillary eminences, and the tors and logging stones formed

from their decomposition, are of more rare occurrence. The granite,

however, still continues to exhibit the lamellar structure, and is easily

split into large slabs. In some instances, where the lamelle are thin,

the vertical fissures which frequently intersect them in right lines, and

greatly assist the progress of decomposition, cause the rock to break

into regular rhomboids. The last ‘‘ tor stones’’ observed on the road

to Nagpur were north of Jakrampilly, where they occurred on a lofty hill,

on which there is a small pagoda. After leaving the basaltic hills near

Bekantrpettah and Jungampilly, black soil is seen in the valley below

a large tank, and some dykes of greenstone pass the road in the direc-

tion of S. by E. to N. by W. at Kamareddypettah: the granite is

lamellar white, with black mica and some hornblende, and fragments

of amethystine quartz are scattered about. A little to the north of the

town, on ascending a very gentle ascent, the red soil and granite give

way to black soil, derived from decomposed trap rock, which is concen-

tric on the top, but lower down is arranged in imperfect strata. On

descending the hill to the north, the black soil conceals the granite

for a short distance ; but at the bottom of the hill, and in the bed of a

small water-course, it is seen of the same appearance as before.

Immediately beyond this, there is a very remarkable hill, which is seen

from a considerable distance standing out from the gently indulat-

ing country, and possessing the peculiar form of the trap hills of the

Deccan. It lies five miles north of Kamareddypettah, and four miles

south of the village of Nugger, and is marked on the specimens as

the “hill of Nugger.” On approaching it by a very gradual ascent,

the soil changes to black; and all at once the hill rises with nearly

perpendicular sides, constituting a narrow ridge, about half a mile in

length, and of a shape approaching to that of an Italic / running

nearly N. by E. toS. by W. The hill is entirely formed of basalt, as

its form had led me to expect. Above and in the body of the hill it

has a concentric globular structure, the external layers of which are

remarkably soft, and on the top of the hill resemble a peperino ; lower

down it is soft, of a greenish color, and soapy feel, (Nos. 66 and 69.)

The nuclei left undecayed on the top, are exceedingly hard and tough,

ef a deep black colour, and contain large crystals of olivine, and small

_globules of calcedony. Many small but very characteristic specimens

Pp 2

104 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes.

of this last mentioned mineral, which had been imbedded between the

concentric nodules, were picked up (No. 67). At the bottom of the

hill, the basalt loses its concentric form, and occurs in tables or lamine,

having the appearance of having been subjected to violent forces. It

sounds under the hammer when struck. Various specimens of the

trap are much loaded with iron, sometimes in grains of a reddish brown

colour; at others, it appears as if it had been partially smelted, and is

not very different in its appearance from some examples of laterite.

Much of the “kankar” that abounds in the soil is coloured with iron,

while other portions are perfectly white ; it is not, however, confined

to the soil, as it was observed to have formed between two laminz of

the basalt, and by the gradual deposition of the lime, to have nearly

broken up the upper stratum. From between some of the vertical

fissures in the tables, and round the large rounded masses that occur

in them, a formation of ‘‘ kankar” projects in several places half a foot

from the surface of the rock. It was evident, that the water loaded

with lime, percolating through the alluvial black soil, or through the

rock itself, gradually deposits the earth, where its accumulation is

favoured by circumstances, of which the most important is the occur-

rence of an impervious rock or soil below that supplymg the lime;

and this explains the absence of organic remains in this recent forma-

tion, except where, in soils rich in lime, it forms round the roots of

plants, and unites with itself, here and there, a fresh-water shell. No.

47, is a specimen illustrative of these views, taken from the south bank

of the Godavery. The rock over which the river flows is granite,

intersected by some great dykes of greenstone, (No. 44,) whose surface

has a smooth metallic coating where washed by the stream. They

project eight or ten feet, and are divided into numerous rhomboidal

masses by fissures, into which lime has been deposited; and in the

bed of the river, numerous fragments of calcedonies, zeolites, and other

minerals found in volcanic rocks, are partially cemented by lime. The

banks are mostly composed of black cotton soil, and the lower part is

covered with small irregular loose slabs, resembling the dried cow-dung

used for fire; which are found in situ projecting from the bank, and

connected above with portions formed round the roots of plants, and

below with other layers spread out between different strata of the

alluvial earth.

From the top of the hill of Nugger above spoken of, numerous in-

sulated hills, and short ranges of a similar form, are seen to rise from

the granitic tract to the east and west, but they do not observe any

particular line of bearing, although the whole group seems to pass

’ ina direction from east to west, like the other basalt ranges of the

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 105

table land. From this hill to four or five miles north of Nirmul (a

large town nine miles north of the Godavery) as in almost all other

parts of the peninsula, is intersected by numerous greenstone dykes,

which generally run from N. by W. to S. by E. These dykes are of

great importance to the agriculture of the country, as the granitic soil

is extremely thin and poor, except in the valleys, where the clay form-

ed by the decomposed felspar accumulates, and bears fine crops of

rice, for which water is collected in tanks, often in a great measure form-

ed of natural mounds of rounded or angular fragments of greenstone,

which is little subject to decomposition. At Jakrampilly, there is a

remarkable dyke of this kind, which can be traced for several miles by

a series of tanks on one side of it: it is also remarkable in exhibiting,

where it rises into a small hill near the village, the gradual transition

of the granite into the greenstone, and in the latter, having a tendency

to split into regular forms. When once a fissure, however small, is

formed, the rain washes a gradually increasing portion of lime and

other soluble parts of its surface into the interstices, until the masses

are separated, in which the alterations of temperature probably assist.

It is difficult to account for the manner in which the greenstone passes

into granite in this instance; but it is evident, that it has been raised

by the granite above the continuation of the dyke at either end of the

hill. I have been more minute in the description of the hill of Nug-

ger, principally with the view of affording some information relative to

the distinction of the basalt ridges, which have burst through the gra-

nite of the Deccan, from the greenstone dykes, which are of such frequent

occurrence. The presence of olivine; the soft wacke in which the

globular basalt is embedded ; the less crystalline structure ; the pas-

sage into amygdaloid containing calcedonies, zeolites, &c. and the gra-

nite in the neighbourhood of all the smaller masses of basalt, differing

little from that at a distance, may perhaps be sufficient to distinguish

these important rocks from each other. The separation of the differ-

ent ingredients of the granite into large crystals, and the insulated

masses of greenstone found in it near the dykes, prove, that the rock

had been softened by heat ; but judging from the appearance and great

length of many of these dykes, I do not think that they were of con-

temporaneous formation with the rock through which they pass. Near

one of these, at Secunderabad, a smooth, wall-like dyke of white gra-

nite passes through the sienite.

At Balcondah, 21 miles north of Jakrampilly, these dykes occur on

the large scale, and the granite is much separated into its constituent

parts, the felspar being of a fine red colour. Nine miles further north, in

the bed of the Godavery, the felspar is of a still more beautiful red

106 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fas.

colour; but good specimens could not be removed. Veins of quartz also

occur at Balcondah, with turbid milky spots, as if altered by heat, and

large imbedded crystals, (No. 42.)

* Sichel Hills ; locally known as the Nirmul range.

Nirmul is surrounded by granite hills, containing much hornblende

and a little schorl; and the summits of some of them appear to resem-

ble the greenstone of Jakrampilly, but they were not examined. After

passing some small ranges of hills, the ascent of the Nirmul chain

commences five or six miles north of the town, and the road continues

amongst lofty hills covered with forest, by a succession of ascents and

descents, for 40 miles, when it descends by the Muklegandy ghat to

the town of Eidlabad, nearly on the level of the flat country of Berar.

The southern ascent of Nirmul ghat, is the most deep and difficult,

the hills not rising in a series of terraces as they do to the north; yet

it is not easy to ascertain the precise direction of the part of the hill

range over which this pass leads, on account of the projecting spurs

and low hills at their base, the thick forest with which it is covered,

and from its having something of a curved form. The general direc-

tion is from W. N. W. to E. S. E., which corresponds with that of

the Sichil range, to which these hills belong, and which extends

from the great lake water of Lonar to the neighbourhood of Munga-

pett, where the silicious fossil wood (marked “ fossil wood,” Munga-

pett), was found in 1828. On approaching the hills, the granite is

observed to become soft, and to decompose rapidly. In the bed of a

stream it has a remarkable concentric appearance, which was also ob-

served in the centre of the hills south of Thitnoor, where it is covered

by trap, on which fossils were found. No schistose rock was found

here, but 20 miles to the east of Nirmul, and a few miles south of the

mountains, hornblende slate occurs on the granite, and along with it the

magnetic iron ore described by Voysuy in the Journal of the Asiatic

Society, vol. II. It is nota sand, as might be inferred from his de-

scription ; but the grains of iron are either mixed with the hornblende

or occur in a sandstone-looking gneiss, from which the hornblende had

disappeared. Specimens of the rock, which I saw dug up, and of the

sand formed by pounding it on protruding masses of granite, are for-

warded. The softer pieces were at once reduced to powder, while the

harder were first roasted; and the one was then easily separated by

washing in small shelving hollows dug in the clay. It is then melted,

and its quality said to be improved by using teak branches: the iron

is soft, but part is used in the mixture from which wootz steel is form-

ed. The strata of the schists have been broken and elevated, but the

* Also called ‘‘ Shesha.’’

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 107

dip and direction are in no two places the same. Here also, the granite

was seen, in the bed of a torrent, in thin concentric scales, not unlike

the extremities of petrified trees, caused by the unequal waste of the

component parts, the quartz projecting unaltered.

On approaching the hills, the soil gradually became black, with scat-

tered fragments of calcedony; and at the first part of the ascent,

which is for some distance very gradual, a singular fragment (No. 49)

of semi-vitrified matter was met with, containing small white crystals

of felspar. It could not be distinguished froma piece of granite fused

in a steel furnace, with which it was compared by Dr. Voyssy. At the

same place there were fragments so much like iron slag, that till I

found them in a large mass resembling a dyke, I supposed that they

were the product of a furnace, (No. 49.) The granite continues the

surface rock a little further, passing into a black hard basalt, inter-

mixed with many white spots, apparently of felspar ; but Isaw none of

them rounded or distinctly crystallized, forming amygdaloid or green-

stone porphyry, such as occur at the lower part of the pass leading to

Eidla4bad. On ascending the last part of the base of the hills, the

surface was strewed with calcedonies, quartz, (No. 52) and other

minerals of the same family, and amongst them, a few fragments of a

softish white clayey and silicious stone, containing small shells of fresh

water families. The trap then became softer, more vesicular with

calcedonies, zoolites, &c. imbedded, and the surface covered with tabular

crystals of the same kind as those so remarkable in the Poonah trap rocks;

and latterly concentric, the external layers decomposing, and the nucleus

lying in a soft greenish wacke. I spent several hours in ascending the

highest points of the range, but was unable to discover any beds of fossil

shells ; large blocks of quartz were, however, observed, with a singu-

larly angular surface, and sometimes with fine capillary crystals, much

of which was found with the fossil fragments ; and afterwards, in the

same position and partaking of the characters of the fossiliferous

masses found in siti. These blocks were seen extending along the

steep face of the hill at the same level as if they had been forced out of

the mountain, or rather, as if the basalt, when erupted, had covered,

and partially melted the bed on which it lay, and thus caused the sin-

gular appearance of those blocks. The highest summit east of the

pass is caped by some horizontal strata, having some resemblance to

sandstone that had been altered and blackened by heat; what its real

nature was, I could not determine.

The hills, for 44 miles by the road, are ene in terraces with

steep sides and flat summits, rising now and then into conical eleva-

tions, with rounded or flat tops, and inclosing narrow valleys, abounding

108 Notes on Geological Specimens from — “[Frr.

in streams, or small table lands with water every where near the

surface. On some of the ridges, the globular basalt becomes columnar,

near which no trace of fossils, and hardly any calcedonies have been

found. A thick wood and grass jungle, composed of very different

plants from those most common on the granite hills, cover the whole

tract, and render it unhealthy for the greater part of the year. In a

deep valley, about the middle of the hills, where the Kurm or Kurrum

river passes through them, the basalt is seen to rest on friable granite,

(as near Nirmul to the south and Eidlabad to the north, and at one or

two other places,) and a level plain of considerable extent and deep

black colour extends to Etchoda to the neighbourhood of the shelly

rock. The fossils were first found at Munoor, and between that village

and Thitnoor, which is near the top of the Maklegandy ghaut. The

most remarkable were found in the beautiful grey chert*, which either

projects from the basalt in which it is imbedded, or rests in large

blocks on the surface. The side on which they rest is remarkably

smooth and even, while the others are rough and covered with bivalve

shells of great size, and some of them having the epidermis still entire,

resembling a recent bed of shells on the sea shore. A few univalves

also occur converted into flint, and it is remarkable, that one small

bivalve, thus altered, retains its colours. The masses are evidently in

siti, and have probably been consolidated by the basalt, with which

they are surrounded, or on which they rest. Some specimens exhibit

a mixture of sand and mud, merely slightly agglutinated and intermixed

with fragments of shells; the greater part is converted into chert

spotted with fragments, or containing the shells in a perfect state; in

other places, the materials have arranged themselves into an enamel-

like substance around irregular cavities containing fine crystals of

purplish quartz, and in one specimen a formation of calcspar has taken

place. Throughout the rock perfect bivalve shells, both closed or open,

occur in the situation in which they had lived and been entombed.

The most perfect are closed, and some of them are easily separated

from the rock to which they are slightly united at a few points only ;

they are filled with the stone, mixed with fragments of minute shells,

and some are entirely converted into chert, which retains the form

even of the ligaments so completely as almost to lead one to expect to

be able to open them.

Between Munoor and Thitnoor, masses of red chert project from

amongst the basalt, and contain various shells, mostly univalves of

small size, and some of them evidently belonging to fresh water

genera. Near to these many fragments of different kinds were found

* See labels on specimens.

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 109

lying loose on the surface, and abounding in shells of various families.

(See specimens.) Those in the green crystalline mass, resembling an

ore of copper, were in many instances converted into quartz crystals,

retaining the perfect form of the shells; one of these of exquisite

beauty, which has been unfortunately broken, was found in the interior

of a larger one: others were imbedded in a tough white clay rock, so

soft as to soil the fingers. The greatest part consisted of a siliceous

rock, partly converted into a black bituminous flint, or a coarse quartz,

partially altered into calcedony, into which the majority of the shells

were converted. Some, on the contrary, retained the structure of the

shell unaltered, and effervesced with acids.

Amongst these, the fragments containing the fossil seeds of chara,

associated with fresh-water shells, were found. The gyrgonites were

not observed at the time the specimen was found, but the rock to

which it belonged could not be far distant, as the shells are of the

Same species as in other specimens, having a similar mineralogical

structure. In other fragments, remains of grasses appearing half con-

sumed were seen; and in the large protruding mass of red chert,

containing shells converted into calcedony, I discovered what I take

to be the tooth of an herbivorous quadruped. A few of the shells I

believe to be marine, and at the distance of half a mile, the principal

masses of grey chert, containing the large marine shells, were found.

On descending towards Thitnoor, granite is seen at one place, and

above, much quartz, having a slag-like surface of the kind seen above

Nirmul occurs. A few specimens of black chert, with shells, were

picked up in the bed of a nulla at Thitnoor, where it was also found

in sitd. A loose piece of reddish and green flint, with shells, was also

met with in a ravine three miles further north. Much lime and kankar

was here mixed with the black soil, or was deposited in the water-

courses; the greater part probably derived from the decomposed basalt,

or from such layers of a soft white limestone, as were found between

the laminz of basalt, in digging pits to obtain water for the troops,”

when encamped at Etchoda. A compact stratified limestone, however,

occurs in the vicinity.

The pass from Thitnoor, called the Muklegandy ghat, is formed

of several terraces, of which three only are remarkable, and a steep

descent between each. The surface rock of the second terrace is a

rough, white limestone, which appeared to be consolidated in nodules,

until it was broken, and found to consist of a great variety of shells,

many of great size, but difficult to remove entire, forming a rock of a

crystalline texture. The strata are horizontal, and in one place, where

it is cut through by a torrent, the rock is 12 feet thick, and zs seen to

110 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Frs.

rest directly on granite of a reddish color. The shells are of very vari-

ous forms : several belong to the genus Ostrea of Linnmus ; one very

perfect Cardia was entire, both valves being connected, and one frag-

ment, of a very large shell, has the water-worn appearance often seen

on the sea-shore. The edges of the large shells are harder than the

rest of the rock, and stand out from it, which has led the natives to

compare its surface to the impression left by the feet of sheep, and to

name it ‘‘ Bakri ke paun ka patthar.” Over the surface, many frag-

ments of basalt, calcedonies, &c. are scattered, derived from a lofty

spur of the higher point of the mountain, which rises precipitously

from the terrace within a few hundred feet of the fossil strata. A very

remarkable mass of soft peperino, resembling ashes, of which a specimen

is forwarded, seemed to proceed from the limestone, where it begins to be

lost amongst the debris of the mountain; and amongst the loose frag-

ments, were some very tough clayey stones, having the forms of small

univalve shells adhering and embedded.

The facts above described, and the nature of the different fossil beds,

more especially this great accumulation of marine shells resting imme-

diately on granite, and the fossil seeds of charze, now perhaps first found

in India, leave no doubt on my mind, that this wild mountain country,

now covered with a dense forest, had once been the bed of an inland

sea or great estuary, on whose shore the chare and associated fresh-

water shells had flourished.

On descending the pass towards Hidlabad, the rock changes to

amygdaloidal trap, with occasional masses of greenstone porphyry,

having large crystals of felspar imbedded. The opake milk-white

quartz, and the beautiful white porous crystalline mineral, which accom-

pany the fossils, were found here, and were not met with elsewhere.

At the foot of the pass, granite re-appears, and protrudes in great

masses from the soil, for about four miles on either side of the town

of Eidlabad*.

Basaltic Tract between Hidlabad and Nagpur.

The greater variety of rocks that occur between Eidlaébad and Nag-

pur, and the interesting appearances they exhibit, will render it necessary

to enter somewhat more into detail_in describing the localities whence

the specimens were collected; so as to afford the means of determining

their relations to each other, and to the fossil deposits already described 5

as well as to the great western trap formation, and the stratified rocks

to the north and south.

* The localities of some other minerals found in the Nirmul hills are marked

on the specimens. The blood-red chert found in the valley of Ankni is

remarkable. ;

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Ndgpur. Yl

The bed of the small river of Eidlabid (see map) is covered by

numerous fragments of the argillaceous blue limestone, so well known

as underlying the diamond breccia in the Cuddapah district south of

the Kistnah. Three miles higher up, the stream runs over the slightly

inclined strata of a fine white sandstone, having some quartz fragments

imbedded, rising towards some lofty ranges of trap formation to the

east, (the Manik-gurh hills*,) and are some places converted into a

quartz-like mass, as is seen in some of the Cuddapah sandstones. It

probably rests on the blue limestone, which is seen to pass into a soft

bluish or reddish clayslate in the bank of a stream a few miles north.

About 10 miles N. of Eidlabad, the limestone is found on the surface,

forming smooth slabs, having much calcareous spar and rock crysta]

between the strata, and in their veins through the rock, and in the

course of the natural figures, numerous small round perforations are

arranged in lines, and occasionally filled with soft calcareous matter.

On a rising ground south of Zeynad, the marble had occasionally a dip

of 40 degrees; but for the most part it was nearly horizontal, and the

direction of the dip was quite irregular. In the nala of Zeynad, which

runs over limestone, there is much tuff, having small pieces of the

limestone imbedded, and evidently formed from the water of the stream

(specimens No. 85); a similar formation is, however, found in a few

places on the high level ground to the S. W. To the east of the village

a gently rising ground extends nearly N. E. and. W. for about three

miles, and terminates in a small hill, which rises rather abruptly. The

slope is formed of nearly horizontal slabs of marble, the edges of the

strata being exposed by the gradual rise of the surface. In following

the ridge to within half a mile of the little hill to which it rises, a

singular appearance presented itself: a dyke of perfectly vertical strati-

fication, about three feet in thickness, projects two feet from the general

surface; its exterior is singularly irregular and altered, the constituents

of the rock being formed into crystalline or flint-like minerals of lime,

argil, or silex, while the internal structure retains the characters of the

blue limestone. On following this natural wall for about half a mile,

it is concealed by globular basalt, which has burst through the strata,

and in forming the termination of the little ridge, has covered the

surrounding limestone, of which a portion has been so singularly dis-

placed. The basalt is vesicular, and resembles much of that found in

the Nirmul hills. No fossils were found here; but in the ascent from

-the second terrace of the Muklegandy ghat, where the great bed of

marine shells was incumbent on granite, the same limestone was seen

* Tne Manik-gurh hills run from N. by E. to S. by W. almost at right

angles to the Nirmul range.

Q 2

112 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fxs.

in sith, greatly broken up by the eruption of the precipitous trap ridge,

on which it was seen. The thickness of the grass and wood jungle

prevented its being traced with sufficient accuracy. Fragments of the

same rock were also seen at Thitnoor; and a very similar rock was

observed in horizontal strata at Muneer, not far from some great

blocks, containing marine fossils, in one specimen of which small

univalve shells were found. Butas this locality was only examined

by torch light, I could form no judgment as to the formation being

the same ; although the total absence of fossils in the blue limestone, -

over extensive tracts nm which I have searched for them, incline me to

think that they are different.

The relative age of the blue hmestone and great trap formation, to

which these hills belong, being ascertained by these and other facts ; it

may be hoped, that a careful comparison of the fossils will assist in

determining the period to which other rocks occurring to the north

and south belong. I have not been able to detect amongst them any of

the Himalaya fossils; but some fragments found in indurated clay at

Jirpoh, near the hot springs in the valley of the Nerbada, and in a

specimen from the Gawilgurh fossil rock, described by Dr. Voysry in

the 18th vol. of the As. Res. appear to belong to some of the same

shells.

The march to the Payngunga river is over a flat country of black

soil, modified in some places by a mixture of earth derived from slate

clay, which appears occasionally at the surface, and of the same kind as

that found below the limestone of Cuddapah, or which takes its place

under the diamond breccia of Banganapilly. Jaspers, striped red and

white, are found in the black soil. Scattered over this extensive plain

are a number of small conical hillocks of white kankar, apparently

formed by springs issuing from the centre, and now dried up: in some

of them the apex is a little depressed. Several long straight ranges

are seen at a distance, generally flat on the summits, but occasionally

rising into cones, with a lengthened base, corresponding to the direc- |

tion of the hills. About half up the greatest height a remarkable line

extends all along, on which the summits appear to rise as on a terrace,

or like the parallel roads of Glen Roy.

The pebbles of the Payngunga are principally calcedonies of a red-

dish color and the blue limestone. No. 93 is a specimen of the

calcareous sandy tuff from the banks of this fine river; it is found as

high as 25 feet above the water at the fort; and is always horizontal,

with black soil between the layers, which are from an inch to three

feet thick. The surface is irregular, but seldom or ever shoots into

branches like the tuifa of the Godavery, and holes occasionally occur in

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 113

the layers, from a deficiency of lime; in other places, it projects three

or four feet, in consequence of the soft soil being washed away. In one

of the specimens, numerous recent shells are imbedded, which corre-

spond in situation to a layer of these left in the sand by the last fall of

the river ; and it is evident, that the tuffa is formed from the infiltra-

tion of the lime with which the black soil and the water of the river

abound, into layers of sand. In all these rivers, and in the stream of

Bibbery and others running into the Godavery above Badrachellam,

beds of limestone conglomerate, cementing agates and calcedonies, are

continually forming.

The country between the Payngunga and Kair has at all seasons

Many springs and streams of pure water; which give a lively and

beautiful green to the vegetation, when the surrounding country is

burned up by the scorching heats of May*. The first of these streams

is at Lingtee, the water of which is loaded with lime, which it depo-

sits on its bed in a thick incrustation of tuff. Loose pieces of branches,

petrified by lime, were found on the banks, and a wall of kankar six

feet high in contact with No. 95, seemed to have been formed from a

spring which had gushed from a fissure in the blue limestone, which is

here the surface rock, and rests on a reddish, very friable slate clay, as

is seen in a section a mile further down the stream. The black flint,

No. 96, resembling anthracite, was found higher up. This stream,

which, in the driest weather, has sufficient water to drive a mill, is said

to have its source about six miles distant in a low range of hills, over

which the road passes more to the east, a little to the north of Ur-

juna, and three and a half miles from Lingtee. At this village, a

small stream takes its rise in a hot spring, whose temperature, as it

gushes from beneath the wall of a half ruined reservoir was, in Decem-

ber, 1833, almost 87°. Copious springs also rise in the bed of the

little stream ; and globules of gas are extricated from round holes in

the mud; but on endeavouring to collect a quantity, it was found that

there were considerable and irregular intervals between each jet of air,

nor did it always issue from the same place. The springs rise through

the blue limestone so often mentioned, which, in a section in the north

bank, is seen to have been raised by some violent forces, in a very

singular manner, so as to form a series of irregular piked gothic arches,

overlaid by partially broken but horizontal strata. The spaces within

the arches are filled with fragments of the same rock, all evidently

forced from below. The bed of the stream has a covering of sand,

* The same was observed of the beautiful stream at Bibbery, in the month of

May, 1828, and inclines me to think, that it derives its source in springs like -

those of Kair, to be presently described. It rises in the Nirmul range.

114 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fes.

which, some way below, is agglutinated by lime into a tolerably hard

rock. The sand is derived from a quartoze sandstone, which crops out

in two or three places from the ascent south of the spring. The strata

are not horizontal, but neither the dip nor line of bearing could be

observed.

North of Urjuna the rock is concealed by the soil as far as the

Pindee ghat, nearly a mile distant, which passes over the steep low

range, in which the Lingtee nulla rises. Its top is rounded, but on

either hand, several conical summits are seen outlying from the range,

which extends for some way from N. W. to S. E. On leaving the

plain of Urjuna, the blue limestone disappears, and the hill is found

to be composed of the usual black concentric basalt, the nuclei of which

are exceedingly hard, and contain much olivine: they are imbedded in

a soft grey or greenish wacken. I was surprised to find the road and

a ravine descending from the hill strewed with the limestone I had left

below, and did not quite credit the guide, who pointed to the top of

the hill as the locality from which they came. I, however, soon came

to it in sitt, in its characteristic large smooth slabs, which render it so

difficult to pass on horseback. They were observed to be slightly

convex upwards, to be very much fissured in various directions, and if

taken in the mass, to have a slight anticlinal dip, although on the top

the slabs were horizontal and several places remarkably altered, as

if they had been half fused ; the argillaceous and siliceous matters hay-

ing arranged themselves into beautiful streaks of a pale blue enamel,

passing into calcedony, or crystallized in minute prisms. Some parts

of these strata had acquired a deep black color, and a flinty hardness.

On descending the hill on the opposite side, the same appearances

presented themselves, and left no doubt of the limestone having been

raised from its connections by the intrusion of the basalt, which had

slightly bent the strata, and in doing so, had caused the numerous fis-

sures, and the alteration of structure. North of the Pindee ghat,

there are a number of very low rising grounds, flat on the top, and

composed of black globular trap rocks: and on the valleys, many large

coarse masses of calcedony are scattered; of which, on a slight exa-

mination, I saw none in the hills. Near this, the limestone, No. 97,

was found in the bed of a nulla. A little further on, there are two

very black conical hills of trap, and at their feet, great fragments of

rock crystal, but of no beauty, and having cavities lined with calce-

dony. From hence to Kair, the country is more level, rising however

a little, to the right of the road; and four miles from the Pindee

‘ghat, and the same distance from Kair, I found the sandstone, Nos. 99

and 100. It was only seen in a small nulla where its strata appeared

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 115

to be horizontal, and was white, red, or of a fine yellow, easily decom-

posed, and having small metallic veins passing through its substance,

No. 100, and in one or two places, passed into a breccia, cemented by

lime. No other rock is found at a higher level. I had been induced

to examine this extensive slope, as the occurrence of the blue limestone

suggested the probability of a sandstone or breccia being found above

it, as at Cuddapah, before I discovered the sandstone at Urjuna, and

near EHidlébad; I was therefore much gratified by finding it, although

different in mineralogical characters. The country did not afford any

section, but the sandstone probably rests on the blue limestone, which

is met with at a lower level, two miles to the north-east. A mile and

a half south of Kair*, the road crosses a small river, where there are

“some masses of travertine several yards square, which have been carried

down by the stream: they are entirely composed of petrified branches

and leaves, with a cement in some parts of considerable thickness, and

more or less crystalline, or resembling kankar.

The stream rises near the town in copious hot springs, whose water

is considered to be exceedingly pure and delicious ; but when taken

from one of the springs, where it can be directly received, was found to

be acid to the taste, and, on boiling, deposited lime, which the carbonic

acid had held in solution. Bubbles of gas are also extricated with the

water, from one of the springs. The lime separates in its course, giving

a whitish appearance to the water of the pools, while it sparkles near

the springs and in the rapids, as was the case also at Lingti. The

temperature of the spring, in 1831 and 1833, was 87° and is the same

in May, June, and December ; but the difference to the feelings, accord-

ing to the temperature of the air, is so great, as to have led to the

belief that it is cold in the day and hot at night ; the thermometer,

however, showed that it was the same at 3 Pp. mM. and 5 a. m. of the 5th

June, when that of the air was 100° and 81°. The principal spring

rises at the root of a great Banian tree below the pagoda, and is stated

by the devotees to flow in the same profusion the whole year, which

they account for by saying that it flows from the Ganges at Benares.

This and other springs forma stream, that increases as its course is

followed downwards, notwithstanding that much is directed to gardens,

and a fine sheet of paddy in the bend of the river thus formed. About

half a mile below the spring, the first formation of rock is found cross-

ing the stream like a dyke, but of considerable breadth ; others more

remarkable are found lower down, and after a winding course of 24

miles, it seems to cease. The congeries of branches, roots, and even

* This small town must not be confounded with a large place of the same

name on the Godavery.

116 Notes on Geological Specimens from [Fzs.

trees, sometimes hollow, and always in concentric rings of deposit,

forms a beautiful sight when in masses of several tons weight. The

strata were seen in one place to be 12 feet thick, and to rest on the

common black alluvial soil ; near this, it had filled the original bed of

the stream, and forced it to find another channel : and in two places, a

fall of three or four feet, forming a pretty cascade, seemed to be occa-

sioned by the growth of the rock, and the wearing away of the channel

below. The deposit often conceals the remains of plants, with a smooth

coating of considerable thickness and firmness, frequently rounded in

irregular sections of large circles ; in others, in nodulous forms of great

beauty, covering over the extremities of the smaller or larger branches,

and occasionally preserving the wood in an hermetically-sealed cavity.

The roots of the Banian now and then pass into the empty tubes, as

if they were the mould on which they are formed ; others probably

form on the weeds, which flourish in the wildest luxuriance along the

banks : one of these I found to be 24 feet in height. Recent shells,

such as now inhabit the stream, were found in many places enveloped in

the stone. One fine specimen of /ymnea was attached to the side of

the rock, asif it had been arrested there by the deposit of stone around

it, and which has taken its shape ; its fine surface, where it adhered,

being that of the fresh shell ; while the coating exhibited the color and

fracture of the tuffa of the hillocks south of the Payngunga, and others

exactly similar, near the town of Kair. Roots and branches were

seen to lie in the deep water without a coating of stone; but the series

of observations so accurately described by Mr. LyE.u was completed,

by finding where the stream fell over some rocks, a plant still living,

whose roots were thickly interwoven, and the leaves on a level, and just

above the water, cemented into a mass of firm white tuffa. (Specimens

of the water and tuffa were formerly sent.)

The spray seemed, therefore, to produce the deposit more quickdlys :

but specimens of moss growing below the water were also converted

into sharp brittle spicule.

Below, some blocks were softened, and as if in part redissolved.

Amongst the petrified plants, one tree 14 foot in diameter was seen :

and also a few leaves ; but these were rare, I suppose from their rapid

decay and smooth surface ; one of them seemed to belong to a species

of lotus seen in a pool above, and another seemed to be the leaf of aloe.

In some places the tuffa was sandy, and in one or two slightly tinged

with iron ; some of it hada fine crystalline appearance, and considerable

hardness ; while other specimens could not be distinguished from kan-

kar. A tendency to the formation of a bluish white scum was observed

on the surface of the still water, both here and at Lingtee: a slight

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 117

smell resembling sulphur was also occasionally perceived ; and at the

latter, our people procured water of a very offensive taste, although per-

fectly clear, from a well which I did not see.

The water abounds with animal life, and the banks are covered with

a profuse vegetation, amongst which many fine insects were seen; and

in the hot season, all forms of life seem to gather round this oasis in

the black burned-up country around. The banks and water affording

so much food, vast numbers of birds of different species, game, doves,

kings-fishers, herons, &c. are collected together, whose habits a natu-

ralist might spend months in observing, without exhausting the field of

inquiry.

All the springs seemed to be equally loaded with calcareous matter,

and similar formations by springs now closed up are seen on a rising

ground down the river. Here too, the globular trap again appeared on

the surface in several places, of small extent ; one was a little to the

west of the greatest formation of travertine, and another below the ford

where the hard nuclei were surrounded by layers of a grey friable wacke

like that of the Nirmul hills, and are curiously divided into compart-

ments by tuffaceous partitions. Near to this, the blue limestone is again

found in extensive slabs, slightly raised from its horizontal position ;

but as usual in no regular direction, the strata occasionally meeting

each other at an obtuse angle. The same remark applies to the rock as

seen to the north of the springs on the road to Won, and to almost

every other place where I have met with it. Near the last mentioned

bed of basalt, some irregularly inclined strata of blue rock, having a

granular sandstone-like aspect, were seen, and at no great distance,

large loose masses of vesicular scorie were found, (specimens Nos.

109,115.)

But the most interesting appearances are seen, in a small irregular

rising ground, above the pagoda at the principal spring, which will be

best understood by an inspection of the specimens 104. The basis of

the rock is a tough white limestone, projecting from the gentle rising

ground in very irregular masses, passing into curious and beautiful

jasperous minerals, often coated with minute rock and other crystals ;

and the whole is perforated by large cavities, and even holes, evidently

formed when the rock had been erupted in a semifluid state. Much

tuffa is associated with these altered rocks, filling up many of the cavi-

ties, and having various minerals imbedded. I believe that few places

exhibit so many of the most interesting effects of volcanic action, as the

small district around Kair ; more especially in altering a stratified rock

of apparently uniform structure, so as to form a great variety of mine-

118 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes.

tals*. A good deal of sandstone has been used in the old buildings,

which the inhabitants stated to be brought from Sacra, five miles to the

west.

To the north of Kair, the limestone resumes its blue color; the soil

is black, and a little further on, mixed with calcedonies, &c. In the

nulla at Won, quartz sand, sandstone, anda mineral resembling pud-

ding-stone were picked up; and at the foot of the hill, the remarkable

vegetable fossil figured in the fifth number of the Madras Journal, and

now deposited in the museum of the Bengal Society. The small hill

of Won is composed of sandstone of different colors, red, white, and

yellow, and waved lines of a black color from disseminated iron, pass

through it in various directions—the composition of which is the same

as that in which the fossil is contained, and No. 100, from between

Urjuna and Kair. The strata have been elevated by the convulsions

to which the rest of the district has been subjected, and have a dip

from the apex of the hill, varying from 35 to 55 degrees: their direc-

tion on the southern face of the hill, is nearly from E. to W., but to

the west they turn off towards the rising ground oa which the town is

situated, the line of bearing of the strata being from S. E. to N. W.

The swell of the hill extends some way to the east, but the country is

on the whole level. This sandstone is also found to the eastward in

the basin of the Wurdah and Godavery, beyond Chanda.

Sand derived from these rocks forms the soil for two miles north

of Won: between that and the Wurdah, it consists of the basaltic

black soil, and the gravel of that river is composed of calcedonies,

agates, &c. of which a calcareous conglomerate, in horizontal strata,

two or three feet thick, has been formed, No. 123.

At Waronah, white sandstone and a yellow slate, apparently belong-

ing to the clay slate formation to which Voyrsry refers the blue lime-

stone, is used in building; and one ebtained from a hill five miles dis-

tant, which I had not time to visit. Most of the pagodas between

Hingan ghat and Chanda are built of the same materials. Between

Waronah and Chiknee the country is level, well cultivated, and the

water within a few feet of the surface ; much fever prevails after the

rains, although there is no wood or marsh. Basalt protrudes from

the level soil, and near it, the bed of a small nulla displays strangely

altered strata of the red slate clay, seen at Lingtee, whichis broken

up, and intermixed with crystalline nodules and layers of calcareous

* In some specimens, the surface has the appearance of a semifused brick, which

had assumed something of a regular arrangement, whilst the centre is composed

of the blue limestone little altered.

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. Hg

spar, having a red clay in the interstices. The specimen (No. R. 5)

gives an imperfect idea of the singular appearance of this rock. At

Dyegham, two miles further north, and about the same distance south

from Chiknee, it is seen dipping to the west of south at a consider-

‘able angle, is much fissured, and is reticulated with beautiful veins of

calcareous spar, filling up the vertical interstices, which vary from a

line to half an inch in breadth ; they intersect each other in all direc-

tions without disturbance, and were evidently formed at one time.

To the east of this, and of the village of Chiknee, there is a very

gentle rise of the country, and concentric basalt and great round trap

boulders are seen wherever the soil has been removed. On this are

found numerous great blocks of indurated clay, of remarkable hard-

ness, and exhibiting all the varieties of that mineral, of flinty slate, of

compact schist, and of semi-opal*. Many of these masses are also

found imbedded in the basalt ; and on a very careful examination, the

inference could not be avoided, that they owed their different appear-

ances to the greater or less heat to which they had been exposed.

Most of them are full of large and small univalve shells, many of

which are of fresh-water genera. Many of the shells are changed

into opal, others are covered, or their shape taken and preserved by

quartz crystals; while the shells of a few can be separated unaltered,

and effervesce with aids. The spines of the small shells are often

insulated in cavities in the rock, and their crystalline surface is often

very beautiful, when examined with the microscope. Some vertebrz

and the head of a fish were met with ; but from the great toughness of

the rock, part only could be broken off, anda portion of the same

block was converted into a red flint, with shells changed into opal. A

large loose block of a slaty structure was found near this, containing

fragments of very large bivalve shells of great thickness, along with.

wood converted into a black flint, intersected by fine veins of a light

purple opal; and other bivalves which had been crushed together,

were found in a flinty state on the upper part of the rising ground. I

do not think that I go beyond the limits of correct inference, in sup-

posing these shells to have lived ina mud formed from the decompo-

sition of the clay-slate found in the neighbourhood, and through which

the trap is seen to have burst.

* Loose specimens of this rock was seen by Mr. W. Geppzs, Surgeon of the

Madras European Regiment, in 1829, who directed my attention to ascertain

their position.

+ Shells were first found here by Mr. W. Geppzs, late of the Madras Medi-

eal Establishment.

R 2

120 Notes on Geological Specimens from (Fes.

The country to Naugri continues to be composed of basalt, which is

in some places tabular, with green earth between the laminz; and the

soil is covered with calcedonies, ribbon and pudding stone, jaspers,

resembling those found in the Nirmul hills, to which the whole cha-

racter of the formation remarkably assimilates, and leaves no doubt of

their belonging to one great period of protrusive violence.

At Naugri, fossils like those of Chiknee are formed; and with the

conical masses of calcedony, having a smooth flat base of cachelong, the

centre being filled with quartz crystals and calc spar; which were

afterwards seen in siti at Hingan ghat, inserted between the globular

basalt with the apex downwards, the peculiar appearance of the base

being perhaps caused by slow cooling.

At Hingan ghat, a number of blocks, loose, of a black and red chert,

containing silicified branches of dicotolydonous trees, and a very perfect

portion of a palm (date?) tree were discovered: and the same kind of

rock, but without fossils, protruded from the basalt a little below

Colonel Lamsron’s tomb. The basalt was globular, but seems to have

had a tendency to form five or six-sided prisms, The rest of the

route to Nagpoor is over a level country, from which a few insulated

trap hills rise abruptly, on whose summits basaltic columns are occa-

sionally met with. On the south side of the small range of hills near

the city, these columns are very regular, and inclined to the south, at

an angle of 45°, in consequence of which many of them have fallen.

The flat top of the hill forms a pavement of the ends of similar co-

lumns perpendicular to the horizon. The round flat topped hill of

Sitabuldee, which is accurately described by Voysry in the 18th volume

of the As. Rs. is separated a few hundred yards from the extremity of

this range, and rests on a decomposing granitic rock; its great and

irregular masses show a similar tendency to crystalline arrangement,

and thin sheets of calcedony are found in the joints.

To connect these observations with those published in the As. Re-

searches and Journal, on the countries south of the Nerbada, it is

necessary to mention, that at the cantonment of Kampty, eight miles

north of Nagpoor, the sandstone is met with in the north bank of the

Kanan river ; and a mile higher up, the granite has been forced through

the strata, bending or converting them into quartz rock. The crystals of

felspar and plates of mica are remarkably large, and mica slate is seen

in a quarry a few hundred yards distant. Beyond this are some small

hills of upraised gneiss; near to which a conical hill of curiously

altered rock, resembling that above the hot springs of Kair, has burst

through a limestone, which it appears to have converted into a fine

crystalline bed, like that found in the primitive districts of Scotland.

1836.] the Country between Hyderabad and Nagpur. 121

From the summit of this volcanic rock the basaltic hill of Sitabuldee

and others are seen to the south and west; and at the same distance

to the north, the rounded mica slate and granitic hills of Ramtesk,

which extend into the Bengal territory south of Sagur.

An examination of the map will impress more strongly, than any

thing I can urge, the importance of examining the whole Sichel or

Shesha range, from the great lake water of Lonar, (to which the atten-

tion of your readers was called in the number of Journal for June,

1834,) to the fossil beds of the Nirmul hills ; and from thence to Bibbery,

the fossiliferous localities above Mungapett, and the hot springs of

Byorah and Badrachellam. Other hot springs are also said to be

found in the Nirmul range, regarding which I could get no correct

information.

There are three other points to which it may be well to call the

attention of such of your readers as may have an opportunity of visit-

ing these localities.

lst. Whether the Sichel hills really terminate about Mungapett,

or are continued in broken ranges towards Rajamundry? I have long

considered it probable that the dykes so common in the Circars are

connected with the great basaltic ranges which cross the Deccan in

nearly the same direction; and Dr. Benza has recently discovered a

bed of marine fossils on the top of a basaltic hill five miles south of

Rajamundry, and a little above the alluvial plains of the mouths of the

Godavery.

2nd. Whether the basaltic hills near the Manjerah river, on which

Dr. Voysry discovered fossils, are connected with those of Bekanur-

pettah and Nugger above described; and whether they belong to the

same geological period as the Nirmul hills ?

3rd. I entertain little doubt that the basaltic formation of the valley

of Berar and the basin of the Panah river, which falls into the Tapti,

belongs to the period of eruption which elevated the Nirmul fossils

from the bed of the sea; before, however, coming to this conclusion,

with reference to the northern part of the valley, the connection be-

tween the localities of the Nirmul and Chiknee fossils with those of

the Gawilgurh hills (A. R. vol. 17th) must be ascertained.

4th. The exact relations of the crater of Lonar to the great volcanic

district to the N. W. where fossils have not yet been met with.

But as the difficulties opposed to the investigation of the greater

part of such wild and unhealthy tracts will probably prevent these

desiderata being soon supplied ; I hope that a sufficient number of orga-

nic remains have been obtained from the central point of the district,

to enable an experienced geologist to arrive at a tolerably correct esti-

122 Description of a New Species of Columba. (Fes.

mate of the relative age of part of the great trap formation of the

N. W. of India, which the President of the Geological Society in the

anniversary address to that body in 1833, stated to be quite unknown:

‘‘no vestiges of secondary or tertiary formations having been detected

within the region described.”

IV.—Description of a New Species of Columba. By B. H. Honason,

Eisq. Resident in Népal.

The following description of a new species was originally sent to the

Society six years ago, but it does not appear to have been published.

It has since been described as new by the Zoological Society in 1832.

With the description went a drawing, coloured, and large as nature.

Owing to the tardy appearance of the Society’s quarto volume, the papers

that did appear there had been forestalled: thus red-billed Erolia, but

also my Circzetus Nipalensis, take precedence, by two years, of GouLp’s

Ibidorhyncha Struthersii and his Hematornis Undulatus, which are the

same species under new names. Both birds are types of new genera:

see the Journal of the Zoological Society under date Dec. 27th, 1831,

quoted, pp. 170 and 174. I described them both two years and some

months previously: as the dates of the papers and the proceedings of

your Society can prove*.

Order Rasorzs. Family, Corumpipz. Genus Columba. Species new.

Columba Nipalensis, (mihi.)

This elegant species is found in the woods of the valley of Népal.

It is seen exclusively in the wild state, and is very shy, seldom or

never entering the cultivated fields for the purpose of feeding, but

adhering almost always to the woods, and living upon their produce, in

the shape of grass, seeds, and berries.

Except in the breeding season, it is very gregarious, and it breeds,

I am told, only once a year, laying its eggs in June and July. I cannot

bring it exactly under any of the dBCDariant allotments of the numer-

* We can offer no further explanation of the loss of the author’s MS. than

was before given (J. A. S. IV.) neither can we find the plate to which he al-

ludes. But we take this opportunity of circulating a lithograph of the Erolia

and bearded Vulture described in vol. IV., which may serve as a peace offering

to the justly offended author. —Ep.

t+ A. orbits and tarsi plumose.

B. orbits plumose, tarsi naked, tail even.

C. orbits plumose, tarsi naked, tail wedged.

D. orbits naked.

a. feathers of the neck and quills simple.

b. feathers of the neck notched at tips.

¢ quills bifid at tips.

1836.] Description of a New Species of Columba. 123

ous species of this genus, according to the specification of those allot-

ments in the 14th vol. of SHaw’s Zoology, as will be perceived by the

following enumeration of characteristic particulars.

There is a naked space round the eyes. Two-thirds of the tarsi are

plumose, the remaining third only being naked, and the toes also are

naked. The quills are simple at their tips. The feathers of the neck

are sub-elongated and acuminated at their tips. The tail is even.

In an earlier vol. of Suaw, the Abcdarian division of the species is

not carried so far as in the vol. just mentioned: and the following

disposition of species, to be found in vol. xi. p. 2, of that work, has at

least nothing inconsistent with the enumeration of significant particulars

above given in reference to our bird.

A. tail equal.

a. orbits naked, feathers of the neck elongated, and acuminated

at their tips.

Comparing, for the sake of further illustration, our bird with the

Columba Livia, or common pigeon, it differs in being larger; in having

the soft membrane at the base of the bill less tumid and mealy; in

having a somewhat longer tail, and shorter, and more lowly feathered

tarsi, not to mention the naked space round its eyes, and other diagnos-

tic particulars, which have been separately explained.

The wings are about the same length as in the common species ; but

owing to the tail being longer than in that species, they have the

appearance of being shorter, and they do not reach within two inches

of the extremity of the tail.

What further illustration of this species may be needed will be best

gathered from a perusal of the details of size and proportions given

below, and contrasted with those of the common pigeon. I now

proceed to the plumage, in respect to which our bird bears a strong

resemblance to the Parabolic pigeon. The principal colour is a dark

slaty blue, deepened into more or less perfect black in the quills and

tail feathers ; and shewing clearest on the lower part of the back, on

the lesser tail and wing coverts above, on the thighs, and on the whole

of the tail and wing coverts below. Upon the lower part of the hind

neck, the upper part of the back, the lesser wing coverts above, and the

most part of the body below, the principal colour is almost superseded

by a rich purplish tinge; and all the feathers so tinged, save those of

the upper back and of the sides of the body, are further adorned by being

broadly margined or pointed with pale clear bluish grey. The head

and top of the neck are wholly of the softest bluish grey, which colour,

as it descends the body, forming in its descent the margins and points

just noted, gradually decreases in quantity, and fades in hue. It pre-

124 Asiatic Society. [Fzs.

vails rather on the lower than upper surface of the neck, and in

respect to the body, is no where seen above, except in the shape of

Some roundish dots of nearly pure white on the lesser wing coverts.

The bill is black, shewing faintly a purplish tinge, which is more

clearly visible in the basal membrane of the bill, and on the naked

orbits. In front, the legs and feet are black green; elsewhere, they

are yellowish. The claws are clear, lively yellow. The iris of the

eyes hoary grey or white.

The female is as large almost as the male, from which she differs

only in having the bluish grey of the head less clear and pale, and in

wanting almost entirely the purplish tinge, which adds so much beauty

to certain parts of the plumage of the male, especially the upper pert

of his back, and the lower part of his belly. This species is, I fancy,

questionless new ; and as it seems to be peculiar to these mountains, if

not to Nepal proper, Columba Nipalensis would be a very appropriate

name for it.

Dimensions and weight of the Columba Livia and Columba Nipa-

lensis.

C. L. C.N.

Feet. inches. feet. inches.

Tip of bill to tip of tail, .. 00-2 e eee se cece ee eene eR | Eg

Length of bill (to the gape), ....--+e-sse-seeeeeee 0 0,5 0 il

TDIEEGLOR HAL, ‘ys cieue dishes ctele opk erase cstetarsy clsrsvere cys exe raielo aN aareD 0 6

POOL & WING; ca os 4s. ac o's adeeiserte tc sete ve ome OO Meme 09

Expanse of Wings, ....seeesecercesctceeseeeseeee 2 O 2 13

Length of tarsi, ........... : ey, ON 5 LE 0 1,4

Ditto of central toe, and nail, .. (5.0... « 2464..%s-sinee eens 0 lg

Weirht pit 222. bre She's wa Mla tele, o iy Rpiahwn mea eeOz, 123 oz.

Valley of Nepal, Dec. 1829.

V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 2nd March, 1836.

W. H. Macnacuten, Ese. V. P. in the chair.

Lieut.-Col. J. Convix, Engineers, Lieut. Col. L. R. Sracy, Joan NeAvE,

Esq. C. §., Lieut. A. Cunnineuam, Engineers, and Raja Visaya Govinpa

Sineua Behadur, proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and

duly elected members of the Society.

Read a letter from Mr. Atexanper Berartie, withdrawing from the

Society.

Read a letter from W. H. Macnacuren, Esq. Secretary to the Govern-

ment of India, Political Department, acknowledging the receipt of a copy

of the communication from His Excellency Prince Esrrruazy.

Read the following reply from Government to the Secretary’s letter,

written in pursuance of the resolution of the last meeting, in regard to

1836.] Asiatic Society. 125

the oriental manuscripts and printed volumes of the Fort William College

Library*.

To James Prinsep, Esq.

ek Dept. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

IR,

1 am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 6th instant,

and in reply to state, that the Governor of Bengal accepts the offer of the Asia-

tic Society to provide rooms for the accommodation of, and to hold accessible

to the public, the Oriental portion of the late Library of the College of Fort

William, and has ordered the books to be made over on the following conditions :

The books are to be the property of the Government until the Honorable Court

of Directors shall decide whether they shall be made over absolutely or not, the

Society to be ruled of course by their decision. The Government to allow the

Asiatic Society a monthly sum of 78 Rupees, (stated by the Secretary of the

College to be the minimum expence for custody of the books,) in consideration

of the Society’s providing for establishment and keeping the books clean and

in proper repair. All other charges to be provided by the Society. The above

allowance to cease, in case of the property in the books being made over to the

Society.

Fort William, * H. T. PRINSEP,

the 24th Feb. 1836. Secy. to Govt.

Resolved, that the Society acquiesce in the terms proposed by the Go-

vernment, and that the Secretary do take measures for receiving the

books and granting receipts for them to the Secretary of the College

Council in the course of their daily transfer.

Library.

The following books were presented :

Memoirs of the Astronomical Society, vol. 8th—dy the Society.

Transactions of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of Calcutta, vol.

2nd—LlLy the Society.

The following by Professor Borr :

Grammatica Critica Linguae Sanscritae, two editions, 1829, 1832—dy Pro-

Jessor Bopp.

Glossarium Sanscritum, 1830—by ditto.

Nalus, Maha-bharati Episodium, 1830—by ditto.

Diluvium, cum tribus aliis Maha-bharati praestantissimis Episodiis, 1829—

by ditto.

eer einige Demonstrativstimme und ihren Zusammenhang mit verschiede-

nen Propositionen und Conjunctionen im Sanskrit und den mit ihm verwand-

ten Sprachen, 1830.

Uber den Einfluss der Pronomina auf die wortbildung im Sanskrit und den

mit iam verwandten Sprachen, 1832—by ditto.

Ardschuna’s Reise zu Indra’s Himmel, uebst anderen Episoden des Maha-

bharati—by ditto.

Conjugations System, 1 vol. 12mo. 1816—by ditte.

Die Sundfiut, 1 vol. 12mo. 1829—by ditto.

Geological Report of an examination, made in 1834, of the elevated country

between the Missouri and Red Rivers, by G. W. FraTHERSTONHAUGH, U.S.

Geologist, presented by the American Philosophical Society.

The following books were received from the book-sellers :

Bridgewater Treatises, Prout’s Chemistry, 1] vol. Kirby on Animals, 2 vols.

Roget’s Physiology, 2 vols.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, England, vol. 5th.

eo , Greeks and Romans, vol. 2nd.

* The resolution, by inadvertence, was omitted in the printed proceedings. It

was to the effect, that as Government had been pleased to transfer the European

portion of the College Books to the New Public Library, the Society begged to

tender accommodation in its rooms for the Oriental portion of the same, the Go-

vernment agreeing to pay the establishment necessary for its due preservation while

in deposit.

126 Asiatic Society. [Frs.

Illustrations of the Botany, &c. of the Him4layan Mountains, and of the

Flora of Kashmir, by J. F. Royer, Esq.

Museum of Antiquities, &e.

Facsimiles of inscriptions on two slabs of stone at the entrance of a

very ancient Temple, supposed to be Buddhist, on the Hill Fort of Gua-

lior, taken by Mrs, Sanz, were forwarded by Major Surueruanp, Resident

at Gualior.

Extract of a letter from Colonel H. Burney, dated Ava 15th January,

announced the transmission via Rangoon, of a small box containing some

Buddhist images found by Captain Hannay at Tagoung, 100 miles above

Ava on the Irawadi.

‘‘ Captain HANNAy’s last letter is dated from Tsen-bo, (the Sembooa of the

Map of the Burmese Empire compiled in the Surveyor General’s Office in 1825,)

three stages above Baman. He must have reached Mogoung on the Sth instant.

He speaks in the highest terms of the general appearance of the country, and

estimates the population, particularly on the right bank of the Irawadi, to be

much more numerous than I had imagined. At Baman he was much interested

by the Chinese, who were inquisitive but civil; and he estimates the breadth of

the Irawadi at Baman, to be full two miles during the rainy season! The

Sherelee and other rivers falling into it are too inconsiderable to have any con-

nexion with M. Kiaproru’s Tsan-po.

‘‘T am writing to you in great haste. The cold at Ava this year is unusually

great ; the thermometer at this moment has fallen to 45°, and I am sitting in an

open verandah without a fire, and shivering under a piercing northerly air, which

seems to be coming directly from the snowy mountains.’’

Extract of a letter from W. Ewer, Esq. was read on the subject of the

interlined writing on the Lath at Allahabad, which he reported to be in

too imperfect a state to be copied or decyphered.

Mr. Ewer reminded the Secretary that he had communicated a draw-

ing of the trident at Barahaut and the inscriptions on it 10 years ago.

A letter from Col. Sracy was received, on the point in dispute of the

relative antiquity of the striking of coin in India.

A tabular view of the statistics of Muttra was presented by Captain R.

WrovenTon, who promised to furnish similar tables of all divisions of the

country measured by himself as a part of the grand revenue survey.

An accurate meteorological register, kept in Nipal by Capt. Rosinson,

for 1835 was received from the Resident at Katmandhu.

A register of the thermometer for the same year, from Mr. Epcewortu

at Amballa.

The following models from Nip4l were preseuted by Dr. A. Campspetu.

1. Sugar-cane mill, or press, called Tusa by the Newars, and Rulw by the

Parbattiahs.

2. Oil press, called Chikon-sa.

3. Water-mill, called Pan-Chaki of the northern Doab, and western hills,

and Kau by the Newars.

4. Spade, called Koo by the Newars, Kodali by the Parbattiahs.

5. Crutch, called Kurmughan by the Newars, used for breaking the clods and

pressing the soil.

6. Roochi-mughan, used by the Newars to cover sown wheat, and Gayha, or

upland rice.

7. Chassu-mughan, used to smooth the flooded beds, in which the seeds of

the Malsi and Toki is sown, and also prepare the soil for sowing vegetables,”

pepper (red), ginger, &c.

8. Roo Retcha, used for weeding the flooded rice.

9. Chong Kooki, used in weeding the Gayha, or dry land rice, coud (a vetch)

or other drill crops.

10. Rooe, used for spreading grain to the sun, and collecting it in heaps after

its removal from the straw.

1836.] Asiatic Society. 127

11. Ooghan-Okua, used for husking grain.

12. Rooti, used for making Chaul (rice) from Dhan, and for pounding bricks.

13. Chou Rummu, bhangy.

14, Plough, used by Parbuttiahs.

15. Keka, used to separate seeds from the cotton.

16. Yeau, spinning wheel.

17. Weaver’s loom.

18. Rool, carpenter’s adze.

19. Phoho, used as a saw.

20. Daha, carpenter’s chisel.

21. Lamp.

22. Tulip.

23. Specimen of Gapgy upland rice.

24. Ditto of rice in the valley of Nipal.

25. Ditto of variety of rice called Malsi.

26. Two specimens of mustard seeds.

27. Specimen of pea stalactite.

28. Ditto of Nipal soap.

29. Two pen cases and inkstands.

30. Two inkstands.

31. Two Buddhas.

32. Nip4l sword.

33. Ditto ditto.

Also the following Nipalese Musical Instruments:

1. Phonga, (trumpet,) Newari.

2. Mohalli, (flageolet,) ditto.

3. Singha, (horn,) Nipal.

4. Nug Pheni, or Turi, Parbattiah.

5. Bansuli, (flute or fife.)

. Beli or Krishna Beli, Newari flute.

Also, several specimens of Cotton and Woollen cloth manufactured at

Nipal, Tibet, and Bhoote, marked from No. 18 to 23.

Physical.

The Secretary presented, in the name of Mr. W. Cracrort, a very fine

collection of the fossil impressions of vegetables and fossil woods in the

coal and shale of Newcastle in New South Wales, just received from that

place, along with a number of geological specimens and many rare shells,

encrinite, &c. : 3

Mr. C. Berts presented a piece of fossil wood from the sandstone above

the coal beds of Burdwan ; to which the natives give the name of Asurhdr,

or “ giant’s bone.”

Three specimens of soil, and five of minerals, of Nipal, and a collection

of skins of birds, presented by Dr. A. Campsext of Nipél.

A stuffed Albatross, presented by J. Catnip, Esq. H. C. Pilot Service.

A specimen of Eurinorynchus Griseus, or Pigmy Spoonbill, presented

by NewcomBE, Esq.

This bird is one of the rarestin the world ; but a single specimen having been

found before: the Curator was requested to draw a description of it for publica-

tion.

A specimen of Remora, presented by C. W. Smiru, Esq.

A note on the Cherotherium, one of the new pachydermatous genera,

discovered in the Sivalik range, by Messrs. Fanconer and CauTLEY, was

read.

The letter accompanying it notices the discovery also of the remains of birds,

in the same rich fossil field.

VI.—Meteorological Register.

128

Darema aaa

*paioysisor oq aInyng UT [[IM 9] ‘WUOUINIZsULs,AjaID0S [eAOY oy} Jo az¥ol[dnpoyy ‘puelsuq Woy JoJeWOIeg pxepurys Amo Jo [eATIAe Jes ay} GoUNOUUL 07 Addey mou are oA,

“4991109 ST JUUINIJSUL UMO INO 07 SUOTIPAIASqO a1} B9Npax 0} UOTeNba oy} : uUMyOI

06k Ye ‘IVT>, OY} 01 aInyesodu1a} oy uOT9a1I09 YM Suore pardde st uomoaI109 smI—oqny Jo Ayrre[[Ide 10j payser102 ‘pasoddns om se ‘jou oxe puv ‘ssurpear jenjor ayy

SULEJUOD ULUNOO SLYOULOIL JsIY IY, *Jaquinu 4st] Amo u21 paysyqnd ‘suoreasesqo [eotNjeWUL0Ie ALLOY s,MOIAeg IJ UO 9}0U IMO UL EyeIsIW SuIpI} v y9a1109 0} Faq a M

“urex jo Tey AAvay e—pjoo Ayjensnun *a[quuen 4 88 g‘9¢ 6L | L°6 | SOL | e'bZ (e8°0.| B10‘ |b189 98 352 | HL | T°TL 99L*0\€18°62 1166S,“ UeayK,

op op op "MS ‘Mu *O 0°16 \e‘rs cL | Ser | O°ST | S*LL |en6 | OGB* \zoz‘} 28 | 0°8 | 2°8 | 8°ZL| OGL‘ |FG0" | F88‘ 66

op op op “MU “a ‘u e%s |0‘S¢ 9°91 | SSLL W9L' EL | 8°01 ples 8

op op op “MS “AML "AA 068 10°99 99 | #*er | L°ST | GFZ |Te8* | 8z0‘ lgze‘t IZ | ¢*S1| B°EL| G*GZ| LeLZ* |916* {out 9G

op op op MS “MS °0 6°88 |e‘69 og | 86 | POT Gibd GB. | 950 |ete‘h 26 | TE | OF | B°GZ| GELS |ZES‘ |FZOS ix

op “ium op “au SANS ers I1°S¢ 68 |8°Z |9°8 | 9°62 |aG8° | 80‘ lnggf G6 | BF | L°o | SSIZ| OLZ* 846° |gt0* £3

ae) Oe eo) fo op ‘u ‘ou 0 6F8 10‘0S 8 | 38 | 16 18 ‘IZ |eLZ« | F9r' geg‘y £8 | 8°Z | 0°8 | Of02) TEZ* \6FE* |080% (XG

‘ouy _ op “Ieaja | “MU 1) @ s‘9L |e*0¢ OFT | 8°69 886° 9° | o°b9 660° 1G

*dULIva]O ‘auy “DOJ “Au ‘Mu °O OLL \2°6r cL | £56 | POT | SOL \9PZ* | P96‘ loot GL | 8 | 8°6 | 6°29} Z99* |9EFS |g60* 06

op “snyedys spUs 2 gS al L‘ch \2°09 ae | 08 | SB | SOL \eGL° | FEL‘ \oFG*4 G6 | O'F | 6'F | £569] 9ZL‘ JOTE® |g¢0* 61

‘ramoys “Apo *4ysB010A0 ‘yynuNs | ‘au “ou ‘a g9L |L‘8¢ 96 | 9 | BE | O°OL GGL" | OPIS lGggq 88 | EE | fe | 6°89) FEO. j9Ie® joTOS 81

pAramoysoug = *a[ZZ11p *Kur103s “a 20 Mae i E19 \o°B¢ 96 | 4°€ |b | $69:\GOL* | O16 lergq LG | BE | ‘PF | 1°69) GUL* |F8S° jose. Ff ZT

*quye'UL-4S" Uy op *snyNUINd “119 sau FOS ers "CT GOL |c9¢ (ET | B°G/, £08" L‘8 | L‘89 P56" 91

op op *snjedjs “119 | +o “a ) PEL \o‘l¢ OBL | OL ole‘ eZ | $°89 9F6. SI

-Apnojo *4SVOI9AO by 6.9) “M s) a) . P08 |c¢09 6°L | BEL 168° PP | $89 A 856 PI

} “77numo “1ynuIN9 *yseodaAO | * A “MS smu 406 B6L |P8¢ 06 |6°9 | O°L | LépL |1s8" | 86 lGgs| 96 | OF | OF | 0°32) GOL‘ [BIT Jogsé €1

pyauiy quia —-Apnojo “Apnop>? [A smu smu BT fF aicd Igcog | se | Oc [G'S | GZ |9gR | Bb6S lgog*] £6 | O's | BF | Ores] LOL‘ |6PLS lorcs | ar

“qu ye ‘Ud ou op OR IDOE es. dS) OAS 88 le19 | 98 | PB | I'L | GOL OTK. | 068‘ |goa} 18 | 0°6 | B°L | B'ez| BIB’ |TET lGr6. | IT

“ya “bs'yyato *snpnumno-at9 “phos “MS “AS 5S 6°88 |0‘e9 16 | 6°9 | 69 | SLL \oe6" | FB lgr7T ¥6 | OF | L‘E | O%FL| OER" |BZ0" | roBt Ol

f ‘ouy op ‘ivaja s|«ms = “MUO 86 [etI9 | aL | SET | Of€T | O22 Ze. | OBL‘ \arz4 BB | o°2 | G9 | O'T2) GEL" 960" |aba’ | 6

*9Z9901q Ysery op “SOF PI] | "MMU 80 L18 jos | 69 | BEL | BSL | Pe |998° | 868° |tos4 Le | 08 | EZ | T's] BLL |PEES Joos’ | 8

op op aoe *o 20 £0 0°88 |0‘0¢ Of9L | B°LL seg’ 66 | E01) . 90 FZ

op op *ABS05 ‘MS "MU ‘Oo P88 le‘ a9 | OL | B°SE | L*pL \Bb8S | 8b‘ logga| 18 | 256 | O'TT| 6'1z] GOL! |6FS' Igtok | 9

*rea]o *avayo ‘Azey f*MUu MU ‘Oo L‘18 \p*0g #9 | PST | BEL | 1'FL |BPB° | BLO‘ log‘ 69 | O'ET| E*TT| O'Zz) G4Z* BPG! Jocn’ | ¢

op op op au tau ‘0 &°88 le‘pe 89 | TIL | GOL | aps ove. | GFOS logg4 IZ | 6'TT| efor} LétZ} 422° loss’ {400 i

ou “ue SHAD) | eR) ONF oo *0 ros lize | $2 | OCIL| £66 | Ges |ees | BE logg| o8 | 2°6 | 0'6 | Occz| BLL. IBGIS loos | ¢

*AQSTUL ‘yuo 4stUr ut | «MS MS TMA 9°06 |e*co 68 | 49 | 6°S | eFZ |gh8° | O86 laze 26 | O'€ | ae | B°GL| GOB. |9ZI ace. Fs

oa taterauta) *AzeYy, phat) 2) ‘MS “MS ‘a | 9°86 109 ¢6|0°9 | L°¢ | gL leZa* | 960° legal 96 | oS | Liz | 1Z| S9L0|GLe° |pen‘oe) T

> = > = Kd is og ia ~ ap] 2 og Is oa] ee | 8 Swn

; : 2 |> - 8 | 2] 2 | 0] 2ege/ 8/82] ae) SF RNE She 82 Be | as eel &

= : ey z : B. ; SB Se be se | Os. e a Bal eo) Sons tl ate ee ee al eeedib mn ceRied so

b 5 03 oO J i=) =} of g wl 88a tee] eBlasis w|soleas| &> A -h

= j a 2 | mo [SS Pole | Fe|S8| Sloasai Pole @i|ee/ 8) s8| se]

7 BL PL See e] | SPP a gee" a] ©) 8s] 8] 8

- 2 L s ' ' 2 . Y . 2

| somanyxy o

*TayIVOM *purAA A9JOWOUNIOY L, “W *d f 18 SUOT}ZAIASGO “Mi "VW OL 38 suorizeAtasqoO let

Ja\sisoy Bs

"9E81 ‘hunnigag Jo yruopy ay7 wof “njynaqny ‘a0Q hossp ayy yo yday ‘uajsthay 109160)0.10879

JOURNAL

Hie AS bk: ALL. S.0:.0:LE,.T Y,

No. 51.—March, 1836.

¥.—Memoir of the Life and Writings of St. Nrerszs Cuasensis, sur-

named the Graceful, Pontiff of Armenia. By Jonannes AvDALL.

(Submitted to the Asiatic Society, Ist May, 1829*.]

At a period when Armenia was labouring under the lamentable

effects of intestine broils and foreign invasions ; when she was subject-

ed to the ruinous consequences of dissensions that existed between the

leaders of the Armenian and Greek Churches, when tyranny and per-

secution of the most violent kind strode hand in hand in her territories,

Providence deemed it necessary, out of sympathy for the sufferings of

human beings, to raise up a person, who, by a happy combination of the

qualities of a great mind, with those of a good heart, might be a proper

instrument of knitting more closely man to man, and of removing dis-

turbances from the Church of Christ, whose very essence is formed of

love, meekness, and peace.

The individual, in whom the illustrious subject of this Memoir found

a father, was called Aprrat, a prince famed for uncommon bravery

and glorious achievements, who flourished in Armenia near the close of

the eleventh century. He claimed his origin from the Pehlavic race,

and had the happiness of perpetuating his memory by giving birth to

four sons, known under the appellations of Basiz, SHanan, Gregory,

* This paper was handed to us by a Member of the Committee of Papers of

the Asiatic Society for 1829, on his departure for the Cape. It had been wnfortu-

nately mislaid among his papers. Although, (as the author’s presentation letter

says,) ‘‘ it is not of a scientific nature, and consequently little adapted to the

taste of the present age,’ still, considering that it is descriptive of the public

acts of the greatest author and divine that flourished in Asia in the middle

of the 12th century, and illustrative of the religious differences that separate

the Church of Armenia from that of Greece, it cannot fail to interest many of

our readers.—ED.

130 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu,

and Nizrses. The latter was born in the year 1100, im the castle of

Zovs, which was the hereditary property of Apirat. Allied by the

ties of consanguinity to Grecory ViKayasER™, who then wielded the

pontifical sceptre in Armenia, Apirat entrusted to him the education

of Gregory and Nrerszs, who were, by the direction of their guardian,

admitted into the monastery raised on the summit of the Black Moun-

tain. Gregory VikAyAsER, when he had attained to a good old age,

was by the repeated solicitations of the prince Basi the Sly, and his

illustrious lady, induced to change the place of his residence, and spend

the remainder of his days near them, at Rapan, situated in the vicinity

of the city of Cheson. On his departure from the monastery of the

Black Mountain, he took with him his wards, Gregory and NiErszs,

haying entertained favourable anticipations of their future greatness

and celebrity. Some time after his having eventually settled in the

Red Convent, near Cheson, perceiving that his career was daily drawing

to a close, he sent for Parsick, whom he had previously nominated

his successor, and for Basin the Sly, to whose kind care and protec-

tion he intrusted the lads Grecory and Nrerszs, the former being of

the age of about 13 years, and the latter only 10 years, old. He also

added, in the presence of those by whom he was surrounded, that,

agreeably to his nomination, Parsicx should immediately after his

death be invested with the pontifical authority of Armenia. On the

elevation of the latter to that high station, he began to shew the

greatest regard for the welfare and education of his wards, Gregory

and Niersgs, and according!y placed them under the superintendence

of Bishop StePHEN, a divine of high attainments and profound erudi-

tion, in order, that they might by his immediate tuition be instructed in

theology and the literature of the west. Grecory and Nigrszs con-

tinued to proceed in their education with two other fellow scholars,

named Sarxizst and Ienarius, whose valuable productions have per

petuated their fame in the recollection of posterity.

* Vikayaser (fey p) is the compound of U44y martyr, and «&p love, sig-

nifying lover of martyrs, which is an epithet given to GreGory in consequence

of the extreme veneration which he displayed for the memory of martyrs, and

the great avidity with which be translated their lives from the Greek and Syriac

languages.

t+ These two worthies are peculiarly distinguished among the divines, who

flourished in Armenia in the twelfth century. At the special desire of the pon-

tiff Grecory, Ignarius wrote a commentary on the Gospel of St. Luke, which

is held in general admiration for the perspicuity of its style and the sensible

observations with which it abounds. Sarxres claims an equal share of vene-

ration from his countrymen for his valuable productions, which have been handed

down to us. They consist of Commentaries on the seven General Epistles, on

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 131

Parsicx having established the seat of his pontificate at the desert

ef Shughr, in the vicinage of Cheson, felt great interest in frequently

visiting the Red Convent, in order that his occasional presence might

enhance the utility and efficiency of the institution. Two years after

this, considering that the qualifications and good conduct of Grecory

were worthy of sacerdotal dignity, Parsicx conferred on him the order

of priesthood, when he had just attained the age of 15 years. Removed

from the Red Convent, Gregory remained with Parsicx in the pontifi-

cal house, where the latter with paternal care and exertions instilled

into the mind of the former such principles of virtuous habits and

sound doctrine, as might befit him for the high office which he was

destined to fill.

Having enjoyed the pontifical authority for about eight years, Par-

sick was cut off by sudden death. Before, however, this melancholy

event, he summoned the dignitaries of the church of Armenia, as well as

some of the nobility of the country, and in their presence, nominated

his ward GreGory as successor to the pontificate, presenting him with

his pontifical robes and sceptre. Accordingly, the bishops and clergy

of the nation having assembled in the Red Convent, anointed Gregory

with great honors Pontiff of all Armenia. Though of the age of twen-

ty years only, the mental and moral qualities of Grecory peculiarly

adapted him for the responsibility of the high situation.

Gregory having, by new improvements, strongly fortified the castle

of Zovs, which had devolved on him after the death of his father, re-

moved thither the seat of his spiritual government. After the lapse of

several years, Nrersss, at the particular desire of his brother Gregory,

quitted his monastic seclusion, and entered into clerical orders. During

the ceremonies of his ordination, the pontiff Gregory bestowed on him

the appellation of Nrersszs, in veneration of the memory of Nimrszs the

Great*, who was of Parthian and Pehlavic extraction. By what name

he was originally designated, no mention is made in the works of

any of our historians. His profound learning and exemplary virtues

soon raised him to the high dignity of a bishop, in whose capacity he

was from time to time sent by the pontiif on visitations to the most

populous provinces of Armenia, for the purpose of enlightening the

minds of the ignorant, and pouring the balm of comfort into the hearts

of the afflicted. Wherever he visited, his footsteps were marked with

the Prayers of St. Grecorius NaREKENSIS, and on the Prophecy of Isatan.

That of the General Epistles was published in Constantinople in the year 1744;

but those of the two latter have not as yet been discovered.

* For particulars of the life of Nimrsus the Great, vide my translation of the

History of Armenia, vol. i. page 181.

s 2

132 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marca,

national improvements and spiritual good. By his peculiarly mild tem-

per and upright principles, he was held in general estimation, and con-

sidered a very valuable member of the fraternity to which he belonged.

At this period, it must be recollected, the city of Antioch was in the

possession of the Latins, who found it necessary to convene a general

assembly for the purpose of taking into consideration some heavy

charges that were preferred against Ropoupu, the Archbishop of that city,

to his holiness Innocent the Second. Being deservedly distinguished

among foreigners for the intense zeal they displayed both in the cause

of Christianity and humanity, the pontiff of Armenia and his brother

Nrerszs were invited to become participators in the proceedings of the

council. They met witha very honourable reception from the Latins,

whose admiration of the graceful tone of their conversation could

only be equalled by the surprise with which they caught every senti-

ment which fell from the lips of those bright ornaments of the Armenian

‘church. On the conclusion of the meeting, which led to the deposition

‘of Ropotrs# from his episcopal dignity, the pontiff Grecory went on a

pilgrimage to the city of Jerusalem, and his brother Nrersrs having

returned to the castle of Zovs, performed the duties of a proxy during

the absence of his brother from the seat of his pontificate.

Dissensions now arose among the Armenians and Syrians residing

in some part of Mesopotamia, through the dissemination of the heretical

doctrines ef the Thondrakian sect*, which were calculated to mislead

the simple and the illiterate. THuxkuran, an Armenian nobleman,

eminently distinguished for his exemplary piety and _ benevolence,

viewed the progress of these heresies with great apprehensions for the

safety of the established Church of Armenia, and in consequence,

endeavoured to check the evil, by communicating the state of things to

the pontiff Grecory, and soliciting him to take measures for effectually

exterminating the sect. The latter, after givmg the subject due consi-

deration, communicated with his brother Nrerszs onthe best way of pro-

* The founder of this sect was an Armenian by the name of SumBAT, who

flourished in Armenia in the beginning of the ninth century. He was born in

Zarehavan, a village situated in the province of Zalcotin ; but in consequence of

his long residence in Thondrak, he received the appellation of Thondrakensis, and

his followers were known by that of Thondrakians. His mind was imbued with

the heretical principles of the Paulicians, and the whole course of his life was

marked with the greatest moral depravity, impiety, and wickedness. Like the

Sadducees, he disbelieved the doctrine of future rewards and punishments, and

in imitation of the opinions of Ericurus denied that God was the creator and

preserver of the world. He refused his assent to the creed of the graces of the

Holy Ghost, the efficacy of the Sacraments of the Church, and the existence of

sin, laws, and justice.

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 138

tecting the Church from the impending danger, and imposed upon

him the task of addressing a general letter to the Armenian inhabitants

of Mesopotamia, descriptive of the confession of the orthodox faith of the

Armenian Church, and contradictory of the heterodox opinions of the

Thondrakians. Nzrsrses performed the injunctions of his brother in

such a successful manner, as to silence those who were inimically dis-

posed towards the Church, and to restore peace and unanimity amongst

the community of that place.

In the year 1142, the Grecian emperor JouANNES PoRPHYRIGENITUS

led a considerable army into the country of Cilicia, in order to put

down the power of the Scythians, which had already begun to assume a

formidable appearance in that quarter. During his short stay in the

city of Anarzaba, the emperor expressed a desire of having an interview

with the Armenian pontiff Grecory and his brother Nigrsses. On their

being presented to the emperor, they met with a kind reception, and

were seated next to his imperial majesty. A conversa’ then ensued

relative to the doctrines and ceremonies of the Armenian Church, and

the sound judgment with which they answered the interrogations of

the emperor, excited his regard and admiration. This afforded him a

favourable opportunity of acquiring a correct notion of the state of the

Armenian Church, and of removing from his mind that unjust prejudice

with which he was in the habit of viewing the Armenians. The exam-

ple of their monarch was soon followed by the majority of the people,

who began to relax in the persecution with which they afflicted a nation

whom by a common faith they ought to have protected from similar

cruelties, when inflicted by the unbelieving Musulmans.

Apprehensive, through the perturbed state of the country, of an

attack upon his paternal castle of Zovs by foreign invaders, the pontiff

Grecory consulted his safety by quitting the place of his residence, and

fixing the seat of his pontificate in the fortress of Hiromcla. Built on

the confluence of therivers Marzmanand Euphrates, and strongly fortified

by nature, Hiromcla proved an insuperable bar against an invasion.

Formerly it was in the possession of the prince Basit the Sly, and

now it was under the control of the countess Joscetyn. The pontiff

Greeory and his brother Nizrszs met with a very hospitable reception

from this illustrious lady, who felt the greatest delight in rendering

their situation comfortable, and was exceedingly pleased with their

charming and edifying conversation.

On the decease of her husband, who had been seized by Novursp-

Din*, the chief of Aleppo, and who died in confinement, the dowager

countess Joscetyn thought it safe to quit Hiromcla for Europe.

* Mirus’s History of the Crusades, vol. i. p. 309.

134 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu,

Previously, however, to her departure, she made over the management

of the fortress to the pontiff Gregory and his brother Nierszs on the

following condition: ‘1 am about to quit this place,” said she, “ and

proceed to my country. I leave this fortress as a trust in your hands,

with a desire that in case my son happen to come to this quarter, you

shall deliver it over to him as his patrimonial property; but if other-

‘wise, you shall be entitled to its possession.” On the arrival of young

JoscELyN in Hiromcla, he was made master of it in conformity with

the desire of his mother. After a short residence in this place, JoscELYN

determined to quit it for Europe. In consequence of this intention,

the fortress was sold to the Armenian pontiff Gregory, who, according

to the historians VarDAN and Krraxvus, established in it the seat of his

pontifical government, and raised there a very magnificent Church,

embellished with splendid cupolas.

About the year 1165, when Grecory had attained to a good old

age, and enjoy 1 the pontifical office for a period of 53 years, he began

to be solicitous for the nomination of a successor. He expressed a

desire of conferring that spiritual dignity on his brother: Nr=rsss,

who was also past the meridian of life. The latter, though the offer

was several times made to him by Gregory, was unwilling to accept it.

Finally, anticipating the approach of his death, Gregory ordered a gene-

ral meeting of all the Armenian bishops, monks, and priests to be held

in the pontifical house at Hiromcla, for the purpose of considering the

best mode of nominating a successor to the pontificate. In this assem-

bly, after making an impressive speech on the approaching termination

of his career, and the necessity of electing a successor worthy of the

high station which be filled, he expressed his choice of investing his

brother Nizrses with the pontifical authority, which proposition met

with the unanimous and cordial approbation of the audience. NrzRszs,

who had made up his mind to exchange the troubles of a busy life for

the sweets of solitude, in vain endeavoured to decline the offer of that

responsible situation. Overcome by the repeated solicitations of the

assembly, he was at last obliged to accept the office of the pontificate,

with a view of promoting the general welfare of the nation. Immedi-

ately after this, Grrecory anointed Nrersss pontiff of all Armenia,

and adorned him with the pontifical robes. He placed in his hand the

sceptre of authority, and saluted him with the greatest reverence and

submission as the head of the Church. When the ceremonies of the

-election were over, Nirrsxs rose and delivered a most excellent speech,

expressive of his acknowledgments for the high honor that had been

conferred on him, and descriptive of the nature of the responsible duties

which he was bound to perform in the spiritual dignity to which he

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 135

was elevated. By this oration the audience were not only assured of

the zeal and interest which he would feel for the welfare of his flock,

but were also struck witha forcible conviction of the goodness of the heart

and the grandeur of the mind, from which these graceful sentiments

emanated. It was owing to a peculiarly sweet tone of his expressions,

and a remarkably fascinating flow of the sentiments of his inspired

mind, that he was distinguished by the appellation of the Graceful,

CinpSu;h» as he was latterly known by the cognomen of CuasEnsis,

ypwegh in consequence of exercising the functions of his sacerdotal

office in the fortress of Hiromcla. About three months after the elec-

tion of Nrersss, his brother Grecory departed this life Anno Domini

1166, and was entombed in a sepulchre prepared during his life time.

Soon after the death of his brother, Nr=rszs, the pontiff, set about

improving the state of the churches, and promoting the spiritual wel-

fare of his flock. And as the Armenians in that time, like those in our

days, were dispersed in various parts of the globe, that is to say, in the

territories of Armenia, in Greece, Persia, Georgia, Aluans, Egypt, and

other quarters, he found it essentially necessary to extend spiritual.

comforts even to his distant congregation, by sending to them pious and

able missionaries, for the purpose of curing the wounds of the afflicted, and

enlightening the minds of the ignorant. Not contented with the good

that was likely to result from the zealous exertions of these preachers of

the gospel, he, at the early part of his pontificate, and by the unanimous

consent of his bishops, addressed a general epistle at great length to the

people of his Church, which was couched in sentiments full of heavenly

wisdom*. In this letter, after mentioning the death of his brother

Grecory, and taking a short view of the relative duties imposed upon

him by his being elevated to the pontifical throne, he states the

orthodox creed of the Church of Armenia, which is immediately follow-

ed by preceptive exhortations best adapted to persons of every age

and rank. ‘The letter itself is divided into different sections, the first

of which is directed to conventuals, who are assimilated to the stars ;

the second, to the primates of monasteries, who are compared to the

eyes ; the third, to the bishops, who are likened to the head, counte-

nance, and stewards ; the fourth, to the priests, who are made to re-

semble parents ; the fifth, to the nobility ; the sixth, to the military

order ; the seventh, to the citizens ; the eighth, to the husbandmen and

peasantry ; and the ninth, to the female sex in general. The immedi-

ate object of the writer was to excite a love of virtue and piety amongst

his congregation, and to be instrumental in eradicating from their

* This pastoral epistle was published in Venice with a Latin translation

in the year 1829.

136 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu,

minds such unwholesome principles, as are calculated to render human

nature waste and deformed. There are also extant several epistles

written by Nizrszs to different individuals, about matters temporal and

spiritual, amongst which his correspondence with the authorities of

Greece, relative to the contemplated union of the Greek and Armenian

Churches, claims pre-eminence. Of this I shall have occasion to give

a detailed account in the following pages :

The attention of Nrerszs the Graceful was chiefly engrossed by a

fervent desire of introducing various useful plans of improvement into

the Church of Armenia. He succeeded in his endeavours of reforming

it from the remnants of those irregularities, which were some of the

baleful consequences of foreign invasions, and which were still predo-

minant in several parts of Armenia. He strove with great vigilance to

restore to the Church that splendour, which it enjoyed during the

glorious reign of the Christian kings of Armenia. He ordered old

copies of the Prayer Book of the Armenian Church to be brought to

him from various distinguished monasteries of Armenia major, and by

a careful comparison of their contents, he modelled the liturgy with

considerable improvements, which is to this day in general use amongst

all the Armenians. He made several additions to the Prayers that

were read on Good Friday and the Pentecost. According to the autho-

rity of MuxuirTHak, the pontiff, it appears that up to the time of Nrzrsus

the Graceful, the Church of Armenia performed the ordination of priests

and bishops conformably to the custom and ceremonies of the Greek

Church ; but Nrerszs, on his elevation to the pontifical throne, adopt-

ed a new mode of ordination, not materially different from those of the

sister Churches.

Prior to the beginning of the twelfth century, poetry was a perfect

blank in Armenian literature. Though metrical pieces_and songs can

be traced in our history to have been repeated and sung by the Arme-

nians in different periods, yet no record is handed down to us as to the

existence of regular poetry in the Armenian language. According to.

a faithful writer* of that time, great credit is due to Nizrsgs the

* Nierses LAMBRONENSIS, a contemporary and relation of Nierses the

Graceful,"pays a handsome and just tribute to his genius, learning, and virtues

in a poetical panegyric which he composed on him shortly after his death. In

alluding to the honor due to him for his being the first who introduced poetry

into the Armenian language, the panegyrist writes thus :

Sndk- push unui fry gwifioy. ‘¢ Who first with grace Homeric numbers strung,

\nwtuenp nunhg qunoy And touchingly in fair Armenia sung,

His verses soothe and elevate the soul,

’b Soqiapub qunjl maLoye

And bend our stubborn hearts to their control.’”

herd qufyunu kup Spo WS oy:

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 137

Graceful as the first poetic writer in Armenia, whose talented produc-

tions have deservedly gained him the title of the Prince of Armenian

Poets. Gifted by nature with a great genius, Nierszs devoted his

leisure to the composition of melodies, anthems, and hymns, which are

to this day sung in our Church to the admiration of all. Some of

these poetical pieces are acrostic, the first letters of the stanzas com-

posing the name of the author or the entire alphabet of the Armenian

language. He also wrote several treatises and panegyrics, both in

prose and verse, on dominical feasts, patriarchs, martyrs, and angels.

During the days of his priesthood, he composed a brief history of Ar-

menia in verse, from the period of Harc to the twelfth century. A

variety of miscellaneous pieces are also extant by this author, several

of which he wrote before his elevation to the pontifical throne. At

the express desire of his nephew Apirart, he produced in verse a pathe-

tic Elegy on the destruction of the devoted city of Edessa by the

victorious army of Zencut,the chief of Aleppo, which memorable event

took place on the 23rd of December, 1144*. This little work, which

abounds with vivid descriptions and patriotic feelings, was for the first

time published at Madras in the year 1810. Another edition of it

was lately published by the Asiatic Society of Paris. The European

public may shortly expect an English translation of it, which I have

undertaken to executet. On his being raised to the dignity of a bishop

Nierses produced another excellent work entitled 37 ()pgfh “ Jesus

_ the Sont,” which is a poetical description of the principal events that

are recorded in the Old and New Testaments. During this time he

composed that admirable prayer which commences with “I confess

with faith,” gwewwnd forunaduitfS, and which is now so popular

amongst the generality of the Armenians. It consists of twenty-four

verses, typical of the twenty-four hours of the day, and the number of

the books of prophecy. Regarding this prayer, the author says in the

records of old manuscripts, ‘‘ 1 have written this in a plain and easy

style, that it should be intelligible to general readers.” It is held in

such great estimation by my countrymen, that a translation of it into

twenty-four languages was published in the year 1823 by the Mukhi-

tharian Society in Venice ! Nrersss was not unaware of the benefit of

combining wtile dulci in the variety of his literary productions. He

* Miuxs’s History of the Crusades, vol. i. p. 307.

t+ The Armenian text was published at Calcutta in 1832. The translation has

not yet appeared.—Ep.

~ This work is very popular with the Armenian literati, and has run through

several editions, the latest of which was published at Venice in the year

1830.

138 Memoir of St. Nierses, Clajensis. (Marcu,

wrote several entertaining fables and pleasing enigmas, with a view of

affording to his countrymen a source of innocent pleasure of the mind.

Besides those already enumerated, he produced several other little

works, which, like many valuable antiquities, have not escaped the de-

vouring jaws of time.

The fame of the sanctity and wisdom of Nrersss the Graceful hay-

ing spread through various countries of the globe, many distinguished

individuals addressed him letters comprising questions on the most dif-

ficult points of religion, which he answered with such skill as to carry

conviction to the mind of every reasonable being. At the special

desire of VarpAN, one of the venerable monks of the convent of Hagh-

bat, he undertook writing a commentary of a sublime panegyric on the

Holy Cross, the production of David the philosopher, distinguished by

the cognomen of the Invincible. When the work was completed and

presented to Varpan, he highly admired the profound learning and the

inspired sentiments with which it abounded. There are also a few

philosophical treatises extant im our language, which some of our histo-

rians attribute to the pen of this bright luminary of the Armenian

Church.

Great intimacy existed between Nrerses and Groretius, primate of

the convent of Haghbat, who was eminently distinguished for his piety

and rectitude of conduct. The latter, who held a constant communica-

tion with the former, solicited him in a letter to use his endeavours to

procure a copy of the Memoirs of St. Sarxresthe General. Nuimrszs .

succeeded in obtaining the work, which was written in the Syrian lan-

guage. He ordered it to be translated into Armenian by a Syrian

priest, named Micuaxx, who was tolerably conversant with the Arme-

nian language. ‘This translation was subsequently revised by Nizrsxs

in the year 1156, while he was a bishop. A copy of this work, written

in Hiromcla, in the year 1198, about twenty-five years after the death

of Nixrszs, is preserved in the library of the Mukhitharian Society at

Venice. Annexed to this work, which appears to have been transcrib-

ed from the manuscript of Nisrszs himself, is a commentary of the

general Epistles of St. James, St. Peter, St. Joun, and St.Jupz, writ-

ten in a concise and comprehensive style, and compiled from the works

of Greek and Syriac theologists, whose names are specified. But who

was the compiler of this work is not known, as no mention is made of

him in the old records. In another copy of the same, which was writ-

ten in the year 1335 at the convent of St. THapprus, situated in the

province of Artaz, the compilation of the work is attributed by the

transcriber to Nierses. ‘This is, however, a mere conjecture, for it

can be clearly perceived from the style that it is not the production of

1836. ] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 138

Nigrszs. Perhaps a transcript made by him from the original was

left in the pontifical house at Hiromcla.

In the evening of his life, Nrzerses commenced writing a commen-

tary on the Gospel of St. Marruew. He had performed it as far as

« Think not that I am come to destroy the law or the prophets : I am

not come to destroy, but to fulfil,” when the termination of his earthly

career put a stop to its completion. After the lapse of a considerable

time, it was finished by Jonannes ZorzeReEnsis. There is another work

by the talented Nizrsrs, which was intended as a guide for monastic

life, and which he wrote while he enjoyed the dignity of priesthood.

The profound learning which characterises his writings, the peculiarly

beautiful style in which they are composed, and the divine spirit of

benevolence which pervades every page of his compositions, are con-

vincing proofs that the author of them was endowed with a mind of

most extraordinary powers, and filled with divine inspiration. His

voluminous lucubrations, which have been handed down to us by the

unanimous applause of past generations, are highly creditable both to his

head and heart as a man, a patriot, a divine, and a philosopher. Few

can rise from the perusal of his works without being moved by feelings

of reverence and admiration for the greatness of the mind from which

they have emanated. Nuizrsus LAMBRONENSIS, the grandson of Gene-

ral SHAHAN, the brother of Nimrsts the Graceful, who was one of his

distinguished contemporaries, and had many opportunities of personally

experiencing his mental and moral qualities, pays a just tribute to the

memory of this paragon of learning in a poetical panegyric which

minutely treats of the many amiable virtues with which he was adorned.

The panegyrist properly dwells on the meritorious exertions, which

Nierszs the Graceful made to promote the public good, on his exem-

plary piety and devotion, his rigid and abstemious habits, his continual

studies and philosophical reflections, and the warm sympathies with

which his heart glowed in relieving the distress of the poor, the orphan,

the widow, the sick, the captive, and others who were doomed to suffer

miseries and calamities.

During the pontificate of Nizrsxs the Graceful, there still appeared

in some parts of Armenia remnants of a peculiar tribe of Armenians,

known under the appellation of || p&opefg AnEvorvIES*, (the Sons of

* This people had probably derived their mode of worship from the ancient

Persians, and perfectly agreed in the tenets of the Guebres of the present day.

They adhered to the doctrines of Zerpasutor ZoROASTER, who considered the

sun as the grand receptacle of fire, and placed the existence of the Deity in the

fiery element spread over all the universe.

T 2

146 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcnw,

the Sun,) who had continued in their ancestorial superstitions, and not

deviated from paying homage to the sun since the days of Grucory

the Illuminator, the second Apostle of Armenia. Through the zealous

exertions of the Armenian missionaries, whom the pontiff Nizrszs

sent to different quarters of the country, the darkness of paganism, '

that had so long overhung the heads of these unbelievers, gradually

began to vanish, and after the lapse of a few years, the whole of that

tribe embraced Christianity, and were admitted into the fellowship of

the Church of Armenia.

Contemporary with Nizrses the Graceful, there was in Armenia

Muxuirnar, an assiduous follower of AuscuLapius, and eminently dis-

tinguished for his Medical and Astronomical knowledge. He had the

gratification of cultivating the friendship of Nirrszs, from whose

conversation he derived the greatest delight and spiritual comfort.

At the particular request of this celebrated naturalist, Nrzrszs wrote

a beautiful poem, descriptive of the beauties and excellencies of heaven-

ly bodies. He added to it another small poem on the Creation of

the World, and the mystery of the incarnation of our Saviour*. The

latter is acrostic, the first letters of the verses of it composing

this sentence IYfbltup pdhaqs piu, ?f tkpubsul quyw pus “ Doc-

tor Muxnitruar, accept from Nierses this poem!” I hope it

will not be considered here out of place to say, that this learned phy-

sician has left a very valuable work on Medicine, which is replete with

wise observations and useful experiments. It was composed during

the time, and by the desire, of Grecory the pontiff, the successor of

Niersss the Gracefult.

One of the most remarkable actions that marked the earthly career

of Nrersss the Graceful, was the contemplated union of the Armenian

and Greek Churches. This desirable object, which originated from a

most unexpected event, was undertaken during the life time of his

brother Grzecory, the pontiff, and prior to his being invested with the

supremacy of the Church of Armenia. But alas for the peace of

Christianity! before the laudable undertaking was carried into execu-

tion, both Armenia and Greece were unexpectedly deprived of the

only instruments by which such a happy change possibly could have

been effected !

During the last days of the pontificate of Grucory, dissensions

arose between the two Armenian princes, THorossz the Great Panse-

* These two little poems are also published in conjunction with the work called

«© Jesus the Son.”’

+ This rare Manuscript work was discovered in the Royal Library of Paris,

and published in Venice two years ago.

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 141

bastus and Lord of Cilicia, and Osuin the Sebastus and Lord of

Lambron. ‘The reason of this unfortunate difference was, that the

former insisted upon the latter to profess obedience to himself, and to

decline becoming tributary to the Greeks, while Osun thought it

safer to continue his allegiance to the Greek emperor, than to acknow-

ledge the ascendency of THorosz. Blinded by selfishness, and provoked

by mutual resistance, they were at last necessitated to have recourse

to an appeal to arms, which was attended with fatal consequences to

both parties.

The pontiff Grecory, viewing these unfortunate circumstances with a

spirit of national sympathy, imposed upon his brother Nirrszs the

task of effecting a reconciliation between the two princes by his mild

and fascinating address. Niprses succeeded in his endeavours of

restoring to them peace and friendship, which were soon after followed

by a happy alliance between them, THoross marrying his daughter to

Heruvm, the son of Osuin. On the celebration of this marriage, OsHiN

desired NizrsEes to accompany him to Lambron, with a view that its

inhabitants might be benefitted by his edifying instructions and evan-

gelical discourses. During their journey they had occasion to enter

the city of Mamestia, which was then in the possession of the Greeks.

Here they met ALExius, the protostrator or generalissimo of the Greek

army, who was the son-in-law of the emperor MANvEL, and had come

thither with the design of visiting the frontiers that belonged to the

Grecian empire. On his first interview with Nizrsss the Graceful,

A.Exius was struck with admiration by the grace and learning which

pervaded every part of his conversation. One day religion being the

topic of their conference, ALExius expressed a desire of being fur-

nished with information as to the cause of the division of the Church

of Christ into so many doctrinal opinions. The promptitude with

which Nrzrsss answered every question that was put to him, created

in ALExIus a deep sense of veneration for him as an erudite divine,

and left no appearance of doubt in his arguments. NurErszs convinced

him that the difference of opinions between the Christian Churches

merely existed in words and forms, and assured him that the creed

of the Armenian Church was consonant to that of the Church of

Greece.

Axrxius desired Ni=rszs to commit the whole of their conversation

to writing, which he promised to present to the emperor, and to exert

every nerve in effecting a union between the two Churches. He also

proposed to him the solution of a few important points, which from

their intricate nature had created a difference of opinion between the

divines of the Greek Church.

142 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu,

Nierszs accepted the proposition with great interest, and accord-

ingly wrote an epistle to him full of sound doctrine and incontrovertible

proofs. He commenced the latter by saying, “1 was extremely

delighted by the opportunity of holding a conference with you, O

philanthropic and pious nobleman, respecting the doctrines and forms

of the Armenian Church! But as sentiments embodied by human

utterance are liable to be effaced from the tablets of memory, by the

lapse of time, by reason of the cessation of our remembrance, I do not

hesitate to furnish you with a written account of all that you were

pleased to hear from me. I shall endeavour to perform my task with

as much propriety and precision, as my time and abilities will admit

of. Encouraged by the love of knowledge, with which you are distin-

guished, I feel no small alleviation in the execution of my difficult

undertaking. It may not be perhaps superfluous to add, that all my

arguments are drawn from that pure source of religious truth, for

which our divine fathers of old are so deservedly characterised.”

This preamble is immediately followed by an orthodox confession of

the Holy Trinity, and of the incarnation of our blessed Saviour. It is

here asserted, that the Church of Armenia admits the duality of nature

in Christ, and that the Armenians by the term “‘ one nature,’ acknow-

ledge by implication an unconfounded union of the divinity and. human

nature of our Saviour. It is also added that the Armenian Church,

according to old customs, commemorates the nativity of our Saviour on

the 6th of January, and that it is a gross fabrication that the Arme-

nians observe the Annunciation day on the preceding day of the Epi-

phany. That in consequence of a want of olives, the Armenians make

preparation of unction by the oil of odorous flowers. That they pay

due reverence to pictures. That in constructing crosses of wood, nails

are with no other intention affixed to them than with that of joining

the parts together ; while those made of silver and gold are without

nails. That the prayer YJacpe G&S “ Holy God*,” is offered in the Ar-

menian Church to Jesus Christ, and not to the Father, or the Holy

Ghost. That the custom of partaking of milk, butter, and cheese, on

* About half an hour previously to the commencement of high mass,

the following short prayer is addressed to the Son in the Armenian Church:

Yoere US; wocpe le Sqor onc pp he wir tnS , op fuuskguip quot Ep» ayapdE-us dE 4+

“ Holy God, Holy and Mighty, Holy and Immortal; who’ wast crucified for us,

have mercy upon us.’’? An erroneous impression had been made on the minds

of the Greeks, that this prayer was indiscriminately addressed to either of the

persons of the Holy Trinity, and by this conviction, they traced a fundamental

error in the doctrines of the Armenian Church.

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 143

Saturdays and Sundays during the lent, has now become obsolete

amongst the Armenian people, and though it is still continued by a

few of the nobility, its entire abandonment will be effected in a short

time. That the custom of using pure wine, unmixed by water, in the

Holy Communion, has obtained in the Armenian Church since the days

of the blessed Grecory the Illuminator. Finally, the writer explains

the nature of the abdomedal fasting, which is observed by the Arme-

nians a few weeks before the commencement of the Lent.

' ALEXIUS, on receiving from Nizrsss the foregoing epistle, expressed

his grateful acknowledgments for the same, and permitted him to take

his departure for Lambron, after having bestowed on him every mark

of honor suitable to his rank and office. Ni»rszs having remained

in the latter place for a short time, quitted it for Hiromcla, where he

met his brother Grecory, the pontiff, and related to him every particu-

lar of the communication that had passed between him and the Grecian

generalissimo ALEXIUS.

On the fulfilment of the immediate object of the letter of Nimrszs

the Graceful, on its being put into the hands of the emperor Manuz1,

and the patriarch Micuazx, they immediately ordered it to be trans-

lated into Greek, and felt great satisfaction at the opportunity that had

offered itself of effecting a union between the Greek and Armenian

Churches. The perusal of the translation filled their minds with

admiration of the mild spirit and rare talents of the writer, and afford-

ed them encouragement to carry the contemplated scheme into exe-

cution. Hereupon the emperor sent a deputation to Armenia, consist-

ing of SumBar and Aruxku, both of Armenian extraction, with a letter

to Gregory the pontiff, dated September, 1167, expressive of his ear-

nest desire of seeing the consummation of the happy union which was

in contemplation. In order to proceed in this undertaking. with faci-

lity and success, he wished that Nizrsss the Graceful should be sent

to Constantinople, thinking that the presence of both parties might in

a great degree be conducive to an amicable settlement of the existing

differences. The following is a copy of the letter in question :

*“* Manuext Comnenus PorpuyRiGENITUs, ever mighty and great, Augustus,

emperor of Greece, and faithful king of God Jesus Christ, to his holiness Lord

Grueory, the excellent pontiff of Armenia, sendeth love and greeting. It is the

imperative duty of all those, who by the medium of the baptismal font have

entered into the fellowship of Christ, to have due regard for the fulfilment of

divine justice, and to display special care and zeal for the advancement of love,

peace, and unanimity amorgst that class of people, who have Christ as the foun-

dation of their religion. They are bound to use their unremitting endeavours

to knit all the Christians with the bonds of union ; to make them followers of one

shepherd, who became incarnate to save us from perdition, to bring them under

144 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu,

the guidance of one pastoral crook ; to cause them to ‘ lie down in green pas-

tures’’ of orthodox faith ; to render them participators of the vital stream of

wholesome doctrines, and to gather them within the pale of one Catholic

Church. Elevated by Providence to the highest station that can be allotted here

to a human being, I consider the duties of governing my empire less sacred, less

beneficial, than those which oblige me to be instrumental in effecting an union of

the Christian Churches. Impressed with this conviction, I shall, as far as time

and circumstances will permit, strive to consummate an object, which involves

the temporal and spiritual welfare of mankind.

‘It is not less becoming to your excellent fraternity, who have made the

scriptures and the laws of God your chief studies, and rendered yourselves con-

versant with the orthodox doctrines of the fathers of the Church, to use your

frieadly and influential co-operation in securing the welfare of the inward man,

by collecting from the only source of life the dews of truth and salvation. Of

your desire to promote this laudable object, we have been informed by our belov-

ed son-in-law Auexius, who delivered to us a letter bearing a detailed account

of the conference that had taken place between you and him concerning the

contemplated union of the sister Churches. Itis our intention to give due

deliberation to the state of the Armenian Church, and to institute inquiries into

the creed thereof. A translation of the letter of your holiness was read by us

with uncommon interest, and afforded us a source of the greatest satisfaction.

Assured of the moral and Christian virtues, for which your holiness is so emi-

nently distinguished, we feel real pleasure in rendering our aid to the consum-

mation of an object highly desirable both to God and man.

‘¢ With this view we would propose to you to dispatch your brother NreRrsEs

to our capital, as we are perfectly convinced that a man of his extensive informa-

tion, varied knowledge, virtuous conduct, and amiable disposition, will not

only be able to afford satisfaction to the Head of our Church, and the synod in

general, but particularly tend to remove the difficulties which will otherwise be

experienced from time and place. Let the insignificant cause of division, which

subsists between the two Churches, be removed if it he within the scope of pos-

sibility ; and let not Christ, who redeemed us from eternal punishment by his

precious blood, be considered a stumbling block, but the Head of the corner and

the True Foundation of our faith, which unites us together im spirit. Let Christ

be the centre of all our religious inquiries, the Anchor of all our spiritual aspi-

rations, and the Director of all our ecclesiastical affairs. In him we founded our

belief, to him our hearts were fixed, and by him our wounds were healed. From

the Great Bestower of so many blessings you will no doubt obtain for your zeal

in the sacred cause of Christianity that recompence which is reserved for the

enjoyment of the elect. We have thought it necessary to depute our faithful

servant SuMBAT, bearing this letter, with directions to induce you to despatch

your brother NizrsEs to Constantinople. He is also authorised to give you

such other information, as might have a connexion with the immediate object

of his mission. You may safely credit all that will be said by him on this sub-

ject. Adieu !’’

While preparations were in progress at the capital of Greece for

depatching the embassy to Armenia, the pontiff Grecory terminated

his earthly career. The Church of Syria was also at the same time

1836.} Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 145

deprived of its supreme pastor, whose station was immediately filled

by an able and worthy successor. News of the proposed union of the

sister Churches having spread throughout the Christian countries

which held a close intercourse with Armenia, the patriarch of Syria

deputed two learned bishops to Hiromcla, for the purpose of taking a

part in the proceedings of the council, which was shortly to be held by

Niersss the Graceful, for furthering the views of the intended union.

On the arrival of the embassy at Hiromcla, Sumsar delivered the

imperial letter to Nrerszs the pontiff, communicating to him many inter-

esting particulars on the part of the emperor, and persuading him to

accompany him to Constantinople ; but the duties of his high office

rendering his absence from the pontifical house indispensable at that

very juncture, NrersEs sent a reply to the emperor, full of spirit and

wonderful observations. As the letter itself is of great length, I shall

here only give an outline of its contents :

‘* I had the honor to receive the letter of your Imperial Majesty, addressed

to my late lamented brother and immediate predecessor in the pontificate of

Armenia. By the perusal of the inspired sentiments expressed in it by your

godly Majesty, our hearts thrilled with that inexpressible delight which a person

feels on recovering from the influence of sleep, and enjoying the vivifying beams

of the glorious orb of day. It is gratifying to us to observe, that your Majesty

is worthy of not only bearing the name of the true EMMANUEL, but also of his

co-operation in ‘ breaking down the middle wall of partition between us.’ En-

dowed with these peculiar gifts of heaven, your Majesty is condescendingly

pleased to accost us with a cheering voice, and propose measures for eradicating

from amongst us that hatred, which has proved so baleful to the interests of

Christianity, and the welfare of our country. I am so exceedingly delighted with

your Majesty’s invitation, that I would, even if I were dead, like LAzarvs, arise

from the grave, and obey the divine voice which summons me to your presence ;

but violent disturbances abroad, and the urgent duties of my avocation at home,

present insuperable barriers to my paying a visit to Constantinople. Notwith-

standing these obstacles, I should still feel diffident to attempt discussing a ques-

tion of so much weight in your august presence, from a conviction that the

sphere of my knowledge would look like a mere drop in comparison with the

vast ocean of your Majesty’s qualifications. All that were great and noble in

Armenia, to our national misfortune, have now ceased to exist. The only com-

fort, with which we cheer our hearts in the melancholy gloom that overhangs

our civil destinies, is derived from the circumstance of our Church being based on

the solid foundation of Catholic faith. We place our confidence in the mercies

of God, that the divine power which excited love and good-will amongst us,

shall consummate a happy union between the two Churches.

‘* Should your Imperial Majesty be graciously pleased to visit Armenia, for

the furtherance of this desirable object, you will, by that act of condescension,

display in your soul the stamp of that humility, with which the heavenly King came

to the world to bestow salvation on mankind. We are sure that you will join with

us in the conviction, that the lustre of glory reflected on your mighty empire by

146 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcw#,

splendid victories, and the aggrandizement of territories, will be cheerless and

evanescent when contrasted with that of restoring peace to the Church of Christ,

by blunting the weapons of the incorporate enemy, and suppressing envy and

hatred, which like cankers have preyed on the very vitals of our spiritual exist-

ence. Our Lord Jesus Christ, viewing the baneful consequences of pride pre-

dominant in human nature, had recourse to humility as to an infallible cure of

the spiritual infirmities under which mankind were labouring ; and by means of

his divine love and meekness, conciliated the hearts of those who were estranged

from him by the infringement of his laws and ordinances. In imitation of the

example set to us by our blessed Redeemer, it behoves your Imperial Majesty to

make your dictatorial authority subservient to mildness and humility, in remov-

ing the cause of estrangement that exists between the two nations. As a tree

which is bent to the ground is liable to be broken by a sudden and violent effort

to restore it to its upright position, so a division amongst the members of Christ,

rendered obsiinate by time, is incapable of being removed by force. It stands

in need of a long and patient application of spiritual ointment, I mean the exer-

cise of a kind, mild, and conciliatory spirit on the part of your Imperial Majesty

towards the Armenians placed under the sway of your government.

‘‘ Many of your people, to our great national misfortune, consider that the

only means of conforming to the laws and justice of God, and of being worthy of

inheriting the kingdom of heaven, consist in pouring upon us torrents of abuse,

in destroying our Churches, in breaking our crosses, in overturning our altars,

in ridiculing our religious ceremonies, and in harassing and persecuting the

ministers of our Church. This unchristian animosity is carried to such a pitch,

as to shame the horrid cruelties of the worst of unbelievers. Galled and perse-

cuted by Moslem despotism, we have hitherto in vain sought protection in the

sympathies of Christianity. Hence it must be inferred, that such a course of

action not only fails to unite the divided, but tends to divide the united. The

first effectual recipe, that can be applied to our spiritual distempers, is to make

an exchange of the inveterate hatred for human love and kindness, and as a matter

of consequence, to stimulate thereby the inhabitants of Armenia major to an

acquiescence in the projected union. We humbly solicit your Imperial Majesty

to order special prayers to be offered up in all the Churches throughout your

empire, that the Almighty may be pleased to crown our undertaking with suc-

cess. We have taken care that similar measures shall be adopted by our clergy

in every quarter of Armenia.

‘¢ We have also particularly to request, that in case Providence assist us in

discussing matters ou the intended union in a general council, no mark of dis-

tinction or superiority should be observed between the Greek and the Armenian.

Let no tone of authority be assumed by the former in denoting such points of

the doctrines of our Church as are nof accordant with those of yours, and no

fault be imputed to the latter in boldly supporting the truths and dignity of

their Church. Marks of distinction are only observable in tne discussion of

civil and temporal affairs. It is true that you claim pre-eminence in the attain-

ment of knowledge and the exercise of earthly power; yet all those who are

strengthened by the graces of regeneration in the baptismal font, are according to

St. Paul ‘one in Christ Jesus.’ If, therefore, it may be pleasing to the Al-

mighty to smile on our endeavours, and to bring our undertaking to a successful

termination, we shall, in the assembly to be convened for the purpose, lay Christ

1836.) Memorr of St. Nierses Clajensis. 147

as the Rock and the Head of the corner over the two sundered walls of our

Churches. Let not the subject be discussed with that fruitless and violent

mode of controversy, which has hitherto beeu carried on by the sister Churches

with detrimental consequences on both sides. Let brotherly love, unanimity,

and an ardour after divine truths distinguish the whole course of the proceed-

ings of the council. Let us, in accordance with the injunctions of St. Paul,

bear one another’s burden, and the infirmities of the weak, and so fulfil the law of

Christ.’ In laying open our spiritual distempers to the observation of one

another, let each party reciprocally look for, in the other, a sympathising and

confidential physician. Whatever may be beyond the reach of our penetration,

let it be referred to the testimony of those whose judgment and experience have

rendered them distinguished in the decision of similar questions. Able physi-

cians do not consider their qualifications under-rated by taking medicines from

the hands of their scholars, when they are labouring under the attacks of sick-

ness. The eyes, though sharp enough in seeing the objects presented to their

gaze, fall short of beholding themselves and the members of the body by which

they are surrounded; and on their being attacked with soreness, they seek a

cure from the eyes and hands of another. What has been stated above, will, we

hope, be considered sufficiently satisfactory to your Imperial Majesty. We have

communicated to you multum in parvo, and have desired your ambassador to

furnish you with such other information, as may be thought to content the ar-

dour of your curiosity. Adieu! Augustus Emperor! May your Majesty live

long under the protection of the Almighty.’’

At the express desire of SumBat, who was at the head of the em-

bassy, Nirrszs the Graceful drew out another form of the Creed of the

Armenian Church, being assured that it would tend to throw more

light on the disputed points of religion, and carry conviction to the

mind of every philanthropic inquirer. The contents of this letter

were a clear, distinct, and comprehensive recapitulation of all that he

had stated in the former one, presented to Auexius, the son-in-law of

the emperor. The letter commenced with the following beautiful

preamble :

‘It now becomes us to address ourselves to you, not with eloquence of speech,

in which we are deficient, but in the truth of the spirit, in which we were in-

structed by those favoured with divine inspiration. We do not attempt giving

colour to a schismatical darkness, by clothing our Creed with the light of ortho-

dox faith, as we have unjustly been supposed to do by others guilty of a similar

line of conduct; but what we have stored in the invisible spirit, we embody the

Same in visible writing, by the testimony of our minds, and the dictation of the

Holy Ghost, who sees, judges and examines the utmost recesses of our hearts.’’

After making long and sensible observations on the mystery of the

Holy Trinity, and the incarnation of Jesus Christ, leaning on the in-

controvertible testimonies of the Fathers of the Church, he proceeds

thus :

‘* Concurring in the fundamental principles of the Christian religion, we be-

lieve that the word, who was made flesh according to St. JoHN, was not changed

into flesh by being divested of his divine nature, but that by an unconfounded

ul 2

148 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcn,

union with body, he was actually made flesh, and continued without flesh, as he

was from the beginning. We believe that there are not two persons in Christ,

one with flesh and the other without flesh; but that the very Christ is both with

flesh and without flesh. He was made flesh by human nature, of which he partook,

and remained without flesh in divine nature, which he had from the beginning.

He is both visible and invisible, perceivable and unperceivable by the touch, be-

ginning and unbeginning in time, the Son of Man, and the Son of God, co-

essential with the Father in divinity, and concomitant with us in humanity.’’

After taking a comprehensive view of the mystery of the incarna-

tion of our Saviour, he dilates on His divine and human wills, and

clearly demonstrates, that the will of the humanity of Christ was

always and in every respect obedient to that of his divinity :

‘¢The human will had no ascendancy over the divine, as in us the passions

very often domineer over the reason; but the divine will always exercised its

dominion over the human: for the actions of the human were all guided and

directed by the power and sway of the divine.

‘Tn accordance with the doctrine of the wonderful union of the divine and

human wills that exist in the person of Christ, we concur in the consistency of

attributing his operations to a natural and supernatural agency. We do not

ascribe his superior actions only to the divinity, unconnected with the humanity ;

nor his inferior acts only to the humanity, unconnected with the divinity. Were

it not truly proper to connect the great with the little, how could it consistently

be said that the Son of Man descended from heaven, and that God was crucified

and bled on the cross? To the unconfounded union of both the divinity and

humanity we attribute the divine and human operations of Christ, who some-

times as a God acted inthe superior power of God, and sometimes as a man, acted

in the capacity of man, as it is easily demonstrated by the whole course of his

dispensations from the beginning to the close of his divine mission. He felt

hunger as a man, and fed thousands with a few loaves asa God. He prayed

for us and on our behalf as a man, and accepted with his Father the prayers of

all his people as a God. In humanity he was brought as a lamb to the slaughter,

and was dumb as a sheep before her shearers; but he is the Word of God, by

whom the heavens were created, in his divinity. He died in human nature as a

man, and raised the dead by divine power asa God. He suffered the pangs of

death as a man, and conquered death by death as a God. It was not the one

that died, and the other that conquered death; but it was Christ himself, who

died, who lives, and who vivifies the dead. For the same Christ, being a man,

and of a mortal nature, and being a God, and of an immortal nature, not divid-

ing into two the unconfounded union of the divinity and humanity, so as to

render the one untormentable and immortal, and the other susceptible of tortures

and death, he suffered on the cross for the salvation of mankind with the inex-

plicable combination of these contrarieties, yielding in human nature to tortures

and death, and in divinity, being free from pain, and immortal. He that died

in human nature, was alive in divinity ; he that was tortured on the cross,

remained also free from the pangs of tortures; he that perspired through fear,

levelled on the ground his assailants; he that was unjustly humiliated and

strengthened by angels, strengthens all his creatures; he that is Creator of the

universe, coequal in divinity with the Father, was born from his creature, and

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 149

partook of our nature. He is proclaimed by the preachers of the gospel to be

perfect God and man, uniting in his person divinity and humanity in a manner

far surpassing the union of the soul and body; for the former, being commended

into the hands of the Father, was separated from the latter, but the divinity con-

tinued inseparable from both of them*.”’

The preceding creed is immediately followed by a detailed account

of the forms and ceremonies observed in the Armenian Church, similar

to that which the writer had previously drawn out at the particular

request of Auexius. It is concluded by the following short para-

graph :

‘‘In the perusal of our letter, wherein the creed and the observances of our

Church are explained in a comprehensive style, we humbly hope that your

Gracious and Imperial Majesty will not deny us the candour and sincerity with

which our sentiments are embodied in writing. Let us not be suspected of

parasitical subterfuges in the communication of our thoughts, and let it be

remembered that we have stated in this nothing which is at variance with simple

trutb, and the genuine effusions of our hearts.’’

The motives of the writer in making this assertion were to silence

the mouths of such miscreants of his nation, as had gone over to the

~Church of Greece, and were invidiously endeavouring to baffle the

consummation of the proposed union, by rendering the doctrines and

ceremonies of the Armenian Church censurable in the eyes of the

Emperor and Patriarch of Constantinople.

On the return of the embassy to the Court of Bee the letter of

Niersts was put into the hands of the emperor Manuet, who per-

sonally presented it to the patriarch. A translation of it being read

before a numerous assembly of the dignitaries of the Greek Church,

they were struck with admiration at the irresistible arguments which

it comprised. They were stimulated by its contents to the abandon-

ment of the inveterate hatred which they bore towards the Armenians,

and unanimously agreed in effecting the contemplated union between

the two Churches. The emperor, excited by an intense desire of pro-

moting this sacred cause, proposed to pay a visit to Armenia, accom-

panied by some of the learned theologists of Greece, with a view of

meeting Nirrsus the Graceful, and holding with him a conference on

the religious differences that existed between the two nations ; but he

was unfortunately prevented from the fulfilment of his intention by the

* This clear, lucid and unequivocal confession of faith is enough to carry convic-

tion to the minds of the most fastidious of our accusers, that the Church of ARME-

NIA is totally free from the heresies of Eurycures! Let it also satisfy such

misinformed, misled, and misguided, writers as Mr. Coartes MAc FARLANE,

author of the sublime Tale of CoNSTANTINOPLE, entitled ‘‘ Tot ARMENIANS,’’ that

we Armenians are not Eutychians, as he is led to believe from the misrepresentations

of the Romanists.

150 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marc,

commotions which at that time prevailed in the west. He conse-

quently chose the alternative of deputing in May, A. D. 1170, to

Hiromcla, Luzion Master Tuzorianey, a Greek divine, eminently

distinguished for his theological and philosophical attainments, with

Jouanngs, the learned Abbot of an Armenian monastery, from Philip-

polis, generally known by the appellation of Uraman, bearing an

imperial letter addressed to the pontiff of Armenia, in these terms :—

“Tt afforded us great joy to learn your willingness to effect a happy union

between the sister Churches, and acquiescing in your laudable views, we have

deputed learned and pious men to confer with you on our behalf, and use

every means in their power to remove the wall of partition between us.”’

On the arrival of the deputation at Hiromcla, Turorianey and

JoHANNeEs were kindly received by the Armenian bishops that were

assembled by Nrrerszs the Graceful in the pontifical house, for the pur-

pose of adopting the best mode of carrying the proposed union into

execution. Nurrszs, on the letter of the emperor being presented to

him by Turorraney, shewed the latter every mark of honor and kind-

ness, which his rank and the immediate object of his mission required.

THEORIANEY had brought with him a copy of the letter of Nimrsxs,

addressed to the emperor, with a view of obtaining an explanation on

some points that appeared doubtful to them, and of satisfying their

minds as to the reality of some assertions that were made by those

who were inimically disposed towards the Armenian Church. To these

ends an assembly of the Armenian and Greek bishops was held in

Hiromcla, who commenced discussing the important points with deco-

rum, mildness, and moderation. THEoRIANEY, in the course of perusing

the letter of Nrerszs to the assembly, proposed, in proper order, several

questions for solution, to which Nrerses made replies, full of convin-

cing proofs. The course of discussions comprised queries on the duality

of nature and will in the person of Christ, (about which point great

stress was laid on this saying of Cyrinuus: ‘‘ The incarnate Word is

of one nature,’ which admits of various constructions,) the exact day

of the commemoration of the nativity of our Saviour, the propriety of

the prayer *‘ Holy God,” which was offered in the Armenian Church,

the preparation of the holy unction, the necessity of performing pray-

ers within the Church, and the decrees of the council of Chalcedon.

At the conclusion of the meeting, Nrerssgs, in his endeavours to remove

an erroneous impression from the mind of THEor1AnEy, that the Arme-

nians were monophysites, cited from a work of JoHannzs the philoso-

pher, a renowned pontiff of Armenia, several proofs corroborative of

the duality of nature in Christ. ‘The work in question,” said he,

“‘ which was before imperfectly known but to a few of our nation, was

afterwards unanimously adhered to by my predecessors in the ponti-

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 15]

ficate of Armenia.” The work was, at the desire of THEORIANEY, pro-

duced at the meeting, and a few passages of the same being read to

him, he highly admired its wholesome doctrine. A transcript of it

was accordingly made out at the request of Turor1ANEey, who wished

to take it to Constantinople for the inspection of the emperor and

patriarch. The proceedings of this council were committed to writing

by TuHeoriANney, as it appears from the panegyric written by Nrersxs

Lamsronensis on Ninrses the Graceful. THrorianny’s account of

this meeting was, in the year 1578, published in Greek and Latin, in

conjunction with the records of the fathers of the Church.

Before the mission had quitted Constantinople for Hiromcla, the

emperor Manvet communicated to Mrcraut, the patriarch of Syria,

his intention of acceding to an union of the Greek and Armenian

Churches. THrort1Aney, on his arrival at Hiromcla, wrote to Micuaegn,

soliciting his presence at the Council of union which was shortly to

be held in the pontifical house of Armenia. The latter deputed a proxy

in the person of Jouannzs, bishop of Cheson, who, reaching Hiromcla

after the meeting had terminated, felt great displeasure at the acquies-

cence of Nierses the Graceful in the doctrines of the Greek Church,

and began to censure him, as the representative of his patriarch, for

such a line of conduct. Nusrsss, by sensible observations, convinced

him of the propriety and necessity of the union, and desired him that

on his return to Syria he should use every means in his power to secure

the consent of Micuasrt to the removal of the religious differences

which had for ages disturbed the peace of the sister Churches.

On the departure of THrortanny for Constantinople in October in

the year 1170, Nisrsss addressed a letter to the emperor, of which

the following is an outline.

‘In delivering your Imperial letter to us, THEORIANEY assured us of the

love and good-will, which you are graciously pleased to exercise in increasing

the spiritual and temporal welfare of our nation. The proposal of effecting

this happy union between the two Churches could proceed from no other source,

than from a mind gifted with the choicest blessings of heaven, and entirely

devoted to the service of its Creator. Enriched with every thing that is great

and good, you burn with the desire of becoming a partaker of our spiritual

poverty. On a conference held between us and the learned divines, whom your

Majesty was pleased to depute, the veil of the unjust aspersions with which the

two nations were covered, was rent asunder. By: the collision of contrary opi-

nions, the truth, which was surrounded with a mist of falsehood, burst to light,

and shone with redoubled splendour. The result of the council of union is

conducive to carrying conviction to the mind of every reasonable being, that

the Greeks are free from the heresy of the Nestorian* division, and that the

* For the Nestorian heresies, see Evsrsrus’s Ecclesiastical history, tom. iii.

pp. 256 and 257,

152 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marcu,

Armenians are also free from that of the Eutychian* confusion. Concurring

in the fundamental principles of religion, the Armenians and Greeks are united

together by the grace of God in the similarity of the creed of the Catholic and

Apostolic Church. Fixed in the determination of our happy union, I shall

address all our bishops residing in different quarters of Armenia, and ask their

consent to some important points proposed by you for our acceptance, lest by

their being excluded from taking a part in the furtherance of this desirable

object, the result of our endeavours may prove contrary to our sanguine expec-

tations. I have also, conformably with the desire of THrEORIANEY, furnished him

with another letter descriptive of the confession of our Church.’’

In this letter, after treating of the incarnation of our Saviour, in ac-

cordance with the tenor of his former one, he adds, that it is consist-

ent with the orthodox faith to admit duality of nature in Christ, by

reason of his perfect divinity and perfect humanity; that the Arme-

nians, by attributing one nature to the incaraate word, on the authority

of Cyriuuus, confess an unconfounded and indivisible combination of

the divine with the human nature; and that the Church of Armenia

anathematizes those who, in the sense of the heretical doctrine of

Evutycues, may confessedly ascribe one nature to Christ.

On the return of THEoRIANEY and Jonanngs Uruman to Constanti-

nople, they felt great satisfaction in presenting to the emperor the

letter of Nrersxs, together with an account of the proceedings of the

council. The perusal of these interesting documents afforded the

greatest delight to the emperor, the patriarch, and the other dignitaries

of the Greek Church. Their joy at the favourable prospect of their

undertaking could only be increased by a sense of veneration, with

which they were impressed on their being informed by Turor1aney of

the piety, mildness, and pleasant address of Nrersxs the Graceful. The

fame of the amiable qualities of the pontiff of Armenia rivetted the

hearts of the Greeks to the cause of the sacred union, and made them

exclaim with admiration, ‘‘ Behold the wise course pursued by the

pontiff of Armenia, and consider the orthodox creed followed by him-

self and the whole of his congregation! Thanks to Heaven, that in these

* The heresies of Eutycues are thus alluded to by Euvsrsivs in his Ecclesi-

astical History :

‘As & oby KAnOels E’utuxhs obk eAHAveE* Ta 5E, Kat maparyeyduevos EdAw. eiphret

yap, duoroy@ ex dvo0 pbocwr yeyerncbat Tov Kupioy juwy mpd Tis Everews* wera SE

Thy wow, piay plow duodroya. bs odd Td oHpa Tod Kupiov buoovo.oy juiy reyev

civat’ KaPorperTror mev- :

Eurycues igitur, cum ad synodum vocatus non venisset, ac deinde coram

convictus esset hec dixisse: Fateor Dominum nostrum Jesum Christum, ante

unitionem quidem duas habuisse naturas: Post unitionem vero unam duntaxat

naturam confiteor. Sed et corpus Domini negabat ejusdem esse substantie

cujus sunt nostra: depositus est.—Eusebii Ecclesiast. Histor. tom. iii. p. 261.

1836.] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. . 153

days of degeneracy we see a pastor of the Church adorned with so many

Christian and moral virtues!” The hatred which the Greeks manifest-

ed towards the Armenians gradually began to abate, anda sort of

generous sympathy was felt by the former, for the lamentable degrada-

tion to which the latter were reduced in a political point of view. They

could not, however, reconcile themselves to the idea, that the Armenians,

after conforming to the fundamental principles of orthodox faith, and

admitting duality of nature in our Saviour, should still persist in as-

serting one nature in the union of his divinity and humanity. Though

the arguments, with which the Armenians endeavoured to clear their

minds on this subject, were perfectly sound and correct, yet the

Greeks could not overcome their reluctance to make such concessions

to them, and were consequently anxious that this obstacle to their

union, together with a few others of minor importance, originating

from certain observances of the Armenian Church, might prudently

and speedily be removed.

Hereupon the emperor came to the determination of sending another

embassy to Hiromcla, consisting of the abovementioned THErorIaANEy

and Jonannes Utuman, who were furnished with letters from the

emperor and patriarch MicuaeEt, bearing date December, 1172, and

instructed to urge Nr=rsszs to apply himself with increased interest and

assiduity to the fulfilment of the object in view, lest the death of either

of them might put a stop to the successful termination of their under-

taking. Nine points connected with the creed of the Church of Greece

were distinctly stated in the imperial letter, for the consideration and

subsequent acceptance of the Armenians. It was also proposed by

the emperor, that those points, but particularly that of the duality of

nature in Christ, should be discussed, and admitted by the Armenians

in a general council to be held for that purpose. Should they, how-

ever, be reluctant in conceding to some of the points alluded to, they

might communicate their objections in a letter addressed by their

pontiff to the emperor. The proposed points are the following :

I. Anathematize those who admitted one nature in Christ, that is

to say, EutycueEs, Deoscorus, Srvertius, Trmoruevs, and the follow-

ers of their heresies.

II. Confess in our Lord Jesus Christ, one Son, one person, one

hypostasis formed of two perfect natures, which are inseparable, indi-

visible, unchangeable, unalterable, unconfounded; so as not to consi-

der Christ in a separate sense the Son of God and the Son of the holy

Deiparous, but to acknowledge in him unconfusedly the Son of God

and the Son of Man, and to confess him to be both God and Man in

the duality of his nature. Confess in him the duality of actions and

154 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. [Marc#,

natural will, both divine and human, not resisting each other, but the

human will following and obeying the divine. III. The prayer ‘‘ Holy

God’ should be offered in your Church by the omission of “ who wast

crucified for us,” and the conjunction ‘‘ and.’’ TV. You should conform

to the Church of Greece in commemorating the feasts, that is to say,

the Annunciation day, on the 25th of March; the Nativity, on the 25th

of December ; the Circumcision, on the eighth day after the birth of

Christ, to wit, on the Ist of January ; the Baptism on the 6th of Janu-

ary; the Presentation of our Saviour to the temple on the fortieth day

after his birth on the 2nd of February, and in like manner, agreeing

with us in observing all the dominical feasts, as well as those of the

holy Virgin Mary, of St. Joun, of the Apostles and of others. V.

The preparation of the unction should be made of the oil of the fruit

of trees. VI. The Communion Service should be performed with lea-

vened bread, and wine mixed with water. VII. Let Armenian Chris-

tians, both clergy and laity, remain within the Church, during the

hours of prayer and the performance of communion service, with the

exception of public penitents, who are prohibited by ecclesiastical

canons from staying in the midst of the Church during the time.

VIII. You should accept the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh general

assemblies. IX. The choice of the nomination of your pontiff should

be vested only in the emperor of the Greeks.

On the arrival of the embassy at Hiromcla, Turortaney and Jo-

HANNES UtTHMAN met witha very kind reception from Nisrsess the

Graceful, who having respectfully received the letters of the emperor

and patriarch of Constantinople, communicated the contents of them

to the principal bishops and friars of the Armenian Church, who had

repaired to Hiromcla from the mountains of Taurus and the frontiers

of Mesopotamia. Though they were easily persuaded to concede

to the chief points proposed by the Greeks, yet great difficulty

existed in obtaining the consent thereto of other Armenian bishops,

whose number amounted to upwards of three hundred, and who

were living in different distant quarters, especially in the frontiers

of Armenia major, save the body of monks who resided in monas-

teries, and who were almost of an equal number. Consequently,

Nrersss thought it necessary to summon these worthies to the general

meeting which was shortly to be convened for taking into considera-

tion the points proposed by the authorities of Greece, and communi-

cating the result of the assembly in a suitable letter to the emperor.

He conceived the unanimous voice of all the principal dignitaries of

the Church of Armenia indispensably necessary in the adoption of the

points, which were the connecting links of the sister Churches, lest, he

1836. ] Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. 155

feared, an unfortunate division might be created amongst the Armeni-

an ecclesiastics, and the result of their undertaking be attended with

lamentable detriment.

The ambassadors of the court of Constantinople applauded the

wise precautions which marked every act of the pontiff of Armenia,

but seeing that the council could not possibly be held before the setting

in of the summer, they determined to depart from Hiromcla. Nrerszs,

in conjunction with Turorianey, addressed letters to Micuant, the

patriarch of the Syrian Church, communicating to him the points

which were proposed by the Greeks for their acceptance, and soliciting

the favour of his presence in the council that was shortly to be held at

Hiromcla for that purpose. Micuar. being prevented by his various

avocations from going to Hiromcla, sent in his room the friar Turo-

porus, who was eminently distinguished for his profound learning and

conversancy with the Syrian, Greek, Armenian, and Turkish languages.

On the arrival of the latter at Hiromcla,he was received by Nrerszs with

every kind of respect due to his rank.A discussion arose between them on

the import of the words “‘ substance” and “‘ nature,” which, according

to the doctrine of Aristotle, admitted of various constructions. THro-

porus, widely differing from the sentiments expressed by Nrerszs on

this subject, immediately took his departure from Hiromcla. In the

mean while, THrorraANnry and JoHannes Utuman returned to Con-

stantinople, furnished with letters addressed by Niersxs to the emperor

Manuex and the patriarch Micuart. NuiersEs promised them to

convene a general council for the decision of the question of the in-

tended union, and to endeavour to make the concessions they required.

«‘T shall assiduously try,” says he, ‘‘t6 overcome the long received

customs of my countrymen, which prevail on them with the power of

a second nature, and to force them to an acquiescence in such of the

points proposed in your letters, as may possibly be reconciled to their

minds. In so doing, we shall only be actuated by a desire of promot-

ing divine love and peace amongst us, but not by an idea of turning

from errors into truth. The acceptance of the rest of the points either

must be overlooked by you, or left to time, and the happy union which

shall shortly be effected amongst us.”

Immediately after this, Nrersrs addressed letters to all the Armenian

bishops, abbots, and friars residing in different quarters of Armenia,

Syria, Aluans, Georgia and Persia, communicating to them all that

had passed respecting the union of the sister Churches. He also

desired them to pray to the Almighty for the consummation of the

laudable object in view, and to take an early opportunity of going to

Hiromcla for the purpose of being present in the council that was

x 2

156 Memoir of St. Nierses Clajensis. (Marcu,

shortly to be convened. Moreover he deputed one friar StzpuHEn with

a letter, inviting the Armenian clergy of Ani and Haghbat to the pro-

posed assembly.

But alas! how often human endeavours and expectations are frus-

trated before they have attained to maturity! On the lapse of a few

months, while Nrersus was engaged in preparations for holding the

council of union, his earthly career was by the inscrutable dispensa-

tion of God terminated, Anno Domini 1173, in the seventy-third year

of his age. He enjoyed the supreme dignity of a pontiff for seven

years, and in that period ordained only seven bishops. His remains

lay in state for several days, during which time numbers of Armenians

thronged to the pontifical house with a desire of kissing the hand of

the deceased. Among those who had assembled there to pay their

last tribute of veneration to the virtues of the deceased pontiff of Ar-

menia, were Nisrses Lampronensis and several bishops and friars of

distinction.

This melancholy event plunged the nation into the greatest distress,

for they had lost in Nierszs the Graceful a vigilant pastor, a kind

father, a faithful friend, a gifted divine, anda most zealous advocate of

the truth of Christianity. Grecory Basin, the nephew of the deceas-

ed pontiff, who was living at a great distance from Hiromcla, on hear-

ing of the dangerous illness of the latter, immediately repaired thither

to see his uncle ere he breathed his last. On his arrival at that place,

he found Nirrsss dead. He evinced the greatest sorrow at the lamen-

table catastrophe which had fallen on his family and the nation in

general. The funeral of the deceased pontiff was performed with the

greatest pomp and honors, that his rank and exalted station deserved,

being attended by almost all the dignitaries of the Armenian Church,

the nobility and other distmguished members of the nation, whose

heartfelt sorrow, at the irreparable loss which the Church and the state

had sustained, could distinctly be read in the melancholy expressions

of their downcast countenances. His remains were deposited in a

sepulchre which was dug near that of his brother Grecory, and a

very splendid mausoleum was afterwards raised over him, bearing

upon it a suitable inscription commemorative of his moral and Chris-

tian virtues.

News of this melancholy event reaching Constantinople, filled the

heart of the emperor with the most poignant grief, and spread general

regret throughout the Greek empire, every Greek sympathising with

the Armenians for the loss which they had sustained in the person of

their gifted pontiff. When his grief had comparatively subsided, the

emperor wrote a letter of condolence to Gregory Basizt, who had by

1836.} Discovery of Buddhist Images, &c. 157

the unanimous voice of the nation succeeded his uncle in the govern-

ment of the Church of Armenia. The progress of the religious union

of the two nations, which was unfortunately impeded by the Church

of Armenia’s being deprived of its head, was renewed by the commu-

nications of the emperor with the pontiff Grecory, who, emulating

the laudable example of his immediate predecessor, manifested equal

zeal and inclination in the restoration of peace to the bosom of the

Church of Christ. Before, however, the question of the long wished-

for union was happily decided, Greece was deprived of her most illus-

trious, pious, and virtuous ruler, in the year of our Lord 1180, which

melancholy catastrophe proved a death-blow to the nearly-finished

structure of peace, and blasted in the bosoms of every Armenian and

Greek the hopes of their future union!

I].—Discovery of Buddhist Images with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at

Tagoung, the Ancient Capital of the Burmese Empire. By Colonel

H. Burney, Resident at Ava.

[Read before the Society, 6th April, 1836.]

I have the pleaure to forward to you a couple of images of GAuDAMA

in Terracotta, which Captain Hannay has just sent down to me from

Tagoung. On both there is an inscription, apparently in the same old

Deva-nagari character, as in the inscription No. 2, of the Allahabad

column, and probably consisting of the same words as those on the

image of Buddha found in Tirhut, and in the other ancient inscriptions .

described in No. 39 of the Journal of the Asiatic Society*.

Tagoung, written Takoung, (or according to Sir W. Jonzs’s system,

Takaung, but pronounced by the Burmese Tugoung,) vou will find

placed in our maps a little above the 23rd degree of north latitude,

and on the eastern or left bank of the Hrawadi river. Captain Han-

nay, however, has ascertained its latitude by an observation of the

sun to be 23° 30’ N., and several Burmese itineraries in my posses-

sion make its distance from Ava 52 taings, or about 100 miles. The

Burmese consider Tagoung to have been the original seat of their

empire, and the site of an ancient city, which was founded before the

time of Gaupama, by acolony that emigrated from Central India.

Some faint remains of an old city are still to be seen on this spot,

where among the ruins of some pagodas, Captain Hannay found the

images I now send you. No one here can decypher the character of

the inscriptions, but on showing to some of the learned, the account

* This is precisely the case :—even to the form of the letters—the dialect how-

ever seems to be Magadhi or Pali, dhammd and pabhava for dharma and pra-

bhava, &c. See the accompanying plate.— Ep,

158 Discovery of Buddhist Images [ Marcu,

of the Bauddha inscriptions given in the 39th No. of the Journal of

the Asiatic Society, the words “ Ye dhamma, &c.” were immediately

recognised, and supposed to be those placed under these images of

Gavupama also. The two figures seen standing on each side of Gau-

DAMA in one of these are not, as I had supposed, his two favorite

disciples, MouceaLan and TuAREpoutrara, but figures of a preceding

Buddha named Dr'penxara, who first delivered the prophetical annun-

ciation to Gaupama, whilst the latter was existing in the state of

Tuoomepa hermit, declaring that after myriads of years, which he

would take in perfecting himself in every virtue, he would attain the

state of a Buddha. The learned Burmese confirm Dr. Mixus’s opinion,

and Mr. Honeson’s information, that there is no connexion between

_ the last two lines and the first two produced by M. Csoma bE K6rés,

in the 39th No. of the Journal of the Asiatic Society. The last two,

they say, are intended to show the points of instruction delivered, not

by Gaupama only, but by every preceding Buddha, and they translate

the Pali thus :

“The not doing of every kind of evil, fulfilling of good, and purify-

ing and cleansing the heart: these above mentioned are the precepts

of Buddhas.”

With the first two lines beginning “ Ye dhamma,” the Burmese

books connect the following anecdote :

On the third year after Gaupama had attained the state of a Buddha,

whilst he was residing at Welawoon monastery in the city of Yazagyo,

(Rajgiri,) one of his disciples, named AsHzen AtHazi Mart’ HEE, went

into that city to receive charitable donations, and was met by Oopa-

DEITTHA, the son of the female Brahman TuAre, and a disciple of

THEIN-ZEN PaRABAIK, some kind of heretics so called. OopapErTTHa

asked AsHen Atuazt Mart’Hexr, who was his teacher, what were his

opinions ; the latter replied, ‘“‘ My teacher is the most excellent Lord

Gaupama, his doctrine$ are as boundless as the sky. I am but lately

become a Yahan, and know a little of them only.” OopapriTTHa

begged that he would repeat a little of them only, when Atnazt

Marr’ HEE recited the two lines beginning with the words Ye dhamma ;

but the moment he finished the first line, OopADEITTHA was converted.

He then-followed the other to Gaupama, who received him as a

disciple, and changed his name into THAREPOUTTARA, or the son of

Ture the female Brahman, by which name he was ever after distin-

guished as one of the favorite disciples of Gaupama, and is always

figured as seated on his right hand, whilst Movecaran, the other

favorite disciple, is seen on the left hand. Hence, these words have

ever since been considered, as Mr. Hopeson states, as a confessio fider

1836.] with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at Tagoung. 159

among Buddhists. Before giving the Burmese explanation of these

two lines, I must premise, that according to their system of belief,

there are four Theettsa, fundamental truths, or moral laws in the uni-

verse, a knowledge of which Gaupama attained intuitively at day-

break of the morning on which he was perfected into a Buddha under

the pipal-tree at Gaya, and therefore, one of his titles is Thamma

tham-bouddhattha, said to mean, he who intuitively acquired a know-

ledge of the four Theettsa. These four Theettsa are called Doukkha

Theettsa, Thamoudaya Theettsa, Niraudha Theettsa, and Megga Theettsa.

1. Doukkha Theettsa means the law of suffering and being, to which

all sentient beings are certainly subject whilst revolving, according to

the destiny of their good or evil conduct, in the three different states

of existence, whether as a Nat or inferior celestial being, a man, or a

brute.

2. Thamoudaya Theettsa is the law of evil desires and passions, by

which all sentient beings are certainly affected.

3. Niraudha Theettsa is the termination of or emancipation from

the operation of the two preceding laws. Not being subject to age,

sickness, death, or misery, and being in astate of ease, quiescence and

duration uninterrupted. This is Neibban.

4. Megga Theettsa is the cause or the way of reaching the last, and

is explained by some to be the Meggen Sheet ba, or the eight good

ways, which, as translated by Mr. Jupson, are right opinion, right

intention, right words, right actions, right way of supporting life,

rightly directed intelligence, caution, and serenity. Others explain it

to be the Meg le dan, four grand ways, or four grand orders of Ariya,

each subdivided into two classes, and an Aviya is a man who has

extinguished evil desires and passions, and attained proficiency in

certain virtues and miraculous powers.

Now the Burmese say, that Gaupama’s doctrine shows, that the

first of the above Theettsas is the effect, and the second the cause,

and that the third only can emancipate us from the eternal thraldom

and suffering of the two first, and that this third is to be obtained

only by means of the fourth. The lines are thus literally translated :

“The law (of suffering and being) proceeds from a cause, which

cause (the law of evil desires and passions) the Tathagata preaches,

and Niraudha, the means of overcoming or terminating those (two

laws). These are the opinions of Maha Thamana, or the great Yahan.

Dhamma, according to the Burmese, is not ‘‘ human actions,” or

“all sentient existences” only, but the law which governs or affects

them, the fundamental law of the moral world.

All that the Burmese know of the emigration from Central India,

160 Discovery of Buddhist Images (Marcu,

and of the founding and history of the old city of Tagoung, is given in

the 8rd volume of the Chronicles of the Kings of Ava. Here is an

abstract of the tale.

Long before the appearance of Gaupama, a King of Kauthala* and

Pinjalarit, desiring to be connected by marriage with the King of

Kauliya, sent to demand a daughter, but receiving a refusal on the

ground of his being of an inferior race, he declared war and destroyed

the three cities of Kauliya, Dewadaha, and Kappilawot, which were

governed by the Thaki race of kingst. These cities were afterwards

restored, and the Taki line re-established ; but on the occasion of the

above disaster, one of the Thdki race of kings, Apur’rasa, the king of

Kappilawot, retired with his troops and followers from Central India,

and came and built Tagoung, which was then also styled Thengat tha

ratha and Thengat tha nago. Here had stood a city in the times of the

three preceding Buddhas. In the time of KexkuruHan it was called

Thanthaya pira ; in that of Goundcoun, Ratha pira, and in that of

KatrHaBa, Thendwe. On the death of king Asui’rAsa, his two sons,

Kan YAz4 yes and Kan YAza no@ay, disputed the throne, but agreed

by the advice of their respective officers to let the question be decided

in this way, that each should construct a large building on the same

night, and he, whose building should be found completed by the

morning, should take the throne. The younger brother used planks

and bamboos only, and covered the whole with cloth, to which by a

coat of white-wash he gave the appearance of a finished building.

At dawn of day, Kan YAza' aren, the elder brother, seeing the other’s

being completed, collected his troops and followers, and came down

the Hrawadi. He then ascended the Khyendwen, and established him-

self for six months at Kule{ Toungnyo, calling it Yazdgyo, and sent

his son Moopootseittra to be king over the Thoonaparan Pyoos,

Kanyan, and Thet, who then occupied the territory between Pegu,

Arracan, and Pagan, and had applied to him for a prince. Kan Ya’z’a-

GYEE then built the city Kyouk padoung to the east of the Guttshapa

nadee, and resided there for 24 years. From thence he went and

took possession of the city of Dintawadee, or Arracan, which had origi--

nally been founded by a king Mayayoo, and having constructed forti-

fications, a palace, &c. took up his residence there.

* Kauthala, (Kosala) Dr. Wiuison considers to be the same as the present

territory of Oude. Some of the Burmese consider Pinjalarit to have been a

kingdom in the Punjab.

+ See No. 20 of the Journal of the Asiatic Society for an account of the

origin of the Shakya race, which the Burmese call Thaki and Thakya Thaki.

{ Kule is a territory to the southward of Manipur.

1836.] with Deva-ndgari Inscriptions at Tugoung. 161

The younger brother, Kan Yaza Naay, took possession of his

father’s throne at Tagoung, where the undermentioned 33 kings

reigned in succession.

1, Abheeraja. 18. His son Thendwé Y4z4.

2. His son Kan Y4za ngay. 19. His son Thihala Yaza.

3. His son Zaboodeepa Y4za. 20. His younger brother Han-tha Yaza.

4. His son Thengatha Yaza. 21. His son Wara Y4za.

5. His son Weippana Y4za. 22. His son Aloung Y4z4.

6. His son Dewata Yaza. 23. His son Kaulaka Yazé.

7. His son Munika Y4z4. 24. His son Thuriya Y4z4.

8. His paternal uncle Naga Y4zé. 25. His son Then-gyi Yaza.

9. His younger brother Einda Y4z4. 26. His son Taing-gylt Yaza.

10. His son Thamoodi Yaza. 27. His son Madu Yaza.

11. His son Dewa Yaza. 28. His son Menlha-gyi Yaza.

12. His son Maheinda Yaza, 29. His son Than thu thiha Yaz4.

13. His son Wimala Yaza. 30. His son Danenga Y4z4.

14. His son Thihanf Yazé. 31. His son Heinda Y4za.

15. His son Dengana Yaza. 32. His son Mauriya Y4zé.

16. His son Kantha Yaza. 33. His son Bheinnaka Yaza*.

17. His son Kaleinga Y4za.

In the reign of the last-mentioned king, Burinnaka YAXz4, the

Chinese and Tartars from the country of Tsein, in the empire of Gan-

dalareet, attacked and destroyed Tagoung. That king, collecting as many

of his people as he could, retired up the Mali river, where upon his

death his followers were divided into three portions. One portion

proceeded to the eastward and established the 19 Shan states, whence

they are called king Bunrnnaxa’s race. Another portion came down

the Hrawadi, and joined the Thunaparanta kingdom, which was inha-

bited by the Kanyan and Thet people, and was the seat of Mu’put-

sEITTA and other kings of the Thaké race. A third portion remained

near the Mali river, with the last king’s principal wife named

NaAca Zzrn. About this period, Gaupama appeared in Central

India, and a dispute occurred between king PatHanapy KaurHaLa

of Thawotihi+ and a king of Kappilawot, named Mauna Nama. The

former had applied for a daughter in marriage, and the latter, unwilling

to deteriorate his race, sent, instead of one of the princesses of royal

blood, a daughter named Watnasa Kuezrtiya, whom he had by a

slave girl. She was however received as a queen, and bore a son,

who was named prince Wir’Hat/Hoopa. When this prince grew up,

he paid a visit to Kappilawot, and on his departure, the spot which

he had occupied was termed the place of a slave-girl’s son, and

washed with milk. Hearing this, the prince vowed revenge, and

* The title of these kings is Radja, but the Burmese pronounce it Y4za.

+ Sravasti in Oude, according to Dr. Wizson.

162 Discovery of Buddhist Images (Marci,

declared that as soon as he became king, he would wash the necks of

the Kappilawot people with blood. Accordingly, on his accession to

the throne, he set out three times with an army to attack the Thaki

race of kings, but was stopped by Gaupama. On the fourth time,

Gaupama, foreseeing the future destiny of those kings, would not

interfere, and king W11’Hat'Hoora destroyed Kappilawot, Dewadaha,

and Kauliya, three cities in the empire or country of Thekka, the seats

of the Thaki race of kings.

On this occasion one of the Thaki race, named Daza Y4za, retir-

ing from Central India, came first and established himself at Mauroya,

which now goes by the name of Mweyen. Thence he proceeded and

founded the city of Thendwé ; and changing his residence once again,

he came to Malf, and met with the before mentioned queen Nsca

Zein, the widow of king BuEernnaxa. Finding her to be of the

same Thak: race as himself, he married her, and founded the city of

Upper Pagan. He next rebuilt the ancient city of Tagoung, calling it

Pinjalarit, and Pinja Tagoung, or the fifth Tagoung, and finally esta-

blished himself there, assuming the title of THapo Zasooprra Daza

YAz4, dividing his followers into classes, organizing an army, and

granting titles and honors. The’ undermentioned line of kings reigned

in succession over this new Tagoung.

1. Thado Zabudipa Daza Yaza. 10. Thado ya Haula.

2. Thado Taing ya Yaza. 11. Thado Poung shi.

3. Thado Yat’ha ya. 12. Thado Kyouk shi.

4. Thado Tagwon ya. 13. Thado Tshen louk.

5. Thado Lhan byan ya. 14. Thado Tshen dein,

6. Thado Shwe : 15. Thado taing gyit.

7. Thado Galoun ya. 16. Thado Men gyi.

8. Thado Naga ya. 17. Thado Maha Yaz4.

9. Thado Naga Naing.

None of these kings reigned long, the country having been much

molested by evil spirits, monsters and serpents. The last mentioned

king having no son by his principal queen Kernnari-DeEw1, made her

brother Kuzsaputa the heir apparent or Crown Prince. At this

time the people of Dintawadi came to the spot inhabited by the Pyiis,

and attacked and carried off king TamBuLa, who was of the Thaki

race, and lineally descended from king Mupurseirra, the son of Kan

Yazacyrer. His queen, Nan Kuan, retired with as many followers

as she could to the lake of Thakya.

In the 40th year, after Gaupama’s death, whilst Toapo Mana

YAza’ the 17th king of Tagoung was reigning, an immense wild boar

appeared, and committed great destruction in his country. The Crown

Prince went forth against the animal, and pursued it for several days,

1836.] with Deva-nagari Inscriptions at Tagoung. 163

until he overtook and killed it near Prome; and then finding himself

so far from home, he determined on remaining where he was as a

hermit. Here he was joined by two of his nephews, named Mana

ToamBawa and Tsuta THamBawa, twins borne by his sister the

queen of Tagoung, but being blind, the father had insisted upon their

being put to death. The mother, after secreting them for some time,

placed them at last on a raft, and set them afloat on the Hrawadi.

The Royal Chronicles give an interesting account of the voyage of

the two Princes, who are cured of their blindness by a monster at

Tsagain*, and who at length reach the country near Prome, and are

recognized and received by their uncle. The Kanyan and Pyis had

quarrelled after the people of Arracan had carried off their king, but

the former, being victorious, settled themselves near Prome under their

queen Nan Kuan, whilst the Kanyans retired, and established them-

selves at Sandoway and on the borders of Arracan. Through the

recommendation of the hermit Prince of Tagoung, the queen Nan

Kuan married one of his nephews Mauna TuamBawa, who became

king of the Pyés, and established the Prome or Thare Khetiara empire,

60 years after Gaupama’s death, 484 B. C.

After the destruction of the Prome Empire, a king Taamauppanrir,

nephew of the last king of Prome, founded Pagdn; but the country

being much molested by certain wild animals, a young man named

Tsaupr’ destroyed them, and the king gave him his daughter in

marriage, and appointed him his successor. He declined the throne

however in the first instance, and placed his old teacher Yar’THE-

GYAUNG upon it; and on the death of the latter, the young man

ascended the throne of Pagdn in the Pagdn era 89, A. D. 167, with

the title of Pru’ rsaup1’. But this Pyv’ rsaupr, or third king of Pagén

also is said to have been of the Tugoung royal race, and a Thdké Prince.

His father, Tuapo Aparrrsa Y4z4, was lineally descended from the

17th king of Tagoung, Tuapo Mana Ya’za’, but during his reign

Tagoung having again been destroyed by evil spirits and monsters, as

-well as by the Chinese and Tartars, he had quitted the country, and

settled with his family in a private capacity at Malt, supporting him-

‘self as a gardener. After receiving a suitable education, the son Pru’

Tsaup1 came down to Pagdn,in order to seek his fortune, and then

distinguished himself by killing the wild animals as before-mentioned.

No further mention of Tagoung can I find in the Royal Chronicles,

until we come to the 6th vol., in which, after being told that a daugh-

ter of ArHenKuAyA, the founder of Tsagain, was married to THapo

TSHEN-DEIN, of the Tagoung royal race, and had ason named Yauu’La,

* City directly opposite Ava.

164 Discovery of Buddhist Images, &c. (Maren,

who was seven years of age, when king Tuesuapaps alias Mrn-

Byouk ascended the Tsagain throne, and to whom at the age of 16

that king had granted the city of Tagoung as a jaghir, together with

the title of THapo MEN-BYA. We are informed, that in the Burmese

year 725, A. D. 1363, when the Shan chief Tao KuygenN Bwa came

dewn from Mogoung and Monhyeen to attack Tsagain, his army was

first stopped at Tagoung by THapo mEN-ByA, but that the Shans soon

took that city, and completely destroyed it, its governor flying to

Tsagain with a single elephant. This governor, THADO MEN-BYA,

afterwards took possession of the Tsagain and Penya kingdoms, and

in the Burmese year 726, A. D. 1364, founded the city of Ava, and the

line of the kings of Ava.

Tagoung, after the Shans destroyed it, does not appear to have

been restored, and it is now but a village with a few ruins. The dis-

trict of Tagoung is the jaghir of the late Wungyee of Rangoon’s

daughter, who is one of the inferior queens, styled Tagoung Men-tha-

mi, princess of Tagoung. THapo was a title peculiar to the

Tagoung royal race. It is remarkable, that some of the names in the

two lists of the kings of Tagoung correspond. The Burmese chroni-

cles give no details of the reign of any of these kings, excepting of

the first in each list, and of the last in the second list. One old

work, Zabudipa kwon-gya, takes notice only of the second list of

sovereigns ; and states that Daza Yaza retired from Central India, and

came to Tagoung, about 300 years before the appearance of GAUDAMA.

As the last mentioned, or 17th king, Mana Y4za, is also stated to

have ascended the throne 20 years after Gaupama’s death: this would

allow a duration of about 18 or 20 years to the reign of each of the king’s

preceding, corresponding with the average of king’s reigns as fixed

by Sir Isaac Newton. The great point with the Burmese histo-

vians is to show that their sovereigns are lineally descended from the

Thak¢ race of kings, and are ‘“‘ Children of the Sun* ;” and for this pur-

pose, the genealogy of even Atompra, the founder of the present

dynasty, is ingeniously traced up to the kings of Pagdn, Prome, and

Fagoung. The countenances of the figures in the accompanying

images are very different from those you see in all modern Burmese

mages}.

* One of the king of Ava’s titles is Ne dwet bhuyen, Sun-descended Monarch.

+ They are very nearly of the same character as those found at Sarnath, and

may have been made there or at Gaya for exportation, as is the custom to the

present time.—Ep.

1836.] On the preparatian of Opium for the China market. 165

IiI.—On the preparation of Opium for the China market : written ia

March 1835, and then communicated to the Benares and Behar Agencies.

By D. Burren, M. D. Surgeon 63rd B. N. I. late opium examiner

of the Benares Agency.

1. In committing to paper, for the use of my successor in office,

the following observations, I would beg, once for all, to disclaim the

idea of their being infallibly correct: for, although they are the re-

sult of ten years’ attention to their various subjects, I am aware of the

disadvantages under which an individual labours, upon whom falls the

task of first writing upon any subject involving the discussion of ob-

scure questions, and who is thus deprived of the benefit of the judgment

of other persons; and am prepared to find my remarks hereafter

greatly modified by the progress of discovery.

2. The great object of the Bengal Opium Agencies is to furnish an

article suitable to the peculiar tastes of the population of China, who

value any sample of opium in direct proportion to the quantity of hot-

drawn watery extract obtainable from it, and to the purity and strength

of the flavour of that extract-when dried and smoked through a pipe-

The aim, therefore, of the agencies should be to prepare their opium

so that it may retain as much as possible its native sensible qualities,

and its solubility in hot-water. Upon these points depend the virtually

higher price that Benares opium brings in the China market, and the

lower prices of Behar, Malwa, and Turkey opium. Of the last of these,

equal (Chinese) values contain larger quantities of the narcotic princi-

ples of opium ; but are, from their greater spissitude, and the less care-

ful preparation of the Behar and Malwa, incapable of yielding extract

im equal quantity and perfection of flavour with the Benares.

3. It therefore becomes a question, how the whole process of the

production of opium, from the sowing of the seed to the packing of the

chests for sale, should be conducted so as to preserve with the least

injury its native flavour and its solubility.

4. There can be no doubt that the quantity and richness of the

milk obtained from each poppy-head depend greatly upon the geologi-

cal and other physical conditions of the locality which produces it ;

especially the soil, sub-soil, manuring, and irrigation; and also upon

the seed which is employed. But as these matters are, in the present

circumstances of the Bengal agencies, little open to choice or control,

the first practical enquiries which claim our attention relate to the

extraction of the juice and its treatment while in the hands of the

koeris.

5. Of the various processes for the preparation of sugar and medi-

cinal extracts from vegetable juices, it is well known that distillation in

166 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu,

vacuo is incomparably the most efficient in preserving unaltered the

original taste of the sugar, and the taste, solubility, and therapeutic

powers of the extracts. It is also known that this process owes its

superiority to the exclusion of the chemical as well as the physical

agency of the atmosphere, to its rapidity of exsiccation, and to the

comparative lowness of temperature at which it is performed. When

sugar-cane juice, after even half an hour’s exposure to the air, is boiled

in a narrow deep vessel, and under the pressure of the atmosphere,

vaporisation goes on so slowly that the sugar has time to undergo the

vinous and acetous fermentations, whereby a certain portion of it is

converted into vinegar, before the heat can be raised high enough to

check this change; and the high temperature, to which it is so long

exposed during this slow vaporisation, chars another portion, and

conyerts it into molasses. Other vegetable juices, under similar cir-

cumstances, undergo analogous transformations: much of their sub-

stance is converted into vinegar; and the high temperature causes a

partial decomposition of the rest: oxygen also is largely absorbed

from the atmosphere, and greatly impairs the solubility of the dried

extract.

6. On the principles which flow from these facts, it would be, chemi-

cally speaking, advisable to prepare opium by distillmg in vacuo, large

quantities of the milk just as it has oozed from the capsules; and I

have no doubt that opium thus prepared would possess in an unprece-

dented degree the desired qualities of solubility and strength, and

purity of flavour, as well as narcotic power; and can imagine, that

under a system of open trade in opium, this process would be commer-

cially profitable. It would, however, be inapplicable under a mono-

poly constituted as the present system is; and I have mentioned it

only with the view of pointing it out as the acme of that perfection in

the preparation of vegetable juices to which we can, with our present

means, only approximate.

7. That the approximation may proceed as far as possible, it will

be necessary, first, that the poppy juice shall at the time of collection,

contain a minimum of water; so that its reduction to the proposed

degree of spissitude may be effected in the shortest time, and be there-

fore attended with the least exposure to the air at a high temperature,

and with the smallest consequent loss of solubility and of specific qua-

lities that may be practicable.

8. The goodness of the soil, and the management of the irrigation,

are circumstances which powerfully affect the strength of the juice at

the time of its collection: but a third agent, still less amenable than

these to control, now comes into play, the precipitation of dew on the

1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 167

surface of the capsule. When a current of wind, or a cloudy sky,

prevents the formation of dew, it is found that the scarifications made

in the capsule about the middle of the preceding day are sealed up by

the slight oozing of juice, which had immediately followed the inci-

sions; and the quantity of opium obtained is small. When, again,

the dew is abundant, it washes open the wounds in the capsule, and

thus facilitates the flow of the milk, which in heavy dews is apt to drop

off the capsule entirely, and be wasted. But when the dew is in mode-

rate quantity, it allows the milk to thicken by evaporation, and to col-

lect in irregular tiers, (averaging one grain of solid opium from each

quadruple incision,) which on examination will be found to have a

greater consistency, and a ‘‘rose-red” (Werner) colour towards the

external surface, while the interior is semi-fluid, and of a “ reddish-

white” colour. This inequality of consistence constitutes the grain of

raw opium, of which I shall have to speak hereafter.

9. In the collection of these drops of half-dried juice, it is very apt

to get mixed with the dew, which, in the earlier hours of collection,

continue to besprinkle the capsules, and which here does a double

mischief—first, by retarding the inspissation of the general mass of

the juice; and, secondly, by separating its two most remarkable con-

stituent parts—that which is soluble, and that which is insoluble in

water. So lhttle aware, or so reckless, even under the most favourable

construction of their conduct, are the koéris of the injury thus caused

by the dew, that many of them are in the habit of occasionally wash-

ing their scrapers with water, and of adding the washings to the

collection of the morning: in Malwa, oz is used for this purpose,

to the irremediable injury of the flavour of the opium. On examin-

ing the juice thus mixed with water, it will be found that it has

separated, as above-mentioned, into two portions, a fluid and a more

consistent ; the latter containing the most of the resin, gluten, caout-

chouc and other less soluble constituents of opium, with part of the

super-meconiate of morphia; and the former containing the gum, some

resin, and much of the super-meconiate of morphia, and much of the

colouring principle, which, though pale at first, is rapidly affected by

light, and acquires a very deep “reddish or blackish brown” colour.

Many koéris are in the habit of draining off this fluid portion into a

separate vessel, and of bringing it under the name of paséwd, for sale,

at half the price of opium, to the Benares agency, where it is used

as léwa, (paste for the petal envelopes of the cakes.) Others, after

allowing the soluble principles to become thus changed into an

acescent, blackened, sluggish fluid, mix it up with the more consistent

part of their opium, and bring the whole for sale in this mixed state ;

168 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Maxcn,

the consequence of which is that they are subjected to a penalty, called

battd upon paséwd, and regulated by the estimate of the opium ex-

aminer, of the quantity of paséwd contained. This penalty is the only

efficient check upon this most pernicious practice of the koéris: for

on the generality of the gomashtas, it is difficult to impress the neces-

sity of their looking after the koéris during the collecting season.

Were goméashtas in general fit for their offices, the name of peséwd

might be banished from the Bengal agencies ; all that is required for

that purpose being that they should instruct all their mahtas and

koéris, to exclude dew as much as possible from the opium at collec-

tion—never to add water to their opium, then or at any other period ;

but at the end of their day’s collection, to rub it together in a mortar

or similar vessel, breaking down the grain of it above-mentioned, so as

reduce the whole to a homogeneous semi-fluid mass, which should be

dried as quickly as possible in the shade, in a current of air free from

dust, by spreading it on any clean flat surface, and turning it over ten

or twenty times. With this management, one afternoon in the dry

collecting season would suffice for bringing to the spissitude of 70 per

cent. the collection of each day, which could then be secured, along

with the rest of the koéris’ opium, in a vessel of any form, safe from

deterioration by internal change. It is a common belief, that all new

opium must ferment*: but that is a fallacy occasioned by the low de-

gree of spissitude at which opium is generally received at the Bengal

agencies, and by the consequent fermentation and swelling up which

almost constantly occur, when such opium is allowed to stand for some

hours in large vessels.

10. So very large was formerly the admixture of paséwé in the

opium brought to the Benares agency, that it was thought necessary,

for the sake of its appearance, to draw off as much as possible of the

black fluid, by storing it, for weeks, in earthen vessels, perforated with

ahole. Of late years, there has been a great amendment in this re-

spect, and the draining system has therefore become unnecessary ; an

event which ought to be followed by the abolition of the inconvenient

receptacles in which it was carried on, and by the general substitution

of movable wooden cases and drawers in their stead.

11. Paséwd, ina pure and concentrated state, is a viscid, dark

reddish-brown fluid, transparent in thin plates. Its homegeneous phy-

sical constitution prevents its assuming to the eye that appearance of

consistency which is presented by ordinary opium. In the former, all

* Dr. Avet believed that fermentation was necessary for the development of

the narcotic principles, and considered the fermentation as of a panary species,

n which the gluten played a principal part.

1856.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 169

the ingredients are in a state of true chemical combination, with the

‘water contained ; while, in the latter, many of the ingredients are

only in a state of mechanical mixture, a condition which almost neces-

sarily gives an appearance of solidity beyond all proportion to the

actual quantity of solid matter contained. Hence, paséwd, and opium

containing paséwd, are less consistent, and would, to the inexperienced

eye, appear to contain much more water than pure opium of the same

actual spissitude.; a source of much perplexity to any one who tries for

the first time to estimate, by the consistence, the real spissitude or dry

contents of different samples of opium containing more or less of

paséwi. A tentative process is the only one by which a person can

qualify himself to estimate the spissitude with tolerable accuracy. He

should, before allowing the parkhiyas to state their estimates of the

spissitude, form one in his own mind, and make a memorandum of it,

noting his reasons for assigning the degree of spissitude on which he

has fixed. The result of the steam-drying test, to which small sam-

ples of all opium are subjected in the Benares agency, wil) then enable

him to judge on which side, whether under or over-estimate, he has

inclined to err, and to avoid the error in his subsequent operations.

12. The constituents of paséwd are in a state of chemical combi-

nation; and the slow addition of water will not subvert that condi-

tion. But the sudden affusion of a large quantity of water on con-

centrated paséwé instantly resolves it into two portions, a dark coloured

fluid containing the gum, colouring matter, and super-meconiate and

acetate of morphia, anda lighter coloured powder, consisting of the

resin and some gluten, and a minute portion of caoutchouc. In mak-

ing léwd, therefore, from paséwd, or from inferior opium, the necessary

quantity of water should be slowly added, and thoroughly mixed pre-

viously to the addition of more water. Pure opium is lable to the

same resolution of its component parts, from the sudden affusion of

water: if the latter be slowly added and thoroughly mixed, the gela-

tinous opium will absorb it, forming a species of hydrate, and will

retain its tremulous consistence; but if the water be suddenly added in

considerable quantity, an immediate separation of the more and less

soluble constituents occurs, and the opium loses its gelatinous and

adhesive character. When opium is dried up to a certain point, below

the spissitude of 80 per cent., it loses the power of absorbing water

without decomposition, and cannot be brought to the gelatinous state.

It might’ be expected, that by adding 30 parts of water to 70 of dry

opium powder, we should produce a combination possessing the con-

sistence and other physical characters of fresh standard* opium; but

* So called, because this is the degree of spissitude required at the Bengal

170 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcr,

the compound has little consistence, and will be found to contain inso-

luble portions, which have lost their power of forming hydrates with

water: yet its spissitude remains exactly that of standard opium, the

precise quantity of dry opium employed in making it being recovera~

ble from it, but in a darkened and deteriorated condition. The above

observations have a practical bearing upon the manufacture of léwd,

as has already been noticed, and upon the degree of spissitude which

opium, either in the hands of the koéris or in the agency godowns,

should be permitted to acquire: it should be limited to 66 or 67 per

cent. for the former, and 70 or 72 for the latter; because, with every

additional degree of spissitude above this, the solubility is impaired in

an increasing ratio.

13. Among some thoughts on the subject committed to writing

six years ago, I find the followmg remark and query: ‘The whole

of the original milky juice will pass through a finer filter than that

used by the Chinese in making the extract for smoking: is it possi-

ble to dry the opium, retaining its property of such minute division.

and diffusibility ; or is it necessary for the complete separation of the

water from the resin, gluten, caoutchouc, &c. that some absorption of

oxygen should take place, and some consequent diminution of their

solubility, or rather miscibility with water?’ My reason for noticing

this query is the subsequent solution of the proposed problem by M.

Previte of Calcutta, in the highly similar case of animal milk, which

he appears to have succeeded in drying to a powder with no perceptible

injury to the diffusibility of its curdy and oleaginous principles. This

is the very result that should be aimed at im the preparation of opium

for the China market.

14. When the juice of the poppy has been properly dried, that is,

rapidly, in a cool shade, and protected from: dust, it possesses, at the

spissitude of 70 per cent., (that is, containing 30 per cent. of water,)

the following properties. It has, in the mass, a ‘reddish brown”

colour (Werner), resembling that of copper (the metallic lustre ob-

structed); and, when spread thin on a white plate, shews considera-

ble translucency, with a ‘ gallstone yellow” colour, and a slightly gra-

nular texture. When cut into flakes with a knife, it exhibits sharp

edges, without drawing out into threads; and is tremulous, like jelly,

or rather strawberry jam, to which it has been aptly compared. It

has considerable adhesiveness, a handful of it not dropping from the

hand inverted for some seconds. Its smell is the pure peculiar smell

agencies for the full price allowed by Government. On parcels of opium, infe-

rior to this in spissitude, a penalty is levied, called battd upon consistence.

1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 171

of opium, heavy and not unpleasant. In this condition it is said to be

“standard” or “ awwal’’ opium.

15. When the juice, again, instead of being thus exposed to the

air, has after collection been kept in deep vessels, which prevent eva-

poration, it presents the following appearances. A specimen of it

which has the spissitude of only 60 per cent. has the apparent consis-

tence or substantiality of standard opium of 70 per cent. But on

minuter examination, it will be found, that this apparent firmness of

texture is a deception, resulting from the mechanical constitution

of the mass; it being made up with but little alteration of the origi-

nal irregular drops collected from the capsule, soft within, and more

inspissated without; this outer portion, as long as it remains entire,

giving the general character of consistency to the mass, just as

the shells of a quantity of eggs would do. For when the opium is

rubbed smartly in a mortar, this fictitious consistence disappears,

exactly as that of the eggs, if pounded, would do; and in point of

apparent consistence, as well as of real spissitude, it is reduced to the

proportion which it properly bears to standard opium. When opium

thus retains the original configuration of the irregular drops, it is said

to be ‘“‘kacha” or ‘‘ raw: when these are broken down into the mi-

nute grain mentioned in the description of standard opium, it is said

to be “‘ pakka’”’ or ‘‘ matured,” whatever may be the actual spissitude

of the opium, whether 50 or 70 per cent. An opinion has been en-

tertained, but on what grounds I know not, that the breaking down

of this large grain is an injury to the opium: to myself it seems plain

that as the large grain always disappears before the opium attains the

spissitude of 70 per cent. and as this vesicular constitution of the raw

opium retards the evaporation of its superfluous moisture, the more

inspissated shell of each irregular drop checking the evaporation from

its more fluid interior, the object should be to reduce the whole with

the least possible delay to a nearly homogeneous mass, in which state

the inspissation of opium advances with much greater rapidity.

16. Connected with this subject is a question which has been

raised, whether the inspissation of opium stored in large quantities in

the agency godowns is effected more quickly, by removing, from time

to time, imto another receptacle, the pellicle of thick opium which

forms on the surface of the mass; or by turning over the mass fre-

quently, and thus constantly mingling with it the pellicles successively

formed. As agreeably to the general law of chemical affinity, whereby

the last portions of any substance held in combination, and in course

of gradual expulsion, are retained with increasing obstinacy, the in-

spissation of thin, is, ceteris paribus, always more rapid in its pro.

172 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu,

gress than that of thick opium; it is clear that the removal of the

pellicle, by which opium of minimum spissitude is constantly exposed

to the air, must accelerate the inspissation more than the turning over

of the whole mass would do: because the latter process exposes to

the air opium which is gradually acquiring a greater degree of con-

centration, and from which the evaporation will gradually be slower

and slower. As evaporation takes place from the external surface only,

it may be proper here to advert to the propriety of making all reser-

voirs for opium below the standard spissitude as numerous and shal-

low as may be permitted by the means of stowage; every practicable

method being at the same time adopted to facilitate ventilation across,

and to exclude dust from, the extensive surfaces exposed; and as

little ight being admitted as may be suitable to the convenience of the

people at work.

17. It might be expected, from the ingenuity of the natives of this

country, and from their imperfect notions of fair trade, that they would

resort to a great variety of means for increasing, by adulteration, the

weight of such an article as opium, in which fraud might be made so

difficult of detection. But in fact, it is seldom that they attempt any

thing of the kind, beyond keeping their opium at a low spissitude ; an

act by which, under the present searching system of examination, they

cannot profit; and which, from its occasioning a deterioration of their

opium through fermentation, entails the levying of a batta upon its

quality, and therefore, in those cases, an inevitable loss. It is impos-

sible that opium left to itself in the open air, during the parching sea-

son of the hot winds, could remain at the low spissitudes of 50 and 60

per cent. at which it is frequently brought to Ghazipur towards the

end of that season: and we must therefore conclude, that artificial

means are resorted to, in order to maintain it in that condition ; either

the frequent addition of water, or the burying it in a damp piece of

ground, which is said to be sometimes done for the sake of security,

When these malpractices have been carried too far, the gluten under-

goes, in a greater or less degree, the process of putrefaction ; the mass

of opium first becoming covered with mould, and acquiring an opaque

«yellowish grey” colour and a pasty consistence, in which every ves-

tige of the translucency and grain of the opium is lost; and the smell

becoming venous, sour, and at last abominably feetid; in which condi-

tion the deteriorated opium is fit for none of the purposes of the

manufacture, and is always destroyed, and its original value forfeited,

by the koéris. It is to be hoped that their experience of the unvary-

ing consequences of such folly, and the introduction of a superior class

of gomashtas, will in time convince them of the advantage, as well as

1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 173

the facility, of bringing in all their opium at very nearly the standard

spissitude.

In some cases it would appear, from the fluid state in which they

bring it for sale, as if they expected every drop of water which they

add to it, to be assimilated and converted into opium. Occasionally,

it would seem that they had admitted some suspicions of its having

been watered too much; and their only remedy is to drive off the

superfluous water by boz/ing - an operation which speedily reduces the

mixture to a blackened and charred condition, easily recognized.

18. A more ingenious fraud, but which is seldom practised, is, that

of washing out the soluble and most valuable part of the opium, and

bringing for sale the residual mass. In this process, the opium loses

its translucency, and the redness of its colour: it loses its adhesiveness

also, not adhering to the hand like opium which has not been robbed

of its soluble principles ; and by these marks, without going further,

the fraud is detected. Sand is now and then added, to increase the

weight ; and is at once detected by its grittiness when rubbed between

a plate and a spatula.

Soft clayey mud is also, but very rarely, used for the same purpose :

it always impairs the colour and translucency ; and can, as well as

sand, be detected, and its quantity accurately ascertained, by washing

the opium with a large quantity of water, and collecting the sediment,

which is the clayey mud.

Sugar and gur, or coarse molasses, are sometimes employed to ad-

ulterate opium: they invariably ferment, and give it a sickly, sweetish,

venous, or acescent odour, easily known.

Cow-dung, the pulp of the dhatird, or thorn-apple, and the gummy

resinous juice of the Jé/, or Bengal quince, are seldom met with as

fraudulent ingredients: the first may be detected by drying it to a

powder, or by washing it with water, either of which processes brings

under the eye the undigested shreds of vegetable matter constituting

the animal’s food; but the two last are extremely difficult of detec-

tion, if not added in quantity sufficient to affect the colour and

smell of the opium, which generally happens in the few instances

of their occurrence. The seeds of the dhatuird are apt to get mixed

with the opium, and afford a ready means of detection. A strange,

but not uncommon, mode of adulteration is the addition of pounded

poppy seeds: if reduced to a fine powder, the oleaginous seeds might

enter into an imperfect chemical union with the kindred resinoid prin-

ciple of the opium: but the fraud is never so skilfully effected as to

produce this result ; and the hard particles of the seeds are perceptible

to the touch and sight. Ma4lwa opium, though less now than it was

174 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcn,

eight years ago, is in general largely contaminated with oil, which is

easily separated by dissolving the opium in water ; and I have seen, in

a few instances, the same fraud attempted within the Benares agency.

As the oil is always in a rancid condition, its presence is betrayed by

its odour, as well as by the glistening appearance which it communi-

cates to the opium.

19. By long exposure to the heat of the sun, the texture of opi-

um, whatever be its spissitude, undergoes a remarkable change,

through the conyersion of part of its gluten into a species of bird-lime.

Its shortness or property of exhibiting sharp edges, when cut into

flakes with a knife, disappears; and it draws out into long threads.

These two varieties of texture may almost always be recognized in

cakes of Behar and Benares opium respectively ; the former being ex-

posed to the sun, in the process of drying the cakes, and the latter

not. This diversity of treatment occasions a difference between the

hygrometric properties of the cakes of the two agencies; the Behar

cakes acquiring a more speedy but less permanent hardness than the

Benares: whereby, though firmer in the shell towards the end of the

hot winds, they are more liable than the Benares to soften and lose

their shape during the rains. The immediate cause of this difference

appears on making a clean section of the shells with a sharp knife.

It will thus be found, that in the Benares shells, the /éwd remains

visibly interstratified with the petals, dark-coloured, and tenacious ;

while in the Behar, it is in a great measure absorbed by the petals,

which are apparently in intimate contact with each other, and is not

to be distinguished from them; the combination being more easily ef-

fected by hygrometrie changes of the atmosphere than the independent

strata of leaf and /éwa in the Benares cakes.

20. While, as at present, a considerable amount of inferior opium

is produced, not safely applicable to any other purpose than the manu-

facture of /éwd, its sacrifice is no great loss. But if all the opium

brought to the agencies were of good quality, the substitution of some

less expensive vegetable paste would be an important desideratum.

Any strong cheap mucilage or farinaceous paste, or perhaps some

indigenous imitation of bird-lime, would answer for the inner portion of

the shell; and an exterior coating of a resinous, waxy, or oily nature,

impervious to water, would defend this from the moisture of the air.

21. In cutting open a cake for examination, the above points

should be attended to. It should also be observed whether the exter-

nal and internal surfaces of the shell are smooth: the former not

knotty or fissured, and none of the interior leaves of the latter detach-

ed among the opium: there ought, also, to be no vacuities between.

1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 175

the strata of the leaves, such as*are sometimes found, lined with

mould, in faulty cakes, and the shell altogether ought to be thin, com-

pact, and of equal thickness throughout. The shape ought to be as

nearly spherical as possible: that being the geometrical form which

under the smallest surface contains the greatest quantity of matter,

and which consequently affords the least scope for the extrication of

air and ultimate injury to the shape of the cake when that air escapes.

Greater attention to having the earthen cups, in which the cakes are

dried, perfectly hemispherical, instead of parabolical as they now are,

would contribute to the desired sphericity.

22. In opening a cake, the next thing to be attended to is the

manner in which the two hemispheres of the opium separate: the

Behar will be found to retain its shortness, while the Benares draws

out into threads. The smell should then be attentively observed and

noted down, being strongest immediately after the opening, and giving

at that instant the fairest indications of the state of the opium with

respect to preservation; the pure narcotic, venous, or acescent odour

being then most strongly perceptible: in this respect the Benares will

generally prove superior to the Behar. It is an important character ;

for the Chinese are great epicures in the flavour of opium, and object

to it when it smells at all sour.

23. The surface of the opium should then be narrowly inspected,

and the tint and shade of colour, both by reflected and transmitted:

light, noted down, in terms of Werner’s nomenclature; also the ap-

parent quantity of paséwa if any be present, which is almost constantly

the case with Behar opium, where it appears like dark glistening fluid,

lining the little cells in the surface of the opium. As the depth of the

colour of opium in the caked state depends on the quantity of paséwé

in it, or the degree in which it has been deteriorated by exposure to

the sun, the lighter the shade, the better is the opium.

24. The chemical analysis of opium, after all the trouble that has

been bestowed on it, is still in an unsatisfactory state. A perfect ana-

lysis, such as we possess of Peruvian bark, and of some other medicinal

plants yielding vegetable alkalies, ought to eliminate the whole of the

active principles, leaving nothing at its close but an inert mass pos-

sessed of no therapeutic power: and the essential principles thus ob-

tained should equal (or, as in the case of quina freed from its bulky

fibrous accompaniment, surpass) in activity, a quantity of the original

substance equal to that from which it was extracted. But how greatly

inferior are the powers, over the animal economy, of a grain of mor-

phia, in whatever state of purity or saline combination, to the quantity

of opium that is required to furnish that single grain! Yet, for all that

176 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcu,

we can, chemically, see, we obtain by our analysis the whole of the

morphia that is contained in opium. I suspect that the narcotic power

is partly lodged in some unknown substance (not narcotine) insoluble

in water: for I have, after careful and repeated washing, until it ceas-

ed to colour the water, found the insoluble residuum to act as an opi-

ate with considerable energy. Although morphia, in a state of

purity, can, like sulphur, be fused without change; yet, when in com-

bination with the other constituents of opium, it is partly destroyed by

a much lower degree of heat, greatly under that of boiling water ; for

the pharmaceutical and Chinese extracts are found to contain very

little morphia: still, the former, as is well known, exert great medici-

nal power, out of all proportion to the quantity of morphia which

analysis evolves from them. From all these considerations it would

result, that the proportion of morphia obtained, by the analysis at

present known, cannot be regarded as a true exponent of the total

narcotic power of the opium which yields it. An additional source of

fallacy in comparing the produce of different countries exists in the

varying proportions which they contain of colouring matter or extrac-

tion ; a principle for which morphia and narcotine have a strong affi-

nity, forming insoluble compounds* with it; and which, as well as

narcotine, is much more abundant in Indian than in Turkey opium.

Hence a considerable loss in the purification of morphia from the

former, and an apparent, and probably real, inferiority in its quantity ;

although we know that good India opium is equal to Turkey im narco-

tic power.

25. Roxsiquer’s process is the one employed by the opium exam-

iner in Calcutta. The chief precautions necessary to ensure success

and uniformity in its results are, not to use too much water at first;

to see that the magnesia is brought to a red heat; not to expose any

of the subjects of analysis to the sun, or to artificial heat, except in the

washing and final solution in alcohol of the morphia; not to use too

strong a spirit in washing the morphia and excess magnesia; and

to employ the strongest alcohol for its final solution before crystalliza-

tion. SERTUERNER’s process is useful where it is not necessary to

obtain the morphia in a separate state : and in practised hands affords

speedy and tolerably accurate information. It is probable that Rost-

queET’s process will in time be superseded by that of the late Dr.

Witiram Greeory of Edinburgh, which does not acquire the expen-

sive use of alcohol, and yields more morphia, by 30 or 40 per cent. ;

affording, in fact, the cheapest medicinal preparation known of Turkey

* This may partly account for the medicinal activity of the mass of opium

aabove noticed.

1836.] On the preparation of Opium for the China market. 177

opium. It consists in the exhaustion of the opium with water under

the temperature of 90°; concentration of the solution at a low temper-

ature ; precipitation by slight excess of ammonia; elutriation of the

precipitate with cold water; exsiccation of it at a temperature below

212°, and reduction to powder; solution in cold water by muriatic

acid, slowly added in slight excess; filtration and concentration to the

consistence of syrup; after which, the preparation on cooling, becomes

a mass of crystals of muriate of morphia, moistened with a dark-colour-

ed solution of uncrystallizable muriate of narcotine and resinoid

colouring matter. This solution is abstracted from the crystals by

strong pressure between folds of bibulous paper; and the solution,

erystallization, and expression repeated once or twice ; after which, the

salt is obtained in radiated bunches of snow-white silky crystals, con-

taining 37 parts of muriatic acid and 322 of morphia. But for the

unfortunate super-abundance of narcotine, and comparative paucity of

obtainable morphia, in Indian opium, the manufacture of the muriate

on a large scale might advantageously be established, at one of the

Bengal agencies, for the supply of the Indian medical department with.

this admirablepreparation, the marc (?) of which would be available for

the manufacture of léwa.

26. Connected with the subject of analysis is another which claims

some attention from the opium examiner, the accuracy and sensibility

of the weights and balances used in his department. Neither of them

should ever be allowed to be soiled with opium ; and the former should

occasionally be compared, to see that all weights of similar denomina-

tions mutually correspond within one-tenth of a grain, andthat the larger

and smaller weights are equally accurate multiples and sub-multiples of

each other. The knife-edges of the balances should occasionally be shar-

pened, so that they may turn with as little friction as possible ; and the

three points of suspension, whenever deranged, should be brought into

a perfectly straight line, by bending the beam with the hand: if the

centre edges be too low, the balance will, when loaded with its proper

weights, be in a state of unstable equilibrium, and will cause great

mistakes ; and if they be too low, the balance will lose its sensibility,

and cannot be depended upon within perhaps two grains. Care should

also be taken that the distance from centre-edges to arm-edges are

exactly equal; from accidental violence, this element of accuracy is

very apt to be deranged, and causes great confusion when overlooked.

27. Were all the opium brought for sale unexceptionable in quality,

free from paséwd, and liable to batté on account of deficient spissitude

only, there would be, supposing the batta levied with tolerable accu-

racy, little difference at the end of the manufacturing season, between

178 On the preparation of Opium for the China market. [Marcn,

the registered receipts and expenditure of opium: and, supposing it

levied with strict accuracy, there would be a small loss, occasioned by

accidental spilling of semi-fluid opium, adhesion to the persons and

clothes of the work-people, and other unavoidable sources of wastage.

But as, in the present state of things, batta to a considerable amount

is levied on quality, the effect of its deduction, if not kept separate

from the batt4 on spissitude, would be to shew, at the end of the year,

a deceptive deficiency of receipt compared with expenditure. Batta

upon quality, or paséwd, therefore, should not be admitted into the

godown accounts ; and should be confined to the account between the

receiving-officer and the koért.

28. There are no satisfactory experimental means, except perhaps

by the specific gravity, of ascertaining the precise quantity of paséwd in

opium. It will hardly drain at all from opium of higher spissitude

than sixty per cent. and not readily from opium of even that spissi-

tude, unless assisted by a slight fermentation, which greatly facilitates

its flow: the paséwad trickling down the sides of the air-vesicles thus

formed, The only convenient rule for the adjustment of batta upon

paséwd, or upon quality generally, is, that absolute paséwd, if not too

thin, and the worst opium purchased for the Company, being paid for

at half the price of standard opium ; for different grades of inferiority

in quality between those two conditions, as fair a gradation of penal.

ties shall be fixed, as can be formed from an estimate of the sensible

qualities.

29. It has been thought, that specific gravity might prove an ac-

curate index of the spissitude of opium; which is, however, not the

case ; its soluble principles, and that portion of its insoluble constitu-

ents which, slightly modified, unite with the soluble in forming paséwé

acquiring in their transition to this altered state, a considerable in-

crease of density. Opium, therefore, containing paséwd, is much

heavier than an equal bulk, at the same spissitude, of pure opium. I

have found this condensation to bear same proportion to the quantity

of paséwad apparently contained: and it might, probably be found to

indicate with considerable accuracy the proper amount of batta to be

levied for paséwd, were such nicety desirable or conveniently attain-

able.

30. The Regulation of Gavernment, which requires Civil Surgeons

to report upon the relative values of parcels of confiscated opium, ac-

cording to the quantity of foreign matter which they may contain,

is obscure on two important pcints: Ist, whether, and beyond what

degree of thinness, water is to be considered as foreign matter ;

and, secondly, whether and beyond what degree of deterioration,

1836.] Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones. 179

fermented and paséwd, converted opium, when contained in the con-

traband article, are to be considered as ‘“‘ foreign matter.” I have

been in the habit of regarding them as foreign, when the water ex-

ceeded 30 per cent., and when inferiority in quality was palpable;

because a different practice would defeat the end, for which the regu-

lation was framed, of securing a fair reward to the informer. Under

a less strict interpretation of the rule, he would be tempted to double

the weight of the seized opium, and consequently his own reward, by

adding to it, a sufficient quantity of water, or of bad opium, such as

may at all times be clandestinely purchased for a trifle in the poppy

districts.

1V.—Catalegue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones presented to the

Asiatic Society's Museum by Colonel Couvin.

[Exhibited at the Meeting of the 6th April.]

Colonel Cotvin’s first dispatch consisted of six large chests of fossil

bones, in their rough state, attached to the matrix rock, as they were

originally brought in from the hills by the native collectors employed

by him to dig. They still remain unclassified in the museum, but the

detailed examination that has been given to the second dispatch by

Lieutenants Duranp and Baker, whom experience has already made

expert in recognizing fragments, even much mutilated, will materially

assist in arranging the former specimens, while it leaves little to be

done with the present beyond publishing their catalogue at once for

the satisfaction of geologists, and preparing the specimens for the

inspection of visitors. There areamong them many noble fragments

of known animals, which challenge comparison with those of any col-

lection in Europe : these it will be a first object to make known by ac-

curate drawings or by plaster casts. There are also numerous skulls,

jaws, teeth, and bones decidedly new to fossil osteology, but the admira-

ble fidelity and scientific knowledge with which the major part of these

is now under illustration by Dr. Hucu Fatconer and Captain Caurtiey,

in the Asiatic Researches, from their own, even more extensive, cabinet,

supplants the necessity of attempting a full investigation here. All

points in which differences from their generic or specific descriptions

are recognized, it will be the duty of our curator to bring to notice.

The synopsis published in the Journal for December last, page 706,

comprised the varieties of organic remains, up to that period extracted

from the upper deposits of the tertiary strata of the Sivdlik or Sy}.

Himdlaya range of hills. Most of the same are to be found in Colonel

Coxvin’s collection, Some recent additions of a highly interesting

2a 2

180 Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones [Manrch,

nature have however been made above, of which I have been apprised

in my private correspondence with Seharanpur.

Lieutenant Duranp has just dug out a nearly perfect head of a

Paleotherium, from the vicinity of the spot whence Captain CauTLry

had previously extracted the Anoplotherium of Cuvier. The Dadupur

museum possesses a fragment ‘ of the lower jaw of a huge new animal :

the teeth not sufficiently perfect to determine its nature: it is probably

of some grand new pachydermatous animal, equalling the elephant in

size.’ Both the rhinoceros and the camel have characters of indubit-

able variation from known species. Of both these, notices are now in

preparation. The acquisition of fossil birds was noticed at the meeting

of March: Dr. Fatconer supposes them to be bones of large Gralla.

This is, as he says, a fair test of the justice he and his fellow labourers

are doing to the enquiry: it is not every museum in Europe that has

fossil birds to shew! A note this moment received announces the ac-

quisition of “‘a superb specimen of gigantic size of an unknown

species of crocodile: it forms an intermediate section in the genus be-

tween the true crocodile or magar, and the leptorynchus or gharidl.

The muzzle is cylindrical, as im the latter, but greatly shorter ; and the

teeth are thick and shorter, as in the magar: they protrude in relief

above the jaw three inches, and are 1 inch and 2 lines in diameter !””

There is also in Col. Cotvin’s collection a Saurian head, apparently new.

I have ventured to alter the numbering of the catalogue, to save

repetition, by bringing bones of the same animals together, the original

having been written out by Lieutenant Baxer just in the order

they came to hand. It will be observed, that great pains have been

taken to unite together with cement specimens which were broken in

extraction, and in clearing them from matrix. The necessity of the

latter operation will be acknowledged on perusal of the following ex-

tract from Colonel Cotvin’s note to me of the 4th October last.

“ The quantity I found collected here on my return, and what had to be

brought in proved to be so great, that in the matrix they would have

loaded a boat; during the rains, therefore, I employed a number of

people to clear them, and though a vast number have thus been rejected

as superfluous, or too mutilated to be useful, still a great deal has been

packed that might perhaps have well been left behind, had I not feared

to attempt a selection.” The same letter adds :—

-“‘T have been unfortunate in not meeting with specimens of teeth of

the Sivatherium, or complete heads of the hog. I had one lower end

of the radius of what appeared to be the camel, but as a few specimens

also deemed ‘‘ camel” had come into the Dadupur museum*, I made

* Since certified by the discovery of an entire bead.

1836.} _ presented to the Asiatic Society’s Museum. 181

over this bone to it with the view of identification, and should the

further search prove successful, you will receive specimens of the animal

from Lieutenant Baxer.

“The clearing away of the matrix, besides rendering the specimens

less cumbrous for transmission, enabled, I should hardly say us, for it

was my young friend, here to give names to most of what are now

sent. The locality of each I found it impossible to particularize, as

the parties, whom I sent out to collect, ranged about in the lower hills,

picking up whatever they found, and heaping all together, until they had

amassed several cart loads; but the eastern limits of their search were

the branches of the Sombe, which are about due south of the Chir

mountain; and to the west, their search extended to about half way

between Ndhan and Pinjér. The only distinction worth noticing is,

that the hard or brown fossils (those mineralized with hydrated oxide

of iron) did not come out of the same stratum as the blue and friable

(calcareous) ones; the latter being from the west of Ndhan. You

will perceive the difference of the matrix on several of the speci-

mens only partially cleared. I have never had leisure to visit the

sites myself, and would therefore add nothing on this subject until I

shall have enjoyed the opportunity of a personal inspection.”

The Society will doubtless be eager to do every honor to the munifi-

cent donor of these splendid fossils, if it has any real wish to acquire the

reputation of possessing a valuable museum. The foundation of our

fossil collection was but laid four years ago, and already through the

contributions of Colonel Burnry, Dr. Spiuspury, Captain Smirn,

Mr. Duan, &c. now enriched by Col. Convin’s vast store of. speci-

mens, it has become necessary to devote an entire apartment to this

instructive department of natural history. Our smallest return of

gratitude to those who have been at such considerable expence in pro-

moting the Society’s interests, will be to do honor to what has been so

generously bestowed, by making up fit cabinets to exhibit them to the

best advantage, and by spreading the knowledge of them as expedi-

tiously and widely as possible.

J. P. See.

Catalogue of Colonel Colvin’s Fossil Bones.

MastTopon ELEPHANTOIDES.

1 Upper jaw, very perfect.

2 —-, fragment.

5-6 Lower jaw, part of the right half.

7 —, ditto left half.

8 Symphysis of ditto, (or of elephant.)

11 to 26 Fragments of molars, of both jaws.

31 Axis of a large mastodon (?) very perfect.

32 Cubitus, upper extremity, with olecranon.

182 Catalogue of a Second Collection of Fossil Bones (Marcu,

Mastopon Latipsns, identified with Elephantoides, Fat.

36 Lower jaw, right half.

ELEerHAS PRIMIGENIUS.

41 Upper jaw, right half.

42 to 47 Lower jaws, left half, and fragments.

48—49 ——_—_—_-., right half.

50 —————-, left half of a younger animal.

51—56 Molars, fragments of.

o7 59 , of smaller animals.

60 Upper jaw of a small animal, much mutilated.

61 to 80 Tusks, fragments of various sizes.

81 Femur, upper and (? mastodon).

82—87 — , lower end.

88—91 Eumerus, upper end.

92—95 » lower end.

96 Cubitus, upper extremity.

97 Tibia, perfect specimen.

98—101 , upper extremities.

102—104 Calcaneum.

105 Axis, of very large size.

HipropoTaMus.

111 Cranium.

112 Upper half of the head, very perfect in bone.

114—117 Upper jaw, perfect, and fragments.

119—123 Lower jaw, in various preservation.

124 Fragment of ditto, with two central incisors.

125—126 Condyles of ditto.

127—129 Fragments of molar teeth.

130 135 Canine teeth, fragments of upper.

136 , of lower jaw.

140 Pelvis, fragment of the.

141—143 Femur, lower extremity.

144 Cubitus, upper extremity, with olecranum.

RHINOCEROS.

150 Upper jaw, fragment.

151—153 Lower jaw, fragments much mutilated.

154 Teeth, three fragments of molars.

155 Axis, doubtful.

156—8 Scapula, three fragments, doubtful.

159—163 Humerus, upper extremity.

164 ——, lower extremity.

165 Cubitus, upper end.

166—169 Femur.

170 Radius.

171 Tibia, with tarsal and metatarsal bones attached.

172—175 , fragments.

176—180 Metatarsal entire.

177—179 Metacarpus.

1806 Calcaneum, perfect.

181 Astragalus, perfect.

Sus.

182 Right jaw of some animal of this genus.

Bones of Pachydermatous animals not classified.

185 Lower jaw of a small animal.

186 Molar teeth, much mutilated.

187—210 Vertebre, cervical; 191, process of dorsal, 192.

212 A very large specimen of do.

213—219 Humerus, fragments of lower extremity.

1836.}

220

221—223

224—229

230—232

233—235

236

237—238

239—246

247—248

249—250

251

260

261—264

265

266

267

268

269

270—271

280

282

283—289

290—293

294—295

296—297

305—306

310

311

312

316

317

318

319—321

325—326

327

328—344

345—358

260

366—367

368—372

373

374—375

376—379)

330—383

384—406

407 —409

410—429

presented to the Asiatic Society’s Museum.

Femur, upper extremity of.

Condyle of do.

Tibia.

Radius, lower extremity.

Carpus and tarsus.

Metacarpus, small.

Metatarsus.

Phalanges.

Astragalus.

Omoplate; socket of do. 251—253.

Pelvis; socket of do. 252.

Horse.

Upper jaw, attached to the humerus of a rhinoceros, &c.

Molar teeth.

Atlas ?

Femur, lower extremity.

Radius, ditto.

Cannon bone,

Astragalus,

Phalanges.

Bos.

Head of some species of ox.

Left upper jaw, fragment of.

Lower jaw, fragments.

Molar teeth.

Femur, upper extremity,

Horn, fragments.

ANTELOPE.

Head and horns, portion of the.

Occiput.

Upper jaw.

Lower jaw, or of a small deer ?

Posterior part of head, (or of a deer?)

DEER.

Upper jaw, molars enveloped in matrix.

Ditto of smaller animal.

Lower jaw, with metatarsal attached—alone 313, 314.

Left lower jaw of young animal with milch teeth.

Posterior molar of large deer : smaller 318.

Germ tooth (?)

Antlers, fragments of.

Bones of various Ruminants, unidentified.

Cranium with occiput.

Lower jaw, back part, large animal.

Molars of a large animal, 345.

Cervical vertebrz, small : three connected, 359.

, of a gigantic ruminant. (? Sivatherium.)

Dorsal vertebra.

Lumbar vertebre.

Sacral vertebre.

Very large vertebre.

Axis.

Atlas, large, one broken,

Scapula, glenoid cavity of, 380.

Humerus, upper extremity.

, lower extremity,

Femur, fragments.

Tibia.

183

184 Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. (Marcu,

430—439 Radius, upper extremity.

440—449 ; lower extremity.

450 , with carpal and part of metacarpal.

451 —, perfect, with part of ulna, fragments, 452.

453 Calitus.

4541—466 Carpal and tarsal bones.

467—527 Metacarpal and metatarsal bones.

528—537 Astragalus.

538—551 Calcaneum, very large.

552—462 Phalanges.

563 Ribs, fragment of.

Hyana.

600 Upper jaw, in good preservation.

601 Canine and Ist molar of do.

602 Lower jaw, entire, and fragment, 603.

604 Cranium.

605 Three molars of some canine! animal.

606 Metatarsal bones of some carnivorous animal,

SAURIAN.

700—717 Vertebre of Saurian reptiles.

718 Cranium of Gharial.

719—724 Plates of crocodilide.

Besides about 120 fragments not identified, received with the second

dispatch; the whole of the first donation unregistered, and some

gigantic testudinous plates, presented by Col. Cotvin personally while

‘in Calcutta.

Gigantic ELx, (presented by Mr. Conductor W. Dawez,) found in

the Ganawer Khal, near the Haripdl branch of the Sombe river.

ID sy 4! Portions of the antler.

D 5 Axis of second cervical vertebra.

D 6 Cervical vertebra of do.

BuFrrato ? presented by the same.

1 Head of bos or buffalo with one horn.

2 Piece of horn, supposed to belong to the same.

V.—WNotice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir in 1836. By the Baron

HucGet.

[Read on the 6th April.]

On my way to Bombay to embark for Europe, I take the liberty of

addressing you a few lines, requesting your doing with them what you

think best: they relate to my journey to Kashmir. I was in hopes

of being able to send you a more elaborate memoir, but my time is

very much limited, that I am afraid of postponement, and hasten rather

to offer you afew notes as they were collected. I understand that

Mr. Jacquemont’s travels are now published. I think therefore that

it may be of some interest to the Indian reading public, to have before

it some observations, not influenced by the above mentioned work,

made by a traveller a few years later, to compare them together. As

1836.) Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. 185

before a regular publication of my residence in 1835 can be made in

Europe and reach India, that of Mr. Jacaurmont will have lost much

of its interest as a new topic, I do not hesitate to come forward with

my notes in their original form, how unfavourable to them it may be.

Kashmir in a political and financial point of view, has been muchover-

rated : not in a picturesque one. The valley in its length, from N. W.

by W. to S. E. by E. is little more than 80 miles long; the breadth

crossing the former line, varying from 30 miles to 6. I speak of the

actual plains: from the eternal snow of the Pir Panjahl to the Tibet

Panjahl are 50 to 60 miles : both ranges run nearly parallel in the

first direction, with a great number of peaks. The height of the passes

from Bimbar to Kashmir, and that from Kashmir to Iscardo is the

same, 13,000 feet; the highest point of the Pir Panjahl, 15,000 feet

by the boiling point. The city of Kashmir 6,300 feet* ; Kashmir

town, Dalawer Khan Bagh on the 19th November, gave meridional

altitude 72° 4’, artificial horizon, which shews its northern latitude to be

34° 35’.

Population.—Four years ago about 800,000; now not exceeding

200,000. The valley is divided in 36 perganahs, containing ten towns

and 2,200 villages. Kashmir town contains still 40,000 inhabitants ;

Chupinian, 3000; Islamabad and Pampur, 2000. It was not the bad

administration of the Sikhs, but a famine brought on by frost at the

time the rice was in flower, and cholera in consequence of it, that re-

duced the population to one fourth of the former number by death and

emigration: many villages are entirely deserted. Chirar town con-

tains now 2000 houses and only 150 inhabitants!

Revenue.—Last year very nearly nothing, Ransi’t SincH wishing

that the country should recover : this year (1836) he asks 23 lakhs from

the Governor Mounan Sineu, which the country cannot give. The

emigration has brought to the Panjab and Hindustén many shawl

manufacturers, and Kashmir will most likely never yield again what it

did a few years ago. Nirpur, Lodiana, and many other places can

bring to the market shawls cheaper than Kashmir, where every article

of food is dearer than in the Panj4b and Hindustan.

Twelve passes, Pansah/ in the Kashmir language (from which Pir

Panjhal of the Musalmans) now exist; three to Tibet (Iscardo and

Ladak) ; eight to the Panjab; one to the west. In former times

there were only seven: the defence of which was entrusted to Malliks

with hereditary appointments: four passes are open the whole year:

one to Ladak, the western pass, (Baramulla,) and two to the south.

* Three thermometers brought it very near to the same height.

186 Notice of a Visit to the Valley of Kashmir. (Marcu,

Wuler lake is 30 miles from E. to W.

Brahmans, the only Hindtts in Kashmir, 25,000 in 2000 families ;

they are Vishnuvaites and Sivaites, divided into three divisions, who alk

intermarry: they are darker than the other inhabitants, owing to a

colony sent for from the Dekhan about 800 years ago, after the abo-

riginal Brahman race was nearly extinguished by the persecution of

the Muhammedans.

There is not in the valley the slightest appearance of its having

been drained: the pass through which the Jhelum found its way is

one of the most beautiful of the world : its bed 1000—1500 feet deep :

I do not believe more in the traditions of the Kashmirian Brahmans

than in the fables of Manethon.

All the remaining temples are Bauddha, of a different shape from any

I have ever seen; only one small one reminds me of the caves of Ellora :

I have observed no Dagoba. Koran Pandan, near Islamabad, Anatnagh of

old, is not only the largest ruin of Kashmir, but one of the splendid ruins

of the world :—noble proportions ;—material black marble. I wasnearly

ledintoerror,at first thinking its form Grecian. The building had nothing

on a closer examination which could justify such a hypothesis. Very

few temples remain in Kashmir in tolerable preservation, having mostly

been destroyed by a fanatic Musalman*, whose zeal did not succeed in

overturning them all.

The only trace of fossil remains in the valley is ina limestone, which

contains small shells.

Nature has done much for Kashmir, art more; the whole valley is

like a nobleman’s park : the villages, being surrounded with fruit trees,

and having in their centre immense plane and poplar trees, form large

masses, having between them one sheet of cultivation, through which

the noble river winds itself in elegant sweeps.

The botany of Kashmir is not rich, and is very nearly allied to that

of the Himalaya, between Massuri and Simlah : in the valley itself not

a plant is to be seen of indigenous origin : the northern declivity of the

mountains is rich in vegetation, the southern steep and barren. The

Chunar is the Platanus Orientalis, which so far from being a native of

Kashmir does there produce ne germinating seeds, and is multiplied by

cuttings, which, since the Moghul Emperor, have not been kept up. It

is a very extraordinary phenomena to witness the Nilumbium speciosum

growing where the orange tree is destroyed by frost. Misri yaleb is not

a native of Kashmir. .

I made a remark on the Pir Panjhal, which I afterwards had occa-

sion to observe several times, and which is new to me: that the freez-

* Sikandar, Bhutshikan, A. D. 1396.

1836.] Notice of a Visit to theValley of Kashmir. {87

ing point on the thermometer advances at great elevations in a similar

proportion as the boiling point retrocedes: thus the water boiling for

instance with 191, the sun with 44 degrees Fahr., did not make any

jmpression upon a piece of ice lying ona black soil, the latter not

being moistened*. This must be the case, although I do not recollect to

have seen it mentioned: on a certain height above the surface of the

globe, the freezing point and the boiling point must meett, heat and

cold being phenomena belonging exclusively to our globe. My ob-

servations led me to believe, that this may be at 84,100 feet above the

surface of the sea, or in other words that there finishes our atmosphere.

The burning gases at Jwalamuki are of a very extraordinary nature,

nothing of sulphur or naphtha in them. They have a most delicious smell,

something like a French perfume with ambergris. The flames, about 10

in number, come out of a dark grey sandstone on perpendicular places :

temples are built over them: I attributed the effect to priestcraft, until in

one of the temples called Ghurka Debi, I was allowed to try experiments,

and remained alone: I blew out the flame, which did not re-ignite from

itself : there is nothing particular on the places where the flame came

out: no change in the colour or substance of the stone, or im its hard-

ness. Water in small quantity is formed in little reservoirs under the

flames, being the produce of them: this water takes fire too from time

to time, when enough inflammable matter is collected on the surface. I

took a bottle of it for you, which Captain Wane will be sokind as to

forward to you for examination} ; it has however now undergone a ter-

rible alteration by putrefaction, and ] am afraid that you will not be able

to analyse it. The taste of it when fresh can distinguish nothing of

its composition: it is not unpleasant to drink, and of a milky-greenish

colour. No traces of volcanic matter near it.

Ihave picked up many coins, which appear to me new; of some I am

certain : those of the Kashmirian kings, of the Bauddha time, found near

the town Bi Bahara (no doubt a corruption of Vidya vihara, temple of

Wisdom, if my Sanscrit does not forsake me): I intended sending them

to you, but they found their way in oneof my tin boxes: I cannot guess

in which, and for this reason do not open them: whenever I come to

them I shall send you them, or their exact likeness.

* The explanation of this circumstance should rather be sought in the dryness

of the air at such an elevation; and the consequent rapid evaporation which carried

off the ice as it melted—ice itself will, it is well known, wholly evaporate ina

vacuum.—Ep.

+ By Daxton’s tables, the aqueous tension of freezing water is 0.20 inch ; there-

fore water will boil and freeze together at a height of 130560 feet, or about 25

miles.—Ep.

¢ This hadnot yet reached us: nor the coins, which we desire much to see.—Ep,

DBD

188 Note on an Inscription at Bamydn. (Marcu,

VI.—Note on an Inscription at Bamyan. By Mr. C. Masson.

[Read at the Meeting of the 6th April.]

Of the antiquities of Central Asia, the Idols at Bamyan have long

been known and celebrated in Europe. To ascertain their character

is still a desideratum. An inscription found in so fortunate a situ-

ation, as at the summit of the niche in which stands the larger, and by

inference, the more ancient of the idols directly over its head, will, if

capable of being interpreted, dispel much of the mystery attaching to

it and its associates. It contains but six characters as here exhibited*,

appears to be entire, and although the copy of it was taken four years

since, I think its fidelity may be depended upon.

When in possession of Mr. Prinsep’s plates of the Pehlevi Alpha-

bets, this inscription was compared with them, and its characters

appeared to me to approach nearest to those of the Pehlevi of Sassa-

nian coins from Marspren. Observing the apparent recurrence of the

two first letters, and concluding that the alternated characters must

be consonants and vowels, of the latter of which A was the more

likely to be used as the more common, | sought its equivalent in the

Pehlevi alphabet noted, and found it might be expressed by u. Marking

also the number of the characters of the inscription, in union with the

duplication seemingly of A or U, the word NANAIA occurred to my

imagination, and attempting to write it in the Pehlevi of the alphabet,

I produced

DINU

The first five letters were so similar to those of the inscription,

that I judged I might without imputation of temerity bring the

circumstance to notice ; and as for the final letter, if we are pretty sure

of all the preceding ones, we may reasonably be satisfied with that also.

The aof the alphabet, or p has indeed a?, or doubt, attached to it,

while the final letter of the inscription resembles the A or 4 of other

alphabets.

The idols of Bamyan, perhaps less ancient than many of the caves

or temples there, have not an antiquity beyond the reach of verification,

and while we pause whether or not to ascribe them to the princes we

call Indo-Scythic, we dare affirm that they were constructed during the

period of the Sassanian sway in Persia, or 220 A. D., and the era of

Muhammedanism.

Kabul, 1836. C. Masson.

* See Plate VI. fig. 1; we confess the similitude of the marks, which Mr.

Masson takes for letters, to the Péhlevi alphabet is but just sufficient to hazard

a conjecture upon. Nanaia, a female, would not be applicable to a male figure :

—wNanao or Nanano (lunus) would be more consonant with the Péhlevi, and

even with the form of the supposed letters. —Eb.

1836. ] Asiatic Society. 189

VII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 6th April, 1836.

G. J. Gorpon, Esq. Senior Member present, in the chair.

Lieut.-Col. CauLFreLp, was proposed as a Member of the Society by

Mr. James Prinsep, seconded by Mr. Pippineton.

Mr. J. S. Sroprorp requested that his name might be withdrawn from

the Society. Mr. Sroprorp had deposited 80 Rupees with the Secretary, to

cover the cost of four volumes unfortunately lost by the wreck of his pin-

nace, until they shall be replaced from England.

Read letters from Lieut. A. Cunnineuam, Engrs., and Raja Visava-

Govinpa Sinena, acknowledging their election as Members.

. Also, from Professor T. Rosen, acknowledging his election as an Honor-

ary Member.

A private letter from M. Eve. Burnour, Secretary to the Asiatic Soci-

ety of Paris, noted the arrival of the 100 vols. of the Tibetan Kahgyur,

and of the other dispatches sent by General ALLarp.

Read letters from the Secretaries to the British Museum, and the

Royal Asiatic Society, returning thanks for the Tibetan Dictionary and

other works.

Extract of a letter from Professor Witson, intimated the distribution

of the Tibetan works sent home for the various continental learned socie-

ties. It also reported that a portion of the Moorcrorr papers had been

finally placed with Murray and Co., for commencement of publication.

Professor WILSON estimates that the whole will occupy, when re-written, and

shorn of repetitions and redundancies, two octavo volumes. The terms agreed

upon are, that 50 copies are to be at the Society’s disposition. Any final loss on

the publication to be made good by the Society: and the relations of the author

to participate in any success.

Read a letter from M. Csoma ne Koros, saying that although the fac

simile from Iskardo, taken by Mr. Vienn, was evidently Tibetan, it was

in too imperfect a condition to be decyphered.

Library.

The following books were presented to the Society :

A copy of the Appendix of the third volume of the Transactions of the Royal

Asiatic Society—dy the Society.

The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, No. 4--by the Society.

A children’s map of the world in Bengali—by Rdja Kdlikrishna.

A daily register of the tide in the harbour of Singapur, from Ist Sept. 1834,

to 3lst Aug. 1835—dy the Government.

Meteorological Register for the months of January and February, 1836—dy

the Surveyor General.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science—by the Editor.

The following received from the book-sellers :—

The Political and Statistical History of Guzerdt, translated from the Persian

by James Birp, Esq., and published by the Oriental Translation Fund.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Literary Men, vol. 2nd.

190 Asiatic Society. (Marcu,

The following letter from the Minister of Public Instruction in France,

addressed to the President, was read :

‘* Paris, le 24 Juillet, 1835.

‘* Monsieur le Président, La Société Asiatique de Calcutta, en mettant & la

disposition de feu M. Vicror JacauEmonrt, tous les matériaux scientifiques

qu’elle possédait, lui a donné les moyens de rassembler des documens d’un haut

interét sur les Indes Orientales.

En témoignage des services rendus A notre compatriote, je vous prie, Mon-

sieur le Président, de vouloir bien faire agréer A la Société de Calcutta un ex-

emplaire de Vouvrage qui se publie en son nom, par les soins de sa famille et

sous les auspices du Gouvernement Frangais.

Je tiens 4 votre disposition, Monsieur le Président, les livraisons qui ont

deja paru : Vous pourrez les faire retirer du Depdt des Livres de Souscription au

Ministére de l’Instruction publique par tel moyen que vous jugerez convenable.

Ageréz, Monsieur le Président, l’assurance de ma haute considération.

Le Ministre de l’ Instruction publique,

GUIZOT.”

Resolved, that the President be requested to return thanks for this

mark of consideration in the French Government, and that the Secretary

take im nediate steps to obtain possession of the work in question.

The Secretary announced the transfer’ and deposit in the Society’s

rooms of the Sanscrit, Persian, Arabic, and Hindui Manuscripts from the

College of Fort William.

The number of the Sanscrit worksis 1130 volumes: of the Arabic and Persian 2676

volumes. A catalogue raisonnée of the whole had long since been prepared by

the College officers, of which the meeting resolved it should be recommended

to the Committee of Papers to undertake the immediate publication, adding to

it such other original works as the Society might possess on its own shelves.

The Secretary apprized the Meeting of the completion of the 2nd volume

of the Mahabharata, copies of which were ready for distribution to the

subcribers.

Museum of Antiquities.

Read a Note on an Inscription at Bamyan, by M. C. Masson.

[Printed in the present number. ]

The two Buddhist Images, with Deva-négari incriptions, mentioned ina

letter from Colonel H. Burney, Resident at Ava, read at the last Meet-

ing, were received, and a paper was read on Tagoung, the place of their

discovery, an ancient capital of the Burmese empire.

[Printed in the present number. |

A drawing of the full size of the sculptured impression of Gaurama’s

foot in Ava, was presented by Ensign Puayre, with a description of the

contents of the several compartments.

The image brought to the notice of the Society by Lieutenant Krrror,

in January 1835, sought out by Mr. Dean and transmitted for the Mu-

seum, had arrived with Col. Coxtvin’s dispatch.

This image dees not seem to possess any characteristic difference from the

ordinary sculpture of the Hindus, as had been imagined. The dress and attitude

are of common occurrence ; the feet rest on the lotus plant. The head has been

struck off, doubtless in the period of the earlier Muhammedan incursions.

1836. ] Asiatic Society. 191

Specimens of spears and other warlike instruments from New Zealand

were presented by C. K. Rogtson, Esq.

Physical.

The Secretary announced the arrival of the second dispatch of Colonel

Convin’s donation of Sub-Himdlayan fossils, which were placed in the

Museum, and lighted up for inspection of the Members present.

The catalogue of this splendid collection, drawn up by Lieuts. Duranp and

BAKER, is printed in the present number. The meeting resolved that the spe-

cial thanks of the Society should be presented to Colonel Cotvin, and that

suitable cabinets should be constructed for containing and preserving his donation.

With the foregoing were received the remains of the fossil Elk and

fossil Buffalo, presented by Conductor Dawe, and alluded to in his letter

read at the Meeting of the 6th May 1835,

The cervical vertebra and portion of antler were depicted in the 44th plate of

vol. iv. The Bovine head, a very fine specimen, and materially different from Dr.

SprisBury’s from Narsinhpur, will be published shortly.

The following acquisitions to the museum of natural history were made :

A live specimen of Histriv Cristata, common Porcupine, presented by

Mr. James Prinsep, to whom it was given by Mr. Srepnrnson, who

found it in the Bakra mound in Tirhut. a

A specimen of Cercocobus Sabeus, presented by C. C. Ecrrron, Esq.

Specimens of the skulls and horns of Cervus Muntjak, Antilope Cervi-

capra, Antilope Chikara, Antilope T’har, and Capra Jemlahica, horns of

the Antilope Hodgsonii, and Cervus Aristotelis, the skull of a species of

Sciuropterus, and the head and bills of Buceros Malabaricus and Platalea

Leucorodia, presented by Lieutenant Vicary.

A specimen of Cerinaceus Auritus, and one of the Nilgherri Wood-

cock, presented by W. H. Smount, Esq.

Specimens of Pitta Brachyurus, Picus Tiga (?) and Pterocles Qua-

dricinctus, presented by Lieutenant Vicary.

[The Picus i figured in HARDWICKE and Gray, and described by Horsr-

FIELD, Linn. ans. vol. xili, and Latruam, Gen. Hist. vol. iii., has only

three toes; but both the figure and descriptions agree so exactly in all other

respects, with the present specimen, which has four, that I have little hesitation

in referring them to the same bird. J. T. P. Cur.]

A specimen of Striv Flammea ; presented by P. Homrray, Esq.

Specimens of the nest of Hirundo Esculenta, the Esculent Swallow, in

several stages of preparation, by Ensign A. P. Puayre.

Seeds of the Cane tree, from the Straights, presented by Dr. Vos.

Mr. Hopeson transmitted an account of a new genus of Carnivora, to

which he proposes to assign the name of Ursitaxus. The skullof the animal

was intrusted by him to the Secretary for the inspection of Members.

[This paper will appear in the Physical Researches. ]

On the motion of the Secretary, it was resolved, that the Right

Honorable Lord Avuckuanp be solicited to accept the office of Patron of

the Society ; and that the President be requested to communicate with

His Lordship on the subject.

VITI.—WMeteorological Register.

cee a I ET SE ES EES EE I SE ST SY

*N Sollur NE OL9AeS SOW $44SIU Ye pAgZ 943 UO oULITTINY Y

*‘payvoim a1oMm syvog Auvut AoA o10YM 687)NI[VD JO *N Sotl Coe neue ae ae inveand Ae nore

yi ‘ ‘JaIeUIOIeG Mau ay} ‘([euINOL ay} JO *[OA pugeyy Ul peqisdsap) I9}e

—W A * pur wy ye 4amo) CEN’ spurs ‘UOT]eIDad xa 04 A.eajuoo at ‘ ! : wate

tov ayy Surdidde zoe st SIU we te 9801 ‘ Fad Cab andeae ey Suueduios Aq “weaemoy ‘uses oq [[IM sy *Joastad sf UraIst9 O13 JO I pl a ie aerucnee, Rete: Ra

ged ee ie ioe iaturt Sones ehors ait joaiwoudnp v sv ‘uewmon Aq apeur ‘uOpuoTy wrOAy padlaoor ATO}E] JUSUINAYSUT 94} POOYSIOpUN aq 07ST ,,194

le sey eqn} ayy a Aa or

‘ 7 % A 6 UeoyN

: ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ "68 (ILI | 319s (282° 06 | ¥°9 | UZ | L°6L| Gro‘ 1\e68°8e(0z6

“sjjenbs yuonbaay aqenes s£0 4 4'e6 [0'99 | 22 [eoL | B'ht | 6°€8 (ILI rg, |e ea pera eer aac er zs

‘ ite ; ; z« ‘ O‘9T | 9° | T'98 |EFB‘T | BBPS |TEL‘e69° | 99 | O“Gt) v‘er| ZL : ‘

‘any a oe it eMac, O66. — £9 | 201 [o'er | U98 inse't | OLF! pedi eoe’ | 88 | 8i2 | 2'8 | G08) LO‘ L/918 ate ne Be

*ava]9 op abe nee. Cece Bee eer ee Te Hamel y. poo | Sco |r. | 108) GeO Tee" foe, Rae) Be

op op . i F A 6 "90 ICL | 2°18 Be uv a © 93

op oun pel eo ae oe GO Wetog: (ete oBl | Vi9k ia ‘ ce | gee | Senvl tastolacos lover (eno® | 92

soul *“ulel ured : , . S16 I2%6S 18126 | 9‘ | €'18 |290'T | 6ae* lo6g bes’ 7 16 9%¢ | 8¢ | 8°82! 196‘0 860 610. legs oe

“119 “und “110 ‘uInd Suey. a8 MM IN a°88 \e2¢ | og (06 | 8'6 | 8°62 \9660 gon! 99° - 88 ue) : gto age ae hee 16° 1 e¢

*AQstuL op Pahee : : ; ‘ ‘ 76 ‘ ‘PL | O28 |SOL'T | Le9% eog'|oge’ | 26 | O°9 | Bf9 | e62} LoO‘T| LEG ‘

‘urd gjeamy = * SB. AO svete Pe ae e se" ote gre a aoe bk 86L |\S00‘T | 808° JET9* 6LL' +6 bp 6%¢ | g‘8Z 0E6%0 960 996° ee fe

ae le ie ont ‘aay aes Sage Ante ‘og |1'Z9 | ze | OOL| ‘tr | S'@8 |060'T | Gas! \6i8IBZZ° fos | 9°8 | o*9 de 880°1|606 te 02

*ATaMoys op : f 2 se oF “6L | 1°88 gy ee 63 | 1 ‘

op ‘Imp t : , ; Bs |cteL | Le |€6 | o%6 | 9°98 \See'T | PEG log ‘ 4 <rlyeo « joss® | LT

in 0 “4ST AS M s 16 ae & : 3 ‘ «lonsi9eZ* fae | € | oF | 1*zal B90‘T\ZER* \¢T6

“fasta “Katy RE eee oo hae (eno | leer) seer | rae | |e lonesloeee | 98 | ore | oe ee eee ere eee ela a

op op *ysTut s 6'0 316 91 é ‘ =

a Ge a Bg | OFS | S*es | $°68 |8EPT | GLE‘ [OIZ' £9 | L°81 6‘B1) 9°68] GFITIOL9° ee 68h et

*avayo op als 21g | $68 , _ (069% <n, | &.9_| 0.88 rer‘tloree |zeg* |p08‘62] et

op OP P 9° | S18 | 9°18 | 0°68 jace'T | Tae jes a aOR ress Zeg' IT

op qea}o : a1 99 g°LT G'pz | 0°88 |eFE‘T | OOF Shr” o6 ev es 6108 pele nage OL

op aug Bees 68 | L£°8 | ator | £698 |STZL | Pea" |aeL® GG | ae | 82a One 920% Hilee 706° 6

ene pL ema Sl A 68 | 918 | 68 | 8:78 [G69 | 962, 1204‘ loz eq} 96 | 9°F | 1°e | Bion] OBO’ TIsLa’ |r06! 8

“119 “wund “IMUM op 98 | 956 | 9‘or | O68 |PRIST | OF9' lpZ* 96 | 9E | $6¢ v 62 086°0 866° . E 1

*48v010A0 *snquiiu “sn[nuns gg | 08 | 6g | 9°ZB IS1TT | 929% [6825 £6 | &°S | Z9 | 0°08) €90 Ti9E8° {6 Br 9

“1yQuIM9 “Apnoyo “419 * wd GI | 0°68 LLL L‘¢ | BL 616" ‘

See CHT oe oye cle wie Es |?

op op nae 961 | B68 16h ge! Mo 1865 g

Oop p “30 ORI | 8°28 : 7 tls ; 08 I a 6esolero® |Ze6° C4

op BP ehane Ag | SFT | eer | 9°62 |ZZ0'L | BIB‘ |Fes 66 | Fie | Tip | Liat) 68a" calecat :

at ead : Pour OL | 8°EL | apr | S°82 10860 | aeZ‘ lays! 96 | FE | Gp | GL) VS8O10E0 eset

*realo “re age! = esa ae

_—— ~ be F.2) o> | os Dolan PZ o

E S S Be|ZE)e9| ss) se PERE RSE 2a| PE Sriae | es lceeizead &

wy i, fe} SE] og & a7] —O a i "o2 S- Mc er Or") oo = ot BE rls g °

" > 4 Bel Rs is} 54 i=] = a 5 al o i=} S41 4g]: 5 Yiospan ge

? 3 e OX) Bo 5126 2» wloB ule vlco|s8|2o | » S188

3 ~ S STB") gs /25 |) es oe (SesfalPols i nelee |e! esiSeat =

: # rele eel 6 RS bee ed BF | SapeSe) &

mle: ? i Sg BE aE aa k= : s

io)

*SOUTOI] XH ? “WV QT J@ SUOTJCAIISqO S

5 “pul JOJIWOUTIEY,L “W ‘d f }e SUOTIBAIOSGO i :

JOyIVI AA purmM rassi30y

‘9EST ‘youn Jo yzuopy ay} Los ‘njjna}n9 ‘ag hossp ayz yn yday ‘saisthaxy jn016070.109,a AT

NN ET AS a ES EE SS

Jourw As.S0L.

Vol.V. Pi. VI

SECTION OF St PETERS CHURCH, FORT WILLIAM.

LYDIA TINS N

AWW Ah {

CON:

CZ) 5 0 L0 20

Ketorences

«x Loundation of masonry lo sustain the stress of the Shores

L Houndatiom beam

l-ce O nrighes. fiting he moulding of ‘the Pillars

d Strang beam

ce Struts

L Strang SUL

ee Moveatte centre supporting the atsle Vaults under

aemotilton j

£ Section ofa suspension platform from which the

workines were able lo demolish the Nave vault

30 40 50 Feet

Ue SecuTuy,

L Lhe suspension ropes jastened lo the towers

2 Leams to whol the punkahs were sus-

ferided

s Holes made tr the [lacs and billresses

Jor the recejtion of the punkate beans

t Lorlions of the pillars broke off i

conseyuence Of Ue ensertion of the frittiheah | a

beams

i”

GC. Hutchinson des.

JOURNAL

Pee sels TiC: SOCTET’Y.

No. 52.—April, 1836.

¥.—Account of the Mountain Tribes on the Extreme N. E. Frontier of

Bengal. By J. McCosu, Civil Assistant Surgeon, Godlpara.

[Read at the meeting of the 4th Nov. 1835]

The following pages have been compiled from original manuscripts

lately put into my hands by Captain Jenkins, Agent to the Governor

General on the N. E. Frontier, with kind permission to make what use

of them I thought proper. Some of these letters were written from his

own personal observation; others by Major Wuirs, Political Agent for

Assam; as also by Mr. Bruck, commanding the Gun Boats at Sud-

dia, so that the information contained in this digest may be relied

upon. From the lively interest lately taken in the regions hereafter

described, on account of tea growing there indigenously, and the

probability of their speedily assuming an important aspect in the

statistics of India, any facts concerning such districts will, I hope,

prove not uninteresting to the public.

Few nations bordering upon the British dominions in India are

less generally known than thost mhabiting the extreme N. E. Fron-

tier of Bengal ; and yet, in a commercial, a statistical, or a political point

of view, no country is more important. There our territory of Assam

is situated in almost immediate contact with the empires of China and

Ava, being separated from each by a narrow belt of mountainous country,

possessed by barbarous tribes of independent savages, and capable of

being crossed over in the present state of communication in 10 or 12

days. From this mountain range, navigable branches of the great rivers

of Nankin, of Cambodia, of Martaban, of Ava, and of Assam derive their

194 Account of the Mountain Tribes (ApriL,

origin, and appear designed by nature as the great highways of commerce

between the nations of Ultra Gangetic Asia. In that quarter, our for-

midable neighbours, the Burmese, have been accustomed to make their

inroad into Assam; there, in the event of hostilities, they are certain

to attempt it again ; and there, in case of its ever becoming necessary

to take vengeance on the Chinese, an armed force embarking on the

Brahmaputra could be speedily marched across the intervening country

to the banks of the greatest river of China, which would conduct them

through the very centre of the celestial empire to the ocean.

This beautiful tract of country, though thinly populated by strag-

gling hordes of slowly procreating barbarians, and allowed to lie

profitless in primeval jungle, or run to waste with luxuriance of vege-

tation, enjoys all the qualities requisite for rendering it one of the

finest in the world. Its climate is cold, healthy, and congenial to

European constitutions ; its numerous crystal streams abound in gold

dust, and masses of the solid metal: its mountains are pregnant with

precious stones and silver; its atmosphere is perfumed with tea

growing wild and luxuriantly ; and its soil is so well adapted to all

kinds of agricultural purposes, that it might be converted into one

continued garden of silk, and cotton, and coffee, and sugar, and tea,

over an extent of many thousand miles.

This valuable tract of country is inhabited by various races, several

of which have acknowledged our authority, some that of the Burmese,

and others that of China; but a considerable number have sworn

allegiance to no power ; and maintain their independence. Of these

tribes the most considerable are the Miris, Abors, Mishmis, Kang-

tis, Bor-Kangtis, Singphos, Muamarias, and Nagas.

Miris. ‘

The Miris occupy that stripe of alluvial land along the northern

bank of the Brahmaputra, from the large island Majuli (the extreme

boundary of the present Rajah of Assam), to the river Dihong the

northern branch of the Brahmaputra ; and are bounded on the north

by the hill country of the Abors. Tul of late years, this district was

deserted on account of the ravages of the Abors; but on our afford-

ing them protection, the original inhabitants have returned. The land

is still very thinly populated, and the only cultivation is along the

banks of the great river. Their head village is Motgaon. The

manners and habits of the Miris are wild and barbarous, their per-

sons filthy and squalid ; they use a language different from the Assa-

mese, and make use of bows and poisoned arrows as a defence against

their enemies. They are expert marksmen; and the poison used is so

1836. ] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 195

fatal, that even a scratch of their arrow is followed with certain death.

They eat all sorts of wild animals, not excepting those killed by their

OWnh poisonous arrows.

The Miris are an industrious race, and partial to living in the

skirts of the forests, clearing new ground, which they cultivate for a

year or two, and then move off to another place, when the soil is

exhausted. A great deal of opium is grown by the Miris, which

they barter for grain with the Assamese.

Abors and Mishmis.

These tribes inhabit an extensive range of mountainous country along

the southern exposure of the great Himalaya chain, from the 94th to

the 97th degrees of E. longitude, and border with Thibet and China.

It is difficult to form a conception of the extent of these tribes, but

they are not to be despised ; for during the insurrection of the Muama-

rias, no less than 17,000 Abors joined to drive that tribe out of

Assam. It is probable that at no ancient period these two tribes were

unconnected, but the Mishmis are now considered by the Abors as

dependent upon them, and treated as slaves. Besides the Mishmis

here mentioned as subservient to the Abors, there are several other

tribes of them; such as Muzi-Mishmis and Taen-Mishmis, inha-

biting the extreme branches of the Lohit or eastern channel of the

Brahmaputra, who are probably independent. These tribes possess

one of the lowest grades of civilization ; they occupy numerous vil-

lages along the precipitous shores of the two great northern branches

of the Brahmaputra, the Dihong or Sampo, and the Dibong. Their

houses are so constructed, that the perpendicular side of the rock

forms one wall: the floor is made of bambus, with one side support-

ed on the rock, and the other on beams driven into the ground. The

space underneath is inhabited by the cattle, and the interstices in the

floor afford the double advantage of showering down all the offal to

the herd below, and preventing the accumulation of filth and nastiness.

Hospitality—Though the snows of their mountain home have

narrowed their means of subsistence, and limited their intercourseto their

immediate neighbours, yet they area hospitable and even a social race ;

and a constant round of festivity is kept up from one end of the year

to the other. Each chieftain kills the fatted bullock in turn ; all his

associates are invited to partake of the good cheer : the host is in his

turn a guest at the next feast; and thus a reciprocity of entertain-

ment is insured. Nor are these hospitable rites allowed to be forgot-

ten ; the scull of every animal that has graced the board, is hung up

as a record in the hall of the entertainer ; he who has the best stocked

2c 2

196 Account of the Mountain Tribes [AprIL,

Golgotha, is looked upon as the man of the greatest wealth and libe-

rality ; and when he dies, the whole smoke-dried collection of many

years is piled upon his grave as a monument of his riches, and a

memorial of his worth.

Migration.—These people, accustomed to a temperature at and about

the freezing point, seem to dread an exposure to the heat of the low

countries during the summer, and make their descent to their markets

at Suddia only in the cold weather, and take their departure to their

snows as soon as the Simala tree puts forth its blossoms.

Trade.—They bring along with them a few bags of musk, and

musk-deer skins; some ivory; a few copper pots, which they obtain

from the same country; and a considerable quantity of a vegetable

poison called Bis-Bisd, used in poisoning arrows. These they exchange

for glass beads, of which they are very fond, and cattle, for the purpose

of eating. The musk is for the most part adulterated ; a portion of

the genuine musk being abstracted to make into artificial bags, and its

place filled up with dried blood.

Poison.—The poison is of a very superior quality, and is in great

request by all the neighbouring nations for destroying wild animals,

It is contained in a small fibrous root, which they tie up into little

bundles. It is prepared by pounding the root to powder, and mixing

it up with the juice of the Otenga tree, to give it tenacity, and make it

adhere to the arrow head. They keep the planta great secret, and

take the effectual precaution of boiling it before leaving their homes,

so as to destroy all possibility of its being propagated.

Road to Thibet.—The route to Thibet, adopted by pilgrims, leads

through the Abor country, along the course of the Dihong or Sampu,

and is accomplished in sixteen days from Suddia. The route, as

mentioned by Mr. Brucz, is as follows :

From Saddia to Kaj-jin, five days’ journey; thence to Lak-qui, one

day ; Gha-lum, one day ; Ma-ma-nu, one day; Dulld, one day ; Omono,

one day ; Hulli, one day; Sum-lay, one day; Han-nay, one day ; Kum-

day, one day; Ri-shah, one day; Bhd-lu, one day. Bhdlu is the frontier

town of Thibet. About four days’ journey beyond it stands the city of

Ro-shi-mdh, containing fine buildings, and a large civilized population,

and a government purely Chinese.

The Grand Lama himself, and all head officers throughout Thibet,

are appointed by the Emperor of China, and receive allowances from

the Chinese government. The chief of Suddia seems to have consi-

derable influence with the Thibetans, and the intermediate hill tribes.

Almost all pilgrims apply to him for a passport, and he is in the habit

.1836.] on the extreme N. K. Frontier of Bengal. 197

of sending an escort with them as far as Ma-ma-nu, whence they are

passed along from one tribe to another till they arrive in the country

of the Grand Lama. There is another route into Thibet vid Brahma-

kind, through the country of the Mishmis; but it is at all seasons of the

year covered with snow. There is but little trade now carried on

with Thibet, and that little is chiefly effected by pilgrims. The few

things imported are smoking pipes of Chinese manufacture, woollens,

and rock salt. In exchange for these they give musk, ivory, and

Bisd poison. Assamese captives at one time formed a considerable

trade; but since these latter came under the protection of the British,

that lucrative branch has been exterminated.

During the flourishing period of the Assam dynasty, we are informed*,

that the kings of Assam were in the habit of sending presents to

the Grand Lama, and that a caravan consisting of about 20 people

annually resorted from Lassa to the Assam frontier, and transacted

merchandise to a very considerable amount with the Assamese. The

Thibetans took up their quarters at a place called Chouna, two months

journey from Lassa: and the Assamese, at Geganshur, a few miles

distant from it. The trade of the former consisted of silver in bullion

to nearly a lakh of rupees, and a large quantity of rock salt. This they

exchanged with the Assamese for rice, silk, lac, and other produce

of Bengal; but this trade has for many years been discontinued.

Kangtis.

The Kangtis, the most civilized of all these mountain tribes, inhabit

that triangular tract of country bounded by the Lohit on the one side,

by the Dibong on the other, and by the mountainous country belong-

ing to the Mishmis on the third. They are descended from the Bor-

Kangtis, a powerful race situated on the sources of the Irawadi.

About 50 or 60 years ago, they emigrated from their native country,

and availing themselves of the civil war then raging throughout Assam,

they took forcible possession of the country they now enjoy, ejected

the reigning chieftain, the Suddia Cowa Gohaing; andthe Kangti

chief, usurping his name and jurisdiction, reduced his subjects to

dependence or slavery. The Kangtis, by a vigorous mode of govern-

ment, and holding out an asylum to refugees from other states, soon

rose to eminence. They are now a superior race to all their neigh-

bours; they are tall, fair, and handsome, considerably advanced in

civilization, and are endowed with no small share of military courage.

Their religion is Buddhism ; but Hinduism is gaining progress. They

are amongst the few tribes who have a written character, and can

read and write the Burmese language, and understand it when spoken.

* HAaMILTON’sS Gazetteer.

198 Account of the Mountain Tribes [AprIL,

Their own language, though written in a character a good deal re-

sembling the Burmese, is quite different, and closely resembles the

original Ahom. Every boy is taught to read and write it, by the

priests. Suddia is the capital of the Kangti country, and the chief-

tain is known by the name of the Suddia Cowa Gohaing, and claims

descent from the royal family of Assam.

Suddia is situated on the right bank of the Kunil or Kundil

nallah, and about six miles above its junction with the Lohit. It isa

place of some importance, and has a population of about 4000 men,

exclusive of women and children. Its trade is rapidly increasing ; all

the necessaries of life are procurable: its exports are gold and silver ;

amber, musk, and ivory ; Kampti daus, Chinese and Burmese trinkets ;

Bisa poison, and dye-stuffs, called Mishmi-tita and manjit. The

Mishmi-tita, manjit, and lime, triturated with water, and allowed to

digest in an earthen pot for a month, makes a beautiful permanent red

dye. The daus are of a high order, and are so much prized as to bring

12 Rs. a piece. They are manufactured by a rude wild race, called

Kunungs, (slaves to the Kangtis,) who are situated on the extreme

branches of the Irawadi, who can neither read nor write, and are

little removed above the brutes.

Suddia station—The country around Suddia is composed of the

richest alluvial soil, well adapted for cultivation ; but is generally flat

and liable to inundation. A large portion of it is waste, and over-

grown with jungle: it is closely surrounded by the snowy mountains,

which are only about thirty miles distant; and the water of the river

is so cold, that of itself it serves to cool wine for table.

Force.—Suddia is the most advanced post we possess on the N. E.

Frontier. Three companies of the Assam Light Infantry are sta-

tioned there, under the command of a European officer, invested with

political authority. Two gun-boats are also stationed there, also under

the command of a European: each boat has one 12-pr. mounted on

slides, and is well manned and equipped for service: one of the boats

is manned by Kangtis, who give much satisfaction. There is also a

small stockade erected, with a few guns mounted. Suddia has hitherto

preserved a healthy character. It is likely soon to become the head-

quarters of. the Assam Infantry. The Suddia Cowa Gohaing, though

he pays Government no tribute, acknowledges the Company’s supre-

macy, and is bound to furnish a contingent of 200 men. That con-

tingent is supplied by arms and ammunition at the expense of Govern-

ment; they are drilled by the Subadar of the Assam Light Infantry,

four months in the year, and the arms, when in want of repair, are

forwarded to head-quarters at Bishnath,

1836. } on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 199

- The Suddia Cowa Gohaing is believed to be a firm friend of Chan-

dra Kant’s, the ex-rajah of Assam; when formerly driven from the

kingdom, the Suddia Cowa had influence enough at the court of Ava

to obtain the assistance of the Burmese to restore him to his throne ;

and now that Chandra Kant is again deposed, he is thought to be

constantly intriguing to have him again placed on the throne.

Bor-Kangtis.

The Bor-Kangtis are a numerous and powerful race, situated amongst

the mountains whence the Irawadi takes.it origin. They are under

the government of Ava, and supply a contingency to the Burmese

army. Experienced Burmese officers are constantly traversing their

country, for the purpose of drilling them, and inspecting their arms and

ammunition. The capital of the Bor-Kangtis is Manchi, on a remote

branch of the Irawadi. This place was visited by Lieuts. Wiicox

and Bururon in 1827, by an overland route, cut across the mountains

from Suddia. The journey occupied about 12 days: they were kindly

received by the Bor-Kangti chief, who gave them every information

about the sources of the Irawadi, and convinced them that from the

smallness of the streams, it was impossible for any of them to afford a

channel for the waters of the Sampu. The main stream of the Ira

wadi is there fordable, and not more than 80-yards broad.

There is a silver mine in the Bor-Kangti country; but it has never

produced more than 8000 rupees a year. It might be turned to much

more advantage ; but the possessors are afraid of increasing its revenue,

lest by doing so, they should excite the avarice of their neighbours.

There are also mines of lead and iron in this country.

Miinglung Kangtis.

We have lately come into intimate contact with another tribe of

Kangtis called Munglung: these from dissension amongst themselves,

and from the oppression of the Burmese, have lately dispatched about

200 of their tribe to stipulate for settlements in the British dominions,

and report on the prospect of the country around Suddia. Should

their report prove favourable, about 5000 more have expressed their

desire to emigrate. :

Singphos.

By far the most powerful and the most formidable of these hill

tribes are the Singphos; they are also the most numerous, and are

scattered over the greatest extent of country. They are bounded on

the north by the Lohit river; on the east by the Langtan mountains,

which separate them from the Bor-Kangtis ; on the south by the

Patkoi range, which divides them from the Burmese Singphos, from

whom they are descended; and on the west, by a line drawn south

from Suddia, till it meets the last mentioned mountains,

200 Account of the Mountain Tribes [Aprit,

The Singphos are divided into 12 tribes, each having its own chief

or Gaum ; but every chieftain maintains his own separate independence,

and seldom unites with any other, unless it be to purish some aspiring

chief obnoxious to them all, or in making plundering excursions upon

neighbouring states. The Singphos have for several generations been

the terror of the wretched and degenerate Assamese, and were in the

constant habit of making irruptions into their country, sometimes as

far as their very capital itself; of plundering their temples, laying

waste their country, and carrying off the inhabitants into slavery.

Since the British troops have had possession of Assam, these inroads

have been prevented; but as might be expected, they are somewhat

impatient of that restraint, and have once or twice endeavoured to

resort to their old habits.

To give an idea of the extent to which the devastations were carried

on, the late Captain NrurviLix, received from the Singphos alone

upwards of 7000 Assamese captive slaves, and perhaps there are 100,000

Assamese and Manipuris still in slavery throughout the dominions

of Ava.

About five years ago, a body of them amounting to about 3000 men,

armed with spears, daus, and a few musquets and jinjals, under a

chief called Waxum Koonsig, made an advance against the station

of Suddia, with the confident intention of carying away in chains every

seapoy present, and of driving the British out of the country. This

was a plot of three years’ concocting ; large stores of grain were accu-

mulated in convenient depéts, and shackles for 10,000 prisoners were

all in readiness; but the whole force was shamefully repulsed by the

then political Agent, Capt. Neurviiue, at the head of a handful of men

of the Assam Infantry, and a few armed Kangtiand Muaméaria militia,

and driven in consternation into their lines.

The Lubona only of all the 12 chiefs took part in this irruption, and

he has taken an active hand in the late disturbances, headed by the

Duffa Gaum.

All the chiefs have claimed our protection, though no tribute is

exacted from them; with one or two exceptions, they have acted up

to their engagements. ;

The Busa Gaum or chief is a man of superior understanding, and

was entrusted by the late Agent to the Governor General, the lamented

Mr. Scorr, with a good deal of confidence, and had an allowance from

Government of 50 rs. a month, as an organ of communication with the

other chiefs, and a spy upon their actions. The late Capt. NEuFVILLE

was also confident in his integrity, and made proposals to him to desert

his own country, and live on lands to be granted him at Burhath and

1836.] on the extreme N. i. Frontier of Bengal. 201

Jaipur, and allow his native hills to become a wilderness, and form a

natural barrier against the incursions of the other tribes.

The population of the Busa Gaum is about 9 or 10,000 men, exclu-

sive of women and children. He furnishes a contingent of about 100

men, and is supplied with arms and ammunition.

The most influential of the unfriendly chiefs is the Duffa Gaum.

Only a few months ago he made a hostile incursion against our ally

the Busa Gaum, and massacred every man, woman, and child he could

get near; the Busa Gaum narrowly escaped with his life, and some of

his own family were cut to pieces. After two or three skirmishes, the

marauders were dislodged, and driven to their hills, by the force at

Saddia; but the Duffa, instead of repenting of his atrocious act, and

retiring to his home to await the consequences, commenced playing

the despot in another quarter, threatening every one with his vengeance

who acknowledged British protection, and even beheaded some who

refused to conform to his will. By the latest accounts, the state of affairs

in that district were very troublesome, and the whole of the Assam

Infantry disposable are already on the move for its protection.

A feud has for a long time existed between the Busa and the Duffa

Gaums, and the inroad lately made by the latter admits of some palli-

ation, as it avenged a similar one formerly made by the Busa Gaum.

Rude as is the state of society amongst the Singphos, they are not

without the distinction of caste; but are divided into Thengais, My-

yungs, Lubrungs, and Mirups.

They have no religion properly their own, but have patched up a

creed from amongst the superstitions of all their neighbours, and deco-

rated their rude temples with ruder idols of all religions.

The Singphos are not a branch of the Shan tribes: tradition traces

their origin to the confines of China or Thibet: the language is

entirely different from that of the Shans, and is unwritten.

Polygamy is patronised, and every man keeps as many wives as he

chooses, free women or slaves; and treats the offspring of both with-

out partiality. Infanticide in all its shapes they abhor.

It is the custom of the country to bury the dead. Those of the

poorer classes are interred soon after death; but the chiefs and prin-

cipal individuals are sometimes not buried for years. The reason

alleged for this consummation of the funeral rites, is to allow the

widely scattered relations of the deceased to have time to attend, who

would not fail to take deadly offence at their not being allowed an

opportunity of paying reverence to the ashes of the head of their family.

Not knowing the art of embalming, the body after death is removed

to a distance from any habitation, till decomposition is completed.

2D '

202 Account of the Mountain Tribes [Aprin,

After that it is deposited in a coffin, and conveyed to the house of the

deceased chief, where it lies in state, surrounded with all the insignia

the illustrious individual enjoyed when alive. When all the relatives

have assembled, or communicated their not being able tu attend, the

coffin is committed to the earth, and a mound of clay, surrounded with

a curious trellis-work of bambus, is raised to his memory. If the

person has died a violent death, a buffalo is sacrificed as a propitia-

tion to their deities, and the head is fixed to a cross, and placed near

the grave; but if he has died in the course of nature, no sacrifice is

considered necessary.

According to the law of inheritance, the patrimony is divided between

the eldest and the youngest son; while any children that may inter-

vene are left to push their own fortunes as they best can. The eldest

son succeeds to the title and the estate, while the younger, carrying

away all the personal and movable property, goes in quest of a set-

tlement for himself.

Tea.—The tea tree grows wild all over the Singpho country, as

also upon all the hills in that part of the country, and is in gene-

ral use by the natives as a wholesome beverage. The tea tree,

according to Mr. Bruce, was known to be indigenous to these climates

about ten years ago; and during the Burmese war, large quantities of

it were sent into Saddia by the Busa Gaum. How long the subject

might have lain dormant is doubtful, had not the affair been again

brought to the serious notice of Government, at a time the most favour-

able for doing so, by the scientific investigations of Capt. Jenkins

and Lieut. CHarLeTon of the Assam Infantry, to whom we must

acknowledge ourselves indebted for a revival of its existence, and for

the boon it must necessarily confer upon our country*.

Mr. Bruce has lately been on a tour to the Singphos, and mixed

in social intercourse with them. He saw many thousands of the trees

growing in their native soils, and brought away some plants and

specimens of the leaves and seeds. ‘The trees were of a very consi-

derable size, so as to merit a higher rate of classification than a plant

or ashrub: he measured one of the largest, and found it 29 cubits

long, and about four spans in circumference at the base.

Mr. Bruce mentions the following as the native process of making

tea, though he does not seem to have witnessed it. First, the leaves

are collected from the tree, and put into large boilers containing

water. As soon as the water boils, the decoction is drawn off, and

* This paper was written before the appointment of the scientific deputation

to the tea districts, whose report may be now shortly expected.—Eb.

1836.] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 203

thrown away, and the leaves, being taken out of the boiler, are put

into a pit dug into the ground, and lined with some sort of leaves, to

prevent the tea coming in contact with the earth. When the pit is

filled with tea leaves, it is then spread well over with a thick layer of

the other leaves, and after all, covered over with earth, so as to exclude

all air. In this state it is allowed to remain for two or three months,

when the pit is opened, and the tea sold on the spot to traders, who

pack it closely up in the joints of bambus, earthen’ pots, &c. and

transport it to other parts of the couutry on mules for sale. He also

mentions, that many thousand maunds of tea are manufactured at a

place called Polong, and exported to China. Where Polong is situated,

I have not been able to determine.

In addition to the tea tree, the Singpho country has lately been

discovered to abound in many valuable gums, well adapted for var-

nishes.

Burmese Singphos.—The Singphos of Assam are separated from the

Singphos subservient to the Burmese, by the Patkoi chain of moun-

tains ; and though these two races are entirely unconnected with one

another, and independent, yet a constant friendly intercourse is main-

tained between them. The Burmese Singphos occupy a very exten-

sive tract of country on both sides of the Irawadi, and from the

Patkoi mountains eastward to the borders of China.

Trade with China.—As the Chinese carry on a very considerable

trade with these Singphos, and through the medium of their country

with Assam, I shall endeavour to mark out particularly the line

of communication between the two countries. The Chinese pro-

vince of Yunan being separated from a navigable channel of the

Irawadi, only by a mountain chain, inhabited by Shans, tributary to

Burmah, the Chinese merchants, by a short land journey across

these mountains, convey their merchandise on mules, to a place called

Catmow, on the banks of that river. There the Irawadi is a large

stream. The channel is unincumbered with rocks, trees, or sandbanks ;

the shores are composed of a stiff hard clay, not liable to tumble down,

and present every facility for navigation. The exact position of

Catmow seems undefined. The merchants, having loaded their goods

on boats, easily procurable, commit themselves to the gentle current,

dropping down with the tide due south, day and night, and on

the third or fourth day arrive at the mouth of theriver called Nam-yang.

After ascending this river four or five days in a north-west direction,

they come to a town called Mung-kung, or Mugaum, the chief

depdt of Chinese trade situated at the junction of two smaller rivers,

the one called Nam-kung, or the Mugaum river, the other, Nam-yang,

2p 2

204 Account of the Mountain Tribes (Apri,

retaining the name of the united stream. The Mugaum river is navi-

gable for 40 or 50 miles above the town, and for small canoes, a good

deal farther, and extends in a northern direction. The Chinese wares

are transported up this river as far as practicable, and afterwards con-

veyed overland through Hukung and Busato Assam. The journey

from Mung-kung to Assam occupies from 15 to 20 days.

Route into China.—There are two other routes to China besides the

one mentioned, the one by a place called Senwa, and the other by

May-nay, both of which run direct into Burmah, but little more is

known about them than their name. The intercourse between China

and Assam by any of these roads is extremely tedious, and can only

be followed by a trading people, who traffic as they move along, with-

out regard to time or distance. A knowledge of the extreme naviga-

ble eastern branches of the Brahmaputra has pointed out a much

shorter and more convenient pass, and this was travelled by Lieuts.

Witcox and Burtton on their visit to the Bor-Kangtis. Following

up the river Noa Dihing, which flows into the left bank of the Lohit, a

few miles above Suddia, they were able to proceed by water convey-

ance to within nine days’ journey of Mung-lang, on the banks of the

Irawadi, and without experiencing any serious difficulty or mcon-

venience farther than the jungly state of the country.

Importance of a Road.—A road passable even for mules or oxen

between the navigable branches of the Noa Dihing and the Irawadi

could not fail to be of great national benefit, and would open a channel

for the direct importation of all the valuable productions of Central

Asia. It would also tend to the complete civilization of the savage

mountaineers, who inhabit these regions, and enable a force to pene-

trate into the centre of the country, whither they can at present

retreat with comparative impunity. It is doubtful how far those tribes

would contribute to the formation of roads, or the furtherance of any

attempt on our part, to extend our intercourse into the interior ; they

have hitherto been jealous of any encroachment, and not many

years ago, gave proofs of the spirit by murdering the individuals who

conducted Lieut. BennetT to the Patkoi boundary.

But the time, it is to be hoped, has already arrived when these fertile

tracts will be taken under our especial protection ; when the untutored .

barbarian must submit to civilization and improvement, and his wilds

and his wastes to the ploughshare and the hoe of British agriculture.

The most important articles of trade exported by the Chinese from the

Singpho country are gold dust, precious stones of various colours, and

ivory.

Gold Dust.—The gold dust is procurable from most of the streams

1836.] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 203

of the Brahmaputra; but the gathering it is but a poor trade, and is

now but little followed. The place most celebrated for its precious

stones is Mung-kung or Mogaum.

Precious Stones.—On a range of hills near it, a great number of deep

mines are dug, and the working of them affords occupation for many

thousand inhabitants. When a stene of moderate weight is found, it

is hoisted to the mouth of the shaft by a windlass erected for the pur-

pose. But they frequently meet with large masses, which they have

not the power of moving: these they contrive to break to pieces.

Mining.—The workmen begin by kindling a strong fire all over and

around the precious stones, till it is well heated; they then mark off

with some powerful liquid, the piece they wish to break off, a large

stone is suspended from the top of the shaft perpendicularly over the

piece to be broken off, and when all is ready, the stone is cut away,

and falling with great impetus upon the mass below, breaks off

the fragment exactly according to the line drawn with the liquid. It

is difficult to account for this mysterious liquid being able to prevent

the whole mass from being splintered, and how it should preserve such

a line of separation ; yet such is the native belief, and it is not impro-

bable that its effect is merely imaginary, or that is practised from some

superstition.

These stones are afterwards cut into convenient pieces by means of

a bambu bow with a string of twisted wire, the string being applied

to the stone and used as a saw, while its action is assisted by some sort

of pulverized mineral*. As might be expected, much bloodshed is

frequently the consequence of finding these hidden treasures. When

any doubt arises about the party who first discovered one, or about the

right of possession, bloody battles ensue with short swords in hand be-

tween whole villages. Large emeralds are allowed to lie around the

pits unclaimed by any one: no one venturing to carry them away, lest

every one should fall upon them in vengeance. These precious stones

are afterwards carried on mules to China, and are sold at very high

prices, some of them bringing 7 or 800 seers weight of silver. The

Burmese governor levies a tax of two seers on every 10 that are

exported. These mules are driven along in gangs of 20 to 30; the

drivers go armed with swords and matchlocks, and guide their beasts

of burden by word of mouth. The route they pursue to China is via

Catmow or the Irawadi, and the overland journey from Mung-king

to Catmow occupies about nine days.

Amber.—Besides the mines of precious stones, there are several

amber mines in the province of Huking, which are wrought to con-

* Doubtless corundum : this is the common mode of cutting hard stones.—Ep.

206 Account of the Mountain Tribes APRIL,

siderable advantage. The amber is cut into cylinders about } inch in

diameter, and two inches long, and is worn as an ornament stuck

through a hole in the lobe of the ear, both by Assamese and Burmese.

Ivory.—A large quantity of ivory is exported by the China mer-

chants. It is almost all obtained by the Singphos, from shooting the

wild elephants with poisoned arrows fired from a loaded musket.

When once they get upon the tract of a herd, they continue the pursuit

for days together, taking up favourable positions upon trees, or lying

in wait in the long grass, till they can take a fatalaim. Vast numbers

of these noble animals are destroyed in this manner, both by the Sing-

phos and Kangtis ; they are as susceptible to the fatal effects of poison

as the smaller animals, and fall down dead immediately after being

slightly wounded. Their teeth are struck out by the hunters, and the

carcasses are left to be devoured by the beasts of prey.

Chinese returns.—In return for these valuable commodities, the

Chinese bring into the Singpho country, nankins, silks, lacquered and

China ware, lead, copper, and particularly silver.

A great portion of the silver that comesinto Assam through the

Singphos is stamped with Chinese characters. It can scarcely be

called a coin, but a piece of bullion; and appears to have been made

by scooping out a small round hole in a piece of clay, then filling it

with molten silver, and before it becomes cold, impressing it with the

Chinese stamp. Not two of these lumps of silver are of the same

value or size: their intrinsic worth is ascertained by their weight, and

is found to vary from two to 10 rupees.

Bullion.—Though the metal is very pure, it is called kacha rupa, and

one sicca weight of it is fixed as equal to only half a sicca of the pro-

perly coined metal. No inconvenience arises in purchasing articles

of small value; the hill tribes take out their dau, and chop it into pieces

even to the portion of a pice. This kacha rupa is eagerly purchased by

the chiefs in Upper Asam, who, after adulterating it largely, cast it

into their own coin, and thus realize an enormous profit. These chiefs

have most of them mints of their own, and are in the habit of coining

rupees for any one who will give them the raw material, retaining only

10 per cent. for their trouble.

Muamirias or Mattuks.

The country of this tribe is bounded on the N. by the Brahmaputra,

on the 8S. by the Buri Dihing; on the E. by a line drawn S. from the

mouth of the Kunili nallah to the Buri Dihing, and on the W. by a

line drawn from the mouth of the river Dibunu to the Buri Dihing.

About 1793, these people rose in arms against the reigning Rajah

GovuriNATH S1nu, and after many bloody engagements with the royal

1836. ] on the extreme N. E. Frontier of Bengal. 207

troops, at last succeeded in driving him from his throne and kingdom,

and in appointing a successor of their own choice. During the period

of their ascendancy, they committed the most dreadful ravages upon

the country, and the original inhabitants: great portions of it were

deserted, and even till this day, it has never regained any thing near

its former prosperity. But these lawless plunderers were not allowed

long to enjoy the fruits of their conquests ; they were speedily driven

from the capital by 1000 sipahis, under Captain Wetsu, and retreated

to the districts which they now inherit. The head of this still power-

ful clan is known by the name of the Marrux Rajah, or more com-

monly, by that of the Bara senapati (great general). During the Burmese

war, he maintained his independence ; but on our taking Rangpur, he

claimed our protection, and has since manifested his sincerity, by a

zealous endeavour to render every assistance in his power in the

advancement of our plans.

The greater part of the country allotted them is a desert waste, and

only the banks of the river Diburi are inhabited. The population

amounts to about 60,000 men, inclusive of women and children. The

capital is Rangagora. The state is allowed about 500 musquets and

ammunition according to treaty, and supplies a large contingent. They

profess the Hindu religion; but act so little’in accordance with its

tenets, that enlightened Brahmins scarcely acknowledge them.

The Bara senapati, with all his affability and apparent deference

to our authority, is by some considered not entitled to perfect and

unlimited confidence. Situated between two powerful states, the

British and the Burmah, his policy seem to be to maintain good terms

with both; and in the event of another Burmese invasion, it is to be

feared, he would preserve neutrality, till he saw how the scale was likely

to turn, and then join the stronger party.

Nagas.

The next border tribes met with in proceeding westward are the

Nagas. To assign limit to their country seems almost impossible, and

even to number their numerous tribes, no less so; they are scattered

all over the mountainous ridge that divides Assam from Manipur, to

which state some of them are tributary, some to Assam, and some

even to the Burmese. There is no one individual tribe of any formi-

dable consequence amongst them, and there is but little inclination

to coalesce, they being constantly embroiled in petty feuds. Their

houses are built on the most inaccessible points of the mountain, and

planned for every-day defence. They are represented by the inhabi-

tants of the plains as robbers and murderers, .and are so much the

dread of all, that little of their economy is known.

208 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Apriu,

Brine Spring.—One of the most remarkable circumstances relating

to their country is the number of brine or salt springs in many parts

of it.

At Burhath, on the river Disung, there are about 20 of these brine

springs, from most of which the Nagas are in the habit of making salt.

These wells are dug to a considerable depth, and the brine varies in

intensity, probably according to the access of fresh water from the

surface ; and being situated in a valley, and having no protection from

the rain, they are generally filledin the wet season. The consequence

is, that the manufacture is carried on only in the cold weather.

Manufacture of Salt.—Some of the best of these wells give 10 sicca

weight of dry salt to the seer of water, and others, only three or four.

The process of evaporation is carried on by filling the joints of large

bambus with brine and suspending them in an earthen trough, filled

with water, which answer for the purpose of a boiler, and in this rude

way, the brine in the bambus is evaporated, till salt is formed. These

mud troughs are every season broken down, and being triturated with

water, afford a strong brine from which other salt is formed.

So tedious and unskilful is the manufacture, that the salt made

from these wells cannot be made at less price than the same quantity

of salt transported from Bengal.

II.—On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of St. Peter’s

Church in Fort William, illustrated by a Section, (Plate V.)

Works of engineering skill come peculiarly within the limits point-

ed out by the motto on our title page, as fitted for the Researches of a

Scientific Society or Journal: ‘The performances of man,” of such

a class in this country, and under British rule, are, it is true, but rare

and trifling compared with the noble efforts of art, which grow up

from day to day under the eye of an observer in Europe. There,

letting alone tunnels and railways of gigantic enterprize, we hear

of half an elliptic arch sprung by the celebrated Brunet from a buttress

and carried to a semi-span of seventy feet, without centering, by the

mere adhesion of the cement !—of an iron suspension bridge at Fribourg

in Switzerland thrown over a ravine of 170 feet deep, in a single bold

span of more than 900 feet from rock to rock, far surpassing the Menai

bridge, or even the designed bridge from St. Vincent’s rocks at Clifton,

which latter we regret to hear has been abandoned, in consequence of

the riots in Bristol, and the destruction of that wealth which would

have been so well bestowed upon this noble work.

1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort Wiliam. 209

We have but little indeed to bring forward in rivalry of such mag-

nificent undertakings; howbeit, there have been schemes of vast

magnitude projected, and some under a Viceroy suchas Lord W. Brn-

TINCK, partial to engineering pursuits, might ere this have been put in

execution. The draining of the Salt-water lake, (were it conceded to be a

salutary measure) would be feasibleenough. The line of wharfs or jetties

on the Strand is actually planned and estimated for. The Rajmahl line

of survey is a splendid specimen of mapping; and although we have

no anticipation of seeing it undertaken, the results of the inquiry will,

we hope, be given to the public in a volume, with all its sections, by

its projector our Indian Belidor. Of architectural achievements we have

less to boast. Twenty years since, money was bequeathed by a

rich native for the erection of a College at Hugli, and yet nothing

has been done unto this day. Are architects wanting, or are the

curators anxious to appropriate the money for other purposes? We

have seen more than one tasteful design, but how is an artist ever to

satisfy the views of a numerous committee, not more than one or two

of whom perchance have any notion of architectural propriety? In

feeble imitation of the Parliamentary Church Committee at home, we

have a private fund created by rupee contributions for the erection of

places of worship in the interior; but it is far too poor to aim at orna-

ment in its humble structures. The Martiniere is the only public in-

stitution, erected within the last year or two, that has rea] pretensions

to correct taste in its exterior elevation. It is strangely disfigured

by a high wall round the ground, and the arrangements of the interior

have been marred by an imperfect conception at starting, of what

would be required in it.

An observation forces itself upon us when viewing the noble portico

of this building, of the Scotch Church, or of the mint, withtheir handsome

flights ofstonesteps ;—that the purity of Greciantemple architecture can-

not or ought not to be preserved under the altered circumstances of the

present age. Menno longer resort on foot in daily processions to the

sacred vestibules of their gods. They drive in comfortable carriages,

and would fain dismount under shelter from the sun and the rain. Is

it not a fault of grievous magnitude then, that neither of these three

buildings possesses a carriage access ? and that at the Mint, for instance,

bullion cannot get within 100 feet of the hall of weighment, except on

coolies’ heads. The Government house is in this respect better provid-

ed; but here the basement entrance has been made an eyesore, anda

mere secondary object, instead of the primary one, being in constant use.

‘The portico of the Martiniere was intended for carriages, but this object

was sacrificed to the gaining of space for a play-ground, and the road

210 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Aprit,

is now brought up at right angles with the foot of the steps, which

has an unseemly and awkward effect.

The native architect in the palaces of the east provides not for car-

riages, but how suitable is the lofty arched gate with its music galleries

for the train of towered elephants and horsemen issuing from the

interior court. Under the sloping chhaja or cornice of the native

dwelling, or baithak-khineh, the architect inserts iron rings for the strip-

ed pavilions it is intended to bear. They look natural to it, as they are

necessary to the climate ; whereas how may not the Ionic facade of the

Martiniere be disfigured hereafter, perhaps, by venetians run up between

the columns of its fine portico, as in the left wing of the Government

house, or by matted hoods gracing the southern windows of each

wing ?

Too much stress cannot be laid on the proper adaptation of style to

the climate. The architect’s duty is but half performed, if he provide

not for every contingency to which his building may be subject, whether

in respect to durability or to convenience; and even when the former is

attended to, the latter is too frequently neglected.

A striking instance of the bad effects of inattention to apparently

trivial objects of this nature is afforded in the subject of the present

notice. Major Hurcuinson designed and executed a gothic vaulted

church roof in brick, the first attempted in India. He neglected to

make provision for the hanging of punkahs, and upon a representation

of their being wanted, the executive department, with little calculation

of the disturbance of equilibrium or strength of materials, ordered holes

to be cut at the head of the clustered columns, to admit beams to

swing them. Had the architect at first, as he has now done, let in iron

rods to sustain the punkah ropes, his work would have been uninjured,

and Government have been saved double, nay triple, expenditure ; and

his fame have been preserved from unmerited censure. Few people in

such cases calmly inquire into particulars; they ask, who raised the

fabric, and upon his head lay the onus of the failure.

Weare glad, with reference to this last fact, at having obtained per-

mission to make public the report of the real circumstances given in

to the Military Board in June, 1832, with its explanatory section.

It is necessary to recapitulate to such of our readers as are unac-

quainted with the facts, that about six years ago the vaulted roof of St.

Peter’s was condemned as unsafe, and was ordered to be demolished.

The keystone or vertex of the central and side vaults had opened from

end to end, and other dangerous symptoms were observed. Committees

were held, and a variety of opinion as to the cause elicited, but the

necessity of demolition was general, and Major Hutcuinson was

1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 211

intrusted with a task seemingly as difficult as the original construc-

tion, and fraught with more danger to the workmen employed.

The true nature of the case will strike every one who looks attentively

at the accompanying section, namely that the cutting of the holes for

the punkahs was the origin of the whole mischief. Had the cracks in

the roof existed at the time, it can hardly be imagined that orders could

have been issued to cut away the only props of the superstructure.

The effect of such an improvident order was however fully represented

at the time by Lieut. Mattock, Major H. being then in England.

It is probable that the chief engineer relied upon his experience of

the firm tenacity of the materials: that he had good reason to do so in

many respects is proved by the fact recorded in the report, that the

semi vault stood firmly when the keystone was knocked out, and was

with difficulty broken away piecemeal.

Hence it appears, that after all, the roof might have stood with per-

fect safety had the punkah holes been refilled with care, and the side-

vault been braced together with light iron rods, as in the well known

Musée des Arts et Metiers at Paris. The continuity of the main arch

from the crown of the upper vault, through the flying buttresses to

the ground, does not appear to have been broken; and if so, the

opening or crack was of little consequence. Yet in face of all the

above facts, the restoration of the vault was interdicted, and in lieu of

a solid “ vaulted roof embracing the highest branches of constructive

science, after the manner and principles pursued by freemasons in the

beautiful gothic edifices of Europe,” it was resolved to descend to an

imitation in wood-work with a flat roof above.

Though of minor importance and beauty, the wooden roof is well

spoken of in the Report of the Committee of Survey: ‘“ The groined

roof of the nave is, we believe, the first work of the kind ever attempted

in this country, and involving as it does the practical application of

some of the most difficult principles of constructive carpentry, the suc-

cessful completion of such a work under all the difficulties attendant

on the employment of native carpenters, who had to be instructed

in every stage of the work, is highly creditable to the skill and science

of the executive officer, Major Hurcuinson.”

Before closing these preliminary remarks, we would fain notice the

painted glass windows of the west and east ends of the nave. They

are decidedly lions in our town, admirable specimens of rich transpa-

rent colouring, not frittered in small fragments, but in the new style, of

colours burnt in on large panes of 24 by 16 inches.

The design of St. Perzr receiving the keys is from RapHanu’s Car-

toon; Moszs and Aaron are on either side, and the four Evangelists

2E 2

212 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of [Aprit,

fill the compartments below. The Faith, Hope, and Charity of the

west windows are taken from the designs of Sir JosHua Reynoxps in

New Church, Oxford.

From the great size of the panes of thin glass the difficulty of

repairing any of them, if broken, will easily be understood. Yet by

an accident, two panes were broken in putting up. The head and

neck of Hope was smashed to atoms by the falling of a bambu! Al-

though it is hard to excuse the occurrence of any accident where pre-

cautions should have rendered it impossible, we cannot but praise the

ingenuity with which it was repaired, so that the damage is not per-

ceptible. The fragments were united together with a transparent var-

nish on another pane of colourless glass. The only question is as to

the durability of the cement; we should fear it would grow brown

by age and exposure.

Report on the Demolition of the Vaulted Roofs of St. Peter’s Church.

«« A continuous and perfect equilibrium of the several parts of a build-

ing, and the concentration of all the forces, whether vertical or lateral,

on a few principal supports, which for the sake of lightness, elegance

and economy, are calculated to sustain no more than their allotted

pressure, being fundamental principles in Gothic architecture; the

demolition of such a structure (more especially if the equlibrium has

been destroyed by the weakening of those supports) must at any time,

even with the aid of powerful means, be considered an undertaking of

much difficulty and danger; but in this country, with the assistance of

native workmen alone, it becomes a duty demanding the utmost vigi-

lance and attention ; consequently in the removal of the vaulted roofs

of St. Peter’s Church, it became of primary importance to ascertain,

with precision, the extent and character of the existing derangement of

equilibrium, as a correct basis for calculation and design, in the opera-

tions to be pursued. With this view, a particular and most minute

inspection of all the several parts of the edifice was made, of which

the following was the result :

Foundations—With regard to the foundations, it was ascertained,

that the sinking, which had taken place from the nature of the alluvial

soil, was exceedingly small* ; any tendency there might have been to

sinking in the main pillars having been counteracted by the heavy

reversed arches extending under the basement from pillar to pillar.

* The sinking of the pillars most injured by the punkah beams not exceeding

gth of an inch, which was as little as could be expected from a general settlement

in a brick building, and by no means capable of affecting the equilibrium.

1836. ] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 213

Vaulted roofs of side arches and pillars.—The vaulted roofs of the side

aisles were found in a most dilapidated state, as likewise the main

pillars at the points d’appui of the springing of the ribs, upon which

rested the load of the side vaults. Upon the removal of the punkah

beams (r*) shewn in the accompanying section, (which had never been

removed by any Committee) it was at once evident that the principles

upon which the equilibrium and consequent stability of the side vaults

and pillars depended, (and according to which they had originally been

constructed,) were entirely destroyed ; viz. 1st, the thickness of butment

inwards, originally given to the main pillars, had been reduced in the

direct line of thrust from 4 to 2 feet, by the perforation of large holes,

for the insertion of beams upon which to suspend punkahs ; 2nd, the

adhesive continuity of the cemented materials (upon which the stability

of pillars composed of brick and mortar so entirely depend) had been

completely disturbed in the vicinity of the holes, from the blows of the

iron instruments by which they had been made; 5rd, the springing of

the main ribs, upon which the side vaults rested, had been wholly cut

away on either side as exhibited at (ss), by which the vaults, deprived of

their supporting points, sunk down both in haunch and vertex from their

original position, thereby greatly increasing the force with which they

pressed against the main pillars; 4th, the mainpillars being so greatly

weakened by the perforation of the holes, and the disturbance of the

cemented material, yielded inwardly} to the extent of 44 inches from

the perpendicular, and became cracked entirely across; the parts

marked (¢¢) splitting off from some of them. Thus all equilibrium was

inevitably destroyed.

Vault of the nave, flying buttresses, cleristory walls, &c.—The above facts

being established, the examination was carefully extended to the vault

of the nave, the flying buttresses, the external and cleristory walls

and towers: but with the exception of some cracks in the flying

Ton. Cwt.

Reveishingdm exchiaisles:) s220 sabe ol. )ftee SORE SS LS Og

IUBNGROMN UVC s BicYolie wilsse. = oti oibuci sist cntis, 5, 8Meson exehlan dies, 1a vos tbe gtowevenial shal SMelcuosdtces Sa oat 10

independently of the weight of the punkahs.

+ The exact estimation of their increased force is a question of much diffi-

culty, from its being connected with circumstances not within the reach of

calculation, viz. the amount of injury accruing to the arch and pillar by the

penetration of the rain into the spandrils and through the arch ; also the amount

of pressure from the sinking of the abutment of the cleristory walls, which rest-

ed in part on the arch: but that it must have been very great will be evident to

every one acquainted with the rules and principles of construction.

t A slight deflexion of the pillars inwardly had been observed before the

punkah beams were inserted. This deflexion, Sir CurtstopHer WREN states, is to

be observed in all the Gothic Cathedrals in Europe, from which it would appear

to be a circumstance incidental to this style of Architecture ; but that it is not

productive of any important derangement of equilibrium, is fully proved by the

great durability of the Gothic structures in Europe.

214 On the Method employed to remove the Vaulted Roof of ([Apri,

buttresses, owing to the sinking of the side vaults, the whole was

found in such good condition, as to remove any apprehension as to the

firmness and stability of the main vault, &c. which being well support-

ed by the flying buttresses, and those of the outer walls, no external

shores were judged necessary; and as in its construction it was

wholly independent of the side vaults, it was concluded, that notwith-

standing the shocks it might be expected to receive from their demo-

lition, yet that they might, when properly secured, be proceeded with

in perfect safety, without any fear of danger arising thereby to the

main vault. Accordingly, the only point which demanded immediate

attention was the counteraction of the imminent danger to be appre-

hended, from the further sinking and spreading of the side vaults, by

which, the main pillars in their shattered condition were liable to be

forcedinwardly, and thereby to entail the consequentand sudden downfal

of the entire building. As this danger could only be prevented by

the construction of such massive shores on the nave side, which should

be able to resist every power that could possibly be exerted by the

spreading of the side vaults, the following plan of shoring, preparatory

to the removal of the side vaults, was adopted, and pursued with success.

Mode of shoring.—A solid bed of masonry (a) was laid for the firm

support of the foundation beam (6), upon the extremities of which were

fixed in mortises the uprights (cc) ; these were hollowed out to fit closely

to the main pillars, their base or lower ends being enlarged and

strengthened by the additional blocks (gg) to which they were firmly

joggled, and bolted, in the manner shewn.

The straining beam (d) being then fixed at one end in the upright

(on a line with the shattered part of the pillars and strain of the side

aisles) by a semicircular tenon working in a similar mortice, the other

end cut to a tenon with a slight angle, was by means of three jack

screws (as shewn in the distance, forced up a smooth inclined mortise

well greased, cut in the opposite upright, and thus brought into a

horizontal position. The shores or struts (ee), let in obliquely upon

the foundation beam (0d), were then fixed in the mortises cut in the

uprights, and straining beam (d), and firmly wedged up into their places

and secured by the footsil (f); thus, the thrust of one aisle was brought

into play against the thrust of the other, and further spreading of the

side vaults effectually prevented.

Centres for supporting the roofs of the side aisles—The above work

having with great care and labour been accomplished, four strong cen-

tres or framings were next constructed, as shewn in jig. 2; which

whea put together, were, by means of wedges underneath, brought

firmly up to the masonry of the vault; and thus securely supported, the

1836.] St. Peter’s Church in Fort William. 215

work people were enabled by means of crow-bars and pick-axes to

commence the demolition of the side roofs without any apprehension

of danger. These frames being made movable, the expence of centre-

ing up the entire side vaults was avoided. The vaulted roofs of the

aisles were thus safely removed, without the slightest injury arising

to the centre roof of the nave, thereby confirming the correctness of

the opinion formerly advanced that no danger would arise to it. <Ac-

cordingly measures were now taken for the removal of the main vault,

together with the flying buttresses and cleristory walls. The erec-

tion of any external shores was still considered wholly unnecessary,

but from the great height of the nave (46 feet), it became indis-

pensable to secure the work people from all probability of danger,

during the progress of demolition, by any portion of the vault falling

inwardly, when the vertex or keying should be cut away; but as the

construction of a frame-work of sufficient strength underneath the

vault could not have been executed without incurring considerable

expence, the following plan was devised and put into execution.

Mode of removing the great vault of the nave.-—The upper pinnacles

and battlements of the north and south cleristory walls were removed,

and a planking laid upon the top of the walls, which admitted of a plat-

form (h), fig. 3, placed across the roof being easily slid along its whole

length. This platform, in order to give perfect security to the work

people, in the event of any part underneath giving way, was suspend-

ed by ropes from the four towers, as shewn in the section ; and upon

this the work people were enabled to commence the demolition of the

roof with perfect confidence ; but so firm was the masonry found to be,

that they soon got off on to the roof itself, although entirely unsup-

ported from below, and the continuity of the arch was destroyed by

cutting from the vertex downwards, thus giving the most unequivocal

proof of its exceeding firmness and stability. In this manner the

entire roof was destroyed ; after which the flying buttresses being cut

at their two extremities, were allowed to fall inwardly ; and finally

the cleristory walls were brought down to a level with the shattered

parts of the columns. Having thus briefly shewn the state in which

the foundations, roofs, and pillars were found, after a most careful

examination, and the plan pursued in the removal of the roofs, abund-

ant evidence has been furnished of the ultimate cause which destroyed

the safety of the building, and it can only be a matter of surprise, that

an edifice, constructed of brick upon the principles of Gothic architec-

ture, should (after the main supports of the side aisles had been cut

away, and the pillars reduced to Aalf their original strength), have so

long resisted the fatal injury committed; the punkah beams having

been put up in 1827.” G. Hutcuinson, Major, Engineers.

[Aprin,

Statistical Abstract of

216

69.9 9L

1OFOT {9ZL0B1

SCZ 88oL

2ES E91

C6L GL6L

Lov FOS

eI LEGS

Oft 8813

8% QESh

86 SES

PS6I S6LOL

OL Soe6

Lstt —_ |¢sogt

CtL PCOLT

ZkS 966S1

68 [8S

tL 1 BES

grgt = | Lose@

ae =

Sree | ae

Come] p

ve oe || ee

at AA Al fe 8

esc) %

52: | 8.

be e| a

eg ie)

3 ENCs er

sos| =

Ee Bo

*satod or ‘spoor 9 ‘so10e gt ‘YSnozd yous 0} UOTWANTND : $0.Z ysnord yous 0} SPIO] [NG

$I 0} G1 Se ‘sayeway 0} SoyemMI=] 03 ZI SB ‘suvpourmeyn yA, 03 SOopuTF{=19.¢ 9snoY Youve 07 suostod—=|6.09 st oSvT[IA ted sasnoy jo Joqunu o3viare sy. —"JoRIysqy

6.38€

LE.0| &.T *uoryeindog

6S | $86I | S6Eszs | LE8ZT CE8GS G1690% | SFET8Z

0S | O&t 95906 9gcEe GS6E TLoLe L¥6SP

G #¢ 616F1 lsh 109 GI8¢ 61408

Gl Ost [#Z8S YI8t 660% BL9EG SP90E

St as 1Z09 GSI 6LG 10€% 6368

Lt ge 19801 $ZE 189 FLOP GZ8S

GZ | OIT c0L9 $L 66 826% 109¢

OF cs F8SEL 86I 80¢ ZS 9964

6€ | 39 OFSST FIL QOIST 9Lcs bEgl

OIl | #61 GESTS 656 9SSt FELIT QGLOLI

col | SIZ | OFOSE | OLEr L0S@ OSES LL6LI

9S LES 9ZE6S 6ESI LLOZ $866 9ELEE

SI O1Z | 9F26% €9L 9E LI 6LETT S9LST

09 | $2 8ZZ0F 0&6 OZIT ZFESOL 9E9TZ

L 9¢ €g8ss Z9 ch ZEOS 01S

L 69 1966 SSI GEG ssse E34

#6 Lt | S2L6 GZEs LOSP 1looZe 6SE6S

oe) Se o = = 2 5

Sel! fe By B — 5 =

is o oy a B © B

° La Oo G oO £

o s a 2

= =

lo)

re “‘suRpOWWeYN IA *SOOpulFy

“cory (ndog

“TVOLL*ILViS

6Z-S 8P.9

“eyony “eyyNng

*sasnopy

FPILFG |ZE8S8 , Z8G01

9ZZ9I l0zSZ 9068

Z0EZ 1Z0Es 0

FSIG |6t06 SOL

ZOLL |t9CT i

4U1B josst LES

Z6 261 0

0866 |6S6z 1G

8828 legge SS

ZLEL ILbZd SZ

s9SL jorsZ ese

LOFIL jogort | L4g

688h |sgsp I

OIS4 {66FZ [[

S9E&L |90eT G

GPOl |PPor I

GELFL |Zsstt | LISm

fae!

eee lem

Sle Be oe

fan] > §

[o)

i<j

99 SS

*sosno Fy

yore 0} surarRy

-tadde seyoorvy,

pue

jo ‘saprur orenbs

LSST 07 duryunoure Yorystp jo vai

jergsiadns [e}07 uo aim oarnbs

yova 03 adpioae ue soald 9Aoge out

ogee teas Ride th “*Taasyny toossnpy] 6

aN eT DOTS) Ve. «te ane

sere npaeping peqepies| §

cores “TRL vsuos

: TL sap Gaga ee) tresses (Bugoay! L

Tep yuos

Bo CROC eo)

seeee fpNnsLIdyS

. es 8ecee ‘1eyng

ee ee ese ce

‘reyng

eee e eee ee ‘20804 aie ES COS ON,

voeees Congvyn | so esess SongeynyAL

*s'* Vaaqf YOON: ****** ‘aay fe Yoon

eee eS EAT

seneipiee ese RCNA ye ee EE ea Ay

Se **Q9ha00S

(eZ USSI, eMy ss ssCmsfoqne

‘SodleploasyNy JO daquny | abet Ove Gel lem iS)

*J01ep[99Sqn},

“drys10jaoq}o9 9an

-@N 10 ‘aaLeuplaas

syRUUNnsilog |- YA] Jo vorpeusisacy

"LOMIQMNG *aasy ‘NOLHDNOUM “Yy “7d0N hg “GEgT ‘1290799 By 0g dn opou Jowjsig viyjnypy fO UANjay anuoaay pun ‘joLngjnoiLh “1092981015 — TIT

217

the Muttra (or Mathura) district.

1836.]

FT-TT OL.F

ACD: “eyynd

aor “S12 MN

6FZEz| OSOLT|69SZ

Lo6 | 6St |sé6L

89ZIi 66It |69

FIO) SbOG jILP

OIG | 6tr iL9

GGG | Lot 196

LSG | 20a |S

GSE L6E ccl

GLE) €1% 199%

T8838 | STS |99E

S386 | Los {829

£6Z€| F9FZ \6Z8

OI1ZI] 909 |#09

St9I} Z8It |T9P

O£9 | 9S¢ LZ

6PL | O€G |6IZ

$86S| elle !31zs

Salon

ae cm

= sh z

2 .

“STIOM.

aan

°GS.8S

“qYySey

pooy ‘9193e9 yeIG

€8G86|Z8SC| 101G6| LIESP|SItE, SOGET! SLOPE G6LCl 6EFIE

GOSE ‘ONE | SOE

LZOE 182% | 66Lz

SLOLLIOTZT}| 89Z0I

EEL 199% | LOFT

GIEL 30 Gel

T6SG {0 16S

cere j19¢g 418%

908I |66f LOOT

OF08 |Z8E SsoL

8569 |9L Gt69

6800T|02S 69°56

€€L9 {SOL 896¢

0408 |€8z L8L£

SSZG 100% $S0G

€66B 19% L61G

I LPS) 9ZF CtOtG

e ia! 2

i Pa ed

ae =

Piel s

= =

f*)

Je)

"VQ yea

}

IsLt

Test

9€6S

S38

004

Geel

Fo9l

106

8007

GELle

00S

GOCE

96LE

Ottt

PSOr

SGLII

*sysno[d [240],

62-286

“34Svypooyy ‘ysno[d

OST TE9t

ctl OIFl

668 | LEOS

el TZL

99 bLO

0 GEET

68% ,; Steel

66 608

68 | 6I18E

€9€ | 69EE

09% | Ztlr

9SE | 6L8Z

OFT | O8SE

L6 6101

€T IL01

£16 | SIStt

x °

Boo.

e | 8

*sysno[d

18.61 SZ.FI

*qySey *SJop[oy-puey

“pooy *siojeAning

FIIS

etd

£O0GE

Leer

SSSI

9E64%

02SZ

O4IT

ecg | gctt | Fic | oo {tI

#7t | 619 | gee | 920 lot

648 | Hzes | 0S9% | eos |LOF

osp | Zoggs | £89 | SLg Jatt

ory 1216 | L6e | toe |e6

Sool | 1Zst | OLbZ | *F2z [6zz

9t4 | tose | Sse | 16S For

Ich 614 669 Oss |6LI

ce6t | Loop | es6e | ozge |ege

666 | sost | 6&bP | OL6E |69F

906 | St9% | o9e2 | LEGt |ezr

I1/€ | €1%% | $9 L8E 189%

Se | eps | GEST | EFST j68z

zer | 66s | 6se | ee !ort

EI 9c6 | 628 | 41d {ert

SOG | F0E9 | DIS | FLT love

Su eos ere

ay cS) Y = 5

Co ce Oa et ew at

ot =» =

5 Dw g 2 a

- |e | # | 8

jae .

‘2,

oOo

a *SIoploy

*SI1OZVANND -puey

ee ee a

—

962

9ET

*SoSRIIIA JoquInN [20],

16923| GLLSI GEE! CESI| 94 96 |foes/|Fere

16.0

*SoSeurta

6I 6 | 61 | Ze

0 cl PG

0 €02| £6

(a 2 | ST

€ T ol

¢€ Stl] St

€ 4 1G

9 |9 | 82

Ot 8I €9

0 9€ | £9

cl GI 8s

o | 6I | 96

€ SI tPF

Gc |Z |£6r

0 0 6f

4 | 62 | 982

lela

Ble s

Body @. [res

“SoSeTILA

30 JOqUInNy

jo raOT Ren arenbs

Z8ST 0} Suyunowe ‘yo144SIp Fo

ware [erogiadns [B40 uo aytur aaenbs

yord 03 aSv190Ae Ue SOATS DAOGe 9]

—_——

——

—

sreeeees Corman paesqny 1oossnyy| 6

cece ee ee ote tSI Pl

eerees iutcparntesls

CERIO 2H p BSUOG

“TAL UNYpMMOD) |... +66. «Zaaary

rents GeT-su0g

reeseess (Sugary

He “ypnd.122qS } teres eee es CpIMG

Sas seins sld'elniar

Eero e lnoee eee ee

eeccevn 6 seeccese bon Rvun

A he een

Ur YOON [29qGL£ GOON

Sa a ee OC 2 21 7)

DENCE ODO ONE NN

ees coe es ‘gahou0g

TeL Iss Bay

eevee sese RVI

*2a1eploosyny,

yore 03 Burg !*diys10j09][09 9A}

-iadde svyooey, j-W@N 10 ‘9aAepees

pue syeuunsieg|-yupjo uoneudisog

eecaee ‘peqepres Ss

“soauuppoasqny jo xoquiny | a A NWN ©

*“TIVLYG TVUALTOAIAIY

Statistical Abstract of Muttra.

£11 O1 OFOT =F F 186 | jo ‘sort o1enbs

‘Sd ‘SV ‘SY ‘(0D “Sd “SV ‘SU ‘BS *soyrun oxenbs 196 ‘LOST 0} Suyunoure ‘yo113stp jo voie

paaee —— — ‘xaat1 vuume Aq potdnos0 oovds Surpnpoxa 4o1ysip Jo wore yerogradng yeoysedns e303 uo ariut arenbs

“MNUIAIY Yora 0} 99v19Ae UB S9AID DAOQE ITT,

6 €6t 46 tt {2 8 4 foxacest | Soges4t, EST9lOL] Tisses )FrLosz1 | PEOSSST|FSLS488 | GETHZHI] IBIS |

Oto e [Ol Fle. 9 Ste oer SES9E | ONT’ | S9zZ 10€l ozste. | GoL6t | cecze | Lsgst | ‘°°***** ‘oodyngs } seeees Spequpieg

8 6 T (6 fA oli G2 Gat 6LELS 16cSE SOL0Z ES 9B SLOFE EFSsl 18862 ozo,t | °°" TRL esaog

S-LSee to 1 Se pat OOFLS 85869 | O6L6E | 868F £612 096t9 | L669E | FIS8S | SaseE ae ‘Tel, YUOS

6 STO {8 €t0 br ZL 0 {8S0sE 91298 | thIGb | 80I8 ZE9P sgisL | sostr | osss9 | Lagse 1° °° **** ‘Susery

9 Tt |@ €€£ 0 jJOr ILO {S92%E Z9r9L | BSSeP | Cros Ysst L1rs9 | ol6se | L891¢ | ece6a | °° °* “Upnsizvays pare imasegnnng

6 s{ I Get Gets) Al GIPEST ZSOILE | 6ErL6 Erirl +908 6069ST | S468 L6gtet | cores [°'' "°°" feasoygl se testes ss oasoy

cece ¢ 0 @ 6 ZiT 968491 60SE9L | SEEE6 ees oOLsol 96ZSbI , S9LZ8 cegeet | 86094 | °° °° °° “Unqeqnyg| **** °° ** Sunqeyny

9% @ Ge Tae Gee TLL [6€0SF $Z9PEI | PSOOL OSS | Geel vET6Ol | 6IES9 osogot {| 11b09 | °° °° ‘T924g YOON] *******Ta0q¢ YOON

+ 0 @ 9 SIT (16 1 S6OIIT s600zI | L8¢89 G9GIZ GOIZI £886 18z9S 6S£96 Cigna cp ees sa aeR IA

OL FI Z ie iets € 6 @ 8616S GEecse LEZ0Z 19ST sss PL6ss | 6FS6L OOSIE gzgLt [°° °° ** ‘aekeu0g

“ASV ‘SU \'d ‘SV ‘SUl'd ‘SV ‘SU |

SD ee oe Ge ee ee een ae

5 NO OFS, So 5 or e Qa9 @ 399 FD i oo 2

ate) id a= a Os ce ae a m2, a Q 2 a

I ze 2 m3, ne ate na we "aarepjoosyn y,

=. ® s 5 i . . : yors 0} Suture, |-drys10409][09 aay

ee = hoe Vat a ao | 2 -ladde seyoojey, |-eN 410 pose ae

Se a ek i “aatoup “MOTTey pue syeuunsisg |-yny jo uoyeusisaog

anuasoy "BO1V [230] apap BRITONS puule(quaninoype “WOTZVAIZING [20],

-euuinge yuasaad uo spieh jenuue JO ‘a4sBia “WIIG |-FBATG[NI “f °9 BoI

arenbs (psp JO atay aad advsoay] yunowy | ___ “BZ003(2N 12I0L

all

218

‘uInjay sATJONposdun pur sayonporg

"TONTAIY

*soodepjoosyny, jo soquiny | = A MHD ©

1836.]} Cotton Manufacture of Nepal. 219

IV.—Notes on the State of the Arts of Cotton Spinning, Weaving, Print-

ing, and Dyeing in Nepdl. By Dr. A. Campsuut, attached to the

Residency.

(Read at the Meeting of the 2nd December.]

It may safely be asserted, that the arts generally in Nepal have not

hitherto arrived at any degree of advancement, beyond that attained

in the plains of India. In regard of those which have attained to con-

siderable perfection below, Nepal is extremely backward in the pro-

gress made by her people, nor do I know of any in which the Nip4lese

can be said to excel their Hindu brethren of India, except the useful

one of agriculture, to which may be added, perhaps, brick and tile

making ; and, in more recent days, the manufacture of flint-lock fire

arms.

In the art of weaving, it is universally admitted, that neither the

Egyptians of the olden, nor the nations of Europe in the modern, time

have equalled, or do excel, the Hindus of Dacca and Benares ; while

this art in Nipal, is still at the very lowest possible grade of advance-

ment. It is matter of curiosity, as well as of astonishment, that al-

though the Newars claim, and not improbably hold, a title to consi-

derable antiquity as a united people*, and have made great advances

in husbandry, some progress in literature and architecture, they have

not got up to this day, beyond the threshold of civilization in that

art, which, among the rudest nations, has been found in a state of

much efficiencyt.

Some one of the Roman philosophers, I have read, gave credit to

Semiramis, for the invention of weaving cotton ; and Minerva herself,

was, I believe, an enthusiast, and proficient in the labour of the loom.

Our Nipdlese queens of the present day are too proud of their Raj-

put, or ‘‘ Moon-born lineaget,”’ to indulge in the practice of the useful

arts. And the goddesses, although abundant as the grains of sand on

the sea shore, are now but images of the olden personifications ; con-

sequently, the weaving art has not descended to the modern repre-

sentatives of the above-named ladies ; but still cleaving to the sex, as a

pastime, or profession, we find it confined solely to the women, among

the Newdrs. The men toil at other labours, but they weave not, “ nei-

ther do they spin.” Weaving is scarcely a trade in the valley of

* Sce Mr. Hopson’s Legends of the Origin of this Tribe in the Asiatic Journal.

+ The Mexicans, at the time of the conquest of their country by the Spaniards,

had manufactures of cotton cloth in considerable perfection—“‘ of cotton they

made large webs, and as delicate and fine as those of Holland,’’

t~ Chandra Vansa.

tr 2

220 ' State of the Arts of (Aprit,

Nepal, for all the Newar women, of the poorer classes, (and there are

scarcely any others now,) weave the cotton cloths required for the

consumption of themselves and families.

These fabrics of domestic manufacture are all of cotton, and of the

coarsest and most inelegant description. The cotton is grown in

abundance throughout the hottest valleys of the Nip4lese hills, and

in the Tarai skirting their plainward face. It is brought on men’s

shoulders*, as picked, with the seeds in it, to the different towns of

the valley, where it is exchanged to shop-keepers, for money, or other

produce, as the case may be; and thus each family, as its means will

admit of, purchases, from time to time, so many pounds of the raw

material as suffices for the employment at the cleaning machine and

spinning wheel of the mother and her daughters.

The cotton is separated from the seeds by the women, either with

the fingers, or by the help of a most primitive contrivance, of the fol-

lowing description, and called Keko. Two rollers of wood, the thick-

ness of a walking stick, and close together, are placed in an upright

frame, and made to revolve on one another by means of a handle

attached (through one side of the frame) to the lower of them. The

operator, sitting on the ground, places the frame between her feet,

steadying it with her toes, and applies small portions of cotton to the

spaces between the rollers with her left hand, while she plies the

revolving handle with the right: in this manner the cotton is drawn

between the rollers ; the seeds, being too large for the interspace, are

separated and left behind.

The spinning is equally primitive, but its mode not easily describ-

ed. The machinef is small, and easily portable, even by a child of

six years old; it is not raised from the ground by means of legs, as

is the domestic one of the Scottish Highlanders, and Northern Irish,

(the ones I am best acquainted with;) nor is the wheel set in motion

by the pressure of the foot on a board connected by a thong of lea-

ther, with a lever or cramp fixed to its axle, as is common in turning

grind-stones, or turning lathe-wheels; but, the spinner, as in the

cotton-cleaning process, sits on the ground, with one hand turning

* Man is the only animal of burden employed in the valley of Nepal, as well

as the interior of her hills—a circumstance of itself strongly pointing out, how

short a way the inhabitants have advanced beyond sheer barbarism. The uneven

surface of their country is scarcely sufficient to save them from this imputation.

The rulers of the land drive English carriages, while the transport of every arti-

cle in their dominions is made on men and women’s backs—a good specimen of

eastern pomp, associated with its common aucouipatuctent;t hard-worked poverty.

t+ Called Yedué by the Newars.

1836.] Weaving, Spinning, &c. in Nepdl. 221

the wheel by means of a handle, and with the other, drawing out the

cotton into thread.

An iron rod is attached by means of a string to the wheel, and

revolves in company with it, on which the thread, as spun, is collect-

ed, and in this manner, women and girls of all ages employ them-

selves, when not assisting at sowing or reaping, either in front of

their dwellings, in the towns, or at the road-side, as may best suit

their convenience*. The spinning wheel may be best described by

saying, that it is but the ancient distaff, improved by the addition of a

wheel for keeping it in motion; for the sharp-pointed iron rod, to the

extremity of which the cotton is applied, and by which it is spun into

thread, is precisely the spike of the distaff, and like its prototype,

serves the double purpose of a bobbin on which the thread is accumu-

lated as spun. The spinner turns the wheel from left to right while

forming the thread, and to allow the portion spun to be accumulated

on the iron rod, gives the wheel a small turn in the opposite direction,

at the same time, lowering her left hand, so as to permit the winding-

up of the thread. This necessary interruption in the spinning process,

is a great drawback on the time of the spinner, and renders the distaff

wheel very inferior, when compared to the common one of Europe.

When tending cattle, or watching their ripe crops, the females gene-

rally wile away the time, and assist in replenishing the family ward-

robe by spinning or weaving in the open air.

Having thus imperfectly spun the yarn, we proceed naturally to the

warping and weaving of it, both of which processes are performed ex-

clusively by women, with the very simplest and rudest machinery,

equalled by the coarsest and most ungainly produce. The ordinary

breadth of the Nipal cotton cloths is about half a yard, and rarely

exceeds two feet. The average length of the webs is from 6 to 12 and 14

yards, and the texture of the finest is not superior to the dositi cloth

of Hindustan, used for house canopies (chhats) and floor cloths.

When a Newdr woman has spun a sufficient quantity of thread for

the warp of a web, she winds it off the iron rod, on which it has been

spun, into (or, on) large bobbins of about nine inches long, and fit to

hold three or four pounds of thread.

With these large bobbins, and a few reeds, about three feet long, she

repairs to the nearest grassy spot without her viilage, or to the side of

the causeway, if unpaved, and there, sticking the reeds in the ground,

* The universality of the spinning wheel may be readily credited, on the

announcement of a custom which enjoins every New4ar parent to present his

newly married daughter with a Yedu and Keko in addition to her dowry.

229 State of the Arts of (Apri,

(a few feet asunder,) to the length of her purposed web, she has pre-

pared the only warping frame known throughout these regions.

Tying the thread to the reed on her extreme right, she moves ra-

pidly up and down along the line, passing the thread (as it comes off

the bobbin, revolving on a shaft passed through its axle, and held in

her right hand), on alternate sides of each reed, until the ‘‘ warp is

laid.”

The dexterity acquired by the women, in warping, is considerable,

and the quickness with which they entwine the thread, with the warp-

ing reeds, is remarkable ; and apparently, it is executed with little trou-

ble. I have often seen those women moving up and down, and laying

the warp regularly on the frame, at a fast walk, and all the while talk-

ing and laughing with the persons present, and assisting them in the

performance of their task.

Having “laid the warp,” the reeds (or rods of wood, as the case

may be), are pulled out of the ground, and the warp, frame and all, is

rolled up and carried home. All the cloths made in the valley are of

uncoloured thread, which renders the warping a much easier affair

than when striped webs are to be laid down.

When leisure offers for weaving the web, the women on a sunshin-

ing day spread out the warp (the warping sticks still in it) and apply

with a brush, made of a suitable kind of grass, the paste necessary for

smoothing the thread preparatory to putting the web in the loom.

The mode of weaving does not essentially differ from that practised

in the uncivilized portions of our own country with which I am

acquainted. The weaver sitting on a bench, with the loom in front of her,

plies the shuttle alternately with either hand, pulling forward the

swinging apparatus for laying the woof thread, close to its predecessor ,

and plies the treddles with her feet*. The weaving is carried on under

a shed, within a sma'l verandah, or in the house; and as the roofs are

generally low, the treddles are made to play in a hollow dug in the

earthen floor under the loom. The loom is made of the commonest

materials, and very clumsily put together, and is altogether of, a piece

with the poor state of the weaving art. Lest it should be thought

that it is intended to connect the wretched produce of the Nepal

looms, with the rudeness of the machinery, as inevitable cause and

* This portion of the loom is extremely rude and primitive ; instead of foot-

boards moving ona fixed point, to be depressed alternately, so as to make one

layer of the warp threads cross the other, and thus incorporate the woof with it,

we find two small buttons suspended from the lower margin of the netting, which

the weaver seizes between her great and first toe, alternately depressing each

foot as the woof thread is delivered by the shuttle.

1836.] Weaving, Spinning, &c. in Nepdl. 223

effect, I may mention that the Nepal loom, and the arrangements of

the weaver, are superior in some respects to those of the unrivalled

manufactures of the Dacca muslin. Mrtu’s account of the Hindu loom

corroborates this; he says, “It consists of little else than a few sticks

or pieces of wood, nearly in the state in which nature produced them,

connected together by the rudest contrivances. There is not so much

as an expedient for rolling up the warp.” The weaver is therefore

obliged to work in the open air, as his house could not ccntain him

and his web at full length; “‘and every return of inclement weather

interrupts him.” The Nepal weaver rolls up the warp on its origi-

nal frame, and ties it to a peg driven in the ground close to her feet,

while a cross beam in front of her receives the web as it is woven*.

The Thibet woollen cloths are of infinitely superior workmanship to

the cotton ones of Nepal, and indeed, are of very fine make and mate-

rial, although deficient in width. It is therefore evident that in the

earliest of the arts, one which must have been practised by all human

societies, so soon as leaves and skins were deemed unfitting clothing,

the Nipdlese have been left far behind, by the Hindus of India on

one hand, and by the Tartars of Bhote on the other.

Dyeing and printing come naturally enough to notice, after spin-

ning and weaving; and the advancement made in these arts has kept

an even pace with that in the former. As dyesters the Newars are

miserable artists ; they cannot at this day dye a decent blue, although

furnished with indigo for the purpose. s

A dirty red (from madder) and a light fading green, are the colours

most commonly dyed by them; but they are not fast and durable, nor

elegant when fresh. The only tolerably good dyeing done in Nepal,

is by some Cashmiris, and people from the plains.

The coarse cloths of the country are printed, in imitation of the

chintzes of India and Europe, and are much worn by all classes of

females, who cannot afford to purchase better stuffs; but the imita-

tions are very badly executed, and the colours not durable. The best

Nip4lese chintz is printed and dyed at Bhatgaon, in the valley; and

in the hills east of the valley, at a place called Dunkutuah. In the

small valley of Punouti too, about 24 miles east of Kathmandu, this

trade is carried to some extent, and with nearly similar success.

* The different parts of the loom are not connected so as to form one com-

plete machine. For instance, the swinging beam and netting are generally sus-

pended from the roof of tle house.

In the commonest European loom, the bench on which the weaver sits, the

beam on which the cloth is received, as well as that on which the warp is rolled,

together with the swinging beam and netting, are all joined together.

224 List of Cotton Manufactures [Aprit,

A piece of best Parbattiah chintz 55 yards long, sufficient to make

an entire dress for a woman, costs at Kathmandu1-8-0 Nipdlese rupees*.

The subjoined list of the cotton piece goods manufactured in the

valley and neighbouring hills, of which specimens are now presented,

may not be useless to the public, while it will tend in some degree to

give practical illustration to the above remarks. As a mode of at-

tempting to estimate the real value of these products, and to assist in

throwing light on the condition of the people who make and use them,

the value of money, in regard to the staff of life, may be conveniently

recorded, especially as in Nepal, as well as India, the craftsman does

not, generally speaking, earn any thing in addition to the common

wages of agricultural labour, or in other words, little more than suf-

fices to fill his belly, and that of a wife and children, with plain rice,

and a few spices, and to buy the raw cotton, for the manufacture of

his, and their coarse clothing. Models of the spinning wheel, and

cotton cleaning machine, accompany the specimens of cloth.

List of the principal cotion piece goods Manufactured in Nepdl proper, and

throughout the Hills; to which is added a notice of the Bhungara, or Canvas

made from the inner bark of trees, and the few coarse woollens of the neigh-

bouring hilist.

Names by which

known in the Bazar.

1. Changa.—Manufactured in almost every Newdr’s house throughout the valley,

and generally in the hills. Is coarse, hard and thin in texture. Is for

the most part in webs of 10, 12, to 14 yards long, and 18 inches broad,

and ranges in the Kathmandu bazar, from one rupee to 1-4-0 and 1-8-0 per

piece.

Remarks.

* A Nip4lese rupee equivalent to 12% annas of Company’s currency.

+t A fall grown labouring man requires fora day’s good food, 14 mannas of rice,

and his wife, with (say as an average) three children, 13 mannas more, or in all

three mannas.

The present price (November 1835) is 26 mannas, or nearly nine days’ food

per current rupee; to this, add salt, spices, and other condiments, worth one

rupee more, and it will be seen that the wages of labour such as a man can live

ou in tolerable comfort, must be about four current rupees per month, and this

without any allowance fer clothing, house or luxuries.

The lowest class of laborers, and artizans, in some parts of the valley, and

throughout a great portion of the hills, cannot come at rice, as their ordinary

food ; but must be content with the coarser grains, such as murwa, bajra, kodu

and Indian corn. Two current rupees per month suffice for their subsistence,

and is about the price of their labour.

+ The specimens here described are deposited in the Society’s museum.

1836.} List of Cotton Manufactures. 295

2. Kadi.—Thick, coarse and strong; manufactured in considerable quantity

in the valley of Noakot, as well as in the great valley and throughout the

hills : is much worn by the cultivators of all tribes, Parbattiahs, and Newdrs.

Comes to market generally in pieces of 6% yards long, 16 or 18 inches

broad, and averages at Kathmandu 12 annas to one rupee per piece. Wears

long and well; like the above, is sold unbleached.

3. Purabi Chint.—Is an imitation of Indian Chintz, manufactured at Dunkutuah

.and other places in the eastern hills, generally coloured, black and red,

in a small striped pattern ; coarse and heavy. Is much worn by the poorer

Parbattiahs, and Newars (women). Comes to Kathmandu in pieces of five

yards long, and less than two feet broad, and may be generally bought for

14 annas or one rupee per piece.

4. Mémi Chint.—Also manufactured at Dunkutuah and to the eastward; is

very like the above ; worn by the Parbattiah and Newar women, made into

chilis (boddice) and saris, A piece of six yards long and 18 inches broad,

costs in Kathmandu about one rupee.

5. Bandrasi Chint.—Manufactured at Bhatgaon in the valley, and named from

its being an imitation of the Indian Chintzes; is of different colours and

patterns, not so coarse and heavy as the other kinds, but thin and flimsy.

Is used as lining for jackets, and for women’s dresses. A piece six yards

long and half a yard broad, costs in Kathmandu about one rupee or up

to 1-8-0.

6. Kalé Chtnt.—Manufactured chiefly in the hills west of Kathmandu; is coarse,

heavy, very rudely dyed and printed, but the broadest of the Nipalese fa-

brics, A piece eight yards long by 23 feet wide, costs about one rupee

eight annas.

7. Durkeah Chint.—Manufactured principally at Pokra and Batwal ; very coarse

and heavy, but has a better width than the Chintzes of the valley: used for

jacket linings, and women’s dresses; six yards long and two feet broad ;

costs in Kathmandu about one rupee eight annas.

8. Bitedar Chint.—Frowm its spotted pattern it takes its name; is afavorite one

of the Bhatgaon Chintzes. A piece of 53 yards long and halfa yard wide,

costs about one rupee eight annas.

9. Hara Chint.—Comes almost exclusively from the small valley of Bunapa,

20 miles east of Kathmandu; coarse and hard like the rest.

10. Pérabi Kadi.—Mauufactured in the eastern hills, is broader, and some-

what finer than the Noakote article (No. 2.); a good deal of this article

is exported from Nepal to Bhote. A piece of 14 yards long and 23 feet

wide, costs at present in Kathmandu three rupees.

11. Kassa.—Nipdlese imitation of the Indian mulmul or common gauze, a

wretched manufacture. Is made in large quantities at Bhatgaon, and gene-

rally by the Newars throughout the valley. Is used for making turbans ;

a piece of eight yards long and six inches wide is sufficient for a pagri,- and

costs generally four annas. Worn by the poorer Parbattiahs, and some

Newars, for the Asiatic turban is not general among this latter race, a

small conical skull cap being the most common head-dress among them.

12. Bhangdra.—A very coarse and strong sackcloth or canvas, manufactured

from the inner bark of trees, by the people of the hills, and much used in

226 List of Cotton Manufactures. [Aprit, ~

the valley of Nepal for making grain-bags and sacks, for the transport of

merchandize. The poorer people of the hills, who subsist chiefly by wood-

cutting and carrying, make this cloth in their houses and wear it. I can-

not at present ascertain the description of trees whose bark is converted into

this clothing, nor the detailed process employed in making it into thread.

The hill people say that several different trees furnish the appropriate bark,

and that it is necessary to beat and pound it, as for paper making*, previous

to spinning it into thread. The cloth is exceedingly strong and durable,

and is said to stand wet for a long time without being rotted, or injured in

texture. It is brought to Kathmandu, in webs of about five yards long, and

12 inches broad, which costs on an average eight annas.

13, Rhari.—A coarse kind of woollen blanket manufactured by the Bhoteahs

of the Nepal hills, and worn by them almost exclusively: is brought to

Kathmandu in pieces of 7% yards long, and 14 inches wide, and costs

about three rupees. Its texture is very thick and heavy, but it is ad-

mirably suited for the rainy season, to the inclemency of which the burden-

bearing, and wood-cutting Bhoteahs, are much exposed. The Newars do

not wear this, nor indeed (as a general practice) any woollen garments.

This is also for the most part of domestic manufacture, as every Bhoteah

who possesses a few sheep, has a web or two of it made up annually by

his family. To add to the warmth and thickness of the Rhari, it is fre-

quently improved by beating wool into it, which gives it the appearance

of felt.

14. Bhote.—Has its name from that of the people making and wearing it.

The hill countries north of Nyakote and the valley of Nepal, up to the

snows, produce this article. It is a thick and soft woollen stuff, half blan-

ket half felt, much warmer and lighter than the rhari, but inferior to it as

a protection against rain. A piece seven or eight yards long, by 18 inches

wide, costs in Kathmandu about two rupees eight annas.

P. S. On submitting the above to Mr. Hopeson’s perusal, he informed me

of the existence among the Newars, of some coloured cotton manufac-

tures, overlooked by me in this list. I have procured specimens of them

and of an unnoticed plain manufacture, both of which are added, they

are as follows:

15. Putassi.—So called by the Newars. It is a strong coarse sort of check,

generally blue and white, sometimes red and white; is entirely a domes-

tic manufacture, and very rarely procurable for purchase in the bazar, the

women not weaving more of it than suffices for their own wear. Is woven

exclusively by the Newar women: a piece 5% yards long, and 23 feet wide,

costs about 23 current rupees. There are several varieties of this stuff, as

to colour and pattern (some of them being striped instead of checked), but

all are coarse and heavy.

16. Punikd.—An imitation of the table cloth manufacture of Dinapur, and the

variety technically called ‘‘ Bird’s eye.’’ Three or four sorts are manufac-

tured by the Newars, but all save one are coarse and heavy. It is worn

by the better class of Newars, male and female, and by the Parbattiah sol-

* See the Nepdl paper-making process, as described by Mr. Hope@son in the

Journal of the Asiatic Society.

Vol V. P1. VIL.

ensis

Saelus .

ipal

éetus N

1sa

type of the new Ge

T. Black Astaizc Lith: Prefs.

1836.] Summary Description of New Falconide. 227

diery occasionally. A web of six yards long by two feet broad, costs three

current rupees, The manufacture of this article is confined principally to

the larger towns of the valley.

Bhim Poga.—(Newéri.) An ancient manufacture and article of clothing

of the New4rs, but not worn by them in the present day. Is wore only by

a class of outcasts, and is with difficulty procurable; its only use at pre-

sent is, to roll the corpse of religious persons in previous to being burned.

The warp, is of coarse cotton thread, the woof of soft spun woollen yarn,

in addition to which some fine wool is amalgamated with the web in weaving

it. Its texture is very soft, and is well calculated for a warm in-door wear ;

it is too fleecy to be kept out wet. A piece of four feet long by two feet

wide, costs two current rupees.

V.—Summary Description of some New Species of Falconide. By

B. H. Hopeson, Esq.

Genus Aguila. Species new. Aguila Pernigra. Jetty Eagle, (mihi.)

Habitat, the central and northern regions of Nepdi.

This species is throughout of a black colour, but less pure below

than above, and the tail is transversely marked with four or five broad

bands of a paler and brownish hue. The cere and toes are bright

yellow. The bill blue, with a black tip ; the talons black, and the iris

brown. It is a bird of somewhat slender form, and very graceful and

powerful flight, possessing all the influential characters of the genus,

as now restricted; but distinguished from its type, or chrysactos, by a

slenderer bill, rather longer toes, and longer and more acute talons. It

is two feet five inches from tip of the bill to the end of the tail, and

five feet and a half between the wings; and is chiefly remarkable for

the extreme inequality of size and acuteness of the talons. The orbits

are downy; the sides of the cere clad in short, soft hairs; and the

feathers of the hind head and neck are prolonged into a vague crest

_ of narrow composed plumes. The cere is rather large, but not heavy ;

the bill longer than the head, but slight rather in form. The wings

are equal to the tail, with the fourth quill longest, and all the great ones

strongly emarginated, remotely from their tips; the tips being inclined

a little inwards: tail even, or subrounded.

The tarsi moderate and plumed; toes nude and reticulate, with

three or four scales next the talons, which, as already noticed, are

very acute, and the inner fore and hind ones of extreme length and

curve. The inner fore talon is the largest, then the hind one, next

the central, and the outer fore, least.

The nares are obliquely cleft in the cere, and of an irregular oval

shape, with the upper margin arched and tumid.

2a 2

228 _ Summary Description of some . [Aprit,

This is a shy bird, which adheres exclusively to the wild and moun-

tainous tracts of the hills. Its body is entirely free from offensive

odour and vermin, and its prey chiefly the pheasants of the region

it frequents, as well as their eggs. Its weight is about 44 Js.

Genus Hualizetus. Species new. H. Albipes, (mihi.)

This species is two feet nine inches long, and six feet eight between

the tips of the wings. In colour it nearly resembles Macei, having

the head, neck, and body, pale ruddy brown, darker on the thighs

and rump; the scapulars, wings and tail, saturate brown: a large

bar of pure white through the centre of the tail: and the cheeks, chin,

and throat, hoary. The bill and head are considerably narrower than

in the golden eagle, but the bill is fully as long in proportion to the

head, and even more so. The toes are longer and less thick than in

that species, and the talons rather more curved. In other respects,

these members sufficiently resemble those of the type of Aquila. But

the tarsi are nearly nude: the acropodia, as well as acrotarsia, wholly

scaled; and the toes are cleft. The bill is longer than the head,

straight towards the base, and at it nearly twice as broad as

high. The lateral compression is, in general, moderate, and the

ridge acutish; the hook, large; the cutting edges, even. The cere,

large, nude, clad only on the sides towards the base with soft hairs,

diverging from the fore angle of the eye. Nostrils, forward, sub-basal,

obliquely transverse, irregularly oval, simple, and inclined to a curve

at the forward extremity. The tarsi are low, thick, and gummy;

plumed over the knee, and a little below it. The toes, longish, un-

equal, stout, cleft to their origins ; but the outer not versatile. To the

front, both tarsi and toes are scaled, as already noted; but the junc-

tion of the toes and tarsi, as well as the sides and backs of the latter,

are reticulate. The central toe is as long as the tarsi. The talons

are loag, arched, stout, and moderately acute: the hind one being the

largest. All are flat below. The wings are very nearly equal to the

tail, and have the fourth quill longest. Most of the great quills are

strongly emarginated, high up, on both webs. The tail is of medial

length, and square. The hook of the bill and the talons are black; the

bill blue; the cere yellow: iris hazel brown, and feet pure white.

This species is generally found on the banks of the larger rivers,

near to where they issue into the plains, and it preys on fish.

Genus Nisactus, (mihi.)

The birds of this genus are distinguished by wings and tail formed

upon the accipitrine model; but their nares are transverse and specu-

lated as in the eagles, Their festooned bills have a form which is

osculant between the hawks and buzzards. They have the long slen-

1836.] New Species of Falconide. 229

der plumed tarsi of Limneetus, and the long, acute, and unequal talons

of the noblest hawks and falcons, to which moreover they assimilate

in their manners, adhering exclusively to the wilds, and killing their

own prey, which consists of pigeons, jungle fowls, and partridges.

Species Nipalensis, mihi. Habitat, the lower hills and Saul forest.

This species is liable to vary very considerably in colour, and is

sometimes found possessed of a drooping egret-like crest of two long,

narrow, composed plumes. I have several specimens, procured with-

in the past 10 years; but, as I cannot venture to determine the diver-

sities of appearance with reference to sex and age and season, I shall

describe a bird in each of the more striking aspects it presents.

Ist. This is the uncrested and paler aspect. The head, the neck,

the whole body below, with the basal and interior parts of the plu-

mage above, are white; the wings, back, and tail, brown.

The crown of the head, and the dorsal face of the neck, have a pale

fawn-coloured smearing. The cheeks, chin, and throat are immacu-

late; the head, neck, and body, below marked lengthwise, with narrow

lines of saturate brown. The thighs are transversely barred with

pale fawn; and the plumes of the tarsi, with the lower tail coverts, are

unmarked. Several of the lesser wing coverts are broadly margined

with white. The wings and tail have seven cross bars of saturate

brown, which are vaguely seen above—clearly on the pale inferior

surface. The lining of the wings is white, with here and there a

heart-shaped brown mark.

2nd. In this, the darker and crested form, the head and neck are

brown, with broad white margins,—a change caused by the expansion

of the central streaks of No. 1. The cheeks and chin have a triple

longitudinal marking of brown, one line proceeding from the chin

down the throat, and one from either side of the gape over the cheeks.

The transverse bars of the thighs are darker, being brown rather than

rufous, and they are extended over the tarsi and inferior tail coverts.

Lastly, from the back part of the head proceed two long, narrow, com-

posed plumes of brown colour, forming a very graceful pendant crest.

In both birds, the bill is blue at the base, black at the tip; the cere,

greenish yellow; the iris, golden; the toes yellow, and the nails, black.

The largest specimen procured by me is 294 inches long and 60 wide:

the smallest is 25 inches long and 494 wide. The former weighed

4 lbs., the latter, 2 lbs. 12 oz. The intestines vary in length from 46

to 50 inches. There are two small coeca: the gut is much more

capacious above than below. The stomach, though, of course, of

the solvent type, has a thickish sub-muscular outer coat, and there

are soft ridges along its inner surface.

230 Summary Description of Falconide. [APRIL,

The following characters of the bill and other members and or-

gans apply equally to the foregone, and to that which will be pre-

gently described. The bill is shorter than the head, moderately

compressed, scarcely arched from the base, and scarcely straight at it,

distinctly festooned, and moderately hooked, with the tip of the

lower mandible very slightly truncated.

The cere is moderately sized, and covered on the sides with down

and soft hairs, which latter scarcely reach forward to the nares. The

nares are almost vertical, ovate, angulated, and smallish. The orbits,

clad ; the cartilage of the brows, nude and prominent; the eye, ra-

ther large; the tarsi, long, slender, and plumed; the toes of medial

- unequal length and thickness ; slenderer and longer than in Aquila or

in Buteo, not so long or so fine as in the noble hawks and falcons,

although, as in them, possessed of rough soles and large balls ;

acropodia, reticulate, with three or four scales next the talons. The

outer toe is connected with the central by a membrane: the talons,

long, acute, and unequal, as much so as in the noblest of the hawks;

the hind talon, largest, and all flat beneath.

The wings and tail are as strong and firm as in the finest of the

Falconine race. The tail consists of 12 equal and broad feathers.

The wings reach only to its centre. The fifth quill is the longest :

but the fourth and sixth are nearly equal to it; the first considerably,

the second and third, moderately and equally, graduated up to the

longest ; first to sixth inclusively emarginate, high up, on the inner

web, and second to seventh, on the outer.

Species Grandis, (mihi.)

I have been able to procure but one species of this bird, which was

taken alive, and lived in confinement upwards of three years. It died

in December, in full plumage. It was a male, and answered to the

following description. The iris is brown ; the cere and toes, yellow ;

the bill, blue, its tip and the talons, black. Head, neck, body, and

wings, saturate brown above, beneath white, stained with rufous; the

tail, above, slaty-blue. The cheeks, chin, throat, and breast exhibit

on each plume a central broad stripe of dark brown, following the

shaft, and margined on either side with rufous, on a white ground.

The thighs are, herring-boned with brown ; and the tarsi and vent,

narrowly streaked lengthwise with the same colour. The under tail

coverts transversely barred with mixed rufous and brown: and the

ground colour of the thighs and tarsi, for the most part, rufous. The

lining of the wings is an irregular mixture of the hues of the upper

and lower surfaces: or saturate brown and white, stained with

rufous. There are six narrow, irregular cross bars on the tail, with

1836.] Nipdlese Mammalia. 231-

one broad terminal one, of a blackish hue; but the tip itself is pale.

The wings and tail, on their inner surface, are whitish, irregularly

crossed with freckles of brown, disposed barwise.

The bird measured 27 inches by 60, and weighed 5 lbs.

VI.—Synoptical Description of Sundry New Animals, enumerated in the

Catalogue of Nipdlese Mammals. By B.H. Honeson, Esq.

ScruropTervus, Cuvier.

Species, Alboniger. Black and white.

* Flying Squirrel, mihi.

Habitat, central and Northern regions of Nipal.

Se. above black, faintly shaded with hoary or rufous; below, white,

with a slight tinge of yellow; tail, concolorous with the body above,

distinctly distichous, flattened, and rather shorter than the animal.

Nude skin of lips, ears, and feet fleshy white. Snout to rump, 11

inches ; tail, 84, without the terminal hair—9, with it; weight, 9 oz.

_ Observations. The sexes are alike: the young are pure black above,

pure white below. The species has but six teats, four ventral and

two inguinal. The intestines are 85 inches long, or eight times the

length of the animal. They have a wide cecum of nine inches in

length, placed at 18 inches only from the anal extremity.

Species, Magnificus. Splendid.

Flying Squirrel, mihi.

Habitat, as above.

Sc. Above, intense chesnut, (the fruit ;) below and the shoulders,

golden red; tail, paler than the body above, and tipped black: a

black zone round the eyes, and another embracing the mustachios ;

chin, pale, with a black triangular spot. Nude parts of skin, fleshy

white. Tail, cylindrico-depressed, and considerably longer than the

animal.

Parachute, large, enveloping six inches of the tail. Length of the

animal, 16 inches, of the tail, 22 ; weight 34 dbs.

Observations. Sexes, essentially similar in colour. In old animals the

chesnut colour tipt hoary, and, in the young, black tipt. In all, the

tail, beyond the limits of the parachute, is paler than the superior

surface of the body: and the black point is always present. So are

the facial marks, though they be less conspicuous in young speci-

mens. The intestinal canal is fourteen feet two inches long, or 10%

times as long as the body; 8.8 to the cecum; 5.6 belowit. The

282 Synopsis of sundry Species of (Apri,

czcum is 20 inches long, very capacious, and sacculated. This species

breeds in the rains, and seems to produce but one young at a time.

In September, the offspring are tolerably independent of their mother,

but their flymg membrane is much less developed than in maturity.

Genus, Scrurus, Auctorum.

_Species, Lokriah, mihi.

Habitat, as before.

. Above, saturate brown, tipped with intense orange; below, and the

thighs, deep orange. Tail, concolorous with the body above, distich-

ous, flattened, and broad, with a double margin of black and hoary.

Length from snout to rump, eight inches. Of the tail, 64 inches, with-

out the terminal hair, equal to animal with it; weight 8 oz.

Species, Lokroides, mihi.

Very similar to the last, but has the inferior parts rufous hoary ;

_ the thighs, concolorous with the body above, and the tail narrower

and void of marginal bands.

Observations. The sexes alike in both the above species. Teats,

six in both*. Intestines, 66 inches, or but eight times the length of

the body, and of uniform calibre throughout. At 15 inches from the

anal extremity, a ceecum of four to five inches long, and double the

calibre of the intestinal canal.

Genus, Friis, Auctorum.

Species, Viverriceps, mihi. Sharp-faced Cat, mihi.

Habitat, open lowlands of lower region.

F. V. Wild cat, with subviverrine face, small ears, and short,

slender, and tapered tail, reaching one inch below the os calcis. Above,

and the neck, deep cat gray, or fulvous gray brown. Below, the head,

tail, belly, and insides of the limbs, hoary. From the eyes to the

root of the tail, four subcontinuous black lines: two more parallel to,

and without, them, from the eyes to the shoulders; two perfect

bands round the jaws, from the eyes: and three round the front of

the neck and breast. Ears, black outside, with a large gray central

spot, and rufous hoary on the inside. Body and limbs, wholly cover-

ed with roundish full black spots, having a sublinear disposition from

the head towards the tail; the feet only, from the os calcis and top of

the carpi, being immaculate. The tail exhibits above and below the

ground colours of the body. On the upper surface, six or seven trans-

verse bands, the two or three next the body, composed of dots, arrang-

ed linearly, and the terminal one being large, forming a blackish tip

to the tail on that surface. Length, from snout to rump, 30 inches;

* In the Regne Animal, eight teats are assigned to the squirrels.

1836.] New Mammals in Nipdlese Catalogue. 233°

of the tail, 10} inches, or 111 with the hair: mean height, 15: weight

17 lbs.

Observations. This species is affined to the Viverre by the form of

its face, and to the Lynxes, by the shortness of its tail, which extends

but little below the os calcis. But it hasno further resemblance to

either : its ears being noticeably short and untufted ; its body, full, and

its limbs, strong and of medial length. The females are nearly as

large as the males, to which they bear a close external likeness. In

the catalogue, this animal is called a variety of the Serval; but the

inspection of several specimens has satisfied me of its specific novelty.

It is distinctly described in the catalogue, though summarily. The

fMtestinal canal is more than three times the length of the body, and

the cecum is an inch long, with the diameter of the large gut, which

is sensibly more capacious than the small.

Genus, Fevis. Subgenus, Lynchus.

Species, L. Hrythrotus. Red-eared Lynx, mihi.

Habitat, all the three regions of Nipal, and abundant in all.

Lynx. Above, pale earthen brown, with a lively tinge of rusty red:

below, clear, but pale ferruginous ; the body, immaculate ; the cubits on

both aspects, and the femora externally, crossed with blackish zigzag

lines ; tail slender, attenuated, and reaching one inch below the os cal-

cis ; concolorous with the body towards the base, but towards the tip,

paler and canescent, encircled with four or five blackish rings, and tipt

with black ; lips, jaw, and a zone round the eye, posteally, pure white.

Ears, externally intense, rusty red, with black tip and small pencil of

the same hue; their lining, rufescent white; feet, from the os calcis

and top of the wrist, downwards, pale rusty, immaculate, and black-

ened posteally.

Snout to rump, 22 inches ; mean height, 16 inches; length of tail,

10, without the hair, 11 with it; weight, 14 dds.

Remarks. The female in this species is considerably less than the

male, but neither sex nor nonage affects the marking of the animals.

An imperfect state of the fur does so: for when the red-eared Lynx

is moulting (so to speak), the sides of the body exhibit some vague,

wavy, stripes, having a subvertical direction.

The tufts of the ears are always present, and the molar teeth have

tubercles on the inner side, notwithstanding the general assertion of

authors that the Lynxes want them. His lengthened limbs, large

pencilled ears, and shortish tail proclaim this animal a Lynx. His

resemblance indeed to the Chaus of Ruppx. is so very striking, that in

the catalogue I identified him with that species. From the examin-

ation of numberless specimens, | am now satified, however, that our ani-

234 Synopsis of sundry Species of [Aprit,

mal is specifically distinct from the Chaus, as well as from the Lybian

Caracal, to which in some points of colouring, he bears a nearer like-

ness than to Chaus. This species is very ubiquitarian, being equally

common in all the three regions of Nepal. In the central and north-

ern regions, he represents the wild cat, whichis not a denizen of these

mountains; nor (I think) of the plains of India.

The red-eared Lynx breeds twice a year, producing three or four

kittens at a birth.

The intestinal canal of the species barely exceeds twice the length

of the body, and is of nearly equal calibre throughout. The caecum

is but half an inch long, with a breadth somewhat less than that of

the large gut. Preys on pheasants, partridges, hares, and rats : breeds

in the woods, but wanders freely through the standing crops. One

of them, a female, took up its abode, and bred, under the residency

mansion, in the past year.

Genus Mus, Auctorum.

Subgenus, Rarrus, (Mus.)

Species, R. Niviventer. White-bellied Rat, mihi.

Above, saturate black brown: below, pure white; tail, considerably

longer than the body, and paled on the inferior surface. Size and

aspect of Mus Rattus.

Observations. For some time I took this animal to bea variety

merely of the common types, but I have now ascertained that it is a

distinct species*. It is invariably pure white below, and even the tail

is paled on the abdominal aspect.

The tail, too, is considerably longer than in Rattus.

Species, Rarrus. Nemorivagus, mihi. Throughout, dusky brown: the

centre of the belly only being paler and hoary blue; the bristles of

the back, unusually long and numerous, but not erect or spiny;

tail shorter than the body, size large ; snout to rump, 12 inches.

Length of the tail, 93 ; ears, tail, and members strictly assimilating with

the ordinary type.

Remarks. The species avoids houses, dwelling in burrows in the

fields, and more especially in the small woods. In the catalogue, it

is called Setifer, to which species it bears much se ga The.

females have twelve teats.

Genus, Manis auctorum,

Species, Auritus, mihi. Eared Manis.

Habitat, lower and central regions.

* In the central region of Nepal, there are four species of Rat, Decumanus,

Rattus, Niviventer, and Nemorivagus. Each distinguished by an appropiate

local name, and by some peculiarity of manners. ‘

1836.] New Mammals in Nipdlese Catalogue. 235

Manis, with rounded, naked ears, vertically developed ; thick tail,

more than one third thorter than the body ; and scales forming 23 lon-

gitudinal series onthe body and neck only. Snout to vent, 22 inches.

* Vent to tip of tail, 13. Weight, 12 to 14 lbs.

Remarks. In the English Regne Animal the genus Manis is said

to be devoid of external ears. Presuming the correctness of this

statement, I have indicated a remarkable peculiarity of the present

species by the specific name Auritus. The eXternal ear, though small,

is perfectly distinct ; the helix having a breadth or free exsertion from

the head, of more than half an inch, and a longitudinal course of one

and an eighth inch, in a direction vertically transverse. In the cata-

logue, this animal is mentioned by the name of the short-tailed or

common Indian species, (M. Pentadactyla of Linn.) with which I then

supposed it to be identical. It differs however very materially, not

only by the presence of ears, but by the much greater number of its

scales. In our animal, the longitudinal series consists of 23 for the

neck and body alone; there being also 10 for the head, and 19 for the

tail. The Manis Javanica of Desmargst is said to have a series of 17

for the body only. I presume our’s yet exceeds this number. The

general appearance of our animal is sufficiently assimilated to Cras-

sicaudata; the body being rather full, though elongated, and the tail

shorter than the body, and very thick at the base.

This latter member is flattened below; broadly convexed above;

and its scales are shorter and wider than those of the body. The feet

are pentadactylous; the colour of the scales, earthy brown, and of the

nude skin, fleshly white. As I have been so fortunate as recently to

witness the gestation and parturition of this species, and have been

also enabled to note the animal’s manners, with its anatomical struc-

ture, I purpose, ere long to give the results of these observations ; and

shall only add, on the present occasion, that if the incaution of authors

only has led to the assertion, that the genus is earless, and the epithet

Auritus affixed to our species thus cease to be characteristic, I would

then suggest the trivial name Plurisquamis, or the many-scaled.

Genus VIVERRA.

Subgenus, Maneusta, (Herpestes.)

Species Auropunctata, mihi.

Habitat, the Central Region.

Mungoose. Of an uniform saturate olive brown, freckled with golden

yellow, an aspect resulting from the five-fold annulation of each hair,

with black and aureous ; cheeks, more or less rusty ; fur of the body,

short, soft, and adpressed ; 3 an inch below os calcis furred; size small ;

2H 2

236 Synopsis of sundry Species of [Apriz,

tail, shorter than the body, snout to rump, 11 inches ; tail, 9 or 103 with

the hair.

Remarks. In this species, as in the following, the tail is pointed,

much attenuated froma thick base, and clad in long lax hair. The

naked skin of the lips and soles is fleshy brown : the iris, brownish

yellow; pupil, variable, but usually oblong and subtransverse ; digits,

membraned crescentwise to the third phalanges. . No anal pouch, but

the folds of the skin on the caudal margin of the anus are subdilated

and furnished with some scattered glandulous points below the surface,

probably subservient merely to the lubrication of the parts. The ani-

mal emitting no peculiar odour.

The intestinal canal is 36 inches long, or more than three times the

length of the body, and of equal diameter throughout. The cecum is

one inch long, and wide as the gut. The stomach has thickish coats,

and is equally broad almost at either end. The molar teeth are brist-

led with points almost as in the Insectivora. In the catalogue, this

animal is identified with the M. Javanica of Horsrietp. But in the

judgment of very competent persons, it is a distinct species. _It differs

materially from the common Mungoose of the plains, not only by its

smaller size, softer shorter hair, and darker colour, but by a less ver-

miform habit of the body and shorter toes, the soles of which, in the

hinder extremities, are less extended towards the os calcis.

Species Nyula, mihi.

The Nytl of the plains. Habitat, the open Tarai.

Mungoose. Varied, with mixed rich red brown and hoary yellow, the

ears, face, and limbs, redder and less maculate ; the neck and body be-

low, pure pale yellow ; hair of the body and tail, long and harsh, with

10 to 12 rings of alternate brown and yellow; toes, long, and in the

hind extremities, nude to the os calcis ; tail, concolorous with the body

above, pointed and equal to the body in length. Snout to rump, 15

inches ; tail, the same, or 18 with the terminal hair.

Remarks. This is the common Mungoose of the Nipalese lowlands,

and of North Behar, and which is identified with Cafra vel Grisea in

the catalogue, perhaps justly so: I leave it to others to judge. Both

of the above species affect the cultivated fields when the crops are

standing, and the grass after the crops are down. They live in burrows

of their own making; and the structure of their extremities is fosso-

rial, but not typically so ; the nails being suited also to climbing trees,

at which the animals are sufficiently expert.

The males are larger than the females; and the young darker hued

than their parents. The females breed in spring: have four: ventral

teats, and usually produce three or four young at a birth. The food

1836.] New Mammals in Nipdlese Catalogue. 237

of both species consists of snakes, rats, mice, eggs, small birds, and

grilli.

Mr. Gray in some recent valuable remarks on the Viverride,

observes, that the Mungooses have “ long, slender, and free toes, and

anal pouches of greater or less depth.” I have again and again exam-

ined fresh specimens of Nyitla and of Auropunctata, with a view to

these assertions, but the result of my observations is that they are

almost wholly erroneous. Neither in the highland nor lowland ani-

mal is there any semblance of an anal pouch ; and the toes of both are

connected by a membrane as far forwards as the hinder edge of the

third phalanx. In Nyala, indeed the toes are elongated, and the hind

feet nearly nude to the heel. In Auropunctata, however, the toes have

but a medial length, and the fur reaches fully half an inch below the

point of the heel.

The fact is, that the structure of the Mungoose, though digitigrade

upon the whole, is by no means typically so: and, in the slow stealthy

motion to which they are much accustomed whilst questing for their

prey, they use the plantigrade action. Their nails are fossorial in the

main; and, like most diggers, these animals incline somewhat to the

plantigrade structure and movement. In fact, they lead off from the

typical digitigrades towards the plantigrades, through the Paradoxuri,

the Gluttons and the Rattels; still, however, retaining the shortish

toes and lengthened compact metatarsi of the digitigrades.

Tribe, PLANTIGRADES.

Genus, Guo. English Regne Animal.

Species new. Gulo Nipalensis, mihi.

Habitat, Central region of Nipal.

G. Above, earthy brown : below, with the edge of the upper lip, the

insides of the limbs, and terminal half of tail, yellow; a white

mesial stroke from the nape to the hips, anda white band across the fore-

head, spreading on the cheeks and confluent with the pale colour of the

animal’s lower surface : head and body vermiformed ; digits and nails of

the anterior extremities stronger ; half way from the os calcis to the

fingers, hairy; fur of two sorts, and abundant, but not lengthened

or harsh, nor annulated: tail, cylindrico-tapered, pointed, half the

length of the animal ; snout to rump, 16 inches; tail, 74, or 9 with the

terminal hair.

Remarks. In the catalogue, this animal is identified with the Gulo

Orientalis of Java (apud Horsrisxp), which is at all events, the insular

analogue of our’s. The cheek teeth are #2 and the animal conge-

quently belongs to genus Gulo, as defined in the English Regne

Animal.

238 Nipdélese Mammalia. (APRIL,

The form of this species is decidedly Musteline from the snout

to the tail; and not merely the head, with its several external organs,

but the skull also bears a close resemblance to those of Martes and

Putorius. The anterior limbs, however, are decidedly fossorial, and

the hinder suited for walking in a subplantigrade manner : both wholly

unfitted for raptatory or scansorial purposes.

Genus Guo. Species new.

G. Urva, mihi. Habitat, Central and Northern Regions.

Urva of the Nipalese.

G. Urva. Above and the sides jackal colour, or fulvous iron gray ;

abdominal aspect of the neck, chest, and belly, with the entire limbs,

dusky brown, a lateral band on either side the neck, from the gape to

the shoulders, white; size and aspect of the preceding ; fur of two

sorts, and very abundant; hair very long, and laxly set on; quadran-

nulated with black and fulvous ; anterior and posterior extremities of

equal strength, and the nails simply ambulatory, being suited neither

to raption, scansion, nor digging; for the rest, the general form of

the feet as in the preceding,

P.S. The whole of the above animals were discovered by me

several years back (1823-1829), and might have been described much

sooner, had I not deemed it improper to hazard the multiplication of

imaginary species by characterising from one or two specimens. There

is not one of these species of which I have not procured several speci-

mens at all seasons, and either alive or just killed. The indications of

the catalogue are such as to entitle me to date from its publication

(originally in 1829). But, in truth, my object has been, and is, much

less to share in the scramble of nomenclators, than to ascertain the

habits and structure of species.

Nothing is so vague at present as the true limits of species, and as

my first aim was rather to find resemblances than differences, so per-

haps it might wisely have been my Jast.

If, however, any person who chances to lay hold upon a single

shrivelled skin, may forthwith announce a new animal, the real student

of nature must be content to leave what is called discovery to the

mere nomenclator ; and the science must continue to groan under an

increasing weight of fictitious species.

B. Bs

1836.] Occasional existence of fresh water in the ocean. 239

VII.—Note on the occasional existence of fresh water on the surface of

the ocean. By Mr. C. Browntow.

It is stated ina recent paper by ARAco, on the subject of Artesian

Wells, upon the authority of one of our most accurate observers—Bu-

cHANAN—that, when on his way to India, he found fresh water more

than one hundred miles from land, to the eastward of the Bay of Bengal.

Araco has addueed this fact to prove, that springs rise to the surface

of the globe from unknown depths. He is doubtless correct in this as-

sertion, as long as he confines his observations to land phenomena—

many causes, however, led me to doubt that fresh water could rise to the

surface at sea, among which may be enumerated the effects of tides,

the disturbance and friction of one fluid passing up through the other,

and the strong affinity which aids their combination while thus in motion.

The fact that fresh water deposited in the shape of rain, remains

unmixed with the salt water beneath, for many hours, during calm wea-

ther; that it is found at sea, around the mouths of large rivers, during

serene days, at an almost incredible distance, led me to seek for an expla.

nation of Bucnanan’s fact, in some less embarrassing theory than the one

which Arago has adopted. I accordingly applied to Mr. Srncratr, one of

the most experienced and intelligent of the members of the Pilot service,

who acquainted me with the following fact.

In the month of October, 1803, in connection with Branch Pilot Bason,

he took charge of the Gungava, an Arab ship, from Muscat, laden with

horses. The passage of the vessel had been long and tedious, and they

were deliberating on throwing their horses overboard, when one of the men f

who had been bathing on a hatch, came and reported that the water along

side was fresh; a bucket was thrown over, which went something below

the surface, and the water brought up was salt !—on further examination,

it was found that the water on the suxface was perfectly fresh. The vessel

was supplied from this source, and the cargo saved. Another member of

the same body informs me, that during the Burmese war, he obtained

fresh water thus when taking troops to Rangoon*.

It appears more reasonable to account for this fact, by referring to the

increased impulse of the waters discharged from the Ganges during the

rains, to the quantity of fresh water actually deposited on the surface of

the sea, at this season of the year, and to the laws of the specific gravity

which determine the relative positions of fluid bodies, than to adopt a

theory which at once sets these aside, and does violence to an established

principle in physics: for these reasons I think Arago’s inference open to

objection.

* These instances occurred over that remarkable part of the bay, the ‘‘ swatch

of no ground,”’ the depth of which renders ARAGo’s theory still more untenable!

240 Note on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Cuvier. [ApRIL,

VIII.—WNote on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Cuvier, or C. Elaphoides and

Bahraiya of Hodgson.

In the number of the Journal for last November, p. 648, Pl. VIII. Mr.

Hopeson has given the specific characters, and a figure of the head and

horns, of a deer which he describes as a new species under the name of

Cervus Elaphoides. The author of this notice came to know this species

in February 1834, from a fine specimen shot by Mr. Money in a jhil

near Muzaffernagar, in the Kadir of the Ganges. Finding no mention*

made of it in Hammron Smirn’s very complete Synopsis of the tribe in

Guirritp’s Translation of the Animal Kingdom, he was, like Mr. Honeson,

led to consider it as an undescribed species, to which he attached, in his

collection, the specific name of C. Enclodocerus, and “ Bara Sinha,” of

the natives. But he subsequently found that it was known to Cuvier as

a distinct species. In the fourth volume of the Ossemens Fossiles, third

edition, p. 505, the horns of the animal are described under the name of

C. Duvaucelii, in honour of his step-son, who sent them to Cuvier from

India ; and in Plate XX XIX of the same volume, he gives outlines of three

varieties of horns (figs. 6, 7, and 8,) which put it beyond all doubt that

the C. Duvaucelii of the Oss. Fossi., and the Cervus Elaphoides of Hope-

SON, are the same species. Cuvirer’s words are these:

“ Cet infatigable naturaliste M. Duvaucet, me met encore 4 méme

de faire connoitre 4 mes lecteurs deux espeéces de cerf des Indes entiére-

ment nouvelles pour les naturalistes.

«La premiére, &c. (he then goes on to describe the C. Wallichii.)

Nous n’avons que les bois de l’autre espéce, mais ils suffisent parfaitement

pour la caractériser. .

«<< A la premiere vue on les prendroit pour ceux d’un vieux cerf commun,

et bien des voyageurs ont du s’y tromper, mais c’est toute une autre cour-

bure, et une autre distribution d’andouillers.

‘‘Le Merrain se dirige d’abord un peu un arriere et de cété, et de sa

partie supérieure se recourbe en avant, en sorte que sa concavité est en

avant comme au cerf de Virginie; mais cette courbure n’y est pas si forte.

“11 ne donne qu'un seul andoniller de sa base, dirigé en avant.

« Les autres naissent de sa partie supérieure et postérieure, et se dirigent

en haut, et un peu en arriére et en dedans.

<‘ Ils sont an nombre de deux, ou de trois, et l’inférieur qui est ordinaire-

ment le plus grand, se bifurque ou se trifurque suivant lage; en

sorte qu’au total on peut compter dans les bois que nous avons sous les yeux,

et que nous représentont pl. xxxix. figs. 6, 7, et 8, de cing a sept cors

a chaque perche ; quelquefois il y’a un petit tubercule dans l’aisselle de

V’andouille de la base.”

* Except in the note p. 116, vol. IV. where Hamitton Smita quotes

Cuvier’s name, with a conjecture that it applied to some species of the group

Rusa.

VAN PTA

Sou Wi _ds . Soc.

Cop per

Ste Uwe

dug’ up

near

Bushtre

Lnsertptien at Buvritian. { See p. 188 y

yTdhs

Bheotia Standard.

[mane anquuvel cl ¢ pee

BQ99099909999299090 v9 5 TN al deo 2° 5h 4

UM NK NIH XY WN \\\

AN WY N WAY

jt Wes fa Sal

7836.] Note on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Cuvier. 241

“1 est fort a desirer que l’on obtienne promptement une description

du pelage de ce beau cerf; mais en attendant nous croyons devoir lui

donner le nom du naturaliste qui l’a fait connoitre, et nous l’appelerons

“Cervus Duvaucelii.”

‘Copies of Cuvirr’s figures are annexed, (see Pl. VI. figs. 6, 7, 8) whieh

differ only from Mr. Hopeson’s to the extent within which varieties.

dependent on age and individuals range.

The designation of Cervus Elaphoides, must therefore give lee to

that of C. Duvaucelii. ;

The chief anatomical peculiarities of the head, as compared with the

Jarao of the Himalayahs, taken as the type of the Rusas, are these. The;

head is narrower for its length, and more elegant in its proportions, than

in the Jarao. The pediciles of the horns are shorter, and more approxi=

mated on the brow. The muzzle is longer and more slender. ‘The intér-.

maxillaries are broad, as in the Rusas, and their, ascending apophysis:joins -

‘on. to the nasals by a wide base. . The nasals are slender, bid run upinte

the frontal in a line with the anterior margin of the orbits:; in the Jarao, a,

the point of union is considerably lower, their lower:extremity projects.

-a little way beyond the intermaxillaries, and a re-entering angle is left:

between them at their tips. . The nasolachrymary figure is a, wide trape-

zium, whereas in the Himalayah Jarao, it isa long triangular slit. .The

depression for the suborbitary sinus occupies less space than in the Jarao,

-but it is deep and well defined. ‘The lachrymal-bone,.at.the upper angle

‘of the depression in the C. Duvaucelii, is perforated. by a very large oval

‘hole ; whereas in the Jarao it is imperforate. The chaffron has a slight

‘rise on the nasals, sinks considerably in a transverse hollow. between the

orbits, and then starts with great prominence in the ridge which runs

along the suture of the frontals, so that the plane of this ridge cuts that

of the parietals nearly at a right angle. In the Jarao, the sink between

the orbits is shallower, the ridge less salient on the frontals, and the

angle more obtuse. :

/; With regard to the indigenous names of the C. Duvaucelii, Mr.

‘Hopeson gives the Nipdlese name of Bahraiya, and says it is known in

‘the western tardi as the Mahé. To C. Elaphus of the Nipdlese sal forest,

che gives the name of Bara sinha.

There is great confusion in the Indian designations of the deer tribe.

Bara Sinha is a notable example. Hamitron Surru applies it (his Baren-

singha) to the C. Hippelaphus, one of the Rusas ; Mr. Hopasow to one of

the Elaphine group; and in the Tarais to the west of the Ganges, so

far as our experience goes, it is given to the Cervus Davaucelii or Ela-

phoides, of Hopesox. That it is inapplicable to the C. El/aphus, it is perhaps

sufficient to mention, that the name of Bara Sinha is very common in the

Tarai westward of the Ganges, whereas the Cervus Elaphus is quite

unknown in this tract, so far as we happen to know. Sportsmen westward

from the Ganges, call the C. Duvaucelii, the Bara Sinha, from the snags

and antlers being frequently twelve in number, in-the adult animal, ang

this seems a very good reason for the name, .Wahd, which Mr: -Hoveson

242 Note on the Cervus Duvaucelii of Cuvier. [AprRIL,

applies to the species, we have always understood to belong to the Rusa

of the Himélayah ; this name being given in Sub-Himalayah tracts ; and

Jarao (or Jerow) in the interior of the Hills, to one or more species, but

these strictly confined tothe Rusa group. Mr. Honeson’s authority, as the

first among Indian Zoologists, will give great weight to such names as he

attaches to the deer tribe; and it is most desirable, that those most

generally in use should be selected. If those who have the opportunity, in

different districts, were to communicate the names by which they know the

different species of the deer tribe, much of the vagueness which at present

attaches to the native designations might be got over.

The following names are in common use in the plains and hills westward

of the Ganges, their synonyms are also given.

Merg, applied, as a general designation for all the deer tribe ; Cervide

and Capride.

Jhank, applied to alj the Cervidz, but more especially to the large species.

C. Duvaucelii, Cuv., and Elaphoides of Hope., called Bara Singha,

Bahraiya of the Nipalese, Hope.

C. Hippelaphus ? and Aristolelis, or Rusas, called Mahé in the Sub-

Himalayan tracts, and Jarao (Jerow) in the interior of the mountains.

Syns. Saumer of Bengal and Jarai of Nepal.

C. Ratwa, Hone., called ‘‘ Kukar’’—Ratwa of Nepal.

A. Ghoral, Harpw., Ghoral everywhere.

A. Thar, Hone., called “ Sarao” (Surrowa) in the hills between the

Ganges and Tonse ; between the Tonse and Sutlej called “ Eimoo,” the

Thér of Nepal.

A. Tetrucornis, called “ Chouka” or “ Chousinga.” Chikara on the

authority of Harpw. ; but this name applied to the

A. Acuticornis ? or Subulata ? an elegant small sized antelope, with horn

on the females, numerous about Delhi, and there called “ Chikara.”

Capra Jharal, Hone. (Quadrimammis ? see p. 254) called Tehr and

Thar ; Jhardl of Nepal.

C. Ibex ? called Sakeen in Kanawar. This species, which is strictly an

Ibex, is got along with the Bhuroor. It does not appear to be known to

Mr. Honeson ; Major Kennepy had two stuffed specimens at Subatu.

Ovis Nuhoor, Hove., called Bhuroor near the source of the Ganges ;

Nuhoor of Nepal.

The Antilope Cervicapra, ( Hiran ; ) Cervus axis, ( Cheetul ; ) C. Porcinus,

(Parah ;) Antilope Picta or Damalis Resia, ( Nilgao,) are so generally

known by these names, that it is hardly necessary to mention them.

Note.—The animal to which. the above principally refers was known to Mr.

Hopcson from 1820, when there was a live one in the Durbar Menagerie at

Katmandhu, though not accurately observed by him, he had, and used, the occasion

of another specimen being there in 1825, to note the characters of the beast.

Monsieur Duvaucet was his friend and correspondent, and was assisted by him

to the utmost; two of his collectors lived in his house at Katmandhu for a year

(1827-8,) and were furnished out of his own stores with sundry specimens.

M. Duvavucet may therefore have procured the beast from him, or through

him ; it is certain that Mr. H. knew this stag before the latter came to India.—Ep.

1836.] Horary Observations of the Barometer, &c. 243

IX.—-Horary Observations of the Barometer, Thermometer, and wet-

bulb Thermometer, made at Calcutta on the 21st and 22nd of March,

1836. By Mr. H. Barrow, H.C. Mathematical Instrument-maker.

1836 ae ee | ae te | Bee

oo. ; ~ = = seo =

Date. | Hour.| § | 22 | ag S z/28 gag Remarks.

=) S he at ee o = s 3 a

S Se ee ace. bg oo 8

SO | | BS |e [Ren] Qea

21 March) 64.m.|29,975| 74,0] 68,8) 69,5|29,879 5,2

7 ,998| 74,0! 63,0} 70,0) ,992 6,0

8 30,016] 75,0] 68,0! 74,0] ,917| 7,0

9 919 76,0] 68,0} 76,2) ,917 8,0

10 ,031] 77,0] 69,2| 79,5| 926] 7,8

i 040} 78,5] 69,0} 81,0] ,931] 9,5

Noon.} ,026) 80,0} 69,2] 81,8} ,912] 10,8

1 [29,998] 81,0] 70,0} 83,0] ,881] 11,0

2 (975] 81,5] 71,0] 84,5] ,856] 10,5

3 ol} 81,8} 70,6} 83,5 85) 11,2

4 926] 81,5| 70,0; 81,0] ,807] 11,5

5 926; 80,5} 69,3; 80,0} ,811]) 11,2 |Rain with thun-

6 993} 74,9] 69,2} 77,0) ,839) 10,7 | der and light-

7 938} 77,1} 69,7} 71,0] ,833 7,4 | ning, which

8 ,957; 76,0} 69,0} 72,0} ,855 7,0 continued part

9 30,001] 76,0] 69,9} 72,0] ,89Y 6,1 | of the next day.

10 —‘|29,97¢} 76,0] 68,0] 71,6] ,868| 8,0

11 951} 74,9] 67,5] 71,0{ ,852] 7,4

Midnt.} ,964| 74,8) 70,0) 71,3] ,865 4,8

22 Do...| y 944] 75,1| 70,1| 70,0] ,845] 5,0

2 942] 75,0| 70,5|/ 68,0! ,843{ 4,5

3 ,93¢| 75,0| 70,5| 68,0] ,839/ 4,5

4 9321 74,5! 70,0! 68,¢] ,834] 4,5

5 961] 75,0! 70,6| 67,0] ,862] 4,4

6 POOn t4 ceual) DSsONn) Great onseo 4,7

7 |30,000j 71,4| 68,0| 70,5| ,912| 3,4

8 015} 73,6] 70,0] 74,0] ,912/* 3,0

5 )030) 74,6} 69,5) 74,0} ,932 5,1

10 y040) 74,5] 69,3] 74,5} ,942 5,2

11 028] 74,0] 68,3] .75,0| ,932| 5,7

Noon. | ,000/ 74,5} 69,0/ 78,0] ,902] 5,5

1 29,9731. 75,0} 69;5| 77;5! 58741 5,5

2 SOA Zone 69,0} 83,0] ,847 6,5

3 916} 76,5| 70,0} 79,5| ,813| 6,5

4 ,904} 77,2) 69,5} 80,0 799 vAvG

5 11} 78,0 69,5| 80,0] ,803 8,5

6 ‘Oto 77:5 |. 7001. 77,21 810) 7,5

The above observations were made with a Barometer in every re-

spect the same as the one used on the 21st and 22nd of December last,

except that the bulb of the attached Thermometer is inserted in

the Barometer cistern to better ascertain the Temperature of the mer-

eury. The redaction of the Barometer to 32° is made by the formula

t— 32 x.003 43) anda constant ‘030 added for capillarity.

H. B.

ys tee

244 Horary Observations of the Barometer, &c. (ApRIL,

Note.—On referring to my manuscript meteorological table for the

month of March, I find that an error of ‘05 has been made in the

printed entry of the two barometers at 10 a. mM. on the 21st, which

should stand 29,899 and 29,947. After correcting these, it will be

found that to reduce Mr. Barrow’s observations to terms of the baro-

meter I have hitherto registered 015 must be added to the corrected

column at 32°: and to compare them to the new standard by Nrew-

MAN ‘029 must be deducted.

These discrepancies are nothing more than index errors; but as it

is a matter of some importance to know which gives the correct alti-

tude, and why an instrument commissioned with such precautions from

the best maker at home should stand three or four hundredths of an

inch lower than tubes made, filled, boiled, and measured in Calcutta; I

have with Mr. Barrow’s aid remeasured the scales of the several

instruments respectively from 0 to the 30 inch mark, by a standard

brass scale of TrougHTon’s at the temperature of 95°.

Mr. BarRow’s scale was laid off by himself exactly... ...... 30,000 inches.

My compensation barometer to a scratch on the glass origi-

nally marked by myself with the same care, was found on 30,000

ReMeaAsUTemMent tome GwiteiCOrnects «soc... «eels wakes

NeEwMan’s Strd. Ist trial 29,658 + 1,176—0,814 = 30,020

Qnd do. 28,746 +1,176+0,100= s,02 | 50,020

3rd do. 28,848-+-1,176 ...... = 30,018

The principal difficulty in measuring the column of Newman’s in-

strument was to find the distance from the lower end of the ivory

cone (or the level of the mercury in the cistern) to the upper part of

the cistern: this I made by several trials 1,173 to 1,1 76; Mr. Barrow

made it 1,182 and 1,183; Mr. Pearson 1,172: I have taken it at

1,176 as the mean, and feel confident the error of the whole measure-

ment does not amount to 0,005 inch. The readings therefore of this

instrument in every instance will be ,020 too low.

Iam reluctant to suppose Mr. Newman should have sent me a

barometer at such a vast cost so carelessly verified ; but such seems to

be the case from the above measurement, which is confirmed by the

adding it to the index error above, we find almost the exact amount

by which the new instrument stands lower than my former standard,

which latter has been compared by three opportunities with the Royal

Society’s barometer and found to agree very closely. Mr. Newman

neglected to make this comparison, although I particularly requested it.

Kye os

1836.} Asiatic Society. 245

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 4th May, 1836.

The Hon’ble Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the Chair.

In reference to the resolution of the last meeting, the President stated,

that he had addressed the following letter to the Governor General,

whose acceptance of the office of Patron he had now the pleasure to

announce.

Asiatic Society’s Apartments, May 2nd, 1836.

My Lorp,

I have the honor to inform you, that at a Meeting of the Asiatic Society, held

on the 6th April last, it was resolved ‘‘ that the Right Honorable Lord AucKLanp

should be respectfully solicited to accept the office of Patron ;’’ andit was further

determined, ‘‘ that the President of the Society should be requested to communicate

their wish to his Lordship, and to ascertain his pleasure on the subject.”

As President of the Society, I have the honor to communicate their wishes, and

respectfully to request you will inform me whether it is your Lordship’s pleasure

to accept this Office.

Iam, My Lord,

Your Lordship’s most obedient servant,

E. RYAn.

The Right Hon’ble Lorp AucKLAND.

Government House, May 3rd, 1836.

Sir,

I have to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, and to assure you, that I

gratefully accept the honorable title of Patron of the Asiatic Society, and shall

be glad if, at any time, I should find it in my power to promote the objects of

so excellent and so interesting an Institution.

Iam,

Most faithfully, &c. your’s,

Hon’ble Sir Epwarp Ryan, AUCKLAND.

GiGae GcGs » ee.

Lieut.-Col. CauLrreLp, proposed at the last Meeting, was ballotted for,

and unanimously elected a Member.

Mr. R. W. G. Friru was proposed as a member of the Society by Mr.

James Prinsep, seconded by Mr. W. Martin.

Mr. Wittiam Bruce, proposed by Mr. PEarson, seconded by Babu

Ram Comut Sen.

Mr. Jamus Prinser proposed Dr. Lumevua, as an Honorary Member on

the occasion of his return to China, seconded by Dr. Cornyn.

Read a letter from J. C. Morris, Esq., Secretary Madras Literary

Society, acknowledging the receipt of the Index, and the Oriental Works

lately transmitted.

The Secretary submitted to the Meeting the Proceedings of the Com-

mittee of Papers and Museum Committee, relative to the system of paid

Curatorship, of which the experimental year sanctioned on the 6th May,

1835, had just expired.

(These proceedings are given at length below. ]

The President reminded the Meeting of the alternatives suggested by the

Report of the Committee: Members were to determine whether a paid Curator

should still be maintained, under the certainty of the income of the ensuing year

not being sufficient to cover even the ordinary expences, including the volume

now in the press ;—whether donations could be reckoned upon ;—or whether

the vested capital should be touched. Babu Ram Comut SEN had proposed, that

the latter should be devoted to the publication of the Researches, an applica-

tion which might accord with the original intention of the donors. There was

still an alternative—would any zealous Member undertake to look after the

Museum gratuitously? All other offices in the Society were gratuitous; the

Secretary, the Treasurer, although their labours were very heavy, even the

Librarian, Dr. Buritn1, received no pay. If none offered to lend their aid, it

246 Asiatic Society. [Aprit,

was evident they must have a paid Curator, if the Museum, which was so essen-

tial to the prosperity of the Society, were to be maintained at all.

Babu Ram Comut SEN explained, that the invested sum of 17,000 Rupees

was part of a legacy of 20,000 by the late Mr. Bruce; this sum the Society

had resolved to reserve, and to devote the interest of it to the printing of the

Transactions ; he therefore now wished to see the sum made up to the full amount

once more; the interest 1000 per annum, would pay for the publication of a

volume in four years, about the average hitherto issued.

The Secretary had, with the President, misunderstood his colleagues’ meaning

in Committee ; he seconded his motion now most warmly; as long as the prin-

cipal remained, it put the Society beyond the danger of dissolution: even

if deserted by all its Members, there was a fund to keep up the rooms, the

library, and the name of the Institution at least.

The publication of the present volume was the chief cause of the deficit in

our budget: it would be an expensive volume from the number of plates; but

the prosperity of the Society was even more concerned in the immediate and

full publication of the fossil discoveries in Northern India, than in the main-

tenance of the Museum. 1t should be remembered, that M. Boucnez, the Assist-

ant and Working Curator, would be competent to set up all new specimens, and

preserve the present collection ; and could Dr. Peanson be persueded to lend

his gratuitous supervision for the next year, after that the printing might be

suspended, and he might again be put on pay. There was still another plan by

which 1200 rupees might be saved, that of making Members pay for the Journal

now issued gratis to them, or rather paid for out of the general fund.

Captain PemBerton and Dr. Corsyn considered the support of the Museum

as a main cause of the Society’s flourishing condition, and thought it would

bring an accession of Members that would cover the expence; they therefore

moved as an amendment :—

Resolved, that with reference to the probable advantages ina pecuniary

way to the Society, from the continuance of the Museum, and in the

absence of any other alternative, it is expedient. that the Curator’s esta-

blishment should be maintained another year on the present scale ; and that

the funds necessary for its support, in case of a deficiency of income, should

be supplied from the money now invested in paper.

The amendment was carried by a majority of seven to five, the Pre-

sident not voting.

Library.

Read a letter from His Excellency General Saint Simon, Pair de France,

Governor of the French establishment in India, forwarding on behalf of

Monsieur Garcin De Tassy, a copy of his edition of the text of Kémaripa

in Hindustani, of which he had before presented the translation; with other

copies for distribution.

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 85, 86, 87, 88, were presented by the Asiatic

Society of Paris.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, Nos. 10 and 11, were pre-

sented by the Mad. Lit. Socy. and Auxiliary of the Royal Asiatic Society.

Meteorological Register for March 1836 —by the Surveyor Generul.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 5—by Dr. F. Corbyn.

Read a letter from Dr. Lumaua, presenting to the Society 352 volumes

of valuable and useful Chinese buoks, of which the following is a catalogue.

No.

l. 5vols. Tat hék chung yong, 1st vol. works of the grandson, Tsi-si, and

of a disciple of Confucius.

Shiong-lon-hdr-lon, 2ud and 3rd vols. Confucius’ conversation

with-his disciples.

Shiong mdng-har-mdng, 4th and 5th vols. ditto grandson’s

scholar’s work Mang.

2. 5 vols. ai hék chung yong chti, &c. Explanation of the above, 5 vols.

3. 3vols, Hao-king, Confucius’ works on moral duties.

1836. ]

4. 3-vols.

5. 7 vols

6. 6 vols

8. 2 vols

9. 32vols

10. Yr ,

11. 8 vols.

12. 10 vols.

13. 32 vols.

14. 14 vols.

15. 4 vols.

Von 3 Vols.

17. 4 vols.

18. 38 vols.

19. 1 vol.

20. 5 vols.

21k vols

22.16 vals:

23. 6 vols.

24. 8 vols.

25. 4 vols.

26. 6 vols.

27. 6 vols.

28. 9 vols.

29. 2 vols.

30. 8 vols.

3]. 6 vols.

32. 5 vols.

Boe 2 ayOls.

34. 8 vols.

35. 4 vols.

36. 15 vols.

Sie 2 Vols.

38. 10 vols.

39. 5 vols.

40. 7 vols.

41. 4 vols.

42. 93 vols.

43. 20 vols.

44. 4 vols.

45. 5 vols.

46. 2 vols.

47. A vols.

Asiatic Society. 247

Shi king,

Shit king. } Ancient records collected by Confucius.

Lai kt.

Chan-tsao, Confucius’ works, morai tales.

Ka yit, Ditto and his disciples’ conversations on the creation.

Honghi tsi pen, Chinese Dictionary, by the Emperor of Honghf,

130 years since.

Y-shap yat tsit, Chronology of Kings’ Ministers from the begin-

ning to the Ming dynasty inclusive.

Qontung-san yit, Statistics and Customs of the Canton provin-

ces, a new work of some reputation.

Kad Tai Sing, Laws of the Tai Sing dynasty.

Po-ong. Cases, arguments, and royal decrees of the present

Emperor.

Sai-un-lok, Collection of difficult cases, with decisions.

Léng-to kung-ong, of the same nature.

Tsang sai un lok, additions to No. 15.

Shan-sen-thang kan, history of gods and saints.

Yau-fo-chi nam, the compass of childhood, (on their diseases.’

Kam-kam-moé fo, on Anatomy and Surgery, with prescrip-~

tions.

Vau fo fat fai, (Director of childhood.) medical.

Yau fo tsap shin, Collections of all the authors on diseases of

childhood.

¥-fong pon cho, a glossary of medicaments and ailments.

Wan ping foé chhan, prescriptions for the cure of every case

surgical and medical, of all ages.

Na chan phen, on the moral preservation of the life, and on sanc-

tification.

Chhang tsit sing cha yet shit, Chang tsu sing on horoscopy, or

selection of fortunate days for building, marrying, &c.

Puk-yik, on fortune telling.

Son-fa, the accountant’s guide.

To-tak-king, book of the To (philosophers) religion.

Wud-fat-lay-shing, book of synonymes.

Kong-sit-lot f4, complete epitome of Natural History.

Shing yit hao, mythology of heaven, earth, animals, mankind, (a

kind of Lempriere,) for enriching language, with anecdotes.

Ying-nad, abridged general history.

Yong chi tsuin chit, Yong chi’s collection of poetical extracts.

Ché-tsit, specimens of elegant prose writing, by Cuo-Tsv.

Man-tsuin, collection of best essays.

Tsam long tsiing tsiti, ditto of best poetry on the affections.

U-mdn. Best specimens of ancient composition.

T,hong-tsi. Poetry of the Thong dynasty.

Y-wai-tsdp. Poetry adapted to expression of feelings.

Chung-wa-fung tso kthong. Customs of the Chinese empire.

Shii-pan. Forms of petitions, letters, &c.

Lao-tsing san tsdp, (a new work,) customs, ceremonies, letters, &c.

Kat-yan-y. A poetical book of jests.

Sit-sht king mant shit. Novelties of the four seasons.

Sit-yok. Gems of good writing.

Tson shan. Chinese Directory of general knowledge and court

guide of salaries, &c.

The following Burmese and Talain manuscripts were presented by

Capt. W. Fonny :

Language. Character.

No. 67. Vajira Buddhi Tika, PAli, Barma... 312 p.

68. Wessantara jataka, Danakhanda 3rd, Pali-Talain, Talain. ... 64 p.

69. Ditto. , chha khattiya ditto, ditto..... 40° p.

70. Ditto. , ditto, ditto, GittO: Haye 34 p.

71. Janaka jataka, ditto, ditto, ditto... 2. 652p.

72. Tika nipata, ditto, ditto, aitto: seve 748 %p.

73. Patthéna, ditto, Pali, Barma. .. 672 p.

248 Asiatic Society. {AprRiL,

Pascuan Avucner’s Armenian translation of Mrntron’s Paradise Lost,

was presented by Mr. Jonannes AvDALL.

Mr. Hopeson, Resident in Nepal, forwarded to the Secretary several

_ Specimens of the drawings prepared for his proposed Illustrations of the

Geology of Nepal.

Subscribers had held back from patronizing his work because no mention is

made of price in Mr. H.’s Prospectus. Without consulting publishers at home,

this cannot be done with any certainty ; but asa guarantee that the charge shall

be below actual cost, Mr. HonaGson states that he is willing to devote 3000

rupees towards the publication, of what has already cost him so much to accu-

mulate. Any subscriber may withdraw hereafter should he disapprove of the

terms ; in fact, as he quaintly but truly observes, he does not seek to put himself

under obligation to others, but rather others under obligation to him, by his

devotion of time, labour, and mouey to this grand object*.

Resolved, that the Asiatic Society subscribe for two copies of Mr.

Honeson’s work, and that the Prospectus be circulated among its Members.

The Second volume (or rather the preface) of the Sairul Mutakherin,

was presented by Maulavi AppuLMosip the editor and publisher.

Museum and Antiquities.

An elephant’s tooth, carved all over with images of Gautama, an object

of considerable curiosity and antiquity, procured in a cave near Moulmein,

was presented by Captain W. Foxey.

Dr. Wautcu presented in the name of Captain Bogie, a wooden stand-

ard taken from the Bhotia army.

(See Plate VI. fig. 4.) It is a bit of plank mounted on a staff, painted red,

with an image of Buddha, belligerent (?) on one side, and a Tibetan inscription

on the back, (copy of which has been sent to Mr. Csoma KéGrés1 for transla-

tion. ‘* The Demangari Raja always had it carried before him with great

solemnity, and under the special keeping of a large guard of honor, who how-

ever in the affair of Subang-kotta ran away without it, and it fell into our

hands.”’

A Burmese musical instrument was presented by Ensign Paayre.

A small antique Persian image, dug up by a peasant near Bushire. By

Capt. J. Heunetx. This is depicted as fig. 3, of Plate VI.

Mr. Avpauu presented three Arsakian and one Sassanian coin.

Literary.

Read a note from Jom#aNNEs AvpALL, Esq. on the reverse legend of some

of the Indo-Scythic coins found by Mr. C. Masson at Begrém in the

Kohistan of Kabul.

A census of the Armenian population of the city of Calcutta was also

presented by Mr. J. Avpa.t. ;

Read a letter from Ensign Newson, forwarding for presentation.to

the Society an account of the 3rd of the four Menankabowe states on the

Malay Peninsula.

Read a letter from Major James Low, dated Province Wellesley, 10th

February, forwarding two manuscripts on Siamese literature, games,

and music, and on the nature of the Siamese government, with specimens

of Burmese and Malayan music.

* In any other country it would be termed national object, but here such a

term might be misapplied! In France, the Government, alias the nation,

publishes M. JAcqummonvr’s works,—purchases M. Ventora’s collections,

—devotes an annual grant to tiie Asiatic Society of Paris of 12,000 francs, as

part and parcel of the national instruction system.—We need not pursue the

parallel.

1836.] Asiatic Society. 249

These manuscripts form a part of a mass of papers which the author had

compiled many years ago, with the view to giving a connected account of Siam.

The publications of Mr. CRawrurp and others on that country, which satisfied

public curiosity then, caused him to lay them aside ; the present however contain

facts either new or more circumstantially detailed than hitherto.

A brief description of Masud, or Farid Shakarganj, was received from

Munshi Monan Lat, at Déra Ghizt Khén.

Physical.

Captain W. Fotey submitted a paper, illustrated by specimens, anda

map of the geology of the country in the neighbourhood of Maulmein,

(correctly Maulamyeng.)

It was from a cave in the limestone range on the left bank of the Gyeng

river, the Damatha cavern, that the elephant’s tusk, carved withimages of Buddha,

and the Pali manuscripts above mentioned, were obtained.

A paper by B. H. Hopeson, Esq. on three new species of Paradoxurus,

found in the Nipal valley, was submitted.

A collection of 148 mounted birds, six birds’ nests with eggs, six mam..

malia, one reptile, and the head and legs of various birds, were presented

by R. Inetis, Esq.

These formed part of the Macao museum lately abandoned. It had been

proposed to transfer the whole collection to Calcutta, and as far as concentra-

tion is beueficial, it is to be regretted that this munificent intention had been

abandoned.

A collection of mounted birds, procured by the Curator, in the neigh.

bourhood of Calcutta.

Specimens of shells, presented by Wm. Bruce, Esq.

A stuffed Alligator, preserved and presented by Dr. Evans. A small

specimen was also exhibited to the Meeting by the same gentleman, who

remarks :

‘‘ This is a specimen of the broad-nosed species, common to most parts of

India, and the kind generally found frequenting old tanks, jheels, and nallahs,

and that seldom attains to any very large size. It measures eight feet two inches,

and is evidently not a very young animal.

“‘Tn comparing it with the small specimen in the glass case, which was taken

alive from the Hooghly, it would appear to be a distinct species ; as I find a con-

siderable difference in the proportionate length of the tails of the two animals,

and also in the number of the spinous processes, the large, having only 35

from the insertion of the thigh to the tip of the tail, while the smaller has 42.

The number of carinated tubercles on the neck varies also, but this latter deviation

may arise from difference of age or other circumstances ; they both correspond

as to number and position of their teeth, the upper jaws having 36, the lower 30,

and so disposed as to alternate with each other when closed: the larger animal

has again two perforations at the extremity of the nose for the admission of the

two long sharp teeth of the lower jaw, which are not perceptible in the smaller

one.

‘‘Both have the power of diffusing a strong musky odour when irritated, and

which I find is derived from two glands opening externally, and situated on the

inner side of the ramus of each jaw.’’

A skull of a Chinese, presented by Mr. W. Carr.

An Albatross, anda collection of shells and insects, presented by Mr.

J. T. Pearson.

Proceedings of the Committee of the Papers and the Museum Committee,

assembled at the Asiatic Society’s Rooms on Friday, 29th April, 1836.

The Curator read the following Report upon the Progress of the Museum

during the last year: :

In reporting on the present state of the Museum, we must revert to what it

was last year, when the Society appointed me its Curator; in order to enable

‘you to form an opinion as to the usefulness or otherwise of that appointment.

250 Asiatic Society. [Aprit,

Many here present may recollect at that time the general bad state of the

Museum ; the dark and dirty condition of the cabinets; the want of arrange-

ment of the specimens; and the dampness of the apartments containing them ;

altogether giving a deplorable proof of neglect : end few who do recollect this, will,

I hope, be inclined to doubt that a great improvement has been effected.

The first step was to divide the Museum into two distinet parts; one

consisting of the works of art; the other of the productions of nature. The

numerous valuable specimens of the former, being lost in the rooms below,

were removed into the entrance hall, staircase, and gallery, where they now

are, and where they are seen, as we all know, to the greatest advantage: and

their removal allowed of the apartments they occupied being entirely devoted to

the Natural History portion of the Museum.

On examination, the specimens of Natural History were found, for the most

part, in a very neglected state. In osteology, they were numerous, and some

of them very valuable; but many were more or less mutilated, and the teeth of

the skulls lost; while no catalogue, nor even memorandum, of the greater

portion could be found, The first care was to remedy this: the broken spe-

cimens were repaired, so far as they could be repaired ; and a catalogue was

made, which includes every thing concerning them, that can be gleaned from

the Researches, and other quarters; whether, as to the specimens themselves,

or the names of the donors. In making this catalogue, some difficulty was ex-

perienced from the want of any notices of the specimens ; and from there being

no objects of comparison, by which to discover the species of an animal of

which we had, perhaps, but a horn, or a single bone.

While this was going on, attention was also directed to the formation of a

cabinet of reference to compare the fossil remains, in which the museum is so

rich, with the living congeners, of the animals to which they belonged. This

is, in its very nature, a tedious and laborious work; but already there have

_ been articulated and set up, skeletons of a monkey, weasel, cat, rat, musk-deer,

horse, parrot, and tortoise. The rhinoceros, which was before but badly put

together, has been made the most of that its condition would allow; and an

elephant’s skeleton; and those of another horse and tortoise are being prepar-

ed. Asthis branch of the museum is of the greatest importance, I am anxious

to render it as complete as possible ; and with this view, have written to various

individuals, likely to further our object, who have promised the bones of the

camel, wild buffaloe, large deer of various kinds, the large bullock of Upper

India, the tapir, and the alligator ; and we may expect soon to receive them.

The most valuable specimens in the osteological section of the museum are,

the skulls of the Malacca tapir; the Dugong ; the Van Diemen’s Land tiger,

(whose dentition has been heretofore mistaken in all works of Natural History,

until it was corrected ina paper, published last year in the Journal of the

Asiatic Society, written from this very specimen;) and the jaw-bone of the

gigantic ape shot by Capt. Cornreroor in Sumatra; a specimen unique, and

valuable as the most lasting, and most striking remains of an animal so strange,

that did not this exist, the whole story might be looked upon as a fable.

The specimeus of mammalia are but few in number, and their condition on

my taking charge was any thing but satisfactory. Some were in such a state of

decay as to admit of nothing being done to improve them. Such was the case

of the Thylacinus Cynocephalus, (Van Diemen’s Land tiger,) to which I before

alluded, its skull and paws having been all that could be retained,—a circum-

stance, however, in the individual instance which turned out fortunate, as

thereby its dentition was discovered. This department of the Museum is

increasing, and in a few years I hope it will be worthy of the Society.

In ornithology, although the specimens were rather numerous, their condi-

tion was so bad that four-fifths were thrown away. But great accessions have

been made during the year; and we are promised specimens from all quarters.

I have myself procured in the neighbourhood of Calcutta more than 100 birds ;

and these, together with several valuable donations, have put the ornithological

department on a tolerably respectable footing; and I am therefore proceeding

with the catalogue. This catalogue I propose to make something more than a

mere numerical one, having been favoured with the valuable notes of Mr. C. W.

Smith, with liberty to make extracts from them; which, together with my own

1836.] Asiatic Society. 251

observations during several years, will enable me to correct many errors, both

of description and habit, that have been committed by the best naturalists re-

garding the birds of India. I may here state, that by following this plan, the

Catalogue of the Museum of the Asiatic Society may be made a work of autho-

rity, such as to do credit to the Institution by which it is published.

The reptiles in the Museum are numerous and valuable; but they cannot at

present be properly displayed, owing to the want of jars, in which to place

them. Among them are many of the rarer Indianserpents. To my friend Lieut.

Cuiene, the Society is indebted for many specimens during the past year.

In fishes the collection is not very extensive, though it contains some of

the rare kinds. These also cannot be shewn, until our supply of jars and bot-

tles shall arrive from Europe. In this branch, Lieut. Monrriore, of the In-

dian Navy, and Mr. Suaw, of the Surveying Vessel Flora, have been the

principal donors.

There was no cabinet of insects belonging to the Society. The whole of the

specimens in this department consisted but of a few preserved in spirits; and

those purchased along with the Sylhet collection of shells. During the rains I

employed my servants to collect ; and they procured what may be considered a fair

sample of the Bengal Coleopterous and Hemipterous insects of the season. They

consist of very many genera and species, and in individual specimens amount to

several hundreds innumber. The collection is purposely rich in duplicates, to al-

low of some being placed in the cabinet of tue Society ; and sent to various societies

and scientific men. I am also selecting for the Society’s cabiret a series of

duplicates from my own; which, as it is the result of the labour of nine years in

Bengal, Behar, and Orissa, contains many specimens but rarely to be procured.

At present our whole collection is scarcely large enough for systematic arrange-

ment ; the specimens therefore are placed according to their locality and donors;

a plan which has also the advantage of marking their geographical distribution,

The American land and fresh-water shells, presented by Dr. Lea, and those

from Sylhet ; together with afew specimens presented by Lieut. Hutton, and a

small number of marine shells, composed the Society’s collection of shells. We

have also hada fewpresented during the year; and I have been enabled to add

considerably to this branch of the Museum, by collecting the land, fresh-water,

and marsh shells of the neighbourhood of Calcutta, and by transferring duplicates

from my own cabinet.

I may sum up this part of the report by stating, that, during the past year

there have been added to the Society’s Museum, in osteology, 19 crania, nine

complete skeletons, and between three and four hundred detached bones of

various animals; 12 specimens of mammalia; !33 mounted birds; from 30 to

50 reptiles, and 15 fishes ; in all upwards of 500 specimens of the vertebrated

animals ; and of the invertebrata, we have had 150 shells, several crustacea, and

several hundred insects: that many ofthese are rare and valuable ; many as yet

undescribed, and one bird, the Urinorynchus Griseus, is all but unique.

To facilitate the collection of specimens for the Museum, a paper of brief

directions for collecting and preserving them was written: this has been exten-

sively circulated. A paper on the same subject was also composed, in which ample

details were given; and this was published in the Journal of the Society. We

are now reaping the benefit of these instructions, and we shall do so still more

as the seasons for collecting come round.

With reference to catalogues, I have before stated that, that of the osteologi-

cal section of the Museum is now in the printer’s hands; as is also that of the

mammalia. The catalogue of the birds is in progress; and in consequence of

the aid I shall derive from Mr. Smiru’s notes, it will, I trust, be valuable when

completed. That of the reptiles and fishes cannot be undertaken until we have

the means of displaying those objects. That of the shells must be delayed

until the promised description of the land and fresh water shells, by Mr. Ben-

SON, shall be published. Inthe mean time, no want of a catalogue wil! be felt in

this branch of the Museum ; the name of each specimen being written, together

with its locality, on the ebony tablet, upon which the shell is placed.

One very important object to the Society is, I conceive, to become the means

of extending a knowledge of the natural productions of India, to scientific men

in other countries. I have prepared duplicate specimens of land and fresh-

oe ie

252 Asiatic Society. [AprRiL,

water shells to send to England, France, America, the Cape of Good Hope,

and the Isle of France. I have also prepared duplicate specimens of insects

from my collection, to send to various scientific societies and individuals in

England. And I have sent some specimens of birds, purchased in Caleutta, to

a gentleman, Monsieur Viror, who is celebrated for his labours in Taxidermy at

the Cape. These were transmitted through Sir Coartes D’Oyxy, who had

kindly undertaken to forward them; and I took the liberty of sending them in

the name of the Society ; though, of course, as I was unauthorised to do so, I

did not burthen the Society with the expence of the purchase. It has been

proposed to Monsieur Virot, to send African birds to our Museum in exchange,

and Sir CHARLES has no doubt of his acceding to the proposition. Should he

agree, the Society will perhaps give me permission to forward to him the dupli-

cates now upon the table.

With reference to the financial part. Of the 50 rupees monthly for contin-

gencies, I have given 40 to M. Boucuez for his assistance ; and subsequently

increased his salary to 50 Compy.’s rupees, by reducing my own from 150 Sicca

to 150 Compy.’s rupees ; by this the Society also is a gainer to the amount ofa

few rupees. Of the sum for contingencies, all has been expended, and about 180 in

excess. This sum I am prepared to refund, should it be thought proper for

me to doso.

It was stipulated, that I should give up my occupation as Editor of the

India Journal of Medical Science; and that I should rent a house near the

Society’s, if procurable, or entertain the means of daily attendance. I gave up

the Editorship of the Journal on the publication of the number following my

appointment. But with regard to the house, I found insurmountable difficulties

in the way; none being procurable but the one immediately opposite, and that

at arent far exceeding my means to pay. I had recourse, therefore, to the

alternative, and my attendance has been regular, always once, and generally

twice, a day.

With reference to the present year, (should my appointment be renewed,) I do

not anticipate the expences will equal those of the past; the cabinets, being

now nearly complete, I propose to finish the Ornithological and Conchological

catalogues, and to arrange the fishes, reptiles, and insects. With Mr. Prinsep’s

aid too, the fossil remains will be examined and the new ones described. While

generally, the new specimens in various departments of the science will be pre-

pared and arranged in the Museum, as they come in. We have reason to believe

these will be very numerous.

Such have been the labours of the past year, and what I propose for the

present. I could have wished to have done more, particularly in completing

the catalogues ; but the difficulties in arranging a cojjection of Natural History

from. the beginning, are greater than any one not conversant with them can

imagine. In all departments there was here much to be done; and of some

there was not a vestige when I took charge. The Museum will now, I

trust, go on thriving, and be worthy the name of the Society to which it

belongs. Its establishment, as a focus into which may be collected the natural

treasures of the East, isan object I have long had at heart: before I was a Mem-

ber of the Society, several years ago, I wrote to the President, and proposed

what has now been accomplished, and what it will be my pride to be permitted

to sustain. J intreat you to carry it on upon its present footing, for at least

another year; when I am sure you will be as anxious for it to continue, as I am

myself. The attention of mankind is now directed to the natural sciences, as

is sufficiently proved by the publication of so many books concerning them; and

none is more attractive than zoology. To the attention the Society has lately given

to these sciences, the great increase of Members is to be attributed ; an increase

during the last year unparalleled in its annals ; but which I believe will be fully

equalled or surpassed in the present. Its reputation will also, I doubt not, be

as much enhanced by the researches of its members in Natural History, as it has

been, and is, by their labours in the learning of the East.

Gentlemen, upon this point I may quote the words of our illustrious founder,

who said, that, the inquiries of the Society ‘‘ will be extended to whatever is

performed by man, or produced by nature.’’ The former part of this prediction

1836.) Asiatic Society. 253

our predecessors have accomplished with ability and success ; itis our’s to perform

the rest. And safely may we prognosticate, that, under those who now direct

its proceedings, the Asiatic Society of Bengal, will, not only fully uphold the

reputation it has so well merited, by inquiries into whatever is performed by

man: but, also maintain it, and increase it, by researches into the productions

of nature.

J.T. Pearson, Curator, Museum, As. Soc.

Calcutta, 1st May, 1836.

Resolved, that the Report be adopted and presented at the next Meeting,

and the excess of expenditure for contingencies above the sum noted on

the 6th May, 1835, (about 200 rupees) be recommended to be sanctioned.

Resolved further, that the Committee are highly pleased with the ar-

rangements adopted by Dr. Pearson in the Museum, and with the pro-

gress it has made under his supervision ; and they have.no hesitation in

recommending to the Society a continuation of the same system which has

proved so beneficial and effective during the experimental year.

The Treasurer, Babu Ram Comut Sen, having laid before the Committee

a statement of the funds of the Society, and an estimate of the calls on

them during the ensuing year.

Balance. ef Cash. a0). eet OPE Soa a 9

Government Papel) ces. ode ee see eee te,000 Ol? 0

18,825 15 9

Number of Subscribing Members, 92X64=per an. 5,888 0 0

Estimated Receipts. SS

Balameeio# Washiy 2% ali. te silat cise ales dle ds ) 45825 16079

Msfynated Collectians;).\. i.e. sees ve voce O,H00N (00/0

Interest on Paper, sb apetye. 8 875 0 90

Income, —— 7,600 15 9

Estimated Charges,

Establishment and Charges,.............. 2,875 0 0

Cabinets for fossils, &c. (ordered),.. 310 0 0

GucHAl SUDSCrIPtION, Vr. 22 oe sss cme pes sien eet 4,200) Of 10

Fuepalrs of the! House, 1.0. on cn sel: caiecinc 200 0 0

Printing 20th Volume, 5 opicIge OB cme Mes sO. Wart

One month Curator’s salary due,.......... 200 0 0

Excess on Contingent Bills of do. say,...... 200 0 0

Total Charge, — — 7,985 0 0

Ape Money advanced by the Secretary for } 186 15 10

abinets, &c.,

8,171 15 10

Deficiency on the ensuing year, ............ HY A ae | ee |

——

Resolved, that upon the above view of the means of the Society, it does

not seem possible to provide for the payment of 200 rupees per mensem,

for the support of a Curator’s establishment during the ensuing year,

without encroaching upon the vested funds of the Society. ‘The Com-

mittee therefore leave it for the consideration of the Members at large,

whether some other means may not be adopted for raising the amount

necessary for this very desirable object. Various plans have been sug.

gested in Committee, such as ;—1. reservation of the vested fund for the

publication of the Transactions ; 2. voluntary donations, from such mem-

bers, as may be interested in the support of the Museum, and from the

public ; 3. charging for admission of visitors. These plans the Committee

deem it advisable to leave open to discussion in the Society at large,

254 Miscellaneous. [ApRIL,

trusting that some expedient may be devised for upholding the Museum,

which they do not think it will be possible to maintain in a state of effici-

ency without having 2 paid Curator.

Epwarp Ryavy,

Chairman.

Asiatic Society’s Rooms, \

April 29, 1836.

X1I.—Miscellaneous.

1.—Postseript to the Account of the wild Goat of Nepdl, printed in the Sept.

No. of the Journal, page 490. By B. H. Hopeson, Esq.

Carefully as I thought my account of the wild goat of Nepal, recently

published by you, was executed, I find that there is one material error in

it, viz. the statement that the species has only two teats or mamma. A

recent dissection of a fine male led to the notice of the fact that there are

four teats, which fact was confirmed by the examination of two live fe-

males. There can, therefore, be no question that this species of goat has

four teats: and the circumstance is so remarkable, that I propose to sub-

stitute the name Quadrimammis or four-teated, for the popular name of

Jharal, under which I described it. Deer are distinguished by four teats,

goats and sheep, heretofore, by two; the intermediate genus antilope, by four

or two, in the several species. Capra Quadrimammis vel Jharal, by its four

teats, offers a singular and unique approximation (in this genus) to Cervus ;

and another proof that the infinite variety of nature cannot be designated

by our artificial signs and peremptory divisions. Antilope, Capra, and

Ovis, how shall we contradistinguish them? Solid-cored horns, in the

first, is no unerring mark: and now we have a species of the second, and

a beardless species too, abandoning his congeners to ally himself with

Cervus, quoad the number of mamme.

2.—Notice of the Basilosaurus, a new marine fossil Saurian, discovered in

America. By H. Pinvineron, Esq.

The discovery of this most gigantic fossil species is due to Judge Bree

of Arkansas, by whom, in 1834, the first fossil vertebra was found in the

marly banks of the Washita river, in the Arkansas territory. In the

latter end of the year, more vertebra, fragments of the lower jaw, &c.

were discovered in Alabama, about 30 miles north-west of Chairborne ;

another portion of jaw, with several teeth ; an os humeri, several immense

vertebra ; numerous fractured ribs ; a molar tooth; the extremity of a

tibia ; portion of the shoulder, pelvis, &c. &c. were now found: and

recently (May 1835), another skeleton has been discovered, and a large

collection of the fossil remains is promised. Near the same spot a speci-

men of the caudal vertebre of the Mosaurus or Maestricht monitor was

also found.

It is assumed, that the bones, though great disparity exists in their

proportions and size, constitute portions of one species, and the structure

of the lower jaw, which is hollow, place it amongst the Saurians as a lost

genus. The comparative smallness of the bones of the extremities seem

to indicate the tail as the principal organ of motion, and the superior

extremities must have been fins or paddles.

The train of vertebra extending upwards of 100 feet in length in one

locality, and estimated te be 150 feet in the Arkansas specimen, shew, that

this gigantic animal must have probably attained upwards of this length,

1836.] Miscellaneous. 255

meriting thus most fully the name Basilosaurus ; which our honorary

member, Dr. Haruan, Professor of Comparative anatomy to the Philadel-

phia Museum, has bestowed upon it. Inthe Transactions of the Geologi-

cal Society of Pennsylvania, which I have placed upon the table for the

inspection of members, previous to sending it up to Dr. Fatcowmr, is a

detailed paper by Dr. Haruan, and two beautiful plates, illustrating this

splendid discovery.

H. P.

eel

3.—The Balloon.

We should not be exercising due vigilance as editor of a scientific

journal, were we to omit recording the first ascent of a balloon from the

plains of Bengal on the 21st of the past month ( March.) M. Rosertson,

the aeronaut, a Frenchman, who had made sixteen previous ascents in

various parts of Furope, came expressly to India for the purpose of asto-

nishing the natives with the novel tomasha of a human being wafted out of

sight into ethereal space in his fairy car: and such competition is said to

have prevailed at Paris*, for the glory of being the first, that M. Rosert-

son was fain to hurry hither before the balloon itself was ready. The

bad success of his attempt may be partly attributed to the imperfect

manner in which this indispensable article was supplied here.

The local and pecuniary arrangements seem to have been very ill judged;

the selection of a spot of difficult access, at the further end of Garden

Reach, tended only to prevent those who had subscribed from attending ;

choking the only land road, and the river, with non-paying visitors, who

expended, what would have amply remunerated the aeronaut, in convey-

ances thither! The distillation of the gas was effective, and the balloon

rose well, but ere it had attained a mile of height, it was seen to return so

rapidly earthward, that great apprehensions were entertained for the

traveller’s neck. It appeared to us that when M. Roserrson entered

the car, and attached the valve-strings to the netting, the valve was pulled

open, thus enabling the gas to escape freely from the first ; for the silk was

found quite sound at its return. The aeronant himself talked of a sudden

collapse of the balloon from condensation of the gas; but this was a

deception: when it began to fall rapidly, the resistance of the air below

pressed up the slack of the balloon like an umbrella, and aided in driv-

ing out the gas from the open valve above ; in fact, the car was supported

in its descent as by a parachute, and could not consequently quicken its

pace to any dangerous extent.

The experience of such an accident should very much aid to increase the

confidence of the aeronaut ; for it is plain that with a little contrivance the

balloon may in all cases be made to act as a parachute on the loss of its

gaseous contents. We trust the next ascent will be made under more auspi-

cious circumstances, and we hope that it may be possible to turn it to some

small use in a scientific point of view, by ascertaining at least the decre-

ment of heat and moisture at increasing altitudes, as well as the height of

the reverse current of the upper atmosphere.

(This notice could not find a place last month.—Mr. Rosertson has since

departed for the more cheering prospects of an ascent at Lucknow. ]

* This competition reminds us of the rivalry in America to supply us with

ice, which has at last led to a confirmed and durable scheme for regaling us with

that luxury at a very cheap rate. Having noticed at length the first ice cargo,

we have thought it unnecessary to recur to the subject ; but the completion ofa

permanent ice-house willenable us hereafter to judge, of the best mode of preserving

the frozen element. The tan bed intended for this object, from becoming wet, had an

opposite effect, and was indeed nearly the cause ofa conflagration! while the car-

bonic acid gas extricated from its fermentation, killed a man who incautiously

descended to examine the chamber.

“ISUE UILG OY} Wor TOUULUT UOUIUIOD 9Y} UL PAI UdWUNAYSUL 9y3 pue *YIIM pasuadsrp seM afdiound sry3 ‘ainjesaduiay 103 paydar109 st 14940

] 94} UL ayeos at[} Jo O1az ayy

yorya Aq aqn} uonesueduios ay} ur sem i[NeZ 9Y) JOYJEYyM UleIAaA0Se O,T, *piepuejs Jaui10y Au Uey} JoMOT *W 'd F Ie GFO'

pue’w -v OL 78 Zey" Spueys yjUOUL si} JeJONIOIeG s,uRUIMaR

*Arp ‘surxo}s yuanbarq “UOOSUOUI * MS 10 (6°OIT SL JOLLe° S| eS | 6°06 (ert | TEs 699° {069° 06 | #2 | 1°8 | 0°98] 08a‘ 11z9s‘ga|26Z‘ GC1'6S, “URI

nes Fm | a |

beraceeecalll | 8 I | a es ee es, eee

“reap op op “MS "MS =—-*MS STIL |a°rZ 89 | 9°21 | F°91 | 66 |66r'T | FSO‘ lecc‘|Zog* | Ze | e8 | Ie | Z¢Zeh Lac‘ tleee 89° |1cof | o¢

Il ‘wind op op “MS ‘8 ‘8 B°COL Jo's $8 | SOT) LOT | 2°26 (6661 | 0906 |6Ss‘lo0e* | ze} OZ | HZ | 92a] cee‘Tlages 189° |ac9 66

“4s1UU *xeayo *reayo “MS dye 8°ZOT |Z‘ O'FT | OEE | O16 leZpT | Sor‘ \oeo‘legs’ | ¥6 | 8°9 | GL | B98! FIZ TITRE. gol’ {Lele 86

*a10 ‘urn “yawns *azeU ‘MS —"H "HAH FILO [OFOT I2eFZ £8 | GOL | UTL | 116 |6zbs1 | 108‘ Joeg'|z6e° | e6 | o°Z | 0°8 | P20) gee LIFES! O6L. \PEd Lg

veug “as "uno op sae he ve B96 |ei9L | 98 | 1.01 | BG | L«16 ogr‘t | gBt‘ joro'lens’ | 16 | 1° | 9°8 | gael Goes IIZP® loed* VoL’ | 9%

*1e9]9 op op ‘So MS MS eee ¥8 | O*OT | B°TT | 2°26 | ros‘L | 860° \6u9'|1¢¢° | ge | 06 | $01) 9°29) coe Tlones 89" FEOF GG

x “Ap amu op op "MS ‘SMS eee £8 | OU) GIL | B16 |paPT | SIT‘ |69c‘|p1o° 06 | 2's | eG U‘L8] 6261 80%. 189° 6£9* iXa

iS “yeaa op “ead “MS ‘Ss "MS OSOL 1°92 G6 | aL | £°6 | O16 |o6s‘T | 69T \6se‘|For* | ge | 8°8 | a6 38g) Ge‘TiopE® |eso* |Le9° £3

me *y7nuM9 op ‘und “119 ‘s ‘s °S 8°66 |9°LL BL | gi€T | 9ST | o*68 \e6esT | Oza‘ 6I9'6e9° | a6 | o'2 | 1°8 | T'eal eos T\THF* |For 199° | &%

S - uy op op ‘Ss 'MS "AIS BLIL {L‘¢L SE | GEG) HFG | E°e6 |eLe‘L | GFOS |ezolIZe° Fes | LZ | eZ | 62e| aoa'tl90p leds eile | 12

Ss *Azey op op "MS = "MS “MS SLIT 10692 PL | GST | SET | 1°6 lope‘ | OTIS l6co‘lade* 1 68 | 86 | G8 T’6g| g9e*tisop. JoLL. |FoL* 06

x op op op “MAS "MS TM B62I j0°SL PS | 0108 | IAT | gE6 |e6s'T | BLO‘ [OLoat9* J ze | sIt| 901] L°Z9| Gee'TlbLE. ers" golf | 61

sy op op *xea[o ‘Ss * MS ‘s SPST \ohL 99 | 060 | B°ZT | 2°26 Ieog'T | Ler‘ |11Zl099* Foe | e'9 | $2 bog] sea'tizec’ Lea. |B6L5 81

S op op “1nuwMn9 “N ‘S| “MS f°S2L |8°69 08 | GIT | SOL | ees jope’t | O6e* logZ\289° | 8 | £6 | 1°9 G‘9g) 062° T\0ZO‘ Jor. |F08 At

‘S aug op ‘uns uoIs | “ms “MS “MAS 1900 Ie‘QoL |e‘aZ 98 | $8 | PB | B16 [GFR I | OFS legolero® | F6 | L‘F | 16 £%og) TLU'T|0FOS | TIe® 922° 91

= “1nurns op wi10}s Aavoy] “MS "AS ) S°€6 — |0‘69 98 | LB | 66 | 6°98 |B2o'L | SbF IZe2‘Ip89° Tos | eZ | 0°8 cpg] 2811 |Z99% jePrat |LI8 cl

~ +Aqstur op ‘IMu‘I[nUuINO}| "MS ‘Ms ‘s BOL |1°SZ P8 | 66 | BOT | 1°26 \zOr°T | TOL‘ lezoleZe* | a6 | 8¢ | 9 £°1] OLB 1\c0c" eLL< jEel’ +I

2 “IID ‘uno op ‘op "MS = * MS S PSIT jochs 18 | O*@T | PST | 6°z6 |1€9°T | E905 |teelFEs* | es | O's | O'R B'gg] BEE‘ T/L6E. |ceL® |90L" 1

8 op op op ‘s "MS "Ss tha C3) Ga 7 £9 | HOT | UIST | e*16 [BGR | Seas 16TZ«{2L9° | 06 | FZ | 9° | e*o9| I92Tloo9* 198° eee! | IL

= op “qe9[o *1ea]9 "MS "MS ‘Ss S6IL |e‘es IL | ST | BET | 6°06 [ILP‘T | 098" |TeZ\089° | F6 |S | $e | E99] Sa‘TlaGe! [IFRS 908" 7 OL

= op Bittle) “TMuino “MS "MS MSS e62l [pel OL | °9T | Z'PL | 8°06 |pE‘T | Lee* {1 29*|929° | ce | GF 8h | 1'¢g] TPL'TIPS9s |c6L. |eLZ™ 6

| op op " s1Ra]o ‘MS "MS “MS HCOL label 68 | L'8 | 98 | E06 |10PST | TtES |eeZ‘\a69* | 96 | 1's | 9¢¢ | FcR BLI‘TI169* 698" |6z8" | 8

“Kavy op “und ‘Ms MS “AAS BOOL [pire | €8 | OFT | S°2I | 606 larr‘T | caat |pez {980° | eG | 0°9 | TZ | orcal clz‘tleco* |Lea* a

op op ~pnos ‘ag. MS) “MS OTIT eel P9 | £°61 | 9°6T | 0-68 jece’T | Oke leagep9" | 6 | 6 | ¢°9 | 2°zel OL0‘TloEL! ose [Flee | 9

, “ITnuins op *UI W11038 *as ‘as cf Z°96—-|8‘99 ZB | 901 Lal | o*/8 |FLa1 | oes lpos*|199° | eg | 28 8°6 | L6g8} SII‘T/8PZ‘ £98" 618" ¢

“Apnoyo op “Azey ‘MS "MS “AIS GEOL j0‘0L 6L | BIL | LET | g2g lozet | 6ab* leszlgel* $6 | 0S | fe | b'zg] 680°T|06L° 648 Gr8e v

op oP op “AS “MU * AA N €6IL 12°89 6°28 jere'l | Lev logs|aed* | og | 8 ‘Ol oer! pzal E8t'tiecl* ces bL8° €

op op “reap “AS =*MS = * MS S66 |8°69 LL | 9°81 | S°GL | 1*6g |pFE‘T | OTP O9L|SeL* | 1g | TOL) 911] B18] PETTIGSLé 6eef 668" Z

aug ou *7S1Ut “MS * MS ‘oO OSOT [ats 1°88 /068'I | OS‘ lopZ4|269°62] o6 |S‘ | Zo | fog] 990Tlg6L ‘sclera’ logs‘6a} 1

rare ~ re u eI og Hr o = a>) 2 aloois wot co} el yo] op Swot oa yg

: 4 Pte ~a2 2s Wed ee eel23|S3|2| BF | ®s/pebgiazl 25] aac 2 | ez leveled s

‘ is E ° a 5 o SRS a eel] ¢s C9 ff OBR SE Gal ero tS eT INS ala

= : E. F E. = S| Se 2e | pai ee ool. aleeole | om eel es St | tal RSISEO oO

: oe 2 ga eo Bred her eg foo [ar S| RE "(ORIS@ ei rl ol “Ss Fel F | GR | SeISss] s

E ae Sale: Kg AC ed as a ag

ewan a es SL i ee 2

| *SouleInxX 5 ©

*TOYyIeIA MA *pulm Reap eo enL “MW *d f 78 SUOTIVAIESqO ‘W °V QT 98 SUOTIZAIESqO os

1a1sisoy

“9881 ‘qudp fo yjuopy ay? Lof ‘njIna1n) ‘a0fQ hussp ay) qn day ‘sajsthaay 7091b0]0.10a7a FAT

256

JOURNAL

Seer AST ATEC “SOCTETY.

No. 53.—May, 1836.

1.—Johéle and its former Dependencies of Jompdle Gominchi. By Lieut.

Newso.p, A. D. C. to Brigr. General Witson, C. B.

Johéle. Of Johdle, the third of the four Menangkabowe states, still

less is known than of Rumbdéwe and Sungie Ujong.

An Englishman of the name of Gray, (whose information is to be

taken, however, with caution,) is said to have been the only European

who has penetrated into the interior of this state. He passed through

part of it in 1827, on his return to Malacca from Pahang, whither he

had performed a journey overland, across the peninsula, to barter

opium for the gold dust of the latter place.

His route lay through Naning, part of Rumbowe, Srimenanti,

Jampéle, Ulu Seruting, Ulu Braugh, and Ulu Pahang. The journey was

performed in 14 days.

From Tabu, in Naning, to Jompéle, he was four days passing over

mount Lanjut, to the villages of Gadang and Tanjong; over mounts

Miko, Pabi, and Punting Pahat, through the villages of Passir, Juno,

and Pila, in Srimenanti; and from Pila to Jompéle, “ one day’s

walk.”

Mr. Gray describes the country he passed through, to have been

in a state of high cultivation, particularly at Miko, and in the vales of

Punting Pahat, Jiéino, and Passir.

He observes that the paddy at Miko is preferable to that of Malacca,

and that it is supposed by the people that the ground there is better

for cultivation, one gantang of seed never producing less than a hun-

dred-fold.

The produce of mount Miko is sapan wood, dammer, and canes of

the species termed Pinang-lawyers in abundance. Jompdle, he con-

® 21

258 Johole and its former Dependencies of (May,

jectures, to be about 90 miles distant from Malacca. Pahang is esti-

mated at 300 miles distance from Jompoéle. From Jompdéle to Pahang

the journey is by boat down the river Seruting to the large lake of

Braugh, called Tassek Braugh; which is said by Mr. Gray to be

nearly fifty miles in circumference, and is formed by the flow of water

from the neighbouring mountains.

If this account be correct, the lake Braugh exceeds in dimensions

the recently discovered inland lakes in Sumatra.

The natives, however, have described this lake to me to be of much

less extent; narrow but long. Its communication with the Pahang

river, which empties into the China sea, is by a river called the

Braugh.

Regarding the navigation of these rivers, Mr. Gray observes: “ In

some parts of the Seruting and Braugh, a brig might go up, and in

other parts, nothing but a small boat; on account of the water being

above the fallen trees, so that the boat must be lifted before it can

proceed, on account of the overflowing banks of the river.”

The Pahang river, from the place where it receives the waters of

the Braugh, down to the town of Pahang, is wide and deep. These

streams are deepest in the months of November, December, and Janu-

ary. From the month of March to that of August, Mr. Gray was

informed, that it is impossible to proceed from the Seruting river to

Pahang, on account of the paucity of water. The general depth of

these rivers, in January, he ascertained to be between 40 and 60 feet ;

but on his return in February, he found their depth diminished by one-

half.

There are afew villages on the banks of these rivers, but for the

most part they are covered with lofty forests, tenanted by the rhino-

cerous, tapir, tiger, elephant, and scarcely more civilized Jacoon.

Mr. Gray met with great kindness and hospitality from the inha-

bitants of the different estates through which he passed. He fell,

however, a sacrifice to his exertions, dying of jungle fever, contracted

during the journey, twenty-five days after his return to Malacca.

Boundaries.—Johdle is bounded on the north by Ul« Pahang and part

of Rumbdwe : to the south by part of Naning and Miar or Segdmet : to

the east by Segamet, and to the west by Srimendnti and part of Rumbdwe.

The boundaries with Malacca are from Bukit Puttés to Battang Malacca,

and from Battang Malacca by Bankéng* Chéndéng to Mount Ophir.

* Bankéng Chéndong is a large tree, growing in the forest that separates Assahan

from Mount Ophir. The tree was still in existence when I visited Mount Ophir

in 1833. te

1836.] Jompole Gominchi. 259

With Segdmet and Méar, its boundaries are Murbdwe sa rdtis (the

hundred Marbdwe trees) and Binkéng Chéndéng; with Rumbdwe, Bukit

Pabz ; and with Srimendnti, Bukit Pila.

Population, &c.—The population of Johdle is estimated at 2,080

inhabitants. The principal villages are Nuri, Londong, Tney, Taman,

and Bennong.

Johéle is governed by a Panghili and Ampat Suki. The former,

like his brother chief of Sungie Ujéng, is elected by the Siékis, and by

the Batin di ablas, or twelve heads of the Jacoons.

The name of the present Panghili is Anu Brxr, or Banouita,

and his title Johan Lélah Percasseh ; he resides at Nuri, is an intelli-

gent looking person ; plain, simple, and collected in manner, and much

respected by his people.

The tribes are those of Bododnda, Sa Melbngan, Tiga, Battu, and

Miinkal. |

Srimendnti and Jompdéle, were formerly considered dependencies of

Johéle, but now assert their independence, as also does Gominchi. The

Panghili, Lussye, ofthe latter place died lately, and his brother Mauam-

mEpD Kari succeeded him. Pdéndok Passir, a small state under the

influence of Srimendnit, was also a dependency of Johdle, and is ruled

by a petty Panghili of its own.

Besides the usual rights of revenue, the Panghilii of Johdle levies

ten per cent. on the produce of the tin mines, together with a tax on

the gold of Gominchi, which will be shortly alluded to.

Trade.——The trade of Johdle consists chiefly in gold dust; 20 catties

of which are said to be produced annually. Tin, about 300 piculs. Fruits,

ratans, jaggery, and fowls are brought in considerable quantities down

to Malacca.

Jompéle.—Jompéle was anciently a dependancy of Johdle, but is now

nominally governed by Raja AuianeG, a son of the third Menangka-

bowe prince, Raja Ham. The Panghila and Ampat Séku exercise

almost independent sway.

The name of the present Panghilé is Hassan; the tribes are those

of Bodoanda, Sa Meléngan, Anédk Malacca, and Tiga Bittu.

Jompole is in the high road of the Pahang traders travelling across

the peninsula to Malacca; it is situated on a small river of the same

name, which flows into the Muar river, [one of the largest streams on

the western coast of the peninsula,] by which it has communication

with the Straits of Malacca. By the rivers Seruting and Braugh, an

easy intercourse from November or October to February is kept up

with Pahang and the eastern coast. The Raja here levies a duty on

the opium, tobacco, cloths, iron utensils, salt, &c. passing through

2 2

260 Johéle and its former Dependencies of (May,

Jompéle to Pahang, as wellas on the gold dust and silk cloths of Pahang

returning to Malacca.

Jompéle produces a considerable quantity of tin, sapan wood, rice,

dammer, ratans, and a little gold, which is sent down the Muar river

to Malacca (eight days pull), and also to Pahang.

The population of Jompdle is estimated at 2,000; it is divided into

three Miikims ; viz. those of Limbajon, Turéntong, and Qualla Lenney.

Gold.—The following account of the gold mines at Chimendros, with

the exception of the part relative to the assaying of the metal, which is

from personal observation, is almost entirely drawn from native

information.

Bukit Chimendros is a hill situated in Gominchi, a territory subject

to the Panghiléi of Johdle, and bordering on the eastern frontier of

Naning. It is covered and surrounded by an uninhabited forest of

great extent, intersected by numerous rivulets, which derive their source

from the hill.

Veins of quartzose rock run over it at various depths (generally

from 12 to 20 feet) below the surface, forming the matrix in which*

the gold is found in small broken streaks.

The rock is enclosed in a bed of a sort of white clay, indurated more

or less, termed Ndpal.

The method pursued by Chinese and Malays for separating the

metal from its matrix resembles that adopted by the Hungarian

miners, with this exception, that the process of amalgamation is not

practised by the former for this purpose. The Kling assayers of gold,

however, avail themselves of it in their vocation,. as will presently

appear.

The Malay miners, as soon as the precise spot and minute have

been determined by their diviners, Pawangs, or other charlatans

supposed to be skilled in discovering the hidden treasures of the earth,

commence clearing the ground of trees, brushwood, &c. and then

proceed to remove the roots and vegetable soil by means of Biliongs

and Chonkoles, (the Malayan adze and spade,) until the bed of Napal

is laid bare. These implements are now put aside, and a heavy

sort of iron crow-bar, (Perjong) is had recourse to.

The first layer of Napal is soft and whitish; the second has a red-

dish tint. The last is a black incrustation resembling brick in hard-

ness, and hence called by the natives Tambrker Quali ; this is commonly

two fingers’ breadth, in thickness, and being removed, discovers the

* A specimen of this rock, in which a small portion of gold is imbedded, or

rather disseminated, has been forwarded to the Society.

1836. ] Jompole Gominchi. 261

white vein of rock, the matrix of the gold, and termed the Reting. It

is generally between three and four feet in diameter: underneath lies

a bed of whitish earth, below which gold is never found.

The next process is that of breaking up the Beting, for which pur-

pose the Perjong is employed. From the extreme hardness of the

rock this is a very laborious and tedious task. The coarse pieces are

then pounded in a sort of large mortar cut from the quartz rock. The

pulverized stone is then passed through sieves (Kisye) of ratan, and

carried in small baskets to a running stream, where the smaller stony

particles are washed away, while the gold dust, with the grosser pieces,

sink to the bottom of the conical vessel in which it is subjected to the

action of the stream.

The refuse is picked out, and the gold dust again carefully washed

and collected in a cocoanut shell or leaf of the Pallas tree, and con.

veyed to the Bongsal, where it is dried by means of a red hot piece of

charcoal being repeatedly passed over its surface. After the adherent

finer particles of the sand have been removed, it is weighed into

quantities, generally of one tael each, which are carefully folded up in

small pieces of cloth.

These packets constitute the Bunkals of commerce.

In Sumatra, according to Marspen, the parcels or Bulses, in which

the gold is packed up, are formed of the integument that covers the

heart of the buffaloe.

The Bunkals are, as in Sumatra, frequently used as currency instead

of coin.

The weights* for gold formerly used as Chimendros and Taon (a

place about half a day’s journey thence) are as follow :

2 small sagas (Saga ie 1 large saga (s4ga besar).

8 Sdga besdr, ..... = 1 Maiam.

16 Maiams, = 1 Tael or Bunkal.

20 Taels, . = 1 Cattie.

The Saga is a sort of small scarlet pea with a black spot, the

Abrus Maculatus.

Besides Chimendros and Taon, I have not heard of any place on the

peninsula where gold is obtained from the solid rock. On Sumatra

it is frequently found in this state.

The gold dust at Pahang and Jellye is procured in the same manner

as that in the mines at the foot of Mount Ophir, already described in a

paper published in this Journal; (vol. i. page 497.)

The mines at Reccan are estimated to produce annually about 20

catties of gold dust.

* At Malacca 10 Sdga besar or 4 Képongs are equal to one maiam.

262 Johéle and its former Dependencies of (May,

The Panghili of Gominchi first levied a tenth on the produce of

these mines, but in consequence of large quantities of gold dust being

secretly carried off, before the tenth had been levied, he substituted a

sort of poll tax, amounting to a maiam of gold per annum, from each

person working at the mines.

The Panghili of Johéle is in the habit of sending five or six buffaloes

a year to the mines, receiving for every head of cattle two taels of gold.

These heavy drawbacks have caused the mines to become unpro-

fitable to the speculators, and almost deserted. The former of these

imposts, I believe, could readily be endured ; but the latter ad libitum

sort of exaction destroys all hope of reasonable profit.

The following is an estimnte of the various degrees of purity of

gold dust, produce of the peninsula. It will be necessary to premise,

that mata, is a term denoting the degrees of fineness for gold, of

which there are 10, as fixed by the native assayers. Gold of 10 mutu

is equal therefore to gold of 24 carats: gold not reaching eight muta

is called mas mida, or young gold; and gold from eight to 10 mtu, mas

tuah, or old gold.

Gold of Reccan, ose pl elistalfavalcteyctete, oe Mino ey mk 10ce be

Mount! O phi eee ie.cie aialwihuolevten ole, a Qaiee ip

Chimendros and gi

Taon, eutie?

Pahang,

Jellye, I

Tringanu, cent

Catantan,

From Calantan gold of 10 miétié is sometimes obtained.

The assayers of gold are generally Chuliahs or Klings, who acquire

by constant practice the power of determining to the fraction ofa

mutui the purity of any specimen of gold dust brought from the east-

ward*. As they would be perhaps liable to imposition were this the

only trial they subjected the metal to, they have recourse to the

Battu wut or touchstone. This is a roughish black stone, apparently

basalt, brought from continental India, and generally set in a small

frame of bronze or brass.

The assaying needles are generally from 20 to 24 in number, ranged

on a string, and alloyed in known proportions of copper and silver,

marked on the surface, from three to 92 muta. The needle and gold

to be assayed are rubbed on the touchstone in parallel streaks, in the

usual manner ; a lump of the adhesive wax called Lilin kalilitis then

applied to the surface of the touch-stone, which brings off the two thin

lamina of gold.

* The natives are, I believe, totally ignorant of the assay by cupellation and

acids.

1836. ] Jompdle Gominchi. 263

The difference between the two being more visible on the wax

(which is coloured black for this purpose with a fine charcoal made

from the plantain leaf) than en the stone. This is the reason the

native assayers give for the removal of the streaks of gold from the

stone to the wax, though to me no difference was perceptible : possibly

the following may afford another clue to the practice of the natives in

this particular.

In this wax the impressions of the gold, which would be lost on

the stone, go on accumulating; a ball of it, which my native inform-

ant had used for the last 30 years, he supposed to contain above two

taels of gold.

The metal is separated from the wax by means of heat applied gra-

dually, in such proportions as barely to cause the wax to pass off in

the form of smoke: the residuum is then subjected to the process of

amalgamation. Half of the gold thus obtained is dedicated in alms to

the poor, or on religious offerings, at the shrine of some favorite Saint

or Wali; generally to that of Miran Sahib at Nagore.

The calculation of a Malay, long employed in the mines at Chimen-

dros, makes the average quantity of gold produced from 40 lbs. of the

pulverized stone, 24 grains of pure metal. Lumps of virgin gold,

weighing from five to six ¢ae/s, have been found in the alluvial soil here

and at Faon. In Jellye, a mass weighing upwards of a cattie has been

discovered: this will appear trifling if placed in comparison with that

which Reaumur mentions as having been shewn to the Royal Academy

at Paris, weighing 448 oz. Hes affirms that when one of the highest

mountains of Paraguay fell down, about 50 years ago, there were disco-

vered in it pieces of gold weighing from two to fifty pounds each.

5 Prt)

asso J 95

UPd ie

Seal of Johdle, dated A. H. 1216.

[The date on the seal is reversed, a mistake that we have not unfrequently

observed on Indian coins with Persian inscriptions. As this is the last Essay on

the Malacca States with which Lieut. NEweo.p will be able to favor us, it may

be as well to point out where the preceding are to be found:

Visit to. Mount 'Opliir, 2. c.cc.c-01.. vol. If. pi 497.

Account of Naning, .... ate 4 IU, oy GOL SEV. aoe

Ditto the four Men: angkabowe "States, san Uaveees 241.

Ditto Sangie Ujong, ..<.secsevsecce 99 EVs 5; 537.—Eb.]

264 Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner. [May,

II.—Interpretation of the Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner,

taken in Assam, and presented to the Asiatic Society by Captain

Boeie. By M. Atexanper Csoma Korost. [See Pl. V1. fig. 3.]

[te a letter to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society ; see also Proceedings of the

Asiatic Society, 4th May, 1836.]

According to the request conveyed in your letter of the 30th April,

I have translated the piece of magical superstition which you have

faithfully transcribed from the Bhotian board. With exception of the

salutation at the beginning and the conclusion, and a few terms in the

middle, the whole is in the Tibetan language. The purport of it, as

will be evident from the tenor of the translation, is, to obtain the

favour and protection of several inferior divinities, to increase the

prosperity, &c. of the person and family for whom the ceremony

was performed, and this magical piece was erected or set up.

It may be that the flag-staff, with the wooden board containing

this inscription, was carried before the Tibetan chief in his march, and

so used as an ensign ia war; but it is more probable that it belonged

originally to the house top or terrace of the prince in Bhotan: for

the houses of great personages in that country are generally decorated

with such ensigns of victory at the four corners of the terraced roof.

They are called in Tibetan 3Q'H A rgyal mtshan (ensign of victory),

and always contain inscriptions of similar purport with this.

In regard to the orthography of the piece, it frequently occurs in

Tibetan writings and books, that the vowel signs are removed from

their proper places, on account of the dependent letters of the line

above ; several cases of this occur in your transcript. The intersylla-

bic points at the end of a line are generally also omitted, except with

the conjunction \&" which will also be remarked here. I have made

a copy in Roman characters, and have also endeavoured to make a lite-

ral translation: the words in Italics I cannot properly interpret.

Om svasti, Pesgogneed by the Tibetians om soti, is rendered by them

in their language wr Aya’ Wan’ 3a om bdé-legs-su gyur-chig :

«« Oh may it please, may it be prosperous.”

Inscription on the back of the wooden Board (fig. 3. Pl. V1.)

2 TT We si 7 a jax Qdsy ANN &5'5G"

aA’ aay SN'AON'W EQGRa AQ" AX SN

ar ay Aaa gt Da NNSA” YN" mS" Q@x.

1836.} Tibetan Inscription on a Bhotian Banner. 265

iy a

BY aASM Lyq y WAG? AQ’ SN HAA

ana nA N74 Vv a

A QraG’ Ar a Near 4qq" Dr QEy YRr 4G"

we ~ V

BAN HAAN’ FG" QHy Haag’ Jara qq"

a ~ 4 n

BY NLS 9H" R'LG’ Ao'Q’ a QQ’ N'Q54

an Xr We isy

SOV AVA NAN’ AAN'SS” YN

x. v v a“ v ae v pa v “ <a

BQVYVSQy' MAN A | FOYo yw yA

n = ca) a

NS BY FANON 1 BANA AYA

Q Ss Gk Q

WLAB’ syy2 Tyr ga YQ qa

= ay v v N mvs

Q" QaLI 5a Qa sy AAT

ANN YY 5O'QIL’ Nanas

Se 4 nd wa

qQyVULaa’ Ble an AYG"S

~ cay es vV/

QUAY GES YL’ AES S" VQ T

v aN a a

Ww’ wa WA 4 WWW ZT Qa SY

’ Fre Mes

ok WAG) NAS UT

Om svasti Lha Srin sdé drgyad thams-chad dang

lo zla zhag dus ts’hés-la dvang. vahi gzah skar ts’hés

tha sa ddag flu rigs sogs drégs-pa gtso Akhor

khyab-mjug (for Ajug) Rahula (for Rahula) ki-kang (for kafikar) Vis’hti dus

mts’ han

ma pi-ling khra ts’ha sogs gnyan-po Adré Srin dang

phyogs mts’hams steng hog gnas-pa rnams dang

khyad-par-du nyi-ma dé-ring gang-la rgyé vahi sa ddag

Snang srid lha srin sogs thams-chad srid-pa

Huhi phyag rgya Adi-la /tos-shig, Snang srid lha srin

Sdé b/gyad khed rnams-kyis, Thub-pahi dstan-pa

la rab-tu dad-pahi rgyu sbyor sbyin-pahi ddag

po Akhor dang échas-pahi ts’hé dang dsod

nams dpal dang Abyor-pa thams-chad

zla-va yar-gyi fio /tar gong-nas gong-du

Aphel-zhing rgyas-par mdzad-du gsol.—

Om akani nékani abhila man’ dala

Mantrayé Svahd, Sarva mangalam.

Translation.

O ye divinities! all hail!—(Ye) all the eight classes of the divine

imps (S. Rakshasas) ; also ye gods, regents of the planets, constella-

tions (in the path of the moon), and of the lunar days, having your

‘For gem. 2 For BLY. ° For xyaix,

266 Noie on the Indo-Scythic Coins of Beghram. (May,

influence upon the year, the lunation (or lunar month), and the dif-

ferent seasons or periods; ye possessors of the earth or land (land-

proprietors), all the eight kinds of the Nagas (Hydras), &c. Ye power-

ful chiefs and attendants, Visonu RAnuta, and the menial (instru-

mental cause) Vis’hti; ye goddesses (or nymphs) pi-ling-khraa ts-’ha,

&c.; ye fierce inferior imps, who dwell in (or towards) the cardinal,

intermediate, zenith and nadir points (or in the ten corners of the

world); and especially ye divine imps, &c. who are rulers of those

regions, wherein the sun this day is moving; ye all look on this emblem

(seal, image, or signed writ, &c.) of Hu, the regent or governor, (or

set up, or erected by Hu.) Ye divine eight principal imps (Rakshasas),

rulers of the world (or keepers of light), I beseech you, that you will

make that this patron, the bestower of charitable gifts, for obtaining

the fruit of his works and actions, who is very faithful to the doctrine

of the Muni (SHaxkya), may together with his household or family,

increase more and more, and abound in life, fortune, (prosperity,)

honour, and in all his substance or wealth, like the increasing face of

the moon. Om akani nékani abhila mandala, mantryé, Svaha; Sarva

mangalam.

Tetielia, Sth May, 1836. A. C. K6r6st.

I1I.—Note on some of the Indo-Scythic Coins found by Mr. C. Masson

at Beghram, in the Kohistan of Kdbul. By Jonannus Avpau, Esq.

M. A. 8S.

[Read at the meeting of the 6th May. J]

The results of the valuable researches of Mr. C. Masson, Dr.

Martin Honrepercer, Lieutenant Burnss, the late Dr. Gerarp, and

Keramat Aut, in the vast field of the numismatology of ancient

Bactria and other parts of India, must have excited a deep interest

among the antiquaries of Europe. It must also be highly gratifying

to the lovers of this important science on this part of the globe, to

observe the unabated zeal and assiduity with which these researches

are continued by eminent numismatologists, with a degree of success

exceeding their most sanguine expectations.

Of the Indo-Scythic coins, discovered by Mr. C. Masson at

Beghram, in the Kohistan of Kabul, and described in the 28th number

of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, the one bearing the Greek

legend Nanata, has, it appears, attracted much attention. He is

persuaded to think it to be identical with Bibi Nanni, or ‘the Lady

Nanni,” a name given by the Muhammedans to the numerous shrines

or Zidrdts, as he calls them, found in those regions of Asia. . The

1836.] Note on the Indo-Scythic Coins of Beghrdm. 267

Hindus also seem to attach to them a peculiar sanctity, claiming in

the Bibi Nanni, a personation of their favourite goddess, Pdrbatt.

These are all, however, mere conjectures, the real meaning of the

Greek legend remaining yet to be explained. :

In a subsequent number* of the Journal of our Society, a far differ-

ent explanation of the Greek legend is given by its indefatigable

Editor, which is, perhaps, a near approximation to its true meaning.

There the goddess Nanara is represented to bear a close analogy, in

name and character, to the Anaitis of the Greek, and Anahid of the

Persian, mythology. This hypothesis is based upon the authority of

Srraso, quoted by Colonel Witrorp. A goddess called by the

former ANAtrA, is considered by the latter to be equivalent to the

Sanscrit Andyasd devi. But, how far the deity, recognised under the

one or the other appellation, can be supposed to be identical with

Nanaia, remains yet to be ascertained.

Anahid was the tutelary goddess of Armenia, during its continuance

in the darkness of idolatry. She is also known in our mythological

works by the names of Artemis and Aphrodite, being supposed to have

sprung from the froth of the sea, and descended from Zeus, Aramazd

or Jupiter. Anahid or Anaid is considered by us to be identical with

the planet Venus, and the letters composing it being inverted, it reads

Diana, which is equivalent to Artemis, by which name the goddess of

hunting is invariably designated throughout all the Armenian books

treating of the ancient mythology of our country.

The word Nanata, or Nanea distinctly occurs in the second book

of the Maccabees: ‘“‘ For, when the leader was come into Persia, and

the army with him that seemed invincible, they were slain in the

temple of Nanea, by the deceit of Nanea’s priestst.” It was in the

compass of the temple of this goddess, that Anriocuus the Great was

put to death. She is also called (awikw Anata, or Vutkuu Naneas,

the genitive of which, according to the Greek termination, is written

“utkw, Nanea. It has its derivation from the Persian language,

literally meaning maternal or motherly. To the honor of Nanata,

or Nanea, many temples were raised in Armenia, the most magnificent

of which, according to the authority of (| qu[Awhgb&y nu AGATHANGELUS,

existed in a village called (@,u Thiln, situated in Upper Armenia.

This idolatrous temple was razed to the ground by Surs Grecor

Lusavoricn, and a splendid church erected in its stead. Yacpgt

Gelber [Fuqua apwet Sutgb pd hep hu qgaulh wy win pul [bw S uate Ehye-

* Journal of the Asiatic Society for September, 1834.

+ II Book of the Maccabees, chap. i., v. 13.

2M 2

268 Note on the Indo-Scythic Coins of Beghram. [May,

ko wlki fs qmkyfot putigku, funk fi, bk qouhft b qupsw[dh une ppbuy :

pe wen poe qkuh Gray gujtheys aliguiblfy . puighfh gyywtbubuit

Ae bkutiy® gunkph [Lpulaggay ?f rhb weatp .k gqudu kpharg JESEupst

ucwp dayndeuy 7p to bpe of oywum Eheykgeajl (LZ [tag pu. mk q bogh

bubzbpd :* “Saint Grecory and the king (Tiripares) broke down

the golden images of the Anahitic deity, and reduced the temple to

utter ruin, having divested it of the gold and silver belonging to it.

Thence they crossed the river Goyle, and demolished the Nanaiatic

temple, dedicated to the daughter of Aramazd, in the village of Thiln.

The treasure contained in these two temples being collected, were

appropriated to the sacred purposes of the church of God, to whom

the spots were also consecrated.”

By the authority of this ancient historian, a philosophical inquirer

will be convinced of the similarity of the characters of ANnarris and

Nanata, and of the difference of their names. It is true that they

were both the daughters of Zevs or ARAMAzp ; but an identity of their

persons cannot be inferred from this relative circumstance. The

progeny of the father of the gods is supposed to be nearly as numer-

ous as the offspring of the late lascivious monarch of Persia, and it is

highly probable that Anaitis or Anaid, and Nanaia or Nanea were

distinct deities. This probability is borne out by the fact of there

having existed in Armenia two distinct temples, in which these two

goddesses were respectively worshipped by our pagan ancestors,

under distinct appellations.

* This is an extract from the historical work of AGATHANGELUS, who is the

oldest Armenian historian, being Secretary to the king Tirmparss, and having

flourished in Armenia in the beginning of the fourth century. Anahitic is

a literal translation of (L¥#Smuwkut» and Nanaiatic is exactly rendered for

Guth wuhwt, both used in the text adjectively. The derivative particle huh y

attached to (LtwSiun and ywt&us is equivalent to the English particle tic ; for

example, Asia, Asiatic, Ganges, Gangetic, &c.

Note.—Mr. AvpALt was not aware that Dr. Swinry had pointed out the

coincidence of NANAIA with the Nanea of Maccabees. This fact I added to

my paper among the addenda of 1834. The name I afterwards found in

Hereetor’s Bibliothéque Orientale, (folio edition,) so that the identity that I

had ventured to anticipate with the Anahid or Anais of Persia, and the Andyasd

devi of Col. Witrorp, was then considered to be perfectly established. Mr.

AvDALL’s note was elicited by Mr. Masson’s conjectures as to the inscription

at Bamydn, referring to the same deity. In Plate VI. of the April number,

his sketch of the supposed characters is given; but I can hardly yet feel assured

of their being letters.—Eb.

1836.] Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 269

IV.—Notes on the Geology, &c. of the Country in the Neighbourhood of

Maulamyeng (vulg. Moulmein). By Capt. W. Foury.

[Submitted at the meeting of the 6th May.]

The town of Maulamyeng is situated on the left bank of the Martaban

river, the channel by which the Than-lweng, Gyeng, and Attayen dis-

charge themselves into the sea. Properly speaking, Maulamyeng

may be said to mark the junction of these three rivers, as the N. E.

extremity of the town approaches to within a very short distance of

the confluence of the Attayen with the Gyeng and Than-lweng ; it

would also be more in accordance with usage, if in the room of “ Mar-

taban river,” (the name by which it has been hitherto known to the

British,) the designation of ‘‘ Than-lweng river’ was given to the

channel above-mentioned; the Than-lweng, being the largest of the

three rivers, is entitled to the pre-eminence of holding an uninter-

rupted course to the Gulf of Martaban.

Immediately opposite to Maulamyeng, and separated from it by the

Martaban river, (in this place about 14 mile wide,) are the northern

end of Phullughewn Island and the town of Mowtumma, backed by a

bold and interesting chain of mountains; to the north are the Than-

lweng river and Joe-ka-beng range of limestone; while on the eastern

and southern sides, the town and cantonment of Maulamyeng are

bounded by the Aftayen river, and a long line of sandstone hills, a

continuation of the Mowtumma chain, which, leaving a passage for

the river, re-appears at the Kyeit-san-lan Phyd*, and is seen taking

its course to the south to the right of Gnang-dey and Gneedone.

The general aspect of the country is mountainous, the mountains

taking a N. N. W. and 8.5. E. directiont. The most conspicuous

of these, from its superior elevation, is the Zingyet Thowng, situated to

the N. W. of Mowtumma ; it attains an elevation of 3000 feet above

the level of the plain, and is seen at a considerable distance by vessels

approaching the coast; as might have been expected, the Gulf of

Martaban, with the country in the neighbourhood of the Sitang river,

were visible from a pagoda placed upon a pinnacle of the mountain, and

to which I had ascended on a clear day. Great labour has been

expended on this quarter of the Zingyet Thowng, with the view of

making it more attractive, and rendering the ascent less irksome, than

it would naturally have been from the precipitous nature of the rock :

steps have been cut into the mountain, and the several projections

* Maulamyeng pagoda.

+ The direction is exceedingly variable; it is sometimes N. W. and S. E.,

making a corresponding difference in the inclination of the strata.

270 Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamgeng. [May,

removed or sloped away. A brick wall (about 3 feet high) extends

on either side of the road from the foot of the mountain to one-third

of its acclivity; this is succeeded by a dry wall, composed of pieces of

rock placed loosely together, and continued to the top. The pagoda

is small and void of all interior ornament; three handsome bells are

attached to the court-yard, one of which bears an inscription, having

reference to the period of its fabrication, and the various metallic sub-

stances of which it is composed.

Adopting the nomenclature of MacCuniocu, the rocks under

review are of the primitive and secondary class; all more or less dis-

tinctly stratified, and of a highly crystalline or compact nature. The

Zingyet Thowng is principally composed of gneiss, and covered with a

forest more or less thick, according to the depth of the soil on which it

reposes ; in places where the rock approaches the surface divested of

vegetable mould, little or nothing is seen save a few stunted bushes

and patches of parched grass, that had been produced during the rainy

season ; these become more perceptible as one advances towards the

summit, which, with the exception of one particular spot, the site of

the pagoda, and terminating in a peak, is either round backed or

cristated. The interior of the gneiss presents signs of disintegration

from constant exposure to the atmosphere ; indeed, the rock is in some

instances so decayed that it crumbles to pieces in the hand; but for

the stratification, it might be taken for a species of fine grained

granite: if I mistake not, granite has seldom been found stratified ;

gneiss will therefore be the more appropriatename. It must, however,

be observed, that the stratification of the rock is in some places indis-

tinct and irregular, the inclination of the strata being sometimes to

the northward, and not unfrequently to the southward, of west.

Under this gneiss probably repose the quartz-rock granite and mica

slate found extending from the sea (in a N. N. W.and8.5. E.

direction) towards the Kyékmi pagoda. I regret much that it was

not in my power to ascertain, by a personal and minute examina-

tion, whether such is actually the case; my visit to Kyékmi was

unfortunately confined to a short walk upon the beach, where these

rocks are found lying in the following order; they are all regularly

stratified, the several strata of no great thickness, but dipping into the

ground at an angle of 75° or 80°; commencing from the jetty, and

advancing by the pagoda to the west, they were observed as follows :

1. Red tron clay (the result of decomposed sandstone ?), enclosing

nodules of quartz; this clay is cellular, of a ferruginous appearance,

and has the property of becoming hard on exposure to the atinosphere.

Q. Is this the daterite of the western peninsula ?

1836.] Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 271

2. White guartz-rock, alternating with

8. Argillaceous schist ; blue or yellow, and slightly talcose.

4. Quartz-rock, white, or pale yellow, and containing a few scales

of mica.

5. Talcose-schist with thin layers of quartz, alternating.

6. A white granite with mica abundantly disseminated in large

yellow scales.

7. Pink, or red, quartz-rock.

8. A grey siliceous substance (resembling chert), with veins of

quartz, and succeeded by

9. Gneiss, similar to that of Zingyet, but more decomposed, from

the action of the salt water,—this is probably a continuation of the

Zingyet gneiss.

10. Red iron clay; the same as No. 1*.

The above constitute the whole of the primitive rocks observed in

the neighbourhood of Maulamyeng, and with which I am at present

so little familiar: the secondary rocks, or those now about to be

noticed, are of a different character, formed under other circum-

stances, and at a different epoch.

The first of these, is the sandstone of Mowtumma and May-

Jamyeng ; with little variation in the line of bearing, the inclina-

tion of the sandstone strata is diametrically opposite to that of the

gneiss, quartz-rock, and mica-slate, &c. It has been already shewn,

that the strata of the last mentioned rocks dip to the westward at a

very great angle, whereas the dip of the sandstone strata is generally

to the N. #., and the angle of inclination not exceeding 40° or 50°.

This sandstone is more frequently white, presenting spotted delinea-

tions of a pink or red colour, and is, in some instances, so highly

impregnated with silica, that it becomes difficult to distinguish it from

guartz-rock. 'The less compact portion of the rock is generally inter-

sected by veins of quartz. In many instances, the base of the sand-

stone is an argillaceous cement, impregnated with oxide of iron, which

gives a red colour to the rock, and renders it more liable to decompo-

sition; large masses of this substance are found either alternating

with, or resting unconformably upon, the rocks of both classes ; in the

latter case, transported from its parent rock (the sandstone above

noticed), and assuming the appearance of a hard ferruginous breccia.

The sandstone hills have an undulating appearance, being free

from the contortions and asperities peculiar to the limestone rocks in

* See Dr. Benza’s observations on the filon of hzmatitic iron in the sienitic

granite of the Neilgiris, vol. IV. p. 424.—Ep.

+ This rock is the same as that noticed at Kyékmi, (No. 1.)

272 Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. [May,

their neighbourhood. Attaining a considerable elevation, and run-

ning parallel to each other with a distance of some miles between

each chain, these mountain ranges form extensive valleys, covered

with water during the S. W. monsoon, and devoted for the greater

part to the cultivation of paddy; what remains untilled abounding

with long grass, the coarser kind serving for house-thatch, and the less

rank affording pasture for cattle during the dry season. Except in

the immediate neighbourhood of the limestone, where a fine black

loam prevails, and on the banks of the rivers and islands formed by

the constant accumulation of mud and silt, transported from a clay-

slate and limestone country, the greater part of the soil found in the

plains contiguous to Maulamyeng is an arenaceous clay, mixed with a

small portion of saline and vegetable matter*.

The only ore that has been hitherto found in connection with the

sandstone is a “ Sulphuret of Antimony,’ ina vein of quartz; it is

found in the neighbourhood of Guangdey, and appears abundant.

Leaving Maulamyeng, and proceeding to the north, a few limestone

hummocks are seen on the right banks of the Than-lweng river, form-

ing part of the long but broken chain extending to the south-east via

Joe-ka-beng, Damatha, Nyown-beng-zeite, and Kyema-row. With an

aspect so different from that of the sandstone, these limestone rocks

present peculiarities of structure deserving mention; although imme-

diately succeeding the sandstone, the S. W. chains of limestone, or

those first seen in contact with it, (advancing to the N. E.,) present

little or no signs of stratification. The limestone appears in detached

masses, rising, as it were, perpendicularly out of the earth; and as

each mass preserves a similar direction with the one preceding it, the

range has, at a distance, the semblance of an extensive chain, conti-

nually broken and interrupted by some great convulsion in nature.

That the sea has covered the whole of this country, and probably at

no very distant period of time, is perceptible at the first view. Four

distinct epochs would also seem to be marked out. The two first

will include the formation of the primitive and secondary strata; the

third, the up-heaving of these strata; and the fourth, the presence

of the sea upoa the whole. The shattered and divided limestone,

with its mural precipices and caverns ; the saline depositions so con-

stantly met with on the plains, and other appearances of a no less

conclusive character, attest the former existence and desolating

* This saline matter is in some places so abundant, that the soil is collected by

salt manufacturers for lixiviation ; the liquid is strained off, and subjected to the

usual process of evaporation.

1836. } Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 273

power of the ocean*. As has been already observed, the sandstone

rock is regularly stratified: the dip being (generally) to the N. E.,

and its angle of inclination from 40° to 50°: on the contrary, the

limestone that immediately succeeds it is (to all appearance) unstra-

tified, or the inclination of its strata discernable only from the fissures

in the rock, so great, as to merit for it the appellation of vertical. It

may, however, be remarked, that this peculiarity of structure is per-

ceptible only in the Joe-ka-beng and Mowmah chains of limestone ;

advancing to the N. E., and passing another range of the sandstone

before noticed, the stratification becomes more apparent, at the same

time, that the line of bearing, dip, and inclination of the strata are

exactly similar to the sandstone at Maulamyeng.

The general structure of the limestone is mural, possessing consi-

derable height but little breadth; the angles of the projecting points

are sharp, and as the little vegetation produced is restricted to a few

stunted trees and shrubs, the rock has a remarkably rugged appear-

ance.

The height of Joe-ka-beng, the most elevated point of the S. W. chain,

is probably as much as 2000 feet above the level of the plain; it has

a small pagoda on its summit, which on a clear day is visible at a

distance of 20 miles; but with this elevation, its greatest average

breadth will not be more than 300 feet. The limestone is of a grey

or lavender-blue colour, sometimes presenting spotted delineations of

white, yellow, ochre yellow, and red; of a fine compact texture,

rarely granulated; fracture fine and splintery; faintly translucent on

the edges; and frequently intersected by veins of calc-spar, corre-

sponding in every essential point with the English “ mountain lime-

stone,” or ‘‘ secondary limestone” of Jameson. Another characteristic

of this limestone is that it is cavernous. The caves are of considerable

magnitude, and from their containing (occasionally) inscriptions

having reference to the fabrication and sculpture of the several images

and temples therein placed, are interesting both to. the antiquarian

and the geologist. The principal caverns are those at Yétséy, Tyok-

hla, Joe-ka-beng, Damatha, Nyown-beng-zeite, and Phabia. Surrounded

with jungle, these limestone caverns are not unfrequently tenanted by

birds and beasts of prey. A great quantity of bat’s dung is collected

* The average elevation of the plains above the level of the sea, at high-water,

will not exceed six feet at the present time, while it is evident, on examination,

that the banks contiguous to the sea, and subject to the influence of the tide,

have been continually raised by successive depositions, and are still receiving

deposits of silt or saline matter on every high rise of tide, or inundation pro-

duced by the freshes during the S. W. monsoon.

274 Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. [May,

from the Tyok-hla cavern, and used by the natives in the manufacture

of saltpetre.

Damatha Cavern, (western entrance,) situated on the left bank of the

Gyeng river, and about 12 miles distant from Maulamyeng.

The mouth of this cavern is almost entirely closed by a brick wall :

a small passage on the left affording entrance. It is spacious within,

being about 220 feet long, 100 feet broad, and 25 feet high. The

singularity attached to the cavern arises from its extending right

through the hill, so that entering on the western side, one may pass

out through the eastern mouth of the cave. The stalactites are

numerous; several are of an immense size, and daily becoming larger

from the continual supply of water, impregnated with calcareous mat-

ter, percolating through the hill, and giving a new crust to those

already formed. Stalagmites likewise exist, but are generally much

concealed from view by bat’s dung, with which the floor of the cavern

is covered. As is the case with all the larger description of caverns, that

at Damatha is crowded with images of Buddha in wood and stone; he

is represented in his usual sitting posture ; in some instances, arrayed

with the “glories,” but more frequently without them. The work-

manship is very inferior, and little attention seems to have been paid

to the polishing of the stone, which is a fine crystalline marble, and

naturally well adapted for sculpture. Exposed as these rude monu-

ments of art are to the ravages of a damp atmosphere, as well as to

the contamination of birds and beasts of prey, such extra labour would

have been but fruitlessly bestowed; the natural white colour of the

marble is either entirely defaced, or it has acquired the crystalline,

reticulated appearance peculiar to the stalactite. Fronting the eas-

tern entrance, and placed over the larger Phyd, is the following

inscription written in the Thalian tongue, and specifying (as Iam given

to understand) the time that had elapsed since the cavern was first

consecrated for the reception of the images*. The country was at

that period in the hands of the Péy-got government, and as marks

of great age are evident throughout the whole of the works contained

in the cavern, it is probable that some centuries have gone by since

they were executed.

Passing out of the Damatha cavern on the eastern side, and following

the limestone range to the south, a smaller cave may be observed

within a few yards of the summit of the hill, which is in this place

about 500 feet above the level of the plain; the ascent to it is

extremely difficult, owing to the precipitous nature of the rock. A

* See note at the end of the paper and the inscription lithographed in

Pl. X.—Eb. tT Pegu.

1836.) Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 275

large brick and mortar image of Gautama guards the entrance of the

cavern, which measures 18 by 22 feet, while its average height will be

as much as 20 feet. This small cave had been but lately selected by

the Phiingi, for the better concealment of a quantity of manuscripts

written in the Thalian or Burmah character, and secreted in the upper

part of the Damatha cavern at a time that the country was invaded by

the Tshdn*.

The manuscripts were placed in wooden boxes, elevated upon raf-

ters ; many had become perfectly rotten, and others were fast has-

tening to decay from constant exposure to damp.

It may be remarked, that curiously carved elephant’s teeth were at

one time to be found in these caverns, along with their less costly

companions in wood and stone: these are now exceedingly scarce;

the greater number have either crumbled into dust, or divested of the

gilding and characteristic features of the Buddhist saint, have been ex-

posed for sale in the bazar: some few have met with a better fate, and

are probably now adorning the cabinets of the curioust. On a survey

of the general devastation that prevails throughout these limestone

caverns, it may reasonably be doubted, whether the hand of man has

not proved equally destructive with time, and the elements, in oblite-

rating much that had claim to notice by reason of superior antiquity,

or novelty of design. The mutilated statues and broken shrines

strewed around the caves too well attest the mtrusion of other than

Barmah devotees, and point out the havock provoked by avarice, a

fanatic zeal, or the more reprehensible disregard of what is due to the

feelings of a conquered people.

Notwithstanding its exceedingly compact nature, perhaps no rock

possesses the property of decomposition and solubility in water to

such a degree as the limestone here treated of. Hence the rich

plains in its vicinity, and the no less fertile islands continually formed

and nourished by the carbonaceous particles transported from a lime-

stone country by the Than-lweng, Gyeng, and Aitayen. This tendency

to wear is particularly manifest at the Phabowng Thowng, a limestone

hill on the right bank of the Attayen, and not far removed from the

site of the late town and fort from whence that river derives its name.

A cavern may be observed in this rock that has evidently been formed

by a mountain torrent, which, coming from the interior, rushes through

* Siamese.

+ I was fortunate enough to obtain three of these teeth: they appear to be of

an immense age; the ivory of the smallest tooth is completely decayed. I

have also some of the manuscripts above alluded to, and reserve the whole for

presentation to the Asiatic Society. (See Proc. As. Soc. 6th May.)

2N 2

276 Notes on the Geology, §c. of Maulamyeng. (May,

it to join its waters with the Attayen; with an average elevation of

. 15 feet above the surface of the water, anda diameter of nine feet,

the cavern continues to cover the stream to the distance of 80 yards

or more beyond its place of junction with the river. In the dry season,

the stream is comparatively tranquil; but in the S. W. monsoon,

when it is greatly swelled, and becomes tremendously rapid, it rises to

the summit, and by its overwhelming force and the constant attrition

of its waters on the limestone rock adds considerably to the dimen-

sions of the cave.

Beyond the Phabowng Thowng, and on the right bank of the

Attayen river, are the hot-wells. They are three in number, and

about two miles distant from the old town of Altayen, of which

nothing now remains save a few bricks to point out the site of the

wall that surrounded it. A dense jungle of reeds and long grass

eovers the ground, extending to the hot-springs and the limestone

rocks in their neighbourhood. The largest of the wells is of a circu-

lar form, and apparently deep; its diameter is probably as much as

60 feet. An efflorescence of the salt it contained was perceptible on

the brick wall by which it is enclosed; the taste of the salt exceed-

ingly bitter, not unlike that of “‘ sulphate of magnesia*.” The spring

was ina state of active ebullition, and much steam arose from its

surfacet ; on the immersion of a therm. bulb, the mercury rose to

137° Fahrenheit. The springs evidently contained much rain water

collected during the 5. W. monsoon, and which, overflowing the

banks, is disengaged by means of small rivulets that discharge them-

selves into the Attayen. Within a short distance of the hot-springs,

I noticed water that hada dark colour, anda disagreeable foetid odour,

like that of “‘ sulphuretted hydrogen;” this water was cold, although

contiguous to the hot-springs. Both cocoanut and palmyra trees

were numerous on the spot, and did not appear to suffer from their

vicinity to the hot-wells; a fine young pipal tree grew luxuriantly

on the bank of the largest spring: on the contrary, the trees situated

near the water supposed to contain “ sulphuretted hydrogen” were of

a diminutive size, and had a sickly appearance.

Advancing beyond Mowmah, another or second range of sandstone

is seen to cross the Than-lweng river, and take asimilar direction with

the limestone on which it reposes; the rock is of the same compact

or siliceous nature as that of Mowtumma and Maulamyeng, but cover-

ed, for the greater part, by an upper stratum of red iron clay, accom-

* A bottle of the water, taken from the hot spring, has been presented to the

Asiatic Society.

+ When visited by me in Dec. 1835, at an early hour in the forenoon.

1836.] Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 277

panied with steatite, a mineral not unfrequently found associated with

this clay in other parts of the coast. This range is less wooded than

the sandstone to the southward, and has the ferruginous appearance

peculiar to the soil.

Approaching to the village of ‘“‘ Hmeebong,” one cannot but b®

struck with the singular appearance of the limestone rock on the right

bank of the Than-lweng: the limestone appears, as usual, in large

isolated masses; but the form assumed by some of these is remark-

ably grotesque, at the same time, that the stratification of the lime-

stone is more perceptible at this place than it has hitherto been. The

following may be taken as a tolerably correct representation of these

rocks, as seen from the neighbourhood of Hmeebong. (See fig. 2.)

Still ascending the Than-lweng, and passing the island of Colon by

either channel, the river becomes more rapid, owing to the rise of its

bed and the limestone reefs that cross it for several miles to the north ;

the eastern channel is that generally navigated: its left bank is high

and precipitous, abounding with the cellular red iron clay so plentiful

at Maulamyeng and Kyékmi: from its position, the clay appears to

have been transported to its present site at. a comparatively recent

period, and subsequently to a change in the course of the Than-lweng ;

for it not only reposes horizontally upon the limestone rocks, but is

found reclining upon a thick stratum of round pebbles and coarse

gravel, in every respect similar to that found in the bed of the river at

the conclusion of the rainy season*. This conglomerate is perhaps

best viewed at an escarpment of the bank a little beyond Chamyah,

and the great probability of its containing organic remains merits for

it the particular attention of the geologist.

The limestone rock had been hitherto observed in broken but elevated

chains on either bank of the Than-lweng, and with the exception of

the few reefs before alluded to, seldom seen to stretch across and

disturb the river in its progress to the south: leaving Colon Island

and proceeding towards the Yengbieng Kyowng the case is far different ;

- the country becomes more mountainous, at the same time that the

rocks appear distorted and thrown about in the utmost disorder: it

seems as if a chasm had been suddenly formed in the mountains, and

a passage thus opened to the Than-lweng. Piled upon each other in

the utmost confusion, the limestone rocks not only form a wall on

either side of the river, narrowing its bed, and thereby adding to the

* This change of course might have been produced by the sudden deposit of

the clay; and which accumulation and deposit can only be accounted for in

the same manner as reasons are assigned for the singular appearance of the

limestone rocks,

278 Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. [May,

rapidity of the current, but spreading themselves -across, obstruct its

passage, and render the navigation extremely dangerous at any other

time than the N. E. moonsoon. The current of the river is very

strong near Mang and Mye-an, but the principal rapids are met with

in the neighbourhood of Towng-bio-myo: I accompanied Sir J. Dicx-

son, K. C. B., to this place in March, 1835, and we found it impossible

for our boats to proceed further ; indeed our return was not effected

without considerable risk, owing to the force of the current, and the

numerous eddies produced by the inequalities on the bed of the Than-

lweng, which is in this place extremely deep. Accidents continually

occur: a boat once drawn within the vortex of the whirlpool is inevi-

tably lost ; both boat and crew are sucked down, and never known to

make their appearance on the surface.

At the mouth of the Yengbieng Kyowng, a spot rendered peculiarly

attractive by the beauty of the surrounding scenery, the limestone is

seen gradually passing into clay-slate ; the limestone has a slaty frac-

ture, becomes earthy, and is of a darker colour; the transition is at

length so perfected (to the view) that but for the effervescence produced

by the nitric acid, it becomes, in some instances, extremely difficult to

detect the presence of the limestone in the argillaceous schist, with

which it is intimately blended. Ata short distance beyond the Yeng-

bien Kyowng, a few blocks of a grey siliceous rock may be observed

at the foot of a hill on the left bank of the Than-lweng* ; the hill is

high, of a conical shape, and covered with a thick forest and under-

wood. Jron ore is found in considerable quantities both on the hill,

as well as in its vicinity; and small grains of iron pyrites are abun-

dantly disseminated in the rock. This is succeeded again by the

slaty limestone, and finally by the blue clay-slate that crosses the river

at the Towng-bio rapid. Large masses of slate repose on either bank,

surrounded by a micaceous sand and pebbles (consisting for the most

part of talcose slate), brought down from the upper country during the

S. W. moonsoon. A dyke of porphyritic felspar intervenes between

the slate strata; the felspar rock is of a deep yellow, and studded

throughout with small circular pieces of the same mineral, of a lighter

colour. I regret much that I had not leisure to pay a proper degree

of attention to the structure of this rock; our party arrived on the

ground late in the afternoon, and we left the place early on the fol-

lowing morning ; but short as was my stay at the Towng-bio rapid, I

have often since dwelled in pleasing recollection, on the wild and

* The rock is extremely hard, and slightly impregnated with carbonaceous

matter.

1836.] Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. 279

majestic scenery so bountifully bestowed by nature on this part of the

Kayeng-dho.

A desire to become better acquainted with the geology of this part

of the world induced me to pay a visit to the Ayein Kayeng. The

following notes, having reference to the geology of that country, are

extracted from my journal, with the view of rendering the description

of the rocks before mentioned more complete.

“Leaving my boat at Mye-an, and advancing in aN. E. direction

towards the village of Yeng-bien, a mass of regularly stratified limestone

makes its appearance on the left of the road; it forms part of a broken

chain extending N. N. W. and 8. S. E. The stratification of the

limestone is remarkably distinct ; the dip of the strata E. N. E.

«« Proceeding from thence up a dry nullah, covered with fragments of

slate and sandstone, the ascent lay over the blue clay-slate that is first

seen reposing on the limestone at the Towng-bio rapid. The slate is

covered with a forest of fine young male bambus, runs parallel with

the limestone, and may be as much as 900-feet above the level of the

plain.” —

“« Bidding adieu to Yeng-bien, and advancing in the same direction to-

wards Mélayo, Tigunnéy, (Tshangelee,) and Bo-thowng, therocks are of the

same nature as those encountered in route from Maulamyeng to Towng-

bio-myo ; viz. limestone, alternating with sandstone and clay-slate; the

sandstone becomes extremely compact and siliceous in the neighbour-

hood of Bo-thowng ; the limestone presents itself in the usual broken

masses of various extent. But the clay-slate of Bo-thowng differs in

colour from that of Towng-bio, being either pink or reddish brown, with

a fine silky texture. The route from Tigunnéy to Bo-thowng is diffi-

cult and dangerous from the precipitous nature of the rock which is,

at the latter place, as much as 2000 feet above the level of the plain.

The ascent is also much impeded by the leaves and clay-slate pebbles

profusely scattered about, and leaving little footing for the traveller on

a path so inclined. Descending on the eastern side of the hill, the

path (if it may be so called) lay over masses of the same pink-

coloured slate, watered by a stream that precipitated itself over the

rock, and rendered the descent a matter of no small difficulty ; after

proceeding a hundred yards or more, in that direction, the route lay

to the left; a second ascent was here commenced, and passing a few

heaps of stratified limestone alternating with the slate, I arrived at

that part of the mountain called Bo-thowng : silver ore is said to exist

in a limestone rock at this place, and judging from the numerous

excavations that had been made by those in pursuit of the precious

metal, no little labour has been used in the endeavour to discover it.

280 Notes on the Geology, &c. of Maulamyeng. [May,

I had neither time nor opportunity for ascertaining whether silver ore

does so exist; pieces of copper green, iron pyrites, and lead ore*, deem-

ed useless and cast aside by those in pursuit of silver, were strewed

around the place, and for the first time, in this part of the world, I

observed Anthracite dispersed in thin seams through the limestone

rock. The figure of the limestone is not a little singular; emerging

from the clay-slate at the upper part of the mountain, and confined to

a line of 20 or 30 yards, the strata rise at a considerable angle, at-

taining an elevation of 90 or 100 feet, so that the exterior form of the

limestone is that of a huge block, resting upon the hill, unconnect-

ed with any rock of the same class. This structure is common to

the limestone throughout the whole of the bo-thowng chain; but

notwithstanding its peculiarity of form, the stratification is perfectly

distinct ; the dip of the strata being to the N. E. or E. N. E. precisely

similar to that of the sandstone or clay-slate, with which it alternates.”

The abcve notes were hastily arranged on my return from Maula-

myeng ; my residence at that place was necessarily short, and I am aware

that much still remains deserving the attention of those who will pos-

sess the leisure and opportunities that I was not fortunate enough to

enjoy. The field is stored with much that is valuable to the Antiquarian,

the Botanist, and the lover of Natural History. I trust that others

will, ere long, lay before the public the treasures it contains.

Note.—The inscription brought by Capt. Fouey, from the Damatha

cave, is certainly the most enigmatical that has yet puzzled the anti-

guarian. I have lithographed it in Plate X., and with the assistance

of Ratna Pauta, now furnish a copy in the Roman character :

Line 1.—sakkarak lri kun, 30—65 nhah, sakkarak Iri kun, 4015061, nhan,

sakkarak kun Iri.

2.—50—45 nha, sakkarék Iri kun, 603304 nha, sakkarak lri kun,

790 whan, sakkarak

3.—Iri kun, 370 nhaf, sakkarak Irf kun, 408—409 nhan, sakkarak, lri

kun, 604—30 nhaf nhan.

4,—sakkarak lri kun, 3096-5-0 nhah, sakkarék Iri kun, 303—50 hen,

sakkardk lri

5,.—kun 508309 nha, sakkarak lri kun, 306060 nha, sakkarak Iri kun

60—303—5

6.—nhah sakkardk Irj kun, 407—50 nhaf, sakkarak kun Irf kun, 6030304,

nhah, sakkardk Iri

7.—kun 401501 nhan, sakkar&k lri kun, 305602 nhbah, sakkarak Iri kun,

503—704 nhaf.

All that can be predicated of this curious text is, that it contains

either some profound and unintelligible calculation, or that it is a

* On analysis, it appeared to be an “‘ arseniate of lead.”

: WAH

Ss cp oy, YA ia\\) WANs: Wy

S AGG y Ge ee Wah va wy Ries hii Mey en ay ily WAM PUMA); \ LG

x Ti | TB i) ay JAA % ie ms wy pe Gis ibe ican INT Ay YIN IGG ie SOAR some

i (ys S XY

2 er Tea Hie (9 17 iv Avi ; Ui lt Mh die Si NO] AGH iG Dai iit JIM

: Ne ee Ae glans a NS, Hi i! AS Woh eA AY

N 'M countai a

an =

ifs

AUS AR

‘i AT 8

ss ae

y any

SY Mi . ull Ne

she anh

aides \ Y wal r a

Allegra \ lai ]

Sy all {ai

Ma Y RS

y a” ilar

\ yw A

& \ ANS \ Ni)

us Hy] 9, ial

fh ie

Ro)

A; fy

\ Ss Li AAs

72)

(EYE

——

ZEB 7

Nes .

f BOS . ma Cen \

me ws se BN: S\} \'\

AA ae aa " an is 8

nN cho Sats put) a Ay

one CSAtes 3 a

wy pS adi \ NY ok NN \\’ ae = Z

— cach te EM te _ AS “i he.

yi’y SS Z) = ey ; x ~ a) qa

Ses , ¥

z Ses § oe

ude hy oN nd

3 8 a a <) N& 3 % « .

SS wi Br Ure S 2

; oes 8 lil

mS :

J. B.Tassins Lilh Freee.

ee Ce

a Pics Lb

SE,

+ eR 9

1 ih by : b

er Pee: Ye PA:

ore OH 7

ih > ae

BLAM pp peier

1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 281

chronological register of mythological times :—if the latter, the names

of the reigning monarchs are omitted as immaterial, and the simple

fact announced, “ in the year so and so, so many reigns ;”—but even

this is conjectural, and unless errors have been committed in copying

the figures, they do not run in any seeming order. The word sak-

karak is the Talain rendering of the Sanscrit sakardj, year ; in Barmese

written sakkarej: the terms Jré kun and nhan are unknown to my in-

formant. A WS

V.—On the Revolution of the Seasons. By the Rev. R. Everest.

In the Journal of April 1235, I gave the result of a comparison of

the amount of rain-fall at Calcutta, with different positions of the

moon, as far as regards her declination. The averages shew that a

greater quantity of rain fell on the days when the declination was

large, say from 20° to 28°, than when it was small. Now, as there

are some years in the lunar cycle in which the declination never

reaches to 20°, it followed, as a probable, though not a necessary,

inference, that in those years there would be a deficiency of rain.

Shortly afterwards I met with this note, (HumBoxpr’s New Spain,

translated by Biack, vol. di. page 86.) ‘‘ Toaupo pretends to be

able to deduce from a great number of observations, that the very

rainy years, and consequently the great inundations, return every 19

years according to the terms of the cycle of Saros—Rozier, Journal

de Physique 1783.” The recurrence seems here spoken of as an

exploded error. I have therefore used whatever means lay within my

reach to obtain information as to what really has been the variation

of the seasons in this country for along time back, and I will now

state the results. But I must first premise respecting the note just

quoted, that great inundations are not a necessary consequence of very

rainy years. Should the rain fall regularly or equably, it will be less

likely to occasion an inundation, than a much less quantity fallmg in

a very short time. This will be more particularly the case in rocky

and mountainous countries, where the channels are more easily choaked.

In wide-extended plains, like those of the Nile and the Ganges, the

rise of the river will form a more probable criterion of the amount of

the rainy-season, though not a certain one. To revert, however, to

the point proposed. The year 1829, was that of the minimum decli-

nation of the moon, and from the early part of 1827, to the end of

1831, the declination is never stated in the Almanacks at above 20°.

For this, or rather for a period somewhat more extended, viz. from

1826 to 1833, inclusive, we have the following facts recorded.

282 On the Revolution of the Seasons. [Mar,

1826,

ae Great drought in N. 8S. Wales; Lieut. Brereton’s Travels.

1829,

1832. Public prayer by the Emperor of China for rain on account

of extraordinary drought. Minimum of rain by Calcutta Register.

1833. Great drought through all the Upper Provinces, extending

from Bundelkhand to Kashmir.

Let us next turn to Mr. Kyp’s Register of the Height of the Hugli,

(see Journal, April, 1835;) and as that has been objected to as evidence,

I must be allowed to say a word in its defence. It is true that the

level of the Hugli at Calcutta is affected by the tides in the Bay;

but according to Mr. Kyp’s account, such an occurrence is very rare,

an inundation from the sea not happening more than once in a century.

Remembering then that the ninth year before 1829 or 1820, was that

of the moon’s maximum declination, we find that the three or four

years immediately before or after that were higher, on the average,

than those farther off. Again, if we take 1811, the ninth year before

1820, and 18 years before 1829, we find that in the years nearest

to it the river was lower than in those farther off. If we take

the joint evidence of the height of the river, and the Calcutta register,

we may assume that 1813 was the minimum year of rain; the 10th

year after that or 1823, was the maximum year of rain: and in the

ninth year again after that, or in 1832, came a minimum again; a

period of 19 years, or a complete lunar cycle, having intervened between

one minimum and its succeeding one.

With a view of ascertaining whether such a variation held in other

localities, E obtained from the collector’s office here, a memorandum

of the character of the seasons as to rain for 21 years back. It was

dictated from memory by an old native officer of the establishment,

who would of course have the records of the office to refer to; and

these in a climate where the crops depend so much upon the quantity

of rain, would of themselves be a tolerable guide.

It begins thus: 1812, great drought; 1813, moderate; 1814 to

1823, (both inclusive, a period of 10 years,) four years very abundant,

four years, abundant, two years moderate. From 1824 to 1833, (both

inclusive, a period of 10 years,) one year very abundant, two years

abundant, three years moderate, three years, drought; one year,

1833, great drought. The seasons of great drought are here placed

21 years apart, instead of 19, as in the former case. Evidence of this

kind, like that from the height of the river, though not free from

objection, can hardly be deemed unworthy of credit, when it is corro-

borated from other sources. There is one advantage, however, which

1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 283

information of the two kinds above-mentioned, possesses over the

results of a solitary rain-guage, however carefully kept, viz. that they

are an index, imperfect as they may be, to what has happened over a

large tract of country ; whereas the rain-guage can only inform us

as to one particular spot, and rain-guages in general are so much

affected by peculiarities of situation, that the results afforded by any

one singly, must be considered as liable to doubt. To obviate this

objection, I have placed together in a table all the different series

procurable, of a date posterior to 1820, (see Table No. 1.) Most of

them are to be found in the different Nos. of the Journal; and the

localities are between Dacca, (E. Long. 90°,) and Delhi, (E. Long. 78°,)

between Nagpur, (Lat. 21°, North,) and Delhi, 28° 40’ (N.) To these

are added the observations at Madras, which I have obtained through

the kindness of the Astronomer there; at Macao, in China, (Journal,

July, 1832,) and at Edinburgh, (see BrewsteEr’s Philosophical Journal,

passim.) In Table No. 2, are given the only three series that I

have for the years between 1800 and 1821. The two first (Madras and

Macao) are merely the preceding parts of the series given in Table 1.

The last from Carlsruhe, in Sweden, is given in the Edinburgh Philoso-.

phical Journal for 1821, there quoted from the Bibliotheque Universelle

for November, 1820. The original appears to be given in French

inches and lines, and I have not reduced them to English measure,

as the doing so would not affect the question at issue, viz. whether

some years of the lunar cycle are more rainy than others. Now to

make a more correct comparison of the different years, we must first

reduce the numbers given in Table 1. to a common mean. Thus, we

have Dacca for eight years, (1827, 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831, 1832,

1833, 1834;) and the mean of the different sums given is 72°80 inches ;

at Calcutta, for the same eight years, the mean is 60°37 inches. The

difference between these, 12°43 inches, we may reasonably suppose to

be owing to the localities. Subtract, therefore, from each item of the

- Dacca series, the mean difference 12°43; the remainders will be

reduced to the mean of Calcutta*. Proceed in a similar way with the

other series, only of course where the climate is drier than that of

Calcutta, the mean difference must be added, and not subtracted.

The series in Table No. 2, may be included in the comparison by

treating them in a similar way, and then considering them only accord-

ing to their position in the lunar cycle. Thus, if we take 1821 for

the first year of the cycle, 1803 (or the eighteenth year before that)

may also be reckoned as the first year; 1802 and 1820, will of course

be the last years. Place the whole in columns numbered according

to their distance from 1802 and 1820, and an average may be taken

* The more correct mode would be to multiply the Dacca series by on —Ep.

202

284 On the Revolution of the Seasons. (May,

of the whole, as in Table, No. 3. From this it appears that the

average of nine years nearest the maximum is 66°34 inches, and

of nine years nearest the minimum, 61°21 inches, making a dif-

ference of 5°13, or nearly sth of the whole between the two periods.

If it be objected, that such a difference is too trivial to be decisive, we

may answer that the difference shewn in the table is less than the

real one. In all the series, except those of Dacca and Macao, a quan-

tity has been added to bring them to the mean of Calcutta, and of

course where two quantities differ, and a third quantity is added to

each, they are brought nearer to a ratio of equality*.

Secondly, if we consider each series separately, (see Tables 1. and

2,) we shall find that each confirms the opinion of the years of ma-

ximum declination being the most rainy, except the Macao one, in

which the reverse holds good. Thus the average of 1812, 1813, 1814,

and 1815, (four years near the minimum,) is 80°50 inches. That of

1816, 19, 20, 21, 22,23, 24, (seven years about the maximum,) is 61°46.

Again, that of 1825, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, (seven years about the mini-

mum,) is 71°00 inches. So that this guage, as well as the others,

favours the idea of a recurrence contemporaneous with the recurrence

in the lunar cycle. We may here remark, that the idea of certain

localities reciprocating, or experiencing at the same time contrary

variations of climate, appears, at first sight, more probable than that

the quantity of precipitation over the whole globe should be abundant

for a series of years, and then deficient, the great cause of evaporation,

viz. the heating power of the sun, remaining all the while the same.

It will be noticed, that among the series are two from northern

Europe (Edinburgh and Carlsruhe). The inference might have been

drawn without them, but they were added, as being the only others

of any length I had at hand, to complete the cycle. Notwithstanding

the testimony of the Swedish guage, it is very doubtful whether such

a variation as is there shewn is general over Europe. I say so: First.

Because of the way in which the idea is treated in the note from

Humsoutpt above quoted. Secondly. From the silence of modern

writers in meteorology respecting it. Thirdly. What English registers

I have been able to examine (and they are for short periods, not

above three or four years) do not shew a preponderance of rain towards

the maximum declination of the moon, but rather the reverse ; so that,

from that, as well as from other sources of information, we might

conjecture the variations there would rather agree with those of the

Macao guage, than of the Indian ones.

In naming the places visited, either just before, or after the year

1829, by drought, the following was omitted: ‘‘ During the three

* This would have been obviated by following the course mentioned in the

note, page 283.—Ep.

1836.] On the Revolution of the Seasons. 285

years prior to 1834, there had been a complete drought, which had

brought a famine upon these islands, and, in consequence, some

thousands of the inhabitants had died.”—Sketches of Cape de Verd

Islands.—United Service Journal, July, 1835. As these islands lie

in a latitude between that of Calcutta and Madras, the fact, is inter-

esting, but I have no accounts to refer to for the state of things

during that period, in the intervening countries of Egypt, Abyssinia,

Arabia, anc Persia.

Lastly. It will be objected, that a regularly ascending and descend-

ing series has not been made out.

This is true; but as the number of series from which to take the

averages has increased, so has the tendency to it become more appa-

rent. There is one circumstance, however, which may serve to prevent

a regular ascent and descent from ever becoming perceptible, viz.

the place ofthe perigee. Having been lately engaged in an examina-

tion of barometric heights with regard to this, I have noticed that the

average amount of variation from the mean, either in excess or defect,

is greater about the time of perigee, as it also is about that of maximum

declination. Now there are some years in which the day of perigee

coincides about the solstices with that of maximum declination, and

these years are usually the extreme ones, both of moisture and drought.

I subjoin a sample.

Perigee Perigee Perigee Perigee Perigee

and Max. | and Max. and Max. and Max. and Max.

NorthDecl.| South Decl | South Decl.| South Decl. | North Decl.

1814-1815.) 1818-1819.) 1822-1823. | 1826-1827. 1831-1832.

Calcutta, (4:2 55°42 50°25

Madras, | 32.27 77°08 27°62 26°61 88°67 20°07

Macao, | 95°70 95°70 51°80

The three numbers in the Calcutta guage are, one, the highest, and

two the lowest up to 1833 ; the six numbers in the Madras guage are

the four minima and two maxima noted up to the same period. Of

the three numbers from the Macao guage, one only is an extreme,

-but the other two are very large either way. Some other circum-

stances, also, would lead to the belief, that peculiar localities receive

the changes both of drought and moisture earlier than others. Thus

the last drought was at its height in Bengal in 1832, and also at

Madras; but it did not reach either Delhi or the Nilgherries to the

westward until 1833. This of course introduces a new source of

confusion.

There is one other way of attempting to trace the variation of the

seasons, and that is by a comparison of the prices of corn in different

years at different places ; but this must be deferred for the present.

[May,

On the Revolution of the Seasons.

286

"+ | t+ 168.18/19-92/90-TE] OF-6T s2-6tlot-ce 00-1% |09-12|00-92|09-¢2]00-92| ** |09-92 oz-szlor-or 00-82|00‘F|08-c¢| ** ‘omasyreg

06-9|00-6¢] °° | °° |08-8F/0¢.r9|oz-cojos-rsjog-zot] “7 fo] cp pt pp | Sa oe fee Ae ee Pee aueoa

60-02|29-22/80-22/z2-£9|20-0F/S¢.g¢|22-ze|s9-crl 7 | tof ct | tt | tt 188-bo/9p-19]T2-Te. TT-TE}OT-99} °° | ce [oot ‘seapeny

— ee oe ff ee |

OZ8L GIST ISI8L IZi8t I9IST ISISI IFIST '€T8l 'ZT8L ‘LIST 'OL8T '608T 'SO8T 1Z08T ‘YOST 'SO8T IPOST '€O8T IZOST ‘LO8T

oe | |

“IZSL 07 snoraaud suvah YZ ur saanjd quasaffip yo uazjnf aany yoy, moy fo suns jonuup ayz buinays

"SON WT1AV,

“sofesoae ay} wo.y parjddns uaeq aaey pue ‘aarjoagjap Aqyerjred ore stoysidey eIyNI[eD oy} YSl193se Ue YIIM payer steak 94} U[—“FLON

a - ES OG 68.7% | 02-SE | 98-62 | €2-GSS | 69-6E | L£Z-CL | ZF-26 | F9-02 = oe ke sees Ca S.inq arp |

ote oe Ome "eg 0£-SZ | 06-2¢ | 0€-6S | 09-FOT] 08-1¢ , 08-62 | O€-F2Z | 09-89 | O2-SG | 09-€9 | 09-89 | °° °° ° +> Sova

9Z-ZE\ZT-OF|S6-9E| 20-06 | O€-0F | IP-FE | 60-ZE | 68-2ZE | £9-88 | 12-09 | F6-S¢ 16-€¢ 19-93 | 08-89 | GI-ZP | “°° °° °° Sseapeyy

07.47\¢8.9¢] 1-FI oe aie ee ee al ee vie aie oe oe ee ee pigae (oP <2) erry

a e =° i. x Ch-GP | 82-93 | GZL-EE | €8-6PF “% fa Ss at “ae a "'* {oodyeqng

ee ee as ee 08-F9 00-Z¢ 09-9F 02-1¢ ee ee ee ee ee ee ee OO O20 20 OLAS

oe ‘* a7 PILE 1€-G9 00-€€ | $36-0¢ 19-9P 66-ES 19-¢9 hey Mg = <= ee? alta aS) ‘a10d3eny

re “* 109-EF| 89-LG | 26-69 | 8ZL-9F te “a i = a a ae a os seers felooouRg

** 190-89/08-29} 02:99 | 00-68 | 06-66 | 08-08 | 08-9F | 00-%2 | 2, = y = = eres Wager TYG |

0G-G8/£Z-8919&-091 GZ-0S | 8Z-8¢ | b6-S9 | EL-6G | 62-2G | 9S-F9 | oP-GG “ad 0€-29 | 02-L2 gt: ne seco sees heqinaleg

GESl | PES] SESt] sesr | Test | OF8t | 628t | SZ8L | Ze8t |! %928T | GOST | xPo8l | ¥€C8L |! Cc8l | TZ8t

'OZBL ours sunah quaiafip up saovjd guasasip up uapjnf aavy joy}; saya um mony fo sung jonuup ay7 burmayg

‘L ‘ON Wavy,

287

*(a10deny Jo oyeunrty) *GEz ‘T] [OA “00g Sy [eUINOL 998) FI] JeaX ay} 10J St SyoyouAg OY} UAT POpHpoUr OM} BY} JO ‘ON 4SLT OUT, »

¢1-C eo ee ee eer oe eer ee ee ee ee se oe es eo eos ee ee oe es oe ‘g0ua.10gIq

16-19 “**""" “pr “eT ‘ar ‘Tt ‘ot ‘6 ‘8 ‘2 ‘9 “tt t‘sawak jo oSesoay

bE 99 *""**" “BT Zt ‘OT ‘GT ‘Gp fe {3 ST ot *fsapak jo advioay

€8-€6 89.69|89-19 126-89 €2-8S)/E1-29 18¢,¢9]¢T.29|82-E9|b2-65]T9-29|ST-69] °° °°" ** ‘edeseny

F8-69 | 1-98 |02?22/92-12106-19)¢8-2¢

_—_——~- | -———— | —_—-..

b6-69 | FO-1Z |F0-091F2-49|F7-69)F9-26

—— OO Oe | |

FE-LClFE.£9 0C-6S%. |¥8-6S\$2.F91F2-€9 |PS,F9!] °° 1F8-69'F6-991FE-89|Fs-99| “°' *faqnAsping

¥ 8-69 06-9F 10€-€5109.86|08-F |08-€2108-29/09-29 02-6F|09-25|09-29 i Hiseee es Copan

0Z-68!0¢-SPIOF-LOL ee ee ee ee ae oe | ee ee ee

Ge.£¢|8G-25]69-L¢ |28-PS| 21.6] ¢6-S01'66°2212z-82/6F-06'G68-£F 121-92 |0F-F9 \ ar

£6-6PF)€6-29, *" Aes “" 1 ** 10G.12/62-82|6F-8F|68-8h|88-68

** 1€6-89}0€-69 |96-€9!¢¢.6¢]69-99 |ZE°6F1ZS-9¢]FZ-86| °° ug i

06-6 | 00-¢¢ | °° 3 08-2F 06-86

= is “" (PS PElSh.26)23-P

£6.28 06-FF ,98-F6/00-18/Ge-2¢,€8-02

°° *SBIpeyy

ee ee ee ‘ysanquipoy

On the Revolution of the Seasons.

6 “7 |S We0562/8t-28lep-6e| °° ‘ee 1B. ae | ae, oe eee

ee ee oe on oe oe oe oe ee.29 9T-1S 09-8¢ IZ-L9 e° es ee ee ae ee eeeee ‘ssodyayqnygy

oe oe ee oe oe oe oe 16-O8/11-8F |TZ-29 1€-LF oe oe oe ee oe oe oe o Bee Ges Sane

{ 98-68

GT-PPI9E-ZLiS0-OF 10€-2G/99.¢q|F0-19 99°cZ| ** J te | ss [ te | ce | cect ttt ferodgeyy

oe oe oe Bic: ** irer¢lep-rolee-ezlec-oc | c- On oo a on ee oe on ais sere es looong

‘ < 1, [Oo [hSeGS]£8-08122-PS/£9-92/29-18 (ZE-89|Le.peiZS-19 | *° | ts Jott tose poss [ose | tt etttss sseoong

os 2 “*_[0$+48/€2-89}9€-09|92-06)/82-89/2-€9 |£2-65/6Z-2¢/9¢-F9 |zH'Ge] °° loe-zo]oz-z2Z| “° | oo | Tot eaanoqeg

81 Al (OL ASRS peels (elo) Tal elle | 56 S| ce be ao ag leh Go We Gai T

"D)4nI]0) fo wvaut ay? 0) paanpas burag ajoym ay] pun ‘ajahg ayy fo ysuuf ay7 so uayng buag (‘uormvuyoog wnueny fo 70Y} 4azfo yrau

98047 40) 1E8I PUD COB sumah ayz ‘aahg wvunT ay) fo Sivah juasafip ur saonjd juasafip ur pyaf yoy; ung fo sarrzuonb aayninduos ay, bumayg

"€ ‘ON a1avy

1836.]

288 Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. (May,

VI.—Recent Discovery of Fossil Bones in Perim Island, in the Cambay

Gulph.

[Read at the meeting of the Ist June.]

The following notice of the interesting discovery of this new deposit

of fossil bones has been obligingly communicated to me in a letter from

the Baron Hucen, dated at Bombay the 17th April. Although its pub-

lication anticipates the arrival of the specimens themselves, it would be

an injustice to science and to Dr. Lusu to delay for a moment so

important an announcement. The acknowledgments of the Society are

due both to the discoverer and to the Baron Hues, for the preference

given to our museum for their preservation. I hope the circum-

stance may lead to fresh exertions in the valley of the Narbada, where

doubtless much still remains to be explored.—J. P. Sec.

“* You will receive shortly a few fossil bones from Perim Island, in the

Cambay Gulph. Dr. Lusu has the merit to have found them, but with-

out exploring them at all. I had no time to go over from Surat, where

Dr. Lusu showed methem. I requested him to send them to you through

Mr. Waruen. One is an imperfect bone of a mastodon or elephant—

another the head of a boar unknown, and one belonging, I think, to a

‘ Rongeur ;’ but what induces me particularly to wish them at Calcutta

is, that there is a horn in its matrix, which, connected as these fossils

must necessarily be with those of the Narbada, might belong to that

species of Bos mentioned in your Journal: it is decidedly not of a

Buffalo. I was so anxious to reach Bombay, that I could not possibly

go to Perim myself. I did however manage to send a boat over; and

I received yesterday 41 pieces of fossil bones : the greater part belonging

to the mastodon latidens, of which the teeth, in a perfect state, did not

leave any doubt ; some of the bones are of an immense size, one frac-

tured piece of the tusk measuring from the centre to the outside of the

circle 5% which gives 103 inches diameter, or 34 inches in circumfer-

ence : some of them are in the same hard matrix you will see imbedding

the horn ; some evidently rolled by the sea. There are some curious

teeth among the fragments I possess, and two triangular shaped pieces

similar to the horn of a rhinoceros : the teeth are however too large to

belong to that animal. I may perhaps send the most curious specimens

round to you; butI am at this moment too much pleased with my dis-

covery to part with them. It appears that the island abounds with fossils,

and it is a clear proof either that the Narbada must have found only lately

its way to the Cambay gulph, or that some other revolution must have

1836.] Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. 289

separated the little island from Kattiwadr. Having no opportunity to

leave this for either Persia or the Cape, I may still perhaps be able to

go to Perim and Gogo, to trace the fossils on the main land of the

peninsula.” HvuGEL.

Since the above was set in type, and just before striking off the

sheet, I have been favored with the subjoined additidnal information

from a new correspondent, Lieut. Futtyamus, which I hasten to make

known through the Journal, while I venture to assure him the thanks

of the Society for his projected exertions to enrich its museum. Who

will not become an enthusiast amid such discoveries? It is but four

years since the existence of strata containing fossil bones was denied

in India, or at least supposed to be confined to Assam and Ava. We

are proud to think that the Journal has been in some measure the

humble means of stimulating the search which has been thus crowned

with success in so many quarters.—Eb.

«« On my arrival in this part of the country in the month of April, I

heard a report that some bones, turned into stones, as the natives

called them, had been discovered on the Island of Perim in the Gulph

of Cambay, and in latitude 21° 39.

I lost no time in going there to see if the report of fossil remains was

correct, and although I do not pretend to be a geologist, or to know

much about fossil osteology, still I consider my labours most amply

repaid, by my first visit to the island; for I obtained a most perfect

specimen of the teeth of the mastodon ; one also that I think belongs

to the palzotherium ; and the femur, vertebre, and many other bones

belonging to mammiferous animals now extinct.

Being well aware from the perusal of your scientific Journal, how

highly, and I might say justly, remains of this sort are prized, I shall

take the liberty of forwarding to the Society for their acceptance a box

containing specimens of these fossil remains.

The formation in which they were discovered is a tertiary conglo-

merate, composed of nodules of sandstone, indurated clay, anda small

proportion of silex, cemented together by a yellow clay ; most of the

fossil remains have been exposed to view, by the sea having washed

off the upper part of the matrix, but still they are firmly attached to

the rock, and the only way they were to be obtained, without breaking,

was by stone-cutters carefully working all round them ; large quantities

of petrified wood were lying about in every direction.

The following is a list of the strata as they appeared to me, com-

mencing from the surface, viz.

lst. Loose sand and earth.

2nd. Conglomerate, composed of sandstone, clay and silex.

2 P

290 Discovery of Fossil Bones in Western India. (May,

8rd. Yellow and whitish clay, with nodules of sandstone.

4th. Conglomerate as above.

5th. Siliceous sandstone with a few fossils. (Calcareous.—Eb.)

6th. Conglomerate.

7th. Indurated clay more or less compact.

8th. Conglomerate, in which the best, and I may say nearly the

whole of the fossil remains have been discovered.

The deepest strata of conglomerate are about 3 feet, but they gene-

rally do not run more than 18 inches to 2 feet, and for the most part

lie horizontal. On the western side of the island, however, the strata

are much disturbed, being fractured, and dipping at an acute angle to

the east; on the southern end of the island, sandstone appears below

the fossil stratum of conglomerate, dipping to the north at an angle of

25 degrees.

There is a tradition among the inhabitants of Gogah, that the island

of Perim was formerly joined to the main land, by means of a stone

bridge, which has, in the course of time, been destroyed; remains

of some buildings are still to be seen, running into the sea in the shape

of piers, &c. It must have been a very stupendous undertaking, for

there is a channel now between the land and the island of the depth of

75 fathoms, and nearly 500 yards in width.

On the island there are the remains of a considerable fort, and

buildings of Hindu architecture, for I observed in an old temple that

had tumbled down, the broken figure of Buddha rudely sculptured in a

sitting posture ; also the remains of a large tank wall, and bauli. Among

the other curiosities of the island are two elephants cut out in the

rock ; they are covered now by the sea except at very low water; one

is finished, and I should say, measured about 10 feet long by 8 or 9

feet high. Capital fresh water is procurable on the island, 20 feet

below the surface; it is found below the stratum of sandstone.

I will here enumerate the varieties of specimens of fossil remains,

which I think have been found. Teeth of mammoth; ditto mastodon,

paleotherium, hippopotamus, or rhinoceros, and a number of other

smaller animals. The head of some large saurian animal; part of

a tortoise; ditto of elephant’s tusks. Femora, vertebra, and other

large bones ; one shell in siliceous sandstone, and the half of a deer’s

foot. With this vast variety before me, it requires a person much better

qualified than myself in the art to say to what particular animal the

different specimens belong, and I therefore forward them with the

hopes of hearing the opinion of the scientific in Calcutta.

It has occurred to me, on reading over the Journal for Aug. 1834,

that the conglomerate in which the fossil remains in the valley of the

1836.] Synopsis of Siwalik Fossils. 291

Nerbudda have been discovered, is very nearly similar to that in

which the Perim fossil are found ; and if my conjectures are correct,

we shall be able to trace the formation along the whole line of the

Nerbudda valley and the greater part of the Kattiwar coast. Should

such be the case, and I have but little doubt in my own mind that it

will be so, what a vast field has thus been thrown open, for discovery

and research ; I still hope to see my conjectures fulfilled with regard

to finding coal in the Tajpipla or Kattiw4r range of hills before the

lapse of many years.

Not wishing to take the credit to myself of having been the first

person to discover these remains, I should mention that I believe Dr.

Lusu was the first ; he having, I understand, found a tusk of some ani-

mal on the island. During a second visit to the island, I was accom-

panied by three other gentlemen, who have most kindly given mi,

permission to forward any part of the specimens so obtained, that Ik

think may be acceptable.

Doubtless on further research and on breaking up the stratum, more

perfect specimens of bones will be discovered : for I must mention that

all those sent were covered at high water, the highest point of the island

not being above 60 feet higher than high water mark; the length of

the island is about 14 miles to 2 miles, and in breadth 4 to 2 mile ;

large sand hills are formed on the south-west side, and it is inhabited

by about 12 houses of coolies, who cultivate bajri there during the

monsoon. A light-house has been established there for some years,

and kept up by the Government, of which a serang and five lascars

have charge: the expenses are defrayed by levying a duty on all boats

passing.

Should I be able to make any further discoveries either in fossil

remains, or as to the formation of the Kattiwar hill, I shall trouble

you with a further communication ; that is to say, should you consider

the present worthy of occupying any part of the pages of your ‘inter-

esting Journal. Gro. FunusameEs.”

VII.—Table of Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Genera, in the Dddtpur Collection.

By Lieuts. W. E. Baker and H. M. Duranp, Engineers.

The following table is intended to illustrate the proportion in which

the respective genera have been found to occur, and is deduced from

the specimens in our collection.

The results might have been presented in a more simple form by

confining the table to the two last columns ; but as information with

regard to the number of perfect and imperfect specimens on which

2p 2

292 Synopsis of the Siwalik Fossils (May,

the entries admitted into these columns are based may be deemed

interesting, the following headings under which the specimens were

counted off are also given.

Craniums, which title includes all specimens showing a considerable

portion of the head.

Upper Jaws. Allotted to such palates as possess either one or

both lines of molars complete.

Lower Jaws. Under this heading are numbered those lower jaws

which are perfect, and also such as, though wanting the symphisis,

present the line of molars complete. The shape of the lower jaws of

the ruminantia renders them very liable to fracture immediately in

front of the molars; accordingly, a great number of half jaws are

found, which, being deprived of their symphisis, afford no means of

aecurately joining together such of them as may have belonged to the

same individual. Some pairs may therefore have been overlooked; an

error nearly inevitable, and which would account for the apparent

excess of lower jaws in proportion to the upper.

Fragments of Upper and of Lower Jaws. Within these columns, as

the heading imports, fragments of maxillaries, containing one, two, or

more molars, and also those detached molars, the maxillaries of which

are not in the collection, have been ranged.

As the table enters into no detail of species, the latest discoveries

which it comprises may be cursorily noticed. These are a very perfect

cranium and lower jaw of a species of Vulpes ; an equally perfect cra-

nium and lower jaw of a species of the genus Gulo; also an addi-

tion to the Pachyderma, consisting of the anterior half of a head, of

which the posterior half was unfortunately broken off; and owing to

the carelessness of the excavators, none of the fragments have hitherto

been recovered. The lower jaw is locked within the upper; so that

the exterior surface, and the outline of the upper molars can alone be

examined ; the characteristics of the teeth being thus imperfectly deve-

loped, and the occiput wanting altogether, the specimen has been

inserted in the table under the general title ‘‘ Cuvierian Pachyderma :”’

by which, however, there is no intention of conveying the idea that it

has been identified with any of the Pachydermata of the Paris basin ;

for although it affords some analogies both to the Paleotherium and

to the Anoplotherium, its essential peculiarities are sufficiently remark-

able to cause it to be separated from either genus.

In the present early state of the search, the accompanying list can

only be considered as an approximation to the relative numerical pro-

portions in which the different fossil genera existed. Viewed as such, it

tends to prove that species of the genera Elephas, Mastodon, Hippo-

potamus, Cervus, Antilope, and Bos, were abundant; that the genera

1836.] in the Dadipur Museum. 293

Rhinoceros, Equus, Sus, Canis, and Hyena, were of less frequent

occurrence, and that the Camelide and the Sivatherium were rare.

The habits of these genera may be adduced as reasons for modifying

this general summary of the state of a former zoological period.

Nore.—Having been favored with the perusal of the forthcoming papers on

the Hippopotamus, in the Asiatic Society’s Transactions, it becomes requisite to

remark, that the specimen placed under the genus Anthracotherium is the same

which in a note at page 59, is considered by Dr. Fatconer as belonging to a

new genus, Cherotherium. In our opinion, it is a new species of Anthracothe-

rium, under which we have accordingly numbered it. Mr. Dawe has brought

to our notice a specimen in his possession, which consists of the right half of a

lower jaw belonging to the Hippopotamus Dissimilis of Dr. FatconrR and

Captain CauTiry. It is valuable as showing two molars which have suffered but

little detrition, and which, instead of the tapering conical collines, with summits

close to each other, as in the large Hippopotami, has its colline apices

widely separated, the tapering taking place from the point of contact of their

bases outwards: the outer side of each colline is nearly perpendicular, and from

the manner in which the sloping and the upright surfaces meet, the colline top

loses the mammillar aspect, assuming a flattened almost trenchant form. The

wear indicated is the same as that describad in the paper above alluded to.

Table of Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Genera.

to o >

ei arate!

ala z ie a | z

HlB/Ele |Boizie

Class. Order. Genus. E AS |¢ Ae Remarks.

AAR Earle

e\sl2les|2.2 8/28

m i o|c

ol lanl cc La Sel Ls

Mammalia, |Fere, Ursus? ....{ 0} 0} 1} Oo} O}| Oo 1

Canis,. .. 3] 0) 6] 2 eS rez

Hyena, . 2| 0} 4| 9 | 15 /11) 19

EMIS S cid pipes 2; 0} 0} O 2) 2) 2

Gutor sy, sre. | ONO) ee Ge to end

Glires, Musas JAE NOLL! Ol) OF)> axa) 4

Hystrix,....| 0) J} 0) 1 2h

Pachyderma,|Elephas,....| 9] 6/22] 46 | 31 |61| 53 56 doubtful

Mastodon,..{ 3| 6/28] 39 | 31 (43| 59 | ¢ mutilated frag-

ments omitted.

Hippopota- |

mus, .. .. {11/14/20} 21 | 43 [46 63

SUSse teaver ole Olea ay pueda 120

: fis. D), lik Obs tnd Jo jak od ie

? 0| o] 0} 2) Of} 2 Oo } Cuvierian.

Anthracothe-

ENP) cot |) Oly 8}, O}5 0 Vo Ole

Rhinoceros, | 3} 3} 7) 18 | 6 |24| 13

Equus, ....| 0; 0] 2) 20 | 14 |20) 16

Sivatherium,| 0} 9) 1/ 8 | S| 8 9

Ruminantia, |Camelus, ...} 1] 0} 1} 1] 2] 2) 3

Cervus, ....} 3/31/17] 25 | 84 [59,101 |) Many doubtful

Antilope,....| 8)18)35) $ | 45 |34) S0 \ fragments not

Bos, ......| 2| 3/12] 35 | 25 }40] 37 counted.

Reptilia, Sauria, Gariala,....| 0} 0) 0} 0 | O | O| O {5 fragments.

Crocodile, ..| 0} 0} 0} O | O |} 0} O |3 fragments.

5 whole—many

Chelonia, |Emys, ....| | 0} 0) O| O] Oo} O fragments of

bothEmys and

Trionix

Pisces, 3} 0, O| O} 0} 3} O

Déddizpur, April 27th, 1836.

994 Note on the teeth of the [May,

VIII.—Note on the Teeth of the Mastodon a dents etroites of the Siwalik

Hills. By Captain P. T. Cautuny. PJ. XI.

[Read at the meeting of the Ist June. |

Without further preface I refer the reader to the 1st volume of the

Osemens fossiles, page 268. Figures 1 and 2, plate 4, under the head

of “‘ Divers Mastodons.”’

These drawings were presented to Cuvier by M. Favusas, and the

fossil was found near Asti in Upper Italy.

Cuvier merely alludes to this fossil as one of the varieties into which

the true Mastodon a dents etroites passes by a greater subdivision and

an irregularity of position of the mamille ; the proportions of length

to breadth of the tooth retaining their full and perfect character.

By comparing the accompanying drawings with the figures above

alluded to, there can be no demur, I imagine, in identifying the Siwalik

variety of Mastodon now under review with the Asti fossil. It remains

therefore simply to note the peculiarities in form of the tooth : al-

though it may be a point of consideration hereafter, whether, as the

character of the tooth is so marked, and its peculiarities so rigidly

adhered to throughout the whole of the remains found in the Siwé4liks,

it may not be placed under a sub-genus, that of ‘‘ angustidens,” with

the specific denomination of M. Sivalensis.

There is no cortical substance or crusta petrosa ; the tooth consist-

ing of enamel and ivory only, the former being very thick and mas-

sive, as is normal in the mastodons.

The coronal surface consists of a double line of conical and obtusely

pointed mamillz : those on the external side being in most cases per-

fect, whilst those on the inner side are divided by a fissure or fissures

into two or three irregularly formed obtuse points. These mamille

are not, as in the true Mastodon angustidens, placed transversely or at

right angles with the line of surface, but meet each other from right

to left alternately, so that the furrow on one side is interrupted by

the mamilla on the other ; and the mamillz on the whole line of tooth

lock into each other in the same way that two serrated edges opposed

to each other might be supposed to do, were they placed in contact.

The outer surface of the enamel is smooth, and the space or furrow

between each mamilla both on the external and internal surface is

marked by a small tubercle, the presence of which however does not

appear to be constant.

The surface of the tooth of the lower jaw wears obliquely and out-

wardly on the grinding surface, as in the ruminants, in which respect

it differs entirely from the elephants.

The wear of the coronals is marked at the commencement by irre-

gularly lobed figures, which, as the detrition advances, become confus-

1836.] Mastodon Angustidens. 295

ed, and gradually unite, until the mamillz are worn away entirely,

when the tooth is left with merely a surface of ivory surrounded by

enamel.

The drawings are intended to represent the tooth at these diflerent

stages; from the state of germ, to the old and worn down tooth,

shewing the intermediate state of detrition at different ages.

Pl. xi. Fig. 1. Fragment of tooth in germ, with the enamel on one

of the mamille fractured.

Fig. 2. A very perfect molar of a young but adult animal, the front

surface being moderately worn, and the rear portion in the state of

germ. This is the right molar of the lower jaw. The length of

this tooth is 9°2 inches or ‘234 metres, and the breadth measured

on the base or lower bulge of the mamille 2°95 inches or -074

metres ; it consists of six pair of points or mamill, with apparently

(as the fossil is slightly fractured at this point) a bilobed talon in

the rear. The coronal surface is here shewn.

Fig. 3. An internal view of the same tooth.

Fig. 4. An external view of the same, exhibiting the obliquity of

wear on the coronal surface.

Fig. 5 and 6. Fragment of a tooth ofa greater age than the preceding.

Fig. 7 and 8. Fragment of tooth with jaw attached ; this is a portion

of the left molar of the lower jaw of an animal of the same age as

that represented in figs. 5 and 6, distinctly shewing the cup-like

cavities formed by the detrition and gradual junction of the ma-

mille: the obliquity of wear towards the outer surface is here very

distinctly marked.

Fig.9 and 10. Fragment of a tooth of the same age as the pre-

ceding.

The three last specimens have belonged to animals of nearly the

same age; the mamillz are much worn, and we see the gradual oblite-

ration of their independent hollows, reducing the coronal surface to

the appearance exhibited in figs. 11 and 12.

Fig. 11. Shews the detrition at an intermediate state between figs. 9

and 10, and fig. 12. The posterior portion of this specimen still

retains the encircling lines of enamel on the worn down points,

whilst the portion in front has arrived at its last stage of wear.

Fig. 12. May be considered as a representation of the tooth in its

final state of detrition, when all marks of the mamillated form of

crown is obliterated, and nothing remains but an outer border of

enamel encircling a deep internal hollow of ivory.

I wish to draw attention particularly to the alternating position of

the mamillz, which I consider to be the chief specific character, and

which is distinctly marked throughout the whole series ; and, referring

296 Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. [May,

again to the Asti fossil as figured in Cuvisr, I think that a clear iden-

tification is established.

As my object in writing this note is simply to point out the dis-

tinctive characters uf the teeth of the mastodon a dents etroites, which

have been found in the Siwalik hills, it is unnecessary to make any

further remarks until we can enter upon a general description of the

fossil mastodons and elephants of these hills ; noting however, that

from the half of a lower jaw of this species, with its ramus attached,

which is now in my possession, we may look forward to some pecu-

liarities of form, differing very materially not only from the fossil and

existing elephant, but also from the other species of mastodons.

Up to this period I am only aware of the discovery of two species

of mastodons in the SiwAlik hills; namely, the variety of M. angus-

tidens which is the subject of this note, and the M. Elephantoides of

Clift. The former is very rare, and the latter in very great abundance.

1X.—Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. By Dr. J. Movat,

Medical Surgeon, 13th Dragoons.

If the accompanying meteorological table, kept at Bangalore, for the

year 1835, be of any interest, you are at liberty to make any use of it

you please. It has been drawn up for the medical reports, which I am

in the habit of transmitting to the heads of my department, and the

transcription of which is all the trouble it now gives. The original

table, as kept every two hours for the entire of 1834 and 1835, are also

at your service ; but they are two voluminous and bulky, I should think,

for any useful purpose. The column of monthly average was obtained

by adding the state of the thermometer, kept every two hours for the

entire 24 hours ; dividing this by 12, gave the average for each day.

These added together for the month, and divided by the number of

days in the month, give the monthly average noted in the table.

The wards of the hospital are visited by one of the medical pupils

or apprentices every two hours from 10 Pp. Mm. to 4 a. m., whose duty

it is to give medicine, &c. to the sick, and, at the same time, to mark

the thermometer. The corporal of the guard, when relieving the sentries,

is responsible, and sees this duty performed ; and, in the day time, the

hospital serjeant, apothecaries, pupils on duty, &c. mark it, the rest

of the 24 hours; so that every source of error is endeavoured to be

avoided. The thermometer marked S., or side, is fixed on the end of a

shelf, some inches from the wall, and by its position, screened from the

influence of the glare or reflected heat; the other, marked C. or centre,

is suspended from the centre of the room, about seven feet from the

floor, and the general agreement of the two instruments isa pretty good

guarantee for their accuracy. The apartment is the surgery of the

* ae bg A - ,

Harti

Vie

Jour As. $00.

PIC. del. 18335.

Wiss

Tip

wast

Thy

Use

i ase gs)

PEAT

TH] YEG Yi

Se SS aS eS '

ee — _—_— ey"

st)

any

Hal \

WS Wy

Wy)

mit) '

ht ENG

BONG

Hf 47m

1836.

Meteorological Register kept at Bangalore. 297

hospital, 12 feet square, with a door facing the east and a window to

the north. The former always, and the latter generally, kept open. ‘There

are also two small ventilators on the west side, always admitting a

circulation of air.

The other table is from Sir. J. F. W. Herscuer’s suggestion of

meteorological observations, &c. kept on four fixed days in each year*

and the thermometer, &c. marked every hour.

Abstract of Two-hourly Meteorological Register, kept at Bangalore, 1835.

S. or Side.

C. or Centre.

Months.

[tion

Dec., ie

Ann. Avg.,

every 2 hours,

day and night.

Monthlyaverage

of Ther., taken

69.93

79.19

74.39

——.

oe Barometer. Rain

Ya a

3S we

c ° .

ape ones Be Ble Wind. Remarks.

ee slee (sole alae

an S19 =

442)/45 |42 |a5 [5 6

ope 27.10|27.00|27.05 Eas- {Weather delightfully cool

ol terly.! and bracing—some foggy

mornings, and after the

72.50 24th, cloudy days.

72.00 27.75|26.98]27.36]..|..]Eas- {Weather cool and pleasant

73.75 terly.j| —sun getting powerful.

80.50 26.95|26.88)/26.91].. |35]Ky. orjMornings cool, days hot,

2 Sy. and at times close and

oppressive—one shower

78.50 of rain.

78.37 26,95|26.87/26.91} 4/16 Ey. orjGenerally close, hot, and

: S. E.f sultry—the air cool.

th.Wy:

78.50

78.50 26.85)/26.79|26.82 Sy

26.79/26.81'26.80] 3

26.75|26.78 26.76] 5

~126.78|26.42 26,60} 4

26.$2/26,77|26.S413

26.84|26.78)\26.81] 5,

71.371. 92} 1

71.50 26.95}26.89)26.9

26.96/26.90/26.93}..

rain.

Weather cool and pleasant,

hazy or cloudy, with fre-

quent showers, and some

falls of rain.

Weather cool and hazy,

with heavy showers, and

pleasant.

Weather cold and chilly,

with constant showers,

and some heavy falls of

rain.

97)Wy.th.twWeather cool, clouded, and

V. andj pleasant—several heavy

By. showers of rain.

10}®y. & tWeather cool and pleasant,

N. E.{ with some heavy falls of

rain.

24)Wy.

ssiWy.

13;Wy.

Co aVic

30/Ey. orlweather delightful, cold,

N. E.f bracing and generally

cloudy,some foggy morn-

ings, and at times very

cold,

*-IN. E.} Weather cold,bracing, and

& Ey.] delightfully pleasant and

73.85}26.95 |G2.82 26.89}44

invigorating.

N. B. The Thermometers marked every two hours—the Barometer at 10 A. M.

and 3 P. M.

* This daily register of the Barometer, at 10 a. M. and 4 P. M., would be par-

ticularly acceptable, provided the instrument was a good one, which we almost

ear could not be the case.

(See below.)—Ep, 2a

298

Meteorological Observations, &c.

[May,

X.—Meteorological Observations, taken every hour, at Bangalore, in the

Hospital of H. M. 13th Dragoons, from 6 a. M. of the 2\st to 6 P. mM.

of the 22nd March, 1836, inclusive, in conformity with Sir W. Her-

schel’s instructions.

ea]

ed .

Hours of Ob-|° &

servation. & 3

3 2

oe onl

March, 1836.

6 A. M. 2'st,/27,01

7 GUCCOR ees ret mer OL

Saito... 4 O02

9 ditto,....| ,01

TO) ditto,.....)|) 0)

LIMAIGEO Se es 1 OO

12 Noon, ..| ,01

1P.M ,00

2 ditto, ,00

3 ditto, ,00

4 ditto,....|26;95

Bho yeas le AOS

6 ditto,....| ,95

7 GUELO sae eiee! 95)

8 ditto,....| ,95

9 ditto,....| ,95

10 ditto,....| ,96

11 ditto,5...\ 97

12 Midnight,| ,97

1A.M. 22d,| ,98

De ditto. 398

BcHitto... o. | 08

4 ditto,....] ,98

5 ditto,....{/27,00

6 ditto,....| ,00

7 ditto,....|26,98

8 ditto,....|27,00

9 ditto,....| ,00

JO ditto,....| ,00

IT -ditto,....| .00

12 Noon. ..| ,00

Van Sing din 8 ELOK0)

2 GittGreans ||. 500

3 ditto,....|26,98

4 ditto,... 95

5, ditto...) si 593

6 ditto,....| ,93

Hourly Mean

Average, ../26,98

Range of 2

Therms.

5 5

se ein he

72) e)

76 76

77 77

78 78

80 81

81 84

82 84

$4 84

84 86

84 88

85 86

85 85

84 86

$4 86

84. 86

83 84

82 84

81 83

81 82

80 79

80 718

80 78

80 79

78 77

80 78

78 78

77 17

79 79

80 81

81 §3

82 85

83 86

84 87

85 86

85 87

84 87

$1.59|82.73

N. B. The observations were made in an apartment 12 feet square.

By the same.

Weather.

——— a ee ee

Weather clear, cool, and pleasant.

Calm ; the sun getting hot when exposed outside.

Much the same; sun getting very hot ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto ; gentle breeze.

Very hot ; some light clouds ; ditto.

Sun hot, air cool, some light clouds, wind rising.

Sun at times obscured, light clouds, and the air cool

and refreshing.

Ditto, ditto, ditto.

Sun very oppressive, very little wind, and very hot

and close; some light clouds.

Very close ; the sun very lot, scarcely any wind.

Getting cool, wind rising, and very pleasant.

Calm and pleasant ; sky clear.

Ditto and very close; light clouds ; some lightning ;

Ditto gentle breeze ditto ditto.

Gentle breeze ; some heavy clouds; Wy. ditto.

Calm and very sultry; some heavy clouds hovering

about; some lightning; S. E,

Slight breeze from S. E. ; sky clearer, some light-

ning, N. W.

Ditto, clear sky ; frequent ; ditto ditto.

Cool and pleasant ; ditto; gentle breeze from S. E.

Wind rising and strong from S. E.; at times variable ;

sky clear.

Still strong breeze from S. E.; at times Wy. do. do.

Gentle cool breezes ditto ; cloudless sky.

Ditto ditto. ;

Very gentle breeze ; not so cool as at 5, but pleasant ;

ditto.

Clear and pretty cool ; very calm, but the sun get-

ting hot.

Ditto ditto, ditto ditto.

Much the same, but the sun getting very hot, scarce-

ly any breeze.

Getting very hot, very calm and clear, slight breeze,

Gentle breeze from N.; sky clear, sun hot, but not

oppressive.

Calm and sultry ; light clouds ; sun getting very hot,

Sky clear and cloudless ; slight breeze from N.; sun

very hot.

Ditto ditto, hot and sultry.

Ditto ditto, ditto ditto.

Very sultry ; little or no wind; sky clear.

Ditto ditto ditto.

One ther-

mometer hung in the centre, 7 feet from the floor ; the other, at the end of a shelf,

some inches from the wall, and quite protected from reflected heat.—The room has

a door facing the east. and a small window to the north, both left open*.

* The march of the Barometer seems so sluggish that we fear the observer neg-

lected to tap the tube previous to reading off—an indispensable precaution with

ordinary instruments,—ED.

836.]

Horary observations taken at Dadapur.

299

XI.—Horary Observations taken at Dddtpur, in conformity with Sir

John

Herschel’s Circular.

Lieut. Durann, Engineers.

[The original, whence we have with permission extracted these tables for publica-

tion, has been forwarded to the Secy. of the South African Phil. Inst. ]

Barometrical Observations taken at Dadipur, Sept. 1835.

| Barometer, |Mountain

Pa by Cary. |Barom. by

& Troughton.

a —<—<——$$_——____—

7 OPsd eres Es AA eee

3 [od iS q we ESE

| 1A feelas| 2 (eB g

wio] . |sclad Sala oS

B\e| © je AiSe| & |g] &

Alsi e Ia |< mo lx es)

H! D. | D.| D. |Inch. | D. |Inch.

rae ° oO oO oO

20|18173» 1726 |73°2 128°690/73°6

»» |19]74°9 |74°8 [75° 695|75°

9) |20|75°4 175°7 |75°8 706)75°6

») (21|77°2 |78° |78°4 727\78°

3) |22|80°9 sis |si-9 744/81°3 983

»» |23'81°6 |83°5 |S4°6 740/844! 981

+> (24,81°6 |84°6 |85°3 728/$4°2 963

21) 1182" |85°8 |86°3 704/85°7 934

yy | 2(81°6 |87°5 [87°7 665/S6"9 904

» | 3)80°4 {87°2187°7] 636/87°2| 872

»» | 4)79°4 |86°8187°2 609186°7 845

»> | 5|79°7 [85°21 |86°2 610'85°4 834

a) | 6|77°6 |82°2 |83° 711/82°4 810

» | 7/77" 180° 180°8 626'S0°2 823

oy) | 8|75°2 |78°2179° 604/79" $29

oo | 9(75°5 |77°7 |78°5 605|78°2 $49

9 (LO175* |76°417'7-7 612|78°7 860

9) 111]73°3 |75° 175°7 620|76'2 $70

Salles bee 2575" 618)75'°3 $42

99 113] 72° 73° 73°5 609,74°2 832

99 |14170°7 71°71 72°5 615)73° 846

99 |15)70°5 |71°2171°8) = 607/722 827

9» |16|70° \70"8 ee 607'71.5| $29

97 |17170° \70°3 Wels 622)71°2 $40

99 119)71°4 71°6 172° 637|72° 869

a3 bl ee 76°5 |76°5 663|75°8 $90

9) 121 78° |80° |so- 678/79°2 907

5, |22]79°6 |82° |Sa-3 690|S1°5 916

49 '23/80°2 |sa-s $3°9 633/83°4 918

9) |(24|80°4 (85°21 95°5 674184°5 903

22) 1'81° ley: 87°1 647)|86'5 872

3 | 2|80°8 |87°3 |s7°6 605|87°5 $39

yy | 3/81°2 |88°1 !gg°5 584|S7°7 823

»,| 4/80°8 87°8 |gs-4 873|87°7 795

| 5 eae 87° 572\86°3 790

»,| 679° "S26 |64°2 568|83°5' 786

By Col. Couvin, Lieut. Baker, and

Remarks.

\23°924|Calm. Mist cannot be seen through for 300

yards, appears less over head.

932|/Ditto ditto clearing off alittle, with just a

breath of wind from east.

942/Ditto ditto ditto objects becoming visible

800to 1000 yards off, air just perceptible E.

960) Wind S. W. light and variable, clear except

light wreaths of mist along the horizon.

ditto very light ditto, with light low

transparent clouds, apparently the re-

mains of the mist.

W. light ditto, still a few light clouds.

W. light and variable, ditto ditto ditto.

W. light breeze, ditto ditto ditto,

W. ditto ditto ditto, except the

line of mountains which is clouded.

W. by N. ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto,

N. to 8. E. in white masses.

N.W. ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto N.

E. to S. E. ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Ditto much fallen, ditto light clouds

over the mountains and on the S. W.

horizon.

Ditto as before, ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto, stars bright.

Ditto light ditto ditto.

Ditto breeze in gusts, ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto light ditto ditto.

Light air westerly ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto-

Ditto ditto ditto do dawn appearing.

Calm, ditto mountains cloudless.

Ditto ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto, except light clouds over

the mountains.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto N E. to S. E.

A very light air from E. ditto large

white clouds on and behind the

mountain range.

Ditto ,, W. ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Ditto ,, W. ditto masses of ditto

ditto ditto N. by E. to S. E.

N. W, light breeze, ditto ditto ditto.

», Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto.

», Ditto in gusts ditto ditto ditto ditto,

5, ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto.

W. ditto ditto ditto, mountains clear

to N. cloudy to E. and S. E.

W. light ditto ditto ditto ditto.

”

”?

Observation commenced at 60°30" A. M, of 21st September, common reckoning.

300

nme

Barometrical Observations taken at Dddipur. [May,

Barometrical Observations taken at Dadipur, March, 1836.

etached Thermo-

meter.

S | Wet. Bulb.

allele

91 3

of 4

| 5

| 6

99 a

| §

v1 9

mito

67°0/75"

66°2/74°5

64° |71°2

64°8)71°

62°2'66"

60°4|63°

59° |60°5

58°5|60°

» | 670° [76°

Barometer,{ Mountain

Remarks.

Wind E.

Wind E. sky clear, over head light clouds

to South, Sirmur mountains clouded.

Wind E, light clouds over mountains ex-

cepting the sub-Himalayas, which are

visible.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Wind 8S. E. light but steady clouds in di-

rection of mountains cover more of the

sky.

Wind E. Gusty, clear over head, light

clouds all round the horizon.

Wind N. by E. unsteady, clear over head,

cloudy from N. W. to N, E. outline of

mountains visible.

026 Wind N. by E. unsteady, clear to S. W.

by Cary. Bar. by

Troughton.

as) 3 q

(ower | . Oo > .

sey, 2 joe! =

S|) eee s

Ss »

25| ama |< aa

D. |Inch. | D. | Inch.

70°6/28°988)|70" |29°128

73°2| = 982/72°3 116

75°5 970\75° 105

78° 954|77°3 080

78°5 923/78" 053

Tissue) 912)74°6 023

75°2 913|74°5 03S

7z §07|71°2

vals) 902|70'6 020

G72 897|166°4 014

64°1 892/64°1 010

62° 900|/61°5 027

61° S9si61°* 030

59°5 §94/59°5 018

58°5 $84/59° 011

57. 881/56°5 000

55°5 860/55" |28°996

54°5 656|55°5 984

So" §54/53°2 982

52°3 §55/52° 884

i iey) 863]51° |29°003

Se §81]50°2 02)

55°7 915}54°7 059

62°7 948|61°4 097

67°7 964|66°7 116

ie 971|70° 11]

74° 934/73°2 091

76°5 944175°7 077

76°8 923/76'1 036

78°5 900|77°9 023

78°5 868]7S° 000

7S8°3 $64|77°5| 28°994

760°7 867]76° 99)

Elsewhere clouded, stormy appearance

to north.

Wind N. light. Clear to S. W. Elsewhere

light clouds, outline of hills visible.

Ditto ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Wind S. E. night clear.

Ditto very light, night clear.

Clear. Clear star light.

Ditto ditto.

Wind N. very light, clear star light.

Ditto ditto ditto.

Wind N. brisk, clear star light. Dawn

commencing,

Wind N. light, sky clear.

N. by E. ditto ditto.

Ditto ditto ditto.

Calm, sky clear.

Wind S. E. light, sky clear.

Ditto ditto ditto.

Calm, sky clear.

Wind S. W. light, sky clear, except light

clouds over the mountains.

Wind W. light ditto ditto ditto,

Ditto ditto ditto ditto.

Time ascertained by one observation of equal altitudes. Observation commen-

ced at 10h. 21m. 31s. of 21st March, common reckoning, and was continued at

exact intervals of one hour.

omitted in the table.—ED.)

(For convenience the minutes and seconds have been

1836.] Horary Observations taken at Dadipur. 301

Memoranda relative to the above Table of Barometrical observations for Septem-

ber 1835. By Lieut. DuRAND. ;

Instruments employed.—Colonel Cotvin’s Barometer was made by Cary.

The cistern is of ivory, the Instrument is adjusted for observation by

bringing the surface of the mercury to a level with the slit in the socket

of the stopcock of the cistern, by means of a brass screw at the bottom of

the cistern. This instrument was, when compared with the standard

Barometer in Calcutta, by J. Prinsep, Esq., found to be correct.

Lieut. Duranp’s Barometer is one of TRovcHTon and Simm’s mountain

Barometers. When compared with the standard Barometer, it stood 0.043

too low.

In order to determine the amount of change which the two instruments

might have suffered, relatively to each other, in consequence of the jour-

ney from Calcutta, a comparison was instituted between the heights shown

by the two Barometers, during the month of June 1835 ; the following is

the result.

Mean, Attd. |Detd.| Moist - :

—- —_____——

28.744 90.4 | 89.51 | 83.15 [10 a. m [28-6944] 92.92 | 91.83 (84.145

28.6488 |95.44 | 94.25 | 85.14 | 4 P.M. | |

28.7486 _|87.83 | 86.51 | 83.22 |10 a. m. |28.7035|88.616/87.236) 83.

98.6585 189.4 | 87.96 | 82.79 | 4p. m. (ie |

Whence may be deduced, that Cary’s barometer suffered considerable

derangement from the inevitable jolting, &c. attendant on so long a jour-

ney. ‘TRoucguton’s had evidently been less disordered, probably but little

so; without a second comparison with the standard barometer, however,

the comparative accuracy of TrovueuTon’s rests upon supposition.

Previous to the day on which the hourly observations were to commence,

Cary’s Barometer was accidentally put out of order, and it became requi-

site to re-fill the tube with mercury ; this was accordingly effected, but

the means for safely heating the filled tube not being at hand, and the

tube appearing to the eye free from air, it was inserted into the instru-

ment ; the observations show the great difference which this untimely

accident caused in the heights of the two mercurial columns.

Thermometers.—The attached thermometers of both barometers read

off to degrees.

The thermometer employed as a moist bulb, is one made by Trovucu-

ron and Smmms. When compared in Calcutta it stood 1:3 too high ; the

scale is graduated to degrees.

The detached thermometer also by Troventon and Simms, reads off

only to two degree divisions ; when examined in Calcutta it was found to be

0°4 too high.

From the foregoing remarks on the thermometers, it is evident that the

division of the scales of these instruments did not admit any perfect accu-

racy in reading off the decimal parts of a degree: the decimal parts in the

table are therefore only careful approximations, and under particular cir-

cumstances, such as reading off at night, &c. small inaccuracies must have

been unavoidable.

Time.—The time of apparent noon and the rate of chronometer were

ascertained by a series of observations of equal altitudes of the sun, on the

17th, 18th, 19th and 20th September.

Location of Instruments.—The instruments were placed in a verandah

facing the north, perfectly shaded, and sheltered from the wind, without, at

the same time, hindering a free circulation of air. Cary’s Barometer stood

about 4/¢. 6, from the wall; Roveuron’s about 1/t. 6, from the wall, the

Space partitioned off and allotted to the instruments not admitting their

further removal from the northern front of the buildiog.

Place of Observation.—Dadupur is situated on the right bank of the

Jamna, a little below the junction of the Sombe ;: the position of the Canal

Cary’s Barometer.

TROUGHTON and

Stmm’s Barometer.

302 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [May,

Department depot is somewhat north of the village, and is in latitude

30° 12 N. and about longitude 77° 23 45” E. as deduced from an obser-

vation of the transit of mercury on the 5th May, 1832. The range of

low mountains separated from the more lofty and older formations by the

Kyadur Doon is about 20 miles from Dadtpur. The word mountains

which enters amongst the remarks on the particulars of the weather, must

be understood to allude to the distant ranges of the Himalayas, and not

to the low and neighbouring mountains.

It is necessary to add,that the hourly observations were taken by Colonel

Convin, Engrs., Lieut. Baker, Engrs., and Lieut. Duranp, Engrs.

Dédipur, Nov. 24th, 1835.

The same remarks are applicable to the March observations, Cary’s

Barometer not having been yet boiled ; the site of the instruments was

Coane et being now under a thatch erected for them in a free circulation

of air.

XII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday evening, the 1st June, 1836.

W. H. Macnacuren, Esq. Vice-President, in the chair.

Messrs. W. Bruce and R. W. G. Friru, proposed at the last meeting,

were ballotted for, and elected members of the Society.

Dr. Lumeva, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the recommenda-

tion of the Committee of Papers, elected an honorary member.

The Rev. R. Everest, requested his name to be withdrawn from the

list of members.

Captain W. Fotery regretted, that private circumstances obliged him also

to retire from the Society,

Read letters from Colonel J. Convin, Engineers, Colonel Cautriexp, and

Colonel Sracy, acknowledging their election as members of the Society.

Read letters from Nicnonas Caruiste, Esq. Secretary to the Antiqua-

rian Society of London, and J. Forsuaut, Esq. Secretary to the British

Museum, acknowledging the receipt of copies of the Index, Xe.

Read a letter from Captain H. Harxnsss, Secretary to the Oriental

Translation Committee of the Royal Asiatic Society, stating, that arrears of

the Society’s subscription were due, to the amount of £31 10s. from 1833

to 1835, inclusive.

Ordered, that the arrears be paid up, with an apology for the delay.

The Secretary stated, that upon an application from himself on the part

of the Society, the Government had been pleased to grant exemption

from postage on all certified ‘‘ proof sheets,” addressed by him to authors

or editors for correction, as well as on their return, similarly attested to

his address. The Government was also willing to grant exemption from

duty on objects of Natural History or Curiosity, imported for or exported

from the museum ; application to be made in each particular case.

Library.

Read a letter from Captain R. B. Pemserron, forwarding a copy of his

report on the eastern frontier of British India, with an appendix and

maps, for presentation to the Society.

Also, from Dr. McCurtuianp, a copy of his work entitled “ Inquiries in

Kemaon,” Statistical and Geological.

Read a letter from James R. Ewarr, Esq. forwarding on behalf of

Captain J. Jervis, a copy of his publication on Indian Meteorology.

Die Philosophie der Hindu Vaedanta Sara von Sadananda des Ram

Krishna Tirtha von Dr. Oramar Franx—presented by the author.

Ueber das Bild des Welthaumeisters, Visvakarma, von Orumar Frank

—presented by the author.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 303

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 61, June 1836—by Dr.

Corbyn the Editor.

The following books were received from the booksellers :

LARDNER’s Cabinet Cyclopedia, Swarnson’s quadrupeds.

—_— , Greece, Vol. 2nd.

<<< —_____—____—__—__, Rome, Vol. 2nd.

Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of the Natural History

of the Himdlaya mountains, by J. F. Royrsz, Esq. F. L. 8. and G. S. and

M. A. S., parts 7th and 8th.

Museum.

Four gold and silver fish, from Nipél, were presented by Hari Da’s,

Mahant of Patna.

A drawing, supposed to be of the Allahabad lath ; as it stood when

perfect, was received with a note from Dr. Movuart, H. M. 13th Dragoons

at Bangalore.

This drawing accords more exactly with the lath in Tirhut, for which it was

doubtless intended, (See Vol. IV. page 122.)

LInterary.

A paper on the valley of Cashmir, by the Baron Hucst, was read.

The author’s detention at Bombay has enabled him to communicate at greater

length the observations made during his recent visit to the valley. The Society

is much beholden to this illustrious traveller for thus disinterestedly placing at

its disposal the results of his personal labours, notwithstanding he has doubtless

the intention of publishing himself on his return to his own country.

The latitude of Kashmir town (Srinagar) is 34° 22’ 58” and (if Vizirabad is

correctly laid down in ELPHINSTONE’s map), its longitade is 75° 12’ 30’’ by cross-

bearings taken by the Baron from the latter place to the Pirpanjabl pass, the

bearing of which was also taken at Kashmir town.

In most maps the situation of this place is 34° 40’ lat. and 75° 58’ long :—

in Hamixton 33° 23’ lat. 74° 47’ long.: and in H. T. Prinser’s RANsSEET

Sineu, derived from Capt. Murray’s information, 34° 9’ and 75° 32’ re-

spectively*.

A paper by Mr. Avpaun, entitled ““ A Memoir of a Hindu colony in

ancient Armenia,” was submitted.

[This will be printed in our next. ]

An attempt to fix the epochs of the four principal Buddhas, by Captain

Forses, of Ceylon, was presented.

Mr. Csoma’s translation of the Bhotian Banner Inscription, presented

at the meeting of March, was read.

[Printed iu the present number.]

Facsimile of inscription on the Bhittree léth near Ghaézipur, was pre-

sented by Lieut. A. Cunninenam, together with a drawing of the pillar.

A memoir on the geography of Peucelaotis, and elucidations of ALEx-

ANDER’s march, together with drawings of all the coins and relics disco-

vered by himself, and a map of the country from his own surveys, intended

for presentation to M. Jacqusr of the Paris Asiatic Society, was obliging-

ly entrusted by the author M. Court, of Mahérdéja Ranusrr Sinn’s service,

to the Secretary, for free communication to the Society of such information

as they may think worthy of extraction.

Physical.

Extract of a letter from the Baron Hucet to the Society, was read,

announcing the important discovery of a bed of fossil bones in Perim

island, in the gulph of Cambay.

[Printed in the present number. ]

* In the note on Kashmir published in the March No. p. 185, we asserted the

latitude to be 34° 35/ with meridional (double) altitude, 72° 4’.—We supposed the

latter corrected to the Sun’s centre; as that was not the case, 15’ must be de-

ducted, while 3’ must be added for difference of declination from Greenwich—mak-

ing the latitude as above, 34° 23’.—Ep.

304 President's Address to the (May,

Specimens of lignite and fossil wood from Nipél, were presented on the

part of Subadar Jopa Sineu,

Specimens of quartz fossil wood and shells from Van Dieman’s Land,

presented by C. K. Rostson, Esq.

A note on the teeth of the Mastodon angustidens of the Siwélik hills, was

received by Captain Cauriey.

Also, by Dr. Fatconer and Capt. Cauriey, a memoir on the Felis Cris-

tata, a new fossil tiger from the Siwalik hills.

A skeleton of a tortoise (Carey’s Kuchuya), presented by Mr. J. T.

PEARSON.

Specimens of the Indian Barbet, ( Bucco Indicus, ) Woodpecker, ( Picus

Mucei, ) and smaller green pigeon, ( Vinago Vernans, ) presented by Lieut.

C. Monrriov, Ind. Navy.

A specimen of the wandering Albatros, (Diomedea exulans,) present.

ed by J. Cuttp, Esq.

A specimen of the Bald Ibis, (Ibis calva,) presented by Dr. A.

CAMPBELL.

Skulls of the tiger, (Felis Tigris, ) Leopard, (F. Leopardus, ) long-lipped

bear, (Ursus /Jabiatus,) and Gurriyal, (Garialis Gangeticus, ) presented

by Dr. McCosu.

A specimen of the ornamented snake, (Coluber Ornata,) presented by

Mr. Kyo.

A specimen of Gecko vittatus (var.) by Dr. A. Jackson.

XIII.—Address read before the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic

Society, on the 27th January, 1836. By the Rev. Joun Wusson,

President.

[This address, obligingly communicated to us by the author, gives so valuable a

review of all that has been done by the Bombay Society, that we make no apology,

but rather feel a pride in transferring it to our pages entire: the rather because Bom-

bay does not yet boast a Journal of its own, like Madras does. Since the establish-

ment of the latter journal, we have discontinued inserting the Proceedings of the So-

ciety at that Presidency, conceiving the means for their preservation and circulation

to be more appropriately provided for.—ED. ]

This Society has now been in existence for upwards of thirty years ;

and it may not be improper for us, in our present circumstances, briefly

to advert to its past proceedings, and to some of the various subjects of

inquiry, and especially those connected with our situation in western

India, which still invite our attention.

In the discourse delivered at the formation of the institution, by its

first President Sir James MacxrytTosn, that great man declared himself

*‘ambitious of no higher office than that of conveying to India the desires

and wants of the learned at home.” A more worthy ‘representative of

the curiosity of Europe,” could not have presented himself in this country.

It must be admitted, however, that, powerful as was his influence, and

remarkable as has been the zeal and success of the members in prosecut-

ing some of the objects proper for investigation by an Asiatic Society,

their contributions on the topics to which he more particularly directed

attention, have not been so numerous and extensive as might have been

reasonably expected.

On Natural History, on which he dwells at greatest length, there are

in our Transactions only a few distinct contributions, while the subject

is only partially adverted to in the papers descriptive of particular dis-

tricts of the country. This is undoubtedly a matter of regret, for the

1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 305

study, directly conversant as it is with the works of God, and with the

intimations which they give of His wisdom, power, and goodness, is, in all

circumstances, possessed of the highest interest, and conduces both to

intellectual gratification and to moral improvement ; and in such a coun-

try as India, so vast in its extent, and so grand and multifarious in its

productions, it is possessed of peculiar charms. It is a study, in many of

its branches, so intimately connected with national resources, and the

useful arts, and the means of humane amelioration, that it is powerfully

recommended to every economist and philanthropist. It is a study in

which most who have received a liberal education may engage, and to

atlvance which, all who give it an ordinary share of attention, may consi-

derably contribute. The sojourners in Bombay have, in the mountains,

forests, and islands, in the neighbourhood, innumerable objects, connected

especially with Geology, Botany, and Zoology, which both from their

comparative novelty, and intrinsic interest invite attention. The Society

cannot do better than encourage their investigation, and imitate in refer-

ence to them, the laudable procedure of the sister institution in Bengal,

with regard to those of a similar nature more particularly connected with

that province, and among whose highest honours must ever be, its having

numbered among its members such men as Roxsures and Watnicu, and

fostered their earliest attempts to unfold the beauties and mysteries of

creation. The report of observation and discovery connected with them,

if given in this place, would form an agreeable entertainment even to those

who may be most ardent and persevering in their researches into the other

important objects of the Society’s investigation. That a studious atten-

tion to both of them, by individuals, is not impracticable, is well evinced in

the cases of Jones, and CoLEBROOKE, and Carey, and others, who have

been distinguished in India both for their science and literature; and who

have been not less remarkable for their knowledge and expositions of the

thought and feeling of man, as connected with the objects of his devout

regard, or superstitious reverence, and the language by which he holds

communion with his fellows, than for their lively cognizance, and philo-

sophie interpretation, of the varied phenomena of nature.

The Statistics of any country are intimately connected with its Political

Economy, and are consequently highly worthy of attention. Their import-

ance was not so generally admitted, as at present, on the formation of our

Society ; but it is strikingly set forth by Sir James Macxintosu. The

tables which he himself presented, connected with the population of

Bombay, and the remarks with which he accompanied them, are valuable.

Similar ones, of a later date, are desiderata, and when compared with

those given by him, would furnish curious information. The Notices of

Jambusar and Loni, given in our Transactions, by Drs. MarsHaty and

Coates ; and of certain districts of the southern Maratha Country, and of

the Jhurejas, of Kach, in the Journal of the home Society, by Dr. Brrp,

and Lieutenant Burnes, are good specimens of what is required of other

localities and tribes. Without the assistance of our liberal Government,

little can be done with satisfaction in this department. Such assistance,

by instituting special inquiries, and by delivering up documents already

in its possession, or which could be procured by application to its judges,

and magistrates, and revenue officers, it could easily, and with great

advantage to itself, render*.

Only one paper on the subject of Political Economy, as connected with

* A proposition has, I understand, been made, by an able and zealous officer

of this Presidency (Capt. T. B. Jervis) to the different Governments of India,

relative to the periodical publication of the returns of population, revenue, and

cultivated and waste lands.

306 President’s Address to the (May,

India, has been laid before our Society. It is by Mr. Bruce, and has been

transmitted to England, where it will not fail to be appreciated.

Of all the topics of inquiry meriting attention, that of the History and

Present Condition of the People, in the different provinces, in regard to

language, religion, literature, science and art, means of support, and

manners and customs, is paramount. It is very extensive ; and has met,

from the members of the Society, with considerable attention.

The Parsis, the great body of whom dwell amongst us, present them-

selves as special objects of inquiry. The history of their original country,

has been ably unfolded by Sir Joay-Maxcotm ; and on its ancient chrono.

logy previous to the conquest by ALEXANDER, and its state from the battle

of Arbela in A. C. 331, tothe rise of Arprsuin BaBEGan, much light

has been cast by our late learned President, Colonel Vans Kennepy.

Mr. Ersxrne’s papers respecting them, are remarkably interesting, as con-~

taining an able review, and analysis, of the Works of Anquerin pu Prr-

ron, who followed Dr. Hype as the expositor of their tenets ; the results

of his. own observation; and valuable disquisitions on their sacred books

and ancient languages. The researches of Professor Rasx, in his paper

given to this Society, whatever may be the opinions formed of the parti-

cular conclusions at which he has arrived, and it must be admitted he has

reasoned ingeniously in their support, are also interesting. For the ori-

ginal tracts, with remarks, in the course of being published in France by

_M. Mout, we owe our gratitude. The History of the Early Kings of

Persia by Mirxuonn, translated by Mr. Suea; and the History of Vartan

and the Armenians, by Mr. Neumann; and of the Shah Namah, by Mr.

Arxinson, for which we are indebted to the Oriental Translation Fund,

contain much historical information on the religion of Zoroaster. Still

more may be expected from the translation of that singularly curious

work, the Dabistan, which is about to appear. The curiosity of the public

respecting the Parsis, however, is far from being satisfied, as is evident

from the inquiries which frequently reach this place both from London

and Paris. We need amore exact translation of the books which they

esteem sacred, than that which is furnished by AnquetiL pu PERRon.

Such a translation has been promised by Professor Burnovr, whose attain-

ments in oriental literature, and ardour in oriental study, afford good

ground for hope that our wishes respecting it will be realized. Should he

fail, the attempt may be made in Bombay, where there are still a very few

Zand scholars among the Zoroastrians to be found, and whose assistance,

as well as that te be furnished by the translations into Gujurathi, may be

procured*, We require information particularly on their popular super-

stitions, and domestic manners and customs, and general habits, as exhi-

bited to the native community, and which, there is reason to believe

differ not a little from those generally observed by their European acquain-

tances, and for which they have received, in the opinion of the most

intelligent of their own number, a more than quantum sufficit of credit.

It was with the view of adding my mite to the information possessed on

these topics, and not because I conceived it possessed of any intrinsic

merit, that I lately, presented the Society with a translation of their Gene-

ral Srroz. There are extant narratives of their settlement and history

in India, versions of which should be presented to the Oriental Translation

Fund. At a late meeting of the Committee of Correspondence of the

Royal Asiatic Society, some of the more liberal natives in Bombay, were

invited to form themselves into an association, with the view of aiding in

collecting information on some of the topics to which I have now adverted.

Little, I fear, can be expected from them, without the co-operation of

* Six Fargards of the Vandidad can also be procured in Sanskrita.

1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 307

Enropean scholars, or without the proposal to them of special queries cal-

culated to direct them in their communications. I am decidedly of opi-

nion that it would be of advantage to both parties, were some of them

associated with ourselves ; and I would fondly hope that should any of

them, possessed of competent attainments and zeal, and a respectable

character and influence, ask membership of our body, it should be readily

accorded.

There is no institution which has furnished more able and interesting

illustrations connected with the Musalmans than our Society. The ques-

tion, so interesting in the history of the errors of the human mind, Was

MunammaD an impostor or an enthusiast, has been discussed by our late

President Colonel Vans Kennepy ; and though many may dissent, as I

myself do, from the conclusion at which he arrives, the ingenuity with

which he conducts his argument, and the varied learning which he displays

must be readily acknowledged. The same distinguished orientalist has

furnished us with the most correct estimate of the literature of the Musal-

mans in Persia, which is extant; and has given us a minute and precise

abstract of the Muhammadan Municipal Law, with a constant reference

to acknowledged authorities, and with an arrangement particularly lumi-

nous, being suggested by that of Buackstone in his Commentaries on the

Laws of England. His paper furnishes an important aid to the under-

standing of the state of Government, and society in general, in Muham-

madan countries. The points at issue between the Shias and Sunnis, and

which have been, and still are, the cause of the greatest distractions and

animosities among the Moslems, are well illustrated by the translations

and remarks of Sir Joan Matcorm ; and the sentiments of the Sufis and

Mehdivis, by those of the late Lieutenant Granam and Colonel Mines.

The account of the Axutax-1-Nasirti, by Lieutenant Frissenu, and the

translation of one of the discourses of Sap1 by Mr. Ross, throw much light

on the Musalmaén Economics and Ethics, both theoretical and practical.

What we chiefly want in reference to the Muhammadan religion, is a

fuller account, drawu from a comparison of all the existing authorities,

of the state of Arabia at the time of its origin, and from which we could

form a more enlightened judgment than we do, of those great revolutions

brought about by its author ; of the history of its religious influence, dis-

tinguished as much as possible from that of the military exploits and civil

arrangements of its followers, which have hitherto almost altogether

engrossed attention ; of the general arguments by which its doctors have

urged its pretensions in opposition to Christianity* ; of the Bohorast

* Some interesting information on this subject, is to be found in the Controver-

sial Tracts, by the Rev. Henry Martyn, and his opponents in Persia, and the pre-

face prefixed to them by Professor Ler, and in the last of the letters addressed to

me, by H’asi’ MAHAMMAD H'ASHIM, and published in Bombay, As the discussion of

the points at issue, however, is an ancient one, it seems desirable that a collection

should be made of the hints respecting it which are to be foundin the Musalm4n

works of theology.

+ To any person, whose leisure may permit inquiry into this body of Musalmans,

the following memorandum written by me on a visit to Suratin the beginning of last

year, may not be unacceptable. ‘‘ The Bohoras of Surat are divided into three sects,

respectively denominated Ali, Suliman, and Daud. In the first of these, there are

only five or six families; in the second, about fifty; and in the third, about five

thousand, with a population of about twelve thousand. They have accounts of their

tribe, one of which I have seen in Arabic, which carry back their history about six

or seven hundred years. They generally support themselves by the vending and ma-

nufacture of cloths, hardware, household furniture, &c. They profess to be quite

distinct from the agricultural Bohoras, who are to be found in the Baroch districts,

and of whom a considerable number of families have now also settled in Surat.

‘¢ The Bohoras are under the religious, and, to a great extent, the civil govern-

ment of a Mulla, whose head quarters were originally in Arabia. The Mulld in

308 President’s Address to the (May,

and other curious sectaries ; and of the peculiar practices, superinduced

probably by intercourse with the Hindus, of those who profess it in India,

and particularly in the provinces with which we are most intimately

connected. That the latter subject is not unworthy of interest, will appear

to any reader of the work lately published by Dr. Herxxors, and to the

notices given of certain festivals by M. Garcin pe Tassy. From these

documents, as well as from Colonel Kennepy’s paper on the religion in-

troduced into India by the Emperor Axsar, it appears that the followers

of Muhammad, cannot only, when circumstances tempt them, lay aside

their intolerance, but accommodate themselves to existing prejudices,

and indulge in the boldest speculations. In the almost universal neglect

of historical records by the subjugated Hindus, we must principally look”

to the Musalmans for any historical information connected with this

country which refers to the times which intervene between the commence.

ment of their conquest, and that of the European powers. The History

by Ferrisura, translated by Colonel Brices, though neither, as was to be

expected , very philosophical nor rigid, is valuable. Captain RowLanpson

and Dr. Brrp, have done well to translate two works which treat of the

history of Malabar and Gujerat. They contain much interesting inform-

tion. Another history of the latter province, by a very intelligent Brah-

man, but principally from Muhammadan authorities, and which may

prove worthy of translation, was lately presented to our Society by our

zealous Secretary. There are materials to be found, in different places,

sufficient to throw light upon the principal occurrences in almost every

province of India.

Of various tribes of the Hindus, as the Katis, the Bhils, the Banjaris,

the Pandu Kolis, the Dakhan Kunbis, and the Karadi Brahmans, and

the inhabitants of Sindh, very curious notices are to be found in our

Transactions. Of many other tribes, accounts have appeared in separate

publications*. Many more, however, with marked natural pecularities,

and in a strange social state, still remain to to be described. Those who

Surat sits upon a throne, and is highly respected. He is thrice saluted by every

person wnen he is in cathedra ; and his attendants give him all the attentions which

the princes of the land receive when they are in Darbdr. He has deputies in all the

towns in India where Bohoras are to be found, and even in Maskat, Basora, Jadda,

and Mokha. He has avery large income, arising principally from donations at

births, marriages, and deaths; but from his funds, the poor of the sect, whether

resident in Surat or occasional visitors, are supplied. He nominates his suecessor,

having a principal regard to his talents, information, and capacity to govern.

“The Mulla, or Mulldjias he is called by way of distinction, reads the Koran,

and addresses the people during five or six days of the Moharram, and one day du-

ring the month of Ramazan, when his auditors are numerous. In the part of Surat

principally inhabited by Bohoras, there are many courts, in each of which there isa

Mulla to conduct worship early in the morning. The people, however, seem most

to relish praying at the tombs, or great mausoleums, which contain the sepulchres

of some of the ancient Mull4s and their relatives. They actually, as we observed,

kiss the chunam covering of the graves!

*“ In regard to marriage, it may be observed, that the number of wives permitted

by the Kord4n is allowed, as in the case of other sects of Musalmans. The follies of

the Hindus have found a place among them, in the manner in which marriages are

contracted and celebrated. Girls are espoused at the early age of five years, and

without much regard, on the part of their parents, to the age of those with whom

they are united. The processions, and feastings, are conducted much as among the

other classes of the natives.

“‘The shaving off the hair, which is viewed as a kind of sacrament, is performed

on the 7th or 21st day after the birth, either of a son or daughter.

“‘ Expulsion from caste follows the practice of ‘gross immoralities, and par-

ticularly the drinking of ardent spirits.

‘Funerals are conducted with considerable solemnity. Those of the higher class-

es are attended by the Mulld.”’

* Among the fullest, and most interesting of these, is the History of the Ramo-

shis, lately published by Captain MAcKINTOsH.

1836.) Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 809

are found resident in tne jungles, and in mountainous districts, and who

are probably the remains of the Aborigines of the country, are particu-

larly worthy of investigation. Attention to them is called for, by all

who desire to advance their civilization, and to elevate them from their

present degradation. Description must precede any considerable efforts

made for their improvement. Perhaps some similarities may be dis-

covered in their language, religion, and customs, which may lead to

important conjectures as to the ancient history of India. Of many of

them it has been already ascertained, that they have had no connexion

with Brahmanism, except in so far as they may have felt its unhallowed

influence in excluding them from the common privileges of humanity,

and banishing them to the wilds, or dooming them to ignorance, and

unwilling and unrewarded servitude*.

Though on the Hindu religion and literature in general, our publica-

tions contain rather scanty observations, some of our members have added

greatly to the information communicated by the distinguished literati of

the other side of India, and of Europe. Our Society was the first body

to submit to the public a proposal for a union for the promotion of trans-

lations from the Sanskrita. Its claim to this honour, it is right again to

re-assert. It will be established by a reference to a letter addressed to

the Asiatic Society of Bengal, in 1806, by Sir James Mackrnrosn, and

published as an appendix to the first volume of our Transactionst. Such

translations were practically encouraged by the Society itself, in the case

ofthe Lilawati,a treatise on Arithmetic and Geometry by Buaskara AcHAR-~

va, and the Prabodh Chandrodaya, a curious: allegorical play illustrative

of the opinions of the Vedantikas, and both published by the late Dr.

Joun Tayuor. The first general account, of any considerable size, of

the Hindu Pantheon, is by one of our members, Major Epwarp Moor.

In Colonel Kennepy’s Ancient and Hindu Mythology, we have a work,

than which none more important, if we refer either to original quotations

from the Shdstras, or learned disquisitions, has yet appeared. I make this

remark with the more freedom, that circumstances called me, on the pub-

lication of the work, to animadvert on the estimate which it forms of the

moral character of Bréhmanism in a manner which gave the learned author

offence. Inthe Essay on the Vedanta by the same gentleman, we have

the best account of that very curious system of speculation, considered in

a philosophical point of view, which has yet appeared,—an account which

proves it to be a system of spiritual pantheism, and as such entirely dif-

ferent, except in occasional expression, from that of the Mystics of

Europe, to which it had been maintained to be similar by Sir Writ1am

Jones, and other writers{. It was in this place that the first defence, by

a Native, of both the exoteric and esoteric systems of Hinduism, in reply

to those who seek to propagate the principles of our Holy Faith, appeared ;

and it was here that a rejoinder, embracing briefly the consideration of

* See particularly Mr. BABER’s Answers to the Queries of a Committee of the

House of Lords on the state of Slavery in the South West of India.

+ Page 310.

} In the works of the Mystics, and of the pious writers, to whom Sir WILLIAM

JONES alludes in the course of his reasonings, there are figures of speech, and other

expressions, very similar to those used by the Vedantists. Others, still more strik-

ingly similar, could easily be produced. I give one from the Poems of RIcHARD

Baxter.

‘But O! how wisely hast thou made the twist!

To love thee and myself do well consist.

Love is the closure of connaturals ;

The soul’s return to its originals:

As every brook is toward the ocean bent :

And all things to their proper element :

And as the inclination of the sight,

How small soever is unto the light :

310 President’s Address to the [May,

both these subjects, was published. About two years ago, a portion of

the Rigveda, the most considerable which has yet been printed, was pub-

lished in Sanskrita, Marathi, and English, by one of our members. A

translation of the whole of this work, to which I believe Prof. H. H.

Witson has turned his attention, and of the Bhagawata Purdéna, which,

though it cannot claim an antiquity much exceeding that of six hundred

years, is certainly the greatest practical authority at present, at least in

the West of India, are greatly to be desired. On the different sects of

the Hindus, and on their provincial superstitions, much light has yet to

be cast. On the North of this Presidency, we havethe Vaishnavas ; in

our immediate neighbourhood, the Smartas ; and in the South, the Shaivas

or Lingavants, in the practice of all their peculiarities. In the Dakshan,

we have a general worship of deified heroes, as yet unnoticed, except in

the most incidental manner. Many curious classes of mendicants, of

whom little or nothing is known*, are to be found within the sphere of

our peculiar observation. The religion of the Jainas, on which most

valuable manuscripts, procured by Mr. Waruen, are deposited in our

library, is still, in many respects, to be unfolded. Our Transactions have

only one paper, by Captain McMurpo, which refers to it. In the posses-

sion of the Jainas, there are many works calculated to throw much light

on the religious history of India in general, with the use of which some of

them would not be unwilling to favour a European student. I fondly

trust and believe, that there are among our members, those who will con-

tinue to contribute, as circumstances may call them, to the exposition of

the systems of faith, which have so long exercised their sway in this

country, and the various literary works, which, though, unlike those of

Greece and Rome, they are of little or no use in the cultivation of taste, are

valuable as they illustrate the tendency of these systems in their connex-

ion with social and public life, and as they explain a language the most

copious in its vocables, and powerful in its grammatical forms, in which

any records exist. Destitute of a knowledge of these systems, and the

works in which they are embodied, the native character, and the state of

native society, will never be sufficiently understood, a right key obtained

to open the native mind, and all desirable facilities enjoyed for the in-

troduction among the people of a body of rational and equitable law, and

the propagation of the Gospel and the promotion of general education.

There are some respectable patrons of the latter supremely important

work, who overlook its importance ;_ but their number is on the decrease.

As the touch’d needle pointeth toward the pole ;

Thus unto thee inclines the holy soul:

It trembleth and is restless till it come

Unto thy bosom where it is at home.’’

No person who is familiar with the Upanishads can fail to mark the coincidence

of the language of BAXTER in the preceding passage, with that of the Transcend-

entalists of India. This coincidence of language, however, does not warrant the

inference that there is the least agreement of statement. In proof of this position,

we have merely to quote the lines which follow those now given.

‘¢ Yet no such union dare the soul desire

As parts have with the whole, and sparks to fire ;

But as dependent, low, subordinate,

Such as thy will of nothing did create.

As tendeth to the sun the smallest eye

Of silly vermin, or the poorest fly.

My own salvation when I make my end,

Full mutual love is all that I intend,

And in this closure though I happy be,

Its by intending, and admiring thee.’’

* Of one of these, the Mdnbhavas, whom I had particularly in view in making this

remark, I have just received an interesting account from Captain A. MACKINTOSH,

the author of the History of the Ramoshis.

1836.] Bombay Asiatic Society, 1836. 31i

They ought to consider that the situation of those to be instructed, is to

be attended to, as well as the instructions to be delivered. While divine

truth must be propagated with unwavering fidelity, and all hopes of ulti-

mate success rest on its own potency, its suitableness to the general cha-

racter of man, and the assistanee of divine grace, judgment ought to be

employed in the mode of its application to those who vary much in their

creeds, and differ much in their moral practice. We have the highest

authority for an accommodation such as that for which I plead. Though

the great truths proclaimed by the apostle Pau were the same in all cir-

cumstances, they were introduced invery different ways to the Jewish Rab-

bis and people, and to the members of the Athenian Areopagus. I must hold,

that there is no little unsuitableneas in India, in addressing a Pantheist as

a Polytheist, and vice versa: in speaking to a Jaina as to a Bréliman; in

condemning that at random which the natives may suppose to be unknown,

and in using theological terms, and general phrases, without any very

definite sense of their application by the natives themselves. The more

a knowledge of Hinduism and of Hindu literature is possessed by any

teacher, the more patiently and uninterruptedly will he be listened to by

the people, and the more forcibly will he be enabled, and principally by

contrast and concession, to set forth the authority, and the excellence, of

the doctrines of Christianity.

In connexion with the subject to which I have now adverted, I may

allude to the peculiar duty which devoives on us of collecting Sanskrita

manuscripts. They are to be found in a purer state in the Dakshan than

in any other part of India, and the poverty of the Brahmans leads them

readily to part with them. Those which were lately purchased by us are

very valuable.

The contributions of the members of our Society to the elucidation of

Hindu Antiquities, have done much to extend and support its credit. The

proximity of the ancient excavations, which may be classed among the

wonders of the world, could not fail to excite curiosity and inquiry. The

descriptions and illustrations of those of Gharipur (Elephanta), Sashti

(Salsette), Karali (Carlee), Veru/a (Ellora), Bag and Ajanta*, though a

few errors and oversights may be detected in them, are highly interesting.

Mr. Ersaive has satisfactorily shown the distinguishing characteristics of

those of them which are respectively to be attributed to the Baud’dhas

and Jainas, and the Brahmans. It is to be hoped that the inscriptioas

which are to be found on some of them, and which are in the Sanskrita

language, and in ancient characters very similar to those which have late.

ly been published in the ably conducted Journal of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal, will be soon understood. The Rev. Mr. Stevenson has already

been successful, to a great extent, in decyphering, and translating those of

the temples of Karali, and thus leading to inferences by no means unim-

portant. Some of those of Kanadi, on Salsette, I should think, from a

partial trial, present no greater difficulties than those which have been

already overcome. The stone bearing the inscription of the temples at

Elephanta, we learn from Dieco de Couto the Portuguese Annalist, was

sent to Joun the Third of Portugal about the year 1534, and is probably

now either in the Royal Museum of Lisbon, or in the University of Coimbra.

The Royal Asiatic Society may, without difficulty, procure a transcript.

There are excavated temples in the country, such as those of Nasik, and

Junar, and others which have been erected, such as those of Abu, Palitana

and Girnar, which have not yet been particularly described. What we

principally require in reference to them all, is information as to the time

at which, and the views with which, they were constructed ; an estimate

of them as works of art, or as indicative of the resources of those to whom

they. are to be ascribed ; and an inquiry into the religious rites and ser-

vices, for which they have been appropriated, and the moral impressious

* Written by Messrs, SALT, ERSKINE, Col. SYKEs, &c.

312 President’s Address to the Bombay As. Soc. [May,

which they seem fitted to make on those resorting to them. ‘They are

worthy of attention only as they may illustrate the civil and religious

history, or practices, of the country. The grants of land, engraven on

copper-plates, many of which are still to be found in different parts of the

country, are next to them in importance in the advancement of antiquarian

research, One of these was translated by Dr. Tavitor. Mr. Warsen has

been successful in decyphering the most ancient of those in our museum ;

and the results, as stated by him in his communication in the Journal of the

Asiatic Society of Bengal for August last, are both curious and useful.

Ancient coins are occasionally found in different parts of the Presidency,

and the Native States to the northward, which may aid in the correction,

or enlargement, of such Genealogical Tables as have been lately published

by Mr. Prinsep of Calcutta*.

There is asmall body of Armenians in Bombay, from which something

interesting might be learnt. A dissertation by one of them on the anti-

quity of their native language, with notes by Mr. Dickinson, has lately

been transmitted by us to the Royal Asiatic Society, and cannot fail to be

acceptable. There cannot be a doubt that the Armenians can fill up im-

portant blanks in our Church History, which, to the undue neglect of the

orientals, is principally formed on the authority of the Roman and By-

zantine Fathers.

The Beni-Israel of Bombay, and the adjoining territories, amount to

about eight thousand. It is to be regretted that no considerable account

of them has yet appeared, particularly as they have been long settled in

the country, refuse the appellation of Jew, and are probably a portion of

the Ten Tribes, never amalgamated, as the body of them probably was,

with those of Judah and Benjamin.

The researches of our members on antiquities, and other subjects of

observation and rational inquiry, have not been confined to India; but I

cannot longer detain you by alluding either to their results, or by attempting

to form, what is unnecessary, and what in me would be presumptuous, an

estimate of the enterprize and intelligent observation and research of our

Matcoums, Expainstones, Potrincers, Ricaes and Burneses. The con-

tiguity of our Presidency to Persia, Arabia, and Egypt ; and the prospect of

increased intercourse with these countries, by steam navigation, afford

ground to hope that our geographical and historical knowledge of them

will ere long be greatly enlarged. There is scarcely a country ‘of Asia,

which, even, in our present circumstances, does not furnish visitors to

Bombay, who prove themselves ready to communicate to intelligent inquir-

ers, informatiyn on places never as yet surveyed by any modern European

traveller. Mr. Warnen has been able, from conversing with Muhamma.

dan pilgrims, to prepare a brief, but interesting, memoir of Chinese Tar-

taryt.

i owe to the meeting an apology for the many imperfections of the

sketch which I have rapidly taken. I have rather endeavoured to mark

our progress, than to point out, what would perhaps have contributed

more to our encouragement, the advantages and means of further advance-

ment. Our Society, I may be permitted to hope, will soon again be inspir-

ed with its pristine zeal, at the same time that it is directed by its accu.

mulated experience ; maintain the character which it has earned for itself ;

and prove not unworthy of its incorporation with the Royal Asiatic Society

of Great Britain and Ireland, an incorporation which must be admitted,

notwithstanding some disadvantages, to be beneficial, as it secures that

literary sympathy and communication which is greatly to be valued, and

the circulation of our papers, with no expense to ourselves, and now in a

convenient form, throughout the world.

* Such coins are occasionally worn as personal ornaments by natives, who have

no idea of their value.

+ See Asiatic Society’s Journal for December, 1335.

1836.] Miscellaneous. 313

XIV .—Miscellaneous.

1.—On the Canis Vulpes montana, or Hill Fou. By J. T. Pearson,

Asst. Surg., Cur. Mus. As. Soc.

{Reprinted from the Bengal Sporting Magazine, Jan. 1836.]

Cl. Mammalia, Cov. Gen. Canis, Auctorum.

Ord. Carnassiers, Cuv. Sub-gen. Vulpes, Auctorum

Fam. Carnivora, Cuv. Sp. Canis Vulpes montana, mihi.

Rufous grey fox, with black throat, and tail white-tipped.

Description.—Size, length from tip of the nose to the insertion of the

tail, 2 ft. 6 in. ; length of tail, 1 ft. 7 in.; height at the shoulders, 1 ft.

1g in.

*Colour :—general colour, rufous on the upper and fore parts of the

body ; becoming grisly behind, at the sides, and at the sides of the tail ;

behind the ears, rich velvetty black, edged at the outer middle third with

short velvetty fur of alight fawn colour, and at the inner upper third, with

light rufous ; tip of the nose, as is usual in the genus, black and naked :

upper lip white, with a few black bristles, and a narrow band of white

extending along just above the margin, which is brown, to the corner of

the mouth, where it widens and unites with a somewhat similar but fainter

band from the angle of the lower jaw, from which junction the white

proceeds along the side of the throat as far as the shoulder, forming a

boundary between the black of the throat and the pale fawn colour of the

side of the neck. A greyish black irregular spot, upon which the whiskers

are set, is situated at the side of the muzzle from near the nose to the eye,

and extending behind in the form of a line to the root of the ear, where

it takes an abrupt course downwards, and is lost under the chin; middle

of the nose and crown of the head, greyish rufous ; inside the ears, side

of the neck, and half the side behind the shoulder, (mid-way between the

shoulder and hip) and the flank, light fawn colour, with a dark rufous

band extending from between the ears to the middle of the back, where

it becomes less distinct, and is continued along the upper side of the tail

as far as the white tip. This longitudinal band is crossed by another

over the shoulders, forming a well defined cross ; shoulders, outer sides

of the hind legs, and sides of the tail, dark grisly grey, partaking at the

edges of rufous ; outer, and back part of the paws, tan, with toes of min-

gled rufous and black, ; throat, chest, fore part of the belly and inner

side of the thighs, dusky black, having a few white hairs, interspered

under the throat, a white triangular spot on the chest, an approach to a

rufous tint on the belly, and being bounded by a white line in front of the

thighs and hind legs. The remaining under surface, hinder pari of the

fore-legs, and under side of the root of the tail, is of a light fawn, ap-

proaching in some parts to an Isabella colour. Tail, dark rufous, waved

with black above, grisly grey at the sides, fawn colour, gradually becom-

ing waved, with black, underneath, and furnished for about the length of

three inches with a white tip.

The general ground colour of the fur is a dingy back, or dirty white,

according to the shade of the part. It is long, thick, soft, and very warm,

mixed with a few strong hairs ; it varies in length from an inch to one

inch and half upon the neck, sides, and back. Upon the muzzle, shoulder,

and outer side of the thighs, under the chin, and on the limbs, it lies close,

and is short ; while behind the ears, it is very short, and has the gloss and

softness of velvet. The tail is exceedingly bushy, some of the fur being

full two inches in length, and at the tip, more than three.

The hill fox appears to approach the marking of the C. Decussatus

(cross fox) in the dark colour of a purtion of the under parts, and in the

cross over the back and shoulders; but the cross is not black in this

Species, as it is described in that. It is of a bright rufous colour in this,

314 Miscellaneous. [May,

and is rendered particularly distinct by the light fawn colour at the sides

of the neck and behind the shoulders. The perpendicular stroke of the

cross is 24 inches wide upon the back of the neck, and two inches imme-

diately behind the shoulders, whilefurther back, it is wider, but indistinct.

The cross band is two inches and a half wide, and very distinct, until lost

on the shoulders in the mixture of rufous and grisly grey of that part.

The hill fox is a very handsome animal. Its colours are, for the most

part, bright, and often well defined at their edges, offering a strong con-

trast with those adjoining, or, as upon the neck and anterior part of the

thighs, separated from one another by a narrow distinct line of white.

It seems to be intermediate between the Vulpes vulgaris (common fox)

and the cross fox, which, indeed, may, after all, be probably varieties of

the same species.

As nothing is known of the habits and manners of this animal, it would

be conferring a boon upon zoological science, if any person, well acquainted

with the subject, would describe them. It is said to be a native of the

lower range of the Himalayan mountains.

2.—On the Soil suitable for Cotton, Tobacco, Sugar, and the Tea plant.

By H. Prppineron.

[Read at the meeting of the Agricultural Society, March 1836.]

I preface what I have to say to the Society on the soils placed on the

table with a few remarks, which I trust may be thought worth placing on

record. My object in doing so is again to impress upon members of what

vital importance it is to the advancement of the agricultural interests of

the country, and to the safety and success of every agricultural specula-

tion, to procure samples of all soils from other countries in which valuable

products grow.

The same climate and soil are, we know, in a greater or less degree the

essential requisites for obtaining the production of one country in another ;

and for our present purpose we may perhaps say that plants find their food

in the soil, and are enabled to digest it by the climate. They do digest,

we know, and this in the strictest sense of the word.

The popular ideas of climates are vague enough, but it may be roundly

asserted, that scarcely one who uses the word knows what is really meant

by soil; or rather what is really meant by ‘‘ the same soil.” This arises

from our vague notion of the thing itself. The very words used to dis-

tinguish soils express, more frequently than any thing else, their appear-

ance, and some of their physical qualities ; scarcely any their essential—

that is their chemical properties. We talk of light and heavy, of sandy

and clayey, moist and dry soils, which are all physical properties, and two

clayey or two sandy soils may be actually as different as light and dark-

ness from each other! The words ferruginous and calcareous are, it is

true, chemical terms, but such vague ones that they designate whole classes

of soils, of which each sort is widely different from its neighbours. The

tea soils and the Arracan tobacco soils on the table are both ferruginous

soils, but differing as widely as soils can do; for the iron in the one isa

carbonate of iron, and in the other the red oxide of iron.

Cotton—Nothing then but asample of the soil and a correct analysis of

it can assure the speculator, that while he is trying to rear any given fo-

reign product, he is not (misled by loose names) absolutely blundering in

darkness, and attempting an impossibility. I begin with Cotton as a most

prominent example, though my proofs on the subject are not quite so full

as I could wish ; and I shall surprise the Society not a little when I say,

that all the expensive efforts which have been made hitherto to obtain

good cotton have probably failed from this one cause, that we have been

at work on the wrong soil ! How far, with the American cottons, differen-

ces of climate may also have operated is not here the place to examine,

1836.] Miscellaneous. 815

-but vegetable productions do, toa great extent, acclimate themselves ;

while it is probable that nothing cau compensate to them the want of a

principal constituent of the soil. Now I have not been able to obtain spe-

cimens of the American cotton soils, but I have good authority for stat-

ing that the soil of the Sea Islands is wholly a calcareous sand—in other

words a light chalky or shelly soil ; so that it may probably contain from

50 to 60 per cent. of calcareous matter (lime generally in the state of chalk),

and we have been attempting to grow this cotton on a soil which barely

contains a trace of it! The soil of the Botanic Garden, for instance, not

containing more than 13 or 2 per cent.: Indeed we may say generally, that

till we reach the kankur districts, none of the soils of lower Bengal, out

of the reach of the inundations, contain any great portion of lime. I

showed some years ago*, that the inundations deposit lime, and that much

of the fertilising effect they produce is due to it.

The American cotton is, then, on account of differences of climate, a

case not strictly in point, but the Bourbon cotton—grown both at Bourbon

and the Mauritius—which sells for a shilling, when the Sea Island sells

for 13d. and the Manilla cotton, which sells for 11d. when the Bourbon is

worth a shilling, are both cottons of hot climates like our own; and both

these are grown in highly calcareous soils. The soil on the table before

yon is from the Mauritius; it is sent me by M. Geneve, of La Riviere

Noire, one of the finest estates on the island, as an excellent cotton soil,

and contains 32 per cent. of carbonate of lime, (or in plain English, one.

third chalk ;) there is, moreover, phosphate and perhaps not less than 40

per cent. of calcareous matter! Its iron too is in a peculiar state, that

of protoxide or the black oxide of iron ; and in this respect, it probably

resembles the black cotton soils of Southern India. No wonder that the

Bourbon cotton, though it grows well in many of our gardens near town,

where it meets with plenty of calcareous matter amongst the lime-rubbish

with which most of them are filled, is said to degenerate when cultivated

in the open fields, which do not contain 2 per cent. of lime. I know,

from the experience of several years, that it does not degenerate if it is

duly supplied with calcareous matter; but that it will produce most

abundantly, and for years, cotton worth from 10d. to 11d. per lb. ina

proper soil. If the soil does not suit it, it will produce little else than

leaves and wood, and the staple will deteriorate. Samples of American

cotton soils are wanting now to make our theory on this head perfect ;

but I would advise no man to attempt foreign cottons in a soil containing

less than 15. per cent. of lime, and its iron mostly in the state of protoxide

or black oxide.

Tosacco.—Tobacco soils are the next, and here we are more fortunate,

for there are on the table soils from Arracan (Sandoway) ; a soil from

Singour in Burdwan, near Chandernagore, the tobacco of which, though

of the same species as that of the surrounding country, sells at the price

of the Arracan sort! and the soil of the best Bengal tobacco, which is

grown at and about Hinglee, in the Kishnagar district, near factories for.

merly held by me. Col. Hazera and Dr. Casanova are our authorities

for saying, that the tobacco soils of the Havanna are red soils, and those of

Manilla, I know, are also ved soil. Now the red and reddish brown soils

contain most of their iron in the state of peroxide, or the reddish brown

oxide of iron; while the light-grey soils contain it only in the state of

protoxide, or the black oxide of iron. I believe the quality of the tobacco

to depend mainly on the state and quantity of the iron in the soil ; while

it is indifferent about the lime, which we have seen is so essential to cotton.

None of these tobacco soils contain any lime. Their analysis shows them

to contain :—

* Trans. of the Phys. Class, As. Soc. Vol. I.,

see

316 Miscellaneous. [May,

; Aracan soil. Singour soil. Hinglee soil.

Oxide of iron (peroxide)............ 15.65 10.60 6.00*

Water and saline matter........ .... 1.00 0.75 1.50

Vegetable matter and fibres........ ol RISERS 1.10 75

Silex iiive tes ke Ree ae aso eee btniee) 6190 80.65 87.25

Aleta ina race. ie ees i. eee He 2.00 4.50 1.50

99.40 97.69 97.00

Water and Loss........00s .60 2.40 3.00

100.0 100.00 100.0

—from which it will be seen that the best tobacco soil we have hitherto

found in India contains 16 per cent., or nearly one-sixth, of iron, which

is mostly in the state of peroxide, and that the inferior sort of tobacco

grows ina soil containing only 6 per cent., one-sixteenth of iron of which is

moreover mostly in the state of protoxide or black oxide.

TI thought it worth examining what the quantity of iron in the different

sorts of tobacco would be ; and I found that, while the ashes of one ounce,

or 480 grains, of Havannaand Sandoway cheroots gave exactly 1.91 grains

or 0. 40 per cent. of peroxide of iron, the ashes of the same quantity of the

Hinglee or best Bengal tobacco only gave 1.50 grains or 0.32 per cent.,

and it appears to exist in the first two in the state of peroxide. and in the

last, as a protoxide, of iron; rendering it highly probable that the flavour

of the tobacco to the smoker depends on the state and quantity of the

iron it contains! for we have now, observe, traced the iron from the soil

into the cheroot. Green copperas water, which is a solution of sulphate

of iron, is often used by the American and English tobacconists and

planters to colour and flavour their tobacco ; and this would be decomposed

by the potass of the tobacco, and sulphate of potass and carbonate of iron

be formed. Carbonate of iron is of an ochre yellow colour. I took care

to ascertain that this process had not been performed with the cheroots

used for my experiment ; and I do not believe our Bengal cheroot-makers

know of this method.

Sucar.—Sugar seems to depend both on the state of the iron and on

lime in the soil. The sugar soil before you is also from the Black River,

(Mr. Greveve’s,) an estate upon which from 3000 to 7000, and even on one

spot the astonishing quantity of 12,000 lbs. of sugar have been obtained

from an acre, of from 12 to 150 bazar maunds per bigah ! Captain SLEEMAN

is my authority for these statements.

Now the peculiarity of this soil is, you will observe, that it is a red soil,

i. e. that its iron is mostly in the state of peroxide ; and it contains more-

over about 9 per cent. of carbonate of lime, with probably some sulphate

and phosphate of lime, say perhaps altogether 10 or 12 per cent. of calcare-

ous matter. We have in many instances endeavoured to cultivate this

cane on soils destitute both of peroxide of iron and lime, and we complain

that the cane has been found watery. Itis clear that the cultivator who

would succeed in sugar should pay attention to these peculiarities ; for

without doing so he may have veturns, but often no profits. His profits, in

a word, may depend upon his canes, his cotton, or his tobacco, being fed

with the food which they require. I used the words feed and digest because

it cannot be too often repeated that plants are living beings, and that the

vigour of their life depends, as with ourselves, on abundant and suitable

food.

Tra Soirs.—The tea soils, though I notice them last, are not the least

interesting. The first is a soil from Assam, for which I am indebted to

Captain Jenxins ; and the second is from the Bohea Hills in China, sent

* Mostly protoxide.

1836.] Miscellaneous. 317

round by Mr. Gorpon, the Secretary to the Tea Committee, and obliging-

ly given to me by Mr. Granr, of the Honourable Company’s Export Ware-

house. How very alike they seem, you will at once have noticed, and

their analysis gives as follows :—

Tea soils of Assam. Tea soil of China.

Surface At 23 feet

soil. deep.

Nake ioc ene nw esha ioiose vos 2.45 2.00 3.00

IPRA O TIAL EON 5 penne renee verres tron nrve termes 1.00 .80 1.00

BOAR COL PEO os sna nennae por evadon sane cone 7.40 6.70 9.90

ALUMINA ower ovrere ne ee rene ce ne ee noe vos oe nee mentee ere ree 3.50 5.45 9.10

SW (De ea eect lie OLE LORE DODD LE POLE TO TODO TOPO DODD TO OP 85.40 84.1 0 76.00

a 99.75 99.05 99.00

races of phosphate and sulphate

BIE PIMIG ANG, LOSS, -- ona ncnt aces scedataci op ini i ee

100.0 100.00 10.000

There are two peculiarities in these soils ; the first, that they contain no

carbonate of lime, and only traces of phosphate and sulphate ; and the

next, that their iron is almost wholly in the state of carbonate of iron—a

widely different compound from the simple oxides. They would be called

poor yellow loams ; and cotton, tobacco, or sugar-cane would probably

starve upon them: but we find that they suit the tea plant perfectly.

It is a striking coincidence, that we should find our tea soils and those of

China so exactly alike.

I fear to grow prolix, though I have much more to say on the subject

of soils ; I shall therefore break off, trusting that for the present I have

amply shown the necessity of a careful examination of the soil; and that

the commercial public, who can do so much for us in this way, will not

neglect their own interests in procuring specimens of soils for us; for to

go to work in ignorance of this great element of success, is absolutely to

blunder on in the dark where chemistry would lend us an unfailing light.

{We have also received specimens of the tea soils for analysis, but for want of

space must postpone the notice of ourresults, which agree for the most part with Mr.

PIDDINGTON’S. We have also an analysis of the Assam tea soil by Dr. McCLEeL-

LAND.—Ep.]

3.—Action of Copper on Ink.

A curious case lately came under my notice of the effect of saline mois.

ture and copper united on writingink. The Bengal Bank referred to my

examination three bank notes sent in by a native, who protested he knew

not how the numbers and signatures had disappeared ; that he had left

them in a small copper box on his departure into the country, having

precisely noted the amounts and numbers—and that on his return they

were thus altered. The Secretary of the Bank disbelieved the marvellous

statement, because the endorsements remained untouched.

I conceived it would be very easy, at first sight, to restore the writing

by the usual method of slightly acidifying the paper, and then testing

with prussiate of potash, which if the smallest traces of the iron remained,

would develope the letters in blue. The only effect however of the appli-

cation of this re-agent was to develope a copious red-brown upon the

entire surface of the paper, proving how strongly it had been impregnated

with a solution of copper :—in one of the three papers there was a general

faint blue where the signature might be expected, but not the faintest

trace of a number or letter could be recovered. It immediately occurred

to me, that a solution of copper would in fact dissolve away the iron while

it deposited the copper, and thus leave none of the former metal to be

acted upon by the prussiate. To prove this point beyond a doubt, I select-

318 Miscellaneous. (May,

ed paper containing blackfwriting that had stood for many years uninjured

and placing it between two clean copper plates, allowed a current of acidulat-

ed water to passthrough. In a minute or two the whole writing disappear-

ed, and could not be restored by the prussiate ; although where the colour of

the ink was merely discharged by acid, the usual effect was manifest. The

native ink being carbonaceous remained uninjured throughout ; and where

even aslight proportion of this ingredient was mixed with the English ink,

the removal was so far prevented. This circumstance presents a ready

mode of obviating such accidents for the future, forthe present is not, it

appears, the first occasion of the kind. A poor native pilgrim took some

notes to Jagannath in a small copper roll kept on his person for safety.

After the customary period of bathing in the sea, he returned, and found

his notes effaced, nor would the bank at that time make them good to the

unfortunate holder.

The preventive alluded to is simply to mix Bengali or Indian ink, half

and half, with the English metallic ink. I have long been in the habit of

doing so for the labels of mineral cabinets, where it is known that pyrites

and other substances frequently obliterate the traces of common writing

ink. J.P. Sec.

4.—Suspension Bridge at Fribourg in Switzerland.

{Having alluded in the last number to this surprising work on the authority of

private descriptions just received from relatives in Switzerland, we imagine our

Engineer friends in this country (so many of whom we are proud to reckon

among our readers) will be curious to hear more of it. We therefore hasten to

extract the following account from JAMESON’S Edin. Phil. Journal*.—Ep. |

The town of Fribourg is built on the left bank of the Sarine. Both sides of

this small stream are very steep; and rise to the height of about 220f feet

above its bed; and travellers coming from Berne to Fribourg were formerly

obliged to desceud the hill, in order to reach a small wooden bridge which

crosses the river, and immediately after by a steep ascent of about 200 feet to

reach the top of the opposite bank before coming to the centre of the town.

The passage through Fribourg thus occupied nearly an hour; but the case is

changed since the erection of the new suspension bridge.

These difficulties and delays were long considered the unavoidable conse-

quence of the local situation of the town, until some bold spirits conceived the

idea of uniting, by means of a suspension bridge, the steep banks of the Sarine.

It was necessary that the bridge should pass over a great part of the town itself,

and the scheme was considered completely utopian; yet certain of success, the

authorities and some active citizens determined to submit the measure to the

consideration of engineers of different districts. Various designs were accordingly

offered, and the government of the canton gave the preference to that of M.

CHaALtey, of Lyons, whose plan has since been executed under his immediate

superintendence.

The gateways at either end of the bridge are of Doric architecture, and are

about 65 feet in height. The tops of their arches are about 42 feet above the

roadway, and the arches have a span of 20 feet. The masonry of the gate is 46

* We take this opportunity of correcting a few errors in our observations on the

Roof of St. Petpr’s Church in the Fort.

1. The central vault had not opened in the vertex from end fo end, but only a

little towards the east end. We remembered having seen it apparently cracked, but

this was merely from the knocking away of the Gothic moulding to examine its

state—Its firm condition should have been an additional argument against condemn-

ing it.

2. The present groined roof of the nave has noé a flat roof above it, this is con-

fined to the side aisles.

3. We understand that the additional expence to Government has been only

about one-third. We alluded however only to the roof, in supposing that the cost

had been ‘‘ doubled or tripled.’?—Ep.

+ All the measurements have been reduced from French to English agreeable to:

the ratios given in the Annuaire du Bureau des Longitudes.

1836.] Miscellaneous. 319

feet in width, and its thickness is about 20 feet; although the largest blocks of

the hard limestone of Jura were employed in this work, iron cramps were used

to complete the union of the stones, and above 24 tons of iron were used for

this purpose.

The width of the valley of the Sarine at the point where the bridge is built,

or, in other words, the distance between the inner face-work of the two gate-

ways on either bank of the river, and consequently the span of the suspended

roadway, is 871 feet. It may be easily conceived that a good deal of doubt was

entertained as tothe propriety of trusting to a span of so great an extent, and the

idea of suspending the bridge at the middle at first occurred to M. CHALLEY as

the best mode of forming the communication. On weighing the difficulty, how-

ever, of obtaining a solid foundation for a pier 220 feet in height in the bottom

of an alluvial valley, he soon relinquished this idea; and the bridge has there-

fore been constructed with a single span of 871 feet.

The roadway is suspended in the manner now universally known, by four

cables of iron wire* passing over ie upper part of the gateways. Each cable

consists of 1200 wires, each about ;1, inch in diameter, and 1140 feet in length.

To avoid the difficulty of moving ‘these heavy cables, each wire was brought

separately to its place, and they were united on the spot by the workmen, who

were suspended during the work. Weare happy to add, that no accident of

any kind occurred during this operation. It is calculated that the four united

cables are capable of sustaining a weight equal to 2946 tons.

The four cables are fixed in chain-pits or shafts cut out of the solid rock on

either side of the river. In each of these pits four cables pass through a verti-

cal cylindric chimney or pillar, which bears three heavy domes resting upon it,

and at the same time abutting against grooves cut with much care in the rock

to receive the springing stones. At the bottom of the pillars the cables are

made fast to blocks of very hard stone, which are cubes of 63 feet. The cables,

therefore, cannot slide without lifting the whole of these enormous buildings,

strengthened as they are by their connexion with the solid rock.

M. Cuautey began this work in the spring of 1832. He brought out of

France, we think, only a foreman who had assisted him on former occasions, and

engaging inthis arduous enterprise with the inexperienced workmen of the countryt

who had never seen a suspension bridge, he completed the workin spite of all these

difficulties ; and on the 15th October 1854, fifteen pieces of artillery drawn by

forty-two horses, and surrounded by 300 persons, crossed the bridge through ;

they united in one body as well on the middle as at the ends of the roadway.

Nor was the least appearance of derangement of the structure discovered on the

closest examination. Some days after the whole inhabitants of Fribourg and its

suburbs passed over in procession, so that there were no fewer than 1800 per-

sons on the bridge at the same time; and all classes of travellers, mercantile

and curious, have since united with the natives of the Swiss cantons in testify-

ing their entire satisfaction with the bridge. Although the severe proof to which

constructor of this work subjected it, by loading the roadway with about 20 lbs.

on each square foot, did not take place till the month of October 1835, yet it

may safely be said that the colossal bridge of Fribourg was completely finished

in two years anda half. The whole expense was only about £.24,000.

The only bridge which can be compared for its dimensions with that of M.

CnaALLey is the Menai or Bangor bridge, which joins the Isle of Anglesea to

the main land of England. The largest vessels sail below it with full canvass

set. It was constructed by the celebrated Engineer TeLForp; but the Menai

bridge is only 550 feet in length, while the bridge of Fribourg is 871 feet. The

roadway of Mr, TE.Forp’s bridge is about 106 feet above the level of high

water, and M. CHAutry’s 167 feet above the level of the river Sarine.

* It is not perhaps generally known that in all the suspension bridges in France

ropes formed of wires are employed, instead of the solid links used in ‘England.

+ This remark reminds us of the Sagur bridge built by Col. Pr i ee oe under diffi-

culties so much superior.—See vol. II. p. 538.—Ep.

XV.—Meteorological Register.

320

{I poqenuisur Ajpenperd 19]eM YL} JWOPIAD SI JL YOM OWUT Eg.

‘juIUINIIsUT Mau ayy Jo A7ITIqGISUAS 19}va19 9Y3 0} aNp Ajyead st 419%} IN “IoJoCN0IeK, JOUIIOJ BY} JO UUINTOD UORsUaduIOD ayy Ur 4[NeJ AU 04 BIGeINQIII}e JOU st sInoY Om} ay} 7e

Sutpear Jo aouorayrp ayy IVY? Surmays “yiuou ysvy sv ApJOVKe ‘pavpuLys AaUIIOJ AVL ULY) JOMOT GFO. “IN “d F Je PUL OLY. “WV OL 3 “UjUOW SIY] pOO}s Sey JojJauIOIeg piepuejs Mou ayL

*puzz wor syjenbs Surueam

*UII0}S Op oul *rvayla

“wind ° 310 "und *Kzey

op op “Timp

"IAU ou *4S@010A0 op

‘imu Apnoya “TyawNd *JSBIIOAO

*AQstur op op

bP Cx) a} op op

‘IMU UUNO*I19 ou. BP ie) fy)

‘IMU ‘30g “Inu op

“IMU "JPALYY op op

*Azey *"7e11S “WIND *1[nuins

“sn quit *1jMuNS *reayo

‘auy ‘ouy “a3s "und

op op op

*9ZdaI YSeTZ op op

‘ouy ‘azaaiq ysory =" Azey

“Azey “I[Muind op

"1S *19 op op

*Azvy op op

‘umd "119 +4¥I}s ‘UND op

*Ajstul op “nuns

op op op

op op ic) n)

op op “Azey

op op *pnos

-auy cauy *pnos

*TpauInd op op

‘guy op *1ynu ns

* aso]a op op

aug op und “119

*1e9]9 “rego *T]nuins

> _ J

co) = Cy

- > =

z 2 5.

- z 3

; a

*IOYIBO AM

“19M JO SSUIG ULY} BUOY B [OOO 03 adr Jo duiny v YIM ‘uLTd uOI[Eq at} UO paulejieose SEM qutod map oy

001 Suteq Jayem aind jo yey} ‘zp JO UOIsua, asvIAe UL popTalh YOIYM FFE] AT “ds JO ayep yey} 19332 pue—(suorsua} yo uuIN[OD das) JTas

I ‘13 -ds Jo ysqZ ay} 03 dn ‘poe otunydtns Jo uoisuay snoanbe ayy uyeysaose 0} pasn Usaq YJUOUL SIy} sey Ta}aUI0Ieq Jom OUT

“1e[nBaX UOOSUOW 0G‘T ,6°OIL { 39 LI FL (0'SL,.o°F1.0'FRIT 66 GFETEGE6S 88 8 (218/868 gcg*

0 ‘MS MS 100'T [OSSOL J0'3Z O9L1F'6 |6°€8'6'FG)009'—\G6L5 | ZePricoe. O*FL\1'9 lessigtZelees‘—levo® gest |ete<

‘as "MS “a P'IZI 10°02 6L |S*ELir‘ 11 S08 B'e6|1e9'— ceas l6LF erp’ | $8 |Z°cZ\¢°9 le*eZlc‘Zalzes'—leao’ {ezo* eggs

‘as “MS = *- MS LOTTO [AOOL {8°18 68L1001/9'F8 ¢fcG|Z99'—|2a8° cee pZp* 0°8 |8°F8/80G/E19'—] 166°83|ce9* IPEct

°MS “ms 3 BELL [a‘ol Sel Z‘98 ¢9g\eZ9°—|808* ers‘|19P‘ » \&°4 |6%68/6‘g8\995'—|Zo0" Jorg E09

* MS *M “m [c0'0 jo'ber |p Sed O*S1\0°28 G°96|ZC9'—|988 jeEc*leLhs S [86 je‘tsle*gsi6ps—|eols |pZ9* | 189°

“as “as “a Of00T |POL 6°02/9°91/0‘e8 ¢°96|F89'—|898° |FLo‘|eecs * 109 |8°28]s‘ge|8eo—lgoel6a|P1Zs |PZ9°

*s ‘8s “a SOIL |Z‘92 S‘TLI€‘T1/9°e8|0526|829'—|098 8s 99¢' |e 1% 106 |s°Esiens|s9z‘—|ece* |fP9t I819*

AS SS OF6 0°08 Aap 16°68 0'95|99¢'—|e0e° |Z 1¢*|Ger* * |Axp |a‘zels‘oa|Zpa‘—|g0e* |IT19* |gegt

‘Ss "MS °S OFOL |S°08 wdF1‘e |8F8 z‘Z6|0re—I6Z15 {zar‘|6rrs 0'6 |8°€8|0%16|Zoz'—\FLe* |eos* |LZac*

‘Ss aS: Shs S66 808 32 IE ST8'F8 0°96, 90G'—|ZLEs* |cog'lerr’ L°8 (L°E8l6%o6|681'—lose* fol9s |6L¢°

"a8 ‘ass "MSS c66 {2°18 loot L°cg efcg|FZ1°—|8c8* |\g9e‘|zoc* 1‘9 |1'F8}9%06/S91—Ila1b* |te9t |Z9g%

oF “as ‘s BFOI S82 OL |5°28|\ T'9G|9ET—leee* | 12o*\gen< G*GLIOL IF*18/S°6818G1°—l99F* seo. |F6S‘

"as “33 “as SOUT 16°92 0'F 1/6508 $F6\860°—|IFPS {elg'leees Z°6 10°08|6‘88|601'—|Pes* SPL’ je69°

i) *os ‘a OO |3°LZ OPLIEH1\S°08| Z°6|Z80'—|8ES* |e09‘|0z9‘ OL 9OTIEIBITT61080'—|F99* |Z8Z° IpPZ‘

"2S ‘as aS B°EZI OtLZ 0°0L)S*ZT 8°08 $'96|890°—lSt9* lelo‘je19% GFL /L°6 |IT8IT6glFoo'—|FoZ* joo’ ise‘

“MS ‘aS “MS OTL |6*GL 0°1¢/8°F3)9'¢4/9°GG|6E0'—|G0E* |c09'| FFG! £1 9°6 |8°6L|Z*p8|680'—l19* jea9* 099°

“MS “MS = -°MS BGIT |S°22 $°09|/6°91|2°18|6°g6|620°—|Ztb* | Lz¢*|GoP* PCL £°8 |L°08)L°88\GT0—l6Zo° jelgs |T6S‘

“MS “MS ‘S BFOL 6°LL S*TLIO‘LZT\2'b8) 1ootZ00'4 {226° |Log‘ \oLe* BOLL [6°CBIL°68|0Z0+ |ezos jeeo* {209% 8

‘Ss ‘Ss ‘Ss L°0GL j—— =| &8 S*2L|Z°G1)9°e8| ‘FG 10+ |S0S* l6teFors | S6 |T'cZic*z |F‘I8le‘agi tend peo’ loro’ leces L

*MS “mS oT) 9°8L | 08 |0°09/L*E1/6e8/e‘gGg 6F0't leors Jrog'|pprs | 86 |x‘9Z/2°9 le‘eelaeelatost lopg* logs lees’ | 9

“MS “MS = °MS VZIL [GZ ff 9g JO'TSIE‘LzI6‘1Z o<Ge\IZ0%4 |86S‘6elzec*|/ze* | 6L oET/Z'F2/8°98) £81 BoL® jol9c ff ¢

‘Ss “MS ‘MS 0601 ist | €9 L°8tie‘Blit°1G) Eat Tlosigce® ff 62 FZI\S'9L19%98) I9-ds zel* 669° (

‘s “MS “MS POIL {ToL | OZ 9°21|8°6L|G°96)22 "10S PIO‘|€29°6a} £6 I‘Z |¢*T816*88|"V' ms 1eL* |ZIZ°6e) 1

- I 2 Ee) or Rm otelsssos] oo wos OAS ree meloasicn SIS DOTA

> 5» 816] 28] _o [selegezizasz| & | Sa (ESSe als elceiealcalie| & | ZS/RPSERS §

= e le S SS leae BP le als eles a eam Seuio (> |anieoleg| & {8 SE alo 8 A

% . . . tal QO a S 5 . ia 0 j=4

B} 24°] 8) SP g) & | Be Se) PR EE Pe| Se|" 8) 8 | es] Ss/See) F

- 1 co ‘ o

i Chap ec | °

*pulm joJSMIOUIIEY, ‘W °d fF 7% SUOTIVAIOSGO “WV OT 8 SuOoljeAresqo e

Iajsisay >

“9E81 ‘hoy fo yruopy ay? sof ‘nynaInQ ‘aoc hossp ay2 yo gday ‘uajsehayy jvovb0j0.10aja fT

JOURNAL

mee ASLATIC SOCTET YW.

No. 54.—June, 1836.

1.—Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities, with an attempt to

fix the dates of the appearance of the last four; being those of the

Mahé Bhadra Kalpa, (or Present Age.) By Captain J. Forsxs,

H. M. 78th Highlanders.

1. Of the Buddhas who appeared prior to the Mahd Bhadra

Kalpa, the names of the earliest Buddhas mentioned in Buddhist writ-

ings, are

Brahma Buddha.

Gautama Buddha*.

Tanhankara.

Medhankara.

Saranankara.

The following are the names of twenty-four Buddhas, who succes-

sively foretold the advent and exaltation of the present Gautama

Buddha.

1 Deepankara, 12 Sujato,

2 Kondhanyo, 13 Piadassi,

3 Mangalo, 14 Athadassi-Atthadassi,

4 Sumano, 15 Dhamma dassi,

5 Reweto, ? 16 Siddatto,

6 Sobhito, 17 Tisso,

7 Anomadassi, 18 Cusso,

8 Padumo, 19 Wipassi,

9 Narado, 20 Sikhi,

10 Padumutto, 21 Wissabhu.

11 Sumedo,

Commencement of the Maha Bhadra Kalpa.

22 Kakusanda,

23 Konagamma,

24 Kasyiapa.

* Not the Gautama Buddha now worshipped.

322 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (June,

Every Buddha, on having attained the object of his ambition, not

only appropriated to himself, and received from his followers the

innumerable titles of former Buddhas, (many of which were apper-

taining to the gods,) but by visiting the same places, enjoining the

same observances, retaining the same moral laws, and imitating all

their actions; he identified himself with the meritorious deeds as well

as with the moral doctrines of his predecessors. From these cireum-

stances it is not easy to particularise the acts of any individual

Buddha; and the difficulty has been increased by writers on this

subject, who in general have preferred aimless dissertations to histo-

rical incidents.

Of Kaxusanpba,

The first Buddha in the present dispensation, B. C. 3101*.

At the commencement of this the (Mahd Bhadra Kalpa) most

auspicious age of the world according to Buddhists, Kaxusanpa

Buppua appeared in Magadhat, when Ksuemat was king, and the

name of the capital was Kshemawattinuwara§. He visited Ceylon,

which then was known by the name of Oja Dweepia, and first

manifested himself from Adam’s peak, at that time called Dewiyakuta,.

and on the summit of which he found memorials of the religion of

former Buddhas were still existing. The Mahamuvuna gardens (com-

prising the plain on which the most sacred edifices at Anuraadhapura

are situated) was called Mahatirtiwana ; and to the eastward of these

was the city Abhya, the residence of a king of the same name; here

also was situated the Piyal Kula mountain, (afterwards called Mehint-

allai) and a cave which the Buddha chose for his temporary abode.

A pestilence which had swept off multitudes, having ceased at the

time of Kaxusanpa’s arrival, the people, believing that it was by his

miraculous interpositions, eagerly listened to the exhortations, and

adopted the religion of their benefactor. The garden Mahiatirtiwana

having been offered to the Buddha, he sent to Kshemawatti to pro-

cure a branch of the Maharibodi tree; that it might remain as a

memorial of himself, and an emblem of his religion. The tree was

* The period not of his birth or death, hut of his becoming a Buddha.

+ Magadha, Bahar.

+ Kshema.

§ Kshemawatimuwara or Khemawatinuwara, probably Saewatnuwara, or Gaya;

the great antiquity of which city may be inferred from the manner in which it is

mentioned in the Ramdyana. In the transmigrations of Gautama Buddka,

before he attained the perfection necessary for a Buddha, he is said to have been

incarnate at this time as this very king Ksuuma, vide Siddhamasuma, Thupa

Wanzae, &c.

1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 828

sent by the king Ksuema under charge of the priestess RUCHITANANDA

and the priest Mauaprwa, and accompanied by numerous priests,

priestesses, and attendants; they arrived safely, and the tree was

planted by the king Asuya according to the privilege ; and with the

ceremonies which had been usual on such fortunate occasions by

former monarchs of the island. The place selected for the tree was

near the plain Sirisam4la, where the Buddha had once rested himself,

and which in after times became the site of the Lowa Maha Paya”.

Having preached from where the Thupa Ramat afterwards stood,

and made innumerable converts; Kaxusanpa bestowed his drinking

cup as a memorial to his followers ; appointed Rucuirananpa chief

over 500 priestesses, and ManapEwa over 1000 priests, to maintain

religion; then having seen the consecrated places of Ceylon, and

revisited Deviya Kuta, he departed to the continent of India.

From these particulars it would not appear that the commencement

of the Mahé Bhadra Kalpa was marked by any general revolution in

the face of nature; but the commencement of an era at that time may

be rationally accounted for, by the successful ministry of Kaxkusanpa

Buppna; this would also account for the same era being styled

Kali yuga (age of vice) by the brahmans; and Mahé Bhadra ane

(the most auspicious age) by the Buddhists.

In support of my opinion for fixing so remote a period as the

commencement of the Kali yuga B. C. 3101, as the era of this Buddha;

I have the unanimous assertion of Buddhist writers, that he appeared

at the commencement of the present age, or Maha Bhadra Kalpa.

Sir Wimiu1am Jonzsi writing on this subject says, ‘‘ The best autho-

rity after all is the Bhdgawat itself, in the first chapter of which it

is expressly declared, that Buppwa the son of Jina would appear at

Cicata§ for the purpose of confounding the demons, just at the

beginning of the Kali yuga.”” Again I quote from the same authority]:

'« Bhrigu says, From this Mzunu named SwA YAMBHUVA, ‘ or sprung

from the self-existing,’ came six descendants, other Menus, or per-

fectly understanding the scriptures, each giving birth to a race of

his own all exalted in dignity, eminent in power—

* At Anuraadhapura. In the remains of this building are still to be seen

(1600) rough stone pillars.

+ At Anuraadhapura. A Dagobah and Wiharé, now in ruins; the slender,

but elegant columns of which, have not inaptly been compared to the Areka

tree.

+ Sir Witi1aMm Jonzs, Asiatic Researches, VII. 122.

§ Bahar.

|| Sir Witt1am Jones, Laws of Menu, Article on the Creation, Section 61.

oa 2

324 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. [Junz,

« Sw4rochisha,—Auttami,—Tamasa,—Raiwata likewise, and Chac-

shusha beaming with glory, and Vaivaswata child of the Sun.”

Chacshusha is evidently the same name as Kakusanda, the final letters

being a usual honorary affix in Cingalese. He is called by Brentury,

Chaksooso*, by Witrorp Chashushat, by Witson Chakshusat, by

Cotresrooke Cucuch’handa§; he is also called Karkutchandj,

Prachanda Dewa§], and Krakuchanda** ; and appeared as a Menu or

Muni, (which in Cingalese is a term applied to a Saint or a Buddha,)

previous to Vaivaswata, who by many of the most eminent chronolo-

gers has been considered identical with Noah, B. C. 2984.t+

The Cingalese works state that Kakusanpa was of the race of

Samata Raja. The first Menu, also the first king, and elected by the

people, after they had lost immortality and become subject to earthly

passions}t.

At the time of Kaxusanpa Buppua, Adam’s peak was called Dewi-

yakuta, (peak of God;) when Konacamma Buppua visited it B. C.

2100, the name was Samantkuta, (peak of Saman.) This appellation

I should infer from Cingalese history it obtained from Saman§§, _

brother of Rama ; whose era is fixed by the date of the partial sub-

merging of Ceylon, B. C. 2387, which is three years previous to the

date of the flood||||, and thus refers Kakusanpa Buppua to a period

preceding that event.

The following quotation is from Topn’s Annals of Rajasthan ;

“Though a passage in the Agni Puran indicates that the line of

Surya, of which Icsuwaca was the head, was the first colony which

entered India from Central Asia, yet we are compelled to place the

Patriarch BuppHa as his cotemporary, he being stated to have come

from a distant region, and married to Exua the sister of losuwaca.”

Referring to the era of R&ma as already given, viz. B. C. 2387, and

* Remarks on the eras and dates of the ancient Hindus, Asiatic Res. V.

t+ Wiurorp’s Chronology of the Hindus, Asiatic Res. V.

~ Sanscrit Dictionary.

§ CoLEBROOKE’s observations on the Jains, Asiatic Res. IX.

l| Asiatic Journal, 1832, p. 380.

. ¥ Asiatic Journal, 1834, p. 220.

** Asiatic Journal, No. 48, p. 87.

tt Dr. Luoyn’s Bible chronology.

tt Jananda Pota, (Cingalese work.)

§§ Saman, LacksHMANA, brother of Rama.

I] According to Dr. Luoyp’s Bible chronology, Noah was born B. C. 2984,

and the flood commenced when Noah had lived six hundred years, two months

and seventeen days, Gen. vii. 11 ; or B. C. 2384.

1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 325

allowing 20 years as the length of each reign of the thirty-six so-

vereigns from Ra’ma up to Icsuwaca, would give the date B. C. 3107:

as the time of Icsuwaca, and confirm the above passage regarding

Buppua being contemporaneous with this monarch; and a similarity

of sound, as well as coincidence of date, tempts me to suggest the

possible identity of Icsawaca with Ksuzma or Ksnemaxa, who is‘

described as being the royal patron of Kaxusanpa Buppna*.

To explain why I have fixed the era of Ra’ma, B. C. 2387. The

Rajawalia states that from the time of Rawena until the era of

Gautama Buppna (at which time a connected Cingalese history com-

mencest) 1844 years had elapsed. In several Cingalese works} the

partial submerging of Ceylon is mentioned as having occurred im-

mediately after the death of RawzNna; and the consequent decrease in

the circumference of the island is stated to have been 133 yoduns or

2128 miles§. It was in this visitation that the splendid capital Sri

Lanka-pura (which was situated to the north-west of the present

island) is said to have been overwhelmed, and

‘* Towers and temples through the closing wave

A glimmering ray of ancient splendour gave.’’

Of Konacamma,

The second Buddha of the present dispensation, B. C. 2099.

At a time when long continued draught had caused scarcity and sick-

ness in Ceylon, Konacamma Buppwa appeared||; and seasonable

rains having fallen, the consequent prosperity of the country was at-

tributed to his power and presence. At this time the island was

called Wara-dwipa, and the peak on which he, according to the cus-

tom of his predecessors, commenced his ministry in Ceylon, was

* Thupa Wansae, Buddha Wansae, Mahawansae, Saddhama Sumana, Raja.

walia, Rajakatnaikara.

+ Translated and arranged by Mr. Turnour, from B. C. 543 to A. C. 1815.

t Rajawalia, Kadaimpota, Lank& Wistrie. The Kadaimpota also records a

similar calamity as having reduced Lanka to its present size, B. C. 267.

§ In Gurziarr’s History of China, the following near coincidence of dates

with regard to the deluge occurs. ‘‘ We are now arrived at a period which Con-

Fucius himself has delineated.’’

‘““Yaou began to reign B. C. 2337." ‘‘ There is an extraordinary catastro-:

phe mentioned in the reign of Yaou, which is one of the greatest events in the

history of mankind, the deluge. Mane-tze (Mencius) in speaking of the same:

event, remarks, that at the time of Yaou the deluge had not yet entirely sub-

sided. During the reign of Yaou,yu commenced the draining of the waters,

and the confining of the rivers to their beds.’’

. || Kanaxa-munt, Asiatic Journal, 1834, p. 220.

326 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (JuNE,

called Samanta-kuta or Samanella; from thence he visited the capi-

tal Wadhamanika, situated on the south side of the Maha-Mewuna

gardens*, which then bore the name of Maha-Antowana, and

being acknowledged asa Buddha the king Samurpua dedicated to

him these gardens by the name of Anopawana. At the request of

the prophet, the king Sosyana sent from the continent of India a

branch of the Udambara tree, accompanied by many priests and

priestesses ; the whole were received with due honor, and the Udam-

bara tree planted by the king Samurpua became the emblem of the

new Buddha. Konacamma Buppua (after having visited the various

places consecrated by the presence of former Buddhas in Lank&) gave

charge over the priestesses to the chief priestess KanaKADANTA, and

over the priests having placed SupHama, he bestowed his girdle as a

memorial to his followers, and departed for the city of king SopHana.

Regarding the date which I have assigned to this Buddha, viz.

B. C. 2099.

I have connected the reign of Prapyora king of Magadha, with the

time of Konacamma Buppua, by the various accounts of the incarna-

tions and transmigrations of Gautama Buppua ; these all state that at

the time of Konacamma, Gautama was incarnate as that fortunate

king of Magadha, Parwartia or Parauyatat; whom I consider the same

as Prapyota of Jones and Bentiey, Prapuyotra of WitForp, and

Pripvor’HANA of Top. These authorities all agree that in the reign of

that king a Buddha appeared, although they have all assigned differ-

ent dates to the event. I follow that of Sir Wm. Jonzs, who gives

his authority; a quotation from the Bhagawatamrita. ‘‘ He (Bud-

dha) became visible the thousand and second year of the Kali yuga

being past.”

“PurANngAYA son of the twentieth king (of Magadha) was put to

death by his minister, Sumaca, who:placed his own son Prapyora, on

- * At Anuraadhapura. Py

+ Lest the father of Prapyota being a murderer, and himself an usurper,

should be made objections against this being the king PARwamia, in which

Buddhist writers have declared thatGautama Buppua was incarnate, I quote

the life of the most revered of Buddhist sovereigns, DHARMaSOKA, as it is written

by Buddhist priests, and which may be thus abridged :

He commenced his career as Asoka, a prince and a br4hman ; attained power

by becoming a fratricide and usurper; B. C. 323, retained it as a zealous

Buddhist, and died king of India, at Patalipura, (Patna.) His memory has been

extolled by all Buddhist writers, and his name and deeds are sanctified by the

appellation DHARMA (the righteous) prefixed to AsoKa.

We also find, that GAuTAMa was believed to have been incarnate as SAKYA,

a chief of the YaksHAs, and as AruLa a king of the Nagas.

1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 327

the throne of his master; and this revolution constitutes an epoch of

the highest importance; first, because it happened, according to the

Bhagawatamrita, two years exactly before BuppHa’s appearance in the

same kingdom; next, because it is believed by the Hindus to have

taken place 2100 B.C.; and lastly, because a regular chronology,

according to the number of years in each dynasty, has been esta-

blished from the accession of Prapyora to the subversion of the ge-

nuine Hindu government.” In the Cingalese accounts we find Kona-

GAMMA received that protection and assistance from the king Sosna-

na*, which his predecessor had received from the king Ksozma. In

the list of kings of the line of Buddha, of the Ooru or Oorvasu branch,

in Colonel Ton’s tables, and about the year B. C. 2050, we find the

name of the king SovaHana; and in supposing SopHana and SovaHANA

identical, there is neither discrepancy of dates nor designation, for

Konacamma Buppua only appeared B. C. 2099, and as there is no

letter v in Cingalese, Sovanana would be written Sosnana, that

being the nearest transmutation.

Of KA&syapa,

The third Buddha in the present dispensation, B. C. 1014.

On Kasyapa visiting Ceylon, he found it called Mada-dwipa; and

the capital Wisala, situated on the west of the Maha-Mewuna gardens,

was the residence of the king Jayanta. The people were divided into

two hostile parties, the one headed by the next heir to the throne,

SamippHo; the other by the king’s ministers : the armies had approach-

ed each other, and were only prevented from engaging by a dreadful

conflict of the elements, accompanied by darkness, and succeeded by

showers of fiery sparks. Kasyapa at this time descended from the

peak, which was then called Subhakuta, and having succeeded in

reconciling the contending parties, was acknowledged as a Buddha,

and the Mah-Mewuna gardens were offered to him by the name of

Sagara gardens. From Brahmadatta of the Okakat race, king of

Baranas{, he procured a branch of the Nigrdédha tree, which was

accompanied by numerous priests and priestesses ; and was planted

in the consecrated ground of Sagara, by the king Jayanra, with the

ceremonies which had been performed on such occasions by former

kings. Kasyapa after converting the people, and visiting the places

hallowed by the presence of former Buddhas, bestowed as a relic to

his followers, the bathing cloth which he had used; then giving

charge over the 500 principal priestesses to the chief of them Sup-

HAMMA; and over 1000 priests placing Sarwamanpa to maintain

religion, he departed from the island to return to Baranas. Regard-

* SoBHANA, + Okaka, same as Ikshwaka. + Benares.

328 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. (Jung,

ing the date which I have assigned to the commencement of Kasya-

pa’s ministry :-—

In a fragment of a poem which has the appearance of having been

rendered into Cingalese from Sanscrit, called the Leechawee history,

Braumapatta, king of Baranas, is mentioned, and that Buddha was

then residing in that city. The date is given in round numbers 2000

years after the commencement of the Kali yuga, which corresponds

with . SUE Ee: ER RP bE, ds B. 'Cz+ BOL

Passes a fiases of Rhode aon the abe shies bicleteel en eS

The Chinese place the birth of Buddha*, ...........sececevccevceseee 1036

Mi ABA, oe cect can oines « ke Reaas CRemeS ns otk ait es gk

Matonan Sin, a Chinese Historian, . .c0sc00 sce s+ 0 sive ade cdes Bom eee

De Guignes, from Mongolian records*, ......+.5se0+ eeccseeseccoveses 1027

Japanese Encyclopedia fixes his birth, ........esccsccsscccceccccecee 1027

Ditto dittothigideath, 4. 2). ed ORAS eee

Inserigtionjat Buddha, Gya™,\i 0210. 5 «csislse'clce ig sjsicieice'e voc ulee oe lea phoralatee ae Eee

Mongol ’Chronolapy of. )Pallasycus. 2 isoyes adie, soa nlaidn 04 /enlenlelniecicloisieels mame

Cassiano by the calculations of the Tibetians appeared], ......eseeeeee. 959

Dittorditto died), 7.016 sisicle.sre opsis .< oya[y heseibitetowie' sas cl pieisis intel salsa ren eee Re OU

Giorgi, death of Buddlia,. . 52 o0.c0 cc vec coos ones «0 00 wists ols vs eec en oo

La mort de Bouddha, on plutot de Shakyamuni le premier de Bouddhas,

est placée par un monument d’une authenticité incontestable, L’Ency-

clopedie Japonaise, en 950 avant notri Ere§, .....e ce cece se eecece ee 950

From these concurring dates, I am inclined to believe, that the

death of Kasyara Buppua occurred about B. C. 950, and the earlier

dates given above, are either that of his birth or of his having

become a Buddha.

Of Gautama,

he fourth Buddha in the present dispensation—Became Buddha, B. C.

588; died, B. C. 543.

B. C. 543 is the era of Gautama Buppua, and generally used in the

religious and historical works of Ceylon.

It is this Gaurama whose moral doctrines are recognised as the rule

of conduct ; whose name is still invoked as the present Buddha by

the Cingalese; and the existing records of whose life and minis-

try are so minute and credible, that they may fairly claim to be

admitted into genuine history. The following are a few of the most

remarkable events of his life, particularly as connected with Ceylon.

* From Sir W1LL1Am Jongs’s Chronology of the Hindus.

+ Prinsep’s Chronological Tables.

“{ Witrorp’s Chronological list of the kings of Maghada.

§ Messrs. Bournour et Lassen.

1836.] Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. 329

Prince SippHarra, the son of king SuppHopana, by one of his

queens Mya, was born at Kapilawasta or Kumbilwatpura, a town of

Central India* ; at 16 years of age he was married to the princess

Yasopar4 (called also SusHADDAKACHCHANA), and when 29 years of

age his wife brought him a son (who was called Ranuta, and after-

wards became a priest). On the same day that his son was born,

SrppHarta forsook his family and country, and commenced a life of

penance and meditation, which he continued for six years in the forest

of Oorawelle ; during this period existing solely by charity, and feed-

ing on wild fruits. He fasted for 49 days, and after a severe struggle

having finally overcome Marya and his attendant host of demonst,

became a Buddha by the name of Gautama.

Gautama Buppua proceeded to commence his ministry, and first

expounded his doctrines at the grove called Isipatana in the neigh-

bourhood of the city of Baranas. In the ninth month after he became

Buddha, Gavurama arrived at the town of Mahawelligam{ the capital

of the Yakshas in Ceylon, and which then covered a space twelve miles

in length and eight in breadth on the banks of the Mahawelliganga.

The majority of the Yakshas appear to have been converted, and to

have driven those who adhered to their ancient superstitions into an

island called Yakgiri. Tradition places this island to the south-east

of Ceylon, and the legends which are preserved (on that coast) of

sunken cities, may refer to some territory, of which the Bass rocks are

all that now remain.

A portion of the hair of the Buddha was enclosed in a golden cas-

ket, over which a Dagoba was built at Myungana§ in Mahawelligam,

and this relic is said to have prevented the return of the Yakshas||

(devils) whom Buddha had expelled : i. e. the worship he had super-

ceded.

* Madhya-désia.

+ It might be translated overcame death and deadly sin; for (mara) and

(mara) signifies death, destroying, lust; also a name of Kama, god of love.

CxiouGu’s Cingalese Dictionary.

+ Where Myungana now stands in Beentinne.

§ Myungana is still a sacred place of pilgrimage near the village of Been-

tinne; the Ddgoba originally built by the chief of the converted Yakshas, was

afterwards enriched by the addition of the Griwa (neck bone) relic, and enlarged

to the height of twelve cubits; it was increased by the king Cuuta Buya to

thirty cubits, and Dataigaimind, between 164 B.C. and 140, raised it to the

height of ninety cubits.

{| The superstitions of the Yakshas had again become general in the time of

PanpuKABHyYA (100 years after Buddha), and continued to prevail until B. C.

307.

Pia ty

330 Notes on the Buddhas from Ceylonese authorities. [Junt,

The second visit of Gautama Buppua to Ceylon was B. C. 581; on

which occasion he reconciled two rival princes of the Nag4s, CauLopra

and Manopra, who had been carrying on a destructive war. These

. princes were near relations, and their capitals of Kellania* and

Wadenawagallat were situated in that part of the western coast of

Ceylon which was then called Naga-diwinia. On the termination of

their feud, the throne for which they had contended, was made an

offering to the Buddha, and enshrined by the Nagas in the Dagobah

of Kellaniat to be worshipped as a memorial of their teacher.

Gautama Buppua a third time came to Ceylon B. C. 577, and hav-

ing revisited Kellania, from thence proceeded to Samanella (Adam’s

peak), Diganakhya in Ruhunu, the eight places at Anuraadhapura,

and all others which had been sanctified by former Buddhas; then

took his final departure from the island, and proceeded to his principal

residence in the temple of Jaitawanarama in Saewatnuwara§ of

Magadha. Gautama Buppua continued to be indefatigable in pub-

lishing his doctrines, and to be eminently successful in increasing his

followers, and at last died placidly at a short distance from the town

of Kusin4ranuwara in Malwa, in the 81st year of his age, and B. C.

543.

Of Maittri,

THE EXPECTED BUDDHA, WHOSE ADVENT IS FORETOLD BY BUDDHISTS.

Buddhists believe that to complete the predestined number of the

Buddhas, allotted for the Maha Bhadra Kalpa, and to renovate the

faith of a degenerating race, Mairri BuppuHa will be born of Winare

Dewt1, who in her last transmigration was the daughter of KELLania

Tissa Ra’sa, and who about B. C. 220 became queen of Magam|,

and wife of Kawantissa RAga.

The emblematic tree which will be selected by Marrri’ Buppua, and

become sacred from the time of his appearance until the end of this

Kalpa, it is predicted will be the Nagaha or iron-wood tree.

* Kellania, four miles from Colomba.

+ Wadenawagalla in the Swinkorles.

t This Dagoba still exists.

§ Buddha Gyais probably Saewatnuwara, and contains amidst its shapeless

ruins the remains of GAuTAMa’s residence ; as well as the wreck of those splen-

did temples which were built to commemorate his worth, or cover his relics.

|| The ruins of the city of Magam, extend over a considerable space, and in-

clude several large Dagobas ruined and overgrown with jungle; they lie on

the left bank of the Menick Ganga, and between Katragama and Hambantotti ;

from the latter place to Magam is fourteen miles.

1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 331

II.—Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. By JoHannzs

Avpat, Esq., M. A. S. '

A singular account of a certain colony of Hindus, that emigrated from

India into Armenia, is recorded in the historical work of ZENosBtus,

a Syrian Bishop and primate of the convent called Innaknian*, who

flourished in Armenia in the beginning of the third century. The

narrative was evidently written in Syriac, and intended for the Syrian

nation, though the writer seems to have subsequently re-written the

same in the Armenian language, but with Syrian characters; the letters

of our alphabet having been invented a century posterior to that

period. By a very long residence in Armenia, ZENOBIUS was success-

fully enabled to acquire a perfect knowledge of the Armenian language,

in which his history has been handed down to us. This interesting

work was published in Venice, in the year 1832, being carefully collat-

ed with five manuscript copies, written in different periods.

I shall, in the present memoir, first give a description of this

Hindu colony from the narrative of ZeNozrus, and then an account

of the religious wars waged between them and the first propagators

of Christianity in Armenia.

“This people had a most extraordinary appearance. They were

black, long-haired, ugly and unpleasant to the sight. They claimed their

origin from the Hindus. The story of the idols, worshipped by them

in this place, is simply this: Demretrt and Kersaneryt were brothers,

and both Indian princes. They were found guilty of a plot formed

against their king, Dinasxkry§, who sent troops after them, with

instructions either to put them to death or to banish them from the

country. The felons, having narrowly escaped the pursuit, took a

shelter in the dominions of the king Vatarsaces, who bestowed on

them the principality of the country of Taron. Here a city was

founded by the emigrants, who called it Vishap or Dragon. Having

* bE ULUybiLy Innaknian, literally meaning, nine springs or fountains,

which existed in the place.

tT PEUESP DEMeEtR isa Greek name, probably borrowed by the Hindus from

the Bactrians or the descendants of the troops of ALEXANDER the Great.

t ShULLUE KeIsAnry is derived from Fel esd Keis, which both, in

Armenian and Persian, signifies a ringlet or a curling forelock. Thus we have

in RICHARDSON peel phe ogunss locks fragrant as amber.

§ PhYULUPE Dineskry is the name of the Indian king mentioned in the

Armenian text, for which I have in vain searched in all old historical records

and chronological tables of the dynasties of ancient India.

2u 2

332 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. (June,

come to Ashtishat*, they raised idols there in the name of those they

worshipped in India. Fifteen years after their settlement in the

country, both of the brothers were put to death by the king, for

what fault I do not know. He conferred the principality on their

three sons, named Kuar, Mrcuti and Horain. The first built a

village, and called it after his own name Kuars. The second founded

a village on the plain, and called it after his own name Meghii.

The third also built a village in the province of Palunies, and gave

it the appellation of Horains.

After a certain space of time, Kuar, Mucuti and Horan, of one

accord, resolved on changing their abode. They sojourned on the

mountain called Karki, which to a delightful temperature added a

fine and picturesque appearance. It abounded in game, herbs, wood,

and all that is adapted for the comfort and convenience of man. Here

they raised edifices, where they set up two idols, respectively dedicat-

ed to Kersaney and Demetr, in honor of whom attendants were

appointed out of their own race. Kuisanry had long flowing hairs,

in imitation of which his priests allowed the hairs of their heads to

grow, which custom was afterwards prohibited by authority. This

class of people, on being converted to Christianity, were not deeply

rooted in their faith. They durst not, however, openly profess the

religion of their pagan ancestors. They continued, therefore, dissem-

blingly to allow their children to wear plaited hairs on the crown of

their heads, in remembrance of their idolatrous abominations.”

The description of this idolatrous colony is entirely accordant with

the colour, appearance, manners and religion of the present Hindus.

The cause of their emigration from India is distinctly stated by

Zenosivus, but through what route or in what period they found

their way into Armenia, it is very difficult to determine. It is, how-

ever, clearly evident that they had formed a permanent settlement in

our country prior to the commencement of the Christian era. Vauar-

SACES, under whose government they found protection, was grand-

son of Arsaczs, the Parthian, and brother of Arsaczs the Great, by

whom he was appointed king over Armenia, Anno Mundi 3852, ora

century and a half before Christ. I shall now proceed to give a

translation of Zenosius’s narrative of the religious wars of this

Hindu people with the first Christian converts of Armenia.

“TLE Sreu.s Ashtishat was a city in Armenia Major. It was socalled from

wcs sacrifice, and TALS many : for innumerable sacrifices were offered there

to the gods and goddesses of Armenia. It might, perhaps, be well compared te

Jagannath or Kali Ghat of this country.

1836. ] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 333

*‘ Having taken our departure from Thordan, we intended to pro-

ceed to Carin and Harc. St. Gregory was informed by some of the,

princes of the existence of two idolatrous temples in the province of

Taron, the inhabitants of which offered sacrifices to the devil. Here-

upon, our course was changed to the place where these temples stood,

with a view to effect their demolition. Having arrived in the country

of Palunies, in the extensive village called Keisaney, near the town of

Kuars, we met there some of the heathen priests. Having ascertained

from the prince of Hashtens that on the following day the great

images of Keitsangy and Demetr were to be levelled to the ground,

they repaired to the temples in the dead of the night, and removed

from thence all the treasure into subterraneous places. Intimation

of the impending danger was forthwith sent to the heathen priests in

Ashtishat, who were earnestly urged to collect warriors, and quietly

join them on the morrow in order to také an active part in the battle,

which was to be fought by the great Kuisanny with the apostate

princes. In like manner the inhabitants of Kuars were also instigated

to lie in ambush in the hedges of gardens, and ruffians were sent to

waylay the Christians in the forests. The head priest, called Arzan*,

and his son Demertr, took the command of the troops stationed at

Kuarstan, and halted there, awaiting the arrival of reinforcements

from other quarters. On the following day they made a descent to

the skirts of the mountain, in order to indulge in marauding and

pillage.

“St. Gregory, accompanied by the prince of Arzruniest, the prince

of Anzevazies, and the prince of the house of Anglt, and followed by

a small number of troops amounting to about three hundred, ascended

the mountain in the third§ hour of the day, where Arzan lay in am-

bush. They had not the least knowledge of the position of the ene- -

my, and never expected to meet him there. Ona near approach to

| UPI, Arzan, literally means in Armenian, statue, image or idol.

i UlSPARUPP Arzrunies was the title of a satrapy in Armenia, and

signifies eagle-bearers. The Satraps known by this appellation, used to carry

eagles before the Arsacian king VALARSACEs and his successors.

tULUbeLSihy Angitin, the genitive of which is Lure 9, SILY

Anglian, means the house of Ang! |14,9.9_ or vulture. This was a title of

distinction, conferred ona noble family in Armenia, compared to that bird of prey,

on account of the ugliness and deformity of their features.

§ This is to be understood according to the mode of the computation of

time, obtaining in eastern countries. The hour mentioned here, corresponds

with nine o’clock in the morning. Thus we have in the Acts: ‘* For these are

not drunken, as ye suppose, seeing it is bu¢ the third hour of the day,”’

334 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. [JunE,

the acclivity of the mountain, Arzan and Demerr rushed out from

the ambuscade, and on a signal being given, the trumpets of war were

sounded, and a furious attack was instantly commenced. This was

enough to alarm the Christian princes, whose horses took fright from

the sound of the trumpets, and began to neigh and plunge, and create

the greatest confusion. Hereupon, the prince of the house of Angl

raised his voice and cried, ‘ Prince of the Seunies, step forward and

see whether these are the troops of the prince of the north.’ The

necessary inquiries were made, but no satisfactory information was

obtained. The prince of the Seunies returned and insisted on the

removal of St. Gregory and his companions to a secure place, lest,

he feared, they might be made prisoners by the enemy, which event

would surely excite the anger of the kmg, and bring the Christian

princes into disgrace. ‘Send then,’ added he, ‘a trusty person to

recall our troops, for the number of the enemy is alarmingly great,

and innumerable flags are seen waving in the air.’

** No sooner was the warning given, than the prince of the house of

Angl, gave charge of St. Gregory to the prince of the Mocks, with

instructions to convey him to the castle of Olkan, and there to await

the issue of the battle. Information of this was immediately sent to

the troops. The prince of the Mocks, accompanied by St. Gregory,

descended the declivity of the mountain, wishing to repair to Kuars.

They met with great resistance on the way from a party of the

enemy, but by the help of Providence, at last succeeded in effecting

their escape. We were, however, pursued by a number of villagers,

but being mounted on swift horses, took refuge in the castle of

Olkan, where we met with a timely assistance and protection. The

villagers having proceeded to the town of Kuars, informed its people

of the place of our retreat. The castle of Olkan was, therefore,

instantly besieged. We were thus seized with apprehensions for

our safety, and forthwith dispatched a messenger with letters to the

prince of the house of Angl, conveying him information of the peril-

ous situation in which we were then placed. He immediately sent

us four thousand troops, all selected from the army, and furnished

with swords, who crossed the river and reached their destination on

the following day. After a siege of three days, they took possession

of the town of Kuars, and reduced its walls to ruins, and razed all

its houses to the ground. The people of the place, that had escaped

the stroke of the sword, were conducted to Meghti.

‘* The Christian princes being apprised of this, ascended the moun-

tain, and descried ARZAN in ambuscade with four hundred men, more

or less. They immediately made a sortie on the enemy, and put

1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 335

Arzan to flight. The Armenian troops having heard the din of

battle, immediately crowded to the mountain. Upon this, Arzan

began to rally, and heap on the Armenian princes torrents of abuse.

‘Step forward, said he, ‘ ye base apostates, who disbelieve the gods

of your ancestors, and are opposed to the glorious Krrsanzy. Do

you not know that it is Ketsanzy that wages war with you this day,

and will subdue you under our hands, and inflict you with blindness

and death?’ The prince of Arzrunies, having rushed forward, said,

*Thou worthless bully, if you fight on behalf of your gods, you

deceive yourselves ; if you fight on behalf of your country, you only

display your own folly. Behold the prince of the house of Ang],

and the prince of the house of Seunies, and the other nobles, whom

you know too well.’ To which Demerr, the son of Arzan, thus

replied: ‘Listen unto us, ye Armenian princes! it is now nearly

forty years since we are-engaged in the service of the mighty gods.

We have an experience of their powers, and are assured that they

fight with the enemies of their servants. We are not, however, able

to cope with you in battle. This is the habitation of the king of

Armenia, and ye are his nobles. But, be it known to you all, that

though it is out of our power to conquer you, yet we prefer to die a

glorious death to-day in upholding the honor of our gods, than to

live and see their temples polluted by you. Death is, therefore, more

welcome to us than life.” Having spoken this, Demerr challenged

the prince of the house of Angl to-a single battle.

«The prince of the house of Ang] having accepted the challenge,

made an instantaneous attack on ArzAN, who inflicted a wound with

his spear on one of the thighs of his antagonist, and was on the

point of levelling him to the ground. The prince of the house of

Angl having, by an adroit movement, regained his position, thus

addressed the enemy: ‘Know thou this, Arzan! that this spot

must receive the appellation, by which you are called; for here thou

art destined to fall, and be fixed like a statue!’ No sooner was this

spoken, than he lifted up his arm, and aimed a stroke of his sword

on his right shoulder, by which his head, together with his left

shoulder and leg, was instantly severed from the body. Thus fell

ARzAN, and was fixed like a statue on the ground. He was buried

on the very spot, which to this day is called, after his name,

Arzan.

*‘ Hereupon the heathen army was immediately swelled by re-inforce-

ments sent by the priests from the city of Vishap. The people of Par-

tukh, and Meghti and Astaghon, also crowded to the spot of battle,

336 Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. (June,

and the number of the army was thus increased to five thousand four

hundred and fifty.

“‘ Their arrival in the summit of the mountain, created great noise

and confusion in the ranks of the two armies. The heathen priests

made a simultaneous attack on the Armenian troops, and by a vigor-

ous pursuit after them made them descend the declivity of the moun-

tain anc fly towards the village. The villagers, who lay in ambush,

having encountered our troops, stopped their progress, and these

being thus hemmed in on both sides, were put to the sword. But

the prince of the house of Angl having passed through the ranks of

the heathen priests, directed his course towards the mountain, where

several men were kept in reserve, and caused great mischief by

flinging stones at our horses. Dsmerr having observed the prince

of the house of Angl ascend the mountain, left the rest below and

pursued his steps. He was immediately followed by his troops, all

mounted on horses.

«The battle was resumed on the top of the mountain. Our army

waited in expectation of further re-inforcements. The whole of our

troops had not yet assembled on the spot, of whom four thousand

remained in charge of the prisoners in Meghti, and three thousand

proceeded to Basain and Hare. The rest were given to pillage and

marauding in the field. Ere decisive blows were exchanged, the

approach of night put a stop to further operations. Both armies

were, therefore, obliged to encamp on the spot and wait the dawn of

the morn. On the following day the expected Armenian troops

made their appearance; and a re-inforcement of about five hundred

men, from the city of Tirakatar, came to the assistance of the heathen

priests. The number of both armies were swelled in this manner.

The heathens amounted to six thousand nine hundred and forty-six

men, while the Armenians were only five thousand and eighty in all.

The trumpets were sounded, and the battle commenced on both sides.

In the beginning the Armenians proved victorious over the heathens.

But the prince of Hashtens, formerly attached to the party of Demzrtr,

but now commanding the Armenian army, deserted his post, and

joined the ranks of the heathen priests with seven hundred men. The

Armenians met with a formidable antagonist in this deserter. Our

troops were seized with fear and dismay at the desertion of this

brave warrior, whose superiority in military operations was generally

acknowledged, and whose extraordinary prowess had rendered him

an object of respect and admiration with all the Armenian princes.

The rebel attacked our army with the greatest fury, and was flushed

with the success of his arms. Hereupon the prince of the Seunies

1836. ] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 337

cried to him in a contemptuous voice, ‘Thou whelp ofa wolf* ! thou

beganst to display the disposition of thy father, and feel a delight in

feasting upon carrion.’ The rebel replied in a bold and reproachful

manner, ‘ Thou vainglorious eagle}! thou only piquest thyself on

the power of thy wings; but if thou ever fallest in one of my traps,

thou shalt soon feel the weight of my arms.’ The prince of the

Seunies could not brook this taunt, but furiously rushing on him,

directed the axe which he held in his hand to his helmet, and having

driven him to some distance from his troops, pursued him to the

eastward of the mountain. Here, opposite to the convent of Innak-

nian, he brought him to the ground by a violent shove from the

horse ; and having himself alighted, instantly severed his head from

the body, which he precipitated headlong from the mountain. ‘ Now,’

said he, ‘let vultures behold you, and know that the eagle has killed

the hare.’ Immediately after this, the prince of the Seunies returned

to the army; and the place where the prince of Hashtens fell, is to

this day called by the appellation of the Kagles.

«« The Armenians were emboldened by this success, and the prince

of Arzrunies attacked the head priest of Ashtishat, called Meraxus,

whom he dragged to the summit of the mountain, commanding a

view of the battle. Mrraxns here made a violent resistance, and

inflicted a wound on one of the thighs of his pursuer. The latter,

burning with rage and a spirit of revenge, levelled a stroke of his

_ scymetar on his neck, which he cut off from the body. He threw

down the headless trunk, and the spot where the deed was committed,

received the appellation of Metsakol.

‘«‘ The prince of { Arges seeing this, consulted his safety in flight,

and, secured himself in a place of concealment. The prince of Arzru-

nies, seemingly not noticing this, gently approached the fugitive, and

made a sudden and unexpected attack on him. The wretch fled into

the forest, where the sharp point of one of the branches of a tree,

having passed through his breast, hastened his fall and dissolution.

The conqueror returned with the horse of the dead, and the spot

was called the vale of Arges.

«Immediately after his return he found Demure and the prince of

* HLELILUIP PRY Gailakoretin, literally, means a young wolf, or the

cub of a wolf.

TUL7 3 WPoNhN3s Qe is an abusive mode of expression in Armenian,

similar to that of Y¥"Q TAL QULG “ou son of a dog.

pC HILyy UWPLARS Prince of Arges was another title of nobility in

Armenia, literally signifying the prince of the bears.

838 - Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. [Junez,

the house of Ang] wrestling together with the greatest fury. Having

made a violent rush, he chopped off the right shoulder of the former,

and threw it on the ground. The severed head he carried away in

his knapsack. The victorious Armenians put the heathen army to

the sword, and the number of the killed amounted to one thousand

and thirty-eight. The rest were made prisoners, and stripped of all

they were possessed of. The son of the prince of the Mocks fell in

the battle by the hand of Demxrr, and this melancholy event spread

universal sorrow among the Armenian troops.

«The fall of Demerr was made a signal of cessation from slaughter,

and the trumpet of peace was sounded by order of the prince of the

Seunies. The two armies immediately desisted from the continuance

of carnage. The surviving heathen priests gladly availed themselves

of the occasion, by soliciting the Armenian princes to sanction the

interment of their dead. Their request was readily granted. The

killed on both sides were collected in heaps, and buried in pits dug

for the purpose. Monuments were raised on their graves, bearing

the following inscription, in Syrian, Hellenic, and Ismaelitish charac-

ters.

UMA ALSEPLAU A CLEP 3I3b UWLUSPY

ALSEPLAUPU PLUS CPALD FKPUULIGSY

AP HLS WSU Vb PULULPLY

br COP DU LP SUA GPEUNRD GP Ape

br 2380 ALSEMLLU LPP LL PULUEILS ONS

GR LOU PPPUSI UP =

« THE FIRST BATTLE FOUGHT VERY FIERCELY,

THE CHIEF COMMANDER IN THE BATTLE WAS ARZAN THE HEAD PRIEST,

WHO LIES HERE INTERRED,

AND WITH HIM ONE THOUSAND AND THIRTY-EIGHT MEN.

WE WAGED THIS WAR FOR THE IDOL KEISANEY

AND ON BEHALF OF CHRIST.”

Here concludes the narrative of the religious war. Our historian,

it appears, was an eye-witness to the scene he describes. This vic-

tory was celebrated by the Armenians with the greatest pomp and

merriment. The heathen temples were razed to the ground, and

the images of Kersanny and Demeter were broken to pieces. They

were both made of brass. The length of the former was fifteen feet,

and that of the latter twelve feet. The priests of the idols, with

tears in their eyes, intreated the victors to put themselves to death,

rather than destroy their mighty Kerisanry. Six of the priests

were killed on the spot, for the resistance they offered to the Armeni-

ans. On the restoration of peace, the prince of the Seunies proceeded

1836.] Memoir of a Hindu Colony in Ancient Armenia. 339

to the village of Kuars, and succeeded in persuading its inhabitants

to forsake idolatry and embrace the Christian religion. Being duly

prepared for baptism, they were conducted to the valley of Ayzasan,

where they were baptised by St. Grecory, and thus admitted mto

the fellowship of the Church of Christ. ‘‘The number of persons,”

says ZeNostus, “ christened on the first of Navasard*, including men

and children, amounted to five thousand and fifty.’ Females, it

appears, were excluded from this number, and baptised on another

day, appointed for the occasion. Some of the heathen priests and

their families, however, tenaciously adhered to the idolatrous practices

of their forefathers. The paternal persuasions of St. Gregory had

no effect upon their minds. ‘‘ Remember this well,” said they to the

Armenian princes, ‘“ that if we live, we will make you a recompense

for your treatment; but, if we die, the gods will wreck their venge-

ance on you all on our behalf!’ Hereupon the prince of the house

of Angl ordered them to be taken to the city of Phaitacaran}, where

they were imprisoned and their heads shaved. The number of these

prisoners amounted to four hundred.

It is impossible to know what was the number of this Hindu colony

at the time of their emigration from India into Armenia. We are,

however, certain, that from the date of their first settlement in the

Armenian province of Taron to the day of the memorable battle, a

period of about four hundred and fifty years, they must have consi-

derably increased and multiplied, and thus formed a part of the popu-

lation of the country. No vestiges of this Hindu race can, at present,

be traced in Armenia, save the record of their exploits, handed down

to us in the narrative of Zenoxztvust.

* VILRILULLE'Y Navasard is one of the ancient Armenian months, corre-

sponding with the month of August. An account of these months is given by M.

BrosseEt in the Nouveau Journal Asiatique for December 1832, page 526.

F PILSSILUULPILY PAattacaran was the capital of an extensive province

of that name, where SANATRUK, the great Armenian Satrap, proclaimed himself

king immediately after the death of Trr1patxEs. It is situated on the eonfiuence

of the rivers Araxes and Kur. *

t Our historian was also called by the appellation of PLILY Glak, whom St.

Grecory appointed primate of the convent of h4,qILuYbILy Innaknian,

which afterwards received the appellation of Q., [Ly Gia.

yes SP

340 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [Jung,

III.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions.

Fearing that many of the inscriptions with copies of which I have

been favored by my mofussil correspondents, may be mislaid or lost

sight of unless committed to print, I am led to anticipate the full ex-

planation which many of them doubtless might receive from those who

have learning, industry, and will, to decypher them, but want the

necessary leisure at present to undertake the task,—by transferring

them to the stone at once, and recording them in the Journal along

with the notes that accompanied them, where they may be at all times

available when accidental discovery may open a clue to their interpre-

tation. Some indeed are of a promising nature, andhave been in a great

measure made out, while others have been alluded to in former Nos.

of the Journal or in the proceedings of the Society, to which refer-

ence alone is all that can be offered. I must proceed in the inverse

order of the plates, having numbered them without consideration.

Konkan Inscription.

No. I. of Plate X. is the reduced facsimile of an inscription on

a slab of stone from Wara in South Konkan, presented to the

Bombay Literary Society by Captain T. Jervis, of the Engineers, by

whom it was supposed to be in the Cufie character. It was communi-

cated to the Bengal Society by our associate the Rev. Mr. Baruman,

in January, (see p. 58.)

Those who have noticed the series of ancient Hindu coins depicted

in the November and December Nos. of the Journal of last year, will

doubtless recognize in the present inscription the peculiar form of the

Nagari character on the Saurashtra group of coins. The ¢risul sur-

mounting the inscription would indeed have been sufficient to negative

the possibility of its Cufic origin. From the position of this symbol,

which we must suppose to have been in the centre of the slab, it is

probable that a third of the inscription on the left hand is broken off,

which alone would prevent the possibility of coming at the purport

of it. This is a pity on more than one account; for the initial invo-

cation might have afforded a clue to a few of the letters, to the

language, and to the sect of Hindus that erected the monument ; al-

though the latter may be considered to be sufficiently established by

the symbol! of Siva surmounting the legend.

The chief peculiarity of this form of alphabet is, that the tails of the

letters are lengthened and turned up backwards in a loop. Abstracting

this portion, the essential part of the letter resembles the Gujerati

type of Mr. Watuen’s inscriptions, (See vol. iv. p.477.) The vowels

also belong to the same type: the y is subjoined to the s and other

Vot.V PL.X.

a IKON KAN.

migenel Slone with the

té. Soc. f Sonbay-)

pe eae

[sasd net ae

ae ie ee jPagea

; 1 dh de

ae EU TALE 1 9° J

Inseription at the Damatha Cavern , » Maulamyeng (M

JomDOrHs voy jn sare ron. ren 19° seitsvess Sap of

Bistio~we dhe Ge Fhe Vino Bad og a oo Rp ow

po Ua BLAH agen 9 OC£2 2039) 0900 “(S098 pone

Ba) Fan 19 oc Bi CPR DAR ) Lt 29 2 saer

BOMGS pockis of gH w poengoh o apne

eeeoeec: Rie ahs eGo ou" 29939) 036 Ge rela

Lost esous oft maDes Fh Gopqa; Fam pesap

koa 3035 DoSaBsir 0 JGop 5 ae) ied ye es) iff

J. Prin nsep Lith.

1836. ] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 341

consonants in the same manner; and, in short, there can be little

doubt that both are of one family, and that the monuments bearing

these characters may boast of as high an antiquity as has been allowed

to the coins, (Pl. XLIX. vol. iv. page 684,) of the Saurashtra group.

Some of these, it will be remembered, have a trilingual symbol, in com-

mon with the oldest form of coins dug up near Seharanpur ; and the

head on their obverse is supposed to be imitated from the Greek coins

of Kodos, probably a Parthian successor of some of the petty Greek

chieftains on the Indus. Other coins have a trident on the reverse.

In the first and third lines there appear to be numerals, which may

be read 333° and S ee, 1110 and 1100: the figure one being rather

like the Bengali than the Ndgari form. These however can hardly

refer in any known era to the period assigned to the coins.

Moulmein Inscription.

No. IT. of the same plate, is the inscription in the Barma character

and Talain language found in the Damatha Cavern near Moulmein by

Captain W. Fo.try, and mentioned in his paper, (page 274 of the

preceding No.) 1 have appended a translation by Ratna Pauta in a

postscript to the same paper, but nothing can be made of such an

enigmatical jumble of figures.

Chunar Inscription.

No. I. of Plate IX. is taken from a pencil sketch of a stone slab

in the Fort of Chunar near Benares, by Lieut. A. Cunnineuam,

Engineers.

This young officer, who during his short residence at Benares has

brought so many facts and antiquities to light as to make me blush for

my own inactive residence there, had some time previously sent me a

Nagari transcript of the same inscription, in its present mutilated

condition, written out by a Benares pandit, who also supplied the

missing part of the text from a copy taken, he asserted, some years

ago, before the surface of the stone had peeled away. An imperfect

copy of the same, as it formerly existed, was also found among the Fort

Adjutant’s records at Chunar. On comparing the three, however,

many discrepancies were perceived, and the position of the erasures

was not marked in the pandit’s transcript. I therefore again wrote

to Lieut. CunnincHam, who proceeded to the fort and took the copy

himself from the stone, whence the present lithograph is made.

Having such abundant materials for making out what appeared a

most simple inscription, I entrusted the whole to a young pandit, late

of the English class in the Sanscrit College, to put together and trans-

late. He made several alterations in the Benares pandit’s readings,

342 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. (Jung,

and substituted what he considered would better fill up the gaps; the

sense was, however, so completely jumbled by these amendments, that

I was loth to trust the translation to print without first troubling our

Tearned Vice-President, the Rev. Dr. Mrut, to look it over: and it was

fortunate ] did so, as will be seen by the comment his valuable notes

afford on the attempt of the Benares pandit! As for the Bengali’s ver-

sion, it was so much worse as to be unworthy of notice.

I had first imagined that the Suawas up-piNn, whose invasion and

assault brings upon him the epithet of eur (the wicked-minded

and tyrannical Yavana,) must be the first Patan sovereign of that

name, whose overthrow of Raja BanXr of Benares in 1193, A. D., is

circumstantially recorded in Ferisuta. The date, however, which cor-

responds with Thursday, the 5th August, 1333, A. D., falls in the

reign of MuHAMMED SuHAu ; and Dr. Mitt has succeeded in discover-

ing the actual owner of the title Shahab ud-din referred to.

The inscription has some interest in a historical view, as supplying

the names of three successive rajas of Benares in the 13th century,

of which no clue is to be obtained from other sources. Neither local

tradition nor history supply any information regarding the holy city sub-

sequent to the overthrow of the fort by Curs up-p1n, until a cursory

notice of it occurs as the site of an encampment, in Baser’s Memoirs.

Dr. Miut’s restoration of the text is as follows, placing the inter-

polations in smaller type. 1 have inserted his notes on the pandit’s

version, as affording an useful example of the caution necessary in

such cases, and proving how utterly void of trust are the attempts of the

pandits of the present day, unless they have to deal with one capable

of understandig what they would foist upon the unsuspicious as

faithful transcript and good sense.

pees ieet Verse. : Sit awaTqaa az: |

1 or atfaté get MeHSaRt ata ATTA: |

THA: SIA ATA AVATAR ASAT ||

2 u* aufatt waenfeerar fear SC OHELE |

ba ~

siifeatea: wait: veqgayaT: |

3 WL. TASHA sta: *aCaT SaalHare |

iS Alon ~

TACs Us a fae: TEOTAA: |

IV. etfausivaseg ten safe uae |

4 Tals wawaa lie (were: eat Jae y

Vv. wesetfequmaaawaeet |

Journ.As, Soe. Vo7.V. Lal, SRG

he INSCRIPTION FROM THE FORT ar CHUNAR. 3936.

——

C a

Dy reraaane alam Wea:

Wy LD, BT AAATAE AT LP PB fp

sham mMAAg an Age

ad THA AAG d {

Wy Mii

pe yp. Aa Beso oad ara

I) AMAA, AZARAYAAIIAA A

CAG AUNAGAAUNMAATHIRAgrace Aza AxmMaAnzsan 3

: mMarIAMaRH AA ai(Ha

Tire shad &d pords are new peeles oy

J- Prins

2. INSCRIPTION erom BARAHAT in GARHWAL

4 og why hUeratqrafun tsa Pagahanasavichag age weg WSO ugeu hvsaty

LAY FA FAW QUA FEY TAN KSAT A 1

2 wEAG BHa eT WA YVYE TTI AES UPA Naaadary Mas Bee CF ques; TIST33N9Hy

WHA aARARUNTIY UNA RAI YH LY 45 1

5 Ga: Gagy Mandi gg id qa wad Lanreanorr Pais Mesgpy laa kM |g

2EdseraR Gab gar INS AT Sy yeu7011

. wa

RE Ce WOT OD

. A (8) a 7 FP (CM

Vraill { WD SVC 16 Or

3. Inscription ona Grancte-rock near [skarde, in Litkle Libel.

“eentder «a bas-relvef of BuktLha.

by xe) w7 a Re ay i

| ASSAY U4 (effaced | i24 a : eer

: = : Two ether cnscrihlon

w cid TES EFOALSs Ts K LAG, MU Uy, £ e | Z i ce oy io

THA OIHKADUN WoO GEvawnyYy a as TS:

TION DTHEIAY II IH) TLHYA WHY AT SS ees

Ai ‘Aa RAL TS FE. ee 2S ARRAS O to be Beetercted.}

BNAD SVG N EY YH NOTURApP

spe NSE AANITLE US BAM IKI TD)

Vigne 3 é

Dis duscription on Lhe enlrance of a chamber containing an image ophuddha , um the

Caves of Adyjuntea. ~

=P s 74 Beer. FF cans ye 7 a

LLBKmev KF TUM I Bg oy icy 5 Tae fh

ii ENE =

6. Facstmule ofa doubtful Wanrce £72 the Bihtaré Inscriptcon. (see Pl. VIM. )

& ty © g5M ‘i See

AGarn ing harm

fh Sy ae

: 2 ‘ Pye iv en

1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 343

-s ~ ~ n~ A

Scat fal feata part strata aurfater 4

5 vi. wutrefa*[aes qar Saige faa: |

aq Feat FT aa: RAT a I

Vil. Waa] itferbarsTet Fu: ara [ = jefald

6 <efacsieat SH ater | dae at falar i]

vill. dae Ga wisadtaren fel tras: |

a waaay ASr Gat ATA mfaeeere

BX, Koll al erates at faatet |

8 aa aaa afe[ sar zaaty aaitad |i

Xx. wa jetafad [3a g a4 ar anarga

aya westecucaa: Brearfacwsrs[ Ts |

9 FART AMICAS SY SA Wa |S TRS TRH UL

SUI FVTY TO ATH SM Sa |

10 x1. «aergaaat wet feet Fat a aeqat |

SEA YACAT TR CsTARSH |

Sag seo wRahe y AVI SIASTANE

11 *uraatamaeraetactiad

Translation.

Om! Salutation to Ganapati.

I. Ofhim who under the name of Dr'vaca, reigned on the oppo-

site coast to Kasi (Benares), the son called Snvana was as the sun in

the firmament, greatly renowned.

II. That king being celebrated as illustrious by the sovereigns of

the world, was ever surrounded by sages, ever devoted to SamBuu

{or Srva], as the bee to the lotus.

Ifl. Of him was Cuanpracana born, merciful, devout to the gods,

endued with all kingly virtues, lord of all, guardian of the city,

(Benares).

IV. His younger brother SvAmr Raja excels as a religious king,

gracious to all creatures, and skilfully exercising government, to the

delight of good men.

V. By Munammep*, lord of the hostile Yavanas ({Moghals]

* This was MUHAMMED Sa#A‘H, the third Emperor of Dehli of that name, who

succeeded his father TuGHiec Sua’ Guayasu up-pin, A. H. 725—eight years

before the date of this inscription—celebrated for his frantic expedition to the

344 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [JuNE,

SHAHAB uD-DIN* and the rest, though an enemy, was SarrAsat, the

treasure of benignity, employed as prime minister.

VI. (By him) from a (far) country (was an army sent to the bank

of the) Ganges. (The king) on hearing of this, (believed) that an

angry and invincible (enemy was approaching.)

VII. Upon this (Svami Rasa and other brave men), went with

horses and men, and sound (of arms, &c.) to defend from the assaults

of the (foe, their fort) (Chunar. ]

VIII. Then did all the inhabitants sleep secure, for those (waves

of terror) had passed by: (and then the army of Yavanas entered

their fort by surprise or stratagem.)

IX. And since pacificationt was not expedient, he [SvAmi Rdsa]

Chinese border, his attempt to remove the seat of empire from Dehli to Doula-

tabad, his application for investiture from the Khaliph of Mecca, and many ex-

travagancies which caused his sanity to be suspected. [The name Yavana, as

is well known, is generally applied by the Brahmins to their Mahometan con-

querors ; though arising from a misconception of the term as occurring in their

own ancient books, where it undoubtedly refers to the Greeks, whom Persians,

Phoenicians and Hebrews always designated by the same name. ]

* The SHAHAB UD-DIN here meant is not theemperor OMAR SHAHAB UD-DIN,

who succeeded his father ALA uD-pIN, A. H. 716, and was murdered after a short

reign of three months ; but must be one to whom, as FerisHTa tells us, MuHAM-

MED SHA'H gave the title of Maxie (by which he is called at the close of this

inscription) and a place called Nusari as a jaghir. Ferisura’s words are

rpaSlest 1] Co lags vile bt} elle I) palott ce Le,

dS Be Further on in the life of the same Emperor ManAmMepD Inn TuGH-

LEX, and nine years after the date of our inscription, that at the close of a suc-

cessful expedition to the Dekhan he gave to Sultan SuHawas, who is most

probably the same person, the title of Nasaret Kwa’n, and the government of

Baider on the Indus, yielding annually the revenue of a crore of rupees whys,

volabs) 4 Ooo3 5) bl) 4 jon we), Be Jouwths wtsi,ai | ) wlalao

sold Ae dablio afis Naas! cso! ci) All this is reno

of what is apparent from the inscription, viz. that this SHAHA’B UD-DIN was

the general of the army which MunammeEpD SuHa'H or his Hindu minister sent

against the Raja of Benares.

{A celebrated Cazi named SHAHAB UD-DIN is commemorated by Asun Fazt,

who was flourishing at the time of Timur’s invasion at the close of the 14th

century. But this is somewhat too late.]

+ This Sarra’sa I do not find mentioned by any historian of the time.

t The allusion is here to the several modes of dealing with an enemy enu-

merated in Menu VII. 198, viz. wat pacification, ela presents Ye sow-

ing dissensions ; either of which three the Hindu legislator prefers in respect of

1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 345

abandoned the fort for some days; only (presents) having been given

(to the enemy, according to usage.)

X. (But once more) to protect his own people did the noble king

SvAmr R4za, the crusher of the pride of alien heroes in fight, (ascend his

chariot)* surrounded by applauding heralds: but (having perceived) the

great Turkish warrior surnamed (Sata) vos [or him of the hundred

arms], at the approach of the hateful one in battle, he again left the

fort of his own accord.

XI. Thence having approached Bhagavati [the goddess ANNA

Purna Devi at her city Benares,] having abode there, and meditated

on her benevolence, thence returning with care, he established his

kingdom here free from all thorns of trouble.

Samvat 1390, in the month Bhadra, fifth day of the waning moon,

{Aug. 5, O. S. A. D. 1333,] on Thursday, was the kingdom set free

from Matic SHands vunp-pin, acting under the protecting favor of

Sarrasa Deva aforesaid.

REMARKS ON THE SANSCRIT TEXT.

Verse I. The Benares Pandit’s reading STAT TIHT is much worse in

sense, beside being inconsistent with the evident letters of the inscription, which

are as exhibited above. The @ is required in Sanscrit construction by the qa

of the next line. ee

II. The B. P.’s reading Grsfau: w W faeqrar fasat TeMTfad: though

somewbat smoother in metre, is inferior in every other respect to this,

which (except for the indistinctness of the qy in faaret and of the sylla-

bles qatfy is clearly marked on the stone.

In the second half, the B. P.’s reading qayyT]e is inconsistent with the cha-

racters on the stone. is

III. In the last quarter of this verse, I wish I could read with the B. P.

faaugcaiaa: in one compound; Visvésa-pura being a well-known name of

Benares.—But the visarga is too clear on the stone to admit of that reading.

IV. In the second half of this verse only the beginning gq and the end

qe with the exception of an 7 in the middle, is clearly legible. My conjectural

reading of the rest in small characters is accommodated to this—whereas the B.

prudence, to the fourth <q giving battle ; and our prince Sva’mt Ra/sA seems to

have been of the same HEU The meaning here is however that to the first, pacifi-

cation, he preferred the second, of buying off the enemy. If for Tq we read aq,

it would mean that he abstained from both of these methods: ifwe read @yqy,

it would mean, on the contrary, that he was profuse in his presents while he

abstaiued from making peace. The first seems to me the best reading of the

three: and all of them more probable than qa which is the reading of the

Benares pandit.

* J find no Moghul or Afghan warrior to whom this name can be considered as

necessarily applying. The syllable yrq sata is conjecturely supplied to filla

hiatus on the stone.—W. H. M.

2¥

346 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [JunE,

P.’s Aaa: wife Sasfreacr Tauaay: is altogether gratuitous and.

irreconcilable with the yet remaining letters of the verse.

Vv. The B. P.’s reading of this verse :

> ~ ©

BSAA ALTA ATA SETA: |

Sal wertisifaar 4 foarsfe aarfaha: |

has only the advantage of mine as to the antepenultimate syllable of the first

half, viz. the 2nd & being somewhat more like what appears on the stone. In

every other respect where there is any difference, any one may see how entirely he

varies from the characters there visible, beside being incorrect in grammar and

prosody, and quite unintelligible. Only three syllables of mine are conjectural,

in a place where the stone is broken.

VI. All of this verse, which is not distinguished by small letters, is most

clearly traced on the stone: but the B. P. has retained nothing of it but the

three first syllables of the second line, (in which also he has thrust in another

syllable with a visarga without warr rant) in his reading, which is—

ASI HANS ACA: WHA WT LATAT:

aa: Far @ yra: aeAha HIG aa: Il

most entirely gratuitous! beside that it annexes the first to sl. 5, and begins the

6th with the other.

VII. VIII. In these two verses, between which there is an interval ina

broken part of the stone sufficient to contain a half-sloka or line, and which

may throw some reasonable doubt as to the precise divisions of the slokas or

distichs, the B. P., who divides differently from me, has not attempted to retain

any thing of the yet remaining large characters on the stone, except in the first

line, and the beginning of the last but one; while any one who compares his

reading with mine, will see how much more he varies from his Ss His

reading is in five lines, as follows : E

aeae fewer: aqaraciaa: i Here are anarrowis misspelt. ]

May Si TAG samrayaaa: | [No Heat as on the stone.]

afaaw = a Si Way Az Afaa: || [A false concord here.}_

wae aq WIC VATA GaGa: | [All but the first syllables

quite incompatible with the stone.]

WAH SKATHY SACs: Fa? BW ||

IX. This the B. P. read quite differently ; but any person comparing his two

first lines with mine, may judge which is the nearest to the actual inscription.

His third line is altogether gratuitous.

AAGUS VAT: F cH a farateara

aa aq ay Hy aaIsey Haga Qql

aa SAT ATA AF sl s Sate: i

X. In-this sloka, which is in the lyrical measure sie Sdrdéla vikriditem,

the B. P. has made the following very serious mistakes, Ist, making its second

pada or hemistich the first, (veading it otherwise quite correctly) to the exclusion

of all the legible syllables of the first pada, whose place in the measure is so

palpable, viz. the 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 15th, 16th, 17th, 18th and 19th or last, which

are on the stone clearly as they are here represented in large letters [having

gratuitously supplied their place by a 3rd Anustdbh line to verse IX. !] 2ndly.

1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 347

Filling up the place of the 3rd and 4th pddas by a crowded three of his own

making entirely, except the eight last syllables of the last—though so much

more of them are clearly legible on the stones at their proper intervals—just as

T have placed them in the midst of the conjectural supplements. The B. P. has

Hara WARIS: arate: |

Yet WY PSST SCAM F Se TU VifAR: |

(This 3rd pada has a glar- WATNTHRAGARATMAT S ae ee

ing false quantity.) wreanfeaufaarsiy y ga: aI SH Sa

XI. This last verse, which is Anustabh, like the nine first, is read by the B.

P. as I read it, except that the 2nd quarter is with him afwayg faafea quite

unlike the stone, and that the 3rd he begins differently, viz. qaqa

borrowing to this place what he had omitted in the 2nd. The stone gives clearly

throughout what I have written above.

After the date and the word aT, the B. P. has gratuitously expanded the

rest into a sloka, as oe ¥ 7

TUT WAS TSY MCUTATITATR: |

aeqeiaaaa: Wal Ft Fcisra: |!

I will add, that the inscription, as itis now legible, affords no counte-

nance to the B. P.’s supposition, that the discreet Sva’m1 Ra’sa acted

under his elder brother CuanpraGana. He rather appears to have

been his successor. W.H. Mit.

Barahat Inscription.

No. III. of the same plate, is the inscription from Barahdét in

Garhwal, presented, in duplicate, to the Society by the Commissioner,

Mr. Traitu. This inscription also has been deciphered in part by the

Rey. Principal of Bishop’s College, who has kindly communicated

its contents to me in the following letter :

“IT have the pleasure of sending one of the Kemdoz inscriptions,

that of Barahdt in Garhwdl.

It opens with the invocation @f@ 3%: Svasti Sri, addressed gpEazcut

ly to a prince, and the first line contains the words y@ 44 Va as

$ltaka Sls ‘ whose and where is a palace which is on a lofty peak

and splendidly magnificent.’ The second line of the inscription is

a turgid verse in the Sdrdila vikridita measure, as follows :

GATS AS AURATYY ASA TACT:

HAMAAATAGVACAT AT SIATA: |

aaa J 4 cmaaica: Teac: W ai (understand #47)

VARTA BCIIAIA TAPRITTA: II

“His son, whose ample condition was exalted by a numerous

army, devouring the juices of the earth like the sun of summer, then

arising sat on the throne, and even with his bow unbent, still ruled with

a) Sve

348 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. (Jung,

sage counsels, and the abandonment of all selfish passions. He who

was originally by name Udara-charita, (the man of generous deeds,)

being skilled in all holy duties, did even thus at once, as the best of

the lords of power, reduce to fragments the army opposed to him,

though crushing all other adversaries, chariots and all.”

This is the whole of the second line. The third and last which

is in prose begins gta: Tra@ “the beloved son of a beloved father,

and ends with the words ...... faaa waes foun araaifa:”

Qatwayicwacay THE UF fegca “As long as the sacred mark

remains in the body, so long has the glory of these two illustrious

ones (father and son) been concealed: but henceforward may the

immortality of this king be unshaken !”

The meaning is not very good, and the word gait: for Illustrious,

is unusual, if not semi-barbarous, in its formation ; but I can make

nothing better of it, neither can I spell out the father’s name from

the strange characters of the first line. The second one is the only

part on which I have no doubt. W. H. Mint.

: Iskardo Inscription.

No. 3 of Plate [X. is a copy of the inscription on a granite rock

near Iskardo, the capital of Little Tibet, taken by Mr. Viens, the

English traveller, who sent it down through Captain Wapz in hopes

that M. Csoma pE K6érés would be able to decypher it.

Being found under an image of Buddha, it may be concluded that

this inscription is but an extract from some of the sacred volumes of

his followers; but it is in too imperfect a state for M. Csoma to be

confident of the rendering, although a large portion of the letters

may be read with ease and certainty. Their accurate form would

pronounce them to have been copied by an artist, if not by one ac-

quainted with the Tibetan alphabet.

Ajunta Inscription.

No. 4 of Plate TX. This mutilated inscription is from the caves

of Ajunta. I am indebted for it to Mr. Raupu and Capt. Gresey,

of Aurangabad, who paid a visit to those celebrated excavations last

year, and I am not aware that this particular inscription has been

yet published.

Mr. Raupx states that it was found “ not in the largest Bauddha cave,

but in the first which we inhabited, and the one where a square was

formed by four pillars each way. The letters were on the right hand

of a doorway of a small apartment leading into one containing the

figure of BuppHa; but here he was not represented with the two

African statues of attendants, nor is this the cave where the Grecian

helmets are found. The rough sketched countenances which are plac-

1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 349

ed under the writing are in keeping with those that cover the whole of

the little chamber, at distances of two or three inches from one another

—these appear to be portraits of disciples seated,—all half lengths.”

Captain Gresiry has favored me with a ground plan of the cave

from memory, but as accurate measurements were taken by Dr. Birp

in 1828, for Sir Joun Matcoum, for the Royal Asiatic Society, it is

unnecessary to insert it.

“The large cave, 40 feet square within the eight columns, has more

brilliant figures in fresco painting than any I have visited. It is the

one which contains what some have miscalled the zodiac, a portion of

a large circle on the wall outside the first cell on the left hand on

entering the cave-temple, where many small figures may still be

traced.”” Some damage has been done since 1828, and it is the

opinion of these travellers that time and rain will soon render the

caves altogether inaccessible.

The first letter of the inscription is sufficient to shew to what

alphabet the Ajunta writing belongs: it is precisely the y of the

Allahabad and Gujerat inscriptions ; the second letter is dh of the same

alphabet, and the third is the m of the coins of the same period,

differing slightly from that of both the inscriptions above named.

The collocation of these three letters, agreeing exactly with the

commencement of the sacred text so constantly found on all the

ancient Buddhist images lately brought to notice from Ava, Benares,

or Tirhut, Ye dharma, &c., led me to look for the remainder of the

stanza; but it was evident that the text would not bear such a con-

struction. Perhaps the Rev. Mr. Srrvenson, whose attention has been

successfully engaged on the Carli inscriptions, than which however the

present seems considerably more modern, may be able to fill up the

chasms and rectify the mutilations of this short legend, if indeed it be

worth while to do more than recognise and record the style of Ndgart

to which it belongs.

No. 5 of Plate IX. is merely a word in an inscription from the

Behtart column, Ghazipur district, concerning which, as it occurred

on the Allahabad column, a difference of opinion existed: Captain

Troyer reading it Yagna Kacha, and Dr. Miu, Ghatot Kacha: the

latter is evidently the most probable, if it be not quite certain ; but I

hope to be able to insert the whole inscription (taken down with

great care by Lieut. A. Cunninauam, Engineers) in my next number,

with a full interpretation by the Rev. Principal of Bishop’s College.

I had lithographed it as Plate VII. to precede the present two, but

the translation was not ready for insertion. J.P.

350 Catalogue of Terrestrial and (Jung,

IV.—Descriptive Catalogue of Terrestrial and Fluviatile Testacea,

chiefly from the North-East Frontier of Bengal. By W. H. Bunson,

Esq. B. C.S8.

The species of land and fresh-water shells described in the following

pages, form a collection, chiefly made in the hills on the N. E. frontier,

which was purchased by the Asiatic Society of Bengal in 1833. One

of the land shells, Scarabus triangularis, and two Neritine and a

Melania among the fluviatile shells, inhabit the jungles and streams

of the Gangetic Delta, and were probably collected on the route to

Sylhet. Several shells belonging to the genera Cerithium, Cancellaria,

Planavis, Phasianella, and Pedipes, which occur in the collection, have

been omitted, as being, in all probability, marine, or semi-marine

productions procured from the embouchures of the Deltaic rivers.

1. Vitrina Gigas. Testa tenui, corneo-virente, ovato-depressa,.

auriformi, velociter crescente, supra planata, rugis concentricis et

striis radiatis decussata; subtus tumida; ultimo anfractu valde ventri-

coso, pené totam testam efformante ; apertura transversa, rotundato

ovata, preegrandi; labio valdé arcuato. Diam. 1.15 poll.

This shell is so flattened, and enlarges so quickly, that it has very

much of the appearance of one of the macrostomata, to which I refer-

red a specimen from the caves of Sylhet, recently fossilized with calc-

tuff, when I first saw it. It has only two whorls exclusive of the

apex, and differs in size, in the depression of the spire, in the very

arcuated left lip, and the more extended mouth from the European

species V. elongata. 1 believe that it is the first shell truly belong-

ing to this genus which has been ascertained to inhabit India. Since

I became acquainted with it, I have met with a second species alive,

‘adhering to dead leaves at the roots, and to the lower part of the

trunks of trees in the teak-wood attached to the Botanic Garden of

Calcutta; but the characters of the animal restrict it to the genus

Helicarion of Cuvizrr. Whether V. Gigas belongs to Cuvier’s Heli-

colimaz or to Helicarion, cannot be ascertained without an examination

of the animal; I therefore leave it in the original genus as defined

by Lamarck.

2. Nanina decussata. Testé corned, discorded, sub-depressa, umbi-

licata; spira exsertiuscula, obtusa; anfractibus septem supra planatis,

ultimo obtuse angulato; epidermide supra arguté decussata, infra

radiatim striata; apertura transversa, lunatéa. Diam. 1 poll; axis 0.35

On a cursory inspection of this shell, I erroneously considered it

to be a variety of the species “ vitrinoides” Dasuayes, belonging to

Mr. Gray’s genus Nanina, (Zool. Proceedings, 8th July, 1834,) which

I indicated under the name of Macrochlamys in the first No. of the Jour-

1836.] Fluviatile Shelis from Sylhet. 351

nal of the Asiatic Society for January 1832, pp. 13 and 76, and which

I altered to that of Tanychlamys in a paper on the genus read before

the Zoological Society in August 1834. Mr. Gray’s characters,

drawn up from specimens preserved in spirits, and from General

Harpwicke’s drawings, having the advantage of priority of publica-

tion, his name, although inexpressive, will necessarily be adopted.

Several independent observers have united in stating the necessity of

separating this genus from Heliz, on the characters of the animal ;

witness the observations of Lieut. Hurron, Journal of the Asiatic

Society, vol. ii. p. 83.

The species under review. differs from N. vitrinoides in sculpture,

has a more exserted spire than the generality of specimens of that

shell, has a more angular periphery, is of a lighter colour, and, pos-

sessing the same number of whorls, is larger and of a thicker substance.

‘The epidermis is apt to peel off the under side.

I have a third species belonging to this country, which I lately

took at the foot of the Rajmahal hills. It differs in its smaller size,

its lighter colour, and in the form of the aperture from both vitri-

noides and decussata, and from the former it altogether differs in its

habits even when inhabiting the same spot, abounding on shrubs and

bushes, while N. vitrinoides is confined to the ground, to rocks, and

to brick work.

3. Helix plectostoma. Testa reversa, depresso-conoided subtis

tumida ; spira exsertiuscula; anfractibus supra planatis, radiatim pli-

catis, rugis transversis decussatis; ultimo angulato, angulo subtis

marginato. Apertura lunata, plica, (ut in Helice personata) interdum

inconspicua, ultimo anfractui adherente; umbilico profundo, anfractus

plerosque exhibenti. Diam. 0.35 poll. paulo plus.

This shell has a salient plate on the penultimate whorl connecting

the two extremities of the peristome, as in H. personata, but differs

from it in its other characters. The peristome is more rounded than

in H. Cocyrensis, the spire more conoid, and the satures less conspi-

cuous. It belongs to the subgenus Helicodonta of Dr Frrussac, but

in the angularity of the periphery it approaches to Helicigona.

4. Helix Ozytes. Testa ferrugineo-corned, depressd; spira con-

vex, apice planato; periphzerid acuta ; anfractibus obliqué subplicatis,

suturis non excavatis; peristomate subreflexo; umbilico lato et pro-

fundo anfractus usque ad apicem exhibenti. Diam. 1.8 poll.

In form it exactly resembles H. acumen of Dalmatia, but exceeds

it in size, and differs in colour, in its sub-reflected mouth, and in

sculpture, the whorls being destitute of decussating striz and of the

polish which adorns the latter. It belongs to De Furussac’s groupe

352 Catalogue of Terrestrial and (Jung,

of Helicigona, and to the 2nd division, Vortices. It would stand as

a Carocolla of Lamarcx. Whorls six, exclusive of the apex.

5. Helix climacterica. Testa subdepressa, subtis tumida; spird

sub-conoidea, gradata; anfractibus omnibus angulatis, supra planatis,

arguté plicatis; apice obtuso. Peripheria angulaté. Peristomate

acuto, non reflexo. Umbilico nullo. Diam. 0.75 poll.

This species resembles H. barbata of Cephalonia in its general

habit and in the peculiar form of its spire, which rises like a flight of

steps; but the apex, though obtuse, is more exserted, and is desti-

tute of the flattening observable in the Cephalonian species. Whorls

eight, exclusive of the apex. It belongs to Helicigona of Dz Frrussac,

and to its first groupe, which is destitute of an umbilicus.

6. Helix Serrula. Testa subdepressa, sub-conoided subtus convexa ;

apice acuto; anfractibus supra confertissimé radiatim plicatis, margi-

natis, marginibus elevatis; ultimo anfractu infra leviore, peripheria

marginata, serrata. Umbilico profundo, mediocri; peristomate acuto.

Diam. 0.55 poll. :

Whorls seven, exclusive of the apex. This is also a Helicigona,

2nd groupe. It is allied to a new unnamed species which I have from

Malta, but has a smaller umbilicus in proportion, and a more acute

. spire. It is also larger.

7. Helix tapeina. Testa sub-conoidea, supra conyexd, subtis

tumida; epidermide minutissimé corrugata; peripheria angulata,

peristomate non continuo, subreflexo. Umbilico mediocri, profundo ;

omnes anfractus exhibente. Diam. 0.6 poll.

Whorls seven, exclusive of the apex. It is allied to Carocolla

Lapicida, but differs in sculpture, in its discontinuous peristome, less

angular periphery, and more conoid spire. The aperture is also more

open. It belongs to the 2nd groupe of Helicigona of De Frrussac,

and to the genus Carocolla of Lamarck.

8. Helix delibratus. Testa depresso-plana, subtis tumida; epi-

dermide cornea decidua; anfractibus transversé striatis ; apertura

transversé rotundato-ovata ; peritremate vix continuo, reflexo; umbilico

. lato, anfractus plerosque exhibente, Diam. 0.9 poll.

Whorls four. Of the same type as the European species H. cornea,

from which it differs in colouring and in the form of its spire, which

resembles that of H. deplana of Croatia; but from this species it

differs in the form of the mouth, and in the markings, as well as in its

more open umbilicus. From Helix granulata (mihi) of the Western

Provinces, it differs in the more transverse mouth, more flattened spire,

and wider umbilicus, in its plainer colouring and greater size, and in

the want of that minute shagreened appearance, under the lens, which

1836.] Fluviatile Shelis from Sithet. 353

renders that species so remarkable. It belongs to the subgenus

Helicella of De Furussac. The epidermis scales off like that of the

Solenes, whence the trivial name which I have conferred upon it.

9. Helix Cestus. Testa subdepressd, corned vel fuscescente,

radiatim striata, subtus convex4, perforata; spira sub-conoidea ; apice

obtuso ; ultimo anfractu sub-angulato, fascia unica rufo-fuscad, media,

reliquis fascia saturali cinctis; peristomate sub-reflexo. Diam. 0.65 poll.

Whorls five. H. cestus approaches in form and colour to a species

which I possess from the Tyrol, and which is marked ‘“‘ H. zonata,”’

but which does not agree well with Lamarcx’s characters of planospira,

of which he gives Dz Ferussac’s zonata as asynonym. It differs from

it in not having a white or a much reflected peristome. It belongs to

the sub-genus Helicella.

10. Bulimus citrinus. .Lamarcx.

This is the reverse variety of a handsome shell, of which South

America is recorded as the habitat by Lamarck. It is perforated, (of

which character he makes no mention,) and of an uniform yellow,

without bands or marks, and being weathered, no polish is observable.

Length one inch.

11. Achatina tenuispira. Testa elongato turrita, corned, longitu-

dinaliter striata, versus apicem attenuata, columnari; anfractu ultimo

interdum fasciis quibusdam albidis transversis ornato; suturis im-

pressis; apice obtuso. Long. 1 poll. circiter. Lat. 0.55.

This Achatina, belonging to Ds Frrussac’s subgenus Cochlicopa and

to his groupe of Hyloides, is remarkable for the attenuated columnar

form of the terminal whorls of the spire.

12. Achatina crassdabris. Testa turrito conica, levi, cornea, lon-

gitudinaliter striata; anfractibus convexis, suturis excavatis; labro

intus incrassato; columella przarcuaté; apice obtuso. Long. 0.7.

Lat. 0.3 poll.

This shell has the habit of a Ceylon species which I believe to be

A. nitens of Gray. It differs in greater size, in its incrassated outer

lip, in its somewhat more ventricose form, and in its sculpture. It

approaches to Swarinson’s genus Achatinella in the arcuation of the

columella, but differs in the absence of the thickened pliciform termi-

nation to it, and in having the incrassation quite at the edge of the

outer lip, instead of removed to a little distance within it.

13. Clausilia lovostoma. Testa sinistrorsa4, fusiformi, medio ven-

tricos4, corneo-grisescente; anfractibus convexis, levigatis, striis

obsoletis ; suturis confortissimé crenulatis ; apertura elongata obliqua,

bi-plicata, supra angustiori, infra dilatata peristomate reflexo ;

columella prearcuata. Long. 0.85 poll.

354. Catalogue of Terrestrial.and [JuNE,

_ Out of a collection of 32 European Clausilie, I find none with a

similar obliquity of mouth, from which character I have named the

species. The outer lip projects beyond the plane of the aperture. The

crenulations of the sutures differ altogether from the papillary appear-

ance which is common to several species, such as papillaris, albo-

guttata, &c., and they are not elongated as in C. nitida.

14. Scarabus triangularis. Testa compressa ovato-conica; xtate

subtriangulari, cornea, fasciis castaneis plurimis interdum obsoletis

cincta, rugis longitudinalibus salcisque transversis, distantibus, inter-

ruptis decussata. Spira acuta breviori; suturis obsoletis. Anfractis

ultimi varice saliente lamelliformi. Apertura quadridentata, biplicata ;

dentibus, uno insuper columellarium, tribus super costulam intro-

labialem sitis; plica una columellarii duplici, pandata, altera columelle

recurva, parva. Umbilico lineari, transversali, pené clauso. Length 0.9.

Breadth 0.65 inch.

This shell, independently of its form, sculpture, colouring, and acute

varix, may be at once distinguished from Scarabus imbrium by its

peculiar umbilicus ; that feature being rounded and perforate in the

Malassan species. The number of teeth on the rib, which is situated

at some distance within the outer lip, is very variable, ranging from

three to seven; of these three are always more prominent. In wea-

thered specimens the subordinate denticulations are generally unob-

servable. Occasionally the whole of the shell is of a dark chestnut

colour, with obscure bands of a more saturated colour. In his Synop-

tical table, Dz Ferussac mentions two species from Bengal, S. plica-

tus and S. Petiveri, both distinct from S. imbrium. As he gives no

description, I am unable to say whether our shell is identical with

either or both: the latter contingency may possibly be the case, consi-

dering the great difference of form observable between young and

aged specimens, and the uncertainty attendant on the species S.

Petiveri, which appears to have been established solely on the inspec-

tion of a plate, no reference being made to any museum.

All the specimens of the shell in the collection are weathered, and

in that state appear of a livid purple colour; this circumstance was,

however, amply compensated for by an excursion which I made with

Dr. Pearson to the alluvial island opposite to Fort William, in quest

of objects of natural history, during which that gentleman discovered

the live animal under decayed vegetation, and under bundles of the

hoogla grass cut down for sale. From these retreats, which it occupied

in company with the amphibious Ass¢minia Gangetica, we made a

large collection in a short space of time. I have searched for it in

vain on the neighbouring mainland, in the vicinity of the Bishop’s

1836.] Fluviatile Shells from Sithet. 355

College and the Botanic Gardens, as well as on the opposite side of the

river; but specimens of deserted shells were taken by a friend, as

low down as the junction of the Damoda with the Hooghly.

It is only of late that French naturalists have verified the terrestrial

habits of the genus. The present species is much distressed when

thrown into water, and crawls out of it when immersed. Its decidedly

amphibious companion, Assiminia Gangetica, | have met with, on

dewy mornings, more than a furlong from the river’s bank, crawling

among moist grass.

15. Cyclostoma involvulus. (MuuuEr.)

This elegant species, which is abundant in a living state at Rajma-

hal, Secrigally, and Patharghata in Behar, attains a large size in the

Silhet collection. When adult it is always possessed of a beautiful

orange colour on the peristome. It is Cyclostoma torquata of Lieut.

Huron, J. A. S. vol. iii. page 82, and is the species alluded to by

me in vol. i. page 12, in my remarks on the genus Pterocyclos.

16. Cyclostoma zebrinum. Testa albida, strigis plurimis rufo-

custaneis, angulato-flexuosis picté, spira depressiuscula, acuminata ;

anfractibus plicis paucis transversalibus distantibus, ultimo rugis un-

dulatis longitudinalibus sculptis ; carina media subacuta. Apertura

ampla, peritremate reflexo ; umbilico parvo. Epidermide crassa, fusca,

plicis longitudinalibus, his setis fortibus munitis, instructis. Diam.

10.35 poll.

I was.at first disposed, from a consideration of the habit of this

shell, to view it as a variety of a Tenasserim shell, described by Mr.

G. B. Sowrrsy in the 5th volume of the Zoological Journal under the

name of Cyclostoma perdix; but a careful comparison with specimens

which Mr. Sowersy had kindly presented to me, has enabled me to

distinguish itas a separate species. It differs in its sculpture, in its

more developed keel, more contracted umbilical cavity, and in the

possession of a singular epidermis, of which Mr. Sowxrsy’s speci-

mens of C. perdiz, though one was taken alive at Tenasserim, appear

to have been destitute. In the latter species the markings are white

mottled on a chestnut ground; in zebrinum they consist of distant

zigzag flames of light chestnut on a white ground.

17. Pterocyclos hispidus. Spiraculum hispidum, Prarson, Journal

of the Asiatic Society, vol. ii. p. 391.

The acquisition of several live specimens of this genus (established

by me in the first No. of the Journal) during the last rainy season, at

the hill of Patharghata in Behar, where I first met with dead speci-

mens of P. rupestris, enables me to disprove the conjecture of Dr.

Pzarson that a branchial apparatus or projecting syphon is attached

222

356 Catalogue of Terresirial and (June,

to the neck of the animal, as well as to confirm its affinity with the

genus Cyclostoma, with which Mr. Sowrrsy has classed it. The

name originally annexed to the genus was altered by Dr. PEarson, on

insufficient grounds, as, independently of the violation of received

rules of nomenclature*, of the existence of the tabular appendage in

perfection in only one species of the genus, and its non-existence in

others, the new name tended to convey an erroneous impression of

the use of the anomalous excrescence observable in the shell of P.

hispidus.

Dr. Pearson assumes that the specimens of P. rupestris from which

the characters of the genus were taken, were immature shells, but a

strict search in the habitat of the species, and the acquisition of 16

specimens of different ages and growth, of which 12 bore all the

marks of being adult, dispelled all doubt of the obtainment of the

perfect shell. The retromitted and retroverted tubular. wing, afford-

ing an index of a former mouth, and which does not appear to have

been accompanied by a reflexion of the peristome, exists in that form

in P. hispidus only, and the sinus under the wing which crowns the

final aperture is never so strongly marked as in the other species,

bearing more resemblance to the channel under the wing of Gray’s

Cyclostoma Petiverianum, which shell indicates the passage to the

Genus Cyclostoma, not only by this feature, but by the intermediate

form of its umbilical cavity, and its operation.

A comparison of the animal of Pterocyclos (my four living

specimens of which I assumed to be female, from the absence of the

exserted organ so conspicuous on the neck of the male Cyclostoma)

with that of Cyclostoma involvulus shewed only the following differ-

ences. In P. rupestris the mantle is sinuated, to correspond with the

sinus at the crown of the aperture, and its edges are reflected over

the edges of the sinus, but there is no organ projected through it by

* In conferring generic names it is an obvious rule that the part should not

be put for the whole, by designating the genus from an organ, without a change

of termination, or the addition of a distinguishing epithet. The circumstance

of the feature being peculiar in the family to which the groupe belongs, will not

justify a departure from the rule; were a relaxation from it allowed in one

instance, we might be called upon to recognize an anomalous form among the

acephalous mollusca (to suppose an extreme case) as the genus ‘‘Caput!’’? In

the present instance the effect of the proposed substitution, is to set aside a

name published by the first describer of the genus, which name is equally appli-

cable to every species hitherto discovered, as it is not contingent on the presence

or absence of a sinus or a tabular, or other perforation, but on the existence of

a wing attached to the otherwise circular aperture. Hence the supposed neces-

sity for a change of nomenclature is not apparent.

1836.] Fluviatile Shells from Silhet. 357

the animal, nor does the mantle line the interior surface of the wing.

No organ likely to occupy the sinus is observable either when the

animal is crawling or when it is drawn out to its fullest extent. The

foot is shorter in proportion than that of Cyclostoma, hardly appear-

ing beyond the disc of the shell when the animal is crawling, and the

curious cup-shaped operculum is received into the wide vortici-form

umbilicus of the shell, which it almost fills, whereas the thin flat

operculum of C. involvulus is carried behind the shell.

My living specimens of Pt. rupestris were taken at Patharghata* dur-

ing amorning shower in September. I had in vain searched the ground

and bushes among the moist rocks and dripping jungle, where multi-

tudes. of Cyclostoma involvulus, the reversed Helix interrupta and

Nanina vitrinoides were moving about, and had nearly abandoned the

search, when I thought of trying an open tract of the hill whence the

jungle had recently been cut. Here, on the exposed side of the hill,

as well on the bare surface, as under leaves, I at last discovered the

sought-for shell. At the foot of the hill a single specimen of a small

conoid Helix, which I had recently discovered at Berhampore, was

found adhering to the leaves of a shrub.

Pierocyclos hispidus, is perfectly distinguished from P. rupestris by

its greater size, the flatness of its spire, its sculpture, hispid epidermis,

retromitted tube, and the inferior development of the adult mouth.

Coming from a climate where it enjoys damp throughout the year,

it may possibly use the perforation for a breathing hole when its

aperture is closed, but in P. rupestris the operculum is drawn in

beyond the sinus, so that no such use can be made of it for breathing

air, for which, moreover, it has probably little occasion during the

season of drought and torpidity.

18. Pterocyclos parvus. Spiraculum parvum, Prarson, Journal

of the Asiatic Society, vol. ii. p. 592.

This species, which is coloured like one of the varieties of P. rupes-

tris, never attains more than half the size of that species. The numer-

ous specimens brought from Silhet have all a perfect, reflected peris-

tome. It is also distinguishable by the greater tendency of the sinus

being often in strict contact, though the circle is never completed by

* Besides some other plants in flower which I had not leisure to note, I

observed a little blue-flowered Tradescantia, a dwarf Ruellia, and a beautiful

large-flowered Pesticia with spikes of flowers of a pale verdigris-green colour,

which I had only once before seen ornamenting a corolla in a species of Ivia (J.

maculata ?) In December 1831, the jungle on the side of Patharghata was flam-

ing with tke rich blossoms of Holmskioldia coccinea. On Kotanasi, a hill

between Patharghata and Terriagali, I captured a fine specimen of the splendid

Buprestis Chrysis.

358 ‘Description of two new Species of (Jung,

the confluence of the shelly matter. The impending wing also shews

a greater tendency to a retroverted and tabular form.

It is probable that SowrrsBy’s Cyclostoma bilabiatum, from Salem

in the Madras presidency, will form a fourth species of Pterocyclos,

distinguished by the sinuated addition at the back of the true lip.

When I examined it in London, I thought that it was identical with

P. rupestris, and that my specimens of the latter had not attained

their full growth ; a further search in the locality of the species, and

the consideration that the sinuated lip must have been of previous

formation to the reflected circular aperture, have contributed to alter

my opinion on the subject.

Cyclostoma suturale has the aspect of an immature Pterocyclos. Its

habitat is, I believe, Demarara.

I had prepared the whole of my notes on the collection both of

land and fresh-water shells during a period of leisure previously to the

close of last year, but I have since then been prevented by want of

time from correcting and arranging them. Dr. Pxrarson’s hint, in

his report on the Museum, has called forth this first brochure, consist-

ing of the land-shells, I fear in rather an unfinished state, for which

I trust that circumstances will prove an apology. The fresh-water

shells shall follow at the earliest practicable period.

V.—Description of two new species belonging to a new form of the

Meruline Group of Birds, with indication of their generic character.

By B. H. Hopeson, Esq. Resident in Nepal

These birds have the wings, tail, and feet of Turdus ; and if we conti-

nue the comparison from the external to the internal characters, we find

a similar construction of the tongue, stomach, and intestines in both.

Both, too, have a similar regimen, habits, and manners. Yet they

are strikingly contradistinguished by the respective forms of the

bill. In the thrushes that member is compressed, and has its arched

maxilla freely exserted from the frontal feathers, and very little cut out

by the nasal foss. In the birds now in question, on the contrary,

the bill is so much depressed as to be more than twice as broad as

high at the base; and its straight maxilla, greatly incumbered by the

frontal plumes, has the nasal fosse so far produced to the front as to

pass the centre of length of the bill.

In the birds before us, too, the head is furnished with a garruline

crest; which is never observed in Turdus. The tarsi are lower than

in the generality of thrushes ; and the tail is somewhat longer and less

even at the end. Like most of the Nipalese thrushes, these birds are

common to all the three regions of the kingdom. They are shy in

1836. ] the Meruline Genus of Birds. 859

their manners, adhere exclusively to the woods, live solitarily or in

pairs, breed and moult but once a year, nidificate on trees, and feed

almost equally on the ground and on trees. I have taken from their

stomachs several sorts of stony berries, small univalve mollusca, and

sundry kinds of aquatic insects.

These birds are not generally or familiarly known to the Nipalese,

- but the foresters, whom I have met with, denominate them Cocho: and

by that name, latinised into Cochoa, I have designated them generi-

cally in my note book.

As a Meruline genus, placed close to Turdus, the following charac-

ter may perhaps serve to mark them.

Wings, tail, and feet, as in Turdus.

Tarsi rather lowe? and tail somewhat longer.

Bill straight, considerably depressed : the maxilla excided beyond

the centre by the nasal fosse: the nostrils very large, and nearer to

tip than to gape. Head crested as in Garrulus. The two species at

present known to me I shall call, from their prevalent colour, Viridis

and Purpurea.

The following is their description :—

Cochoa purpurea. Purple Cocho, Mihi. Male, dark purple: cheeks

black: crest, tail, and upper apert portion of the wings, soft grey

blue, more or less purpurescent: lower part of the wings and tip of

tail, black; and both black internally : a white speculum on the wing,

just below the false wing: bill and legs black: iris brown. The fe-

male, brown where the male is purple ; and the upper part of the wings

also brown. The young are rufous below with black bars: brown

above with rufescent white drops: head blue as in maturity, but

barred. The species is eleven to eleven and a half inches long by six-

teen to seventeen wide, and weight three and half to four oz.

Co. Viridis. Green Cochoa, Mihi. Brilliant parrot green, paler and

changing into verditer blue on the belly and thighs: crest, cheeks, and

neck posteally, brilliant blue: upper part of the wings and tail, the

same, but paler with a grey cast; and both black internally, and

apertly towards the ends, as in the preceding species; through

the eye to the nostrils black: bar of same hue across the pale portion

of the wings, caused by the long coverts and bastard wing being tipt

with that colour : legs fleshy brown: bill black: iris brown: size of the

last: sexes alike.—N. B. This species is apt to vary considerably

before it has reached maturity as well as under moult, when the back

is sometimes lunated with black; and the soft blue portion of the

Wings is smeared with brownish yellow. At first, the young males are

exactly like the female. The following more particular description of

360 On anew Genus of the Meropide. (Jung,

the several members and organs is equally and exactly applicable to

both species.

Bill to head as five to four: sometimes merely equal to the head:

considerably depressed, except near the tip; at base more than twice

as broad as high; straight; culmen produced among the frontal fea-

thers, which are soft and turned back; sides of the maxilla cut out

beyond the centre by a broad membranous and plumose fosse: tomiz

locked, trenchant, and entire; towards the gape somewhat incurved—

towards the tip, straight: tip of upper mandible inclined and notched ;

of the lower, subrecurved and subemarginated, sometimes straight and

entire. Nares nearer to the tip than to the gape; at fore end of the

nasal fossze, lateral, longitudinal, elliptic, large, free, shaded above by

a small nude process of the fossal membrane, and set over with tiny

incumbent hairs: gape scarcely to the fore angle of the eve and sub-

ciliated: wings reaching to centre of tail, firm, first quill bastard,

second long, fourth longest ; all four slightly emargined on their inner

web. Tail composed of twelve firm feathers, rather longer than in

Turdus, the four laterals gradated in a small degree, more than in

Turdus.

Tarsi submedial, stout, rather longer than the central toe, usually

smooth, sometimes crossed by three or four scales.

Toes simple, ambulatory, compressed, moderately unequal; outer ba-

sally connected ; hind stouter and subdepressed.

Nails compressed, obtuse : the central fore with both margins dilated

but entire.

Head furnished with a soft, full, garruling crest. Tongue simple,

flat, medial, subcartilaginous, with cartilaginous, subjagged, tip.

Stomach muscular, of medial subequal thickness, the lining tough and

grooved. Intestinal canal 20 to 25 inches long, of subequal calibre

throughout ; close to anal end, two grain-like ceca.

The intestines are longer in proportion than those of Turdus: but

otherwise similar.

VI.—On a New Genus of the Meropide.—By the same.

Order Insessorzs ; Tribe Fissirostres ; Family Meropide, Vigors.

Order PassEREs, Section Synpactyx1, Cuvier. Genus new. Bucia,

Mihi.

Generic character :—

Bill much elongated and arched throughout, strong, greatly com-

pressed ; the sides nearly vertical, and the ridge flattened towards the

base. Wings moderate, full, not acuminated, fourth quill longest,

1836.] On a New Genus of the Meropide. 361.

one and two considerably and subequally gradated. Nares entirely

concealed by incumbent setaceous tufts. Tail longish, quadrate,

strong. Feet and tongue as in Merops. In the family of the Mero-

pide but one genus has heretofore been recognised. If the above

characters be admitted to differ materially from those of Merops, and

if the birds to which they apply are distinguished by a marked and

consequent diversity of manners, I presume the propriety of the generic

separation will not be questioned.

Now, the bee-eaters proper, according to my experience, have

invariably a long and acuminated wing, and aérial swallow-like habits

corresponding to that form of wing. Again, their bill is considerably

spread laterally except towards the tip; the general form being tetra-

gonal, and the ridge acute.

In Bucia, on the contrary, the wing is not so much acuminated as

in the thrushes. It is distinguished for considerable, uniform, breadth ;

not at all for length ; and the habits of the bird are quite foreign to per-

petual questing on the wing in the open country: they lead it to seek:

the deep recesses of the forest,—and there, tranquilly seated on a high

tree, to watch the casual advent of its prey, and, having seized it, to

return directly to its station. The bill, again, is greatly compressed

with vertical sides and ridge flat towards the base, convex towards the

tip. This organ is, moreover, strong, longer, and more arched than

in Merops. The Bucie are of rare occurrence, and are solitary wood-

landers ; whereas the bee-eaters proper are gregarious, and common

tenants of the champaign. Our birds are found in the lower and cen-

tral regions of Nepal; but seldom or never inthe northern. The Nipa-

lese call them Bukay-chera; chera being merely a corruption of chiria,

or bird. I latinise the former word to procure a generic appellation.

I have as yet discovered but one species, of which the following is the

specific name and character.

Bucia Nipalensis. Nipalese Bucia, Mihi. Bright parrot green, shad-

ed on the belly and vent with bright buff: lining of the wings and

lower tail covert, pure buff: wings internally and basally, and tail

on the inferior surface, the same: forehead and gular hackles, blue:

the last, formed of a double series of long, composed, drooping

plumes, ranged opposite to each other on either side the trachea:

bill plumbeous, with black tip: iris brown: legs greenish yellow.

Length thirteen to fourteen inches: breadth between the wings seven-

teen to eighteen: weight three to four oz. : sexes alike.

The bill is more than twice as long as the head. It has a consider-

able and uniform arcuation throughout; is hard, strong, entire, very

moderately excavated internally ; at base scarcely broader than high ;

362 On a New Genus of the Meropide. [Junz,

and nearly twice as high as broad immediately beyond the base. The

ridge above, though narrow, is quite flat from the brow to the centre of

length; beyond it and below, convex. So great is the lateral com-

pression, that the sides are plane and nearly vertical : the cutting edges

are trenchant and unemarginated: the tips pointed and nearly equal.

The nares are rounded, lateral, basal; the fosse evanescent; the aper-

ture covered closely by a small incumbent tuft of setaceous plumulli.

The tongue is long, flattened, pointed, cartilaginous, and feathered

towards the tip. The gape is scarcely cleft tothe fore angle of the

eye, and smooth.

The wings are of very moderate length, but of great and pretty

uniform fulness or breadth: the tertiaries and primaries equal: first

and second primaries considerably and subequally gradated: third

and fourth nearly equal. Fourth longest: first not bastard; more

than half as long as the fourth.

The tail is rather long, and is composed of twelve very firm, broad,

and equal feathers. The tarsi are very low: knees and more plumose:

acrotarsia scaled: paratarsia smooth : toes long and typically syn-

dactyle ; the soles being quite flat, and the exterior toe joined to the

central fore as far as the second joint—the interior, as far as the first.

Nails subequal, much compressed, falcate, feeble, and acute: the

central fore with a large unpectinated comb. From the chin to the

breast depends a row of plumes, inserted opposite to each other on

either side the trachea. They are more than two inches long, of

composed web, and medial equal breadth. Their mobility gives the

living bird a very grotesque appearance. Some such appendage

seems to distinguish one of the true bee-eaters, viz. that called

amictus.

These birds feed principally on bees and their congeners: but

they likewise consume great quantities of scarabei and their like.

They are of dull staid manners, and never quit the deepest recesses

of the forest.

In the Raja’s shooting excursions they are frequently taken alive

by the clamorous multitude of sportsmen, some two or more of whom

single out a bird and presently make him captive, disconcerted as he

is by the noise. It may be worth while to add, in conclusion, that

the true bee-eaters are never seen in the mountains: nor the Bucie

ever, I believe, in the plains. The intestinal canal in our birds is

usually about twelve inches long, with ceca of an inch and more in

length, placed near to the bottom of it. The stomach is muscular,

and of medial subequal thickness. Such, too, is the character of the

stomach and intestines in Merops.

1836.] On a new Piscatory Genus of the Sirigide. 363

VII.—On a new Piscatory Genus of the Strigine Family.— By the same.

Order Rartores. Family Stricipaz. eines i

Genus new. Cultrunguis, Mihi. i A; i

Generic character :— ;

Bill subequal to the head, straightened as far as the cere, gradually

curved beyond it, moderately compressed, strong. Wings medial,

equal to the tail, four and five longest and subequal ; three first con-

siderably gradated, first not pectinated. Tarsi rather elevate, partially

or wholly nude, reticulate. Toes nude, and reticulate with three or

four scales next the talons; the anteriors subequal. Talons medial,

stout, subequal, compressed, cultrated below*. LEgrets as in Budo,

disc and ears as in Noctua. Tail short. ;

It is some time since Gen. HaArpwicke made known to science an

owl with nude tarsift. The circumstance was remarkable, but it does

not seem to have led him to any further investigation. Some years

back I discovered a similarly-characterised species, and at the same

time noted that the talons were sharpened like a knife on their lower

edge. In process of time I discovered another species with the tarsi

half naked; and this also had cultrated talons. But my specimens of

both species happened to have the stomach empty; and I had no

immediate means of observing the manners of the birds. In 1830 I

had opportunity to note that both species flew well by day, and were

constantly found on the banks of rivers. Analogy with the eagles

then led me to suspect that these birds might possibly be fishers :

but still, until I had seen them fishing, or had obtained specimens

with fish in the stomach, I could have no safe ground for assuming so

extraordinary afact. I have now, however, procured specimens with

the stomach full of fish, and fish only{ ; and I presume that the expost-

facto inference from structure to habits will scarcely be questioned.

Whether Harpwicke’s owl will, when better known, constitute another

genus of the fishing owls, remains to be proved: but that bird is

sufficiently distinguished from either of mine by its shielded tarsi. In

forming a new genus for two new species, essentially alike, and very

materially differmg both in conformation and habits from all known

birds of this family, I rely upon the sanction and support of men of

science. And I shall only add, before proceeding to give the specific

characters, that those of the genus have been derived from a freer

use of ordinary external characters than has heretofore been made in

* Hence the generic name, culiratus and unguis.

+ Of the yet earlier Strix nudipes of Daudin, nothing seems accurately

known.

t~ I have just discovered that they prey on crabs as well as common fish.

B. H. H., 2nd July, 1836,

3A 2

364 On a New Genus of the Strigide. [Junz,

respect to the Strigine birds. Cuvier regarded these birds as consti-

tuting but one genus. Vicors raised this genus to the rank of a

family, advancing Cuvier’s subgenera to genera. But Vicors left

Cuvirr’s character as he found them,—whether wisely or not, I shall

not presume to say. I suspect, however, that, as species multiply and

become accurately known, resort will be had to characters analo-

gous to those by which the Diurnal Raptores (to go no further) are

generically distinguished, if not from a sense of the superficialness of

the old characters, yet from a want of determinate new ones. It is

surely reasonable to distinguish all the Raptores upon similar princi-

ples; and, as the external construction of the Strigine birds certainly

renders this quite practicable, so, I believe, that the analogies thus

necessarily suggested to the student between them and the Falconide,

would tend to the higher uses of the science.

First species : C. Flavipes, yellow-footed Cultrunguis, Mihi. Head,

neck and body below, bright rusty, each plume striped down the

shaft with saturate brown; the stripes narrower below than above:

disc and leg-plumes immaculate: back wings and tail, saturate

brown, transversely barred, and largely emarginated and tipt, with

rusty ; the bars interrupted on the shafts, and frequently resembling

triangular indentations: four bars across the great quills and tail

feathers; and the tips of both largely paled: plumes of the thighs

and tarsi downy: half the latter nude: nude portion and the toes,

flavescent fleshy grey : talons horn yellow: bill blue, witha dusky tip:

iris bright yellow : edges of eye-lids black : twenty-two to twenty-three

inches long by 55 to 58 wide. Weight three and a half lbs.

N. B. The sexes resemble each other both in size and colours.

Second species: Cultrunguis Nigripes, Mihi. Head, neck, back, and

whole body below, pale earthy brown, with a fawn tinge; paler and

albescent on the abdominal surface; each plume striped down the

shaft with a saturate brown mark, which is narrower below than

above; and each also crossed with numerous slender zigzags of

brownish fawn colour: wings and tail saturate brown, triangularly

indented or cross-barred, and broadly tipt, with obscure rufous yellow,

which is freckled, for the most part, on the tertiaries, and scapulars,

with brown : great quills and rectrices, quadricinctate, as in the preced-

ing: disc earthy brown: thighs pale fawn: both immaculate : throat

white, and almost or wholly unmarked: wings albescent towards the

roots of the feathers: bill dusky horn: iris bright yellow: edge of

eye-lid black: tarsi and toes, purpurescent dusky: talons the same,

with black points: thighs and knees to the front, covered with downy

plumes : tarsi and toes, nude: size of the last.

Vol VEL EXE

{he

PLS

es \

: seh ol

2 it

we ¢

“it Mews “be eee

Caltrunguis Flavipes willy Wigrepes lype of the Genus

Cultrunguis

KB. inner side of the foot: sixe of nalite.

1836.] Report on Nepal Rice, Wool, &c. 365

N.B. This species bears an extreme resemblance, in point of

colours and size, as in other respects, to the Striry Hardwick. But it

may be at once distinguished therefrom by its reticulated tarsi.

The sexes, as in the preceding species, are alike both im size and

colours. These birds moult once a year, between June and October,

inclusive ; they breed in February-March; and are almost equally

common in the several regions of Nepal, notwithstanding the great

diversity of climate.

The structure of their stomach and intestines offers no marked pe-

culiarity. The intestinal canal is from three and half to four feet long ;

very thick-coated throughout ; considerably wider above than below ;

and furnished with two thin ceca, from three to four inches long,

which are situated near the anal extremity of the canal, and widened

considerably at their distad end.

The stomach is rounded, considerably and equally thickened in its

coats, and provided with a toughish and rugose lining, which is

easily separated.

The coats do not consist of proper muscle, but of a substance be-

tween gland and cartilage ; for which I know no name, commonly as

it occurs. The succentorial stomach is purely glandular, with soft

papillated lining, not distinguishable from the body of the organ; the

points of the papille being, in fact, mere excretory pores directly in

contact with the secreting substance.

The following detail of dimensions is taken from a male specimen

of Flavipes: but so similar are the two species, and the sexes of

both, that it will equally represent the average size and proportions

of the males and females of both species.

St. in.

Rip billitatipt tails, OF. edya Le ak Md ee LO

BIE eM Of ferade 2.5 af clie's prt a ctaiiere Nelw sia 'e p89 O nce

ASA MEE DE Ol meres malsiaib=oisfaacie sickes em LO mek) &

MasalDTeRAt Of, eee sce e sees rs O Lys

PAE ia fateh oietole.cccetelain ecabintele:s aka b¥e areas be Owe G.

PURERNIAD Beeee ls Braet Ayal eho’: S Ura ehs ss eros oan torches re cake oe

BewiEIRLOE OM Sel cas late ee alee akin OLAS

PP SANAE OL: SUIS, alata) <5 seis) oto Sissel lel oats 4OU0

Metall: sis diaraakae one cts ccrits aos te BELO:

VIII.—Report of the Society of Arts on Specimens of Rice, Wool, &c.

Srom Nepal and Assam.

[Communicated by Government.]

The Society having received from their Committee of Colonies and

Trade a report on sundry articles sent to them for examination from

266 Report of the London Society of Arts [JuNnE;..

the Honorable Court of Directors of the East India Company, have

been pleased to approve the same, and have directed their Secretary

to transmit a copy of the Report forthwith to the Honorable the Court

of Directors, with an assurance that the Society will at all times be

happy to receive from them any communications connected with the

objects of this Society.

(Signed) Arruur Aixin, Secy.

Report.

The Committee of Colonies and Trade having been directed by the

Society to examine sundry articles sent to the Society by the Honor-

able the Court of Directors of the East India Company, and referred

to this Committee 4th November, 1835, report as follows :

I. The Soomla or Himalaya paddy, or mountain rice, received

from Mr. Hopeson, Resident at Nepal, appears to be of the same

kind as a sample (comprising five varieties) sent to the Society of

Arts in 1821, by Dr. Watuicu.

From the great height above the level of the sea at which this

grain is cultivated in Nepal, it is suggested that it may perhaps be

advantageously introduced as an agricultural crop in the North of

Europe.

Before this can be determined in the affirmative, it is necessary to

prove, first, that this grain is capable of coming to maturity in the

climate of the North of Europe ; and, secondly, that the clear profit of

a crop of hill-rice from a given area shall be at least equal to that

of a crop of oats, barley, or rye from the same area.

Several parcels of the former quantity of hill-rice were distributed

by the Society to persons residing in various parts of England; and

several were likewise sent to France, to Switzerland, to Germany,

and to Russia. Of those sent to the Continent, the Society has

received no intelligence ; and of those distributed in England, the result

has been, with one exception, that the seeds did not germinate. A

notice likewise was inserted in one of the French journals a few

years ago, from which it appeared that various attempts had been

made to grow the hill-rice of Nepal in some of the districts of France

from seed distributed by the Government of that country, but wholly

without success.

Mr. AnvrErson, the Curator of the Apothecaries’ garden at Chelsea,

was one of those who undertook to make an experiment on the possi-

bility of growing the hill-rice in England, and was, in consequence,

furnished with some seeds of the five varieties at that time in the

Society’s possession. They were sown in March, and some of

each kind germinated and did very well while they were kept in the

1836. ] On Rice, Wool, and Cotton, from Nepal, &c. 367

hot-house. In May they were removed to the green-house, where they

became stout, healthy plants. In the end of June they were transferred

to a sheltered place in a basin for the growth of aquatic plants, having

nine inches depth of water and twelve of mud; here they grew and

promised well till the beginning of August, when, the weather

becoming cloudy and rather cold, they became sickly, and were all

dead by the beginning of September without having come into flower.

_ It seems, therefore, evident that the temperature even of the warmer

parts of Englandisnot sufficientfor the successful cultivation of hill-rice.

The latitude of Sirinagar, where this grain is cultivated, is about

30° ; that is, under nearly the same parallel as Cairo; and although,

from its height above the sea and its vicinity to ridges of snowy

mountains, the winters are severe, yet in such situations the summers

are much hotter than on lower levels in higher latitudes, where the

average temperature of the whole year is not perhaps greater than

that of the middle of one of Europe. In Florence, and even in Rome,

frost and snow are by no means of unfrequent occurrence in the

winter, and yet the summers are hot enough to bring to perfection

many annual vegetable products, rice among the rest, which will

not succeed north of the Alps.

Concerning the second head of inquiry,—viz. the comparative profit

of land cropped with hill-rice, and with barley or oats,—the Committee

are not in possession of a single fact on which to found an opinion.

But they may be allowed to state that, as the farinaceous food of

Europeans is consumed chiefly in the form of bread or of cakes, and

as rice is not capable of being made into either one or the other of

these preparations by the simple process of kneading with cold water

and then baking, either an additional process of cooking would be

necessary in the attempt to substitute rice for the ordinary European

grains, or the new habit must be superinduced, of doing without

bread and replacing it by boiled rice.

In érder to obtain a correct opinion of the comparative value of

hill-rice with the other qualities of this grain in the London market,

a sample was sent to Mr. Ewsanx for examination. That gentleman

reports that fine Carolina rice, imported in the state of paddy and

cleaned here, is worth 30 shillings per cwt.; that fine Bengal rice

cleaned here, is worth 23 shillmgs per cwt.; that rough and inferior

East India rice, imported half-cleaned and finished here, is worth 14

shillings per cwt. This latter was purchased from the importer at

eight shillings, lost 20 per cent. in cleaning, and the cost of this

process was two shillings per cwt.; so that there remained only two

shillings per cwt. for interest, profit, &c.

868 Report of the London Society of Arts [JuNE,;

The hill-rice is nearly of the same quality as the latter kind, being

dark coloured, opaque, and not at all calculated for the English market.

The opinion, therefore, of the Committee is, that the hill-rice cannot

be successfully cultivated in Europe; and that, if capable of being so

cultivated, it could not enter into competition in the European market

with Bengal rice.

II. The wool of the Hooniah sheep of Tibet consists of two

samples,—one, of the wool in its natural state ; and the other, of a

portion from which the black hairs have been separated.

The former is of precisely the same quality as a parcel sent last

year (1884) to the Society by Dr. Wauuicu ; and the market price

of it in London, at that time, was, according to Mr. Essworts, of

Basinghall Street, from 10 to 11 pence per lb.

The two samples, after being examined by the Committee, were

also examined by Mr. Essworrn, and by Mr. Souruey, of Coleman

Street.

According to Mr. Essworru, the value of the wool in its unsorted

state is from five to seven pence per lb. A considerable quantity

of similar wool from India, but rather coarser, has been sold in the

London market during the last two years at from two and half to seven

pence per lb. The sorted wool is worse than the unsorted ; for, in se-

parating the dirt, all the finer filaments have likewise been taken away.

Mr. Souruey estimates the value of the unsorted wool at about

10 pence per lb. ; and states, that it greatly resembles a large portion

of the wool imported from Jutland and Denmark.

Mr. Hopeson’s expression that the ‘‘ wool is said to be superb,”

does not in the least apply to the sample actually sent by him; but

as he has stated that the animal “is of trans-Himalayan origin, and

will not bear the heats of Nepal*,” it seems probable that the wool

in question was grown in that country, and has greatly degenerated ;

it being well known that the sheep of Barbary produce hair rather

than wool.

The Committee think it incumbent on them to notice an opinion

expressed by Mr. Sournzy, from the great attention which that

gentleman has paid to the growth of wool; namely, that the Hooniah

and other coarse qualities of Indian wool, of which many hundred.

bales have recently been imported, would be very materially improved

by the introduction of some well-selected rams, of which an ample

supply might no doubt be obtained from New South Wales.

* This expression completely confirms the observations previously made

respecting the hill-rice of Nepal, which thus seems to grow in a climate too hot

for the production of wool.

1836.] On Rice, Wool, and Cotton, from Nepal, &c. 369

III. Two large pieces of cloth made from the down of the Simool or

Tree-Cotton, Bombar heptaphyllum, from Gowahatty in Assam, the

place of their manufacture.

On examining the cloth it appears that the fine short down of the

Bombaxr has been spun into a large wove slightly twisted cord or

roving, and that this is made into cloth by interweaving it with a

warp and short of common thin cotton-thread, much in the manner

of carpeting. It composes a loose cloth, incapable, probably, of being

washed without injury, but considerably warm, very elastic, and light.

From the shortness of the staple and the great elasticity of the

fibre, it is not at all probable that it could be spun by the machinery

now in use for spinning cotton; but the combination which it exhi-

bits, of fineness of fibre with great elasticity will, no doubt, make it

rank high as a non-conductor of heat, and therefore fit it for making

wadding, and for stuffing muffs, and perhaps mattresses. When carded

with wool it might probably form the basis of fabrics of great warmth,

lightness and silky softness.

IV. Sample of Safflower made at Myrung in Assam, by Lieut.

RUTHERFORD.

The Committee not wishing to rely entirely on their own judg-

ment in this case, more especially as the whole quantity placed at

the disposal of the Society is not enough for a satisfactory compa-

rative trial either on silk or on cotton, have availed themselves of the

opinion of several dyers and brokers, the concurrence of whose judg-

ment with that of the Committee induces them to consider it as

correct.

Mr. Grieve, silk dyer, of Booth Street, considers the sample to be

clear and of good quality.

Messrs. Racinr and Jaquss, silk dyers, of Spitalfields, consider

the sample to possess a fair proportion of colour, though not of equal

quality with the best from Bengal.

Messrs. Jounson and Rennuy exhibited to the Comm<tte samples

of safflower from different places and of various qualities. They stated

that the best Indian comes from Dacca, of which there are two varie-

ties, one from Paturaghauta, and the other from Billespour ; the former

of which is the more valuable to the amount of about 20 per cent.

Mr. Renney stated, that during his residence in India he paid

much attention to the preparation of this dying drug. The time for

gathering the flowers is near the end of the dry season, when the

tanks are almost exhausted; in consequence of which, the water

employed to wash the safflower is generally muddy and swarming

with animalcule: hence it happens that the cakes, though packed in

370 Report of the London Society of Arts, &&: [JunE,

close boxes, are often more or less injured by worms ; which injury

he conceives would be greatly diminished by substituting clean spring

water for that of the tanks. The sample before the Committee is

fair and clean, and suitable for the market, and is worth about £ 7

a cwt.

The finest safflower of all comes from China, but is not an article

of regular appearance in the market. The comparative value of it is

as high as £ 30 per cwt.

Mr. Emuey, drug-broker, and a Member of the Committee, considers

the sample to be of good fair merchantable quality, and in value as

stated by Messrs. Jounson and Ranney.

V. Two skeins of fibre made from the leaves of the wild pine-

apple, and two net bags made of the same material, sent from Gowa-

hatty in Assam, by Captain Jenxrns.

The sample is not sufficient for any fair comparative trial of its

tenacity.

The Society are already in possession of fibre from the leaves of the

black Antigua pine and from the Penguin pine of Jamaica, which latter

is occasionally made into ropes in the West Indies, but is not the

object of any regular manufacture, the expense of labour in those

colonies rendering it more advantageous to import from England

cordage ready made. It appears likewise (from Burnerr’s Wander-

ings in New South Wales, &c. vol. ii. p. 207), that at Singapore the

Chinese settlers obtain fibre from the leaves of the wild pine-apple,

which fibres are exported to China, where they are employed as a

material for linen. Also in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of

Bengal, for January, 1832, is a paper by Lieut.-Col. Watson on

Chirra Punji, the sanatory station recently occupied by the East

India Company, in which it is stated, p. 27, that the pine-apple plant

flourishes in great abundance in the adjacent valleys, 4,200 feet above

the level of the sea, and that the leaves are gathered by the natives

for the purpose of obtaining from them, by a very simple process, a

strong fibre, which they employ as the material of the net pouches or

bags in common use among them.

From these indications it would perhaps be worth while for the

Court of Directors to have a quantity of the fibre imported, sufficient

for a fair comparative trial with hemp and flax.

IV. Sample of the wood of the Nipal Privet, Ligustrum Nipalense,

from Mr. Hopeson.

A specimen of this wood was found among those sent to England

by Dr. Wauticu, and of which a catalogue is published in the 48th

vol. of the Society’s Transactions. It appearing to Mr. Arkin, the

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 371

Secretary, when drawing up the catalogue*, that the specimen referred

to promised to be useful to engravers on wood, it was accordingly

put into the hands of Mr. Branston, who reported very favorably

respecting it. That specimen was a piece of a bough or trunk a few

inches in diameter, and had been taken sufficiently high above the

root to be of a perfectly uniform texture. The present sample, from

its broad irregular rings, appears to have been cut as near as possible

to the root, in order to get it of the greatest size: but, in so doing,

the uniformity of texture absolutely necessary to fit it for use by the

engraver has been wholly overlooked, and the result is a sample

perfectly worthless for the object for which it is intended.

By order:

(Signed) Arruur A1xin, Secy.

IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 6th July, 1836.

The Rev. Dr. Mix, Vice-President, in the chair.

Captain R. Luoyp, I. N., Dr. D. Stewart, and Dr. McCie.uanp, pro-

posed at the last meeting, were ballotted for, and elected members of the

Society.

Mr. Wo. Speir was proposed by Mr. J. Prinsep, seconded by Dr. Mitt.

Sergeant Dawe, of the Delhi Canal Establishment, proposed as an asso-

ciate member by Mr. J. Prinszp, seconded by Dr. Pearson.

Read a letter from Wm. Macxenzin, Esq., stating that, in consequence

of the pressure of business, and other indispensable engagements, he was

obliged to retire from the Society.

Read a letter from Cuarues Konig, Foreign Secretary to the Royal

Society, acknowledging the receipt of the Journal, and Index As. Res.

The following circular, enclosed in the above, was read and directed to

be printed for general information :—

Royal Society of London, Somerset House, Nov. 19, 1835.

Sir,

I am directed by His Royal Highness the President and Council, to acquaint

you, for the information of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, that His Majesty the

King has been pleased to grant two Gold Medals, of the value of Fifty Guineas

each, to be awarded by the Royal Society on the day of their Anniversary

Meeting in each succeeding year, for the most important discoveries in any one

principal branch of Physical and Mathematical knowledge.

His Majesty having graciously expressed a wish that scientific men of all

nations should be invited to afford the aid of their talents and researches, I am

accordingly directed by the Council to announce to you, Sir, that the Royal

Medals for 1838 will be awarded in that year, the one to the author of the most

important unpublished paper in Chemistry which may have been communicated

to the Royal Society for insertion in their Transactions, after the present date

and prior to the month of June in the year 1838 ;—the other, to the author of

* See Journal As. Soc. II. 182.

= tae’

372 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (June,

the most important unpublished paper in Physics, which may have been com-

municated to the Royal Society for insertion in their Transactions, after the

present date and prior to the month of June in the vear 1838.

I have the honour to be,

Sir,

Your very obedient humble servant,

Cuas. Konto, For. Sec. R. S.

To James Prinsep, Esq.

Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.

Read a letter from H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Secretary to the Government

of India, General Department, intimating that the Right Honorable the

Governor of Bengal had been pleased to empower the Curators of the

Public Library to make over to the Society the Oriental books printed in

Europe, on the same conditions, with the manuscripts and works already

transferred from the College of Fort William. The Secretary stated that

he had in consequence received charge of three hundred volumes—some

few being, however, duplicates of works already in the library.

A letter from the Civil Auditor, desiring to be furnished with an abstract

of the establishment entertained for the care of the Government Oriental

Works. Understanding the 78 rupees monthly to be a consolidated allow-

ance, in which case no detail of its expenditure need be furnished, Resolv-

ed to make a reference on the subject to Government.

Library.

Read a letter from H. T, Prinsep, Esq. Secretary to the Government

of India, forwarding on behalf of the Honorable the Court of Directors

for presentation to the Society, a copy of the Catalogue of Stars in the

Southern Hemisphere, by Lieut. Johnson, H. C. Ast. at St. Helena.

Read a Persian note from Manv Lat, presenting a copy of a compila-

tion from standard Persian and Hindustani Poets, published by himself

under the name of Guldesteh i Nishét,—The Nosegay of Pleasure.

Read a letter from Kumar Rapsacanta Des Behadur, forwarding

for presentation to the Society a copy of his great publication, entitled

Sabda Calpa Drama, an Encyclopedical Lexicon in Sanscrit, vols. 1, 2,

and 3. The subsequent or the remaining vols. will be forwarded when

published. Also translation of an extract from a Horticultural work in

Persian, printed by the Roy. As. Soc. of London.

A volume of selected papers of a literary nature published in the

Government Gazette while Mr. Witson was Editor, was presented by

Mr. James Prinsep.

Meteorological Registers for April and May 1836, were presented by the

Surveyor General.

Museum.

Read a letter from Prof. Gooprve, Secretary to the Medical and Phy-

sical Society, requesting the Society’s acceptance of a pair of glazed

almirahs, their contents having been transferred to the Medical College.

‘Two large chatta-hats from Assém, were presented by Dr. W. B. Davis.

Various rude specimens of domestic implements from New Zealand, by

Mr. H. T. Prinsep.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 373

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from R. D. Manetes, Esq. Secretary to the Government

of Bengal, Judicial Department, transmitting on behalf of the Right Ho-

nourable the Governor of Bengal, a Census of the population of the town

of Gyah and its suburbs, framed under the superintendence of Mr. Ha-

THORN, the Magistrate of Behar.

A note on the origin of the Armenian era and the reformation of the

Haican Kalendar, by Mr. Johannes Avdall.

Read a letter from L. Witx1nson, Esq. Agent at Bhopal, forwarding the

copy of an inscription on a copper-plate lately found at Piplianagar in

the Shujal Perganah, by a krisan, or husbandman, in ploughing ; with an

English translation.

Read a paper by Major Luoyp, on the sacred silken vests of the Tibe-

tan priests, alluded to in Turner’s Embassy. They are adorned with

images, and have a lettered border of sacred texts woven into the scarf :

one of these had been submitted to Mr. Csoma pe Koérdés, and by him

translated.

[This note will be printed in our next.]

Mr. Hopeson forwarded an amended list of the Sanscrit Bauddha works

procurable in Nepal. Such as have been Se. home to Paris or London,

were noted by an asterisk.

Physical.

A note on the progress of the boring in Fort William was read by

Capt. Tayztor, Town Major. [Vide infra. |

A memorandum of a well sank in the Chandpur bunds, near the foot of

the Sewalik range, was likewise communicated by Lieutenant Baxerr,

Engineers.

A descriptive catalogue of part of the Society's collection of Silhet

shells, was received from Mr. W. H. Benson, M. A. S.

[Priuted in the present number. ]

A letter from Lieutenant Gro. Funisames, giving further detail of the

fossil discoveries at Perim, and announcing the despatch of specimens for

the Society’s museum.

[As this letter arrived while the Baron HuGet’s note was in the press, the

interesting particulars it contained were appended to that paper; see last No.

p. 290.]

Mr. B. H. Hopeson transmitted 27 further specimens of his Tlustra-

tions of Nipdlese Zoology ; also papers,

On three new genera of thrush.

On three new species of woodpecker.

Dr. W. Cantor submitted his sketch of an undescribed hooded ser-

pent with fangs and maxillar teeth, accompanied with coloured drawings

on a large scale.

Dr. N. Watticu presented two papers on new genera of alae by Dr.

GrirritHs, to which the author has given the names of Bucklandia and

Sedgwickia.

{These will be inserted in our next.]

374 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [JuNnE,

Presentations to the Museum of Natural History.

Specimens of the great-eared owl, ( Bubo Macrocephala ;) Flammeous

Fly-catcher, ( Muscicapa Flammea ; ) Gurial King-fisher, ( Halcyon Gu-

rial; ) black-headed Oriole, (Oriolus Melanocephalus ;) Bengal wood-

pecker, (Picus Bengalensis; )—Woodpecker, ( Picus Macei ; ) skulls of

Hornbill, ( Buceros Homrai ; ) and Pelican, ( Pelecanus Onocrotalus, ) and

skin of the Amethystine Python ; presented by W. B. Davis, Esq.

Specimens of Silky-throat Raya, (Raya Sericeo-gula ;,) Nepal Bucia,

(Bucia Nepalensis; ) black-headed Sibia, ( Sibia Nigriceps ; ) Picaoid Sibia,

( Sibia Picaoides; ) and blue-winged Chloropsis, ( Ch/loropsis Cyanopterus ; )

presented by B. H. Hodgson, Esq.

The above are specimens of new genera, instituted by Mr. Honeson ;

papers on which he has favored the Society with ; and the specimens will

be figured in his great work on the Fauna of Nepal.

Specimens of white eye-browed Jacana,( Parra Superciliosa, ) and Girra

Teal, ( Anas Girra,) presented by W. C. Smith, Esq.

The internal ear of the Whale, presented by H. 7. Prinsep, Esq.

Specimens were exhibited of Birds from Almorah, mounted in the

Museum ; and an articulated skeleton of the Adjutant, also prepared there.

On the conclusion of the ordinary business of the meeting,

A letter was read from the Most Rev. the Bishop of Cochin China,

(who was present at the meeting) resubmitting a proposition for the pub-

lication of his Anamitan Dictionary, and stating that in an interview

with the Governor General, he had been empowered by his Lordship to

renew his application to Govt. through the Secretary of the Society.

The favorable recommendation embodied in the report of the Committee

of Papers last year, was qualified on one point—namely, in as much as the

specimen of the work then before them wanted the Chinese character, which

was deemed essential to its perfection as aliterary work. This was now

removed, and the Bishop was present, and ready to engage for its correct

insertion: he would also engage, should it be determined to publish in li-

thography, to write, or superintend and correct, the whole of the work on

transfer paper, for the consideration of 4,000 rupees. ‘The paper and

printing might cost about 1,200 more. On these new grounds it was agreed

that there would be no disrespect in submitting a second application to

Government in favor of the proposition, which the Secretary was requested

to prepare.

Note on the Progress of the Boring in Fort William. By Captain Tay.

tor, M. A. §.

In laying before the Society the accompanying section* and specimens

of the strata found in the recent operations carried’on in Fort William

for the discovery of a spring of pure water, it may be expected that I

should give some account of the progress and state of the experiments ;

1 theretore beg to offer the following observations. |

* We postpone this until the operations, hitherto so successful, may have

been brought to a close.—Ep.

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 375

A detail of the early part of these operations, which commenced in

October last, would comprise little besides a narrative of difficulties barren

of facts scientifically interesting. It will be sufficient briefly to state, that

in the first attempt a depth of 136 feet only was attained by boring ; when

the same quicksand which in every case seems to have baffled General

Garstin’s efforts to proceed, put an end to this also.—The tubes, witheut

support in the loose sand, separated in several places, and fell out of the

perpendicular ; all attempts to rejoin or recover them failed.

As the same strata, and consequently in so much as that is concerned,

the same difficulties might be expected to occur in boring in any part of

the alluvial formation of the delta of the Ganges, it was not supposed

that any material advantage would be gained by changing the site of

operations ; it was resolved to proceed with asecond attempt in the imme-

diate vicinity of that where we had just failed.

On the 28th of April another shaft was commenced ; experience had

suggested several improvements in the arrangement of the machinery, and

taught us to use the tools with better effect. The improved skill of ihe

workmen was made manifest by the fact, that the depth of 126 feet,

which in the first attempt occupied forty-seven working days to attain,

, was now reached in eighteen with ease and facility.

So far the strata passed through, corresponded precisely, in their order

at least, with all that had occurred on former occasions. The same quick.

sand which caused the abandonment of the first attempt was reached at

120 feet ; and at this point our difficulties commenced. To obviate the

disaster which had rendered our labour abortive in the first instance,

the tubes were secured against dislocation in the loose sand by screws at

their joints ; and to this precaution must be attributed the success of

the work so far. The sand alluded to is of so loose, 1 may say, semifluid

a character, that onthe removal of a portion of the water which stands

in the tube to 15 feet from the surface, it immediately rose 17 feet ; and

although at this time the work was prosecuted night and day without

any intermission, the sand rose faster in the tubes than it could be remov-

ed; so that at the end of eleven days and _ nights of incessant toil it had

risen from 124 to 103 feet.

Hence it became evident that the only mode of overcoming the ob-

stacles presented by the sand was to force the tubing down, until coming

in contact with some firm stratum, the sand should be excluded. By unre-

laxing perseverance and much labour, frequently gaining but a few inches :

in the day, the tubes at last attained a depth of 157 feet. The sand was

gained upon ; at 152 feet it was observed to become darker in color and .

coarser in grain, containing a quantity of what appeared to be small pieces

of iron ore*. At 159 feet a stiff clay with yellow veins occurred, resem..

bling in appearance a thin stratum passed at 127 feet. The borer, which

during the prevalence of the sand was always behind the tubing, some-

times several feet, now penetrated in advance of it, and in less than 24

hours reached the depth of 175 feet.

The clay at 163 feet changed, for a short space, remarkably in color and

substance ; becoming dark, friable, and apparently containing much vege-

table and possibly some ferruginous matter. At 170 feet it became sandy,

and gradually passed into a very coarse sharp sand mixed with small frag-

ments of quartz and felspar, which was brought up from 175 feet.

This gravel or shingle at present impedes further progress, until we

shall have made some auger capable of penetrating and lifting the stones.

* Red waterworm nodules of hydrated oxide, like the laterite of South In-

dia.—Eb.,

aster.

ical Reg

olog

X.—Meteor

eS SY I ET SS LT MTT | AT aye

‘6L SE fQPST 'AB ‘ds poe orinydyns re pue ‘pp atozo1o st (prow aind yo yey3 YIM paredu10d) ppe‘t 1d ‘ds prow s1mnyding Jo uorsua} snoanbe [euttsazu09 ayy (‘-f. uaaq cary os[e pinoy:

{uSts ay}) :suo1suay JO sutunjos ay) 02 patydde aq ysnu E70! > JO UOT}IAAIOD B aIOYM ‘YJUOUT 4se[ 9UOP Udaq aavY P[NOYs sF *1eg *puRys P90 ay) JO asoy] WLOIZ SPULpvaL s}I Sunonpap Aq uaxyeq os

SUOISUd) ay, *.0G 7B ' 49 “ds OBP‘T JO Plow JasuOIs v 1OJ pasuvyo seM 4I UOYM “YIS™T AY) JO UOOUIDIZe 9Y} 0} dn pFE*T Jo AjtAvAD ogiosds B pey ,,Ja}aWIOIVG Jam 5, 942 UT proe ormydins ay 7,

: *syjuouL Sutpaosid Om} ay} SuLinp poyseural se sSarpee

SULUIAD pue sumi08ul 8} UsaaijJoq suUaTIAYIp oules oY} Surais ‘plepuejys IIUVIIOF Aut UVY} IOMO] “Wd F Je SPOS pues *W tv OL Ie ZEoS YQUOU SLY} Spuvj}s JoJQWOIeg plepuejys mou euL

“piemyorq Joyyer uted _2 SR RRRAAIMPRTY OMI "i 0'F 6001 9° 94 98 6'9h 89 vl 0°06 eae ooF* 81F* 16 L‘gtia’e {Z6¢ \9*Z8 Les’ lezo*Ge ‘uvay

“urex *Azey “138 ‘119 “as “aS “MS OPOL |PLL O LLP Ee Io \o‘oR e8ls jonas |6LF ‘PEE L's 10°9 |Z‘osi6er' jare’ |rist jogr® its

“1nurnd *482019A0 op ‘MS “MS ‘ms [SO' le*POL jot, OL |L°B \0°ZE'G2a*|EZS ES BtHS 96 IL°b |G: onipels loles |pee’ leags 62

op op *1e9]9 ‘as AS ‘a Ici o96 8b 9% \F'E latpslOsl® \6La° lé6cr‘|gar* | 26 8% |s'e joPAl6or’ lgces |Zze° leapt | az

*Ayeo1yy op “11119 au *as "uw 10°SOL {8°92 OOLIGSOT|G°E6|6FS OFS |e6e'|ThE* aL \6°L |Laglses’ lps’ eset ILLS a

op "yes umd op "eS "MSM 0 L°gtt |g‘o4 oat |0'8 |Axp | /°68/P0G. |Pzo! |Bar | 18e° eOL|Ph |S°o \tZele6l’ jags’ {199% Isees | as

*Apnoyo “nuns op SO8F MS) soo as T6000 |8°¢L O'ZL10°9 |TB |2°88|906° jFGat |onge*|Zor‘ l'9 |€*€ {eZaiTsl’ joer’ |r1t9f jae. ita

op *9t11s “WIND “wind “MS GS HOES FBSLOT L542 S‘OLIP‘S 19°9 9'L8/F0" JOZES |Pas‘|oRPS LQTS |€S [6'9R|P8T" loghS jpeg’ leno’ | oz

op op ‘umd “119 ‘as * MS "38 10°83 (8°92 E°9L10'S |S'h | 898 IBIS |Poe’ legp‘|pops 0S9LISS JE'S IQOR\FELS Inop® Ipege lERes gL

*Apnoyo op *"yexys “Nd ‘as = * MS) CMS ale |e‘eZ OfLL lop Ge PEsiOsr® jose’ [9re|FaF’ OBZi0% IPE lg‘ZelZelS lipps jezg*s |edos LI

‘Ayearyy “ays “und op *as ) Ss OOIT |6'8Z &6 IL°GL(O'S j9%h \g‘Ze\lIe* |Pre* lezetleaps # 88 69 1¢°9 |G°RR/B0GS JITP. jezos jenes 9I

‘Azar “TMU op “aN “Ms 3 « {&isot jOfRe | 68 \g*e2 0°9 j€°9 |6°L8 LIB. 063. |Logti Lops | 96 Be |0P j9'98)/206° jeaes inses josss | et

“qs ‘uno *4S@019A0 sumo | “MS “AL *s [98 F2OL 0°18 18 |ZOL|2°6 |€*OL 9°SU|FESS 1898S" Jalpi9ars | 16 S‘g |0°9 {O%9R|96L* Ieze* |e9e* gag‘ I

Aquiu = “Ha ‘wma = suet ava] "AA *S ‘Ss ’ foes locce | aa jatosa‘9 |acz pag est’ foes lasptlecrs | 86 Sh ITS [cogiLGL'—leop* logge |Z9c° F st

‘ul au = “WO}s "198 * Gund ‘Ss Ss ‘o PLT | — |atee | en jo‘oL} Aap [eT 1) 1'G6|81a—|F2e*ez|ape'|a9c" | 68 lorpsiot9 |P°L |6*Zel8o9° lear’ |999° |oe9° | at

‘IMU ‘WIO}s ‘T1190 "wind ‘12 Op ‘Ss °MS aS) fe ap 18 |O'9LIZ°9 |6°8 |8°06|8P9' |998* |PIg‘|69P° | GB |Z*2710°2 |I‘Z letoGl909' e10SGaleau. |PEg‘ Il

op ‘Mund = *pulm Suorjs}| “-Ms “AAS “AASS 1°86 |0*@8 lg 69 |6°6 RB°FG/OS9S (BIB |gop|8cps | 98 le*g7iP*Z |Z°8 |o‘oG|9z9° loge’ legst lets’ OL

‘auy ysaizourmoyq = “und *9 "8S *MS °S j0,26 OTs | 8 o°¢ |1°Z |pe6lGP9* |Pel’ jeepticas’ | 16 6F |P'9 \A°06)E29" i906. |Rest |LBP* 6

op “und "uund "MS SMS is O16 = |T°68_ sf 6B S°9 |S°8 |6°S6|Z59" j96L° lecpj90rS 4 36 PG |9°9 |1506|/S09' |zens |Lec. {L6r° | 8

‘azaalg Yysoay BAIS “ND “JUIJS ‘UND | "MS “MS 45 OOOL |StI® | 8 O*0T|96 |6°F6\099" |89L* IgaptieZe* | 16 9'¢ |6°9 |L°0G|919" jFoG‘Bzjoass |L4p° FZ

op *114T0 ‘ass 0°86 |a‘Ta 3

“Azey *T[TNUIND ita) ‘as tas ae 6°86 p*Z2 98 |F9LI9°L |b°6 |L°t6/Z99° [88° lcgplEbhS § 88 \o*ez|0‘Z |8°8 |p'Ggicse* goo’ loses legs‘ g

*AVSTUL op *zeajo Ss ‘as *as OfZOL |1L | 38 |9SGL/OOT\ESI/G*FG|S89° \PPBS Ii~eg<|SLb° | G6 lo*gzi9%¢ IIL letagiogss jzgu’ |er9* 109% P

op auy “198 ‘wind op “S| "MSS! °08 . J8OOL 8°89 | GL j9'eL|S°IL/eers*eG|629° jZzle* |reg|6Lb* | €6 lgrczie‘e |F°9 |o°2Z81199° |agns6z\oc9’ |6Bs‘ &

op -Aystur *TynuNn9s op “AAS ‘as AS Sh" 1686 10°89 L°8 \65O1\T°E6\€S9° 908. |ecps}ZOPS | 88 Ipfezio‘g |S°Z le*ggi98s' lege’ leas’ |Faes 3S

‘JU 4Je*IUOUYy *4S2012A0 “und ‘MS = -* MS *S |03'0 {3°96 (0°04 | 98 [e%FZ|6°L |9°6 |9°c6/1Z9'—|208'8zleap<|6LE6a4 £6 |pc/I8%h \6°S [p‘HA|69S'—ipZo‘eclers’ 46762! 1

> _ 2 i — foo] ° 09 ori & Isic 4 n= aw ] 2 Waals a = je =

S = = ~ 8S EI P| Fl , Rep ehizaes S| PS iPoa Pas cecmtssiga S | es iaboa re ¢

z : 5 2 Pf Ss] | Sal ao [SSB eerie) # | eS Pe gape a Sale ee tire| # | ee esti sa] <

ce 2 a 5 2 a os ee eels ols ees g 2 og pol OB oye pols “IE EBS g a ad Pie 2

Bho "a [ho [STREP cigaes| & | oP | siSesps BeiS S| 5 se | S8lessl s

e |B UP ey Sirota) & |e ieeieBay arg Si? "["3i ® | 8 | Peletel &

*SOWIOIIX A =

*19YICOM “pul yOJOULOUTIOY,L ‘W ‘d P 42 SUOTIVAIOSqO ‘NM ‘VY (QT 3®@ SuOI}yeAIasqo =

I9jsisoyY >

‘9ES] ‘aun Jo yzuopy ay2 vos ‘nj]najnQ ‘aug Avssp ay? yn day ‘4azsthay 1p91h0]0.109}0 AT

JOURNAL

THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

No. 55.—July, 1836.

1.—Translation of a Témba Patra, which was found ina field of the

village of Piplidnagar in the Shujdlpur Pargand, by a Krisdn engaged

in ploughing, and presented to Mr. L. Wiuxinson, the Political

Agent at Bhopdl, by the Jagirddr.

[In a letter to the Editor of the Journal of the Asiatic Society.]

It is incumbent upon the friend of research to contribute every

piece of information, however trifling, thrown in his way by accident

or opportunity, by which the future researches of our successors in

regard to the history and chronology of this country may be, in any

degree, promoted. With this view I have thought it proper to for-

ward to you the copy of an inscription on a copper plate lately found

at Piplianagar, in this neighbourhood. For the benefit of the purely

English reader, I have added a translation, which, if pound correct,

you can also insert.

On referring to the Chronological Table of the rajas of Malwa,

given in the number of your Journal for December 1835, I find that

this plate confirms the Ujjain Inscription in regard to the order of

succession of four princes.

Three other copper-plates have since been found at the same vil-

lage. I have not yet had time to translate, or indeed to decipher them.

L. Winxinson.

[This inscription does more than Mr. Wiuxrnson allows, for it

adds four important names to the Ujjain list, below that of Jayavar-

mA, (see Chron. Tab. 105,) and having a date A. D. 1210 to Arsun

the last of the list, it exactly fills the blank between the former prince

(1143), and Birsan in 1220. We have no space for comments,

but we offer our best thanks to Mr. WiLkInson 3 his valuable

contribution.—Eb. ]

378

Text of a Copper plate grant

Trenscript of the text in Modern iis

ail Aa TANT USTAUa UMTS II

ufataraat Ba AAT armafars |

HUTETCAA ferarfesiat ayats TWA

STACAUATaT AS? TUT LUTTE |

aeurtsra art rq ta aTqat wR il

Fa detecararfata: ufaat Vz |

mrad ta ata a tH HAVA FT 3 Wl

varia dat ats Tatet S afutec:

amreagat slag geara fataa: 4 8

GUAR: Rasatear VT |

BAASA LATA ATHARAATT: | YW |

aaquateatefa fenainat fina

fauquax: ysiy jsciatiatad ve

aaraqcarteat faanaiy aaRTaa |

qaraTeMA CaCI HE hea WO

AGIATIEAAI A qaterataeraa: l

afa ataqfrareat Wee ATATSAT: | = |

aenigatesadit ACAAT LTP TT: |

qarPyRCM BATRA aehyati et

ufaward fageat RoriGcee qa |

qanacat faa waraanatetiay ve I

aaata aia ya: AfaatET: |

qeeaaaansratfays: TT WA A

aaattonra WAAC AAT |

WaALISe frsieit FTA ASAT |) VR I

ATLATHAAT are curfas Erncat |

aaitty Taser sTHaAT Ag | 22 |

AQAM IT: TV FAAACgiUAe |

au: quzeata dafasaeraa | 1X2 |

ae sata fewsig: wae: |

arattaqaavaty asso | UH I

fay Ta afeazavsaaute: |

STAT UUSAAT Ulat TAFT TAG TUT ji V_ |

{Juny,

1836.) found in the Shujdlpur pargand. - 379

aaaaTea Ty safeerartae |

feaarerere aaa oat fea fare fard | (9 |

RIBAS acafatiat 4 aa Biya |

WMICMIILT TTSR TRRAWAT | ey

aq fafaudita feaatad aw |

wayaey waifa safe RGA | Ue |

aug Aaa Sahacainageufasacwa fafsfats ata

GAG TWHTLAT A ATS AT ATT ufafrarfang faa saqeteta

aTYAAs afated aa asucinratwacents: wasataTa

allem Wa aaade HTS ®RZo

ET IGICCR LEC ala Hde warfare sat

LUralcat SET aurts |

arava fauafas Feat hmaA ATTA faaata ara: |

margarasrs teat ALIA YH! FRI WAS Ucat-

HATA |

fa aafaqMeTaaaitaa qarseera ta fastara at

sevamrenatta a ATATATATA auras Te Taf TaLT

aaqafanzama guts ufeaataedirara ufsa dates

yaa yeifeatifienaa areata sawing: RRS

tras: STATA RT acm: «= See: wala

aaa: afafaant arafiarcraas quanviaget WaT.

Aiwa AAAARTT ATIALAT WAIT Waa aeayed Tem aa-

aT atratfangfarsats tat etaara arate fecer.

fer < eq arama fat asraretaya at asaaal Tae ata

TaaTUAS qamenscacty wife maT eet

avVaAATaay: WITS SAT |

qsfaseur wart cert leaciicit: | we ae aa uta

SA TY At WF |

qeut went a at eta qauci | a fasrat fatayar

freta: ae ante xfs aaaesiafigarat faa aati

ary sifraa |

aanfacaqered a aaa fe Tee qoataat fara: |

Haq w2go aTemMyAE to Wet cfaafas auufsa

AHfewdass CMH ALAA |

3¢2

380 Translation of a Copper plate grant (Juny,

Translation.

To Virtue, the most worthy object of desire to man, hail!

1. May the best of Brahmans, who gives happiness to the whole

universe by accepting a small portion of the earth as an emblem of

the whole, give happiness to you.

(Or, may SHesHa, who gives happiness to the whole ss uphold-

ing (by contact with) that portion (resting on his head), give happi-

ness to you. Or, may the moon, who gives happiness to the whole

world, and who receives (in an eclipse) the shadow of the earth, give

happiness to you. ]

2. May that Parasnuurdma, who gave to the Brahmans the whole

earth, after it had become red as the setting sun, being drenched in

the blood of the race of Cshatriyas prostrated in terrible conflicts,

ever be praised.

3. May that Rama, who victorious in battle, quenched in the flood

of tears, caused Manpopari to shed the fire that burnt in the breast

of the virtuous Si’ra, when torn from her consort, give salvation

to you.

4. May Yuputsutuira, whose feet the valiant Bui’ma kissed in

humility, and whom Cuanopra, the founder of his race, formed wholly

in his own likeness, live for ever.

5. The illustrious Raja Buosa Deva, formerly reigned: he was

the chief of the Paramar princes, and in glory equal to the conqueror

of Kansa. He traversed the earth in victory even to its ocean limits.

6. On the appearance of this glorious king, the fame of all hos-

tile princes in all regions of the earth faded into obscurity, as white

water-lilies in a ruffled lake bowing their heads submissively, lose

their brightness before the world-pervading glories of the rising full

moon.

7. To Raja Buosa succeeded UpayApitya, whose constant de-

light was in the pursuit of pleasure: he was singularly endowed with

the virtues of a hero; and stripped his enemies of their glory and fame.

8. How many proud princes with their terrible armies did not this

Raja overthrow in ever-memorable battles, which resembled the war

of elements in the universal deluge by the rapid discharge of his irre-

sistible and fast-flying arrows; or he was like the whirlwind, which

rising up at the universal deluge by its irresistible force, overthrows

whole ranges of terrific and inaccessible mountains.

9. After him succeeded Raja Naravarma, who smote his enemies

to death. He was wise and steadfast in support of religion and virtue :

a very paragon of excellence, and a perfect model to the princes of

the earth.

1836.] found in the Shujdlpur pargana. 381

10. He restored to religion, who stood infirmly on one foot in

this iron age of guilt, its four-fold support, by making daily grants of

land to Brahmans.

11. Yasnovarma, the chief ornament of the Cshatriya tribe,

succeeded to him: and to him succeeded Asayavarma, distinguished

by his wealth and victories.

12. His son VinpHayavarma, glorious in his life, next followed.

He was distinguished for his heroism, and by his personal prowess,

and directed his ambition to the reduction of the country of Guzerat.

13. The sword of this warrior assumed a threefold edge, when up-

raised to yield protection to the three worlds.

14. His son AMusHyayana, equal to Indra in glory, next ruled

the people. SusnatTavarMa, whose aim was directed towards con-

firming the people in the practice of virtue, succeeded to him.

15. The angered prowess of this conqueror, like the fiery rays of

the sun, which exercised its thundering rage on the city of Pataz in

(or cities of) Guzerdt, is witnessed to the present day in the forest-

conflagrations that still prevail in the country.

16. On the ascent of this prince to heaven, his son, Arsuna

Raja, succeeded, who still holds oa his arms the circle of this earth,

as a bracelet encircles the wrists.

17. This prince, when stilla child, put Jaya Sina Raja to flight

even in child’s play ; the eight Dikp4ls (or rulers of the eight corners

of. the world) smiled at his success. Thus his fame reached the ends

of the world.

18. He is a very treasure of poetry and melody. Saraswat,

delighted by the accomplishments of this prince, gave him her own

lyre and her sacred volumes.

19. To whom but to him, who is equally renowned for the three-

fold virtues, learning, valour, and generosity, can we attribute the

enlightenment of the three worlds ?

To this Raja belongs all prosperity. By these presents he informs the

officers of Government, all Brahmans and others, the patél and rayats

of the village of Piriwiri in the Shakapur pargan4, that in the fort

of Mandu, this day 10th Phaélgun Shakla of the Samvat year 1267,

he has given away this village in free gift, in commemoration of his

accession, after the prescribed ablutions and due worship of Samsau,

and with due regard to the fleeting vanities of this world.

20th verse. As the clouds are drifted along by the wind, so enjoy-

ment from the senses lasts but for an instant: the life of man is like

the dew-drop depending from the tip of a blade of grass; and

virtue is the only friend that will avail in the world to come.

382 Translation of a Copper grant.. (Juny,

Thus reflecting upon the vanities of this world, he resolved to

seek the (sure though) invisible rewards of a future state. He there-

fore gave this village to the Brahman Govinpa, his purohit, the son

of JAITRAH Sinu, the son of Somapeva, the son of DeLana Avasa-

vik, of the Tribe (Prawar) of KAsuyapa, VatsAra and Naripuruva,

of the family (Gotra) of KAsuyapa, and a follower of the Madhyan-

dina (or Wajasaneya) shakha or branch of the védas. He gave the

whole village to its utmost limits, and all its groves of trees, with

the full usufruct of its rents and revenues and rights, and of all the

moveable property therein, including all right to trove property found

therein, that he and his father and mother may increase in good

works and in reputation. This gift is to last so long as the moon,

and sun, and the earth shall endure, being duly made with consecrated

water on a befitting record and with all reverence. Let the patél -

and all the inhabitants of this village, bearing the royal generosity

in mind, obey his orders, and make over to him the full usufruct of

all the rights and dues heretofore paid to Government, excepting

only such endowments and grants as have been made to temples

and Brahmans. And let my descendants, and all who may succeed

me, though not of my blood, well understanding that they will there-

by be entitled to a participation in the fruits, preserve and maintain

this grant in its integrity.

It has been written,—

««Sacar and many other princes have enjoyed the earth in succes-

sion. But every prince who maintains in full force any grant of a

predecessor, acquires the same religious merit and title to future

reward as the original donor.”

And again it has been said,—

«The Raja, who resumes grants of land made as a religious offer-

ing either by himself or by former Rajas, shall become a vile worm

to roll in filthy ordure: and shall drag his ancestors down into the

same pollution. Reflecting that power and wealth and even life

itself, are as unstable as the drop that floats on the leaf of the lotus,

let every man refrain from detracting from the good name and from

perverting the religious merits of another.”

Written on Thursday, 10th Phalgun, Shudha of the Samvat year

1267, by the Raj-Giru Manpana, and with the concurrence of the

most learned Pandit Binnana.

1836.) Note on the sacred Tibetan Scarfs. 383

Il.—Note on the white satin embroidered Scarfs of the Tibetan Priests.

By Major T. H. A. Luoyp.' With a translation of the motto on the

margin of one presented to the Asiatic Society. By Aurx. Csoma

K6r6s!.

Having received lately, with a letter from Butan, one of the silk

scarfs mentioned by TurNnER as in use in that country and Tibet,

which, though rather dirty, is of a superior manufacture and more

highly ornamented with figures of deities than those I have heretofore

met with, I think it may be presented as a specimen to the Society.

I can fully confirm TurNner’s account of its general use in all inter-

course, and am sorry I have not had any opportunity of ascertaining

the origin of the custom, which is, I believe, peculiar to Tibet, Batan,

and Sikhim. I applied to Mr. Csoma K®6rési for an explanation

of the sentences woven in at the ends of the scarf, and that gentleman

has kindly transcribed and translated them. I enclose his notes on

the subject, and to save you the trouble of a reference, I shall copy

what Turner says on this subject; to whose account I can only add

that these scarfs are almost indispensable in all religious offerings, as

well as on the occasions he mentions.

Titalya, 31st May, 1836. T. H. A. Luoyp.

Extract from Turner’s Embassy, 4to. Edition, 1800.

Page 67. ‘‘ We each advanced, presenting, one after the other, a

white silk scarf, or long narrow piece of pelong, fringed at both ends,

as is the custom in these countries, to the Raja, who, keeping his seat

all the time, took them in his hand, and passed them to his zempi.

Page 71. We delivered to the zempi, or master of the ceremonies,

a silk scarf for each of us, which being thrown across our shoulders,

he dismissed us.

Page 72. An inferior, on approaching a superior, presents the

white silk scarf; and, when dismissed, has one thrown over his neck,

with the ends hanging down in front. Equals exchange scarfs on

meeting, bending towards each other, with an inclination of the body.

No intercourse whatever takes place without the intervention of a

scarf; it always accompanies every letter, being enclosed in the same

packet, however distant the place to which it is dispatched. Two

colours are in use for this manufacture, which is of China, white and

red: the latter is rather confined to the lower orders: the white is

respectful in proportion to its purity and fineness ; there are various

Cegrees in both. I am yet ignorant of the origin of this custom, but

shall endeavour, at some future time, to obtain an explanation of it.

384 Note on the origin of the Armenian Era. (Juuy,

P. S.—I may also mention that the kow-fow or nine prostrations,

as knocking the head nine times on the ground, is in these countries

always performed by inferiors approaching their superiors.”

Translation of a Tibetan sloka, found on a white piece of China

scarf, called aA Sar wrqnasy : 5,krashis kha 6,tags, or “ scarf of

benediction.”

wo1 qyarqy asa awdaqea aay 1 Fyadanwya”e:

IAs’ 1

a ~ a Vb SYA a a Vv

Qa HHA SH’ DNA YQ 1 AMSA S HQ AN AY

The same in Roman Character.

Nyin-mo éde-legs mts’han bde’-legs, Nyin-mahi gung yang bde-

legs-shing,

Nyin mts’han rtag-tu drda-legs-pahi, dkon-chog gsum-gyi dkra-

shis shog.

Translation.

«‘ Blessed the day ; blessed the night ; the mid-day also being blessed:

may day and night, always return (bring) the special favour of the

three most precious (holy) ones.”

(Or thus ; the favour of the eminent three holy ones) the az

QSN'Y being rendered, in Latin, insignis, eminens, &c.

Norr.—On the cloth the Ayn is not sufficiently distinct ; I took it first

for Oa" Qaw as in the two former lines; but now I correct it as it probably

stands on the cloth.

30th May. A. Csoma K6rés1.

III.—Note on the origin of the Armenian Era, and the reformation of

the Haican Kalendar. By Jouannes AvpALL, Esq., M. A. S.

While the Abyssinians, Babylonians, Egyptians, Persians, Bactriaps,

and other primitive nations of Asia, have each had their respective

epochs, the people of Armenia, where the descendants of the second

grand progenitor of mankind began to increase and multiply, are not

without a national era of their own. It is not my intention to enter

here into a description of the various eras that have from ancient

times obtained among the people of the East, as they have been

successfully treated of in the chronological works of learned authors.

I shall only confine my observations to the origin of the Armenian

era, and the reformation of the Haican or Armenian kalendar.

1836. ] Jote on the origin of the Armenian Era. 385

It appears from our historical records that the Armenian era origi-

nated in A. M. 3252, immediately after the coronation of the Arme-

nian king Paroyr. Arsaczs, prince of the Medes, it must be

remembered, having availed himself of the assistance of Paroyr, and

of BeLtests NaBonassar, a prince of Babylon, succeeded in subvert-

ing the Assyrian kingdom, and proclaiming himself king of Assyria.

Ensigns of royalty were conferred by the conqueror on both of his

powerful allies, each of whom returned from the field of battle to his

respective country. This memorable conquest of Assyria was signa-

lised by the commencement of the era of NaBonassar in Babylon,

and by the origin of the Haican era in Armenia, which dates 743

years before Christ.

The Armenian era was from the commencement regulated accord-

ing to solar years, like the eras of the Babylonians, Medes, Persians,

and Egyptians. The ancients were of opinion that the solar year con-

sisted of 365 days, without paying any regard to the addition of the

six hours, which formed the concluding part of each year. Conse-

quently, the Armenian era, like that of YEzpEcrrp the third of Persia,

anticipated the Julian year by one day in every four years. They

divided the year into twelve months, giving to each 30 days, and

added five days at the end, called (\ebjbug Aveliaz, which signi-

fies added, and is equivalent to the Greek word pagomen (zayouev.)

Thus the Armenian calendar year was made to comprise 365 days,

leaving out the six hours. And according to this mode of computa-

tion all the Armenian years are common, but not intercalary. The

following are the names and days of the Armenian months.

Armenian months. Days of the mths. Total of the days.

yu wowpe Navasard, 30 320 i Here in fa order of the

0 d rmenian months are to be seen

ocr Hori, < a By not only the number of days

YuSup .. Sahmi,.. 30 90 thereof, commencing from Na-

Eee oy Prey,...<. 30 120 vasard, which is the first month

5 f th di th

SgewteeKarhos::. 0 e year according to the

* LI se ars a0 = Armenian era, but alee the

Urry --. Araz, .. 30 180 total of the days of the year up

yresbhyut Mehekan, 30 210 to Aveliaz or Pagomen, which

Uphq ... Areg, «. 30 240 invariably consists of 5 days,

Gates Plein, © 30 270 even in leap years.

Yepeph. Marery, . 30 300

Wepre » Margaz, . 30 330

Sprnly - « Hirotiz, .. 30 360

Uebpe ag Aveliaz,.. 5 365

According to the above mode of computation, the month of Nava-

sard will commence on the 24th of August in the year 1836, and

after a lapse of four years it will begin on the 23rd of August 1840.

3 D

386 Note on the origin of the Armenian Era. [Juty,

In this manner it will anticipate the Julian year by one day in every

four years, and after a period of 120 years the difference between

the Armenian and Julian epochs will be 30 days. The lapse of

1460 years will increase this difference to a whole year, and the

beginning of Navasard will again fall on the 24th of August, the day

on which it will have commenced in the year 1836.

It is stated in ancient Armenian chronological works, that the

Armenian era was recommenced on the 11th of July, A. D. 552, on

which day fell the first of Navasard. But the want of an intercalary

day in the Armenian year creates a deviation of the beginning of the

month of Navasard from the day of the Roman month, on which it

originally commenced. We know on the authority of Armenian

authors, that the month of Areg in the early part of the fifth century

corresponded with the month of March. Nrerses the Graceful con-

cludes his letter to the Greek Emperor Emmanuet thus: ‘ Written

in the Armenian era 619, in the Armenian month of Areg, and in the

Roman month of October.” And in an old manuscript copy of the

Armenian Ritual is stated thus: ‘‘ Written in the Armenian era 670,

in the month of Mehekan, which corresponds with the month of

August.”

In the year of Christ 551 the Armenian Kalendar was reformed by

the Armenian Pontiff, Mosrs the Second, a native of the village of

Eliward, in the province of Aragazotn, and eminently distinguished

for his extraordinary talents and profound erudition. On his eleva-

tion to the pontifical throne, he devoted his attention to the reforma-

tion of the Armenian Kalendar. A council was accordingly convened

by him in Duin, consisting of learned Bishops and scientific indivi-

duals, by whose co-operation he succeeded in remodelling the Arme-

nian Kalendar, as much as the circumstances of the times permitted,

by newly commencing the cycle. Thenceforward the Armenian nation

adopted the reformed Kalendar, and generally began to reckon their

years in accordance with the rule laid down therein. In order to

know the Armenian era, deduct from the Christian era 551 years, and

the remainder, whatever it may be, will be the Armenian era required.

For instance, if 551 years be deducted from 1836, the remainder will

be 1285, which is the present Armenian year.

It is usual with the people of Armenia to reckon the hours of the

day from sunset to sunset, in imitation of the custom prevalent in

ancient times amongst the Italians. The day, consisting of 24 hours,

is called in Armenian |\<p Aur, which entirely corresponds in sound

with the English word hour! In the Armenian language the hours

of the day and night have respectively distinct names, which I shall

state below.

1836.] Conjectures on the march of Alexander. 387

Names of the hours of the Day. Names of the hours of the Night.

1. (Loe: Aig, 1. pence Khavarak,

2; Pye: Zaig, D. Updudary 9: Aghjamighj,

B-é Qoaypuryk wy: Zairazial, 3- [PFuybu, : Mithazail,

A. Aunwquy[tbu,: Charagaithail, 4. Cuyueon: Shaghavot,

DS. Cwnwepyé: Sharavighail, De Yudue om: Kamavot,

6. brhgeute: Erkrates, 6. Powe whut : Bavakan,

7- Cutt [Ptuhoy: Shanthakogh, 7- Juclturpiuy: Khothapail,

8. Epuhuld: Hirakath, 8. Gfgquh: Gizak,

9. Snep thuy bu): Her Phailail, Q. Lecuw2tw: Lusachiem,

10. (dreyu[FEw, - Thaghathail, 10. [Laucom: Aravot,

Ll. (Leeyom: Araghot, 11. Lacowfuy: Lusapail,

12. Wppay: Arphogh. 12- uywean: — Phailazi.

It is recorded in the ancient annals of Armenia, that ARMENAC, the

son of Harc, had twelve brothers, who were respectively called by

the names of the twelve Armenian months. He had also twenty-four

sisters, who received the respective names of the twenty-four hours

of the day.

The Armenians of British India as well as of other parts of the

globe, have adopted the use of the old Julian style and months in

mercantile transactions, and in their correspondence with Europeans.

1V.—Conjectures on the march of Alexander. By M. Court, ancien

éleve de I’école militaire de St. Cyr.

[Communicated by Captain C. M. Wapz*.]

According to Piurarcu, the first country through which ALEXANDER

passed on leaving Hyrcania, was Parthia. I shall therefore set out

from this province, which is supposed to be the modern Khorasan ;

and what confirms us in this supposition is, that to the south of

Parthia was situated Tabiana, now Thabas, which town is to be found

in this direction between two deserts. Another incontestable proof

is, that the province of Margiana, which was contiguous to Parthia, is

to be found situated in the country of Metmané, watered by the

modern Murg-db, called Margus by the ancients.

Barsie’ pu Bocace fixes the capital of the Parthian empire at

Nicephorium, or Nishapir. But I must here notice that the town of

Tin may very probably be Parthonisa, of which he makes mention ;

and if this be the case, the tombs which are here to be found are those

of the kings of Parthia.

* We are indebted to the kindness of a lady friend for the translation of

M. Covrr’s valuable Memoir.—Eb,.

BV) Pe

388 Conjectures on the march of Alexander. (Jury,

It was in this province that the traitor Bessus seized the person

of Darius, whom he subsequently assassinated. History does not

record the spot where the assassination took place. From the statement

of PLurarcu, it appears ALEXANDER sojourned for some time in

Parthia. After he left this province his march became exceedingly irre-

gular and confused, and we find no historical elucidation of it. Some

historians say that he returned to Hyrcania; PiurarcH is amongst

those who give us this statement; others, however, relate that he

marched into Bactriana. RENNEL, the geographer, is of opinion, that

on leaving the western provinces of the Caspian Sea he passed

through Aria and Zarangei to make the conquest of Arachosia, and

that from thence he proceeded to direct his attack upon the Bactrians.

I am led to be of this opinion; and what most strongly induces me to

adopt it, is the death of Parnoras, which was very much anterior to

the murder of Cuirus ; and it is well known that the former perished

in Zarangei, and the latter in Sogdiana. ALEXANDER on leaving

Parthia passed through Aria, which is watered by the modern Arius,

anciently called the Heriroud, and which passed by Herat. He here

built a town, which I imagine must be that called Obeh, situated ten

farsangs to the east of Herat : however, this latter town was built by

ALEXANDER, according to the reports of its inhabitants; but some

geographers refute their statement by giving as their opinion, that

Herat is not the Aria of the ancients. Barsiz’ pu Bocaaz says, that

Artacvana, otherwise called Aria, was the capital of the province of

this name. In regard to this, I must notice that in my travels from

Ispahan to Yezd, 1 found the town of Ardecon, in its vicinity, in the

same route, the equally ancient town of Akda, and quite close to this

again was another called Beni-bit. Now these three towns bear in

their names the strongest resemblance to those called Aria, Artacvana,

and Bitaxia, that Barrie or Bocacer fixes in Aria Proper. This

country, of which I have just spoken, is situated between Ardistan and

the province of Yezd, and is no other than the Isatcechee ( t7arorxor)

of the Greeks, where the worship of fire and the institutions of the Magi

were established. I must, moreover, notice that at the distance of two

days’ journey southward of the town of Tin, we enter the territory of

Bucharia, and here meet with ruins, which may be attributed to the

ancient Persians; but I must observe, that neither in this canton or in

those of the three above-mentioned towns, is any river bearing the

name of Arius to be found.

From Areia, ALexANDER marched into Zarangei, now called Sigis-

tan, but a vestige of its ancient name remains in that of the actual

capital called Zarang, which is no other than the town of Propthasia,

where ALEXANDER put Puitoras to death.

1836.] Conjectures on the march of Alexander. 389

This town was situated at a short distance from the Htymander, now

called the Hind-mind, which river empties itself into the lake Zeéré,

otherwise called Néibendam, known by the ancients under the name of

the lake Arian. This river receives in its course that which flows

from the territory of Farrah, and which is no other than the Pharma-

cotis of the Greeks, for there is not a doubt that Farrah was the

ancient Phra, the country of the famous Rustam of Persia.

From thence he went into Arachosia, a province watered by the

river Arachotus, which emptied itself into the lake Areiana, and

which is the same as the Aracandab, which has its source in the can-

ton of Navor, and which subsequently flows through the territory of

Candahar, and from thence falls into the Hind-mind four farsangs

below Gerishk.. The town which was situated on this river, said to be

built by Semrramis, ought to be found amongst the ruins of Candahar,

or more probably it is the ruins of that town which are visible upon

the river Arcassan, four farsangs below Candahar upon the road to

Shikérpur. Two equally ancient towns are those of Hskarganj,

and of Sher-safa, the ruins of which may be seen upon the road which

leads to Ghaznf. As to the Alexandropolis of Arrokhaje, it undoubtedly

is old Candahar. Nicea appears to me to be Ghazni.

The Macedonian conqueror must necessarily have passed through

Candahar, as the several roads branch off from this town which lead to

India, through Cdbil, Ghazné and Shikdrpur ; and moreover all the

extent of country to the south of Arachosia, is nothing but one desert

of moving sands, which occupy a distance of forty farsangs, stretch-

ing over as far as the country of Neskhi and Karan, which form a

part of Balichistan.

To the north of Arachosia we find the country of the Paropamisei,

separated from Bactriana, by a high chain of mountains, to which the

name of Caucasus was given by the companions of ALEXANDER, out of

compliment to this prince, who wished to traverse them. Here they

found a cavern that they transformed into the cave of Prometheus.

I have been assured that a similar cavern does exist in the envi-

rons of Candahar, at the spot called Khar-Jemshid-jan. The moun-

tainous part of the country of Parapamisei is now inhabited by

Hazarés, amongst whom exist a tribe of the Bactiaris, who doubtless

are a descent from the intrepid Bactrians who offered such a valorous

resistance to ALEXANDER, and who repulsed him several times before

they were made to surrender. I presume that this conqueror penetrat-

ed into this country, either by re-ascending the valley watered by the

Aracand-ab, or by passing through the defiles of the chain of Gul-

kau, near Ghazni, where we may remark some dykes built here by

390 Conjectures on the march of Alexander. [Juny,

Sultan Maumup Guaznavi. In this passage he had to penetrate

through heavy falls of snow before he could reach Bactria, the capital

of Bactriana, which they say must have been the same as Balkh.

This country, according to Barsie pu Bocags, extended to the south

of the Oxus, a large river which stretched as far as the Paropamisus.

It compromises Bactriana, properly so called, and the country of Mar-

giana, of which I have already spoken.

Oxyartes, the father of Roxana, was king of the whole of this

country.

It was at Bactria that ALEXANDER condemned Bussvs to have his

nose and ears mutilated. CaLisTHENEs was arrested at the place called

Cariata. Puiurarcu relates, that ALEXANDER was on the banks or

confines of the Oxus when he first meditated the conquest of India.

The route which he pursued is, I imagine, the one now adopted by

the caravans which pass from Balkh to Cabul, and which appears to

be the only passable road through which this mountainous country

can be traversed.

This road passes through the territory of Bamiana, a very ancient

town, not far from which are to be found the prodigious ruins named

Gulgula. Six kos further, we meet with others that are attributed to

ZouHAK SHAH; and at the place called Szggan, there are the remains of

a fortress, the building of which the inhabitants attribute to ALExan-

pER. If this tradition be well founded, there is not a doubt that it must

have been in this spot that ALzxanpeEr built the town in the country

of the Paropamiszi, and from whence he proceeded to Cophenes.

This starting point is a stumbling-stone for geographers, inasmuch

as none of them have been able to determine its exact position. For,

proceeding in their narration from thence, some state that he marched

to Cow, which they mistake for Cophenes; and had he done so, he

must have quitted the Paropamiszi, gone through the defiles of Ghazni,

and have precipitated himself from thence to the cantons of Gerdiz

and Lougird ; then crossing the country of the Bangishs he would

have proceeded to Peucelaotis by the route of Kohdt. In this case

Borikrajan must be Arigceum, of which we find mention made in

history. But I would observe, that along this route no such impor-

tant river as the Cophenes is to be found; and then again how im-

probable it appears that ALExanpER, who had such an immense

tract of land to explore, would have ordered his generals Hupuas-

tioN and Perpiccas to conduct a division through a track so dis-

tant as that through Peucelaotis. It is then more probable that

he must have taken the road to Cdbdul, and from thence dismissed

his generals, with orders to proceed in their route to Jeldldbad,

1836. ] Conjectures on the march of Alexander. 391

and he himself pursued that which led to Lagman, and which an-

swers the historical description, being very rugged and mountainous,

but still such as to allow the cavalry to penetrate through it. From

thence he could give assistance to that division of his army which

were detached towards Peucelaotis.

Whilst pursuing this train of supposition, 1 cannot help observing

that the Macedonian conqueror must of necessity have passed through

Cabul ; for its geographical position is so brilliant, so advantageous,

that it is a military position which we cannot but suppose that he

noticed, and therefore traversed it.

It is then only the more unaccountable, that to this day that no

geographer has been able to ascertain the ancient name of this town,

the foundation of which the inhabitants attribute to Knrkopap. From

the fertility and luxuriance of this territory, I am led to think that it

must be the same as Cabura or Ortospanum, of which Barsrs’ pu

Bocaer speaks, describing it as ‘“‘a town situated upon the route

which led from the Alexandria of the Areians to India, and which was

not very far from the Paropamisan Alexandria.”

RENNEL’s opinion appears to be erroneous when he says, that the

Cow-mul of Basrr Suan is the same as the Cophenes, the principal

branches of which, he adds, are rivers flowing from the Ghazni and

Guerdiz ; for the river Ghazni, according to the account given by

its neighbouring inhabitants, empties itself into a lake which is

situated at the south of Moukkor, in the canton of Zermele. As

to the branch called the Guerdiz, it is no other than a narrow

stream, and can scarcely be denominated a river. On the other hand,

he adds, that the river of Cophenes was defined as the eastern boun-

dary of the province of Paropamisus, of which Alexandria was the

capital. I must observe, that from the direction the Cow takes in its

course, it goes too far southward of the Paropamisus to form its

eastern boundary ; what he says there seems to have a more just refer-

ence to the province of Arachosia.

Iam very tenacious, then, of my opinion, that the Cophenes must

be the same as the river of Cdbul. This river has its source in the

country of the Hazarés, betwixt Bamian and Cébul ; it has its fall in

the mountains of Meidan, through which runs the road which leads

from Cdbul to Balkh; from thence it traverses Cabul, and receives

below this town the river of Shéikabad, which also takes its source

from the Hazarés ; a little lower still it is enlarged by its junction

with the Panje-shir; this takes place at the spot called Teng-carun.

From thence it proceeds in its course through a mountainous part of

the country, and empties itself in the western extremity of the valley

392 Conjectures on the march of Alexander. [Juny,

of Lagman, where it receives the waters of the Alumkhar, which flow

downwards from that territory. We follow it from thence into the

valley of Jelalibad, where it is enlarged by its junction with the

Surkh-db, which rises in Peivar ; and then again it receives the Khondr,

which flows through Kaféristan. In leaving this deep valley it passes

anew through the mountains of Dekha, and empties itself at Micheni

in the province of Peshdwar; and when passing a short distance

from Ashnagar, it receives below that town the Jind, which flows

from the country of Baajor, then passes by Nouchareh, Akhora and

Jengir, and from thence finally empties itself into the Indus; and

here we lose it about half a league below the fortress of Attok*. From

Cabul to Jelalabad it is known by the name of the river Cdbul, in the

Moumends by that of Khameh, at Pishdwar they give it the name of

Nagouman, and below that it is called Landeh, by the Kattuks and

Yusufzies.

From its source to Ashnagar it abounds in rapids, which make it quite

unnavigable in the rainy season, and more particularly so during the

heavy falls of snow, which swell it out toa prodigious breadth. I

have above concluded that ALEXANDER took the route to Lagman,

after having ordered his generals to go to Pencelaotis.

The Aspii and the Thyrzi that he attacked, appear to me to be the

Buzbins and the Touris, who inhabit the mountainous part of the

country which separates the valleys of Lagman and of Jeldldbad from

the territory of Cdbul. As to the town of Arigeeum, which was found

beyond these mountains, it may be Alichung, a very ancient town

situated in the valley of Lagman. That of Tigueri, which is here to

be observed near the rivers of Meitarlam, is also of a very ancient

date. The two rivers of Choe and of Evaspla, that he must have

crossed in order to arrive, must in all probability be the Penj-shir

and Alumkhar.

The valley of Lagman, as also that of Jeld/abad, were formerly in-

habited by an idolatrous people, who were driven after the first con-

quests of the Mahomedans beyond the chain of Hindu-kou, the Emodus

of the ancients. They are now known under the names Sidposh or

Kaferis, and the country that they inhabit is just below that of Ka-

Seristan.

* The latter part of its course may be traced on a map, which we have been

permitted to copy from M. Court’s original survey on its way to the Asiatic

Society of Paris, and which, with a few extracts from his geographical notes on

the country, will appear in our next number.—Ep.

1836.] Conjectures on the march of Alexander. 398

These nations declare that they are descendants of the Ghoris,

which name resembles greatly that of Gure?, of which notice is taken

in history.

At Jeldlabad ruins of a considerable extent are to be found: their

origin is not, however, known. It is the same with those that may

be observed three stages further off, near the defile of the Kheibers,

and which are called Pishboulak. These last are situated on the

northern range of the chain of Sefidkoh, and not far from thence is

the village of Azarno, which one meets in the road from Jelalabdd

to Peshdwar. In these ruins are to be found some medals exactly like

those of Manikydla; and from this I am led to believe that these

towns must be of equal antiquity. It remains now to discover what

were the names by which they were then called. The Muminds

appear now to occupy the country of the Assaceni, against whom

ALEXANDER marched, after having crossed the Gurus. This river,

which he crossed with great difficulty, appears to me to be the

Khonar, a river the stream of which is very rapid and full of

polished stones, like the Alumkhar: it flows from Kaféristan. If it

be not this river, it must be that of Cdbul itself, which here took the

name of Gurus, from the Ghorzus which inhabited the banks, or

rather the Jinde which traverses the country of Bajru.

From thence ALEXANDER went into the country of Bajru, called

by us Bijore. This town is situated 60 kos N. N. W. of Peshd-

war; is very ancient, and we may there find many medals like those

of Manikyala. It remains to be proved if it is really there that we

find the Bazira of the Greeks. This mountainous country is traversed

by the river Jinde, which divides it from the canton of Suwdt, and

which after having emptied itself into the defiles of the Tengui passes

to the west of Ashnagar, throwing itself from thence into that of

Cabul. If Bajor be the Bazira of the Greeks, it is in this country that

we must search for the famous mountain of Aornus, the seizure of

which was one of ALExaNpER’s most brilliant exploits.

From this country ALEXANDER passed towards the Indus, and took

possession of the town and fortress of Peucelaotis, which HepHzsTion

and Psrviccas had been besieging for upwards of a month.

Several geographers think that this province is the same as that

of Peshdwar. In this case the Malamantus, upon which Peucela was

built, is no other than the river Barreh, which flows downwards from

_ the Kheiber mountains, and which loses itself in that of Cddul. Rennzt,

led into error by Forster, supposes that Pakkhert, which he calls

Pukkholi, was the Peucelaotis of the Greeks. This last town was

found at the west of the Indus, whilst Pakkhert was at the east of

394 Conjectures on the march of Alexandér. (Jury;

this stream, and at a considerable distance from it, and moreover in

a mountainous country, where the Indus has never been able to

change its course. Besides, Peucelaotis was contiguous to Bazira, a

town that they suppose must have been Bajiir.

From Peucelaotis Alexander returned on his steps, directing his

march towards the north-west, in order to investigate Aornus. After

the capture of this rock, he made a second expedition into the country

of the Assaceni, between Bazira and Peucelaotis.

Ashnagar, which several geographers mistake for Massaga, the capital

of the Assaceni, appears to me to be the town of Nysa. Its vicinity

to Cophenes, and above all what PLurarcn states that ALEXANDER

said to the Macedonians, who hesitated and seemed to fear encoun-

tering so deep a river, all corroborate my conjecture. I must, besides,

observe, that three kos below this town, and on the borders of the Ca-

bul, is the village of Nysetta, where there are some vestiges to be found.

All the suburbs of Ashnagar are scattered over with vast ruins, of none

of which we know the origin, and where we find some very ancient.

medals. The actual fortress of Ashnagar overlooks this territory.

In starting from thence to the Indus we meet no other river, with

the exception of a small stream which flows from the Babizies, and.

which passes between the Hotti and the Kapourdigarhi to throw itself

from thence into the river Cdbul, below the Nouchareh.

At six kos to the N. E. of Ashnagar is the mountain of Behhi,

isolated upon a vast plain, and upon which may be remarked the

ruins of avery vast town, which seems to be of most ancient date,

and which, according to the reports of its present inhabitants, was the

residence of the ancient kings of that country. Specimens of bas reliefs

may there be found ; also the remains of an aqueduct, by which thence

the waters of Ashnagar were carried to the town. At eight kos to

the north of Behhi we see the summit of a mountain, situated between

the canton of the Babizies and the massive ruins of a fortress, which

was only accessible by a path cut through the rock.

This spot is called Pelley. At 18 kos N. EK. of Ashnagar we see on

the southern range of the mountain called Kohgangathe vast ruins of

a town, that the present habitants say was peopled by idolaters, and-

which is quite close to the existing town Bazar. At 15 kos to the east of

Ashnagar is the actual town of Kapourdigarhi, which from its locality

might well be the ancient Caspatyrus, the capital of the Gandarii,

which is placed by our geographers to the east of Assaceni, on the

western bank of the river Indus.

Thave remarked, that close to this town is an inscription in charac-

ters quite similar to those we observe on the ancient Indian medals

1836.] Conjectures on the march of Alexander. 395

of Manikyala*. To the west of this town is the territory of Hottt or

Hoddi, which received its name from an ancient sovereign of this

country, who might have been the Omruis who surrendered himself

to ALEXANDER.

On the western bank of the Indus ruins may be observed at Pevur

Toppi, Hound, and Mahamadpur. Those of Hound are all striking,

and there may be found blocks of marble containing inscriptions

traced in characters quite unknown to the inhabitants.

As for the ruins of Mahamadpur, situated at the junction of the

Indus and the river Cabul, they are, we are told, more than two thou-

sand years of age. After having exhausted the above facts relative to

the country of the Youzoufzies, I shall be led to form more than one

conjecture on the true position of Bazira; but I have been quite per-

plexed by REnNEL, who says that ‘‘ ALEXANDER after his arrival at

the bridge made an inland excursion into the country situated on the

western banks of the Indus, to visit the town of Nysa, and that he

subsequently penetrated into the country situated between the two

rivers of Cophenes and Indus.”

Being quite devoid of all references or means of solving my doubts,

i am obliged to adopt the supposition of this judicious guide.

As to the Assaceni who inhabit the lower part of the western bank

of the Indus, they are only inhabitants of Katteuk, and the town of

Ora is perhaps the same as Akhora. As to that of Sabissa or Capissa,

we must seek for it in the canton of Lachittiri, or in that of Kohat.

As relates to Aornus, which is situated in this country, and of which

ALEXANDER made himself master, it is probably the castle which was

opposite Attok, and the vestiges of which we see upon the summit of

the mountain: its foundation is attributed to Raja-Hoddi. Accord-

ing to some geographers, Attok is the town of Taxila; through which

the army of ALExANDER effected the passage of the Indus. If it be

not this town, we must recognize it in that of Torbila: the locality of

the ruins which we there remark lead me to form this conjecture. It

is possible besides, that this name may have undergone some change

in its orthography. We know that the Greeks were not exact in

their mode of spelling the names of the towns and countries which

they invaded.

* We have written to M. Court to request, if it be possible, that facsimiles

may be procured, both of the inscription near Ashnagar, and of those on the

marble blocks at Hound. The Pehlevi inscription copied by M. Courr from

one of the Manikyala topes has excited very great interest at Paris: it would

be very desirable to obtain a precise facsimile of it,—Ip.

5S Deb

396 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juxy,

V.—Eaperimental Researches on the Depressions of the Wet-bulb Hygro-

meter. By James Prinsep, F. R. S. Sec. As. Soc.

At the first meeting of the British Association for the advancement

of Science, the Committee appointed to draw up a list of desiderata

in the various departments of science, included among the objects of

meteorological inquiry an investigation of the theory of the wet-bulb

hygrometer : and in the circular then prepared, and at the subsequent

annual meetings repeated, the Meteorological Committee was pleas-

ed to compliment with its favourable notice the papers published

anonymously on this subject in the Calcutta “‘ Gleanings in Science.”

The requisition of the British Association appears to have remained

unanswered until the Dublin meeting in August last, when Professor

Apsonn, of the Royal College of Surgeons in Dublin, brought forward

the results of his own experiments, and expounded a simple and elegant

formula which he had in every case found to agree with them, and

to be practically applicable to the various conditions of the problem.

Dr. Apsoun’s papers are published in the Philosophical Magazine

for March, October and December, 1835 ; and it is principally an obser-

vation in the opening of his memoir which induces me to revert to

the subject. ‘‘ In the first report,” he says, “‘ mention is made of a

to high temperatures, would necessarily exhibit great depressions, and

would therefore be valuable as a standard of comparison; but I have

in vain searched for the Calcutta Journal ‘ Gleanings in Science,’ in

which they are said to be contained.”

In one respect we may deem it fortunate that the sluggish circula-

tion of our humble periodical had not attained the shores of Ireland ;

if to the want of the data which ‘the Gleanings” might have fur-

nished we are indebted for the series of experiments undertaken by

Dr. Arsoun ; for the more varied these may be, and the more numer-

ous the observers, the more confidence may reasonably be placed in

any formula that may accommodate itself to the whole.

I might without vanity claim to my own share as large a portion of

the labour of experimental investigation as has rewarded the patience of

any observer of the wet-bulb indications ; having, with little intermis-

sion, registered daily observations since 1822; but | am more anxious

to claim for my lamented fellow labourer, Captain Hmersert, the merit

of having treated the theoretical portion of the subject—I will not say

in a more philosophical manner than had hitherto been followed,

because Gay Lussac had before exercised his masterly hand upon it,

but,—in a manner equally sound in principle and creditable to himself,

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 397

considering that he had not the means of referring to the original

memoir of the French philosopher, and that he had only the erroneous

views of the Edinburgh Encyclopediato guide, or rather tomisguide, him.

In Captain Herzpert’s first paper*, he reviewed with unsparing

criticism the paralogistic reasonings of the Encyclopedist, Mr. ANDER-

son, and pointed out the true basis of the wet-bulb depression so

nearly in accordance with the views of Dr. Apsoun, of Dr. Hupson

his coadjutor, and of M. Gay Lussac, that it establishes the general

correctness of all, although the particular formula which he proceeded

to build upon it, naturally agreed best with the data that my own

experiments, published also in the Gleanings of March 1829, had

furnished to him. He had fortified himself for the investigation by

previous study of the doctrine of the latent heat of gaseous bodies,

upon which subject he had published a brief but luminous essay in

the Oriental Magazine for September 1827; and certainly no subject

has so much needed a sprinkling of rationality to lay the dust of

unphilosophical hypothesis which even yet remains to obscure a plain

question; so much so, that Dr. Hupson, one of our Dublin competi-

tors, while he acknowledges the dependence of the problem on the

relative capacity for heat of air and aqueous vapour, “ will not dwell

on this method nor the corrections it would require, placing no reli-

ance on the truth of the requisite assumptionsf.”

- But before entering into a review of the various theories that have

been adopted by others, it may be preferable to describe in as succinct

a manner as is consistent with clearness, the course I originally pur-

sued to supply the experimental requisites for calculation, and upon

which I ventured to form a tablet for the reduction of wet-bulb indica-

tions to hygrometric degrees in 1828-9§. Ihave recently concluded a

second and even more extended series of similar experiments, with the

advantage of superior means and apparatus, which have enabled me

to prosecute some branches of the inquiry that I believe have not

before engaged sufficient attention.

In all hygrometric speculations it is usual to consider the state of

extreme moisture, or the point of aqueous saturation of the air, as

* Gleanings, Vol. I. p. 45.

tT Phil. Mag. Vol. VII. p. 259.

} Gleanings, Vol. I. p. 81.

§ Before this period in 1827, I furnisned a ‘‘ table of multipliers’ for reducing

the depressions into aqueous tensions, calculated from three years meteorolo-

gical observations at Benares with this instrument and the hair hygrometer. The

Royal Society, who did me the unexpected honor to publish my registers, retrench-

ed this table, and the notes which accompanied it. They had been, however, in

the mean time printed in the Calcutta Oriental Magazine for March, 1827.

398 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [JuLy,

represented by 100°; while extreme dryness, or entire absence of

aqueous vapour, is expressed by 0°. The intervening degrees com-

prehend every intermediate state of moisture that can possibly occur,

and conveniently express the percentage of actual moisture present, or

as itis more scientifically termed, the centesimal tension of the vapour.

The point of saturation on the wet-bulb instrument (100) is indicated

by 0°, because evaporation, and the cold consequent on it, then ceases.

The questions to be solved then are, Ist, What is the maximum depres-

sion, which corresponds to perfect dryness (0) in the assumed scale, for

every temperature '—and 2nd, What is the value of each intermediate

degree (Fahrenheit) of depression of the wetted thermometer in terms

of the centesimal tension or 100 hygrometric degrees above alluded to?

I. There is one very easy method of attaining the first object: viz.,

by exposing a wet-bulb thermometer to a current of perfectly dry

air of various temperatures. This was the mode pursued by Gay

Lussac between the temperatures.32° and 70°, in 1827: by myself

in 1829, between 70° and 140°, and recently continued up to 700°

Fahrenheit: it is the plan proposed to be pursued by Dr. Hupson*,

and employed in the test experiments of Professor ApsJoHn in 1835f.

In fact, this is the only accurate plan of testing the maximum depres-

sion, which is to represent 0° on the hygrometric scale: for the

exposure of a wet-bulb thermometer in sti/] air dried to the utmost,

fails to produce a maximum, the instrument being necessarily sur-

rounded with a medium not perfectly dry. Dr. Apsjoun makes the

error by this method sth; I have found it about ,'sth.

II. The second question, as to the value of intermediate depres-

sions? may be ascertained by drying the air to various points, as 20,

30, 40 per cent. which can be done by exposing it to various saline

liquids, or more conveniently to sulphuric acid of different strength,

and then submitting the thermometer to a current of it as before.

This mode was used long since by M. Gay Lussac in testing the

value of the degrees of Saussure’s hair hygrometer, and it was fol-

lowed by myself in a repetition of the same train of experiments in

1825t. To obtain, however, an equable current of wholly or of

partially dried air for a sufficient duration of time, is by no means

easy ; nor do I think that air merely passed through a tube containing

sulphuric acid or chloride of lime, without remaining in protracted

contact with it, would be thoroughly deprived of moisture. At any

rate, to ensure confidence, there should be the means at hand of record-

* Phil. Mag. Vol. VII. p. 260.

t Ditto, p. 271.

{ See BRANDRr’s Journal of the Royal Institution, XXII. 28.

1836.) of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 399

ing its actual state. M. Gay Lussac merely dried his air by chloride

of lime, and his depressions will be seen to be all below the mark.

Professor Apsoun states, that he pressed air from a caoutchouc bag

through three of Wours’s bottles, passing it thrice through the acid

on its way to the thermometers. This must have been inconvenient

and difficult to regulate, and the knowledge of the real condition of the

air was withheld; although there can be little doubt that it was

thoroughly dried. My own method was to dry the air previously for

days or even weeks in a large gasometer, whence it could be driven

in a very uniform current. The secret of the facility I enjoyed in this

respect lay in the substitution of cocoanut oil for water in the reser-

voirs of my gasometers, which not only prevented the accession of

moisture, but preserved the gas unaltered for any length of time ;—I

have fearlessly lighted a jet of hydrogen that had stood two years in

my gasometer !

There are other modes of obtaining intermediate stages of dryness :

the most obvious is by using the atmosphere itself of a dry or damp

day, first ascertaining by Dauron’s dewpoint experiment its actual

hygrometric state, and noting the corresponding indication of the wet

bulb thermometer; the averages of a good meteorological register

are of this kind. Again, when damp air is artificially heated by pas-

sage through a warm tube, the capacity of the warm air for water

being increased while the dew point remains unchanged, an effect tan-

tamount to using drier air may be obtained and exactly estimated.

The rarefaction of air also, (in the absence of the means of fresh

supply of water) produces a measurable diminution of the ratio of

humidity per given volume. These simple methods have been used

by all experimenters, particularly by Lesuiz himself, the original pro-

jector of the evaporation-hygrometer.

In describing, therefore, my experiments directed to the two main

inquiries, it will save some circumlocution to designate the methods

pursued as, Ist, dry air current; 2nd, current of air having given

aqueous tension; 3rd, heated air of known tension; 4th, rarified air

do; and 5th, dew-point comparisons.

But there are other important branches of inquiry necessary besides

the above two, ere we can hope for a formula to satisfy all conditions

of the wet-bulb problem.

III. The experimental effect of diminished and augmented atmo-

spheric pressure ?

IV. The amount of depression in other gaseous media ? and

V. The effect of greater or less velocity of the air on the tempera-

ture of evaporation? This effect has been sufficiently examined by

400 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [JuLy,

Dauton himself, as regards the quantity of water evaporated. Theo-

Fetically, however, it has no influence on its temperature; and this is

confirmed by experiment, under certain limitations.

With such an appalling complication of influences to be traced out,

it is hardly to be wondered at that M. Gay Lussac himself should have

given up the prosecution of the wet-bulb problem, or that the Editor of

the Royal Institution Journal* should have joined in its condemnation

at atime when the elegant method of DaniuuL was winning general fa-

vor. Nevertheless, independently of its direct preferability as the most

simple mode of registering the humidity of the air, the problem itself

is of the highest importance, in the solution not only of very many

phenomena in pneumatics and meteorology, but of such standard doc-

trinal poimts of theory, as the latent heat of gases and steam; and

others of practical utility—as the artificial production of ice and cold.

I shall have occasion to adduce a few illustrations ere I conclude ;

but I must now proceed to my first series of experiments.

§ 1. On the curve of maximum depression.

The apparatus used for drying the air is sectionally depicted in

Plate XXI. fig. 1, where a is a dish containing concentrated sulphuric

acid enclosed in a 120 pint gasometer. Another similar dish rests in

the glass double bell receiver 6, wherein are suspended a hair hygrome-

ter (the only instrument applicable as a tell-tale, and indeed an inva-

luable hygrometer for every purpose) and a delicate thermometer.

Through this receiver the air of the gasometer passes to the stopcock

and short glass tube c, in which is placed a small thermometer, cover-

ed with muslin and dipped in distilled water at the moment before the

experiment commences.

The only difference in the order of M. Gay Lussac’s experiments,

being, as I have stated above, that he employed chloride of lime with-

out a tell-tale hygrometer, while in my first Benares series I employed

the same salt with this addition, it would be easy to apply to that

philosopher’s results the correction I found necessary for the want of

complete desiccation in my case. At all events, as his series compre-

hends low temperatures, which were beyond my reach in India, it will

render my review of the question more complete to insert his valuable

table, converting the centigrade expressions into those of Farenheit’s

thermometer. In the fourth column I have added the aqueous ten-

sionsf at the wet-bulb temperature ; and in the fifth, the quotients of

* Jour. Roy. Inst. XV. 296.

+ By Bior’s formula founded on Dauton’s experiments, and published in

the Edinburgh Encyclopedia, Mr. ANDERSoN’s article Hygrometry.

1836. ] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 40r

the depressions divided by these tensions, which will be found to be

the key to the formation of a formula for the problem.

Tas. I1.—Depressions observed by M. Gay Lussac.

Temp. of Wet-bulb Depression Aq. tens. re of Temp.of Wet bulb Depression Aq. age ee of

dry air therm. wet-bulb at?#’. D—/f’; dry air. therm. wetbulb. at —f

t te D ihe t ? D i

° © ° in 0 e 2 in

See 22-00 wi LOO Vaso) fz ee Sch pL ae Ooi

a) a1s hye Wel Peict)taatant Lt Canales) I? aaa) 99.0 39.5 “1915 .260" 75

SRO WW24e le POLES plas 75 60.8 40.6 20.2 .268 75

BGA anak ele On) hog, 6 0 62.6.) 41.70. 20.9 ,,280.. 75

Sues eto sL0Gn, 74 OP 420 aed) meet eso

AVO? W27:9o 1S 9.172. 9 76 66:2.°. 44,0 \| 22.2 .304 74

42S SO MUS ens 79. iG 68.0) $945.14 922.9) 67 (316) 4 72

44.6 30.2 14.4 .186 72 GF) dove eeaeo.0 2 ols hi:

46.4 931.5 (01419: .195.. 77 W1G62 47.3 1024.3) 1.4340) 5 72

AB 2 WOS2.7 y Wlpeo my 204 0076 73.4 48.4 25.0 .354 70

Bu.0) ooo OLO Sale ee 75 75.2 49.5 25.7 .863 71

BeBe £G4. 9! = COR T2200 77 77.0 50.5 26.5 .380 70

eden O.) Ad oe eal a iG —_—

Average ratio of depression to aq. t., 74

It will be remarked, that with exception of the three or four last ex-

periments, the depression follows a nearly uniform ratio to the aqueous

tension, being 74 times greater. The air in the last four was doubt-

less not quite so dry as in the others ; for in my own first series, which

begins nearly where the French table leaves off, the depressions are

found considerably in excess of M. Gay Lussac’s results.

In the series in question the presence of the hair hygrometer enables

me to make an approximate correction for imperfect dryness founded

on a coincidence, which will be explained hereafter, between the curve

of depressions and the curve of the hygrometer, so that nine degrees

of the latter + or —, for instance, will nearly represent 9 per cent. +

or—in the depression, near the dry extremity of the scale*. The baro-

metric correction will be also explained further on.

Tas. I1.—Maximum Depressions determined at Benares.

Temp. of Wet-bulb Observed; Barom. Hair Corrected ;Corrected Aqueous Quotient

dry air Therm. depression.) at 32° Hygrom. depression.| wet bulb tens. at t’ of

t t’ d B H D # £ Dey

° ° ° in

P25 747.2 '25.3° | 29.43 9.5 27:5 45.0 .315 87

75.0 48.2 26.8 -o2 9:5 1129.3 Cy eres y 2 | 91

Leet a2 2054 -30 SraP ) 2955 49.7 .369 78

82.6 54.8 27.8 26 9.5 30.3 52.3 .403 75

83.5 54.5 29.0 25 8. 31.3 52.2 402 77

DEO 29.7 -30 9.5 32.3 52.4 .405 80

85.0 55.0 30.0 -30 8 32.2 52.8 .411 80

85.0 54.8 30.2 -20 8 32.5 52.5 .407 80

90.2 56.8 . 33.4 015 9 36.1 54.1 .429 82

90.3 56.7 33.6 15 8 35.9 54.4 434 83

In continuation of the foregoing, I will now give the Calcutta

series, in which sulphuric acid was used in lieu of chloride of lime,

* This mode of correction was not adopted in my former paper, and the de-

pressions were consequently too low.

3 F

402 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury,

and a greater dryness consequently attained ; though in some cases I

had not the patience to wait until the hygrometer marked 0: in fact,

if it did, there was usually enough of moisture in the passages of the

gasometer to cause a fall of 1 or 15 degrees in the tell-tale hair hygro-

meter, ere the air reached the vent.

Tas. II. 2nd pt.—Maximum Depressions determined at Calcutta.

Temp. of Wet-bulb Observed { Barom. Hair Corrected| Corrected Aqueous Quotient

dry air Therm. depression | at 32° Hygrom. depression. | wet-bulb tens. at t' of

é t’ d B H D tt J* D —f'

0) Co) to) to) to) in

94.8 57.8 37.0 29.67 5 38.7 56.1 .459 84

94.6, 457.3) © 37.3 ol Me SSYfer! 56.9 | .471 80

96.4 58.4 38.0 43 2 40.0 56.4 .462 82

92.0 56.1 35.9 00 3 37.0 55.0 .442 84

88.7 54.4 34.3 200 3 35.2 52.5 .406 86

87.0 54.8 22.2 44 4? 33.4 53.6 .420 79

83.1 52.1 32.0 00 2 32.5 50.6 .381 85

88.2 54.5 33.7 46 3 34.6 53.6 .420 82

82.6 51.7 30.9 50 2 31.4 50.2 .376 84

80.9 51.1 29.8 209 I 30.1 50.8 .384 78

The same uniformity in the quotients of the last column will be

remarked in these two tables, but the average is now 81.8, considerably

higher than the Paris result.

Having thus by the ordinary atmospheric temperature of a Cal-

cutta laboratory in May, brought up my train of observations to

96°; and finding that the depressions so much exceeded those for the

same portion of the series ascertained at Benares by suspending a

wet-bulb thermometer in a vessel of sulphuric acid heated succes-

sively from 90° to 140%, I devised the following method of extending

the dry-air current series to temperatures still more elevated.

In the first place, the gas-pipe of the gasometer was encased for

about four feet of its length in a larger leaden pipe connected with

my small steam engine, so that a current of steam could be main-

tained in the latter during the continuance of the experiments, as

is shewn in fig. 2. Pl. XXI. The extremity of the gas-pipe terminated

in a glass tube holding, first, a dry thermometer, and an inch further

on, the wet-bulb thermometer, inserted through corks.

On letting on the steam, (the two thermometers being stationary at

92°,) one began to rise rapidly, while the other fell very slowly. I

could not, however, succeed in getting the former to rise beyond 190°,

though the steam itself was at 215°. The wet-bulb then stood at 85°.0

and it fell to 80°.4 at 180°:—80 at 170, and 79.5 at 166. The

* See Gleanings, I. 79. I purposely exclude these results in the present

place, lest they should confuse the view ; but they are, nevertheless, valuable in

another sense, as shewing the difference, between the depression in calm air and

in a current.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 408

fluctuations of the dry thermometer being so considerable for a nearly

stationary temperature of evaporation, it was somewhat difficult to

determine the exact terms of coincidence; but the above are selected

as the best from a great many readings recorded in my note book.

In a second experiment with air containing 2;°; ths of aq. ten. at

94°.3 (= 335 ths at 170°) the dry thermometer became stationary at

176°, with the wet at 87°.7.

In a third trial, aq. ten .65 at 94.6 (= #55 at 180) the stationary

points were 180, and 90.

In a fourth, dew-pt. 74.3 (aq. ten. = 4.4 at 190) the same points

were 190 and 92.2—Bar. 29.50.

Barometer Thermom. in Wet-bulb Observed Cen. aq. Corr. Aqueous Quotient

curt. of air. oe ORS depression. tens. for do. tens. att D —»/’

0 ))

29.55 190 85 105.0 0? 0? 1.17 89

180 80.4? 99.6 0 0 1.01 98?

170 80. 90. 0 0 1.00 90

29.50 190 92.2 97.8 044 (-b-7.22. V7 89

180 90. 90. 065 +7.4? 1.12 87

170 87.7 82.3 07 47.72? 1.00 70

Observing the very rapid increase of the evaporating depression

with the rise of the temperature, I perceived that I might safely carry

my experiment to much higher limits than the boiling point of water.

I accordingly next passed the current of dry air through a porcelain

tube maintained at a bright orange heat in a Black’s furnace (fig. 3,

Pl. XXI.) At the further end of the tube a lateral hole was perforated

to admit the bulb. of the thermometer, coated with two-fold muslin

that it might hold a larger supply of moisture. It was necessary to

watch the experiment carefully, as, the moment the water was removed,

a sudden rise took place, which would have otherwise broken the thermo-

meter, while the cloth and cork were instantly charred withthe heat. The

actual temperature of the dry current was then estimated in the following

manner: a thermometer, with the tip of its stem left open, was held

mid-tube in the position previously occupied by the wet-bulb. In a

few minutes the mercury boiled off, shewing that the temperature

somewhat exceeded 656°, A very thin slip of tin was instantly fused :

one of lead was then held within the tube, but it required to be

passed a little in advance of the position of the wet-bulb ere it

melted :—-we may therefore assume the heat of the dry air to have

been under 700°. Two experiments agreed precisely in giving the

temperature of evaporation 145°. With a very rapid current the wet-

bulb thermometer fell to 144°, but probably the air had not then time

to get thoroughly heated in traversing the furnace.

3F 2

404 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juy,

There would have been little satisfaction in carrying this train of

research further, because of the difficulty of measuring the tempera-

ture; otherwise it is evident that the coated thermometer might be

safely trusted in a much greater heat, ere it would itself reach even

the boiling point of water under the ordinary pressure ; an illustration

of which will be hereafter mentioned, but, not being strictly experi-

mental, it cannot be introduced here.

Having however accumulated abundant data for the formation of an

experimental curve, I may proceed to throw them together in the

form of a diagram (fig. 4.), and to compare at once the results with the

various formule that have been proposed by different philoso-

phers.

As, however, each author has employed different algebraic charac-

ters for working out the problem, it will be better first to bring them

to common terms, adopting the most simple expressions: thus let

t = the temperature of the air.

¢’/ = the temperature of a wet-bulb, or of an evaporating surface,

i” — the temperature of saturation, or the dew-point.

then f, f’, and f’ may be conveniently used to represent the force of

aqueous vapour, at t,t’, and 2” respectively. d, the depression, is of

course = ¢—?’, and not absolutely wanted, but it is frequently a more

convenient expression; and D may be also used to distinguish the

maximum depression in dry air, when f’ — 0.

Now supposing the increasing temperatures, ¢, to be represented

by the abscisse of the divided line TT, the observed depressions

may be laid off as ordinates, through the apices of which a dotted

line being drawn, will form an experimental curve of maximum de-

pression, for which a mathematical expression is required.

Next, to collect the materials for the theoretical curves to be entered

in the same diagram, we must take a cursory view of the existing

theories.

Lzsuiiz, who must be regarded as the inventor of the wet-bulb

hygrometer, deserves the precedence in this inquiry. His experi-

ments were conducted by approaching a dry and a wet thermometer

together gradually towards a heated furnace in a closed chamber.

The Professor calculated the hygrometric conditions of the air as its

heat rose ; and on comparing his results, he was led to the conclusion,

that as the caloric necessary to convert water into steam was = 6000

degrees of his instrument, and the capacity of air was 3ths that of

water, the same measure of heat would raise an equal mass of air,

16000 degrees; and consequently that at the temperature of the wet-

bulb, ¢’, air would take up the 16000th part of its weight for each

1836. ] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 405

degree marked by his hygrometer, which is equal to the 2880th part

for each degree of depression by the common thermometer.

Now p (Barometric height) may be substituted for the weight of

the air, and /’ for the saturation weight of vapour at 7’: therefore by

d x 2880 d ; ;

the above data f’ willbe =——39_ = ~gg % (as d is the object

sought) d (or D) — 96 /’, at the pressure 30.

This simple enunciation, making D in the direct ratio of 7’, is unduly

criticized by M. Anprrson in his elaborate treatise on hygrometry

in Brewster’s Encyclopedia ; but while in reality it will be found closely

to agree with the experimental data, and with the subsequent formule

of others, the new expression deduced from ‘‘ the laborious investiga-

tions” of the critic, turns out to be wholly at variance with experiment,

except accidentally at the temperature of the single trial he has him-

self recorded: his formula (omitting the correction for the barometer)

eed 9 eee (36 Zs —f") which, when f” = 0, is convertible into

D=fxX 3 ra

making the depression depend on the tension at ¢, instead of at 7’.

M. Gay Lussac’s memoir should, I fancy, precede Mr. ANDERSON’s.

It was written in 1815, though not published until 1822. The rati-

onale of his formula is explained in these words :—

«Le froid produit (par l’evaporation) est & son maximum lorsque le

calorique absorbé par la vapeur est égal a celui que perd l’air pour

se mettre en équilibre de temperature et de pression avec elle, plus a

celui versé sur la surface évaporante par les corps environnans ; mais

la quantité de ce dernier, lorsque le froid produit n’est que de quelques

degrés, est trés petite en comparaison de l’autre, et peut etre negligée.”

If, therefore, on one side the latent heat of vapour (J) and its density

(5) be combined with its weight (/’) ; these should counterbalance the

weight of air (» —/f’) combined with its capacity (c) and the number

of degrees cooled (D or t—?’) ; thatis, fs 7 = (p—/f’) (t—1’) ¢

or, at 30 inches, f’ X.625 X 960 = 30—/f' & d x.2669 and

Ta Oe

; 30—f ’

depending as beforeon/’. With dry air, the divisor in this equation

should, I imagine, lose —/f altogether, which would elicit the

value of d, = 74.9 f’; a value lower than Lzsuiz’s, but almost exactly

agreeing with M. Gay Lussac’s own experiments detailed in Table I.

Captain Hersert’s formula was founded on the proposition that

“ when the equilibrium or stationary point of the wet-bulb is attained,

406 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Juny,

the indefinitely small decrements of caloric from evaporation are

balanced by the indefinitely small increments arising from conduction

and radiation in the equally small moments of time.’” Now as Messrs.

Dutone and Petit have shewn that the rate at which a body cooled be-

low the temperature of the air (by conduction and radiation) reacquires

heat, is proportional not to the simple difference of temperature, but to

that difference raised to the 1.233 power; hence it should follow that

the amount of evaporation should increase in the same ratio ; ‘“ but,”

says he (page 191), ‘‘ how determine the rate of evaporation? One of

the most striking phenomena of evaporation is the cold produced by it ;

the consequence of the absorption of heat attending the conversion of

water into vapour. This depression of temperature must evidently

be as the evaporation; or rather the momentary depression will be

in proportion to the rapidity of the evaporation. The momentary

depression is equal to the momentary increment of heat which would

take place were the cooling power of evaporation suspended, and the

moistened bulb thermometer allowed to assume the temperature of

the air. -This is known to be as the 1.233 power of the total depres-

sion: the evaporation will then be as the 1.233 of the depression.”

But the evaporation is (according to Dauton), as the tension of the

evaporating surface minus the tension of the vapour in the air (= 0

in dry air:) then finally this tension will be as the 1.233 power of

the depression: or

1,233

dm = OL cae W

m being a co-efficient depending on the latent heat of air and the

ratio of the evaporation to the weight and surface necessary to produce

a fall of one degree ; which Captain Hersert deduced from the experi-

ments made at Benares. The complete formula, at 30 inches, for dry

air becoming

in which L (proportion of mass of water to the vapour required to be

evaporated to produce a fall of 1°) is derived from a table published

in the Oriental Magazine, September 1827; it varies from 898 at 40°

to 1005 at 90° and 1250 at 1800. The divisor 6.056 would require to

be diminished to 5.4 to suit the present experiments, but neither

would the formula then agree so well as the more simple one of

Lesuiz and others. The fact is that the experimental curve is of so

simple a nature, that, any geometric series of moderate divergence may

within limits be accommodated to it by proper co-efficients: thus my

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 407

own formula was merely an empiric one formed to represent the

experimental data of Benares and those of Gay Lussac in the most

ready manner, expressing the depressions in terms of the temperature

of the air: the former increasing geometrically with arithmetical

increments of the latter, I found d = a a3 but this does not cor-

respond at all with the higher depressions now ascertained experi-

mentally, though it suits those of the former series. We may, there-

fore, reject it without further regard: nor need we pause to consider

Brrzezutus’ more simple rule, founded, he says, on the experiments of

Aucust, BonenBERGER and others, viz. that the temperature of the

wet-bulb is always an arithmetical mean between that of the air and

the dew point, or ¢” = 2t’/—t, which, except at certain points of the

scale, is utterly erroneous.

We now come to Professor Apyoun’s formula, which will be found

not to differ essentially from those of Lust or Gay Lussac. It is

S' = f’ — md (at 30 inches pressure) where m is a co-efficient as usual

*« depending upon the specific heat of air, and the caloric of elasticity

of its included vapour,” of which the arithmetical value deduced from

! : 1 °

received data is .01149 or the equivalent vulgar fraction 7 at 50

Farh. Now in the case of extreme dryness assumed for our compa-

rison, f” — 0; therefore d — 87 /f’; an expression entirely agreeing in

form with Lesu1e’s, but rather smaller in amount, and more nearly, as

will be seen, in accordance with the experiments of Tables II and III.

Dr. Hunpsown arrives, from different premises, at nearly the same

method as Professor Apsoun*. He calculates a column of the “ rela-

tive quantities of heat (Q) necessary to supply vapour of saturation to

dry air at each degree of wet-bulb temperature, ¢’, and then finding

from experiment at one point (¢, = 61°) the actual depression (51.124

Apsoun), the depressions at other degrees he assumes to be direct

proportionals, or Q (at 61°): Q’ :: 51.124; D.

Now it is evident that in this equation, as in most of the pre-

ceding, Q (whence D is directly derived) necessarily depends on

the aqueous tension, /’, affected by the indispensable co-efficient

of the latent heat of water, vapour and air, or as Dr. Hupson

1168 —t X 22 f't. Hor

asters from Dersrretz’s values, Q = ._W_ a

448 47

* Phil. Mag. Oct. 1835, p. 257.

t If the theory which makes the sum of the latent and thermometric heat for

gaseous bodies a constant quantity b¢ correct, Dr. Hupson’s expression does

408 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juny,

ordinary temperatures, Q on an average will be found = 50 f

and D is assumed from Apsoun’s experiments —— = 1.9Q;

so that by this formula (at 30 inches,) D = 98 /, nearly; being a

little in excess of LeEsuix’s original formula. This is attributable to

Apjoun’s single experimental depression assumed as the basis of the

whole calculus being somewhat too great. ‘

It cannot be said after the preceding list, that the wet-bulb theory

has. been neglected. On the contrary, it may be rather feared that

the researches of its earliest investigators, particularly those of Lzsiiz

and Gay Lussac, have been neglected ; for it is certain that their

formule are nearly as well adapted to the actual phenomena as any

that have been since suggested. This cannot be more strikingly

exemplified than in the accompanying diagram, (Pl. XXI.) which

has been filled up from the preceding data. The abscisse represent

the temperatures (¢), and the ordinates the maximum depressions in

dry air (D). The experimental determinations are shewn by dots*, and

the principal theoretical curves delineated, are distinguished by the

name of their authors.

The following table also embraces a comparative view for every

ten degrees of temperature, the experimental entries being adapted

by interpolation from the observations before set forth.

not seen open to objection. The volumes of air at different temperature

being as 448 + ¢directly: the densities are as 448 -+¢ inversely; and for

6607

“448 + ¢ X 30

Further, allowing the atomic theory of volumes, the density

625 X22 f

448-- t”

of the latent heat of vapour at ¢ which is 1168 — ¢ (being 956 at 212°); we have

as above the quantity of heat necessary for the vapour of saturation at ¢ =

1168 —t x 22/

448 +. ¢

disputed points, of the capacity of air and vapour for heat : but it may be reason-

ably doubted whether the assumption of the equality of 7 4+- ¢ be a whit more

tenable.

* In the portion of the curve marked ‘‘ PrinsEp’s experiments,’’ both the un-

corrected and the corrected observations are entered ; the latter, distinguished

by a dotted line passing through them, are alone to be attended to. The cor-

rected places of the sulphuric acid experiments have been omitted, because they

are necessarily doubtful. The flewure of Gay Lussac’s curve seems to be the

most suitable to experiment, were its ordinates a little increased. 2

any other pressure

ates

448 bt

the density of air at ¢ will be

Compounding this expression with that

of vapour at ¢ will be=

. The author has steered clear of what he considers the

mometer tr ary ar.

Depressvons of Wet- bulb Ther

| |

MOPPUNOUEL IY J.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 409

Tas. ITI.—Comparison of various formule for the depression of the wet-bulb

thermometer in a current of dry air, with the results of experiment.

eee.) 2 is Calculated depression for Bar. 30 inches.

pets. | s ae se es (Sais emt

Belt ie @ a ia 8 Sip Ey SEIS 2 a

SR ae A iba he eal a Se ey a

se fos) ey Ss jeSeS|Sel is ie 8 leo fs 4 ea

ee eS ei Sh wl) S| ae ee

Bo | os o 5 olFalelan laa Silas] ore sea| Bea

ed s 5 o i AlNRAILMIL S Iw Siw 120 | ale aa

Bo | s > aioe 3 a jha H/2a |e mes Oo &

Be ou o 3 2 tia tl m || S2 5/2 | |< ll gx Il Ho

ES ot ee ZS (SAlP aA lea lSal/8, faa ]ekal £6

rd & o) CO [4 | aa a ae <i om 5

t t D D De D D D D

7 prions, ware As i ESE phate AA

30 20.8} 9.2/G. 11.7 9.2 8.6) 11.0 | -. 10.8] 10.6

40 27.3 12.7/G. 14.9 13.10 12.4; 13.5 | .. 14.0] 13.6

33.9} 16.1/G, 16.4

50 { Sal iecala } 18.6] 16.4 | 16.4] 16.7 |.. | 17.6] 17.1 | 0.1

40.1! 19.9/G, 2

60 { 38.4| 21.614. } 22.9 0.6 | 20.7; 20.0 | 23.4] 21.8] 21.3 —0.3

7of{} 40-0) e718} 127.6] 24.9 | 95.2] 24. | 28.1] 26.4] 25.9 | 0.2

so ; 30.6|P. 32.7| 29.7 ; 29.9] 28.4 | 33.2} 31.3] 30.8 | -+0.2

90 ae 35.5/P. 38.2! 34.6 | 34.77 33.1 | 38.4] 36.5; 36.01 -£0.5

100 ne 40.8|P. 44.0} 40.0 | 39.7] 38.2 | 44.0] 42.2) 41.6 | 0.8

110 ; 47.8/S. 50.0} 46.0 | 44.9} 43.5 | 49.C] 48.3] 47.6 | —0.2?

120 es 54,1|S. 56.4] 52.0 | 50.2] 49.2 | 56.0] 54.5) 53.9 | —0.2?

130 ae 60.9|S. 63.1 58.6 55.6) 55.1 | 62.2) 61.1] 60.5 —0.4?

140 Be 68.2|S. 70.0; 65.5 | 61.0! 61.3 | -. | 68.0; 67.3 | —0.9?

150 ae 74.8/C. Se 72.4 | 66.7) .. we | 7oelt 4c | 0.5

160 a 81.3/H. Hd 79.4 1 92.5) .. -» | 82.3] 81.5] -+-0.2

170 80.0!} 90.0/P. ae 87.0 ; 78.2] 79.8 | 90.4| 89.6] 88.9 —0.1

180 80.4| 99.62!P. ae 94.6 | 84.2! .. -. | 97.2} 96.5 —3.1?

190 85.0} 105.0/P. 107.0} 102. 91.2] 98. |102.0)105.0;104.3 | —0.7

200 . & 109.5 | 96.4} .. e» {112.01 111.1

210 bs SE Be, | ve ae 102.4] .. -- 1120.0} 118.

? 14520) ee LES 627.| 625. $105. |308. (487. |567. 1552.

[The letters in column 4 denote, G. Gay Lussac; A. APJoHN ; P. PRINSEP;

S. experiments tried at Benares, by suspending the wet-bulb thermometer in a half

filled bottle of sulphuric acid ; these have been augmented 10 per cent. on insertion :—

C. and H. Carbonic acid and Hydrogen gas heated in the steam pipe. ]

The last line may be looked upon, in some measure, as the test line

of the various formule: for, the hot current of air from the furnace, we

have seen, barely melted lead and boiled mercury ; its temperature,

therefore, could not much exceed 660 Farh. Let us see what it would be

according to the principal formule depending upon the aqueous tension

at ?’, which, when ¢’ = 145° is 6.53 inches by Datron.

Lesiie’s formula gives 6.53 X 964.145 — 772°

Gay Lussac’s (retaining f’) 6.53 x 95.7 4145 = 770

(omitting—/’indivisor) 6.53 x 782 4+ 145 = 655

Hupson’s formula gives 487 +'145 = 632

Pevso ren i F039 oe -. 653% 87 + 145 = 702

Formula deduced frommy expts.6.53 x 84 + 145 = 697

AnbERSoN’s, HeRBER?’s, and my former formule are too much at

variance at this high point to be worthy of quotation. The rest

410 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury,

agree remarkably well, and it does not materially signify, nor is it

perhaps possible to certify which multiplier is to be preferred. Pro-

fessor Apsoun’s has the merit of coinciding precisely at the tempera-

ture of 190° with my steam experiment; but for the range of lower

and more practical temperatures it is perhaps slightly in excess.

The simpler expression of “ one-eightieth of the depression = the

aqueous tension at ¢”’ would there be nearer the mark; and would

be easier of application. From my own experiments I deduced a

mean of D — 84 f’ with which I constructed the table at the conclu-

sion of this paper, but I must in fairness acknowledge that its prefer-

ence to Professor Apsoun’s rule is nearly evanescent in practice.

§ 2.—Value of depressions less than the maximum, in centesimal hygro-

metric tension.

We are now arrived at the second subject of inquiry, which is in

fact of more practical importance than the first, since it includes every

observation that can be made in an atmosphere never reduced to a

state of absolute siccity.

The simplest condition of the case of intermediate depressions would

be that assumed by Dr. Hunson, viz., that the maximum depression

being divided into 100 parts, each part should indicate one hundredth

of the moisture of saturation at the given temperature, or D: d:: f’:

f—fr

But such a law is not found to prevail in reality: nor is it analo-

gous to the course of nature that it should exist in the case of the

wet-bulb thermometer, when the hair-hygrometer and the law of evapo-

ration require different ratios. It is more consonant with theory*, as

it proves to be with practice, that the tendency to evaporation,

and the cold consequent upon it, should increase in a geometrical

ratio to the dryness of the air.

* The depressions will, ceteris paribus, be less, the more aqueous vapour is

previously contained in the air, because the specific heat of a given volume of

vapour being .529 (or .847%.625) while that of air is .267, the specific heat

of any mixture of the two must exceed that of airalone. But the curvature

imparted to the line of depressions from this cause may easily be shewn to be tri-

fling. Thus at the temperature of 80° where f = 1.00 inch; the capacity of dry

air being c, that of moistened air will be c X p—f’"-+-c’ Xf”; whence, calling e=1,

for saturated air we should have the specific heat 1.053 ; and for half-saturated

air, 1.031; and the depressional degrees at those points will be inversely so

much less than those at the dry extremity of the curve. Were the other agents

easily evaluated, we might through this means verify the specific heat of

aqueous vapour.

Ou e. Sem

> ; } : A

oP 4 ae SR SPY SIRE ate,

J ha a AAs) TT as i 7 ie a

Ls oe *e: / f deve ia)

y ri

, ; ¥ \

BER LE hey ? |

> ti P. 6 é

pre , ‘

an S

rt Some vy ace N Sprite

J ere x ol a a

CO ne ie c

ar :

vert» 1m 06 Peter

4 ’ -

yal

Vol. V.PL.XXIL

Soc.

Jour: As.

or Hygromet

Centestmat Tensions

3\0 “0

€és

degr

Contesimatl Depresstons

observed

Therm

of Wee- bulb

SE 20,

NSSTONS

Complements

Daniels Lapl

I4e------- a ease al ee

eS Andersons Clin cerns

Barometric Pressure of the Atmosphere

pS NN aa of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. a

“Before proceeding to detail the experiments directed to the~eluci-

dation of this point, it may be as well, as we have already become

acquainted with the theoretical expressions of other authors for the

/ maximum, to see how they also bear upon the intermediate depressions.

The formula of M. Gay Lussac makes no provision for aught

but the maximum depression; but the omission may be readily sup-

plied on the same simple principle as has been adopted by Professor

ApJouN ; namely, by the addition of —/”, the aqueous tension at the

dew-point, to /’: thus, by the latter author, in all cases d = 87 f’ —f”.

At first sight, this would seem a simple arithmetical ratio, like Dr.

Hupson’s, but inasmuch as the tensions (f) are themselves in geome-

trical ratio to the temperature (#), the same parabolic curvature will

extend to the centesimal depressions ; or f? —/” will follow some low

power of ¢— 7’.

Captain Hersert’s rule has the same happy intr oduction ‘of a ies

We have therefore but two theoretical enunciations to put to the test

of comparison with experiment: for which purpose I will now bring

forward such evidence as I have accumulated. In this branch of inquiry

~ materials are so numerous in my registers kept at Benares and Calcutta,

that it becomes expedient to gather selected data into groupes adapted

to elucidate various points of the hygrometric scale. Moreover, as unity,

or the maximum depression, varies in amount at each temperature, all

observations must be brought to common centesimal terms before they

ean be compared in the manner which is best adapted to give a quick

perception of the relation of such phenomena; namely, by a diagram, as

‘in Pl. XXII. First, then, to enumerate the data afforded by method 5, or

comparison with the dew-point, of which, in addition to my Benares ob-

servations, I have profited by the presence of an American ice-house on

the banks of the Hughli to collect an accurate series made thrice per

diem in the hottest period of our Calcutta year.

Tas. Iv. —Comparison of intermediate Depressions with aqueous tensions,

ascertained by the dew-point method, at Benares.

‘Namber of obserya- Temp. Wet- Dew- Centesimal | Depres- Comple-. Tabular cente-

tions agreeing close- of air. bulb, point. tension. sion. ment cent. sim. tension 5

lyin their respec- t—t' depn. deduced.

tive particulars. tai t ue fvf j\ord, D-—d

o 0 0 Tee,

7 Obs. mean, 85.0 81.5 79.4 83 S89 84 +01

12 Obs. ditto, 87.5 81.8 78.7 76 5.7./ (83 76 0

12 Obs. ditto, 90.0 80.5 75.7 65 9.5 74 64 —01

6 Obs. ditto, 94.0 81.0 73.2 202 13.0 66 04 +02

6 Obs. ditto, 92.5 75.5 64.5 41 17.0 55 40 +01

13 Obs. ditto, 88.2 67.3 42.9 23 20.9. 43 26 +03

8 Obs, ditto, 92.6 68.3 36.4 16 VES a 20 +04

3G 2 .

412 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury,

Second series, from observations in Caleutta.

fll xsd ne of Sof dads. Alege

6 Obs. openair, 82.1 79.4 78.1 .88 Dell, 92 -88 6

6 Obs. ditto, 84.6 79.9 76.7 .78 4.7 86 80 +02

9 Obs. ditto, 85.6 79.7 75.5 Arh) 5.9 82 75 © 02

15 Obs. ditto, 87.7 80.2 74.6 .66 as 79 70 +04

2 Obs. ditto, 96.0 85.6 78.3 .58 10.4 74 .64 +06

3 Obs. ditto, 93.8 82.9 71.2 49 10.9 71 60 +11?

4 Obs. ditto, 87.3 76.4 67.3 .53 10.9 68 58 +05

3 Obs. ditto, 97.1 80.8 71.8 .45 16.3 59 45 0

6 Obs. ditto, 97.3 73.6 55.5 .26 PRE 41 .26 0

1 Steam pipe, 19.0 92.5 74.3 .04 97.5 6 04 0

3 Vacuum-pipe 92.8 80.8 74.8 .58 12.0 68 57 —O01

Third series, extracted from other observations.

7 Obs. by Her-

beré on ri-

ver Ganges, 91.4 82.1 78.1 66 9.3 74 65 —01

6 Obs. by Ap-

GONy Nes a: 70.0 60.8 54.5 -60 9.2 64 52 —08

4 Obs. ditto,

(heated air,) 93.2 69.0 53.7 -28 24.2 35 22 —06

In the following series the air was dried to two fixed points of

hygrometric tension by means of sulphuric acid, of which the drying

power was known beforehand by the table which I published, from

careful experiment, in my note on the hair hygrometer before alluded

to; but I preferred verifying those determinations by fresh measure-

ment of its barometric tension, in the mode I had adopted to correct

the tables of aqueous tension during the past year ; namely, by mois-

tening a barometer tube with the acid solution, and mounting it in

the ordinary manner. The daily readings registered in my monthly

tables for May-June afforded a more accurate average than a cursory

trial could have yielded; but the result was in perfect accordance

with my former determination*.

Fourth series—current of air partially dried.

Number of observations Temp. Wet- Known Hair |Depres- Comple- Tabular F

in similar circumstances. of air. bulb. cent. Hygrom.| sion. mentcent. centes. &

tension, t—t' dep. tension. mg

t z or, D D—d Load

2 Obs. with gasome- D

ter current, Sulph. ° = °

acid, 1.344, S02 wvoeo 45 75 14.9 58 45 0

2 Obszidittoyin & .ie% 87:2. 7201 44 74 15.1 56 43 —O01

2 Obs. ditto, 90.3 74.4 44 74 15.9 56 43 —O01

1 Obs. ditto, ...... 96.4 79.4 44 74 17.0 57 44 0

WObsedittoy-.--. .- 94.0 76.6 43 73 17.4 54 40 —03

2 Obs. sulph. aeid,

WAG eee coteasey.: S80 > Or, WODee 18 43 23.6 33 -20 +02

1 Obs. ditto, .... 87.7 61.1 18 AS 26.6 24? .12 —06

1 Obs. shorter tube, 84.4 62.0 18 43 22.4 aya elite) 0

2 Obs. brass tube,.. 87.8 64.3 18 42 23.5 30 RZ, —O01

* It will be seen by the Meteorological Register for May 1836, that pure

sulphuric acid caused the barometric column to be higher even than a boiled

tube.

but acts in an opposite sense with acid or water.

capillarity in my registers.

This must be attributed to capillarity, which is negative with mercury,

No allowance is made for

1836. ] of the Wet-bulb Hygromeier. 413

On inspection of the columns of complementry centesimal depres-

sion and centesimal tension in all the foregoing tables, the constant

excess of the former is their first predominate feature; whence the cer-

tain conclusion that the ratio is not direct. But to arrive quicker at a

conclusion of what it may be, let us view the position of the whole series

in diagram 6, Pl. XXII. Here the base line designates the hygrometric

tensions /”—f and the ordinates denote the corresponding centesimal

depressions D—d —D. If amid such a straggling and scattered nebula

it be allowable to trace a normal line, the curve D d will have a pre-

ference over any other. Pursuing its dubious course, it passes through

the two principal test groupes, upon which more dependence ought to

be placed than upon isolated comparisons with the dew-point in still air.

Now this line D d nearly coincides with the curve I suggested in

1829, from my Benares experiments, making H (or f’—/) follow the

ratio of D — d'"°; or, calling D = 100, H = D—d '*° ; in other

100

words, the centesimal tension is as the difference of the actual and the

maximum depression raised to the 1.5th power ; a form obviously very

convenient to be worked by logarithms. This formula has been used

for constructing my general table ; and its errors may be judged of by

the last two columns of the preceding experiments: but it need by no

means supersede the elegant formula d = 87 f/—” when the table

is not at hand. The curve corresponding to the latter formula at 90°

is also entered in fig. 6. At lower temperature it will have less flexure.

On the same diagram I have traced the curve of the hair-hygro-

meter indications, both according to Gay Lussac’s data and those of

my original plate in Branpr’s Journal, on purpose to shew that the

depression curve passes between the two near_the summit :—it was

hence I derived the rule for correction of the rough maximum de-

pressions, (Table I. II.) by taking it in the direct ratio of the hair-

hygrometer indications: and the near accordance of the maxima so

deduced, with the observed maxima in dry air, is an additional testi-

mony in favor of the assumed parabolic curve.

It seems an unmerciful increase of the tax upon my reader’s patience

to extend this train of comparison further: yet it would be hardly

fair to omit any thing that can tend to elucidate the subject or assist

future investigation : I will not, therefore, forego, through a false and

unphilosophical delicacy, the insertion of an abstract I had prepared

for my own satisfaction, of three years’ comparative deductions from

the wet-bulb and hair-hygrometer. It detracts somewhat from its

value, that a constant index error of 4 degrees has to be substracted

from the readings of the hair-hygrometer during the period in ques-

414 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juuy,

tion. This I only discovered on checking all the instruments, as is

my custom, before commencing the present experiments; but the

hygrometer has been untouched during the interval, and as its scale

embraces the 100 degrees with as much sensibility as when it was

constructed in 1825, there can be no hesitation in making the required

correction throughout. The extreme points of this instrument should

indeed be verified at least once in a year ; as the index point is, from

its delicate construction, easily shifted 2 or 3 degrees.

Tas. V.—Comparison of the monthly averages of the Wet-bulb depression,

and the Hair-hygrometer, for 3 years in Calcutta.

At 10 A.M. Tension, At4p. mM. Tension,

Temp. Dep. Hyg. byDep. by Hyg. Temp. Dep. Hyg. by Dep. by Hyg.

t) o

Jan.1833 68.0 8.4 81 100 .61 72.4 VIMG 74 -47 A9

1834 67.5 6.4 83 64 64 71.1 DE 03 o2

1835 67.8 8.0 80 -06 wy 70.7 alsa VAL -42 43

Rebs). 01 474.0 278,2.:82 -60 63 78.7 1207 2 44 44 .49

De TEA Hetsye teh 64 70 77.8 TG Tai 48 .o4

3: 4nd: 6s Oe, 87 70 72 76.6 LO 2 tad. Ay? .52

Mar. 5 (83.009 9-8). od 59 Ary) 89.2 1723.66 “3 43

Diese os hea. eb 67 -68 | 86.7 2D Lb 52 252

3.79.8 8.3 85 2630) iees6D 83.6 13.0. 740 47 44

April, 1 S720 Os OS 79 74 91.6 10.8 79 -60 py s

Pk oia eels tee! 65 67 93.2 Sys, “Dy 99 |

3 84.6 7.6 86 .68 70 88.1 12.7.075 +52 ol

May, .1 87.5 6.1 91 PY A) -80 90.0 8.2 86 67 70

207. 729) 86 -69 .70 94.6 10.9 80 58 -o9

3 86.8 6.5 89 74 76 88.3 7.5 86 79 79

June,. 190.5 6.4 88 75 74 92.8 Sal 82 -70 -66

2798/0) 24S oN -80 -80 87.8 6:1 90 79 78

BP S621 556) 487 76 72 87.4 6.9 85 72 68

July, . 186.3 4.0 91 83 .80 87.9 4.6 90 -83 78

Za00.0) ) 2 del, ol -80 .80 88.0 6.0 90 76 78

2) ite Ay/ eee lel etiets) 77 74 85.3 4.8 88 -80 74

Aug... 1 85.0 4.1 92 -82 -82 86.8 4.9 89 79d 76

PPO els sO) -82 82 86.7 By) Sh 78 -80

3 84.0 4.0 92 ,82 -82 85.0 ATS aeOW 81 80

Sept.. 1 86.3 4.4 91 76 -80 88.3 5.5 88 -82 74

2 S5s9u e49) 5 292 Hoa) ey 86.4 59 91 76 80

Pot Oeste Ott O)k -80 .80 85.0 6.8 89 7AL 76

Oct se IV85r2)) Hrb2h 87. 76 72 86.8 7.6 83 .69 69

2 S29) 4.0 oe 82 -84 83.9 5.0 91 wie) 80

lo) So.0) Ges Bod, adil «2 85.1 9.3 82 61 63

INov.n La 95 6.9 84 -69 -66 82.1 Oa, By / 54

ZAI Led BGO .66 -68 79.4 10-178 00 56

oy Han 9 ars koh} 64 68 HAS) 10.0 79 59 Df

Decry: L779 5-85 189 70 68 74.3 7.2 82 .68 63

2 72:4 6a 987 .67 72 75.7 9.0 81 “By 61

3 69.8 6.1 84 68 66 72.0 igs) 7s: 090 56

SS a ns

Means, 81.2 6.1 86.8 shit 72, | 83.8 8.9 81,5. .63 -63

The actual tension of vapour in inches, found by multiplying Datton’s

maximun tension of vapour at ¢ by the percentage here given, is,

1836.) of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 415

at 81°, 2= 1.040 x .71 = .738 ; at 83°.8=1.128 X.63=. 711 (or.716 at 81°.2)

being at the two periods of the day, on an average, very nearly

equal ; though, relatively, the air is much drier in the afternoon.

A similar comparison to that afforded by the above table would

have been published with my journals for 1825-6 in the Philosophical

Transactions for 1827, had the registers been allowed to stand as

they were; but the columns of aqueous tension were struck out,

although from the elaborate care I had taken in valuing the degrees

of my hair hygrometer they were entitled to some reliance. It is,

however, not worth while to republish them, as the wet-bulb instru-

ment was then situated outside and the hair hygrometer inside the

house*, and the two columns are not strictly comparable. One little

table, however, deduced from four years’ daily experiments at Benares,

which was also suppressed at home, I think likely to prove useful, while

it bears directly on the wet-bulb theory, and exemplifies the truth of

the assumption of its immediate dependence on f/’. This table shews

the actual evaporation in depth per month, as measured by a small

evaporameter suspended in the open air, for the opposite extremes of

the year. The instrument is described in the fifteenth volume of the

Asiatic Researches. I have collected on the left hand the observed

quantities, and have now inserted on the right the theoretical num-

bers which should express the ratio of evaporation. The results are

even more satisfactory than could have been anticipated; and lead to

the following very simple rule to find the amount of evaporation

roughly in inches per diem. ‘‘ Multiply the aqueous tension at the

wet-bulb temperature by the observed depression in degrees, and

divide by 34.’’ Omitting the latter operation, the product will express

in round terms the evaporation per month in the open air, or in a

moderate breeze.

Tas. VI.—Rate of Evaporation and simultaneous depression observed at Benares.

Months. Year. Temp. Wet- ODepres- Obsvd.Eva- Ditto |}, 4.- Depres- Calculated

ofair. bulb. sion. poration per {32% sion x daily eva.

t. t d permonth diem |S & tension, poration,

° Fy 3 inches, inch. |S 33 aXf. aX fe

April 1823 88.0 68.9 19.3 13.9 ~ 34

aie sade) 71.8) 91.3 °° 11.9

Ma 1825 92.3 74.2 18.1 14.7

ys 1826 90.4 69.8 20.7 15.1

Means 91.2 70.9 20.3 13.9 0.463 |0.748 15.18 0.447

182Z58079.8)r 462.0 17.8

March, 1824 81.4 66.5 13.8

—"

Lo 2)

iS)

“I

—_

nan

“N

—_

ok DCOO

aonn

Means 79.4 64. 1553 7.3 0.243|0.599 8.16 0.240

* The Calcutta Oriental Magazine, 1827, contains the whole paper.

416 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Juxy,

1823 80.5 78.2 2.3 2.3 Sf’. dxf! dxf’

July and} 1824 85.6 82.1 3.5 2.6 are

August, |) 1825 86.9 81.3 4.6 4.4

1826 84.4 80.8 3.6 3.6

Means 84.4 80.6 3.8 3.2 0.107|1.020 3.88 0.114

1823\60:. 55.7° 4.44 2.3

edge 1824 61.8 56.6 5.2 4.0

Jandary): \ 2825:003.5) M8:3 65,2 5.6

Y> [1826 63.8 54.9 8.9 3.1

Means 62.3 56.3 6.0 2.5 0.085|0.462 2.77 0.081

per. an

The if 65.6

twelve

Means 78.9 70.1 8.7 64.4 0.179/0.729 6.34 0.186

permonth 5.37

I have, as yet, had no opportunity of applying the principle ascer-

tained from this table, to the circumstances of other places*.

§ 3.—Influence of the Barometer on the Wet-bulb depression.

All philosophers agree in rating the influence of atmospheric pres-

sure on depression as inversely proportional to the height of the

barometer ; so that when the depression under a pressure of 30

inches is known, it may immediately found for any other pressure by

multiplying d into p being the observed height of the barometer,

That the evaporation increases with diminution of pressure nearly

in the above ratio, has been proved by various experiments; and it

might confidently be anticipated, from the necessary connection be-

tween the evaporation and the refrigeration, (as exemplified in the

concluding table of my last section,) that the same law would prevail

in the depressions: but the only two experiments directed to this

point that I am acquainted with, lead to an opposite conclusion.

These were cited in my former paper: but as they are not accessible to

many readers, I will here repeat them. Mr. Daniexu’s experiment

will be found in Jour. Roy. Inst. XVII., and Mr. AnpERson’s in

Brewster's Cyclopedia, Art. Hygrometry.

Barometric Evaporation | Depression | Incre- { Depression | Incre-

Daniell. by Daniell. by Anderson.

30.4 . 1,24 9 0 5 i)

15.2 3 2.97 12 +3 9 +4

7.6 z 5.68 15 +3 13 +4

3.8 8 9:12 18 +3 18 +5

1.9 1é 15.92 21 +3

9 = 29.33 24.5 3.5

5 3 50.74 26 #15

* The tables now published by the astronomer at Madras will afford good

data; but his mode of measurement must be first known, as his evaporations

seem double of my own.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 417

Now in these instances the evaporation certainly followed the in-

verse pressure law ; but the depression was made to receive only a con-

stant arithmetical increment for each geometrical decrement of the

pressure ; in accordance with which I assumed that the proper correc-

tion for variation of pressure should be d ye rather than d22 ; and

even this would require a different co-efficient to make it suit fe two

cases quoted above. Under such an uncertainty as to the real amount

of this important correction, I was induced to direct a fresh series of

experiments to this particular object ; and as my results differ greatly

from what has preceded, it is incumbent on me to describe my process

a little in detail.

I first prescribed to myself the necessity of working with a current

of air as similar as might be to that of the maximum series, as with-

out such a precaution it would be impossible to ensure the permanent

hygrometric status of the air in contact with the wet-bulb. The

bell glass of an air-pump, under which I imagine the experiments of

Danistt and Anperson to have been conducted, could not possibly

fulfil this indispensable condition, since a partial halo of moisture

would encircle the bulb of their thermometer ;—nor do they appear

to have used a hair hygrometer to inform them how far this might be

the case. Mr. Danieux it is true had a dew-point instrument fitted

into the side of the glass receiver, but for slight aqueous tension this

instrument becomes wholly useless. The extent to which his air was

dried can be calculated pretty well from his own datum that the

depression at 50° was nine degrees, which by my table would indicate

-263 — (9 — 87

pte ade

in the latter case requiring a cold of 8 degrees, and in the former of

16, below the freezing point to produce deposition.

But to return to my own experiments :—

In place of the short open glass tube connected with the gaso-

meter and glass balloon in which the wet-bulb was before exposed

to the current of air, (fig. 1,) a thin horizontal brass tube (fig. 7)

was substituted, having two lateral apertures for the admission

through corks, air-tight, of the dry and wet thermometer bulbs

(¢, ?’). From the same brass tube descended a glass barometer tube

(p) into a reservoir of mercury, similar to the gage of an air-

pump, for marking the actual pressure close to the thermometers.

The other end of the tube was conducted by a flexible pipe F to the

receiver of an air-pump, where a continual vacuum could be kept up

by pumping without intermission during the course of an experiment.

centesimal tension *30: or by Arsounn’s formula

418 Experimental Researches on the Depressions {Juuy,

and by manceuvring the stopcocks (k, k’) at the two ends of the brass

tube, the pressure could be maintained at any point, and the draft of

air regulated until the temperature of the wet-bulb had been satisfac-

torily ascertained.

Finding that the labour of working the pump was rather irksome

in a climate of 95°, I afterwards availed myself of the vacuum engine

of the coining-press room in the Mint to relieve me from this duty.

In the pipe leading from the twelve recoil-pumps of the presses a

vacuum of about (or rather 30—27) inches is constantly maintained

by the steam engine, so that by adapting the tube F to this with a

stopcock, I was enabled to regulate the pressure, and prolong each

interval with the utmost ease and comfort.

It will be seen from, the table of experiments below, that by em-

ploying a current of dry air the freezing point was readily attained

under a pressure of 74 inches, while the dry thermometer, only one

inch from it, marked 92°: whereas all who have tried Lusuin’s pro-

cess for freezing have found it exceedingly difficult in the hot weather

of this country to produce ice with a vacuum nearly perfect. The

reason has been already explained: in the latter case the partially

moist atmosphere arrests the progress of refrigeration ; whereas in the

latter, the vapour rising from the evaporating surface is continually

removed ;—it is, in fact, like sitting under a punkah or without it, an

illustration that requires no comment to an Indian reader! Of such

influence is the motion of the air in the experiment, that, as will be

seen presently, a cold much below the freezing point may be attained

under a pressure of 43 inches, with common air at 92° containing six-

tenths of its vapour of saturation (dew-point = 75°) and without the

aid of sulphuric acid, or any other artificial means of previously drying

it! This unexpected result opens a wide field for speculation as to the

possibility of modifying the apparatus of Lusuie for the artificial

production of ice; and I hope, when leisure permits, to resume the

thread of this collateral and highly interesting discovery. The nature

of the problem teaches us @ priori, that if a temperature of 20° can be

attained under a pressure of 43 inches, the cold at two inches ought

to be many degrees below zero of Fahrenheit’s scale !

Out of four experiments made with the air-pump, and eight with the

Mint vacuum engine, it will be sufficient, after quoting the numerical

results of the whole, and referring to the accompanying diagram

(Pl. XXII. fig. 10.) for a comprehensive view of their general bearing,

to select two or three of the most regular examples for analytical dis-

cussion.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 419

Tas. VII.—Depressions under diminished pressure.

Temp.| Hyg. |Temp. of wet-bulb, under a pressure of

of air.) tens. |20. 22.5 15. 17.5 6.0. 5.5 5.0 in.

1. Expt. with air pump, air ° oO 0 oO

dried by Sul. Ac. 1.48, {| g4.0 .18 161.0) .. |56-0| 48.

. Ditto, corks fitted closer, | 94.7 Byictee ||) ok lO eee

. Brass tube, better fitted, | 94.4 | .18 |62.0/57.0/50-3} 32.0

. Ditto, careful expt... .... | 87.8 .18 (64.3/55.0149-0] 35.0

. Common air, in Mint vac.

tube; dew-point 79°.5,| 88.5 | .75 |81.3/76.4'69.0| 48.0 | .. | 32.0

. Partially dried, hair- wid

in balloon av. 34, 5 92.1 -12 |64.2/60.1/52.9] 31.0 | 24.0] 20.0} 18.0

- Nearly dry air ; hye. 1°,.. | 91.0 | .00 |58.3/54.4/48.7| 20.0 | 20.4) 18.5

75. Partly dried ; hyg. Oe Onl s0 BOS sce NOS su|DS. 91. ee 25.7| 20.0

93.2

92.0

i=) on om & bd

8. Hygrom. variable, ay. 20.. 05 |79.1\75.1|59.€| .. a

9. Dry air; hyg. 2°, .01 '59.563.2 56.3] 38.5 | .. | 26.4] 20.0

The last experiment is evidently affected with some accidental

error, since the depression is Jess at 22.5 inches than at 30. I ima-

gine the external air was admitted through an unobserved leakage of

the tube, or a drop of water may have fallen in the tube, and thus

moistened the air before it reached the wet-bulb.

I now detached the gasometer and balloon, and admitted the air of

the room directly into the tube at stopcock & (fig. 8) keeping up a pro-

longed current at intervals of every two inches of pressure from 30.0

upwards to 5 inches, and then descending in the same manner : taking

care to wet the thermometer from time to time as its water evaporat-

ed. In ascending the scale I regulated the pressures in the barome-

ter-gage principally by manceuvring the stopcock (A’) next to the

vacuum pipe, the orifice at & remaining constant: whereas in de-

scending, I allowed #’ to remain untouched while I brought the

gage to the desired point by gradually opening the outer stop-

cock k.

The effect of this will be understood on viewing the apparatus: the

current of air was considerably stronger in the last case than in the

first, and in consequence the depressions are somewhat greater. To

this it must be added, that in the ascending scale the depressions

will tend to lag below their full amount, while in descending they will

err in an opposite sense ; all of which is well exhibited in dotted curves

numbered 10, 11 ofdiagram 10. The mean of the two series (marked

by a plain line on the diagram) may be assumed as a good foundation

for the analysis we have proposed.

Experiments 10 and 11, on depressions under diminished pressure.

Temperature of the room 92°.2 ; dew-point 74°.8 = centesimal tension .58 ~

Hair-hygrometer, 79 = ditto o7

3 H 2

420 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Suty,

rom. i Ties. Descending series.| & 5) £2 Calcu-

ee Se Wet Wet- * Temp. a a | a5 Mean | lated

sure | of air. |bulb. bulb. bulb. bulb. | ofair.| 23 {| 2§ depres- depres-

inches. =. ae sion ob-| sion. 30

1 hg 3 4 Az {lag | served-| dX p

cn vie aeil Wim ato ae re Lan | °

30 92.7 |S0.4 82.0 rewetted) 80.5 93.0 } 11.7| 13.0] 12.0 12.

98 79.7 80.8 79.2 12.6] 14.3] 13.1 12.9

26 92.9 |78.0 80.0 rewetted 76.8 79.2 13.9] 15-5| 14.6 14.0

D4 77.8 74.7 75.2 15.0} 18.0} 17.0 15.0

22 92.7 75.4 (rewetted 72.4 73.8 16.4, 20.4. 19.1 16.4

20 73.0 70.2 19.8| 23.3] 21.5 18.0

18 70.3 66.9 22.5! 26.6| 24.5 20.0

16 67.7 64.2 24.2| 29.3| 26.8 | 22.5

14 93.0 64.0 61.2 29. | 32.3 30.6 35.7

12 | 60.0 57.4 33. | 36.1{ 34.5 20.0

10 54.9 (rewetted 54.6 53.8 | 93.2 | 38.1/39.7| 38.9 ; 36.0

8 48.3 47.3 93,2 | 44.7| 45.9] 45.3 45,0

6 38.0 38.8 92.5 | 55.0| 53.7! 53.1 60.0

5 31.0 30.8 91.6 | 62.0; 60.8] 61.4 72.0

4.4 rewetted 23.7 89.8 | 66.1] 66.1 81.8

At the first glance towards the final columns of this table, one might

at first be led to exclaim, upon the wonderful accordance between theo-

ry and fact! The ascending series, especially, agrees exactly with the

calculation in several points, and does not diverge materially until the

pressure falls to six inches, far beyond the reach of any likely contin-

gency within our observance.

But allthis seemingly agreeable coincidence is, in a measure, delusory.

The effect is compounded of two different influences—1, the rarefac-

tion; and 2, the diminution of humidity which is consequent thereon.

We know from our second section of experiments how to appreciate

this latter disturbing cause, and so isolate the reduction of tempera-

ture due to the diminished pressure alone; but the prior experiments

give us an opportunity of estimating it in a more direct manner.

Thus, taking experiment 7, we have the following data: the temper-

ature being 91°. Fahrenheit. The fourth column contains the hypo-

thetical depressions on the supposition of the inverse-pressure ratio.

Barometrical Depression Increment Theoretical Increment Calculat-

pressure in dry air. observed. depression. d+ 30 q ed co-effi-

inches. D p—d POSES Pp cient.

° A p ri) A—6

30.0 32.7 32.7

27.5 35.6 + 2.9 43.6 + 10.9 27

15.0 42.3 + 9.6 65.4 + 32.7 29

7.5 61.0 + 28.3 130.8 + 95.1 -29

6.0 70.8 + 30.1 165.5 + 132.8 23

5.5 72.1 + 39.4 176.5 + 143.8 .27

5.4 72.8 + 40.1 179.8 + 147.1 27

The rate of increment observed, it will be remarked, here invariably

falls short of the calculated rate in the fifth column, but it bears al-

ways the same proportion to it, about one-third; as shewn in the

sixth column : therefore in this example the law of the inverse pres-

sures holds good relatively, but it requires a co-efficient to reduce the

absolute amount. Thus, the maximum depression in dry air at any

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 421

pressure will, by the experiment, be equal to d + .27 (@ a)

instead of d + ( d = —d ) (or simply d="). I will not seek to en-

quire the cause of this deviation from theory ; or whether it be pecu-

liar to the form of apparatus I employed; or whether the effect will

be constant under all circumstances :—I will merely suggest that the

supply of heat from extraneous sources—the brass tube (only half inch

diam.) radiation, &c. could not fail to reduce the cooling effect of the

mere current of air; and here we have the measure of their united

disturbing power, which it is satisfactory to find constant throughout.

Let us now see whether the same constancy can be traced in the more

elaborate experiment with common air (10-11.) The first thing neces-

sary is to calculate the percentage of moisture for each step. Now, as

under 30 inches the centesimal tension was found to be ‘58 by the

dew-point, and as no source of fresh supply was at hand, the tension

at any other pressure should be directly as the pressure, or inversely as

the volume ; since it is evident that a double space, for instance, will

require twice as much aqueous vapour to bring it to a given state of

humidity ; the aqueous tension, therefore,will be ‘58 x a for this

series of experiments. Again, from our table of depressions, (from the

diagram or from the formula) can be obtained, with the reading at

these variable states of humidity, the depression either in dry air or

in air of the initial tension ‘58. I have, in fact, given both in the fel-

lowing table, and have set in the three last columns the calculated de-

pressions by the expression just found of d+ .27 a d

Tas. VIII.—Experiment 10-11, reduced to a constant hygrometric state.

Barometer. | Centes. ;Tabular , Observ-|Deduced} Deduced

aqueous |centesi- | ed de- | depres- jdepression {Cajculated | Calculated |Calculated

calc. {pression [variable |aq. ten.| air, D = | for varia- |for aq. tens. 'for dry air.

H x 2_|corres- faq. tens.}.58 ps dx 100 ble aq. tens. 58

He dt 30 oqine e dx > T fof second

9 ° ° °

30 -58 32 12.0 | 12.0 12.0 37.5

28 .54 34 13.1 12.2 12.3 38.2

26 .50 37 | 14.6 |} 12.5 12.6 39.1

24 -46 42 A i by 3 12.8 40.1

22 42 44 TOL) ses 13.3 41.4

20 39 47 21.5 | 14.7 BIA 42.8

18 235 50 24.5 | 15.7 14.3 44.6

16 rst 54 26.8 | 15.9 15.0 47.4

14 2d, 58 30.6 | 16.9 15.9 49.7

12 23 62 34.5 | 17.8 17.1 53.5

10 19 66 38.9 18.6 18.7 58.9

8 15 72 45.3 | 20.2 19.4 69.6

6 1l 76 Job | 22:3 25.7 80.4

5 096 78 61.4 | 25.1 29.1 91.0

4.4 |.085 | 79 | 66.1 | 26.7

429 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Jury,

‘With exception of the four lowermost entries, the three middle (or

observed) columns of this table accord wonderfully well with the three

last, which are calculated by the formula above given multiplied into

T, (the tabular cent. dep.) ; which is variable in the first of them,

(that of the experiments;) is equal to ‘32 for the case of humidity

‘58; and is of course = O for the final case, of extreme dryness.

Were we to suppose that the dryness of the air did not mount higher

than -18 (second column) from some unperceived cause, the calculated

depressions would suit equally well from beginning to end; and it

must be remembered that any disturbing force will be much more

felt in the low pressures. Moreover, it can hardly be expected that the

depression should continue to follow the same law, after the evaporat-

ing surface has congealed into ice. Had the ascending series of de-

pressions only been used, instead of the mean, the accordance would

have been greater towards the middle of the scale.

It is hardly necessary to analyse any more of the present series,

after ascertaining that the same co-efficient is equally applicable to

dry and wet air. We may therefore proceed at once to the conclu-

sion, that the depression of the wet-bulb thermometer, ceteris paribus,

varies inversely as the barometric pressure, the actual variation being for

every case twenty-seven hundredths of the calculated variation.

§ 4.—Depressions under augmented barometric pressure.

It would perhaps have been better to have preceded the last enun-

ciation, by a description of the experiments included under this head,

since they obviously form part of the same series, and must be go-

verned by the same law. They need not detain us many minutes.

The modification of apparatus now employed is depicted in fig. 9.

Between the gasometer and the brass tube furnished with the two

thermometers was introduced a condensed air blow-pipe; while at

the other extremity near the discharge cock k’, was adapted a syphon

barometer capable of shewing an increase of pressure up to + 12 inches.

By keeping up the action of the pump with the discharge cock more

or less open, a current of condensed air could be maintained at any

pressure until the readings of the wet-bulb became stationary; for, as

before stated, it was upon the current only that reliance could be

placed; and my endeavour was always to maintain the same rapidity

in the passage of the air, although small variations in this particular

do not, and ought not, to produce any sensible error.

Not having used a hygrometer in this series, I trust to the de-

pression itself (at 30 inches) to supply the datum of the humidity ;

and here of course, under condensation, the moisture increases directly

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 423

with the pressure. On the diagram this is very conspicuous in figs.

13, 14; and asthe air approaches dryness, the line formed will be seen

amalgamating with the curvature of the former experiments.

Tas. IX.—Depressions under increased pressure.

Barom. { First Experiment. | Second Experiment., Third Experiment. ) Fourth experiment.

Mres=)*) | .2 2 ess

_sure.

inches,

Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres- Hum-|Temp. Depres-Hum-

air. sion. idity,| air. sion. idity.| air. sion. idity.} air. sion. idity.

Oo oO o o £0) oO

30 93.5 23.5 .24] 93.5 23.7 .24) 85.0 24.0 .15] 86.4 26.8 .10

33 sss 93.6 20.9 .26 — —_—

36 PA SPL itl a fetere amet) 14.0 .18 22.8 .12

42 19.5 .34] 94.3 15.5 .34}) 85.2 11.4 .21 20.7 14

In the last experiment the air was maintained for along time at

each pressure, whence its results are perhaps entitled to greater con-

fidence than the rest. The direct theoretical depressions, d x mS

would be 26°.8, 22°.3, and 19°.1, which corrected by the co-efficient

before found, would become 26°.8, 25°.6, and 24°.7; these again

would have to be diminished for the altered humidity to 26.8, 24:5,

and 22.8; still, however, differing materially from the experiment,

which I attribute to the difficulty of keeping up a sufficient draft at

the high pressures, in consequence of which the humidity is not fairly

estimated.

If we examine the first experiment we shall have,

The direct geometrical depressions,.............. 23.5 19.6 16.8

These modified by co-efficient, .27..;....... ...- 23.5 22.4 21.7

Corrected to the incipient state of humidity will be, 23.5 20.0 18.1

The observed depressions being in this case,...... 23.5 21.5 19.5

nearly midway between the modified and the corrected numbers, and

as much above the latter as they were below them in experiment

4,—s0 it will be not unreasonable to conclude that our formula would

hold good for augmented depressions, if proper care were taken in

conducting them.

We have now examined every case of depression that can be ex-

perienced in common air, and we may finally sum up this lengthy

investigation by uniting the members of the formula, that it may com-

prehend both changes of humidity and changes of atmospheric pres-

sure thus :—

d= 84f/-—f" + .27 i nu a);

The latter member of the equation may be converted into a table

of multipliers for heights of the barometer other than 30, which will

leave the table I have appended to the present paper applicable to all

424 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juny,

circumstances that can occur. The rule for its use will be given in

the proper place.

§ 5.—Depression of wet-bulb in other gaseous media.

It has been seen that the theory of the wet-bulb thermometer is

entirely based. on the relation of the specific heats, or capacities, of

water, of vapour, and of air. It may be made therefore to furnish an

unexceptionable and easy method of solving the much-contested ques-

tion of the relative capacity of different gaseous fluids, by substituting

any of the latter for common air in the experimental determination of

the depression. |

By Gay Lussac’s formula we perceive that the depression varies

precisely in the inverse ratio of the air’s capacity, ¢ (see p. 405.)

Aprsoun’s. formula is based on the same datum ; thus the specific heat of

vapour at 50° being 1129 (= 967 - 212 — 50) ; that of water being

1; and that of airc = 0.267; “ one part of air in cooling through d

degrees will raise the temperature of 0.267 part water through the

same number, and will consequently be adequate to vaporize a quan-

tity of water represented by oer a Now, as *267 d (=e d) isa

constant quantity, any change in the value of c must affect d in an

opposite or inverse sense, that is c’ = Ze d' being the depression ob-

served in other medium than common air.

As most likely to exhibit any difference of specific heat, and without

reference to any prior determination of the question, I selected two

gases, hydrogen and carbonic acid, as far at variance in essential points

as could be wished, and proceeded with them exactly as had been

done with ordinary air. On account of the mode of preparing the

two gases by distillation through a water-trough, they entered the

gasometer surcharged with moisture: and, as noticed below, even

after being well dried by the acid in the chamber, they took up mois-

ture from the discharge-pipe on their passage to the wet-bulb. I

could only approximatively remedy this evil by immediately filling in

common air, and finding how much moisture the latter also absorbed

in its passage. The error was of course less, if at all, perceptible at

the high temperatures, and in a fresh series of experiments it was

obviated by the introduction of my tell-tale hair hygrometer.

Wishing to save the gas, it was made to pass into another gasome-

ter instead of into the open air; on which account the current both of

hydrogen and of carbonic acid passed more slowly through the steam-

heated tube than the gir had done, and their temperature only rose

to 160 and 170, in lieu of 180 and even 190 as at first. Here follow

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 425

the readings which were considered as coincident, but, as before, there

was difficulty in keeping the dry thermometer stationary,

Tas. X.—Depressions with Hydrogen gas. First Series.

Tabular de-

Therm. Wet- Depres- Hygro- Tension pression in Ratio.

inair. bulb. sion. meter. centesimal. dry air.

o o co) d—D

1. Through steam pipe, 92.0 67.8 24.2 — = 37.1

2. Ditto, steam on, .. 160.0 83.2 76.8 — _ nearly dry. 81.5 .94

3. Ditto, GEO, a0... 137.0 76.4. 60.6 — ditto. 65.3 93

4. Ditto, cold, ...... 93.8 67.5 26.3 44°? SE: 38.1

The hydrogen of the gasometer in the first two experiments was

supposed to be dry, but it was found that it acquired moisture in pass-

ing through the pipes, which had been moistened by the distillation

of the hydrogen ; the amount of error was estimated by filling com-

mon air in, and finding how much its depression differed from the full

rate. The gas of 3, and 4 was passed out into a vessel containing

the hair hygrometer ; but still no great confidence was placed in the

series, and on two subsequent days fresh gas was prepared.

Second Series.

5. Protracted current of hydrogen gas,.. 85.4 60.0 25.4

6. Common air treated exactly in the

RMUOG RS ATUI CTS ar, crc e)o\ci cay cig miele abaere'e\ ee 90.6 59.0 31.6 = 29.1] at 85°4

Ratio of 29°.1 to 25°.4 as 1.00 to .87

This was still unsatisfactory, as there was no mode of testing the

hygrometric state of the gas: I now therefore fitted the glass cham-

ber enclosing the hair hygrometer, (as in fig. 1) and took the follow-

ing readings after intervals of a day each.

Calc. Maxim. Depress;

i in

in Ratio.

t v d h Hydrogen. Atm. air. d-——D

7. Hydrogen, current, 87.8 60.5 27.3 8 29.5 34.8 84

8. Ditto, fulldraft,.. 88.0 59.7 28.3 5 29.8 34.9 .86

Sewitto, ditto, ...... 84.0 57.1 26.9 4 28.0 32.8 85

10. Ditto, ditto,...... 88.5 58.5 30.0 4 31.2 35.2 88

11. Common air. .... 87.0 54.8 32.2 4? 33.5 34.4

PZULO, 2.2%. aestu Ooel law) ae 2 32.6 32.4

Still a fourth series was thought necessary ; and in this all access

of moisture to the tubes being prevented by passing the gas over

sulphuric acid before it entered the gasometer, and leaving it for a

week to dry thoroughly, the hair hygrometer marked extreme siccity :

precaution was also taken to cool the wet-bulb with ice below the de-

pression point, before inserting it in the tube.

Fourth Series, Hydrogen gas.

t t’ d h. D d—pD

Moa dratt,|7..c S6u% 15835)" 28.2 0 34.2 82

Ae Ditto. 2 acs 8 San 7.402760 0 33.4 83

inet PIttO,* <d'scies 82.8 56.0 *26.3 0 32.2 81

426 | Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juny,

This fourth series, on which every care was bestowed to ensure accu-

racy, confirming as it does the ratio of the prior experiments, certainly

tends to prove that hydrogen produces a less depression than common

air in the proportion of 82 to 100 ; and consequently that the specific

heat of this gas for equal volumes should be 1.22, that of atmospheric

air being 1.

Tas. XI.—Depressions with Carbonie Acid.

Temp. Wet- Depres- Hair Tabular

air. _ bulb. sion. hygr. - depression Ratio,

t th d for dry air. d

1. Current through © o ° D D

steam pipe,.. 91.7 66.2 25.5 (acquired moisture .20 ?) 36.3 -

2. Do. steam on, 161.0 85.0 76.0 Nearly dry ? 82.2 94

3, Do.quicker draft,160.0 81.5 78.5 ditto, 81.5

4. Common air, .. 86.8 60.8 26.0 34.3

The experiment with common air shews that the passages still im-

parted moisture to the amount of full ‘12, and therefore vitiated the

result as with hydrogen. The trial was renewed with the precaution

of employing the hair hygrometer. & d D dp

5. Short glass tube, 83.6 55.0 28.6 5 Corrected 30.1 32.6 .92

6. Ditto, ovate 45 BOse O0sg OL. oo fOr ary: 32.0 34.0 .94

7. Ditto, ........ 83.7 53.6 30.0 3. air or 31.0) 0 aesgay 395

ee ee

8. Common air,..... 88.2) 04.5) 33.7). 3. Max. dep, 34.89) 0-0

Here again the depression in carbonic acid gas is proved to be

94 hundredths of that in common air, whence the specific heat of

this gas should turn out 1.06, air being 1.00. A third series was taken :

Sa Well dried) Goe7 9 00-2) oa om 10 02.0"). dosoee Ol

OP Dittoy ee sO 408) 5. Leo gee 0.5 29.4% « 33.2) — 190

LO: Dittojont.ai- ive Oabs 57.25, 52.4. 1 32.8 "30.8, 90

In the last three experiments which were made with the precautions

Thave described, in the hydrogen experiments, (13-15) a little of the

latter gas was mixed (35th) with the carbonic acid; while in experi-

ments 6, 7, common air may have been present to the same extent.

We may therefore assume the maximum depression in dry carbonic

acid to be about 92 per cent. of that in atmospheric air; and its spec.

heat = 1-087.

Although these unexpected results are supported by their great

uniformity, I still feel hesitation in inviting for them the implicit con-

fidence of chemists, in opposition to the very opposite conclusions of

other experimenters. Had the specific heat of one gas proved in de-

fect and the other in excess, it would have been more consonant with

the analogy of their specific gravity,—but that two gases so strongly

contrasted, should both err, on the same side, I own to be plausible

evidence against me. Still I hardly think that the § per cent. discre-

pancy in the carbonic acid experiments is within the limits of experi-

mental error ; and the 18 per cent. of the hydrogen is certainly more

than I am willing to allow to be attributable to such a cause.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 427

At any rate it must be conceded that the method itself possesses

superior facility to the process of De 1a RocueE and Brrarp*, also fol-

lowed by Haycrarrtf, or to that more recently followed by my friends

Messrs. F. Marcer and Dr xa Rive of Geneva}.

It may be as well to recite the conflicting values arrived at by

these and other authors, including M. Dutone§, whose mode of in-

vestigation by the velocity of sonorous vibrations in the respective

gases, was most ingenious in itself, and perhaps better entitled to

respect than any other:

Tas. XII.— Specific heat of gaseous bodies by volume, under constant pressure.

By De la Roche By Haycraft By Marcet By DuLong By wet-bulb

and Berard. and De la Rive. - | depression.

Atmospheric air, 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

Oxveen.! 3)... 976 1,000 1,000 1,000 _

Hydrogen, .... 903 . 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,220

itrogen,.. ..... 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 —

Carbonic Acid, . 1,258 1,000 1,000 1,175 1,087

Carburett. Hyd. 1,553 1,060 1,000 1,531 =

Carbonic oxide, ‘1,034 — 1,000 1,000 —

Nitrous gas, .. 1,350 — 1,000 1,160 —

Notwithstanding the tendency of my own experiments, every one

must feel a prejudice on a view of this table in favor of the conclusions

of the English and the Genevese philosophers ; namely, that all

the gases have the same specific heat.

In such case however it will be necessary to assign some other

cause for the indubitable results above given, or our judgment must be

suspended, until a careful repetition of similar experiments may deter-

mine the conditions with other gases, and lead to some definite con-

clusions for the whole of this most interesting question.

§ 5.—A few illustrations of the wet-bulb theory.

My paper has expanded to such a formidable length, that I am

loath to burthen it with many “last words :’’ yet I cannot refrain

from pointing out an instance or two of practical application, and

shewing that d and /”’ are as important elements in the play of mete-

orological phenomena as the dew-point itself, and require equally to

be studied by naturalists.

1. The Baron Hucet remarked, that ice was formed in Cashmir

with the thermometer at 44°|| at an elevation of 15,000 feet: whence

he concluded that the freezing point rose as the boiling point fell.

This startling paradox is now readily explained : the air of the plains is

dry enough at all times in those latitudes :—it becomes relatively drier

in expanding on the mountains, while the depression simultaneously

* Annales de Chimie, Ixxxy. 126. + Annales de Chimie, xxvi. 298.

+ Ditto 1829, xxxv. 5. § Ditto, xli. 113.

| See J. A. S. vol. v. p. 186. |

3K 2

428 Experimental Researches on the Depressions (Juny,

increases. Whent = 44°, D = 15.5 which + .27 = — a for

15,000 feet, — 18.5, so that if the air were already charged witha

third of its saturating quantity of vapour, the depression of 13 degrees

would still cool a surface of water below the freezing point.

Gay Lwussac points out asimilar fact noted on Saussure’s ascent of

Mont Blanc. ‘ En faisant tourner sur le Col du géant un thermomé-

tre dont la boule était enveloppée d’ une €ponge, il a obtenu un refroi-

dissement de 9°.3 C (16°.7 Farh.) au dessous de la température de

Vair qui était de 10°.1 (50°. 2 F.). ainsi l’ evaporation peut concourir

avec le rayonnement pour déterminer la congélation de l’eau a la

surface de la terre, dans un air dont la température serait de plusieurs

degrés au-dessus de zéro*.”

2. The formation of hail is readily explained on the same princi-

ple. The drops of water passing through a stratum of very attenuated

dry air, perhaps even warmer than the saturated cloud they have

quitted, are cooled to congelation—nay, most likely much below

it, since they are not remelted in their onward progress to the earth,

but are apparently enlarged by. deposition of fresh moisture. Hail is

seldom observed to fall in damp weather.

Thus also, frozen clouds (cirri) may be found at elevations in the

air much lower than would belong by theory to a temperature of 32°,

and their dissipation while still ina frozen state, is also accounted for.

3. The increase of rain drops as they approach the earth has been

satisfactorily proved to originate in the deposit of atmospheric mois-

ture on their surface, cooled below the dew-point temperature.

4. Why is not the air at sea always surcharged with moisture ?

The actual tension of vapour in the air does not depend on¢ but ?’:

now the bulk of the ocean maintains an uniform temperature, in

general a few degrees below that of the airin the day time: /’ there-

fore being then always less than f, saturation cannot take place,

however much water may be present. But there is another reason;

salt-water has a lower tension than pure water; that is, were it

heated to?#, its tension would not be f. It boils at 2134, (?) in lieu of

212°, which reduces its tension about one part in 40—and the same

proportion will hold good, on Dauton’s hypothesis, for lower temper-

atures. In clear nights the air on ship board must always be fully

charged with moisture, and hence the heavy dew on deck.

5. An analogous explanation can be given of the curious fact

observed by M. Ciement in 1821+, that if a thermometer bulb coated

with lint be dipped in a saturated solution of any salt (or the salt in ©

powder) and be held in aqueous vapour of 212°, it will acquire itself

* Annales de Chimie, xxi. 92. + Ure’s Chemical Dictionary, p. 284.

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 429 -

a higher temperature, equal to what would be the boiling point of a

similar solution. Here the saline solution at 212° cannot support

a tension of /” (= 30 in.) ; deposition therefore takes place with conse-

quent disengagement of latent heat, until the tension of the salt at

t + @ finds itself in equilibrio, or = 30 inches*.

6. Puzrxrins has observed, that when water is thrown upon a heated

metal not visibly red, it flashes into steam suddenly : but when placed

upon iron, silver or gold at a much higher heat, it takes a considerable

time to evaporate. Here would seem to be an indication that at or

about 1200 Farh. the evaporation point gradually rises to exactly

212°, and that beyond this it becomes negative, or, the depression

becomes so great that it falls below the boiling pointt.

This is surely a more rational explanation than Prrxins’s, who

supposed the liquid to be prevented from evaporating from the enor-

mous pressure on its surface :—how could such a false equilibrium hold

with free space around for the vapour to expand into ?

Many other illustrations might be brought forward, but I forbear

from exhausting the patience of my readers, and will here conclude

with the tables for the depression of the wet-bulb at temperatures from

30° to 1800 under the constant pressure of 30 inches. For other states

of the barometer the small table below will be found sufficient, until

my friends in Nepal, Dehra Dun, or the Nilgiris may furnish better

data for its correction.

TaBLe oF MULTIPLIERS, fo convert the following Tabular Depressions at 30

inches (1-000) into the depressions at any other pressure of the atmosphere.

Barome- Density of Multipli- | Barome- Density of Multipli- | Barome- Density of Multipli-

ter the air. er ter the air, er ter the air. er

inches. e. 14-.27e—1 inches. e& 1+-.27e—1| inches. e. 1-#.27 e—1

29°5 1016 =1°004 24°5 1:224 =1:060 19°5 1°538 1-145

29:0 + 1°034 # 1:009 24:0 1°250 ~=—-1:067 19°0 1579 =6.1'156

28°5 1:053 +=1-014 23°5 V:277, 41°075 18°5 1°621 1:168

28°0 4 1°071 #1:°019 23°0 1:°304 86 1:082 18°0 1°666 1°180

2775 1:091 1:025 22°5 1333 ~—- 11:090 17°5 1:720 =1°194

27-0... V:11F © 1°030 22:0 1°364 1:098 17:0 1°765 1°206

265, 19132 1°036 215 1°395 =: 11-107 16°55 ° %I:8l8 1-221

26:0 1°154 1-042 21°0 1°428) = 2°115 16°0 1:875 =1°236

25°5 1176 =1:048 20°5 1:°463 = 1°125 15°5 1:935 1°252

25:0 1:200 1:054 20:0 1500 1°135 15:0 2:000 = 1°270

Norr.—When the depression in attenuated air has been observed, divide it by

the multipliers here given, before entering the table following to find the aqueous

tension.

Sin he, ek aby eg Sa Se

* A new source of error in the wet-bulb is hence suggested, in the substance

with which the bulb is coated :—flannel, linen, and cotton may have different

hygrometric affections. This is a fit subject for inquiry.

+ The very slight modification required in the theoretical curve of depressions,

to produce the effect alluded to in the text, is shewn by a dotted line in Fig. 5 of

Pl. XXI. ApsoHn’s temperature of evaporation only reaches 212° at 2800°.

LesLiz’s at 2600° ; beyond which it would continue to rise.

430 Experimental Researches on the Depressions [Juxy,

At HtKt ttt gd FNM HH MH HO NESCOOCOOCORRAN

° w :

s @®lPSSSSSSSOSSSSSSSSSS SES SSS SCC Co's SS

Ss '

= ol! BE PODDDDADAMBRSOSSSNAHAAAAANAMNHMH + HH

= aleSOSSSCSOCSSCSSS ANNAN

— in AATMAAAANKH MAHAN MO HOOOMDDDARROOAAA

BS [ve) ae a a) ee ee eee ee Ses Se SS

S o BCOSOMHDDAARSCSOAAAANHHNHHANNOOSOHMNDAROA

= fe) SAA ARAB BT MBM NANNNAANANAANAANAATAAAAAHS

= w | oS PASSTAAAVWMO AFH OOOHNHDHDAARSAARABHHHLOMO

Ses ™~ AAANANANAAAANAANAAAANAMHHAHMANNAAMMD

= a MH OMWOMNDARSTAIANAHHONDADBOIAMHHO

g 1 ONANAANAAAAAMHMAMNHNHMMHRHOHHH HH ao

Sifu ees

2 2 wp | SPLL AST ARV HHL ONDASHAAHMHOMDASHAM +

= 2 Re) AAIAAMMMMMNMNHHHNNMHHHHHHHHHH DD DOD

Ss = S AANA OOONNASCHANHNMONDASCAMNHHODRONN

re gs oO MMNMMMNMNMNMNIMNHHHHAHAHHHteOHN HH HHH YDOCECS

=| 2

= Eb ys DONDAOTARAHHONDOAANHONDSAMWnNCcngaa

a = wl omnmMnmntHHntnnaeegd ono oH OHECSOOSCOSOOR

is)

3 o CANMNHAMOEASCIAANHFOMDOAAHXHOHEODOAHMHONS

cS 2 2 CHHHHHe HH eH HHO HHH HOOSOOSCOSCOORRARRER®D

s =|

Fi ae

= Be FT OODASCANMHHODMHROAMNCGCHDAARHOOAAMHOW

a BH OL Ot HHH HHH HOHHHOSCOHRCOONNEAEROHHHOH

S| &

~ n~

wy 5 DOAMMHEDHAAAHHORDOANHOHONAHONSOAMON

S ro) S CHO HM NOH KH HHOCKSCOCOOCRERERErDDDDDABDAAAD

S| 8

2 >

= onl

= i) DHHORDONDHODOANHEDONHOWONHONHORHE

ss gad © | Chih DH HOSCOOSCORRER ERE DHDHDDHDDAADARSSSS

= io} ioe) ee le on

s| 3

sh oS DONHDONDOAMNDONDONHONONHODAMNKHHDONHE

a — SCI1OHKSDOSOSCHOHOORARRRERRDDHDDDARADHDOSOORAAAA

i) s Ge) Le ieee i oe Be Be Be

eth:

Ss n

= & HORAANHODOAHMHAANHOHOHMNNROANHHOAWHH

o- A wml o~poweOrrnnndDndnDNDDDRAADADSSIVOOA SHH AAAN

= s int ee ee ee

BS] o

sD Fim

Soe PAP GHAACHHHAAHSLPSOATONANHNSOMHOA KOS

oS SCl1OORRRE RD DHHDDADARSSIOOSOHAHAANAANHMNHD MH

v nN Ee ee ee Oe a ee ed eel

.t)

SS CHONHFRHAIWMOHAAPRHATHNOAAHHAHNOMGAN

D pe SCRrRDDDNDDARDRAVRNDSCOCSOAHAARAATAAARAANAAHA Haw HwH

= wm Re ee ee

n BB ED OOS NLD Wis a AN STO Ss tO OXY ID ES S09 Bee DCD COIS

DA CL ODMDDAADADSSOSOTAAAAAAHHHHHHHOHH HOS

Tr) = To ae ee Oe Oe Oe ce ee oe ee ee ee

ma °

a NEN OAGHAOHONDOHMOARV HAT BHOAHANHONNS’

Ay WD lL_SODHDROSCDTCSOAAATAAANANAHHAHMAHHAHOGOCEHER®OD

g [7 3s FF aS et FR es aes SB OI SIS eM eS SI eS ee ee

= CAAMNAHROMOANOCAMSCOMN-wANHALCOVON

~ COSRHANAAHMHMNHTHAD HOO: mKFr-ononoamnodco-

SSS oOo es

a a Ia

mq | “oInjpet COBAMHAHONDASCAAVHMHHORDADROANNHNORMDNAS

< | -3duay, DANMMMMMMMNNY HIM tH HMeGAHONHNOMHNH OHMS

1836.] of the Wet-bulb Hygrometer. 431

: - MEN DNDDNDNDNDDARAARARDSOCOCOCSCOR A HAHHAAN

§ aleSCCSCCOoODoCCOoOCCOOCOCOOCOCOC OR FAA NA nee

=< ‘

= =) Me ose ee ee eee eee ae Sahu ee hed Bd elie) Noe oP)

SS [>>] ° AOR FR BABB TMT TBF RNANANNANANNAINANANUNAN

= H

‘= 1 eR SU St Sa Ne ere OC ie a AGAR SNC) SUIS) SOO ik

> BD) SCARANAAAAANAAAAAAMHMHAMMHAMHMHMMOAAAM

5 a emer Su ON Sie Sa SR eth Cok ocr carp meu ee, Sunt RGD 'E™ Ee 000) ON

S a AM MNAMNNNMNMNMNOHHHKHHHHNHHHAHDH Didnt

~ ‘ss DADAAARNRHHONEDAGCAAVNHHNONDDONANANH

S | ommnHtmrHeHaqeaqeea eon no hn bb ni wHoocoecods

s s MODASCHAMHEEMNDHDOAANHNONDAOAHHHOND

g BR loaaaetewh oh HO HHRHHOSOOSCOOCOOOORARRARRR

See af SR EA Sea NRO SST ARS Oro SAAD aAsqe

= 58 SCibihhhROSOODOOCOSCORARRR ERR DDHDHHDODDHDRASA

s 2

3 35 +HOODROAMNODROAMHOHNAOAMHONMOTHNHOR

= © | COSHSOSCORKRARARERRHHDHDHDHRRDORSESOSOOSS

= — er

S$ 3 % AHO NDOANHONDAAHHONAAMHOHHRAMNOHSON

te SH DW] ORRRRRDHDDDDECDRAGDATSEOCSOOSCOOCONAHAHAA

Re Ge le ee ee a ee Be ne eB ee ee oe

i °

8 FO ee ae eee ae eo Ne Thee ee ile AON Fi Sih an AON Ce ea A a

~ 8 DODNDRAAMRAARDRSSCHSOSCSSRAAAAAAANAANAMHNHAHNN

= gs De ee ee |

= |

~ o

Sf] 2 pl Caton ornnmnarnmoenarntztoneontonrmMonand

= & £1 PCARADDSSSSSSOAAANAAANNAAHMHHMOMHHHHHO

= th i ce a ee ee Bc ree ee ee ee ee ee ee |

o> °

~ nw

~~ =| AANODOAHOMANHNHNOAHOCHOAMOHOAHrOADE

= 5B CSR SSSSHAAAAARNAH MAH HHH HH HODOOSD

oe Gy s = — 8 SS Ss eS eS eRe eS Se SS Ce a Bi cen re ee oe ee |

S| 6 AA MOHONYHOAPHAM*HATHHOAHNONHHRIN

8 d © 1SCOCHRHHAADAAMRHMMNHMHHHHNOKH OCS OONNRNED®

ce Oo Se) i oe

S od

WA] 63

= 2 ANGHigs DIES HS Upc HERI MDI ols eh orange ea ER ISK I) SSRN le ve

2 SS HANANAAHHHMHHHHO HH HOOOORRKDHHDDAARAS

o 5 wy ee er ee ee ee ee ee

S ‘DR

S & SHOBAHOANNOAAHHAHNOMOANHDNOMOSONH

= A wl OmamnaretbbinbOSCORnRnDDHDRADOAWAAAN

= O° Nn ~—a R ne ee ee en ey es es

SAO

~ & AODAHTROHEFONODAWVAAHAANANAHAANDANOG

° Ot tH tip in OMrMrM™MmDHDDAMDOOCOFHRBAANAANYNM NB

S oO Se ee eee ee We ee Sk eh hit SA GAGH. GW CRED CL AUG RCT Clee

WANMODAN DAH DANMDNNAMGCOMNOHNANAGE

8 WlONMOOORnEPrDDDHDAAHDGCOCOCOAHAAAHMHAMHAHHOMNSO

= Coal Tt St NNN N INN NNNNANN INAS

+ F

Z ANGSCHHAHADAOAMNMEHHDAGHSOHHABAHAHDAOOW

a al AAR TIM tA BTAAANANAANAANAANANAAAAAA

<3)

z DNOSHO A GOHAANAVOAPAYM A SSOHHPVEAMAS

Q MW lLONADSCSOCHAAAANMDHHHHHOSKRRDHHABDOSGAN

Q SSB ANANAAAANANANAAANAAAAAAAGIAAAMNM MH

Ss PAOMVHOHAHAAHOMODNDOMNDHMNDMNODNNHONAKAHSY

C1 OMANHDHHHHH HO SORRDHDRSSBAHAARNHH+HONO

= ANANAANANAANAARAAAAAMDAHN NH OM OH OD OD

ral

5 *I1NJVI SCH NNHNMORDACHAMHANORDDOAANAMHANHOPADRSOA

=) -3dwoy COKDOCKOKCCOREERREEERERERDDHHDDDDHDDDAG

432 Experimental Researches on the Depressions, &c.

fete teres eovsasHoge

caesioalwd railessiesies salesiiea! ra mel enew ou exes cole

gues on g2 a3 9

Oras aaa

P33

OOO ND

DAANSSAMAMAANRMOOHSOD

aAaN

ANAAAKHHHNMHNHMNHHNYHHHOOO

e oO

2°5

2:7

2:8

binininisinooCnnnas

PASS

Hot ip io

fo)

10°3

noo

ANAM NO MOL HH Ht tt

1p 1

COSSSORHAOHA

5°3 3°8

. 4°

4°

5°6 4°7

#19 Om

RRR

Qonn OPO OD = fe

ROH DDDRAO- HHH

Tae 5°7 4°8

to)

6°6

6°

3 6:2

Am Hw

AAADH

DSOTKTANNODHNeNANT SH

ir)

L ad

i=)

HQoecococentoroa-=

ee ee ee Me oe oe on

isp}

10)

"8 .

8.9 71

ss}

ODA

ooo

oe oe ee

aM BB ANYNOr-DON

Con een Bl oe I oe Boe lo oe ee

10)

ONYHNROEENN|DS

NMOMAMNHDRA-NO

Se ee eS |

NaPorn

ANANN

Oa ww

maa

a5 =

fo)

37°4 33°4 29°4 25°5 21°6 17°7 14°

15°3 a 12°0 ros 9°0

16°4 14.7 et 11°2 9°7

14°0 12°3 10°8 9°5

‘ 9 e .

oe |

15°1 13.5 11°9 10°3

16°

33°2

15°4

16°8

17'0

17°

18°0

18°3

18°5

18°8

19°

36°9

40°1

41°5

(0)

Wer

15°J

15335

05'6

15°9

16°

17°3

17°5

17°8

18°

18°9

34°

37°8

41°3

45°8

OOMMOAHNSMDOBSOMOHND

ANNMNMMNMMrONM-SO

NUNANNNANAANAANAAYNHYM +

19°7

20°0

20°3

44°6

48°4

50°2

WMANMWANAMAANANHANOMHO- 0

ro)

MOHHHDODHOAMKROTA

ANAANAAANAARAHHAA+H

22°2

57°1

55°

24°2

57°9

60°

The centesimal tension of vapour, or percentage of humidity being

25 40

26°

26°5

63°3

65°6

7/0

28'°9

73°6

79°1

71°6

SMOHTOHANMHONATRANOH

NNH+ Mon nOOKARADMOND

NAMMNNMNMNNIANHHiNnHSONm

fo)

29°

30°

31°6

78°3

WOOF OR OH RARAKRYNKEHaAdH RAN

DOORRDNDADSOHONHDHORNMS

AMNANMNMNNANDHHTHHHMOORROO

oon

SOEONDHOONDHOSOOANWNMHKHAWS

AN+HiodHORRMORUAUDOSS

YUH HSH HgetytmMoonrndndadnd

Pel

38°

39°:

39°

40°4

“OINZet onm a

WORnDROHAAMS DD

-oduiey BDADBRAAARSOODSSOSOSSSRaSS

TABLE of the Depressions of a Wet-bulb Thermometer, for degrees of temperature, and every twentieth part of hygrometric saturation.

(Jury,

is table must be multiplied into the aqueous tension for

l tension deduced from th

ima

the air, the centes

temperature, extracted from DALTON’s, Biot’s, or URn’s tables.

To find the real quantity of moisture

given

the

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 483 -

V1I.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, 3rd August, 1836.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair,

Mr. W. Spiers, proposed at the last meeting, was ballotted for, and

duly elected a Member of the Society.

Mr. Conductor Dawe, of the Delhi Canal Establishment, proposed at

the last meeting, was, upon the favorable report of the Committee of

Papers, elected an associate member.

Mexuara Meng, uncle of the present King of Ava, acknowledged his

election as an honorary member in a Bengali letter, of which the fullow-

ing is a literal translation :—

Mexuara Ra’sa to the learned Members of the Asiatic Society of Calcutia,

commands.

Tam informed of the contents of the letter from this learned body, and of

the honor they have done to me. But so difficult is the attainment of know-

ledge, that I can by no means hold myself worthy of such a distinction, The

progress of knowledge may be likened to the ascent of a lofty mountain,—he

that attains the summit will gain the first glimpse of the rising sun, then he in

the centre, while yet it is hidden from the crowd at the base. The sun is to

them a thing entirely imperceptible. Afterwards, when the solar orb declines, it

still remains visible and palpable to him who has surmounted the hill, while the

others have a partial and fading remembrance of its glory. Thus are there

gradations in the acquirement and appreciation of learning, and there is no limit

to its increase, nor can any thing compare with its excellence.

The enjoyments of worldly life are finite, and afford little variety—riches bring

satiety ; but there is no satiety in knowledge. Every day brings novel food to

the mind, and only whets the appetite for more. I do not then think myself

learned, but it is a law of nature that the bulk of each species should remain on

an equality, whether man, beast, reptile, tree, or land itself—and hold social

commune with its fellows.

My name has been inserted in the list of the learned men—I am glad to hear

it, for the mind that cannct traverse alone the field of knowledge; in company

of judicious guides, may derive instruction and advantage at every step. I shall

know what I have not known—hear what I have not heard. All my doubts may

be explained, my conjectures certified :—therefore am I filled with joy, for L

would have my ignorance enlightened.

Should the Society wish to know any thing relative to the Burmese literature

of my country, I will do my utmost to supply every information.

As the learned members are acquainted with various languages, I have caused

this letter to be written in the Pali language* and in the Bengali character.

The Secretary read the following reply from Government to the appli-

cation made, in conformity with the resolution of the last meeting, on the

subject of the publication of the Cochin Chinese Dictionary.

2 To James Prinstep, Esa.

p Genl. Dept. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

IR,

I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 1]th in-

stant, and in reply to state that the Right Honorable the Governor General of

India in Council will be prepared to sanction an expense of 5,500 rupees to be

incurred in printing a Cochin Cainese Dictionary by Lithography in the manner

* The letter contains an admixture of Péli words, but the substance is in Bengali,

and is evidently a very imperfect rendering of the author’s expressions by a Bengali

writer.

3.L

434 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Juy,

proposed by the author; but his Lordship would prefer much, that in order to

make the work accessible to seafaring persons and traders as well as to the

learned, the explanation should be given in English as well as in Latin, and

that a Vocabulary rendering the common English words into Cochin Chinese

should be added to the volume.

2. His Lordship would hope that by compressing the writing in the page

which is rather wide in the specimens transmitted, these additions could be

brought nearly within the same compass so as to occasion very little additional

expense.

3. The specimen which accompanied your letter is herewith returned.

? I am, &c.

H. T. PRINSEP,

Council Chamber, the 20th July, 1836. Secy. to Govt.

“In consequence of the above suggestions, the Secretary had, in consul-

tation with the author, returned the following reply :—

To H. T. Prinsep, Esa.

Secretary to the Government of India, Genl. Dept.

Sir,

. I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 20th

July last, communicating the acquiescence of the Right Honorable the Go-

vernor General of India in Council to the proposition submitted by myself, on

the part of the Asiatic Society, and of the most Rev. the Bishop of Isauropolis,

for the publication of a Cochin Chinese Dictionary in lithography at an

expense not exceeding 5,500 rupees.

I have accordingly placed myself in communication with the author, with a

view to arrange the preliminaries without loss of time, as well as to provide for

the modifications recommended by his Lordship in Council.

The Bishop is of opinion that the addition of a column of English meanings

to the Dictionary in its present form would involve a very serious increase of

labour in passing it through the press; it would also augment the bulk of the

work very considerably ; while a very large portion of the words and explana-

tions connected with literary and abstract terms would be of no utility whatever

to the commercial class or to seafaring persons.

The object contemplated by his Lordship in Council may, he thinks, be sup-

plied with more facility by the addition of a Supplementary Vocabulary con-

taining all the most common words, which might also be published in a

detached form for the use of mariners and traders.

This Vocabulary the author undertakes to draw up in the English, French, and

Anamitan tongues, during the progress of the publication ; and precaution has

been taken to include this additional matter in the estimates which have been

called for.

His Lordship’s remarks on the appearance of the lithographed specimen, and

the obvious advantage, if possible, of securing to a standard work of this nature

the advantages and neatness of typography, induced me to communicate again

with the Proprietors of the Serampore Press, before any final arrangements

should be made. ‘

The Bishop on his own part handsomely consented to relinquish 500 rupees

out of the 4,000 rupees of personal remuneration for which he had at first

stipulated. I was thus enabled to offer a clear sum of 2,000 rupees to Rev. Dr.

MarsumMaNn for the execution of 500 copies of a quarto volume, containing nearly

500 pages, with the native words in the Cochin-Chinese character. This offer,

although much below the usual Calcutta printing rates for ordinary works, has

been in the most liberal manner accepted by the Rev. Dr. and Mr. J. MaArsHMAN.

I now therefore only wait for the final sanction of Government to place the

MSS. &c. in their hands.

Tam, &c.

(Signed) JAMES PRINSEP,

Calcutta, 1st August, 1836. Secy.

a e

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. ~ | 435

To this letter the following reply had just been received :—

To James Prinsep, Esa.

Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Sir,

_I am directed by the Right Honorable the Governor General of India in

Council to acknowledge the receipt of your letter dated the Ist instant, and in

reply to state that his Lordship entirely approves the arrangement made by

you on the part of the Asiatic Society for the publication at the Serampore

Press of the Anamitan Dictionary prepared by the Most Reverend the Bishop

of Isauropolis, at the charge already sanctioned, of 5,500 rupees.

2. The modifications made in the original proposition seem to his Lordship

in Council calculated very much to improve the work, and entirely meet the

wishes expressed in my letter dated 20th ultimo.

3. The Governor General in Council has much satisfaction in acknowledging

the disinterested and public-spirited offer made by the Right Reverend author,

to forego a portion of the remuneration allotted to him in order to obtain the

advantage of having the work published in type; and the terms accepted by

Dr. Marsuman of Serampore appear to his Lordship in Council to be not

less liberal ; for the rate at which they have agreed to print the work in the

original character is such as can afford them little or no profit.

4. Itis the wish of the Governor General in Council that additional copies

should be printed of the Vocabulary proposed to be added ; and if this should

occasion an increase of expense, his Lordship in Council will have no objection

to defray the amount that may be charged on this account, taking for Govern-

ment an additional 100 copies of this part of the work.

Iam, Sir, &c.

Council Chamber, the 3rd Aug. 1836. H. T. PRINSEP,

Sec. to Govt.

The liberality of the proprietors of the Serampore Press in undertak-

ing to print the work without any hope of profit, or even at the risk of

some sacrifice, was fully appreciated by the Society, and the best thanks

of the meeting were conveyed to Dr. Marsaman, who was present.

A bill from the Orphan Press for printing the Ist part of the twentieth

volume of Researches, 248 pages, amounting to C.’s Rs. 1806 6 4,'was pre-

sented and passed.

Oriental Publications.

The Secretary reported the completion of the Naishadha-Cheritra (1st

part, 900 pages) one of the Sanscrit works transferred from the Committee

of Public Instruction ; of which copies were ready for distribution. By the

terms of agreement with the Editor, Prema Cuanpra Pannira, of the

Calcutta Sanscrit College, who had supplied the tika or commentary, 100

copies were to be given to him in lieu of pecuniary remuneration, which

was approved.

Library.

The following books were presented :—

Results of Astronomical Observations made at the Madras Observatory dur-

ing the years 1834 and 1835—presented by the Madras Government, through

Colonel Casement, Mil. Sec. Sup. Govt.

Jahr bucher der Literatur, No. 69, 70, 71, and 72—presented by the Baron

Joseph Von Hammer. ‘ i :

Notizia di Diciotto Codici Persiani della Biblioteca della Regia Universita di

Torino—by the same.

Memoire sur deux Coffrets Gnostiques du moyen age—by the same.

Mamik und Afra, a German Poem, translated from the Persian—dy the same.

on 2

436 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Jory,

Historical Oriental Translations and Researches, 2 vols. quarto, by the Rev.

W. Taytor, Madras—presented by the author.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, No. 4—by

the Society.

A descriptive and illustrated catalogue of the Physiological Series. of Compara-

tive Anatomy, contained in the Museum of the Royal Coilege of Surgeous in

London, Vol. III. Part I.—dy the President of the College.

The Sixth Annual Report of the Society of Natural History of the Mauritias—

ty M. Julien Des Jardins, Sec.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No 12, for April and July, 1836—

by the Madras Literary Society.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science, No. 8, and Review of Works on Sci-

ence—by F. Coriyn, Esq. the Editor,

Meteorological Register for June 1836—by the Surveyor General.

The following hooks were received from the booksellers :—

Lardner’s Cabinet Cycltopedia—Botany, 1 vol.

, Foreign Statesmen, vol. 2nd.

Museum.

_ Read a letter from J. Bett, Esq. Secretary Agricultural and Forti.

cultural Society, for warding for the acceptance of the Society two blaukets

and two woollen cloths on behalf of Lieutenant H. Verex.

The blankets are made from the Siméil tree ; the woollen cloths are of Bho-

tian manufacture.

Literary Communications.

The Government of Madras referred for the consideration of the

Society, through the Supreme Government, a proposition submitted by

Cavetity Venxata Lacsumta, Pandit, tore-establish the system of Histo.

rical Research so successfully pursued by the late Col. Corin Mackenzig

in the Peninsula, by coliecting inscriptions, manuscripts, grants, &e. as

well as to translate and digestthe mass of materials alieady collected, and

now in the possession of the Royal Asiatic Suciety.

CaveLLY VeNKATA had drawn up a report-progress of the researches, in

which he states himself to be still engaged, classifying the different dynasties,

ancient and modern, of South India, on which light iias been thrown by the

Mackenzie collection. This paper and the correspondence were refersed to the

Committee of Papers for their examination and report, previous to discussion

of the question in the Society.

Mr. W. H. Macnacuren presented an elaborate Memoir by Lieut.-

Colonel Burney, Resident in Ava, entitled “ An account of the wars

between Burmah and China, together with the journals and routes of three

different embassies sent to Pekin by the king of Ava, taken from Bur-

mese documents.

[Referred to the Committee of Papers. This account has peculiar interest

at the present moment, when the offer of Mr. Gurziarr to penetrate through

Chiva to Ava or Assam has been much discussed. |

Mr. Treveiyan on behalf of M. C. Masson presented a third memoir

on the coins discovered at Beghram.

This paper is a careful and laborious recapitulation of all that has been done

in this curious branch of discovery, with the addition of the results of a third

year’s search. The acquisition of new coins and new names naturally becomes

every day more rare; so that notwithstanding the addition of 2,294 coins to his

1836.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 437

cabinet in the year 1835, the only real novelties are an unique coin of ARCHE-

Lius, one of DiomepEs (found in 1834) the confirmation of ADELPHORTOs and

Tpartrisus. Three Euthydemus’, and one Antiochus have been gained; the

ratio of the more common Bactrian and Indo-Scythic names is much the same as

in former years. We shall hasten to publish such portions of M. Masson’s

most industrious labours as have not hitherto appeared in our pages.

Mr. Avpany brought to the Society’s attention a singular narrative, in

translation, of the interview between Arsacss, king of Armenia, and the

Persian Monarch Sapor (ALaknar.)

[We hope to find room for this curious morceau ere long. }

The Secretary read extract of a letter from the Counsellor Josepa Von

Hammer, of Vienna, (now Baron Purestatt,) forwarding a continuation

of his translation of the Mohit, an Arabic nautical work by Sint Capupan,

of which the first chapter was printed in the third volume of the Journal.

The present chapter contains a catalogue of the islands along the shores of

the Red Sea, and directions for thirty different voyages from Loheia, Aden, &c.

to the various ports of India, Persia, and the Straits of Malacca. It is a fact

difficult to be accounted for, that the learned author offered to translate the whole

of this very scarce and curious work for the Oriental Translation Committee,

who have given to the world so many of less consideration; but he was not

honored with a reply.

Extracts were also read from other Tete Correspondence. Pro-

fessor Wirison reports his having forwarded the Society’s memorial

regarding Oriental publications to the Roval Asiatic Society, which, in

concurrence with the Oriental Translation Committee, had warmly

espoused the object of its prayer. The Foreign Societies had also sup-

ported it, as far as the voice of protestation and argument by a body of

the most distinguished oriental scholars can lend its influence.

Paris has set a further example which it would be unjust to the cause to omit

mentioning.

Colonel Troyer, having presented to the Société Asiatique a German transla-

tion of the first Six books of the Rdj Tarangini, (one of the Sanscrit works

suspended by the Government order, a lately completed by the Society here,)

was invited to undertake a French version of the same for publication with the

Sanscrit text at the Society’s expence, estimated at not less than 6,000 francs.

1t may be hoped that the edition completed in India; of which specimens must

soon after have reached Paris, will spare a portion of this money for the many

other objects embraced by this active association.

M. Jacquet avnounces the contemplated institution of a new professorship

of the Oriental Janguages in the University of Ghent, which well desire to ac-

cumulate manuscripts and printed works from this country. The late discovery

of coins and inscriptions in India bad excited the most intense interest on the

Continent, but General Ventura’s collection had not yet reached Paris, on

account of the detention of General A1uarp by illness in the South of France.

With regard to the coins of the Kadphises group, M. Jacquet having seen

HoniGBERGER’s collection would read the name Mokadphises, which he sug-

gests to be Mahdtricha of the Sanscrit. We await his papers on this subject in

the Journal Asiatique.

Physical.

A collection of specimens made by Captain Hannay in his recent

expedition up the lrawadi to the Amber mines, was presented by Colonel

“Burney.

The collection includes many varieties of white and gray marble—

Serpentine, agates, jaspers, heliotrope and crystal, particularly a pale

438 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Juny,

green prase, much prized by the Chinese, and called by them Yu ; it is

found about 80 miles N. W. of Mogaung. Wrist rings are cut from it.

With the specimens'was a substance called by the Burmese earth wax, which

they say exudes from some high precipitous rocks above Ava. They add, that

monkeys are particularly fond of this substance, and that those animals swarm

about the rocks which yield it. The wax has all the appearance of common

unbleached wax.

There was also a specimen of the tea prepared by the Singphos of Payen-

dwen ; and a poisonous plant used by the Mishmis, supposed by Dr. WaLLIcH

to be identical with the Bish of the Gurkhas, (Aconitum ;) another herb myen-

thé, used by the Mishmis for the same purpose, had more the appearance of an

Acanthaceous plant.

The fossil bones from Perim in the Cambay Gulph, presented by the

Baron Hueet, had arrived. Among them is a large and indisputable frag-

ment of a buffalo’s horn, which the Baron refers with probability to the

- Nerbudda fossil bos ; two smaller horns imbedded in matrix, (a calcare-

ous and ferruginous conglomerate.) Also shells from a similar conglo-

merate in Gogo, and specimens of the cornelian, natural and burned,

from the Ratanpur quarries.

A geological series from Pulos Floer, Trotto, Ledah, Tingy, Pigeon

Island, Birdnest Island,.and Dehli point, in the Straits of Malacca, was

presented by Dr. Brann, of H. M.S. Wolf, with a note of their locality,

and some remarks on the genus of shells denominated Pterocyclos by

Benson (Spiraculum by Pearson), found in abundance on the islet of

Susson, opposite Queda Peak.

{[Dr. Brannp’s notes shall have early insertion. |

Specimens of a calcareous and silicious Scoria, forming the substance of

a small hill at Bédiginta near Courtney, about 11 miles west of Bellary,

was presented by Lieut. Newsonp.

[The accompanying note will be inserted.]

Mr. C. W. Smiru having purchased a collection of specimens of Natu-

ral History from the Eastern Isles, presented the Mammalia, the dupli-

cates of the Birds and the Reptiles, to the Museum, on condition of the

remaining birds being mounted for him. The Mammalia and Reptiles

consist of the following specimens :—The grey Roussette, ( Pteropus Gri.

seus) two specimens ; one of a species of JVoctilionina, and one of Ves-

pertilionina, probably new genera; one of a species of Marten, agreeing

in specific characters very exactly with the Pine Marten, ( Martes Vul-

garis ; ) two young specimens of a species of Ictus; one of the Barang

Otter, (Lutra Lutreola?) one of the slender Delundung, ( Prionodon

Gracilis ;) one of the Sumatra Cat, ( Felis Sumatrana ;) one of the Ma-

dagascar Squirrel, (Sciurus Madagascariensis ;) one of the Jeralang,

(Sciurus Leschenaultii ;) two of the two-banded Squirrel, (S. Bivitta-

tus ;) and two specimens of the Java Musk Deer, ( Moschus Javanicus. )

-The Reptiles are a specimen of the Eastern Box Terrapia, ( Cistuda Am-

boinensis ; ) and one of the Clouded Monitor of Gray’s Synopsis, ( Moni-

tor Nebulosus. )

A specimen of Bengal Vulture; (Vultur Bengalensis,) presented by

Major Fane,

1836.] Miscellanea. 439

The specimens of birds presented at the last meeting were exhibited,

having been mounted in the Museum.

Physical Communications.

A memoir on the Fossil Rhinoceros of the sub-Himélayas, was for-

warded by Lieuts. Baxer and Duranp, of the Engineers.

[This, with the lithographs and engravings kindly prepared by the authors

themselves for the Journal, will be published in the ensuing number. ]

Mr. Honeson, of Nepél, continued his contributions of new species in

two papers: 1, on the thick-billed finches; 2, on two genera of Colum-

bide. Twenty-two ornithological plates were also added to the magnificent

series of illustrations now under dispatch home.

A note on nest of the Bengal Vulture was submitted by Lieutenant

Hurron.

A Register of Rain at Delhi, by the Rev. R. Everssr.

A living specimen of the new genus of venomous snakes denominated

Hamadryas by Dr. Cantor, was exhibited to the Society ; it measured

nearly 10 feet in length, and was caught in the Sundarbans.

VII.— Miscellanea.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science.—It has not been hitherto our

custom to enter into criticism of the contents of contemporary journals, but we

cannot refrain from noticing the number issued by our sister society of Madras

in July, which has just reached us and has excited—not our envy, but—our

astonishment and our joy.—To say that it rivals or eclipses our own humble

production in what is called ‘‘ the getting up,’’ would be, perhaps, considered

little of acompliment. The fresh zeal and exertions of a new editor, (Dr. CoLEz,)

are not less conspicuous in the judicious selections he has made from other

works, and the valuable notes with which he has embellished them, than in the

host of able contributors he has summoned to his aid ;—some of whom, alas !

we have hitherto boasted as our own*, but whose transfer of allegiance is but

natural, when so legitimate a rival arises to claim it. The present number

(four-monthly ?) contains 240 pages, price only 3 rupees. Of its most rich

contents we should be tempted to glean with unsparing hand, could we afford

space. Dr. Benza has another excellent geological paper on the country

between Madras and the Nilgiris. Mr. Coie has done a service to geology, by

an accurate definition and description of the laterite formation.— Mr. Tay-

LoR’s view of the present state of astronomical science is highly interesting.

It shews, that he is not one of those who merely keep up a supine routine of

accustomed observations, but that all his observatory does is directed to useful

ends—to the elucidation of those desiderata in the science for which its situation

is best calculated. Nor is he a Flamstead, jealous of giving his labours into

other hands, and tardy in working out results himself; for his third volume of

observations, reduced and classified in the most compendious manner, has just

issued from the Madras press. We may be indeed jealous that our Presidency

should boast no similar production, and that even the astronomical labours of

the Grand Trigonometrical Survey in the northern mountains should be as inac-

cessible and unknown as all their other operations! Colonel Monteitu, Engi-

neers, whose survey of part of Persia we noticed some time since, is imparting

the statistical contents of his note book, accumulated during 18 years’ residence

in Persia. An account of the Thuggee system, by Lieutenant ReYNoLps—

Observations on original and derived languages, by the Rev. B. Scumrb, and on

the language of the Battas of Sumatra, by Lieutenant Newsotp, and the Rev.

W. TAyLor, are amongst the most interesting contents of this very creditable

volume,

* Dr. Benza, Mr. T. G. Tay Lor, Lieut. NewsBo.p,

VIII.—Meteorological Register.

440

"LT ‘awid ‘oads jo

S1 plow MINYydins ay} SsyuUeWLIadxa 1eyjO Ut poAojduna useq sey xroj9mI0IsAY Ley ay] —xeput uonvsuaduod $}I YITM YO peel uaeq sey JoJaWlOIeg pIepuLys p[O ay} YyUOU wast dant uy :

SESL B°E6 lp'gt PF LL Ee BG Z°9Rt03" 7086S F0S'| 0Sh6S 9298 (Eh |UPBIS8L° LIP *s(s6s*Gs!gee"iG “wean

| {ee | SE A a fe eS Ge hs asl

‘aug *4SB010A0 *gs8019A0 ‘38 ag 5 08° 2°63 a'ph atcl|e‘e ad GTR 98l' loess gor‘ OP be \S'h |L'18 ZOTS jepps jOrg9s jFZzs*

‘Apnoyo “ALD MOUs uled hole OF (OUR 293" |S Fe piles OF | G8 O61" |68E. ogs* POLE IPE [os 98l* jons’ 919% iepy'

*ALamouys aug ae A oe ‘Ss o'eB [Btud o°11)0°9 8°88 RBS" |09E* gig* og KS IBS [OGHIEGLS foBbs jeZ9" laeoe

*Azey > kzey 14s ‘wind TAs bod 'S Goi gits e'gsie*Z i128 ees eres eng. 092 9S |UD lSfeul9sL JOGFS [989* {6z9*

yeas ‘wind OP op oe Ss ‘S 8°6 Likt 09! sus ges’ \pces ogg * yZ2\9°S {269 \e‘9alz1es josrS |e02* jergf

*Kiamoyus aug op MS : s : S L'L6 ia 821199 | £05 “es looet 1e¢* ogee lee lecalaar’. Ler cx9* | 2e96

*1js ‘wind °y21}S- 10 op “ms ‘as a lo46 g's LicLia'Z 1°68 886° |6.e* eg‘ BLL pe |L'S joccni6ors jirgs JOIZ’ jecos

oP op Pe ae Ge lie Eee Es Eaealre gcd] |S fetcalosrs fear’ fant |eeot

op uy op iS 2 3 IS 9°91 1% | /0°G8) OFT 668° Gres BiLiee \e'h loccsigsr® jeeps {229° |PEegt

f op ee EAP i Ae ‘a8 She 016s ofee O°RL/9°E | 6:98) 961% poe* e0g' leo/lt'e (9% |6es]9Z1* ash’ |Fl9e |res*

A139 moys yeas ‘uma __ “aug fee eg cae a {s0°T ofcor gird B81 19S G*Egie6l’ |8tss c6e* OLLIE |S'b IoPsjg6l’ |pees joess Jods

feet wind *119 {csi fag ute ANS 0 °6 gike Lg £¢ 16°98, 666" OTS cog‘ Pol\Le \8°h |stealaers jeces PISS jecé

a zey 2 OP 43s “und Bi FQN AS: og AB ioe, hs L194 S'gL |S 6°98 E26" [896° bars SOLOS [09 \Pesicst® |g0r* |16S* j6E9*

amoys auy Baek a8 ee AS oe NS +08 0/88 6°94 9°82 95S lepelaor’ (eles rigs OLLIE \E°S lecSlIGL* |ZPPS [869% |T09*

“ys “wunD aug mas HS | atte lated | Q6L|a \6T {Zenl220* |6Lps j9s9’ jorgs

; snquira oP FE ‘as "mS So. B56 ores : F ogee |LiS |TEeslbZt’ jarbs* |9I9* joLs*

7801940 azeyy OTTER ae a a's Oud 0508 etae BELLU [acs lettBiBL’ (Sle. |OGP.| IPD e9/|1'% |956 |9*IB|09LS {288° |ZPS* jeas*

SR auy OP ; fae vas 3 “a a RT 4 (21/68 [eco |T*oR/BGI" joGs! lear. aPrs 11/0 \9%% |Z’esleors eee jogs. jers®

‘Kramoys urer mtd Neon ‘A 9 "HfO9F [0806 fabs eLL|Se joe epee’ |e0z* joae<| Tse. BGL/8°S [85 IZsl19l’ |F8at abe [o1gt

yea yeays “WIND op 0 tas JOEY je ts0r j9rrd B°6LIS'S [O'b [tical PBL’ jelo’ Zep “91p® neZioce |L% |r'ea|o2t¢ jeles jase’ |Z19%

neue no Selinp op [0 cm “ese [00'S ,0°86 god BBLIES [90'S lEHQ 961. [693° cor} TEP orgLioce |b laccpl9Zt® jgce® jess jLos’ fF 6

; 1amoys siomoys ce ‘au "3u a 08 0°16 Bol FAL o*s 8°9 8°98 116° 0ca. | 19 |aor® 1% \oe |L.eglests jZes* jarss 06P* 8

wes "us = “az ‘pnoys a a ag a 0:94 Lig 19°! jo°Gg/Zes. |1es° jegp<|s6E* ceLiace \6% \occa| 161 joe: [toes ster | 4

Fie sioMous qeajo "og “au 10 09% 0°26 joree G ELIE ake jeccgle6l’ [eaZe. |TLpyesbs J + [otosihie [PP locpa/RAT® 80p* {96¢* {Bho 9

Pero ROUS: Azul , op ABS). 2°28 ‘a fO9e — fOfeTT 0°64 BF |6°L |B°LB/E1G" 89a" | 18p*|Esr* PLLlO# US leces|ezt* jeoes joso* Lest | Ss

eae ae S819 A0 pS ee AE esa Or Of. a‘Gh GLLIG'E [aC [LHR 88I" [068" |BLp*|Gor* 9% |p] Ipcaglest® jozes jogs’ |Pige | &

a z9Keus) yuna oP see ANS y'S GL‘0 0°06 0°62 acl Les LL |6°L8)861' rea. = |zep|c6E* ofe (89 lpsogiZes* eae’ jorss BLY" 6

ulayye aug aug. eS MS °*MS 6 16 {@LZ BOLIL'S 18°L |T<68/90G° |9¢6°6S/ GOP ‘IFZr6s OLLILSS 10°F 18°GQ/8L1°—|99E 6S|FFS “6G/91S I

is = = eee 2e ia) gm Bre oir) 5 = Boze Ts ie Stole SZ 9

: Se 15 5 EE] SF) o (BElSeebiesez! & | 2S (PSPS Ee Zelzslfz] & | es |oesi=se| 2

2 : 5. St ae SP FP sa] 38 fee ssiBeetice! & fet PMs spas) See esas! & LE" 8 alskat o

F E die eee S5) 85 [a aisesc/eea3] 8 [ea l2eceee [owleciecec! 8 |eaFl Sslasal =

i : 4 ; - map Se ols a) PISSSaR IAS] ylSols st o S

ge) 8 Pal a) Serle] & ee (ele el ale) Se [os & | Ge | Seite] &

; : ‘ 3 ie

*SsoMeII XA °

"Taye M *pulAr OJOUIOWIOY,L, “W *d } 3¥ SUOTIeAIOSGO ‘W *V QT 38 SUOITBAIOSGO 3

Jeysisey ; >

‘9e9 | ‘Ang fo yquopy ay? sof ‘0jjna}0y ‘a0fQ hossp ayz 10 day ‘uagsihaxy y09160)0.L0a,0 fT

JOURNAL

EE AS LAT ECS OCTET Y.

No. 56.—August, 1836.

1.—Ezxtracts from the Mourr (the Ocean), a Turkish work on Naviga-

tion in the Indian Seas. Translated and communicated by JosrpuH Von

Hammer, Baron Purestaut, Aulic Counsellor, and Prof. Orient.

Lang. at Vienna, Hon. Memb. As. Socy. &c. &c.

[Continued from vol. iii. p. 553.]

[ We know not how to express sufficient gratitude to our illustrious cor-

respondent for his courtesy in allowing these pages to be the medium of

publication of this curious manuscript of Sipi AL1 Capupan. The manner

in which it was discovered by the Baron at Naples, after 30 years’ fruitless

inquiry, was described in the preamble of the former extract. The value

set upon it by this eminent oriental scholar, induced him to offet to

translate the whole for the Oriental Translation Committee ; but through

some accident, (we can ascribe it to no other cause,) an offer so generous

has remained unacknowledged. ‘‘ Without doubt,” our correspondent

writes, ‘ the book would deserve much more the care of the Committee than

many of minor interest published by it; but although to my volunteer I got

no more answer than to my offer of an edition and translation of Wassor,

agar hdéjat bished, asthe Persians say, and with the assistance and remarks

of some Indian sea-faring gentlemen on the parts already translated, I

hope to send chapter after chapter to your Indian Journal, and thus we

shall be independent of the Committee.”

On the last occasion we derived some little assistance from the Nakho-

das of the Arabic vessels, in recognizing the places alluded to in the Sec-

tion on the monsoons. The same plan we have been prevented, in a great

measure, from following now, through the absence of these traders, who

only arrive here towards the end of the south-west monsoon (August-

September) and return with the setting in of the north-east wind in Fe-

bruary-March. We have, however, been able to trace most of the principal

names on the map, and have marked them in foot notes. The catalogue of

the names of islands in the Red Sea would be—and may, we hope, still be—

of great use to the officers of the Indian navy now engaged in its survey.

449 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave.

We have discovered many of the islands and capes mentioned by Sr’p1’ in

the large manuscript chart sent roundfor the use of the steamer Forbes in

its passage up the Red Sea: but by far thegreater number of islets remain

unnamed ; and to them, with a little local inquiry, Si’pr’’s list might

doubtless be easily applied. The book is also of great service in pointing

out the maritime channels of Arab commerce, at the period perhaps of its

highest prosperity, before the Portuguese, the Dutch, and the English had

diverted the majority of the Europe supply to the newly discovered route

by the Cape of Good Hope. :

The Baron* is in hopes that the presence of sea-faring Arabs will also

enable us to assist him in understanding the prior and more difficult chap.

ters of the work, wherein is discussed the manner of ‘‘ making the pole,”

(ule,) or taking the altitude of the polar star. Here, however, we have

little chance of success. The present navigators have adopted the im-

proved methods of Europe: —they take their latitude by the sun, and

with the modern sextant ; and the richer merchants even provide their

vessels with chronometers:—not that the Arabs yet possess translated

tables or ephemerides by which to work the course themselves ; but they

almost universally employ an English sailing master, to whose superior

intelligence they implicitly confide.

Nothing then have we been able to learn of the instrument used by the

early navigators in taking their latitude from the circumpolar stars ; or

of the measure of an are called issabé (es~!) inch, and its subdivision

into eight zdms (¢!5;!) We find however on inquiry that the latter term

is still applied to terrestrial measurement, and is well known to

nautical people of the present day as the fifth part of a geographical

degree, (twelve nautica] miles.) Though this measure does not at all

accord with the sailing distances quoted by S1’p1’ Capupan, from well

known places, it will be seen presently to correspond exactly with the value

of the celestial inch or issabé as deduced from the internal evidence of the

work itself.

The Baron Hammer in his private letter to us writes thus: “‘ Concerning

the measure of elyj! the first section of the IlIfrd. chapter explains as

follows: ‘ The zém, lis is either the practical one, ustres or the rheto.

rical, Use tbolt 3 The practical is one of the eight parts in which day

and night are divided : the rhetorical is the eighth part of an inch, tio! in

* It seems we erred in giving that designation to Counsellor VON HAMMER in

1833; but our announcement proved prophetic ; the Emperor having conferred the

title on him in December 1835, upon his succeeding to the little state of Hoinfeld,

bequeathed to him and his male descendants by the late Countess PURGSTALL

(Cranstoun). The present paper is a proof that this accession of honors will not

detract from the zeal of his Oriental studies.—Ep.

+ We are inclined to think that this word smile! istilahiy, is an error of the

transcriber, and that it should be us) bo)” ustur ldbiy, appertaining to the divi-

sions of the astrolabe.—ED.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 443

the ascension, elss)] and descension bih='} of the stars. For exam-

ple, if you go north and make the star USO>, eight zim; it is ele-

vated one inch: and if you go south, it is by eight zéms, one inch depress-

ed 2s”, ‘This is the whole section on the measure of the eli (plural,

e!53)) an explanation which, however, helps me not a bit to understand

the true measure of a zém, in the reckoning of the ship’s course so fre-

quently employed in the subsequent chapters. Nor have I been able to

obtain any explanation from our astronomers.”

We will now venture to offer the explanation which has occurred to our-

selves from perusal of the present translated chapter of voyages, and the

above extract conjointly.

1. The zdm, in practical or vulgar parlance, is said to be the eighth

part of the day and night. This, doubtless, applies to the nautical division

of the twenty-four hours into 8 watches, generally prevailing among ori-

ental nations, and exactly corresponding with the 8 pahars of the Hindus*.

2. Again, the zém is seen above to be the eighth part of the ordinary

inch or issuba ; as the jo, or yava of the Hindus, is the eighth of their

angil : and the /ine of Europeans is the eighth of their inch : it is, in fact,

the vulgar subdivision by two and two, both of the unit of measure and

of time. Perhaps, indeed, zém may be a mere corruption of jo.

It would seem, that to suit ordinary capacities, both the issabé and the

zém had been transferred to the arc of the rude quadrant or astrolabe

used by the Arab seamen, in lieu of the more scientific division into de-

grees and minutes. Or it is very possible that in still ruder times the al-

titude of the polar star above the horizon was actually measured by fin-

gers’ breadths, the hand being held out at the natural arms’ length in

front of the face: for the measure of the arc thus subteuded would nearly

agree with the value of the issabd derived from other considerations.

The actual value of the issabé in degrees and minutes may be readily

found from the latitudes, or polar altitudes, of known places extracted

from Si’pi’s work. Thus the elevation of the pole Cape Guardafui is

always quoted at.4} inch; while at Jedda it is called 10 inches ; differ-

ence, 5Zinches. The difference of latitude by our mode of reckoning is

21° 28’—12°, 00’= 9’ 28’; which gives nearly 1°37’ for the tssabd or

inch. Now, as before stated, we were informed by an Arab Muallim that

the zém was 12 of our minutes, or 5 zéms=1 degree. Therefore, 8 zéms

or 1 issabé should be equal to 96’; or 1° 36’,—so close an accordance

with the foregoing result, as to leave no doubt of the value of the issabé

and zim being 96’ and 12’ respectively on the celestial arc.

It still remains to explain the divisions of the lower are of their rude

instrument, and the kids, or point at which the readings of the upper and

lower index coincide, as also the point whence the divisions commence on

both quadrants, or what may be called their index error.

* The subdivision of the pahar into eight gharis, is like the ‘‘ eight bells’? into

which our nautical watch is counted off.

3M 2

444 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave.

In the description of the islands of the Arabic coast, it will be seen that

as the readings of the upper limb increase, those of the lower quadrant

decrease, their sum being constantly 144 issabd.

Thus, at Saibén, (Loheia,) the upper reading is 63, lower 74, sum 144.

at Jedda, ditto LORNA 41, 144.

It is evident, therefore, that the kids occurs at 74 inch, or 7 issabd

1 zdém, the half of 144.

Again, for the zero point we have the following data :—

true lat. issaba zero point

By the Jedda latitude, .. ........21° 28’— 10 % 1° 36’ (= 16° 00’) = 59 28/

By the Guardafui, latitude ,........ 12 00 —4—§X 1 36 (= 6 36) =5 24

By Darwesh, or Dorish, ....7.....18 30 —8 X 1 36 (= 12 48) = 5 42

By Loheia or Saiban, ~< ..j....<.-. 15 41 — 63 x 1 36 (= 10 48) = 4 53

By Wasaliat, (Fossailiat,).. ......17 42 — 73 * 1 36 (= 12 24) —5 18

TEU D EIS eign Qaida He UCT Soo Mar 19 31,.— 83 X 1/36 (= 13) 32) 559

By Haseek sinave, (Harik-simadr), 19 50 — 83 X 1 36 (= 13 56) =5 54

The average index error or zero point is thus found to be 5° 31’,

or in round terms 53 degrees, to be added to altitudes taken by the issabd

scale. The only conjecture we can offer as to the origin of such an arbi-

trary arrangement is, that the zero has been fixed at the lowest elevation

at which it is safe to trust to the measurement by the polar star: so that

mariners, on finding polaris fall below 0 inches, would then know they

should take their latitude by Farkadain, or g and y urse minoris.

The zero point of the under quadrant may be easily deduced from the

foregoing to be at 28° 18’ below the horizontal line. This we may suppose

was the highest elevation of the polar star observable by navigators in the

Red Sea or in the Persian gulph. Indeed the latitude of Suez and of the

mouths of the Euphrates, the most northerly ports visited by their ships,

being 30°, the difference between this and 28° 18’ is very nearly equal to

the north polar distance of polaris (1° 42’): and in the period from January

to July it would be only the inferior meridional passage that could be

observed. It is generally supposed that the early astronomers regarded

the polar star as stationary, and did not trouble themselves to attain even

the accuracy we are giving them credit for; but an expression, which occurs

in a following page, shows that this was not the case ; since it directs, that

“if it be not time to take the polar star, then another star is to be substi-

tuted.’

As a proof, however, that no great accuracy was attainable,it may be re-

marked that the two stars called by the Arabs Furkadain (8 and y urse

minoris) are accounted to have the same altitude; whereas in reality there

is a difference of no less than three degrees in their declination ; but it is

probable that the altitude was taken constantly by either the upper or the

lower star, although we have no data here to decide this point.

The following table will be found very useful for the conversion of issabas

into degrees and minutes. In it the quadrantal difference of the Far-

kadain is assumed at 6§ issabd, or 11°-+ 5° 30’, = NPD 16° 30', which is

nearly the average north polar distance of the two stars. "

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 445

Blevation of Polaris. Elevation of Farka-

North Latitude. [at his inferior meridional passage ?] dain.

Degrees. Minutes. |By upper quadrant. |By lower quadrant.| By upper quadrant.

Issaba. Zam, Issaba. Zdém. Issaba. Zam.

0 0 3 33

0 54 4 0

2 30 5 0

4 6 6 0

5 30 ~ 0 0 14 2 6 7

7 6 1 0 13 2 7 7

8 42 2 0 12 2 8 7

10 18 3 0 1] 2 9 7

1] 54 4 0 10 2 10 7

13 30 5 0 9 Z 11 u

15 6 6 0 8 2 12 Ul

16 54 7 1 (ki jas) 7 1

18 18 8 0 6 2

19 54 9 0 5 2

21 30 10 0 4 2

23 6 11 0 3 2

24 42 12 0 2 2

26 18 13 0 1 2

28 18 14 2 0 0

With regard to the value of the zém in terrestrial measurement, 12’ or

12 nautical miles* would perhaps be applicable to many of the instances

in S1’pv’s work ; for example, where he directs that in running down the

Malabar coast the navigators should keep five zdéms distant from the shore,

or 72 miles, which is the common practice. But to suit other cases, the zém

must beassumed at halfadegree or upwards ; and this is probably attributa-

ble to the very erroneous notions of the longitudinal distances of places pre-

valent before good charts were formed. With the aid of a map, however,

and the bearings given by our author, it is easy to describe the track of

his several voyages. We have thus derived the probable measurements

given in the following notes, in which we have also given the names of

the places on our charts where they were recognizable.— Ed. ]

THE NINTH CHAPTER.

Containing an explanation of some Islands and Voyages, and precautions,

the knowledge of which is requisite for Navigators in the Indian Seas.

First Szotion.—The islands of the Arabic coastt.

The island Okbdn', north of which the island Katdma?, afterwards

Sil Noban’, the island Sdnat, then the two islands Badhidin®, the envi-

rons of which are shallow; after them the islands Zithelath®, the

J isk A BLS : we deo Praag HE ws star2y A os ,d

* Has the terrestrial zdm any connection with the jojan or yojana of the Hindus,

which is estimated at somewhat more than 10 miles?

+ This enumeration of islands commences from near Loheia, lat. 15° 41’ on

the Arabic coast, in front of which lie the islands of Okbdne, Kotama, and Loban,

with Camaran a little to the south. Most of the rest are not to be found by

name on Capt. Exwon’s new chart,—Eb.

446 Translation of the Mohit, [Aue.

island Hawai, the island Haula®*, which is situated behind Hawal ;

the islands Zé Kassdr?+ through which great ships cannot pass;

behind Zé Kassdr, the island Mokammar:t, and behind that the

island Hodatfes§, on which are afew trees, and no passage between

them on account of a great number of rocks ; the island Hodaife is the

last towards Bakil’ onthe seaside : the water is here very unclean. On

the east side of them is a small island called Masad’, but no passage

between them; behind them the island Jihdn el Kebir*||, and near it on

the nether side the island Jihdn ess-ssaghir’{ : the sea between them is

full of shallows, to east of them the island Sdsoh'’ whichis a greatmoun-

tainous island: on the western side of it a shallow called amariya'. Ap-

proaching from the seaside the island Sdsoh is in sight before the

amariya ; on this shoal the depth of the water is five fathoms (kuldj.)

Between the two above said islands the great and little Jihdn is also an

amariya or shallow. Be it known that the cape of Jazar Farsdn'?**

lies north between Sharja'® and Jazd'* on the sea side are the two

islands Zt Khardb's++ and Zi Saldb\*. Sdsoh is on the sea side of

these two islands between south and west. On the sea side of Sdsoh

are two islands, each of which is called Dohr jihdn (back of the

world.) Be it known that the island of Sei] Mothan'"tt is the end of

the Persian islands: on the sea side and north side there is no coast

except that of the island of Irak Ozab'*. The back of Jazar Farsan'’§§,

and the unclean places are on the side of Irak Ozdb ; towards the east

side lies the back of the island Rakab”; the most eastern of all is the

island Jozién"', from thence Borrassh” is in sight. There is a small

) 3 Comer oo o wo

: Jy a Vm pad. o * Avo 3 ARS SD ® st © hase * SST ye

* rail Ge 10 Spb 1] & pal 12 wauyi ym 13 bo yi es

5 Oy Er 16 ‘ , 18 os 19 Nese

20 $, 21 we ; 22 ie

* Howali? on Abyssinian coast, 16° 30’, can hardly be intended.

+ Rasher ? below Camaran ; the R. may be miswritten for K. (See p. 449).

¢ Ras Majarmla? 14° 30’. 7 there may be small islands so called from their

§ Hodeidah Cape ? 14° asf proximity to these capes.

|| Zebayer islands, 15° 2': the Z is probably a miswriting of K.

{ Gebel Zogar, or Zeghir of map, on the 14th parallel of latitude.

** Theran? 17° 12’. The word Farsdén is applied farther on to the Abys-

sinian coast,—it is probably an error of transcription.

tt Gorab, 17° 10°. tt Mutharhane, 17° 287.

§§ Perhaps the Cape Jazar Farsdn which is mentioned above.—H.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 447

bank' called Akdaf?. After the island Set! al Motahan there is

nothing but sea, but on the border of the sea at the left are two sandy

islands called Fossailidt?*. At their lower extremity are the islands

Jaztra-i Somratt and Zahra’. Be it known that on the sea side of

Rakab’ is a shallow in which the ground is visible, but is eight fathoms

deep. Some say that parts of it are impassable for ships ; this amariya

or shallow is called Ork’ Fossailidt ; after (south of?) the Fossailidt

are three islands called Jamas*t. On the sea side towards the

north is a great island called Zokak*§, and on the south side a long

bank, on the outside of which are the breakers!®, called Tihdl"||

Merir'*, but the water has eight fathoms. This island and the above

mentioned lie south on the sea side of mount Ssabaya°Y. From

Tihal Merir in the direction of the sea side and towards the last is a

Mira (shallow) ealled Irki Isa (Jesus’s vein :) the shallowest water is

there two fathoms anda half, and the deepest eight fathoms. All these

amariye (shallows not to be used) are in the Arabic sea. After

Zokak is a great island called Maassaba** on which are some trees ;

on its beginning” is a small ridge” called Bodér. After Maassaba

are four great islands, called Bahr-ul- Kabir, (the great sea;) the two

most southerly are called Lam and Han *: they are situated on the

sea side of mount Ssabaya ; after them is the ridge Ablaj”++ ; on the

south-west of it is a great bank” called Shobi Yahya; on the north

side of the island Ab/aj is a mountainous bank, which is a long

ridge, and extends till to the ridge of Kimdri, and is next the island

Faraye*. Between them is a Ritka® ; that is tosay, arock. On the

sea side of the mountainous ridge is the island Darwish*tt. On the

sea and north side isa bank” called Helya*§§, and on the north side a

great island called Shobain™||\|; after it the island Mushka®Q, and

Patt 5) IS) ? colglaas Tayom © bry OS) T Gye 8 pweyem

GH; Gb "leh “ye Uleta apane Melee

Pr Ge a lel nd * stunk ola

OEE a oc 27 & |) 26 29 & 30 ine

gpd 48S, pay d nat ~ dsl ed Sib

* Wussaleat, of Capt. ELwon’s map, in latitude 17° 427.

+ Simer, east of ditto. t Shab el jurmah, 17° 34’.

§ Zoogah, 18° 5’. || Elalthaller ? 18° 157.

4] A mountain on the coast? Gebel Tase Sharme?

** Massuba, 18° 14’, tt Aboo Lelf (on the shore.)

tt Dorish, 18° 31’. §§ Halli? S. of Coomefiddah.

\I|| Shabbane, 18° 44’. 9{ Mooshka.

448 ; Translation of the Mohit, [Aue.

west to it lies the island Shrka'*, which is alsoa great island; on the

sea side a great bank’ called Shob Sowaidi*; on the north and land

side of the island Shtkan is the island Zé Shajih*t. On the western

side is a shallow® called Irk-ul-oytra® ; next to it a segment’ called

Kitaei Zaidi®. Afterwards on the sea and north side an island called

Tajedda°t, and on the sea and north side of this a ridge'’§ called

Zohrai Kassr", and an island called Takshef”: on its sea side a ridge”

called Zohrat Takshefi+; in the neighbourhood of this are great

banks’ called Dakhakhin®. Beit known, that between the islands of

Dének || and Tajedda both are in sight, if there is no hazy weather’’.

These (of Dakhakhin) run down to Danek and Tajedda towards the

west; from the Dakhakhin you see the island Shobaz-zokdr’{ ; these

islands lie from Ddnek tewards the coast of Yaman, that is to say,

south, on one side of Shobaz-zokdr is the island Wissil Omm Dahresh” :

on the land side of Danek towards Syria, that is to say, north, are in

some distance some segments (portions of rock?! ?) called Jbn Saaid”.

The islands called Danek are three: the first to the south is called

Shobaz-zokar, and the next northern one Khabire™, on the sea side of

it is a segment™ called Omm Moen*, north of which lies Danek, the

greatest of all; round it are four banks®. On the landsideis a

passage between them and Dének ; they are called Mahdhan”, Makh-

ref’, Korb”, and Kebla®. After Ddnek are four islands called Bahrez-

zihar™ ; the name of the first is Matata®**, of the second Jodair®++, of

the third Marma™tt, and of the fourth Zohrai Marmd. On the

land side of them towards N.N.E. is a segment” called Zeinab®,

and here N. the Shob Salim, a long bank ; from here towards E. S.

KE. are three islands in sight. After Zihdr follow two banks and

two called Homais” ; north of them are no islands, but only some

Bees enn ° CO S2 9 Leenrct = ests : dye ; Bypdall 5ye " ashs

fe: dy saab : Shox? i. Sy 1 y23% 4 Pe ages “re = BAS & palo

yy ene ° opalene 17 cle ee 7 SH aera 20 Pon! yee,

a 23 bate 24 Pee 25 wtp! 26 ee:

9 w =20 we 31 > 32 ke 33

Ly? alss he! = (bth. it

34 5 ae

yv0 oP ha ot wb; oe eee

* Shaker, 180 53’. + Doshagea. ;

t Tegdah, 18° 58’. § Marked dangerous patches in chart.

|| Dahnac, 19° 32’. Q Shab Assugga, 19° 22’.

** Mutatoo, 199 45’. +f Jedere. tt Murrmah, 2 isl.

1836-] a Turkish work on Navigation. 449

segments, the names of which are Rehal', Majradtb?, and Hakan’;

the last lies to the land side and north to Majradib ; on the western

side of Hakan is a segment called Magharriya* above Kaidani ;

after it comes Tofiya®*, after it the segment Ssordm’{, and after-

wards Shob Kaméni*t, which is in the height Mantaj?. Afterwards

Khoshaat"§ on the height of Ssdmfma'|, after it Irk-ghordb°Y,

after it Mesmari***, which is on the height of the Black Cape, Radsol-

aswadt+. These islands are the last of the Arabian seas.

Seconp Section. Of the islands on the Persiant{ coast.

The first are those of the islands Dahlak"*§§ situated south; the first

of these islands is Mokaidah*, afterwards Mahlatan'*, then the island

Zibbar", afterwards Zuikarsh Bent Aadai®: on the sea side of Zubbar and

Zikarsh is a bank" called Zalfokda®. After Zikarsh is the island

Sifala, afterwards Balaja”; on the sea side of it is the ridge Bent

Tamarkass” ; after it comes great Hdteya and little Hdteya*4|||| ; after-

wards Dozima®, afterwards Taraza”, afterwards Dalikaf”, afterwards -

Delfaidal, afterwards Nahali®, afterwards Ghobdri®, afterwards

Jadlab", afterwards Kabihi®?; between these two is Makhddha

Bent Antar® ; afterwards Harmail*; this is the last of the northern

islands on the seaside; but there are some islands on the western

side near the shore. After Harmal towards the land side, and N.

the island Rumiat*, afterwards Auwdli Bent Hatem®4Q, afterwards

Auwdli Shura”, afterwards Ssil Katin®, afterwards Bent Alawa*,

: tae ae, . we * be pRv0 : yl d.3 . asalo . er?

jbeS Krai . : CO ON Eee tl Lee ee) te wo) bye i ies

% Colmes td as le a wrbl "0 is ie pie

° aernt ld allaw 7 bel * Lab alendy

rece. seppeeheat “deey 5 _ Bj yo eS SSN ® Jdsalo” foe

30 31

hs we Sm ? ot aes prbcisnrdidolse oe alee o>

elec placed de yd idhe abi ne

* Tutteffah, 21° 0. + Serome Cliff. + Cobane. § Ul Cussar Shamier.

\| Simama. q Urgo Gorab. ** Moosmaree.

tt The Cape immediately south of Jeddah.

tt By Persian it may be presumed Abyssinian must be intended. Perhaps

who 5 is a miscopy for yaaa Habshdn or wig ys) African.

§§ Dhalac, near Massua. None of the islands of this groupe can be traced by

the names here given, until we come to the northernmost.

ill! Two large islands north of Dhalac.

{J Howalee Huttoob and Shoerah, 16° 30’

450 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave.

afterwards the island of Dafna'. This island situated on the land side

and N. is the last of the islands Dahlek. If you proceed from Harmal

N. E. one day and night, your course leads you to the islands of

Tahyrdi*, which are seven islands, four of which are situated on the

sea side and three on the land side; one of those situated on the

land side is called Delkas?, one Bent Hatem®, one Tastahel*, and one

Rédka® ; the three on the land side are called Zalkordb’ ; after the

four islands situated on the sea side are on the north two islands, a

great one called Mosdmara’t, and a small one called Korb’. On

the western side of Mosdmara, as far as the eye can reach, are two

great islands and sandy shoals called Loka®{ and Dilsak!®; after

them is on the north a great island called Zilkefla'', and further on

thrée islands are seen. Next to them and at some distance from the

shore near Zi’l asela'? is an island called Torinbo'%§. After Zilkefla

on the sea and N. side is a small island called Tamarshah''||, there

is a bank'® and on it a rock resembling a chair. After Tamarshah

north is the island, little Bér-Miisa'®q], which is a little round island,

on which are some tombs and trees and shrubs of tooth-pikes. To

the N. of it, and at some distance, is the island Bér-Misa Kabir'”**,

a great island on which large trees are growing ; afterwards, towards

the land side, in the direction of W. N. W. is an’islandcalled Barkat'*tt,

and in the vicinity of it a bank'® which is called Shobi Riéimdn®.,

From Barkat in the direction of true west is an island called Misa

Maitbén”'. Beit known, that if one of these two islands is seen,

the other is hidden; but if you pass between them, both are seen.

After Bdr-Miisa Kabir to the N. is the island Hindjodr*tt; this is

the last of the northern islands on the seaside. On the south side of

these islands is a great bank called the long one”, and after it a

small one. If you steer from Hindjodr true west, you come to the

port Masrika*, which is at the height of Sawaktn®§§.

; us0 é wild * ebourd) * alias » aS}, , 11,9 i Spa lunve

: 3 as, an Sold - - Kaila e Mid gals

14 Ma 15 % 16 . 17 He

i hacer Ras ee Song y rbd 1 aug Sy

19 9

20 Meron 22 : 23 =

24 K pane 25 oy! i

* Dahrat Abbeed, &c. 180 15’, t+ Mussarmroo, 180 50’.

{ Locha and Undeesellec. § Juttat Tromba. || Timershear, 18, 56’.

] Barmosa Segera. ** In lat. 19013’. +f Barkoot and its Shab.

tt Hindee Geedam. §§ Suakin, one of the chief ports.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 451

Tux Turrp Sscrion.—Of Voyages and indications of the coasts being

near.

First Voyace from Bdbolmandam' to mount Zokar? and Sai-

ban ; you go first in the direction N. W. by N. half a zdm',

then steering N. N. W. you come to cape Zokar, and mount Ard?

is in sight on the left side; if from Zokar you wish to proceed to

Kamran’, and you steer N. by W. you come to Rakba’t. Here

you see for the first time the island Zasha*t. The course from

Zokar to Saibdn goes in the direction N. W. by which you come

first to Abauel?, and then to Saiban§, which are seen on the right.

Be it known, that if you steer true west you come to Mokaidah||, and if

you take from Saban the direction W. by N. you come to the two

Hatia (the great and small one.) If from Saibdn you follow the

direction W. N. W. you come to Bent Antar and Harmal, which are

islands of the Persian (African) coast; from Saiban going straight to

the pole you come to Badhiain: from Saibdn going N. by W. you come

to the two islands Jehdn (the great and small one), which are on the

Arabian coast.

Seconp Voyracs from Saibdén (Loheia) to Jedda.

From Saiban to Jedda with an unfavorable wind, the voyage is

performed from four inches to four inches by degrees in the follow-

ing way. First from Satbdn where the pole wants « quarter to

seven inches{], you steer four zims N. W. and afterwards N. W. by

N. If the contrary wind is very strong, the course to be steered is

E. by N. and true east, or near it; if the wind is a middle one, you

steer N. E. or N. E. by N. If in your measurement the inferior

quadrant" gives an inch** and a quarter, the ship is on a spot

distant seven inches (measurement) from the pole. If in this place

the northern wind ceases, you may lay to or tack. If it blows a

hard northern wind, you look for the Arabic coast, and go te Badhiain"

or near it. On the seaside of Badhiain is a shoal (amaria) ; that is

to say, a place where you see the ground of the sea; with a weak

northerly wind you go to Mokammar, or in the vicinity of it. The

said islands are one near the other. If the pole is seven inches and

a quarter, and the inferior quadrant seven inchest}, and a strong

northern breeze, you go to Hsman and Mesed; and if there is but

* pdsolloly * ja aw a el; : | ye 4 wl oS K &A3 Bie;

Pde! tle ugitiatguye |? ytnedy

* Assaban of maps, off Loheia, 15° 41’; long. 42° 52’.

+ Saddle island in the Zebayers? + Rasher? § Or Loheia.

|| Dhalac island. { See introductory remarks, = Lat. 16o 18’.

** This should be 7Z inches. Tt Lat 17° 6’.

3N2

452 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave.

little of. a northern wind, you go to Jihén and Ssail-ol-mathanat'*.

If the pole is made by seven inches and half, and the inferior quad-

rant wants a quarter to seven, and the wind blows strong from the

north, you go from thence to Khobat?, where some shoals are seen ;

with a little northern breeze you go to Fossailidtt ; if the pole wants

a quarter to eight, and the inferior quadrant shows six and a half, and

the northern wind blows strong, you go to Fossailidt, where it is

the best to remain, because on its sea and north side is infinite rub-

bish, that is to say, unclean places; with a weak northern wind you

go to Maassabah*t or to the island Lam‘. If the pole is made by

eight inches§, and the inferior quadrant marks six and a half (4 ?), and

the wind blows strong from the north, you go to Darwishi|| or

near it; if there is but little northern wind you go to Zoo Shajeeh],

where much precaution is required on account of the bank Sowaia#’.

If the pole is made by eight inches a quarter, and the inferior quad-

rant marks six inches, and the wind blows strong, you go to Dakha

Khein’ or to the island Takshef* or near it. With a small breeze

you go to Dének. If the pole is made with eight inches and a half,

and the inferior quadrant marks six inches** less a quarter, and the

wind blows strong you go to Danek, and with a small northern wind

to Hareik Semar®. If the pole wants one quarter to nine inches,

and the inferior quadrant marks five and a half (Lat. 19° 30’), and the

wind blows strong, you come to Hareik Semdr, and with a small

northern breeze to Baher-zehdr", with a small northern breeze you

come to Homais', where you stop. If the pole is made by nine

inches and a quarter, and the inferior quadrant shows five inches, you

go to Homais, with a small northern breeze you go to Réhel'?, or

near it. If the pole is made by nine inches and a half, and the wind

blows strong, you go to Majrddtb*++ or near it. With a small

northern breeze you come to Ssorizim'*}{ or near it; ifthe pole wants

a. quarter to ten, and the inferior quadrant shows four and a half,

and the wind blows strong, you go to Ssoriim, and with a small

northern wind you come to Jedda. If the pole is ten inches$§, and

Matick) Jno Aue sk thea ¢ ¢ > yd Us dagaw

° ° 8 safe 9 - .

a upmlee a BN SN eae Foy 10 hall ys? M dem 12 Jal,

13 eed) par? 4 (x?

* Matharhane. + Wassaliat. + Massubah. § 180 18’. || Dorish.

§ Doshagea. ** Lat. 19° 6’. Dahnak is in 190 31’. Vid. sup.

+t Maharabi of the map, 20° 14’. tt Serome, on the coast of Elwon, or

Sarum island of HorsBuRGH, 21° 9. §§ Lat. 21° 30’.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 453

the inferior quadrant shows four inches and a quarter, you go right

east four z@ms towards Jedda, if God please. Be it known that in

the sea of Jedda you find as you find corals in the western

seas.

Turrp Voracs from Saibdn (Loheia) to Sawéken*.

The way in which you perform a voyage from Saibdn to Sawdken

is the following. From the place where the pole is made with seven

inches} you proceed in the same manner, that is to say: first, if the

northern gale is strong, you steer KE. 8. E. and 8. E. by E.; if there

is but little wind, N. W. by W.; but the true way from Saibdn to

Sawdken is by Jedda. If the northern wind blows strong you go

to Mokaidah}, and with a small breeze to Hawateb' (the Hatyas) or

near them. Be it known, that on the sea side of the islands of Dahlek?

is an amaria (shoal) and an ahja’, that is to say, topook* or rocks

which are not seen; the most remarkable of them is the Ahja

Tamerkass’ on which the water is more or less than three fathoms

deep; great precaution is necessary in all these places. If the pole

is made by seven inches and a quarter, and the inferior quarter marks

seven inches, and the northern wind blows strong, you go to the

Hawateb, with a small northern breeze to Harmal and Bent Antar®,

or near it. If the pole is made by seven inches and a half, and if the

inferior quadrant shows seven inches less a quarter, and the wind

blows strong, you go to Bent Antar ; with a small northern wind to

Harmal, or it is seen at the left hand. Be it known, that from Harmal

to the pole or N. by W. two rhumbs and a half is a shoal Merat

Aart’ called Harbobat*, of which great precaution is to be ta ken.

Going along the coast and the pole wanting a quarter to eight, and

the inferior quadrant showing six inches and a half§, and the wind

blowing strong, you turn to Torbet Khassizs° or to the north side of

it: if the pole is eight inches and the inferior quadrant shows six

inches and a quarter||, and the northerly wind blows strong, you go

to Batn Hobdb," witha small northern wind to Aantab". If the pole

is made by eight inches and a quarter, and the wind blows strong,

you go to Mandel, and with a small northern breeze to Jein’® or near

it. Ifthe pole is made by eight inches and a quarter you go true west

‘elm ; SOUR Se Le] a yak e Vas peils =] © yAhe endy

" cssecsl)< Pee eg se ihe U2yas isi wk by eenhic

12 o>

* Suakin by Captain Exwon’s chart lies in Lat. 19° 4’, Long. 37° 30’,

+ Lat, 16042’. +t Dhalac. § Lat. 179 54’, {| 18° 18.

454 Translation of the Mohit, [Aua.

to Tahtiat' or it is seen on the right; if the north wind is but

weak you go to Tamarsheh* or Zilkafla ; on the left hand at some

distance are seen some islands, as Mosamara and Lauk@’+. If the

pole wants a quarter to nine inches, and the inferior quadrant shows

five and a half, and the north wind blows strong, you go to Tamarsheh or

Zilkafla, and with a small breeze to Bar i Misa ssaghir}. If from

Bar i Misa ssaghir you steer true west towards the continent, you

go from Sawdkor or Bir i Misa Kalir to Matiyat’. If the pole

is nine inches, and the inferior quadrant shows five inches and a

quarter§, and the wind blows strong, you go to Barkat* or near it ;

from Hind Jodr’*|| true west you go to Maserkai® §] ; this port is on the

upper side of Sawdéken. If the pole is nine inches and a quarter, and

the inferior quadrant shows five inches, you go with a strong wind

from Hind Jodr to Sawaken; with a small breeze to the superior

part of Sawdéken : where is nothing but mountains. Mark that if in

these parts you go tacking with a north wind, the rule is to hold the

middle between the Arabian and Persian (African) coast, and that if you

side to one of them you never attain your object. On the south side

the bank Rés-eshabak’** called Héwi® is opposite the island Tamarsheh.

On the north side the end of Shabak is opposite Bari Misa.

Fourtu Voyace from Jedda to Aden.

The way of the voyage from Jedda to Aden is the following. If

you start from Mesmdri you go two rhumbs{}+ 8. S. W., afterwards

two rhumbs 8S. by W., afterwards two rhumbs to the south pole, turn

then and steer 5S. E. by E. from thence you steer S. E. to Zokartt.

From Zokar you run one rhumb S. by W. afterwards S.-S. E. to

Babel Mandam ; from thence one rhumb in the direction E. S. E.,

then E. by 8. to A’ara’, from thence you follow the direction E. by

N. to Adan in Yaman, which is a celebrated port, and is commonly

called the Pearl Aden'’, though there are no pearls at Adan ; but as it

is a great port, this name arises probably from its trade in pearls; in

the same way you call the cocoanuts, which come from Bengal Kabi-

lian, because they come by the way of Kabal. Cornelians of Yaman

are found at Aden in immense quantities.

wis? f kK; Ng whirbe ; Sty * da ddD : eK

4 Sh dN oly 3 US ;'d 9 $y 10 dye

* Timershear, 18056’. + Dahreat Abged? { Barmosa Segere, 19° 3’,

190 54’; Shab Barkoot is in 19° 14’ || Hindee Geedam, 19° 21”.

{] Mersa Arakea, on the coast, 20° 13’. ** Ul Shebek, 180 44’,

tt Perhaps zams. tt Gebel Zoogar, 14° 0’.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 455

. Firrn Voyace from Sawdken to Aden.

The way Sawdken to Adan is the following: The voyage may be

performed in two different ways. From the 180th day till about the

230th of the Yazdajerdian year*, (beginning with the Nauriz ;) that

is to say, from the 45th day till to the 95th day of the Jelaulian year,

when the sea-faring shuts ; the voyage begins from underneath Shabaka'

and you follow the coast till cape Mérdt*} ; from Mérat two zéms

true east, then two zdms E. by S., then two zdms*? E. S. E.; from

thence turning to S. E. you come to Satbdn ; if from Saibdn you wish

to make Kamrdn, you go true east, till you see the islands of Koféma*

and Okbdn® ; from thence to Kamrdn is the Sséheb Darke Robbdn® ?

If you sail from Rakbat one zaum towards the south pole you come

to the mountain of Zokar§, and from thence you proceed in the same

manner as it has been mentioned before.

The second way of performing this voyage is with the monsoon which

sets in with the 280th day of the Yazdajerdian year (12th Aug.) which

is the 145th of the Jeldlian, or near it. Sailing from Katka’|| you steer

right east, because in this season the south-western winds prevail.

If you do not set out below Shabaka, set out from above it, going

between the islands and Shabaka, till you are passed the sea islands,

little Bér-Misa4] and such ones, you follow the course of true east.

As soon as the islands disappear you sail S. E. till the pole is marked

seven inches and a quarter; you go then 8S. E. by E. to Saiban.

This is the course with a favourable wind, but if it is not favourable

it is quite different.

Stxtu Vorace from Zaila’** to Kujurat.

The way of performing it is the following. After having left Aibdn9

and after having passed the unclean places, you steer N.E. by E. till you

see the mountains of Aden; from thence true east, till you lose sight

of the mountains of Aden ; from thence E. by N. three or four days ;

then E. N. E. If you do not see the mountains of dden you go N.

E. by E. till the pole marks five inchestt ; from thence in the manner

above said. Be it known, that in Gujerut grow indigo, ginger, cocoa-

nuts, tamarind, and the tree Tari'*{{, each bunchof which gives every

day a pitcher of wine; there is also the Pawn", that is to say, tanbil

H 2 oe

io we) Le : a bts ® hake ‘ wey BS ys wen>lo

" 3B | ea; sae uss iM ae

* 7th May to 24th June. + Amarat, 180 197.

t Saddle island. § Zoogar, the zém must here be taken at one degree.

|| Trinkatah ? 18° 45’; another name for Shabak. { Barmoosa.

** Zehila, east of Babelmandal, to Gujerat. tf Lat 135 30’. tf The toddy palm.

456 _ Translation of the Mohit, [Aue.

trees, and a great number of Tébau trees (Tuja)*, from the branches

of which the bunches descend as roots; there are bats, the wings of

which measure more than a yard; there is also a great number of

Zokim treest, and an infinite number of parrots and apes, so that

you might call it the country of apes.

Seventy Voyrace from Barbara} to Gujerdt.

If you start from Khorsaid? you follow the direction N. N. E. till

you come to where the measure is equal§, which has been explained in

the former chapters, and from thence you proceed in the way above

mentioned.

Ercutu Vorace from Aden to Gujerat.

If you start from Aden, you go true east till you lose sight of the

mountains of Aden; you continue to hold the same route a day and

a night, then E. by N., till the southern wind sets in, then E. N. E. if

possible, and if not, you followthe above course and go then E. N. E. ;

if th ere be little motion with the Awelama* (?) there is no harm in it ;

if a closer course is pursued you side to KE. by N. and return from

thence again to E. N. E., till the measure*|| is equal; in this measure

LyraQ is five inches, or Sagitta’ six inches, or Canopus and Lyra are

equal to three inches and a half. Under this measure (height) you see in

the sea frequently sea snakes, which ought to be taken care of, as it is

agood sign; if you do not see them follow your way in the direction

right east till you see them, and then change again your course to

E. by N. till you see land. The best rule is to trust to the soundings

and not to the sea-snakes, which, if they prove true, show themselves

twice and thrice a day. Be it known, that sometimes in the monsoon

Damani the ship is thrown by the current towards the Persian shore

like mount Koholdd Dabbaghdt® ; at this time the ship finds itself in

the barbarian channel; there great precaution is necessary against

the whirlpools ; besides this place there are such between Gujerat

and Sind in the gulph Jakad’**, where the wind blows continually

from the sea, and the current comes from the shore, so that waves

3 Bry? z SA RAW 9m * bal.) : Ur ys be Os) ee 3 webs T AES

* The Bur or Banian tree. tT Seej or Euphorbia ligularia, Ro xpuren.

t Lat. 100 30’, Long. 45, 10’. § The kids or 16° 54’, || Lat, 160 54%

q There must be some mistake in these stars, as Lyra would have a meridio-

nal altitude of 680 30’ and Sagitta much more. Canopus also could not be

above the horizon along with Lyra, as in the given latitude this star only rises

after Lyra sets; and it attains an elevation of 19° on the meridian.

** Point Gigat, at the entrance of the gulph of Cutch.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 457

and contrary currents are not wanting, and a ship falling in with them

runs great risk to be lost, if it is not saved by the grace of God; so

it is necessary to avoid these places. You must turn from the Persian

shore to the Arabian, and steer N. N. E. and N. E. by N. till you

are out of reach of this dangerous place, after which you steer again

E. N. E. Know that the wind of Canopus (S. S. E.) is not to be

trusted till the pole is made with six inches or six inches and a

quarter ; the flood runs then true E. The signs of a tempest are great

distress, and the summer birds called in Yaman, ijam', also the birds

bani safaf? and amm ul sanané ; these birds keep then to the shore, flying

in the summer on the sea; sometimes you see them till where the

pole is made with nine inches, (lat. 19° 54’.)

Nintu Voyacs, from Kashan** to Gujerat.

If you set sail from Lezben’ you follow the direction E. 8. E. and

E. by 8. during night time, when for the most part the northerly

wind ceases. From §. 58. EK. there is a heavy swell; therefore it is

advisable to keep the high sea; if during night time the wind dimi-

nishes and you find yourselves at sea, lay to till the wind becomes

fresh again; but if it be fair, you go twelve zdm* true east, return

then to E. N. E. till Sagitta is six inches or Lyra’ five inches, or

Canopus and Lyrat come equally to three inches anda half. If in

this height you see really sea-snakes, you follow the course of E. by

N. till land is seen. If the sea-snakes are not seen, you steer true east

till you see them, and return then to E. by N. The sign of the

presence of the sea-snakes are great numbers of birds, as the Sowaidi*

and korani®. In some years the sea-snakes and the birds Sowatdi are

seen on the Arabian coast. If you are leaning towards the Arabian

shore, and the pole is made with nine inches or near itt, it is guessed

that you are come near the Indian land ; but this is not certain, because

these birds do not deserve much credit, as some years they are seen,

and in other years they are not seen; sometimes they are to be seen

in great numbers, and sometimes but few.

Teantu Voracs, from Khalafat'§ to Gujerat.

If you start from Khalafat you keep the sea till you come to cape

Fartak" ||, from thence you run twelve zdms true east, then to E. N.

E. or E. by N., as it has been mentioned before.

plese Bh hy bead Std Papal lj Tyla

* Codage 8 gi S Meola 5,5 Up)

* Kisseen on south coast of Arabia; Long. 51° 5’.

+ Wrong stars, (vide supra) Dr. Dorn calls Lyra u/sa!bak, not salbar.

+ About 20° N. Lat, § Maculla? || Cape Fartash, N. E. of Kisseen.

458 : Translation of the Mohit, [Aue.

Exeventu Voyacs, from Zofar* to Gujerat.

Setting sail from Zofdr you go 8. E. by S. or near it till you

get into the open sea, into which cape Marbdat'} stretches out a long

way. From thence you go E. N. E. or E. by N. till you come to

the kids? (Lat. 17°) (the measurement explained in former chapters).

At Zofdr grow also cocoanuts.

Twetrryu Voyracs, from Kalhat* to Gujerat.

Setting sail from Kalhdt{ you follow a true eastern course till

you see the sea-snakes, and if you see them, you return towards the

coast, till Lyra‘ is marked by four inches and a half; from thence

you steer true east till you come to the shore; this is the course per-

formed with the monsoon 4zib: but at the time of other monsoons »

you follow the direction E. by S. till you are come to the kids

(measurement explained in the former chapters), from thence true

east till to the end.

TarrTEENTH VoyaceE, from Maskat to Gujerdt.

If from these ports you wish to make Concan’, you follow the direc-

tion of E. by 8. and east; if you wish to go to Monembdr§, you

follow the direction 8. E. by E., you come then to the mount Karata’,

which is a famous mountain of Monembdr.

Fourtreenty Vorace, from Aden to Monembar7, (Malabar.)

The course is the same which has been already mentioned before

from Aden to Gujerdt ; you go on till the pole marks six inches and a

half or seven inches||; if from thence you can go tacking, you go in

the direction of E. by S. or true east ; if it is impossible to keep this

course, your way is E. by N, till the pole is made by seven inches and

half or eight mches ; from thence you follow the direction E. by S.

till the pole is made with six inches], then true east till land is in

sight, which is A’zddiw*** or a place near it; you steer then towards

the shore ; what is meant by the inches, assabd@’, and the pole or polar

star jah has been explained in the former chapters.

Firreentu Voyace, from Aden to Hormiz, (Ormus.)

Sailing from Aden in the direction true east you see the moun-

tains of Aden, and if you do not see them you steer in the direction

of Dairai Bar" whichis E. N. E, till Fartak', from thence five zdms"tt

u aly yop : ent tas : wll yhelaw Shh : al ys * hes ~

tM Portege ee aa NS wr

* Dofar, a little further east of Fartak. + Cape Morebat; Lat. 16° 50’, Long.

55°, t Half way between Muscat and Cape Rasalgat. § Malabar.

|| About Lat. 170. q Lat. 150, ** Ajideeva near Ankola, lat. 14° 40’.

tt The zdm here must be about 35 miles.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 459

N. E. by E.; then N. E. to Marbdath' and Mottika?, (this last is

ealled Janjari*,) from thence you follow again the direction N. E.

by E. taking care on your way of the island Hausakeya‘*, because on

its sea-shore is a shallow; it is necessary to come forth between

Siikara’ and the islands Khiré or Miria’t. After having found

Stikara you sail five zdms N. E. by E. then three zdéms N. E., from

thence five N. E. by N. to Mousir*t you may see it or not; if you

see it, you follow the same way till the island is left behind: from

thence four zéms to N. N. EK. from whence you return to N. by E.

till Rasolhadd? ; from Rasolhadd you direct yourselves to the known

Dairai Barr" till Ras Mosandem''§, from thence to the pole to Hormiiz.

The pearls for which Hormiuz is famous are fished on the islands of

Kais"*|| and Bahrain’*. If you wish to go from Rasolhadd to Dilsind'*4

you steer £. N. E. till you come to Pasani'® or near it; from thence

to Dairai Barr’’, that is to say, E. by S. till Rds Karashi'"**, where

you come to an anchor, waiting for the fishing boats with which you

enter the port. The ancient pilots used to sail from Cape Alhadd

to that of Kardshi in the direction E. by N. but it is better to go

with the higher wind.

Sixteentu Voyace, from Diu to Meshkass'*++.

The time for this voyage is from the tenth day after the Vazdajer-

dian Nawriz to the 60th day (7th Nov.—27th Dec.) which is to say,

from the 240th day after the Jelalian Nawriiz to the 290th. First

you follow the direction W. by S. two Terfa'’, that is to say, two

inches, which make the poles eight inchest{ ; from thence to W. S. W.

one Terfa; if it is the time to measure the pole (to take the height

by the polar star) you take it: if it not be the time for it§§ you

take the height at the setting of Aguéla”|||| by the Lyra™ which gives

V bye 2 Abo grin SAikwle Pad ye Lye

Phyo - podbean pol) rf Us

8 py? rs dia lyre G cohues * 2 Bye ot col Spal

Pee P6335 7 Sled ig tl. f

* Hasek of maps. + Curia Muria. i t Mazeira island.

§ Cape Mussendan, at the entrance of the Persian Gulph. | Kishma ?

§ Mouths of Indus. ** Kurachee on the northernmost mouth.

tt Maculla? or a place nearer Morebat ? tt Lat. 180 18’.

§§ This sentence proves that the meridional passage of Polaris was usually

observed.

\||| The Arabic name of the star here translated Aquila by the Baron enables

us to clear up the difficulty in former passages. In the description of the Arabic

celestial globe by Dr. Dorn (Roy. As. Soc. Trans. IT. 381, the star Colg!) pend

(the falling vulture) is shown to be alpha lyre, or wega of the Alphonsine tables.

The translation in the text, therefore, should be—“ take the height of Polaris

at the setting of wega (in lyra), i. e, of alpha lyre.

302

‘pie 9 os l ip), 10

460 Translation of the Mohit, {Ave.

seven inches and a half, then you steer true east to Sdjer*, the moun-

tains of Dain?} are visible on the right ; at this time of the year it

is better to see them than to see Fartak, because the wind coming

from N.N. E. is to be feared, which at this time of the year. (it

being winter) is much to be feared, as it raises great dust and waves.

Tf you cannot attain Sajer you pass Meshkdss ; if the polar star is

seven inches and the ship at sea with a strong wind, turn again its

head to the sea one or two days, according to the strength or the weak-

ness of the wind; after the winterly wind sets in the monsoon Azib,

and in this case you go back as much as you are come. If you

start from Diu on the 70th or 80th day of the Yazdajerdian year (6th

—16th Jan.) your way lies then in the direction W. S. W. till you

come opposite the Cape of Fartak, which is the 300th day from the

Jelalian Nawrtéz or the 310th. From opposite the cape Fartak

you go true east; if the winterly wind blows, you haul down the

sails and lay to, if possible ; if not, you go with as little sail as possible

to get the ship free of the waves. After the ceasing of the winterly

wind the monsoon 42) sets in, in which case you measure back your

steps as much as you have gone, and this season is better than the

former. Some years the winterly winds blow till to the hundredth

day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is the 330th day of the Jelalian

(14th Feb.) particularly from Fartak to Zofar; the signs of land

being near are the birds Dhofaik? and Koraik‘, and of the sea beasts

or fishes; the Tabbdka® and Lezdk®, and of the maritime plants the

Kirmith’, and Kelhaf*.

SEVENTEENTH Voyacs, from Diu to Shehr and Aden.

The course lies first W. S. W. till opposite Fartak, from thence

true east till land is in sight; this voyage is performed within the

tenth day of the Yazdajerdian year, and the sixtieth, that is to say,

within the 240th and 290th of the Jelalian (7th Nov.—27th Dec.)

if it is performed within the 80th or 90th day of the Yazdajerdian

year, answering to the 310th or 320thof the Jelalian (16th Jan.—

26th Jan.) the course to be heldis W.S. W. till the pole is six

inches and a quarter or six inches, then true west. If you set out

from Diu on the 110th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which answers

to the 840th day of the Jelalian year (15th Feb.), the course to

Meshkass and Shehr is W. 8S. W. and S. W. by W. till the pole is

marked by five inches and a quarter; from thence you run true west ;

at your right the island of Socotra is near in sight; as soon as you

Vyale 7 dite * Shas * eho talkb ‘Git " be)

sion eks

* Seger. + Doan near Fariak.

1836. | a Turkish work on Navigation. 461

see it, if you are bound to Meshkass or Hiridji* you steer N. W.

by W. and if you intend to go to Shehr you steer W: N. W. till you

see land; the sign of your approaching Socotra is that you see of the

sea-plants or an infinite number of trees of the species called Kirmith,

but sometimes you see them and sometimes not; on the coast of

Shehr men and animals live all on fish.

Ereuteentx Voyaae, from Mahdim*t and Shit? to the Arabic coast.

The time for sailing from these ports is from the tenth to the six-

teenth day of the Yazdajerdian year, which answers from the 240th

to the 290th day of the Jelalian year ; the course to be followed is

W. by S. till the pole is marked by seven inches, from thence you

steer true west. If you intend to go to Meshkass, Shehr, and Aden,

the course to be followed is W. by &S., till you come opposite to

Fartak, from thence you go true west to Fartak, and from thence to

which port you please: if you set out from the above mentioned

ports at the end of the season, the direction to be followed is W. S.

W. till the pole is four inches and a quarter or four inches and an

eighth, from thence you steer true west to Kardafintt. The ports

Mahiim and Shiil belong to Deccan; from this country come the

muslins called Candaharians, and those of Daulatabdd, Beripatari®,

and Bairami®.

Nivereenty Voyages, from Diu to the islands of Dib’, (Maildives.)

Steer first S. S. E. the pole being made by five inches, side towards

the land in the direction of E.S. E. and S. E. by E. till you see

the mountains of Monibdr ; from thence to Daira Barra, till the pole

is three inches ; from thence to the south pole, till the fardgad*§ are

eight inches and a quarter, then true W. to the island Foywka®, and

the islands near it. ©

TwentietH Vorace, from Daubil' to the islands of Dib.

You follow first the direction W. S. W. till you lose the shore,

from thence to Daira S. W. by W. till land is in sight ; from thence

S. S. E. till the pole comes to three inches, from thence to the south

pole and 8. 8S. W. till the Farkadain (g and + in the little bear) are

marked by eight inches and a half; from thence true west to Foyika

or its neighbourhood. Mark what has been said above: till land is

in sight steering S. W. by W., that means, that the land is at hand.

«GU F elyen "Spat * uysayS © silage rw erty" yall ys

8 PU . 9 . 10

3s) 3 BS g55 axle

BS * pi

* Maculla? and Hargiah near Aden. + Mahim, north, and Sheoul, south

of Bombay. t Guardafui, N. E. Cape of Africa, lat. 12°.

§ The far kadain, or 8B and y urse minoris.

462 Translation of the Mohit, [Aue.

Be it known to you that in some of the islands of the Maldives the

inhabitants hunt with dogs, bred to the purpose, the Orang-ootang

(Nisnaus) and eat it. The Nésnaus is an animal resembling a mon-

key, but endowed with speech; but generally monkeys are also

called Nisnaus. I have heard from the brother of Janim Hamza,

the late Intendant of Egypt, that coming one day on commercial

business at the extremity of Yaman, to a walled village, he alight-

ed at a house where two boys lying on the ground were crying, and

that out of commiseration he untied their fetters. The master of

the house, returning, laughed at it, and said, these are Nisnaus, which

we hunt. The next day the master of the house took his disbelieving

guest with him, and he saw the Nisnaus hunted by dogs. Some

Nisnaus emerge from the sea, their flesh is a great dainty ; that they

are endowed with the power of speech is even recorded in the books

of philosophers.

Twenty-First Voyace, from Dit to Maskdt and Hormtz.

The time of performing this voyage is from the 10th of the Yazdgyer-

dian year to the 60th, (7th Nov.—27th Dec.) that isto say, from the

242nd day of the Jelalian year to the 290th ; but you must continually

go tacking, because the wind which is at this time of the year the mon-

soon Azib, blows very strong ; if it is impossible to pursue your course

tacking, you must wait till the wind grows favourable, in which case

you go till the Lyra! (?) is made by three inches and a half, and the land

is at hand; because the interior pole is near the Arabian mountains ;

from thence you proceed true west to Saatari?*, or its neighbourhood.

If you set out on the 110th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is the

340th of the Jelalian year, (7th Feb.) your way is W. N. W. till the

pole is eleven inches ; from thence true west till to Td’, or its neigh-

bourhood ; but if you set out on the 150th or 160th day from the Yaz-

dajerdian Nawriz, which is the 15th or 25th of the Jelalian year (26th —

March), then you proceed W. S. W. and S. W. by W. till you see the

island of Socotra: direct your course then towards the north pole till

Hausakiat, from thence to Daira (E. N. E.) towards the Arabian coast ;

if the wind grows strong before Socotra is in sight, the western wind

Kis you proceed tacking to N. W. by N. or N. W. or N.N. W. as you

can till you see Mottuk', Khar*, or Miria®t. If these places are not

seen, you must take care of Ghabbai-tin?§. In order to avoid it, you

put the head of the ship to the sea and goon. The sign that you

ybelw a ceylew Cea "Gye Fd Seige 7 atans

* Swardi, near Muscat. + Hasek. + Curia Muria. § Cape Isolette ?

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 468

are near Ghebba is, that the water grows yellow; as soon as you see

signs of land being near you must be in guard against it, till Madreka'

or Massira?*. If the pole is ten inches and a half, and land is not

in sight, and no signs are seen; you have passed the Arabian shore,

and then you have no chance but to steer for the Indian continent.

You follow the direction E. by S. till the pole is ten inches to Man-

galort or Soomdanat} or Shiirowaur* and Gilinaurt; but take care not to

bring the pole to ten inches and a half, (22° 18’) in which case you

necessarily come to Jaked’§ which is your damage and repentance too

late. God be your guide! What is said of Indian whirlpools is all a tale,

exceptthe whirlpools in the gulph of Jaked, and in the Barbarian channel

near Kardafiin, where ships falling in are unavoidably lost; the causes

of it are the heavy waves, the strong winds, the currents and the

breakers of the coast, so that it is impossible for the ship either to

hold the sea or to land on the shore, if God does not grant his parti-

cular grace. If you guess that you may be drifting to Jaked you

must take before hand your precautions and endeavour to reach from

the coast of Makrdn either the port of Kalmata® or Kawader’, or

Kapchi Makran® ; Bandar Kawauder||, is the place where cocoanuts

grow; or you must try to goto Karaushi4 or to enter Khirdéiil Sind? ;

that is to say, the port of Lahore, to get rid of the fear of Jaked. In

Sind are a great number of liver-eaters, against whom you must be on

your care; because if they meet a man who eats his dinner in public,

they have the talent of eating up his liver with their eyes, and so

kill him. This is not to be slighted.

TweEnTy-SEcoND VoyaGE, from Cambeya to Aden at the end of the season.

Cambeya is the district in the province of Gujerdt, comprehending

the ports of Ahmedabad ano Patan; from thence comes the cotton of

Patan; and Bahdder and some Indian stuffs. In this country is a

profusion of Babaghari'® and cornelians: but the best of the last

are those coming from Yaman. If you set out from Cambeya and

come to Dié or its district, you must sail at night, because at the end

of the season the wind blows from the west during the day, but dur-

ing the night from the shore ; with this land breeze you go as far you

can towards the south. In some years the wind is a strong north

western in the place of the Maurara (sea-snakes), then your course is

8 Gu 9 . BS

Wye = See 39> eset,

* Mazeira. + Mungrole, 21° 30’.

t Somn&th, Choorwaur, and Cooleynorky Pagoda.

§ Point Gigat, or Juggut, at the south-west corner of the Gulf of Kutch.

\| One of the three Bunders on the coast of Gujerdt. q Korachee.

464 Translation of the Mohit, [Ave.

S. W. by W. Your measure (height) be the pole and no other, till

the pole marks five inches, then you go W. S. W. till the pole is four

inches and a quarter or four inches and an eighth, then true west to

Kardafin. The signs of Kardafién being near are the birds Karih'

and Manji?, but few are seen of the last, those which are the most

frequent are the Daghdt® and Kasld*; of sea animals you see the

Tabbaka® (tortoise?) and sometimes the sea-horse ; as soon as land

is again at a distance these signs vanish: it is also probable that the

birds here seen are those of Socotra, Samaha® and Dorzan’. God

knows the rest. If at this time of your course Socotra is on the

north, you direct yourselves to Hadiai Socotra*, and if you go to

Kardafiin, your course is along the Persian* continent. If you go

from Hejrdi*+ to Ddrzin” you steer W. N. W. and if you wish to go

from Mitt to Aden you steer true west till Aden is insight, then you

follow the current, mdjri'’, till Bab Mandam.

Twenry-THIRD Voyacs, from Dabil§ to Aden”.

If you leave Ddbai at the end of the season, you direct yourselves

W.S. W. till the pole is four inches and an eighth, from thence true

west to Kardafin.

Twenty-FourtH VoraGs, from Kiwwai Sindabur'*+t to Aden.

If you start from Kuwwai Sindabir at the end of the season, take

care not to fall on Cape Fal'>, because it is five inches and a quarter

on the pole ; steer therefore W. by S. till the pole is four inches and

an eighth, from thence true west.

TwENTY-FIFTH VoyaGE, from Hennir' || and Baudaklaw"( to Aden.

If you leave those two ports at the end of the season, go from

Azddi«'*** or Angili'® side-wards, and then turn to the sea true west,

if the wind be favourable ; if not, direct yourselves W. by S. or W. by

N. your utmost being S. W. by W. If you cannot attain any of

these directions, turn and steer to the pole till the wind grows favour-

able, then turn again and steer W. by S. till the pole is made by four

inches and an eighth, so you come then going true west to Kardafin :

the vicinity of Cape Faw/ is known by the quantity of birds and a

Me eke lS ileal ESL ee

‘ SybSwdy XD na ee oy? pie ASsh do. use? * pele

9) Jdsu} 9S a Se om, “i jp - Ys ols * tl a sx!

* African. tT Harjieh ? t Mette, west of Guardafui.

§ South of Bombay, lat. 179 45’. || Honawer on Malabar coast, 14° 15’ lat.

q Bhatakuli or Betkuldrag, ditto, 14°. ** Aujideeva, off Ankola, lat. 18°.

tt Probably Cotwale Sonderbaut of Arrowsmith, north of Goa.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 465

great quantity of Kalhdf" that is to say, sea foamand Kerme??, or sea trees,

Twenty-sixtH VoyaGeE, from Calicut to Kardafin.

If you sail from Calicut with a favourable wind, steer W. by S. and

sometimes W.S. W. so you come to the island Kolfaini* ; if at this

time, that is to say, on the 140th day of the Yazdajerdian year, which is

the 5th of the Jelalian (March), the sea shuts, theflood runs at this time

N.N. W. from thence you direct your course to the south pole, and go

tacking if the flood runs to the south pole, but if the wind falls lower,

then this course to S. W.,S. W. by S. and. S. W. you may follow it

a day andanight without inconvenience. If it should fall yet lower, turn

and steer to the north pole or near it, particularly if the pole is made by

less than three inches (lat. 10°), because it is profitable to be then high

north, and the wind grows favourable ; ifit be already so, you run from

Calicit till Kolfaini two zams in the direction of W. by S., then eight

or nine zims W. S. W.t+ then you may rejoice, as you have got clear of

the islands of Ful, from thence W. by N. and W. N. W. till the pole is

four inches and a quarter, and then true west to Kardafin. Calicét is

famous for its pepper plantations : its Prince is the Sdumervit who is

at war with the Portuguese. On these coasts are a great number of

elephants employed in dragging ships, launching them into the sea, and

similar doings.

TWENTY-sEVENTH VoyacE, from Dit to Malacca.

Leaving Div you go first S. 8. E. till the pole is five inches, and

side then towards the land, till the distance between it and between

the ship is six zéms; from thence you steer 8. S. E., because in the

neighbourhood of Ceylon, the sea runs high, the further you keep off

the more quiet the sea grows; you must not side all at once but by

degrees, first till the farkadain (g and y in the little bear) are made by

a quarter less than eight inches, from thence to S. E. till the farka-

dain are seven inches and a quarter, from thence true east at arate of

18 zams, then you have passed Ceylon. The sign of Ceylon being

near is continual lightning, be it accompanied by rain or without

rain; so that the lightning, of Ceylon is grown proverbial for a liar.

After haying passed Ceylon you go E. N. KE. and E. by N. till the

pole is made by two inches, from thence true E. till to the island of

Sarjals which is one of the Nd@jbdri (Nicobarian) islands. After hav-

ing left it behind you steer E. by S. tillland is in sight, you go along

it to the islands Faliisanbilen*§ which are nine islands ; from thence to.

F a e guls 3 hays Fi Csdaols : Oyu _ cy shuugls

* Calpeni, one of the Laccadives.

+ This course is the ‘‘ nine degree channel’ through the Laccadives.

+ Saan Amir? of the Bider or Ahmedabad dynasty, A. D. 1505—49,

§ Pulo Sambelan or the ‘ nine islands’? on the Malay coast, lat 4° 5’.

3 P

466 Translation of the Mohit, (Ave.

the south pole. At your right some islands are seen at a distance, so

you go towards the south pole till you come to the islands to Folod-

jomra'* which appear near, from thence E. S. E. where the seais more

than ten fathoms, if it be 11 or 12 never mind, because after 12 is

the deep sea, and you are clear of the Shob Kafaussi. You go till

mount Folipdsalir?, is opposite, N. E. till the soundings give 24 fa-

thoms, because there is a bent shd6® running out in the sea, which is to

be taken care of—wherefore your course must be followed always in a

depth of 24 fathoms till you see the mount Folupdsaldr N. N. E. ; then

you steer towards the landand Dairai-barra(E.N.E.) till Malacca. The

inhabitants of Shuli*t (?)go from Falisanbélen two zams to thesouth pole.

TwENTY-EIGHTH VoyaGE, from Diu to Shatijdm’t, i. e. to Bengal.

Sailing from Dié, your course, till you have left Ceylon behind you,

is the same as the above mentioned, then you steer N. E. Ceylon

remaining on the western side ; then N. E. by N. till you come oppo-

site to Rakanj*§, where the pole is made with a quarter wanting to

nine, and the Aselli scarce with six inches; if in this course you see

land it is well; if not, steer E. N. E. till the pole is nine inches and a

half, so you come to the island of Dardiw’. If you see it at this time it

is well, if not go right east till you see land, but take care of Fesht

Hayumiin'||, which is a desert rock, round which the water is twenty fa-

thoms deep; take care also of Dardiw4] where the water is but five fathoms.

If Rakanj is in sight, go N. N. W. with 25 fathoms of water. At this

time Hayumién remains on your right, of which great care is to be taken.

After having passed it you approach the land till your soundings give

16 fathoms, and with this course you come to Dardiw ; after having left

it behind you go with 12 fathoms depth N. N. W., there you come to

a great Khir? (?) called Bdakdl’***, and then five capes which are taken

for islands by those who don’t know them ; thencomes a Ghobba", that is

to say, a gulph full of shallows, shoals and breakers ; this place is called

Kékar Diwa'*+t, then you come to the island Zenjilia'*{{ which is facing

ayeagld % Matygld “ Cerads * ylabptaaylle sala, bli © Ads)

dy" cypheegaendd 8 yd 1 JBL age Je SS led

* The Arroas islands. Mt. Parcelar is a well known land mark on the coast,

lat. 2° 50’. + The Sholas or Marhatta traders ? t Chittagong,

once a place of great trade. § Arrakan, lat. 20° 10’.

|| Probably Oyster island, a barren rock off Arracan, or St. Martin’s reef.

q Probably Nardiel or Narkoldeap of Horsburgh, off the Tes Naaf entrance.

** Probably Mascall island. tt Cutub-deep, southof Chittagong.

tt There are now no islands seaward of the Chittagong coast to which the

sailing directions of Srpi will apply: but Lieut. Luoyp, of the Indian Navy,

who has surveyed this line, informs us that there is a long shoal called ‘‘ the

patch,’’ parallel with the coast, which is nearly dry at low water, and may have

formed the islands of Zenjilia three centuries ago ; for there have evidently been

great changes in these parts, even in the memory of our own navigators.

1836.] a Turkish work on Navigation. 467

you, your way lies N. N. W. When you approach this island, side to

the sea, because its southern cape is rikk', that is to say, a shallow, and

the colour of the water grows white; meanwhile, on the sea side it is

seen green. Hold that course, and you'll find better soundings by degrees

till you come to 17 and 18 fathoms. Coming to this place you find the

water again whitish, these shallows are on the south side of Fesht Guri-

dn, which is a desert place: here the sea is noisy, don’t keep either too

near to the island of Zenjilia, nor too far from it, but steer a middle

course ; if the soundings give 18 fathoms or near it, you have passed

Zenjilia ; then you go in the direction of the north pole, and continue

to take soundings till you come to seven fathoms ; from thence you steer

in the direction of the north pole, and to the rising place of the g and y

of the little bear, till your soundings are six fathoms but notless. So

you come to cape Khir* which is Shdtijam. Here you stop till

the rebban? (tide) come, with which you enter the port. Bengal is

abundant in ivory and ebony; the finest muslin turbans, the very

best judar’t, and most precious Indian stuffs come from thence; the

finest muslin sashes are called malmal‘, and the most precious of them

malmali-shahi, which by confusion is generally named marmare-shéhi

(royal marble) ; there are also sea-bulls’, the best of them are found

between Bengal and Delhi in the interior lake; they are called sea

bulls, although they don’t live in the sea, but in the interior lakes on'the

land; but the merchants call them so; for in the interior northern

lakes, in the mountains of the Afghans, are also found the rhinoceros

(Karkaddn*, the name quite the same as the Krokotos of Ctesias), but

their horns are but two palms long; it is related that those which are

found in Abyssinia have much longer horns. Girafes are found but

in Abyssinia and never in India.

TWENTY-NINTH VoyaGe, from Malacca to Aden.

Starting from Malacca you go first along the coast till to the moun-

tain Foliipdsalér’; there you take care of the above-mentioned

bank’. This mountain is seen in the direction E. by S., and on some

distance you see Folddjomar® ; after having left it behind you your

direction is that of the north pole till you come to the islands Falisan-

bilent, from thence you steer for some time N. N. W. till you come

to the islands Firak'’§ and Yaflibotof''||, from thence W. by N. till to

the island Nadjban’’, from thence W. by S. till the farkadain (g

: 3, oy; ; ei lees: 8 Urbs : yl ASS , lal y gle

5 ert * po augls yas atiglsl 7 gual (Nicobars)

* The word Khér used here and elsewhere seems a corruption of the Bengali

term ‘hal, creek or estuary. + Choutar, a fine cloth, so

called from its four threads. t+ Pulo Sambelan of the Straits.

§ Probably Pera on the Malay peninsula, or Penang? || Pulo Bouton.

oP2

468 Memoir ona Map of Peshawar [Ave.

and ¥ of the little bear) are made with a quarter less eight; from

thence true west, Ceylon being in sight at the right; if you don’t see

it, continue nevertheless your western course till to the Maldives, and

from thence to W. N. W. siding a little to N. W. by W. till opposite

Kardafin, and till the pole is made by four inches and an —

from thence true west till you reach the land.

TuirtietH Voyacs, from Shdtijim, (Chittagong,) that is to say, from

Bengal to the Arabian coast.

Sail at the end of the madd (flood), that is to say, when three

quarters of it are passed, and go then with the ebb W. by 8. two

zams, the soundings being six, seven and eight fathoms; weigh the

anchor as soon as the flood sets in and go to the wind, weak or strong,

till the ebb begins again one z4m W.S. W. then two zams N. W.

The water grows then black, and you direct yourselves S. 5S. W.

till the Farkadain are made with eight inches less a quarter, from

thence true W. Ceylon being in sight on your right, you continue

true W. till to the Maldives, and from thence to Kardaftin in the way

above mentioned. The measure of the stars (the taking of the height)

and the distance of the inches has been explained already.

I].—Extracts translated from a Memoir on a Map of Peshawar and the

country comprised between the Indus and the Hydaspes, the Peucelaotis

and Taxila of ancient geography, by M. A. Court, in the service

of Mahd-raja Ranjit Singh.

I.—ON THE PROVINCE OF TAXILA.

The space lying between the Indus and Hydaspes was first known

to the Greeks under the name of Tazila: whether as its ancient local

title, or one given by the soldiers of ALExanpeER from the town of the

same name, afterwards its capital, is uncertain*. Srraso says that the

* Col. WiLForp identifies the town of Taxila with the Tacsha-sila of

Hindu ancient geography, of which the extensive ruins were supposed by

ELPHINSTONE to be traced at Manikyala. The Tacsha Sdila or Syéla tribe are

still numerous in the Panjab. They state, the former name of their city to have

been Uda-ndgari. (As. Res. VIII. 42.) There is deposited in the Asiatic Socie-

ty’s collection a large manuscript map of the Panjab compiled by Col. (then

Lieut.) WitForp from the route and compass surveys of a native, Mirza Mo-

GuL Bre, expressly instructed by himself and employed from 1786 to 1796, in

travelling and collecting materials to illustrate an account of ALEXANDER’S pro-

gress ; the account however does not seem ever to have seen the light, and it is pro-

bable that the map has thus suffered oblivion. It is considerably fuller than M.

Courr’s Sketch, and as might be expected from the Compiler’s learning, more

correct in the orthography of names. We regret not having collated the two

before lithographing M. Court’s map.—Eb.

h) mee

Fash a Serai AL ahd,

oo Sa Hipur

—— eee

——

7 a ii 7/2"

vane = _

pe « | B

es «t | Sih és 5

B * Kaka Bayba

Berkhont hunkisty

%) sigderbhane See Kidder

pac aeas

- en Afercdes

ies Po Malis fioT ce

A ales

be }

« Kwot

ROUTE MAP

of the Provinas Conprisig

(algae opt

Kattoks

uar ieee

Yariasscin

— Monery ©

s a

the ancient TAXILA and PEUCELAOTIS

in lhe Pare b

made from Compass warings dad Stages

by A Cour ancien bléve de lBcole mnilidoure de Sauit- Cyr

in 1826-1835

injiide. Kor

$0 tithe fayree

UNpAginin

oBdhiny TA

Many

ZN Byhour,

Sable

Muraferabid

Digrar

Princh

oy,

Trill oo a

2 ayn hiF

Fatisunj

HAI

Ari Ty cash

Tips

Ductiad

acl

| cary

Kiva

Jerse Pabey

Bulbul Pars

Nanje

Gila otk

ee ne Ve

Asinigark py

Bund

Mirpur *

Mangitli is

\ nKanddre®

Dephahane

Pi, z

1 igh hindene) yg

Sala

latineny mi «x.

Kaltas

a ait

Mayr)

Andinabid, B

( cI Bert

Pindaadenthon ff Kilanpur Ape

wee

Pendle: »

Pandy

Areggur

SAtiané

eAtalvad:

o Ana

Kallisin |

Lundds © 4

raticcnn

a Fevrusoh dct

jing

Tonge from Greenwich

Hild Va)

oedema =

Hin

Kateri |

| Nifytupira Shonatuer®

Golaited

oKirvanvali

Devadelnagar a

Rec Fendel

Bidiceur Fy

esstdpun Lae , eae

“0 Sindawila Aalek soe Ao Hera

Ranivale: eee ohn | thet tert

i opera Hage Kata 30 846 = oe /

chenmd — oltella # SS 3 he

hls oHneke ae :

> Patan Gerry y

Khenis Sa 2 Sioral

o Pet a eg he es”

= aynuiagas Fasrur

| yy Atalarrh

————

JU Tassin’s 1th! Press. Cle tan.

1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. 469

native kings assumed the name on mounting the throne; and we find

in history ALExaNDER obliging Ompuis, who governed the country,

to take the name of Taxizes. The appellation is quite unknown at

the present day.

It appears that the Greeks confined Taxila proper to the central

part of the region between the Indus and the Hydaspes ; for when

they passed it, the northern portion was ruled by chiefs independent of

Ompuis, while the south was in open opposition to both ALEXANDER

and his ally.

The geographical limits of Taxila are well defined on the map, by

the two rivers and the chain of Pérpanjal on the north ;—from this

range to Koshdb on the south it measures 120 kos, with a breadth

from Attok to the Jelim of 74 kos*.

It seems probable that the original inhabitants were Hindus of the

Pandava race, and Chandra-vansis. With these were amalgamated

Persians, Scythians, and even Greeks; for the Ghékers, of whom so

much has lately been written, I take to be the descendants of the

Macedonian colonists ;—they themselves trace their ancestors to the

Khaiani race of Persia, but the word seems but-a corruption of Greek.

Taxila contains the traces of a number of ancient towns of which the

origin is now unknown. Massive walls of stone masonry are seen,

and in some places brick work of Babylonish dimensions. The inha-

bitants call them the ruins of temples of Deva Nagarit or Sita-Rama.

The most curious, however, are the mausolea, cupolas, or topes. In the

northern provinces are found colossal statues of plaster, marble, and

stone, most of which have been mutilated by the bigotry of the

Muhammedans. Smaller idols are also occasionally dug up of superior

execution: some I have remarked with frizzled hair. The ancient

religion of the country was Buddhistic. The worship of Bacchus, or the

Sun, prevailed at the time of ALExaNnprER, and traces of it are visible

in the names of towns, as Surya, Sita, and Causalya; the sun, his

daughter and mother (?)”

_ The present inhabitants, being of so mixed an origin, betray striking

varieties of character and manners. The Musulmans who border the

Hydaspes resemble perfectly the Hindus of the Panjab,—while those

on the east bank of the Indus have all the peculiarities of the Afghans,

whence they are descended—an elegant figure, pleasing features, and

vivacity of expression. They are loquacious like the Persians :—and

though living in servitude, they retain their national pride, and submit

* Col. WiLForp’s map states that the sos of this part of the country varies

from 10 to 22 furlongs, probably 2 miles will be a fair average.—Eb.

+ Doubtless the Uda-ndgari of WiLrorp ; see note to page 468.—Ep,

470 Memoir on a Map of Peshdwar [Aue.

only to the authority of their chiefs, with whom they live on terms of

equality. ‘I have everywhere witnessed their courage and intrepi-

dity, in their encounters with the Sikhs, on whose bayonets they rush

sword in hand. Against the Hindus a fierce and implacable bigotry

is kept up among them by their Mullas, whom they regard with super-

stitious reverence. They retain many traits of hospitality : are blunt,

coarse in manner, and devoid of the polish of the Persians. Their dress

is a long shirt, blue turban and scarf, which serves the secondary pur-

pose of a cloth to pray upon. Their women are allowed comparatively

much liberty, but do not abuse it: they perform as usual the whole

labour of the household, while the men are in the fields. Their

houses are constructed of mud roofed with timber, and again covered

with earth to keep off the rain. The tribes of the plains, having a fine

fertile land, are in good circumstances; but those of the Putwar, Thenni,

and Khibbi districts are sadly oppressed by the Sikhs. The mountain

tribes along the west bank of the Hydaspes are in a half savage state.

Most of them live only by plunder and robbery, and think as little of

cutting a man’s throat as asheep’s. Travelling alone amongst them

is most hazardous.

«The language of Taxila proper is the Hindustani corrupted, which

pervades the Panjab: in the north, Cashmerian ; and on the Indus the

Pashtéi dialect, peculiar to the Afghan tribes. The Persian is little

used, except among the informed classes.

«The principal towns in the southern division are Rawel Pindi,

Jélam, Pind-dadan Khan, Nillé, Fatehganj, Khibbi,and Makhade :—in the

central division, Attok, Khampur, Iskanderpur and Noachir :—in the

northern, Muzafferdbdd, Birrh, Pakkheli, and Kaka Bamba.”

M. Covurr describes minutely the whole of these and other re-

markable places, repeating under the head of Manikydla the account

of his interesting operations upon the fopes there, which was published

in the Journal for 1834. We have lithographed his sketch of the

principal tope opened by M. Ventura and his ground-plan of the place

(Plate XX VI.) to shew the situation of the numerous ruins with which

it is studded, and which he considers to be the sepulchres of ancient

kings. The following explanation refers to the figures on the plate :—

1. Chief Cupola explored by General Ventura, (J. A. S. 1834.)

2. Cupola whence were obtained the coins and relics described by M. Courr

in the same Journal for 1834, p. 556.

3,4, 5, 6,7. Ruinous topes of which the foundations have been dug up.

8. Cupola in which M. Court found an urn enclosing a glass prism.

9. Cupola wherein was discovered a box containing a bit of ivory.

10. Small mound whence were dug up fragments of bronze images.

11. Cupola which contained an urn of baked clay.

1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. 471

12. Square buildings attached to many of the Cupolas.

13. Tombs.

14, Mound from which were extracted many medals of copper and of caracoly

(a compound of gold, silver, and copper.) f

Pl. XX. represents what M. Courr denominates a ‘‘ symbole,” also

found among the extensive ruins of this curious place. We donot find

it particularly described, but, from the general appearance of the sculp-

ture it may be regarded either as a Buddhist ora Mithraic monument—

probably the frame of some picture or shrine of a temple: and it is

peculiarly interesting from the collection of symbols in the upper

horizontal line, almost all of which can be recognized as belonging to

the series of ancient coins about which so much has been written.

The jar, the swastica, the sun, the altar, and especially the penultimate

object on the right hand, which is common on the Kadphises coins.

All the country commanded by the elevated summit of Manikyala

is much raised above the plain of the Panjab. It appears to have

been anciently a vast plateau, that in the course of ages, from the

gradual action of periodical rains combined with occasional earth-

quakes, has been cut into deep ravines now difficult to traverse, which

make it look like a heap of ruins. It is covered with villages, the

inhabitants of which raise a thin and precarious crop on its very poor

soil. The neighbourhood of the mountains is covered with a thorny

and leafless jungle.

The whole district is called Potwér ; it was formerly very populous,

as at least testify the numerous ruins of old habitations. The villages

are said to have run into one another, forming a continuous line for

16 kos from Manikydla to Tammidk. The mulberry and other fruit

trees used to thrive in its gardens.

The ruins of Ramma are at 13 kos S. S. W. from Manikydla: they

are attributed to Sita Rami (?) Those of Parvala, traced to the time

of the Pandavas, are on the north at 12 kos. At the latter place, in

the gate of an old castle, is an inscription in an unknown character.

Traces ofa very ancient town, Dangéli, are met with 14 kos towards

the east: the inhabitants ascribe its origin to the Diws. It flourished

under the Ghiker sovereigns, who resided there. Makkyala near

Kattas, Benda and Pakhi were also Ghiker towns. The modern town

of Bégram is five kos lower down than Dangeli. It is now inhabited

by Chandra-vansis, who are descended from the former rajas of the

country.

In the neighbourhood of Jelim (a modern town of the Peruzan

zemindars) are the extensive ruins of another castle perched on the

top of an artificial mound, where very old Hindu medals are found.

472 Memoir on a Map of Peshdwar [Aue.

The inhabitants assert that a city surrounded it called Bidad-nagar,

which through the wickedness and cruelty of the raja was destroyed

by an earthquake,—a fact borne out by the appearance of the mound.

This hillock had been in generations past dug up in search of coins

and relics. The walls were of brick, very massive and large: there

were two or three reservoirs and some wells within the enclosure, one

built of stone. The Cashmerians for twenty-five years have been in the

habit of digging here,. nominally for bricks, but evidently from their

eagerness they have fallen upon more valuable spoil : the chief of Jelim

has several times confiscated pots of copper and silver coins thus dug up.

The greater part of these have a horseman on one side and a bull on

the other*. At one time a number of squared blocks of red granite

were dug up, anc some door posts which have been since converted

into objects of worship by some Udasi fagirs on the banks of the

Hydaspes. One of them is sketched in fig. 2 of Pl. XX, and is seen

to be the door post of a Hindu templet. The fellow of it is set up at

Khallih, three kos N. N. W. of Jelim, by some Ben-bdba fagirs. M.

Court imagines this spot to have been the site of Bucephalia; and

he would fix Nicea at Patti-kuti near Vessa, three kos E. of Jelim. In

his opinion Jelim and Aurangabad} are the only positions in which two

numerous armies could have encamped to dispute the passage of the

river. Moreover, not a vestige of an ancient town is to be found on

the west bank of the Hydaspes from Kala Mangala to Darapur, except

at Sultdnpur, where the river debouches from the hills. In face of this

spot is the fortress of Kala Mangala, attributed to Raja Sarwan. The

opposite bank is too broken for Porus to have manceuvered his cha-

riots. Below Sultdénpur, at the small hill of Bariti, the inhabitants

assert a bridge of boats formerly existed. Two kos further down, at

Menar, are seen the remains of a castle of very great antiquity: the

river once washed its walls, but has now retired half a league. It is

accounted the customary place of crossing the river in former days.

* This description is insufficient to determine whether they are of the Azos

group, or whether of the Rajput series ; but as they are called above, Hindu, we

presume the latter must be the case; and this will account for the large quantity

of these coins procured by Keramar Axi and Mowan Lat in the Panjéb. It

may also account for the inscription Syd/apati on one series of them—‘‘ lord

of the Sydlas,’’ whom Col. Winrorp fixes as the people of Taxila, (see above.)

—Ep.

+ Capt. Burnes describes a fluted pillar witha capital very like the Corinthian

order shewn to him by M. Courr. He says also, that the inscription on the

slab was in the Arabic character. Travels, i, 58.—Eb.

t Erroneously written Uzengabad on the map:—and Morungabad of Wi1-

¥wORD.—Ep.

1836.] and the ancient province of Taxila. ee Ya:

M. Court recognizes the place of ALuxaANpER’s passage at Khili-

patan, where is still the principal ford. It is five kos from Jelim, the

Bucephela of our informant: agreeing with the passage in history,

‘«‘ ALEXANDER wishing to pass the Hydaspes, ascended four leagues

higher up than where he had encamped, and there crossed his army

at an island which facilitated the passage.’ This island is the one

in face of Khilipatan, for at the village of Gitcali the river divides into

two branches, one running towards Jelam, the other towards Suk-

chandpur. They enclose a large plain of cultivable ground. The

western branch is only fordable in November, December, and

January: it divides again into two branches at Kiilipatan, thus

forming several large islands, the largest being two leagues long by

one broad :—the river beds are pebbly, and the current strong. The

plain continues for four kos up to the ruins of Patti Koti; and here,

doubtless, ALEXANDER must have had his encounter with Porvus’

son, and with that prince himself, who came to his aid. All that

Puurarcu says of the passage and of the towns founded by ALExAN-

DER, tallies well with the above explanation.

The celebrated fortress of Rotas, now unworthy of regard in a

military view, presents little beyond Muhammedan tombs and mosques

in its ruins. Thereare, however, Hindu medals found there, but the

particular class is not mentioned.

Pind-ddden Khan, a modern commercial town, is the great mart for

the rock salt of the mountains on the west, now monopolized by Rawn-

sit Sincu*. Other ruins of an ancient town, Gagirakhi, extend along

the banks of the Hydaspes from near Jeldlpur to Ddrapur. On leav-

ing the district of Pind-dadan Khan by the route which traverses the

salt range, the site of an Indian annual pilgrimage occurs, called

Kattas. Here again are the traces of an old town ascribed to the

Pandavas, where are found small images of a red stone, holding in

their hand the ¢oppa of the Persians,—a species of iron club which

would appear to have been a weapon of offence formerly in use.

ALEXANDER was wounded by one in his attack on the fort of the

Malli.

The district of Thenni bordering upon that of Pind-dddan is famous

for its breed of horses and mules. After passing Chekuvdl, Nilli and

Dula on the Sudan river, a ruined castle is pointed out where the

sovereigns of old used to keep their treasure. Medals are here found

* See the description by Burnes in his Travels, vol. i. 52, and in the Journ.

As. Socy. ii. 365.—Eb.

474 Memoir on a Map of Peshiwar [Ave.

in the ruins. The whole country is indeed remarkable for the number

of antique ruins it presents: the most striking are those of Tatta and

Ris : those of Kounda are attributed to raja Hono (?).

At Jend, 12 kos from Khébbi, towards Kushdlgarh is a small gold-

washing. Fatehganj, a very old town, is remarkable for its sulphureous

springs : Hassan Abddl, for its picturesque situation and pure waters:

the remains of a palace built by Axzer here are still visible: it is on

the high road from Attok to Lahdr. Of these places it is unnecessary

to speak, as they have been fully described by Burnes and other

travellers ; nor have we space to extract M. Court’s notes on Khanpir,

Skanderpir, Naucher, &c. Near the former place General Venrura

opened several cupolas, and a large one at Pdhler was explored by the

native chief.

Of the district of Pakhéri, called by Forster Pukholi, this author

would make Peucelaotis of the Greeks. This M. Covrr refutes, plac-

ing it (as noted in the memoir published last month) near Bajore

(Bazira of the Greeks) on the west bank of the Indus.

We must also take but a very cursory view of M. Court’s remarks

on the physical geography of Taxila, hoping to see the whole pub-

lished ere long in the Paris Journal, with the advantage of the com-

ments of savans acquainted with the ancient history of the province.

The mountainous tract to the north of the district boasts the boldest

and most romantic scenery. It is the link between the Pirpanjal

range and the Hindu-koh. In the winter months there are but two or

three passes practicable for foot passengers, and that with much

hazard. Parallel ranges of less elevation occupy the southern face of

the principal mountain ridge for a space of 40 to 60 kos, forming

between them the successive valleys of Kakabamba, Pakkhéri, and

Mozafferabdd. Detached and irregular mountains and ridges cross

the main chains at various angles, or form insulated groups, as is

shewn on the map. There seem to be two principal lines of upheave-

ment, which it would be abundantly curious to examine geologically

on the principle of contemporaneous origin of parallel ridges started

by M. Exiz pe Beaumont. The most interesting lines are the metalli-

ferous hills N. W. of the Hydaspes, in general low, savage and uncul-

tivated, but richin ores. Ferruginous, sulphureous and saline springs

are plentiful, but are not now turned to more use than the mines,

which were apparently worked in former times. The Hydaspes for-

merly paid tribute in the gold of its own tributary streams. The Pind-

dadan chain has abundance of iron. At Karengéli near Kattas are mines

of antimony :—in the Guirih range, native sulphur : near Makhodi, na-

tive alum: and at Pind-didan, the salt mines before mentioned.

1836.] and the ancient province of Tazila. 475

The vault of the large salt mine fell in shortly after the visit of M.

Jacquremont. The section shews well the position of the salt, which

is, in fact, a solid rocky mass : towards the upper part it divides into

veins of white and red :—the latter are preferred ; the former contain-

ing lime and gypsum.

The western mine is greater in depth, but less extensive than the

other. 250 steps were counted before reaching its focus :—the shafts

were only wide enough for one person to pass at a time, each carry-

ing a flambeau. The excavation is divided into two vaults ; one is now

abandoned, being cut away to a dangerous precipice.

The lamps rendered the air and heat nearly insufferable when

Messrs. Wave and Murray visited it in company with M. Covrr.

On the surface of this chain are scattered large blocks of gypsum,

worn as if by the action of the sea. Some yellow slates are also seen.

Vegetation is confined to saline plants and a few thorny bushes.

Of the Indus and Hydaspes sufficient is already known. Danvitir

has fallen into an error in making the former pass by Hashtnagar,

which lies on a small tributary called the Jind.

The climate of Taxila embraces extremes, from the healthy bracing

cold of the snowy mountain to the excessive heats of the southern

plains. ‘The soil of the southern portion for want of water, as well as

from the presence of salt, is little adapted for cultivation, and the vil-

lages are consequently very scant. In the beautiful valleys to the

north, however, plentiful springs and a rich soil produce the opposite

effects of fertility and a dense population ; but agriculture is neglected

through the oppression of the Government. The perpetual verdure of

the hills to the north affords abundant pasturage for cattle.

II.—ON THE PROVINCE OF PESHA’WAR™.

Peshdwar, the city, supposed by some geographers to be Peu-

celaotis, of the Greeks, is said by its inhabitants to be built upon the

ruins of the ancient Baghram. In dimensions it certainly much sur-

passes Cdbul, but its suburbs and the number of gardens which extend

southward, contribute towards this apparent magnitude. Its houses

are slightly built of brick or mud, held together by wooden frame work.

This mode of building has, perhaps, been adopted on account of the

earthquakes, which are frequent, but seldom very serious. The houses

are generally provided with Sard-khdnas, a description of cellar or

underground room, where the inhabitants spend the day, to avoid the

* In this part of the translation, which follows the original more closely

than the foregoing, we are indebted to the same fair hand, to which we were

beholden on a former occasion,— Ep.

3a 2

476 Memoir on a Map of Peshdéwar [Ave.

intense and scorching heat of their summer. ‘The streets are narrow

and irregular, and present every where the most uncleanly aspect.

A large bazar runs across from east to west, commencing from

the Serait Gaur katra, and terminating at the fortress of Balasir. A

stream which draws its waters from the river of Bahréh, crosses

the town from south to north, and would very much facilitate the

establishing of fountains, if the Asiatics only knew the use and

advantage of them. The population of Peshawar may be rated at

80,000 souls, consisting of Afghans, Kashmerians, and Indians. The

latter appear to have been its primitive inhabitants ; but although they

are still very numerous, they live in dependence on the Mahomedans,

and are oppressed by heavy taxation, (taxés d’avanies.) All the com-

merce of the country is in their hands. From Cabul, raw silk, worsted,

cochenille, jalap, manna, asafcetida, saffron, resin, simples, and

both fresh and dried fruits—all which are generally exported to

India, from whence they receive in return, cambric, silks, indigo, sugar,

and spices. To Cashmir the exports are gold sequins, gold and silver

thread and lace, in transit from Bokhara; and the return, shawls, tea,

and Persian manuscripts. They exchange the salt of the Kohat range

with the rock crystal and the iron of Bijdwar: this last district, as

also those of Sawat and Bunir, offer a ready market for the sale of

their tissues of cotton ;—the trades and arts of the town are limited to

mere necessaries of life, and are principally carried on by the Cash-

merians,

The Hindustani is generally spoken, also the Pashtu ; the use of the

Persian language becomes nearly extinct on entering this province.

Peshdwar musters about 40,000 horse, a thousand foot soldiers, and

twelve pieces of cannon. The troops are very irregular, and are

badly paid.

The climate of the province is not very healthy. Fevers are very

prevalent from the summer solstice to the end of autumn, at which

period they generally prove fatal. They are brought on by excess in

the eating of fruits, or by the unwholesome exhalations and vapours,

rising from the rivers of the Duab. The irrigation necessary for

the cultivation of the Turkish corn in May, may contribute to en-

gender fever, the heat of the air being then very intense. The in-

habitants, ignorant of the superior properties of quinine, make use of

a very bitter plant which grows on the banks of their streams. In

1835 I was encamped in this country with the French brigade, 10,000

strong, when we lost by these fevers upwards of a thousand men.

Great inconvenience is also here experienced from swarms of flies,

which prevent any nourishment being taken during the day ; for if

1836.] and the ancient province of Tavila. 477

any of them be swallowed with the food, they occasion a vomiting,

attended with very severe pain in the loins and in the chest. Snakes

and scorpions are also in great abundance, and are often venomous.

The spring sets in early: by the end of February the peach trees

blossom luxuriantly; by the end of April the weather becomes un-

pleasant ; and the heat is scorching during the months of June, July,

and August. In June the Simum prevails; it is sometimes pestilential,

resembling the desert blast (Samial) of Arabia. When it blows, one

would fancy that one stood at the entrance of a hot oven. ‘‘ Heaven

pity then,” the poor traveller, who is overtaken by this wind at mid-

day in the open country! When first attacked the body becomes

covered with blue spots, and putrefaction is almost instantaneous.

This wind generally blows from W. N. W., in the direction of Jeld-

laébdd, where it is frequently fatal. The hot season ends in September.

”

The rains are heavy in the winter, when the sky is frequently clouded

for a week together. There are intervals of rain also in April, but

rarely. In July and August, the rainy season in India, little falls in

these parts, but storms are very frequent, and very severe, and are

always preceded by whirlwinds of dust, obscuring the atmosphere for

hours together ; they are brought on by the S. W. winds, and are

accompanied by claps of thunder in rapid succession. The lightning

falls with fearful flashes.

The environs of Peshawar exhibit little else but a vast space covered

with ruins and tombs. I discovered and dug out several remains of

Indian statues. These statues, some of which are in plaister, others

in bronze, appear to be of very ancient date, for they are devoid of

beauty and are ill executed. They principally represent Gawraknathi

fagirs, or perhaps Jogis, who for a long time held the country west

of the Indus. The image represented (in Plate XX VI.) was dug out of

the village of Banamari, which lies west of Peshawar. Ata greater dis-

tance are the ruins of Pirigel, where in the rains Indian and Bactrian

medals are to be found. To the west of Peshawar is a mount upon

which an ancient castle appears, which may be the one that Hupuas-

TIoN besieged, and which was re-established by Timour Suau,

and was subsequently sacked by the Sikhs. The Sikhs again re-

built it in 1834, when this province fell into the hands of Ranygit

SinGH, in consequence of a victory gained over the Afghans by the

division under my command. The gardens which stretch from the

south to the west of the town present the appearance of a forest of

orchards, where they cultivate the plum, the fig tree, the peach, the

pear, the mulberry peculiar to this country, the pomegranate, and the

quince: but these fruits, although beautiful to the eye, are very far

478 Memoir on a Map of Peshéwar [Ave.

from having equal flavour with those produced in the south of France.

The grape is only cultivated at the village of Shekh Imadm Mehdi.

Peshawar is situated in the middle of a vast plain, which stretches

towards the N. E., and which is twenty-five kos in length from the east

to the west, and fifteen in breadth from the south to the north. The

mountains of the Kattiuks, and the Afrédis bound it to the east, and

those of Kohat on the south. To the west it is bounded by the mountains

of the Kheibars, and to’ the north the river of Nagumdn separates it

from the districts of the Dudb and of the Yusafzais. This plain is

crossed by the river Bahreh, which has its source on the southern side

of the Koh-suféd, crossés the Kheibars, enters this district at A’lam-gijar,

and after‘a short passage empties itself into the Nagumdn, seven kos

east of Peshawar. Without it the district would be nothing but a bar-

ren desert. From June to September the river is dried up by the many

drains made to irrigate the cotton plantations and the barley fields.

The principal water-courses strike off at the village of Serband, and

are divided lower down into an infinity of lesser ones, which give asto-

nishing fertility to the soil of this district, and promote the cultivation

of rice, which is principally sown in the village of the Mdshturzais,

and is much prized by the inhabitants of Afghdnistdn, and the Pan-

jab. The river Nagumdn, which I presume is no other than the

Malamantus of the Greeks, formerly ran to the west of Peshawar,

and you may still trace its bed near the ruins of Rasheki. It appears

that some sovereign of the country must have changed its course, in

order to fertilize the land of the Mumunds, which extends to the

south of the town. This tribe, as well as that of the Kaleels who in-

habit the west, have often bloody contentions for the water. The

districts of the Daidzais and of Kalessa are watered by the canal of

Budeni, led from the same river of Nagumdn; its waters are so

favorable to vegetation, that grass grows on its banks to the height of

a full grown man. The territory of Peshdwar is, generally speaking,

most fertile, rivallmg the best in Europe if it were but well administer-

ed. The harvest is gathered in the summer, and again in autumn.

That of the summer yields an abundance of barley and corn,—that of

the autumn several kinds of maize, rice, oil seeds, arid abundance of

cotton, which provides the inhabitants with a species of manufacture

suited tothe climate. Wood is procured in great scarcity from the

surrounding mountains, on which very little grows.

This country on every side presents to the view ruins of ancient

tewns, of the very origin of which the natives are ignorant. The

most striking are those of Khohusser, more commonly known by

the name of the Takkal, where are the vestiges of three massive

1836. ] and the ancient province of Taxila. 479

cupolas, of very ancient date. Not far from thence are the ruins of

Rachekhi. Further off the remains of the town of Jamrud may be

observed at the entrance of the defile of the Khetbar mountains.

The route from Peshdiwar to Michin¢é betrays signs of old habitations at

Pirbala and Pessank. The road to Kohdt presents also the remains

of Boulidana, which may possibly be Embolima of AtexanpeER. Quite

close to this, Deliter may be seen; and further off, at the entrance of

the defile of the Kohdts, are the rus of Kargan, Akor, Zendin; and

in the districts of the Mamunds may be also seen those of Aspinagar,

Bassevanan, and Ormiil.

The province is divided into six districts; namely, the Kaleels

to the west, the Mimunds to the south, the Déivdzais, the Dudd

to the north, the Kalissa to the east, and that of Hashtnagar to

the north-east. These several districts yield a revenue of eight

lakhs of rupees, without including the cantons of Mohdt and

Lachiteri, which bring near two additional lakhs. The district

of Kohdt is inhabited by the Bungeish, and is celebrated for the

beautiful springs of limpid water which meet at the foot of the

surrounding mountains. A coal mine exists in this territory, but

the inhabitants derive but small profit from it. A mine of sulphur is

also to be found there, but it is not worked; and some petroleum

wells or mineral tar, which the inhabitants use to light up their

dwellings. Adjoining to this pergannah are the districts occupied

by the Theris, and beyond this is the province of Banitdk.

The district of the Dudb is so called, because it is enclosed between

the two rivers of Nagumdn and Jindi. It is very fruitful in rice and

sugar-cane, and abounds in beautiful and fertile meadows. It is

inhabited by the tribe of the Gigianees. In the district of the Abdzais

are the ruins of Gound, but their origin is not known. Still further

in the direction of Teagi is the isolated mountain of Azarneh, which

might well be supposed to be the Aornus, the conquest of which

was one of ALEXANDER’s most brilliant exploits. The fortress of

Hissdr is only ten kos to the N. E. of Peshdwar: it is situated three

kos from the river of Nagumén, in an island formed by two branches

of the river Jind, which flows from the outskirts of Sawdt and Bajd-

war. This fortress is conspicuously raised on a small artificial hill.

At its foot are extensive ruins of an ancient town, apparently

founded by idolaters, and upon which is built the actual town

of Hashtnagar, a name meaning the seven towns*. Our geographers

* Hashtnagar, meaning eight towns. The whole eight are named on

Wi.Lrorp’s map.—Ep,

480 Memoir on a Map of Peshawar [Aue.

think that this town is the same as Massaga, the capital of the

Assaceni, but 1am more inclined to think that it is the Nysa of the

Greeks. Its proximity to the Cophenes, and above all what Piv-

TARCH states as said by AtExanpeER to his Macedonians, when they

objected to fording the river on account of its depth, corroborate

my conjecture. The inhabitants of the Duab, and those of the

mountains of the Mourmards, appear to me to be the Assaceni,

who were employed by ALexanveER in building the vessels, in which

they sailed down the Cophenes as far as Taxila. To the N. E. of

Hashtnagar is the mountain of Behhi standing alone on a vast plain,

and close to it are the ruins of an ancient castle which is attributed

to Rajya Varrah, and which, according to the traditions of the

inhabitants, was the dwelling of the ancient sovereigns of this

country. There are also some basso-relievos, and the traces of

an aqueduct by which the waters were carried to the river Jind.

This aqueduct commences at the ruins of Raji, which are situated

nearly opposite Hashtnagar. Further off in the district of the Babi-

zais, on another mountain, are the massive ruins of another fortress, ~

which can only be reached by means of a path cut through the rock.

It goes by the name of Peli.

Three days’ journey north of Hashtnegar are the districts of Sawdt

and Bunir, where are the ruins of Gerira, Bonsekhan, Zakut, and Chim-

kor. Near the latter are four massive cupolas of the same kind as

those of Mantkyala. The small river Panjkori traverses the district,

and joins the Jindi. It is much to be regretted that travellers do not

visit with more minuteness this portion of the country, as they might,

were they to do so, gain positive information as to the march of

ALEXANDER on the banks of the Indus. It is in these districts that

Birset, the Vizier of AksEr, perished with a whole army. The inha-

bitants have, we are told, cut a road through the rugged rocks,

leading to the north, by means of which they communicate with the

Tartar tribes of Kashgar and others. All that tract of country lying

to the east of Hashtnagar is inhabited by the tribe of the Yusufzais.

The Indus forms the eastern boundary of this district, and Landeh on

the river Nagumdn its southern. To the north are the mountains of

Panjitar and Shemla. According to some historians, the province of

the Yusufzais is the same as the Taxila of ALEXANDER, where the

king Ompuis reigned, whose fidelity and devotion facilitated to ALEX-

ANDER the conquest of the Indus. But, according to other historians,

and more especially in the opinion of Piurarcu, the real Taxila was

that country enclosed between the Indus and the Hydaspes.

1836.] and the ancient province of Tasila. 481

The province of the Yusufzais is divided into eleven tappas—viz :

Principal Towns.

Pee kavons Sedu-zais, Hound.

Ppas.-- -+-+-+ 1 Otuman-zais, Toppi.

Keder-zais, Khiva.

Mamu-zais, Nohdéh.

Five tappas, Rezers.. ¢ Malek-zais, Yar-hosein.

4 | Akukhels, Ismaila.

L Mani-zais, Toulandi.

Two tappas, Amazais. ae \ Kapurdigarbi.

; Kamal-zais, Otti.

Two tappas, Kamalzais. ieamaliears. Tard,

All these districts are governed by independent chiefs, who live in

the greatest dissension. There are no taxes established, and each in-

habitant rents, cultivates, and reaps the produce of his grounds, paying

only a small sum as tribute to the chief of the district. It is only

since 1822 that the Maharaja of Lahore succeeded by the force of arms

in levying five rupees on every house and a certain number of horses,

with which they are obliged to furnish him annually. The tribe of

the Yusufzais is one of the most powerful in Afghanistan. It has

always been remarkable for the independence it has preserved, and for

some time it resisted the attacks of the Mogul kings, and even Napir

Suan himself, who never thoroughly succeeded in subjugating it. The

people of this tribe are vigorous, active, turbulent, and have given

proofs of extraordinary courage in the wars which they have had to

sustain against the Sikhs. When public danger is threatened, all the

districts suspend their own quarrels, and gather together to make

common resistance. Each one provides himself with weapons at his

own expense, and volunteers as a soldier under the banner of his chief.

This soil is extremely fertile in every kind of grain, yielding a plen-

tiful harvest of maize, beans, peas, cotton, oil seeds, and excellent

tobacco. The mountains towards the north afford excellent pasture

for all kinds of cattle. The province contains no town, properly so

called, but it is embellished by large and populous villages : the prin-

cipal one amongst themis Kapardigarhi, standing in the midst of the

ruins of a very ancient town, which might very possibly be the Caspa-

tyrus of the Greeks, the capital of the Gand&éri, whom our geogra-

phers place to the east of the Assaceni on the western bank of the

Indus. Quite close to this village I observed a rock on which there are

inscriptions almost effaced by time, and out of which I could only

decipher the following characters. (See Inscription 5, of Plate XXVII.)

Further off, on the opposite side of the mountain of Koh-ganga, are

482 Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. [Aue.

the ruins of an ancient town, which is attributed to a heathen race;

and quite close to that is the village of Bazar, now inhabited by the

Kamaizais. Not far from thence is another very extensive ruin,

where several remains of statues have been found*. In the land of the

Yusufzais also are the ruins of Motina near Yar-hosein; those of

Gagriand Shirkand near Ismailia ; Kirkand near Mayar, in the district

of Otti ; Kaleder near the stream of Kalapdni ; Mashari-Banda, on the

river Landeh; and Pélusseddn, opposite Messa. Besides these ruins

the country is covered with an immense quantity of small artificial

hills, on which there are remains of ancient dwellings, and where, in

the rains, Indian, Bactrian, and Indo-Scythian medals may be found.

Near Panjitar are the ruins of Nogiran, where there are inscriptions

in the same character as those noticed above.

In the district of Shemla, which is further to the north, we remark

those of Ndgari, where basso-relievos may be seen. On the banks of

the Indus are the ruins of Péhour, Toppt, Hound, and Mahmedpur, of

which I have already spoken. The river Landeh or Nagumdn sepa-

rates the Yusufzais fromthe province of Katiiks. This country is

very mountainous, and contains mines of sulphur, salt, springs of

naphtha, and many slate quarries. It is inhabited by the tribe of the

Kattuks and the Aferidis, intrepid mountaineers, who often intercept

the route from Attok to Peshéwar. Their chief towns are Nizampur

and Sirri in the interior, and Akhoreh on the right bank of the Nagu-

mdn. This last town may be presumed to be the Ora of Arrian. If

this be the case, the inhabitants of the mountains of the Katiiks are

descendants of the Assacent. The province of the Kattuks is divided

from that of Kohat by the district of Lachitri.

I11.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by Jas, Prinszp,

Secy. &c.

[Continued from page 349.]

Pl. XXVI. 1.—Asirgarh inscription.

This inscription, for the knowledge of which I am indebted to the

antiquarian zeal of Dr. J. Swiney, has been in the possession of

Dr. Meuuisu since the year 1805, when, according to a memoran-

dum on the original drawing, it was copied from a wax impres-

sion of a seal found at Asirgarh by Captain Co.esrooxg, of the

Engineers. By the three notes in pencil at the top, (which I have

* We have lithographad in Pl. XXVI. a bronze head dug up probably at this

place by M. Courr.. It bears a Sans¢rit inscription.—Eb.

a ; aeense & Poti € thent® A: Courd.

Yaa ea i nm

, ul

ty SiS ‘ 2 Ks :

piles : i,

Piel os Hii)

at pip wel

Nai

‘

i !

i f

b i re ss igo

path: ‘ t

err

i " 7 We

i ot | sea

ARUP

Nite i

i fee

—_ 2

= ==

Wis

Hf "

al H ph

aa rT

a NSE

A H

: a mir7or Zs bncil (LBs

NTT

R ae =

at Llc CP TS TirsitC = Ne

«> # » :

es ;

hie ot Ae

ise) eee i d

fo)

1836. ] Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. 483

inserted), it would appear that the seal was surmounted by three series

of figures, probably cast in bronze: viz. in the centre, Nandi the bull,

with a state chatta over him, and supporters on either side, bearing, the

one, a chatta and axe; the other a sceptre and axe.

The inscription, hitherto undecyphered, is at once seen to belong

to the old form of Deva-ndgari, now grown familiar to us; and I am

indebted to the Rev. Dr. Miu, for the subjoined transcript in the

modern character, as well as for the translation of the text, and remarks

on the same.

From the absence of a date it is not easy to assign a certain posi-

tion to the five distinct successions which it embraces ; though, from

the locality of the inscription in a fort of Khandésh immediately south

of Mdlwa, as well as from the termination of the names in Varma, they

may be assigned with some probability to the Ujjayani dynasty ; where,

in the twelfth century, we find Naravarma, YasuvarMa, and three

other Varmas recorded as having reigned. No one of these names,

however, accords with any of the present list ; neither does the modern

Nagari of their inscriptions, of which Colonel Top has published fac-

similes, at all resemble the seal character, which is evidently of a

much more ancient date. Itis customary, also, in Hindu records of this

nature, to commence with the reputed ancestor of the race; but we

find no allusion to VicramApirya or Buosa in the present instance,

and must either suppose our seal anterior to these illustrious person-

ages—or unconnected with Ujjayant. Itis certainly possible thata

petty raja might have maintained independence for a few reigns in his

hill fort, claiming descent from the unknown Hari-varna; but itis un-

likely that he should have assumed the lofty title of Mahdrdjadhiraja.

The twice recorded matrimonial connection with the Gupta family

is also worthy of remark, as it may possibly have reference to the

Canouj dynasty, whose coins have lately excited so much interest. The

style of alphabet affords strong evidence of their contemporaniety.

Transcript of the Asirgarh inscription in modern Deva-ndégari.

Staal amrAa ea: TATU MTAAATIST: WHITATT SIT

ACIS AANAVATITT AA SCA MSICIASCaa A

grairegaifasa: AMAT ARS MGAA: MASAI

waa qa qaafueqenrfasar TAA AANA: FASC

BACT TA qaufaequattai TAMAS HIATT

ASIST STA ax. ficra Tet yaumequitacty

Ail WITATA STAT: FAST a

SICA MUIARAATH SAT: |

Ont nann PWD =

484 Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. [Aue.

Translation.

‘‘He whose glory was transcendent by reason of his four great

goods*,—before whose splendour other kings bowed, sickened with

envy,—who was ever occupied in the juridical decisions of learned

Munies dwelling in leafy hermitages,—whose crooked ramparts were

alike bright and impenetrable,—who was the spoiler of all such as were

vexed with peace,—(such was) the great king Hari-varman. His

son, whose excellent victories equalled those of his father, born of his

noblet wife ANxa-pE’vi’, was the great king A’pITYA-VARMAN. His

son again, whose exceeding joys equalled those of his father, born of

Arixa’ri’{, eldest daughter of the Gupta race, was the great king

I’svaRA-vARMAN. His son, whose magnificence equalled that of his

father, born of Arixa‘rr’, eldest daughter of the Guptas, was the great

king of kings R. Sryua-varman. His son, possessed of like exceed-

ing joys with his father, born of Bua’ra Ka’ma-wart’, was the chief

of the excellent lion-rulers, the great king of kings KHarva-vaRMAN,

our worthy Lord.”

It is observable—that the title of Raja-adhiraja, or king of kings—

is here, as in the Allahabad inscription, restricted to the two last of

the line of succession—viz. SinHA-VARMAN, and Kuarva-varMan. I

do not understand the simple letter R. prefixed to the former name,

(viz. at with a dot preceding and following)—unless it be an abbrevia-

tion for Raja: nor am I quite sure of the three letters following the

last name, which I have made Syt: W. H. M.

Inscription on a bronze image from Peshdwar.

The head depicted in Plate XXVI. is copied from a sketch in M.

Court’s memoir and collection of drawings, from which extracts are

published in the present and in the preeeding Journal, (see p. 482.)

The characters are decidedly Deva-nagari, but whether from their

indistinctness, or from errors in the copying, or from the language

being different, their combination does not form any intelligent

Sanscrit sentence.

* i. e. Religious duty, way; wealth, ayy; pleasure, ara; eternal salvation,

Ha. Such are the four Bhadras or goods according to the Hindus. Amera Cosha,

ii. 7, § 3, sl. 57. If, however, for teqayxR we read Wax with PREMA-CHAND

Pandit, the translation will be, ‘‘ He whose glory transcended the bounds of

the four encircling oceans,’’—W. H. M.

+ The ordinary honorific epithet Srimati is here, contrary to the usual rule,

introduced into the compound in the feminine gender. Regularly it should either

be the crude form Srimat, or the locative case feminine Srimatyam.—W. H. M.

t The recurrence of the same name and description is singular. It is impos-

sible that they should be the same person, such incest being unknown even to

the heroic age of India.— W. H. M.

1836.) Facsimiles of ancient Inscriptions. ' 485

The head has its hair gathered in a knot after the fashion of the

Hindu devotees, and it is bound together by a triple-headed snake of

the cobra species—an ornament not uncommon to Jain figures, but

rarely seen in the simple head of Buddha. The ears seem to be

lengthened and split, in the style of the Kanphati sect ; but the draw-

ing may also be viewed as of earrings in ears of the natural dimen-

sions.

Pl. XXIX.—Inscriptions on Kemaon Tridents.

On the right hand side of Plate XXIX. is depicted the bronze

trident at Barahét in Garhwdl, reduced from the large native drawing

presented to the Society by Mr. Commissioner Trait, last winter.

The inscription on the shaft was published as No. 2 of Plate IX. with

a translation and explanation by our Vice-President, Dr. Mitt. The

copper letters being in relief from the shaft were taken off in facsimile.

The same plan, Mr. Trarut says, did not answer with the trident

at Gopésvara, although the ancient letters on its shaft are soldered

on in the same manner.—The copy taken by the eye of a native

draughtsman is unfortunately too incorrect to be legible: but the form

of many of the letters shews clearly that this inscription is of the same

age as that of Barahat. .

On the upper part of the trident are three or four short inscriptions

in the modern Dev4-nagari. These, Mr. Trait says, are cut into the

metal. Three of them are illegible, or rather appear to be in some

other language. One only is in Sanscrit; but in this also several

errors have been committed by the transcriber. With the assistance

of the Society’s pandit I am able to present it in a complete form :—

it contains a name—the grand desideratum in such cases ; though too

often, as in the present instance, it turns out to be a name unknown to

fame! The verse is in the accustomed Sdrdila Vikridita measure, so

often mentioned by Dr. Mizz. It opens with the invocation dum

Svasti.

Vv afa il war fefang aeray asiearadaifaat tr:

aaeiag* wacifaMugaralaara |!

Ware sfatiy ag fasraaa a fast

aarSe Gasfatran fe weal ya AAA FA: |

‘ The illustrious Prince Anix Maun, having extended his conquests

on all sides, brought together (quere, humbled or made low) upon this

* The proper grammatical reading would be Zaeata

486 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains > (Aue.

holy spot sacred to Mahadeva, under the emblem of a pillar, the very

sovereigns of the world whom his prowess had overcome ;—

« And thus having re-established this same pillar of victory, he

acquired reputation. It is a pious act to raise up a worthy foe when

he has been humbled.”

‘ Parcere subjectis et debellare superbos’ seems to be the sentiment

here inculcated ; and it is probable that the allegory of overthrowing

and restoring enemies, alludes to the taking down the pillar (which

may have been done to cut the new inscription) and its restoration,

by some raja who had penetrated thus far in a successful expedition.

The name of Matt occurs as a patronymic in more than one dynasty

of Nipal. It is not impossible, therefore, that the name here written

Antik Matt, may be the same as the Anya Matt of the Neverit

race, who reigned in that valley about the year 1195 A. D. according

to Kirxpatrick’s Sketch. ‘Anya, which is without meaning, should

probably be written ANr’k.

IV.—Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains of the Dadupur Collection. By

Lieuts. W. E. Baxeur, and H. M. Duranp, Engineers.

[We should be wanting both in candour and courtesy, were we not to point

out to the reader, tbat the plates accompanying the present paper were furnished

by our zealous contributors, and their esteemed commandant Col. Corvin. [n

despair of the difficulty and expence of executing so many plates in Calcutta, it

occurred to us that the same pens aad pencils which could produce such neat ori-

ginal drawings, could, if provided with the requisite materials, furnish engravings

and lithographs ready executed for our Journal. We accordingly dispatched

some yellow paper, and a copper plate, by dik, to Dadupur ; and these are the

first fruits. If not quite perfect, it should be remembered that the transfers

had to travel 1,000 miles in the height of the rains ere they could be secured

on the stone—and that the copper-plate, with its waxed and etched surface,

had to be bitten by the acid after its arrival in Calcutta. The wonder is, that

they should have turned out so well! We anticipate much greater success here-

after. —Ep.]

RHINOCEROS.

The manner in which the organic remains of the Sub-Himalayas

were at first deposited, and that in which they have been subsequently

disinterred, have necessitated a system of search more favorable to

the acquisition of specimens than to the accurate description of the

localities in which they occurred. Hitherto the fossils were in general

found widely scattered over the surface and throughout the ravines of

the calcareous sandstone formation ; a dispersion which rendered glean-

ing from the hill surfaces preferable to excavation at any one place,

affording the certainty of a larger number and greater variety of spe-

i Burn. As.Soc. Vat. Vi PLOT

Brom the wax-tmprefsvon fa Seal found atlsti- gar,

taken bf Capi. Cove prooke in 1805: preserved sy Dr. Merrisn.

asqusifaie yen wa euyag

US YBAUGEOAIYRSTA | | VETE DIA A Ay

HAHALIEAEN SHAT Phe DAH OTELSA

eres sais 512 afiumf

Egiahayy ny YAH SLsy T3WOHTE ELT YB

um rE@ Eh a ae

4) Zs VY

A SY 4 BN sf

S y) q ‘ope ©

di Y Ny

Y :

BRONZE HEAD dug up at PESHAWAR by M.A*COURT.

Lb. Tessin t Ldh? Press Ciluta-

Trident at Barahat in Garkhwal,-

t f- os =

~ H

exe ae We 8 fect he

c - >: = & —To 2i wf é vigh.

a: a

. r >).

ae port Slow. 13

YS RTS CEIIVFITI1 1/77 Pek 3 ——

2 Peat Gene | “Re | fe [i =! 1B | {2 ;

3 uso : Slo /L/ FL LL ASE 4 ea a

Vol. Vo PiXXX.

[AL De

“a

s |

@)5 ae Trident at Gofsesvara. /6 feet high. i

Pusu tty erect wun,

Paver gmuouwn

Meant de

a} Petree) drained

vl ee ee) J 5 AVE ULIy reA eee

- y \: ; ey Paras

SS Wy 72 ¢

BIS GAL HaqZa7y Wadmiu)e weARUrd uy Qersre aa Arete i

~@ rs |

das

ai Ni!

we NK A {|

! %

[eb dn RAM EMD ICP TUN 3440 eye uuod, Lima euza ahaa ewaagae Agape. rate c=

HeCSCAA wae -— aM 41 ym em dee A arderaey US aan precag-wae h :

* Press Calculle,

Be eS N

oe Gj) sn. 42 i ‘ Peete 3 t so Sé }

: co aes é Haas

Ancient Inscription onthe shaft of the Gopesvara trident, at A. 3

[S CAH QAuIeAEOePHYYDZIRM Har YSuAAzaIvAyal mam zazadae Ay HAIGMYS Hany LLerPA- Ar wwe? 2h Mj a Uetvt IPYABAL 20 Reg .

, HoeELR SAYA ATRAGIZE Quen er PI cu Rae Um ERRTA TZ og FAB RE Yer Bey anes wd ene 3

: BBG ATE euggzagra : “WES RTRYLSY ARCHIAD Usa “Pa sid mF, wa 4 Aatct-mai a ncu 5 Ge 4 Se

eUWodern Inscriplion ,at B, Madern Inscriptions af Cant D. <i

mS ‘ “a

8 Wale aatiqaanaaaginanenanaal i aelige e202 te i ei ee 33

5 Mazngzagz tRraam PAT Au aaa aha avaAgtaaag gla FULM ANG -PFAUETYNTaaA WAaMIAAn AA) es

iS yma Aas athhaAmMaha manasa si mame shaantmaaadnaegaseaniaealer NE FF

ui = . Te Qravrini Lo ie i a ee

1836.] ‘of the Dddupur Collection. 487

cimens than could be anticipated to result from any other mode of

collection. Notwithstanding these circumstances, however, it was

soon observed that the different parts of the head, the various frag-

ments of one limb, picked up at considerable distances from each

other, could with a little trouble be extracted from the heaps and

assorted; the sharp edges and accurate junction of the fractured sur-

faces preventing any doubt or mistake. Such restorations proved that

whole extremities, perhaps entire skeletons, must occasionally have

been entombed in the sand, and that the upheavement of the strata

causing the greater number of fossils to be traversed by cracks, divided

them into a number of fragments, which, on the degradation of the

strata, were swept away by the drainage water to various distances

from their original sites. It became an object, if possible, to discover

these sites ; with this purpose in view, many of the abrupt cliffs and

fresh slips, with which this tertiary formation abounds, were examined ;

but with such little success as to render it evident that the gradu-

al wear of ages could alone have sufficed for the exposure and

dissemination of so vast a quantity of these relics on the slopes

and in the ravines of the hills. The scattered fragments were

seldom found to give any clue to the original place of deposit : in fact

it has but once occurred to us that a nearly entire extremity has been

discovered in the calcareous sandstone. And in order to illustrate the

foregoing remarks, we have appended a sketch of these remains*; the

drawing represents them as they lay after the removal of the sand

which at first concealed all but the lower fragment of the femur:

pieces of tusk, bones, and the half of a lower jaw, were found in the

immediate neighbourhood, and indicated that the other parts of the

skeleton of this mastodon elephantoides had originally been deposited at

no great distance from the posterior extremity which forms the sub-

ject of the sketch. The whole may be considered a fair example

both of the mode of deposition and of the subsequent dispersion

which lodged separate, sharp-edged fragments on the hill sides and

amongst the sandstone boulders of the water-courses. The rare

occurrence of specimens under such favorable circumstances rendering

excavation a very uncertain and ill requited labour, forced the native

collectors to be satisfied with the crop which time had exposed.

* We regret exceedingly that the drawing on transfer paper of the fossil in

situ was spoiled in passing it on to the stone. This was the case also with

Plate XIX. a very beautiful drawing by Col. J. Corvin: but the latter officer

having taken the precaution of forwarding its original, a tolerable attempt has

been made to supply its place by M. Tassin. The initials W. E. B. to this

plate have been inserted by mistake.—Ep.

488 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains [Aue.

Hence, too, the localities of fossils thus collected at places remote

from each other did not admit of being accurately specified ; a cir-

cumstance of less importance so long as the species, sometimes even

the genera, exhibited characters distinct from the fossil and existing

species hitherto described ; but the species about to be noticed being

an approach to an existing tvpe, we consider ourselves fortunate in

having witnessed the exhumation of many of the specimens referred

to in this paper, and are only sorry that the limited time at our

disposal was insufficient to enable us to take a plan and accurate

sections of the ground.

The following general description may, however, give some idea of

a locality which furnishes an exception to other places whence fossils

have been obtained; in this instance they have not been met with

in solitary fragments, but found massed together ; and excavation has

been resorted to with advantage. Though but an imperfect descrip-

tion, what follows may suffice to point out the site in question, and

it has therefore been introduced.

The deposit is situated about a mile and a half to the N. W. of

Maginund, a village on the left bank of the easternmost affluent to

the Caggar, (or Gagur of some maps), immediately at the debouche

of the channel from the hills. On leaving the village, crossing over

to the right bank, and skirting for a short distance in a westerly

direction the base of the hills, the bed of a tributary is reached, which,

on being traced up, leads to the deposit. The formation here consists

alternately of strata of calcareous sandstone and of strata of a loamy

texture, composed of a mixture of sand and clay; the proportions

of these ingredients of course vary continually, but in general they

are nearly equal; the clay colours the strata, giving a brownish red

shade. The calcareous matter which enters into these loamy strata

is usually in small quantity, and they are so little indurated that some

of the blocks, although sheltered from the force of the rain itself,

fall to pieces when exposed to the damp atmosphere of a rainy day.

The fossils extracted from this matrix are more fragile than those

imbedded in the calcareous sand, and much care is requisite in dis-

engaging them.

A hasty or distant view of the sections which here, as elsewhere,

abound, might lead to the conclusion that the loamy strata predomi-

nate; for being, as above described, but little indurated and easily

acted upon by damp and rain, they tinge the calcareous sand strata

beneath them by covering their exposed sectional surfaces with red

or ochre-coloured particles. The consequent effect is very deceptive ;

but on closely examining many sections, we invariably found the sand

1836.] of the Dédupur collection. 489

to predominate. The part of the hills here alluded to is barren of

wood. The strata evidently suffer very rapid degradation, in conse-

quence of the facility with which the clayey beds yield to the abrad-

ing force of the drainage water; by means of the loose stratum,

the more enduring sandstone is as it were peeled off, and covers the

hill slopes with its debris. The dip of the stratification has a general

N. E. direction.

The circumscribed space, more immediately under consideration,

consists of about one hundred feet of ravine along a stratum of

loamy texture. Within this confined space specimens of all the

genera, contained in the synopsis of our collection, have been

found: that is to say, the same bed which yielded so many remains

of the fossil unicorn rhinoceros, likewise produced the half of the

upper and lower jaws of a young sivatherium ; many bones of the

extremities of adult animals of that genus, or of a ruminant of as

large a skeleton as that of the sivatherium; the anterior half of the

head of an animal which presents analogies both to the paleotherium

and anoplotherium ; and, in short, exemplars of all the genera except-

ing the hippopotamus. The remains of fish and tortoises must also

be added to the list of classes not hitherto discovered in this deposit :

exceptions, however, which are probably accidental, as the plates of

saurian animals have been obtained from thence.

The osteological remains, although strangely amassed together, are

frequently perfect; in many instances whole extremities have been

disinterred ; there are cases of the greater part of whole skeletons

being dug out, but these are rare; whole craniums of large animals

have not hitherto been met with; a circumstance which, considering

the number of their bones, would be unaccountable, had we not

grounds for taxing the carelessness of the excavators as in part an-

swerable for the anomaly. Perfect craniums of the smaller animals

are of frequent occurrence ; in one block we counted five craniums of

antelopes, close together ; not all equally perfect, as one of them

possessed even the core of the horns complete, but with the molars

and greater part of the head present, so that all error is excluded.

Animals of the same species are not always thus heaped together: on

the contrary, the relics of very different species may be frequently

observed in contact. One block of moderate dimensions presented

the assemblage of remains of the sivatherium, rhinoceros, sus, croco-

dile, of a large feline and a small carnivorous animal, of antelope, and

of an undistinguished ruminant. Another block gave the head of a

species of gulo, accompanied by the plate of a saurian animal. To the

rhinoceros femur and tibia, (Pl. A) we found attached the astragalus of

490 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains [Aue.

an elephant and metatarsal of a rhinoceros : it would however be useless

to mention at greater length the juxta-position of specimens in this

stratum ; suffice it to add, that sometimes, perhaps in general, the

skulls and bones of the same species are found together ; at others,

however, as above described, the remains of very different species

occur together.

There is one remarkable fact deserving of mention ; whichis, that by

far the greater proportion of the craniums from this deposit are those

of young animals ; the adult bear a small proportion to them.

From the above site the fossils selected to form the subject of this

paper have been obtained, with the exception of the following.

The cranium, Pl. XV. which was found about three miles from the

Maginnud deposit.

The separate teeth, fig. 5, 6, 7, 8, Pl. XIX. which were brought at

different times and without any account of the places at which they

were obtained.

The fine fragment from a lower jaw, fig. 6, 7, Pl. XVI. which is in

the possession of Conductor Dawes, of the Canal Department, to whom

it was brought from the vicinity of the Haripur pass.

Cranium. Weshall commence with the fossil, which being the most

perfect, affords the best means of instituting a comparison with the

skulls of described species. It forms the subject of Pl. XV. in which

three views are given, which were taken with a camera lucida—the

instrument and the distance of the cranium were so adjusted, that the

reflected image was exactly one-sixth the size of the original. We

are indebted to Colonel Convin for the delineations in this plate.

The fossil cranium is imperfect in the following parts. The extre-

mity of the nasal and intermaxillary bones are broken off; the zygo-

matic arches are both fractured; the left occipital condyle is wanting ;

the following molars have either dropped out prior to the envelop-

ment of the head by the matrix, or have been broken off subsequently

to its fossilization, viz. the fifth of the right, the first and seventh of

the left maxillary. In addition to these losses the cranium has under-

gone, when in the stratum, the common fate of sub-Himalayan relics,

and is cracked in several directions : the crush, however, which pro-

duced these cracks has not materially altered the form of the head;

the chief effect produced has been the forcing the left half palate at its

anterior extremity a little above its proper level; this the longitudinal

crack passing through the left orbit enabled it to accomplish; the

displacement resulting may be best observed in the profile view of the

skull, fig. 3. The transverse cracks are accompanied by a small

hollow and a consequent neighbouring bulge, both so partial and

1836.] of the Dddupur collection. 491

of such small relief, that in the profile their places can only be

observed by paying attention to the jagged outline at the depression

of the frontals. With the above exceptions the specimen is perfect.

A glance at Pl. XV. will be sufficient at once to determine the species

with which this fossil rhinoceros must be compared. The depression

of the frontals causing the deeply curved outline of the upper planes

of the head; the slope of the occiput; the septum and its nasal

arch—all separate this cranium from the existing and fossil bicorn

species. The existing unicorn species is that, therefore, to which

recourse must be had in order to establish a comparison.

In the unicorn rhinoceros of Java the height to which the crest of the

occiput rises above the palatal plane, as also the thickness and promi-

nence of the nasal arch supporting the horn, are less than in the Indian

rhinoceros. A line drawn tangential to the crest of the occiput and

the highest point of the nasal bones will, in the unicorn species of

India, be more raised above the plane of the frontals than is the case

in the Javanese rhinoceros. In the foregoing respects the fossilasso-

ciates itself with the Indian, and differs from the Java species. The

comparison may, therefore, in general be confined to the former.

With the view of bringing at once under the eye, the discordance

which occurs between the relative values of analogous dimensions, the

subjoined table is here inserted. The modulus chosen is the space

occupied by the seven molars, because on this measurement the

development of the bones of the head must, to a certain extent, be

dependent. The measurements given in Cuvier’s Os. Fos. have

afforded the proportions of the existing species; and the table of

dimensions which closes this paper has given the proportions of the

fossil.

a ae

Measurement. Cuvier’s | Fossil.

Ind. Rhin, |Ind. Rhin.

$< ES

Space occupied by the seven molars assumed equal UOpoenG ce 1:00 1°00

Height of occiput from lowest edge of occipital foramen to

summit of crest Of occiput, .... cece eee e rece ee eee tee eee 1°02 0°80

Greatest breadth of occiput, ..... e212 cece eee ee ee ee ees ey 1°05

Least thickness of cranium across temporals, .... ..-+-++-- 0°45 0.38

Breadth across at post orbital apophysis of frontals, .......- 0.83 0°78

Distance from anterior of orbit to auditory foramen,......-.. 1°02 1-00

Breadth across the occipital condyles, .... .. bb dap eeorne Ge 0°47 0‘60

Referring to the table of dimensions it will be observed, that the

height of the occiput is in the fossil less by met. 0.021 than the

corresponding measure of Cuvrer’s Indian rhinoceros ; but the greatest

breadth of the occiput is met. 0.036 in favor of the fossil: relatively

to the space occupied by the seven molars, these two measurements

attain a less development in the fossil than in the existing animal.

492 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains (Aue.

The difference in the occipital condyles amounting to met. 0.065 in

excess of the Indian rhinoceros causes a marked discordance in the

ratios of these dimensions ; but, as the left condyle and the adjacent

parts are wanting in the fossil, the measure was obtained by doubling

what appeared to be the exact half dimension ; this of course is not so

satisfactory as if the condyles had been perfect ; any inaccuracy conse-

quent on this circumstance could not, however, amount to a quantity

whieh would materially alter the deduced proportion. The occiput,

figs. 8, 9, Pl. XVII. is fortunately very perfect ; from its dimensions,

which prove it to have belonged to a smaller animal than the cranium

of Pl. XV. may also be concluded, that though inferior in size to

Cuvier’s specimen of the Indian rhinoceros, which in greatest breadth

of occiput exceeds it by met. 0.039, yet the space occupied by the

condyles is 0.010 in favor of the small fossil occiput. In both of the

fossils the depressions near the summits of the occiputs on each

side of the mesial projections are deeper than those of the existing

species.

The zygomatic arches not being entire, and the matrix being

uncleared from the portions which remain, no particular remarks can

be passed on them,

The sutures cannot anywhere be traced ; a circumstance which pre-

cludes the notice of particulars frequently of importance in the compa-

rison of species.

The least thickness of the cranium is but met. 0.001 greater than

that of the Indian rhinoceros; and therefore in proportion to the

modulus, yields a less ratio than that species.

The breadth at the orbits is met. 0.024 greater than in the existing

species ; consequently the skull does not in this part present any

material discordance of proportion.

The length between the auditory foramen and the anterior of the

orbit is 0.043 met. greater in the fossil; this measurement affords a

proportion only differing met. 0.002 from that obtained from the

existing species.

The infra-orbitary foramen is situated similarly to that of the

Indian rhinoceros.

The nasal arch is massive and much developed ; the spring of this

arch is perpendicularly over the anterior of the second molar; that

is a little more retired than in the Java or Indian rhinoceros skulls,

given in Cuvisr’s Pl, 4.

The breadth of the palate has not been given in the table of

dimensions, because the first and seventh molars not being perfect on

both sides, measurements corresponding to those of Cuvimr’s could

1836. ] of the Dddupur collection, 493

not be obtained. It is comparatively less than in the existing species,

but the great breadth of the teeth compensates for this difference.

Having detailed the essential differences and the points of resem-

blance observable in the fossil Indian rhinoceros when compared with

Cuviser’s dimensions of the existing Indian rhinoceros ; we must be

permitted to add, that additional measurements from skulls of the latter

species are requisite before anything certain can be pronounced as to

the amount of difference or correspondence between the two species.

We are induced to make this remark, in consequence of having been

favored with the examination of two craniums which presented consi-

derable variation of proportions when compared with Cuvirer’s and

with each other...

It appears to us desirable, therefore, to ascertain the limits within

which individual variations range before any thing positive can be

asserted. The foregoing remarks will have shown a great general re-

semblance, accompanied by a departure of proportions in some corre-

sponding parts: the latter may be sufficient for the establishment of a

new species,—at least for the present, until more data are obtainable

whence to determine the bounds by which the individuals of one species

are limited in their variations ; for the sake of distinction, therefore,

and present convenience, at the same time keeping in view the type

to which it is a near approach, we have termed the species under con-

sideration the R. Indicus fossils.

Teeth. The remark has been already passed, that the greater num-

ber of fossils obtained from the Maginnud deposit are the remains of

young animals: with the rhinoceros this has been particularly the

case. We accordingly find ourselves better able to illustrate the early

stage of dentition than that more advanced.

Fig. 1, Pl. XIX. represents the right half of an upper jaw, the left

half being in this instance omitted, as also in figs. 3 and 4, in order

that the series may be brought under the eye in one plate. Fig. 1

contains the four milk molars of the left maxillary; the fourth being

but just cut is unworn; but the palate being broken away from the

base of the tooth, more of it is seen than would otherwise be the case ;

in the right half of the specimen, where the palate is whole, the fourth

molar is more concealed. The first molar is also unworn, but the

second and third have suffered detrition. The two rows of teeth have

their internal base lines parallel to each other, and the lines which

would circumscribe their exterior much curved, in consequence of the

difference of breadth which exists amongst the teeth. The upper

part of an unworn tooth, measured exteriorly, is much longer than

the lower ; for the anterior of each molar projects beyond the posterior

494 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains [Aue.

extremity of the one immediately in its front by the gradual enlarge-

ment of the external line of enamel from the base to the summit. As

the molars wear down, this outer development is reduced, the internal

sides of the teeth come more into use, and breadth is gained in

compensation for the diminished length of surface in wear.

Fig. 2, Pl. XIX. isa fragment from aright maxillary, containing the

Ist, 2nd, and 8rd milk teeth, more worn than the corresponding

molars of fig. 1. The Ist teeth in these two specimens are dissimi-

lar; but that of fig. 1 not having completely disengaged itself from

the jaw-bone, a strict comparison cannot be made between the two.

The detrition which the remaining teeth have undergone does not

prevent the trace of their enamel from being found to agree with that

of the analogous molars of fig. 1.

A still further advanced state of wear is figured in fig. 3, which is

taken from a cranium to which the occiput and anterior of the nasal

bones are wanting. The 5th molar is here on the point of appear-

ance; the four first are much worn, particularly the first and second ;

but there is no difficulty in tracing the correspondence between the

molars of this and of the preceding specimens.

The above three exemplars of the deciduous dentition we assign to

the fossil Indian rhinoceros, from the circumstance of their having

been found in company with bones the forms of which clearly pointed

out the species which they must have resembled. The disposition of

the molars also corresponds with that observable in the cranium PI.

XV. where the same parallelism, of internal base line and arched ex-

ternal bounding line, exists. To which may be added, that the frontals

of the cranium to which the molars of fig. 3 belong, evince no sign of

having borne a horn.

Between the worn state of the deciduous molars exemplified by

fig. 3, and the worn state of the permanent molars figured in Pl.

XV. we have no connecting links, excepting such as may be obtained

from a few detached teeth which appear to have belonged to this

species—these are,

Fig. 5, Pl. XIX. The sixth molar from a left maxillary. The spur,

which occupies no inconsiderable part of the hollow between the

anterior and posterior transverse hillocks, is here less curved than that

of the Indian rhinoceros; and there is wanting altogether the small

salient of enamel, which in the Indian rhinoceros occurs between the

starting point of the above mentioned spur and the point of junction

of the exterior and anterior main lines of enamel. It may also be

mentioned, that the exterior and posterior lines of enamel being less

thick than the corresponding parts of the sixth molar of the Indian

1836.] of the Dadupur collection. 495

rhinoceros, there is a greater space between the two. Such modifica-

tions of form are however fortuitous, differences of equal amount

being observable in the teeth of animals of the same existing species.

This fossil measures in length, in. 2.50 met. 0.0645

in breadth, ,, 2.62 je 40.0645

Fig. 6. The 5th molar, derived from a left maxillary. The outline

of its enamel accords with that of the similar tooth of the Indian

rhinoceros, the only difference being in the dimensions and in the

enamellated edge of the short beading at the anterior side of the

tooth.

It measures in length, in. 2.08 met. 0.053

in breadth, ,, 3.27. ,, 0.0835

Fig. 7, is the 7th molar, and from a right maxillary ; the point of

the small spur is broken, as also the anterior extremity of the external

line of enamel; but the tooth is sufficiently perfect to show a close

resemblance to the analogous molar of the Indian rhinoceros.

It measures in length, in. 2.88 met. 0.0735

TD DECACID, isin Deed.» culos, 0.065

Fig. 8, is the 7th molar of a left maxillary ; the difference observa-

ble between this and the foregoing specimen consists in the great

development which the small anterior spur here attains ; in the for-

mer it is scarcely observable ; in fig. 8 it is very prominent. Varia-

tions to an equal amount may, however, be observed in the minor

saliants, &c. of enamel in teeth appertaining to skulls of the same

existing species. No weight can therefore be attached to such unim-

portant modifications.

This fossil measures in length, in. 2.95 met. 0.075

in breadth, ,, 2.55 ye 0.065

Fig. 5, offers a good example of the difference of length at the

upper and lower parts of the tooth ; the greatest length, which is that

taken near the top, is given above; the least external length taken at

the base would have been in. 2.04, or nearly half an inch less than

the top measurement.

The cranium Pl. XV. has its molar teeth so much worn down, that

the configurations of the enamel cannot be traced ; the table of dimen-

sions gives the length and breadth of each tooth, and shows that

although the lengths do not materially differ from those of the cor-

responding teeth of the existing species, the breadths exceed those of

any hitherto described.

Without complete illustrations of the milk-teeth of existing species,

it would be dangerous to attempt a comparison between them and the

fossil Indian rhinoceros. We have therefore avoided the endeavour ;

496 Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains [Aue.

but we must be allowed to notice the upper jaw fig. 4, Pl. XIX. which

offers peculiarities when compared with figs. 1, 2, and 3 (of the same

plate) deserving of remark.

The right half of the specimen is figured in the plate, the left half

having lost the Ist tooth. With respect to age, this jaw nearly cor-

responds with fig. 3, the fifth molar being in both on the point of

appearance. The following departures from the tracing of enamel in

figs. 1,2, and 3, may, however, be observed. The second molar of fig.

4 has this peculiarity,that instead of the anterior portion of the tooth

being one continuous offset from the exterior line of enamel, it only

assumes that appearance after considerable detrition, consisting at

first of a short offset and an isolated pillar, as shown in the drawing.

The two sides of the jaw have been very unequally worn, in conse-

quence of which the opposite side to that delineated has the pillar and

offset conjoined. The third molar also presents a marked difference,

when placed in juxta-position with the corresponding teeth of the

other three jaws; the two spurs which occupy the central hollow of

the tooth are of a different shape from that which occurs in the other

specimens. In other respects fig. 4 corresponds with them—its rows

of molars are parallel to each other, and the dimensions offer but

trifling variations. The modifications of form above alluded to, unless

fortuitous, which is perhaps improbable, denote the existence of

another species; a fact corroborated by the examination of the milk

molars of the lower jaws in our possession. Upon the consideration

of these we now enter, but are able to offer but few and unsatisfactory

remarks.

Lower Jaws. With the exception of the fine fragment, fig. 6, Pl.

XVI. submitted to our inspection by Conductor Dawes, and the frag-

ment fig. 9, the specimens of lower jaws are all from the Maginnud

deposit, and all the remains of young animals.

Fig. 1, Pl. XVI. represents a fossil which has lost the anterior of its

symphysis, the second molar on the right, and the first molar on the

left side of the jaw; as also both the rami, which are broken off. Four

molars have appeared, the second and third of which are worn, but

the first and fourth have their enamel intact ; the sections of fracture

expose germ teeth. The two lines of molars have a gentle conver-

gence, which is effected, not by a curve in the rows of teeth, for these

are set in a perfectly straight line, but by the gradual approach of the

two rows, which make a small angle with the medial line of the jaw.

The section shown by the break of the symphysis and the interval

between the front molars, argues the existence of a prolonged sym-

physis. The fourth molar is characteristic, having an isolated point

er low pillar in the centre of the chord of its posterior crescent.

1836.] of the Dadupur Collection. 497

Fig. 5 is a fragment containing two molars, apparently the third

and fourth milk ones; the outer enamel of the latter is mutilated, but

the interior is perfect, and presents the isolated pillar of the posterior

crescent, noticed as remarkable in fig. 1.

Fig. 4 is the right half of the lower jaw of a young rhinoceros,

but of one somewhat older than the animal to which fig. 1 belonged,

for the fourth molar has in fig. 4 suffered detrition. Notwithstanding

the difference of age being in the favor of this specimen, the space

occupied by the four molars is less than that of the four in fig. 1.

The fourth molar is here devoid of the low isolated pillar in the pos-

terior crescent, and has the central enamel, or junction of the two

crescents, larger than in fig. 1. There are no means of ascertaining

whether or not the opposite rows of molars were parallel, but in

position of symphysis and set of the teeth in a perfectly straight line,

this specimen corresponds with the foregoing.

Fig. 3 is the exterior view of fig. 4. :

Fig. 2 has its fourth molar just disclosed and rising into the line

of molars: it is devoid of the isolated pillar; but in size corresponds

with fig. 1, instead of fig. 3, to which latter it assimilates itself by the

fourth and second molars.

It is difficult to ascertain the degree of importance to be attached

to such points of difference : in no specimen from the jaw of an adult

animal has any trace of the isolated pillar been hitherto found: oc-

curring as this peculiarity does in a deciduous tooth, should nothing

similar take place in the permanent t6oth which replaces it, the only

chance of determining the question will be the discovery of an entire

head. We have noticed an upper jaw, fig. 4, Pl. XIX, which indicates

the probability of the existence of two species. The examination of

the above lower jaws rather confirms this supposition ; but in the

event of such slight modifications denoting specific distinctions, we

are unable, in consequence of the paucity and incompleteness of speci-

mens, to decide which are the milk-teeth of the fossil Indian rhinoce-

ros. Nor are we fortunate with respect to the lower maxillary of the

adult animal ; figs. 6, 7, and figs. 8, 9, being all that we can bring for-

ward. ‘The sections of these two fragments differ in consequence of

their being derived one from the posterior, the other from the anterior

part of the jaw, which thickens as it approaches to the symphysis.

These two specimens resemble the corresponding portions of the

lower jaw of the Indian rhinoceros, but are too imperfect to afford

any satisfactory measurements for grounds of comparison.

Anterior Extremity.

A scapula in our possession is not sufficiently perfect to give accu-

3 °T

498 Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains [Ave.

rate measurements, but it bears as great a general resemblance to

that of the Indian rhinoceros as do the other parts of the skeleton.

The humerus, figs. 1, 2, Pl. XVII, having its radius and ulna at-

tached, was discovered by ourselves very close to the place whence we

excavated the femur and tibia forming the subject of Pl. XVIII. With

the exception of the deltoid crest, this humerus is perfect, and has afford-

ed the dimensions which,enter into the first column of the table. For

the purpose of comparison the following five columns are here added.

The proportions of the Indian and Sumatra small species of rhinoce-

ros are deduced from Cuvisr’s table ; those of the fossil specimens

are of course from the table of dimensions. The length of the bone

is assumed as the unit, and the measures of other parts referred to it

in order to obtain their comparative values.

¢] #.| Aa [Ps [FE

3 Sopra ee pe (= a 2a

Se ot saree | ely teen ae et (te

Measurements. s = | S_M| oa [Se siogs

PS lesa) 2 1525] ea08

57 62a] PS (Per | wee

Length of humerus from tuberosity to external | |

Oi UW ike gino Oc UACGOC-U OF OUmat UCU UDOE 1°00 + 1°00 } 1°00 1:00 | 1°00

Ditto ditto ditto interval ditto, ........... 1:03 | 0°95 | 0°91 | 0°94 i

Greatest anter. post. diameter at top,...... 0.44 | 0°30 are 0°44 | 0°43

Breadth across condyles, ........ sseeeseeee 0°36 | 0°31 | 0°35 | 0.37 7

Ditto of articulating pully, ................ 0°25 | 0°19 ; 0°22 | 0°22 |! 9:95

Least diam. of the body of the humerus, ....| 0°15 | 0°13 | 0:14 BC 0°15

Dien oth OL wats s pis lone siete einse eles siefohe =epsici=iel ols O° 79) 1c,.0°75. |, 0.76 if

LET PER VAMOS » Bio dkoasodpn Sodndo0p as sulee 0°26 | 0°20 | 0.23 i

DittoratiDOttoOnys opts atten = ae dale eletelar di cles «6 0°25 | 0°18 | 0.23

Length from articulating head to gottom of

internal Condyle, jem ssc nae els se on Se 0.82 | 0°S1 ° 0°87

The Sumatra rhinoceros (small species) concurs with the fossil

Indian rhinoceros in having the length taken to the external condyle

longer than that taken to the internal. The Javanese and the larger

Sumatra species also accord with the fossil in this respect, but not so

nearly as the small Sumatra species, which has consequently been

introduced into the above table.

The length of the fossil humerus, figs. 1, 2, Pl. XVII, exceeds that of

any of the existing species : its thickness is, in proportion to the

length of the bone, intermediate between the Sumatra and Indian spe-

cies. The articulating pully also possesses a development interme-

diate in value to those of the two existing species. The breadth at

the condyles is in the same proportion or nearly so as that of the

Indian rhinoceros. The radius is in length, considered with refer-

ence to length of femur, a little less than in the Indian and somewhat in

excess of the small Sumatra species ; the remaining two dimensions of

this bone yield values intermediate to those of the two existing rhinoce-

roses. These remarks apply to the deductions for fig. 1 ; nor would it

1836.] of the Dddupur Collection. 499

be necessary much to alter them in speaking of fig. 5; but fig. 6 pre-

sents such a close approximation to the Indian sdhinia dnc that it is

much to be wished that the specimen had not been so broken as to

prevent additional measurements from being derived from it. Except-

ing in the length from the articulating head to the bottom of the

internal condyle, it does not much differ from fig. 5. The bone, how-

ever, being imperfect, must be omitted in drawing a comparison be-

tween the fossil and existing species.

Fig. 1, varies most from the Indian rhinoceros in the proportion of

the length taken to the internal condyle ; an anomaly difficult of expla-

nation. We must here repeat, that there exists a necessity for a greater

number of tables of dimensions taken from the skeletons of the Indian

rhinoceros: the anterior extremity of a rhinoceros, with the examina-

tion of which we have been favored, yielded proportions so nearly

corresponding with those deduced from the fossil humerus, figs. 1, 2,

as to prevent our drawing more positive conclusions than those ex-

pressed at the close of the remarks on the cranium, Pl. XV.

Posterior Extremity.

The femur and tibia, Pl. XVIII, were dug up in such close proximity

to the humerus and radius, fig. 1, Pl. XVII, that little doubt could be

entertained of their having belonged to the same animal. Being perfect,

; 5 i it

= " tel aja o

ao | & [788/598

Measurements. ‘ Ba] =o [peg le oe

z s a ao lag by

Length of femur from articulating head to bottom of

ME PEN ALCON AVES clear ehaisi'viaistetaloda’a) s\eNaloleiej=)sfetoic.a 1:00 | 1°00 1°00 1°00

Breadth from head to most salient ‘part of great

PEQENAMLER, ere Pisici sy om olalotci = Pe don FIC Gp. GOOG = 0°38 | 0°43 ae aC

Breadth across condyles, ........-00:ceesseecvses 0°29 | 0°28 | 0°26 4

Antero. post. diam. of internal condyle, ......-... | 0°34 | 0°34 ee :

Ditto ditto ditto of external ditto,.............. 0°27 | 0°26 = :

Distance between bottom of 3rd trochanter and top

2? UTliy . Sarcod AIneR OED EC BIORIGEIG CI Ore OCIS CCl 0°59 | 0°61 is

Ditto ditto ditto small trochanter and top of head of

TGT suddcc. Mice dBidbidg SppeousadocodEddos sses | 0°46 | 0°41 0°46 | 0°42

Diam. of articulating head of femur,..... Sencadade 0°18 | 0°19 | 0°16 | 0°17

From lower side 3rd trochanter to bottom of exter-

AEMICOMELY LES Varmaye le itae triode le talet otter! Getorcts 2 ciale eieleh cles alo Ne 0°38 | 0°38

Length of femur from articulating head to bottom

Oi SEG UOCnaAntels ites oct mete “ig 0°72 | 0°71 0°64

Length of tibia from anter. tubero. to anter. "edge

of "inferior BRUCMALNG SULTACE, alec <ies\e clei elo aie a= 0°67 | 0°70 oe 3

Greatest transverse diam. at top, .... 0°25 | 0°25 od 5¢

Antero. post. diam. from antero. post. tubero. to

post. ext. of internal condyle, .............e:. es | 0°29 | 0°31 :

Transverse diam. at bottom, ........eseceeceveee 0°21 | 0°20 ae PE

Diam. antero. post. of internal side, ............ ee | 0°14 | 0°13 ee .

PRCTIUNUGI TIDULA ses sel ce rete crsisie erate stereo sc a e-cietee 8's 0°62 | 0°65 é é

Tenth at Dotto... sie ovsatelardmresbonreacet waa tve. Vall ell? LOFIRON 10, ai t

372

500 Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains (Aue.

except at the lower part of the great trochanter, the specimen affords

ample means of comparison with the femur of the existing species.

On reverting to the table of dimensions it will be observed, that this

fossil exceeds, as did also the humerus, any of those in Cuvimr’s table

of existing species. The preceding columns show in what respects the

proportions of the bone vary from those deduced from Cuvimr’s

Indian rhinoceros. The length of the femur is here the modulus.

From a comparison of the two first columns in the above table there

results, that the fossil has a greater development at its upper and a some-

what less development at its lower extremity than is the case in the In-

dian rhinoceros. The third trochanter is set lower down, and the inferior

extremity of the small trochanter higher up than in the existing species ;

the articulating head is larger in proportion in the fossil than in the

Indian rhinoceros. None of these modifications however are excessive ;

on the contrary, they are less than those which exist amongst the

fossils themselves, which are all three undoubtedly of the same species.

From the manner in which the lower and exterior part of the great

trochanter is broken, there is every probability that a descending

point protruded from the fractured surface towards the third trochan-

ter, the ascending point of which is very perfect.

The third trochanter, however, differs from that of the existing species

as figured in Cuvisr’s Oss. Foss. in not possessing the double point ;

for it has a single well defined ascending process, without any sign of

the bicuspid termination. The lower edge of this trochanter, instead

of ascending with a gradual swell towards the point, as in the existing

species, has a counter curvature to that of the upper edge. The chief

dissimilarity between CuviEr’s plate and the fossil occurs in this part

of the bone, the third trochanter assuming a different shape, and

offering a variation more distinctive than any other presented in either

extremity. This circumstance, together with some of the proportions

of the cranium, has led us for the present to distinguish these remains

by appending the word fossil to the name of that species of which

they are the prototype: but we dwell on the necessity of more ex-

tended research, and the collection of a greater series of tables of

dimensions of the Indian rhinoceros, before any thing absolutely con-

clusive can be pronounced with regard to the fossil and existing

species.

We have had no hesitation in ascribing the two limbs dug up in

Such close neighbourhood to the same animal; an additional confirma-

mation of the correctness of the assumption may be derived from the

proportion which exists between these two extremities, when compared

with that which occurs in the Indian rhinoceros.

1836. ] of the Dadupur Collection. 501

Ind. Rhin. femur and tibia, met. 0.960 humerus and radius, met. 0.868

Fossil Ind. Rhin. do. do. ,, 1.056 ditto do. », 0.947

In the first, the humerus and radius are to the femur and tibia in

the ratio of 1: 1°10; in the fossil the ratio is 1: 1°11].

The analogy which exists between these fossil extremities and those

of the Indian rhinoceros being no less striking than that which was

observed between the cranium Pl. XV. and the skull of the existing

species, we have considered such correspondence sufficient to prove,

that the fossil anterior and posterior limbs appertained to an animal of

the same species, and of about similar size to the one of which the

cranium in question is a relic.

Even in the event of a much closer approximation of symmetrical

proportions than that given in this paper being obtained, we are aware

that identity of species could not be presumed. It could not be

assumed that the skin, the external appearance of the animal, was

precisely similar to that of the existing species. The fossil Indian

rhinoceros must, however, have presented a figure bearing a strong

general resemblance to the uncouth symmetry of its present repre-

sentative.

Remarks on part of the specimens delineated in Plate XVII.

When describing the specimens of upper and lower jaws, the pos-

sibility of the existence of another species was noted. The fossil

femur, of which figs. 3, 4 are representations, would be corroborative

of the fact, were it not for a peculiarity which renders it somewhat

doubtful whether or not it may be attributed to a species of rhino-

ceros. On comparing it with Pl. XVIII, the dissimilarity of the two

bones will be at once apparent. The third trochanter is in fig. 3,

placed about the centre of the femur, in which respect it resembles

the unicorn of Java, thus described by Cuvinr: “ Le femur a son

troisieme trochanter placé au milieu de son céte externe, large, re-

courbé en avant, ne remontant pas de sa pointe vers le grand tro-

chanter lequel ne donne non plus aucune pointe pour venir 4 sa

rencontre. lL’echancrure entre eux n’est donc pas close en dehors;

mais du reste elle est aussi grande que dans l’unicorne. La téte inferieure

est plus enlargée en arriere.”” The latter remark, however, does not

at all apply to the fossil, which has its inferior extremity much com-

pressed instead of developed; so much so, indeed, that but for the

other parts of the bone it could not for a moment be a matter of doubt

whether or not it came from a rhinoceros.

502 Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains [Ave.

Figs. 10, 11. Axis of a rhinoceros: the spinous process appears

shorter and deeper than the one figured by Cuvier, and the main

foramen more regularly circular.

Figs. 12, 13. A calcaneum which appears not to differ from that of

the existing species.

Fig. 14. Tarsus and metatarsus. In this specimen the medial

metatarsal bone is not so long as that of the Indian rhinoceros, but

longer than that of any other species given by Cuvier. The general

form corresponds with that in Cuvier’s plate.

Fig. 15. Metacarpal bones: the medial one is rather longer than

the same bone in the Cape rhinoceros, and considerably longer than

in any other species.

Figs. 16, 17, are the external metacarpal of the left side.

Fig. 18. An astragal, which differs much from those figured by ©

Cuvier, being higher, narrower, and more compressed.

Fig. 19. Tarsal and metatarsal bones of a rhinoceros, with the

lower portion of tibia attached.

Table of Dimensions.

Measurements of the head. Cranium. Occiput.

Pl. XV. Pl. XVII.

ES ES em fo ES

Met. | In. Met. | In.

Height of occiput from lowest edge of occipital fora-

oer

TU WD VONOE CSG. dado dasesuddoooscododdt osc 0°259 |10°20 |0°223 | 8°78

Greatest breadth of occiput, behind auditory foramen, | 0°34! |13°44 |0°266 |10°50

Least thickness of cranium at temporal bones, ...... | 0'126 | 4°95] .. ae

Breadth between post orbital apophysis of frontals,.. | 0°254 | 10°00 ms

Distance from anterior of orbit to auditory foramen, 07325.|12780) |e oe

Space occupied by the seven molares,......-..+-.+++- Or324° 112-7 Sie o.

Breadth across occipital ebay cocecs cecesecers | O°195 | 7°70:10°140 | 5°51

Ditto, ofoccipitalfarament cca geri crclenisiesiestae meer oe ve") 4020575) 2°25

He eH tOr dittonditcoyerd cies ere retiere eleisaitere ee 0°049 } 1°90

Distance between internal extremities of glenoid facets

Of temparalier nur lyeti nile teiaene ois eae talon e ae ++ |[0°0735} 2°88

Ditto from lower edge of occipital foramen to medial

post. extremity, of palate, ........ 02. 0cescoes 0°368 114°50

Ditto from post. of right occipital condyle to spring of

DASA ALCH, warietefer PA cloiiak- einteusiotcayats, viele afaje cloa it ele’s 0°539./21°22] .. a

Ditto ditto ditto to anterior of GED UG ee a ieselors islet evuereiny« 0°449 (17°71 Ae

Depth from edge of maxillary at 5th molar to upper

Subtace of frontals: ic <cieistiectejeiieis © eye sts ee wees -. | 0°239 | 9°42 ae se

Greatest transverse width of nasals at horn Sibeneraelenals O°174! 686]... :

Ditto external breadth at 6th molar,....... ..-eee-. 0°246 |] 9°72] ..

Thickness of cranium over the medial post. extremity

of palate, .... . pee Meta oteteie euivelMelenstersiot risiei (eselala'e ctevetee 0°204 1 8°06] .. ee

Height of highest point ‘of nasal arch above anterior of |

Palate to's DererettalerMelapertere a clclere cietetect sisi ccctcieieies «Semin 0°233 | 9°38) op

Perpendicular from a line tangential to the summit of

crest and vertex of nasal arch to the depression of

FOMCHIS ee cane cads Hest ae diets week eee men aeon cee 0°099| 3°91} .. ai

1836.] of the Dudupur Collection. 503

Cranium.

Measurements of |Cranium. | Fig.3 Pl. Fig. }. Fig. 2. Fig. 4,

Upper Molars. Plex Vie XIX. Pl. XIX. | Pl. XIX. Pl. XIX.

———

Met.] In. |Met.| In. | Met.| In. | Met. | In. Met. { In.

Greatest length

Molar, 1 o° -. |.030 ]1.19 |.0295; 1.14 030 | 1.20) .. oe

2 |.035 |1.36].034 |).335).038 | 1.49 0395] 1.53] .039 |1.49

3 |.045 11.75].0475)1.85 |.053 | 2.07 O56 | 2.17) .045 |1.74

4 |.049 |1.92].058 !2.26 |.061 ! 2.39 oe 056 12.20

5 =a

7 |.0755/2.96! .. °

3 1.69].061 |2.37

Greatest breadth

.0495]1.95] .. a ay bs ‘ ye be

Molar, 1 So : |.024 0.95 ;.024 | 0.95 0285} 1 <5

2 1.059 {2.31'.0385]1.5 036 : 1.40 041 1.58) .037 |1.45

3 |.050 }3.15].049 ,1.9 045 8 053 | 2.05; .051 ,2.007

4 |.083 |3.36].0575!2.25 . -059 |2.30

5 |.081 {3.19 ae eit ze a . .

6 |.089 |3.48| .. ae ie oe 2

7. '.088 J3.25!' .. a ah +e : an

Measurements of Lower Molars. Fig.l. |) Fig-2.., Fig.

Pl: XVE. ) Pl. XVI: | Pl. XVI.

Met. | In. \Met. In. |Met. | In.

Greatest length of Molar, <2. 02 5.055 tees 1! .016/0.61 -. 1.017 | 0.67

2 | .037/1.44 .0335 1.30 |.033 | 1.29

3] .053/2.09 |.050 |1.98 |.04251 1.67

4, .047/1.82 }.056 {2.18 |.046 | 1.79

5 45 an ee s° ee on

6 we se oe ee

Greatest breadth of Molar, .........e+++2+- J a aes -s |.0115] 0.46

2 .020 0.77 |.021 ,0.61 ].018 '0.70

3 | .026/1.01 |.027 3-05 -025 | 0.98

4 1029 1.12 1.029 11.10 |.030 } 1.19

A 36 ee Oe ba) on ae

Measurements of Anterior Ex-| Fig. 1. Fig. 5. Fig. 6. Neen hu-} Fossil

tremity. Pl. XVIT./Pl. XVII.| Pl. XVII.|merus not|humerus

drawn. |notdwn.

ee —_—— ew ee

Mt. | In. |Mt.| In. |Mt.|{ In. | Mt. | In.

i a ee | |

Length ofhumerus from tub. to

—|—- | —_—_—_

— | |

external condyle,.......... -538}21.20],488/19.22/.482:19.0 | ..

Do. do. do. internaldo....... -492/19.38}.461]18.15] .. | .. a

Greatest anter. post. diam. at

UTLEY SAAD Ceo eaten oe | oe -218| §.60}.208 8.20].200| 7.90 Bi

Breadth across condyles, or “| igs MeO LASS Vise]! a0 ill. 'e.0 .. -176) 6.94

Breadth of the articulating

TUS Catmecrté ¢ Se. cOeeepe +119] 4.70/.111} 4.40).121] 4.80].104] 4.10].109] 4.30

Least diam. of the body of the

WUD ETUS ire cicetayerttct ores Cee aU fs, 3.07 : -073| 2.90].071] 2.82].069] 2.75

Length of the radius,........ -409/16.10} .. otal big ste De sot ere

Pereadthi at: top;. 2 so. 0sis e's +. 1.124] 4.90] . a

Ditto at bottoms .¢. i isc. cee [V24) 4:90] .. | Sel Gc ae) Alaste

Length of humerus from art.

head to internalcondyle, ..

-441/17.40 .393'15.51|,420] 16.55].389]15.35|.398] 1570

504 Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains [Auve.

Measurements of Pos-|Femur&ec.| Fossil | Fossil Figs. 3 | Fossil Fossil

terior Extremity. |P1.XVIII|femur not/femur not} and 4 |femur not|femurnot

drawn. | drawn. |PI.XVII.} drawn. | drawn.

ae In. |Mt.| In. ;Mt.] In. |Mt.| In. |Mt.] In. | Mt.| In

Length of femur from

ant. head to bottom

of 3rd trochanter, |.449°17.70 383] 15.10 328] 12.94].369| 14.56

Length of femur from

ant. head to bottom

of internal condyle,|.621}24.45 .539/21.25] .. | ». 1.510120.10} ..

Breadth from head to

most salient part

of great trochanter,|.269; 10.60

Breadth across con-

Us, Edbedogudede -173} 6.82 -143] 5.63].146|5.75] .

Antero. post. diam. of

internal condyle, ..|.214] §.45}.221/8.70 « ) 16616-55106

Ditto do. do. external

condyle,........-.|.161] 6.35].162/6.40| . «- |-139]5.48) .

Distance between bot-

tom of 3rd_ troch-

anter and top of

FTES, Hee roles eae ous -383,15.10:

Distance between bot-

tom of small troch-

anter and top of

head of femur, .... }.259|10.20 9.80 -215} 8.50).23119.10

Diam. of articul. head

Of feEMVUT sy) cle s4 «sh -- -118] 4.65 3.40 -089] 3.50}.083}3.30

From lower side 3rd

trochanter to bot-

tom of external

COMGYIES ee em orieic) == 242] 9.53].177|7.00|.208} 8.20].266) 10.50

Length of tibia from

anter. tubero. to

anter. edge of infer.

articu. surface, .,1,435/17.15

Greatest transverse

diam. at top, ..-.|.156} 6.15

Antero. post. diam.

from anter. tub.

to post. ext. of in-| |

ternal condyle, ....!.195}) 7.70 4a.

Transverse diam. at

bottom, .. : .128] 5.05

Diam. of antero. post.

internal side,...... -086| 3.40

Length of fibula, .... |.405/15.95

.064| 2.54 etn mi ca Re)

Breadth at bottom, ..

Index to the Plates referred to in this paper

; shewing also thew orders of succession.

Pl. XV. Three views of fossil cranium, (on lithographed paper.)

Pl. XIX. Views of connected and detached molars upper jaw, (copper plate.)

Pl. XVI. Ditto fragments from lower jaws, (lithographed paper.)

Pl. XVIII. Three views of femur and tibia.

Pl. XVII. A folding plate on lithographed paper, sundry bones of the extremities.

[The letters appended to the plates for convenience of reference in the MS. ; name-

iy, A, B,C, D,E, F, have been changed in printing into Nos. XVIII, XVII, XV,

XIX, and XVI. Plate F was, as before stated, spoiled in transferring it to the stone.

By mistake the dimensions in Pl. XV, have been marked one-fourth in lieu of one-sixth ;

a material error, which it is as well to notice thus prominently.—Ep.]

Jour. AS. Soe. LV PX MN.

Fossil remains from the Sub Himalayas khinoceros

AB Tassinis Lith? bros Caleulla.

We oc

ge 9" Sowa

7 oi —*

iy j i Zo : 4 ue b3

MS thle Wf Poy Liuwe

vee ae | |

{

Atty ) 4

CHA]

SASSY

( f ie

. alt Any

THE y if

Mie

it teh

}

‘ie ‘ti f i ge ey i i

a of qi q y, i ul IB

a ees bod =*s

“POLL 38, SOLLIANIHY SMbupouiny 9NS Ay Mos SDE ax 12,

Hany |}

y/iiay)

Val. A Se. XVEL,

“ae

——\e =

HAD)

Z 4

\ =

\i\

Sats

f at

f Na i

1p aN

Fopsel Pemairrs.

rom The

Sicd-Hia layes,

LP BINOCHROS,

JAE Tintrral Sige.

TB Tassia's LG! Prevs— Glowta.

Vol Ve PUXVUL.

Jour. As. Soc.

— =

aut eS =

wr Lopsil Pemains prom lhe S: ty-Limmatayas. PAIN OCLROS

ies

Seen nahi htedeen sine a ene | “ oat

* Se Se, eet See eee tt

Bua! tpt

4 that omits

Jour As. Soe. Vol.V PL. XIX.

Fossil Rhinoceros of the. Sub -Himatayas.

Sieh

B30 NERO

RS ARS

Ages

MTN

War it Ds

af;

Durand des.et i.

Rt aad Re een sR tenia 9 a

AF ohh ian

ee See ee

—

ty A ee

1836.) Note on the States of the Malay Peninsula. 505

V.—Note on the States of Pérak, Srimenanti, and other States in the

Malay Peninsula. By T. J. Newsoup, Lieut., A. D. C.to Brigadier

General Wixson, C. B.

Pa’rak.

Pérak is separated on its northern frontier, from Quédah by the

Krian river, which debouches into the Straits of Malacca, in about

5° 10’ North. On the south it is divided from the piratical state of

Salangore, by a river of inconsiderable magnitude called the Runkip,

which lies a little to the north of the Bernam river, in about 3° 59’

north ; interiorly, by the chain of primitive mountains, that run down

the centre of the Malay peninsula to Point Romania near Singapore, from

the states of Tringinu and Pahang on the opposite coast. According

to Captain Guass, the territory under the sway of the Pérak chief

extended about 50 leagues inland: its length along the coast is

upwards of 120 miles.

The principal town is situated a considerable distance up the Pérak

river, which is one of the largest and most rapid of the streams of

the peninsula that flow into the Straits of Malacca: according to

ANDERSON, it will admit vessels drawing 12 feet. The channel, how-

ever, is tortuous and intricate. The banks are generally covered with

jungle, having but a few villages at considerable distances. The places

of most note are Kota Ltimut, Bander, Pantong Panjang, and Pdssir

Gdram, about 30 miles up the river. The chief generally resides at

Pdssir Suyéng or Passir Pulye; places about three or four days’ pull

from the mouth. It has been stated to me by natives, that there are

several stockades commanding the approach by water to these places.

Produce.—The principal products of this state are tin, rice, and

ratans. The present produce of tin is about 8,500 picals annually :

this goes for the most part to the Pinang market : latterly some of it —

has found its way to Singapore. Mr. ANprrson states, that the Raja

-~Mov’pa and Tuvanxu Hassin, sons of the late chief, Tas-uppin,

established posts a few years ago, about 30 miles from the river’s mouth,

where they levied a duty on all tin exported. These posts have since

been abandoned. The chief himself derives most of his revenue from a

toll on the tin produced : so much, it is said, as from four to six dollars

per bhar of 3 piculs. The Dutch enjoyed, for upwards of a century

and a half, during their sway at Malacca, the monopoly of the tin.

They had a factory at Tanjong Puttiis on the river, and a small fort

on the harbour between the Dinding Islands and the main. The ~

cultivation of rice has, of late years, been on the increase.. I was

assured, by some respectable Pérak traders, that more than sufficient

for home consumption was now grown.

3 U

506 Note on the States of the Malay Peninsula. [Ave.

Population.—The population of Pérak is roughly calculated at

35,000 Malays, professing the Mahomedan religion, not including the

aboriginal tribes ; a few Chinese, Arab and Chuliah (Malabar ?) settlers.

History and Government.—Peérak was formerly tributary to the

Malayan sovereigns of Malacca, and afterwards to those of the king-

dom of Achin. Since the decline of the latter, however, it has become

in some measure independent; although Siam has, at various periods,

asserted her claims to sovereignty, and demanded tribute. In conse-

quence of the spirited resistance of the late chief, Tas-upp1n, to these

arrogant and groundless assumptions, Pérak was overrun in 1818

by the troops of the Raja of Qéedah, who had invaded it by order of

the king of Siam. In 1822 the Siamese were expelled, and the right-

ful chief restored, by the powerful assistance of the late warlike chief

of Salangore, Raja Israuim.

The government is despotic. Pérak has been ruled during the last

three centuries by a race of chiefs, under the title of Sultan, who were

connected with the ruling dynasties in Johdre and Achin. Under the

Sultan are five officers of state, forming a deliberative council, viz :-—

the Bandahara, Tumungong, Raja Mida, Mantri, and O'rang Kaya

Besir. Besides these there are six Panghilis over the six Bongsas

(Vansas) or classes, into which the people are divided.

The succession to the throne is generally hereditary. Sultan Man-

su’R Sua’H II, who died in 1818, was succeeded by his son Tas-up-

DIN, who died about four years ago. His nephew, the present chief,

Raja Cuo’sn, succeeded.

Political and Commercial relations with the British Government.—In

1818 a treaty of commercial alliance was concluded by the British

Commissioner, Mr. Cracrort, on the part of the Company, with the

then Raja of Pérak, Sultan Mansv’r Suu, chiefly with the view of

preventing the monopoly of the tin trade by the Dutch, who were, at

that time, about to resume possession of Malacca. This treaty provided

against the monopoly, and secured to British merchants the privilege of

being allowed to trade on equally favorable terms with Pérak as any -

other nation. k

By Major Burney’s treaty with Siam in 1826, it was agreed that

the Raja of Pérak should govern his country according to his own

will; should he desire to send the gold and silver flowers to Siam, as

heretofore, the English would not prevent him. That if Chow Phyd, of

Ligore, desire to send down to Pérak, with friendly intentions, forty or

fifty men, whether Siamese, Chinese or other Asiatic subjects of

Siam, or if the Radja of Pérak desire to send any of his ministers or

officers to seek Chow Phyd of Ligore, the English should not forbid

1836. ] Note on the States of the Malay Peninsula. 507

them. That no force should be sent by either nation to go and molest,

attack or disturb Pérak. The English engaged not to allow the state

of Salangore to attack or disturb Pérak; and the Siamese, in turn,

engaged not to go and attack or disturb Salangore.

The Siamese also stipulated in this treaty, that the present ex-king

of Quiedah should not be permitted to live at Prince of Wales’ Island

or Prye, or in Pérak, Salangore, or any Burmese country.

Sri’MENANTI.

Srimenanti, though formerly considered as subordinate to Johdle,

asserts her independence, and has tacitly assumed a place among the

four elective states, though her claims are not distinctly recognized.

The Panghulis of Srimeninti, not being descended from the nine to

whom titles were given by the Sultan of Johdre, assumed by the

sanction of the Panghili of Johdle, that of Sétia Mahdrdja. Since

this, seven Panghialius have ruled in Srimenanti, the six last of whom

were Naham, Jallam, Allam, Pompom, Tallin, and Talib.

Raja Ravin, one of the sons of the fourth Menangkdbowe prince,

Sineane Laur, assumed similar powers to those exercised by the

Eang depertian mida of Rumbéwe i: this state, which he still retains,

though now opposed by another candidate from Menangkabdwe.

There are twelve Sukiis over the twelve tribes in Srimendnii ; their

names with their titles are as follows:

Amin, Baginda Mahdrdja, Olay, Sendra Muda, Molay, Maharaja ;

Manti, Padika besir; Lattih, Orang kata bongsu; Arrih, Sempirna

Maharaja ; Lésah Sendra. kaia; Aggah, Sri Mahérdja; Eytiét, Orang

kaia kechil; Bandin, Sendra Angksa; Si Main, Mahardja Lélah ; and

Rejab, Perdana.

The names of the twelve tribes are, Sri Lummah Pahang, Sri Lum-

mah Menangkdbéwe, Battu Ampar, Tannah Dattar, Sa Meldngan, Tiga

battu, Payakumba, Muncal, Anak Achi, Battu Balang, Tiga Nenik, and

Bédoanda Jacoon.

Srimendnii is the place of residence, burial, and contains the Astana

of the princes deputed from Menangkdbdwe.

It is bounded on the north by Jhompdéle ; towards the south by

Uli Miar and Rumbowe, (from which it is separated by the moun-

tains of Lepat Cajang and Génong tujoh ;) to the east its boundary

with Johdle is the hill of Bukit Pecla; and to the west the Paro

stream and Terdclu divide it from Svingie-ujong. The extent of

Srimendnti is supposed to be about equal to that of Rumbdwe : its

population is estimated at 8,000. The principal villages are those

of Srimenanti Pinang, Saribii Peela, Péndok Passer, and Terdchi ; the

3 ou 2

508 Note on the States of the Malay Peninsula. [Ave.

two latter places now claim their independence. Like Srimenanti

itself, they were formerly subordinate toJohdle, andhave been governed

for seven generations past by their own Panghilis. The name of

the present chief of Terdchi is Salong, and under him are six tribes.

The Panghili of Péndok passér is named Ambong: it was with this

chief the ex-Panghila of Naning sought and found a shelter after his

defeat and expulsion in 1832. Part of Terdchi was formerly subject

to Suingie-ujong ; but during the late internal commotions and strug-

gles for power, by which the Menangkdbowe dynasty has been rooted

out, leaving the interior in a state of anarchy and_ confusion, the

minor chiefs seized on the opportunity to assert their independence,

and in this unsettled condition they remain up to the present time.

The manners and customs of the inhabitants of Srimendntt, its

revenue, internal administration, and law of inheritance, are much the

same as those of the natives of the three states already described.

Its produce is tin, sapan wood, wax, ratans, and rice, most of which

find their way down to Malacca.

A fresh tin-mine has been lately opened at a place called Plangaye,

the produce of which during the last three months has been 30 bhars

of metal.

States of Calang Jellabaé, Ulu Pahang, Jellye, and Segamet.

Of the nine interior states, or Negri sambilan, formerly tributary to

the Malayan dynasties of Malacca and Johdre, four already noticed,

with their dependencies, acknowledged the sway of Menangkabdwe,

or rather of its deputed prince. The remaining five, viz., Ulu Pahang,

Calang, Jellye, Jellabu, and Segdmet, with their dependencies, adhered

to Johdre: this kingdom, however, was too weak to retain them all.

Calang was wrested from her by a colony of Bugis, who established

an independent government at Salangore towards the beginning of last

century, which has rendered itself formidable to its neighbours by the

hardy, warlike, and piratical habits of its chiefs, but is now fast de-

clining.

Jellabi has been taken possession of by the descendants of the

Menangkdabéwe princes, and is now ruled by an Hang Depertian, named

Raja Sasu'n, son of Raja Avi, the second chief from Menangkdbowe.

This chief is looked upon by the superstitious Malays as a living

Krdmet, from the circumstance of his having ‘ white” or very light

blue eyes, with jet black hair.

Jellabi was governed formerly by its Panghali and Ampat Saki.

These still retain considerable authority ; the name of the present

Panghila is Arpur Rauman; his title Akhir Zuman ; the titles of the

Ampat Siikt are Dattu Menniang, Dattu Mantri, and Mahardja Sendra.

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 509

The tribes under them are those of Bodoanda, Tannah Dattar, Muncal,

and Battu Ballang.

The forms of government, laws, &c. obtaining in Jellabi are much

the same as those of the states already described. Its population,

which is divided into seven mitikims, is estimated at 3750, not includ-

ing the aborigines.

The produce is gold, ivory, tin, (about 200 picals annually), aloe-

wood, jaggery, ratans, &c.; these generally find their way to the Pa-

hang market.

The boundary marks of Jellabu with Pahang are nine Meranti trees,

(Meranti Sambildn,) growing on the right bank of the Jellabé river ;

with Sungie Ujong, a hill called Bukit Tangoh and Dhalu Karu Bandar

Barangan ; with Jompdcle, the hill of Bukit Dejdla ; and with Calang, the

hill of Guinting Perhi.

Ulu Pahang and Jellye are now tributary to the Bandahdra of

Pahana, a chief nominally feudal to the kings of Johdre. Jellye is

immediately governed by a Panghila styled Mahardja Purba. It

produces a considerable quantity of gold and tin, which go to Pahang.

Both this state and Jellabii; on account of their remoteness from the

British frontier, have had little political connexion with the several

governments at Malacca.

VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 7th September, 1836.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

The Proceedings of last meeting were read.

Lieutenant Newsoup was proposed as a member by the Secretary,

seconded by Dr. Miu.

Lieutenant S. Tickenn, proposed by Dr. Pearson, seconded by Mr.

PRINSEP.

Mr. Vincent TREGEAR was proposed as an honorary member by Capt.

A. Cunnineuam, seconded by the Secretary :—referred to the Committee

of Papers.

Read, letters from Dr. R. Haruan and Professor Lea of Philadelphia,

acknowledging their election as honorary members, and presenting vari-

ous works which will be found under the head of “ Library,”

Read, a letter from Mr. J. K. Kane, Secretary American Philosophical

Society, Philadelphia, acknowledging receipt of Researches, Vol. XVIII.

and Index, and Journal, Vol. 1II.; and presenting publications in return.

Also, letters from M. P. H. Fuss, Secretary of the Imperial Academy

of St. Petersburgh ; and from Mr. Gapriet Désrentet, Secretary of the

510 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ave.

Hungarian Society at Pest, (in the Hungarian, Latin, and English lan-

guages,) noticing the receipt of M. Cséma’s Tibetan Dictionary and

Grammar.

The following letter from the Honorable G. Turnour was read.

Kandy, July 8, 1836.

Sir, %

Various circumstances have concurred to prevent my presenting the Asiatic

Society with the accompanying pamphlet sooner. Its completion has been

delayed, partly from want of leisure, and also in some degree from my having

entered more fully into an account of Péli Buddhistical literature, and published

more of the Mahdwanso in this volume, than I had designed when I addressed

you on the 10th July, last year.

In presenting a copy of this publication to the Governor General and the

Governors of the several Presidencies, I have mentioned that I had adopted this

preparatory course, with the view of eliciting the criticism of oriental Societies

and scholars on this portion of the Mahdwanso, before the principal work issued

from the press; and of thereby, at once, obtaining either a confirmation or

refutation of the expectations I entertain as to its pointing out the road toa

new and interesting field of research in Asia. It would be satisfactory, there-

fore, to me, if this pamphlet were referred to the Committee of Papers, for its

judgment on it. At the risk of being considered affected, I repeat, that it is on

the original work and on the general references thence deduced by me, that I

court criticism. I cannot attach much importance to a translation, hastily made,

of a work composed in a language which I have hitherto studied rather with the

view of gathering information regarding the native institutions, than of famili-

arizing myself with its philological niceties.

The first volume of the Mahdwanso has been printed. I have only to recast

the introduction, and prepare a glossary, to admit of its publication.

If the contributions to your Journal offered in the introduction (p. 110)

would be acceptable ; as a preliminary step, I would suggest your transferring

to its pages, from those of the Ceylon Almanac of 1836, Mr. ARMour’s trans-

lation of KitretiGAMa’s Essay on Buddhism, as well as his prefatory letter.

The author of that Essay was a Buddhist priest, of distinguished reputation for

learning ; and Mr. Armour is unquestionably the best European Singhalese

scholar in the Island. The comprehensive form in which the system of Bud-

dhism as recognized in Ceylonis presented in that Essay, and the definitions

there afforded of particular terms, will both save details of explanations in my

analysis, and serve to render it more intelligible.

I have the honor to be, Sir, &c.

GEORGE TURNOUDR.

To the Secretary Bengal Asiatic Society.

Mr. H. T. Prinsep in reference to the above stated, that the Governor Gene-

ral had empowered him also to solicit the opinion of the Society on the charac-

ter of the Ceylonese Historical Annals, to guide his Lordship in Council as to

the extent of patronage to be accorded to the work by the Government of India.

In compliance with the wishes of the Governor General and of the author

himself, Mr. TuRNoUR’s Introductory Essay, Historical Epitome and translation,

were referred to the Committee of Papers to examine and report their opinion

of the authenticity and value of the Pali annals, which the author has under-

taken to introduce to the knowledge of the learned world, as well as upon the

fidelity of the translation, confronted, as it is, line by line with the Pali original

in Roman character.

The Secretary read the following report from the Committee of Papers

on the proposition of Cavetty Venxata Lacami'a, referred by Govern-

ment to the Society at the last meeting.

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 514

Proposition of CAvELLY Venkata Lacumi’a, Pandit, to the Madras Govern-

ment.

To His Excellency Lieutenant-General the Right Honorable Sir Freprerick

Avam, K, C. B., Governor in Council, &c. &c. &c.

Fort St. George.

Ricut HonoraBLe Sir,

Par. 1.—I have the honor to submit respectfully, the accompanying copy of a

letter addressed to your Excellency from the Royal Asiatic Society of Great

Britain and Ireland, for the consideration of your Excellency in Council, of

which Society I am a corresponding Member, whereby it appears that that

Society is very desirous to receive every literary information in this part of the

world, with a view to complete the late Colonel MackeENzin’s collection. I

most submissively solicit, that your Excellency in Council will be pleased to

sanction every support from the Government regarding those researches, parti-

cularly to authorize me to open a general correspondence with the gentlemen of

literary endowments, under this Presidency, in the revenue, judicial and

military branches of the service, to enable me to procure every information on

the subject of the History, Antiquities, &c. of India.

2.—I beg leave to submit the enclosed copy of an abstract, comprising a brief

idea of the nature of the work in which I am engaged. I leave it to your Excel-

lency in Council to judge what may be estimated to be the expense and esta-

blishment required to bring it to a completion. It would, however, be presump-

tive in me, at the present stage of affairs, to suggest any specific amount. But

the work consists of twenty-one different ancient alphabets and fourteen lan-

guages, ancient and modern, of various parts of the Peninsula ; consequently, I

would observe, that I will have occasion to employ in every zillah, on the smal-

lest scale, two intelligent scholars, OMe versed in Sanscrit and the other must be

proficient in oriental literature, whose office it will be to collect ancient inscrip-

tions from religious structures and holy temples, which will prove the best

guide to ascertain the accuracy of the chronology and history of the country.

If the collectors undertake a part of this laborious task, I should imagine that

it will prove less expensive: yet I am led to fear greatly, that they can hardly

afford to give any attention to it, with the exception of some few of the most

literary characters. For the materials thus collected, I would require an esta-

blishment of pandits, translators, &c. to arrange and bring down such infor-

mation that may be collected and approved of.

3.—It never can be expected that the postage of the vast correspondence con-

pected with this arduous task, which are necessarily required by the above

Society, can be carried on at my own expense; I therefore most respectfully beg

the favor of your Excellency in Council to pass all communications to and from

me, as a corresponding member of the Royal Asiatic Society, free of postage, in

the same manner as was passed in the late Colonel Mackrnzin’s time, relative

to which the enclosed is a copy of a letter from the Post Master General of this

Presidency, dated 8th March, 1809, for the information of your Excellency in

Council, and in the same manner as the Madras Literary Society is still enjoying

this privilege without any interruption, as stated to the President of the Madras

Hindu Literary Society, in your Chief Secretary’s letter under date 22nd February,

1834, which is about to be discontinued. But I would faithfully promise that no

abuse or advantage shall be taken of the confidence that may be reposed in me on

the subject.

I have the honor to be, Right Honorable Sir,

Your Excellency’s most obedient humble servant,

(Signed) CaveLtLty VeNKaTA LACHMI/A,

Corresponding Member of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain

and Ireland.

(A true Copy),

Madras, 16th June, 1835. Chief Secretary.

512 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Aue.

Report of the Committee of Papers on CavELLy VENKATA LACHMI‘A’s pro-

posed renewal of Col. Mackenzie’s investigations.

The reference from the Madras Government, for an opinion on the merits of

Venkata Lacumi’a pandit’s proposition, however complimentary to our Society,

might perhaps have been addressed with better effect to the Madras Literary

Society, which must be far better acquainted than we can pretend to be, both

with the character and attainments of the individual, and with those desiderata

in the History of the Peninsula, which he undertakes to elucidate.

We, however, enjoy one advantage in the possession of Mr. now Professor,

Witson’s Descriptive Catalogue of Col. Mackznzie’s Collection, which, aided

by other published works on the history of the Southern Hindu States, may

enable us to form a tolerable opinion on the question.

It might be supposed from the entire silence of VeNKATA on the subject of

Mr. Witson’s labours in the statement he has handed up to the Madras Govern-

ment of the ‘‘ Progress of the Researches’’ in which he is engaged, that he was

a total stranger to the descriptive catalogue; although the brief notice he gives

of each state and dynasty, appears based upon the summary contained in the

introduction to that work, both as to arrangement and detail; and certainly it .

adds not one iota to the information made public by Professor W1uson in 1828.

The object of Sir ALEXANDER JOHNSTON, in persuading the Pandit to found

a native literary society at Madras was, doubtless, that through the gratuitous

aid of those best acquainted with the languages and traditions of the country,

and having connections or friends dispersed over the Peninsula, the learned

world might be put in possession of translations and digests of the mass of

MSS. collected by Col. Mackenzie; at the same time that other materials of

a similar nature might be sought out and accumulated*. The Vice-President

of the Royal Asiatic Society does not seem to have contemplated the organiza-

tion of an extensive paid establishment of collectors, pandits and copyists ;

otherwise itis probable he would have addressed himself to the Government

itself, either directly or through the natural channel of the Madras Auxiliary

Society. For he would have anticipated that such an extensive scheme would

need the control of a master head, accustomed to generalization, and capable of

estimating the value and drift of inscription and legendary evidence. The

qualifications of CaveLLy VENKAvra for such an office, judging of them by his

‘* abstract,’’ or indeed of any native, could hardly be pronounced equal to such a

task, however useful they may prove as auxiliaries in such a train of research.

The pandit’s original and arithmetical mode of weighing authorities, of which

examples may be found in every item of his statement, is any thing but calcu-

lated to contradict this assumption. His remarks on the first, or ancient

Nandavarrum dynasty of Andhra, may be cited as an instance :

‘* As this is a very obscure dynasty, confidence can only be placed in the

inscriptions. From the materials already possessed in the collection of Col.

Mackenzie, I suppose one-eighth of the history of this dynasty is complete,

and the remainder should be completed by further research.”’

The Mackenzie Manuscripts (embracing, as CAVELLY VENKATA says in his

letter to Government, using the words of the late Colonel himselff, no less than

twenty-one different alphabets and fourteen different languages) have been for

some time at Madras deposited in the College Library. We have no means of

knowing whether during that period the pandit (himself a servant of the college)

has published or undertaken the translation or analysis of any part of its con-

tents. In the absence of any such testimony of his competence, contrasted with

what will be presently urged, it seems impossible to recommend any large

outlay of public money in the way he proposes.

Not that it is undesirable to complete the examination of the MacKrenziE

papers. On the contrary, all who have read Mr. Witson’s catalogue, will grant

that to be an object of high, of national importance; especially when it is

asserted that many of the volumes are going rapidly to decay}, and may not be

* See Mad. Lit. Soc. Journal, No. 12, p. iy

t See Preface to WILSON’S Des. Cat.

t See TayzLor’s Hist. cr. Man.

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 513

available a few years hence. The British Indian Government has spent a lakh

of rupees in purchasing these ancieot records: to refuse the requisite aid for

their examination and conversion to public use when they are known to contain

avast store of curious and interesting matter, would be false economy, only

equalled by the case of the Buchanan MSS. in Calcutta, which cost even a

larger sum, and which the Government has recorded its unwillingness to print

even free of expense, or to take a single copy of it printed by others*.”’

But happily, in regard to the Mackenzie collection, such neglect cannot

now be feared. Independent of Mr. Witson’s able summary, we are awaref that

Captain Harkness, Sec. of the Roy. As. Soc., has undertaken to translate and

digest a portion of the manuscripts in London, and M. Jacauzr of Paris has inti-

mated that the mass of the Colonel’s inscriptions, to which the Hon’ble Court of

Directors have handsomely allowed him free access, are to be included in the

“ Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum,’’ upon which he is now busily engaged ;

while in Madras itself has lately appeared an able and zealous expositor in the

Reverend Mr. W. Taytor, whose previous study of, and publication on, the

history of the Peninsula, added to his acquaintance with the Tamul and Telinga

languages, eminently fit him for the task, and point him out as the properest,

if not the only, individual capable of fulfilling the grand object proposed by Sir

A. JoHNnsTon.

This gentleman has already gone deep into the subject. At a great expence

and sacrifice of time, he has published a variety of ‘‘ Oriental Historical Ma-

nuscripts’’ in the original character and in translation, with a connective com-

mentary, shewing their bearing on the general history of the country.

The Editor of the Madras Journal, indeed, announces that Mr. Taytor

has further undertaken a careful examination of the whole of the College

MSS., and that he promises ‘‘ a paper or series of papers on the subjectt.”’

It would certainly be most desirable that such examination should not be

cursory or incomplete, that it should not leave any thing to be done by others,

who would have again to travel over the same ground of previous study to be

capable of undertaking it. It would, in short, be most expedient to secure the

services of Mr. Wm. Taytor publicly, for the thorough examination of the

Mackenzie records; to allow him such assistance as he might require for the

period, (with him necessarily so much shorter than could be allowed to any

other,) which he might fix for the task ; to unite CAveLLy VENKATA pandit with

him, should be be desirous of assistance, (although from an expression at page 63

of his second volume, it may be imagined that ke would not count much on the

aid of the late Colonel’s native establishment,) and to sanction the publication of

those records, which he might select as the most valuable, either in elucidation

of history or native science, philosophy, religion, customs, &c.

For the collection of new materials, the zeal of the numerous members of the

English and native literary societies of Madras, (scattered through the various

districts,) will need only the suggestions and direction of a leader so well qua-

lified, to accumulate them, without any necessity for a paid establishment.

The circulation of a scientific journal throughout the presidency will materially

contribute and doubtless has contributed to excite curiosity to such objects

among the ‘‘ gentlemen of literary endowments,’? whose correapondence either

with Mr. Taytor or with CavreLLy VENKATA, might advantageously be allowed

the indulgence of exemption from postage.

Without first ascertaining Mr. Taytor’s willingness to accept the office here

chalked out, or consulting him on the extent of the aid he would require, it is

impossible to estimate the probable outlay ; but the Government records will

furnish comparative data, in the sums paid for the ‘ oriental translating esta-

blishment,’’ entertained fora period under the late Secretary of the Asiatic

Society.

* See Mr. Secretary BusuBy’s Correspondence with the Editor of the Gleanings

in Science and Journal Asiatic Society.

+ See Sir ALEXANDER JOHNSTON’S address to the Royal Asiatic Society.

t Madras Literary Journal, No. 12, p. 173.

514 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Aue.

The volumes of MACKENzI= papers in our library might advantageously be

added to the other documents for the proposed scrutiny*, so that the whole might

be published continuously ; but these details will naturally come under consi-

deration hereafter, should the Government agree in the view taken by the

Asiatic Society, and resolve to entrust the undertaking to the individual

pointed out, either directly or through the medium of the Society, (here or at

Madras,) which might exercise its judgment as to the final publication, should

Mr. Tay tor consent to labour under its auspices.

(Signed) J. Prinsep, Sec.

For the Committee of Papers.

20th August, 1836.

Resolved, That the Society concur in the view taken by the Committee

of Papers, particularly as to the expediency of engaging the eminent ser-

vices of Mr. W. Taytor, for the examination of the Mackenzir MSS.,

and that the Secretary be empowered respectfully to communicate this

opinion, in reply, to the Government.

Mr. Cuartes Browntow submitted to the Society the following pro-

position, relative to a complete copy of the Alif Leila, or Arabic original

of the 1001 nights entertainments, lately purchased by him from the

estate of Major Macan, well known as the Editor of the Shah Nameh.

To JaMES PrinsEP, Esq., Secretary Asiatic Society, &c. &c.

Sir,

Having become the possessor of the original of the complete Arabian Nights

Entertainments, formerly the property of Major Macan, apparently the first

that has ever reached India; I am desirous of adding to oriental literature a

work which has long been a desideratum with Eastern scholars, by its imme-

diate publication. I trust that my views regarding the importance of this

work are not unreasonable; at least T am not alone in my opinion, for no

book extant has ever enjoyed such universal popularity as this, even in

its translated form. Much of its narrative depicts, with miraculous fide-

lity, that most difficult class of incidents to describe with interest—the

incidents of common life; and, beneath even its most grotesque and im-

possible circumstances, there is a moral beauty—a knowledge of humanity

discoverable, which comes home to all, and ¢hroughout, a vivid power of descrip-

tion, which is unequalled in any other production, and addresses itself to the

mind with an effect almost pictorial. It is the remark of an orientalist of high

repute, speaking of this unique and extraordinary work, that ‘‘ we here behold

a genuine portrait of the spirit and character, the common life and domestic

manners, of a once powerful nation, which excelled in arts as well as in arms,

in three quarters of the globe ; in these tales we see the Arabs, depicted by

themselves, in the tents of the desert, and in the courts of the Caliphs. We

mingle among their merchants, join them in their travelling caravans, visit

them in their social circles, and even penetrate into their harems.”’

If the book appeal thus powerfully to the European reader, whose sympathies

are weakened by distance and difference of habit, how much more emphatically

must it address itself to the inhabitants of the East, in the overflowing and

beautiful language in which it was originally written !

My chief object in this paper is to draw public attention to the document,

and to give such evidence regarding its authenticity as I have been able to collect,

under the very difficult and embarrassing condition of having no other com-

plete copy to refer to. My attention has been directed, in the first instance, to

the MS. alone, which contains the unbroken series of one thousand and one

nights; next, to its quality, which is reported on by competent persons to be

clear, and remarkably free from literal errors.

* See printed catalogue of the Library Asiatic Society.

1836.]} Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 515

My next step was to examine the MS. with the printed edition of the ‘*‘ Two

Hundred Nights,’? published some years since in Calcutta, whence it appears

that the latter is a set of excerpts merely, made, in many instances, without

regard to the literary value of tke selection, and in some, overlooking even the

integrity of the tales. These fragments have been arbitrarily renumbered as

the ‘first two hundred nights.’’

I have been fortunate enough to obtain a copy of that edition of the original

now in the course of publication at Breslau, by Professor Hasrcat, an orien-

talist of high attainments; he has devoted his life (and it had need be a long

one to enuble him to fulfil his task), to the publication of a complete edition

of this work; he has procured copies of the MS., perfect and imperfect, from

Tunis, from Cairo, and from the library of the Baron S1nvestre Dr SaAcy, and

is proceeding with the publication, subject to the critical collation of these MSS.

I find, on comparing the MS. in my hands, with the edition of Hasicut, as far

as published, i. e. to upwards of three hundred and fifty nights, that no important

discrepancies occur, though, in transcripts of this length, there will always be

found considerable differences. This fact is curiously illustrated by the German

Professor, who has carefully set forth the variations, omissions, redundancies,

and inversions of order, found on comparison of his various MSS. It is like-

wise stated by M. TrEBUTIEN, in his preface to a recent French translation of

this work, (published in 1829,) that he collated twelve manuscripts, and among

them those of the King’s Library at Paris, and the Bodleian copy, which pre-

sented continual discrepancies, both as to style and the order of the tales, which

every copyist had arranged according to his own taste. These differences, though

they would be important in a historical paper, are of little consequence in a se-

ries of fictions. They have manifestly resulted from the carelessness or caprice

of the transcriber, and do not affect the value of the work. All that can be

done, under these circumstances, is to adopt the reading most consistent with

the context.

Beyond the print to which Hasicur’s edition extends, there exist here no

means of continuous comparison. The evidence of genuineness is strengthened,

however, by finding, that the portion of the original already known in the Cal-

cutta edition, is found in the manuscript in my possession, except that the

stories, in the latter, stand in their natural and proper connexion with the re-

mainder of the text. The tales generally correspond in their order with those

found in Scort’s translation of 1801, taking into account those contained in the

supplementary volume, (translated from WortLey Montacue’s MS.) and al-

lowing for the omission of those which the translator has deemed it best, from

motives which he assigns, to pass over.

A remark made by the Baron PurcstaLL (Von Hammer) on the sub-

ject of GALLAND’s translation, is another strong proof of the authenticity

of the manuscript before me. He says, ‘‘ the MS. used by GALLAND* was far

from complete ; and if he published no more stories, it was not because the re-

mainder were less deserving of translation, but because he had no more in his

possession. The imperfection of his manuscript compelled him also to invent,

as he has done, a conclusion to that story of the Sultan of the Indies :—we shall

find that SHEHERZADI was saved from death, neither by her many amiable qua-

lities, nor by her inexhaustible tales, but by her having, during the ‘ thousand

and one nights,’ borne the Sultan three children!’’ TREBUTIEN’S translation,

the result of the collation of twelve of the best manuscripts in Europe, confirms

this ; itis a literal translation of the one now under consideration; the passage

occurs at the thousand and first night, and is unquestionably one of the most

pathetic and beautiful in the whole work! To the above may be added the

strong internal evidence deducible from the uniform character of the style

throughout. The manuscript is open for general examination, and [ shall grate-

fully appreciate the opinion and advice of competent orientalists.

With reference to my intention of publishing, we have great advantages in the

mechanical facilities, which we can so readily command, in printing oriental

* TREBUTIEN has since examined the MS. used by GALLAND, and finds that

he possessed only two hundred and eighty-four nights.

as oe

516 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Auvae.

works in this country ; and a work of this kind, which would take many years in

Europe, might be readily produced here in less than twelve months. We have

our disadvantages too: for it is far from probable, that any editor could be pro-

cured here, possessing the high qualifications and the indefatigable industry of the

Professor before named, united with the leisure necessary for the undertaking ;

one who would carry through the formidable labour of collation, of elaborate

verbal criticism, and the compilation of a lexicon of words found in the original

Arabic of this work, but in no other authority extant! We may despair of this;

but it is not too much to say, that an edition, accurate in all essential particu-

lars, may be brought through ; and I will not conceal, that it would be a source

of great gratification to me to be the means of giving to the classical literature

of the East a book, which, while it has enjoyed throughout Asia and the civi-

lized world a reputation equalled by none, has been, heretofore, in its complete

and original form, but a name /

Calcutta, September 5, 1836. C. BrowNnLow.

Reselved unanimously, That Mr. Brownuow is entitled to the warmest

thanks of the Society, and of all interested in oriental literature, for his

disinterested exertions in regard to the Alif Leila, and for his laudable

wish to make public the valuable and complete edition he has become

possessed of. As it seems possible, by further comparison of the manu-

script with the recent translation of M. Trmsurien, and with the Arabic

printed version of Professor Hagicut, and the incomplete volumes publish-

ed in Calcutta, to add in some degree to the guarantee of its authenti-

city, the Committee of Papers is requested to enter upon this examination,

and report upon the extent of patronage to be accorded by the Society to

Mr. Brown1ow’s laudable enterprize.

A letter from M. Evcene Ormoutr, Director of the French Journal

entitled ‘‘ Institut,” addressed to the President, invited the Society to

communicate copies of its proceedings and publications to this Journal,

and to subscribe for a copy of the work. Referred to the Committee of

Papers.

A letter was read from Dr. F. Monn, one of the Secretaries of the

Asiatic Society of Paris :—

Referring to a prior official communication (not yet received) offering to unite

with the Bengal Society in the expence of completing the oriental publications

abandoned by the late Government of India, and in furtherance thereof re-

questing a supply of the works already finished for sale on the Society’s ac-

count, it states that the five copies of the Mahabharat sent home under charge

of our associate M. Ricwy, had been sold in one day, and it was calculated that

there might be a demand for 100 copies of this work on the continent, and for

half that number of other Sanscrit works. The money realized has been paid to

the Society’s agent in London. Dr, Mout concludes :—

‘‘ Nous ferons ici tout ce que nous pourrons pour repandre ces ouvrages en

France et en Allemagne, car nous sentons tous vivement le service que la

Société de Calcutta rend a la litérature orientale ; et s’ il m’est permis de parler

de moi je ne desire rien plus ardemment que de pouvoir lui etre utile dans cette

circonstance, ou elle a pris si energiquement et si honorablement les interets

de la litérature orientale.’’

Library.

The following books were presented.

Transactions of the American Phil. Society—dy the Society, through Mr.

Ryan.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 517

The American Almanack for 1836—y ditto. .

Harwan’s Medical and Physical Researches—by the Author.

Transactions of the Geological Society of Pennsylvania, vol. i.—by the Society.

Transactions of the Hungarian Society of Pest—by the Society.

Transactions of the London Society of Arts, vol. i. pt. 2—dy the Society.

Marsden’s Numismata Orientalia, 2 pts. in 1 vol. 4to—dy the Author.

Notes on the Indica of Ctesias—dy Professor Wilson, the Author.

Epitome of the History of Ceylon and Translation of the Mahawanso—hby the

Hon'ble G. Turnour, the author.

Second Report on the State of Education in Bengal—by Mr. W. Adam.

Bell’s Comparative View of the External Commerce of Bengal, during the

years 1834, 35, and 36—dy the Author.

The India Journal of Medical Scieuce and Scientific Review—dy Dr. F.

Corbyn, Editor.

The Meteorological Register for July 1836—dy the Surveyor General.

The following book from the Booksellers.

Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Stebbing’s Reformation, vol. i.

Museum of Antiquities, &e.

Read, a letter from J. Bexn, Esq, presenting various articles of food

and clothing, in use among the savage tribes inhabiting the coasts of Dam-

pier’s Straits, brought to Calcutta by the Ship Bombay Castle.

The Secretary presented in the name of Lieut. Corin Mackenzie,

various weapons taken from the Malay pirates ;—among others a long

bambu tube, through which light poisoned darts are blown by the mouth.

The slightest wound inflicted by them is esteemed fatal., Lieut. Mac-

KENZIE also presented the head of a pirate chief killed in the late expe-

dition.

The Secretary called to the attention of the members present, a very

curious piece of sculpture, sent down for the express inspection of his

associates by Colonel Sracy, a Member of the Society.

This sculpture (of 2-3rds size)—cut in the spotted red sandstone of Agra and

Mathura. It seems to represent Silenus or Bacchus, his brows crowned with

vine leaves, and supported by bacchanal attendants. The dresses of the figures,

of which there are several on both sides very well proportioned and grouped, is

decidedly not Hindu but rather Grecian, having a tunic of plaited folds gathered

round the waist by a band. The figures and foliage support a large circular

bason, which may have beea for holding sacred water, or connected with a

fountain. We must endeavour to make a drawing of this very interesting groupe,

and publish it, with the zealous proprietor’s account of its discovery.

Literary Communications.

A memoir by the Hon’ble G. Turnour on the authenticity of the early

Buddhistical Chronology, developed in the Pé/i annals, as compared with

the Réja Tarangini and other authorities, was submitted.

[This will be printed in an early number. ]

A note on the Muar State, being the conclusion of his series of essays

on the native divisions of the Malay Peninsula, and an outline of their

518 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. {Aue.

several political and commercial relations, was received from Lieut. T.

J. Newsoup, A. D. C. to Brig. Gen. Winson, C. B.

Extract of a letter from Mr. V. Trecear was read, offering should the

Society wish it, to forward to Calcutta the Bhitaré lath, containing the

important inscription which the Vice-President Dr. Mixx is now engaged

in decyphering, as it is held in no reverence or consideration by the

people of the neighbourhood.

Some conversation took place on Mr. TreGear’s proposition, which his

letter explained would not have been made, if it involved the removal or destruc-

tion of an object of local interest or veneration. The pillar was at present

isolated, half buried in the ground, and in no way regarded by the people. By

transferring it to the museum it would be preserved from further injury, and an

inscription of great historical importance would be rendered permanently

accessible to the antiquarian. It was the concurrent opinion of the members

present, that if the removal could be effectedat a moderate cost, Mr. TREGEAR’S

obliging offer should be accepted.

Adverting to the neglected condition of the pillar lying half buried in the

ground in the fort at Allahabad, and the great interest which the inscriptions

it contains had excited among orientalists in Europe, it was

Moved by Sir J. P. Grant, seconded by Dr. Corsyn, that a respectful

representation should be made to the Government of India, on the expediency

of taking measures to preserve the ancient monument at Allahabad from further

decay, by setting it up, with a pedestal and railing, in such position within the

fort or elsewhere as may appear most appropriate.

Physical Department.

A letter was read from the Secretary to the Medical and Physical

Society of Bombay, forwarding a memoir by Dr. Lusn, on the Fossils

recently discovered in the Gulf of Cambay.

The fossils have been sent to Calcutta by the Chief Secretary Mr. WATHEN,

aud may be daily expected, when the paper will be printed.

Mr. J. Trorrer presented some specimens of the fossil bones recently

discovered at the Cape of Good Hope.

Mr. TRotter’s note informs the Society, that Mr. Pope, the modest discoverer

of this new fossil deposit, had kindly promised to collect a more numerous series

for the Society’s museum, to be presented in the name of his lady, and that

they may be soon expected. The specimens now presented consist of vertebre

and fragments of ribs of some large animal, which from their mutilated state

cannot be identified ; they are thoroughly fossilized and very hard. Mr. PoPE

says they are found chiefly in the bed of the Ganka river, whither they have

been washed from the site of their inhumation in a ‘‘ sandy and slate stone’’

soil: one specimen in his possession was found imbedded in this hard slaty

matrix, from which it required a crowbar to extract it; it was as one solid rock.

The vicinity of the district called the ‘‘ Gouph’’ abounds with specimens ; the

country is stony and barren, and much intersected with dry ravines. It is

situated between the Zwarteberg and the Niewwbergen, the central part of the

Cape Colony, Lat. 33° S, and 22°, 23° W. Long.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 519

A memoir on the fossil remains of the smaller Carnivora of the Sub-

Himélayas, by Lieutenants W. E. Baxer and H. M. Duranp, Engineers,

with a lithograph, was submitted.

Description of some new species of the Strigine family ; and indication

of a new genus of the Picidz, by Mr. B. H. Hopeson.

A specimen of the sea-horse ( Hippocampus ) called by the Mag inhabit-

ants of Ramri a young Ngaga, or “ volcano serpent,” was presented by

Captain D. Witu1ams, Senior Assistant Commissioner in Arracan.

Dr. McCuetianp exhibited to the Society the collections made by him,

of Zoology and Geology, in the late expedition to the Tea province of

Asam, and submitted two written notices, one of which he read in eluci-

dation of the geology of the Kasia range.

Dr. McCuevanp stated, that the fossil shells were found in such numbers

and variety at Chirra Punji, as to afford the most unquestionable evidence of the

tertiary nature of the Kasia mountains: and further, that when the species

shall be rigidly identified and compared with those of the London and _ Paris

basins and the sub-Appenine beds, as well as with existing species in the Indian

seas, it may be possible to tind their place in the Hocene and Pliocene divisions

of LYELL.

This he considered the first instance of any extensive deposit of fossil shells

having been found in sub-Himalayan beds, calculated to throw sufficient light

upon the period of upheavement.

Mr. Cracrort, and long before him Mr. Scort, had indeed made known the

cerithia and turrilites of Chirra, anda variety of the nummulites of the Sylhet

limestone, which is in fact made up of shells and nothing else; but to Dr.

McCieuanp belongs the honor of having found 27 varieties of shells in the same

limestone; also, of having found an extensive deposit of marine shells on the

S. W. face of the mountains quite distinct from any limestone whatever, but

imbedded in a superficial layer of partially consolidated sandy matter, which

reposes on the surface of sandstone covered only by the soil, and of having

exhibited 100 species nearly of these shells for the first time to the Society.

The great extent of the collection and the variety of objects of natural history

particularly—embracing 120 fishes of the Brahmaputra; besides birds, quadru-

peds, insects, shells, and a very numerous and regular series of rock specimens

taken from the whole line of journey,—did great credit to the industry of

Dr. McCiettanp. A vote of thanks was unanimously passed to him for the

opportunity he had so kindly afforded the Society of inspecting his portion of the

fruits of the late expedition to Asdm. The descriptive catalogues of the whole

are now in a state of forwardness, and will, it is presumed, be incorporated in a

general report to Government by Dr. Wat icu, who conducted the expedition,

and it is hoped be eventually published for general information, either in a se-

parate volume, or through the medium of the Society’s Researches.

{We shall hasten to insert the two notes as soon as space permits.]

V1I.—Meteorological Register.

*d *£—'7e919 003 ssoudip payepnoyes 344

SOyeUl YUM “YINI} oy} MOTEQ 91}7I] & JULOd-Mop 94} 9}eUIT}s9 0} AQUapUa) B sI_a1AY3 (JjosAut Aq paArasqo you a104m) yeyy pojou aq prnoys4y “LzZ81 eune OJ auizeSeyw jequano oyy

al pue [euINor uoKNzTsUy [eAoY ay? ul paysi{qnd taj39wWoIsAY oy} Joy a[Qe AUL wOIZ UOyR} SI PITY] OY : ALB 9y} Jo aanquroduie, ey} IL UOIsUE} OU) Aq juIOd Map ay) Iv UOISUD} BY)

sutpiatp—s uoIsud} snooenbe jo a[qQe} S,u0ITVq WOT p9}e|NdTLd st UUINT[OD puodas at]; : Jequinu A[ne syj UT pojaesul JUSUINA]SUL GING-J9M SY} AOF 9[GBI ©} ULOIF UAY¥I SI UWN]O Isty AYE

‘rre oyy ut Ayrprumng jo asejuaoied oy} Surpuy JO Spoyjour sary} 943 JO (panuljyuod aq [JIM Yorym) uostarduioo ATIep v Oy WOOT DYCUL OF YJUOUL S14} Pz} IMO Usaq sey UNIO .tajzaWwowHg

94d PUL "“WOWUBAIOSGO ABWIAIOZ YIM Sulooise ‘AjOAtadser "Wd p puke “WV QT Av Bru" puke BE’ useq savy sedUueIayIp ayy, ‘sxojsuto1eq ayy 03 Ajdde yQUOCUL 4s] JO syAvWeL OYL

“royjvam Axgqns Ayo Nosy YySt ice 1 Goh yp | eh] Fe [06 122.6% Jove jorseletp*ce| rir 6s 9L| 6L | G6 6‘9L|h > |LF [Boe 6rS “Gel L19%Gs “Ura

= Beak plea St Rane Os | eee i Dee eae OAC eS Perea (le do SR es | lr pee jee

‘Aomoys = “A438 “und | "aS “MS BIIt \e°ZZ | 9s | 12 08 | 06 |2°82\2°% |e‘ \FCB e0gs [LbPS | of | FL LL | G8 \g°9L|0°S €°98|F195 63

op ‘aug ‘M°S ‘*M'S O'FOL 13°84 } ¢9 | 09 Lo } G8 |g‘l c°8 116 |L'6Ricegs |2ce fT og | 8Z BF 16 [OGLIOT 10 |8*oeieZ9° |1F9S 83

‘auy *FSBDIDAO [AA “S “MA *S HOTS g'c6 \o°FL | ZL | 99 L9 } 28 \o*cLio9 \1°2 |L'eelee9s jIZo° Ff Ze | 62 cg } $6 IZ‘9LIF'E IG'e |L'FglerZ® |069S 1G

op *ulel “py — ‘as foo'p «6 OfS8 «(0.6L 1g | ¢8 GB OY FG IZ‘OLIS™‘E 6's le‘18\89¢* jes‘ 93

op “Apnojo ‘Se “opiates? Bre je'eL | ag | FL LL | 6 \9°9L\8‘b |1'G \S‘9Bieces |o82. § ze | I8 08 | G6 \o‘ZZ|0°R IPD IZ'Pelech’ j6ees GS

op »Alamoys ‘as. aS 9*E0T jo'9L | BL | 08 LL | 06 |0‘'BL.a°F log [S“S8)09FS [FEES F 0g | GL 08 | 16 |8‘ZZ|e°F 10'S |6'98|FO9* |FPSS ing

op ‘ouy ‘as "AS [025 €66 |0'cL | 2g} LL 08 | ¥6 I9°ZZio> |a%e j9'S8io6ps SRS F pe] LZ ze ft S6 \¢‘ZZIZ‘€ l0‘h l6‘ssigag’ Gees &%

*uler “uae "SoU tG’“T «| OFG8 IpF9L | 28 08 | 6 8° |o%E |ar8\nses |2Z2e° | gg} 28 68 1 C6 \0‘O8|0'E |O'e joPeless’ lé6ce* IZ

op op 0 ‘8 O*00T |s°94 1 99 | 9 G9 | 98 €°L2\a°Z |e%e jc'1Gloses |862* | BZ | 94 08 | 06 [etZZ|Z‘F |o°s |roR|OGbS ORES | OZ

op op rou tam fag =| OCOIT |a‘LZ 1 08 OLLIO leh \S'e8lzers jege‘ LL ra GLLIL'E |e lersellZps® \68p 61

*AIaMOYS ‘Mund jou ‘au OSTOL [2b 99 OL 9°GL\%‘¢ lo'g9 |Z’e8leis’ |9bPS ae 8°E |9'P lEegsigss IIFSS 81

op op 7) as ¢00I 6°84 ol cL ELL om lp‘¢ |6°Z8leens 08h‘ GL 08 OLLI9'D l8*h |e'Zelprs® \|F8Ps OL

op op “as "as G‘ZIL [9°92 yA ol G‘OLITS Ip%¢ \S‘L8iFors |968° WZ gL e°GLIG*S \\‘9 jo'gaiees* Eeecs at

op op "ag ‘as 1cgf 616 {L692 9L 82 9'sLig<h le letZelezes |19¥° 8 68 OBLIS'S 10°F |8°c8loe9s 99° vat

*A1aMOYS op "7 om f0a* $c6 0'2Z LL 08 ELLio% le \Stesiores |FGr‘ gl 8b lo IT*eelePos {609° €1

“ulna op *as *as 6°S8 |3°9L 69 $9 0°6L'8°9 |p*g |6°06|FIgs ESPs el 08 OOLIL‘P IL*o 18°98IP19" jIZe* rat

op ‘aug ‘und | as ‘as fOLS G16 |6'9L 69 el O'ZL9°F \1'9 |L°88\66p° Shr‘ 9L 08 Ligh\e‘b job iL*aeizee. 1079" iat

‘ured “Aramoys {am *s “ma "Sa tSe° 0°16 § |6‘92 el 08 S*oLio‘s |e |6°98\96R. |8bP* GL eB OGL|e‘s |I‘b l6°S8]E9c* Iaees ol

*4se010A0 *Azey, ‘asa a “Sy f08S O16 {8°22 FZ 08 99L|9°E |g |G‘98le9e* OTE. tL 08 PLLY'D Io'F |698|01b: jEge* 6

Ala mous *Apyo ‘a cas tse’ | 8°46 |o‘sZ aL, 08 96LIOF ep {LZ8\990° jess cL 08 GILLIE lob \Pgosiese’ jie. 8

ured umd 2m SS «foes O01 |0°ZZ rZ ZL SLLIOD le \OSL8\eze* PLE‘ 6L ¢ GOLlb's IPS \L*98icer® jcuE* L

“K1amoys op ‘as ‘as [cos 8801 |3‘8L .9L cL L°BLIL% IL'¢ |PL8\66e* |4e8‘ 14 GL OSLLI9SS 1D 1S°HB\SIS* ors 9

‘und ‘1100 “4JBays WIND | ‘asa. “ass O9IT |0°92 *9 £9 S°9119°2 \e%g |606|ogr! |Z0P el fj LZLIO'S 16G (E°98}669" crs‘ G

“BUTUDIvAAYy “ALE *as "S [ges | B‘E0T |3‘92 9 08 SoLleh lot lecelerc’ |Fer‘ 89 09 eFL[eZ joe |2°98\089. jZ8cc fF

*“Azey ‘auy ‘op | as ‘s 6°86 |0*SL 29 £9 L>L19°8 |L°9 \6°8B\g6e* {PISS 08 Gl E‘OL|P‘S |1°9 |¢*9e}o6os {EEO | €

"34s ‘wIND op ‘as 6° MS feos g°96 j0‘SL a 09L,9%% \g*e |T‘Zele09* jes‘ el gL GGLinse Igce Ir°calesg’ |Po0* Z

“Azey “qeris*uind | “aS “AAS Jol’ 8°96 |o°bZ el cl 9'9L.e% la8o 19°S8\e0g ‘6c|6EF 6S 08 G8 BOLICE (6G |VEBlORGOTIEFS CS) T

ic3} > = ert ie) abla s gaye ePplo syle pola h Aieel Po cero =blobla sie molt nwz

: es | = 5 [E| € | £ Bese eeasyse F1ss) 5 82) PS Ages Sees eae) = |S\2s|2z Fale 4) &

g 5 5 = "ry elt ee et s Sie BS to mG roajorm ” S| is Slo g|ee °

5 E ee 5 | & [SSSciZFssis |e ES/Ss/o8|5o| BufsSis — Fo8\a” mw (ESSER PesISB al S

mB oa c e x Pele |© Bil B erles|s S| 58 €SyF Bs 208 o al Slsclesias| selessl s

Pl Sy a} Sot si Tegel ol "el oe EM | SeRp sl Sis Bisel oe] “Fletay ©

*s9 Wad] xX *Aqrpruin yy *Ayrprumn Fy °

*IOUJES AA *pulm eee peye[noyep ‘Wd f }8 suoleAIesqo pezena[vD ‘WV OT 2@ SUOTIVAIESqC =.

Joysisoy 5

‘9E81 Gsnbnp fo yquop ay? wof ‘n2In9]np ‘29K hossp ay) yo yday ‘sazsihayy 1916070.L00}0 Ty

e-FOURNAL

foe ASIATIC.. SOCIETY.

No. 56.—September, 1836.

{1.—Leamination of some points of Buddhist Chronology. By the Hon.

Grorcr Turnour, Ceylon Cwil Service.

While the question of the authenticity of Buddhistical chronology,

developed in Par annals, subsequent to the advent of Sa’kya Sinua,

is under the consideration of the Committee of Papers of the Asiatic

Society, I beg to offer a few observations on the Chronological Table

appended to Professor Witson’s Essay on the Hindu History of

Casumir, called the Raja Tarangini, published in the XVth volume of

the Asiatic Researches.

The first portion of this history, compiled by Kauna’na Pandit

commences with the fabulous ages; it is represented to extend to

A. D. 1024 ; and the author is reputed to have flourished about Saka

1070, or A. D. 1148. .

Before tabularizing and adjusting the chronology comprised in

that history*, Professor Winson gives the following details regarding

the reign of the monarch Aso’Ka.

‘¢ The last of these princes (Sachinara) being childless, the crown of Cashmir

reverted to the family of its former rulers, and devolved on AséKa, who was

descended from the paternal great uncle of Khagendra. ‘This prince, it is said

in the Ayen Acberi, abolished the Brahminical rites, and substituted those of

Jina ; from the original however it appears, that he by no means attempted the

former of these heinous acts, and that, on the contrary, he was a pious worship-

per of Siva, an ancient temple of whom in the character of Vijayésa he repair-

ed. With respect to the second charge, there is better foundation for it, although

it appears that the prince did not introduce, but invented or originated the Jina

Sdsana. We is said to have founded a city called Srinagar, a different place,

* Want of space must excuse our inserting these tables, which will be accessi-

ble to all our readers in our Chronological and Genealogical Appendix.—Ep,

img

522 Buddhist Chronology. . [Supr.

however, from the present capital, which is attributed to a much later monarch. In

the reign of As6xa, Cashmir was overrun by the Miech’has, for whose expulsion

the king obtained from Siva a pious and valiant son, as a reward for the auste-

rities he had practised *.’’

‘‘Ja’LoKa, the son and successor of AséKA, was a prince of great prowess :

he overcame the assertors of the Bauddha heresies, and quickly expelled the

Mlech’has from the country, thence named Ujjhita dimba : he then carried his

victorious arms to foreign regions, and amongst others to the north of Persia,

which he subjugated in the reign of Danas, and then proceeding in an opposite

direction, he subdued the country of Canow).”’

‘¢ The successor of this celebrated monarch was DAmMoDARA, of whose descent

various opinions were entertained.’’

‘‘Damopara was succeeded by three princes who divided the country, and

severally founded capital cities named after themselves. These princes were

called HusuKxa, Jusuka, and CanisHKa, and these appellations are strongly

corroborative of an assertion of our author, that they were of Turushka, that is,

of Turk or Tartar extraction: they are considered as synchronous, but may

possibly be all that are preserved of some series of Tartar princes, who, it is

very likely, at various periods, established themselves at Cashmir. The chief

event recorded of their reign is the foundation of the three several capitals,

named after themselves, but another and more important consequence of their

sovereignty is said to have been the almost entire change of the national faith,

and the nearly exclusive prevalence of the doctrines of the Bauddhas under a

Bodhisatwa or heirarch named Na'Ga'rsunA. The period at which this took

place is said to have been 150 years before the death of Sa’kya SinBA.”

‘¢ The Tartar princes were succeeded by ABHIMANYA, a monarch evidently

of a Hindu appellation, and a follower of the orthodox faith, which he re-

established in Cashmir.”’

In elucidation of the date assigned to the age in which Na’Ga’r-

yuna lived, Professor Witson adds the following appendix. The

Sanscrit quotation, which (if I have correctly read it) is here repre-

sented in Roman, is there given in Déva-nagari characters.

* The faith of As6KA is a matter of very little moment, as the prince himself

is possibly an ideal personage: as, however, tne comparative antiquity of the

Buddha and Brahminical creeds in Cashmir has been supposed to be affected

by it, and the events subsequently recorded, it may be advisable to give the

passages of the original, which shew that AsOKA was a worshipper of Siva: it

is not impossible, however, if we are to attach credit to any part of this portion

of theCashmirian history, that he permitted heretical, possibly Bauwddha doctrines,

to be introduced into the kingdom during his reign from his Tartar neighbours.

‘¢Then the prince Aséxa, the lover of the truth, obtained the earth ; who

sinning in subdued affections, produced the Jena Sdsana.’’ This may méan

possibly something very different from the received idea, and may imply his

neglect of affairs of state through excess of devotion, and his consequently omit-

ting to prevent the intrusion of a foreign power, rather than a foreign faith,

into the kingdom, the expulsion of which was the object of his son’s birth.—

{Note by Professor WILson.]

1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 523

‘¢ Appendix No. 7, to Professor W1ison’s Essay.

“<The passage in the text adverted to (page 23) requires a little consideration,

both as to its meaning and the chronological views to which it has already given

rise. The text of the original runs thus :—

Té Turushkénwayédbhaté pi punyasrayé nripah Sushkakshétradi déséshu ma-

thachityadi chakriré. PrAjyé rajyakshané tesh4n, praya Kasmiramardalam bhéjya-

masté sawauddbgnam pravrajyorjita téjasam. Tat6é Bhagawatah Sa’Kya SINHASYA

puranirvrité asmin saha l6kdhatau sdrdham varshasatam hyagat Bédhisatwascha

désésmin néka bhuméswar6 bhut, sacha NA'’GA'’RJUNAH sriman shadarhatwa na

sansrayé.

‘¢ There are in this passage some obvious inaccuracies, and some compounds

of a purport absolutely unknown to the most learned Brahmans. Taking it as it

stood, it appeared to involve the position that the Turushka princes preceded

Sa’xya S1nHA by above a century and a half; and concluding the Gautama

of the sixth century before the Christian era to be intended by the name Sa’xya

SinwA, which is always enumerated as a synonime, the date of GonrrRpa III.

was adjusted accordingly in the preceding pages, and placed 640 B. C.

An opportunity having subsequently occurred of consulting a Burma priest,

and a man of some learning, on the subject, there appeared good grounds for

revising the passage, and altering the results, in consequence of which several

pages previously printed off have been cancelled, and it is only in the marginal

dates of the first dynasty that any traces of the error have been suffered to

remain. These are of comparative unimportance, and will be readily rectified

by adverting to the table. We have now then to offer a translation of the pas-

sage; premising, that the term Puranirvrité should be Parinirvrité, the sixth

case of Parinirvriti, ov in Patt, Parinibbuti, the ordinary term used by the

Bauddhas, to express the final Nirvritté or emancipation of their Buddhas or

saints in its fullest sense; Pari being added as an intensitive prefix. The use

of this and some other peculiar expressions, which are at present quite unin-

telligible to the ablest scholars among the brahmans of Hindustan, but are fa-

miliar to the Rahans of the Burman empire, proves that Kanna’na, the author

of the Cashmirian History, or at least his guides, were well acquainted with the

language, and, probably, with the system, of the Bauddhas.

‘ They (Hushka, &c.) of Turushka descent, were princes, asylums of virtue,

and they founded colleges, and planted sacred trees, in Sushka and other places.

During the period of their reign the whole of Cashmir was the enjoyment of

Bauddhas, eminent for austerity. After them, when 150 years had elapsed from

the emancipation of the Lord Sa’kya Srnua in this essence of the world, a

Bodhisatwa in the country named NA'Ga’rsJuNA, was Bhumiswara, (Lord of the

earth,) and he was the asylum of the six A’rhatwas.’

“* As the prevalence of the Bauddhas and consequence of Na’Ga‘rsuna, if not

subverted, were at least checked in the ensuing reign of ABHIMANYa ; and as the

passage expressly states that the circumstance occurred after the Yurushka

princes, the 150 years subsequent to Sa’kyA SINHA must fall within the limits

of ABHIMANYA’S reign: itis therefore necessary only to fix the date of Sa’xya

Srvwa to determine that of the several reigns occurring in this portion of our

history.

Assuming that this S{xya Sinwa was the Buppua of 542B. C. he

ventures to correct thereby KanwAna’s more distant epoch :—

oY 2

B24 Buddhist Chronology. (Szpr.

‘At the same (ime KaLua'nA, well informed as he is in these respects, bas

evidently confounded the two periods, and hence assigned to Sa'kya SINHA a

date corresponding to at least 1332 B. C. although apparently designating the

person who flourished B. C. 542. We may therefore venture to correct his chro-

nology with reference to this latter date ; although until we can je satisfied that

the Savkya Sinwa of the North-west was one individual with the Gaurama

of Magadhé, we cannot venture to attach any thing like certainty to this emen-

dation. Some circumstances in favor of the date laid down are adverted to in

the concluding observations ; and we may here add, that there seems to bea

strange connexion between the circumstances and dates of the Zerdashts of

Persia and the Buddhas of India, which deserves a more particular investigation

than we have hitherto had materials to undertake.

‘‘ The passage relating to the prevalence of the Bauddha faith in Cashmir

includes the mention of an individual, WHOSE HISTORY IS FULLY AS OBSCURE,

IF NOT AS IMPORTANT, AS THAT OF BuDDHA.

‘““Na/Ga’RJUNA as a Bodhisatwa, (see note in page 21,) may be either a reli-

gious or a secular character: he was probably the former, as a hierarch, the

prototype of the modern Lama of Tived ; his other title, however, Bhumiswara*

may mean a prince, and has probably induced Mr. CoLeBRooke to translate the

text generally thus :—

‘‘Da’MoDARA was succeeded by three kings of the race of Turushka, and

they were followed by a Bodhisatwa, who wrested the empire from them by the

aid of Sa’kya Sina, and introduced the religion of Buddha into Cashmir.

He reigned a hundred years, and was followed by Abhimanya.”’

After carefully considering all the data accessible to him, Professor

Witson decides on adopting the above Buddhistical record of the

age in which these three Turushka princes and Na GARJUNA flourished,

as the most authentic authority available for making the first adjust-

ment in his chronological table ; whereby he reduces, at the termi-

nation of his ‘‘ first period,” the date of Gonrrpa III.’s reign from

B. C. 1182 to B. C. 388, showing an anachronism in the Rija

Tarangini of 794 years.

This circumstance alone, even if no new light could be thrown on

this interesting question, would afford a powerful argument in support

of the opinions I entertain of the superior accuracy and authenticity

of Buddhistical over Brahminical chronology. We should bear in

mind, too, that the Raja Tarangini is admitted to be “the only

Sanscrit composition yet discovered to which the title of history can

* “ Tswara,” (Pali ‘* Issard,’’) and ‘* Sdmiké,”’ are often conferred on Buddhis-

tical sacerdotal characters who have gained great ascendancy. Vide chap. v. of the

Mahdwanso. ‘‘ Addhdyan sémanéré mé gharé hessati Sa’mtx6.’? Chap. xiv.

“< Gahetd pathawi mihi: Dipé, hessanti Issara'.’’? ‘‘ This samanéro will this

very day become the master of my palace.”’ ‘‘ The land will be usurped by these

persons: they will become the lords of this island.’’ (Note by Mr. T.)

SS es

ee Le ee

1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 525

with any propriety be applied.” It is not a little remarkable, there-

fore, that Professor Wixson, after having thus recognized the correct-

ness of the date assigned to Saxya Sinwa’s death, and availed him-

self of an event connected with Buddhistical history to correct the

chronology of the Radja Tarangini, should have entirely lost sight of

these circumstances, and been led, in analyzing the Tibetan works, to

say that ‘“‘ any thing like chronology is, if possible, more unknown in

Buddhistical than Brahminical writings, and it is in vain to expect

any satisfactory specification of the date at which Buppwa Sdxya

flourished.”

The object, however, which I have more immediately in view at

present, is to point out, that the correction adopted by Professor

WIxson in this table, which reduces the date of the reign of GoneRDA

III. from B. C. 1182 to B. C. 388, invites criticism and reconsidera-

tion, as being apparently inconsistent with the most approved data

previously established, in both the Brahminical and Buddhistical

chronologies ; and also to endeavour to prove that the imperfection of

the adjustment proceeds from the omission of a single letter in the

passage of the Sanscrit text quoted in his appendix. Whether the

omission of this single letter has arisen from KatuaAna Pandit having

misunderstood the Buddhistical authority, from which his informa-

tion was derived; or from the inaccuracy of some transcriber of his

work, will not, perhaps, ever be ascertained; unless, indeed, some

copy of this history be hereafter found, exempt from this- minute

imaccuracy, the discovery of which would fix the erratum on the

transcriber. ¢

Before I explain the grounds on which I justify the addition of

«d” to the numeral “ Sdrdhdn warsha satai,’ it will be proper to

notice, why the adjustment, made according to the present reading

of that numeral, is inconsistent with “the present most approved

data of both the Brahminical and Buddhistical chronologies.”

According to the Brahminical chronology developed in the Puranas,

as analyzed by Sir W. Jones, Colonel Witrorp, and other oriental

scholars, the date assigned to the reign of CHanprRaaupta is B. C.

1502; and whether we regard him as the contemporary of ALEXAN-

DER the Great, or of Sexznucus Nicator, the Brahminical date

assigned to his reign will have to be reduced to about B. C. 325;

making an adjustment of about 1177 years ; in comparison with which

the foregoing adjustment of 794 years at the reign of GonrmrRDA

III. is deficient to the extent of 383 years, and to that extent,

therefore, it is at variance with the present cardinal point of Brahmi-

nical chronology, the age of Cuanpracurta. Ona careful comparison

526 Buddhist Chronology. (Serr. |

of Professor Witson’s Table with Sir W. Jonzs’s Essay, it will, I

think, be admitted that Katu4wa Pundit did not depart materially

from the fictitious scheme of Hindu chronology contained in the

Purdnas, until after the reign of Gonxrpa III.; and that it was

subsequent to that date, that he attempted to correct progressively

the Hindu anachronism. According to the Purdnas, CHANDRAGUPTA

succeeded to the Magadha empire about B. C. 1502. Admitting

(for reasons hereafter explained), that Asdxa of Cashmir is identical

with Aséxa of Magadha, the grandson of Cuanpracupta, we shall

then have a series of nine (three of Magadha and six of Cashmir)

princes to fill up the term of 320 years intervening between CHANnDRA-

cupTa B. C. 1502, and Gownerpa III. B. C. 1182, giving a some-

what high average, certainly, of 35 years and seven months, but still

not greatly out of proportion with the term actually assigned in Bud-

dhistical history to the reigns of the three Magadha kings, (viz.) ;—

CHANDRAGUPTA,...... 34

BINDUSARA,.... ...... 28

ASO RAR 2 Fy RY Oe

99-+- 3 = 33 years for the average

At all events, it must be conceded that a series of only nine reigns,

comprised within so limited a term as 320 years, can by no admissible

process of adjustment be extended to 703 by the addition thereto of

383 years short deducted at the age of Gonrerpva III. Such an

addition would make it necessary either to throw back the reign of

Cuanpracurra to (B. C. 1182 + 703=) B. C. 1885, which would

disturb the whole scheme of Hindu chronology, or to bring the reign

of Gonrrpa III. (B. C. 1502—703) to B. C. 799, which Katwa’na

had not done.

It appears to be requisite, therefore, that the adjustment made in

the date of the reign of Gonrrpa III. should be nearer 1177 than

794 years; and, indeed, I conceive I am justified in asserting, that

this position admits of almost arithmetical verification, from the ine-

qualities of the averages produced in the reigns of the three subse-

quent ‘<dynasties” in the Chronological Table of the Raja Tarangini.

It will be seen in that Table, that Professor Winson does not escape

from his chronological embarrassments till the close of his “ third

dynasty ;” as the averages assigned to two of those dynasties are, by

his own acknowledgment, inadmissible. According to his corrected

chronology he has

1836. ] Buddhist Chronology. 527

In the first dynasty,.. 21 Princes in 378 years, average 18 years.

In the second dynasty, 6 dittoin 192 ditto, ditto 22 ditto, 8 months.

In the third dynasty, 16 dittoin 433 ditto, ditto 43 ditto, 3% ditto.

———— a

37 1003 general average 27 years, 1 month.

If, instead of resting these adjustments on conjectural grounds, we

substitute the precise correction ascertained to be necessary in Hindu

chronology at the reign of Cuanpracupta, being about 1177 years,

we shall then bring the reign of Gonerpa III. from B. C. 1182,

down to B. C. 5. The general average of the reigns of the 37

Kashmerian princes from Gonerpa III. in B. C. 5 to the end of the

reign of Ba’napitiya in A. D. 615, will then give the satisfactory

result of 16 years and 9 months. The necessity of all further adjust-

ments of the Cashmirian table, subsequent to the age of Gonmrpa III.

will be thereby got rid of. The clumsy expedient of Katna’na Pandit

for making those adjustments, by assigning preposterously protracted

terms,—in one instance of 300 years,—to the reigns of the princes of

the three subsequent ‘‘ dynasties,’ may at once be rejected. His

chronology down to the reign of Gonerpa IIT. will be rendered con-

sistent with the Pur4nas; and our adjustments will be in accordance

with the anachronism ascertained to exist in the age of Cuanpra-

GUPTA.

As regards the Buddhistical chronology, I have it in my power to

adduce dixect evidence, independent of hypothetical reasoning, in sup-

port of the proposition which I have advanced.

It can hardly be necessary for me to bring forward proofs, beyond

those exhibited in the foregoing extracts from Professor WuLson’s

Essay, to establish, that Aso’Ka, “‘to whom the crown of Cashmir re-

verted on the demise of Sacuinara without issue, was the Magadha

prince of that name, the grandson of Cuanpracupra and son of

Brinpusa’ra, who became the great patron of Buddhism after his

accession to the supreme sovereignty of India. It is found in the

Attakatha on the Pitakataya (the commentaries on the Buddhistical

Scriptures) as well as in the Maha Wanso*, that this prince admi-

nistered the government of Ujjéni, by the appointment of his father

Brnpusa’ro, the emperor of India; that he succeeded to the empire

* Vide Ch. V. As Aso’Ka’s son, MAHINDO, was born while his father ‘‘ admie

nistered the government of Ujjéni,’’ and as Mauinpo is stated to have attained

his twentieth year in the seventh year of Aso’Ka’s rule in Magadha, Aso’KA

must have governed Ujjéni, for his father Binpusa/ro, at least fourteen years.

It is immaterial, as regards the foregoing computation, whether his accession to

Cashmir preceded or followed his accession to the Magadha empire, as my cal-

culations are based on the date of the ‘‘ Third Convocation’’ in B. C. 307.

528 Buddhist Chronology. [Supr.

in the year 218, after the death of Sa’xya, or B. C. 325; that he

became a convert to Buddhism four years after his accession, and that

the mission for the conversion of Cashmér was deputed by him, in the

18th year of his reign, after the termination of the third convocation,

in A. B. 236 or B. C. 307. The particulars given of the rule of this

prince in Cashmir, concise and imperfect as they are, entirely accord,

as far as they go, with the foregoing sketch. According to that

sketch, Aso/Ka is not the direct descendant of his predecessors who

reigned in Cashmir ; ‘he was originally a pious worshipper of Siva,

but subsequently invented or originated the Jina Sdsana’’ (religion of

Jina or Sdkya); and, according to the Ayin Acberi, “< abolished the

Brahminical rites and substituted those of Jina.” With these marked

features of resemblance, of peculiar and prominent importance in the

tableau of Indian History, which are not recognizable in, or applicae

ble to, any other Asiatic monarch, it appears to be impossible to

withhold the admission that the Aso’xa of Cashmir,-and the Aso’Ka of

Magadha, subsequently called Dhammaséka, the emperor of India, are

identically one and the same individual.

If on this hypothetical reasoning, the point of identity may be

considered to be established, (and I observe by your Genealogical

Tables that it is there admitted,) we have to add 20 years for the

residue of the reign of Aso’Ka, from the date of the Buddhist mission

to Cashmir in A. B. 235, or B. C. 307, to complete his reign of 37

years in Magadha, which brings us to B. C. 287, leaving a term of

282 years between that date and B. C. 5, to which the reign of

Gonerpa III. was brought, according to the foregoing adjustment

(made on Brahminical chronological data) to be divided amongst the

six princes who intervened between Aso’ka and Gonerpa III.

These numbers will give an average of 47 years for each reign, which

is certainly inadmissible. This discrepancy, however, only serves

to give me greater confidence in the views I entertain ; and, indeed,

if sucha result was not produced, in this particular portion of Bud-

dhistical chronology, the whole of the reasoning entered into in the

introduction to my pamphlet, on which I have attempted to prove

‘that an intentional perversion to the extent of about 60 years has

been adopted, to answer some national or religious object, which is

not readily discoverable, between the date of Sa’xya Sinwa’s death

and that of the accession of CuanpRraGurra,” would be nullified. By |

deducting these 60 years, about 222 years will be left to be divided

among those six princes, which gives an average of 37 years, which

also is far from being a satisfactory result. But a single protracted

reign, in so limited a number as six monarchs, would be sufficient

1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 529

to reduce the average of the other five reigns to an admissible term,

and would, at the same time, adjust the date of Aso’Ka’s reign in the

Raja Tarangini to the date assigned to it in Buddhistical chronology,

as well as produce the same result with that arrived at by the fore-

going adjustment of the Brahminical chronology,—viz. fix the age of

Gonerpa III. to about B. C. 5.

In the translation of the foregoing Sanscrit quotation, on the

authority of which Professor Witson’s adjustment of the age of

Gonerpa III. from B. C. 1182 to B. C. 338 is founded, I have

ventured to make a few verbal alterations, unconnected with the date,

in conformity with the meaning which Buddhistical phraseology

would suggest. From the context with the other portions of the

work, it may be perfectly just to apply the term “ pravrajyarjita”’

to ‘‘ Bauddhas” exclusively; and M. Csoma pe Ko6ros corro-

borates, from Tibetan authorities, the inference that these Tartar

princes were of the Buddhistical faith. But that term in Buddhisti-

cal literature signifies, in the most general sense, “‘ ascetic,” without

distinction of any particular religion. The impression conveyed to

my mind by this passage is rather to the effect that ‘‘ Cashmir was

under the spiritual controul of (Brahminical) ascetic sages, eminent

for their rigid piety,” than that ‘‘ Cashmir was the enjoyment of

Bauddhas eminent for austerity’ during the reigns of the three

Turushka princes.

The correction made by Professor Witson from ‘‘ Puranirvritté”

to “ Parinirvrité’ is indispensable ; and had the Burma priest, whom

he consulted, called to his recollection that Majjhantiko théro did not

repair to Cashmir for the purpose of converting it to Buddhism, until

236 years after the death of Sa’kya Sinua, he would doubtless have

also pointed out that, according to Buddhistical authorities, there was

as great an irrelevancy and inadmissibility involved in the specified

date of 150 years, as in computing that date ‘ anterior’ instead of

** posterior” to the death of Buppua.

This manifest inaccuracy is to be rectified by prefixing ‘‘d” to the

‘ sirdhan varsha satan,’ and converting it into “ dasdrdhan varsha

satan*,”” In making the addition of this single letter, it must not be

* I should here note that I have never met in my Pdli reading, nor has any

native scholar been able to refer me to, the numeral ‘* Saddhan-sata’’ for “* one

hundred and fifty ;’’ although, according to grammatical rules, the contraction

of ‘‘ Saha-addhdan-sata’’ into ‘‘ Saddhan-sata’’ appears to be perfectly admissi-

ble. Whereas the numeral ‘‘ Dasaddhasata’’ contracted from ‘‘ Dasa-addhén-

sata’’ for ‘‘ half a thousand,’’ is in continual use. It is repeatedly met with in

the Mahdwanso, Ch. 1. ‘‘ Sdmuddé Ndgabhawané dasaddhasata ydjané.”? ‘In

530 Buddhist Chronology. (Serr.

regarded as an arbitrary alteration on my part. It is a correction,

the adoption of which cannot be resisted without impugning the

authority of authentic Buddhistic history, in which “ Na’ca’rsuna”

(as Professor Wiison himself surmises) under the name of ‘‘ Na’ca

Sz'na”’ enjoys a distinguished celebrity. He does not appear ever to

have visited Ceylon, and as the Attakathd extant here only com-

prise a continuous record of Indian events up to the period when the

third convocation was held in A. B. 235 or B.C. 307, while he

himself flourished in A. B. 500 or B. C. 43, the only record of

Na’ea’ Sena in this island, (as far as I am aware,) excepting some

unconnected allusions to him in Buddhaghdsés Attakatha, is the

Milindapanno (commonly called Milinapprashno), a work which derives

its title from his dialectic controversy with Miuinpv the raja of Sdgald.

In that work, from which I shall presently make some extracts, it is

specifically stated that he appeared (in fulfilment, of course, of an

assumed prediction of Sa’kya Srinwa) five hundred years after the

death of Buppua ; and that work, moreover, contains the names of

the siz Arhatwas, (Pali Arahanta,) who, most fortunately for the illus-

tration and substantiation of my case, are referred to in the four

apparently insignificant words with which this Sanscri¢ quotation

concludes. In Professor Wiuson’s translation of these four words,

the negative ‘“‘ na” has been overlooked, and he has rendered them

into ‘‘ he was the asylum of the six Arhatwas,’” instead of translating

them ‘‘he did not recognize,” i. e. he denounced, “the six Ar-

hatwas.”

With these explanatory remarks, I venture to offer the following

translation of this valuable Sanscrité quotation.

“They (Husuxa, Jusrxa, Canisuxa) of Turushea descent, were

princes asylums of virtue, who founded colleges and chetiyas in Suscha and

other countries. During the entire period of their rule, the whole of

Cashmir was under the spiritual controul of ascetic sages, eminent for

their rigid piety. Thereafter, when (half a thousand) five hundred years

had elapsed in this (land), as well as the whole world, from the period

that the sanctified Sa’kya Sinua attained Parinirvritit, the pre-eminently

endowed Bédhisatwa, Na’ca’rsuna, became the (spiritual) lord of this and

many other lands, and did not recognize (i. e. denounced) the six Arhatwas

(who were his contemporaries).”

a Naga kingdom, balf a thousand (five hundred) yéjanas in extent, bounded by

the ocean.’”? Ch. V. ‘‘ Purisindn dasaddhéhi satéhi pariwarito :’’ ‘‘ attended by

retinue of five hundred men.’? I am not aware whether this remark be applica-

ble to the Sanscrit language also; nor does it appear to me to be material, as

Kaxua’na probably quotes from a Pali Buddhistical work.

1836.) Buddhist Chronology. | 531

The general history of Na’ca Su'na, to which the Milindapanno refers,

although it could throw no light on the history of Buddhism in Cey-

lon, in as much as Buddhism was established in this island 264 years

before the period of his ministry, and as he himself never appears to

have visited it, is nevertheless a work, the value of which, as regards

the Buddhistical history of India, cannot well be overruled, and for

the recovery of which, if still extant in the regions mentioned by

Colonel Top and Lieutenant Wxss*, no pains should be spared. It

is reasonable to infer, from the tenor of the Milindapanno, that his

triumph over Mixinvu raja was either his principal achievement, or

that which most contributed to his renown; but the mention made of

him in the Raja Tarangini presents conclusive evidence of the sphere

of his influence and ministry not having been confined to that tri-

umph; and the circumstance of the Milindapanno commencing with a

quotation from a more general work, affords equally conclusive proof

that such a history of his life had once been extant. The Milinda-

panno being incomplete, neither the date at which, nor the individual

by whom, it was compiled from pre-existing works, is specified in it.

The following is a literal translation of its commencement.

«* Adoration to him, who is the sanctified, the deified, the omniscient,

supreme Buppua !

“In the capital city, Ségalé, Mininpu approached Na’ca Sr’na, as a

river approaches the ocean. That monarch having selected him who was

endowed with the power of enlightening the darkness of ignorance, as if

he were a meteor-bearer, proposed certain profound questions (to him)

involving the great principles of right and wrong.”

“There (in reference to that quotation) do ye (my hearers) devoting

your undivided attention to, and preparing your minds to be favorably

impressed with the subject, listen to these profound and doubt-dispelling

dissertations, which, as well from the questions suggested as from the

solutions rendered, their deep import, and connected consistency, their

influence over the passions and charm to the ear, (are) unprecedented, and

make the hair stand on end (with amazement) ; portraying them, from

the similitudes and parables used by Na’ea Sena, as if immersed in the

(waters of) the ‘ Abhidhamma’ and ‘ Wineyo,’ secured (at the same time)

in the meshes of the net of the ‘ Suétans.’

“‘ The subject may be thus set forth in due order.”

After describing the magnificence of Sdgald, and giving an account

of both Na’ea Sena and Miuinbu in a previous existence, the former

as a Samanero, and the latter as an Upasampada, the narrative thus

proceeds.

* Alluding to the existence of an extensive Bauddha library in Jesalmir. The

raja of this country is, we hear, passionately addicted to turning, and might

barter all his books for a good lathe |—-Eb.

3z 2

532 Buddhist Chronology. (Szpr.

“« Thereafter, in whatever manner the appearance of the 37d* Maggal-

liputtatisso was foreseen by our Bhagawé, in the same manner (the appear-

ance of) these two personages also was foreseen by him, for he had thus

predicted; ‘ Five hundred years after my Parinibbiénan they will be born.

Whatever discourse there may be propounded by me, which, from its

conciseness may appear entangled and confused, these persons will, from

the mode in which they will conduct their interrogation and illustration,

thoroughly unravel it. Of these persons, the Samanéro will be born in the

character of Mininpvu raja in Sdégalinagara in Jambudipa, accomplished

in learning, skilful in conduct, gifted with judgment, powerful abroad ;

who, both in the conception and execution of his designs, whether

regarding the past, the future or the present, will exert a sound and

deliberate judgment. To him many endowments will be attainable,

viz: the ‘Sate,’ ‘ Sammati,’ ‘ Sankhya,’ ‘ Yéga,’ ‘ Niti,’ *‘ Widésika,’ ‘ Gana

ké,’ ‘Gandamba,’ ‘ Tikechchha,’ ‘ Chatubéda,’ ‘ Purana,’ ‘ Itihasa,’

‘Joti,’ ‘Maya, ‘Hétu,’ ‘ Mantané,’ ‘ Uddha,’ ‘Chhanda,’ ‘ Samuddha.’

He will be capable of confuting sages versed in the nineteen védas,

invincible from his own gifts, and held in universal estimation, even

of those of antagonist creeds. In the whole of Jambudipa, there will be

no one comparable to Muninpu raja, in the aforesaid particulars of

power, energy, enterprise, and wisdom. He will be endowed with riches

and worldly prosperity ; and guarded by military power in a state of the

utmost efficiency.’ ;

“On a certain occasion, Miuinpu raja, desirous of inspecting his mili-

tary array, composed of every branch of the four constituent hosts of an

army, proceeding out of the capital, and having caused them to be counted ;

this monarch, a profound disputant, and versed in the phraseology and

science of those learned in the ‘ Sakayata,’ looking at (the position of)

the sun, thus addressed his attendant officers of state: ‘ There is a long

day before us yet: how shall we pass it? Were I to return instantly to

the town, is. there any sage, whether sacerdotal or brahman, the head of

a great sect, having a fraternity of his own, and being a preceptor himself,

who maintains that he is avahat and an omniscient Buddha, who would be

willing to enter into a disputation with me, for the purpose of solving

doubts.’

“ On having thus expressed himself, his five hundred Yonaké (chiefs)

replied to Miuinpu raja in these words: Maharaja! there are six

(such) viz: +Purdnarkassapo, Mokkhaligésélo, Nigunto-ndthaputto, San-

jégo bélatti putto, Ajitakésakambali, and Pdékudokachchéyano, who are heads

of great sects, having fraternities of their own, and are preceptors them-

selves, of great celebrity, having numerous congregations, sectarians in

* Vide Chapter V. Mahdwanso for this prediction.

+ These are also the designations of certain contemporary disciples of Gou-

tama.

1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 533

principle, the elect of a great portion of the human race. Maharaja!

seek them ; enter into a controversy (with them) and solve doubts.”

The narrative proceeds to describe the disputation of Mutou,

first, with Purdna-kassupo, and then, with Makkhaligésalo, and re-

presents that as the monarch confuted them and similarly overcame

every other disputant, all the arahat priests absented themselves for

twelve years from Sdgald, and retired to the vicinity of the Rakkhitatalo

mountain in the Himawanta regions. At the intercession of Assa- |

GatTa théro, in behalf of the Buddhistical priesthood generally,

Saxxua, the supreme of déwas, is represented to have invoked Na’ca

Sr’ na, who was in the Kétumati heavens, and called Mani Sn’na, to be

born in the human world, for the purpose of confuting Mrinpv ; to

which Na’ca Sn’Nna ultimately consented. Accordingly ‘ he is con-

ceived in the womb of the wife of the brahman named So’nutsaRa,

an inhabitant of the village Kajangalla on the borders of the Hima-

wanta mountains,” and becomes highly accomplished and perfect

master of the three védas. Doubts are then engendered in his mind

as to the correctness of the doctrines contained in those védas. While

in this frame of mind, Ronana théro, as predestined, enters into a

controversy with him, converts him, and removes him to Rakkhitatala.

There he is admitted into the ‘‘ Samanéra’’ order of the Buddhistical

priesthood, and acquires the Abhidhammapitaka; and is ordained

an ‘‘ Upasampada’ priest at the age of 20 years. He is next

placed under the tuition of Assacurra théro, apparently in the same

village, for three months, where he first attains the sanctification of

‘* Sotdpatti.” At the termination of this period, he is sent to place

himself under the charge of Daammaraxkutra théro of the Asékdrdmo

temple* in Pataliputra, which is stated to be distant ‘‘ one hundred

yojanas” from Kajangalla, the birth-place of Naca Sx’na. On the

road he meets with a Setthi, who was travelling also to Pataliputto,

with a train of five hundred carts. This Setthi maintains him on the

road, and hears his discourses propounded from the Abidhamma. At

Asckérdma vihara, in the course of three months, he acquires the

Pitakattaya by heart, and in three more, masters their import, and

attains ‘‘ Arahat.” He is then summoned to appear before the

Arahat priests, who had retired to Rakkhitatala mountain in Hima-

wanta; and he repairs thither. He is there enjoined by these Arahat

priests to proceed to Sdgalé and cope with Mu.inpvu raja, whose

triumph over all other théros had driven them to the Hima-

* Vide Ch. V. of the Mahdwanso, for the construction of this temple, by

DHAMMA’SO’KA,

534 Buddhist Chronology. (Serr.

wanta. He consents to undertake the enterprize, confident of over-

coming him, and all other opponents; and advises the rest of the

Arahanta to precede him thither, without fear. They do so, and

Sdgald is represented to “ glitter with yellow robes again.”” Mininpu

then enters into a disputation with Ayupdta théro of Sankhéya pari-

véna, on the question as to whether the priesthood possess any spi-

ritual advantage over lay ascetics, resulting from their ordination. It

does not clearly appear whether AvupAua is one of the priests who

came from Himawanta or not, but he is also confuted by the raja.

The royal suite, composed of the aforesaid five hundred Yondka

nobles, do not participate, however, in the monarch’s exultation, and

attribute the discomfiture of the théro to his individual incapacity.

At this particular juncture, -Naga Sz'na makes his appearance in

Sagald, and establishes himself at the Sank¢yapariwéno with a sacer-

dotal retinue, which is exaggerated into 80,000. The Milindapanno

then proceeds to describe the preparation for, and the actual interview

between Mixttnnu and N&aa Sr’na, quoting occasionally from the

work before referred to. Mui.r1npvu, on this occasion, loses his former

confidence in himself, both from the fame of NAca Sn’na’s reputation,

which had already reached him, and the composure with which he

received him. It is finally agreed upon, that the disputation shall be

carried on in the king’s palace, in the presence of ten selected théros.

The disputations are then entered into accordingly. The Milinda-

panno extant in Ceylon contains 262 dissertations, as well as the

designations of the dissertations that are missing, being 42. In the

Singhalese version of the Milindapanno, from information stated to be

derived from a Tikd brought from Siam, which I have not met with,

it is mentioned that these dialectics terminated in Mininpu becoming

a convert to Buddhism, then a priest, and ultimately an Arahat.

These extracts and abstracts, whether viewed in connection with

the events recorded in the Cashmirian history, which also bear testi-

mony to the partial subsidence of the influence of Buddhism in Nor-

thern India, and of the congregation of the heads of that faith in the

neighbourhood of the Himalayan mountains about the third century

B. C., and the subsequent revival of that influence in the days of

N&cArsguna and the Turushka princes, who are likewise represented

to have resorted to Cashmir from the same quarter ; or whether we

regard them in connection with the incidents contained in the

history of Buddhaghéso in the fifth century of our era, as illustrated

in my pamphlet, together with the data contained in Tibetan annals

as noticed by Mr. Csoma, are replete with historical importance

ond engrossing interest. I shall not, however, venture to speculate

1836.] Buddhist Chronology. 5385

on data, which are as yet but imperfectly analyzed, and on the

authenticity of which oriental scholars have still to form a judg-

ment.

Reverting, therefore, to the consideration of the Cashmirian Chro-

nological Table, I have to observe, that according to the Milindapanna,

Nea Sr’na flourished about 500 years after the death of Sfxya Srnua,

or B.C. 43. If his visit or mission to Cashmir took place towards

the close of the reign of the three Turushka princes, the rule of their

immediate successor, ABHIMANYA, who restored Brahminism in

Cashmir, must also have commenced about the same date. By your

Genealogical Tables, that monarch reigned 35 years, which term

deducted from B. C. 43 leaves B. C. 8; being nearly the same date

as those to which I arrived, by the two foregoing computations, in

which | have attempted to reconezie my adjustment “to the most

approved data as yet established in both the Brahminical and Bud-

dhistical chronologies.”

The next and last source of evidence of which I have to avail

myself, is derived chiefly from your valuable researches in numisma-

talogy. At the end of the second volume of Lieutenant Burnss’ tra-

vels into Bokhdra, some observations are furnished by Professor Wrt-

son and yourself, on one of the Bactrian coins found by that enterpriz-

ing traveller, and portrayed in the engravings attached to his work*.

The points you seek to establish in regard to this coin are, that it

belongs to Kanisuxa, one of the three Turushka princes above named ;

and that he reigned “near the end of the second century B. C.” and

these points are apparently corroborated by the foregoing date assign-

ed for the age in which N&ea Sp/na lived, viz. about B. GC. 43. By

your Genealogical Tables these princes are represented to have reign-

ed, synchronously about 60 years: that computation, also, will bring

the commencement of their rule to B. C. 43 + 60 = 103 B. C. or * near

-the end of the second century B. C.”

* See the second volume of the Journal, page 314. Most of our readers are

aware that the date assigned in our notice of Lieut. Burnes’ coin, was after-

wards in a measure abandoned, on the ground of its being found in association

with Sassanian coins of a much later period.—The reading of the letter P in

KANHPKOZ was also confirmed by a multitude of specimens, No argument,

therefore, can safely be built on the evidence of this coin as to the period

of Na’cGa’RsuNA’S mission, but there remains ample authority without it in the

written history of the Buddhist church.—The typographical error in Mr. Wit-

son’s Chronology of Cashmir I could not fail to perceive when drawing up my

own tables; but for the reason above given, I did not think it worth while to

notice it.—Eb.

536 Buddhist Chronclogy. [Szpr.

I cannot, in this place, forbear noticing that, misled by a slight

derangement of type in the impression of the Professor’s Chronologi-

cal Table, you have also in this note been betrayed into making an

undeservedly disparaging remark in respect to Buddhistical as com-

pared with Brahminical chronology. Under the impression that the

date assigned in the Raja Tarangini to the termination of ABHIMAN-

ya’s reign was B. C. 118, you consider the accuracy of that chrono-

logy to be erroneously impugned by being thrown back to B. C. 388,

by Professor Wison, in deference to Buddhistical authority. The

date assigned for that reign, however, is not B. C. 118, but B.C.

1182, in the Raja Tarangini ; and by that adjustment, made on Bud-

dhistical authority, though the correction, from the circumstances ex-

plained, is insufficient, still an zmportant and valuable correction is

effected to the extent of 794 years !

I have thus, from four sources of information, totally unconnected,

arrived at one and the same conclusion, corroborative of the authority

of the Milindapanno, on which I have added the single letter “d” to

the numeral ‘ Sdrdhan-satan.”’ The chronology of the Rdja Tarangini

is brought, by the first, to coincide with the adjusted Hindu chrono-

logy in the Purdnas—by the second with the A‘takatha of the Pitia-

kataya and the Mahawanso—by the third with the age of NAGArguna,

or Naca Se’/NA, as given in the Milindapanno, and the revised Sanscrit

quotation from the Raja Tarangini: and by the fourth, with the age ©

of the coin of Kanisuxa; with Tibetan authorities adduced by Mr.

Csoma ; and with the epoch of the overthrow of the Bactrian dynasty, 3

as given by Scunecen and other authorities.

In computations of this nature, exact precision is not to be attain-

ed, or expected. In specifying the age of NAGArguna, in such round

numbers as 500 years after the death of SAxya, it is manifestly an

approximating rather than a specific date. If from the general tenor

of the Raja Tarangint, and the Tibetan authorities referred to by M.

Csoma, it be clearly shown that the Turushka princes were Buddhists,

and that NAGArsuna appeared in Cashmir during their dynasty, the

only alteration rendered necessary in the foregoing computations,

would be that his visit to Cashmir should be considered to have taken

place about 460 instead of 500 years after the death of SAxya. Mr.

Csoma’s unpublished life of Sa’kya, to which you refer as containing

data connected with Buddhistical history, derived from both Sanscrit

and Tibetan works of the age of Kanisuxa, furnishes another impor-

tant and encouraging evidence of authentic annals of Buddhistical

history having extended in Continental Asia beyond the age of

ASsO’/KA.

1836.] Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. 537

II1.—Third Memoir on the ancient Coins discovered at the site called

Beghrdém in the Kohistén of Kabul. By Mr. Cuartes Masson.

Dated Kabul, May, 1836.

Two notices on the site of Beghriim, and of the nature of the coins

found at it, have already been made public in the pages of the Jour-

nal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. The collection of its antique

treasures having been continued for three successive seasons, the

results may be worthy of being presented in one view, both for

exhibiting the exact state of discovery up to this time, and for

providing data on which to found inferences or to hazard conjectures

on the curious and intricate subject of Bactrian history and antiquities.

It is not the object of this memoir to convey a full account of the

present state of knowledge on these and other points, upon which, in

truth, light is only beginning to dawn ; but simply to narrate the fruits

of our own labors, happy if they prove useful to those, who, with

superior advantages, and when sufficient materials are collected, will,

no doubt, favor the world with some important work. We have,

therefore, only to descant upon the coins found at Beghrdm, and such,

allied or connected with them, which may have been procured by

ourselves in Afghdnistdn, and refrain in the same spirit from the

delineation of any coins not actually found by us; and if such are

alluded to, it is from necessity, and to direct attention to them.

The site of Beghram, whatever its original name may have been,

and whoever may have been its founder, yields evidence from

the coins found at it, of its existence as.a city, which must,

at least, have flourished from the epoch of Euruypemus, the king

of Bactria, to that of the Mahommedan Caliphs—or for a pe-

riod of 900 years. We have speculated on the probability of its

pointing out the situation of Alexandria ad Caucasum, or ad cal-

cem Caucasi, and see no reason to change the opinion, viz. that

the honor of being considered such, must be assigned to it, or to

Nilab of Ghorbund. The detection of a coin of one of the Antiochi,

may prove that it flourished prior to the age of EKuruyprEmus, as it

undoubtedly will have done,—and certain Hindu Brahminical coins*

described as Class Brahminical, may perhaps verify that it existed

subsequently to the Mahommedan Caliphs, or to the duration of their

sway in Afghdnistdén :—at all events, it would appear to have been

destroyed, in whatever manner, before the era, when coins with

Persian legends became current in these regions; as our aggregate

eollection of nearly 7,000 coins from its site, has not been contami-

* Of the Rajput, or bull and horseman groupe.—Eb,.

538 Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. [Serr.

nated with a single Persian coin—unless fig. 9. of the just noted

Hindu series have a Persian legend, which may seem to intimate

that the city’s extinction was about the period of the introduction of

the language, which may have been contemporaneous with the rise

of the Mahommedan sovereignty of Ghazni. The coins of its princes

have Persian legends, to prove which, we have inserted a silver coin

of the celebrated Sultan Maumup: none of his coins or of his

father, Sapextecin Kua'n, have been found at Beghram, where those

of the Caliphs so numerously occur.

Although Beghram, inferring from the presence of topes or sepul-

chral monuments on its site and in its vicinity, may be supposed

at some period to have been a capital, which its name testifies, it will

generally have been only a provincial capital—and this is worthy of

note, because there may be reason to suspect that many of the former

rulers in these countries, particularly the Greek-Bactrian princes, had

distinct provincial coinages.—Certain coins of APoLLopotus, ANTILA-

K1pEs, Exmaros and Evucratiprs seem to countenance the suspicion.

It is presumed that coins constantly found and in number on any

known spot, afford proofs of their having once been current there,

and that the princes whom they commemorate, whether as paramount

or tributary sovereigns, held also authority at that spot. The num-

bers in which coins may be found, may perhaps furnish a criterion

upon which we may calculate, first. generally, the duration of the

dynasties denoted by the various types of coins, and next particularly

that of the reign of each individual prince. A collection of one year

would not furnish this criterion, a collection of many years might,—a

statement is therefore annexed, of the numbers in which the several

descriptions of coins found at Beghram haye, during three years,

been obtained ;—and if it be seen, that they are found annually in

due numerical proportion, it may be of service in our speculations,

assisted by the coins themselves. Indeed of the recorded kings of

Bactria, the coins are found in just the numbers we might expect,

and confirm what we know as to the length of their reigns; and in

some other instances of unrecorded princes, their coins and the fre-

quency or rarity of their occurrence corroborate the conjectures as to

the extent of their reigns, which other accidental discoveries seem

to authorize.

The coins of Beghrdm fortunately admit of ready classification, and

may be reduced to five grand classes: 1st, Greek-Bactrian ; 2nd, Indo-

Scythic or Mithraic; 8rd, Ancient Persian, whether Parthian or Sassa-

nian ; 4th, Hindu or Brahminical; 5th, Kufic or Mahommedan—the

last class may chronologically be entitled to stand before its prede-

cessor the Brahminical one.

1836.] Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. 539

These classes at once point out the general nature of the succession

of sovereignty in this country, from the age of EurnypEmus to the

Mahommedan era. To define particular alternations and revolutions

in authority, which will inevitably have happened, more knowledge

is requisite than we possess, or are likely to acquire. Yet some of

these may be conjectured from the faint lights discovered coins im-

part, and many more may become obvious, as research advances, and

as we progress in acquaintance with the subject.

From the historical records of the west we learn so much as, that an

independent monarchy under Greek princes was established at Bactra,

or the modern Balkh, about 250 years before Christ ; and from them we

are led to infer that it ceased to exist about 130 years before Christ,

having thus flourished about 120 years. From the same records we

also learn the names of seven ofits princes, Turoporus I. the founder,

his son and successor THEopotus I]. the usurper Evruypemus of

Megnesia, his son Demetrius, Apottopotus, and Mernanper, famed

for exploits in India, and mentioned conjointly with EvucrartipEs,

surnamed the Great.

The actual coins, incontestible evidences, recently discovered of a mul-

titude of Greek princes, respecting whom history is silent, not only seem

to intimate that the Bactvian empire may have had longer duration than

supposed, but farther to establish the fact, that a variety of independent

Greek principalities were erected about that time in Central Asia,

some of which, judging from the coins of the princes, rivalled the

Bactrian in power and splendor. These principalities, or some of

them, we infer to have endured up to the first century of the Christian

era,—probably to the middle or close of the second century, about which

period Greek authority would appear to have been displaced by the

race of princes hitherto designated Indo-Scythic, of whom Kapputsxs

and Kanerkos are pre-eminent and have the precedence. Their suc-

cessors appear to have ruled for a very long period, according to cir-

cumstances, independent or tributary to paramount governments in

Persia or India,—perhaps very close to the Mahommedan era. We

say very close, because before the last mentioned era, a Sassanian

dynasty or dynasties must be introduced, and possibly may have ruled

at that epoch. This speculation may be confirmed or otherwise, by

consultation of the Arabian historians, some of whose works will

doubtless inform us from whom the armies of the Caliphs wrested

these countries. Beghrdm has not yielded one coin of the Arsacides,

or.one coin that we dare positively to affirm to be Parthian. Coins

with the Sassanian symbols on the reverse, or the distinguishing fire

altar, are very numerous ; but it may be questioned whether they are

4a2

546 Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. {Supr.

coins of the Sassanides of Persia, and whether they may not rather refer

to distinct princes, that we believe Persian authentic history attests to

have flourished in these countries, as at Zabulistan, &c.

The characters of the inscriptions on the Beghrdm coins, some of

which command attention from their peculiarity, may be also useful

in determining the periods at which particular dialects ceased and

became used in Afghdnistdn. The earlier Greek-Bactrian sovereigns,

as Evrnypemus, being guided by coins hitherto found, placed on their

monies only Greek inscriptions ; some of their successors, as Eucra-

T1DEs, have coins bearing in the same manner only Greek legends, and

others exhibiting both Greek and native legends; while others, and

the majority of them, as ApoLLopotus, MENANDER, &c. have on their

coins inyariably both Greek and native legends ; no one coin of these

sovereigns having been met with bearing simply a Greek inscription.

The opinion might be advanced, that native legends were first adopted

by those princes who extended their empire by the acquisition of

distant provinces, and their absence on the coins of KutHypEMUS

will not controvert it, as it is nearly certain that he could have

carried his arms across the Causasus or Hindu Koosh, only towards

the close of his reign. Another question will then arise, whether the

characters of these native legends refer to a language common in

Bactria or the countries north of Caucasus, or prevailing only in

the Indian provinces south of it :—the latter may be suggested, by those

who suppose Menanper to have ruled in India before he conquered

Bactria ; for if he did, so did ApoLLoporus ; and on the coins of these

princes, these characters will then be first noted. It is not, however,

positive that Menanpzr preceded Eucratines ; for although generally

believed, the scant historical data left us are as much against the

belief as for it. The language itself, that of this part of Asia, two

centuries before Christ, will not have become obsolete until the period

or nearly so of the Mahommedan era ; for although the coins of Kap-

PHISES, whose epoch we would fain believe was about 200 A. D. are

the latest apparently which exhibit them,—excavations near Jelaldbdd,

in the burial grounds of the ancient Nagara, have elicited inscriptions

in the same character, which may safely be assumed to have been’

deposited at some period within the century preceding the Mahom-

medan era. Indeed, if the famous Manikyala tope be an erection

subsequent to this era, as we suspect to be proved by some of the

coins extracted from it, the language may have continued in use to a

much more recent period ; and all these circumstances may be adduced

to support the opinion, that it is of Indian rather than of Bactrian

origin. Mr. Prinser has admirably commenced the investigation of

1836.] Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. 541

this novel language, and to assist in the attainment of an object, from

which so much advantage is likely to be obtained, we have, following

that gentleman’s plan, given the names, titles and epithets of the

Bactrian kings, &c. as we find them on coins before us. This might

have been more satifactorily done, had we, for the purpose, taken full

advantage of all the coins which have passed through our hands: but

as they have been transferred only to receive superior attention, the

matter occasions no regret, and is noticed to excuse individual neg-

lect in this instance and in another, viz., the passing slightly the

characters on our Sassanian coins, which, while they exhibit some

varieties, appear singular and different from the ordinary forms of

Pehlevi.

The coins of AcaTHoc.es and Panra.Eon have native legends in an-

other peculiar character, essentially distinct from that found on the

coins of the other Bactrian princes, and both of them on every account

must stand high in the royal lists of these countries. The character,

Mr. Prinszp suggests, is that of the inscriptions found on the columns

of Delhi and of other places in India,—a character also that of the

coins of the early Canowe princes, and singular it is that a connection

may be traced between these coins and those of AGarHocies and

PANTALEON.

About the period, or a little anterior thereto, of the Mahommedan

invasion, we find the first traces of Nagari, but on coins which we

are not positive were current at Beghram. The Caliphs introduced

Kufic, shewn by their coins, and on the inscriptions of the columns at

Ghazni, the seat of their government. To them succeeded in autho-

rity the Brahminical sovereigns, as we suppose, whose coins have

again Nagari legends, and these were expelled by the: Mahommedan

princes of Ghazni, when modern Persian became the general and

written language of the country, as it remains to this day.

It may be proper to note, how tenaciously the Greek language was

preserved on the coins of this country, up to a period within a century

or two of the Mahommedan era, and employed by the whole series of

Indo-Scythic kings excepting Kappuisss, to the exclusion of the native

dialect. While there is sufficient testimony that the Greek language

was studied and well known by the fashionable and higher orders in

India during the first and second histories of the Christian era, the

latter coins of the Indo-Scythic princes seem to testify, by the very

corrupted characters they bear, that at the period of their coinage

the knowledge of it was very trifling, or limited to the power of

determining the value of its letters,—Greek artists would then have

been out of the question ; and without some such knowledge it is diffi-

542 Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. (Szpr.

cult to conceive how Indian artists could have arranged in Greek

characters such words as AGPO, MIOPO, APO, OKPO, &c. The respect

so obviously shewn to the Greek language may suggest the opinion,

that coinage was considered eminently a Grecian art, and corrobo-

rates the notion that the Macedonians introduced it into these parts

of Asia.

The several devices of the Bactrian coins, whether Greek or Indo-

Scythic, are interesting from their variety, and instructive from the

information they convey as to many points, particularly the religion

of the times. Of the Greek, some display the deities of the classical

Grecian mythology, as Jupiter, Minerva, Apollo, Hercules, &c. repre-

sented in the attitudes, costumes, and with the attributes commonly

assigned to them in the West ;—some have animals, as elephants, hors-

es, bulls, camels, &c., from which may be implied localities of rule ;

others have warlike devices, as horsemen at charge, seeming to indi-

cate the personal character of the prince, and others appear to

commemorate some remarkable incident in his career, as victory pre-

_senting a chaplet, or a figure trampling upon a vanquished foe. The

Indo-Scythic coins have universally devices, whose accompanying in-

scriptions, as fully and satisfactorily shewn by Mr. Prinszp, prove to

be personifications of the sun and moon. It may excite surprise that

the peculiar religion to which such personifications refer, should have

been so exemplified on the coins of princes, whom we have consider-

ed of the Buddhist faith. It was, nevertheless, the religion of old

standing in these countries, the supremacy over which, if acquired by

Buddhist or Indo-Scythic princes, will have been acquired, as supre-

macy ever is, by conquest. Of this ancient religion, besides the evi-

dences furnished by coins, we have that afforded by the temples and

places of sepulture. That the Buddhist faith also prevailed, while agree-

able to historical record, is not contrary to hypothesis; and the con-

querors of that persuasion may, from policy, have placed on their coins

the emblems of the national religion of the vanquished. As Buddhism

will also have gained ground by a correspondent decline of strength in

the religion which preceded it, it is natural that superstitions and ob-

servances of both should be blended.

The regions spreading from the source of the Oxus have claims to

be considered the birth-place of that peculiar form of the Mithriac

religion, which was at one time adopted in all the countries between

the Indus and the Bosphorus—and of which vestiges are still seen in

the temples and sepultures ofits votaries. Persia presents the superb

proofs of it in the wonderful ruins of Persepolis, and Afgyhdnistan dis-

plays them at Bamidn. Numerous are the places of minor considera-

1836.] Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. 543

tion in Afghdinistdn, Turkistdn, and Badakshan, which were alike sacred,

but in a less degree, which yet plainly indicate the strongholds of the

faith they commemorate. The distinguishing feature of these sacred

places is the samach, or cave, always found with them, and which

decides the identity in character of the honey-combed hills of Bamian

in Afghdnistan, and those of Tilmissus in Asia Minor. It is affirmed

in the Ayin Akberi, that there are 12,000 of these samaches in the

hills of Afghdnistén :—the number is not overrated. There is no rea-

son to suppose that they were ever the residences of a multifarious

community, engaged in the ordinary occupations of life ;—it is obvi-

ous, that they were the abodes of priests and ascetics connected with

the temples of religion and sepulchral monuments. So plain is this

fact in Afghdnistdn, that, if a solitary samach or cave be discovered,

it is merely necessary to employ the privilege of sight to detect the

mound or tumulus relating to it; and vice versa, if a tumulus be first

descried, the sight directed to the nearest eminence will not fail to

discover the cave or caves belonging to it. It is always the case,

that these monuments and caves are found at the skirts of hills, shew-

ing that they were remote from the inhabited villages, then as now,

and in conformity to the spirit of asceticism, enjoined by the religion

of the day. It need not, therefore, be deemed that the caves of

Afghanistan were the dwellings of a rude Trogloditic nation ;—on the

contrary, they are works of art, the results of vast labour and expen-

diture, and must have been formed under favorable circumstances of

national prosperity. Let no one imagine he beholds in them the

retreats of the Mardi. The most prominent of the sepulchral monu-

ments of Afyhdnistdn are unquestionably its topes or royal cenotaphs

with their tumuli: the latter so perfectly agree in form with the

Buddhist dehgopa that it would be difficult not to allow them to be the

same thing. The most ancient of the cenotaphs hitherto examined in

Afghdnistdn does not appear to attain the antiquity of the Christian

era,—most of them certainly fall much short of it : it is true that every

tope has its caves, but there are caves, as in the conspicuous instance

of Bamian, which have not topes: Bamian*, like every other spot

* There is an error in our account of the site of Alexandria ad calcem Cau-

casi, contained in our memoir of 1834 relative to the river of Bamidn, which

it is necessary should be noted. We have made that river pass by Ghorband,

which we supposed it did, contrary to the reports of the natives—they are cor-

rect, and the river flowing northerly falls into the stream of Kundiz. Prouemy,

we believe, has an upper and a lower Nilabi, when noting the country about

Alexandria ; and they can scarcely be other rivers than those of Ghorband, and

Puryshir.—May, 1836,

544 Third Memoir of the Ancient Coins. {Szpr.

in Afghdnistan, has its mounds or ancient burial places. The cave

temples may therefore be considered, in some instances, more ancient

than the topes, whose age is within the reach of verification; and

while it may point to the period of the introduction of Buddhist so-

vereignty in Afghdnistdn, that of the cave temples must be carried to

the period when the religion, in whose service they were constructed,

had its rise or was pre-eminent. Of this religion the Guebres are,

at this day, evidences, as are possibly the inhabitants of Cafferist dn.

Asceticism, of which every case presents a memento; while a dis-

tinguishing feature of primitive Buddhism would be also a condition

of the more ancient Mithriac faith ; for

‘¢ La religion a toujours produit des solitaires.”’

Reverting from this digression to the coins to which the term Indo-

Scythic was once considered so aptly applied, and whose sovereigns

we had considered, in deference to historical evidence, to have been of

the Buddhist religion, if it should be ultimately found that they were

of another faith, yet the Buddhist religion will have been widely dis-

seminated in Afghanistan, the images of Buddha and other idols to be

found in abundance being accepted as proof. The apparent traces

of the faiths of Mithra and Buddha observable in the antiquities of the

country, are only natural consequences ;—in like manner, at Moscow

before its destruction, might be seen the mosques of Mahommedans

surmounted by the cross, as at the present day at Constantinople may

be witnessed the temples of Christianity surmounted by the Crescent.

The terms applied to designate the sun and moon on these Indo-Scythic

or Mithraic coins, may suggest some reflections, some of them appear-

ing to have been derived from the West, as HAIOC, NANAIA, APO, &c.

and others from the east, as MAO, OKPO; &c.

We had hoped to have obtained a sufficient quantity of coins from

some known spot north of the Caucasus, which could not fail of throw-

ing additional light on Bactrian numismatology ; but not having been

able personally to attend to the point, dependence upon others has hi-

therto frustrated our object. Even at Beghrdm we have not met with

all the coins that probability would lead us to expect ; at least we dare

not appropriate any of them to the Pandava dynasty, which go-

verned in the Paropamisus at the period of the invasion of ANTIOCHUS

the Great. It is but reasonable to suppose that after the Macedonian

invasion, all the native princes had distinct coinages, and, of course,

this dynasty among the rest. Greek historians have preserved the

name of SopHAGASENUS, who established himself in the Paropamisus ;

and Sanscrit records, as Colonel Top informs us, gives the name of

his son Gag, both valuable ; Gaj accounting for the etymology of Gaj-

1836.) Third Memoir of Ancient Coins. 545

ni, or as now called Ghazni; and SopHacasEnvus, shewing the name

both of the prince and of his nation. The former, Colonel Top tells

us, was Sudhav or Subhag ; andas for the latter, we learn from Puinr

that the Asrn1 peopled three cities, their capital being Bucephalia ; ‘the

ruins of this city may still be seen on the Jélum river, in the Panjab,

and the Yadu or Yidu hills, from which Susuav issued on his career

of conquest, still preserve their ancient name in Jid or Yid. This

branch of the Pandava family being cotemporaneous with Evuruyps-

mus of Bactria, who is supposed to have deprived it of sovereignty in

the person of Raja Gas; it is evident, that the sway of the two first

Bactrian kings, Turopotus I. and Tuxoporus II. did not extend south

of the Caucasus ;—it also is manifest that Euruypremus could have es-

tablished his sway over the Paropamisus only towards the close of his

reign ; for at the time of the expedition of ANTIOcHUS, SOPHAGASENUS,

as the Greeks have it, the father of Gas, was living. Puiny in men-

tioning the AsEn1, is speaking of the nations which inhabited the mo-

dern Panjab, but it is probable that he gives the information he deriv-

ed from authors who flourished two or three centuries before him;

and this remark may correctly apply to all he advances upon India.

His observations on Bactriana, Marginia, &c. he avows to have col-

lected from Demonax; his testimony is not the less valuable on this

account, and this slight notice of the Asrnz, leads us to the know-

ledge, that the kingdoms of Porus and Taxiss had been subverted or

had passed into other hands, that the Panpavas had possessed them-

selves of the hilly regions, west of and contiguous to the Acesines ;

and that Bucephalia had risen into importance, and had become the

capital of a dynasty.

We had nearly omitted to refer to the monograms of the Beghrdm

coins. The Greek-Bactrian have chiefly alphabetical ones, which con-

ceal much information, never likely to be ascertained. As the same

monograms occur sometimes on the coins of more than one prince,

they may be presumed monograms of locality, and may be useful:

to establish a connection, when other indications are wanting. The

Indo-Scythic coins have also monograms, but not alphabetical ones,

being apparently emblems of authority and religion,

We refrain in these preliminary observations from many specula-

tions to which the subjects referred to might lead,—because it is possi-

ble that future discoveries may tend greatly to clear up the difficulties

which attend our present investigations into the antiquities of Bactria,

and which may induce very different conclusions from those we now

arrive at by conjecture. In the memoir of last year we indulged too

freely in such speculations, which occasions regret. Nevertheless, in

546 Third Memoir of Ancient Coins. {Serr

the subsequent analysis, we have ventured to point out the ideas that

have suggested themselves upon reviewing each particular species of

coin, not that they may be implicitly adopted, but under the hope,

that while liable to correction, they may conduce to promote inquiry

and elucidation, and this perhaps is all that can be done until our

knowledge is more matured*.

Kabul, December 31, 1835.

Norz.—After writing these observations, a copper coin of one of

the Arsakian princes apparently, has been picked up, in which the ob-

verse legend is in the exact corrupted characters of the Greek legend

of the Kadphises coin, the basileus and the first letters of basileén be-

ing distinct : while the reverse legend presents the characters we call

Bactrian, but not so clear from the coin being worn, as to allow their

transcription with any advantage. Of the characters there is no doubt.

* Mr. Masson confesses in this memoir that he has been too ready on former

occasions to draw inferences which subsequent researches have either failed to

confirm or have overthrown. The more he avoids such speculations, the more

confidence will be placed in his results, because they will be freed from the

suspicion of any bias. We could not, however, have ventured to prune his essays

without danger of cutting off what was really valuable, or of robbing him per-

haps of some happy conjecture which might hereafter prove well founded. On

the same grounds we have formerly allowed names to stand on his list, (like Au-

sios, &c.) which were evidently wrong, and which his further search has led

him to correct. His present elaborate memoir is hardly free from the same ob-

jection, for it is yet too early to generalize : nevertheless we do not like to keep

back a line of his introduction, replete as it is with valuable information. |The

list of coins to which it is a prelude includes the whole of his former collection,

with the additional light thrown upon them by other essays published in the Jour-

nal. It would be an useless and expensive repetition to republish these drawings

at length, especially when we have not the coins themselves to engrave from.

We trust, therefore, the author will excuse our limiting an insertion of figures

and descriptions to those that are new in name orintype. At the same time we

shall take the opportunity of adding a few coins from M. Court’s excellent

drawings, as well as, with permission, some of Krra’mat ALt’s second dispatch

(lately purchased by Dr. Swiney) which have not yet appeared: always keeping

in view the arrangement of our engraved plates for a general compilation on In-

dian Numismatology hereafter. Mr. Masson’s coins have, we presume, long

since been despatched to the Hon. Court of Directors through Col. Porrinerr,

and we have little doubt that accurate engravings of the whole will there be made

by the new ruling machine. We must not omit to make public, that Col. Por-

TINGER most courteously offered to send them all for our inspection en route to

England, but we felt it unfair thus to detain them on their journey, while we had

Mr. Masson’s ample investigation before us.—Eb.

1836.] Third Memoir of Ancient Coins. 547

Enumeration of Coins collected from Beghrém during the years 1833, 1834,

and 1835.

Greek Syrio-Bactrian. 1833. 1834. 1835.

PEMBUIOCINUS, s 5 os vec essen ale once ne on mel stelckenoisuie eiae” ore! ass 0 0 1

Recorded Greek Bactrian.

EME ENAED SS silat gic” bia's.o!p<i'sielcinase/s@ nied 8) 8.0.n1'0W cj me es ne 1 2 3

eT ECT ON 4 Bel Op Ge OCIICIGOIDO CIO RIGS COICO MECC IS OIOn 19 Fe hr 433

Deae PERE ETE NN wane seta bias cma RN PN ore caetatale fivaveie. cialis 39 56 58

EIRENE Sti tte rer a Mache Git bia’elas oie s be oelo e wrele. bw Wielaemee ys 70 92 107

Unrecorded Greek Bactrian.

TREO UES tarcdele wa iceie cic.n Sel rrah bs stejelevachaiele «| sie ujete‘e (a's) oa 2 2 3

MPSA LON Dats) eater a teien is! a) a aele, ele aier a\c valle araiel dieile eet le, evele 10 19 14

LAELIM 36) SOAs SAU BOD DDR OGUD CRETE OOe HumCe DO n Gis cate 6 5 3

PPR NCTE teat.) tye: ata cloh ctariajerciciiel si ciee eioleiessisienl sich se Ateisiele oieie 8 16° 13

ree Oe WIGER! fi. alee ae alec ce selec baneescecticece. JOM 31 27

Ermaios pee DB eraifave aj eda alas ol nkad’ais Gita pianiaie isles at 5 13

Ermaios. .... 5 O NiCsCINO 3 DONO OR ae oxo cir cae BIRO. AeA aks 1 0 0

Rican, (2). Bec Bolen iets, sicuisieickeseve sual ofeustentedaiovons were 6 14 #13

Lion and Elephant coins. afaticie ate oie lalehe sick ertisly atolate oiatorelt | MOO 23) 24

PS PPMPOM COMNS. on we aioe oe ce tes wane we scarce 0 0 ii

Unadpherros... BOh obigdsorgdo awe, 16 20

BAEIAEVC BACTAELN CLITHP META. - Soon DO Gino Gauued Wall 267 257

Analogous coins, fig. 104 to fig. 106. Sodio ase espa.

Ditto aie LF aGni dior, BLO. «6514 3 0.0 aia jholcume aos 8 24 20

Ditto ia. WEN BS be 6 OOo bide Roo Gee DUEL. ae 1 l 0

Ermaios of Nysa, and his family. ................+-.. 136 179° 278

MEMES a teis cate Sapte Je Tiel a sek eele a da'sle ws de 0 0 1

MMPRTONCRES o.oo 04's 0 .apsi s'e''e «0.0! sie a’ SINC WARES CIS GOIRCIO SOOO 5 0 1 0

IRE PII cto alg. Sah 015 aialtain, Yn 6h oyu Yo 9,05,,(¢inn ave lojny'niovarpi janes 1 1 1

Antimachus........ dsnc co GUeanaBGbeodade : 0 1 1

aaa (Spalyrius, J. P.).. Ee? oh eres aurea dtr 1 0 1

Azilisus.. Dctelaletettate’ aie mateve (afo/e\ cheat statara'lelavelw clehaleretere’el oie 0 1 0

RUMI EN a a i alciave wish sliste ecarai wis. ols fell ieletral eit siedetelia efiwie/etaksyeh ole 0 0 0

Indo-Scythic or Mithriac.

EERE elle vaste atic censite nen tise eoiieain's sss he ON ] 62

MEPMGEEOHS, vie weil cle cle wscpncesas veonctncscurcevone 2415). f «4

Kanerki family.. Seas aaid all Seite ces eon eel» 162,

Series 3. Givers figure seated: in makers cee, ad 10} Ze 19

Series 4. Couch-lounger, one foot up....... -... --.. 564 3 2 $175

Series 5. Elephant rider............... seseeeee-e-s 56] BE] 73

Series 6. Reverse, bull and priest-okro..............6 254] 7 492

Series 7. Very rude—reverse, female with cornucopia... 113 | J 161

Parthian ? and Sassanian.

As. fig. 1 to fig. 16. ) Small, head and fire-altar 161 978

As. fig. 44 to fig. 51. and large, of all types. } {Pe }

Kufic and Brahminical... .......ceccece cece 122 171

* It is avery remarkable circumstance that none of the coins of Azos, which

were so numerous in the Ventura collection from the Panjdé, should have been

met with at Beghram.—Ep.

4Bp2

548 New. Varieties of Bactrian Coins. (Ssrr.

Ill-—New Varieties of Bactrian Coins, engraved as Plate XXXV. from

Mr. Masson’s drawings and other sources. By James Prinszp, Sec.

Instead of pursuing Mr. Masson’s recapitulation of all the coins

hitherto found by himself at Beghrdm, we have preferred selecting

those only which were new in name or type for illustration; on the

present occasion confining ourselves to those bearing Greek inscrip-

tions of the earlier class, and leaving the Mithriac, of which our author

produces some highly interesting novelties, for a subsequent plate.

Fig. 1. A silver coin of ArcHeE.tvs, similar in character to the

coins of Menanper and APpoLLopotus*.

Obverse. Bust of king; head bound with fillet or diadem, legend

BASIAEQS. (Sika) LOY NIKHSOPOY APXEAIOY,

Reverse. Jupiter tonans, seated, holding sceptre in left hand.

Compound monogram: the legend in the Bactro-pehlevi character is

PATIL) PISAL Phws Pitty. The name is faint in the drawing,

but is read with confidence by Mr. Masson from the coin itself. It

may be read A’lakiyo (or jo) ; but, if the second and third letters can be

made 4“, the word will represent very tolerably the pronunciation

of the Greek name 4’kaliyo. The equivalent for Nicephorou is an

old acquaintance, Ajalado; but the middle letter is altered in form.

The remaining epithet Phw + which I have supposed to be represented

in the Greek by dikaiou, is in fact found standing for this title “ the

just,” inacoin of the Ventura collection figured as No. 9, of Plate

XXI. Vol. IV. A more perfect and legible specimen will be noticed |

below in Mr. Masson’s series (fig. 6,) in which the second syllabic let-.

ter W, (mi) decides the identity: but the initial is more like €, n ; and the

penultimate is ) instead of ‘n; but as the vowel 9 (a) according to our

former observation, never occurs in the middle of a word, it should

probably be read ‘1 (d) and we should thus have additional evidence

of “‘n being the same letter affected with some vowel mark.

Mr. Masson remarks on this coin: “This silver drachma is an

unique specimen found at Beghrdm in 1835. It is evident that king:

ArcHELIUS must stand high in the list, but there is difficulty in

locating his empire: if it be extended to Beghrdm, why do we not

meet with his copper coins ?”

The same epithet, as Mr. Masson points out, may be observed on

one of the Azos group of coins having the horseman obverse (fig. 22

* Col. Sraey writes, while we are correcting this proof, that he has just

added another name to this group, BASIAEQS NIKATOPOS AMYNT.... but

of this we are promised casts ina day or two: it is too late for the present plate.

in 4: Soc. Vol. V. PL.XXXV

Miscellaneous

ppl sy

TAD YW; a

SS we nt \

g aid OS Tiles

as F RY a WR \

Ip a \\\\ \ {hy y=

al ies ah) ™ |

\ (hear Wt i HOY}

AeA NIN SSSy

i NN

Ai ntye cam Pari fr

d RN fi iii

_ 1836.) New Varieties of Bactrian Coins. 549

of Pl. XXIII. vol. IV.) In our coin the legend was indistinct at the

top, but in his drawing it is clearly

PAD PLVALIThwWs Paty PLAY.

In this the thirteenth letter should probably be P, unless by some rule

of orthography the epithet “‘ just” is combined by a permutation of

its final, and duplicated with the commencing consonant of the fol-

lowing word, which may be recognized without difficulty as the

representative of Megalou, the great. We are indebted to Mr. Mas-

son for the restoration of the inscription, which we have introduced

in this place, because no other opportunity may occur of noticing

this Azos coin.

Fig. 2. A silver drachma of AnTILaAkipEs, discovered by Mr. Mas-

son in 18385.

Obverse. Head of the monarch, with the peculiar hat or helmet

common on coins of Eucratiprs, Puinoxenus, MENANnpeER, &c. but

rather flatter: mustachios on the upper lip (?); legend as in the cop-

per coins of the same prince,

BASIAEQS NIKH®OPOY ANTIAAKIAOY.

Reverse. Jupiter seated, holding a small victory in his right hand :

in his left a sceptre or trident: monogram compounded of the Greek °

letters P and K : native legend .... WHA. 9.... PX4.1u as on the

copper coins.

Dr. Swiney possesses in the collection lately purchased by him

from Keramat Aut, a duplicate of this coin, which shews the com-

pleted Pehlevi legend to agree with that given in my former notice.

The device on the reverse of the square copper pieces of this prince,

two beehives and palm branches, denoting, as Mr. Masson conjectures,

plenty and peace, has been met with on a similar coin of Eucraripzs :

in whose neighbourhood, therefore, it is probable the unknown An-

TILAKIDEs should be classed.

Fig. 3. An unique coin of Diomepzs, found by Mr. Masson in

1834, and described by him in the present volume, page 24. In the

memoir now before us he applies our system to the reading of the

native name, which he makes out PIwWA) ajamido, and argues thence

that the Sanscrit equivalent for Diomep may be AsA-mEDHA, a prince

of the lunar race, who reigned at Canya-cubja. <‘‘ This remark,’’ he

writes, ‘is elicited from an observation in Dr. Mix1’s historical note ©

on the Allahabad pillar, (July 1834,) that the Chronicles of Marwar

represent Nayana Pax as having conquered Canouje in the year 470

A. D. from king As1-pdxa, a descendant of AsaA-mepHa. We here find

a dynasty bearing the common name of Aja (identical with the Greek

Azos), and suspected by Colonel Top to have been of Scythic origin.”

550 New Varieties of Bactrian Coins. [Sepr.

We may remark, however, in opposition to this ingenious conjec-

ture, that the Sanscrit name Aja is but a corruption of Ajaya, the

unconquered, and therefore might more appropriately represent the

Greek anikétos than Azos, which latter I have indeed elsewhere con-

jectured might be found in the Yavana-asé of Hindu tradition*. More-

over, the first letter of the present legend may probably be ‘1, which

would give the reading P1lwA1 daya-mido, in exact accordance, as

to pronunciation, with the Greek.

Fig. 4 is taken from a drawing by M. Court, who has been

fortunate in finding a new type of this curious copper coin, the

reverse of which usually presents the figure of a naked horse. (See Vol.

IV. page 343.)

The present reverse exhibits the prince holding an olive branch

and spear, implying peace or war, in either hand. From the

collation of many specimens of the horse variety, and one small one like

the above, Mr. Masson makes out the full inscription to be Bas1AEQ=

BASIAEYTS AMAIY the H apparent at the commencement of the lower

line being the missing = of the word pastaErs. This reading is con-

firmed by more than a dozen examples, but it still leaves us with a

most unpronounceable appellation. It may possibly be only a perver-

sion of the epithet arkaior. In Masson’s small coin the monogram

m appears to be the triple blade of a trident reversed, which the

figure is holding.

Fig. 5. An unique, is also extracted from M. Covurt’s collection.

It assimilates with the numerous class of Azos coins, having on the

obverse a horseman with extended arm. The inscription has much

the appearance of Pehlevi, but this may proceed from the indistinct-

ness of the Greek letters. The monogram is very peculiar and

curious, from the circumstance of its constant occurrence on the dege-

nerate gold coins of the KapruisEs group.

- The reverse is quite in the Roman taste. Two soldiers seem to be

crowning their successful chief, who rests on a kind of club. The

name in the legend below is happily most distinct, PIX THA; the

fourth letter is doubtful, but if read ‘ the combination may be hesi-

tatingly transcribed Yattlariko.

Of fig. 6, three examples are known: one in the Ventura collec-

tion was depicted in Vol. IV. Pl. XXI. It was copied hastily, and I

* In the Cashmir imt of the Rdjtarangint, there is a prince named Ava

(transcribed Aj in the Persian of the Ayin Akberi) whose date by WILSON is

100 B. C. but when corrected for the epoch of Asoka, about A. D. 180. He,

too, may be one of our Azos family :—but if we go by resemblance of name only,

we shall be liable to lay hands on the great Asoxa himself as the founder of the

line!

1836.} New Varieties of Bactrian Coins. 551

have now reason to think I must have omitted a letter, having then

engraved the name AAEAsOPOT. The two new drawings, one

by M. Covurr, the other by Masson, (both agreeing perfectly,) from

which the present engraving has been taken, leave no doubt of the

correct reading being smaarPloY AIKAIOY AAEAGOY TOY BASIAEQS,

‘Spatyrius the just, brother of the king.’ The first letter may

possibly be an E, or it may be superfluous, and the name be read

Palyrius, but the y on the right hand of the coin is tuo distinct to

permit Mr. Masson’s reading of the name Aaraeopror, or my

former reading BASIAENZ NIKATOPOS AAEAGOPOY. It is a very

curious circumstance that the prerogative of coining should thus

have been delegated to a brother, and we have unfortunately no

further means of ascertaining who this indulgent sovereign may have

been, further than he probably belonged to the numerous dynasty of

Azos and the “‘ great king.”’

On the reverse we have cither Hercules with his club, or more pro-

bably, from the attitude, a musician playing ona kind of guitar. The

Pehlevi is very distinct on three sides, and in conformity with the Greek

on their parallels, the word for ‘‘ king” is wanting. It would doubt-

less have been found in the lower compartment. The remainder, bor-

rowing two first letters from Masson, reads PUTbdn PI ws PUPAL

(49). All that can be certainly extracted hence is that PIS, as

before noticed, is equivalent to aikaior. The name is unintel-

ligible, and the word for brother, Ulafarmo, approaches to no fra-

ternal etymon with which we are acquainted, unless the first letter

be ‘1, d, with a vowel mark, which would express something like the

Greek itself, delpharmo !

Fig. 7. Here again our author’s labours of 18385 have enabled

him to clear up one of our doubtful names (Pl. XXI. fig. 6,) and to

correct his own reading of last year, (see page 25,) where he supposed

it to be maanpKOr. From the native legend I had supposed the

word might be read Ulidizou. The real name and title is now

made out from six very distinct samples sent to Mr. Masson from

Munderaur of Lughmdn, which were in excellent preservation, having

still upon them the lime cement which had been used in depositing

them in some tomb. It runs thus; BArIA€WN BACIAEW: MerAAOT

IMAAIPILOY, 4 name which betrays a kind of patronymic affinity to

the last mentioned Spalyrius ; while in the style of coin there is also

a remarkable similarity. The divinity on the reverse is, however, a

Jupiter inhis celestial chair. The native legend is easily brought to

agree with the Greek, through the facile mutation of letters of ac-

knowledged similarity ; thus the hu, must bea F, p: andthe “di must

552 New Varieties of Bactrian Coins. (Serr.

be \ ri, and thus the context will become PoWXHP PHALY PL WLYU

malakdo malakko palirijo, the epithet megalou seems to be omitted.

Figs. 8 and 9. These two coins, made known in Mr. Masson’s

first memoir, I have now had an opportunity of engraving from

specimens in Dr. Swiney’s purchased cabinet. The Pantratnon of

fig. 8 is quite legible, and the curious and unknown letters of the

reverse are distinct, and perfectly accordant. with Masson’s original

drawing. The word Ara@oKaEors however, is only partially visible

on fig. 9, and is completed on his authority. In other respects the

two coins are identical, having a dog or panther onthe obverse,

and a clothed female on the reverse, with a flower in the right hand.

The similarity of the native character to the alphabet ofthe Indian

laths has been before noticed, as well as the frequent occurrence

of the symbols +; and & on coins of this group (see Pl. XXXV. of

Vol. IV.)

Fig. 10 is introduced from Masson’s plates as a more perfect

specimen of the Hercules-reverse type than any in my former Plate

(XXIV. of Vol. IV.) as regards at least the Greek legend, which is

here evidently BaAlAens srHPOs=VermAlov. This Hrmeus differs

from his namesake by the reverse, and by the great corruption of the

Greek; but it is possible that the piece may have been contempo-

raneously struck at a provincial mint ; and in such case, if cities may

be recognized, as among the Greek coins, by their tutelary deities,

we shall find a clue to the appearance of Erxmaus’ name on the

following coin, fig. 11, which bears the reverse of the naked horse.

It might perhaps be allowable to assign this horse as the armorial

symbol of Bucephalia, while the Hercules might be attributed to

some town conspicuous for his worship: victory to Nicea; and Jupiter

to one of the Alexandrias (being the general reverse of the ALzEx-

ANDRINE COINS.)

The native legend on fig. 11 is the genuine Pehlevi one of

Ermaus; but that .on figure 10 is of the modified character so

puzzling to the decypherer, It passes unaltered through a succession

of princes, and may perhaps therefore embrace only their titles.

Fig. 12. It was from dubious authority that I added the name of

KAAeIsHs to this group. Mr. Masson’s Researches have now given

authentic evidence that I did so justly. He has, this year, fallen upon

two coins in which the name is quite distinct. It is remarkable,

however, that the title of BAzIAEns is here for the first time omitted,

and the foreign expression xopanor introduced. This, it will be

remembered, is precisely the transition that is traced in the Indo-

Scythic or Mithriac series of Kanzrxos; and thus we have pretty

1836.) New Varieties of Bactrian Coins. 553

strong grounds for inferring that the change was simultaneously

effected in various provinces of the empire of the foreign, (or domes-

tic,) usurpers who supplanted the dynasty of Bactrian descent.

There is, however, another very curious circumstance to be noted

in regard to fig. 12. The Greek legend is KosoOVvaod KAasiIzOV

XOPavov. Now, as good luck will have it, Mr. Neave, of the Civil

Service, has just favored me with a few old coins picked up in the

mofussil, among which is one in excellent preservation and well

executed of the KAAASES.... kind described in my former paper

(Vol. IV. Pl. XXIV.) The name on this coin (which I have engraved

as fig. 14,) is very clearly KOZOAA KAAAs.... which is just such a

deviation from the orthography of Masson’s coin, KOz0TAO KAAsIzOY

as aprovincial dialect, added to the difficulty of expressing native

names in a foreign alphabet, would justify and explain. The name on

two of the coins of Plate XXIV. Vol. IV. may be also read KOZOAA,

Among several coins of the same class in the collections of Capt.

CunnincHam and Dr. Swiney, as well as in Masson’s plates, other

variations of the spelling occur, KO=sYAO—KOZOVAO, &c. until at last

the word becomes utterly illegible.

In a private letter from M. Jacquur, of the Paris Asiatic Society,

that gentleman expresses his conviction, after seeing Dr. Martin

HoniGsERGER’s coin, that the name we have called KAAeIzHs should

be written MOKAA@ISHS, which he supposes equivalent to the Sanscrit

Mahatrishi ; but I think we have abundant evidence against such a

conclusion, since we can now produce at least three individuals of the

family name of Kadphises. Thus—

Fig. 13, copied from a drawing in M. Covrr’s memoir, has the

legend ZA@oY KAAAGE% (ov) XOPANOY ; while on the gold coins, we

have already adduced numerous instances of MO, OOHMO, Or oOKMo,

attached to the same. We shall take some future occasion to place

all these varieties under review together ; meantime the French ships

of the season will, it is hoped, enable us to profit by the disquisitions

of the learned of Paris, on this highly interesting question.

Figs. 15, 16. Small coins found by Mr. Masson in 1835, at

Beghram. The execution is neat and evidently Bactrian, but the

names are defaced. The caduceus of fig. 15 is to be met with on

the coins of Mznanoer, and particularly on those of Mayos.

It must not be supposed that Mr. Masson’s labours during the

past year have been productive of no other novel results than those

above mentioned. He has brought to light many new types of the

Mithriac series, which I shall reserve for a future plate ; besides a very

numerous series of what he has correctly designated Indo-Sassanian

554 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. [Szpr.

coins, to which hitherto we have paid too little attention. To make

their study useful would involve the necessity of reviewiag carefully

the well known Sassanian coins of Persia proper; a task, unfortu-

nately rendered almost hopeless by the great indistinctness and per-

plexity of the Sassanian alphabet. I must not, however, on this

account, keep back the new and curious coins with Nagari characters

of which the Beghram collection boasts.

In conclusion, I must once more offer the tribute of admiration for

the indefatigable and successful exertions of the collector of these

Bactrian relics, and express a hope that his extensive collection, now

consisting of upwards of 7000 coins, may be deposited in our national

museum by the Hast India Company, to whom it is presumed they

have been annually consigned.

IV.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lthographed by Jas. PRrinszp,

Secy. &c. &c.

[Continued from page 486.]

Inscriptions from Trincomalee, in Ceylon.

Dr. W. Buanp, of H.M. ship Wolf, to whom I am indebted for

copies of the three fragments forming figs. 1, 2, 3 of Plate XXVI., has

favored me with the following note of their discovery and present

situation :

“The three inscriptions are at present in Fort Ostenburgh, which

stands on a high rocky tongue of land, forming the south side of the

entrance to Trincomalee harbour; these three separate stones have

been laid down to form part of the platforms for the guns of the fort.

Anciently on the site of this fort stood a venerable temple of the Bud-

dhists, which was destroyed by the Portuguese, and its remains used

in the construction of a place of defence. No.1 is 164 inches long

and 11 inches broad, the letters 14 inch long, with a groove between

each line two inches apart. No. 2, the same size, and its composition

the same, and although found in a different bastion, has all the ap-

pearance of having at one time been united. No. 3, 14 inches long,

and 12 broad, letters one inch long, all distinctly cut in the stone, but

appears to have been formerly much larger. Great care has been

taken to give an exact facsimile of the inscriptions. The slightly mark-

ed letters near the end were more worn, and made so in copying. As

this may meet the eye of some one conversant with ancient Sanscrit or

its cognate dialects, you will oblige those interested on such matters by

publishing these inscriptions.”

Journ. As. Soc.

Vol Vi. PUAXVLIT.

INSCRIPTIONS at Fort Ostenburgh, Ceylon.

ton a stone slab. /4 inches by /2. letters 1 in. long.

49 2 coqeod Df w P}ugsLo con co) +4

At — GIODIP HAM] w] dh Ref. 94 2.

a), EISF POP BU CILP 4, 2405) Uttouc

Wanhhn hi K2 w2939 3 oe ATIRUIAACO

24 eV LR RAIMA IYACI AY IVA GO

LD DNAY 197 Fw VHF HANS YEN

Bh ATE Lough HA TY SB a PT ATON BP

HOW CIOS OHHLOFITVU OFS 7

STAPH UDI ADLZUD>AIAIS?

TWO SLABS of Breecia 16 by I| inehes , at Fark Ostenburgh Ceylon.

2. BJ

Ot AY -DW =

uIOU TH Be

BF Ft IN OC

7 tye wr | Y¥ Oe aa

Drew. Bland dei, TB insep lth

4. INSCRIPTFON at HaBuRENNI

| KEANX LES WU YX hI CWLY HAM OUTNGSX AT GX

1 THISW LOL GIT HCTFWEHHS HFAVHIROKHAYAIFEKIITS

| XIddwWRVVIOUbAD UA ZEW V Lrevdda SanVUVBSOVIS|X

| UFXFXVFEXTAXEXHATUDEWUAYIYhHE DOWN IXSGFOUO HHO

F DFIIFWUASSEUSIWUXSHIO+CLSWEFU RWFOOXLEIFFT DD

| PIUSLATEXFIEFSTOAVATW SIW SOVSAUEOISUKIICWUITE

KOI PUDNOMGOUUIHUHSVETIEFOFITAFOUARUADYASO

FIALLUITHAIGSXFIEFIVIDLAIWYI@ANWARUENIF

UPXLICWUASCUGI LFF VIDEW UG WFFFI WAY HAKAVUIDE

WUHWEPLCAU 2 2X ALAIEOT DSFZOIGEWOAWIFFLIT WE

DRAAVITEWUAWIF UAV EUSP YCSIEVADETA AIL CH

WY AIS W IAAW CVE TIRFITT LU K3BIGYFAEONIU FAI GO —~~p

5. Letlers ofan Inseription,nearly obliterated, ona rock near Kapurdigarhe, Peshawer

ALSA PY-~..A..U-4. PBA ~M--Y 7K U9 -3 “O35. 3 :

A Court dal UiRby —— TeBrimep

| Printed al the Oviental blk Press, Calicuslia

» resco ee

sed Bs

oe se et

‘

1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 555

The origin of the fragments of inscriptions found at Trincomalee is

similarly explained in Sir A. Jounston’s note upon a much longer and

more perfect inscription from the same place, published in the first

volume of the Roy. As. Soc. Trans. page 537.

The whole of the ancient pagodas or temples of Trincomalee were

destroyed as above remarked by the Portuguese in the 16th century,

and their materials were used in the construction of the modern forti-

fications. The late Chief Justice of Ceylon adds :—

«The race of people who at present inhabit the province are com-

pletely ignorant of the character in which the inscription is written : they,

however, believe from the traditions preserved among them, that it isthe

character which was in use throughout the whole of the northern and

eastern parts of the island in the age of the two kings of Solamandelam,

Manumetuy CanpesoLaMm, and his son Katocata Mawarasa, who

are stated, upon what authority I cannot ascertain, in all the ancient

histories of Trincomalee (of which I have in my possession both the

Tamul originals and the English translations) to have reigned over

the southern peninsula of India and the greater part of the island of

Ceylon about the 512th year of the Kaliyug, or 4400 years ago*,

and during his reign to have constructed not only these magnificent

temples, but also the equally celebrated tanks or artificial lakes called

Kattucarré, Padvilcolam, Minerie, and Kandellé, the remains of which

may be considered as some of the most venerable and splendid monu-

ments ever discovered.”

There are three traditions respecting the contents of the long in-

scription. 1, that it contains an account of the taxes which the

priests of the temples of Trincomalee had a right to levy, and of the

expences incurred in the buildings: 2, that it contains an account of

the construction of the great tank: and 3, that it contains the heads

of the civil and criminal laws of the country.

However this may be, it is not likely that we shall very speedily be

able to benefit by the preservation of this curious document, unless an

actual facsimile be substituted for the manual copy published in the

Transactions. It is evident from the form of many of the letters in that,

and in Dr. Biann’s fragments Nos. 2 and 3, which have a strong

resemblance to it in the lines drawn between each row of letters, that

these are ina form of Nagari not very different from that of our early

lath inscriptions, and there is little doubt that an accurate transcript

would prove legible. Dr. Buanp’s No. 1 is apparently much more

* The names above given are doubtless TrrRamApr CaANDA SHOLAN and Cari-

cALA of the Sholan dynasty of Karnata, of Bucoanan. According to Turn-

our, the Sholan conquest of Ceylon took place in the year 104 B, C.—Ep.

4c2

556 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. [Sepr.

modern—it is so like Tamul in many letters that I think a Madras pan-

dit would find little difficulty in decyphering it. .

Other inscriptions from Ceylon, Pl. XXVI. XXVIII.

The preceding note has called to my recollection a number of other

fragments of inscriptions in nearly the same character which were

sent to the Society in 1833* by His Excellency Sir R. W. Horton.

They were collected from various spots in the Matele district by

Captain Forses, as marked on the accompanying plate: and, His

Excellency says, thousands of the same nature exist on the island.

The inscription from Haburenni offers the best chance to the decy-

pherer from its very perfect state :—In the 4th line I read with ease

the words paramara Maharaja....Sri mad....Vijaya Patisara puta deva.

The same word QEW vijaya occurs very frequently in the course of the

inscription. It is a name of great celebrity in the Ceylonese history,

as the founder of the earliest dynasty. The opening letters of the in-

scription are precisely such as appear on our first Canouj coins :—they

run Mujénagama.. . :

I am not aware whether the inscriptions so successfully decyphered

by Mr. Armour, and published in the Ceylon Almanac, include any of

this class—but I presume not, as they generally refer to periods much

more recent, as the reign of Sauasa Mauua, in the 12th century,

when we know by the coins discovered at Dambedinia, that the Nagari

hardly differed from the present form. Moreover, they are stated to

be in the Cingalese language.

Inscriptions from the Caves of Ajanta, PI. XXVIII.

When I inserted in a former Plate (IX. see page 348) the rude

facsimile of an inscription taken for me by Messrs. RaupH and

Gresuxy, I forgot that I had in my possession several of a similar

nature collected by the same parties during a visit to these caves some

years ago, which were in vain shewn to the pandits of Benares and to

the Secretary of the College there.

Not being aware that the measurements and drawings made by Dr.

Brrp for Sir Jon Maucoum have ever seen the light, while the brief

notice and rude sketch published by Lieutenant AtzxanpeER in the

second volume of the Roy. As. Soc. Trans. is any thing but satisfac-

tory, I think it but tardy justice to put on record the materials so

kindly communicated to myself.

One inscription (fig. 11) was taken with red paint on cloth from the

base of a large statue of Buppua, and, curious enough, we here again

trace the three initial letters “‘ ye dharma” of the Buddhist formula; but

* See Proceedings As. Soc. 30th Oct, 1833.

Journ. As. Soc. Vol. Vi PL XXIX

fuserifplten sx from Ce len , corcltimwted .

6 SIGIR}

MerTW444 US FatuDOr a

FUANYVOOHUUWEU TTIIOAID

BES WhRAR SOS FSOTUE GE

LEGLOLCET RB UASEIOICVS

DEGOTACLG ———

AMBOOL

J. from D .

memoOoLo dg 4SOlrmdd £RUASo OF

WAGYNADHSOA A424

mega ews PUNY DIGUEANU ARENA

eee OE, ea Se ree

)

4 DOnATTAO XK Co

BO C7 er a)

M1iXADEYRU~LCeuURNne-XhUvVeUHAS

DAAZAGt+CO

TBCAWLUUON—-% 9% Pu — AXgd -DuY

() —-

oT ae a LiG Lig Gia UNG hY-7IT4 3 -..

: 3 Dee eo

IY 4

eT OU gy oie WS 7m yee

“Ops Ce

8. from ALUE VIHARI,

POALU Ne vA

Forbes. ded + 8) a bo lL ar JL 4H

9. Lower part ofan Inscription in the Zodiac orShield Cave ut Anta.

HAPS MUASEQPUSUYNAYZ 291

DEVAL AL OZ Ts SiR Ws

0, Another from the same Cave (supposed to be more modern.)

Was vas WO wna pysezosuatezyAsUpangsaa7s ED

7%, TYEBRYSHVULIZW S RUT ANY UGS

"borne, VERAY Ver OMUZ an M8 rganaeey

, Sfaced. SoA YMEIITS TS YRAT Ap ji

WaT TP La By 3

Wl, Another Inscription , zaken én Sacsimile from the slone.

yy Pr

BUIY BAY VBAas wh SF IZ WL

MDW CDA ADAWE HAL Y By 4. Ss Fathh © Gresley ces. — TPeineep 1

Printed at the Oriental Lilh* Press. Calcutta.

1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 557

the remainder is unintelligible, although the value of many individual

letters can be readily assigned.

The fragment (fig. 10) in the parallelogram-headed character, (of

which an alphabet will be furnished under a subsequent heading,) is all

that remains of what was once a long inscription in the zodiac cave.

It is therefore useless to transcribe it in modern character, which

might easily be done for the major part of the fragment.

But it will enliven the dry recapitulation of such particulars to

introduce the reader to the romantic scene whence these antique relics

were derived, in the very language of Mr. Raupn’s most animated and

scenic correspondence—written as he clambered up the precipitous

and crumbling entrance, and threaded his way through the recesses

of the hollowed hill by the light of the brahman’s torch.

‘‘ On the 6th of the month I left Aurwngabad, and went seven marches east-

ward that I might join Captain GresLey, and induce him to come hither with

me. When I found him on the 13th, we were near 50 miles from this place, to

which we came in two breakneck marches, galloping over stony roads and rocky

torrents at the rate of ten miles an hour. We then rested one day, and on the

18th arrived here at 9 a.m. During the two last days Grestey has been with

me, and his exclamations of admiration and regret, the mere variations of won-

der,—would fill three pages. Thepaintings, which are fast fading and falling

away, demand consideration. There is nothiug in India like them. They give

us glimpses of a former world—but, alas! how industriously these valuable and

beautiful remains have been by violence destroyed! I shall now rapidly throw

together my companion’s observations, among which are all mine, in which he

agreed. Youknow I have no knowledge of painting or design—only a perception

of what is beautiful ; but you must have remarked his skill in drawing and good

taste in every thing.

‘ These caves are becoming daily more difficult of access. You pass along nar-

row goat paths with a chasm of 50 or 80 feet below, the footing not nine inches

broad, with scarce any thing to cling to. The rains yearly making the passages

worse. G. and I admired the fires on the hill above us: grass and leaves burning

all night. What followed? Why, last night every hour and oftener, stones and

burning rubbish, large logs half consumed, rolled down close to the tent, and this

morning the ascent proved more difficult. One cave is inaccessible, and several

are approached at the risk of life. ‘

‘ What a wonderful people these must have been! Remark the head dresses.

‘Now, is this a wig or curly hair? Ald the statues, the curved figures of BuppHa

have them, How can I say? First wigs were made to represent hair, and then hair

dressed to look like wigs. ’Tis the shape of your Welsh wig, and rows of curls

all over. Then the head dresses and ornaments are different from every thing

we now see. These are chiefly domestic scenes—seraglio scenes ;—here are

females and males every where, then processions and portraits of princes

which are always larger than the rest. The subjects are closely intermixed ;—a

medallion is twelve or fifteen inchesin height ; below and above, closely touch-

ing, are other subjects. I have seen nothing monstrous. No, certainly,

there is nothing monstrous except where we see some figure evidently designed

558 roi Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Super.

for ornament, as in the compartments of the ceiling. The ceiling—aye, every

thing but the floor and larger statues and small figures—every thing has been

painted. It is done while the plaister is wet—it is fresco painting. I have seen

the operation while going about in Rome. It has been dug off, scraped and

knocked off with iron instruments. See how the stone itself has been broken!

Now, Ratpu, look here: can you see this figure? No. Bring the torch nearer.

Give me the torch.” You can see it better now—hardly! Let us light dry grass.

Bring grass now: place it here. Now watch while the light is strongest: you may

now see the whole figure. This is a prince or some chief. It is a portrait.

Observe how well fore-shortened that limb is—yes, I can see it now; but throw

water on it—now the colours are more vivid. Here is a lovely face—a Madonna

face. What eyes! She looks towards the man. Observe, these are all Hindu

faces—nothing foreign. All the sweet countenances are of one complexion.

R., now remark. Here are evidently three beauties in this apartment—one an

African, one copper-coloured, one of a European complexion. Yes; and how

frequently we see these intermixed. See this, R. is a fair man—yes, I think he

is a eunuch. Another :—he has his band round her waist, and she one hand on

his shoulder. Observe ; many love scenes, but little gross or grossly indecent :

no nudities—nothing like the shocking sculptures on the outside of the temples

in Telingana. This must be the inside of a mahal. Here is a woman ona chdrpéae

or some stage with legs: See, they are bathing her: do you observe the ghara

of water in the woman’s hand above? How well executed that figure is; the

fore-shortening of the arms ; the waist—are not her haunches too full? No. Go

farther off, and you will see the figure ina better light: it iscorrect. This beauty

has delicate drapery—nearly falling to the knee: it is transparent, like sky-

coloured gauze. Observe that Abyssinian black prince seated on a bed ;—

remark his ornaments. Now the woman seated on his left knee whom he

embraces is as fair as you or J. Did these fellows get Georgian slaves? He has

two boys or pages tofan him. I wish I could make out this story—there certainly

is a story. Here isa fair man of full age, dressed in a robe and a cap like

some monk or abbot. Here is next to him a half naked brahman copper-coloured,

with shaven crown and the single lock on his head. Here is a man presenting him

with a scroll on which something is written. He is in a crowded court—he has

come to an audience. What can all this be? This is a procession :—the ele-

phants are passing under the windows, and women are looking out. I think they

evidently express alarm. That one has her hand up, as making some exclamation.

How often we see people of three complexions in the same pannel! Now this

is the most extraordinary thing we have found. Here are three placid portraits

—they are Chinese. Nothing can be plainer :—observe the style of the hair ;—

the women have locks brought down in ringlets over the ears falling on to the

neck, like some of the Hampton Court beauties. Observe the head dresses:

there is something like a bandeau—yes, a muslin band, or the imitation of a

turban by English women. The cap worn by the chiefs or nobles or princes is

a tiara loaded with pearls mostly conical. Round the waist is a cloth, but it is

not so full as a dhott. A sort of jhangia worn by the women, coming nearly

to the knees, and this drapery often transparent. Are these paintings as well

done as Europeans could have executed? In the expression of the countenances

certainly they are. The perspective is not good, and the pieces are crowded :—

yet here is a small building, the perspective of which is quite correct.

1836.) Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. petite 559

Small buildings, such as are open to a‘garden with light pillars, are the princi-

pal domestic scenes: few or no trees. In two pieces are parties in a boat—the

prow and stern both very high. Here is a hunt ;—here is a horseman and dogs.

Ido not like the horses we see—rather poor. These are elephant-fighting ;—that

head is sublime.

Now, R. remark this saddle ;—here is a led horse, and the saddle exactly such

as we see in England with a cloth below it—unothing larger—and the bridle too.

This is a war scene—here are many spears.

This zodiac, as they call it, is very elaborate. Why they call it zodiac I

know not. There is in one part a bull, and in another scales. We must get a

ladder to see it clearly. It might have been called the shield of Achilles as

well as a zodiac. There have been eight grand compartments and sixteen

smaller ones—how full of little figures! I think this is the best example in the

whole series, and evidently done by the same painters who worked in what we

call ‘ par excellence’ the painted caves. These medallions in the roof are very hand-

some. I think they resemble compartments in a Turkey carpet, or what we see in

a kaleidescope—wreaths and coloured radiated patterns. Here are five women

with their feet all towards the centre of the circle :—their heads alone perfect.

Are they angels? There are no winged and no two-headed figures anywhere.

The zodiac is incomplete. I think about athird of it is wanting, and the

lower part of the circle could never have been complete, for it must have been

over this door of the cell. G. Perhaps they covered the top of the doorway with

something in order to complete the circle. R. You admire it so much: you are

willing to suppose it must have been complete.

What a lovely female! Yes, the last one we discover seems always the sweet-

est. Here is another heavenly face. This man is her lover:—a handsome

fellow. You have his profile looking to the left. How eager—how full of

ardent desire! The woman has just turned her face towards him, and looks

with timid satisfaction and self-approving coquetry. It is excellent. But here

is another beauty :—she is entreating: her head is turned towards some one

above. Is she supplicating or in prayer? Shame to the villains who have

destroyed these paintings !

These must have been convents, and these decorations to attract the multi-

tude at festivals and to bring pilgrims from afar. This cave was never half

finished. I can fancy that the site of a cave was granted to a society of monks

with lands for their support. These, according to their ability, made it large or

small, filled it with paintings when able to incur the expense.—The fewer

theories you form, the fewer blunders and dreams you will make.

R. We must form theories—we cannot remain awake and not do so.

G. Some nation of conquerors who landed at Elephanta, coming from Egypt,

first began there, and then got 2 or 300 miles to the eastward. There is no-

thing like these in Telingana or to the south.

R. No—only some very small caves with sculpture, rude and old,—the cave

being as big as one of these ten cells. But the fewer theories you make, &c.

Now, Ra.pu, look at this! Why, you are half dead—no, not half dead, but

knocked up. When you have 25 years added to your present age, and have

completed 30 years in India, will you labour so well or have so much zeal? ’Tis

five to one against my being alive.—But do get up and come hither. This

man is going to ravish this woman ;—he has a sword, too, in his hand. Here -

560 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Supt.

are other armed men. Ts if the sacking of a city? See how the water brings

out the colours,—but I have given Prinsep more than two hours. Have they

brought the oil? and the ladder,—they are all here.

21st.—A Dr. Birp from Sattarah, the Residency Surgeon, come with a design

to draw up some account of the caves, dismounts from his horse at 8 a. mM.

Mutual greetings. In three minutes my new acquaintance praises Mr. ERSKINE

of Bombay ; quotes him and swears by him, and tells ine, ‘ These are Jain cave

temples, and, like most others in this part of India, are dug in basalt. This

is amygdaloid basalt: you see it incloses masses of quartz.’

Dr. B. says he has brought a learned pandit to examine the inscriptions ;

that he is about to draw up an account for the London Asiatic Society, and

carry away some of the paintings by taking from the wall. Can you draw, Sir ?

‘ No—I am sorry I cannot.’ Those who come here with that qualification are

disheartened by the difficulty, or have other occupations which demand their

attention, (as G.)—As for carrying away the paintings, you can do so in powder.

I have ascertained that they will not quit the walls in lamine, but crumble

under the touch. .

‘Tam sorry for that. I think a native painter might succeed in copying them.’

Certainly he might—but you must attend on your native painter, to give him

confidence. This is a wild secluded spot, within a mile or two of the frontier ;

barren rocks and chains of hills HE. and W. The nearest inhabited place is a

poor hamlet three miles off. We find marks of recent fires in the caves and

caverns, and know that small parties of migratory predatory Bheels who

lift in these parts, haunt the caves, which are very seldom visited*.

Dr. Brrp’s so-called pandit proves to be a Marhatta brahman :—can make

nothing of the inscriptions—supposes them written by the Jains.

G. For my part, I think it is the character I have seen on the pillar at Alla-

habad, and on the column at Delhi, which no one can decypher. On the left of

the portico to the zodiac cave has been an inscription four feet high and one and

a half broad—the left and lower part utterly effaced by the weather. What re-

mains, may afford a few whole words to one who has the key ; (see Plate XXVIII.

No. 10). Under the foot of a colossal statue, there is part of an inscription,

perhaps half a name :—outside another cave. In the zodiac there is some

writing—and in the same cave one figure holds out a scroll on which the writing

may be legible.

Ma .tet’s figures in the Asiatic Researches would lead a stranger to expect

statues—but the figures are entirely in alto relievo. Almost the only novelty is

the thing I call an altar: it is nine feet high. There are four altar caves, or, as

folks call them, carpenter’st caves. The first has the figure just mentioned at

the back. In the second the altar differs in having an intermediate circle or

section of a cone—another globular mass.

[* Capt. OvANs visited in March 1827; Mr. LA1ne saw two in July; Capt. O.,

Mr. G. GIBERNE and GRESLEY were here in February 1828; Mr.and Mrs. R. on

the 8th of that month; G. and R. 18th and 19th of the current month; and, lastly,

Dr. Brrp, an intelligent young Medical man from Bombay. Lieut. ALEXANDER

of the Lancers visited them in 1824.]

+ From the tradition regarding VisvAKARMA’S having constructed them ina

night, See Sir WILLIAM Ma.uet’s description of Ellora, As. Res. VI., 389.

1836.] Sketch of the State of Miiar, Malay Peninsula. 561

In the third small cave, 45 or 50 feet by 20 to 24, is a more elaborate altar

(dehgopa), having three globes superposed, and each stage ornamented with four

pillars—on the top four figures, now much worn, supported a canopy, (evidently

the ordinary Buddhist Chaitya.) But all these desultory descriptions and frag-

ments of conversation can be of no use but to stimulate you to come hither,

&c. &c.”’

In the same graphic style our visitor describes the kund or reser

voir at the foot of cliffs 250 feet in height—and the Dehgopa or

Buddha cave. Dr. Birp found no less than 25 chambers, some in an

unfinished state, and now covered with earth. Notwithstanding pro-

testations about defacing monuments, this visitor contrived to peel

off four painted figures from the zodiac or shield! To have copied the

whole, even had he been an artist, would have taken twenty days. Of

the fresco figures, in three divisions of the shield, were extant in 1828,

73 figures varying from 5 to 7 inches high. It is a great pity that

none of our European tourists, whose pencils every year produce such

exquisite bijoux, can be persuaded to make a visit to Ajanta, before the

remainder of these treasures of antiquity moulder away with the damp,

or fall a prey to the hand of the spoiler.

V.—Shetch of the State of Mar, Malay Peninsula. By T.J. Newszoxp,

Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Witson, C. B.

The information contained in this paper was obtained partly from

personal observation, and partly from inquiries made while on a visit

to the chief of the country at Gressik, on the Muar river, in 1835.

The state of Maar lies to the south of the Malacca territory, from

which it is divided, towards the coast, by the Cossang river, and inte-

riorly by a suppositious line drawn between Bankon, Chondong and

Mount Ophir. The Serting river separates it from Pahang,—Parrit

Siput from the tract of Dattu Kdya Padang—and the Murbdwe Sa-ratius

from Johdéle.

Populatton.—The interior of Muar is generally termed Segdmet.

The united population is stated not to exceed 2,400. This appears

extremely scant compared with the extent of territory ; and arises

from the misgovernment and apathy of the feudal sovereign, the

Sultan of Johére—whence perpetual broils among the petty chiefs,

causing insecurity of person and property, and eventually desertion of

the soil by most of the cultivating and trading classes of the commu-

nity. The honest peasant, in many instances, is compelled from sheer

necessity to turn robber; and the coasts, instead of being crowded

4 D

562 Sketch of the State of Méar, Malay Peninsula. [Serr.

with fishermen, swarm with pirates. These remarks may be applied

generally to the whole of the peninsula under native sway, though to

Miar more particularly ; the whole of which country appears to be

one almost uninterrupted mass of jungle and swamp, if we can except

a few straggling villages and clearings. Cultivated rice grounds

have degenerated into barren marshes—an enormous forest, abound-

ing with wild elephants, overshadows a soil naturally rich and prolific ;

while the gaunt rhinoceros and uncouth tapir stalk unmolested over

spots which, if tradition belies them not, were once the sites of large

and populous towns.

Such is the melancholy picture of the effects of misrule which this un-

happy country presents to the eye of the traveller, who cannot avoid

being sensibly touched by this forcible, though silent, appeal for me-

lioration.

The principal villages are Bokko, Langkat, Gressik, Ring, Segdmet,

Pagoh and Pangkdlang Kota, the residence of the chief, on the river,

Produce and Revenue.—The produce of the country consists of a

little rice, sago, ivory, ebony, gold dust, tin, wax, aloe-wood, gum

benzoin, camphor (small in quantity and of inferior quality), ratans

of the kinds Battu and Jagga, Dammer Battu, Dammer Miniak,

jaggery, Lakko wood, and Guligas, stones extracted generally from

the heads of porcupines, and in much repute among Malays for

medicinal purposes.

The chief has been empowered by the late Sultan of Johdre to levy

an impost upon every bhar of tin exported, of | 14 Spanish dollars.

One hundred bundles of ratans,...... .. 1 = do. do.

One bitar*cf'ebonys” Stes ees ee ie doe do.

One koyan tree romported;. ee ee ar dos do.

pete herr ea ery a 1 do. do.

One katti of opium ditto, . mits 20 do. do.

On smaller articles he ayieee a ‘daty ef 5 per cent. He has the

power of exacting the gratuitous labour of his subjects, and derives

some emolument from the fines he inflicts on them at pleasure.

Government.—Mvar is under the sway of a chief bearing the title of

Tumingong, who is a vassal of Johdre. Under the Tamingong are

eight Panghdlis, four of whom are styled Ampat de Ilir—the remain-

der, Ampat de Ulu. The former are the Panghilis of Gressik, Bukit,

Raya, Liang Battu, and Ring ;—the latter, those entitled Besar, Tan-

jong, Daggang, and Muncal. There is nominally a mosque under each

Panghili, but in that of Umbum alone is the Juma-ahad held. This

is in the jurisdiction of the Panghalu besar. The customs enjoined by

the code termed Undang Undang Malayu ; and the Mahommedan law

1836.] Sketch of the State of Méar, Malay Peninsula. 563

of succession obtains, to the exclusion of the Trémba Pusdka prevailing

in the four Menangkdbowe states.

History.—M iar, like the rest of the Malay peninsula, was formerly

inhabited by savage aboriginal tribes, among whom the Jacoons seem

to claim the superiority. With regard to its origin, it is stated in the

Sejdra Maldyu that Srt Iscander Shah, the monarch of Singhaptira, on

his city being taken by the Bitdra of Majapahit, fled te Muar. This

event took place about the middle of the 13th century; and it is

asserted that he left one of his Maniris in the interior of Muar.

No more mention is made of this state until near the middle of the

14th century, when the kingdom of the Sultan of Malacca, MozarrEer

SHAH, was invaded by the Siamese under T’Hawt Cuacri. The Sultan

on this occasion directed a levy of the population of Maar to be made,

and the inhabitants to be assembled at Malacca. According to the

Malay annals, the war between Siam and Malacca ‘continued for a

long time, and great numbers of the Siamese perished ; but Malacca

was not reduced. At last the whole Siamese army retreated, and as

they took their departure they threw down large quantities of their

baggage ratans in the district of Miéar, where they all took root; and

that is the origin of the name Rotan Siam. Their stocks, which were

formed of fig-tree wood, likewise took root in a place in the vicinity

of Muar, where it still exists. The rests for the Siamese cooking

places also took root and grew up, and are to be seen at this day at

the place named Tumang Siam.” I was unable to find out the locality

of the places here mentioned by the author of the Sejdre Maldyu,

though every inquiry was made near the spots where these scenes

are said to have occurred. The tradition, however, of the defeat of the

Siamese was universally current. In 1511, Aumen, Sultan of Malacca,

on his city bemg taken by the Portuguese, retreated up the Muar

river to a place called Pagoh, about 15 or 16 miles from Gressik, now

under the Panghilu besar, INcut Muir. Sultan Maumu’'pD remained at

Battu Hampar, and founded a fort at Bentayen. According to the

Sejdra Maldyu, the Portuguese pursued Aumep up the river, attacked

and took Pagoh. Aumup fled further up to Panarigan, near Jompdle,

and thence, accompanied by Maumup, repaired to Pahang. The latter

subsequently established himself at Johdre. Many of their adherents

remained in Miar and Segdmet, and in course of time erected a primi-

tive form of government, directed by four elders, styled Tuah Campongs,

who ruled under the Sultans of Johdre until 1119 A. H. The four

campongs were those of Pagoh, Sungie Ring, Sungie Terap, and Gressik.

A. H. 1119. A Mantri of high birth in Johdre, named SamapgE

Rdsa, obtained a grant of the territory of Maar from the then Sultan

4p 2

564 Sketch of the State of Muar, Malay Peninsula. (Serr.

of Johore, Appa JauiL Suan III. He settled at a place called Pantei

Layang on the banks of the river, and ruled till 1145 A. H., when he

died succeeded by his son Papu'ka Tuan; who, on his proceeding to

the court of Johdre, on the occasion of his father’s demise, was invest-

ed by the Sultan Aspat Jauriu with the title of Tumingong Padika

Tuan. He died A. H. 1175, succeeded by his son Burox or Anox,

who was confirmed by Sultan Appa Jatt Suan IV., then resident

at Rhio, whither he had removed from Johdére. Burox died at Binga

Tanjong on the Muar river in 1214 A. H. leaving two sons, Konix

and Israuim. The former went to Lingga to present himself to Sultan

Maumv’p III. by whom he was acknowledged as third Tuméngong of

Muar.

Koni died in 1246, A. H. leaving a son named Syzp, the present

chief, who succeeded him: he also left a daughter. Syzp proceeded

to Singapore, where he was confirmed by the late Sultan, Hussain

Suau I., whom the English had recently placed on the throne of his

ancestors. From him he obtained the title Tumungong Dattu Syed.

It would appear from what has been advanced above, and by the

subsequent Boundary treaties, that Muar has always been feudal to

the Sultan of Johdre since the time of their ancestors, the ancient

sovereigns of Singapore and Malacca. The Dutch, however, when in

possession of Malacca, appear to have claimed Muar, as in the map

of VaLentyn the boundary line of the Dutch territory is made to

extend so far beyond the Muar river as the Rio Formoso.

The Tumingong’s sway is confined to the villages immediately on

the banks of the Muar river and on those of the stream of Segamet,

which empties itself into the Maar about 12 miles above Pankdlang

Kéta. He appears to be popular from his easy temper, and the inha-

bitants feel alarmed at the idea of any change being made in the

government by the Sultan of Johdre. We had an interview with this

Malay chief at a village, about 18 miles up the river, called Gressik.

He acknowledges himself a vassal of Johdre, and sends annually to

the Sultan the amount of a duty levied on the houses of the settlers

at Padang (one dollar per house) and 200 gumpits of rice.

Malayan Albino.—On landing at Gressik I was struck by the sin-

gular appearance of a Malay lad, an Albino, standing under the shade

of atree on the river bank. His skin was of a reddish white, with

blotches here and there, and thinly covered with short white hairs.

The eyes were small and contracted; the iris of a very light vascular

blue ; the lids red, and fringed with short white lashes ; the eyebrows

scant and of the same colour; the pupil much contracted from the

light. On calling him to come near he appeared to be ashamed.

1836.] Sketch of the State of Miar, Malay Peninsula. 565

He evinced an extreme sensibility to the stimulus of light, fronr

which he almost constantly kept his eyes guarded by shading them

with his hands. He told me he could see better than his neighbours

in imperfect darkness, and best by moonlight, like the ‘‘ moon-eyed”

Albinos of the Isthmus of Darien.

He is morbidly sensitive to heat: for this reason and on account of

the superstitious respect with which the Malays regard him, he is

seldom employed by his friends in outdoor labour, although by no

means deficient in physical strength. The credulous Malays imagine

that the Genii have some furtive share in the production of such

curiosities, though this they tell as a great secret. To this day the

tomb of his grandfather, who was also an Albino, is held sacred by the

natives, and vows (niyats) made at it. Both his parents were of the

usual colour. His sister is an Albino like himself.

Albinos, I believe, are not common on the peninsula, nor are there

any tribes of them as, according to VoLraire, exist in the midst of

Africa. In the only two instances I recollect observing, the eyes

were, in both, of a very light blue; the cuticle roughish and of a

rosy blush, very different from that of the two African Albinos seen

and described by Vo.Tarre, and quoted by Lawrence; “ Leur

blancheur n’est pas la nétre; rien d’incarnat, nul mélange de blanc

et de brun, c’est une couleur de linge, ou plutét de cire blanchie ;

leurs cheveux, leurs sourcils sont de la plus belle et de la plus douce

soie; leurs yeux ne resemblent en rien & ceux des autres hommes,

mais ils approchent beaucoup des yeux de perdrix.” Hssai sur les

Meurs.

WauitEtaw Ainstig, in his description of the Albinos of continental

India, ascribes to them the same delicacy of constitution and shyness

observable in the Malayan Albino, and that they are seldom known to

live to an advanced age. The females, he remarks, rarely bear chil-

dren; but when they do, their offspring is of the natural colour of

the cast to which they belong.

Observations on the Maar river.—The Miiar river at the mouth has

an apparent width of about 600 yards, and at Gressik 18 miles up the

stream is about 100 yards broad and 7 fathoms deep. The soundings

at the bar varied from 2 to 4 fathoms low water. The current ran at

the rate of 25 miles an hour. It has its rise, according to the natives,

among the mountains of Jel/aboo, and falls into the sea about 30 miles

south-east of Malacca. From these mountains the Serting river,

which disembogues itself into the China sea at Pahang, and the Calang

river, which flows into the Straits of Malacca near Salangore, have

also their rise. The general direction of the Muar river from the

566 Sketch of the State of Mar, Malay Peninsula. __— (Surr.

mouth to Gressik we found to be N.E.—its course tortuous, the banks

for the most part low, muddy, and covered, with the exception of the

vicinity of villages and a few Ladang clearings, with dense jungle.

Among the trees near the river’s margin we observed the mangrove,

the Nipah palm, (the Nypa fruticans of TaunsErG,) the Nibong, (the

Areca Tigillaria of Dr. Jacx,) the Api-Api, (Pyrrhanthus Littoreus,)

the Pedada, the Neridi, and the Bita-Bita.

The water of the river was more turbid than that of the Lingie,

which might be owing to the freshes from the hills. The paucity of

cultivation, thinness of population, and the almost total absence of

trading boats and even fishing canoes on the river, could not fail to

strike the most careless observer. By this river there is a communi-

cation, almost all the way by water, with the eastern coast of the

peninsula, frequently adopted by the Pahang traders. The navigation

was formerly under the control of a Bugis chief named Unxv’ Kta’na,

who settled at the mouth of the river; and, after him, under his son

Raja Issa: but on the return of the latter to Rio in 1826, it reverted

to the Tumingong. |

In former days the mouth of the river was a noted place of rendez-

vous for the fleets of the Siamese, and in later times of the Malay

princes, in their attacks on Malacca during the Portuguese and Dutch

administrations. The last instance occurred in 1784, when Radja

Hapsi, the Maida of Rhio, anchored there with a fleet of 170 prows

on his way to invade Malacca ; an enterprize in which he lost his

life.

Gold Mines of Bukit Raya.—Gold dust is found a short distance

from the left bank of the river at Bukit Raya, a low hill covered with

forest, which was pointed out to us by the guides. There were, we

were told, formerly gold mines on and at the foot of this hill worked

by Malays, who were compelled to quit them through the exactions

of the petty chiefs. The Tumingong had brought down with him in his

own boat to Gressik, two Chinese miners, with the view of ascertaining

whether any mining speculations there would be likely to turn out

profitably or otherwise. I have not heard the result. Tin is also

found near Bukit Raya.

From Gressik we saw a range of hills at a great distance running

down the peninsula in a south-easterly direction, one of the highest

of which is called Siang-battu, the Cave of the Rock. From this

mountain, the natives affirm, flow the rivers of Battu Pahat, (the Rio

Formoso of the Portuguese,) Pontian, Undéwe, Roompin, Bennoon, and

Johore ; the last of which streams empties itself into the sea at the

extremity of the peninsula: on its left bank stood the capital of the

MAA LNOUd

MBIA NIWE-

mn __=¢ |

| | i i Satie

iva | Tery ly

Vol.V. PLXAAVI

ie,

= SSS :

Lf Wy

wre

fov4.g-90) Ag (pa.towoosyp SANTTIS #2 oI7PAL

Journ.As. Soc.

1836.] Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. 567

Malay empire of Johdére. This range of mountains seems to be a

continuation, if I may so term it, of the broken chain running down

the peninsula through the States of Quédah, Perak, Salangore, Stingie-

ujong, Rumbéwe, Jellaboo, and Srimenanti, terminating near Point

Romania, and probably having their origin in the lofty ranges which

overlook the vast steppes of Northern Asia.

VI.—Notle on the discovery of a relic of Grecian Sculpture in Upper

India. By Lieut.-Col. L. R. Stacy. Plate XXXI.

[In a letter to the Editor, dated Aligarh, 29th February, 1836.]

I have the pleasure to enclose two sketches exhibiting the obverse and

reverse of what appears to me a Grecian perirranterion (Mepippayrnpiov (1)

in stone (Italian, tazza*). The block, which is three feet in width,

three feet ten inches high, and one foot four inches thick at the base,

is of the hard red sandstone with white spots, which is found so

plentifully in the Agra district, particularly in the neighbourhood of

Fattehpir Sikré, and of which the greater number of the ancient build-

ings at Agra are constructed.

- This relic was given to me by a friend at Mathura : it is in a very

mutilated state, but fortunately sufficient development of it remains

to determine, I think, its original character and use.

The obverse represents SrteNus inebriated ; he is reclining on a

low seat or throne, supported on either side by a young male and

female Grecian. Two minor figures support the knees: the attitude

of Sizznvs, the drooping of the head, the lips, and powerless state of

the limbs, give an extremely accurate representation of a drunken

man. ‘The figures of the youth and maiden are also in appropriate

keeping. The whole is evidently the work of an able artist, who could

not possibly, in my opinion, have been a native of Hindustan.

The reverse appears to have been executed by a less skilful person,

and the figures carry an Indian style about them. The back-ground

represents a grove, and the trees are loaded with fruit. Four figures

are conspicuous in front: on the left hand a Grecian girl, with short

tunic and loose drapery falling to the ground; her sandals are orna-

mented; her right hand is grasped by the right hand of the figure

next to her, a young man, whose apparel is confined to a jhangi: he

has a kerchief round the neck with a tie in front as worn by sailors.

Next to this is another female in a Grecian dress ;: she would seem to

right, who is in the act of putting on woman’s attire. The bracelets

(1) Vide Potrer’s Grecian Antiquities, vol. i, pp. 224 and 262.

*. Vide Moszs’ Antique Vases, Pl. 95.

568 Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. [Szer.

be highly amused with the person (a young man) immediately on her

of this female reach half way to the elbow, and are most elaborately

and beautifully executed, but the appearance of this figure is less

elegant than that on the extreme left. At the feet of the group are

goblets. The heads of the figures are bound with vine leaves.

The figures on the obverse are on a larger scale than those on the

reverse: the deficiency on the reverse is supplied by trees, forming a

grove. The whole supports a circular bason or font measuring sixteen

inches in diameter, and which must have been originally about eight

inches in depth. As already noticed, this relic is sadly mutilated,

and it is probable the bigotry of Muhammadans, (who perhaps consi-

dered the work connected with Hindu idolatry,) occasioned the injury

done to the faces and breasts of all the figures and a great part of

the bowl. Enough, however, remains to identify it as representing

a scene in the Bacchanalian festivals.

For the present I will simply add, that should this piece of sculp-

ture prove to be what I conjecture it to be, the correctness of WILTon

and Jonss’ (2) opinions will be strongly evidenced, when they asserted

a similarity of the gods of the Greeks and Indians, and that this led

to intermarriages, and thus the former merged into and were ulti-

mately lost sight of in the Indian community. (8)

Norre.—The discovery of a piece of sculpture bearing evident

reference to Greek mythology, if not boasting as unequivocally of

the beauty and perfection of Grecian sculpture, might excite less

surprize after the elaborate display we have lately had of coins

found in Upper India and in the Panjab with Grecian legends, and

a combination of Hindu and Greek deities. Yet, in fact, the latter

offer no explanation to the former—on the contrary, they relate

exclusively to a period comparatively modern, when the worship of

Mithra spread through the world with the rapidity of the element of

which he was the type, and superseded ina great measure the more an-

cient superstitions ; whereas the worship of Bacchus—or of Sitenus, his

wine-inspired counsellor, must belong to a much more remote period—

nor can we trace any clue to it in the present mythology of the

Hindus. True there have been traditions preserved in the West, of

Baccuus’ expedition to India, and of the easy conquest every where

following the steps of the hero who could make rivers run with

wine—and fought with an army of laughing Bacchantes aad satyrs.

(2) Vol. i. p. 221, Asiatic Researches.

(3) This opinion of WiLTon’s is quoted in ConpErR’s History of India. I

cannot immediately say in which vol. of the As. Researches it is to be found.

1836. ] Note on Grecian Sculpture in Upper India. 569

The Dionysiacs of Nonnus have been quoted by Colonel Winrorp,

and analysed by Professor WiLson in our Researches—but without

hinting at their hero having been grafted on the pantheistic system

of India. Nishapur, Déva-Nahushanagar, and other towns, have been

pointed out as the site of Nysa, Nicea, or Dionysiopolis, where the

extravagant rites of Dionysos’ worship were celebrated with the

greatest pomp :—where, according to some authorities, he was born—

where, according to others, he founded a city in honor of a damsel,

Nica#a, whom he encountered in his expedition through Persia and

Bactria :—but all is vague and uncertain on the subject. The Indian

origin indeed of the religion of Baccuus, long ago asserted and

believed, has lately come to be suspected from the want of any

arguments in its favor but a few slight resemblances of names and

ceremonies. Professor A. W. ScHLEGEL expressly denies in his

Indian Library, that the Greeks had, previous to the conquests of

ALEXANDER, any idea of an expedition of Baccuus to or from India*.

The author on whose authority this opinion is repeated, Mr. T.

Keiecut.ey, thus traces the origin of the confusion :—

«© When ALExanver and his army had penetrated to the modern

~Cabul, they found ivy and wild vines on the side of Mount Merus

and on the banks of the Hydaspes: they also met processions,

accompanied by the sound of drums and parti-colored dresses, like

those worn in the Bacchic orgies of Greece and Lesser Asia. The

flatterers of the conqueror took thence occasion to fable that Dionysius

had, like Hercutzs and their own great king, marched as a conqueror

throughout the east: had planted there the ivy and the vine, had

built the city of Nysa, and named the fountain Merus from the circum-

stance of his birth from the thigh of Zeus. At length, during the

time of the Greco-Bactric kingdom, some Greek writers, on whom

it is probable the Brahmans imposed, as they have since done on the

Englisht, gave out that Dionysus was a native Indian, who having

taught the art of wine-making in that country, made a conquering

expedition through the world to instruct mankind in the culture of

the vine and other useful arts. And thus the cultare of the vine

came to Greece from a land which does not produce that plant!

This last is the absurd hypothesis which we have seen renewed in

our own days, and supported by all the efforts of ingenious ety-

mology !’”

Colonel Stacy’s group may throw a new light on this curious

question. There can be no doubt as to the personage represented

by the principal figure—his portly carcass, drunken lassitude, and

* KrerGHTLey’s Mythology of Greece, 170. t+ Alluding to Col. Wrirorp.

570 Description of some Gramineous Plants. [Supr.

wine-wreathed forehead, stamp the individual: while the drapery of

his attendants pronounces them at least to be foreign to India, what-

ever may be thought of S1nunvs’ own costume, which is certainly highly

orthodox and Brahmanical. If the sculptor were a Greek, his taste

had been somewhat tainted by the Indian beau ideal of female beauty

—in other respects his proportions and attitudes are good—nay, supe-

rior to any specimen of pure Hindu sculpture we possess: and consi-

dering the object of the group—to support a sacrificial vase (probably

of the juice of the grape)—it is excellent. It would be time well be-

stowed to survey all the temples and antiquities of Mathura, in search

for other specimens of Grecian art. Colonel Sracy can have no

greater inducement to undertake this pleasing task, than the posses-

sion of the highly interesting relic which we have made a faint at-

tempt to introduce to the eye of our readers in the accompanying

lithograph.—Eb.

VII.—Description of some Grasses which form part of the Vegetation in

the Jheels of the district of Sylhet. By Witi1am Grirritus, Esq.

Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment.

Zizania ? cruiaTa. Spreng Syst. il. p. 1386; Kunth Agr.p.10.

Leersia citiaTa. Roxb. Fl. Ind. p. 207.

Puarus cruiatus. Retz. Obs. 5. p. 23.

Gramen in aquosis proveniens, culmis gracilibus basi longe repen-

tibus, articulis cylindraceis pubescentibus, ceeterum levibus.

Folia subglaucescentia, linearia, acuta, supra lineata et tactu scabra,

margine subsimplici scabro.

Spice pauce, distantes, subsecundz, in paniculam nutantem alter-

natim disposite. :

Spicule solitariz, in apice cyathiformi pedicelli curvati articulate,

subsessiles, uniflore.

Glumez null, nisi cupulam membranaceam apicis pedicelli glumam

existimes.

Pale 2, chartaceo-coriacee, compresso-carinate, mutice, obtuse

mucronate, brevissime stipitate, stipite crasso rotundato; exterior

5-venia, vena media (carina) duabusque marginalibus denticulato-

ciliatis, duabus intermediis subglabris, interveniis scabris ; interior

3-venia, paullo brevior, carina denticulato-ciliaté, intervenio scabro,

ceeterum leviuscula.

Lodicule 2 carnose, acinaciformes, integre, glabre.

Stamina 6, antheris longe exsertis.

Vol. V. PUXXIV.

Tour As, Soc.

SMAw

IAS

Tour As, Soe.

NN RA

Da ios ect eae

NSS

iis

W. Grofith del. Sept? 1635.

Lixania ? ciliata.

, SL

AG A

——

Vel. Ve PLXXIV,

AB. Tasting Lith! Press. Coleulte.

Petamochloa Reteii.

1836.] Description of some Gramineous Plants. 571

Ovarium ovato-oblongum, glabrum. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa,

divisionibus ramosis, ratione stylorum longa.

Caryopsis ....

Legimus in aquosis Jumalpore, in plagis inundatis, Jheels verna-

cule dictis, Sylhet confinibus ; in collibus Khasiensibus prope Nunklow ;

et nuperius in regione Assamica alta; annis 1835-36.

With regard to this grass, we have Mr. Brown’s authority (Prodr.

Fl. Nov. Holl. ed. Nees 1. p. 67, sub Leptaspide) for its being

totally distinct from Pharus, to which it was originally referred

by Rerzivs. Mr. Brown likewise points out (loc. cit.) that this and

the succeeding, if not retainable in Zzania, will constitute a distinct

genus. It will be seen that I have ventured to go farther, and I am

only deterred from characterizing this as itself distinct, by the diffi-

culty I find in distinguishing it from Leersia, with which genus I am

only acquainted through M. Kunrtn’s Agrostographia. Its obvious

affinity is with Oryza, from the awnless varieties of which it only dif-

fers in the total absence of glumes; the presence of the membranous

cup terminating the pedicel in Oryza proving, that it is not to be consi-

dered as a modification of these envelopes.

PotaMocHLoa. Griff.

Syst. Linn. Hezandria Digynia. Order, Nat. Graminee, Juss.

Spicule uniflore. Glume null. Palez 2 membranaceo-chartacee,

carinate, aperte, exteriore in aristam producta. Lodicule 2. Stamina

6. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa.

Caryopsis......

Gramen fluitans ope vaginarum cellulosarum, dense cespitosum.

Folia lata; ligula obsoleta. Panicula effusa erecta; pedicelli infra

medium constricti.

Poramocuioa Retz. Griff.

ZiZANIA? ARISTATA. Kunth, Agr. p. 10.

Legrsia AnistaTa. Roxb. Flor. Ind. 2. p. 207.

Puarus Aaristatus. Retz. Obs. 5, 23, ex Kunth.

Hab. In aquis stagnantibus prope Jumalpore, et copiosissime

in inundatis, Jheels dictis, Sylhet confinibus. Legimus florentem

Septembre, 1835.

Culmi emersi vix pedales, glabri. Immersi longissimi, hinc illine

radiculas capillaceo-divisas emittentes.

Vagine immerse vel semi-immerse quam maxime cellulose, in-

crassate et quasi inflate; emerse longiores cylindracee, minus

cellulose.

452

Be Description of some Gramineous Plants. (Serr.

Folia in exemplaribus spontaneis semper emersa et erecta*, lanceo-

lata, basi cordata, obtusa, apice sub-cucullata, rigida, supra tactu

scabra.

Panicula erecta, axi ad ejus originem subito angustata; rami infimi

subverticillati, divaricati, superiores alternantes, ascendentes.

Spicule ramis adpressz, subsecunde, inferiores geminate, inequa-

liter pedicellatz, superiores solitariz longius pedicellate.

Pedicelli clavati, infra medium constricti, ibidemque annulo rubro

Insigniti, spicularum infimarum curvati.

Palez sessiles, apicum pedicellorum continue! vix compresse ;

exterior major 5-venia, venis denticulato-ciliatis, ceterum parce hirta ;

arista continua, recta, scabra, paleam excedens ; interior mutica, acu-

Mminata, 3-venia, carina denticulato-scabra, venis lateralibus levibus,

pallidis.

Lodicule 2, subacinaciformes, magne, extrorsum gibbose et car-

nose, introrsum sub-membranacee, glabre vel apice ciliate.

Stamina 6. Filamenta longe exserta. Anthere lineares, longe.

Ovarium oblongum, glabrum.

Stigmata ratione stylorum longiuscula.

Caryopsis non visa ; stipitata?

It is this genus that appears to me allied to Zizania. It differs,

I conceive, materially from the preceding in habit, in the shape and

consistence of the pale, which are open during the period of inflo-

rescence, and in the outer one being awned.

Vossia. Wall. et Griff. Mss.

Syst. Linn. Triandria Digynia.

Ordo. Nat. Graminee, Jussieu.

Char. Gen.—Spica compressa, articulata, rachi flexuos4 excavata.

Spiculz in singulo articulo due, altera sessili, altera pedicellata, biflore.

Glumez 2 dissimiles, exterior chartaceo-cartilaginea, plana, apice in

cuspidem producta; interior chartacea, mutica, carinato-navicularis.

Flosculi hyalini, mutici; superior (interior) hermaphroditus (in spi-

cula pedicellata seepius masculus), bivalvis 3-venius. Lodicule 2,

cuneate, dentate. Stamina 3. Styli 2. Stigmata plumosa. Caryopsis. .

Flosculus inferior masculus, bivalvis, bivenius !

Gramen procerum, fluitans, cespitosum.

Culmi 3—4-stachyi. Folia longissima, acuminatissima, plana, vena

centrali crassa alba. Ligula indivisa, dense ciliata. Diximus in memo-

riam b. Johannis Georgii Vossii, poetee Germanorum dulcissimi, eru-

* In exemplaribus in horto botanico Calcutte cultis natantia, oblongiora et

teneriora.

CTPA) 994.) » WT supeen, og 6!

pep “aunsd png Uiniyong .

Wrz | arco DIPSSO

. Le

Vet. Ve FE. XXL

Ludimun Sty yramen del

Vossia procera.

We Griffith: aaalysin del.

SD, Tessa i's 459° Preis — (eal

1836. ] Description of some Gramineous Plants. 573

ditissimi, poematum grecorum et latinorum, imprimis Georgici Virgi-

liani translatoris et commentatoris locupletissimi, rerum botanicarum

et agrestium insigniter periti.

Vossta PRocERA. Wall. et Griff. Mss.

Iscuamum cuspipatum, Rowxb. Flor. Ind. ed. Carey, 1. p. 325.

Kunth, Agr. 1. p. 516.

Hab. In inundatis vernacule Jheels dictis prope Hubbeganje, flumi-

nis Barak, Bengale orientalis. Florentem invenimus mense Septem-

bris, 1835.

Gramen glaucescens, in aquis stagnantibus leniter fluentibus pro-

fundis nascens. Culmi immersi longissimi, crassi, cellulosi, radi-

culas capillaceas ad geniculas emittentes, emersi 3—4-pedales, vagi-

nis laxis, compyessiusculis, tactu scabris undique tecti.

Vagina-

rum axille gemmifere ; colla dense barbata.

Ligula brevis truncata.

Folia lineari, ensiformia, basi subcordata, longissime subulato-acu-

minata, 2, 23 pedalia, supra parce pubescentia, infra glabra, vena

centrali crassa, alba, supra plana, subtus prominula, marginibus car-

tilagineis antrorsum denticulatis.

Spice terminales, bine vel terne, rarius quaterne, digitate, 6—8-

unciales, patentes, subnutantes, laterales subsessiles, rudimento alterius

interdum adjecto, terminalis pedunculata, insertionibus cartilagineis

plus minus hispidis. Rachis introrsum planiuscula, extrorsum con-

vexa ; flexuris dextrorsis sinistrorsisque, marginibus scabris. Spicule

pedicellatz, infimz summezeque tabescentes. Pedicelli spicularum inferio-

rum articulis paullo longiores. Gluma exterior dorso plana, venoso-

striata, apice producta in cuspidem ensiformem, longam, glumam

ipsam fere bis superantem, rectam, vel subundalatam, venoso-striatam,

marginibus denticulato-scabris.

Interior navicularis, carina obliqua a medio supra scabra, breviter

mucronata, irregulariter venosa, vena centrali nunc incompleta, inter-

mediis incompletis et seepius, presertim spicule sessilis, cum vena cen-

trali arcuatim confluentibus.

Palez flosculi exterioris masculi membranacee, complanate, bivenie !

exterior apiculo brevi pubescente: marginibus mutuo involutis sub-

ciliatis.

Lodicule 2, carnose, maxime, cuneate, angustiores quam in flosculo

hermaphrodito, dentate. Anthere longe exsertz, lineares, lutez.

Pollen globosum, inzquale, leve. Rudimentum feeminei nullum.

Palez flosculi interioris hermaphroditi consimiles, sed exterior trive-

nia. Lodicule staminaque ut in mare. Ovarium subobovatum,

glabrum. Styli duo, umbone nullo interjecto.

574 Description of some Gramineous Plants. [Supr.

Stigmata ratione stylorum longa, ramis denticulatis. Caryopsis. . .

Spicule stipitate flosculi minores, et superior interior rarius her-

maphroditus.

Obs. Genus habitu quodammodo Tripsaci, Hemarthriz accedens,

sed discrepans precipue pedicellis flosculorum exteriorum glumisque

interioribus spicularum sessilium solutis, nec axi adnatis, flosculisque

exterioribus bipaleaceis masculis, nec unipaleaceis neutris. Ab

Ischemo diflert preecipue paled exteriore flosculi hermaphroditi (supe-

rioris) mutica.

Panicum Brunonianum. Wall. et Griff. Mss.

Panicula effusa, spiculis 1 vel 2 infimis sessilibus et in axis excava-

tionibus seminidulantibus, reliquis exsertis seepissime solitariis, rachilla

in aristam spiculam duplo superantem producta, foliis linearibus 3-

veniis vaginisque glabris, ligulis 3-dentatis.

Hab. In aquis leniter currentibus profundis plagarum Bheels dicta-

rum prope Goalnagar ; florens Septembre.

Gramen fiuitans : culmi longissimi, compressiusculi, ad geniculos ra-

dicantes. Vaginarum colla nuda. Ligulz dens intermedius minor. Folia

linearia, 2—3-uncialia, obtusiuscula, 3-venia, marginibussubsimplicibus

denticulatis. Panicula terminalis, ambitu ovata, subglabra, axi inferne

tetragona et excavata. Spicule 1 vel 2 infime in excavationibus semi-

nidulantes ; reliquee exserte szpissime solitarie ; rachilla scabra ultra

spiculam quamque si unica, ultra terminalem si geminata, in aristam

subulatam, antrorsum denticulatam producta. Gluma exterior minima,

membranacea, evenia, subcrenulata, decolorata; interior lanceolata,

acuta, mutica, venosa (sub-13-venia,) marginibus parum involutis

subciliatis. Flosculi dissimiles; exterior masculus, duplo triplove

major: palea exterior glume interiori similis, sed scabrella et margines

magis involuti; interior duplo minor breviorque, membranacea, glabra,

apice bifida, cente setiformi minimo interdum interjecto, venis 2

indistinctis infra-apicem evanidis. Lodicule 2, palez interiori omnino

externe, oblonge, subrhomboidez, integre. Stamina 3, antheris

rubro-sanguineis. Paleze floris interioris foeminei membranacez, mu-

tice, ovato-lanceolate, exterior evenia! interior latior, magis obtusa et

involuta, incomplete bivenia. Staminum rudimenta tria. Lodicule

2 anguste, interdum coalite ? Styli 2, ima basi coaliti, longi; stigmata

plumosa, purpurascentia, ratione stylorum longissima.. Caryopsis non

visa.

This species belongs to the last section of this extensive genus, as

given in Mr. Brown’s Prodromus ; it is interesting, as it seems to be

the only species of the section hitherto found out of New Holland.

1836.] Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. 578

In the disposition of the sexes it agrees with Isachne, but differs

from it in habit, in the relative size of its glumes, and in the consist-

ence of its palee. From Chameraphis this section differs only, we

are told by Mr. Brown, in the number of its styles. The curious

prolongation of the rachilla beyond the terminal spicula likewise

occurs in some genuine Panica.

REFERENCES.

Plate XXIII. Vossia procera. Figs. 1, 2. Portions of a spike viewed on

different faces. 3, Spicula detached. 4, Exterior glume viewed on its inner

face. 5, Outer palea of the inner hermaphrodite flower three-veined (by a fault

in the transfer the central vein in the original drawiog has been left out.) 6,

Inner palea of ditto two-veined. 7, Outer palea of exterior male flower, two-

veined. 8, Inner ditto, two-veined. 9, Inner glume, viewed laterally and on its in-

ner face. 10, Pollen. 11, Ovarium, or rather Pistillum, with the two lodicule and

the three filaments in situ. 12, Outer view of lodicula. 13, Inner view of

ditto, the lateral stamina separate with these. 14, Portion of a branch of

the stigma.

Plate XXIV. Left half. Zizania? ciliaris. Fig. 1, Spicula. 2, Apex of

pedicel, much enlarged. 3, Ditto with lower portion of the outer palea. 4,

Lateral view of inner palea. 5, Lateral view of lodicule, stamina and pistillum ;

palez removed. 6, Pollen. 7, Pistillum. 8, Portion of a branch of the stigma.

9, Genitalia, relative situation, from a young spicula; anthers removed, and

the lodicule displaced. —

The same plate, right half. Potamochloa Retzii. Fig. 1, Spicula with its

pedicel, that of the second pedicel removed at the time of expansion. 2, Portion

of the pedicel, shewing the construction. 3, Outer palea, dorsal face. 4, Inner

ditto ditto. 5, Ovarium, stamina and lodicule, the two former in situ, the latter

displaced. 6, Pollen. 7, Ovarium, styles and stigmata with the lodicule in situ.

8, One of the divisions of the stigma. 9, Lodicula, inner face.

VIII.—Notes on Delhi Point, Pulo-Tinghie, 8c. and on some Pelagic

Fossil remains, found in the rocks of Pulo-Ledah. By Wm. Buanp, Esq.

Surgeon H. M. S. Wolf.

[Accompanying specimens presented to the As. Soc. 4th July, and deposited in

the Museum, next to those presented by Dr. Warp from Penang and Queda. ]

Where the Malay peninsula terminates in the China sea, there is

a tongue of land, called by the natives Delhi Point, somewhere about

104 E. longitude, for it is not very correctly laid down. Reefs are

found here, running to the southward and eastward, upwards of a

mile at low water. Along shore, for the space of two or three miles,

is strewed with large masses of scorie many feet thick, hard, and

emitting a metallic sound. Specimens Nos. 1 and 4 will show the

kind of vesicular masses mentioned ; long lines of perpendicular strata

are found stretching generally parallel to the shore, from three to

576 Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. [Sepr:

eighteen inches in thickness, of which No. 6 is a specimen. Indu-

rated clayslate, No. 9, is likewise seen in layers running parallel, and

in juxta-position to Nos. 1 and 2, of a few inches in breadth. Quartz

was found, No. 5, in layers from one to two inches in thickness,

accompanying the others and occasionally crossing them, and again

continuing its course: imbedded masses of siliceous matter occurred

both in the scorie and in the strata. A nucleus, five or six feet in

diameter, was examined, which presented the appearance as if lava

in a liquid form had been forced up from below, with a gyrating

motion ; circular layers having different shades of colour becoming

wider and more extended, and were found edging away into straight

lines parallel to the other strata. Of the tube marked No. 2, many

were found from half an inch to two inches diameter; whilst No. 3

was got at the outer edge of the stratification. Of the remarkable

specimen No. 10, abundance were seen, always standing up an edge:

above the general level, and occasionally many feet in length, a piece

might be found large enough to furnish forth the reticulations of a

good-sized Gothic window.

At the N.E. point of the reef, within a few yards of the sandy

beach, and dry at low water, was found a fossil tree, of which No.

11 is a specimen, standing at least 15 feet high and of considerable

diameter, attached toa mass of rock of the same kind, and so good

was the resemblance to a decayed tree, that some of the seamen

called out, ‘ Come and see a tree grilled into stone by the heat.’ The

fossil in question must have been in a decayed state previous to its

exposure to the mineralizing process, and it is the more remarkable,

as it now stands, to all appearance, as it originally stood when alive :—

it is the same as No. 9, composed of argillaceous schist. A specimen

of coral No. 7, which has been exposed to the same general igneous

agency as the masses scattered around, and found in the masses

themselves, Madrepore No. 8, but the whole of the reef has coral of

recent growth scattered over it, in all states and ages. Our stay on

this point only extended to a few hours: little opportunity was given

for minute observation, but it is a field well worthy the attention of

future travellers in that quarter.

Pulo-Tinghie will be found in the charts to the northward and east-

ward of Delhi Point: this island rises to a considerable altitude, and

terminates in a graceful truncated cone, with a lower cone seen to the

southward of the former. The general surface presents irregular ridges

radiating from the cone as a centre, running down to the circumfer-

ence, 1. e. the water’s edge, which disposition of surface often obtains

in volcanic islands. Be this, however, as it may; we found Pulo-

1836.) Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. 577

Tinghie densely covered with jungle, most difficult to penetrate, with-

out more time than our public duties permitted ; hence the specimens

are not numerous, and were found along shore, generally from masses

lying about. Nostratum was seen. The island terminates to the east-

ward in a high reddish coloured cliff, but at which we had no oppor-

tunity of landing.

Nine specimens marked Pigeon island, from a moderately high

and cliffy islet some miles to the southward of Pulo-Tinghie, obtaining

its name from the abundance of a fine cream-coloured pigeon, having

the wings and tail tipped with black ; the same bird which is found

on the small islands on the Tenasserim coast. No. 25, from a large

mass partly beneath the surface of the sea. 21, high cliffs around,

as well as No. 22.

Returning from the eastward, we had an opportunity of examining

a group of small islands called Pulo-Romania. These islets, about

two miles to the southward of Point Romania on the Malay peninsula,

are partially covered with wood, and appear to be formed chiefly of

granite of two kinds, which was seen checquered by fissures in all

directions, and intersected by Nos. 34 and 35, found standing above

the general level in narrow ridges, the granite being more easily

disintegrated than the intersections themselves. No. 31 found in

layers of various ,thickness, and No. 29 in large irregular masses

some 15 feet in length, on shore or partly immersed in the sea.

Enclosed are thirty specimens, from a remarkable group of islands,

lying between Jan Salang, (Juak Ceylon) and Pulo-Pinang, parallel to

the kingdom of Quédah and im sight of the mainland. Passing over ma-

ny islands visited, all of which will be found worthy the attention of the

geologist, and the ornithologist, as well-as the conchologist, I shall

only mention Pulo-Ledah, as one of considerable importance, from

the circumstance of pelagic fossil remains being found in the rocks.

Pulo-Ledah dedarat, literally inthe Malay language, ‘ Tongue island in

shore,’ to distinguish this from another Pulo-Ledah de laut, or ‘ Tongue

island at sea.’ This island is about a mile anda half in circumference,

and rises to the height of 4 or 500 feet, crowned by a castellated

looking rock with perpendicular strata: the whole appears composed

of limestone, having a considerable proportion of siliceous matter

deposited in it, with veins of quartz a few inches in breadth occa-

sionally intersecting it. The general rock was found stratified from

one to three or four feet in thickness, lying at an angle about 45°

dipping to the eastward ; all the surface, wherever exposed, is rough

and uneven, of which Nos. 15and 24 are specimens. Numerous caverns

were found whose roofs not being so exposed were more smooth,

578 Notes on Dehli Point, Pulo-Tinghie, &c. (Serr.

which caves have been evidently formed by the action of the waves

impinging against the rocks ; which action is still going on in certain

situations. Some caverns were situated higher up, and not now exposed

to the same agency, but it was noticed in a few of them that the

entrances were smooth, similar to those in various parts of the world,

which have been used, and smoothed down by the ingress and egress

of wild animals : it turned out, however, in this case, that the agent

that had worn these entrances was man himself, for these caves

furnish him with troglodytic abodes during the season for collecting

the nests of the Hirundo esculenta.

Your attention may be more particularly called to the north side

of Pulo-Ledah, where will be found large masses of the same rock,

from 20 to 30 feet in length and breadth, and 10 feet in thickness,

lying in juxta-position, and no doubt originally deposited en masse,

but having been raised unequally, have been broken into their present

form and appearance. These masses were found rich in fossil remains ;

quantities of testaceous deposits were seen in all directions, partly

above the general surface, undergoing disintegration along with the

matrix in which they were imbedded. Of the fossil nautilus, No. 16,

many were seen, as well as some others, concerning which some

doubt may remain whether or not they are ammonites. As to the

nautilus no doubt can exist, for the plain concave septe dividing the

chambers of the shell are well marked, with the siphuncle in the

middle. Had time and better tools permitted, better specimens would

have been procured; but the matrix was found very indurated, and

it requires time to take such specimens out of hard stone, in a perfect

state. The labourer, always worthy of his hire, would here be richly

repaid for his time and trouble.

I add the rough sketch of a shell as it was a lying in the

matrix, and of the natural size, which gives a tolerable idea of its

general appearance. Siliceous cylinders No. 22, occur frequently,

and a back bone was found in a fossilized state: from the round cup-

like appearance of the vertebre, it is most probably that of a fish.

Pulo-Ledah is one of the Lancavies, as well as Pulo-Trotto, (Giant’s

island,) an island, high, mountainous, and worthy of being better

known ; and Pulo-Tloer (Egg island) is a small one ; but the whole of

the islands in question will be found interesting, as on this subject

of fossil remains many of your correspondents in India are devoting

their time and attention with great success. Iam sorry our time

among the islands mentioned was so limited, but it is enough that I

have pointed them out as a field worthy of future research, as well as

the main land opposite.

1836.] Fossil remains from the Sub-Himdlayas. 579

IX.—Fossil Remains of the smaller Carnivora from the Sub-Himdlayas.

By Lieut. W. E. Baker and Lieut. H. M. Duranp, Engineers.

The specimens which are the subject of the following note form a

part of the Dadiptr Collection, and comprise varieties of the genera,

Felis, Canis, and Gulo.

The comparison of such, with their existing representatives, must

necessarily be less satisfactory than that of the large Pachydermatous

genera, which being local in their habitats either contain few species,

as the Elephant, Hippopotamus, and Tapir, or when, as in the Rhi-

noceros, the varieties are more numerous, the size of the animals, and

the striking peculiarities of their osteology have claimed for them a

minute description and comparison from Cuvier. On the other hand,

the smaller carnivorous tribes have a far wider distribution, and their

species are as numerous and as varied as the climates under which

they are found ; their distinctions are chiefly drawn from the exter-

nal characters of the animals. Minute differences in their osteology,

if they exist at all, escape the attention of the naturalists who describe

them, and would, in fact, possess little interest except for the fos-

silist.

We should not be warranted in pronouncing any particular fossil to

belong to an extinct species, without having previously compared it

with all the known varieties of its genus ; and even were such exten-

sive means of comparison in our power, its result could not be deci-

sive*, so long as there remained unexplored regions, whence new

varieties might be derived. We shall, therefore, content ourselves

with negative conclusions drawn from comparison of our fossils, with

the skulls of those species only of their existing congeners now in-

habiting the neighbouring districts, none other being at our command.

Such conclusions, we hope, will not be without geological interest ; as,

if we succeed in establishing one or two points of marked difference,

they will be sufficient proof that the animals now inhabiting these

provinces are not the lineal descendants of those whose remains are

entombed in the strata of their soil, and thence may be inferred the

occurrence of some great geological change during the lapse of ages,

which have intervened between the periods of their several existence.

Frxis.

' Of this genus there are traces of several varieties among our fossils,

but as the larger ones, with the Hyena and Canis, may form the subject

* For instance, in the 52nd No. of the Journal As. Soc. Mr. Hopason de-

scribes two new species of gulo and one of felis.

580 Fossil remains of the smaller Carnivora [Sepr.

of a future paper, we will confine our present notice to the Cat. The

cranium represented in fig. 1, Pl. XX VII. though somewhat mutilated,

is sufficiently perfect for comparison. The most serious injury which it

has sustained (as being the only one affecting the measurements) is a

slight crush or compression, which has apparently flattened, and per-

haps widened the cranium. The proportions between the fossil and the

skull of a common-sized wild or jungle cat are as follows :—the length

from posterior of occipital condyle to anterior of canine tooth being

taken as the unit or modulus, and those dimensions only being col-

lated, in which the greatest differences exist. The two skulls may be

understood to correspond in other respects.

a ET

Recent. Fossil.

Length from post. of occipital condyle to ant. of canine

tooth, assumed at .... cece ee cece cece ce we cee scenecs 1,000 1,000

Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid processes,.. 908 ,581

Height of occiput from lower margin of foramen magnum

to top of transverse ridge, ..-...-..--2sseeseseseeee 301 3333

Breadth across the occipital condyles, .......-..-2+ee+-. 9267 3346

Ditto measured externally across most prominent part of

Aire Ofer O Se eeetateiel lel iets suis asc clk aide) cians In nauatah ee reuete 427 3489

Height of orbit perpendicular, but measured in plane of

ODDIERS MMA UMN siete alle avers ckanavote's) <Leye()eleleletls|iafa(etelnfaletalelo\ieetste »289 9257

The differences of proportion exhibited by the foregoing compari-

son are, as will be seen, very trivial. Setting aside the excess in

breadth of the fossil’s cranium, which if not caused is at least exagge-

rated by the crush before alluded to, there will remain no remarkable

points of difference except in the diameter of the orbit, and in the

width across the occipital condyles. The other variations probably

exceed not what may be detected in the skulls of cats belonging to one

species. There are, however, other differences of form not shewn by the

measurements. In the fossil, the post. orbitary apophysis is more

developed, and the plane of its projection more continuous with that of

the frontal bone. The depression of the cranium in rear of this apo-

physis is more marked, giving a greater width to the temporal fosse;—

the bull of the mastoid processes have a more elongated shape, and

are generally larger ; and the transverse ridge of the occipital bone is

higher, sharper, and more prominent. All, or nearly all, these differ-

ences, tend to shew a greater development of the predacious facul-

ties in the fossil,—a circumstance further confirmed by the teeth,

which, though precisely corresponding in form with those of the

cat, are somewhat larger and stronger.

The lower jaw occupying the central place in fig. 2, must have

Vol, V. PLXKVIL.

ATTN

anal

E me

eS SSS ys?

‘ . ae . L

Sublimelayan , Gol fee CIALIS Of 4 he S72 ahi ‘ Ge AI722Z2dIFV A

ty ths ~

: s

" ve !

> Oo ee

2 Mey ¥

1836. ] rom the Sub-Himalayas. 581

belonged to asmaller animal than that which owned the cranium: it

presents no difference worthy of note, from the lower jaw of the wild

eat. The humerus, tibia, and metatarsal bones, forming part of this

interesting little group, appear to have belonged to the same _indivi-

dual as the lower jaw, and it is curious enough that their present

bond of connection is the plate of a small crocodile. The carpal, meta-

carpal and phalangal bones represented in fig. 3, obtained from the

same locality, though at different times, may possibly be assigned to

the same or a similar animal.

GuLo.

Of this genus we possess the fossil skulls of two individuals, one of

which, represented in fig. 4, is nearly perfect : the lower jaws have been

separated at their symphysis and otherwise somewhat mutilated, but

as they were not found attached to the cranium, we may consider

ourselves fortunate in having obtained them at all. The second cranium,

fig. 7, has suffered considerable mutilation, and is without the lower

jaws : we have, however, inserted it in the plate, because though other-

wise less perfect, it has escaped a crush, which appears to have flat-

tened fig. 4. Some differences of proportion between the two fossils

would be accounted for under this supposition.

The recent skulls with which we have compared the above men-

tioned fossils belong to an animal known by the Hindustani name

Bou y=¥ identical, or nearly so, with the Cape Rate/, (Gulo Capensis,

Desm.)

In classing the Biju and Ratel under genus Gulo, we follow the

common system of arrangement; though, as remarked by Cuvisr*,

both the number and character of their teeth would rather place

them with the Mustela Putorius. They appear, in fact, to be indebted

to their plantigrade motion alone for a place among the Gluttons. The

fossils now under consideration correspond in dentition with the Rated

and Biju, and the following table will shew that their resemblance to

the latter in most other respects is very strong.

* Tl convient d’autant mieux de comparer le Ratel au Glouton, que ces deux

quadrupédes sont A peu pres de méme taille; mais outre que le Glouton a six

molaires de plus que le Ratel, le crane de celui-ci est plus large en arriére, son

front moins élevé, son orbite moins cerné, ses arcades zygomatiques moins

hautes, et l’apophyse coronoide de sa machoireinférieure beaucoup moins haute,

plus large, et plus obtuse. Les rapports du Ratel avec le putois, d’apres ses dents

et sa téte, sont certainement plus importans que les différences de marche. Ossee

- mens fossiles.—Tom. IV. Chap. VI.

582 Fossil remains of the smaller Carnivora {Sepr.

aa er oa Fossil.

Biju. |— A——

Fig. 4.—Fig. 7.

Extreme length from posterior of occipital condyles to an-

terior of incisors, taken as the modulus, and assumed at) 1,000 | 1,000 1,000

Preadth measured across mastoid processes, ......-..... _0,581 } 0,592 0,610

Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid processes, -.| 0,457 | 0,443 0,474

Least ditto ditto at temporal fosse, 55 Men Seep nor cr atte 0,226 | 0,258 0,262

Height of occiput from inf. margin of foramen magnum

COMSUps CMOCCIPItale Eide em emelneein es eicie.<s/- ce/e eee eiststerel el sls 0,318 | 0,307 0,343

Breadth of ditto from point to point of styloid PRSEEESESS 0,335 | 0,361 0,394

Ditto across the occipital condyles, ........-....-e00- 0,243 | 0,241 0,248

Ditto of frontal from point to point of post. orbitary apo-

TESS (aoe O-oraige aor Os Or: SOILD TO oS sopodeseen -.| 0,286 | 0,327 0,313

Ditto greatest across zygomatic arches, ..........s+000- 0,546 | 0,543 0,561

Ditto exteriorly across the superior canine WGGIN Coad cade 0,220 | 0,238 0,236

Perpendicular diameter of occipital foramen, . .......... 0,088 | 0,091 0,108

Length from anterior of canine teeth to post. of tubercu-

lows teeth, measured extermally,..):-).ccn.s- «+ cies ce os 0,282 | 0,287 0,287

Breadth of upper jaw measured across carnivorous molars,| 0,347 | 0,339 0,325

Greatest antero-posterior diameter of canine teeth, ......| 0,058 | 0,071 0,067

Width of tuberculous molars, sac csiect are siete «ioe acaaie ee 0,081 | 0,073 0,069

The two fossils, though differing considerably from each other, agree

in the following points of dissimilarity from the recent skull. Their

canine teeth are larger and stronger, and their tuberculous molars

smaller ; the two lines of molars converge towards the muzzle consi-

derably less in the fossil than in the recent, and the individual false

molars are set less obliquely to the line of maxillary. The frontal

is wider between the orbits; the post. orbitary apophyses more pro-

minent, and the depression of the cranium in rear of them less deep ;

the exterior portion of the mastoid processes has a far greater deve-

lopment (fig. 8) ; the transverse occipital ridge is thicker, more rugged

and more prominent, and projects considerably beyond the plane of

the occiput in the prolongation of that of the parietal bones (fig. 5).

Measurements of the recent and fossil lower jaws exhibit no differ-

ences save in the canine teeth, which severally correspond with the

same teeth in the upper jaw. ‘There is, however, in the fossil (fig. 6)

a deep depression in the ramus, which in the recent species is nearly

flat. In our specimen this depression is as marked as in the tiger

and other feline animals. The differences above noted, as before re-

marked with regard to the cat, tend to prove that the ancient species

was even more powerful and savage than its present representative, the

Biju itself, by no means deficient in these qualities. The three recent

skulls examined on this occasion had all suffered more or less from

the violence to which the vigorous self-defence of the animals had

obliged their captors to resort.

Canis VuLpEs.

The specimen represented in figs. 9 and 10, though fortunate in

possessing both lines of molars complete, has suffered much from a

1836.] from the Sub-Himalayas. 583

crush by which the whole posterior portion of the head has been flat-

tened and disfigured. The dimensions selected for comparison in the

following table are those least likely to be affected by the accident.

Our recent specimen belongs to an adult male fox, of a species com-

mon in the N. W. provinces of India. Its size, the colour of its fur,

and other external characters, appear to correspond with the descrip-

tion of C. Corsac (Pauas), which Cuvizr is inclined to identify with

C. Bengalensis of PenNant—figured also in “ Harpwicxer’s Illustra-

tions,” Pl. I]. Parts XV. and XVI.

| Recent. Fossil,

Length from occipital condyle to anterior of canine, taken|

as modulus, and assumed at........ Gea que Sos NoRae 1,000 1,000

Breadth measured across mastoid processes, ............ 390 3433

Least breadth of cranium at the temporal fosse, ........ »205 ,206

Breadth from point to point of styloid processes, ........ 253 »298

Mitta across occipital condyles, .) ssa. 0-1) eegseeum eee. 202 251

Ditto of frontal from point to point of post. orbitary

DTM PIN SES UR Gb Mbeor dba. c ap boutisicc digngonleoce tatoo 287 ,295

Greatest breadth measured "externally across both lines of

BER OMEN SO ste tons Gre ial os: olla eteunienave ts (ue dea esabaesauaay ola amie ces erehs 6 isis 9338 9319

Horizontal diameter of occipital foramen, . ............ »130 ,133

Length occupied by line of molars and canine taken toge-

PLease Peltier cid sicker aiers(eiee se sls veve-n eiayayeca'sisie eaue tear a6 ,500 »470

Ditto ditto MVOLALS ALOE, a eid << aequsbe ed ate’ blere cichs ele ble nie e whet 410 415

The chief differences howe pinbied are those of greater breadth in

the posterior portion of the fossil’s head, and must, though they

appear natural, be liable to the suspicion of having been caused more

or less by the crush before alluded to; but there are some points of

dissimilarity which must be considered free from this objection. The

transverse occipital ridge is thicker and higher in the fossil ; the post.

orbitary apophyses are altogether broader and more prominent ; the

hollow or depression in their upper surface, forming a valley between

the outer edge of the apophysis and the swell of the frontal, (consti-

tuting one of the distinctions between the fox and the other varieties

of canis) is in the fossil more marked. From the rear of these apo-

physes start two ridges, which at first converge towards the occiput in

a curvilinear direction, until the distance between them is reduced to

about half an inch, after which they run nearly parallel for some dis-

tance, and then converge again, till they unite near the occiput and

become blended with the parietal crest. We have been particular in

describing this formation, as a very similar one was observed by

Cuvier in the skull of the ‘‘ Renard Tricolor,” C. cinereo-argenteus,

Linn. It will be observed from the table of measurements, that the

length occupied by the molars and canine teeth together is less in the

fossil, while that occupied by the molars alone is proportionally

greater. This difference is only apparent, and is caused by the ad-

584 Fossil remains from the Sub-Himdlayas. [Supr,

vanced position of the first false molar close to the root of the canine ;

the tooth is probably a deciduous one, not yet replaced by the perma-

nent molar; the unworn state of the other teeth also attesting the

youth of the fossil, at the period of its demise. The lower jaws, figs.

11 and 12, are not sufficiently perfect to afford any satisfactory mea-

surements. Fig. 11 is the external view of the left; and fig. 12 the

internal of the right lower jaw.

To the foregoing observations we have nothing further to add than

that, in our opinion, they point out sufficient proof of specific differ-

ences between the several objects compared; but, for the reasons be-

fore adduced, we must limit our conclusions to this, and cannot there-

fore venture upon giving new names to our fossil species.

Measurement of Fossil Skulls, &c. represented in Plate XXVIII. figs. 1 to 10.

in Gulo a 6

Felis | Felis|figs.4/Gulo |> 2 ~

Detail of Measurement. fig.1.|fig.2.15 & 8.|fig.7.1c5 as

ins. | ins. } ins. | ims. Jinches.

Extreme length from post. of occipital condyles to

anterior Of INCISOM CECE, 2... se sieie chive) sie SIS ER te 5,51} 5,08] 4,09

Ditto ditto ditto canine ditto, .................+--- | 3,27) .. | 5,13} 4,86) 3,83

Breadth measured across mastoid processes, ...... | 1,67) .. | 3,26] 3,10) 1,66

Greatest breadth of cranium opposite mastoid pro- ,

CESSES5 te ise wie = cies, Aisles ogabe..o'k aialabotaianre. pik yeneens bie L,GOM cic 2,44! 2,41 1,71

Least ditto ditto at temporal fosse, .............. 1,28) .. | 1,42} 1,33) 0,79

Height of occiput from lower margin of occipital

foramen to top of transverse ridge, .......-.... 1,09; .. | 1,69} 1,741 0,90

Breadth from point to point of styloid le nia +s | -ee | 1,99} 2,00) 1,14

Ditto across the occipital condyles,. BN aN 1,13) .. | 1,33] 1,26] 0,96

Ditto of frontal from point to point of post. “orbitary

APOPHYSeS, «ewer ese eee e ee cece cece SacbRia Sa LSOlharee 1,80} 1,59] 1,13

Greatest breadth across zygomatic arches, eves 2,72) vse lists QOh 2 ecules ae

Breadth measured externally across superior canine

TEE at Oe eee Seer, CE ee ee, Ue 1,00) <3. | 1,30), 2alee oe

Ditto ditto most prominent points of line of molars, | 1,60); .. | 1,87|-1,65] 1,22

Perpendicular diameter of occipital foramen, ...... 0,45} ., | 0,50] 0,55) ..

TTOLIZOMtALLATEGONCUETOS coc nie) stale ceremony xteieielo ae 0,55) .. | 0,62] 0,60) 0,51

Length from exterior of incisors to anterior of pa-

TataleSUMUS 5 calete eal Aner eats US ad iti OIGD OsOo 1552/0 22 4p 2540200.

Ditto from anterior of palatal sinus to lower mar-

gin of occipital foramen, ....-...-++2+- see 1,68} .. | 2,56) 2,70) 2,05

Ditto occupied by molars and canine teeth, taken

together, 0... ...e cece cece ce ce cece erence sietisle de, Hd ee| cee) || OSto aoe TAR)

Ditto ditto molarsialanes sayy kere tangs ola eel ole a 0,95) 3. | 1,25) Ti 59

Diameter of orbit perpendicular, but measured in

plane of orbit’s margin, ........+. .-+-- 5¢ 0,84} .. ; 0,62} .. | -0,58

Ditto ditto from point of post. orbitary apophysis to

ant. margin Of orbit,....-.-- s+ sess ee eee ee eee fe Bo Punish arc 0,74

Greatest antero-posterior diameter of canine tooth, 0,19) . | 0,39) 0,34) 0,18

Width of tuberculous tooth, (in Felts and Gulo,) . 0,14; .. | 0,40) 0,35) ..

Lower Jaw.—Length from posterior of condyle to

anterior of canine, .......- essere ee ee eevee Ble reer’ af [Syd geOll = v6 at

Ditto from ditto ditto to posterior of molars, ... fe (SO,OS/RISSSE o.. Es

Ditto occupied by molars and canine teeth, taken

together, ....-...+eseeeee eee Soman mhadhdés atels sey) | WSUS late re ste

Ditto ditto molars alone, Breeds ele ectene sucked abel atowele cp “1G -- | 0,78) 1,37) «. fe

Depth of lower jaw taken in front of carnivorous

TOOLS ete ta wickets Metetspetats iets Meraloveneberie ener euale-ctenave -. | 0,44) 0,671 .. 0,45

Greatest antero-posterior diameter of canine tooth, -> | 0,20] 0,38) .. | 0,13

1836.] Continuation of a Paper on Heights of Barometer, &c. 585

X.—Continuation of a Paper (Journal, May, 1835), on the Heights

of ihe Barometer as affected by the Position of the Moon. By the

Rev. R. Everest.

In a comparison of the heights of the Barometer with the position

of the moon in declination, (See Journal, May, 1835,) I stated that

it appeared, that though the greatest depressions coincided, or nearly

so, with the times of the moon’s maximum declination, yet that many

of the greatest elevations held a similar situation. To ascertain

whether this idea was well-founded, the daily barometric heights

were taken from the 4 p. m. column of the Meteorological Registers

of the Journal; then the differences either in excess or defect from

the monthly mean, were noted and placed in different columns accord-

ing to the state of the moon in declination, as given in the Nautical

Almanacks for noon of the same day. Then the average of each

column was taken for the year, and continuing the process for the

13 years of which the Meteorological Registers are extant, a general

average was finally taken of the whole, which came out as follows:

Moon’s Decl. ...... pe alll TS ale Sa 5° 0°

Average amt. of camiaediadd| F 1. F ; foe

from a a ta ne 68 | 055 056 | 055 | 054 052 |

If it be objected that this diiference, between the two extremes of the

line, of ‘008, be small, we may answer that small as it is, it is nearly

ith of the whole amount. The heights of the barometer at London

for a period of 24 years were then examined in a similar manner,

only that instead of classing the differences in columns according to

the number of degrees of the moon’s declination on the same day,

they were classed according to the distance of the day on which the

observation was taken, from the day of maximum declination. Thus,

the number of days from maximum north to maximum south declina-

tion being nearly 14, the differences were arranged in 14 columns,

numbered in this way :

reat A REG IOY VS? 09)! 9 1Q> Seb vapQen. Te acagig

and as a whole revolution from one time of maximum declination toits

succeeding one is something less than 28 days, a column was occa-

sionally left blank to keep the maxima always in the Ist and 14th.

This method is rather less troublesome than the former one adopted,

but it does not answer so well for a long series of years, as the

moon’s maximum declination is very different in different years :—for

example, in 1820, it was between 28° and 29°, and in 1829, between

18° and 19°. The average, therefore, was taken for the six years in

which the declination was greatest, viz. 1818, 1819, 1820, 18921,

1822, 1823. The maximum declination was then always above 25°,

586 Continuation of a Paper on Heights of Barometer, &c. (Sevr.

so that the first column would correspond with the left-hand column

of the former classification. North and south declination were then

put together, and the results came out thus:

Days, ...... 1 2 3 4 5 6 i

Average amount of variation -935 | -221 | -223 | 227 | -216 | -218 | -217

from the mean, ...

The average was iene taken for nine years, in which the declination

was at a medium, say between 26° and 21°, so that the first column

would nearly correspond with the second column of the former classifi-

cation ; the seventh column being, as before, that on which the decli-

nation was least. The years were 1814, 1815, 1816, 1817, 1824,

1825, 1826, 1833, 1834, and the results were:

Days. ss = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Average eee of raintion | ogy -220 | -215 | -200 | -201 | 215 | -225

from the mean, .........

The average was again taken for nine years, in which the declina-

tion was least, viz. between 21° and 18°; that is to say, 1810, 1811,

1812, 1813, 1828, 1829, 18380, 1831, 1882. The first column, in

this case, would nearly correspond with the third in the classification

of the Calcutta barometer. The results were as follows :

Days, ....- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Average amount of variation ire aan

par aE oma 206 | -214 | -212 | -221 | -228 | -295 | -239

In this last case no increase of variation is perceptible towards the

maximum, but then the maximum did not usually exceed 20°, or at

the most 21°.

I have as yet said nothing about the perigee, because it has been

proved in Kurope that the perigee produces some effect on the weather.

With a view to ascertain whether the effect produced was the same as

that occasioned by the increase of declination, I took the same varia-

tions of the London barometer, as before, for 24 years, and arranged

them in different columns according to the state of the moon’s semi-

diameter on the days on which they were taken. The general aver-

age came out thus :

)’s 3 diam. 1000" 990" 980" 970" 960" 950" 940" 930” 920" 910” 900" ggo""

Av. Var. Bar. :247 -227 +207 +229 +226 «+219 216 +214 +209 +224 -205 -918 -911

Here there appears a tendency to an increase of variation with an

increase of semi-diameter ; but on examining the differences of the

Calcutta barometer, no such increase could be made apparent. It

remains, therefore, in doubt whether, in this climate, such an increase

does exist—or whether, owing to some mistake, yet undetected,

it has not been made apparent. Iam inclined to the latter supposi-

tion—from this consideration—Ist, If no increase exists, no results

eould be traced from it; 2ndly, Ifan increase exists, though not, at

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 587

present, apparent, some remote results would probably be observed,

which might be ascribed to it, as their cause.

Thus, with an increase in the variation of the heights of the baro-

meter, an increase both of dryness and moisture would follow. As

an increase of variation also attends an increase in declination, it is

probable that the greatest effect would be perceived when the two

causes were in co-operation together. Now as there are certain years

in which the moon’s perigee fell onthe same day with her maximum

declination, either north or south, it is probable that, in those years,

the extremes of weather, both of dryness and moisture, would be

experienced. Is this then the case? Are those years in which the

day of perigee is the same as the day of maximum declination, also

those in which the extremes both of drought and moisture occur!

By such results let these speculations be tried. For our present

purpose, which is only to obtain some useful indications, the differ-

ence between an absolute error and a barren verity is not worth

mentioning.

XI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 5th October, 1836.

The Rev. Dr. Mint, Vice-President, in the chair.

Lieutenants Newzotp and §. Tickenn, proposed at the last meeting,

were balloted for, and duly elected Members of the Society.

Mr. Vincent TreceEar, proposed at the last meeting, was, upon the

favourable report of the Committee of Papers, unanimously elected an

honorary member.

Mr. G. F. MacCuinrocx was proposed by Mr. MacnacuTen, seconded

by Dr. Mitt.

The Secretary then read the Report of the Committee of Papers on

Mr. C. Browntow’s proposition relative to the publication of the Alif

Leila.

[See below. ]

Resolved— That the Society approve and adopt the Report of the Com-

mittee :—that it feels honored by Mr. Brownuow’s desire to publish the

work under its auspices ; and that in addition to its own subscription, the

prospectus shall be circulated among individual members, and the patro-

nage of the Government shall be respectfully solicited to Mr. Browne

Low’s undertaking.

Library.

The following books were presented :—

A Discourse concerning the influence of America on thé mind, being the

Annual Oration delivered before the American Philosophical Society on the 18th

October, 1823, by C. J. Incersoxti, Esq.—by the Society.

Notice Historique sur Caaries Tetratir, Esq. Fondateur et President de

la Societé d’Histoire Naturelle de Vile Maurice, &c. &c.; by M. Jurien Des

Jarpvins—by the Author.

462

588 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr.

Nouveaux Choix des Poesies Originales des Troubadours; by M. RayNnovarp

—by the Author.

Opinions on various subjects, dedicated to the Industrious Producers; by

Wn. Macsere, Esq.—by the Author.

The Indian Journal of Medical and Physical Science—by F. Corbyn, Esq.

Editor.

Gay’s Fables translated into Bengali Poetry, by Maharaja Kati Kissmn

Behadur—by the Translator.

Conclusion of the Guldestah, or Nosegay of Pleasure, by Manshi Mannv’

La’t—by the Author.

Map of the Indus River and of the neighbouring countries, from the recent

surveys, compiled in the Surveyor General’s Office—by Mr. Tassin,

Royle’s Himalayan Botany, 9th part—/from the booksellers.

Read a letter from the treasurer of the Academy at Bordeaux, Mr.

Durrovinies, forwarding by the hands of Dr. Laverene a packet of

secds for the Botanic Garden of Calcutta, and requesting in return such

seeds from Tibet or other colder parts of India as are likely to thrive in

France.

The seeds have been made over to Dr. Watticu, who will kindly reply on the

subject to Bordeaux.

Literary and Antiquarian.

_ An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenasserim

Provinces, drawn up from the journals and reports of Dr. RicHarpson,

was submitted by Mr. E. A. Bhunprexti, Commissioner of these new pro-

vinces ; also a sketch of the history of Labong, by the same.

Capt. A. Cunnincusam, Engineers, A. D. C., presented to the Society

the very extensive collection of statues and other specimens of Bauddha

sculpture discovered by him in his exploration of the well known monu-

ment or tope in the road between Ghazipur and Benares. The following

note on these interesting relics was read.

‘¢ The stone figures, bas-reliefs, and inscriptions were all found near Sarnath,

a Buddhist monument about eight miles from Benares. The greater number

were dug up within a small space of 10 feet square, and nearly all in an upright

position side by side, Along with them were 40 or 50 others now lying near

S4rnath, and which were left behind from their being of the same description as

those now presented to the Society, and from their being in a less perfect state,

and from their wanting inscriptions.

I learned from a villager that when JAcarT Sineu the Dewan of Curnru Sineu,

Raja of Benares, was digging near Sarnath for building materials for the ganj

which now bears his name, his workmen lighted on a small temple the walls of

which they carried away—and it was within that temple that these figures were

then seen ; but owing to some superstitious feelings on the part of the workmen,

no steps were taken at the time for their removal.

The three seated female figures, one bearing an inscription, were found in

the ruins of a small temple consisting of only two rooms, and the long bas-

relief containing the alligator’s heads was discovered in a stone tank 13 feet

nine inches square, upon clearing away the rubbish from the pukka terrace

which surrounded it.

I am induced to offer these figures to the Society, in the hope that the in-

scriptions upon their pedestals may be translated, and help to throw some light

upon the Buddhist religion, as well as upon Saérnath and the ruins of the differ-

ent buildings in its neighbourhood.”’

The special thanks of the Society were voted to Capt. Cunnineuam

for this valuable contribution to the Museum.

Physical.

The Secretary presented on the part of Mr. Dean, Assoc. Mem., some

fine fossil specimens lately obtained by him from the bed or banks of

the Jumna river.

1836.) Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 589

Mr. Dean had maintained for some time an envoy to explore such parts of

the river as he had not been able himself to examine. Out of the produce of

this adventure be had selected the specimens now transmitted, because they

served to settle the question of the existence of three animals in a fossil state,

which had hitherto been doubtful,—or rather which had been for the first time

advanced with hesitation from his former collections in the Jumna ;—the

camel, the buffalo, and the antelope.

They consist of the femur and cranium of the fossil buffalo, about one-sixth

larger than the present race ;—fragment of the femur of a camel ; cores of the

horns of an antelope, and waterworn portions of the horn of the axis.

To make the recognition of these fossils as clear as possible, Mr. Dean had

placed side by side of each the corresponding recent bone, so that no doubt

could remain of their identity. The splendid discoveries in the Sivalik range

have meantime removed all uncertainty on the subject, and have even pointed

out two distinct species in the fossil camel, on which a paper has just been print-

ed in the Researches.

A paper by Messrs. Fanconer and Cauriey was submitted on the fossif

bear of the Sivélik range, with drawings pointing out variations from

the existing species.

The knowledge of this animal is derived from two fine fragments of the head,

The chief peculiarities are observable in the teeth, which are constructed more

after the type of the higher carnivora than any other described species of the

genus.

A paper entitled ‘‘ Some remarks on the development of Pollen,’’ was

submitted by Dr. W. Grirritx, Mad. Est.

Indications of a new genus of insessorial birds—by Mr. B. H. Honeson.

A Table of the breadth, current, and depth of the river Satlej, from

Hari ke patan to its junction with the Indus at Mithankot, was communi-

cated by Capt. C. M. Wane.

Also a note on the spring of Lohand Khdér—by the same officer.

Two large cases containing a fine collection of butterflies, moths and

other insects from Si/het, was presented by Mr. Grorece Loczg, C. S.

Observations concerning certain interesting phenomena manifested in

individuals born blind, on their restoration to sight, were communicated by

Dr. F. H. Brerrt.

Report of the Committee of Papers on the Autre Lama.

The Committee having deputed the examination of Major Macan’s

manuscript to those of its Members most eminent for their knowledge of

the Arabic language and literature, think it will be more satisfactory to

submit the separate minutes of those gentlemen to the Society than to

embody them in a general report.

They are unanimous in their opinion of the genuineness, general cor-

rectness, and value of the manuscript, as well asin advocating the support

of Mr. Browntow’s undertaking: and they think the patronage of the

Government should also be respectfully solicited. For the correction of

the press, they believe Mr. Browniow to have made the best arrange-

ment ;—nevertheless, as he has solicited permission to publish the work

under the auspices of the Society, it may be proper that a file of the sheets

as printed should be furnished to the Secretary to be occasionally submitted

to Members of the Committee and other competent judges of their accuracy.

They consider the price fixed by Mr. Brownriow, 48 Company’s rupees

for four royal octavo volumes of 600 pages, to be very moderate, and they

trust he will experience the advantage of it in a full list of subscribers.

For the Committee,

J. Prinsep, Secy.

590 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Supt.

Minute by Mr. W. H. Macnaghten.

Of the genuineness of Mr. Browntow’s manuscript, there cannot, I

think, be the slightest doubt. I have compared the third volume of the

«© Contes Inedits,” by M. Tresurien, with the fourth volume of the ma-

nuscript, and, as far as I can judge from reading three or four of the

commencing and concluding pages, and looking over some of the inter-

mediate pages of each of the six last tales, I believe that they corre-

spond almost exactly.

I have also carefully looked through the third volume of the MSS. The

anecdotes which are at the end of the third volume of the French trans-

lation, are contained in this volume; but they do not, in the Arabic

MSS. appear to be so numerous. They are chiefly introduced between

the stories styled ‘ Histoire d’Adjib et de Gherib,” (the last story of the

first volume of Tresutien,) and that styled “ Des ruses de Dalilah et de

la fille Zeinub,” (the first story of the second volume of TresuTien.)

I have not had time to compare all the “ Anecdotes.” They are not

entered in the same order as in the French version, owing to which the

comparison would necessarily be a work of time—but I have been able

to compare the anecdotes styled ‘‘ Divorce et second mariage de Hind

fille de Naaman,” page 464, and that styled “ Conduite du Vizier Ibn

Aamir,” page 487, and I find that they minutely correspond with the

Arabic MSS.

On comparing the story styled “ Histoire d’ Abdallah I’ habitant de la

Mer et d’Abdallah I’ habitant de la Terre*,” I was much struck with the

mutilated state of the story as contained in the French version. I sub-

join aversion in English of the French and of the Arabic stories. It

will be seen at once, how much the former has been shorn of its fair

proportions.

Story of Abdallah the inhabitant of the Sea, and of Abdallah the inhabitant

of the Land.

There was oncea fisherman, called Abdallah, who was father of a numerous

family. All his riches consisted in his nets, with which he went every day to

the sea shore to supply the wants of his family ; he lived in this way from day

to day. His wife was confined for the tenth time of a boy: that very day

there was nothing at all in their house. The wife told her husband to take his

nets, and to throw to the good luck of the newborn. The fisherman took his

nets, and threw them in with prayers for the happiness of his son. When he

drew them out the first time, they were filled with sand, gravel, reeds, and

mud, and he did not find even one single fish. It was the same also the second

and third time, In vain did the poor fisherman try another place: the night

overtook him before he had caught the least thing.

“Great God!’ cried he, ‘‘ is this the luck of my new born! has thou cre-

ated him that there may be no happiness for him! It cannot be so: he who has

opened his lips to form a mouth, has taken care of his existence.’’ Overcome

with sadness, he threw his nets upon his shoulders and slowly took the way to

his dwelling, thinking what he could say to his starving children and his lying-

in wife. He passed before the shop of a baker where he was wont to buy bread.

Seduced by the smell of the hot bread, poor Abdallah stopped before the shop,

and cast looks of starvation on the bread just brought from the oven. ‘* Do you

wish for bread ?’’ asked the baker of him. ‘‘ I would willingly have some for my

poor children,’’ replied the fisherman, ‘‘ but I have no money to pay for it, for I

have not caught a single fish to-day : nevertheless, if you are willing, I will leave

my nets in pledge.’’ ‘‘ How,”’ replied the baker, ‘‘ could you earn money to pay

me, if you leave me your nets in pledge? Hold, here are ten loaves, what you are

accustomed to take, and, moreover, ten pieces of money which I lend you. If

* Pace 89 of Vol. III. of TREBUTIEN.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 591

you are successful in your fishing to-morrow, you will pay me, and if not I will

give you credit.’’ ‘* God will reward you,”’ said the fisherman, taking the ten

loaves: and he went to the market to buy some vegetables. The next morning

he went out very early, and threw his nets all the day without catching any

thing. In returning home that evening he did not dare to approach the baker’s

shop ; but the latter having seen him, called him and gave him, as he had done

the night before, ten loaves and ten pieces of money. Things went on in this

way for forty days, and the fisherman was in despair to see his debts thus in-

creasing without any means of discharging them. The forty-first day he said

to his wife, ‘‘ I am going to tear my nets in pieces ; because I see that I ought

no longer to reckon on gaining my livelihood in that manner. I am ashamed

of being such a burden to the baker, and I must do some other business to pay

what I owe.’’ ‘‘ God is great,’’ replied the wife; ‘‘ and since he has given us

such a generous benefactor, he will grant us also the means of clearing ourselves

to him. Do not despair then, continue to throw your nets and put confideuce in

God.’’ The fisherman followed the advice of his wife; he threw his nets in

the name of God, and said, ‘‘ Be favourable to my fishing, O thou who dis-

pensest the gift of destiny! If I catch a single fish I will carry it to my bene-

factor.’’ The nets this time were of an extraordinary weight. Abdallah worked

with all his strength to bring them to the shore, but the poor fisherman, to his

great despair, found nothing but a dead ass, which exhaled a pestilential smell.

‘¢ There is neither might nor power, but in God,’’ cried Abdallah, in clearing his

nets of the carcase. ‘‘ It is my accursed wife,’’ added he, ‘* who gave me this fine’

advice ; I told her that I was going to give up the business of fisherman, but no,

“ God is great; do not despair, continue. to throw your nets.’ See what it is to

follow women’s advice! Nevertheless, Iam going to tempt fortune again to-day

for the last time.’’

The fisherman sought another place to avoid the stench of the ass, and

threw his nets: they were still heavier this time than the first, and Abdallah

found in them a being with a human form. At first he thought it was one of

those genii that Solomon had cast into the depth of the sea, after having shut

them up in brazen vessels. He, therefore, cried ‘‘ Pardon! pardon! O Genii

of Solomon !’’ ‘‘ Fear nothing,’’ replied the figure in the net, ‘‘ 1 am a human

being like thee ; the only difference which exists between us, is that I live in the

depth of the sea, and you inhabit the earth.’’ ‘‘ Then,’’ replied the fisherman, re-’

assured by these words, ‘‘ you are neither a genii nora demon ?’’ ‘ Not more the

one than the other,’’ replied the inhabitant of the sea ; ‘‘ 1 believe in God and his

Prophet.’’ ‘‘ But who threw thee into the waves ?’’ I am, by nature, an inhabitant

of the sea, and I serve God. When I was caught in the nets, I was trying to be

useful to thee, and I allowed myself to be taken; because it would not have

been difficult for me to break your nets, if I had wished to escape; but I re-

cognized the finger of God in this event, and I see that we have both been creat-

ed to be brothers and friends. The earth produces grapes, melons, peaches and

pomegranates: the sea abounds in coral, in pearls, in emeralds, and in rubies,

Bring me fruit, and I will fill your basket with the precious stones which are

found in the sea.’’ ‘‘ This proposition suits me marvellously, my brother,” said

the fisherman ; ‘‘ swear to me that you will keep your promise, and recite the first

chapter of the Koran.’’ When the first chapter was recited, the fisherman laid

down his nets, and asked his companion his name. ‘I am called Abdallah of the

sea; and thou, what is thy name?’ “It is truly extraordinary,’’ said the

fisherman ; ‘‘ my name is also Abdallah, and to distinguish us one from the other,

T will call myself Abdallah of the land.’’ ‘‘ Very well,’’ replied Abdallah of the

sea ; ‘‘ we have been created one for the other ;— wait for me here an instant, I am

going to search for something which I wish to make youa present of !’’ At these

words he plunged into the sea to the great grief of the fisherman, who regretted

having given him his liberty. ‘If I had kept him, thought he to himself, I.

could have shown bim for money as a curiosity, and in that manner I might have

gained my livelihood.”’

An instant after the inhabitant of the sea re-appeared, with his hands filled with

rubies, pearls, and emeralds, ‘‘ Do not take itill,”’ said heto the fisherman, “ that

I have not brought you more of them; I had nothing to put them in, but I will

592 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Serr.

give you as many to-morrow again, and every day, if you will come here at sun-

rise.’’ Transported with joy, the fisherman went to the baker’s, to whom he gave

all his pearls and precious stones, thanking him for all the favors which he had

hitherto heaped on him. After that loaded with as much bread as he could

carry, and after having bought with the money which the baker had given him,

meat, fruit, and vegetables, the good Abdallah ran home to inform his wife of

the happy adventure which had happened to him.

‘‘ Keep well your secret,”’ said his wife to him; ‘‘ it is a thing that ought not to

be related to every one.’’ ‘‘ If I must conceal it from every one,’’ replied the

fisherman, ‘‘I cannot at least make a mystery of it to the baker my bene-

factor.”’

The next day, having got up very early, the fisherman went with a basket of

fruit to the sea shore, which he reached before sun-rise. He cried there: ‘‘ Where

art thou, Abdallah of the sea?’? ‘‘ What will you?’ replied a voice from the

depth of the waves; and at the same instant the new friend of the fisherman came

out of the sea with a load of emeralds, rubies, and pearls. After having break-

fasted together, they retired each going his own way. The fisherman gave, in

passing, two more necklaces of pearls to the baker, and carried the rest home.

He went afterwards to the bazar, and shewed all the pearls and precious stones

to the syndic of the jewellers. ‘‘ Stop him,’’ cried the latter; ‘‘ he is the thief

who has stolen the queen’s pearls !’? Abdallah allowed himself to be loaded with

bonds, and to be conducted before the king without saying a word. They pre-

sented to the queen the pearls which they took for hers, but she declared that

the pearls were much handsomer than those which had been stolen from her ;

that they did not belong to her, and that she would buy them at any price.

‘‘ Retire, infamous informers,’’ said the king ; ‘‘ asif God could not give riches to

the unfortunate also! Retire.’’ When the jewellers had departed, the king turned

towards Abdallah : ‘‘ Now inform me from whence did you get this treasure. I

am aking, and I do not possess such precious stones.’? Then Abdallah related to

him his connection with Abdallah of the sea. ‘' Venerable man,’’ said the king,

‘“riches ought to be joined to power ;—aslong as I reign you need not fear violence ;

but I would not be answerable that after my death my successor will not cause

you to be put to death to seize on your treasures. I wish, therefore, to give you

my daughter in marriage and to make you my vizier, so that after me envy may

not assail you.’’ After that the king ordered Abdallah to be conducted to the

bath, and caused him to be dressed in magnificent clothes. They sent letters

for his wife and children, who were loaded with marks of honour. The contract

of marriage was drawn up according to all the forms. Abdallah of the land

gave as portion to the princess all the treasures which he had received from

Abdallah of the sea. The next day the king having observed the vizier betake

himself with a basket of fruit on his head to the sea shore, asked him what he

meant by so doing. Abdallah replied that he was carrying breakfast to Abdallah

of the sea. The answer displeased the king. ‘‘ This conduct, my son-in-law,’’

said he to Abdallah, ‘‘ is not suitable for a vizier. Take your choice to remain in

the palace, or to drop instantly your load.”’

Up to this point the French and Arabic versions correspond with great

minuteness. The French version, however, terminates in a very abrupt

and unsatisfactory manner. It conveys no moral, and leaves Abdallah the

inhabitant of the land to enjoy his good fortune, notwithstanding his ingra-

titude towards his benefactor. The French version proceeds—‘‘ Abdallah

liking better to preserve his place and the favour of the king, returned

no more to the sea shore and lived happily to the end of his days.”

The Arabic version is altogether different, and if it possesses no other

merit, it has at least the advantage of conveying a moral and teaching a

cheerful resignation to the will of Providence : it proceeds thus :—

‘¢ Abdallah said, I fear to break the promise which I have made to him. I

shall then be accounted a liar, and the world will accuse me of falsehood.’”’ The

king replied, ‘‘ You are right. Go, and God be with you.’’ He then went into

the city, and the people recognized him. He overheard them saying, ‘‘ This is the

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 593

king’s relative : he is going to exchange fruits for jewels ;’’ but they who were ig-

norant and were not acquainted with him said, ‘‘ O fortunate man, stay a little,

and let me form acquaintance with you.’’ He paid no attention, however, to any

one, and proceeded onwards till he joined Abdallah of the sea, and presented him

with the fruit and exchanged them for jewels. Having so done, he returned to

the baker’s shop, which he found closed, and learnt that this had been the case

for ten days. He then proceeded ta consummate his marriage with the daughter

of the king, with whom he lived on terms of affection. He went daily to the

man of tke sea and returned by the baker’s shop, but found it always locked.

He was at a loss to conceive where the baker had gone, and asked the neigh-

bours where he had gone, and what had happened to him. They told him in

reply, that the baker had fallen sick and could not leave his house. Having

inquired where his house was situated, Abdallah sought him out. His friend

seeing him out of the window bearing a full basket, on his head, descended and

opened the door, and throwing himself upon him, embraced him and cried. Upon

this, Abdallah said to him, ‘‘ Where have you been, my friend, this longtime; I

have come daily to your shop, but have found it shut, and have been unable to

find you. Are you in distress ?’’ The baker replied, ‘‘ No, but I heard that the

king had seized you and charged you with being a thief, whereupon I became

afraid, and skut up my shop and concealed myself.’’ Abdallah answered, This

is true ; and then recited his adventures with the jewellers and the king, and how

he had married the king’s daughter, and had been made his vizier. He further

desired him to take as his portion what was in the basket, and not to be afraid.

Saying this, he left him in a happy mood, and returned to the king with his

basket empty. The king said to him, ‘‘ O! kinsman, I fancy that you could not

haye met your friend Abdallah of the sea to-day.’’ He replied, ‘‘ I did meet with.

him, but what I obtained from him I gave to my friend the baker, to whom I am

under an obligation.’? The king asked who is this person—to which he replied,

he is a baker by profession, and behaved to me in such and such a manner

during the period of my distress, and never neglected me. The king asked his

name. Abdallah, said he, is called Abdallah the baker—my name is Abdallah of

the land, and the name of my companion is Abdallah of the sea. The king

rejoined, My name also is Abdallah*, and the servants of God are brothers; send

_and bring him, we will make him our second vizier. Then were sent for him

the vizier and the nobles, who caused him to be clothed in the habiliments of a

vizier, and brought him into the presence of the king. He was then made the

second vizier, Abdallah continuing the first.

Abdallah of the land, the first vizier of the king, continued after this fashion

a whole year, and never omitted for a single day to go with a basket of fruits and

to return with a basket of jewels and precious stones, and when fresh fruits were

not procurable he used to carry raisins, almonds, walnuts, figs, and such like.

Whatever he took was cheerfully accepted, and in return his basket was filled

with jewels according to custom. One day it happened that he took a basket

of sweetmeats. Abdallah of the sea accepted it, and took his seat upon the land

by the sea shore. They entered into conversation and mutually told stories,

when the following dialogue occurred. ‘ Is it true, my brother, that the prophet

{on whom rest the peace and blessing of God!) is buried among you on dry land,

and do you know where he is buried? I do, replied he of the land. In what

place? Ina city called Yusrub. Do the inhabitants of the land go to visit his

tomb? Yes. Happy then, exclaimed Abdallah of the sea, are you denizens of

the earth, that you are enabled to visit the tomb of this gracious, clement and

merciful prophet who intercedes for all those who perform the pilgrimage !

Have you, my brother, ever visited his tomb? No, I wasa poor man and had not

enough to pay my expenses on the road, but since I became acquainted with you

and you have bestowed upon me this exceeding prosperity, it is a duty incumbent

upon me to doso. I have a strong desire to visit the holy city, and nothing but

the affection 1 have for you prevents my doing so. I cannot, however, bear to

part with you for a single day. Do you, said he of the sea, prefer my friendship

to that of the prophet (on whom be the blessing and peace of God), who will

* Servant of God.

594 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Sepr.

plead for you with the Almighty on the day of resurrection? who will save you

from the fire, and give you admission into heaven by his mediation? Do you

abandon the pilgrimage to the shrine of the Prophet Mahomed, (on whom be

peace and blessing of God) through love of the world? To this he of the land

replied, ‘‘ No; I swear that I should prefer the pilgrimage to all things ; I only

require your permission to perform it this very year.’’ ‘‘ I have granted you per-

mission,’’ rejoined he of the sea; ‘‘ but when you arrive at the shrine, submit my

salutation. I have an offering to present. Enter with me into the ocean, so that

I may take you to my city and admit youto my house—that I may entertain you

and entrust to you my offering, in order that you may present it at the shrine of

the holy Prophet, saying, This is an offering from Abdallah of the sea, who

conveys his salutation, and intreats your intercession to save him from hell

fire.”’

The story proceeds to state that the fears of Abdallah of the land hav-

ing been removed by the assurances of his companion, and his body having

been rubbed over with a certain ointment which gave him the power of

living in the water, he entered the ocean with his marine friend. Then

follows a long description of the wonders of the deep ; Abdallah having

seen “wedges of gold, great anchors, heaps of pearl, inestimable stones,

unrivalled jewels—all scattered in the bottom of the sea’—and many

other things undreamt of even by Cuarence. The story concludes thus :—

Having taken leave of the king of the ocean loaded with jewels, Abdallah of

the sea took his companion back towards his city. On the road he put into his

hand a packet, saying, Take this,and present it as my offering at the shrine of the

holy prophet. Abdallah of the land took charge of the packet without knowing

what it contained. Abdallah of the sea then proceeded to convey him to the

shore, but on the road there appeared an assembly of persons rejoicing and

singing, and eating and making merry. Upon witnessing this, Abdallah of the

land said to his companion, ‘‘ For what are these people rejoicing? Is therea

marriage among them ?’’? His companion answered, ‘‘ No—but some one among

them has died.’? ‘‘ What,” said he of the land, ‘‘ do you eat, drink, and make

merry on the occasion of a death ?’”’ “‘ To be sure we do,’”’ said the inhabitant of

the sea: ‘‘ do not you do the same on land ?’’ ‘* Not we indeed,"’ said his com-

panion ; ‘‘ on such occasions we cry and weep, and the women beat their faces and

tear their clothes, and make all sorts of lamentation.’’ On hearing these words,

Abdallah of the sea exclaimed, ‘‘ Deliver up my offering.’’ This he did with fear,

and having got upon dry land, Abdallah of the sea said, ‘‘ I have parted with

your friendship—you shall never see me again, nor shall I ever again behold you.”’

“‘On what account is this?’’ asked his companion. ‘‘ It seems then,’’ replied

Abdallah of the sea, ‘‘ that you dwellers upon earth, whose life is a mere deposit

by your Creator, cannot endureits being taken back, but you must weep thereat.

What then would be the case with my deposit for the Prophet? When a child is

born you rejoice that God Almighty has endued it with life as a deposit, but

when that is taken away again you feel it as a grievance, and you cry, grieve, and

lament. I have no occasion for such company.’’ Saying this he vanished.

Abdallah of the land having put on his clothes and taken his jewels, proceeded

to the king, who received him with much joy and gladness, and asked him how

he was and what had befallen him. Abdallah then recounted his adventures,

and mentioned all the wonders of the deep which he had seen. The king was

astonished, but upon hearing what Abdallah of the land had said to him of the

sea, the king observed that the former had erred in making the communication

which he had done. For a long time afterwards Abdallah continued in the

habit of going to the sea shore and calling upon his former companion, but he

never re-appeared.

The king and his friend lived happily until the destroyer of delights—the

spoiler of all things came, and they both died. Then praise be to God who

never dies, who is the living God, Lord of kings and angels, and who has power

over all things !

At the conclusion of the tale which immediately precedes the above,

and which is styled “ Histoire D’Aboukir et D’Aboussir,’ M. ‘TReBurtien’s

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 595

version, is, “ Aboussir le fit inhumé et lui eleva un monument sur lequel

on grava une inscription qui renfermait un sens trés moral.” In the Arabic

MS. the inscription is given at full length. I here subjoin a translation

of the Elegy, which is not without elegance in the original, but which

seems rather intended to inculcate the advantage of prudence, and to

convey the moral that “ honesty is the best policy,” than as a suitable

epitaph on the tomb of the treacherous friend over whom it was erected.

After a series of efforts to ruin his friend and benefactor, the treacherous

man came to an untimely and ignominious end, while he whom he

designed to ruin, and who buried his corpse (which was found tied up in

a bag on the sea shore) attained the summit of prosperity.

‘« By his deeds a man is known among his equals.

*¢ The qualities of a free-born and noble person resemble his origin.

‘© He does not revile, though he be reviled ;

‘“‘ For how often what a man says recoils upon himself.

‘* Abstain from evil words and use them not, whether engaged in serious or

trifling matters.

‘* How many a great man has been subjected to abuse,

‘¢ From one whose value is not equal to a fragment of his shoe !

‘* What is triumphant exultation? even the lion is taken in the toil through

ignorance.

“« The sea bears on its surface the rotten carcass. But the pearl lies resplen-

dent in its lowermost sands.

‘ T never saw a sparrow oppose a hawk, but I thought of its insignificance

and want of understanding.

‘‘It is written on a lofty pillar in Hindustan, Whoever cultivates virtue shall

be recompensed in the like.

‘¢ Abstain from the attempt to make sugar of coloquintada ;

‘¢ For every thing must partake of the nature of its origin.”’

Scorr, in the Preface to -his translation of the Arabian Nights Enter-

tainments, has observed, “‘ The stanzas, elegies, and other poetical quo-

tations which so frequently occur in the original, M. Gatuanp has indeed

omitted, but such omission (at least in the humble opinion of the Editor)

is not to be regretted, for he thinks that to the European reader their

insertion would have been an intolerable interruption to the narrative.”

M. Tresutien does not seem to have been generally of this opinion,

for he has on most occasions faithfully rendered the verse as well as the

prose. Where he has not done so, the fault, I suspect, was in the original

—not in the translation.

I have compared the MS. of Mr. Browntow with the printed edition of

Hasicur and the lithographed work edited in Calcutta, as well as with

Scorr’s and GaLuannp’s translations. The comparison was made with one

of the old tales, and I took at random the first voyage of Sindbad the

Sailor. This examination has afforded additional proof of the genuine-

ness of Mr. Browntow’s MS. M. Hasicut’s edition comes next to it in

fulness and accuracy. The Calcutta edition is very faulty and defective.

I cannot help thinking that an entire and correct translation into Eng-

lish of these beautiful stories is still a desideratum, and that no better

original could probably be procured than that belonging to Mr. Brown.

Low. Scorr’s, which is the best translation, seems very inaccurate. Take

for instance the following passage in the story of Sindbad the Sailor.

Reflecting on the time he had lost and the profligacy of his past life, he

says that he called to mind the saying of Solomon, that three things are

better than three things: ‘ The day of death than the day of birth—a

living dog than a dead lion—the grave than a palace.”

This has been translated by Scorr, ‘‘ 1 remembered the saying of the

great Solomon, which I had frequently heard from my father, that death

is preferable to poverty.”

4H 2

596 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Supr.

I leave to other Members of the Committee the task of examining the

first two volumes of the MSS.; if indeed any further examination be

thought necessary to establish the genuineness of the work. I am quite

satisfied as to that point, from the examination which I have made of the

third and fourth volumes. The stories of Sindbad the Sailor are intro-

duced at the commencement of the 3rd vol. of the MSS. ; consequently it

may be assumed that the ‘‘ Contes Inedits” which I have not compared

are to be found in the first and second volumes of the MSS. and a com-

parison of them with the Arabic might be still more satisfactory.

Upon the whole, I have no hesitation in stating my opinion, that the

MS. copy of the Alif Leila now submitted to the Society is a most valu-

able addition to the literature of the East, and worthy of every encourage-

ment. I have little doubt that the work would find a ready sale both in

Asia and in Europe. I do not believe that Mr. Browntow requires any

pecuniary aid from us. As a Society, we might subscribe for a certain

number of copies, and individually I should hope we shall not withhold

our aid from this highly public-spirited and meritorious undertaking. To

Government, I think, we should make an earnest appeal for support, found-

ed on the credit which must accrue to our nation, from presenting to the

Mussulman population of India, in a complete and correct form and in

their own classical and beautifal language, these enchanting tales, which

even in the estimation of Europe enjoy almost unrivalled celebrity.

Our Maulavi, if competent, might be desired to assist in correcting

the press, and I for one should be very happy to aid in this duty, as far

as my limited abilities and leisure might permit.

Sept. 20, 1836. W. H. Macnacuren.

Minute by Mr. H. T. Prinsep.

I have examined the four volumes of the A/if Laila as far as my time

would permit, and am able to confirm entirely the testimony given by

Mr. Macnaeurten in favor of the accuracy and completeness of the copy.

So far as my examination has gone, the tales and anecdotes given in the

list at the commencement of the first volume of the ‘ Contes Inedits”

are all to be found in the Arabic, and those that have been translated are

more full and complete in our copy than in the French version. I did

not find the numbering of the nights exactly to correspond. Thus the

anecdote of Zobeide in the bath is between the 382nd and 383rd nights, and

the secret entrusted to the wife at the end of the 384th; whereas, ac-

cording to the French list, these ought to have been found first in the

384—385th, and the other in the 387—388th night.

The French version of the ‘‘ Contes Inedits” is not, it is to be observ-

ed, avery close translation ; nor does it give in regular order the tales

omitted by previous translators. It is still merely a selection, and made

not exclusively with reference to merit or the interest of the tales. It is

evident, however, that the original must have corresponded very closely

with the copy brought to India, by Major Macan, and was probably from

the same. Whether it was as complete in all respects, and as carefully

made, may well be doubted ; for the getting up of this manuscript is of a

very superior description. I do not find that the German edition in the

original Arabic corresponds exactly in the arrangement of the tales with

our copy, but the text does not materially differ of the same tales, which is

an additional confirmation of the accuracy ‘and genuineness of the very

complete set of these tales now laid before us. :

I join heartily in the wish expressed by Mr. Macnacuren, that a com-

plete edition of this work in the original Arabic may be printed in this

country from Major Macan’s copy, and I doubt not that many subscribers

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 597

may be found to contribute towards the expense of carrying it through

the press, if this should be deemed necessary. The offer of Mr. Mac-

NAGHTEN to correct the press with the aid of the Maulavis of the Persian

office, is one that will be appreciated by all who wish well to the litera.

ture of the East, and it ought to determine those who hitherto have felt

hesitation at the idea of attempting so great a work.

I am afraid that no capable person has leisure here in India to under-

take the translation of these four volumes into English. But certainly it

would tend equally to the credit of our literature were it possible to put

this also in hand. Were I myself an idle man, I should like no better

amusement than to take up such an occupation.

Sept. 25, 1836. Hi. T. Prinsepr.

——=

Minute by the Rev.-Dr. Mill.

I entirely agree with Mr. Macnacuren and Mr. H. T. Prinsep as to

the undoubted genuineness of Mr. Brownitow’s MS. The style of these

tales is very strongly impressed on the memory of every one who has read

any large portion of them in the original: and on comparing the detached

portions I have read from this MS. during the three days it has been with

me, with the recollections of the Voyages of Sindbad which I have repeat-

edly perused from M. Laneu‘ss’ edition (Paris, 12mo. 1814)—there is the

same delightful ease and simplicity of style, with the total absence of the

rhetorical effort so general in other works of imagination in the same lan-

guage,—the same purity of Arabic idiom, with the free introduction of

e. g. the Persian Shardb- foreign nouns, which (even independently of the

khdnah and Or own well external evidence) bears witness to the common

eae athe darken origin of all. This MS. is apparently much

termination) which I ob- closer in its order and readings to Baron Von

serve in Night 284, vol. 2, Hammer’s Cairo MS. (bought at Constantinople)

of this MS. from which M. Tresurten’s “ Contes Inedits”’

are published, than to the Tunis MS. from which M. Haxgicur’s complete

edition of the original is now publishing at Breslau: and for this reason,

peousst others, I do not think that work need preclude the publication

of this.

The part which I have taken almost at hazard for critical examination,

is the part shortly preceding that which has been so ably examined by

Mr. Macnacuren, It is the curious adventure (near the beginning of the

2nd volume) of Isaac of Mousul the musician, and the consequent intro-

duction of the Khaliph Mémin to his future bride, the daughter of his

Vizier Hasan ben Sehl. This occupies from the middle of Night 277

to 280 in the MS., but from 279 to 282 in Treeurien, (this slight

difference arising rather from a different division than from any deficien-

cy in this MS. as the collation of the preceding tales shews.) A com-

parison of this story with the same in TresBurien’s third vol. (p. 289—

295,) has convinced me that the text of Macan’s and Hammer’s MSS. is

as nearly identical as those of any two ordinary MSS. of an oriental work,

and that whatever discrepancies appear between the Arabic and the

French in this part at least, arise from the translator rather than from

his text. An example or two will best prove this.

MS. (literally translated.)

There appeared something hanging

from the adjoining houses, andlo ! a large

basket decked with silk at the four han-

dies. I said to myself, ‘‘ Surely there is

acausefor this,’’ and I remained amazed

at my adventure. But intoxication

Trebutien.

Je vegardai ce que ce pouvait étre,

et, & ma grande surprise je vis une

sorte de corbeille garnie de soie.

Comme le vin que j’avais bu dans la

soirée m’avait un peu troublé le cer-

veau, je me plagai dans cette corbeille

598

so far transported me, that my mind

said to me, ‘‘ Sitdown init.’’ Accord-

ingly I sat down, and when those who

let down the basket to me felt J was

within, they drew it up to the top of the

wall: and behold four damsels who said,

‘¢ Alight freely and without restraint.”’

And one of them walked before me

with a taper till I entered into a house:

and there were sitting rooms strewed

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

[Sept.

sané savoir ce que je faisais, et au

méme instant je me sentis enlever en

haut. Je fus recu sur la terrasse par

quatre belles esclaves qui m’engagér-

ent a descendre dans lamaison. L’une

d’elles marcha devant moi, un flambeau

& la main, et me conduisit dans une

salle, dont la magnificence ne pouvait

étre comparée qu’a celle des apparte-

mens du palais du Khalife.

out such as I had never seen evyen* in

the Khaliph’s palace.

To the method so apparent in the above extract, of seizing only the

points of the narrative, and neglecting the orientalisms of style and man-

ner by which they are introduced, I should ascribe even the places where

the two copies appear discordant ; as, where in TREBUTIEN (after the long

interview with the lady described in substance exactly as inthe MS.) Isaac

is made to go down by the basket as he came:—“ On me descendit dans

Ja corbeille ;” whereas the Arabic MS. distinctly says in that place, “A

damsel went down stairs with me and opened [the door] to me, and I

went out and walked to my house.” (Night 279): where it seems to me

at least as probable that the translator hastening with the story after his

manner, left out the circumstances of descent and added “ dans la cor-

beille” afterwards, on revising his French, than that he found the basket

in his original. The conclusion of the story furnishes another striking

example of his manner, and of the disadvantage which these tales suffer

by being so translated.

MS. (literally. )

Then we went out: and he said,

‘¢ O, Ishak, do not tell this story to any

Trebutien.

Nous sortimes de la maison, Le

Khalife m’ ordonna de ne pas parler

one ;’’ so I concealed it till the death

of Maman. Never had any one an

interview such as I had during these

four days, sitting in the day with Maman

and in the night conversing with Kha-

de ce qui venait de se passer; etj’en ai

gardé le secret jusqu’a sa mort. Ces

trois nuits, dit Ishak de Mossoul, je

les mettrai toujours au rang des plus

agréables que j’aie jamais passées dans

dija. By Allah I never saw any one _ la plus aimable société.

of men like Mamfin, and never did I

behold a woman like Khadija, who even

approached her in wit and under-

standing and eloquence. But God

knows best.

Similar conclusions were obtained by comparing the preceding story in

the 2nd volume of the MS.—the adventure of Abdallah the son of Abu-

Kolaba, and his discovery of the paradisiacal city of Sheddad the son of

Ad—occupying from p. 284—289 of Trebutien (who calls him Abdallah,

son of Kotaiba, and with whom his ndkah or she-camel is a mule). The

text of the two Egyptian MSS. of M. Tresutien and Major Macan must

be almost entirely the same. .

Very different, however, is the text of Professor Hasicur’s edition, which,

if it contains either of the above “ Anecdotes” of M. TrREeBUTIEN, must

place them in a very different place from that in which the numbers led

me to search for them without success. And this is not wonderful, as the

arrangement of the nights is altogether different in the two editions. For

example, the Voyages of Sindbad in both the Egyptian MSS. (MS. vol. 3,

and Trepurtien, Preface p. xlvi.) occupy night 536—565, but in the

Tunis MS., Night 250—271, as appears in Hasicur’s 3rd and 4th volumes.

* The discrepancy from the French may here very probably arise from the omis- -

“

aw 4

sion of the word yj by the copyist—but the mistake may just as probably lie on

the other side.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 599

On the other hand, the first of the unpublished Tales in both the Egyptian

MSS.—where it occupies from Night 34—38 (MS. vol. 1 and Treb. p. xli.)

occupies all from the 139th to the 218th in Hazicur (iii. 66—166). It is

not, however, actually longer in the latter than in the former: and as

this tale, viz. the History of the two Viziers of Mohammed Ibin Soleman

Alzini [in Hasicnt “ Alrasi’] has never been translated either by GaL-

LAND or TRreEsBuTIEN, I selected it for the collation of the two Arabic

texts. Here, though I found the printed and MS. text to tally in the main

from beginning to end, not only as to the succession of incidents, but in the

poetical passages interspersed throughout, the variations were very con-

siderable both in the prose and the verse: whole clauses appeared in the

one which were not in the other; the advantage of fullness being some-

times on the side of Mr. Browytow’s MS., but more frequently on that

of the Breslau edition.

On the whole, I should strongly recommend the publication of this text

without any reference to that of M. Hasicur—even in the parts which

might be compared with advantage. (Mr. Macnaguren’s offer of assisting

in the correction of the press is one which should be most thankfully

embraced, however learned may be the Maulavi engaged for the pur-

pose.) When both texts shall have been published, (belonging, as they do,

apparently to two very different editions or recensions of these celebrat-

ed tales, one long current in Egypt and Arabia, the other among the

Maghrebin Arabs of Barbary and Spain,) they may enable the critics of

Europe to form perhaps a judgment as to the true original text of both.

The work of a translator is one of greater difficulty: and we have none

probably in India, possessed at the same time of ability and leisure for a

work of this description. The ease and vivacity of M. Gaxuann’s

translation, so deservedly popular among Western readers, would be a

good model for imitation—avoiding, however, his liberties with his origi-

nal, except, indeed, in the too frequent cases where decency requires

curtailment or omission. M. Tresurien is far more faithful in giving the

whole of his original: but in the mode of representing it, a due medium

between his too occidental style of paraphrase, and a servilely literal

version of the Arabic text, would be, in my opinion, at the same time

more accurate and more pleasing.

W. H. Mit.

Minute by Mr. J. R. Colvin.

I have no pretensions to the name of an Arabic scholar, and shall not

presume to offer any opinion of my own on the genuineness of these

volumes. But I can bear testimony to the late Major Macan’s opinion

of their genuineness. He was a highly competent judge, and had made

inquiries which satisfied him on the point before he bought the manu-

scripts in England.

I cordially join in the wish to give encouragement to the publication

of a complete edition. J. R. Convin.

Minute by Mr. C. E. Trevelyan.

Neither have I the least pretension to be called an Arabic scholar, but

it is not necessary to be one in order to appreciate in some degree the

beauty of the Arabian Nights. I think it very desirable that a correct

version of the original Arabic should be published, and still more so that

it should be well translated into English. Such a translation, if it were

well executed, would be a most valuable accession tu English literature,

and I believe that for one person who would read the book in Arabic,

five hundred would read it in English. Nobody, in my opinion, is so

eminently qualified for this task as Mr. Macnaguren, and if he could

be persuaded to undertake it, he would lay every person who reads

English under an obligation to him. C. E, Trevetyan.

*“YJUOUL JseT JO SUOT}LAIASqO aag AyIpruInYy

PayZlNoVg » JOF IS[G OY} WoIy syuamIIedxe Jayj}0 0} pardde sem sAsjoMOISAY Weyoyy, *Ajeanoadser ‘w ‘ap Jeged’ pue “WV OL IV syFO"

*1quilu ‘ajed “App | ‘mS = “Ms bc6 \o°eL cl 69 9*9L)¢°9 \8°9 |\1°egites*s {99%° cL O'S Ip |e*nBisec® jegas 0g

*UI10}$ UIeIJUBSSaIUL| “AN aA ‘N }S0°9 | 018 10‘3L 06 68 BYOLIG'T 16'S |L6Liceps sors 06 88 B°91/6°S j9°S \oGLi9ec’ {25° | 6

“Apnoyo “Azey “A “A 'N 09 | 0°68 je‘ae LL 6L OGL eh 18°F |T'e8lzos* 69° 08 £8 S°BZ9'E 16° \6'PR|0L9° |Te9° | 86

“ured "prey ‘ynund =a N “N [0ST | 3°96 |SbZ £9 6¢ e'oL\S°o |TTLis*68igo9 j6es' £9 69 S*ELip‘Z |8°L |1°88\869° 1179‘ 16

“Azey ‘aug SNe ck 9OIL |0'8Z L9 69 GEZL|9'L 118 |e98l PROS {eGg° 09 +9 0°22|\6°8 |6°6 |L*Zei90Z° |pS9* |. 96

“rea]o *Ieayo *N “N Z°ZIt \9%0L 6g 8P OTLIVELP PLL T6\az¢° j909° 19 6S STLI9OT\POL/6.9g\eF9° |109° GS

Ss “tynuINs *119 “1va]o ‘a°*S (MS UGOL \0'Z2 €¢ 6g OGL 9‘ TOILE 'G6)\ Fe9° 069" 89 Td S‘eLig'9 \L'Z \6*Z8lgcl< jg0L‘ 6

= *488919A0 ‘ynumd |"a's ‘es 109°L | 0°96 |o‘o8 | 28 | eZ 82 | 6 \0‘CLIE’D |6°F |6°P8\co9* a9 | 92 | 89 QL | 06 |a%cr\p°¢ jors |etdglesgs |op9o | 0G

S ‘ouy ‘op op ‘ms °° B°COL [0°62 § 99 | €9 99 | $8 lPHZie's |o°8 lo‘6siags’ joes’ | 92 | 89 GL | 68 \0%PZ\2Z°¢ 109 19°98/Z89° 9F9 61

fe op oul ‘Mua MO Lit (O24 | eo | ¥9 bS | LL leSLIT'at LLL 16\aze* joes | OZ | 22 Lh | 98 \s‘cL\a‘9 |e°9 |e*cgizgo* jgzo° | BI

ee: *ITMuino *yseo7a2A0 |*mu ‘MU O%ZL |O'ZL | LP | ae 98 | 4 |p IZ\Z*1ToFLl616|1ag* cos’ | go | 9 99 | $8 \OeZIe°% |9°Z ja‘Zglo69% 9¢g9° LT

3 “1mp "yes‘wns | “A CMS OTIT [P82 | 19 | 8g GD | 18 |o‘TZ\00T|Z6 |8‘s8ioge® ILE. | oz | £9 99 } 98 |FZL\0'8 |2°8 |6‘98|602 |¢c9‘ 9L

a3 “aug op “mu *M ON OfGIT \OSGL | LP | 9S Gb | &Z ipes ©*€1\6°06\0z9° {22° } 99 | +9 £9 f $8 IPT 0‘8 lefagiseZ* |669% ST

> *1e9}9 *1e9]9 “Us {Ni S‘6UL |Z°9L | GP | €¢ og | 2 \2°69 PSL|L68ige9° 689" | zo | 9 8S | G8 |2°TZ/0°8 (2°6 lo‘ceiseds |aoL‘ v1

= *AIOMOYS = UTeX *[}U09 | “ms ‘oO fos =| OTFOT [OL J 88 | 28 G8 | 26 [L°2L\6%% joe |e*celop9s 009% | 06 | F6 66 | 96 109210 jo‘t |r‘eZigeL° |r1Z GL

Ss *auy. “‘sniii0 ‘wnd} “Ms “Ms [OLé OO |1°ZZ FZ} IZ OL | 88 |g°LI8°S l0'2 jatgs|ezos ols 98 | 68 18 | 76 |0°L1/3° Iph jo‘es|ZeZ* |g69° IL

ae “4SBOI9AO =“ UIA *]JUOD |" “SM “S-OTS OIG |s‘eZ | 08 | $8 LL 1 16 \eZLI9%e |o%e \otesl66g9* {265° | 0G | 06 06 } 96 |0‘g2/z‘% \a‘% Ie*ts\Po8’ jeeZ‘ or

PS ‘Aep [fe -urex = yseor0ao | “mM AA 06S =| B‘FOT |c‘eZ | 9a | 88 06 ] $6 |o°ZLI2°S |a°s |L‘tgjceo* {969° | gg | 98 L8 | 56 |€‘eLic%s Io's |peLicol® 129° | 8

| op op “aS “a'S fee’s | 9°16 |2'sh | 06 | GL 08 | 96 \6*9L\9%e [9%p le‘peliass |gesk | gg | 8 88 | 96 |0‘6L/9%% 12° |a‘rslos9s |zEe9* LE

’ op *Aramoys |" "S “a's fo0‘o | OTe [p92 | 88 | 28 8 | $6 \oreLip’e |p'e jaccaltas’ |AZp' | og | €8 | £8 | FG lo‘GZ|Fe \6‘e |e*palsco’ |elos | 9

= "wITeO ‘op op ‘aS “A'S (010 | 66 [9°92 | 88 | 94 08 | 96 |L*9Z\c°E Iam leccglugr’ IS0b. | Fg 18 } £6 GP |o°F IT98|0e9° OLS g

= ~Aramoys op Sic FO OFOT \S°9Z | BZ | &Z GL | 06 |S‘ZZ/0°S |a°9 |L°28\1EP° le. J of | LL 9L | 68 \0‘8Ll0°¢ Ig‘¢ \t‘ogloge*® jZ1S* v

ad ‘ouy ‘und op *as 0 ecor |0'9L | FZ | 92 9L } 88 |0‘6L/6'S 16°¢ \g‘Zeigcp* 00% 94 | 8L 82 } 68 J0‘6LI0*¢ |9‘¢ |Z‘ogleccs gts‘ &

*Apnoyo yerjs ‘und | °° “S “A'S 0801 {0'9L | tZ | 69 TL | 88 |O°ZLi9°9 |e°L \6*se|1ZP‘62|40P°62a] og | 08 GL } 16 |E"8L\n°h |o’s |2°cg|09°6a|6FS'63]

os > om a Te) (1) ie) ho} ej y/>mwola® Qpy] S'S F Ohm =e] ° +312 Bolt wo

2 ec cles 6. g | & [esieeeSeciee) © |Ss| oe T zi CPSlS agiee Seize SGleE| YESSY eM Eclees S

> = = re oe U ot o = lay ma on as

e & : 2 | 3 |PossiF_ s(8n) FleelZsiog) 38) SS/PoeS| 27 3[8.] 2 eeleeies| Sblessl

Po] SY a! Zee si iseieel el "el sat RH” | BeAr sl Bis eiee| 6] “Pletal &

; *SsoUloly xy *AVipruin Fy * Apruin yy 5

*JOYIVA AA *pUurIM snemeuiey se peyepnojeg “Wd 7 38 suoeArasqo peyepnoyea ‘W ‘VY Q[ 78 SUOIZVAIOSQO =

Iaystsay :

"9E81 ‘waquazdag fo yjuopy ays sof ‘n2ynajvD ‘a0Q fussy ayn yw yday ‘uajsrbary joorbojouoazayyr

600

‘

‘f

x .

‘< L)

‘ i

sie Pe vate

Y Lb! :

A °

bie

Journ. As. Soc. | Val. VPLELIN.

« . ? .

Names of Palaces in D*Richardsons 3 tours inthe Tenasserim provinces. |

/ 00363 a0§ 2 pdloas] 3 20994) 4 coon ¢) 5 age 6 weg] 7 qvas

say 9 99d 40 ug oop: i (90 14 cog?) 390) nosro(R¢]

Is ePe: 16 APE) 7 oqoogsl 1 OGCArmeS 19 o€B 20 a anda

21 EX) 22 39: (0%) 23 nan) 24 ebb (af? 25 oad) 56 Gena d}

27 aah 28 Scd) 29 20805: 19 gjpn: 200g: 31 nfm 32 ond):

33 a §{aB: 34 oad 35 Sams: 36 6 op 37 2 ira d| a8 gangs

39 CLO 40 M07) 4) IGP 42 43 44 geod As o¥6) AG 47 3

48 AY aged 50 ny] s2. Sox 53 54 ss adaye) x Oonk

37 58 59 Go god 61 age 62 63 64 GOO

IC) ~ 06 ~

65 OR9 66 oy 67aEM ey 68 @O) 69 70 aotp aS) 7 6 006)

72.90HE2 73a oF J aqongy’ 75 ge ge 76 5): (GO 17 wg da(p 2

70.9 ee oS) 79 ae 80 faa) ai avo onabet) 2 (A a3 wo?

BA 299 gh (6 sage sapery s7 Aadays ee QBigvd 9 00)

oo go aon dy 9) Span (GO 92 aod) 93 Oo 94 003 339% gs orgoasd

96 (ae a0 97 (Beor 96 Bsooné 99. 49° 120 30 6p 0005) /01 69\932:

2 CAGE cog 103 gislo ps’ 104 gpxsd 105 106 cag eh

joy cog 108 oF 9 109 of ors? 0 {Sooaf mo (arops. ud ost

113 8 BD & a) ( The blanks are se in the oréginal ) IP lithes.

Mi Masson's Sketch of the sculpture ak Bameian.

inthe niche of She S 4 Ldot,

econ

VUlt yyy

AR inn tw

Be My

"A Leite

*rinted ab the oriental Lith? Press, Cabeulta,

JOURNAL

G24. ASAE LC ...8:0O-C1LE TY.

No. 58.—October, 1836.

{.—An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenas-

serim' Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D.

Ricuarpson, Hsq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim

Provinces. By E. A. Buunpexiy, Esq. Commissioner.

{The small figures refer to the accompanying Plate, where the native words are cor-

rectly written in the Burman character. ]

Of the numerous petty states north of the Tenasserim provinces,

those only of Zimmay?, Labong® and Lagon*, on the east bank of

the Salween and the slip of country on the west bank inhabited by

a wild, barbarous, but independent tribe of mountaineers called Red

Kayens°, have hitherto been visited by Europeans. Of the vast extent

of country between the Salween® and Cambodia rivers, we know little

or nothing, though it is hoped the expected opening of an overland

trade between the frontiers of China and the Tenasserim provinces will

extend our knowledge of the intermediate country.

The town of Zimmay (or Changmai) is situated in Lat. 20 N.

and Long. about 99 E. That of Labong is distant from Zimmay

only 10 miles S. E. ; Lagon about 50S. E. from the same. The

several states are named after these towns, but their respective

boundaries are not well defined, and, together with those of Moung-

pay’ and Moung-nam, appear to be the patrimony of one family. About

fifty years ago, when the whole of this country was under the dominion

of Ava, seven brothers succeeded, with the assistance of Siam!®, in

throwing off the Burmese yoke, ejected them from the above named

towns, and having been confirmed in the government of them by

Siam, have continued tributary to that kingdom, and successfully

resisted all the attempts of Ava to regain possession. The elder

brother was invested with the title of Chow-tchee-Weet, or “ Lord

602 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

of Life,” with the supreme authority over the others, and the title

has descended to each brother successively alive till it reached the

youngest, whom Dr. Ricnarpson found on his first and second visits,

but who died at the advanced age of 73 years, during his third visit.

It is now in abeyance in the family, and awaits the decision of the

court of Siam. ‘

Of the original inhabitants of this country but a very small por-

tion now cbtains,—perhaps not above one-third of the whole, owing

to the great number that were carried off by the kings of Ava when

they overran and subjected the country. The remainder consists

chiefly of Burmese'', Peguers!? and Shans", from the different states

tributary to Ava; either refugees or slaves ; for slavery exists in this

country in its worst features. The unfortunate wretches are kidnap-

ped and seized by the hill tribes on the west bank of the Salween,

of whom some account will be given, and eagerly purchased from

them at very low rates, by the people of this country. Dr. Ricnarp-

SoN was unable to form an opinion as to the amount of the popula-

tion. He was told that the towns of Zimmay, Lagon, Moung-pay

and Moung-nam contain each about 20,000 and Lalong 14,000, but

he thinks these numbers exaggerated.

In person the Shans bear a great resemblance to their Bur-

mese and Siamese neighbours, though somewhat fairer. They

are muscular, well formed, .and healthy in their appearance: eyes

moderately linear; nose small rather than flat; the mouth large,

and disfigured by black teeth and gums, which they cherish as

a beauty; the hair is long, straight, lank, and almost always black.

They tatoo the lower limbs, but to less extent than the Bur-

mese. Their dress consists of a cotton putso or cloth round the

loins, generally blue, a blue cotton jacket reaching well over the hips,

and a coarse red cotton turban; though many go uncovered. The

dress of the chiefs is of the same description, but the materials are

more costly,—Chinese crape or satin jackets, with gold or silver lace,

the putso of silk. The women are fair and good-looking, and their

dress more becoming than that of Burmese or Siamese,—not open in

front as with the former, nor tucked up between the legs as with the

latter. It is, however, fastened in the same way round the body

without pin or string. Old and young have the bosoms bare, or but

partially covered by a small scarf thrown round the shoulders. Many

of the women are disfigured with goitre, but it seldom attains a

large size. The people are a quiet, mild, good-humoured race, and

not addicted to many vices. Opium smoking and gambling are

scarcely known, and drunkenness is uncommon. ‘The religion is that

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 603

of Buddh, and consequently their ceremonies and festivals differ in

no material manner from those of the Burmese, which are now well

known: indeed there is little other difference between the two races

than that of dress and language; which latter is a dialect of the

Siamese with a distinct alphabet, bearing in the formation of the

letters a great resemblance to the Burmese character. Of the

resources of a country so thmly populated and so constantly subju-

gated to the devastating inroads of both Siamese and Burmese,

according as one or the other of these powers held the sovereignty,

it is not practicable to form an estimate. Speaking of the soil and

cultivation, Dr. Ricuarpson says—‘ The soil in the low paddy and

garden lands is a rich black loam apparently inexhaustible, in which

the crops follow each other in uninterrupted succession. Cultiva-

tion is conducted with a good deal of care by irrigation and trans-

planting, and the return on good lands is about 120 and on inferior

about 75 fold. The general seed-time is in July and August, and the

harvest in December and January, though some descriptions of paddy

are perfected in three months. Their plough closely resembles those

used in the south of Scotland without the culture or ploughshare,

and is often drawn by one buffalo. The principal articles of cultiva-

tion are the cauth-brier, or glutinous rice, cotton, maize, sugar-cane,

tobacco, ground nut, chillies, several kinds of pulse, radishes, and

turnips. Of grain, wheat, and other corn they have none. Pepper,

cloves, and all the finer species of spices are unknown.” Both the

soil and climate seem well suited to the cultivation of Pernambuco

cotton, which is now being introduced into the Tenasserim provinces ;

and it is much to be regretted that the seed with which Dr. Rrcwarp-

son was furnished on his last visit proved bad, as the people evinced

great desire to cultivate so valuable an article. If the cultivation of

South American cotton is found to answer in the Tenasserim pro-

vinces, of which great hopes are entertained, every exertion will be

made to introduce it into the neighbouring countries.

Tin, iron, and lead ores appear to be abundant in the country, and

some of them very rich, though it does not appear that the extraction

of the metal is engaged in to any extent. Dr. R. was informed that

the tin ore yields 80 per cent., and some iron ore that was shown

him seemed equally rich. There are extensive teak forests in that

part of the country immediately adjoining our provinces, but owing to

the difficulty of bringing the timber down the Salween river in con-

sequence of rocks and rapids, it is doubtful whether we shall be

enabled to avail ourselves of that supply to any extent. The country

abounds in cattle, to procure which originally, and subsequently to

412

604 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

ensure the supply, has been the object of Dr. R.’s several visits. An

immense saving has been effected to Government: in obtaining from

thence sufficient cattle for provisioning the European troops on the

coast, in lieu of procuring them from either Bengal or Madras.

The trade of the country is unimportant. An annual caravan visits

it from the frontier provinces of China, bringing silks, satins, velvet

and woollens, (the latter chiefly English,) cooking vessels, musk, and

trifling articles of Chinese manufacture ; and carrying away chiefly raw

cotton, the produce of the country. It is expected that a portion of

this caravan will this year extend their journey to Maulamyne", and

hopes are entertained that this will lead to annual visits in increasing -

numbers, and the opening of an important overland trade between

China and our possessions on the Tenasserim coast. From Maulamyne

are received British piece goods, chintzes, muslins, hardware, &c. in

return for cattle, ivory, and a small quantity of stick-lack. With the

hill tribe on the west bank of the Salween they exchange cattle, grain

and betelnut (the latter from Maulamyne and Bankok), for slaves,

tin, lead, and stick-lac.

It is evident from all that Dr. R. observed and reports, that both

the chiefs and people of this country are not only desirous of conti-

nuing on the most friendly and intimate footing with us, but that they

are really grateful for the immense benefit which our presence in

their neighbourhood has conferred upon their country ; and there is no

doubt that should any future danger menace them, they would gladly

place themselves under our protection, and see their country under

our rule. Our occupation of the provinces has spread peace and

happiness over a wide extent of country entirely independent of our

authority, by putting an end to that ruthless and devastating system of

warfare that had been for ages carried on between the Burmese and

Siamese, whose object was not conquest, but solely to plunder and to

carry off the defenceless people into irremediable slavery. On many

occasions, as Dr. R. passed through the country, the common people

and cultivators expressed to him how different was now their state to

what it was in former years, when they scarce dared leave the walls

of their towns to cultivate their lands ; were obliged to be armed and

constantly on the alert, and to leave their wives and families in the

town ; whereas now the country is in every respect equally secure, and

they are enabled to follow their avocations without apprehensions of

any kind.

The fact may be observed here, that our occupation of the Tenasserim

provinces has also proved of incalculable benefit to a large portion of

the population of Burmah themselves, as it is well known that the

5s ay Pig aa Nae-nales teh:

peat ¢ tapi autia Hr tee ey oli pavrieive: ue te

fost ; pn Ye he . wy

WF }

bel. V PU_XT.

‘ ROUTE MA P

Of Dt Richardsons Journeys

tla the interior of the Tenaggerim Provinces

“ —

Wawa

nighe Vesely

((

AMS

“tl ites

\ Y

\\ Mon- le Lay

(CONTI hy \

RY \ }

S Uy,

biz

RZ * : EZ

Z A

a es

% PS

EY ,

EEE i. Bi ‘a

i ‘ ag

Si Se TAN MARY A) RKQU ATR aS

~ as Se Ae

te eo a

Nae ys Ze

Sakae

gee

\ alla

Seeks Ate

a bs

pa q

&, i.

<| aw

$ b ¢

g v

Z ‘

Se re

Ss J 3

33 > Say

SREz 5 -

Sy) ES Ose: ra

==! = oy ii HK =

SUES Zr \

SSNs Fajpe <i ~-) - ff

Tee S rl ay © '

es nek. Gp hig S0

Rs oot US" Bs

A\ ws

‘Ay

‘f

bah

“Me

S HN

ty wwe ~

t) y

My. y

)

VAT

iia

2 ila

anv

nS)

Moore Ss

sond’z

919° A|oo"

Oriental lth Press, Cileutte. if

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 605

authorities in that country in our immediate neighbourhood,—Rangoon

for instance,—have found themselves obliged to modify their exactions

and oppressions, and to govern ina better spirit of justice and hu-

manity, being well aware that the people have a refuge to fly to should

they be driven to desperation.

The following extracts from Dr. Ricuarpson’s Journal will show the

route travelled by him, and give an account of his reception by the

chiefs whom he visited.

Dr. R. left Maulamyne on 11th December, 1829, and proceeded in

boats up the Salween river for about 100 miles, and landed on the

14th on the east bank at the junction of a small stream called the

Yembyne'’. From hence he started on the 16th.

Journal.

‘©16th. Direction North, 70 East. Time, 3 hours; distance, 7 miles, 4 fur-

longs.

“© 8, 30. Proceeded along a good path practicable for bullocks, elephants, &c.

“9, 35. At the bottom of a short and rather deep descent crossed the

Yembyne river, about 70 feet broad, running South, 45 East.—11. 40. Halted for

the night on the banks of a small grassy lake : the path has been good and gently

ascending ; the jungle of bamboos and common jungle trees, thick and impenetra-

ble, owing to the creepers; the march, thougn only seven miles, was made with

difficulty, owing to the thickness of the jungle.

‘617th. Direction North, 80 East. Time, 3 hours; distance, 8 miles.

“7, 30. Proceeded for some way along a path of the same character as

yesterday.

**8.15. Along a swampy path at the foot of a nearly perpendicular rock,

but covered with verdure to the top.—8. 35. Another rock like the former,

(called by the Careens Lein Koso ;) path better.—8. 45. Crossed a small stream

with steep banks at the site of a village deserted last year by the Careens (who re-

move annually to a new position). It is now overgrown with tall jungle.

“9, 30. Crossed the Yembyne river, wide 30, deep 3 or four feet; clear,

rocky bed, swarming with fish. Halt for an hour.—10, 30. Path soft, along a

valley winding amongst the hills with long grass and dwarf bamboos, much

intersected by tracks of elephants, rhinoceros, and wild hog.

10.10. Again crossed the Yembyne river, wide 40 feet; course South, 20 East.

‘¢11. 30. Halted on the eastern bank (course S., 65 East), where it is joined

by a small stream called the Mean Keun'®, running S. 50° west ; the path nearly

as yesterday ; continued to ascend. Here we were joined by the Careens

from the second villages, and dismissed those who accompanied us the last two

marches.

‘618th. Course North, 80 East ; distance, 10 miles 4 furlongs.

‘*7, 30. Crossed the Mean Keun four times in 20 minutes, and proeeeded

along a rocky path through thick jungle.—8. 20. Crossed Yea-ta-goon Keun'?

20 feet wide ; clear rocky bed.

*©9, Came again to the banks of the Yembyne river.

*©9,10. Crossed a small stream falling into the last.

606 An account of some of the Petty States (Ocr.

«© 9, 30. Path soft through long grass surrounded by hills.

‘©9, 40. Along the rocky bed of the Yea-ta-goon-keun, (waterfall stream.)

“© 10. 30. Halted for half an hour.—l1l. Ascended with some difficulty the

face of a broken rock 3 or 400 feet in height, over which the water of the Yea-

ta-goon during the rains falls.—11. 30. Halted at the top of the waterfall, within

sound of another which we heard tumbling from the hills above us to the east-

ward. The path to-day continued ascending and very bad, either soft with long

grass, or rocky and uneven and extremely tortuous; but the Careens say it is

the only pass through this part of the hills; that elephants, horses and bullocks

formerly travelled it with loads, and that it was the route of the Burman army

in 1790. Passed some of the large bamboos peculiar to this country, some

catechu, and some of the tree with the sap of which the Careens poison their

arrows. The rest of the jungle consisted of common jungle trees, immense

creepers, and the common bamboos; tracks of elephants and wild hogs were

numerous, but no marks of the rhinoceros, which is confined to the more level

part of the country where grass is abundant.

“19th. Direction North, 55 West, Time, 3 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

8 miles.

‘* 7, 30. Path along the stony bed of a stream.

‘7.55. Skirt a ravine to the eastward.

** 8. 30. Crossed the Keung Cank'*, or crooked stream, eight or ten times

running in various directions.

‘* 9. Path a little better, but repeatedly crossed by the Keung Cank.

“© 9.45. Halted on the banks of the Ween Weel, a small stream 15 or 20

feet wide, which falls into the Thaung-Lin®® to the north-eastward. The path

to-day was wet and bad; the jungle thick. No marks of inhabitants. Were

joined in the evening by four Musulmans, who, together with seven who accom-

panied us, and five sepoys, make the party amount to forty-two persons. Those

who joined us to-day came by the Gyne?! road in nine days from Maulamyne, five

by water to Daggue?*, and four by land. They represented the road as bad,

and hilly, only accessible to people unincumbered, but inhabited by Careens, five

or six of whose villages they had passed.

“© 20¢h. Direction North, 35 Kast. Time, 2 hours; distance, 4 miles.

‘* 7, 30. Crossed the Ween Wee, and ascended a rather steep hill and pro-

ceeded along an ascending path, which appears as if cut along the face of the

hill on the bank of a ravine 300 or 350 feet deep, but clothed with small trees

and verdure, as are all the hills, even those which are nearly perpendicular.

‘* 8, Descending along asimilar path through ajungle of the large bamboos ;

paths particularly good.

‘©9, 45, Descended along the rather steep bed of a stream, water ancle deep;

path extremely bad.—9. 55. Came to the bank of the Thaing-Ein* (called by

the Shans May-pmoie) river, wide 160 or 180 feet; moved a short way down

the western bank, north 20 east, in the direction of its course, and crossed

over to the eastern side by assistance of a boat and some bamboo rafts. I had

been led by the guide to believe that we should be met here by some chiefs of

the Zimmay country with elephants, &c. to assist us in transporting the bag-

gage and presents, and to accelerate our movements towards their capital; they

had, however, decamped eight or nine days before our arrival, and we took pos-

1836. ] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 607

session of their sheds, which were the first human habitations we had seen since

leaving the boats. The Thaing-Ein river is the old boundary between the

Burman and Siamese countries, and is now the British boundary in this direction

with the latter nation. It arises in this range of hills about eight or ten days’

march in a south-easterly direction from this, about one day’s march from the

course of the Gyne river, and falls into the Mein-lun-ghee* (called by the Shans

Mun-neum) two days west from this. The united streams fall into the Thaluru”

some distance above a cataract im the latter river, which entirely cuts off all

water communication with the country above it, and in which even timber is

shattered to pieces that happens to get into it.

‘21st. Felt the first effects of being inthe Siamese country, in being obliged

to halt till the road was cleared by the Careens. There was an evident desire

on the part of the Careens, who met us here, to detain us for a day or two:

they indeed privately declared their orders from Caow Ho Kyio, the chief who

was to have met us here, todo so. I, however, intimated my intention to pro-

ceed on the following day. We were here furnished with a pig, rice, and fowls.

‘© 22nd. Direction North, 20 East. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance,

6 miles, 2 furlongs.

‘“*7 a.m. Proceeded along a good path through a patch of cultivated ground,

where the Careens grow the hill rice, which is fine and small in the grain.

‘©7,15. Ascended.—8. Crossed the May-tha-woe* river, wide 60 feet, clear

stony bed; abundance of fish.—8. 45. Path along the side of a hill of the same

character as last march. Or the top of a steep rocky hill above the road is

perched the first Careen village we saw. The houses are entirely composed of

bamboos ; the roof, with a very little slope, is made of two rows of split bam-

boos; the first row with the concave side up, and their edges touching the

second, with the convex side up, and their edges in the trough of the first,

embracing the two contiguous edges. There were only three houses in the

village, the inhabitants of which, old and young, might amount to forty or fifty

people; abundance of pigs, poultry, rice, &c. The people are dirty in their per-

sons, and the skins of the men generally rough and scaly from exposure ;—they

were much alarmed at our first approach, but we gradually gained their confi-

dence.

12. 30. Continued our march, and at 1 halted on the side of the May-tha-

woe (which we frequently crossed in the course of to-day’s march) in thick

jungle, within sound of a heavy fall of water.

‘93rd. Direction North, 20 West. Time, 2hours, 30 minutes; distance,

5 miles, 6 furlongs.

“10 a4. mM. Having sent the coolies on three hours before, on account of the

steepness of the hills : proceeded along a pretty good elephant path up the steep-

est hill we had yet ascended.—10. 45. A plantation of small seed cotton.

“11. 50. Reached the top of the ascent, from which we could count seven

ridges of hills which we had crossed, running north, 20 east, to south, 20 west,

but very irregular and broken in the descent.

«¢ 12.5. Crossed the Tsieu-dzoé?7, (Elephant’s tusk) rivulet, wide 15 or 20

feet.—12. 30. Halted on the banks of the stream at the foot of an extensive hill,

covered with paddy stubble; the Careens say they reap 30 or 40 folds; and

the rice is the finest I have ever seen, almost transparent, and when boiled beau-

tifully white. The Careens of the hills have no cooking or eating apparatus ;

608 An account of some of the Petiy States [Ocr.

the rice and a sort of vegetable stew are boiled in a joint of the bamboo, and

the latter served up in another split in form of a trough, round which they

squat with their rice on any leaf they can find large enough; there is one shell

spoon in the stew which serves the whole party. This day’s march was one of

much labour to the coolies: many of them were seven hours on the road.

‘24th. Direction North, 20 West. Time, 3 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

7 miles.

“*7, 30. Proceeded along a worse path than usual, over a succession of hills,

many of them covered with paddy to the tops, which would indicate a very con-

siderable Careen population. The greater part of the hills this day were of

primitive sandstone.—11.10. Halted by a small stream at the foot of a hill.

‘25th. Direction North, 60 East. Time, 4 hours; distance 9 miles.

“«7, 30. Ascended a rather steep hill along a path much the same as we had

travelled for the last few days.—9. 25. Marched along the bed of a stream about

knee deep; the bottom rocky and broken, the water extremely cold, and the sun

hot and beating on our heads till 11. 30, when we halted on the banks of the

Moy-Gnow” river, (wide 150 or 160 feet) running to the northward and fall-

ing into the Mein-lunght about one day above where the Thaung-Ein falls into

the same river. No marks of cultivation throughout this day’s march. Passed

a number of teak and ¢het-tse trees: of the former there is an extensive forest

on the eastern bank of the Moy-Gnow, but the falls of the Thaluin render it

extremely difficult to transport it to the coast. The famous thet-tfse varnish is

merely the juice of the tree, which exudes from notches made in the bark into

vessels placed to receive it, and is fit for use without further preparation. The

tree has somewhat the appearance of the bastard teak. Saw also several small car-

roway trees in the jungle.—One o’clock. After a flourish of gongs in the jungle

on the other side of the river, several Shans made their appearance, and a Burman

of the party pushed over to our side of the river on a bamboo raft, and after

ascertaining that I was not accompanied by an army, as had been reported by

the Careens, communicated the fact to those on the other side: four petty chiefs,

the heads of the party, then came over; they said they had been sent by the

chief of Zammay to welcome me, and offered us their assistance for the

rest of the march. They dispatched a letter to Zammay to announce our

arrival, and begged us to remain one day on the present ground, assuring me

that they kad five elephants for my use. These elephants were a very season-

able relief, as the people were much knocked up, and the nature of the paths

over steep hills or stony beds of small streams, had precluded the possibility

of my riding for a single march.

‘26th. Halted till some bamboo rafts were made to transport part of the

baggage, which could not be carried on the elephants down the Moy-Gnow. I

found that the chiefs who met me were part of the licensed robbers of Labong,

and one of them (a Burman formerly captured in one of their predatory expedi-

tions) was exceedingly anxious to excuse them for carrying off some of our

people last year, as they were mistaken for Burmans. The Careens brought

three pigs, some fowls, and rice, enough for the whole party: the Shans would

not allow me to pay for them; hitherto every thing had been paid for that was

brought to us.

‘‘ 27th, Direction North, 30 West. Time, 5 hours, 30 minutes; distance,

15 miles.

1836.) lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 609

“9.30 a.M. Marched through a beautiful forest of teak and thenghan trees,

on both banks of the river, which we crossed no less than nineteen times, occa-

sionally following a path, more frequently without any, and the river in many

places just fordable by the elephants ; the whole of the baggage and most of the

people were conveyed either on the elephants or on the bamboo rafts.—3 P. M.

Halted on the east bank of the Moy-Gnow, having crossed one or two trifling

hills in the course of the day, but the march was on the whole a slight descent,

as we followed the course of the stream through the hills towards its mouth;

the country was entirely uncultivated, and destitute of any sign of inhabitants,

The wild elephants are much more scarce on this than on the western side of

the Moy-Gnow, and even there much less numerous than on the British side of

the Thaung-Hin. Tigers, deer, wild cows, &c. &c. are, however, numerous here.

The Shans march without tents or coverings of any desoription, and make little

huts of branches after each march in the same manner as the Burmese.

“28th. Direction North, 30 West. Time, 4 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

12 miles.

“ll a.m. Crossed the river ten times, and proceeded along the banks

through a country of the same character as yesterday, with scarcely a sign of a

path, and learned that this road is never travelled except by the chiefs when

collecting the tribute from the Careens, who, in the neighbourhood, are tributary

to Ponya* or Benya-tche, the principal of the four little chiefs who came to

meet me.—3. 15. Halted on the east bank of the river, about the same width

as when we first came on its bank.

“29th. Direction North, 25 West. Time, 2 hours; distance, 6 miles.

“9 a.m. Continued our march along the banks of the Moy-Gnow till about

10 a. m. when we left it to the westward, and, crossing a rather steep hill, came

at 11 o’clock on the banks of the Mein-lun-ghee (running to the southward ; wide

about 120 feet) a short way above where it is joined by the Moy-Gnow.—ll

A.M. Crossed and halted, Saw numerous marks of elephants, deer, elk, and hog,

in a soft part of the jungle to-day: the Shans say that they all eat that sort of

mud,a kind of black stiff (probably saline) loam or rather clay ;—killed a small

animal to-day called by the Burmans Poe*?, and of which I do not recollect to

have seen any description. The head is large and round, like an otter; the cut-

ting teeth like a rat, and feet slightly webbed, somewhat resembling in appearance,

though inferior in strength, to the moles. The fur exactly like that animal, but

larger in the staple, and, I think, even finer—it is little larger than a common

English mole, and burrows with great rapidity. There are two kinds of the same

animal ; the other differs in being much larger, and the hair coarse and harsh,

like the bandicoot. I regret that the specimens I obtained were both lost,

‘© 30th. Direction North, 30 West. Time, 4 hours ; distance, 12 miles.

“10. 20. Continued to march along the Mein-lun-ghee in the same way as we

had done along the Moy-Gnow. Crossed twelve times to-day. Its average breadth

130 or 140 feet, and depth about six feet. Its course continues amongst the

hills, which are covered with teak and that-tse trees, as those of the Moy-Gnow.—

At 2. 20 halted on the western bank of the river in a small patch of paddy

in a plain of few miles extent; the first lowland paddy we have seen since leay-

ing the Thalween, and the first of any cultivation since joined by the Shans.

“31st. Direction North, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 10 minutes; distance,

12 miles,

‘610 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

‘68,15. Marched to-day along a path better than any we have seen since

crossing the Moy-Gnow.

‘© 11, Passed the village of Bowtaa*! ; 12 or 14 houses surrounded by a small

patch of cultivation. Having crossed the Mein-lung-hee river four times to-day.—

12. 25. Halted in a rather extensive patch of paddy stubble belonging to the village

Kapa®, which is distant a mile and a half, Nearly the whole of the country between

this and the village, which is in a small valley, has last year been under cultiva-

tion; all the rice in the country is of that glutinous description called by the

Burmans kanghuyeen ; the only hard rice that can be obtained is from the

Careens, who left us to-day, and by whom we have been accompanied from the

neighbourhood of one village to that of another since leaving the Thalween. They

are a fair, well-limbed, athletic race, superior in appearance generally to the

‘Talines and Burmans, but have been oppressed from time immemorial by Talines,

Burmans, and Shans, whoever happened to have the ascendance. They have

been obliged to furnish provisions, erect huts, cut the jungle from the edges of

the path, and furnish guides to all travellers crossing the hills, the latter of

which services they performed for us, and were much surprized at being paid

for whatever they furnished us. They annually shift their habitation, and if

they pitch upon a site near a path, it is immediately shut up. In addition to

the other inhabitants of the jungle, we to-day saw marks of rabbits in consi-

derable number.

“« January 1st. Direction North, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 50 minutes ; dis-

tance, 14 miles.

‘“¢9, 45. Proceeded along a good path through the paddy grounds of the

village of Kapa, which we passed at 10. 20, consisting of about thirty or forty

houses precisely in the Burman style, with one or two Pungee® houses, but no

pagodas, &c.—11. 25. Passed the first pagoda we have seen since leaving Thal-

ween, perfectly dilapidated. Near a small village saw 70 or 100 heads of good

cattle in a rather extensive paddy field.—2. 35. After traversing a grassy plain

intersected with belts of jungle, halted on the south bank ofa small stream run-

ning to the westward and falling into the Mein-lung-hee river about quarter of a

mile from the village of Mein-lung-hee. The path to-day was well marked, and there

was more appearances of cultivation than we had before seen. We only crossed

the Mein-lung-hee river three times. The rise of water in the rains, from the marks

on the trees and banks in this river, cannot be less than 30 or 40 feet.

‘¢'The Shans being anxious to detain me on the read till an answer is received

to the letter notifying my arrival, dispatched on the day I met them, I have

consented, as I cannot well proceed without their assistance, to remain here twa

days.”

The town, or rather village, of Mein-lung-hee at which Dr. R. arrived

this day, is a collection of huts about 200 in number, scattered over

an extensive plain of 34 or four miles in width, through which the

river of the same name runs, having its rise about fifteen or twenty

days’ journey north, and pursuing a southerly course nearly parallel

to the Salween till joined by the Thoung-yeen, when the united streams

take a westerly course and enter the Salween. The town is under

the jurisdiction of Labong™, from whence a governor is appointed,

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 611

who levies contributions from the Kayen tribes in the neighbourhood,

and is not scrupulous of occasionally extending his exactions into

our portion of the country. Such is the wild life and timorous nature

of these tribes that they submit to any one who appears invested

with any authority, and it is difficult to induce them to visit Mau-

lamyne with their complaints. | Mein-lun-ghee being the first frontier

Station, is generally passed through by the traders of Maulamyne,

and the Shan States also by those of the latter, who visit the country

of the Red Kayens to purchase slaves. An effort was made to detain

Dr. R. here, till an answer should be received from Labong regarding

him ; but on evincing a determination either to proceed or to return

immediately to Maulamyne, elephants were furnished him, and he

resumed his route on the 6th.

“6th. Direction South, 80 East. Time, 3 hours, 30 minutes ; distance, 10

miles.

Six elephants were produced, and at 10. 20 we proceeded across the valley

to the south-eastward.—11. 12. Commenced the ascent of the eastern hills, which

is gradual but considerable.

“1.15. Crossed the Moy-Konie* within quarter of a mile of a fall 60 or

80 feet to the S. W. of the road.

“1.50. Halted on the banks of the Moy-Konie. Three of the elephants

had four young; all born in captivity, which the Shans speak of as a thing of

course: one of them had two, one about six years old, the other about 24 or

3, still sucking. We here left all the little chiefs, but Benya-cuit and the

Burman who was taken prisoner twenty-five years ago. The road to-day (one of the

principal routes to the Careen Uce (or Red Careens) country) was good, and the

hills not very steep. ;

“7th. Direction South, 80 East. Time, 7 hours, 50 minutes; distance, 14

miles.

**8.55. Steep ascent for two hours; great part of the way in ruts as deep as

the elephants’ backs worn by the mountain torrents.

‘11. The mist on the hills and valley below us with a beautiful clear sun

on it, had exactly the appearance of snow. A cold piercing wind from the east-

ward.—ll.15. Narrow road along the side of a hill which rises perhaps 150 or

160 feet above it, with a deep ravine below to the eastward.—12. Continued

cold and chilly ; left the elephant; steep descent for nearly an hour.—2. 45.

Halted on the banks of the May-lie®® (which falls into the Mein-lun-ghee about a

day below the village) on a beautiful little plain surrounded by high hills, and

bounded on the south-west by the stream 10 or 12 feet wide.

‘‘The march to-day was almost a continued ascent; some of the hills very

steep ; the elephants frequently obliged to stop from fatigue ; the paths tolerably

good, evidently much frequented, and said to be cut by a Shan king” of great

power, but evidently the tracts of elephants deepened by the torrents, in many

places as deep as the backs of the elephants, not more than 18 inches wide at

the bottom, and just clear of the howdahs at the top. The elephant from which

I dismounted at 12 did not come to the ground till 4, 45, and was consequently

4x2

6i2 An account of some of the Petiy States [Ocr.

8 hours, 50 minutes on the road; some of them did not arrive till an hour after-

wards from the difficulty of the ascent.

‘“‘8th. Direction North, 70 East. Time, 5 hours ; distance, 12 miles.

‘‘9, Continued to ascend the hills in a path rather better than that of yes-

terday ; free from ruts.—10, 45. A good broad road along the side of the hills

for an hour or two.—2. Halted on a small plain near the Lowa village of

Meing-lay-been*® containing five or six houses. The nights have gradually been

becoming cooler as we ascended, and there are sevenof the people ill with fever

in consequence. The thermometer stood at 46° in the tent this morning at

8 A. M.

‘The jungle plantain, thet-tse, bamboos, and pine in luxuriance, the latter

forming the principal part of the jungle (or forest, for it has lost much of its

density in these upland regions ;) the creepers have almost disappeared, and the

trees which form the crest of the hills tothe westward may almost be counted in

the afternoon, and might be traversed with little difficulty.—At 11. 15 to-day from

the top of ove of the high hills nothing could be seen as far as the eye could

range but masses of hills rising one above another, covered with the same

description of jungle to their summits, but no snow to be seen; if they can be

said to be disposed at all into ranges, it is between S. S. E. and N. N. W. but

they are extremely irregular and broken.

‘¢ 9th. Direction North, 45 East. Time, 6 hours; distance, 10 miles.

“©8, 55, Continued to ascend.—2. 30. Open forest, composed entirely of

fir trees, tall, straight, and free from branches, to the height probably of 50 feet.

“©2.55. Halted at the Lowa* village of Bo’, situated in an open plain in

the forest, perhaps of 12 or 15 miles in length by five or six in breadth, as has

been the case ever since leaving the Mein-lun-ghee. Our march has been a continued

ascent, but gradually surmounting hills in succession, with several descents

throughout ; we are now said to occupy the highest and coldest halting place

on the road ; the fir has been the most numerous tree throughout the march, and

the only one during the latter part of the day. The village of Bo consists of 60 or

80 houses: the people are all ironsmiths, and are exempted from all service but

furnishing elephants’ chains, cooking pots, spears, and other iron-ware to the

Shans during war, or for military purposes; the iron ore is a red oxyd, and is

found in immense masses in a hill to the north-westward less than one day’s

journey. It is brought to the village on elephants and melted in a simple fur-

nace—yields nearly 50 per cent. of metal, soft and unfit for knives, ploughs,

shears, &c. &c.; they have not the art of hardening it. The people are said to

be rich, particularly in elephants, of which there are not less than sixty or seventy

in the village.

‘610¢h. Direction South, 65 East. Time, 5 hours, 40 minutes ; distance, 14

miles.

‘610 a.m. Ascended by a good path, much frequented throughout.—10. 20,

descent.—1l. 25. Saw the May-ping*! river, which falls into the sea at Bankok.—

2. 20. Rocky steep, difficult descent.—3. 15. Crossed the May-papie* river, knee

deep, running easterly.—3. 40. Halted on the banks of the May-papie on a

small grassy plain. Since 12. 20 we have been descending; the road though

rocky has been pretty good, the'air is decidedly milder, the pine has been gra-

dually diminishing in numbers, and now not one is to be seen; the jungle just

here is very close; the rocks throughout the latter part of the march old gray

1836. ] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 618

sandstone, previous to which they have been granite with a large portion of

felspar.

‘11th. Direction North, 80 East. Time, 4 hours ; distance, 12 miles.

‘©8. 40, Crossed the May-papie: good path and less precipitous.—ll1. 50.

Crossed a small dry rivulet in which rubies of small value are found.—12. 5.

Crossed the May-Haut*? about knee deep, by which the paddy between this and

the village is irrigated ; nearly all the paddy in the plains of the valley of May~

ping is cultivated in the same way.—12. 30. Halted at the village of Maing-

Haut* (pronounced by the Burmans Mein- Woot) on the west bank of the May-

ping, which runs to the southward and falls into the sea at Bankok after joining

the May-nam*>.

‘‘ The march to-day continued to descend gradually, with a few trifling accli-

vities till 12 ; since which nearly level; the climate proportionately improved ;

the jungle has assumed the same character as on the other side of the hills, but

more open.

“‘ We are now fairly in the valley of the May-ping, and have the prospect for

the next three or four days of seeing something of the level country, but the

whole extent of the country between the Thalween and May-ping, with trifling

exceptions (such as the little valley of the Mein-lun-ghee), is one succession of

mountains ; nearly all of the primitive series, principally gravel gneiss trap, lime

and sandstone.

‘¢ We crossedthe May-papie thirteen times to-day. The village Maun-Haut con-

tains about sixteen houses of the most uncomfortable appearance ; it is about 12

days from Bankok, with which the communication is frequent; the river here

is about 200 yards across, and rather rapid; there are a number of palmyra,

cocoanut and other fruit trees, both here and on the opposite side, where there

is also a small village.

‘¢ The river here is a little wider than above or below the village, and just for-

dable by elephants ; there are few fish in the river, and the people almost igno-

rant of the art of catching them. On endeavouring to procure boats as the

easiest conveyance for the sick, I was not a little surprised when only one small

canoe could be procured, in which only one of the worst cases could he sent

forward.

‘* Remained here one day at the request of the persons who accompany me, in

order to transmit intelligence to Labong of our approach.

‘© 13th. Direction North, 20 Rast. Time, 5 hours; distance, 15 miles.

“9.15. Road lies along the foot of the western hill; the river turns towards

the eastern hills, which are distant about 20 miles.—1l1l. 55. Crossed the

Nam. May-tcheem*, wide 100 yards; fordable by elephants.—1. 45. River 200

yards wide ; full of shoals.—2. 5. Crossed the May-ping, and halted on its eastern

bank in an open jungle, where a house* had been built for our reception. The

road to-day has been nearly level and much frequented ; the whole of the valley

was inundated last year to a greater extent than is recollected by the oldest people,

the paddy being nearly all destroyed, and the people obliged to take to the hills.

‘14th. Direction North, 30 East. Time, 5 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

16 miles.

“8.15. Road good level.—9. 55. Grassy plains.—1. 30. Crossed the

May-lie*®, which falls in the May-ping four miles to the westward, wide about

thirty or forty yards; halted on the eastern bank at the village of Naung-long”.

614 An account of some of the Petty States (Oct.

‘¢15th. Direction North, 60 East. Time, 7 hours; distance, 21 miles.

‘©8.5. Road good, passable for banaies.—12. 20. Grassy plains intersected

with jungle.—1. Western hills distant 20 miles ; eastern hills, 4 miles ; hills

n sight to the northward.—l. 30. Paddy ground; numbers of buffaloes and

black cattle—2. 10. Halted between the village of Bansan-kanoy*® and Ban-

Soupta®! on the western bank of the May-ta‘?, a small stream, which falls into the

May-quang® about a quarter of a mile from this, andfrom thence into the May-

ping a quarter of a mile further to the south-west.

‘The road to-day has been very good, much frequented and passable for a

bullock cart; throughout marks of recent inundation are still very visible ;

oranges, pummaloes, pine apple, mangoe, palmyra, cocoanut, guavas, and other

fruits are abundant; the first and the cocoanut are the only two now in season.

The people have much improved in appearance; some of the women and chil-

dren are nearly as fair as Europeans: many of the latter with light hair; the

eyes are large and expressive, not at all like the Chinese ; the nose, however, is

small, like the Burman.

‘“‘They have had a report current here for the last month, that the English

were coming up with 1,000 men, which has alarmed them a good deal. A letter

has been dispatched to the people here to-day, telling them who I am, and order-

ing them to supply me with every thing I want; and the messenger begged

I would remain here two or three days, till the road was made smooth and every

thing ready for my reception at the capital. There is no way of avoiding their

ridiculous delays.”’

Dr. R. was delayed here a few days, on the plea of preparing for

his reception, and ascertaining from the astrologers a lucky day for

his visit.

‘20th. Direction North, 20 East. Time, 2 hours, 10 minutes; distance,

6 miles.

*©10, 20. Started on horseback with ten or twelve elephants, each having a

little either of my baggage or presents. At 11. 35 I was met by the second

son-in-law of the Tsodoa, the 3rd chief of the province, with fifty elephants. On

each were mounted some of the numerous relations of the chiefs. They had

brought a spare elephant for me, on which after complimentary speeches of

welcome, I mounted, and we continued our march ; the elephant on which I rode

being last. In this procession we proceeded slowly towards the town, occasion-

ally stopping to let the elephants pull the pine apple plants and plantain trees

out of the gardens of the poor people, with whom the chiefs chatted on the

most familiar terms.

‘* At 12. 30 we arrived at this spot, about a mile from the town, which they

had fixed on for my encampment. My tent was already pitched in a little

square of sheds, which they had built for the people. The chiefs remained

with me about an hour, examined the muskets, talked of our soldiers, &c., and

then took their leave. On inquiry I found there were two chiefs from Lagon,

but none from Zimmay present. There is only a small portion of the walls of

the fort visible from this, and none of the houses; and from the immense

number of cocoanut and betelnut trees growing inside, it has more the appear-

ance of a forest than a fort; the tops of two pagodas (one of which is gilt) are -

1836. ] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 615

visible over the tops of the trees ; the whole country is so covered with food that

not twenty houses are to be seen from this place: there are as many round the

Fort as there are init. It stands on the right bank of the May-quang**, which

is here about 30 feet wide and three deep at this season, though navigable for

boats of some burthen during the rise of the river. The May-quany falls into

the May-ping about half a mile from this (in the valley of which river both this

town and Zimmay are situated), which pursues its course amongst the hills from

this to within a few days of Bankok, where the hills terminate, and the country

spreads into a plain populous and fertile. The valley varies in breadth from

10 or 12 miles to 60 or 80; the soil is a rich sandy loam, and from the beds of

the river apparently of great depth; the hills are of very considerable height,

but no snow is visible from this, though the thermometer at 7 o’clock is

seldom above 53°. The distance from this to the frontier towns of China is

about 40 elephant marches (probably of 12 or 15 miles each) over the northern

hills, and throughout that distance no snow is said to be encountered ; but to

what other cause than snow the rise of the river can be attributed, I am igno-

rant; as it is thought a heavy monsoon if there are three or four days of heavy

rain ina month. The annual rise of the river is considerable, and last year was

sO excessive as to drive the whole population from its bank.

‘*T have had no communication with any of the chiefs to-day, but a letter

was sent to the person (a Benya) left here to provide any thing I might want, to

keep the Pungees and the people from crowding round my tent, in consequence of

a representation of mine yesterday. The bearer of the letter said it was the

wish of the chief that I should be presented to-morrow, and begged that I would

not bring any pocket pistols or any other hidden instrument of death; I request-

ed to know if I should wear any sword, as it was looked on by us as a mark of

respect ; to which they also objected. The materials have this evening been

brought to build me a small house.

“2st. At 12. 30 sixteen coolies with seven large silver, and nine copper

calats (salvers), and a body of peons armed with spears, came out to carry the

presents and conduct me to the presence of the chief.

“The walls of the fort are formed of the red ferruginous porous stone common

in Burmah at the bottom and the top of bricks of the most slender construc-

tion; the sides of the streets for a few yards were lined with the common people,

bearing muskets ; the shed (about quarter of a mile from the gate) in which the

chief received me, was about 60 feet long and 20 wide, with three sheds at right

angles built for the occasion, occupying the whole of the front, all of which

were filled with people ; many of them near relations of the chief, and all in the

crouching position common with the Burmans; nearly all armed either with

swords or muskets. The presents had already arrived, and were placed at the

upper end of the centre shed. Having made a bow to the chief, I went imme-

diately up to his seat (a small light chair) and presented the letter. I said that

I was fortunate in being the first to open the road of friendship between the

two countries, that it was the wish of the English Government that the mer-

chants of each should be as uncontrolled in the territories of his neighbour as

if they were in their own, &c. &c. He answered, he had long turned the eyes of

friendship towards us ; that he was happy the gold and silver road had been open-

ed ; that he hoped we should now be as one people, but that the presents must be

616 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

sent to the king of Siam, whose instructions would be taken. He wished to

know what terms we were on with the Burmese. I said on terms of friendship:

that after a war of two years they had sued for peace, and had obtained it—that

they had nearly fulfilled the terms of the treaty, and that it was a principle of

the English to forget an injury as soon as reparation was made. He said such

was not the case with them; that they had been at war with the Burmans for

ages, and that they killed or made slaves of them whenever they had it in their

power—that the Burmans were equally inveterate. He then asked if I thought

T could obtain an order from the Commissioner of Maulamyne for the Burmese

to give up some tribes of Shans who had originally formed part of their king-

dom of Siam. I said they were Burman subjects ; and though we had conquer-

ed the greater part of their kingdom, it had been restored to them, and that we

had now no control over them. He said that we had the Thenieu®* or Siriam

Shans with us; that they were originally from Caung-Ghan*®; and that if they

wished to return to the land of their forefathers, he hoped that they would not

be prevented. I said, that they were our subjects, and that if they wished to

return, every facility for doing so would be afforded them.

‘‘ I thought this too favorable an opportunity to be missed, as I knew nearly

every one in court was aware of my being acquainted with the circumstance of

thirty or forty families of Burmans having been carried off by his people when

coming to Maulamyne with a pass from Sir A. CamMpseLt. Seeing the person who

carried them off in court; and a Mussulman merchant being with me who had

represented the impropriety of their proceedings at the time, and fearing that

an unfavorable construction might be put on my silence and a precedent for

like enormities in future; knowing also that Major Burney had demanded

and obtained from the court of Siam the liberation of several hundred people

carried off by the Siamese from about Mergui and Tenasserim ; I thought it

my imperative duty, as the business had already in some degree been agitated,

to endeavour to obtain their release, notwithstanding my instructions were not

to interfere in the matter if it could be avoided. I therefore said, I hoped

equal indulgence would be granted to the Yaline people who had been taken

with the British General’s pass. He denied having seen the pass, though I

believed at the time and have since heard that it was shewn him when several of

the Zimmay and Logan chiefs were present—that their liberation was agitated

and opposed by the Zimmay chiefs. The chief who carried them off being in

court, and having been before pointed out to me, I immediately put it to him,

and he acknowledged that the pass was still with him, but no one present

understood English; that they were ignorant of its contents, but it should be

brought to my tent inthe evening. CHow-TcHEe-WEET said it should be made

known at Siam, and that they must abide by the instructions from thence. I

mentioned the circumstance of Major BurNry’s mission, and said I was sure

jt only required to be made known to his Siamese Majesty. The old chief was

evidently much embarrassed during this part of the conversation; however, in

case of any thing further being done towards their liberation, he cannot again

plead ignorance. I repeated the hope that our intercourse might be free and

unrestrained, and was again told that they must wait for instructions from Siam.

I said that they might come to our settlement on the coast with the same freedom

they would go to Lagon or Zimmay, and requested that Ponya-TcHE (who had

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 617

asked me to make the request) might be allowed to accompany me to Maulamyne,

where he would see the facility with which business was carried on amongst us, and

the advantage to both countries which would arise from an unrestrained trade. He

said he was about to send him to Bankok with the presents I had brought in the

course of next month. I hoped he would find it convenient to send some one else,

and from the great number of chiefs I there saw round the hall, I thought it could

easily be managed. I thea took my leave, and in the evening Ponya-TCHE

called on me, expressed himself much disappointed, and begged I would not give

up the point. He was persuaded if I repeated the request he should be allowed to

accompany me, and as he is one of the most intelligent persons I have met

here, and the ultimate object of the Mission likely to be forwarded by his ac-

companying me, I promised I would do so, Iasked him if there was any

objection to my riding through the fort, &c. &c. He told me Coow-tcHE-WerEt

lad desired him to tell me I was at liberty to go where I pleased in the day,

but that the gates of the fort were shut at night, and that it was rather expected

IT should call on some of the lesser chiefs, his numerous relations. I proposed

calling to-morrow on his son-in-law, and one or two others of the chiefs who

met me on the road and remained bere the day I arrived.’’

The following are extracts from Dr. R.’s journal during his resi-

dence here, which are the most likely to interest the general reader.

‘¢ They had no idea that any European would attempt to cross the hills. I

visited Caow Hova*’* ; he is an intelligent man, about 40, of quiet and agree-

able manners, to whom the chief government of the province is entrusted. The

whole conversation was of the war with the Burmans, their hatred to whom is

only exceeded by their dread, and their expressions of friendship for us propor-

tioned to their idea of our power from having conquered the Burmese. The

Zimmay chief whois nephew to CHou-TcHE-WEET is by no means so friendly to

us as the others, and there is some sparring between them now, about my being

allowed to come here. On my return in the evening I found CHow-n1-mo1-Koin

at my house with two of the first chief’s wives and several musicians, waiting to

entertain me with a natch and singing; the music was particularly pleasing.

One man, a northern Shan, sang remarkably well, both as to taste and execu-

tion, much in the style of the Chinese, but much superior to any thing I ever

heard in that country. I presented a cotton handkerchief and a Madras rupee

to each, with which they were highly pleased.

‘© 24th. Rode round the fort to-day, which is of an irregular form; the

largest end towards the south. The east, west, and southern faces are nearly

of the saine length (probably 15 or 1600 feet); the north end not more than

1,000. The wall is from 15 to 23 feet high outside, and from 13 to 18 inside,

and of the most flimsy possible structure, with four gates in the east and two

in the south, two on the west, and one in the north face, surrounded on three

sides by a wet ditch of 60 or 70 feet wide and in good repair. On the east

side the river flows: at this season it is not more than knee-deep; at the gates

‘are guards of half a dozen coolies without arms. On the eastern bank of the

‘river opposite the fort are the remains of an old stockade of equal size with

the fort, with brick angles and bastions. The houses are more numerous with-

aut than within the fort. On the western side is an extensive plain of rich

* The title of the heir-apparent to the chieftainship.

4.1

618 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

paddy ground as far as the eye can reach from north to south, and five or six

miles from east to west covered at this season with many thousand head of cattle,

buffalos, also elephants in considerable numbers. Saw some of their bandies,

which are the best specimen of their workmanship T have seen; the wheels are

exactly like, and equal to those of a common English cart.

‘(25th. Ihave heard to-day that orders have been given to the people not

to buy any thing from the merchants who accompanied me, and not to come

about my house. Yesterday they endeavoured to exchange their goods for cattle,

but the people dare not sell without orders, though anxious todo so. I sent the

interpreter to CHow-TcHE-WEET, as is the custom here, to intimate my intention

of calling on him. He excused himself on account of indisposition. I told the

interpreter also to say I was anxious to return on Saturday or Sunday at farthest,

and to inquire if there were any objection to my going to Zimmay, to which I

received no answer. ;

‘6 Called on Cuow Rasawoon, an elder brother of Coow-tcHE-WEET’s, but

by aconcubine ; he lives in a small bamboo house outside the fort, but has

gold betel apparatus, the gift of the King of Siam, which is only given to

chiefs of rank. He has twenty-eight wives, and told me with evident exultation

that they were all taken prisoners by himself but one. He was chief of the Dum-

myas, or licensed robbers, for many years,—a situation of some honor and

danger, where the most barbarous system of border warfare is carried on with the

most rancorous hatred, and where the State looks upon the prisoners taken by

these treacherous midnight robbers as a principal source of its population.

‘T represented to Cow Houa the inconsistency of the friendly expressions

towards us, whilst the very object of my visit, from which they ought certainly

to expect much advantage, was defeated by prohibiting their people from pur-

chasing the things they were anxious to be in possession of, from the few poor

people who had accompanied me ; that it was bad encouragement for future cara-

vans on a larger scale; but to convince them we perfectly trusted in them, the

merchants would remain till their things could be disposed of, and that I would

give a note of their names and numbers.

“26th. I received a visit from Crow Hova to-day, the purpose of which

was to induce me to remain here for two months, till the presents I had brought

were sent to Bankok®® and the King’s sentiments known. I told him my recep-

tion had been such that I could have no objection to remain twelve months, but

that the purpose of my visit had been to assure them of our friendly disposition

towards them, and open a friendly communication between Maulamyne and the

Shan country ; that we had been on the most friendly terms from time imme-

morial with the King, or I could not have been sent to any of his allies or

dependencies ; that they were now aware of our sentiments and our anxiety to

be at peace with all our neighbours, and that I wished to return on Sunday

the 31st.

‘© 29th. Paid my second visit to Coow-TcHe-WeeET to-day, who sent in the

morning to say he would be glad to see me; I was received as before, but with

less stiffness and more cordiality, and there were no armed people in the street.

He repeated his declarations of friendship towards the English, which I see no

room to doubt; and saidthe only reason we were not on the same terms as

natives of the country, was the bad feeling of the Zimmay chief towards us, and

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 619

that they had sent to Siam to endeavour to bring him under the king’s displea-

sure for having received me as he had.

‘*T begged to know if CHow-n1-Mo1-Ko1n and Ponya-TcHE would be allow.

ed to accompany me, and told him I was anxious to start on Suaday 3lst. He

said in that case it would be impossible for them to accompany me, and hoped

I would wait nine days, when every thing would be ready, and a lucky day, and

they should then proceed along with me. After some consideration, I said that

though my instructions were to return immediately, I would take on myself to

remain. ‘ Then,’ said he, ‘ every thing is settled very soon; if you have any

thing to ask or communicate, do it without reserve.’ I then produced the

General’s pass, which mentions 1100 people, though there are now scarcely 100

remaining, the others having escaped as opportunity offered ; and asked what

were his intentions regarding those people ; and as I had little doubt of his refus-

ing to liberate them, and I had no authority to demand them, I added, that as

our friendship was sealed and they were apprehensive of the King of Siam, I

did not wish to press their immediate release, but begged he would allow the

heads of the villages now left (who was the person they had selected to bring

the letter to Maulamyne) to accompany me, and communicate his case to the

Commissioner, that from the constant and friendly intercourse we had with the

King of Siam, and his having given up our people who were carried off from

Mergui, 1 had no doubt of the result. He readily agreed to the man’s accom-

panying me, but begged jocularly that I would not give him up to the Burmans,

who were a thorn in their eye, which seemed a signal for the conversation to

become general; amongst other things he told me he had 80 wives, 18 sons, and

16 daughters, of whom one is an inferior wife of the King of Siam, but has

unfortunately no children; that his relations in the three towns amount to

upwards of 700; that there were 30 guns in this town, and 40 in Lagon and

Zimmay each; (a Burman prisoner here has offered to eat all above ten in the

three places ;) that there are 1,000 inhabitants in Laboung, 40 or 50,000 in

each of the other towns:—this is also of course very much exaggerated. The

people who accompanied here to-day, after many pros and cons, received an order

to buy forty-two bullocks for carriage. A Chinese who is here (father-in-law

to CHow-TCHE-WEET) is to start to-morrow for Zimmay, to bring up some of

the principal Chinese traders said to have arrived there, and I have strong hopes,

from the enterprizing character of the Chinese, they may be induced to visit

the coast,

‘¢ T was invited into the fort at 3 Pp. m. to an entertainment, and had the cere-

mony called ‘‘ Powk’’*® performed ; beyond which I am told there is no possible

mark of friendship. It consisted in two old men saying a prayer of some length

for long life, riches, and happiness to one of the English Chiefs of elephants and

horses and conqueror of the Burmans, and tying seven threads of white cotton

round my wrists: the latter ceremony was also performed by CHow Raya

Woon, the chief’s elder brother, and by Coow-n1-mot-Kotn, and I returned the

compliment to them. Two large bouquet of flowers, one ornamented with a num-

ber of thin silver plates, and some of the flowers being of very considerable but

oppressive fragrance, were presented. Sweetmeats were also served up to me,

and rice with various curries, both to the people who accompanied me and to

the natives, in large silver bowls, to the number of probably fifty, varying in size

4L2

620 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr,

from a foot and a half to a few inches in diameter: the workmanship of many

of those of the lesser size was remarkably good, nearly all gifts from the King

of Siam; after which seven of the chiefs’ wives danced to the music of the

Bankok band, by which they set great store, and the music is certainly very

pleasing. Many of the women possess a very considerable share of Asiatic

beauty : their eyes in particular are large and expressive, without a trace of the

Tartar ; their skin remarkably fair, and had it not been for the little Burman

nose, some of them would have been really handsome. There were probably not

less than 300 people present—all the chiefs of ZLaloung, many of those of.

Lagon, but none from Zimmay.

‘* February 8th. 1 have at length prepared to start in the morning by the

shortest and best route to Maulamyne. The only reason for not starting to-day

is its being a black one, and it would be disrespectful to me, as well as danger-

ous to themselves, to begin a journey to-day. J took leave of the chief to-day,

and have been allowed as an especial favor to buy one (and CHow-TcHE-WEET

has presented me with another) young female elephant, and sends one as a pre-

sent to Mr. Mainey.

‘‘ Had another visit from some Zimmay people to-day, who agree with the

others as to the very friendly feeling of the people there towards us. They say

they so fully expected me there, that houses have been ready for the last ten

days. On taking leave of Cuow Hova he gave me a rhinoceros horn, on which

he seemed to set a great value, as a charm against every evil; and as I had

expressed some impatience at their delays and suspicion, he begged I would not

suspect them of any want of friendship in so long withholding permission to

purcbase bullocks and trade with their people ; that our character was perfectly

new to them; that they were like an elephant crossing the river ;—they

must feel before they proceeded; that their difficulty was now got over, they

were aware of our intentions being good ; and that we should now come there on

the same terms as subjects of Siam,

‘‘In proof of their sincerity and the trust thus reposed in us, Breyna-rcnr

would accompany me with 50 or 60 people, 2 or 300 cattle, and a number of

elephants ; that they all lived by trade or agriculture, and that some of the

Cuow’s sons would certainly next year visit oursettlement on the coast. He

invited me to repeat my visit next dry season.”

On the 9th Dr. R. started on his return: he gives the following

account of the route he took, which, until the 15th, was the same by

‘which he had travelled on his way up.

‘© 15th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 4 hours; distance, 10 miles,

‘6 12.35. I started: most of the people having gone on before me.

‘¢ 1, 30. Came amongst the hills and commenced to ascend.

“2,12. Broke off from the old Mein-lun-ghee road, leaving it a little to the

westward.—2. 20. Crossed the May-papie in a few inches of water; path narrow,

through low bamboo jungle; hills range about south 70 west, north 70 east.—

3.45. Crossed the May-Gnoot® and halted on the western side in long grass ;

the bed of the stream rocky and wide 20 or 30 feet, with but little water at this

season. Saw two wild cows and a tiger this evening.

' 4©16th. Direction South, 50 West. Time, 6 hours; distance, 13 miles. -

' ©9, March along the banks of the May-Gnoot, and continued to ascend with

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 621

few declivities ; the path rocky.—10. Rocky steep ascent for half an hour.—10.

55. Saw the first pine trees. —11. 30. Left the May-Gnoot.—1. 20. We entered

pine forest, and no other tree is to be seen but a few stunted yews.—3. Halted

on the N. E. bank of a small stream called the May-lie, which falls into the

May-ping to the eastward ; the path has been pretty good, and though rocky in

many places, I think less difficult than the Mein-lun-ghee road : it is the old road

to Martaban®', and has been little frequented for the last seven years ; the rocks

in all the high hills are granite of very dark colour externally. A good deal of

thunder and rain this evening ; this halting place is famous for tigers; several

people have been carried off from it.

“17th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 3 hours, 20 minutes; distance,

11 miles.

“8. 30. Crossed the May-lie.—9. 30. Proceeded by a nearly level path

along the top of a small connecting range of hills in a noble pine forest.—11.

30. Descended.—11. 50. Halted onthe banks of a small stream, the May-tome®?.

Path remarkably good and nearly level for the last two and a half hours; some

of the pine trees measured eight or nine feet in circumference, and are much

taller and straighter than the same trees in Europe.

“18th. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 3 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

14 miles.

“8.45. Crossed the May-tome, and continued along a good path ; descending

for nearly half an hour.—9. 30. Crossed a small stream.—1].15. Crossed

another small stream, and ascended with occasional small descents till 10, when

we halted on the southern bank of the May-tuan®, running to the eastward.

‘«The whole march to-day through the same fine open forest of pine; the path

good and the hills not at all steep. Shot a jungle cow to-day: these are abun-

dant in some of the valleys near our route ; the flesh was harder than the worst

buffaloe. Tigers and the common deer are abundant.

«19th. Ihave been obliged to halt to-day to refresh the elephants, as the

passes are said to he difficult and no forage for three days for them: (there are

seventeen large and four small ones.) We are now on the site of an old city®¢

formerly inhabited by Talines (to whom all the country to the westward formerly

belonged) and more lately to the Shans, but has been deserted some years on

account of the devastation committed by the Burmans ; the valley is of some

few miles in extent, and throughit runs the May-tuan river, which at this season

is about two feet deep, and asit falls into the May-ping, was formerly navigable

for small canoes to Bankok; its course is extremely winding.

30 miles.

‘¢ 9. Ascended along a rugged bad path.

‘* 10.17. Descended. The firs which have been gradually diminishing in

numbers through the whole of to-day’s march, are now only to be seen in single

trees towering above the other trees of the jungle.—3.48. Halted ina ravine

of very thick jungle on the west bank of the May-tuan, running to the north.

ward.

‘¢The march to-day has been the longest as to time, the most toilsome and

disagreeable since leaving Maulamyne; the path has been either up or down steep:

hills, or along the bottom of ravines into which the sun can only shine a few

622 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

hours in the day ; and since half past ten through a thick jungle. Our course has

been all round the compass, and I have been obliged to note its direction no

less than eighty times to get at any thing like a correct general direction ; we are

again on the banks of the river which we left this morning, the course of which

is even more tortuous than the road we have come. We are encamped on a

small level spot of a few hundred yards, surrounded by high hills; the jungle

extremely thick, but abounding on the hills with deer of all sizes, cows, buffa-

loes, tigers, leopards, and rhinoceros. We passed the end of the road, which

runs more to the eastward, along which the bullocks are to come; path is much

better, but there are no inhabitants in that direction.

‘“‘ 21st. Direction South, 65 West. Time, 7 hours; distance, 15 miles.

“9.15. Proceeded along a narrow ascending path in thick jungle.—4. 45.

Halted on the May-Koung®, wide 30, deep 14 feet, pebbly bed, a short way

from Kanoo®, a Careen village. The march to-day has been over a succession

of hills, some of which were nearly perpendicular, and J should think almost im-

passable for a loaded bullock, though the elephants have travelled with ease. The

path is well shaded, and there isabundance of water : indeed thejungle has generally

been so thick that we could only see a little of the path before us, and a ravine

or a hill close to the road ; the march on the whole was less disagreeable than

yesterday,’ having been more on the hills. Between 10. 20, and 10. 40, passed

a hill, on which there are a great many lofty cinnamon trees, the only ones known

by the Careens to exist on any of the hills, and are not at all prized by them;

the bank is about two inches thick, and of good flavour, when fresh, but acquires

a bitter taste when dry. Passed some immense trees, called by the Burmans

Couck-Moo*, of which the canoes are made; said to be large enough to make a

canoe for 5 or 600 baskets of paddy.

‘(22nd. Direction South, 40 West. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance,

7 miles.

“9. Path pretty level; jungle extremely close.—9. 20. Along the bed of

the May-Koung, pebbly with large rolled mosses overhung by rocks 1 or 200

feet high.— 10. Jack trees ; said to be the site of an old city.—11. 30. Halted

in a thick jungle with some betel-nut trees on the western bank of the May-

Koung. March nearly of the same character as the last two days, but the hills

less steep.

‘¢ 23rd. Direction South, 55 West. Time, 8 hours; distance, 17 miles.

**8.4, Ascended.—9.10. Wound up the face of an extremely steep hill

from east to west, in a southern direction; and at 9. 20 ascended along the

brow of the hill.—11. 40. Crossed the May-Yia®, and proceeded along a ravine.

—l. Recrossed the Tia.—4. 45. Halted on the east bank of the May-Gnow,

wide 90 or 100 feet, running north, 20 west. The hills to-day, with the exception

of those on the 2lst, were as steep as any we have crossed; and our progress

slow and difficult ; some of the highest hills to-day had been cleared for paddy,

and the ground is said to be productive. Met a Zimmay s!ave merchant return-

ing by the route ; he had six slaves, three of whom are about five years of age,

for each of whom he gave four bullocks.

‘24th. We have been obliged to halt to-day till the old road between Mar-

taban, and this, which kas grown up from disuse, be a little cleared by the

Careens for the next two marches, when it again joins the route followed by us

in our march up one day from the Thaung-Ein.

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 623.

“25th. Direction North, 80 West. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance,

7 miles and 4 furlongs.

**9. 45. Crossed the May-Gnow several times along a level road. At 10

passed a small Careen village, and left the May-Gnow to the northward. The

Careens had cleared the path through long grass, along the banks and in the

bed of the May-Satang®, a small stream of afew inches deep, At 10. 15 halted

on the banks of the May-Satang, in thick jungle with wild plantains. The path

to-day has been nearly level down the course and across the valley of the

May-Gnow.

*26¢h. Direction North, 65 West. Time, 3 hours; distance, 7 miles.

**9. 30. Proceeded along a pretty good path, crossing the May-Satang.—

10. 45. Descended and crossed the May-Satang, the last time.—11. 40. Side

of the hills less steep to-day than some parts of our march, but path very

narrow on the brink of a precipice.—12. 30. Halted on the brow of the hill.

The road which we have come to-day will be good when more frequented.

Except a very steep hill at the beginning of the march, the Careens declare

there is no better path through these hills. A considerable part of the march

to-day was through an old paddy hill on which the trees had not yet acquired

any size, and many of the other hills had been cultivated to their summits within

the last year or two. The Careens in this part of the hills must, of course, be

pretty numerous.

‘697th. Direction South, 70 West. Time, 5 hours, 13 minutes; distance,

11 miles, 6 furlongs.

‘9,10. Started, and crossed several hills, or rather heights, on the hills.—

2. Came on the paths we travelled on the way up.—2. 25, Halted at our

former halting place on the banks of the Seindzoy-Keum7™. The path to-day

has been good for elephants, and very passable for bullocks.

‘98th. Direction South. Time, 6 hours, 40 minutes; distance, 12 miles.

‘9, Crossed the Seindzoy, and proceeded along the path pursued on our

way up.—l. Passed our old halting place on the May-tha-woe7'.—3. 40.

Halted at our former halting place on the banks of the Thaung-Ein’.

‘“‘The first half the march to-day, which was extremely distressing to the

elephants from the steepness of the hills, was performed in two hours and a half

on our march up, and took us four hours to-day. The last half of the march was

more level along the little valley of the May-thoe-woe, which we crossed 8 or 10

times, and was performed in very little (10 minutes) more time than we took in

the way up.

‘“* March 1st. Halted to-day on the banks of the Thaung-Ein. To-morrow I

shall proceed alone, and the Shans will wait for the remainder of the cattle on

their own side of the river. The golden sword-bearer is to accompany me one

march with four elephants.

‘©2nd. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 5 minutes; distance,

12 miles.

‘10. Crossed the Thaung-Ein at an elephant’s ford about % of a mile above

where we crossed before.—12. 10. Passed Ween-Wee7*, our old halting place.

«©3,.5. Halted on the old ground at the top of the waterfall’.

““The path for much the longer proportion of this march was good, and per-

624 An account of some of the Petty States [Ocr.

fectly level; the elephants consequently proceeding rapidly, and were up with

the people.

‘‘3rd.. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 4 hours, 20 minutes; distance,

10 miles.

“10. 20. Descended the waterfall.—1l. 15. Reached the Yum-byue? river.

—2.45. Crossed the end of the Yum-dyue path, by which we marched on our

way up, and halted on the beginning of the Dagyue7® path, near our former

halting place.

‘The descent of the waterfail was less difficult than I had anticipated. The

bullocks left Ween-Wee this morning, and were up a short time after us. The

voad on this side of the Thaung-Lin, though still amongst the hills, is less moun-

tainous than we have travelled between Mein-Woot and that river.

“4th. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 2 hours, 45 minutes; distance,

7 wiles, 4 furlongs.

“9. Crossed the Mian-Koung7, the path good but narrow, from not having

been cut by the Careens.

9.45. The whole jungle of short bamboos intersected in all directions

with clephants’ tracks.—12. 30. Crossed the Chline-Boye7® river, now with

only a few inches water, but the bed of the river is $0 or 100 feet wide, with

deep banks, probably 18 or 20 feet.—1. 10. Halted on the north bank of the

Kwee--Keung’ or buffaloe stream, 10 or 12 feet wide, running to the westward.

The path to-day was particularly good and level, but not cleared for a few miles.

Some of the people saw to-day a herd of 20 or 30 elephants, amongst which

there were several males, and some young ones.

‘‘Sth. Direction South, 45 West. Time, 2 hours, 45 minutes; distance,

7 miles, 4 furlongs.

‘©9. Crossed the buffaloe stream and marched along a good level path.—11.

Halted on the banks of the Ou-ko®, after searching half an hour in vain for a

path; the Careens who were sent for this morning at daylight have not yet

arrived. The path to-day good, open and level, and, as yesterday, much inter-

sected by elephants’ tracks.

‘‘This part of the country was formerly inhabited by the Lowa-Talines®!, and

the places still bear Lowa names ; the same race extended to the Moy-Toum,

before the country was devastated by the Burmans, whose blood-thirsty rapacity

has depopulated the whole of this part of the ancient Taline kingdom.

‘“¢6th. Direction South, 30 West. Time, 4 hours, 15 minutes; distance,

12 miles, 2 furlongs.

“*8. 30. Good path through open jungle and long grass.—11. Remains of

Careen villages.—1l1. 20. Plains of considerable extent ; marks of wild cattle.

—l2. 25. Halted in consequence of the jungle in advance being on fire.—

1. 40. Proceeded, and at 2 halted on the south-western bank of the

Chline-Boye (which falls in the Gyne®, a short distance in a South 70 East

direction from this.) Such is the level nature of the country that some of the

stream runs into the Chline-Boye in the beginning of the rains, and out of it after

they have fairly set in. The bed of the Chline-Boye, which rises 20 or 25 feet in

the rains, is here 80 or 100 feet wide, the water about knee-deep in some places,

in others of greater depth, and frequented by alligators; and that of the Chline-

putty about 30 wide and 25 deep: they were both choked up with fallen trees, and

the latter dry at this season.

1836.]} lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 625

*‘The march to-day has been through a level country ; the jungle open with

long grass, and four or five small plains covered with small bamboos much cut up

by the jungle cattle. Elephants’ tracks still intersecting in all directions. Saw

some rhinoceros’ marks to-day; their feet are smaller than the elephants, toes

more apart, and the nails longer ;—sent off two sick people to proceed down the

Ghine in boats, under charge of the head Careen.

*‘ 7th. Direction South, 20 East. Time, 2 hours, 30 minutes; distance,

7 miles.

“8. 30. Proceeded along a good path and level.—9. 30. Plain with long

grass. At 10.45 large plain and paddy stubble covered with upwards of two

hundred buffaloes belonging to the Careen village of twenty-eight or thirty

houses called Twine-woot or Twine-bot.—11. Halted at the end of a plain.

**8th. Direction South, 35 West. Time, 2 hours, 20 minutes; distance,

10 miles.

“10.10. Proceeded along the level path, through a country of the same

character as yesterday.—2. Bed of the Tham-dou* river.—2. 30. Halted at a

broken bridge over the Atsong* river on the high road from Martaban to the

town of Gyne, about ten miles from Gyne, aud at an equal distance from Domi-

tha®, and within sound of the evening gun of Maulamyne. The town of Gyne

was destroyed in a revolt of the Talines about twenty years ago.

‘The road to-day good and level ; very beautiful plains, less water than usual,

but plenty for cattle and passengers.

“9th. Direction South, 20 West. Time, 6 hours; distance, 17 miles.

*¢8.10. Route continues through level grassy plain with occasional patches

of jungle.—11.11. Paddy stubble.—2. 10. Halted near the Thaung-thoo vil-

lage of Naung-laung®, containing about thirty houses, and probably about 200

inhabitants : found here a body of about one hundred of the annual caravans of

the Shan-Gaung-bee® Shans, who have been nearly four months on the road from

their own country in the north. The road to-day level, and generally free from

jungle, through plains of fine long grass. The path has been extremely tortuous,

and for the last two hours most unnecessarily winding in all manner of directions

through a plain of short grass or paddy stubble. The whole of the plains in this

neighbourhood are covered with rich green grass, enough for the subsistence of

an immense number of cattle throughout the dry season. The waters of the

monsoon recede very late from this part of the country, and at that season

boats pole across this plain to Yam-soline®*, and from thence up the creeks to

Shewe-Ghin®, and Toungoo”.

‘‘The path along the plain was much exposed to the sun, and many of the

Talines, who suffer more from the sun than the natives of India, were ten hours

on the march.

‘610th. Direction North, 20 East. Time, 8 hours; distance, 26 miles.

‘© 7, 15. Marched along the continuation of the plain till 1. 45, when

we halted a few hours at Dzadi-been®'!.—6. 30. From this proceeded in boats to

Maulamyne, where we arrived at 9. 20 P. M.

[To be continued. ]

626 Political and Commercial Relations with the fOcr:

II.— Outline of Political and Commercial Relations with the Native

States on the Eastern and Western Coasts, Malay Peninsula*, By T.

J. Newsoup, Lieut., A. D. C. to Brigadier General Witson, C. B.

Note.—It will be convenient to preface, that the subjoined outline follows

the geographical order of the States on both coasts of the peninsula; com-_

mencing on the north-west with Quédah, and proceeding southerly down the

Straits of Malacca to Point Romania—thence turning northerly along the east-

ern coast up to Potdni.

The following is the order of the States, with their supposed boundaries and

estimate of population, chiefly derived from native sources in 1835.

Quédaht—from the Trang river, in 7° 20! N. to the Krian, 5° 10’N,. Popu-

lation 50,000.

Pérak—from the Krian to the Rinkup, in about 3° 59’ N. Population 35,000.

Salangére—from the Réinkdp to the Lingie, in about 2° 35’N. Population 12,000.

Malacca—(British territory,) from the Lingie to the Cassang. Population, (1833-

1834,) 34,333.

Johére—from the Cassang to the Sediliy, on the East coast, 2°15’ N. Popula-

tion 25,000.

Pahdng—from the Sedilly to the Kemdmang, in 4. 15’ N. Population 40,000.

Kemdmang—is situated a mile or two up the river, little or no territory along the

coast. Population 1,000.

Tringanu—from the Kemdmang to the Basut. Population 30,000.

Caléntan—from the Basut to the Bariéima. Population 50,000.

Paténi—from the Bartina to Tana, in 7° 20’N. Population 54,000.

The population of Pinang in 1833 amounted to 40,322,—that of Province Welles-

ley to 49,553,—and that of Singapore, in 1834, to 26,329.

Quédah, Ligére, Patani, Merdilous, Junk Ceylon.—The upper states

of the peninsula, viz. Quédah, Ligére, Patdni, Merdilous, and the

island of Junk Ceylon, are considered in the treaty concluded by Major

Burney, with Siam, in 1826, as provinces of that empire,—a con-

cession to that arrogant power, scarcely just or politic.

Quédah.—Our relations with the latter four states are merely of a

commercial nature,—an unrestricted trade with the ports of Sin-

gapore, Malacca, and Pinang. With regard to Quédah, it is stipulated

in the above treaty, that the Siamese shall take proper care of that

country and its people, and that they shall remain there: the inha-

bitants of Pinang and Quédah enjoying mutual trade and intercourse

as before. The Siamese engaged not to levy any duty upon stock

and provisions ; such as cattle, buffaloes, poultry, fish, paddy, and

rice, which the inhabitants of Pinang, or ships there, might have

* This paper, though rather more of a political nature than is suitable to a

Scientific Journal, cannot be refused publication, as it forms the wind-up to the

valuable series of notices of the Malacca States already printed in our pages.—Ep.

+ It must be borne in mind, that a tract of the Quédah coast, called Province

Wellesley, about 35 miles long by 4 broad, extending from the embouchiire of the

Miéda to that of the Krian river, is under the Pinang Government.

1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 627

eccasion to purchase in Quédah: and the Siamese should not farm

the mouths of rivers or any streams in Quédah, but should levy fair

and proper import and export duties.

The English engaged to the Siamese not only that they would not

attack nor disturb Quédah, but that they would not permit its depos-

ed sovereign or any of his followers to attack, disturb, or injure in

any manner the territory of Quédah or any other territory subject to

Siam. They also engaged that they would make arrangements for

the ex-king of Quéduh to go and live in some other country*, and not

at Pinang or Prye, or in Perak, Sulangére, or any Burmese country.

In case the ex-king did not remove, the Siamese were at liberty to

levy the export duty upon paddy and rice in Quédah.

With Quédah for Pulo-Pinang or Prince-of-Wales Island.—Pulo-

Pinang was formally ceded to the British on the 12th September,

1786, for the annual sum of 6,000 Spanish dollars, by the father of

the present ex-king of Quédah, through the agency of Mr. Lieut, to

whom it had been presented the preceding year as a marriage portion

with the Malay king’s daughter.

In 1802, Sir Gzorce Letru finally arranged that the English Com-

pany should pay annually to His Majesty of Purlis and Quédah 10,000

Spanish dollars, as long as the English should continue in possession

of Piilo-Pinang and Province Wellesley. This last is the line of

coast, on the opposite shore, on the main, that lies between the river

side of Qualla Muda on the north and Qualla Krian on the south;

measuring inland from the sea side 60 orlongs.

_ The Company are bound to protect this coast from all enemies,

robbers and pirates that may attack it by sea from north or south.

The treaty consists of fourteen articles, and terminates with the

following remarkable paragraph. ‘‘ These fourteen articles being settled

and concluded between his Majesty and the English Company, the

countries of Puriis and Quédak and Pulo-Pinang shall be as one

country ; and whoever shall depart: or deviate from any part of this

agreement, the Almighty punish and destroy him; he shall not pros-

per.”

Pinang was formed into a regular government in 1805.

Pérak.—Pérak is the next state, on the west coast, south of Quédah.

A notice of its relations has been already given. .

Salangore.—A treaty of commercial alliance, precisely similar to

that entered into with Pérak, was concluded with Salangére in 1818

by the British Commisioner, Mr. Cracrort.

_™* He resided and drew his pension in Malacca till the close of 1835, when he

left it ostensibly for Dedli in Sumatra.

4m 2

628 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr.

By Major Burnezy’s treaty with Siam, 1826, the British are bound

not:to allow the State of Salangére to attack and disturb that of Pérak.

The Siamese are likewise bound by the same treaty not to go and

attack or disturb Salangére. In 1786 the Dutch dictated atreaty to

the then R4ja (Iprauim), by which the latter was compelled to

acknowledge the sovereignty of the Dutch, who were then in posses-

sion of Malacca, and to hold his kingdom from them asa fief. In

1818 the Dutch wished to renew this treaty, but the Salangére chief

refused, relying on his newly acquired relations* with the British.

Johére for the occupation of the island of Singapore.—In 1818 a

commercial treaty was entered into, by the then Resident at Malacca,

Major Farquaar, with the monarch of Johdére, who was acknowledg-

ed by the Dutch; viz. Sri Sultan ABDURRAHMAN SHAH. Since that

time, however, the elder brother of this prince was set up and acknow-

ledged by British policy as being the rightful successor, and in order

to obtain a legal title to the island of Stmgapore, which, as will be

shewn, was ceded to the Company by the latter. By Major Farqunar’s

treaty with ARpURRAHMA’N SuHA’H, mutual liberty of navigation and

commerce in the ports and dominions of Johdre, Pahdng, Lingin, Rhio,

&c. was secured to British subjects, or persons under the protection

of the Company, on the footing of subjects of the most favored na-

tions; the subjects of Johdre enjoying similar advantages and pri-

vileges in the harbour of Fort Cornwallis, and in all other places

dependent on the British Government of Pinang.

Sir Stamrorp RaFF ies, in a letter to Sir Roser H. Ineuis, states

that the Dutch no sooner obtained possession of Malacca, (in Sep-

tember, 1818, the month after Major FarquuHar’s treaty with

ABDURRAHMAN SHAH had been concluded,) than, notwithstanding our

treaties, which had been publicly communicated for their information

on the cession of Malacca, they sent an overpowering force to Rhio,

where ABDURRAHMAN resided; declared the chief to be their vassal,

treated our negotiations with him contemptuously, and dictated a

treaty which excluded the British trade from the port, &c.

In consequence partly of the delivering up of a place, so advan-

tageously situated as Malacca, to Holland, it was deemed politic by

the Marquis of Hastines, in order to protect the British trade, and

to secure one of the two passages to the Eastern Archipelago and

China, to attempt the improvement of our relations with Achén at the

* Salangére, formerly renowned for its warlike and enterprizing colony of

Bugis, has dwindled into a weak, piratical state. They were apprehending and

preparing for an attack from Siac in the middle of last year. The present chief

is not remarkable for talent or enterprise. His name is Sultan ManomeED.

1836.] vative States in the Malay Peninsula. 629

northern entrance, and to form a settlement at Rio, an island advan-

tageously situated near the southern extremity. ~ For these and other

political purposes, Sir Stamrorp RaFFLes was appointed and associ-

ated with the Resident at Malacca, Major Farquuar, by his Lord-

ship, and proceeded on his mission from Bengal in December 1818.

On arriving in the Straits he found Malacca and Rhio in the hands

of the Dutch, as already alluded to ;—consequently, Holland at this

time held in her hands the keys of both those gates to the China

Seas, the Straits of Malacca and Sunda.

The Carimon isles and that of Singapore were almost the only eligi-

ble spots now left. The latter, with the concurrence of Major Far-

QUHAR, and, some say, at the suggestion of Captain Ross, was judi-

ciously selected by Sir Stamrorp, and the British flag there hoisted

on the 29th February, 1819. The new settlement was placed in

charge of Major Farquuar ; who, from his great popularity among

the Malays, and local experience, was admirably fitted for the office.

- It appears that Sir Stamrorp when off Singapore was visited by the

Tumungéng of Johére, a chief inimical to the interests of Holland, and

by no means friendly to the claims of the Sultan newly elected by the

Dutch, ABpURRAHMAN Sua’H, with whom a reluctant and exclusive

treaty, as far as regarded the commerce of other European powers, had

been concluded by Dutch agents at Rhio, which gave them possession

of that island. The Tumungéng represented to Sir Stamrorp, that the

British were still at liberty to establish themselves on the island of

Singapore under the sanction of the legitimate sovereign, whom he

considered to be the elder brother, Hussain Manomep Sua’u, whose

lawful claims had been set aside by the Dutch in favor of those of his

younger brother, AspuRRAHMAN SHAG, with whom they had concluded

the arbitrary treaty already mentioned.

As the recognition of Hussain Sua’u as lawful sovereign of Johdre

was anecessary preliminary to treating with him, he was now invited

over from Rhio to Singapore by the British Commissioners, and being

acknowledged by the two hereditary elective officers of the empire, viz.

the Bandahdra of Pahang and the Tumungéng of Johére as their law-

ful chief, was recognized and treated with as the legal sovereign by

the Commissioners ; who forthwith entered into arrangements for the

immediate occupation of the port and the establishment of a settle-

ment at Singapore, pending a reference to the Supreme Government.

By the arrangement with Hussain SuAu, of the 26th June, 1819,

which appears to have been rather loosely drawn up, it was decided

that the British jurisdiction should extend only over a limited part of

the island; viz.—from Tanjong Mallang on the west, to Tanjong

630 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr.

Kattang on the east; and interiorly as far as cannon-shot range all

round the factory. The council for the government of the island to

be composed of the British Resident, the Sultan and the Tumungong.

This state of affairs continued with little alteration until 1824, when

final arrangements for the entire cession of the island to the British

were made, and a treaty of friendship and alliance concluded by the

then Resident, Mr. Crawrurp, on the part of the Company, with their

highnesses the Sultan and Tumungong of Johére. This took place on

the 2nd of August. By it the island of Singapore, together with the

adjacent seas, straits and islets to the extent of ten geographical

miles from the coast of Singapore, were given up in full sovereignty

and property to the East India Company, their heirs and successors

for ever.

The Company agreed, in consideration of this cession, to pay to the

Sultan the sum of 33,200 Spanish dollars, together with a stipend dur-

ing his natural life of 1,300 Spanish dollars per mensem; and to the

Tumungong the sum of 26,800 Spanish dollars, with a monthly stipend

of 700 Spanish dollars during his natural life.

In event of the Sultan and the Tumungong, their heirs or successors,

preferring to reside permanently in any portion of their own estates,

and to remove for that purpose from Singapore, the Company agreed

to pay the Sultan, his heirs or successors, the sum of 10,000 Spanish

dollars; and to the Tumungong, his heir or successor, the sum of

15,000 Spanish dollars. The Sultan and the Tumungong, in return,

relinquishing for themselves, their heirs and successors, to the Com-

pany, their heirs, &c. for ever, all right and title to every description

of immovable property, whether in land, gardens, houses, &c. of

which they might be possessed within the island or its dependencies

at the time of their withdrawal from Singapore, for the purpose of re-

siding permanently within their own states.

It was also mutually stipulated, that neither party should be bound

to interfere in the internal concerns of the other Government, or in

any political dissensions or wars which might arise within their re-

spective territories, nor to support each other by force of arms against

any third party whatsoever. The Sultan and Tumungong bound them-

selves that, as long as they continued to reside within the island of

Singapore, or drew their respective monthly stipends from the Com-

pany, they would not enter into any alliance, nor maintain correspon-

dence with any foreign power or potentate without the knowledge and

consent of the Company, its heirs, &c.; to maintain a free and un-

shackled trade every where within their dominions, and to admit the

trade and traffic of the British nation into all the ports and harbours of

1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 631

the kingdom of Johére and its dependencies on the terms of the most

fovored nations. Such are the conditions under which the British

hold Singapore from the Sultdn of Johére.

Pahang.—Pahédng, though virtually independent, is nominally a de-

pendency of Johdre ; governed by one of its elective officers, the Banda-

hdra. It has consequently been included in the relations with that

state.

Tringanu and Calantan.—By the 12th article of Major Burnezy’s

treaty it is stipulated, that Siam shall not go and obstruct or interrupt

commerce in the states of Tringdnu and Calantan. English merchants

and subjects shall have trade and intercourse in future with the same

facility and freedom as they have heretofore had ; and the English shall

not go and molest, attack or disturb those States upon any pretence

whatever.

Patdni.—Patdni has already been adverted to as having become a

province of Siam, on which empire it borders.

Present condition of the Malay States.—Waving thus traversed both

the eastern and western coast of the Peninsula, I will briefly advert

to the political condition of the Malay States as it existed at the time

of my quitting the Straits in 1835. The Siamese retained, in spite of

their struggles, firm hold of Quédah and Patiéni, which are still groan-

ing under the yoke. The rightful Raja of Patdni remained a close

prisoner in Siam, and his country in a state of depopulation and dis-

tress under a Siamese governor. Tringdnu and Calidntan, being less

under the withering influence of the monarch of the White Elephant,

are in a more prosperous condition, carrying on a considerable trade

with Singapore under their own princes. Both Tringdau and Calantan

have been lately menaced by Siam, in violation of their treaty with

the British, by which they are interdicted from interfering with these

States—Kemamang is a small state, lying between Tringdnu and

Pahang : of the former it is nominally a tributary, but bears a mala

Jama on the score of piracy, —a practice said to be countenanced by its

chief. The pirates are chiefly tempted by the prows trading from

Patdni, Caldntan and Tringdnu to the port of Singapore. Pahdng was in

a peaceable and flourishing state under its Bandahira, carrying ona pro-

fitable trade with Singapore, chiefly in gold-dust. The shores of Johére,

though nominally the possessions of our stipendiary the Sultan, are

miserably neglected ; the creeks, bays, islets, and rivers of this ex-

tensive tract affording safe shelter to the hordes of pirates that threat-

en to extirpate the native commerce of Singapore. The states in the

interior of Malacca were, by the last accounts, stillin anarchy and con-

fusion, arising from the fierce feuds and broils which have for some years

632 Political and Commercial Relations with the [Ocr.

past been raging among the native chiefs. Salangére was labouring

under serious apprehensions of an attack from Siac on the opposite

coast of Sumatra, the chief of which was said to be collecting a fleet

of prahus for that purpose. The Raja of Salangére was employed in

repairing his fort, and remounting the numerous guns that lay scat-

tered on and around the hill on which the fort stands. Pérak was

quiet, and occupied in agriculture and the tin trade. Our old ally, the

ex-king of Quédah, and the Sultan of Johdére were living on their hand-

some pensions at Malacca. The latter has since died (September 2nd,

. 835). Near the close of 1835 no steps had been taken with regard to

the succession. According to treaty, the pension was to expire with

the Sultan ; but out of consideration to his widow and children, an

allowance of 100 Spanish dollars per mensem has been granted her by

the Straits Government, pending a reference to Bengal.

The late Sultan first married with the present Bandahdra of Pa-

hang’s daughter ; by whom he has no issue. By his second wife,

the present Tumingong of Singapore’s sister, he had a son, surnamed

Tuanku besér, who married one of the Tuméngong’s daughters, but

died without issue. His third wife was a woman of low birth, by

whom he has a son now living at Singapore, named Aspat Jauiz. He

is about 21 years of age. Not being of noble blood by his mother’s

side, his claims to the succession are not considered good by the

Malays. By the fourth and present wife, who is of royal extraction, he

has two sons, fine lads,—and two girls: they reside with their

mother at Malacca. The eldest of the boys is considered the late

Sultan’s heir.

The ex-king of Quédah, I believe, left Malacca towards the end of

1835 for Delli in Sumatra. He had, in 1838, expressed to me his

determination of doing so, being disgusted at the answers given to

his earnest and repeated applications for redress against the Siamese,

and to his request for permission to reside at Pinang, which had then

been recently refused by Lord Witt1am Bentinck. He said that he

had many friends at Delli, and hinted at the possibility of his mak-

ing a final attempt to expel, with their assistance, the Siamese from

his dominions. Pérak and the whole Malay population of Quédah,

and probably that of Patdni, are greatly under his influence; and it

would require but little persuasion to excite the whole of the neigh-

bouring Malayan States to take up arms against their haughty

oppressors.

With regard to British influence over the Malay States, it might

unquestionably be much greater than it is; and indeed we might

possess almost sovereign power over the whole peninsula, were we

1836.] Native States in the Malay Peninsula. 633

only to exert the political means already under our control. Of later

days the fashion has been to treat with them as independent

powers ; while the chiefs themselves, from a combination of circum-

stances too long for detail here, are for the most part with difficulty

and unwillingly brought to consider themselves so.

Experience has shewn the necessity of the existence of a predomi-

nating power, capable and willing to afford effectual mediation, to

which these divided States may look up in their frequent disputes.

The Dutch during their ascendancy were fully alive to, and took

every advantage of, the influence their commanding position gave

them; as the numberless treaties concluded with almost every petty

chief on the peninsula and in the Archipelago fully evince: but, by

a series of tyrannical and impolitic acts, more particularly the dis-

graceful system of forced labour, they alienated the affections of a

generous race of men, and lost, as a natural consequence, the fruits

of their able, though selfish negotiations and political alliances.

Britain now occupies a prouder situation with regard to these Eastern

States than Holland ever did. Two princes, representatives of the

two most noble dynasties, Quédah and Johore, derive a handsome

subsistence from British bounty. British colonies occupy, and carry

on an extensive commerce from the site of those two ancient seats

of Malayan empire, Malacca and Singapore; while British ships

retain undisputed possession of the seas. It alone remains for a

wise and liberal Government to consolidate and uphold the moral

influence of public opinion,—that extraordinary talisman by which is

held together the greatest of colonial empires. In the face of such

considerations, deterred by the fallacious theories of non-intervention

and non-territorial extension, we are incurring the heavy moral

responsibility of permitting so great an extent of power, delegated,

no doubt, for philanthropic and humane purposes, to lie inert,—a

power which, if wielded with discretion, would not only strengthen

our political and commercial relations in this part of the globe, but

effect the decided amelioration, and, eventually, the radical extirpa-

tion of the evils under which these oppressed States now groan.

The absence of the strong hand of power, guided by the dictates

of humanity and common sense, to settle the endless feuds of the

native chiefs, which are too often excited and supported by the crimi-

nal cupidity of native merchants and others residing under our autho-

rity (as in the case of the late massacre at Likdét, and the disturb-

ances still prevailing at Lingie); the morbid dread of intervention,

exemplified in our late treaties, and in our systematical non-support

of the native established sovereigns in just authority over their rebel-

4 N

634 Political and Commercial Relations, &c. [Ocr.

lious vassals ; the worse than uselessness of British law, applied to a

state of society for which it was never framed, are, it is my firm con-

viction, the remote causes of the present system of piracy now pre-

vailing ; of the numerous unpunished murders and outrages which

disgrace not only the territories of Malayan chiefs, but also territories

lying nominally under the protection of the British flag; and of the

impoverished and disorganized condition of the Malays in general.

The resources of the soil have been almost hermetically sealed to

the occupier by the frequent and protracted feuds already alluded to.

Hence the peasant, driven from his village and lawful means of sub-

sistence, and tempted by the smooth seas, the favorable navigation

and shelter from pursuit afforded by the unexplored rivers, creeks,

and numerous islets of the Straits, and by the charms of a life so

congenial to the free and restless spirit of a Malay, is induced to

scour the water for a precarious subsistence \by fishing or plunder, or

by both, as opportunity chance to present*s

* The prdhus used by Malay pirates are from eight to ten tons burthen,

extremely well manned and remarkably fast, particularly with the paddles com-

monly used. They are generally armed with swivels on their bows, centre,

and stern, of small calibre, but long range. When preparing to attack, strong

bulwarks of wood called Api/ans are erected, behind which the crew ensconce

themselves, fighting with their long guns until their prey is disabled; or till the

gong sound the signal for boarding. But what they mainly depend upon for safety

and success is their skill in paddling, (Malay pirates scarcely ever attack except

during the lull between the land and sea breeze, or in a calm,) the swiftness of

their boats, and their knowledge of the intricate channels between the islands,

or over the bars of the rivers into which they generally contrive to escape,

baffling their pursuers, and often leaving them aground on one of the numer-

ous shoals or mud-banks which their own superior knowledge enables them

to avoid.

The prahus of the Sulé and Ii/dnin pirates are much larger and better equip-

ped than those which commonly infest the Straits. The Malay pirates make

their attacks and move in small fleets of from six to twenty prahus.

During the months of October, November, December, and January, they will

be found cruizing up and down the west coast of the peninsula and the opposite

shore of Sumatra. From June to the end of September, they are often to be

seen among the islets south of Sizgapore, and in the creeks and rivers of the

Johére coast. February, March and April are spent in fishing, collecting sea-

weed, and preparing for future piratica]l expeditions.

The crews are armed with boarding spears (some of very great length),

krisses, Malay hatchets and swords (the parang and kleywang), muskets, blun-

derbusses, and a variety of missiles, such as sticks pointed aud burnt at the

end, stones, &c, ‘

The most noted haunts for pirates on the western coast of the peninsula

(according to information derived from a Malay of Salangore, who had in his

1836.] A brief account of Shakarganj. 635

I conclude with afew suggestions touching the suppression of

piracy now existing to so alarming an extent in the Straits. Its

remote causes, I have already remarked, are alone to be removed by

the adoption of a more enlightened policy towards the native powers ;

and, it may be added, by the gradual spread of civilization and diffu-

sion of useful knowledge.

lst. The employment of one or more small armed steamers,

together with eight or ten large boats, of the fastest possible con-

struction, (particularly for rowing ;) manned fully with Europeans, and

well armed for both close and distant fight.

Qnd. A discreet surveillance over the conduct of the present

Tumungong of Johére ; who is more than suspected of being the main-

spring of the daring system of piracy which has so long been an

opprobrium to the eastern extremity of the Straits. A threat of with-

drawing the stipend he enjoys gratuitously from the British Govern-

ment might be useful. |

3rd. A careful survey of both coasts of the peninsula, the unex-

plored rivers, creeks and islets. This, in addition to other obvious

advantages, will afford opportunities of observing the character and

pursuits of the natives inhabiting the sea-shore and banks of rivers,

who are always more or less in league with the pirates, and of collect-

ing information of piratical haunts and places of rendezvous.

4th. The suspected native chiefs should be peremptorily called

upon to lend their assistance and information: particularly the chiefs

of Kemamang, Salangore, Pérak, and Caldntan. And lastly, the co-

operation of the Dutch Government should be secured.

III.—A brief account of Masvu’p, known by the name of Farid Shakar-

gay or Shakarbér. By Munsui’ Manan Lat.

{Dated Derah Ghazi Khan, 10 miles off from the right bank of the Indus, 10th

February, 1836.]

When we reached Ramu, a village on the left bank of the united

streams of the Hyphasis or Bids, and Hesudrus or Satlaj, about 150

youth exercised the profession himself) are the Bénting, Aroe, Cocab, Ptsang

Dinding and Sambilang isles ; those on the Salangore coast, and the islets

between Cape Rachado and the Lingie river. The rivers Mirbowe, Birman,

Perak, Puteh, Koroo, Muar, Rio Formosa, or the Battu Pahat river, and for-

merly the Lingie river: the Straits of Calang and Dryon, Point Romdnia and

its vicinity, and the Carmion isles to the south.

On the eastern coast are the creeks and small rivers of Johére up to Pahang ;

the Kemdmang river; those of Tringdnu and Caldntan, also the islands of

Timoang, Puio Tingie, Redang and Aor.

4 Nn 2

636 A brief account of Shakarganj, [Ocr.

miles S.-W. of Lodidnd, we heard that between the two waters of

the Hyphasis and Acesines is a town called Puk Patan. It was built in

ancient days, and is looked upon as a place of devotion, since the body

of Suexn Farv’p reposes there. We crossed the river in a small boat,

and bent our route to that direction. The road commenced in a fear-

ful forest, and ended in an extensive hard clayey plain, which envi-

rons the above town. It is constructed on a precipice, which is

70 feet high from the surface of the land. The houses are small,

both of burnt and unburnt bricks, and the baz4rs are narrow, contain-

ing some poor shops.

In the year 600 Hijri, or A. D. 1235, the town was celebrated by

the name of Ajwaddhan, and was governed by a Jogi of that name,

tributary to the neighbouring Mahomedan chiefs. When SHErku

Fart’p (whose original name was Masvp) after travelling into Asia and

Arabia chose his residence in this town, with the power of his piety

he persuaded the Jogi to believe in the true faith of Munammap, and

changed the name of the town from Ajwaddhan to Pak Patan. Pdk

in Persian means holy, and Patan in Panjabi signifies ferry, (holy

ferry.)

It is added, that after passing some period, the Suz wished to

undertake the Mujdhedah, which, I think, imports to labour in defence

of the faith, and asked the permission of his Murshid, or the guide to

salvation, who rests now in the charming place called Qutab, about

nine miles §.-W. of Dedl/. Suexu Qursuppi'nN Baxurty&r, as he is

called, answered his pupil SHexu Farr'p to make a “ ta?’ or fast for

three days. Fanri’p did accordingly, and ate nothing for the fixed

time. On the eve of the third day some person presented him with

a few loaves, which Fart’p ate, thinking that they were sent to him

from the invisible world, or. ‘“‘ Ghaib.”” Meanwhile, a crow holding

the polluted intestine of some dead animal in his beak came and sat

on the bough of a tree. Fari'p, on the very first sight, felt an abhor-

rence in his heart, and, ejecting the bread which he had eaten a few

minutes before, his stomach became quite empty. He told the cir-

cumstance to QurBupp!'N Baxuryé&4nr, his spiritual guide, who replied,

that God has bestowed a great favor on him, otherwise this meal

would have hurt him. ‘“ Go now, Masv’p, and fast three days more.”

As he had not eaten any thing from six days, he became very weak,

and the heat of hunger began to burn his heart. He stretched his

hand on the ground, and, taking a bit of clay, put it into his mouth,

and found that it tasted like sugar. This was the effect of his pure

mouth. The following verse says,

1836.] the Muhammedan Saint. 637

88,5 68 4) a6 9 2; 8955 4S g) md d CSiw

Sang dar dast o guhar gardad, Zahar dar kam o shakar gardad.

‘¢ Stone in his band becomes pearl, and poison turns sugar in his mouth.’’

Farr’p attributed this favor of God to the tricks of man, so he threw

it out of his mouth, and fell deeply again into the contemplation of the

Omnipresent. At midnight hunger rendered him weaker than before,

and he again got some pieces of earth, and after putting them in his

mouth discovered that they were as sweet as sugar. The same

thought of deceit came again in his memory, and he threw them once

more out of his mouth, and engaged again in prayer as before. By the

end of the night Farr’p reflected to himself, that the feebleness caused

by hunger might render him unable to stir, so he picked up again some

bits of clay and they became sugar in his mouth. He thought they

might have been sent to him by God, ate them, and broke his fast in

the manner he was directed by his guide Qursuppi’n. When the sun

rose he went to Qursupp1’N, who told him, “ Farry, you did well to

break your fast with the sustenance sent to you from the invisible world.

Go: you will be sweeter than sugar.”” Hence he was called ‘“‘ Fari’p

SHAKARGANJ SHAKARBAR,” or the treasure of sugar.

Books have been written of the miracles wrought by Fari’p.

TuGHLAQ, a man of obscure origin, and the inhabitant of dbir, seven

miles from Pak Patan, presented him with a load of fuel, and asked

nothing for its price. The only petition he made to Fari'p SHaxar-

GANJ was, to plant him on the throne of DeAli; and it happened so

by the benediction of SHaxars&r. The reign of this person may be

remarkable for other things for aught I know; but the large and

strong fort he constructed now presents nothing singular to the view

except heaps of rums. It was called Tughlagdbdd, and is situated

six miles south of Dehlt.

Fart'p SHakarcGans had many followers; one of them was Niz4m-

uppI’N. His body rests in the most handsome place out of Dehli.

He was the patron of the famous poet Am1'r Kuusrau, who, by the

Persians, was denominated ‘‘ Totie Hind,” or the parrot of India, and

sleeps on the same charming spot.

The mausoleum of Fari'‘pD SHAKARGANS is visited by the pilgrims

of different quarters. The Hindus of this country believe him to be an

inspired man, and pay respect to his monument, like the Musalmans.

After descending a few steps we came into a square laid with bricks,

and entered the cupola in which the Farr’p is interred. It is floored

with marble slabs, and opens by a door towards the east. On his left

hand is the tomb of his son, Sazexu Bapruppi’'N, neither differing in

size nor in materials. Over them is a pompous canopy of green

638 A brief account of Shakarganj. [Ocr.

brocade tied with string against the roof of the monument. A small

‘window covered with oil and dust is made in the direction of the south.

It is called the ‘‘ Darwazah Bihisht,’’ or the door of Paradise, and is

opened every year on the fifth of the month of Muharram, which

is the death day of that holy man. The people flock on that day,

and, pushing each other forward, rush in at the Darwazah Bihisht, and

come out by the next door. By doing this they have been persuaded

to believe, that they shall have the first place in heaven when they

depart for the next world. The monument is 20 paces in circumfe-

rence, and 30 feet high. It was erected by his disciple SHuxku Nizému-

uppIn, Auliyd, or the Saint. It is whitened with lime, and has a

beautiful appearance when nearly viewed. Fari’p was born in 569

Hijri, and died of colic in the year 664 H., at the age of 95. The

following verse gives the above dates.

Bid sa) 5] dale W,3 Ave \e 8 em)

OE Oyxuwe ato, P| AUT ady 58 AW

Rahm farm4 shud tawallud 4bid 4zAdah umr,

Shud Fariduliah s4le rahlate Mastd asar.

The words Rahm farma we should take for the date of his birth,

as, ( Led em) ) 140 200 80 40 8 200 or 569 Hijri. The words A’bid

azddah stand for the year of his age, as ( $]5) dale ) 70 4.1 + 2+4

+1+7+174+4+4+5 = 95. Shud Faridulldh shews the date of his

death as (alld 545) 54304304144 +104 200 + 8044 +

300 = 664. “ Farid asrv’” or the gem of the time, is another date of

his death as (spac 3/5) 10 4.200 +:90-4. 70.4.0.4 4) 1054/2800

+ 80 = 664 H.

Next to this monument in the same square is another dome built

by Tucuiag Suku. It contains the tomb of Sarxw ALAn-upDI'N,

Moizzuppi’N and Suexu Fazu, &c. &c. the descendants of Fari’p.

The height of this dome is nearly 50 feet, and the circumference 36

paces. Itis larger than the former, and has a door opening to the

south. It looks older, because it has never been repaired. All of

the graves were veiled with dust, but a few flowers lying over them

showed that they are also occasionally visited by the people. The

accompanying is the drawing of the Fari’p’s monument, which I

have done by the means of a camera obscura*.

* Our young friend has evidently not yet acquired the knack of the camera

obscura (lucida?). Out of consideration therefore for the memory of Dr. Wol-

laston, its inventor, we omit his unsuccessful attempt to use it.—Ep.

Vol.V, PU XXXVL

Connection of Mithratc with Hindu Gins.

o £ me

O35,

Ger

s SS

2359:

fitndi Coins. Canouf Serces.

i : with Ardokro

x OU ADO

SPs Te rk: reverse.

1536.) Coins of the Mithraic Series. 639

we Iv. —New varieties of the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic Series of Coins and

their imitations. By James Prinsmp, Sec. As. Soc. &c.

_ From the variety of the Mithraic reverses already made known, it

might have been imagined that the series was nearly exhausted. Every

year, however, adds a few new types to our previous list, or produces

finer” samples of these hitherto considered indistinct. So multiplied,

_. indeed, are our resources at the present time, that we can afford to be

_- fastidious, and not only reject coins of the baser metals, but limit

‘the admission even of golden novelties to those of one size, weight

_and value !

My object in Plate XXXVI. is to develope more fully the transi-

tion from the Mithraic or Indo-Scythic coinage to the Hindu series,

. for which my numerous friends have furnished even more unequivocal

_ links than those engraved in my former Plate, (XX XVIII. of Vol. TV.)

I must begin, however, with a few novelties of the true Mithra type.

__ Fig. 1 is the first to rivet our attention and curiosity. It is an

unique of Mr. Masson’s discovery. The obverse has the usual stand-

Jing figure of the Raja sacrificing, with the legend PAO NANO PAO

_ KANHPKI KOPANO. The reverse has an armed figure, nearly the

"counterpart of the other, but without any altar, and with the usual

‘monogram : the legend being in» Masson’s drawing, OPAATNO. Not-

having the coin itself before me, the reading I venture to substitute

for this, is of course liable to correction; but the strong similitude

between the commencement of this legend and of the two curious

ones formerly noticed, namely, APAOXPO and APAH@PO, Jeave little

doubt in my mind that the one before us should be read

APAATNO ; the word arno representing the Sanscrit @fy “Agni,

the god of fire; whom we may reasonably suppose to. be substituted

for Athra, as the Sanscrit qa Arka has been for Mithra in the Indian-

E E “ized designation, OKPO. The Pehlevi affix APa Arda (generally

written - APTA by the Greeks) implying ‘the great,’ bears an evident —

-connection with qa Arya, a common Sanscrit epithet of the same

: ‘signification, “excellent;’ or are A'rya, holy, venerable ; as Baa

~~arya-man, the sun, Baya dryavarta, the holy land, (India) &c.

-Aria also occurs in combination in Persian names beginning with

~ consonants, as Ariobarzanes, king of Armenia,—a derivative from

Berzin; the planet Jupiter of the Mithraic system*.

’-. Further search, should these conjectures be well srounded, will

probably bring to light coins with the single appellation ATNO, which

has not hitherto been observed.

*-Vaillant Ars. Imp. I. 183.

640 New varieties of the [Ocr.

Fig. 2 is misplaced: for the imperfection of the Greek legend on

the obverse, ought to condemn it to a lower grade in chronological

order. All those legends which have the family name of KANHPKI

are clear and better formed than those of OOHPKI to which this coin

belongs. The latter, too, have generally the bust of the sovereign

substituted for the full length sacrificer. The name on the reverse of

fig. 2, ®@APO, is new; nor is it at first very obvious what meaning it

may be intended to convey. It cannot well be a corruption of A®PO,

because the standing figure faces the opposite way—holds a spear,

and wants the flames on his shoulders. Mr. Masson observes on

this coin: ‘“‘ Here is another peculiar legend, but evidently signifying

the sun as source of light and majestv. Pharos was the term applied

to the Alexandrian light house, and Pharoah is the well known Scrip-

tural title of the old kings of Egypt. The bust on this coin affords a

remarkable contrast to other coins of the family.” It is certainly

probable that the word has some affinity to the Greek aos, lumen,

dies, solis ortus, but no more than is naturally found between lan-

guages of common origin. The word Phraa, or something like it,

certainly existed in the ancient language of Persia, as the personifica-

tion of light or heat—analogous to Mithra, the sun*. In compounds

it is frequently found, as in Phraates, Phraortes, Farnaces, aud Phradates;

the latter being altogether congenerous with Mithradates, or as the

Greeks translated the name, Apollodotos. From the same root are

descended the modern Persian verb upd yys to inflame, whence jis!

illuminating, so often employed in compounds. Perhaps the uncouth

name of Unad-Pherrou, on a numerous class of the deteriorated

Bactrian coins, may spring from the same root.

VAILLANT, however, gives a different and, I think, a less satisfactory

etymology of the above class of names in his history of the Arsacide.

«« Phriapates seu et Phrapates, idem ac Aphra Pates, seu et Papatius ;

nam apud Persas idem Aphra est, ac Pa apud Turcas Scythasque,

scilicet elevatus, supremus, maximus, que nominibus propriis ut et

art preponuntur.”’ (Arsac. Imp. I. 2.) Now if the word aphra be merely

an intensitive preposition, like the Sanscrit WX para, the Persian

ber, the Greek rapa, and the Latin pre or per, the word to which it is

affixed should be a significant adjectival noun, as UIA: par akramas, the

very heroic ; pried | Ardashir (Artaxerxes), the Soa SS or very valiant,

&c. The participial nouns Mithradates (quasi sold *y¢* the given of

Mithra) and Phradates (sdlol, 5] the given of Phra) require the first

member of the compound to be a noun.

* Phre in Egyptian has precisely the same meaning as mifr in Persian,

‘king, prince.’

1836.] Mithraic Series of Coins. 641

Fig. 3. A type familiar to us, in copper—and known before in gold

of a smaller size. It was, in fact, one of the two coins first extracted

by M. Ventura from the Manikyala tope. In Mr. Masson’s coin

the spelling accords with the vernacular pronunciation MIIPO, and the

solar glory is irradiated on its edge, to shew more plainly its reference.

Figs. 4 and 5. Two more gold coins of Mr. Masson’s collection,

having the legend of the reverse respectively NANO PAO and NANA,

both proved to be equivalent to NANAIA by the peculiar attitude of

the allegorical image. The introduction of PAO in the first of the

two would almost seem a mistake of the engraver, who had in his

mind the PAO NANO PAO of the obverse. I have nothing to add to

my former remarks on the word itself, except to draw attention to an

extract from the Armenian Chronicles with which Mr. Avpauu has

favored us, proving that NANAIA and the Persian ANAHID were not

positively identical, each having her separate temples and votaries

even in Armenia.

«« Anahid was the tutelary goddess of our country, and was known

equally by the names of Artemis and Aphrodite in our mythological

works. She was always considered identical with the planet Venus,

though possessing all the attributes of Diana.” As Nanea, on Mr.

Avpatt’s authority, means maternal or motherly, it would hardly

be proper to ascribe such a designation to the moon, the chaste

Diana; neither has her effigy on our coins the lunar emblem, so

distinctly portrayed on the MAO and some other types. Rather

then let her be constituted the Venus of the group, who plays an

equally conspicuous part in the Mithraic system*.

Fig. 6. Isa gold coin from M. Covurt’s drawing, of the a@po

reverse. The obverse legend is PAO NANO PAO OOHPKI KOPANO,

Fig. 7 is likewise from M. Covrt’s collection. Init I was struck by

the strong resemblance of the head-dress to that of the Parthian or

Sassanian coins. The legend is wanting, and that of the reverse is

quite illegible, though the monogram and device are in a perfect state.

Fig. 8 has been already engraved in my plate of the Manikydla

relics ; but as one of the most interesting of the Mithraic series, it could

not be denied admission in a plate exclusively devoted to them. I wish-

ed further to place it in juxta-position with the sitting figure of the

APAOKPO reverse, because it might be conceived to be the parallel

Hindu /unar coin to that form of the Hindu solar effigy, OKPO.

* The Baron Hammer says that the word Neith of the Egyptians is evidently

‘the same as the Persian Nahid—whence also may be traced the German Nacht

sand the English Night,

642 New varieties of the [Ocr.

Like OKPO, this figure has four arms, and is therefore Indian: further

it is a male divinity ; and thirdly, it is identified with MAO, the moon,

by the crescents of that luminary arising from its shoulders. It

must therefore be Soma or Chandra of the Hindu pantheon, who is

represented with all these characters in Moors, though a later work

by Mr. Cotuman makes him to be a two-handed divinity.

The appellation manaoBaro, which so puzzled me on the former

occasion, has at length, I think, found a satisfactory explanation.

Mang, S560 in Persian, is an ancient name of the moon,—and Bhaga

wa in Sancrit, means splendour, glory ; and is given as asynonyme of

the moon as well as of the sun. In the Zend, then, the link between

the Persian and Sanscrit, we may naturally look for a compound of

these two terms, such as manao-bago. It is well known that the my-

thology of the Saxons was derived from a Scythic or central-Asiatic

source, and their male deity MONA (whence our modern term, moon*),

has been by the learned referred to the Persian Mang. Ihave, how-

ever, found a much more convincing proof than these analogies afford,

that such is the correct explanation, in the Baron Von Hammer’s

Prize Memoir ‘ sur le culte de Mithra, son origine, sa nature, et ses mysteres,”

Paris, 1833 ; for a copy of which | am indebted to the learned author’s

perusal of my observations on the curious relics from the Panjab.

In the catalogue of Mithraic inscriptions discovered in various parts

of Europe, the Baron points attention to one in particular among

Gruter’s collection, i which the word MENOTYRANNUS denotes

the deified moon :

‘* Cette inscription est une des plus interessantes 4 cause des deux mots de

Menotyrannus et de Persidicus: le dernier indique l’origine persane du culte de

Mithra : le Menotyrannus peut se traduire par, seigneur du mois ; mais malgré

les objections de M. Rolle contre l’existence du dieu Lunus, je crois que cette

existence peut trés-bien étre prouvée, non seulement par tous les monumens

astronomiques des orientaux modernes, dans lesquels la lune est représentée

sous la figure d’un jeune gargon de quatorze ans, mais encore par la coincidence

de la mythologie Egyptienne dans laquelle la lune, d’aprés les decouvertes de M,

Champollion, est une divinité male. Enfin le mot MHN dans lequel M.

Rolle ne voit que le nom d’un mois, est effectivement un nom persan de la lune

qui s’appelle mah et mang ; c’est le moon des Anglais et le mond des allemands,

lesquels lui ont conservé son genre oriental.”

* In like manner I feel strongly disposed to connect the strange OAAO of our

coins with Odin or Woden of the Saxon mythos, an acknowledged derivative from

the Sanscrit ¢q Buddha, Mercury. Itis not a little curious that the verbal root

of two of our present days of the week, Monday and Wednesday, should thus be

discovered among a parcel of old coins dug up in the Panjab!

1836.] Mithraic Series of Coins. 643°

After this we can have little hesitation in translating MANAOBATO

* lord of the months :’'—indeed if we derive BAro from the Persian or

Scythic eS beg, ‘ lord or prince,’ we shall have precisely the cor-

responding term to tyrannus.

Fig. 9. A gold coin of Kanrrxos from a drawing by M. Court. The

rao in this seems to have a case for his bow strung behind his back. The

reverse is similar to that of a fine coin of OOHPKI in General VENTURA’S

series (fig. 9. of Plate XXXVIII. Vol. IV.) which however differs in

having the bust in lieu of the full length of the prince. The legend

APAOXO has been before explained as “the great sun*.” One of

his attributes it may be presumed rather than the god himself, is

intended, by the female holding the cornucopia—typifying the ferti-

lity he bestows on the earth.

Fig. 10 is amost important acquisition to our Mithraic series, as

being the very link of connection between them and the Canouwj coins.

Immediately after the publication of my former plate, Lieut. Cun-

NINGHAM wrote tome from Benares, pointing out a coin in his cabinet

of the class I had designated links, having the seated female with the

cornucopia, but more perfect than those I had engraved, inasmuch as

the legend to the left was preserved and legible as ApAOxPo, the same

as that of the standing figure. A duplicate of the same coin was

also in Colonel Sracy’s cabinet, and on reference to the Asiatic

Researches, Plate I., the letters of APAOXxPO were clearly legible on the -

reverse of fig. 6, a gold coin procured by Mr. Witson from the bed

of a tank in the Higii district.

The cornucopia as a device seems to have been copied from the

Roman coins of the Emperors. It is seldom or never to be seen on

the genuine Greek coins—nor is it found on our Bactrian series until the

age of Azos (with exception of the copper coins of ANTimacuus and

PurLoxenus, the date of which is uncertain). Whether it bears any

direct allusion to the legend may be doubted,—at least such allusion is

entirely lost sight of the moment we pass the boundary into the Indian

series.

Hindu coins imitated from the Ardokro type.

Since my former paper on the Gupta coins of Canouj appeared, very

important acquisitions have been made to our knowledge of this

before unknown dynasty, through the medium of coins and of in-

scriptions; for both of which we are almost entirely beholden to the

researches of Lieut. A. CunnincHam and Mr. V. Trecear in the

neighbourhood of Benares.

* The OPOOKPO of the copper coins may be deemed a still closer imitation

of the Sanscrit Baa Aryarka, APA is the Persian orthography.

402

644 ’ New varieties of the (Oct.

The inscription in an ancient character upon the column at Allahabad

interpreted by Capt. Trovzr and Dr. Miz in the 3rd vol. Jour. As.

Soc. had made us acquainted with the four first of the family* ; namely,

1, Gupra, a Raja of the solar race: 2, GHaror Kacua, his son: 3,

Cuanpra-curta, his son: 4, SamupRa-Gupta, the fourth in descent :

—and there the Allahabad record broke off with an intimation that a

son was expected.

The Bhitari lath brought to notice by Messrs. Treerar and Cun-

NINGHAM, fills up the line of succession for three generations further

(see Plate XXX. of the present No.). We may so far anticipate the

translation of this highly important record promised to us by Dr. Mitt,

for the illustration of our subject, as to state that the infant of Sa-

MUDRA was named Cuanpra-cupta II. His son was, 6, Kumara-

GuPTA ; after whom followed, 7, Skanpa-Gupra—and there again this

new authority breaks off.

Now to all of these (excepting perhaps the first) we can at present

assign their respective coins from undoubted and numerous specimens,

and the succession of the devices on the obverse and reverse will be

seen to follow just that modification from the original Mithraic model of

the Ardokro coin, as would be expected when the source was nearly for-

gotten, and Hindu ideas became predominant. Moreover, we can, from

our coins, add the name of Maurenpra-aupta, and perhaps of Assa-

Gupta to the list, and there is presumptive evidence of a second

- SamuprRaA as ofa second Cuanpra. Altogether we may reckon upon

nine or ten generations, which at an average of eighteen years will fill

a space in Indian history of nearly two centuries, of which no writ-

ten account can be met with ; unless the passage in the Vishnu Purdnat,

that the Guptas, a Sudra family, reigned over a part of Magadha, at

the time of its compilation, be regarded as alluding to our dynasty.

The sites whence their coins have been most frequently obtained,

certainly agree with this description; but the date assigned to the

Purdna must in this case be carried back a few centuries, and by

the Mlechhas of the Indus must be understood the Indo-Scythians

rather than the Musalmans. But I had intended to confine myself

to an enumeration of the new coins, and to postpone speculation until

we are thoroughly acquainted with them. To proceed therefore :

Fig. 11. One of two gold coins of Capt. CunnincHam’s cabinet

(the first procured at Benares, the second in Calcutta, now with Dr.

Swiney). It is a duplicate of my own (from Lieut. Conotiy) with the

unintelligible legend, engraved as fig. 23 of Plate XXXIX. It was

* See Vol. 3, page 344.

+ See Witson’s analysis of the Vishnu Purana, Jour. As. Soc. I. 440.

1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 645

then alluded to as having the letters a little different from mine, and

was read Kragipta Paragu (pta). Upow full consideration of each

individual letter as compared with those of other coins, I do not

think the second letter ag; it is rather a bh, and the reading altoge-

ther gUTgucaAs, Kubhavu paraguja (adding the ja from the obverse

of my own coin, where it is quite distinct). Now we have gained ex-

perience enough from our reading of this class of coins to expect that

the legend, where it does not merely embrace the titles of sovereign-

ty, will express some extravagant epithet. The final ja also (imply-

ing born of,) shews that the said epithet belongs to his father; and

this will account for the omission of ja on one side of the coin, which

would have the effect of making the epithet apply to the son also. The

present compound may thus be made up of @& ku, a diminutive par-

ticle ; wra bhava, the mind; YU upa, a particle implying similitude ; cd

Ragu (for Racuv) the grandfather of Rama, and Sa, born of * or, uni-

ted by Kubhdv-uparagu-ja ‘ of the humble-minded, resembling-Raghu-

born.” The name is unfortunately cut off from the margin. Two let-

ters of it are visible under the Raja’s arm on the obverse, and look like

4a Asa: but on reference to my own coin, I have there no hesitation in

reading it yx Samupra. The coin is in this case wrongfully placed

at the head of the group in the plate, but as there are two coins to one

in favor of the reading Asa I still hesitate to remove it, for Assa-

gupta is a known name in the Casimir list; and it is, moreover, so

like our Azos, that one feels inclined to discover in it a coin of YAVAN-

Aso himself, the supposed founder of this Canouj dynasty.

Fig. 12. This beautiful coin is an unique in Mr. TrEeeEAR’s pos-

session. It is valuable on every account: as giving an additional

link with the Mithraic coins (fig. 9), in the standing cornucopia-

female ; as adding a new and much desired name to the coin list;

and as teaching a good lesson, in the most unequivocal and well form-

ed Nagari, of the style of legend adopted by these sovereigns ; to whom,

whether from their extra-Indian, or their low origin, or their limited

sway, the panegyrist seems to have avoided applying the usual epithets

of royalty, mahardja dhirdja.

On the reverse the reading seems to commence, waist Sarva-

rdjochhatra, ‘ the chatta or overshadower of all the Rajas’—then, on

the right of the obverse, alaaqwaaa ¥.... Kdma-naruttama-ja Gha-

(tét ?) and under the left arm, written perpendicularly in the Chinese

fashion = Kacua. ‘ Son-of-an-excellent-man-resembling-Kama,

* J have worked out this solution, dictionary in hand; for the Pandits could

not aid me in the least : itis therefore quite open to criticism.

646. New varieties of the [Ocr.

Gua(tot) Kacua.’ The only portion of this inscription missing is

the second syllable of Ghatot, which may be replaced with confidence.

The Ra4ja is sacrificing on the small Mithraic altar, and is dressed

much in the Kanerkos style, though more fashionably.

Fig. 13. Next in succession to Kacua comes Cuanpra. Of his

coins I have already supplied several examples, (see Nov. 1835, fig.

18, also Marspen MLVII.,) but to keep up the comparison of the re-

verses, I here insert a very perfect sample from Lieut. CunNINGHAM’s

cabinet, procured at Mirzapur. Legend on the obverse tIM4tay Raja

Srt Chandra (the rest only partially visible), and under the arm again as

Chandra; on the reverse W\faaa Sri Vikrama. 1 do not find any in-

stance of the name on this form of coin being written Chandra-gupta,

although it is distinctly so on the pillar-inscriptions. He is the first

to change the trident standard of OOHPKI for the (quasi) Roman

eagle. He also prefers the bow to the spear.

Fig. 14. Lieut. Cunnincuam’s, from Gaya, similar to my own (Capt.

Wape’s) of fig. 16, Plate XXXVIII. Vol. IV. Fig. 17 of that plate is

another ; and seven are now known of the same type, dispersed among

us: but few, if any, have the marginal inscription so well developed.

As all the coins bearing simply Vikrama on them may be set down to

Cuanpra-ocupta, so all having 4tt@H~a: Parakrama may be assigned

to his son SAMuDRA-GuPTA the first. This legend is attached to the

same sitting female as before on the reverse. The Raja on the oppo-

site face is just like his predecessors in costume and attitude, with

spear and eagle standard.

By means of Messrs. CUNNINGHAM’S and TREGEAR’S Coins, adie

to my former specimen, the long legend on the obverse can be nearly

all restored; it appears to be Wat WA AAA... .. AsTASTAT.. .. Samara

satamataga (ja).... which may be translated ‘ having the strength of

100 must elephants,’ and on the opposite margin vijayajatara.... In

my former specimen, however, the final portion read Aparajita davya.

Under the arm the word #a_% Samupra is written in the perpen-

dicular form, the uw being apparently placed above the m, because the

d had taken its proper position below.

Fig. 15 is another Chandra-gupta, from Col. Stacy’s box, of

which Mr. Trecear has a duplicate. Another is engraved in Mars-

DEN, fig. MLVIII. From the alteration of the device, and particularly

the omission of the fire altar on this coin, we might with plausibility set

it down to CuanpRra-Gupra the second,—but on the same authority

we might make two Samupras ; for these princes seem to have imitated

one another so closely, that we find the device of the Raja and his wife .

1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 647

(?) like that of the Raja and eagle standard, repeated on the Samudra

coin (fig. 12,) and at a later period on a coin of SKANDA-GUPTA

(fig. 24, of Plate XXXIX. Voi. IV.) with a change of costume.

The Raja’s name on this coin is disposed in two perpendicular lines

one on each side of the spear 33 Chandra-gupta—the second line,

not very clear in Col. Sracy’s coin, is quite distinct in Mr. Trucxar’s,

which reached me just too late to be substituted in the engraving.

On the reverse, the cornucopia lady is seated on a sleeping lion—as

if to express ‘ all will go on prosperously if ye rouse not the wrath

of your ruler.—On the left hand are the words Y= q¥y: in the ancient

character. The upper prolongation of the p, perhaps, indicates an

anuswara, and thus the reading may be Get: Panch-chhavayas, ‘ the

five excellencies ;? to wit, of a king.—There is a fault in orthography,

however, here, as in the legend of Ghatot kacha : the words should be

written way gay: Pancha-chhavayas. Whether the word chhavaya,

‘ light,’ may have any allusion to the five luminaries of the Mithraic

worship; the sun, the moon, fire, Jupiter, and Venus, it is impossi-

ble to say :—but that a king should possess five virtues, we learn from

various Hindu authorities.

Fig. 16. An unique in Captain CunnineHam’s collection from

Gaya. The female of the reverse having in the last quitted her Gre-

cian seat, has been here installed in one of a more genuine Hindu

character—the lotus flower. There isa peculiarity also in her at-

titude, both hands being turned up, and the elbows resting on the

knees. The legend is unfortunately cut off. On the obverse, how-

ever, to the left of the usual Raja, we have in very conspicuous

letters superposed in the usual style Gait: Kumara—proving that

this is a coin of KumAra-cupta, the successor of CHANDRA-

GupTA the second, and thus far in accordance with the Bhitari

monument. Lieut. CunnincHam has another of the same prince, of

quite a different type, (described in Vol. IV. page 637,) but what

confirms Kumara’s succession to CHanpra the second, is, that there

are devices common to the two which belong, as far as our researches

yet go, to no others,—as if on the accession of the new prince the

mint had continued the preceding device, mutato nomine, until an-

other was subsequently selected by the rising monarch. (See figs. 27

and 28, Plate XXXIX. Vol. IV.)

Figs. 17 and 18. For our acquaintance with the owner of the

_next coin in our series we are entirely indebted to Lieut. Cunnineuam,

He first extracted his name from the Bhitari-lath inscription,—and

subsequently traced it on these two unique coins in his own, and on

648 New varieties of the [Ocr.

one of my, collection, already published ; (fig. 24. of Plate XX XIX.

Vol. IV.) Fig. 17 is from Gaya, and fig. 18 was dug up near a village

four kos from Ghazipur.

On the obverse, the general attitude of the Raja is the same as

usual—the waist a little more fashionable, the gaiters absolutely those

of the last century! and the hair or wig. commencing to be curled

jn parallel rolls, as will be more fully developed hereafter. The

name perpendicularly disposed under the arm of both figures is quite

clear, or w= Skanda ; while on the reverse of Fig. 18, itis as decided-

ly (in the old character) SYRUYUA Sri Skanda gupta, the very name of

the Bhitari-ldth successor to KumAra.

Cn comparing the plates in the Researches and Journal of the coin

given to me by Mr. Bacon, many years ago, and then thought rather

suspicious, Lieut. CunninaHam soon found its legend to be identical

with his own,—a fact fully confirmed by re-examination of the coin it-

self. These three, however, are the only coins yet known of this name.

One of them No. 17, exhibits a new name on the reverse, for,

unlike 18, itis certainly not Skanda-gupta, but HAA: Kramamanda,

which may be looked upon as a rhyming epithet—‘ equal to (or sur-

passing) Manda” (Saturn or Yama). Mr. Trecear has lately got a

duplicate of this coin—in which the reading is rather mM#HaT&:—one

and both may possibly be intended for #ta#¥*H: Sri Mahendra.

Figs. 19, 20. We now pass to another new acquaintance made

out jointly by Lieut. Cunnineuam and myself on a general inspec-

tion of the Gupta coins. Fig. 19, is in the Society’s collection, and

is engraved as No. 14 of the Plates in the 17th Vol. As. Res. unread

by professor Wiztson. Upon recognizing the final letter = ndra,

we soon perceived the preceding letter which I had before mistaken

for a ph, or 2, to be the old ¥, A, and thus with the vowel above it, the

name was immediately cleared up as Mlae*y! Sri Mahendra. Ano-

ther coin from Gaya, belonging to Lieut. CunnineHam, turned out

to be of the same individual as to the reverse, with some varia-

tion in the legend of the obverse. Under the arm of the latter,

the letter @ ku seems to denote a Kumara; but on the margin

are evidently the words wya Wey Jayaté Mahendra. On the

Society’s coin, fig. 9, the marginal inscription is more complex—

UCHLSHAT, as yet unintelligible; then between the feet 3} Sri, and

near the hand the letter ny gu (of Gupta) the intervening name being

cut off.

Pursuing the examination, we found the coins 29 and 30, of Plate

XXXIX. Vol. IV. with the Raja on horseback, and the seated female

Jour As, Se oc.

ane ‘Hr

a(t »

Canine

+ aad | j= t 4 ve

Aes

LNA ot

Ateanaatt

Second Series of imutations from the ‘Ardokro’ type

Gis

He TT NA)

: ily’ yi Ni

1 ANY Qi

A aa 4 yak i

1 Ny oy if J) OY y { ‘\

ey 1)

mul WNW

ia i i VC

7836.) Early Hindu Series of Coins. 649

feeding the peacock, to belong alsoto Manenpra-cupra. Ajita Ma-

hendra. on the reverse and Mahendra-gupta on the obverse of 30, are

‘quite clear. I was. before only misled by the letter h, which I read

as the nasal » of the /dth alphabet.

I shall have occasion to recur to this name in the next plate,

which contains those new forms of the Canow coin that are without

the cornucopia female, and have not such direct analogy to their

Mithraic prototvpe as is palpable in the whole of the reverses included

in the lower half of the present plate.

Plate XXXVIII.

Figs. 1, 2. These two coins, from Mr. Treezar’s cabinet, are

variations only of the original coin given to me by Lieut. Conor,

now became celebrated as having opened the door to the understand-

ing of the whole group. In that coin, however, the archer holds his

bow in the wrong hand, whereas in the two present coins, and the one

following, the position is rectified and the lion is better developed,

particularly in Fig. 2. Besides adding these fine specimens to our

series, Mr. TrecuAr has made out the true reading of the legend on

the reverse. Instead of. Saccha or Pradya the word is fa<fama:

Sinha Vikrama, ‘the lion hero,’ which is consistent withthe device,

for it may be also understood as ‘ conqueror. of the lion*.’ To whom,

however, this title is to be applied, would still have remained

doubtful, but for the fortunate discovery of another coin by the same

indefatigable collector in the prolific neighbourhood ef Jonpur, while

even I was engraving the present plate.

Fig. 8, the coin here alluded to, bears precisely the same device,

with variation only of the attitude of the warrior. The legend is

different, the part visible being on the obverse, 3\.. qae7y BAY Sri... ta

Mahendra jaya, and on the reverse, s\nwwafae Sri Mahendra Sinha.

Whether the Mahendra here designed be distinct from the MaHEenprRaA

GupTA of the cornucopia reverse, remains to be ascertained.

Figs. 3, 4,5. From Mr. Treezar’s collection. These three coins

hearing the Raja on horseback on the obverse, and a female seated

~ sideways on a morha or wicker stool on the reverse, are essentially

the same as were published in November last, (figs. 29, 30, Plate

XXXIX. from Lieut. Burt’s and my own coins) which 1 was then,

however, unable to read satisfactorily, from misapprehension of the

* It is remarkable that in most cases the word Sinha (or more properly Simha)

is written with an unknown letter superposed to the wz, This must be the nasal

m, for which the anuswara is now substituted. In fig. 2 the letter is palpably

an &, m, to which is subjoined the / 9; but im figs. 1 and 8, and in my coin, the

letter has the form of C.

4 Pp

650 New varieties of the | [Ocr.

letter 4. The legend is in all exactly the same on the reverse,

uafsra aery Ajita Mahendra: ‘the unconquered Mauenpra.’ The

female holds, in her right hand, variously, a flower, a noose, or food

for an attendant peacock, like that of the Kuméra coins.

On the obverse the legend is more variable.

In No. 3, we have the letters wfsauga....afam....

In No. 4, not legible.. afa

In No. 5, wa .. not legible.

Fig. 6. (TrecEar). This coin resembles in all respects the foregoing,

excepting as to the legend, which is on the obverse, beginning at the

top Xam... aa Paramés (vara ? Cha or mahe) ndra-gupta. On the

reverse (the second letter being very clear on a duplicate coin in Capt.

Cunninenam’s cabinet) Sfsta fama: Ajita Vikrama. This name so

closely resembles the common pronunciation of Vicramajit, (correctly

written VixramApitya,) that although it may not belong to that

celebrated sovereign, it is very possible that matters appertaining to

the history of the one may have beentransferred to the other, and hence

some of the confusion, so perplexing to the historian, have originated.

Fig. 7. An unique lately procured by Mr. Trecuar. The Raja on

the obverse is of a peaceful character, with hand extended but no altar.

A diminutive attendant holds a chatta over his head. The letters on

the margin are not legible. On the reverse is the standing cornucopia

female holding a well depicted lotus flower, with a lateral inscription

which may be read famwatie: Vikramdditya ; but although the length

of the subjomed y exceeds that usually found in the d, and the

diis not much like the ch, it is probable that the word is after all only

fanaa: Vikrama Chandra: and we must not allow our sanguine

imagination to rejoice in having at length hit upon a veritable coin

of the author of the Samvat era ; against which there is also a cogent

chronological obstacle, in the date hitherto assigned to our dynasty of

Guptas*.

Fig. 9 (Tr.) is introduced as a new variety of the Chandra-gupta

coinage : only differing from the numerous class before described in the

legends, which are very clearly on the obverse, SSAA. ... Sr¢ Chan-

dra-gupta, (the titles not legible,) and on the reverse =—fama: Sri

Vikrama.

Fig. 10, of Mr. Treczar’s collection, was engraved as a doubtful

name, but I think it may be set down as belonging to SKANDA-GUPTA.

Figs. 11 to 15. This curious class of copper coins has not yet

been brought to notice. They are indeed much more scarce than the

gold coins of the same age, and hitherto only those of one individual

* Mr. TREGEAR has since written that on re-examination the word is palpably

Vikramaditya.

1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 651

of the family have been met with. It was not until Mr. Trreuar’s

highly curious specimen, fig. 11, had furnished us with the style of

Cuanpra’s copper coins that we were led to re-examine our several

collections, in which were found, and became legible, a few rare spe-

cimens of the same character.

Fig. 11 has the portrait of the Raja on one side, with a smaller,

perhaps female, figure on his left hand. On the reverse a front face

of him is presented, leaning, as it were, on a window sill: below which

in very well defined characters, ..... SI<ta#t AIHA A (Srima) hardja

Srt Chandra-gupta.

Fig. 12 isa demi-coin of similar stamp, one of two belonging

also to Mr. TrecEear: but-on the reverse of this, as in all that follow,

the device, is a bird, the same that figures on the military standard of

the gold coins, and which Mr. Wiuson says ‘‘ looks more likea goose

than a Roman eagle.” The inscription is very well preserved, ATRTT

Sri Chandra-gupta.

Fig. 13 is from Col. Sracy’s cabinet: the obverse, well executed,

represents the bust of the Raja holding a flower; beneath, 3\fama. .

Sri Vikrama ; the next letter may be | or @; but on the reverse are

distinguishable the initial letters aq... Sri Cha.... proving that the

coin belongs to CHANDRA-GUPTA.

Fig. 14 is from Col. Swiney’s cabinet, in all respects a duplicate

of the last, but the reverse legend is even more distinctly .... GAIT

the lower part of the ndra only is effaced.

Fig. 15 had escaped notice in my own cabinet :—the head is more

highly finished than in the other specimens, but the legend could not

have been understood without their aid :—it is .... wala. ... ndra-

gupta.

Before quitting this very interesting group of coins, I must not

omit to notice the only silver specimen which has yet come under my

observation : it belongs to Dr. Swinery, and is.... a forgery !—not a

modern one, but an actual false coin of the period when it was

struck. It is of copper thickly plated, but the silver plate is worn

through in several places, exposing the interior nucleus. I have

depicted it in Plate XXXIX. Fig. 21.

Obverse, the Raja in the original sacrificing attitude; under his

left arm the letters 4aTq Ajaya or TITY Raja y...

Reverse. Goddess (Durga?) seated in the native fashion with cor-

nucopia (or flower) and glory—a small elephant with trunk uplifted

for protection, on her right shoulder. The marginal inscription

MwA. .... Sri Prakanau.... the last letter may be double 2,—

but in neither manner does it present an intelligible word.

4p 2

652 New varieties of the [Ocr.

Second Series of imitations:

We now pass to another series of coins evidently descended from

the same ‘ Ardokro’ type coin to which the early Canouj group has

been so satisfactorily traced. In the latter case we have seen that

the Hindu artists soon quitted their original, and exercised a fertile in-

vention in varying the device during several generations of princes:

but in the coins we have now to notice, no claims to ingenuity can be

advanced; unless it be for gradually barbarizing and disguising the

original type, so that it would have been absolutely impossible to.

recognize the character of the extraordinary symbols on the later

pieces, had we not a numerous train of specimens to produce, in evidence

of the gradual deterioration. I had already more than once engraved

specimens of this curious series, thinking them to be merely the link

coins between the Rao nano rao and the early Canouj series. Among

the Manikyala coins was the only silver coin of the set on which | had

particularly remarked legible Sanscrit characters; which were of a

form and age differing essentially from the Canouj com alphabet (so

called). But now through Capt. Cunnineuam’s careful scrutiny of

all our available collections, I am enabled to produce a host of variable

legends, which may be the means of ceveloping by and bye a second

royal dynasty of some other Indian locality, as successfully as has.

been the case with the Gupra family.

Henceforward my readers should understand, and they will, doubt-

less, soon perceive the fact, that my coin essays are joint productions,

and that I have an auxiliary at my elbow, far better acquainted with

the contents of, I may say, all the collections of coins in India, than

¥ have leisure to become. With his zealous aid in hunting out the

unpublished varieties of every class, I hope to make these notices

complete as far as discovery has yet proceeded, and to do fuller

justice to the numerous contributions I continue to receive from my

numismatic co-adjutors in the interior.

That the present class is totally distinct from the last, may be

argued on many grounds :—those are discovered in greatest quantity

at Canouj, Jonpur, Gaya, and even occasionally in Bengal,—these are

chiefly met with in Upper India, and in the Panjdb. Capt. Cauriey

has sent me one dug up in the foundations of his residence near

Scharanpur ; Mr. Dean dug up some at Samehana near Delhi :—but

the most important fact in their history is the extraction of one of

the lowest members of the group from the Maniky4la tope by Gene-

ral Ventura. Mr. Masseon’s large collection in Afghdnistdn does

not contain one of this type, nor any of the first or Canouj series. They

are, therefore, purely of Indian growth. To Upper India, the Panjaé

1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 653

or Cashmir, then we must turn our view in seeking the focus whence

they were issued, and fortunately we have authentic lists of the so-

vereigns of some of these places to consult.

But first to enumerate the coins :—

Fig. 18. A gold coin (Stacy) weight 120 grs.* deserves to be

mentioned first, because the workmanship is nearest in perfection—

in imperfection we might rather say,—to the ‘ mano rao,’ or ‘ Ardokro’

original. The legs of the couch, cornucopia, and drapery, are well

defied. The raja on the obverse has his trident standard, and his

right hand outstretched as over the fire altar, but the altar is omitted.

Under the right hand of the raja, both in this coin and in figs. 16

and 20, occur the letters Ya pasa either side by side as in 16, or su-

perposed as in 20. Under the left arm, which is elevated to hold a

spear, is another perpendicular combination of two or three conso-

nants, apparently 4 @, and @ with the vowel Ge. The same mono-

gram (or rather polygram) continues through the whole series. I

formerly took it for a sword handle, which it exactly resembles when

the lowermost letter is hid.

Fig. 20. (Sracy) the next best in execution, has the letters 31

Sri Kri.... visible on the left of the female.

Fig. 19. (TrecEar :—duplicate, CunnineHam) continues the

word ; qaTHTa Krigodhdya ? or Kribhodhdya.

Figs. 16 and 17 of my cabinet have the letters 4tfaq.... Sré

Visva.... or Vikha on the former, and yw... .. Pasala... (or perhaps

Visala ?) on the latter.

Numerous other specimens in gold might be enumerated,—but

they generally contain even less satisfactory fragments of names than

the above. All that can be positively asserted is that the letters are

Sanscrit, and, on these at least, of the same alphabet as that we have

designated No. 2 of the Allahabad lath.

The silver coins of this second series are much more scarce than

the gold and copper ones.—The three I possess, represented in figs.

1, 2, and 3, appear also to be of a very debased standard, and to be-

long toa much later period. None of them retain more than the

rudest semblance of the raja figure—and still less of the goddess ;—

the latter has even been taken for a dagger, the former fora scorpion !

The letters also are of a more modern formation, not differing much.

from those of the tenth century, found at Sdrndth and other places.

Captain Cunnineuam first pointed out to me the words 4tyaTy Sri

Pratadpa.... on figs. 1 and 2.

* The weight of all these coins is nearly the same, being in fact the di-

drachma of the Greeks.

654 New varieties of the [Ocr.

Plate XXXIX.

On fig. 3, on a former occasion I had already read 3tqq.... Sré

Yag.. but as there are traces of a cross-line to the loop of the third

letter, I am inclined to adopt rather the reading 9x.... Yasa...

Yasa glory, forming in composition many Indian names, as Yasa

Vigraha, Yas o Varma, Yas o Pala, Yaswant, &c. i

The two earliest specimens of the copper series, figs. 4 and 5, are

from Col. Sracy’s and Capt. CunnineHam’s cabinets respectively.

The first has several letters of the old character :—under the left

arm perpendicularly way. . Sayadha, and on the exterior a%. . maka.

Fig. 5 is, in reality, a forgery of a gold coin: the remains of the

ancient gilding are still perceptible in the angles. The monogram

is the same as in fig. 18, of the last Plate.

Figs. 8 and 9 are selected” from Col. Sracy’s box as examples

of the name of ayaaTy, Sri Pratapa, in the two forms of alphabet.—

Probably they belong to different individuals of the same germs

name.

Fig. 8, is a valuable unique in Col. Swivey’s drawers, with a

multitude of letters that have usurped the natural position of ‘arms,

cornucopia, throne, and all such appurtenances!—On the obverse are

the letters a4 jaya: on the opposite face, s\faae Sri Vinada or fata

Virava.. and to the right 4 (?) =e mandéd....

Fig. 9.. The word Sri is still perceptible.

Fig. 10 is but introduced (from my collection) to shew the com-

plete barbarism that finally prevailed. Such rude pieces are to be

had in plenty, for one that contains a trace of writing. Pratdpa is

the commonest name on those that are by any means legible.

Third Series of imitations.

The next five coins of my Plate represent a very numerous class

of Hindu coins, grotesque but very bold in execution, and attempting

refinement in the position of the right hand of the raja, and in the

sitting posture of the reverse. Having pointed out the prototype of

the European coat, pantaloons, gaiter and wig on one series, I must

not pass unheeded the epauleite so faithfully and curiously portrayed.

on the obverses of this series! I am induced to consider them a third

instance of imitation of the Ardokro type from their general aspect. and

attitudes :—moreover the cornucopia is traceable in the earlier pieces

as figs. 13 (Sra.) and 14 (J. P.) As they deteriorate, the limbs are

lopped off as usual to make way for Nagari characters! This is well

exemplified in fig. 11 (Cunn.) and 12 (Sta.) Fig. 17 (Sw1.) BAY

be regarded as the ultimate degradation of the type.

Sour. As. Soc. VOCE PLC. XXX.

oar ay

ar 4 »

io il |

LET OF pn tied /

‘

i } 4

Ne ya Wa fi

a Ly ; - ria \

ec Gaye is

| i fis ‘ = W4 ue

14}

aC Byrn

Na A Sud TN,

(Ni Wit

ADR

Wee h

Msi

o ! My

ity ri Nf

(ins

{ {

\ x

\ i

‘i

Aes

41 (Wane a

rm) ee A v

]

LAN . |

a Ve Mi 1

fica

ii “lM

Y | ( S

\ a STR a Ol

SP NG

(ff

fee A RN

i a Wi) oe a

See 1°* Series.

1836.] Early Hindu Series of Coins. 655

Of legends we have in fig. 15, on the margin .. @f.. yo.. On fig.

16, reverse, the letter @ ja. On fig. 11, on either arm of the sitting -

figure 2rife Sri di? and on fig. 12 several uncertain letters scattered

about #4 ay. In the last of the set, the letter @ stands alone.

It would be in vain to attempt any explanation of such vague

symbols. Of this series of coins M. Courr’s drawings contained

many good samples. They are plentiful in the Panjab, less so in

Upper India, and comparatively rare in Afghdnistan. Mr. Masson

has only given one, and that very degraded.

Fourth Series.

These shadows of the Kanerkan king are alike Duncan’s issue,—

“ a fourth ?—start eyes! what will the line stretch out to the crack

of doom? another yet ?”—Such is, however, the singular fact; whe-

ther they ‘‘ reigned in this kingdom” consecutively, or in subdivided

portions of it, there can be no doubt of the common source whence

these numerous progeny have borrowed their family features. Amid

the hundreds of each kind, now open to our examination and selection,

the progress of deviation can readily be followed: and it is nota

little curious to see the different results of corruption arrived at by

different engravers or moniers, in the course, perhaps, of a few gene-

rations. In one case we come toa kind of dagger—in another to a

few dots and strokes—and in the present instance to a kind of heart,

formed of the knees and petticoat of the seated female! The best of

the three coins depicted in the engraving are from Mowan La’t’s col-

lection; the worst from Capt. CauTiEy’s disinterred Behat relics,

where a large proportion of these heart coins was found in associa-

tion with the supposed Buddhist coins, described in my essay of last

November. I can find but one approach to a letter on any of them,

viz. the fa to the left of the well formed Raja in fig. 16. It is

hardly sufficient to confirm their Indian origin: and it must be noted

that this species is found in abundance farther to the north-west than

any of the others.

Thus Mr. Masson says of them: ‘‘ this series is very extensively

found in western Afghdnistan. The obverse has a rude figure of the

prince, clad in mail with the accompaniment of the fire altar,” (not

visible in ours, but clearly so in M.’s drawings) ‘‘ and on the reverse

a figure seated on a throne with her foot on a footstool. Onno

one coin of the class have I been able to detect the legend, al-

though they appear in some instances to have had characters intended

for such. Figs. 61 to 63,” (those that shew the chair, the cornuco-

pia and noose) ‘‘ are generally found at Beghram, figs. 64 to 66,”

(those having only the outline of a heart,) ‘“‘ are the types prevalent

656 New varieties of the [Ocr.

on the banks of the Indus and in the Panjdb,’—and, as we have

stated above, near Seharanpur in India proper. This series has, un-

doubtedly, a better claim to be considered the genuine descendant of

the Ardokro coin in situ than any of the three preceding series.

To sum up my review of these coins, I cannot help remarking how

great an analogy exists between the circumstance of these several

adoptions by subordinate imitators, of a predominant form of coinage

that had perhaps prevailed for centuries under a paramount rule;

and the nearly parallel case of the Sua’ A/tamM coinage of the last

century, the very words and form of which were copied by the numer-

ous rajas and nawabs, who assumed the privilege of coinage upon

the dismemberment of the Delhi monarchy. In many places, a few

years only, have sufficed so to disfigure the Persian letters, as to render

them quite illegible and barbarous.

| Pala or Déva dynasty of Canouj.

By way of filling the plate, I have engraved at foot, two new spe-

cimens of this dynasty, brought to light since the publication of Plate

L. Vol. IV.

Fig. 19 is taken from a cast of a gold coin, in Col. T. P. Smirn’s

possession. Some of the letters are new in form, but they may pos-

sibly be read Mlaaiaue Giaea Sri mad Vigrahapala deva.

Fig. 20 is an unique copper coin of Capt. CunnincHaAm’s. On the

obverse, the four-handed god is crushing a demon—instead of being

seated in the usual serene attitude. The legend on the other side

may be read, Mtaaqeqtea Sri mat Prithi deva, a name occurring in the

Delhi list as having reigned at Lahore A. D. 1176—1192: but not

to be found among the many names which inscriptions have given

us of the Bhupala family of Canouj and Benares.

Mr. Masson has figured a third new name of the same group,

which I have inadvertently neglected to introduce in this plate as

I had intended. The letters that are visible are Wi#.... @alcata

.. ea Sri ma....miramas..deva. The first and last letters are half

cut off, and the vowel may be an da, so that the reading may

possibly be Sri m(at Ku)mdra mah(é Rdja) deva. Mr. Masson says

that ‘‘at Kabul coins of this peculiar type are met with occasionally

in the bazar, generally of gold. A large parcel was dug up out of

the soil, three or four years ago, near Korinder a village of Koh-

daman.”’ He places them as the last of the Indo-Scythic series, not

having, at the time of writing, seen what had been made of them here.

If indeed the sitting female be a far descendant from the Mithraic

goddess, the long interval of six or eight centuries will fully account

for the magnitude of her transformation.

LATH

at Behtari, Ghaxipur.

PL. XXXII)

(for tnscripecon, see

SURF, ae city

AWN WN We MN

™~

‘Sy

| 3 “SOP Wot te WE eine Svap

Gir se ble or wok VS LugouGble 4 eeGrSkriolk Gs ee reep 4BE@

{A LG Kis TR Wolpe OPS FOE Ere b Hw ELE ls Pes Wk bor e)belsk &

DOL LEB Uaes 2 ib lalgk¥le Week) ¢ Mi pUMG EU ain GEaeasfussis lio

Ds EisebvbwWerlsalLe@lSE Ys bw ek Lok fis SLB ISL Lewsey) ely Qe WU bse?

& visks Blob BOYS glee Seis PERIL Ve/So SKM BY LARUE GLE rales —

BD) Plo SPIEL PER WERPER RE Loeb ay Abe bUUOENSe IRE kde bu RISE IER Kite Wy

Printed at the Oriardal Luh” Press. Calcutta.

~Ccu

—

geapiusye, DADy-Dyppng 71” NOLLdIYOSNI “> / ATIWISIV4

Journ.As. Soc.

1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 657

Itisa great pity that the horde discovered at Korinder was not

secured at once. Jt might have contributed very materially to our

classification of this second Canouj dynasty. A great many specimens

of the same sort must also be scattered about in the cabinets of retired

Indians at home ; and we may hope now that Professor WiLson has

commenced upon the task of examining the coins in the Royal Asiatic

Society and India House collections, specimens will flow in to him

from all quarters to be decyphered and described.

V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed by JamEs

Prinsep, Secretary As. Soc. &c.

[Continued from page 561.]

Inscriptions from Buddha-Gaya, Plate XXX.

The neighbourhood of Gaya has long been known to be prolific of

inscriptions :—yet, notwithstanding the various notices of them which

have appeared in the Researches, of the Bengal, and of the London So-

cieties, the theme is, as yet, by. no means exhausted. Mr. Harineton

furnished our Society at a very early period after its institution wth

copies of two inscriptions from the principal cave, lying in the hil’ of

Nagarjuna, (the name, it will be remembered, of a celebrated Buddhist

patriarch,) one of which was decyphered by Dr. WiLx1ns, and proved

to be a record of the excavation of the cave by ANanra Varma, the

grandson of Yacna Varma. The date is not given, but the character

(No. 2 of the Allahabad lith) shews it to belong to an early cen-

tury of the Christian era. Mr. Harineton mentions several other

caves and inscriptions which have not yet been examined.

Dr. Wixins also translated one inscription copied from a stone

by Mr. Witmor in 1785, (As. Res. vol. i. 284,) dated Samvat 1005,

purporting that Amara Deva, the author of the Amera kosha, built

the temple of Buddha at Buddha-gaya.

Dr. Hamitton (Roy. As. Soc. Trans. vol. ii. 44,) in his account of

the ruins of Buddha Gaya, alludes cursorily to inscriptions on two

images of Gautama, recording their erection, one by Jaya Smn and

Kuma’ra Sen, sons of PunyasysapraA, son of Samanta, all untitled.

persons: the other by Raja Visyaspuapra, of whom nothing more is

known.

The Burmese inscription found by the Embassy in 1831, was of a

more interesting description. It is described in the Journal (vol. iii,

page 214), and more fully by Colonel Burney in the last volume of

the Researches. It was upon the occasion of my requesting Mr.

Hatuorne, then magistrate of Gaya, to take a duplicate of the Bur-

658 _ Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. [Ocr.

mese facsimile, that this gentleman went beyond his commission, and

kindly furnished me with facsimiles of several other inscriptions in

the neighbourhood of the ancient temple, all of which, he says, are

quite illegible to the learned pandits of Gaya.

“No. 2, (No. 1 being the Burmese inscription) he writes, is on a

stone lying near the Mahi Buddha temple.” A copy of this, noted by

Hamitton as ‘ an inscription of considerable length,’ appears to be

deposited in the E. I. C.’s Museum, labelled No. 113, but no further

account of it is furnished. It is this imscription which I have litho-

graphed in Plate XXX; but before proceeding to its discussion, it will

be better to notice the other items of Mr. Harnorne’s dispatch.

‘‘ No. 3 is an inscription ona stone, inserted in the wall of a Brah-

man’s house erected on the site of the old fort, said to have belonged

to Raja Amir Sinn, who went over to the Burman empire, became

converted to the Bauddha faith, and died inthat country.” This is

evidently the inscription translated by Witktns ; the Raja Amr

being the AMARA above mentioned, : and the story of his conversion

has merely been altered a little in repetition, and mixed up with the

more recent collisions between the Burmese defendants of the shrine

and the Rajput expeditions against these infidels in the 12th and 13th

centuries. Perhaps the similarity of the name to the celebrated Ha-

MvRA Sinu of Chitor may have helped to confound the tradition. It

is unnecessary to republish this inscription.

«No. 4 is inscribed in a circular form over an image of Devi in the

Mahant’s garden.” ‘This, again, is alluded to by Dr. Haminton as

No. 99 of the India House museum, ‘‘ on a male figure now called

Saraswatt (a goddess), is the usual pious sentence of the Buddhist.”

It is useless to lithograph this inscription, which does not differ even

in the form of the letters from the ‘“‘ Ye dharma hetu, &c.” of the

Sarnath and Tirhut images.

«© No. 5 is a word engraved on a pillar which now forms one of the

stanchions to an upper story in the convent. The character you will

observe assimilates to the ancient inscriptions.” This I have found

room to insert in Plate XXXIII., but it is impossible to make any

thing of it: perhaps it formed part of a longer inscription in the

oldest lath character.

No. 2, then, is the only one of the series which requires further

observation. From my acquired experience in such matters, there

was little difficulty in transcribing the whole from the facsimile (li-

thographed on a reduced scale in Plate XXX.) into the modern Nagari,

nor in preparing a translation with the assistance of the Society’s

pandit, and of Ratna Pauna, whose acquaintance with the Buddhist

1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 659

tenets enabled him to correct the former in several doubtful read-

ings.

The character may be properly designated as the Gaur alphabet,

the parent of the modern Bengalé form. The specimen is chronolo-

gically valuable to the investigation of the gradual alterations it has

undergone, because it contains a date, Samvat 73 or 74, of an era

that has been the subject of some misapprehension. Mr. CoLzsrooxs

rectified Dr. Wi1x1ns’ mistake in supposing this sambat could refer to

the era of VikramApitya, andassumed a position for it 1000 years

more modern, in connection with the Gopala or Bhupdla dynasty of

Gaur. The document before us corroborates this view ; but by the ex-

pression, “ after the expiration of the reign of Laxmana Su'na,’’ it

would seem that the term samvat applied generally to whatever epoch

might be mentioned in the preceding sentence. Laxmana Sz'na, the

son of Beat Sen, who built the city of Gaur, reigned in A. D.

1116—1123: so that the date of the inscription on this supposition

would be A. D. 1197, only three years prior to the destruction of the

monarchy by the Musalmans. The figures, however, are unfortunately

doubtful, just where their identification is of the greatest conse-

quence :—the first might be read as the Nagari 1, were not the nu-

merals of the month so clearly of the Bengali form. If counted from

the foundation of Gaur in 1066, the date would fall in 1140. Were

there any possibility of assuming a starting point on satisfactory

data, the day of the week, Thursday, would afford a sure test of its

being correctly fixed, by the calculation of the luni-solar period

elapsed: but according to the formula in my calendric tables, neither

of the epochs above selected will bring about such a result.

The following is the transcript of the facsimile in modern Nagari.

One letter after Namobuddhaya is illegible, and the next word is con-

sequently doubtful : anusvara is substituted for ¢.

AT Ay PRU TICHLATalaar: TAT TAA Sanacucfa=

ARCAYACLSHCATTSTIMAA HUSIfATTS ATAU CITIAA AT

facfatanatinsnataefanfafarintasatad wiewafwafc

STAT TST STAA HT AHS IH fT SSN ML TA AS AH ANCT ST

qrasiifa wremiftaveaaaram fafrrustaa feeasitreta age

DIP SSA AA AGI AAAS SAAT ATA SAS AA AAAI

BIAGG «ASHE AATA Uae TIT AT AST TUT aa aie

MARANA RHTTUTTS AT SIAM AA ATA

Hox Fwia ate YX ALT

492

660 Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. (Ocr.

Translation.

‘«« Salutation to Buddha.—May this votive aspiration of the devoted

-votary to Mahdvira Swémi*—(Of him who is) in holiness like the

blue-bee steeped in the honied lotus of the feet of a divine personage,

and in might like the lion triumphant over the infuriate elephant,

who reigns over the royal and puissant progeny of Hulkara Buupa’ta,

named Krisuna Nripatiand GARUDANA/RAYANA, his inveterate anta-

gonists—who is himself the gracious father (protector) of tributary

kings—who, adorned with such might and virtues, sways the im-

perial sceptre over 125000 kingdoms well people with mountaineer

warriors—the king of kings—the auspicious and high in dignity

Asoka Cuanpra Deva,— (of the aforesaid R4ja’s) younger brother,

Dasaratua Kuma’Ra, supported and maintained through the lotus of

his gracious feet, his dependent treasurer, a conscientious Bodhisatwa

—the light of his tribe and family, by name Sawasrapa’pa, son of

the dignified Sri’ Cua’ta Brana, and grandson of Mrisu1 BrauMA

—may (this his holy act), united with the virtues of his teachers and

guru, his mother and father, enable to attain the fruit of immortal

wisdom, salvation from passions and delusions of sublunary existence,

and absorption of his soul in the Supreme Being.”

“Written after the conclusion of the reign of Sri mat Laxmana

Sena Deva, in the year 74, on Thursday, the 12th day of the dark

half of the month of Vatsakha.”

The inversion of the sentence, and the multitude of epithets applied

to each party, makes it difficult for an English reader to follow the

sense through such a labyrinth :—in afew words, it prays that some

good act (probably the building or endowment of a temple) may

redound to the eternal welfare of one Sanasrapa’pA, the treasurer of

DasaratHa Kumasra, the younger brother of Maharaja Asoxa Cuan-

pRA Deva, the reigning prince of adynasty that had supplanted by

conquest some descendants of the Buupata family, (of Gaur doubt-

less,) by name Krisuna and Garupana’ra’yan. All these names

and persons I believe are new to history: at least I find no Asoxa

among the successors of Beua’n Sz'n. From his assumption of such

a name it may be presumed that he was of the Buddhist faith, as the

invocation shews to have been the case also with his officers of state.

_ * Buppwa, the transcendently victorious hero. The construction of the sen-

tence, which it is endeavoured to follow closely, will be hardly intelligible

without explaining that this first epithet belongs to SaHASRAPA’DA, whose

name occurs lower down.

Jour, CaSoe tes ee

SubArmatayan Fossil Remains. Sie. 4

Printed at lhe Oriental Lith Frets. Calcutta,

1836. ] Fossil Remains of the Dddupiir Collection. 661

Bhitari Lath.

On the same plate | have lithographed from a drawing by Captain

Cunnincuam an elevation of the Bhitari ldth in the Ghazipur dis-

trict, of which so much have been said. It was Mr. Trecear who

first brought it to notice in 1834; he sent me a rough pencil sketch,

and promised further examination. This was accomplished in com-

pany with Captain Cunnincuam ; when on clearing away the earth

from the lower part of the shaft along inscription was discovered.

It was immediately seen to be in the same character as No. 2 of the

Allahabad léth—and while taking a copy of it in pencil, the names of

Rajas Sri’ Gupra, GHaTOT KACHA, CHANDRA-GUPTA, SAMUDRA-GUP-

Ta, were found following in succession, exactly as on the Allahabad

inscription—other names, CHANDRA-GupTA, Kuma/RA-Gupta, and

SKANDA-GupTA, succeeded ; proving that this pillar had been erected

several reigns subsequently to the other, and confirming in an extra-

ordinary manner the concatenation of the Canowj coins of this very

Gupta family, as has been noticed in a preceding paper.—More need

not be said at present, as the inscription itself will appear next

month with Dr. Miuu’s interpretation and valuable comments.

There are two other pillars near Ghazipur, at Zamineah, south of

the Ganges, from which great expectations were entertained, of our

making a further acquisition—but we have just been disappointed.

Col. Povoueri writes me, that Mr. Murray has closely. examined the

principal pillar without finding any trace of writing on it; he is

about to dig around it, however, for the square portion of the shaft

may possibly be buried below the soil. This is our only chance.

VI.—Sub-Himalayan Fossil Remains of the Daduptr Collection. By

Lieuts. W. E. Baxer and H. M. Duranp, Engineers.

Genus Sus*.

Cuvirr has confined his remarks upon the fossil remains of the

genus Sus to a brief notice of their existence, in consequence, it

appears, of the fact that up to the time at which the Recherches sur

les Ossemens fossiles were published, the instances of the occurrence

of fossils of this genus were rare ; and of the small number discovered

the greater portion had been found in peat. The tables given in the

* The Plates B and C mentioned in the ensuing descriptions, have been in-

corporated in Plate XLIV., and had been reserved for the Researches, on account

of their dimensions ; but we see they are mecessary to the article, and have in-

serted them with Col, Couvin’s lithograph. —Eb.

662 Fossil Remuins of the Daduptr Collection. [Ocr.

latest geological manuals show, that in the interval which has elaps-

ed since the publication of Cuvimr’s work a few sites have afforded

specimens, but still the remains in comparison with those of other

genera are far from being abundant. By reference to the table of

Sub-Himalayan fossil genera in the 58rd No. of the Journal of the

Asiatic Society it will be observed, that, although here found in

greater quantity than in European localities, the relics of the genus are,

in comparison with those of most of the other Pachydermata, scarce.

Notwithstanding their small number, the specimens in our possession,

happening in general to be tolerably perfect, form a series which,

though not continuous, is sufficiently perfect to illustrate the dentition

of one of the species.

To the consideration of this species we without further introduction

proceed; premising only, that with the exception of the cranium of

which fig. 6, Pl. B, is a representation, the whole of the specimens

referred to are from the Maginand deposit, a general description of

which prefaces our notes on the fossil unicorn-rhinoceros.

Cranium. The fossil, of which figs. 1 and 2, Pl. XXXIV. are re-

presentations, is the cranium of the sow of the species to be described.

The specimen has been less crushed than is usual, but has not altoge-

ther escaped. The nasal bones are not quite centrical, and in their

natural position, being thrust over towards the left maxillary by a

crush which acted on the right side of the head. The mastoid apophy-

ses and the descending tubercles in their front are broken off; the

extremities of the pterygoid apophysis are also mutilated :—the zygo-

maticapophysis of the temporal, if perfect, cannot be cleared completely

from the matrix which adheres to it, without the risk of destroying

the process itself and the adjacent parts: both jugals are imperfect,

being broken off (as shewn in the profile view of the skull) immediate-

ly after their descent from forming the post. orbitary apophysis: the

canines are wanting, but their alveoli are very distinct, though small

for the size of the head; this circumstance, in conjunction with the

minor development of some parts of the occiput when compared

with other specimens, indicates the sex of the cranium.

With the view of obtaining the difference of proportions consequent

on differences of sex, the measurements which form the third column

of the subjoined table were inserted; the half palate of the cranium

from whence they are derived is given at fig. 5, Pl. B, but the occiput

and nasal bones being imperfect, it was not deemed necessary to

delineate the specimen either in plan or profile.

The second column of the table is occupied by the proportions

deduced from the dimensions taken upon the cranium of the sow ; and

1836.] Fossil Remains of the Dddupir Collection. 663

the first column by those obtained from the head of a wild boar

killed in the neighbourhood of Hansi. These two skulls denote, by

the state of their molar teeth, very similar ages, the existing being

but little younger than the fossil species; they are therefore well

adapted for a comparison.

Fossil Fossil

Existing | species, | species,

species. | Female. | Male.

Space occupied by seven molars measured on mesial

REC, 5 dod dadd Gad va pale handel nce onac ole toads 1,000 1,000 1,000

From lower edge of foramen magnum to Cah ed

OfMCEMMAGU ALY, join ws)aisie» winresiiolejsiolsieins sieleptee . 2,672 2,586 Fc

Space between the 9th molars at their anterior, seoet 0,210 0,193 0,257

PREC AICO! ISHIGIELOS oie jo ciesiee ooimiele » Baie ielernlo eislers 0,371 0,356 0,418

Distance from Ist molars to extremity of inter-

PRTG 6 ORGS URISUIAGDOIOES Dich otOOSoohoc piecistigd 0,858 0,680 Sip

Ditto from lower edge of occipital foramen to Pos-

terior edge of 7th molars, ..... 0,825 0,922 s

Ditto from summit of occiput to extremity of inter. -

TRON ERG Hi on Sb dood dao OnErd Op. OS Oo ec onbe 3,267 2,940 Ae

Breadth of frontal plane at post. orbitary apophysis,} 0,876 0,831 0,928

Ditto of parietal plane at narrowest part,. ........ 0,358 0,241 0,301

Greatest breadth across zygomatic process of tem-

IEAM OMES sapetcleyfelielstels fe (ere) u <tarel claveyauela’ sVehatetiettele) ote 1,323 1,280 we

From anterior of orbit to extremity of intermaxillary,} 2,079 1,934 Ae

From anterior of orbit to point of post. orbitary

2/1 0)0) MISE Go OO OU COBO CU Oe OG DOT ICO Unto OO Crae 0,362 0,317 a

Diameter of orbit perpendicularly to line of molar,] 0,365 0,280 0,290

From point of post. orbitary apophysis to lower edge

of jugal,...... wiahor ia/(oishol ajaiuis)ahalekeinde jo slevatcis/s 0,562 0,553 .

Height of occiput from lower edge of ‘occipital fora-

MEN TOISUMMIE,, 0 sole cies’ s slae si dhele Dhara) diets 's:stters 1,073 0,893 ie

Breadth across occipital condyles, onesae ae Sale aca) ORY) 0,449 é

Having only one specimen of the existing species, we shall draw no

conclusions from the difference of size observable in the two species,

as shown by the table of dimensions which closes this paper ; but,

confining ourselves to the discordances displayed by the above table,

in which the length of space occupied by the seven molars is chosen

as the unit of comparison, shall notice the following circumstances.

The molars with reference to the length of the head as measured

from the foramen magnum to the extremity of the intermaxillaries,

occupy more space, and are situated at a greater distance from the

foramen magnum ; there is, consequently, a less interval between the

anterior false molar and the extremity of the intermaxillaries in the

fossil than in the existing species: the palate is also somewhat

narrower. .

The mesial line of the occiput is in the fossil nearly perpendicular

to the plane of the palate, agreeing in this respect with the cranium

of the hog which forms the subject of Cuvirer’s description: but in

the wild hog of Haridnah this mesial line makes an obtuse angle

with the palatal plane ; thus causing the dimension from the crest of

664 Fossil Remains of the Dadupir Collection. [Ocr.

the occiput to the anterior extremity of the intermaxillaries to be pro-

portionately greater than in the fossil.

It will be observed, that the male, with exactly the same ‘space

occupied by its molars as by those of the sow, has a greater frontal and

parietal breadth of upper plane of the head. In both fossils there is,

in the frontal plane, a total absence of convexity: as this plane

ascends, there is a tendency to concavity, in consequence of the parie-

tal crests being more strongly marked than in the existing species,

and thus producing the appearance of a gentle hollow where in the

common wild hog there would be a gentle swell.

The orbits are in the fossil’ proportionately less, situated higher,

and more forward in the head; their horizontal is greater than their

perpendicular diameter, whereas in the existing species these are nearly

equal: the post. orbital apophyses of the frontals are not so salient,

and those of the jugal bones are less distant from the oak or of the

orbit than is the case in the existing species.

Considering the sex of the fossil cranium, the saliency of the zygo-

matic arches correspond in the two species. .

On reference to the table of measurements, it will be seen that the

occiput of the specimen third in the table is, in consequence of hav-

ing belonged to a male, larger than that of fig. 1, Plate XXXIV. The

specimen here alluded to possessing only one molar, could not be

introduced into the foregoing table of proportions: -supposing, how-

ever, the space occupied by its molars to have been equal to that of

fig. 1, Plate XXXIV. and fig. 5, Plate B, the height of this occiput

yields a proportion of 1.071, which is very similar to that obtained for

the existing species. The breadth across the condyles is comparatively

less in the fossil; but the transverse breadth of the occiput at the

broadest part is more developed than in the existing species. —

No sutures can be traced in the fossils. From the foregoing re-

marks it is evident that in several respects the species differ. We shall

now proceed to examine the dentition, which presents a few modifi-

cations worthy of notice.

Upper jaws. 'The plane of the palate extends backwards behind

the seventh molars, even further than in the common hog.

The teeth correspond in number with those of the existing species,

the incisors being § canines }—+, molars 7—2?.

With exemplars of the earlier stages of the dentition in the upper

maxillaries, we are not well provided: a small fragment containing

the 3rdand 4th molars but slightly worn, shows that the 4th milk

tooth resembled that delineated by Cuvier in his Plate 1, fig. 6

but the 3rd molar, though composed of similar parts, is a little longer

ur As. Seo

Plate B. Fossid Sus

————

1836.] Fossil Remains of the Dédupur Collection. 665

and more tapering than the one in fig. 6. Between this the initial

step in the dentition, and that in which the 6th molar is making its

appearance, we have none of the intervening stages. <A cranium

which has not been drawn in consequence of the mutilation of all the

molars except the 5th, shows the 6th tooth in the act of cutting the

jaw: the anterior extremity of the intermaxillary being broken off,

the incisor teeth are not perfect, but by the fracture the permanent

incisors are in part laid open, so that the milk ones must either have

already fallen or have been on the point of so doing: the latter is

the most probable, as the lower jaw of this cranium, of which fig. 2,

Plate C, is a representation, has the first set of incisors still in the

jaw, though much worn; of course the state of detrition of the molars

of the upper corresponds with that of the teeth of the lower jaw; the

4th molars are very much worn, the 5th has commenced to be in use,

and the 6th is showing the summits of its collines ; it appears to be

during the progressive wear of the 5th and the descent of the 6th

molar that the milk teeth are shed and replaced by the permanent

ones ; for fig. 1, Plate B, which represents the right half of a speci-

men, has no vestige of the milk teeth, but shows the permanent mo-

lars Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 unworn.

As the animal increased in age and the 7th molar gradually de-

scended, the teeth already in use assumed the appearance exhibited

by fig. 2, Plate B, which represents the left half of a fossil upper

jaw; this and the foregoing specimen, fig. 1, show that the Ist, 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th molars, excepting in size, correspond with those

of the existing species, each tooth being compounded of the same parts,

even to the small external interstitial pillars of the 5th and 6th. The

7th is in fig. 2 quite untouched, only the anterior portion of the

tooth having, in fact, been exposed ; although in consequence of the

breaking away of the posterior part of the specimen the whole of the

molar is now exposed. Compared with a germ of the existing species,

it is found to be composed of analogous parts, the general shape of

the fossil tooth being at the same time modified in consequence of

the greater size to which the posterior collines or mamille attain ;

hence the tooth is comparatively longer and less tapering.

Fig. 5, which represents the left half of a fossil cranium, shows the

7th molar in great part brought into use, and the corresponding pro-

gress in the detrition of the other teeth. In fig. 3, Plate B, which

is a view of the left half of the palate of the cranium fig. |, Plate

XXXIV., the whole of the last molar has been brought into use. The

Ist molars are in this specimen mutilated, the others evince the wear

4 Rk

666 Fossil Remains of the Ddduptr Collection. (Ocr.

due toa more advanced age than that to which the fossil fig. 5 had

arrived.

Fig. 4 is the left half of a fossil cranium, in which the two rows of

teeth have accidentally worn irregularly ; the left side is given, being

the one in which the enamel curves of the last molar have assumed

forms which, on comparison with the foregoing specimens, will be

found slightly to differ. The corresponding tooth in the right maxillary

is both considerably longer than its fellow, and bears a greater simi-

larity to those of the other skulls. The canines of the male were

large and ribbed on the upper surface, but the fossil upper jaws pre-

senting none perfect, their shape and direction are not ascertainable:

a detached fragment indicates a wear similar to that which occurs in

the tusk of the wild hog: from the lower jaws little can be deduced,

fig. 3, Plate XXXIV., being the only adult one which possesses the

canines perfect. This specimen would have accurately indicated the

wear had it been possible to clear the canine of a thin hard coating of

the matrix, which, though not sufficiently thick to affect the general

shape of the tusk, conceals the worn, and does not allow it to be distin-

guished from the unworn, surface.

The canines of the female were small, as may be seen by the alveoli

of fig. 3, Plate B.

The incisors in fig. 3, Plate B, are much used: only four are

visible ; the matrix, which cannot be altogether cleared from the ante-

rior of the palate, probably conceals the alveoli of the posterior incisors.

Lower jaws. The early state of the milk teeth when the 4th or tri-

partitioned molars is commencing to be used, is exhibited in the frag-

ment of which fig. 1, Plate C, is a representation ; the 5th molar is

also here seen prior to undergoing detrition.

The next stage exemplified by a specimen, is that in which the 5th

is a little worn ; the 3rd and 4th are a good deal so, and the 6th is just

showing the tops of its collines; the central early incisors are much

used, but not yet shed; the posterior ones are already replaced by

their permanent successors, and the canine is showing its point : this

jaw, as before remarked, was found together with its cranium.

By the time that the 5th molar is much used, and the 6th a little

so, the milk teeth are all cast, and the permanent ones in use. Fig. 3,

Plate C, exemplifies this step; here the 7th molar is half developed,

the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th are slightly abraded ; the canine, which is broken

at the point, rises with a gentle divergence, and instead of the trian-

gular section observable in the tusk of the existing species, has one

nearly elliptical, being only somewhat flattened at its posterior edge.

1836.]. Fossil Remains of the Ddadupir Collection. 667

The specimen, not coming from an adult animal, affords no trace of

any friction having commenced to take place between the upper and

lower canines, the latter being intact: inthis respect the fossil corre-

sponds with the existing species, in which, to judge from a skullin our

possession, the canines do not meet until the development of the 7th

molar. The posterior incisor is present in neither half of the jaw,—a

circumstance which fig. 4 proves to be accidental, and that the shape

of this incisor is peculiar and distinctive. The central incisors are

large, and protrude more horizontally than in the existing species. The

right side has been crushed towards the left side of the jaw, so that

the angle formed by the two halves at their symphyses cannot, from

this specimen, be ascertained.

Fig. 5 is a fragment in which the 7th molar is nearly clear of the

jaw, and has its anterior portion a little worn, but the central and pos-

terior parts untouched. Nos. 3, 4,5, and 6 are of course in amore

advanced state of detrition than is the case with those of fig. 3.

The next condition illustrated is that in which the 7th molar is

completely developed from the maxillary and-in use; No. 6 is much

worn, No. 5 nearly obliterated, and Nos. 2, 3, 4, and even No, |, are

in progressive wear. Fig. 4, which illustrates this state of the teeth, is

from a nearly perfect fossil jaw ; the specimen has lost the left condyle,

and has the parts adjacent to the right one broken off, as shown in

the profile view fig. 6; the left canine is snapped off close by the

bone, and thus presents a sectional view: the left hind incisor, though

not actually affixed to the specimen, was found in the same block,—a

fact which in connection with’ the general state of the specimens

argues quiet deposition.

The molars of the lower jaw, like those of the upper, bear a close re-

semblance to those of the existing species ; the incisors and the canines

are, as above noticed, distinctive ; and by reference to the table of di-

mensions it will be seen that the symphysis is in the fossil shorter in

comparison to the length of the jaw, and the angle formed by the two

sides is also less acute than in the common wild hog.

From the form of the cranium, the shape of the canines and incisors,

and the other points in which the fossil differs from the existing

species of the country, a specific difference may be inferred; for the

dissimilarity, although less than that which occurs between the Baby-

russa, the Larvatus and the Sus scrofa or common hog, is too re-

markable, particularly in the shape of the canines of the lower jaw,

to admit of the fossil being considered as a mere variety of the Sus

scrofa,

4R2

668 Fossil Remains of the Dddupir Collection. [Ocr.

Besides the foregoing fossil species, the existence of another is in-

dicated by a cranium, of which fig. 6, Plate B, represents the left half

of the palate: the fossil is unfortunately imperfect; the molars of the

right maxillary are all broken, and of those on the left side the 6th

and 7th are alone perfect. These are smaller than the analogous

molars of the former,—smaller even than those of the existing species,

and also present other differences besides those of length and breadth :

their detrition does not take place in the same manner; for the 8th

molar is but little worn, notwithstanding that the 7th is fully deve-

loped; in the larger fossil species the 6th would have been muck

worn down. The 9th molar resembles in its tapering form that of the

common hog, but is posteriorly much less complicated, fewer tuber-

cles entering into its body; it is not in the fossil quite perfect, one of

the anterior collines being broken off : there is, however, sufficient of

the tooth to warrant these remarks. The 6th molar is composed of the

same number of collines as that of the common hog, but these, as

also the inner side of the tooth, generally are less channelled. The

head appears to have been short, for the nasals gain breadth more

rapidly as they ascend, and the anterior extremities of the channels

from the foramina on the frontals are perpendicularly over the 3rd,

instead of being over the anterior of the 6th molar, as in the Sus

scrofa. The occiput being broken off, the length of the head can

only be guessed by paying attention to these minor considerations.

The above specimen is the only one in our collection of this variety ;

we shall therefore content ourselves with noting its existence amongst

the fossil species ; and in the event of further discoveries adding to its

exemplars, we shall recur to the subject.

Measurements of Lower Jaws. Existing Fossil, Fossil,

species. Fig. 4, Pl. C.|Fig. 3, Pl. C.

——

Length from post. of ramus to anterior

extremity of symphysis,............ 10,62 11,65 ae

Ditto of symphysis on mesial line, .... 3,25 3-7! 3,00

Space occupied by seven molars,...... 5,40 6,15

Molars measured along ihe el Ist. 0,30 0,35 0,35

CONELES,. ce eeere evceeees 2nd, 0,41 0,52 0,50

3rd. 0,48 0,57 0,62

Ath. 0,52 0,60 0,70

5th. 0,51 0.50 0,71

6th. 0,76 1,05 1,23

7th. 1,53 1,94 é

Greatest breadth, Ist. 0,13 0,21 0,20

2nd. 0,18 0,27 0,27

3rd. 0,27 0,33 0,36

4th. 0,36 0,45 0,51

5th 0,47 0,57 0,54

6th 0,60 0,69 0,72

7th. 0,66 0,76 56

1836.] Fossil Remains of the Dddupir Collection. 669

Table of Dimensions.

aS 6 re Fe

wil@.(22| £&. (2.2. (2

3 oa Fl . es ite ies te °

Measurements of the Cranium. é 2 ane a z an 2" a7 8

oe lah |2c| 2h [ah lon lon

a |e |c & ce |e |e

In. { In. | In In. In. | In. | In.

Space occupied by the 7 molars, taken

Onumesial’ line,.). sj... <1 SAGAS IET 4,52) 5,17) «+ 5,17 <5

From lower edge of foramen magnum

to anterior extremity of intermaxil-

LP ink Gee MOG Bobi 0 BHB.06 12,08/13,37| -- “ . Se St

Space between 7th molars at their

anterior, ... euvescee-eee oe} 0,95] 1,00] 1,06} 1,33 :

Ditto ditto, Ist ditto,. Riataeteiteretele sreterc 5's 1,48} 1,84] -- 2,16 5 oe

Distance from Ist molars to anterior

extremity of intermaxillary, taken on

THE STAM IMG. “2s. lie werctetes eels cet sree 3,88] 3,52) -- c Ld

Ditto from lower edge of occipital for-

amen to posterior edge of 7th molars

GIZIGH Ope DCSE Dato GEDO Rootes 3,73| 4,77; 4,60) . > on oe

Ditto from summit of occiput to ex-

tremity of intermaxillary,.......... 14,77|15,20| - : oe nae ste

Breadth of frontal plane at post orbi-

PALME APOPHMYSIS, olc\<s cites le elev le aes « 3,96] 4,30] 4,80} 4,80 ae 5c: we

Ditto of parietal upper plane at nar-

MOWESG PALU, ic cilss, ccieisc ce sc wie ae 21 y62} 1,25) 2,00) 1,55 ek

Greatest breadth at zygomatic oneness; 5,98] 6,62) -. te wv

From anterior of orbit to extremity of

MGCL MAXIM ALY Sais pclere ces wm ein wie ore 9,40)10,00) -- : 4

From anterior of orbit to point of post.

orbitary apophysis,........-.....6- 1,64] 1,64] 1,78 56 Go do

Diameter of orbit perpendicularly to

MHbatAlNPIANG,” 2a. %:8/clae vis divs oie. sie 3.0 1,65} 1,45] 1,40} 1,50 ate = 4%

From point of post. orbitary apophysis

to lower edge of jugal, ...... ceeeee| 2,54] 2,86] 2,94) . is oie 56

Height of occiput from lower edge of

occipital foramen to summit, ...... 4,85) 4,62) 5,54 6 Ax ae ae

Breadth across occipital condyles, .. 2,20| 2,32} 2,24; .. as Ay ski

Length of molars eee ist. 0,34] 0,30] . 0,36 0,40) .. ae

along their centres, .. 2nd.| 0,43) 0,47) . 0,43 0,49] 0,52) ..

3rd.| 0,44] 0,47] . 0,45 0,54| 0,52| 0,41

4th.| 0,38] 0,45] . 0,56 0,54] 0,49] 0,41

5th.| 0,61) 0,52) . } 1.35 0,80] 0,74) 0,51

6th.| 0,77) 0,87) .. Z 1,24] 1,29] 0,74

7th.| 1,45) 1,97| 2,03] 2,04 .. {| 2,03] 1,02

Breadth of molars measured Ist.| 0,21] 0,271 .. JS 20 0,18) /.. oc

across anterior at base, oo 2nd.| 0,26) 0,31) .. | 2 a 0,34] 0,31] ..

broadest parts,......+... 3rd.| 9,33) 0,33] .. |8 5 a2 | 0,44) 0,43) 0,31

4th.| 0,54| 0,55] . 428 ¢°2 | 0,54) 0,60) 0,48

5th.| 0,62) 0,68] .. ja © 2+ | 0,70) 0,66] ..

6th.| 0,76] 0,85] .. |3.3'8.% | 0.80] 0,84! 0,61

7th.| 0,34] 1,00 a . | 0,97] 0,70

Reference to Plates.

Plate XXXIV.—Plan and profile views of fossil cranium, and plan view of a

lower jaw.

B.—Series of half palates to illustrate dentition of u

PL pper jaws.

LALAV. te —Series of half and entire lower jaws.

670 Note on Volcanic Scoria in the S. Peninsula. [Ocr.

VII.— Note on the occurrence of Volcanic Scoria in the Southern Penin-

sula. By Lieut. Newson, A. D. C.

I have the honor to present to the notice of the Society, specimens

of a calcareous and siliceous scoria forming the substance of a small

hill at Budigunta, near Courtney, about 11 miles west of Bellary.

This hill is situated close to the road, at the summit of a small pass

over a range of hills running 8.E. by which it is embosomed. Its

apparent height is about 40 feet—circumference, 420 feet.

The summit is rounded, and surface partially covered with long

dry grass; amid which project in every direction masses of scoria,

passing round the hill in almost regular succession like steps. Towards

the top the scorie appear to be more friable—the base is cavernous,

and the masses more vitreous on their surface, and stalactitic in shape.

The hill when struck by a heavy stone or the heel of a booted foot

emitted a sound as if hollow. Similar sounds were produced in

riding a horse over the base. I found two pieces of the scaria several

hundred yards from the spot: it is, however, probable that these

may have been conveyed thence by the traveller. On the summit I

picked up a piece of clink-stone and one of hornblende rock: the

latter appeared to have been excavated by art. Around the base

masses of scoria intermixed with the schistose sandstone, greenstone,

and quartz of the surrounding formation were strewn together, with

fragments of trap and iron ore.

The bed of the rivulet that washes the foot of the pass I found to

be composed of greenstone. A partial stratum of kankar is here met

with, covered with alluvial soil.

The surrounding hills are greenstone slate, in which minute scales

of mica are found disseminated, capped by a schistose sandstone.

The mound of scoria has from a distance a singular cineritious

appearance, strongly contrasted with the ferruginous tint of the

surrounding hills. By many it has been thought of volcanic origin,

but I could discover nothing like a crater; nor any traces of lava,

obsidian, augite, olivine or other volcanic matter.

The oldest natives can give no account how these scorie were

accumulated, beyond the vague tradition founded on an episode in the

Mahabharat, of their being the burnt bones of a Racsdsa of a former

age (Dwdpar Yug); nor am I aware that such scorie are produced

by any furnace used in the country in present times.

Bucuanan, in his geological account of the range of hills from

Rajmahal to Burdwan, describes a calcareous matter, in mass, called

Asurhar, or giant’s bones.

1836.] Postscript to the account of Ursitaxus. 671

The similarity in the names given by the natives to these two

substances (Racsdsa also signifying a giant) has struck me; although

Bucuanan describes the Rajmahal formation as deposited from

water ; whereas the specimens now sent appear to have undergone

the action of fire.

P.S. Since writing the above 1 have received a letter from the

President of the Madras Hindu Literary Society, Cavetty Venkata

Lacumi’aA, who informs me that there are mounds of scorie of a

similar description at Biédibetta near Chittledriig, at Biédihal, in the

Mysore country, and at Biditippa in Stindah, near the Nugger frontier.

Regarding the origin of these ashes he gave no further account save

the local traditions ; viz. that some were the ashes of religious sacri-

fices performed by the holy Rishis in their hermitages, and some the

funeral piles of remarkable heroes and other noted persons.

Budigunta, the name of the place whence the specimens sent you

were procured, signifies in the Canarese language the “ hill of ashes.”

VIII.—Postscript to the account of Ursitaxus printed in the 19th

Vol. of Researches As. Soc. By B. H. Honeson, Esq.

I have just procured another very perfect skull of the Ursitax,

which exhibits the same formula of molar dentition as that described

in my paper or —-

It is the cranium of a mature subject, but less old than the preced-

ing, and I am thus enabled to correct that portion of the generic

character which ascribes an almost ursine flatness to the crowns of

the molar teeth.

In the present subject the coronal processes of those teeth are

distinctly salient, with an obtusely conical form. A similar process

rises from the inner heel of the great carnivorous tooth, above; nor

is the transverse tubercular, next to it, wholly without symptoms of

such a process.

The, generic character should be corrected as follows :

* Cheek teeth a strong, broad, low, and furnished on the crowns

with obtusely-conical processes: the tubercular of the upper jaw,

transverse, narrow, sub-parallelogramic, smaller than the carnivorous

tooth, and essentially a grinder: no tubercular in the lower jaw,’ et

cet. sicut prius scripta.

It has been suggested to me that our animal is a Glutton or a Ratel.

But the dentition of the former, according to the Regne animal, is

5.5

ée-> of the latter is + ; and I possess several species of both con-

672 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. {Ocr.

forming to those formule. The peculiar dental system of Ursitaxus

is in harmony with other material peculiarities of structure; and the

animal therefore seems abundantly entitled to generic distinctness.

As to the species, that is probably identical with the Ursus Indicus

of Suaw, the Indian Badger of Pennant, and the Biju of Hindusthan,

but which still wants (I believe) a scientific name. I suppose, there-

fore, mine of Inauritus will be recognised, unless we are to persist in

incumbering the science with the vague names and descriptions of a

half informed age.

IX.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 2nd November, 1836.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Mr. G. F. McCurntocu, proposed at the last Meeting, was balloted for,

and duly elected a Member.

H. Watters, Esq. C. §., Dr. J. M. Bramiry, Dr. Drummonp, Newab

Tauawur June Behadir, and Shah Qazsir v’pI’N were proposed by

Mr. Jamus Prinsep, seconded by Sir Epwarp Ryan.

Dr. Jackson was proposed by Dr. Pearson, seconded by Sir Epwarp

Ryan.

Read a letter from Mr. Vincent Treexar, acknowledging his elec-

tion as an associate member.

Read a letter from Mr. C. Browntow, returning thanks for the So.

ciety’s patronage of the Alif Leila, and agreeing to the stipulation for

the deposit of a file of the sheets, as printed, with the Secretary.

Read a letter from J. C. C. SurHeruanp, Esq., Secretary to the Ge-

neral Committee of Public Instruction, requesting to know at what

price the Society would supply twenty-eight copies of the Naishadha

and of the Raja Tarangin', required for the use of the Government San-

scrit College.

Mr. W. H. MacnaGuTen moved that the books should be given gratis if in-

tended for deposit in libraries, as the encouragement thus given to the study

of these works would promote the sole object the Society had in view in com-

pleting their publication. The Secretary explained thatthey were required as class

books; that the present application would doubtless be followed up by a con-

stant periodical demand for this and other works; that when he guaranteed

the Society against any risk in undertaking to finish the suspended volumes,

he calculated on the necessary school demand for many of them as one of the

means of repayment; and the prices fixed were calculated only to cover the

gross amount expended in their completion: he proposed furnishing them at a

reduced price. Sir Bens. MaLkin and other Members objected to a reduc-

tion of price, and it was resolved by a large majority that the ordinary selling

price should be charged.

The Secretary submitted correspondence with the Secretary to the Com-

mittee of Public Instruction, relative to the Oriental works deposited for

sale at the London Booksellers, which the Society’s English Agent

from a misconception had authorized to be transferred to the Society’s

account, and to be sold at reduced prices.

The transfer had been countermanded as soon as known; but the Committee

refused to sanction any sales that might mean time haye been made at the re-

duced prices, awaiting the report of the circumstances from their bookseller.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asialie Society. 673

Read a letter from the Secretary of the Royal Academy of Marseilles,

acknowledging receipt of the Researches and Journals presented last

ear.

: Shah Qazir v’pi’N applied to the Society to be allowed the loan, forthe

purpose of taking a cepy, of avery valuable manscript of the Koran in

the Library, depositing 250 rupees, the price at which it had beeu pur-

chased by the Society.

Resolved, that he should be permitted to employ /dtibs in the apart-

ment to take the copy, but thatthe volume could not be lent out for such

a purpose.

He also requested two copies of the last three volumes of the Alemgéri,

of which the three first volumes had been supplied gratis to the Susseram

Madrassa by the Education Committee.

Resolved, that this request be complied with.

Library.

A letter was read from the Secretary to Government, General Depart.

ment, forwarding for deposit in the Library of the Asiatic Society the un-

dermentioned 95 volumes, being a set of the Reports and Publications of

the Commissioners of Records, of which three copies had been recently

sent out (as printed on the reverse of the title page) “for perpetual

preservation in some public library of the Bengal Presidency.”

Report from Commissioners on Public Records, 1 vol.

Recerd Commission, Scotland ; Correspondence of U. P. Cooprr, Esq. Se-

eretary to the Board, with Taomas Tuomson, Esq. Deputy Clerk Regulation,

1 vol.

Reports from the Commissioners on the Public Records of Ireland, 3 vols.

La Commission Des Archives d’Angleterre, 1 pamphlet.

Public Records, the public advantages of entrusting the Records of the Ex-

ehequer, &c. 1 pamphlet.

Nenarum Jngquisitioues in Curea Scacearii, 1 vol.

Reotuli Hundredorum, 2 vols.

Valor Ecclesiasticus, 6 vols.

Inquisitionum Post Mortem Calendarium, 4 vols.

Manuscripts in the Harleian Collection, 4 vols.

Placita de quo Warranto, 1 vol.

Domesday Book, 2 vols.

Domesday Index, 1 vol.

Domesday Supplement, 1 vol.

Sir H. Exxis’s Introduction and Index to Domesday, 2 vols.

Placitorum Abbreviatio, 1 vol.

Ducatus Lancastrie#, 2 vols. Pars prima and secunda, and Pars quarta.

Rotuli Scotiz, 2 vols.

Rotuli Litterarum Clausarum, | vol.

Rotuli Litterarum Patentium, 1 vol.

Rotulorum Originalium, 2 vols.

Manuscripts in the Lansdown Collection, | vol.

Inquisitionum in Officio in Hibernia, 2 vols.

Rotulorum Patentium et Clausorum, 1 vol.

The Acts of the Parliaments of Scotland, 10 vols. (first volume wanting.)

Registrum Magni Sigilli, 1 vol.

Proceedings in Chancery, 3 vols.

Calendar to Pleadings, &e. 1 vol. marked Vol. II.

Federa, 6 vols.

Parliamentary Writs, 4 vols.

Letters sur la Cour de la Chancellerie d’ Angleterre, 1 vol.

Letters to Cuarutes Purton Cooper, Esq. of Lincoln’s Inn, Barrister at

Law, on the appointment of a Permanent Judge in the Court of Chancery in

‘the place of the Lord Chancellor ; 2 pamphlets.

674 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr.

Substance of the Speech of Cuartes Purron Cooper, Esq. as Counsel for

the Rev, CHARLES WELLBELOVED, in the suit of the Attorney-General versus

Suore, instituted in the High Court of Chancery, respecting ‘Lady HEWLEY’s

Foundations ; 1 pamphlet.

Memoria du Commissa6 dos Arquivos du Gran Bretanha dirigida aos Car-

torarios Bibliothecarios e Antiquarios de Portugal, pello que resputa aos traba-

thos e Exames da mesma Commissao ; 1 pamphlet.

Proceedings and Ordinances of the Privy Council of England, 5 vols.

Rotuli Curie Regis, 2 vols.

Rotuli de Oblatis et Finibus in Turri Londinensi, 1 vol.

Rotuli Selecti Ex Archivis in Dom. Cap. Westm. 1 vol.

Excerptaé Rotulis Finium in Turri Londinensi asservatis Henrico Tertio, 1 vol.

Fines 7, Ric I. 16 Johan, | vol.

Rotuli Normanniz in Turri Londinensi, | vol.

Statutes of the Realm, 12 vols. including 2 vols. of Index.

Manuscripts in the Cottonian Library, 1 vol.

Calendarium Rotulorum Patentium in Turri Londinensi, | vol.

Calendarium Rotulorum Chartarum et Inquisitionum ad quod damnum, 1 vol.

Taxatio Ecclesiastica Angliz et Walliz, 1 vol.

Read a letter from Mr. H. A. Horneman, forwarding for presentation

a copy of the first number of the Numismatic Journal, on behalf of Mr.

Joun Yonce AxerRmAN, F. S. A. the Editor.

Meteorological Register for September, 1836, was presented by the

Surveyor General.

Second Annual Report of the Statistical Society of London, presented

by Dr. D. Stewart.

Literary and Antiquities.

Read a letter from H. T. Prinsep, Esq. Secretary to the Government

of India, General Department, forwarding copy of a report furnished to

the Government of Bombay from Colonel Cuesney, of the proceedings

of the Euphrates expedition, in its various departments.

[The substance of this report is published below. ]

A memoir on the Antiquities of Bamian was submitted by Mr. Tre.

VELYAN, on the part of Mr. C. Masson.

The same member presented also a notice by Munsut’ Monan La't,

of Uch Sherif, a town near the junction of the five streams in the Panjab,

celebrated as the place of sepulture of many Mahommedan saints.

Mr. 8S. G. Heattry presented through Dr. Corsyn, the first of a series

of mathematical essays on the use of functions in geometrical analysis.

Physical.

A large fossil fragment of the acetabulum of an elephant was presented

by Dr. Spmssury, found by him at Szgouni, the place where Captain

SLEEMAN discovered the first indications of the Nerbudda fossils.

Brigadier AnuuREy, Engineers, presented on the part of Mr. Sweren-

HAM, Séme incrusted petrifactions of leaves from the calcareous springs

in the Dehra Dun.

A specimen of the red-billed parrot ( Psittacus Sinensis) was presented

by Dr. Burtt, and a woodpecker by the curator, both mounted in the

museum.

The Secretary read the following extract of a private letter from Dr.

W. Grirrirn, dated Sadiya, Assam, 12th Oct.

‘J have much pleasure in informing you that I have lately completed the

arrangement of the collections of the Musci and Hepatice made during our late

deputation into Assam. The collection of the former amounts to 154 species,

or to about an eighth of the whole known number. It includes twenty-seven

genera, of which I have ventured to characterise two as new. That of Hepaticze

includes forty-eight species, of which thirty-one belong to Jungermannia

alone, and ten genera, of which five appear to be new. Almost the whole of

both these collections were made by myself on the Khasiya Hills between Chur

1836.) Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 675

ra Punji and Nunklow, and within a period of seven weeks. Both these orders

have hitherto been almost totally neglected by Indian Botanists ; and the

greater part of the few that have been described seem to have been sent from

Nipdl by the Honorable Mr. GarpineR. Hence, owing to the impossibility of

obtaining advice, and as my situation obviously precludes me at present from

consulting the requisite authorities, I have determined on sending the MSS. and

drawings to England, accompanied with a complete series of both collections.

By the adoption of this plan the stability of my very numerous new species will

easily be determined*.”’

X.—A General Statement of the labors and proceedings of the Expedition to the

Euphrates, under the command of Colonel Cutisney, Royal Artillery, F. R. 8.

The object of the present communication is not to anticipate the interest

which must be felt, and especially by the members of the Geographical Society,

as well as other public bodies, not only in the progress of the Expedition to

the Euphrates, but also in the results obtained to science and general know-

ledge ; for, to render these of any real value, they must be accompanied by the

details of the means by which they were acquired. It is rather, therefore, with

a view to the exhibition of how those means haye been hitherto applied, and

how the capabilities of the Expedition have been directed, that the present

statement is made; not, however, omitting those details which a brief notice of

this kind will admit, when touching upon the labour, the progress, and the pre-

sent condition of the enterprize itself.

The voyage to Malta from Liverpool occupied a period of twenty-nine days, a

great part of which time was taken up in working out the details, and consolidating

the original plans of our commander. Among the scientific labours, indepen-

dently of questions of general navigation and drilling the men, were the rating

of the chronometers, observations in meteorology, the temperature of the sea,

and researches in natural history.

At Malta, some time was devoted to the determination of the intensity of

magnetic forces, and the amount of the dip of the needle. ‘The cylinders

used for the former experiments consisted of two pair that had been tried by

Captain Sapine in Limerick, and another obtained through the kindness of

Professor Lioyp, T. C. D. and tried at Duélin previous to departure. The

whole set being subsequently experimented upon in London by Lieut. Murpay,

R. E. and also at Liverpool.

An exploratory tour was also made in the interior of the islands, Malta and

Gaza, with the view of recognizing in a general way their geological structure

and natural productions. Some fossil shells of interest were obtained, also the

plants of the season (March), and some species belonging to the classes Tunicata,

Acaleppa, Malacoderme and Polypi.

During the stay at Malta, Colonel CuEsNrey was much occupied with the

general objects of the Expedition, more particularly about the construction

of flat boats. The George Canning had been separated from the Aldan Steamer

her consort, by rude weather, off Cork, and it was found impossible to remedy

this loss at the Mediterranean station ; but the Admiral, Sir Jostas Row ey,

allowed the Columbine sloop to accompany the Expedition to the mouth of the

Orontes ; and there was certainly every reason to rejoice in this arrangement ; for

not only was the George Cunning taken in tow by the brig at all times when

the weather permitted, but Commander HeNpDERSon and his officers secured

the gratitude of every member of the Expedition, by the most efficient and

zealous services in landing the stores.

The difficulties and opposition to the landing of the stores are already known

from the various reports that have reached England. Success was only obtained

here in the first instance by the bold step of an immediate landing without a

reference to the authorities of the country, and by exposing and remonstrating

* We hope soon to receive from the Tea Committee some account of Dr.

GRIFFITH’S previous labors. We hear that the several reports of Dr. WaLLicuH,

Dr. GriFFITH, and Dr, McCLeELLAND have been some time sent in.—ED.

4s 2

676 Procecdings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocz.

in the second, against the system of subterfuge carried oa by the Syrian Govern-

ment towards the expedition; and its commander visited Iprani®s PACHA at

Tripoli, in the hope of persuading him to give, at least for a time, that assistanee

which had been promised unreservedly by the Viceroy himself.

The connexion hetween the George Canning and the shore having been

established by means of an hawser extending from the ship across the bar of

the Orontes, a distance of 1200 yards, parties were sent on shore from the

Columbine and George Canning with tents for their accommodation, and the

disembarkation was carried on with such spirit and activity, that the site

designated as ‘‘ Amelia DepOt’’ soon became a little camp with a very mixed

aspect, replete with bustle and useful occupation. The bar at the mouth of the

river was at times dangerous, and on one oceasion Commander HENDERSON with

his boat’s crew narrowly escaped a watery grave.

The observatory being now fixed, Lieutenant Murpuy applied himself to as-

tronomical observations, more especially with the fine transit instrament that had

come out with the Expedition. The survey was soon afterwards began under

Lieutenant Murpuy, Mr. THomson, and Mr. Srenuowusn, (who was sent by

the Admiral) at Lattaquia (Laodicea), but was limited to a determination of the

outline of the coast with its soundings, and an examination of the coast itself.

_My. Ainsworte also accompanied the party for parposes of natural history.

The sitesof Heraclewm and Possidizim were recognized. On their return an

excursion was made to the summit of Puiny’s wonder, Afount Cassius or Gebel.

The succession of the various forms of vegetation was noted. The party bivouack-

ed near the summit, on which, April 28th, there still remained some patches of

snow. The results given by the Barometer, which was observed at various

heights, compared with a register kept at the same time by Mr. Epern in

the Depdt, coincided closely with those obtained trigonometrically by Mr.

Munrpuy, and which gave for the elevation above the sea 5318 feet. But

this mountain, notwithstanding its great height, is entirely composed of supra-

eretaccous limestones, characterized by cones and cerithii. At its north-eastern

foot is an extensive deposit of highly crystalline gypsum, and to the south-

east diallage rocks and serpentines break through the same formations,

accompanied by lacustrine martes and siliceous limestones.

On the 29th of April, a party consisting of Lieutenant Munpny, Mr. Ains-

WORTH, and Mr. Tuomson, left the Orontes in a country boat to commence the

survey of the Gulph of Seanderoon and its neighbouring shores. The first points

visited were Arsons and Rhosas, Av ascent was then made to Gebel Kaiseria,

on which they bivouacked, Nextcame Seandernoon, and in its neighbourhood

Jacob’s Well, the site of Myriandros ; to the south, the pass of Bylan, gates of

Syria (Protemy), Amanian Gaies (SrRawBo), a defile in the mountains separating

the Amanus from the Rhesas, and leading from Myriandros into the plan of

Antioch or Umk.

To the north the remains of a marble gate-way, commonly called Jonas’

Pillars, (Cilicia Gates of Protemy, Q. Curtrus and ARRrIAN:) this was

the midnight halt of ALEXanprER. The description of ZuNoPHON refers to a

narrow place contiguous to the sea; that of ARR1AN to the ascent of the hills

that shut up the same plain contiguous to the sea. The latter applies itself

distinctly to these ruins. Half a mile north of the Cilician Gates, is the river

Markotsaye (Kersus), and beyond a wall terminating in the sea with a tower.

Atthe foot of the mountains, the HKersus passes between two walls near the

village of Merkets. This is the wall and gates of ZsNoruyon. They are built

of stone. Farther north is Dyas (Baias Anton. Itiner. Aiyrcandros of W1LL1aMs’

Geography of ancient Asia) and there are several populous villages between Byas

and the Issus (Pinarus). Ata subsequent period, in company with Colonel

Cursney, this river was examined in detail, as also the ruins of a considerable

town near some hills which enclosed the Issic plain to the north-west—the

Giaour Dagh, or Amanus, being the east pass of Darius, Armenian Gates of AR-

RIAN; the whole corresponding closely with the last mentioned author’s de-

scription. Where the gulph runs to the west, there are ruins of forts, castles and

gateways. From thence proceeding north-west by Kurd Kulac (Wolf's ears)

(Jordequiea of D’ANViLLE and RENNELL) to Missis (Mesis) at a pass through

1836. ] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 677

low hills of sandstone, are the remains of a road and archway constructed in

part of sandstone, but chiefly of polygonal masses of basalt and laval, which no

doubt have given rise to its name, Demir Kapon, Iron Gate, and Kara Kapon,

Black Gate,—the Armenian Gates of Proremy; Amanicae Pyle of Colonel

Leaxe; Upper Armenian Gates, RENNELL ; Timour Kapon, or the Gate of Ta-

merlane, (Mecca itinerary by Geographical Society of Paris.) From hence the

party visited Ayas (4ge@) the mouths of the Jihoun (Pyramus), where an interesting

examination took place of the progress of alluvial deposits. The most westerly

point reached was Karadash, the site of Mallus and Megarsus. The whole of

the party being sick, the pass of Bylan was the only position examined on the

return to Antioch.

In the neighbourhood of Amelia Depét, the points of most interest were the

course of the Oruntes, examined by Lieutenant CLfaveLANnp, Messrs. Eprn,

CHARLEWOOD, and FirzJAmMeEs; and the ruins of Selucia Pieria also made the

object of interesting researches. About the same time, various other under-

takings were in progress. The gentlemen already named, in conjunction with

Messrs. Hector and Bett, were in turns employed on different points, repair-

ing and widening the road from the mouth of the Orontes to Antioch ; a work of

considerable labour, especially in making the fords over the rivers practicable

for waggons. Captain Estcourr and Dr. Staunton had gone on a journey

of rewonstrance to the Civil Governor of Syria at Damascus,—visiting as they

returned Buailliec andthe cedars of Lebanon. Lieutenant Lyncu was employed

in improving the line of route from Antioch by Djezer haded to Bir ; and, lastly,

Lieutenant CockpurN was employed (after Captain Esrcourt’s visit to

Rescuip Pacua at Diarbek) in throwing up some slight field works, and con-

structing slips at a spot selected for this purpose, 13 miles below Bir on the

right bank, and now called Port William.

To avoid the mischievous effects of idleness, as well as to carry the heavy

weichts to Antioch by water (when denied all other local means by Govern-

ment), the Ziyris was put together on the Orontes during the month of May

as a working shell, in which state she was steaming experimentally, when the

Pacua withdrew his outward opposition on the 3d of June. Towards the mid-

dle of that month commenced the dispatch of the light stores on camels and

mules, and towards its close some trains of waggons* passed through Antioch

carrying heavy weights, but this being found a dilatory operation, the water

communication was looked to once more, along a new line which promised many

advantages. The Orontes, the Lake of Antioch, and the Kara-son, were, there-

fore, examined ; and upon the reports and maps thus obtained, the Commander

ordered a Depdt (the 2d) to be formed at Goozel Burge, ‘‘ pretty tower,” a

village on the Orontes 3 miles above Antioch, when the infinite variety of ma-

teriel, including the more ponderous objects, such as boilers, the eight sections

(into which the Tigris had been divided,) diving bells, &c. were to be put on

rafts, flat boats, and pontoons, in order to be transported by the Orontes into

Kara-soo, (black water,) and along this navigable stream into the Lake Owja

Dengis (white sea,) keeping along its western side on account of the deeper

water, and ultimately ascending the Ultra Kara-soo to a spot called Moorad

Pacha, near the Village of Gule Bachee, ‘‘ head of the waters,” a little beyond

the junction of the Aswad and Yagra rivers, the whole distance being fourteen

hours from Goozel Burge. ‘he abundant spring called Gule Paehee issues out of

a pseudo-volcanic mound rising out of the plain. The Bridge of Moorad Pa-

cha is chiefly a causeway resting on the soil, but in parts supported by arches,

and crossing that part of the plain of Umk which is most liable to be inundated,

for a distance of about three miles. This plain is inhabited by pastoral and No-

made Turcomans living in tents, who are a quiet people. The ancients appear to

have known in this tract the rivers Oinaparas, Arcenthus, Labotas, Ufrenus,

and the ditch of Meleagrus. The actual fluents of the Lake are the Aswad,

or Asond, the Yagra (uniting to form the Kara-soo) the Aphreen traversing

the Cyrrhesteca, the rivulet of Hareem and the Orontes, but the first mentioned

have various tributaries to the north, with different appellations. On the road

* Twenty-seven vehicles of different kinds were constructed at Amelia Depdt,

and there were thirty-three, including the artillery waggons, from England,

678 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr.

to the valley of the Aphreen are some Thermal springs, El Hammam, “ the

Baths,” issuing at the point of junction of plutonic rocks with tertiary dolo-

mites. The waters of these springs are said to have originated with different

earthquakes, and present corresponding differences of temperature.

It is a distance of about 111 miles across the so called ‘‘ Syrian Desert”? from

Moorad Pacha to Port William. The first part of it is hilly but not infertile,

between El] Hammam and Azass, or Arsace Menniza of Ant. Itinerary (MSS,

of Colonel Cussnuy). The second part from Azass to Port William is for the

most part level, at the best undulating, containing the valleys of the Kowick

(Chalus) and the Sajour. These plains are every where fertile, for the most

part cultivated, and abounding in populous villages, consisting of Fellah Arabs,

Kurds, Turkish tribes, and mixed races, possessing bullocks in great abundance

along the whole of the direct line which passed a little way southward of Aintab,

the ancient Antiochea ad Taurum, and now a garrisoned town of large size

and some commercial importance.

The general arrangements for the transport were, that Lientenant CLeave-

LAND and Mr. Cuaritewoop were tocarry the boilers, &c. to Goozel Burge, from

whence they were to proceed under Mr. FrrzJames to Moorad Pacha by water,

to be conveyed from thence to Port William by Captain Estcourt, assisted by

Mr. EpeEN ; and as there was a line of waggons connecting the boats with the sea

on one side, and to the Euphrates on the other, the three portions of the grand

line were simultaneously ia operation, and also a fourth, viz. camels and mules,

carrying the light stores direct from Amelia Depdt to Port William by the An-

tioch route through DjezerHadid*. At first every thing went on well, and pro-

mised a rapid conclusion. Lieutenant CLEAvELAND obtained bullocks with a mo-

derate degree of difficulty, and his ingenuity and perseverancet did the rest

by removing every thing to Goozle Burge, where they were successively

embarked for Moorad Pacha; but here things were immediately at a stand still,

and although the strongest orders (in appearance) were constantly issued by

Inraut Pacua, very few bullocks could be obtained even at the highest pri-

ces by Captain Estcourt, whose unwearied efforts could only secure the tanta-

lizing but ingenious result of an abundance of bullocks along the whole

line, except the first and last stages ; consequently tke boilers which had remain-

ed for ten or twelve weeks on their carriages, might have continued at Moorad

Pacha until now, if we had not exerted ourselves to bring them on, one at a time,

with our own horses, instead of bringing on a number of the heavy weights at the

same time with the bullocks; and theresult was, that the officers and men had to toil

along the great line of route from Moorad Pacha, exposed for months to the great

heats of noon, the chills of night, and to the baneful effects of what Humpoxipr

expressively calls an extreme climate, the thermometer being as high as

110° in the shade, (July) and as low as 8° in the winter, during which some of the

boilers were flooded, and the diving-bell actually lost in an extensive sheet of

water near El Hammam. This had been in all likelihood the original object of

the Packa, and the Euphrates being already complete, bullocks were given to

perform the impossible (as was thought), task, of bringing on the Tigris’ boilerst,

which were warped out of the lake by manual labor, and ultimately taken to

Port William by Lieutenant CLEAVELAND, Messrs. EpEN, CHARLEWOoD and

Hector, the only officers in the Expedition then effective. Not one indi-

vidual officer or man employed on this enterprize escaped at least one serious

illness, nor is it at all surprizing that some§ fell victims to trials so long conti-

nued, and to a climate so often replete with morbid miasma as Moorad Pacha,

the worst of the stations: yet the malaria only proved fatal when other causes

combined to render it so; nor need the splendid scenery, nor the magnificent

* Eight hundred and forty-one camels and 160 mules were employed in all, and

the greater part of these caravans were stopped on the frontier by the Pacha, in

order to cause delay by forcing us to bring others from the Sultan’s territory.

+ In addition to puilies, &c. the boilers were actually moved up the hills inch

by inch with jack screws by Mr. CHARLEWOOD and Lieutenant CLEAVELAND.

t Mr. Hecror found the diving bell by means of long poles, and then rolled it

under water for the most part half a mile to its carriages,

§ Seven men of the Expedition and one workman.

1836.] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 679

climate of Syria, be approached with fear, for its malaria is not a pestilence, and

the circumstances under which the Expedition was placed, toiling on lakes and

rivers, dwelling ic the marsh, with almost reckless exposure to the sun of the

day, followed by the dew of the night, require a separate consideration ; and

perhaps the surprize will then be, that a greater fatality did not occur amongst

a body of men (about 85), in general unseasoned, during the laborious and almost

unexampled transport of two large iron vessels, which, thanks to the care of all,

have siuce been set up*, and are now steaming with their boilers, engines, &c.

quite as safe and even more perfect in their working details than when sent out

of the maker’s hands at Liverpool, notwithstanding along journey, with all the

difficulties which could be thrown in the way by the Local Government un-

derband.

Previous to taking medical charge at the station at Moorad Pacha, Mr.

AinswortH had made an examination of the less frequented countries imme-

diately south of Antioch. He crossed the mountains at Beit El Moie (the

Daphne of Pococks,) and entered forests which covered a great basin of tertiary

rocks chiefly cerithia limestone, silicious limestone and lacustrine marles, with

gypsum every where broken up and dislocated by serpentines and diallage rocks.

It is only in the valley of Antioch, that the Pliocene formations shewed them-

selves, and enabled Mr. A. to determine the period of the elevation of the plutonic

rocks of the silico-magnesian series. From JLattaquia, he followed Maun-

DRELL’S route by the country of the Maronites and Gebel Kraad, the northern

prolongation of the Ansarian mountains, and by the valley of Bedame, rich in

scammony (convolvulus scammonia) to that of the Orontes, which he joined at

Djezer Shogher, the Larissa of Gosstiin, and Seleucus Belus of D’ANVILLE. A

Roman road led to Koalat el Medyk, where are ruins of a highly ornamental

character. Part of the town is enclosed in an ancient castle situate on a hill;

the other ruins lie in a plain part of a strong wall, and an archway still exist, and

also the remainsofatemple. In the adjoining lake are the celebrated black

fish, the sources of a distant commerce, which were recognized to be the A/a-

cropteronotus magur of naturalists. From Medyk he visited the little centre of

primitive Christianity in the mountains of Reiha and Edlip, abounding in monu-

ments of a then new hierarchy, returning subsequently by the borders of the

great plain to Antioch.

At this period, August 1835, Lieutenant Murray commenced the grand line

of levels which was to be carried from the Mediterranean to the Euphrates, with

reference to canals, and many other objects of deep interest connected with

science and calculated to encourage this extensive work.

Many obstacles occurred at first ; prolonged malaria had unfitted all for expo-

sure to the sun. Lieutenant CockBurNE and Mr. Tuomson after a short exer-

tion were both laid up. Lieutenant Mureuy was also seriously ill. Ultimately

after another beginning, the last mentioned industrious officer left for Port

William, where he was required in the observatory, and levelling was continued

by Mr. Taomson, who has just completed this important part of the original

plan.

Nearly at the same time a party composed of Lieutenant Lyncu, his brother,

Mr. Staunton, and Mr. Extror, set out on a mission of a friendly and

conciliatory nature to the Arabs. They visited the tribes of Welda, Aniza, Geeza,

the Bore-sipahi and some of the Turcomans, from all of whom they meta

favorable reception. The Aniza alone shewed a doubtful disposition, and the Bore-

sipahi, one of their tributaries, wounded one of the servants severely. This

hostility did not, however, appear to be directed against the Expedition so

much as with the view of plundering those gentlemen who had ventured amongst

them, and the Sheikh immediately offered to compromise the matter by presents,

which were declined as a matter of policy, in the hope that an unsettled affair of

blood may tend to keep the Aniza in better order as regards their future inter-

course with the Expedition.

In the early part of January last, Colonel Cursney left his bed, and was ac-

tually put on his horse to prosecute a scientific journey to the Taurus, and part of

* The labor fell chiefly upon Captain Estcourt of the 43d Light Infantry, Lieut.

CLEAVELAND, Messrs, EDEN, CHARLEWOOD and FiTzJaMEs, R.N,

680 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr.

Asia Minor. He was accompanied by Lieutenant Murpny and Mr. Ainsworrts,

both invalids ; also Mr. Sraunton. The party proceeded by Antad to Killis,

and thence to the Eastern acclivities of the Amanus, in the parallel of the Ivsus,

but no passage could be effected at that season of the year. Repelled to the

south, the mountains were passed by Pagrae, through the Beilan pass, to Scan-

deroon, from whence the party proceeded by the Cilician Gates and Byas to the

plain of the Zssus. Sufficient time having been devoted to the examination of

the various questions of historical geography, connected with this most interest-

ing district, the great road towards Constantinople was followed by Demer

Kapon to Kurd Kulac,‘‘ the Wolf’s ear,’’ (Jardiquiea) and by the plain of

Lachokour Ova, ‘* the valley of the ditch.’’? Crossing the Gebel Elnour, the

mountain of the light, bearing on its rocky summit to the north, Shah Merar,

‘* the Castle of the Serpent,’ and along the left bank of the Jihoun, Djehan sao,

“‘ the river of the world,’’ to Méssis, the ancient Mopsuestia, now almost in ruins,

but once (like Tarsus) one of the chief cities of Cilicia. From Missis the party

continued, cross the plain by Adana (head-quarters of the Pachalic) to the

lust mentioned town, where they found the French Consul, Mons. Gruer,

engaged in excavating a monument close to the place, of great solidity, and

apparently very remote antiquity. It consists of an enclosure in the form of a

parallelogram, with two transverse masses of similar form at one extremity ;

the walls and masses were of the most solid construction, without the least

appearance of any thing like a sepulchral chamber in any part of this extensive

mass,—at least as low down as the level of the ground around it.

The road followed on leaving Tarsus led over the sub-alpine country at the

foot of the Tarsus, consisting of tertiary rocks in great variety. Near the

centre of the Tauric chain the lead mines of Kulé Boghaz were visited: they

occur in limestone belonging to the cretaceous series, and are in the valley

south of the grand pass of the same name, but worked most injudiciously.

The pass itself was then examined almost to the summit level, and the party

regained the more level country on the south side of the great mountains, in

erder to visit the town of Sis, and the border territories of the Sultan and

Pacha. Here the inhabitants had so bad a name, that no muleteer or guide

could be induced to proceed along the mountains in that direction, and whilst

overcoming the difficulties made by the alarms of the people, Colonel Cuzsney

and Mr. AInsworTH were separated from the rest of the party, and made their

way to Sis on foot by one line, whilst Lieutenant Murpay and Mr. Staunton

_ reached it by ancther; each traversing a romantic and beautiful country formed

by the wooded abutments of the Taurus, and well peopled by the best disposed

peasants imaginable, instead of being all robbers, as they were represented. During ,

about 125 miles of country, composed almost eutirely of tertiary sandstone,

(ostracite sandstone of Kuprrer,) they crossed the Seihoun, the Jeihoun, the

Corrykoon, and several smaller, yet good sized rivers watering this interesting

country, which terminate at Sis, the residence of an Armenian Patriarch, the third

in importance at the present day, with a respectable palace, and a large convent

in his charge; whilst at Sis anincursion was made into the Taurus and the

mountain of Kara Sis, Black Sis ascended, after crossing a part of the

crystalline plutonic formations, The researches were then directed towards

Anasaiba onthe plan. The ruins ofthe city are still extant, backed by an insu-

lated mountain, bearing a castle of various architecture. Such solitary hills rising

out of the plains are not unfrequent here, and they mostly bear castellated build-

ings on their summits, as Sis Shah Meran, Toome, Anuasaiba, andothers. From

Anasaiba the party crossed the plain of the village and district of Kars, and

there entered the mountainous country which led by Analat to Marash. The

chain was not crossed without much difficulty ; the narrow pathway was carried

alongside, and down precipices that were very steep; so much so, that it be-

came necessary at times to unload the horses, and carry the baggage over the

most dangerous places. The culminating point of this part of the Taurus is

called Durdoon Dagh. The chain is composed of mica slates, clay slates, with

graphite or plumbago, quartz, schists, quartzites, and diorites, with up-

lifted limestones belonging to the supra-cretaceous series. The great and

massive mountain which rises above Marash, and is there known by the name of

1836. ] Report of the Euphrates Expedition. 681

Arga Dagh consists of tertiary sandstone and limestone tilled up by and re-

posing on serpentine and diallege rocks, which would indicate different geo-

graphical connections. The direction of the Arga Dagh is nearly from SW.

to NE. ; that of the shistose chain of Durdoon Dagh, a little south of east; that

of the Giaur Dagh (Amanus) is the same as Arga Dagh. Colonel CHEesnuy

returned to Port William from Marash, leaving directions for the remainder of

the party to proceed in the direction of Samsat, Orfa, &c.; but being thrown

back on Romkala by the swollen rivers, they returned to Port William, survey-

ing the river between those places. During the whole period of their progress

the positions of the principal places, ancient and modern, were determined as-

tronomically by Lieutenant Murpuy, and careful itineraries kept, in addition

to bearings taken, when practicable, with the theodolite or Kater’s compass, ac-

cording to circumstances. The results of these labours has been, in the first

place, to connect the survey of the coast of Lattaquia and that of the Issus

with that of Captain Beaurort; and, in the second, to join those surveys to the

Euphrates. There are ample materials for laying down a map with such a de-

gree of accuracy as will, it is hoped, enable the learned to determine many

points of ancient history and geography, especially those depending upon the

length of the stadium, the parasang, and other scales of measurement used by

Srraso, PLiny, and Hrroportus.

On the day following the return of the first party, another was sent out by

the commanding officer to finish that part of the plan which had been inter-

rupted. This one consisted of Lieutenant Lyncu, Mr. Epren, R. N. and Mr.

AinswortH. Agreeably to the instructions received, the party took up the for-

mer work at Romkala, proceeding from thence along the left bank, carefully sur-

veying the river as far as Samsat, the birth-place of Lucian. The ruins of

this celebrated place are just recognizable. The modern town small and poor,

but the valley itself fertile, as it is described to have been in former times; and

ferry-boats are still kept up to pass the river to and from Orfa,. The course

of the Euphrates from this ancient Zengma, to that above Bir, differs from

what has been represented on most maps: it flows, in fact, in the general direc-

tion of south-west, and is not turned, as an incorrect reading of StraABo would

infer, (RENNELL and D’ANVILLE) to the south-east.

Samosat having been fixed, it was then connected astronomically as well as by

an itinerary, with Orfa, (Calli-rhoe, Roha Orfah, in its progress of corruption,

‘Edessa, and Antiochea under successive masters.) To the north of the city are

evidences in conic lines, and circles of elevations of pseudo volcanic action. The

fish venerated so much in ancient times, are still preserved in the marble

basins of the mosque of Adbrania, and were recognized to be akind of Barbel.

From Orfa, the great Mesopotamian plain was crossed in the direction of Har-

ran, ‘* Carrhas clade crassi nobiles,’’ and still more interesting as the resi-

deace of ABRAHAM. Harran was also connected with its rival in antiquity, Se-

rug, of which scarcely a vestige remains. In the plain around the ruined site

of the latter place, the party met two colossal lions, sculptured in basalt with

refined taste (Basanite basalt,with disseminated augite) ; these may possibly be the

remains of that vanity which prompted ANTONIUS CARACALLA to assert that

a lion had fought by his side in his Parthian wars.

Doctor HELFER having been separated from the rest of the party when pro-

ceeding towards the Taurus, a journey made by him to the Salt Lake south-

east of Aleppo, led to the discovery of an ancient city near a basaltic range,

four hours S. E. of the Lake. There are some remains of a temple and several

Greek inscriptions which have been furnished, with a detailed description of

this hitherto unknown place, by Mr. Hrtrer.

Early in February an opportune reinforcement arrived,consisting of four sappers

from England, and six seamen from the Columbine, which restored the Expedi-

tion to its original strength; and the pendulum, dipping needle, and other

experiments being completed, the Expedition was putin motion onthe 16th

March. The Euphrates taking the lead to survey, and give the benefit of the

rough charts, and a pilot to the Yigris, in order that she might follow at one

‘or at most two moves, and thus spare fuel as much as possible.

682 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Ocr.

Previous to the actual descent, the Euphrates passed up rather a bad rapid,

and stemmed the strong current as far as the town of Bir in the most satisfactory

manner, displaying the Sultan’s standard, and saluting him with 21 guns, which

were returned from the castle and by the acclamations of the astonished

Moslems, who crowded both banks to be really certain that iron could be made

to float, and to surmount the force of a current, now overcome for the first time,

and God was blessed for such a creation, and sending men amongst them, ten

of whom could take their town, was added.

Since the departure, 101 miles of the river have been carefully surveyed in

the following manner. A boat was dispatched ahead usually for a distance of

twenty or twenty-five miles, sounding, and taking bearings, which being placed

on paper when the officer returned, he became pilot to the vessel for the

distance examined ; anda second set of bearings, with a double set of soundings,

were taken from the vessel’s deck. Simultaneously with the water operations

thus carried on by Lieutenant CLeAvELAND, Messrs. Epren, CHar.Lewoop,

FitzJames, and Hercror, there were two other sets on land; viz. a chain of

grand trigonometrical angles along the principal heights, based on astronomical

points, by Lieutenant Murpny, R. I.; and a smaller one, with a succession of

short base lines from bend to bend, by Captain Estcourt, who is now laying

down a map with his details of the ground, &c., and also embracing the labors of

all his coadjutors : so that it is hoped, that the map of the important part of this

great river will be sent home almost immediately*. A similar method of survey-

ing is to be organized immediately on board the Tigris, so as to carry the work

on to Bussora in the same manner, each vessel taking a separate section of the

labor.

Our land parties, as well asthe water, naturally involved much intercourse

with Arabs, who have shewn themselves well disposed, except in one instance,

when it became necessary to fire a 9-pounder blank to save a Sheik, their enemy,

who was attacked whilst in our boat.

The state of the river is very favorable, although we run aground, Owing to

the deception caused for the moment by a bright meridian sun: but the deep

part of the river was 420 yards wide at the spot in question, where we remained

some days digging the vessel out, nor did she suffer in the slightest degreet.

XI.—The Governor General’s Conversazioné.

On Tuesday, the 9th of November, was held the first of a series of

entertainments, which we hail as the harbingers of a new era for Science

and Research in India. Acting on the example of the Duxe or Sus-

sex, President of the Royal Society, Lord Auckuanp, as Patron of the

Asiatic Society, has expressed a desire to assemble around him at these

periodical parties, in a social way, not only the members of the Society,

but all residents and visitors at the metropolis, who are known to culti-

vate the fine arts, the sciences, or literature, and to collect on his tables

for their inspection and amusement, in the language of our motto,

‘ whatever is performed by man or produced by nature.’ Thus without

interfering with the formal proceedings and records of the several

scientific bodies, those who contribute thereto will have the satisfaction

of knowing that their donations or their inventions will be likewise

viewed by the head of the Government, and by a much more numerous

assemblage than could ever be enticed to an ordinary meeting. Distant

merit will feel that it is sure of appreciation, and ambition secure of noto-

riety. Schemes for scientific exploration—plans of national improvement

—useful mechanical invention—promising talent in the fine arts,—will be

brought forward, canvassed and encouraged, where encouragement is due,

* Also the specimens already collected in the different scientific departments of

geology, natural history, &c.

+ The above report was addressed to the Bombay Government, previous, of course,

to the disastrous hurricane which wrecked the Tigris, and destroyed so many

lives.—ED.

1836.] Governor General’s Conversazioné. 683

and the stimulus which has been wanting since the days of Minto and

Moira, will again be restored.

We have hardly room to describe the conduct of the first meeting, nor

do we think any formal report of a soirée, intended to be private, and

sans formalité, would be becoming. It is more to satisfy our distant

readers as to the nature of the parties, which they can so materially

benefit, to speak paradoxically, by their absence, that we venture to in-

sert the brief notice, which appeared in the daily papers.

‘¢ The south-west or drawing-room wing of the Government House was taste-

fully laid out with all the novelties in the arts, in antiquities and in natural

history, that could readily be brought together. On the pier tables of the cor-

ridore leading to the rooms, were disposed very numerous specimens of the

plants now in flower at the Botanical Garden, each ticketed with its classical

name.

‘‘ On entering the ante-room, a very splendid collection of insects was seen

displayed on the tables and against the walls, in convenient cabinets: the newest

addition to these, (which comprised a portion of Dr. Pearson’s and of the

Asiatic Society’s cabinets) was the donation of Mr. Grorce Locu of the Civil

Service, to the Asiatic Society, at a recent meeting. A fine collection of shells

just received from His Excellency the Governor of Ceylou, was distributed on

the side tables of the principal saloon. In an adjoining apartment were selected

fragments of the rich and highly curious Buddhist sculpture, discovered by

Captain CUNNINGHAM, in the neighbourhood of the Sa’rna’TH tumulus near

Benares, and presented by him to the Asiatic Society. On another table the

last fossil discovery by Dr. SpruspuRy, the socket of the thigh-bone of an

elephant from the rock at Segount, whence Capt. SLEEMAN first brought to

light the fossils of the Nerbudda valley. By its side were placed the femur of a

modern and of a fossil elephant (the latter of an animal 15 feet in height) to

shew that the present socket must, from its curvature, have belonged to a still

more monstrous animal !

“On the round tables of the drawing room were spread out numerous beauti-

ful drawings—of Mr. Hodgson’s Nipal Zoology ; of Dr. Canror’s collection of

Indian Snakes ; of Dr. McCieLiann’s Assamese Zoology; and all the designs

sent in to the Committee of the Metcalfe Library. In other convenient spots

were displayed a wax magnified model of the human ear: stuffed objects of

natural history, and models of Malay praws, presented by Capt. Cuaps, &c.

‘* After the company had severally made the round of these objects, their

attention was drawn to the table which Professor O’SHAUGHNESSY had prepared

for the exhibition of his very ingenious model of the application of the late

galvano-magnetic discoveries to the practical attainment of a working power.

** It would be impossible here to describe fully the construction of this curious

wheel :—a number of horse-shoe magnets of soft iron, with wire coiled round

them, were arranged on its spokes, so as to present their poles successively in

rotation before the opposite poles of a more powerful magnet {also artificial)

fixed on a stand at the side; the wires of the several wlieel magnets were con-

ducted in a manner not readily seen, so as to terminate in mercurial cups, into

which were dipped the two wires of a small galvanic battery ; on charging the

latter, rotation ensued, and by a contrivance, as each revolving magnet arrived

by the force of attraction, at the fixed magnet, its poles were instantaneously

reversed so as to cause repulsion, while the next magnet above was attracted.

We hope to see a full account of the Professor’s successful adaptation when his

apparatus is matured. The model worked steadily with 10 oz. power.

‘* The converse of the problem, or the development of a galvanic force from

the ordinary magnet, was then exhibited on an adjoining table by a beautiful

apparatus belonging to Mr. James Prinsep. Water was decomposed by the

magnet ; a candle was lighted by it; and an electric shock was administered to

many of the spectators, among whom the native gentlemen in particular betray-

ed considerable astonishment at its effects.

‘* At the close of the evening refreshments were partaken of in the marble hall,

and the guests retired at half-past eleven, apparently much pleased with the

novel entertainment prepared for them by their illustrious host.’’

ad, Y

: ‘payed Ajazernoov useq 394 4OU svy o[¥ds sj Ses sIOIIO Duryiay esnvo Au sty. L—‘pasesua ssiMJayjO Sulaq auo

PO ay) JuaumMASUL Mau v WOIZ paiazUe YIUOW sIYyy a1v JaJaWMOASAY avy ay} JOSUUINJOISY,L “PILPULyS P[O ULYI TaMO] E90" “Wd fF 3B PUL GEO'O “Wd OL 3B daj}oWOLwg MAN

‘rayqeem Aap avapo Apeays [Aproyrou yysi! Bt‘0 | 9*sor [P99 | 8h | BF OF | SL 1'€9/6ST|9'ET'8'98/918°6%/ZoL 6a] oo | 09 09 | ZL jo‘99|e%6 |1°6 |8°18) 1 16°62|0L8'6s “UeaW

*Axamoys *kpnoyo ‘MS ‘AU Ltor |2°69 | el | OL SL | gg \8°69/0%9 \€*9 |6*os|9GB" [aBL" | 19 | 09 v9 | 18 [a*co/E"8 G8 jo‘ 18/986" 168 | Te

‘uy, raBuvyo Azey | smu ‘Mu BEOL \6F9 | Bo | OF 8 | OL SL 0ST GIT a palRI8® [BgL" | OF | €9 9 | Lo |o'b9l9‘L \1°8 |8'eLi2e6* lene! | 63

op Teela) ‘Mu “MU (OL |S*eq | IS 6h | ol 9°61 8°S1|L‘F8| FEBe eLL' br | 19 £9 | OL |6°c9\0'8 |0°8 |P'08 966° c88" 86

op op ‘MU CMU o‘Zot |0f89 | SP | IF LE | IL (Siloe*si/L'cric*pe|GP8" 18BL" | 9g | 9 Lg | BZ |0°S9/9°6 |p°6 [0°62 BEG. |G08, 13

op op SUN ECS Ss) OIL |2°8g | IF | oF PE | 89 0°29 3'S1/8'9T|T'hB/ PSB" e6L! | 9b 9p | ad 8°CT|9°S1|6.6L 696% | F26 , 96

op op 7° | {MO eSIt \o'e9 | IF ob | 89 B‘FTI9‘Stjo*eg|sBB° |esB‘ | OF | o¢ OF | GL [0%6s\0‘SIlg‘T1/E.08|S86" j6eG" | ss

< op op ‘NI “M OIL |e‘I9 | GF OF 169 OfF1 8 FT) P8 p98* Tos’ | bo | oe £G | ZZ \S‘19\¢‘01\9 01 0°08 816° |986. &&

= op op ‘U ‘oO UZIL |p‘I9 | Ib | oF OF | 89 O°Loe*hI| L'er| I'b8 L06 ee" | 99 | €9 09 | 84 |S*colZ‘8 I|p8 8°6L Se0* |€66, G

52 op op pies a BG0L \a19 | Sb 8€ | IZ BPr|scriZ*Fe|GI6" [ors | by | Be so | LZ |Z 09\9'o1/g‘0r|P08|zo0 |I46" | Iz

> op op ‘uA POUL |SE9 | Gb | Eb LE | 69 [0°69 0'9T B.9T9%CR/006 jOFB’ | 9g | ZO 09 | 82 |T'b9\c's [68 |O°6Z\986* |196) | 0G

S op op aU a OI |G 19 | PP | oF G Fol iotLelUEriorris*paiP8° 818° | 6g | o9 GS | 08 |B'r9l0's |o‘L |L°LZ/3L6° [686 | GL

me op op “ou 8‘900 819 ealee ; _ fee lse] 92 | 94 lettoleorleor|togloos« jracs | gt

= op op “Mu * ANU BE0T \9‘6g | 62 | BE Le | 8G (G0S|6°6T|T'6T|p*o8\808" |8oL* | bE | OF GP | OL [9'PSig‘eT|1‘E1/S°82)006" 828 91

*s coy op nae” oe NL BIOL \o'Z9 | Te | be 0& | 09 |T’e9|8°8T\6°81\9‘98|ZE8* joBl* | oF | og Sb | GL |G%Gelg‘Fricer/S°I8icees [268° J ST

> *ABOT9 op ‘mu * AA PLOT \o°0L | Ih | &F LE | 89 j0°29.8'9T\0'21|G'6a|8h8* |6LL' | be | 09 09 | LL |0%69\0%01|2°6 |I's8\9e6. |1se¢ fF FL

= ay puto Aue GEIL |B IL | bP | OF Le | o£ 8°29|Z‘p1/9F1/8°06|/868* joel’ | 6¢ | 99 $9 | 08 |8°ZL\1'8 |p°8 |6*8/916. j6g8« | EL

S “TynuNd “SNjUI}S “110 | “ou O‘EIT \0'@L | FE | 9S bo FLL (OTL OL/STL0%OR|EPB. Joe’ | 89 | OL 08 | £8 |9°EZip fc |Z" |6°F8|c06. Brae F SI

S *48v010A0 ‘augumo j;*aum ‘ou fF STO | OTOL ja‘al | 2@Z | eZ 08 | Ze [S*o2ib'p [8c |pecsiOIs® TpeZ’ | os | OL LL | 98 \O‘PL\25¢ Jeo |€°S8/668° |z98« Il

> *rea[o ‘snjeajs ‘so | ‘u =U 800 | Lcor letee | 9¢ | 8g 69 | BZ OCLITITIOOTEO6I0ZL. JeTZ® 99 L9 BTLie®s (LL [8°PB\EBB. jaege | OT

~ op “Azey oS c‘Lor |pel | bo | 8g lg | LL BOL/L66 |8‘0r/8L8/82Z2° |FIZ" | 6g | $9 29 | 08 |O‘ZLic'R [pe [pScBlOL8* [roa | 6

xs ‘auy ‘uma “1yNumMa “mu “MU 8‘G0r \s°0L | Fs | Lo 9G | ZL |0*tZ 6% |Z110%68\0PL" elo" | 19 | OL GL | 18 |S*TL\o°8 |p9 |p‘zele9Bs |808« | 8

| “xea9 op “mu TMU OILL |2°89 | ag | S¢ PI 1 OL |9°69 DOTIG‘TLERB/EGL! IPL. J gg | 6¢ 09 | 84 |0°89|8°8 126 |otts|9T6. |Z98« | 4

: “Tymurns op “mu AA BSIt OOL | Fo | FE Bo | LZ B89 L'TT|PZ1|S‘8B\N5L" |FZL" | og | 09 9 | 82 \0‘69/e6 |e jo%SR|GL8° Icke | 9

= op op “M *S “A'S G‘e0r |OCTL | OG | a ob | PZ [819 0%PT|P'PT|9‘BB/CS2* {989° | og | ce BS | BL [B*SOiN TIL t1/E°P8l FFB. [€GL« $

ra op op “MS ‘AS BGIT \SOL | Ih | 8€ BE | 89 0°09 0'9TO'9T|o6B|FFL. 6995 | $e | oe £9 | ZZ jo‘99\¢‘orlo‘orj9cFe|ocss |IZZ. | F

a op op MANS *S? cS SOIL |6‘0L | Fh | Sb 88 | OL \0‘29 9'9T|L‘9116'88|802" |cE9" | Ge | 09 2 | 08 jo‘l9/e8 ja°e |L‘es\cel® |4eL, |

esto “rea ‘N ‘G'N S60 |6°6L | 1g | ¢¢ Go | G2 |O°LOSOT|TSElo%sa|atZ’ |6S9" | gg | 6g 9 | 82 |O°Z9/1°6 |o°8 |E“ealFBL® Ord | &

Ong ‘aug “MSS *M'S BCIL |LSh | Le | 09 19 | 6L |8TL|0°01|66 [9° 28|0F9°6G/289 6] gg | IZ LL | 28 |0°SL|9°¢ |e‘G |6°C8/S1L‘62|089°6G]_T

es a a < FF Olea Sboblty ® DOSE alry 2h] S'S & Clon Sploplen|swolz# wz] 9

2 5 > s || B | & Bessie ayekl g jss/PsiSeicea Pacis s|sSeesaiebl ge |sslesiSo\eeiseel &

g. EB 2b | ® | £ |g feelssizegsie |e |rzissl2al*su| Palesise|"gogle |, |me|Ssibe|es4lse) &

=] ° = A — 5 iow 1 oo fad a oy anal u oF

i & 2} gs |PoleS|> SIS) SE selEeirg| Sl Ss[Pole=] 27 s[Sa1 Se eEKIES! SElaas| s

: 5 | 8 | EY | go8l =) * logles| sl *a) say 8° SSey al SISSiS5\° o| FPot al @

ae . carl D ie of FR 1 . vie ce a T . ~ 1/5 Ly ° Ka

*SOUL8II XG -AQipruin “Ay pruny g

*19Y IVI AA “pul 19IUIOUIIOY, pezenoreg “NM *d Je SUOTIVAIOSAO pazepnoyepD "HW *V OT 38 SUOIJCAIESqO a

1oysis9yY

<i i

€ €

aE ES Ss SS TSS SEUSS SERS SSE SS SESE AES SP ST EE LI EE ITI EE LI LIE LEE ELLE LILO! EAE EES

JOURNAL

THE ASPATLC SOCIETY.

No. 59.—November, 1836.

I.—Notice of the Vatuasur’ dynasty of Saurashtra; extracted from

the Buddhist records of the Chinese. By M. Eucenr Jacquet,

Member of the As. Soc. of Paris.

A new source of information on the darkest period of Indian history

cannot but be most acceptable to all who have perplexed themselves

in attempting to reconcile and connect the scattered and contradicto-

ry traditions of the Rajput bards with the inscriptions found in various

parts of western India; and to assign specific dates even to sovereigns

whose names are most familiar and notorious. While Mr. Turnour

is throwing light upon the earlier periods of Buddhist rule, from the

authentic chronicles preserved among the Ceylonese priesthood, it

has been reserved for a distinguished orientalist at Paris to render

us an equally eminent service from an opposite and more remote

quarter of the globe! M. Kuarrotu’s tables of Buddhist chronolo-

gy, translated from the Chinese and Japanese authorities, had proved

the intimate connection that existed between India, Tibet, and China

for the first eight centuries of our era, and had encouraged the hope

of gleaning a few cursory notices of the state of the Buddhist por-

tion of the continent of India from the annals of some of their com-

mon patriarchs, whose head-quarters were variously located in Ma-

gadha, Capila-vastu, Cabul, and Ferghana, during that long period.

More than this is, however, likely to be realized :—the narrations of

Chinese pilgrims and travellers have been happily preserved, and,

more happily still, have found their way to Paris, where alone, perhaps,

exists the concurrence of talent and research capable of turning

these valuable records to their best purpose. The specimen we have

now the satisfaction of introducing to our readers has been elicited,

686 Notice of the Vallabht dynasty, {Nov.

the author writes us, by a perusal of Mr. Waruen’s translation of the

Guwerdt inscriptions in our last volume,—a translation which M. Jac-

queT does not hesitate to pronounce “ ce que I’ on a encore publié de

mieux en ce genre dans 1’ Inde al’ exception peut-étre de quelques

monuments traduits par votre admirable CoLEBROOKE.”’

‘Wecannot deny ourselves the pleasure of adding his further testimony

to the great utility of this important document. “J ’ai été d’autant

plus satisfait de voir ce Shdsana si heureusement interpreté, que je

posséde, dans le petit nombre des copies d’ inscriptions rassemblées

par Top, un Shasana non daté, ecrit dans le méme caractére; et que

javais dechiffré de maniére & obtenir un alphabet absolument con-

forme a celui de Mr. Warusun. C’est encore cet alphabet qui m’ a donné

le moyen de dechiffrer les legendes des anciennes medailles indiennes,

et de reconnaitre le nom alteré de Chandragupta dans l’inscription

de Bhilsa, publiée dans votre journal d’apres le facsimile de Mr.

Hopeson.”’—In fact, M. Jacquzr at Paris has been pursuing step by

step the path we have been following in India; and while this fortunate

key has opened to him an insight into the Bhilsa inscription, the

self-same has led Capt. Cunnincuam to discover the titles Maharaja

adhi rdja, &c. in the inscription from the Khandgiri rock, published in

STIRLING’s account of Cuttack. The copies are both too imperfect

to hope for further success until the originals can be re-examined,

and this has been undertaken by two friends upon whose zeal we may

entirely confide,—Mr. L. Wiixinson of Bhopal, and Lieut. Kirros,

whose regiment has just marched to Cuttack.

But to return. In addition to inscriptions and coins, we may now

look to the geographers and historians of China, for an insight into

the middle ages of Indian history; and the latter have this great

advantage over the former,—that they have scrupulously preserved

dates in their records, and that they, as M. Jacquer justly says,

‘‘font le journal de l’Asie depuis le second siécle avant notre ére.”

In his very interesting article inserted in the Journal Asiatique on the

recent Bactrian and Indo-Scythic discoveries, we are promised further

and more copious extracts from the Chinese relatively to Cabul and

the adjacent countries.—‘‘ Les témoignages des auteurs orientaux,

et en particulier des historiens chinois, sur les monnaies des différents

peuples qui ont successivement occupé les contrées del’Asie centrale ;

les temoignages des mémes auteurs, sur les langues et les écritures

de ces peuples ;’’—these are included among the objects embraced by

the learned author in his intended publication, ‘ Corpus Inscription-

um Indicarum, the appearance of which, our readers will regret to

hear, is unavoidably delayed beyond the period at first indicated. It

1836. ] From a Chinese work. 687

is only to be hoped that the health of the single individual upon whom

this mighty labor has devolved by the lamented death of M. Kuap-

‘ROTH, will not succumb under so vast and important an undertaking.

We trust no apology is necessary for insertion of M. Jacqurt’s note

in its original language.

Ep.

« Je trouve les renseignements suivants sur la contrée de

Vallabhi et sur Vorigine des rois de cette contrée dans la relation

d’un religieux Bouddhiste chinois qui visita la Transoxiane, la Bactri-

ane et I’ Inde dans les années 632 et suivantes de notre ére.

«<< La contrée de Fa Ja pi, aussi nommée contrée septentrionale de

Lolo, a plus de six mille de tour. La ville capitale de la contrée

a plus de trente /i d’enceinte. Les productions du sol, les condi-

tions de la temperature, les mceurs, et le naturel des habitants sont

les mémes que dans la contrée de Ma la pho. Le nombre des habit-

ants est considerable; les familles sont opulentes; on y compte en

effet plus de cent maisons qui ont cent daksha de fortune; d’ im-

menses tresors viennent des pays les plus lointains s’ accumuler dans

ce royaume. Ony trouve plus de cent kialan (monastéres boudd-

hiques ;) les religieux y sont au nombre de plus de six mille ; ils etudient

pour la plupart la section des écritures nommée la parfaite mesure

qui appartient au petit ydna. Il y a quelques centaines de temples

consacrés aus dévas; les heritiques y sont en grand nombre. Bud-

dha, du temps qu’il etait dans le monde des hommes, a plusieurs fois

visité cette contrée; aussi le roi Wou-yeon a-t-il elevé des sthoupa

aupres de tous les arbres sous lesquels Bouddha s’etait reposé, pour

les faire reconnaitre. La dynastie actuelle est de la race des cha ti li;

Vancien roi etait neveu de Che lo ’o tz to, roi de la contrée de Ma la-

pho ; celui qui gouverne presentement est gendre de Che lo ’oti to roi de

la contrée de Kie no kieou tche; il se nomme Thou lou pho po tcha...”

“« Le religieux Chinois ajoute qui c’ etait un prince trés genereux,

trés sage &c. car il avait une grande veneration pour les trois joyauer

(Bouddha, la loi, et ’assemblée.)

“ Fa la pi transcrit Vallabhi; et Lolo aie Lata ou Lara, la Larique

des anciens; Malapho est pour Mdlava, et Cha ta li pour Kchatriya ;

Chelo 6 ti to est la forme Chinoise de Shildditya ; Kie no kieou-tche celle

de Kanydkoubdja ou Kanoudj : et Thou lou pho potcha répresente regu-

ligrement Dhrouvabhatta. Quant au roi Wou yeon, c’est & dire sans

chagrin, c’est Ashoka deguisé sous une traduction Chinoise.

** Je dois d’ abord observer que nous avons ici un roi de Malava et

un roi de Kdnyakoubdja tous deus nommés Shiladitya; (et ils parais-

4u2

688 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

sent distincts des roix de Vallabhi qui ont porté ce nom) qui ne sont

pas cités dans les tables genealogiques des rois de I’Inde recueillies

jusqu’ & ce jour. La relation ne fournit ancun renseignement sur

Shiladitya roi de Kanoudj ; mais on lit dans un autre endroit que Shi-

laditya roi de Mdlava regnait soixante ans avant l’arrivée de notre

religieux dans l’Inde. Dhrouvabhatta est certainement le méme nom

que Dhrouvaséna ; bhatta, et séna etant des titres de Kehatriya, de

méme valeur et presque synonymes, qui s’employent indifferemment

l'un pour l’autre, sans que lidentité du nom propre auquel ils s’ajou-

tent en puisse étre compromise. La liste genealogique des rois de

Vallabhi, extraite par M. WatuEn des inscriptions qu’ il a si heureuse-

ment interpretées, nous fait connaitre deux Dhrouvaséna, dont l'un est

le quatrieme et l’autre le onziéme prince de la dynastie des Bhdidrka.

I] n’est pas probable que le Dhrouvabhatta de la relation Chinoise soit

Dhrouvaséna [: Vinscription que noux connaissons efit sans doute

fait mention de lhonneur qu’avait eu ce prince d’ étre allié a la

famille royale de Kanoudj ; un etat qui n’avait été elevé au rang de

royaume que sons le frére et le predecesseur de ce prince, n’éut pa

d’ailleurs étre parvenue si rapidement a la haute prosperité et a l’etat

de puissance ou le trouva le voyageur Chinois. Ce qu’il rapporte de

Dhrouvabhatta s’applique donc & Dhrouvaséna IJ, et l'un des points

chronologiques les plus importants de l’histoire de l’Inde occidentale

peut étre determiné avec assez de precision par cette identification

de deux noms dont un est daté. L/’inscription publiée par Mr.

WatHEN, et redigée par l’ordre du septiéme prince de la dynastie, peut

donc étre approximativement rapportée a l’année 550 de notre ére:

cette date s’acorde mieux avecles données paléographiques que celle

de 328, deduite trés ingenieusement d’ailleurs par l’auteur, des tradi-

tions singuliérement suspectes des Djaina.

II.—An account of some of the Petty States lying north of the Tenas-

serim Provinces ; drawn up from the Journals and Reports of D.

Ricuarpson, Hsq., Surgeon to the Commissioner of the Tenasserim

Provinces. By E. A. Buunpe ty, Esg., Commissioner.

[Continued from page 625.]

DR. RICHARDSON’S SECOND visiT, 1834.

The object of the second visit was to ascertain the truth of the ru-

mours that had reached Maulamyne, of some dissatisfaction existing

among the Shan traders on account of the bad market they had expe-

rienced latterly for their cattle, compared with former years, and to

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. | 689

obviate any bad feeling that might have arisen in consequence.

None had visited Maulamyne that season, and it was said they declin-

ed bringing their cattle down any more. It was important that mea-

sures should be adopted to ensure the continuance of our supplies

from thaf country, and Dr. R. was directed to extend his visit on

this occasion to Zimmay.

He started on the 6th March, 1834, and travelling nearly the same

route as that by which he had returned from his first visit, he reach-

ed Labong on the 1st April, having, when near that place, encounter-

ed the same petty delays as before, on the ground of preparing for his

reception, and ascertaining from the astrologers a lucky day for his

arrival.

‘©On the Ist of April started in the morning for Labong ; and though the

THoocyEer of Passony®? was with me at starting, neither he nor any of the

neighbouring head-men accompanied me. One man ran before to shew me the

road. Reached Ladong about noon, and on arriving at the temporary houses

or fays®, for which I had waited three days, found only three small ones for

the people, which might have been put up in three hours. No house for myself,

and no one there to receive me, This was all so unlike my reception on my

last visit, that I sent the interpreter to Coow-Hova to say, if they did not

wish to see me, I was ready to return. He assumed anger and surprise that I

had arrived without his being made aware of it; said he had ordered the head

people of the villages to accompany me, and when half way to run out and let

him know, when he would be at the fays in time to receive me. The same

reason was given for not building me a house, as on my last visit; viz. that as

I had a tent, they did not think I would occupy it; but he immediately called

the people who had put up the sheds, and gave them orders to set about a house,

which they commenced at once. .

‘¢ The Cuow-Hova sent some officers to wait on me, with a request to know

when I wished to see Coow-1cHE-WEET. I expressed a wish to see him

to-morrow, as the approach of the rains would necessarily make my stay shorter

than I wished. I hear loud complaints on all sides of the rascality of the Ben-

galees who have come up lately from Maulamyne to purchase cattle, and the

people who last visited Maulamyne are very inveterate against the contractor

(Suex AppuLxian) for supplying cattle to the troops, and declare their determi-

nation never to return so long as he continues to be the ‘‘ Gomanie,’’—as the

first bullocks were taken by the Commissariat on the Company’s account;

and he being now the only purchaser, they believe him to be the Company,

(Gomanie).

‘‘On the morning of the 5th, the officers of the court, and some people with

silver calats (salvers) for the presents and Mr. BLuNDELL’s letter, came to

conduct me to the Tso-Boas’. They preceded me, followed by the people who

accompanied me, about 40 in number, dressed in their gayest putsos, thirteen

of them each carrying a musket. On arrival at my former place of audience,

I found no sheds erected, and that I was to be received in the house (query,

palace ?) of the chief, I dismounted at the gate Chow Rajaboot ; the KEINTOUNG

690 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

Tso-Boa and others came out half way to meet me, (the whole distance about

sixty paces,) and preceded by the letter, (the presents having stopped at the

gate,) they led me to a seat on the chief’s right. I bowed before taking my

seat, and wearing my boots was never objected to. He was seated on a gilded

pedestal (yozaboleen®) about two and a half or three feet high, and before him

the chiefs of his principality on carpets spread on the mats with large triangu-

lar pillows to lean against, ornamented with gold embroidery. As soon as we

were seated, the presents were brought in and placed before him. He put the

usual questions respecting the King of England, the Governor General, &c. &c.,

the length of my journey, and the difficulties of the road; made some excuse

for not meeting me on the road; mentioned the death of his son and nephew

with much feeling; and expressed good-will and friendship towards us. Indeed,

nothing could be more friendly or fatherly than my reception altogether, and

certainly with every appearance of sincerity. It was evident at a glance his

illness was no formal excuse for not seeing me; he was much emaciated, and

evidently very weak. I was seated nearly opposite to the door of the private

apartment, which was crowded with women and children, who sent me out a

present of fruit. There was no dancing as on my former visit, but a male and

two female singers seated immediately within the door of the private apartment,

sung a sort of metrical history of the exploits of the Tso-Boa and his six brothers,

in which the successful insurrection of KAwrELA, the eldest brother, against

the Burmese sixty years ago, and the carrying off the people from Kewt-them™,

Keintoung’, and Mein-Neaung®, by the present chief, held the most conspicu-

ous place; and though many of the unfortunate sufferers were present, any con-

sideration for their feelings seemed never to enter the old man’s mind: yet the

expression of his countenance and manners altogether is benevolent; which

character he bears among the people. The voices of the performers, both in

sweetness and compass were, beyond comparison, superior to any thing I have

heard out of Europe. After sitting about three-quarters of an hour, he retired

on plea of weakness ; his feet were swelled, and he tottered a good deal before

reaching the door of the inner apartment. After spending some time in conver-

sation with the chiefs I took my leave, intimating my intention of calling in

the morning on Cuow-Hova, by whom all business is now transacted.

The chief’s house is situated near the middle of the town in a large stockade

inclosure, and surrounded by a garden. The wooden hall in which I was received

is about sixty feet long by thirty wide, and ornamented with three small China

chandeliers, some paltry Chinese and India looking-glasses and China lanterns,

some of glass and some of paper; a picture of the great pagoda of Rangoon;

one of a Chinese joss, and a portrait much resembling one of our Royal Family.

The most valuable ornaments were the muskets 1 took up in my last visit, which,

with some Chinese-looking scimitars and swords with long silver handles, com-

pleted the decorations, The white umbrella was not unfurled; the floor in

front of the yozabollen or throne was covered by the carpets and triangular

pillows of the chiefs, who assume a much more manly position than in the

presence of some of the lowest chiefs of Bankok ; though I am told that next

to the Raja of Ligore, this is the highest Chief in the kingdom. On the 6th,

according to my notice of yesterday, called on Cuow-Hova, and had a long

conversation on the duties being taken off their elephant-hunters in our pro-

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 691

vinces. He readily agreed to the free sale of buffaloes, paying an export duty of

half a tical of coarse silver, and reduclng that on bullocks to the old rate of one

quarter. I brought to his notice the complaints of the Bengalee cattle-dealers, of

the refusal of the court-officers to interfere in their complaints against each

other, and called his attention to the 10th paragraph of Colonel Burney’s

treaty of Bankok in 1826 on the subject. “He complained of the total want of

principle in these people, with one or two exceptions, (which all I have heard

from themselves tends to confirm ;) said he was glad the subject had been men-

tioned ; as, though they had copies of the treaty, they were afraid to punish our

people, and had, besides, another difficulty to contend with, in the offenders

escaping from one territory to another; and that though they had the power,

there was an indelicacy felt in apprehending them in the Zimmay district. They

had now my opinion that they should act according to the treaty, and would do

so in future, and hoped there would be no further cause of complaint. He said

he had no objections to the Zimmay officers following offenders into this district,

and that they would do the same from this; but begged me to impress the

necessity of it on the Zimmay chief on my visit there, to prevent misunderstand-

ing between relations ; as CHow-TcHE-WEET is now a very old man. I found

by this, that the visit I had intimated I intended to make to Zimmay was taken

as a settled matter, though they had strenuously opposed it on my asking to do

so in my last visit.

“On the 10th I received an invitation, or rather a request, from CHow-

TCHE-WEET to attend his son’s funeral. He begged I would come early, and

see the whole ceremony. I accordingly went at 11 o’clock, and remained till 2.

On my arrival, a Pounghee was seated in the centre of the shed reciting, in a

monotonous sort of chaunt, a blessing on all present. He ceased soon after

my arrival, and a daughter of Caow Rasa Woonc of Lagon, a very pretty girl

of 18 or 20 years of age, played for some time on the ke wine, (brazen circle,)

an instrument composed of small graduated gongs hung horizontally in a circle,

in the centre of which the musician sits and beats with small sticks. She

played evidently as a proficient. This was followed by a boxing-match, in which

the boys, when once come to blows, hammered away at each other’s faces much

like two little English fellows of the same age. There was a good deal of

shuffling before the first blow was struck. They were followed by two men who

flourished their arms about within a few inches of each other’s faces under a

most overpowering sun, for half an hour, without, however, hurting each other

much, though they were exceeding serious and intent. CHuow Rasa Boor then,

dressed in a white robe, ascended a small platform about seven feet from the

ground, and showered, or rather pelted, a largess amongst the people. On the

platform was an artificial bamboo-tree, with perhaps two hundred limes, in each

of which was a small Siamese coin of two or three annas hanging from the

branches, which he pulled off, and with them pelted the people below ;—though

there was, of course, great struggling for the limes, there was little noise, and

not the least quarrelling. CHow-Hova’s wife then begged I would allow the

Burmese to exhibit their dance, and as there were two professed dancers of the

party and one or two musicians anxious to acquire merit by assisting in the

amusement, she was gratified; after which they commenced to drag out the car

with coffin. It was burned with rockets in the same manner as a Pounghee,

692 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

outside the town, about 4 o’clock; most of the wives of the headmen were

present, and the whole of the ceremonies were gone through without quarrel

and in great good humour. The deceased was the same whose house was burnt

during my last visit here, and who sent out to beg me to look through a small

sextant I had beew seen using, and tell him who had stolen a ring he lost on

the occasion. I left the shed when the coffin was moved, and prepared to start

for Zimmay in the morning, congratulating myself in getting off a day sooner

than I had anticipated; but about 9 o’clock, Benya TcHE came out to say

Cuow-tTcHE-WEET begged me to remain one day, as he was anxious to see me

to-morrow before starting for Zimmay. After many complaints of loss of time

and fear of the rains, I was obliged to consent to remain; and on the morning

of the 11th, an officer came out to the encampment to say CHow-TcHE-WEET

wished to see me. I promised to wait on him immediately after breakfast. On

arriving at the house found a large assembly, and the only communication the

old man had to make, was a request to remain till after the new year*, a further

loss of three days. I at first refused, but on his urging his request, and reflect-

ing that nothing would be done at either place during the festival, I agreed to

remain on condition I was not detained here on my return. The Tso-Boa made

some demur, as in duty bound, as a good Buddhist, about the sale of the cattle ;

he was, however, easily satisfied by transferring the sin to the sellers and Coow-

Hova, who sanctioned it. He was as kind as usual, always addressing me as

his ‘‘ luck Chow Engrit,’’ literally, ‘‘ son chief English.’’ He talked of a refer-

ence to Bankok, which I said was unnecessary after the treaty of 1826, and he

was again satisfied. He is quite in his dotage, and repeated the same things

over and over: the people from their respect for him shew him, however, much

consideration. He asked if there was any difference in the value of his presents

and those to the Zimmay chief, and seemed pleased when told that his were the

most valuable.

“« After breakfast, on the 13th, two officers, dressed in white robes used in

religious ceremonies, came out to my tent by the Cuow’s orders, to conduct me

where the ceremony on his grandson entering the priesthood was to be per-

formed. I found a large assembly of people in an old zayat% near the pagoda.

The Cuow was seated on a mat near the centre of the place,—the other chiefs

near him, his wives behind him—all dressed in white. I found a carpet and

pillow for me close to Cuow Raga Boor. A Pounghee was seated in the mid-

dle expounding the law, and Cuow-tTcne-WeerT had told him to continue till

my arrival, as he wished me to see the whole ceremony. As I was told I would

be expected to contribute, I sent the interpreter to the CHow with 10 rupees ;

and he soon afterwards went out to the open space before the zayat to inaugu-

rate the boy (about 7 years of age) in his holy office. The ceremony is the

same as in Burmah and other Buddhist countries, shaving the head, bathing,

investing with the yellow garment. Whilst he was gone, his son told me a

Rahan was also to be raised to the office of high priest, (See-dan)'™; that the

Cuow before investing him with his office asks him if he will obey his lawful -

orders; which being answered in the affirmative, he makes over to him all

* I afterwards learnt that the reason of his requesting me to stop was a fear lest

I should be insulted, or the people get into any quarrel with the Zimmay people,

during the holidays at this joyous season.

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 693

authority over all ranks of the priesthood. The high-priest then asks the

Tso-Boa if he will listen to his intercession in favor of criminals condemned to

death when it shall appear to him that the punishment is too severe for the

offence; to which he assents. On the return of the Tso-Boa to the zayat he

called my interpreter and told him in a whisper the money I had given was too

little for distribution, and desired him to ask me for 13 rupees more; which I

immediately sent. In the meantime, an old priest invoked a blessing on all

present by name, amongst which I discovered my own; and the Sea-dan who has

been raised by the votes of the priests for his strict observance of the precepts

of Budh, promulgated rules and ordinances for their guidance much stricter

than those which have been known here for some years, where the discipline has

been exceeding lax. Sent the interpreter to inquire how the Cuow-Hova,

who had been ill, was, and to request BENyA Paroon!®! to callon me. The

former no better; the latter promised to callin the morning. Benya Patoon

called on me this morning; he is about 50 years of age, and an exceedingly

intelligent person, His father came originally from Pegu to Zimmay with about

3000 other Taliens on the destruction of that city by ALtompra, A. D. 1757.

A short time after their arrival here, an army of Burmans encamped to the

northward with the intention of attacking Zimmay. The Taliens were promised

this,—if they beat off the enemies, they should henceforth live free of taxes.

They attacked them, and were successful, and for a time were well treated; but

in three or four years, when gratitude began to cool, they were taxed without

mercy ; and on any expression of discontent, numbers were executed under pre-

tence of secret conspiracy. The Taliens in fear and disgust removed farther

northward to Keintheu under the Burmese ;—the Benya and some other young

men went afterwards to Ava, from whence he was sent to Keintheu on a royal

message, and with twenty-five others was caught by a slave-catching party, and

from this place sent to Bankok, where he soon came into favor with the king,

who raised him to his present rank, and sent him up here to look after the

Siamese interest at all the three towns. He gives a shocking account of the

brutal rapine, and destructive waste of human life in the petty border-warfare and

slave-catching incursions all along the frontiers, that has kept down population,

laid entirely waste many large towns, and retarded civilization and all the arts

of peaceful life in this unhappy country to a degree that could not be exceeded,

I should hope, in the annals of any portion of Africa. All of this has been

almost entirely put a stop to by our occupation of the provinces on the coast.

He gives a somewhat different version of the Cochin-Chinese war from any I

have heard. He said the Cochin-Chinese endeavoured to save the town of

Wentian'”*, Chandapoora or Lingen, when the Siamese attacked it seven years

ago. The Siamese would not attend to negotiations on the destruction of the

city when horrid cruelty appeared to have been perpetrated. One of the sons

of the king found his way to Hue. The King of Cochin-China'® sent an ambas-

sador to Siam to say the prince had found his way to him; but as he wished to

avoid a war, under certain conditions he would give him up. The Siamese

treacherously murdered his ambassador, saying he had given protection and

encouragement to rebels. The Cochin-Chinese, enraged at this piece of perfidy,

had commenced the war. The latest accounts said the Siamese had the best of

it, and were-east of the Cambodia river.

694 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

‘* Left Laboung this morning (15th), at 6 a. M., and in five hours and a half

reached Zimmay about N. 30° West of the former place. The Mein Neaung

Tso-Boa came to see us off, and brought with him a person sent as a guide,

though many of the people with me were known to be acquainted with the road.

He took us through the fields, a path he evidently did not know himself, under

pretence of breakfast being prepared for the people at some village by the way,

and I ultimately regained the road by the direction of some Talien people we

met. The whole of tbe road lay through a rich and cultivated country, irrigated

by a water-course from the May-ping, the main trunk of which is some seven or

eight miles in Jength, and thirty or forty feet in width, by eight or nine in depth, ©

as far as we travelled along the bank of it. At 8 a. M. came on the banks of the

water-course, and at 10 crossed the May-ping at a ford of considerable breadth,

but at this season only reaching to the poney’s saddle. On the Zimmay side

found some officers waiting to conduct me to the zayat or fay,’ which we found

to be a rattle-trap of a wooden building, forty-five feet by twenty-five, surround-

ed by an eight feet verandah a foot lower, with four small rooms on eacb side,

in which the people were housed. These buildings shut out every breath of

air; which, as the thermometer was 103° at mid-day and 80 at 8 Pp. mM. was any

thing but comfortable. The floor was of split planks laid on without rails or

fastening, and as the people crowded up to look at me, the rattling was unsup-

portable. As I would get no relief from this annoyance by complaint, I was

ultimately obliged to drive them down by force ; after which they did not ven-

ture further than the steps of the zayat. The zayat, which is about a quarter ofa

mile from the town, was surrounded by drunken holiday-making people, singing,

and hallooing, and shouting till about 12 o’clock, one of whom eame elose to

the zayat and abused us. My people pursued him to a neighbouring house,

which I was just in time to prevent them breaking into, and I denounced the

occupier to the police in the morning.

‘¢ On the 16th, the brother-in-law of the Chow-Hovwva and some other officers

paid me a visit of ceremony, bringing a present of rice, sugar-cane, &c. with the

gratulations of the Tso-Boa at my arrival, and expressing his and their good-will

towards the English. They remained about am hour. Before they left, I com-

plained of the annoyance of the rabble, which they promised to remove. The

forcible ejectment of the rabble yesterday left me at tolerable peace to-day tilt

the evening, when the wife of the Ken-Toung Tso-Boa came to visit me, and such

a number of women came under her protection that the floor of one of the

passages gave way with them, but fortunately ne accident occurred. I hear

nothing but complaints on all sides of the raseality of the cattle-merchants

employed by the contractor to buy his cattle. They are old boat lascars, dis-

charged peons, and thieves from the jail, to whom he has had the folly to entrust

more money than they ever saw before. Considering themselves rich, they

have bought wives and slaves, and dissipated part of the money; and as they

cannot return to Maulamyne, they sell the property at what they can get for it.

‘Some of them have picked up the Shan language, and act as interpreters to

strangers arriving from the coast, get their property into their hands and appro-

priate the proceeds. The presents they are enabled to make at this (to them)

cheap rate, and the knowledge of the language, sets them above the fear of

punishment. On the morning of the 17th, in consequence of my complaint of.

-1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 695

yesterday, a person was sent out to keep the people from coming up in the

zayat, and a writer came to hang up a notice to the same effect. I have been

left to myself all day. The poor woman into whose house the person who abused

me on the night of our arrival ran for shelter, came to-day to beg my interces-

sion. Sheis a stranger from Bankok, and, as she could not point out the offender,

is threatened with a fine. As they have shewn a disposition to punish the per-

son, I promised to intercede for her.

At 10 A. mM. on the 18th, CoHow nz nAm Mana Nevt and some other

officers came out to conduct me to the Tso-Boa’s house. They proposed

that I should halt for some time at the court of justice, which was soon

given up on my positive refusal to do so, and I proceeded in the same order

as I had done at Laboung. The Tso-soa came in after a few minutes and

seated himself on a cushion at the foot of the zoyabollen; I was seated im-

mediately in front of him on a pretty large Persian carpet with pillows. I

inquired after his health, age, prosperity, &c. and explained the purport of my

visit to be a wish on our part to cultivate his friendship and open the gold and

silver road, that, as at Laboung, we might exchange our superfluous produce to

mutual advantage, &c. &c. He replied, that to all proper subjects of traffic there

was no restriction. I said I was glad our customs agreed, and hoped that there

would be now no further ebjections to the export of cattle and buffaloes, which

was what we principally wanted from this country. The Cuow-Hova, who as

at Laboung, transacts all the business, and who is said to be the only one opposed

to the trade in cattle, objected on the score of the great mortality which some-

times takes place among them, in which case I observed the price would rise,

and still only surplus cattle would be sold; that I did net urge him to give the

people an order to sell, but permission to do so. He made some objection, half

expressed, on the score of fear of the Nags or presiding spirits of the country.

I pointed out the fact of their being sold to the Red Careens, to which he made

no reply; but, Buddhists as they are, the question of the life or death of the

animal has never been mooted by any one except CHow-TCHE-WEET in trans-

ferring the sin of selling to the Caow-Hova. The Tso-soa then heard the

letter read, ordered in some sweetmeats, desired us his children to continue our

business, and retired on plea of weariness. The hall I was received in, is a brick

building about 100 feet by 50; the walls painted with an extraordinary jumble

of clouds, trees, temples, &c.; on the window-shutters natives of different

countries in the act of salutation. Among others I observed two Europeans in

the costume of the time of George II. Below the windows a sea with boats and

the white umbrella (emblem of royalty) of seven tiers of coarse cotton cloth,

diminishing in size to the top (like an old fashioned dumb-waiter,) was fixed

above the zoyabellen. I did not ascertain what chiefs were present, but the

Tso-soa and the Coow-Hova were the only ones with whom I had any con-

versation. The Tso-Boa is 80 years of age, but looks much more hale and

robust than Cuow-rcue-Weer. He was raised to the Tsoboaship by the king

of Bankok, from his merit as a soldier, though he can neither read nor write,—

a very unusual thing in this country.

“©Qn my way to the fort this morning I called on Cuow-Hova, and found

him as much disposed to be friendly as he had been the reverse on the two

former occasions. He agreed to the trade being perfectly free and unrestricted.

Aig 2

696 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

No duty will be levied on imports. The duties on cattle to be as at Labong :—

elephants one tical ; horses free of duty ; muskets and slaves are alone prohibit-

ed being taken out of the country ;—offenders from Laboung shall be given up,

-and the people of this district harbouring them punished. He said our presents

of muskets was a certain mark of friendship, and that he intended to send fifty

cattle to the Commissioner ; and as I could not take them with me, he request-

ed that I might arrange to leave some one to take charge of them.

‘© 24th. I went to take leave of the Tso-noa, who received me nearly alone

in an outer hall; gave me the letter for the Commissioner, and was most friend-

ly in his professions. His house consists of three wooden ranges of about fifty

feet wide, (their length I could not see,) the brick hall standing across the ends,

in which I was formerly received, and the small one in which I saw him to-day.

Soon after my return to the ¢aydau or zayat, Coow Mauna Neut came with

a message from Cuow-Houa to set my mind at ease regarding the cattle and

trade generally ; that every facility should be given to purchase cattle, and the

trade should be perfectly free and unrestricted ; that it was not becoming to be

bounden by promises, but that we would see hereafter the strength of their friend-

ship. He regretted that he had not seen me on my last visit, that my stay this

time was so short, and requested I would return for a longer stay next fine wea-

ther, &c. &c. I left Zimmay at half past 4 Pp. mM. onthe 24th, and reached La-

bong at 10. The walls of the inner town of Zimmay are 800 fathoms from east

by west and 1000 from north to south, all of brick, and a ditch and rampart

all round. ‘The outer wall, which reaches from the north-east to the south-west

corner, is circular and upwards of 1800 fathoms, one-half of brick, the other of

wood with a rampart round the brick part, and a ditch surrounding the whole.

The ditches when in repair, (which they do not appear to be now,) can be filled

from the river. The town is situated four or five miles from the eastern foot of

the Bya-tha-Dyhk'™ hill, the highest in the range, and between it and the hill is

another small single-walled fort about the size of Labouwng, called Moung-Soon-

dank’, (city of the flower garden.) All the houses in Zimmay above the poor-

est of the people are surrounded by compounds fenced in, in which are cocoanut,

arica, betel, bamboo, and other useful trees, with a great variety of flowers and

flowering shrubs, which are watered by a stream of clear water brought from

the hill. The valley in which this town and Laboung both stand, is little less

than one day from east to west, and little more than three from north to south,

Much of the valley near the town is under cultivation, which is all prepared by

irrigation, and the grain is transplanted, yielding upwards of one hundred-fold,

though the fields are never left fallow.”’

Dr. R. quitted Laboung on the 29th. On the 9th May the rains

set in, and continued almost without intermission during the remain-

der of his journey. He arrived at Maulamyne on the 21st May,

suffering greatly from the exposure ; most of his followers ill, (sever-

al of them died shortly after,) and the elephants completely knocked

up by the difficulties of the road.

DR. RICHARDSON’S THIRD VISIT, 1835.

Dr. R. was directed on this occasion to extend his visits to some

of the other Shan States, and also to th® tribe of Red Kaffens'™ on the

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 697

west bank of the Salween, who, sometime previous, had sent a mes-

sage to Maulamyne to say they should be glad to see an European

officer in their country, and to open an intercourse with us.

Dr. R. started on the 29th December, and arrived at Laboung on

the 26th January, 1835. Here he found that his old friend the

“‘ CHow-tcoHE-Weet,” or ‘ Lord of Life,” was dangerously ill. The

old man received him, however. Dr. R. says—‘‘ On entering his

house, I found the chiefs and elders assembled and a curtain across

the room. After some conversation, chiefly regarding the war to

the eastward and the great blessings conferred on this country by

our occupation of the Provinces, the curtain was drawn aside, and

showed us the poor old man evidently on his death-bed, with his

children and grand-children around him. He spoke but little ; said he

was glad to see me again, and handled one of the muskets I had

brought with me to present to him.”

After staying a few days at Laboung, Dr. R. proceeded to Zimmay.

Here he had some long discussions with the Cuow-Houa of that

place relative to some impediments and restrictions he had placed on

the trade in cattle, and to some late attempts on the part of the fron-

tier Shan petty chiefs to levy tribute on the Kayens residing on our

side the boundary river. These matters were, however, amicably

adjusted, and much kindness and attention were shown him. It was

the period of an annual festival, for which he was urgently pressed

to stay. He says—

‘¢ One of the amusements at this festival was the letting off of large rockets—

each rocket being honored with some name, and supposed to appertain to some

chief or great personage. One was appropriated to me; and my coolies and

servants being joined by a number of Maulamyne traders then in the place, who

entered into the spirit of the thing, my rocket was well attended to the ground

with dancing and singing, to the delight of the Shans, to whom Burmese music

and dancing was quite a novelty. The rockets were all of wretched construc-

tion, but it so happened that mine performed its duty in a style infinitely supe-

rior to any on the ground; and such is the superstition of these people, that I

feel confident this incident has made an impression on their minds of the supe-

riority of our nation which will not easily be effaced.’’

Here Dr. R. met a large portion of the annual caravan of Chinese

traders, of whom he says—

“¢ At Zimmay I found the caravan of Chinese traders, consisting of 200 mules

and horses. Three hundred more were said to be at Moungnan, where cotton is

abundant. They had arrived in the country a considerable time before me, and

were preparing shortly to return home. If had a good deal of conversation with

the two heads of the caravan, who seemed to be intelligent, enterprizing charac-

ters. They said they had long entertained the idea of visiting Maulamyne; and

now that they were invited to do so, and were assured of protection, they would

698 An account of some of the Petty States LNov.

undoubtedly do so next season ; the present one being too far advanced to allow

of their increasing their distance from home. They requested that an interpreter

should meet them at Zimmay ;—and from their repeated requests that he should

be at Zimmay in all November, in order to accompany them down, I feel con-

vinced these people will be at Maulamyne before the end of the year. With the

chiefs I found no difficulty whatever in obtaining their consent to their passing

through the country: no objection was ever hinted, nor have I reason to expect

that any will hereafter arise. L

‘¢ The imports by these caravans consist of copper and iron vessels, silk, (raw

and manufactured,) satins, gold and silver thread and lace, musk, walnuts, car-

pets, and vermilion. They export from the Shan country cotton, ivory, skins,

horns, &c. &c. From the information which I could collect, the caravan assem-

bled at Moungkoo, distant from Zimmay about two months’ journey. Their goods

are conveyed by mules, and they would appear to travel rapidly ; as they asserted

they would not be more than twelve days from Zimmay to Maulamyne*. They

allow nething to detain them on their journeys. Ifa man fall sick, or is dis-

abled, he is left behind ; and if one dies, they do not even stop to bury him, but

cover his body with a cloth and continue their route.’’

Dr. R. left Zimmay on the 23rd February for Lagon,'” a town

he had not hitherto visited. The following is his route :—

693rd. Direction S. 65 E. Distance, 54 miles.

‘“‘ Started at 1 p.m. and reached Paboung!® at 3.30. This is a small

village of only twenty-four houses, but the Thongyee, or head-man, has altoge-

ther about three hundred houses under his jurisdiction. The road was level,

through paddy fields, intersected by small slips of jungle.

“© 24th. Direction S. 20 E. Distance, 16% miles.

“Left Paboung at 7.35, At 9 crossed the May-quang, which runs past

Laboung and falls into the Moypiny to the southward. At 11. 40 we halted at

the village of Ma-wan-tchay'®. The road throughout the day was good and

pleasant ; considerable cultivation, and the inhabitants numerous. The people of

the village where we have halted are all captives from Mein Neaung, who, never

having seen an European, were very curious, but, at the same time, exceedingly

civil and hospitable, having provided a dinner for my followers. An old man of

the village remarked to me, after we had been encamped a few minutes only,

that a Burman chief, travelling as I was doing, would ere this have tied up and

flogged some of them to shew his authority, and that neither he nor his father had

ever heard of a person travelling through a country merely to make friends. He

wished J would open the road to his native place of Mein Neaung.

‘© 25th. Direction S. 20 E. Distance, 13 miles.

‘¢ The road to-day was through a teak forest and over several small hills lying

from afew yards to a mile distant from each other. Our guide to-day was a

Doctor, who was quite an amateur in his profession, and spread out all his me-

dicines under a tree and began prescribing gratis for our people. He had in his

store of medicine the thigh-bone of a dog, the jaw of a monkey, the vertebre of

* A small party of them have since arrived at Maulamyne in company with

the men sent to meet them. They made the march in 15 days and express

themselves satisfied with the market here.

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 699

a fish, part of a grinder of an elephant, the fore-tooth of a rhinoceros, some

bone ofa turtle, and two or three pieces of broken china. The rest of his collec-

tion consisted of little bits of sticks, and roots of all colors, to the number of

two hundred and eighty-one, (I had the curiosity to count them,) the names and

virtues of all which he professed to show. Not the least curious part of the

collection was his mortar or substitute for one ; it was a turned wooden bowl

ten inches in diameter, with a handle to it, and inside opposite the handle a piece

of coarse flinty sandstone fixed with lac about four inches square, and sloping

towards the bottom of the bowl : on this the various articles are ground down,

in sometimes a quart of water if the patient is very ill.

‘© 26th. Direction 8S. 70 E. Distance, 16 miles.

‘¢ The road to-day was very tortuous and in some parts steep and rocky. No

inhabitants or cultivation were to be seen.

‘6 27th. Direction East. Distance, 15 miles.

‘ Started at 7 a.m. March lay along a good road in the jungle till 8. 30

when we passed a last year’s clearing with buffaloes and other signs of inhabited

country. At 8. 45. crossed the Maytan'!®, a considerable stream in the

rains, now not ancle-deep, and on the eastern bank at Ban-hang-sat'', a

village of some size ;—found they had received orders to have breakfast ready

for the people, which was fortunate, as there was not rice for half of them at

starting, Here we halted fifty minutes under the tamarind trees, whence two

hours marching brought us to Boutwe,!2 on the banks of a stream of the

same name about the size of the Maytan. The road has been good throughout

and the country level. The people of this village have orders to supply us with

every thing, and take us into the town to-morrow ; they brought out dinner for

the people soon after our arrival,—rice and vegetable stews, ready cooked, each

house furnishing a portion, as is the custom in Burmah. These were brought

out by the women of the village, young and old ; the former, as usual, uncovered

to the waist, and finer busts are not to be found in the world, and many of them

fair as Europeans.

‘28th. Direction S. 70 E. Distance, 4 miles.

“* Reached Lagon at 8.20 a.m. There are three towns close together, two

on the north and one on the south side of the river Moy-Wang, ''3 in the

last of which most of the chiefs live. The river between the towns has a course

nearly east and west, and, dividing, forms a little sandy island nearer the south

side, on which sheds had been prepared for our reception. The whole breadth

of the river is about one hundred and forty-seven paces, but at this season there

are only two small streams near each bank about knee-deep. During the rains

even, it is seldom full, and consequently for the greater part of the year is not

navigable for boats of any size. Neither is it favorable for purposes of irriga-

tion, and as the rains are often insufficient, it is a far less favorable site fora

town than Laboung or Zimmay, though containing an equally numerous popula-

tion. As the trees in the town and neighbourhood are luxuriant, and the soil

generally appears productive, it is probably the fault of the people themselves

that provisions are scarce.’’

The following are Extracts from Dr. R.’s Journal during his stay at

Lagon.

700 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

‘3rd March. Visited several of the chiefs to-day. They all expressed them-

selves most friendly to us, and spoke openly of a different feeling existing at

Zimmay. As my visit was entirely conciliatory, I avoided the subject, merely

saying, that we were grateful to our friends, and that I believed the general feel-

ing of the people of Zimmay was friendly towards us, in which they agreed, and

said they saw I was aware where the bad feeling lay. I spent several hours

with the several chiefs, and altogether passed a very pleasant day, owing to their

kind reception and the absence of all ceremony.

‘‘ 4th. Went over to one of the towns on the north side of the river to visit

a chief residing there. The whole of the town is enclosed within old walls,

the river face of which is mud, the remainder brick, but in a very ricketty con-

dition. The paths from one house to another, which are all far apart, are

more like the paths ina common village than the streets of the town.

““ 8th. There are fewer elephants here than at Zimmay. The king of Siam

called for a return of these animals last year, when three hundred were found

here and near one thousand at Zimmay, large and small. I learn that there are

no taxes on specific articles here. Every cultivator, without exception, at the

close of the harvest, pays into the Government granary a quantity of grain equal

to what he may have sown, and each house pays half a tical of coarse silver on

account of sacrifices to the Nats, or protecting spirits of the country. These

sacrifices are another name for public feasts as the buffaloes, pigs &c., toge-

ther with the spirits that are provided, are consumed by the people. The land

is the property of him who clears it, and any one may cultivate unoccupied

land, provided he pays the accustomed contribution to the public granary. The

person so clearing and cultivating land may dispose of it in any way he likes,

and cannot be arbitrarily dispossessed of it by the chiefs, as in Burmah the peo-

ple are glad to place themselves under the protection of some chief and become

followers of his family. They work for him, and are often sent by him on trad-

ing excursions, receiving occasionally a portion of the profits.

‘(10th. Received a visit from No. 1 wife of the Caow-Hova, accompanied

by her two daughters and several female attendants. She says she will be

obliged to leave her daughters behind when she accompanies her husband to

Bankok, (whither all the chiefs are bound, on the occasion of CHow-TcHI-WEET’S

death,) as the king might take a fancy for one of them. This, she said, would

be all very well for a year or two, after which she would be discarded and neg-

lected, and then her life would be one of misery.”’

Dr. R. left Lagon on the 10th March, and arrived at Laboung on

the 13th, a distance of 44 miles ; direction N. 70 W.

‘‘ Here I found the chiefs of all the associated States, assembled to perform

the funeral rites over the body of Cuow-rtcne-Weet, the acknowledged head of

their family. I had to enter into long and disagreeable discussions relative to

the three elephants which had been stolen at Maulamyne on several occasions,

and which had been traced to Laboung and the thieves discovered. The diffi-

culty arose from the thieves being proteges or dependents of Cuow-Hova of

Eaboung, who alone opposed restitution of the property, or the punishment of

the thieves. I at last threatened, that unless I could report that this business

was satisfactorily settled, it would be referred to Bankok. This alarmed them

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 701

as, under present circumstances, they must deprecate any reference against them

to the king of Siam, who might take advantage of the opportunity to place a

stranger in the situation of the deceased chief. Still the settlement was put off

till the arrival of the chief of Zimmay, who had returned to his town for a few

days, and I was obliged to quit without knowing the result of their deliberation.

I learnt, however, by a messenger who met me on my return from the Red

Kayens, that the affair had been terminated to the satisfaction of the owners of

the elephants, who had accompanied me from Maulamyne.

‘* At this assembly the chiefs seemed on very bad terms with each other, and

their deliberations were conducted with much acrimony, and on one occasion

with personal violence. The Cuow-Hova of Laboung appeared to have given

general dissatisfaction, though he again was full of complaints against the others.

This mutual bad feeling was shewn in the inditing of the letter brought by me

from the chiefs of Laboung. I was informed by one of them, that when it was

read to Cuow-Hova, he ordered kis name to be struck out without assigning

any reason. When I called on him to bid him farewell, I asked him why he had

done this. He begged me to be assured that no disrespect was intended by it ;

that the letter had been written without, in the least, consulting him ; and though

it was a very good letter, yet he declined to have his name in it under such cir-

cumstances. He then went on to say, that the death of the old man, whose

obsequies they were then celebrating would, he feared, be the cause of much

evil and misery to the country, owing to their own dissensions.

«¢ Having at last obtained the letter, and having been furnished with an order

for guides from the frontier to the Red Kayen country, I left Ladoung on the

25th March.”’

The route usually travelled from Laboung and Zimmay to the coun-

try of the Red Kayens on the west bank of the Salween, is through

Mein-loon-gyee, towards which Dr. R. bent his course and arrived on

the 3lst March. Here he remained one day in order to procure rice

and other articles for himself and followers during the remainder of

the journey, as no villages would be fallen in with for some days.

“« April 2nd. Direction N. 15 W. Distance 15 miles.

‘¢ The road lay generally along the banks of the Mein-loon-gyee river, cross-

ing occasionally from one side to the other and through a magnificent teak-

forest.

‘‘ 3rd. Direction N. 39 W. Distance, 20 miles,

‘¢ The road much the same as yesterday’s march. Crossed the river twelve

times during the day with the water sometimes over the saddle flaps.

“4th. Direction N. 75 W. Distance, 17 miles.

‘« Left the Mein-loon-gyee to the eastward, and proceeded along a road of

much more rugged character, up a small stream which we crossed seventy or

eighty times. The hills are here more close and precipitous, but the tops of

many of them are cleared for grain cultivation, the only sign of the country

being inhabited. Met fifteen elephants returning from the country we are about

to visit, with stick-lac.

‘5th. Direction S. 80 W. Distance, 12 miles.

‘« Crossed the highest part of this range at 7 a. M. from whence the water

702 An account of some of the Petty States [Nov.

runs westward into the Salween and eastward into the Mein-loon-gyee. The

road to-day has been the worst we have travelled ; the hills very trying to the

elephants, and the stony banks of the streams to the horses’ feet. Met two

poor little children recently purchased from the Red Kayens; one for six bul-

locks ; and the other, a very interesting child, about 7 years of age, for 10.

‘¢ 6th. Direction W. Distance, 11 miles.

‘¢ First part of the road over a steep hill; remainder over low land covered

with grass, formerly cultivated.

““ 7th. Direction W. N. W. Distance, 15 miles.

‘¢ First part of the road the same as the last of yesterday’s, along low reedy

ground, following the course of an inconsiderable stream. At 8. 30 came to a

pass between two hills, which, in case of attack, is defended by the Kayens by

_ securing large stones with ratans and bamboo work on the tops of the hills ;—

the ratans are cut, and the stones roll down on the invaders. It is about one-

fifth of a mile in length.

‘8th. Direction W. N. W. Distance, 12 miles.

‘‘ The country more level, with some occasional clearings and a few heuses.

The jungle to-day was unusually alive with pheasants, pea-fowl, partridges, &e.

‘9th. Direction W. Distance, 14 miles.

‘‘ The country of the same character as yesterday. Halted on the banks of

the Salween about four hundred yards wide, running a rapid stream in a narrow

valley or ravine, except at the small plain where we are encamped, and another

on the opposite side on which stands the village of Banong 1°8 or Yougong, con-

sisting of about twenty-five houses, having the appearance of a common Burman

village. Met 20 or 30 bullocks to-day with stick-lac and eight slaves en route

to the Shan country, making in all fifteen since leaving Laboung. One family of

four were bought for ten bullocks, the father and mother and two children two

and three years of age. There are some others for sale at the village. In the even-

ing the son of PHA-BuHO, one of the chiefs of the Red Kayens, an exceedingly dirty,

stupid-looking lad of about 18 or 20, came over with a relation whois headman

of the village. They appeared to have some difficulty in making up their minds

who was the proper representative of the tribe. At last it was decided that PHa-

BONG was too young and comes to PHA-BuHO to consult on state matters ; and

that as Pua-BuHo was the person who sent the message last year, it is deter-

mined I shall go to him. He resides three days’ journey on the other side of

the river. There have been about fifty or sixty Kayens about my tent this after-

noon, (none of them appeared to come avowedly as the young gentleman’s at-

tendants ;) they do not differ at all in personal appearance from the common

Kayens of the hills, except that they are perhaps less good-looking. Their

dress consists of a pair of short trowsers of generally red (particularly the

chief’s), colored cotton of domestic manufacture, comiug about half way down

the thigh, and every one had either a piece of book muslin or an English cotton

handkerchief round his head.

“10th. Waited some time for the boats. At last the young lad of yesterday

crossed over, and on my interpreter complaining to him of the delay, he said

the Kayens were never ina hurry. He succeeded, however, in getting them at

12 o’clock, and every thing was crossed over that evening. We were in appre-

hension of a scarcity of provisions, as the old head-man of the village declined

1836.] lying north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 703

supplying any. P#HA-BHo’s son however, procured some rice ; as to eggs or

fowls, they were out of the question.

11th. Direction N. W. Distance, 9 miles.

‘« The road to-day was either rocky or covered with round water-worn pebbles,

and lay among low rocky hills scantily covered with vegetation and stunted

scattered trees. PHA-BHO’S son was engaged in eating a buffaloe, which he had

sacrificed to the Nats, and did not accompany us. He sent a guide, however,

and is to follow us to-morrow,

“12th. Direction W. N. W. Distance, 15 miles.

‘* First part of the road rocky and bad as yesterday, but the latter part more

level and less stony. Passed one or two small villages, around which was

a little of the most slovenly cultivation, chiefly cholum. Halted at the village

of Bantoe,'” of about thirty houses under the nephew of the last PHa-Bane

(a chief’s title). At this village there was a poor woman brought in two days ago,

from a party of about three hundred people seized by PHA-BHoNG from the

village of Tongpak '°° (Burman Shans) which they left a smoking ruin a few days

ago. The story which she told in the fullness of her grief is replete with all the

horrors that are attendant on such diabolical scenes. The Kayens attacked the

village, it appears, with bravery, (but the Shams are cowards,) and her husband

was cut to pieces in her arms, and she kicked by the savages from his bleeding

body. Many of the Kayens were killed, but they succeeded in carrying off all

the inhabitants. She saw her two daughters in their rapid flight, but was sepa-

rated from them two days ago. The respectable individual at the head of this

village took her as his tenth of the captives taken by his people. She does not

know where her daughters are carried to. What adds to the helplessness of

her situation, is that she is far gone with child, and is the only one of her

village here.

‘¢ 13th. Direction N. W. Distance, 14 miles.

‘¢ Reached Pua-suo’s residence (called Dwon Talwee) ''° to-day after travel-

ling over a succession of hills on the worst possible road.

‘© 14th. Sent into the village to say I wished to-day to deliver the letter

and presents from the Commissioner, and PHa-BHo requested me to come when

T felt inclined to do so. I accordingly went in after breakfast about two hun-

dred yards to the village, which consists of seventy houses in the worst Burman

style, the chief’s much the same as the rest, but made of wood split and fastened

together by wooden pegs. There is a sort of open verandah, if it maybe so

styled, without a roof, at which we arrived by a rough sort of wooden ladder of

six or eight steps, all of which were loose. Here we stooped under the roof

which reaches within four feet of the verandah or platform of loose boards, and

two paces brought us into the door of his Majesty’s mansion, from which one

step landed us to the royal presence. This, however, I did not for some time

discover, as the door at which I entered was the only opening in the room, or

rather house, except the crevices between the boards, so that for some minutes

after entering it was perfectly dark. I could absolutely see nothing but a little

bit of fire that was in the middle of the floor. I seated myself on a carpet, and

the people groped their way in with the presents, and after sitting a few minutes

I was able to distinguish by degrees objects in the room ; not, however, so as

to have recognised the old gentleman if I had met him ten minutes afterwards

4y¥2

704 An account of some of the Petiy States [Nov.

in the day-light. I told him I had come as he had requested, and as the Com-

missioner of Maulamyne had promised last year, from whom I had brought a

letter and presents, and wished to open the gold and silver road between us, and

be friends with the Kayen nation, &c. &c. He gave me an opportunity of talk-

ing, as he said nothing for a quarter of an hour. At last he requested to have

the letter read and explained, which was done. He then said his object in re-

questing an officer to visit him was to know if the English would form an alli-

ance with him,—for the purpose of making war on the Burmans! I declin-

ed the honor of a warlike alliance, but told him our views were all peaceable,

and that we never made war unless injured, when vengeance was instantaneous.

I begged his protection for our traders, &c. &c. &c. He said if we would not

make war along with him, he must make friends with us, nevertheless ; but that

war with the Burmaus was his object in asking a visit, and that he would send

for some chiefs from Ngoay Doun, and make known my visit, and the wish for a

friendly intercourse. He promised his protection to traders, and was as friend-

ly as possible. By this time I could see the size of the room—it was about

thirty feet by forty, and a bow end where the door entered. The fire was in the

middle of the room on a little square place insulated from the floor, being

raised an inch or two from it and supported from below, the roof splendidly

varnished with soot. The old man was alone when I went in; the room was,

however, soon crowded, but their whole demeanour was civil and respectful,—

very different from what the Zimmay chiefs wished me to believe. In the even-

ing the old man’s factotum came out to beg me to delay six or eight days, which

I declined, and begged to be dismissed on the 17th. This old man, who is an

up-country Shan, after giving a splendid account of the numbers of the Kayens

and size of their towns, said some of their towns had four hundred houses, and the

country was six days’ Journey from north to south, and four from east to west.

Pua-BHO discourages men-catching, but the people pay no regard to his coun-

sels; There is something like law amongst them ; for, on inquiring the cause

of the firing of muskets that took place this morning, I was told it was a robber

who had been ransomed by his friends for two ketsees |!' (copper drum, a sort

of gong) and 100 tickals coarse silver. Found our height by the thermometer

to-day to be 1021 feet. The flat on which we are encamped, and on which the

village is situated, is about 610 paces wide and 600 or 650 long. There is

another about 600 feet higher of the same size, and still further up is a third

platform 2049 feet above the sea and about two miles square, perfectly level, with

rich soil, all under cultivation, watered by two streams which rush down the

perpendicular face of the mountain from above and irrigate the two lower plat-

forms. The mountain is of limestone, and its steepest acclivity appears to be

on this side, though the presence of the beautiful stream on this face would in-

dicate the country.

seen by day-light. The only indications of his chieftainship were a gold sword

and a silver betel-box, both of which he carried himself, and his only attendant

was the old Shan mentioned yesterday. He was as silent as before for some-

time. He at last began to speak, and continued talking for about an hour of

the origin of the human race, to prove what I had said (on his questioning) that

the English were the most powerful nation in the world, to be incorrect, or at

1836. ] Iging north of the Tenasserim Provinces. 705

least uncertain. The pith of his story was, that we were all originally descend-

ed from PHA-BEE, a lady wlio lived at Ava. Who our other venerable progeni-

tor was, he did not know, or how the lady happened to come into the world :

however, she had three sons, the elder the father of the Chinese, the second of

the Kulas (all people pot Chinese, Shans, Burmans, or Kayens), and the third

of the Kayens. Of the country from which these ancient gentlemen obtained

helpmates, he was ignorant. This story was altogether imperfect, and the in-

terpreter a wretched one. However, there is a pagoda some days from this to

the northward, on which no nation has yet appeared with sufficient power to

put the Tee 1! or ornamental covering, on the top ; but there is to be a great

feast and gathering of all the nations to take place, which he expects every day

to be called to attend, when this will be achieved, and a Natthamee, or female

spirit, will descend, to whom the Chinese, Kulas, and Kayens will each believe

their claims equal, and will fight till they are up to the knees in blood. The

demi-goddess will then inquire what is the matter. On its being explained, she

will end the contest by espousing the chief who can draw her sword : it will

then be known which is chief amongst nations, till which time he will not be-

lieve that we are much more powerful than the great nations named above, espe-

cially the Chinese. The magnificence of my tent and brass-bound bullock

trunks had, however, their weight with him. He did me the honor to remain

four of the longest hours I have spent amongst many very protracted ones

in my present mission. He, however, as an equivalent, promised his protection

to traders from Maulamyne and to people (Chinese included) from the northward,

but was afraid they would not find provisions, which will be somewhat difficult,

even if he has sufficient influence with his savages to prevent their molesting

them. Some of our traders from Maulamyne came in to-day (ten) who had gone

into the Shan territories subject to Ava to the north-east, where they had dis-

posed of their cotton goods to some profit in exchange for horses. They met

the Chinese traders who annually visit the town of Mank Maie '°, (which is only

four days’ journey from this,) who had expressed a wish to come to Maulamyne,

and probably would accompany any of our people who may be there in proper

time next year, unless deterred by the terror with which these detestable savages

have inspired their neighbours, though Iam convinced they are equally despi-

cable and detestable.

‘16th. Several of the head people came out to the tent this morning, and

in the evening I went to take leave of the head-man. They were vociferously

discussing the propriety of returning a present to the Commissioner. As soon

as I could obtain a hearing, I repeated all I had previously said about the

traders, and was begged to explain to the traders coming here that they must not

take forcibly what did not belong to them ; they promising to do all on their part

to protect them if their conduct was correct, but could not be answerable for of-

fences beyond their jurisdiction. They would tell them where they might go with

safety ; if they went beyond that, it must be at their own responsibility. The

discussions were renewed more loudly than before, and I took my departure with

a head-ache, partly from the noise, partly from the vile smell of the house, As

the grand distinction between the chief and others is his not eating rice, the half

of the room was filled with yams, some growing, some putrid and _ highly offensive

After I had returned some time, the old Shan came out and said, the chief wish

706 An account of some of the Petty States, &c. [Nov.

ed to know distinctly if we considered him our debtor for the things I had given,

as he feared it might be brought against his children or grand-children ; which

is by no means a groundless fear amongst themselves, for I saw on my first visit

to Zimmay a little child who had been seized and sold by a creditor for a debt

contracted by his grandfather for a gong. TI assured him his fears were perfectly

groundless, and explained what was usual in other countries. He wished me to

remain tomorrow, on the chance of his getting a horse to return for the presents.

As we have the greatest difficulty in getting—in fact cannot get—rice, and should

we be caught by the rains on this side of the eastern hills, we shall be obliged to

halt without provisions till they are passable, I intimated my positive inten-

tion to start with the moon-light early in the morning to save the elephants

crossing the hills in the heat of the day.

“17th. Last night at 11 o’clock the old Shan came out according to his

promise, bringing a letter for the Commissioner written on two shabby leaves of

an old Burman black book, and a little pony, for which my servant had been

bargaining in the course of the day ; its price was about forty-five rupees. I

believe a man from Maulamyne who was robbed and is now seeking justice here,

was the writer of the letter ; and as they have no written character of their own,

it was written in Burmese.’’

Dr. R. quitted Daung Talwee this day, and arrived at Maulamyne on

the 10th May, having returned through Mein-loon-gyee by the route

already described. He thus sums up the result of his last mission :—

‘« T need not descant upon the great importance of opening a market with the

frontiers of China for British goods by means of the caravans of Chinese traders.

It is probable that on the first visit of these people to Maulamyne their numbers

will be few, but when once aware of the safety and freedom from all vexations and

exactions with which their visits will be attended, and of the extensive market

existing for their goods, I think there can be no doubt we shall see them here

in future years in great numbers. I learnt from the people, and also from other

quarters during my travels, that no difficulty would exist in our traders visiting

the frontier towns of China. The Chinese asserted there were no guards and

no restrictions in their towns, and a person of some rank at Labon pressed me to

accompany him next year on a trading expedition in that direction. I cannot

but think this subject is worthy the consideration of Government ; and should

any thing of the kind be deemed advisable, I should be most happy to offer my

services.

‘« An extensive opening for our inland trade has been made by securing the

good-will towards us of the Red Kayens, and it is possible that the intercourse

with these people now commenced may lead eventually towards their civilization,

and that our influence with them may hereafter be successfully exerted in putting

an end to their system of kidnapping and selling their neighbours which now

forms their, I may say, sole occupation. I learnt that from three to four hun-

dred unfortunate beings are annually caught by these people, and sold by them

into perpetual slavery. I met many of them on my journey,—some just pur-

chased, others on their way to be sold.

‘The kind feeling of our north-eastern Shan neighbours towards us, have

been increased by my late visit. The mixture of firmness and conciliation which

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bamidn. 707

I had it in my power to exhibit towards them on the points discussed, has tended

to convince them that we are firm and consistent friends, not desirous of aggran-

dizing ourselves at their expence, but at the same time not to be imposed on or

trifled with.’’

ee ee ae aT

III.—Notes on the Antiquities of Buimiin. By C. Masson.

Bémidn is situated in one of the Paropamisan valleys, distant about

80 or 85 miles from Cabiél, bearing N. 75 W. The valley is deep,

the enclosing hills on either side exhibiting, to a greater or less ex-

tent, perpendicular walls of rock, whence their convenience and

adaptation for the construction of caves. The rock is called Mung,

being a conglomerate of small pebbles, sand and divers colored earth,

remarkably compact and “hard. The length of the valley is about

nine or ten miles, in direction from east to west. Its breadth is

inconsiderable, but greatest at the particular spot in it, pre-eminently

called Bdmidn, and where the statues and principal caves are found.

At this point also the streams of Siirkh Dur, and Jui Folidé, by their

junction, form what is called the river of Bamidu, which flowing east-

ward down the valley, receives at Zohdk the waters of Kali, after

which winding to the westward of Irak, Bibilak, Shibr, Bitchilik, &c..

and augmented by their rivulets, eventually escapes from the hills,

and passing Ghori falls into the river of Kunduz.

The appellation Bamidn may perhaps be equivalent to high region

in contradistinction to Damidn or Damdn, the low region, or that at

the skirts of the hilis—‘< Bam’’ signifies ‘“ roof,’ and when it is

remembered that Asiatic roofs are flat, as are in general the summits

of the mountains in this part of the country, we are at no loss to

account for the name, once probably universally applied to it, though

now retained by a particular locality ;—-and when we further consider

its elevation above the surrounding regions, we may admit the figura-

tive and emphatic interpretation of Bamidn, as afforded by some of

’ the inhabitants, who render it the ‘“‘ roof of the universe.”’

The mountains among which Bdmidn is situate, are no doubt those

designated by the Greek historians and geographers Paropdmisus,

as opposed to the true Indian Caucasus or Hindu Kosh, from which

they are distinct. The term has been cavilled at, but without justice.

It was no creation of the Greeks, but the native name for the hills ;

nor need we doubt this, when we find it made up of par and

pdm, signifying “hill” and “ flat.” Paropdmisus may therefore

be translated the region of flat summitted hills, and is a term peculi-

arly appropriate to the countries on which it was conferred. Know-

708 Notes on the Antiquities of Bamian. [Noy.

ing the etymology of Paropamisus, we learn that of Pamir, the lord

of hills.

The principal antiquities of Bamidn are its idols and caves, which

have manifestly a connection with each other,—the castle of Zohak,

so called—and the remains of the city and citadel of Ghiulghileh.

The evidences of Ghulghileh are numerous and extensive, proving

that it must have been an important city. Refraining from specula-

tion as to its origin, we know from authentic history that it was de-

stroyed by Gencuiz Kun in 1220, A.D. The natives of Bamidn have

a tradition, that it was re-edified, and again fell into decay—which is

probable, there being many Muhammedan tombs referring to it,

which have a less antiquity than six centuries, if painted glazed tiles

to be seen in them, were confined to China,euntil the era of GENGHIz

KuAn, as supposed by some authors. The most striking of the re-

mains of Ghilghéleh is the citadel or place, the walls of which

encompass an isolated eminence.

The fortress of Zohak, so called by the natives and by Asut Fazin,

occurs at the eastern extremity of the valley, where the rivulet of

Kali falls into the river of Bamédn. We have not inspected it with

sufficient attention, to decide upon its character, or to venture to

advance an opinion on it, which future research may controvert—we

therefore merely observe that, agreeing with Asun Fazrz as to its

antiquity, we differ both from his notion and that sanctioned by

tradition that it was a place of defence.

The caves of Bdmtdn are found in the cliffs or perpendicular fronts

of the hills on either side of the valley, and on the northern side

they uninterruptedly occur for a distance of six or seven miles. At

the spot called Bumidn, the elevation of the cliffs, being most consi-

derable, there are found the greater number of caves, or samuches as

called in these countries, congregated as in a focus. Among these

caves stand in niches the two large idols long known in Europe, and

between them are two other niches, in one of which are the fragments

of a former idol, and the other as certainly once contained one. Op-

posite to these, diverging to the south-west is the valley through

which flows the rivulet of Jui Foldd/, and eastward of the citadel of

Ghilghileh is a valley stretching to the south—the hills to the north

and east of both these valleys are also perforated with caves, and

among those of the latter is a large idol inferior only in size to the

two superior ones at Bdmidn.

The idols are cut or hewn in the rock, and have been covered with

a surface of cement. They are erect figures, with their hands extend-

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bamian. 709

ed, and supporting the folds of drapery with which they have been

clothed. Their features have been destroyed, by removing one-half

of their heads, or as far as the lips, leaving the hinder halves with

the ears, enormously large, appended*.

The work of mutilation was one of some labor, and having been

executed with precision, will have been directed by authority, possibly

by that of the Arabian conquerors. A subsequent and less systema-

tic mutilation has been practised on the idols, by breaking off their

hands, and fracturing their legs, for the merits of which Juneniz,

Timvu’r, AURANGzE’B, and even Timu’R SHdu Dv’Rrsnni’, who are all

accused, may dispute.

The idols stand in vast niches formed in the rock, whose sides on a

level with the necks of them have been embellished with paintings.

These consist of busts and seated figures, both male and female. The

niche of the superior idol has on each side a line of twelve female

figures, and, what is of great importance, at its summit, over the idol’s

head, is an inscription, obviously intended to unravel the mystery.

The niche in which stands the second idol in importance has no

inscription, but on either side has lines of twelve male and female

busts, among which is one so valuable that we need not regret the

absence of a literal testimony ; over the head of this idol is a painted

full length female figure. The niches of the other idols are also

embellished with paintings.

On either side of the niches are series of stairs, cut in the rock,

‘which conduct to their summits or to the heads of the idols—each

series of steps leads to a small square apartment, and these several

apartments have been superbly decorated with gilding and lapis lazuli.

To illumine these passages, apertures have been cut through the rock

towards the idols. We ascended to the summit of the second idol by

the passage on the one side, and walking round the hinder part of its

head, descended by the steps on the other side. Near the summit or

above the lines of paintings the niches have been widened, and on

either side has been formed a ¢akht or sofa, obviously for the conve-

nience of sitting upon. The superior idol has or had the same facili-

ties of ascent to the summit, but at the time of our visit the lower

caves near it were occupied by an unaccommodating Tajik, who had

stowed in the passage his stock of provender. We could not prevail

upon him by menace or entreaty to open the path, and he evasively

affirmed that he had never heard of one. We did not insist with him,

relying upon making a further visit, which until now has not happen-

* See a sketch of them published with Lieut, Burnes’ Description, J. A, S.

vol. ii. 561.

710 Notes on the Antiquities of Bdmian. (Nov.

ed. It is a great point to gain these upper stations, as from them may

be profitably inspected the paintings.

Between the legs of the superior idol are entrances conducting into

spacious apartments surmounted with domes—and there are many

other caves at Bdmidn which display the dome or cupola :—these we

imagine to have been particularly temples. They, in common with all

other caves, were covered with cement, in which the lines of moulding

surrounding their circumferences, with the ornaments at the summits

of the domes, have been formed. The interiors of all of them are of a

glossy black color, from the smoke of fires which were or have beenkept

up in them. Many of the caves at Bdmidn are remarkable for their

dimensions, and have other peculiarities in their form and embellish-

ments. The most curious are found above the superior idol, but in

another cliff rising backward; so that in walking from them to the

front or south, we reach the edge of the perpendicular wall of rock

in which that sculpture is carved. In these caves we saw the names

written with charcoal of W. Moorcrorr, W. Tresecx, and G.

Guturiz! They are gained by an ascent a little to the left or west

of the idol.

There can be little doubt but that of the vast number of caves,

which do not terminate in cupolas, many were the residences of the

priests connected with temples ; others may have been the abodes of

ascetics or monastic classes; and as we find in Afghanistan that the

cave is invariably the companion of the sepulchral tumulus, without

reference to its nature, or whether it be a tomb or cenotaph, we may

suppose the majority of the excavations at Bamidn to be of the same

character. When circumstances permitted the erection of a tumulus,

it became necessary to excavate a cave—and we need not be surpris-

ed at the vast number of caves at Bdmidn, when we have under our

eyes the ruins of a large and once flourishing city, or when we

consider the spot was a sacred one, possibly the most sacred, of the

professors of the then existing religion, and whither the dead of the

surrounding regions might, from pious motives, be carried for deposit.

The inhabitants, in speaking of the three superior idols, call them

the father, mother and son,—presuming the second in consequence

to be a female; but there is no distinction in the figure to warrant

the supposition that its sex varies from the others. Of whatever sex

the whole may be, there is little reason to doubt but they are of one

and the same.

We visited Bdméan under the idea of meeting with Buddhist anti-

quities, but it became evident that they were of another character.

The inscription was in characters unknown to us, and continued so

aoe

ee 0

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bamidn. 711

until we were favored by the alphabets of the Pehlevi and Zend from

Mr. Prinsep, when we ascertained it to be a form of Pehlevi. The

bust of the king among the paintings in the niche of the second idol,

we had found to bear an exact resemblance to the busts on a series

of coins constantly and numerously found at Beghrdm, and which we

called Parthian provisionally ; but the characters of the legends on

these coins were very different from those of the Bdmian inscription.

At length, however, a coin was found of the same class, with the

characters plainly similar—in fact comprising three of those forming

the inscription (see Plate XLIV). We now began to suspect we had

sufficient evidence to assign the idols of Bamian.

Under the idea that the inscription might be rendered NANATA,

we had ventured to communicate our suspicions to Mr. Prinssp:

should they be confirmed, the idol might be supposed to be an image

of Diana or the moon, called by the old Persians NANAIA—but we

are not yet confident of the reading ; and viewing a succession of

idols, it occurs to reflection that they may possibly commemorate.a

series of sovereigns: and this, even if the reading be allowed; for we

find over the second idol which has no inscription, a full length female

figure, which may be Nanaia, and the first idol has no figure, but a

name in its place. We must confess, from the general appearance of

the idols, we should suppose them to represent male personages.

The coins referred to are probably of that description marked by

Colonel Top, when he enumerates among his collection ‘‘ rare ones

of a Parthian dynasty unknown to history.” The term Parthian may

cease to be applicable, but we doubt whether the kings commemorat-

ed by these coins, and, as we suspect, by the idols of Bamidn, are un-

known to history. We take them to be the Kzdnian dynasty, whose

records, more or less authentic, are to be found in Persian authors ;

and whose descendants, if their own accounts be credited, still exist

- in the persons of independent chiefs in Seistdn. The Tajiks, so nume-

rously dispersed over Afghdnistén and Tarkistan, and no doubt the

more ancient inhabitants of the countries, represent the nation, in

olden time, obedient to the princes of this dynasty. For a series of

ages, in Afghdnistdn at least, the Tajik authority has been superseded ;

and, within memory, the proprietary rights of the Tajik to the soil

have been seriously infringed by the encroachments of the Afghans.

He preserves few traces of his origin or descent, and as a convert to

the uncompromising tenets of Islamism, recollects with horror that

his country was once governed by infidels—while, as at Bamédn, he

resides, and follows the ordinary occupations of life, in the temples,

422

"12 Notes on the Antiquities of Baméin. ad [Nov.

from whence his ancestors, in all due solemnity, invoked the glorious

sun and dazzling hosts of heaven. ,

Admitting the evidence upon which we ascribe the idols of Bdméén

to the princes of the Kidnidn race, without prejudice to their indi-

vidual character, or whether they be idols of Nanaia and other deities,

or statues of sovereigns—we naturally turn to consider the possible

epoch of their construction ; and this, if not absolutely to be fixed, is

brought within a certain and comparatively recent period, or one sub-

sequent to the destruction of the Greek-Bactrian monarchy. This

monarchy, as Justin testifies, was overthrown by the Parthians, and

the fact is perhaps as easily to be credited as that its subversion was

effected by the Getz ; though it must be allowed, that in support of

the latter opinion, SrraBo is very grave authority, particularly when

he enumerates the hordes or nations that effected the subversion, the

Asii, Pasiani, Tochari, and Sacarauli. It may be, as Scusrep hints,

that both had a hand in it; but the conclusion by the same learned

author that the Getz remained in possession, may be liable to doubt,

if we recognize the Bdmiéin idols to be memorials of the Parthian

(qy.) conquerors of Bactria. It is proper, however, to note, that

about this time, the AZO= dynasty, whose coins we have, seems entitled

to be considered ; and if that appellation have any connection with the

name of the first of the four Getic hordes, as, we believe, Mr. PrinsEp

suspects, both Justin and Strago may be reconciled ; for, according

to every appearance, the Azos dynasty originated in the regions bor-

dering on the Indus towards its source. At the same time, it must

be remembered, that we suggest the possibility only that the Bdamidn

idols may refer to the Parthian (qy.) conquerors of Bactria. We

have remarked that the year 56 B. C. has been mentioned as the

epoch of the construction of the idols, (that will be of the more anci-

ent one,) and this epoch might coincide with that of the supercession

of the Greek-Bactrian monarchy; but when this date is quoted as

being found in the Mahabharat, either the authority of that work has

been carelessly advanced, or the work itself must considerably abate

its pretensions to the antiquity conceded to it by some.

We feel repugnance to renounce old and favorite theories, but

they must yield to facts. We had plausibly enough given the Greeks

in Bactria for successors a race of Getic or Indo-Scythic sovereigns,

as we conveniently called them ; and we concluded them to be of the

Buddhist faith, because we have read that such faith was prevalent

in Central Asia about the commencement of the Christian era. With-

out deeming it necessary to contest the latter fact, in favor of which,

indeed, some proof may be adduced, we have gradually, however,

— 1836.) Notes on the Antiquities of Bamétin. - 718

grown sceptical as to that of Buddhist supremacy in these regions;

and the term Indo-Scythic has yielded to that of Mithraic, which may

safely be adopted, as clearly indicating the religion of the ruling

powers, while it affects not the question of their race or descent.

It may be observed, that the later antiquities in Afghanistan and the

Panjab, or in the countries along the course of the Indus, are appa-

rently mixed Mithraic and Buddhist ; nor is it improbable that the

two systems, if they were really generically distinct ones, should have

been blended in the limits to which both extended, and were both

met—it being considered that Buddhism will have been propagated

with vivacity when Mithraism was languishing in decline.

Our objections to the term Parthian, as applied to the coins pro-

visionally so called, and to the princes commemorated by them,

and possibly by the idols, arise principally from the impossibility

of deeming them Arsakian. Under that powerful dynasty, which

so long controlled Persia, it is generally understood that the

worship of Mithra was discouraged :—we know not why it should

have been, and might ask in return, of what religion besides

the Mithraic could the Arsakian monarchs have been professors’?

It may be, that as Parthians, who have been supposed to be of

Scythic origin, they were followers after the manner of their fore-

fathers, whose rites it is one of the objects of the Zendavesta to

depreciate and to condemn: while with the virulent feelings common

to sectarians, and in possession of the necessary power to allow their

exhibition, they might have neglected no occasion to discountenance

the opposite rites and observances in vogue with the people of Cyrus

—whence may be accounted for, during their sway, the neglect of

Persepolis and the fire temples of Istakr. The fire-altar never occurs

on any of the coins of the Arsakian princes, while it is seen on those

we suspect to be referrible to the princes commemorated at Bamidn. The

same emblem, indeed, distinguishes the coins of the Sassanian princes

of Persia, successors in authority to the Arsakian line, and who re-

kindled the sacred fires throughout the land, which had been extinct

for centuries—-but on their coins, it is always accompanied by two

guardians or defenders—which are wanting on the coins of our princes ;

and as the more simple may be presumed the more ancient form,

we might deduce from the circumstance a corroborative proof,

that they are prior in date to the Sassanian monarchs of Persia.

Should this view be correct, we learn that cotemporaneous with a

portion of the Arsakian dynasty, a powerful and independent so-

vereignty existed in Bactriana, whose princes became of the orthodox

Mithraic faith, or that so lauded in the Zendavesta. It is obvious

W714 Notes on the Antiquities of Bamidn. [Nov.

also that they must have been subsequent to the Greek monarchy—

and who they were, and whence they came, can only be profitably

speculated upon, when we become acquainted with the antiquities

hidden in the regions north of the Indian Caucasus. It is an advan-

tage, however, to possess the knowledge of their existence, their

coins and memorials, which display alike their language and religion.

The height of the larger idols has been estimated at 120 feet and

70 feet respectively ; the third may be about 50 feet, and the two

others were 35 and 25 feet in height. Surveying them, in connec-

tion with the theory that they serve to commemorate sovereigns, the

gradations in size, as well as their numbers, may be turned to profit ;

the former denoting the degrees of prosperity under which they were

formed, and the latter authorizing us to infer that there were at least

as many sovereigns as idols. It is also probable that these idols, with

their accompaniments of caves and temples, are not posthumous me-

morials, but that they were constructed during the lives of the mo-

narchs who projected them. That they are the labors of a series of

kings, is an inevitable conclusion, from the moral impossibility that

they could have been formed by a single one.

Supposing that Bdaémidn was peculiarly a sacred place, and on that

account pre-eminently selected for the burial-place of the sovereigns

of the age, we may inquire what evidences we have of their sepul-

chres. Some ancient authority,—we believe Crestas or Dioporus,—

describes the mode of interment of the old kings of Persia—which

was by lowering down their remains from the summits of precipices

into caves hewn in the rock, and then closing up their entrances.

Some of the caves at Bamidn are so situated, as exactly to come

within this description; they are now inaccessible, and from their

small apertures could scarcely have been intended for dwellings,

while without some such contrivance, as lowering down workmen

from the top of the eminence, it is difficult to imagine how they could

have been hewn atall. Itis proper to observe, that at Baméan there are

none of the structures now familiarly known to usas topes, and which

are so abundant in the regions east and west of the Indus ; and their

absence might suggest the idea that they were a later mode of distin-

guishing departed royalty, and originated at the period when the

Mithraic and Buddhist practices became mixed. Such a conclusion

might be convenient for adjusting that epoch, and to sanction it, the

whole mass of Afghan topes might be adduced as proofs, exhibiting

the chaitya and the cave: but there is no reason to suppose the

chaitya exclusively a Buddhist form, and topes are not irreconcileable

with the mode of commemorating Persian monarchs—if the monu-

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bamidn. 715

ment at Mirghdb, north of Persepolis, be really the cenotaph of Cyrus,

it being nothing but a chaitya or dahgopa; and we hesitate to believe

it not to be the tomb of Cyrus, having the hints of Arrran and Arts-

TOBULUs, and the interpretation of an inscription (we believe found

on some contiguous monument, which renders the subject doubtful)

by Professor Grorerunp. Moreover, if it be, we may inquire, where

are the dahgopes of the successors of Cyrus ?

The most ancient of the topes of Afghanistdn, which have been yet

examined, we think may be referred to the close of the first or com-

mencement of the second century of the Christian era. While we

suppose that Bdmian may be the burial-place of a dynasty of kings,

we mean not to infer that it was also their capital, rather supposing

that it was not—although the comparatively recent Ghiulguleh may,

nevertheless, be supposed to have been the representative of a preced-

ing ancient and considerable city. The Paropamisus had been, pre-

vious to the conjectured period of the formation of the Bamidn idols

and caves, the seat of a considerable power,—that of the Pandava prince

Susude, whose son Gay, the founder of Gajni (Ghuani), lost his king-

dom to Evrnypemus and his sons.

It has been usually conjectured that Bdmidn is the Drapsaca of

ARRIAN, occurring in ALEXANDER’s route from Bactra or Bulkh to Alex-

andria ad Caucasum. Drapsaca is called Drastoca by Protemy, which

Wi rorp tells us is a substitute for the Sanscrit Drashatca, or “ the

stone city.” Admitting the etymology, we need not credit the ac-

companying assumption that “‘ towns before were only assemblages of

huts’—an assumption founded on the caves of Bdamian being hewn,

as indeed all caves are, in the rock—and thereby forming a stone city.

If our preceding deductions be correct, they never, strictly speaking,

formed a city at all; although one naturally, and as is_ proved by its

remains, grew up and existed in their neighbourhood. Farther, if our

conclusions as to the epoch of the formation of the idols be well found-

ed,they consequently did not exist at the period of ALExaANDER’s expe-

dition, which may account for no hints being given of them by the

classical historians and geographers of the West. We are not certain

therefore that Drapsaca was Bamidn, or that a city existed there at

all, admitting the probability that a valley’so conveniently situated and

fertile, was even at that time adequately peopled. Thestone city was

a term applicable toany substantial one. Timur in his march from

Bulkh to India halted for some days, as Suurir-u-DiN says, at the

* fine city’ of Khilm. This is an ancient site, and with Hybuk,

Kunduz, and any other locality in the route, may have a claim to be

considered Drapsaca. Bamidn has also been suggested to represent

716 Notes on the Antiquities of Bdmian. [Nov.

Alexandria ad Paropamisum, The last word appears to be a careless

introduction of the geographers for Caucasum. We believe it was not

used by the original historians—excusable however, when we consider

that the ancients deemed the Paropamisus a continuation of Caucasus,

and the passes of the hills between Cddu/ and Bdmidn, are to this day

spoken of by the natives as passes of the Hindu Kosh, which, strictly

speaking, they.are not. Alexandria, it is clear, was built at the

southern base of Caucasus, indications of its locality more fully an-

swered by Ghorbund and Beghram. Bdmidn may be termed south—

but widely—of the true Hindu Kosh, and, we should think, has little

pretension to be considered Alexandria ad Caucasum, beyond the

doubtful one conferred by vicinity.

Examining the pretensions of Bdmidn to be considered in another

point of view, as a sacred locality, implied perhaps by its being select-

ed as the burial place of kings, we have WiLrorp’s authority, that it is

represented in the books of the Buddhists as the source of holiness and

purity. This may be of some value, as shewing that the same spot

was held in the same venerated light by the followers of two religions

generally understood to be very opposite; and as the antiquities are

certainly Mithraic, we might draw the conclusion, that the Buddhists

have appropriated the property of others, and that the books referring

to Baméan are comparatively modern—or we may suspect that Bud-

hism was originally merely a modification of Mithraism. We judge

it unnecessary to detail the Mahommedan traditions respecting Bami-

dn, which ascribe, however, the idols to Sansa’L, whom they generally

assert to have been a giant infidel, first vanquished and then convert-

ed by Azarer Atr; nor need the Buddhist and Brahmanical traditions

be noted, with a view to comment, which consider SHarma or the

patriarch Suum to be the founder of Baméin,—because we have no

proof that he was, or was not;—but when a writer so talented as

Wirorp asserts with apparent gravity, that Bdmian is the Mosaical

Eden, it may be useful to review the grounds on which he bases his opi-

nion and makes an assertion so singular. He is compelled to recognize

in the Landhi Sind Helmend, the rivers of Kundus and Balkh, the Phi-

son, Gihon, Frat and Hiddekel of the Mosaic accounts—but it is

plain that he depends upon the statements of the Puranas and Zenda-

vesta. The former contain so many evidences of modern composition,

that they surely ought not to be brought into competition or compa-

rison with records of high antiquity, as are acknowledged to be those

of the Pentateuch. The age of the Zendavesta has been much dis-

puted, some conceiving it of unfathomable antiquity; others, among

_ whom is our countryman Hyp, ascribing it to the epoch of Darius

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bamfdn. 717

Hystaspzs; while others have deemed it of comparatively modern

origin. We are free to confess that we espouse the latter opinion,

and the very passages cited in favor of its remote age, we think, are

decisive against it. We advert to this subject the more willingly,

because we cannot help suspecting the possibility, that the Zenda-

vesta was compiled in the court of the sovereigns commemorated at

Bamtén.

It is worthy of note, that the Brahmans, Buddhists and Mithraists

have the same ideas as to the locality of paradise, shewing that they

must have acquired them from each other, or from some common

source. Itisnotimprobable that the two first adopted them from the

last, and it may be conjectured, though it will tell little for the antiquity

of the Zendavesta, that Bamidn may have been clothed with a sacred

character, from the very circumstance of its having been made a burial-

piace of kings—for so the Zendavesta itself commemorates, when it

describes Gorotman (Bdmidn or its vicinity) as a terrestrial paradise,

and reveals its nature when it figuratively and significantly adds, “‘ the

abode of the Supreme Being and the Blessed.”’ There can be no

doubt but that the larger idol of Bdamian is also the more ancient,

and with its accompanying caves became the nucleus, around which

all the other caves and idols were subsequently and successively

formed ; and it is a fair inference that, prior to the construction of the

first idol, there was no burial place of kings at Bamidn, and none

worthy of emphatic panegyrism by the author of the Zendavesta.

The remote antiquity conferred by some antiquarians upon the

Zendavesta is not claimed by its author; and why he should be called

ZOROASTER who Called himself ZErpEsuT, is only to be accounted for

by the desire of theorists to identify him with a celebrated person

of that name, who existed, according to authentic history, some

centuries before him. ZerrpDESHT so clearly narrates the details of his

career, that it is impossible to misunderstand them, and they cannot

be more correctly or more concisely represented than in the elegant

language of Professor HrErEn, one of the most able advocates of

the impenetrable antiquity of the Zendavesta. The Professor writes—

“The works of Zoroaster (ZeRvESsHT) abound in details relating to his

own person, as well as the countries and kingdom, which were the first

scene of his career as a reformer. He proves by the clearest geogra-

phical data, that his native country was Northern Media, Azerbijan,

or the territory between the river Kur or Cyrus and the Araxes,

both of which empty themselves into the Caspian. Here he first ap-

peared as a legislator and a reformer ; but soon quitting this district, he

passed into the countries east of the Caspian into Bactra, the residence

718 Notes on the Antiquities of Bamian. [Nov.

of king Gusrasp, who became his disciple and admirer. The origi-

nal seat therefore of his new religion or doctrine was Bactra, whence

(under the protection of Gusrasp) it was disseminated over Iran.”

ZeRDESHT, in giving the name of the sovereign of Bactra, his pa-

tron, possibly gives that of one of the sovereigns commemorated at

Bamidn. Wf it be so, we may associate with him Lourasp his prede-

cessor, and it is deserving of particular notice that the romantic his-

tory of Persia ascribes to Lourasp the construction of a hermitage,

to which he retired, abdicating his throne in favor of Gusrasp, and

from which he was called forth to repel an invasion upon Bulkh,

(Gusrasp being absent at the time in Seistan,) when he fell in battle.

We perhaps gain from this history a hint as to the origin of the

caves and idols of Béméidn. Having coins with legends, which it is not

too much to hope may be interpreted, we may ultimately ascertain

these facts, when we shall be afforded triumphant evidence of the age

of the Zendavesta ; and it is cheering to reflect that records are pre-

served of these kings independent of the Zendavesta, itself a most

important and valuable one. These records are within our reach, and

we have only to distinguish fiction from reality, and history from ro-

mance, to acquire a full and satisfactory knowledge of a hitherto dark

period.

ZERDESHT has accurately described the extent and partitions of the

kingdom in which he lived, as justly observed by Professor Huzren,

and what he describes we shall allow the Professor also to state for

us. ‘‘ The opening of his Vendidad contains a catalogue of the pro-

vinces and principal cities of that kingdom; and this record, so inva-

luable to the historian, is so clear and complete as to leave no room

for doubt. The chief provinces and places, sixteen in number, are

registered according to their oriental appellations, and for the most

part are easily to be recognized. We learn hence that, except Azer-

bijan, to the west of the Caspian, all the countries east of the same,

as far as northern Hindustan, were, together with the latter country,

subject to king Gustasp, at whose court the sage resided. The

whole of Khordsdn is here enumerated, with the several provinees of

which it is composed—Bactriana and Sogdiana, Aria or Sehestan,

Cabul, Arokhage, the confines of Hindustan, and finally Lahore in the

Panjab, are all successively mentioned.”

The record of ZeRpEsuT is indeed historically valuable, and de-

scribes the extended empire of Bactria as it probably existed under

Evucratipes, and as it may possibly have fallen into the hands of the

Kianians—in many of the countries as we know, and very probably

in all of them, are found their coins and memorials. It will be re-

1836.] Notes on the Antiquities of Bdmidn. 719

membered that Ariana or Khordsdn, formed a portion of the Bactrian

empire, as recorded by Srraso. Professor Hmrren remarks—‘‘ No-

thing, however, is said of the two chief provinces of the Persian em-

pire, Persis and Susiana, nor of their capitals, Persepolis and Susa, nor

of Babylon, which, nevertheless, were the customary residences of the

kings of Persia, and in particular of Darius Hystaspis.” So re.

markable an omission will cease to surprise, when probably at the

epoch of ZeRDESHT, we may suspect those provinces, and also Babylon,

were under the rule of the Arsakian princes—and therefore could not

be enumerated by him as forming part of the kingdom of Gustasp.

They were also under the spiritual influence of those false Magi, in

the estimation of Zerpusut, against whom he is so severe, and whom

he stigmatizes a kdfraster—a term for infidel preserved by Muham-

medans of this-day in kafr. The possible fact of a powerful indepen-

dent monarchy in Bactria subsequent to the Greek one, gives rise to

many singular reflections on the probable relative position it occu-

besides those already known, which induced some of the latter Arsa-

kian princes to fix their capital at Babylon, or rather Ctesiphon. We

feel, however, that the time has not arrived for delicate speculations,

neither can we venture to fix with certainty the epoch of the Kaidni-

an monarch, but we do feel confident that materials exist to fix it,—

and we do cherish the hope that itis possible to destroy that flagrant

monster of fiction and prodigy of national vanity, Persian history. If

the Lonrasrs and Gustrasprs prove to be Bactrian monarchs, as in-

deed Zerpssnr tells us they are, we may ask whether Queen Homas

may not be SrmirAmis, and Rustam may turn out to have flourished

a little before the age of Muuammen. The same sources of informa-

tion are open to us, as were to SHau IsmaxeL when he wrote to

- Sueipanit Kudn, “ That if the right of succession to a throne was

decided by hereditary descent only, it was to him incomprehensible

how the empire had descended through the various dynasties of Pesh-

dadians, Kaianians and the family of Cuznais to himself Suerpanr.”

As for the Zendavesta, however, it may be admitted that a Zrer-

DESHT flourished in the reign of Gustasp. It is by no means certain

that that work as now preserved was written by him; on the contra-

ry, the dialect in which it is written, would seem to be proof that it

‘was not—for it must assuredly be the most recent of all the dialects

of the Pehlevi—if Pehlevi at all; and accordingly on reference to

coins, we discover the first traces of it on the very last of that series,

(whether Sassanian or Peshdadian) which bears them, and then not

in the legends of the coins, but as marks manifestly punched on them

after they had been in circulation !

9 A 2

720 New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. _- [Nov.

-- We- submit these notes on the idols of Bamidn, with the observa-

tions. occasioned by them, in all due humility--and: furnish the au-

_thorities in the inscription, figures, and. coins, on which we have

based our conjectures, that others may judge how far they-may be

correct; and it must be noted that the coins which bear legends in

the characters of the Bamidn inscription, do appear to us at least to be

the most recent of the class to which they belong. ‘This we consider

rather fortunate than otherwise ; for if they are still Kaianian:or Pesh-

dadian, we may be able to find other caves and hermitages. for Lou-

rAsP. and Gusrasp—it being remembered that we are ‘yet standing

only. on the threshold of discovery. :

Kabul, June, 1836.

| IV. —New types of Bactrian’ and Indo- Scythic Coins, engraved a as + Plate é

XLIX. By Jamus Prinsep, Sec. Ge. ie he Seen

I did not expect to be again so soon Saha to resume ee

graver in the department of Bactrian medals; but to do so when such

novel and interesting specimens are handed to me, is no less an ob-

ligation than a pleasure. :

_ The two main attractions of my present plate are represented with

scrupulous regard to fidelity, from the coins themselves, which were

entrusted to me for the purpose by their fortunate possessers, as soon

as they were discovered.

No. 1 is an unique of Amyntas, a name entirely new to. Bactria ; it is

a square coin of bronze lately procured by Colonel Stacy from the

‘Panjab, in excellent preservation. ch ta i

Obverse. Bust of the prince wearing a curious cap, which may

possibly represent the head of an elephant, but from the worn, surface

cannot exactly be made out—legend on three sides off the square,

BAZIAEQS NIKATOPO2 AMTNT (ov).

Reverse. A standing figure of Minerva, with helmet, shield - and

epear—her right hand extended in token of peace. Square maou.

gram X. Legend in. Bactro-Pehlevi P1w) PASAY PLL ; qua My

malakao djalade amido. It will be at once perceived that the native

epithet corresponding to yixaropov is the same as that for vexnpopov ON

the coin of ARcuELIus published in my September number, (page 548,).

and before on the coins of ANTIALKIDES and Anrmacaus, with .

exception only of the. first letter. The word was there read Po VAI; :

the initial 9a being: substituted for 4, or. broad @ of the Archeliis and

- Amyntas coins. The third letter in those cases is also rather an 1

Jour. As. Soc. Vol. VPLXLVE

Bactrian Cotns.

WITT

ee |

tI i NS ll

Hw) iN it

Ny ale A |

cA li

} y i}

rm! | ers

thd

TaN Ht.

p wtih

D4,

Nhat

S&B

< We ~.

ili its

| “dl MMe TM I Sh

t ) !

OM bie

N bul Ne

AR Silay thc

{ | aah

rae

we tg jay Pivrheghts: ue

‘ ih Pa, , ay itis nag > r ine

h ideemuih dine iatceu clei heels MM MRR,

ga VED, BOE A PE OB: eh Be ieee

hae 7h, e E “ ig : pee 7.

a). eee, » i FS aed Sips f r A Die j | ‘

q x : ; : 4 ! ’ ow okie he .

a * ay j by” eS * shad) ae oft’

a's | Res iG 1 a 43

tf is ‘ ye Nr "i ord r

SEPA 5 ad , } &

eo aay ee i.

) se spate ah oe i: Rn hee Se [oa

PE ERE 4 1S Mlle ede hed Bae Se as:

; ‘ ¥ 4 4 a a ‘ ,5 u

, Ee elf vie pls. ~ itt a; ey tif ‘ Sead :%

abs ts . “

: ;

CS ee we engee ae

“be : iis

ii RA

PI Bite on ‘ Hb GE Ks

is he " ebigue ledira dee

Bets

1836.) New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. 721

I, than 2 of which the value is as yet unknown. I have called it /

ad interim.

Fig. 2 is, if possible, a more valuable acquisition than the above,

being the first queen of Bactria yet discovered. Dr. Swingy ob-

tained the coin among Kerdmat At’s collection. It was thickly

coated with the rust of ages, and, from the helmeted head on the

obverse, was looked upon as a Menanoker, until the Doctor set about

cleaning it carefully with a hard brush, and, perceiving a variation

of the legend, shewed it to Captain Cunnincuam, who immediately

recognized with a feeling of intense curiosity the undoubted title of

a female sovereign BASIAIZSAS OEOTPOT! (ys) ATAOOKAEIAS—“ Of the

queen AGaATHocLEA, the god-nourisher.”’ This very curious epithet

6corporn, a word not to be found in the lexicon, must have been coined

on purpose for the queen-mother, after the oriental style of flattery,

in allusion to her royal offspring.

Reverse. Hercules seated on arock (or a morha), resting his club on

his right knee—monogram ¥. The Pehlevi legend is most unfor-

tunately so indistinct in one or two places, as to preclude the possibi-

lity of our making out the true reading. The first word seems to

differ in no way from the ordinary PY11U malakdo, king: and the

second would appear to be PIN radako, cwrnpos; then follow two

short words P1‘% P hw which I am totally at a loss to expound,

though the individual letters are clear enough.

To these two uniques I have subjoined some new types of Eurny-

pEMUS, MENANDER, and Eucrartipgs, which have not yet been engrav-

ed, though some have appeared in the lithographs of Masson’s

drawings.

Fig. 3. A silver tetradrachm of Eutuyprmus, now in Dr. Swiney’s

cabinet, having a standing Hercules on the reverse, in lieu of the

seated figure. The coin must have been originally very beautiful,

but we learn from the memorandum of Knrramat Aut, who purchased

it at Cabul, that it was taken to Dr. Gurarp, who deemed it spurious

or not silver* ; this induced the vender to put it in the fire (cased in

clay) to ascertain the fact, and the smoothness of surface, and clear-

ness of outline were thus destroyed. The beauw restes are still suffi-

cient to excite admiration.

Fig. 4 is from Masson’s drawing of a small copper piece of

Evutuypemus. The reverse has a naked horse prancing. Legend as

usual, BASIAENS ErY@rAHMOY. Masson has another similar, but larger.

* Probably it was covered with a coat of muriate, like my Euruypemus,

722 New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. [Nov.

Fig. 5. A square copper coin of Mrenanper, procured by Dr.

Swiney at Agra; in good preservation.

Obverse, the usual helmeted head with the legend pasIAEQz SQTHPOS

MENANAPOY.

Reverse, the circular shield of Minerva with Medusa’s head: the

features of the face only worn smooth: legend in Pehlevi PiSw

pope be a ot

Fig. 6, from Masson. The reverse here presents the bird of

Minerva, so common on the Athenian coins; in all other respects the

coin is similar to the last.

Fig. 7. Obverse of a smaller copper coin from Masson. In the

centre is a wheel with eight spokes, distinctly so delineated, other-

wise we might have supposed it the shield with Medusa’s head ; the

Greek legend surrounds it. The reverse is the same as that of fig. 9.

Fig. 8. In this larger square copper coin Mr. Masson gives, as

a new reverse, a dolphin; but from the appearance of the sketch it

is possible that the original may have been an elephant’s head—a

common device on MENANDER’S coins.

Fig. 9. On this the sovereign’s portrait is replaced by a boar’s head

according to Mr. Masson’s sketch, and on the reverse is a simple

feather or palm branch : monogram H—legends Greek and Pehlevi as

usual.

Figs. 10 and 11. Two specimens from Masson’s collections, one

silver, one copper, to shew that the coins of KucratipEs sometimes

bore the emblem peculiar to ANTIALKIDES*, two conical beehives and

two feathers or palm branches.

Fig. 12. An additionto our Indo-Scythic group of the elephant °

rider, or Kenranos. Col. Stacy has just obtained four from the Panjdd ;

all evidently from the same die, but not one containing the legend com-

plete. To save space I have filled it up from the united specimens,

and there can be no doubt of a single letter, barbarous as the context

appears. Odverse. Raja astride on a small elephant, legend (commen-

cing from the right of the head) OIAHQH OIAPOIAHIAHPOAION, of

which nothing can be imagined but a barbarous attempt at BAsIAEQS

BASIAEQN SQTHPOS, the syllables 1a, os, or on, and po being the

only happy conjunctions seized by the ignorant die-cutter.

On the reverse the standing figure of a@po is depicted, with the

common monogram, but the legend differs; being aOu, or inverted

* This name has hitherto been always written (on Masson’s authority)

AnTILAKIDES. M. Jacquet corrected it fromthe VENTURA coins, and on re-

examination of the silver coin in Dr. Swinry’s possession, his reading is cor-

roborated. It also corresponds better with the Pehlevi which is P'H919

quasi, atl-alikudo.

1836.] New types of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic Coins. 723

Hov. The same is met with on one of the couch-lounger coins

extracted from the Manikydla tope, (see fig. 29, Pl. xxii. Vol. III.)

It may possibly be a perversion of the tri-literal MAO. But the horns

of the moon do not appear on the shoulders.

Fig. 13. A rare and valuable variety of the Kenranos coin in Dr.

Swiney’s cabinet, of which Captain CunnineGHam has a less perfect

duplicate ; the obverse legend, hardly legible, must be pag NANO PAO,

&c. The reverse has the standing female figure with the horn of

plenty, and legend aPaoxpo, as on the gold coins of the same device.

Fig. 14 should have been introduced in my last plate, among

what I have supposed the fourth series of APAOKPO imitations. This

coin, of which Dr. Swinry possesses several equally legible, has the

legend aPpaoxpPo quite distinct, proving that this group must be

regarded, not as an imitation but as the direct descendant of the Mi-

thraic series in the Kanerkan line. The appearance of Nagari on one

of my coins must be regarded therefore as Greek. It is curious that

Masson should not have detected a single letter on all the specimens

he amassed. Some faint remains of them are traceable on those from

Behat.

Fig. 15 is a duplicate of Masson’s coin, fig. 15, of my last Bactrian

plate, in Dr. Swinry’s possession. A few of the Pehlevi characters

are better made out, but the proprietor of this coin still eludes us.

Figs. 16,17, 18. I terminate this plate with three coins of Kédes

in Capt. CunninGHaAm’s cabinet purchased from the late General

Arnotp’s collection, of an entirely new reverse. They are all of

silver, deeply indented to throw the head out. The letters Kwa..

are visible on the smallest of the three, which is otherwise of the best

execution. The horse’s head of the reverse gradually deteriorates until

it can be no longer recognized (as in 18) without the earlier coins as

objects of comparison. On cleaning one of my Kédes coins, it was

found likewise to have the horse’s head reverse; and the horse has

been since traced to the Chouka Dooka, or degraded Saurashtra series,

in some specimens also purchased from the estate of the late General

ARNOLD.

Postscript. 1 cannot delay one moment announcing a very suc-

cessful reading by Professor Lasszn of Bonn, of the native legend

on the coin of Acatuocies depicted in Vol. III. Pl. ix. fig. 17, by

Masson, and again engraved last month as fig. 9 of Pl. XXXV. The

following is an extract from the Professor’s letter this moment re-

ceived. “ The legend on the coin of Acatuoctss, is in my opinion, in

another character, and I think we may recognize in HAQOSFLE

724 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov.

the letters waamitrat, Agathukla rdja, reading from the left to the

right. The first two letters are self-evident—the third is similar

enough to the Tibetan and Pali forms of ¢h with wu below: the fourth

letter expresses k/ quite in the Indian manner. If I am right in this, it

will be necessary to give to AGATHOCLES a very different position from

that assigned to him by Mr. Raout Rocuetrs.”

The principal objection to this highly plausible solution of the

Agathoclean legend is, that nearly the same characters also appear

on the coms of Panranzon. There are differences to be sure, and it

might be possible to assimilate the word to the Greek, on the suppo-

sition of the first syllable being wanting—thus & ,] d will form

., talava or .. talao... the next letter on Masson’s coin is a €, 7, and

on Dr. Swinery’s a f or 7, but on both coins there are three letters to

the left of the female which still remain an enigma.

I have also just had the opportunity of perusing M. Jacqusrt’s first

paper on the VENTURA coins, but as this merely enumerates their

Greek legends, postponing the consideration of the Bactro-Pehleyi,

there is nothing in alteration or correction of my own list excepting

the termination of some of the names, Kodes, Lysias, Vonones (?) for

Nonus, Azes, &c. M. Jacquet had remarked the connection of the

Hindu coins with their Indo-Scythic prototype when examining Col.

Ton’s collection, but had not published his sentiments.

V.—Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed. By JamEs

Prinsep, Sec. &c.

[Continued from page 661.]

Stone Slabs in the Society’s Museum.

Many of the inscriptions in our Museum bear no record, either of

the places whence they come, or of their respective donors. Unless

therefore they contain in themselves such information as may supply

a clue to their origin, the greater part of their value is lost. Publi-

cation may in some cases lead to their recognition, and this is one of

my motives for including them in my present series of lithographs; a

stronger motive is, the example they furnish of the variation of

Devanagari character prevalent at different epochs; which it is desir-

able to place in an accessible position for reference, before we can un-

dertake a comprehensive review of the palzography of India.

The inscription, marked No. 5, in the Museum (Pl. XXXIII.) is

neatly cut on a stone, about 23 feet long by 1} feet broad. Itis

nearly in the same character as that of the Shekawati inscription, pub-

“a

"Y BS :

Pith, > J

| 4 Uy : =

‘DADA BY PPT 10.0 f UO19VI/ 2LOSUT P70 ‘SDUIMYD wosf 0714 ¢rs98Uy 9477227 WC w fe 2

¥riwt (8) VORP REIBLE Mh 1 BD U2k ie

LJ) \ qi ~ oy --= HE =

ORVP om (PoG Weribibbsvitiews_ —

bh) Bubb

Voe V. PLIXXDT

: “ede

ele Reburte ay uls £)2 1B [b bLulS-bilslitatny) p JS BB byt iy ue ¥ heb 0) ur OCR

Gre £2 OWI NZ p) 2015) PCa <2 ene Be Prk Als)

‘Rk BRE Dip wp Boks oR ob /b WNL nfo MABE bb pbheohnoay Rusts ooh ves

WBE i RHE aR yep pela BURL oN. ATR cb yh) eB Im Robb BS yp

Erika alee Sve W>eyDibitr ge mol D SHARE Po bonebisd Fawr Bohs eb

| Bawarorse ee? RFousypUicob Why nuh tea siaLbh: hur vpuskat eatunepibhesdaW ys P

Mehflers Fibyeb By gh Nop oh) av BY 2 Hea SER EDS QishbyPas bls ble ae " DPW tytedd bis

Po nwpa tbsp rbaedyrlo bated y)jabivis ia beh plbde B ABEL Bly

EGCny [pO uenba\aAwy 2 NP) 2b Bay UrteSilBb hdres’ Rloiruabtowseabsicib

oe (~~ Uy Paw 2 Cry ony ° ° ° ° °

Noto RY MBP Rulel Brailes tebbprs bh Sb Tye laisie be tebl bleteute be |

Sa no ie

CA PFH.0 0 ce ‘AUI1A STIYYP shzar00g 977zDIsTY ev UF BUOQS Ww to UO77 of 2 DEUT UD fe ATI ISOPY

“W922 Perursp

Journ. As Soc.

1836.) Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 725

lished in my last volume. There are, however, some peculiar forms, as

the kh, the gh, the a, &c. Hardly any of the letters in the whole

inscription can be regarded as uncertain; I havehad therefore, no

difficulty whatever in preparing the following transcript in modern

Devanagari. But as to the interpretation, after receiving a formal

certificate from the pandits of the College that, with exception of the

verses at the commencement and conclusion, the bedy of the inscrip-

tion was not Sanscrit, or was so ungrammatical as to be quite unintel-

ligible, it may be conceived that I was somewhat staggered! How-

ever, on conning it over word by word, with a pandit better versed

in the out-of-the-way terms employed, the general drift was readily

made out, although the connection in many parts still remained

broken, and the sense doubtful. As there is neither date nor allusion

to any reigning monarch, the fragment is of no historical value ; but

it may be a curious study for the Sanscrit scholar.

Transcript in modern Devanagari character.

Raa Wasa aTgSaTa | BUI a sega fava: sala awaviz

aaa GU sfasr) a aianacwadycatecu acai qaqa

aa 79a Gaara sfrart sfaat clad ara clade! Ba

AAA UUAGSA FUiw i YHA Call Wasarai afar agic-

aru afaat | waranrafsag wt aa screen aearafcara faatr-

az |! Stanaaarsrary | fanaa | aa agua wad afateg

qea Tay aawae] suture saarafcarar: waa wat | waa ufaaa

ATATaTa: YMA: wadtaayre: Fafaate: Hear eeaaTAT qzae-

ATSITARSE HACITS: | RUIGIA asa Fzaear ufyaa Facay

Se afava || Brateanrizag “efairs ufadaifa aaatara: aew

qaaas: afafrarneay stu aa] ANE aifaar ci aa

aq yay faaza aat aay TeeAed yal TA I oelsaiia ater

fray yur eal Tage Reed Gaaatfa | eeaustan waar

ayeaIges HSA Gal quai gaze wayaifa fuasica Aar Hl

ale tag aed ywate: sarfuar!) ae weaty area faa: yary

fea | aeaaatn fa warfa garter Fraattar |

Translation.

Salutation te the divine son of Vasu Deva, deal: ) We adore

with becoming reverence N&rdyana, lord of lords, creator of the three

worlds, source of the holy precepts of the vedas, whose praise is

beyond speech and thought.—For the abode of the eternalt day by

day the pious offer up lamps of oil; of saffron} and asafcetida four

* This should be fy, + A Vaishnavi temple so called ?

t Kunkuma-dréma; the whole of this passage is very obscure, and full of

erthographical errors.

2 B

726 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. (Nov. .

pans* : of incense, dron flowers, ghee, amalika (myrobalan fruit) a sér

weight ; masuri pulse, a ser; of dry-wood perfume (indan) ; davaha-

(?) 16 pans.—(Here follows apparently an enumeration of landed pro-

perty belonging to the temple or Vishnu-khetram)—Allagamarika (?) a

road,—Upa allaka, a small village, with a good tank having four pucka

ghats. They say on the south is a bay tree; on the east a boundary ,

wall; on the north the wall of Upauiixa village ; on the west a bazar

and old tank, where is alsoa wall. Between the bay and a great

many mango trees are 13 ketakit trees. Also hard by, a well with a.

cattle-trough attached. On twosides of the bar tree a chabutra is built,

on the west a boundary wall: farther off to the south, a tamarind

tree, on the south and west are two roads, and a police chawkt} : fur-

ther on a drinking trough. On the north of the tamarind tree, half

a trough ; item two rows (shops) built by Loxrxa ; whose son, named

Mirrata, built a row, a cistern, and a handsome dharmsala. An-

other lane also, two houses and four bazars, for the Vishnu-khetra,

bounded to the west by several large hills,—four mauwa trees, two

pottery and distiller’s shops (?) were severally given by Siva Hart,

another son. (Verse.) Whatever has been thus presented to Vishnu,

may they for ever hold sacred ; and let nobody abstract the house, the

bazars, (300?) nor the numerous trees.

Seoni grant, Plate XXIII. et seq.

~ For this ancient document I’am indebted to. Mr. D. M. McLzop,

assistant to the Commissioner of the Nerbudda territories, who stated,

on sending me a copy of the first plate, some months ago, that it was

one of five in the possession of a native zemindar in the Seont district,

supposed to be a jatas or sanad confirming lands granted by former

Goand chiefs, but wholly illegible to the pandits of the Nerbudda dis-

trict. Recognizing the character as identical with that of the Chattisgarh

inscriptions, published by Mr. Witson in the Asiatic Researches, vol.

xv. page 507, I supplied Mr. McLxzop with this alphabet and with a

transcript of the plate in modern Nagari, of which the sense, however,

could not be wholly made out for want of the context. Through absence

of leisure, and illness of his pandit, the discoverer has been obliged to

relinquish his laudable desire to decypher the document on the spot,

(where he might, doubtless, have been aided by the names of the coun-

tries and villages mentioned in the grant,) and to entrust a faithful

copy of the remainder, made with great care by his young native

friend Mir JAFin ALt, (who has performed his task remarkably well,)

to our more hazardous attempts in Calcutta.

* 8 Tolas. t Pandanus odoratissimus. t Bhath.

our. As Soc Fol Vi PLxAXIM, 2.

Third Plate continued

jajeaytanygza sje dypaaaggg ag

G3 ngDAaayAOQaal ys yTOgaiae

PFadpaniraczma@adag:3da

saya) HzA:aaeoeaqadeaqdiaen

[ray soe jarqqaadzdpogaaaac

JRIT2G:AT AMIE yay jag anys

pasegs pysar {gat oag-aljdya any

ajpaaddaraibasgajpaaag sy

Fg]: 85 AFyra gs wrapayg ara

agiag fp Daay hag: a] 32 Layaa gay

PaganPasraagy walnogans das

says ae padaay-aacajanpay up yawse

araArapaddaarayr vad ao gs |

@ xis apTeapadgas ia sagas

ji Tasyarayadia, anyrady 4g

para gakaargy py and 44 ¥ \

a adaanachah shang Qiaag pra ag

aT gaa Ppa wa Sey ey ee |

faa GP AAT AA wang ay angi dn 78a aawas :

insertptton enthe Seal.

Le tters Peculiar ~2n farm.

i kh Too a a ae mJ” (®) a) br Aba @th Bl Ai Frew |

Be Pe Pee Gn W as ce 8) BY ay Fmd (1) Eg CH)

Ha ie Te ae he atlas - eel

STL rincep lth,

Prinked Phe Oriental Lak‘ Press. Calcutta

Journ.As. Soc. VolV. PLIXARY

One of S Copper Plates in pofsefsvon of a jemindar at Seonc.

rs Aqe MS UgTeg TgTEaag oy yaa

Ty aq q ye De & Jug aURGYURED RE RT

272) yi] way Ray RagaTise 0

SELES CEE EEL EL ESSE Ci LEE ae”

NAT eATCATIATF MUNA TH Mseayea |

FACSIMILE ana aes Musevm.

An.Bom./035.

‘

» pene pt day dad, 2 =— WS

r : wae PArea, 3 am eS

Sr a: rd Pole Se

pa as few r S Bi

I MO Bs oe pam 5S |

aud oJ 4 ie as =

FED AS (Se Se es)

sed ele ei & a]:

bs |aw Sle & gl=

Se eee oe Ae as ee oS

; * cul a g 7 a |

NPA ia eg af6 4!

Ut 2 | ae ee

, oe gl ed Gye 3b

magnry 23 jar <2 | 3)

GRACE eee ee SHE RUE

A MaAG a ile 2 Aly

ae EE

la qaqnela var. Bie hs pa ae Le 3 = d

ZHaAqageA Voocs [vwitten fle &

: :

| fe) - UNZSR SE:

2? Ne 4

_@ way,” Wii.

Wir

iter ay3y3 anaagaere: grease

ageny- rpepe gsi es }eaay aye |

cE AibshiE bat Ht ly tit la

dqug suas 7 ObpeA san yayrargsad

PHUMAIYA SS YTIGAPTAAY-eReH |

AgTaseAy CsgoTT Ty ]ALTy inp zAaa? |

ASang Y MAMI YAY FPT ATED |

pSUaY) apa-alg) greg] yy SAP IDR

4yipMah daa sar gaa ag Aaapgog sed |

gupdyganruyd say aaAassad sIFR |

spe AUG Is 9 VAT: yoyar, PeRTYMTE

spapyq.ay-w07a huspaag rey

FATT gasaarguyiigensay |

TARTS Rada ganga-A joa a) |

VAGAT TY Msg ayss apyeaya Aa: |

pyyrayaigaseaegi trea |

ep HT aes Tyr ad Tait we

7836.) Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 727

-”

Received only within the last week, I have been so hurried in tran-

scribing, translating, and lithographing, that I fear full justice has not

been done. The order of the plates having been lost by taking

them from their binding ring, I had to guess it from the connection

of the reading—and on revising the first translation, with the aid of

a second learned pandit (Kamaxa KAnrt), I found I had inverted the

order of the two sides of the second plate in the lithograph, which I

~ was unable to correct, before printing it off. I have also omitted the

of the lithograph. The rest is, I believe, pretty correct.

The character in which the Seoni plates are written, when depriv-

ed of the open parallelogram at the head of each letter, is so closely

allied to No. 2 of the Allahabad lath, that there could have been but

little difficulty in decyphering it, even without the aid of Sri Varma

“Suri's alphabet, which Mr. Witson seems from his words to have

applied with considerable distrust at that period*. There are indeed

notable deviations from the Chattisgarh typet in several letters, as well

as invariably in the application of the vowels. I had inserted Varma

Surr’s alphabet in Plate XXXIII. with a few variations marked. I

have now further noted some of the chief peculiarities at the foot of

the last plate.

Concerning the purport of the inscription little need be said. It is

an erdinary grant by one Raja Pravara Sena, of a piece of ground in

a conquered district to his officiating priest, in perpetuity :—but neither

the country nor the boundary villages mentioned, nor any of the said

Raja’s family can be recognized! The dynasties of Cuttack, the near-

est resembling Vakdtaka in sound, exhibit no such names as Pravara

Sena, Rupra Sena, Priruivi Sena, Rupra Sena; and again Pravara

Sena, who successively reigned over this unknown province. That

they were of an inferior grade is shewn by their simple title of Maha-

rdja, while Deva Gupta, whose daughter was married to one of the

line, and was mother to Rupra Sena II. is styled the paramount

sovereign (Maharaja Adhiraja). This is the second instance within

a year of our finding the record of a matrimonial alliance with a

Gupta family, which we can suppose to be no other than the one now

so well known to us through coins and pillars. The present name

Deva Gupta, however, is an addition to our still growing catalogue.

* “ After two months the pandit was again called on without previous notice

or preparation to read his copy of the original, whilst his reading was checked by

careful reference to the Devanagari transcript.’’ As. Res. XV. 507.

+ M. Jacauer has sent me from Paris the facsimile of a plate in the Top

collection, which corresponds more closely with the Chattisgarh plates.

5 B 2

728 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov.

What would have added still more to the value of the present docu-

ment, is the exact date it cites, were it not unfortunately in an unknown

era, entitled Pravarddhamdnarajya Samvat : it may, however, bear the

interpretation of ‘‘date of the growing (or current) reign” which I

have adopted in thetranslation. At any rate, the omission of the now

common dates in all these early records proves that the Vikramaditya

Samvat was not then generally in use.

The omission of a benedictory invocation at the head of the inscrip-

tion is a curious circumstance also noted in the Chattisgarh grant. The

initial word Dristhamasi, may possibly be equivalent to ‘‘ Take heed” —

r ‘“‘ By these presents.” Some of the epithets, especially those ap-

plied to the piece of ground, are too far-fetched even fora guess

solution by Kamara Kant and Ram Govinpa, whose ingenuity has

good reason to be admired even im those I have attempted to render

into English. They refer to practices of petty exaction not uncom-

mon among feudal chieftains.

Transcript of the inscription tn modern character,

AT HISH ASAT

MAITSU Ay:

th Pas a ea

cee Ua VAS ATR

wea Rye

ae \ afqemnmiaaaire wracaarsiyy eeafaga

agqMagraaVaiag fawaquiay wee (Was: alearar

MRIS AIAITY Qt wis wawafares

Uae seufgainatustasiaetinay vitqe

aqauifeatiaad Wara UU AT YMA CA SSA TS TA

faaraTa HUSA ATAT ATA CRA ATTA

QFVAY Olay BORA SIC TASTHRUT

afamarafa Taare lanl taTee aaa faa aa asThy

ara ea feaUTgrerea qu aa aSATART

qwayaNMayauiray: afafeqe ta arearareaertiss

Fisfeaiwey wera wats: qaierarisra

Raqzay AR SRA ASTI A AIT wat

FARIS qa MATa A ATCT: GAVIA HAT

feaeaigs: ETI THTI MATA FATATHATA Tt

TMAMATAY WA: TRU PraTIgITEy aR eR

FRUAHI ATTY AVMUANITT AY TATA UA

aracala TTEMTACI TAT WENA HIT

ANAT SRA aHSATAT afactarareat

F SAMA AFTRA VRCS: WAU AT:

AAICH AMA flee: qeycagintu faatear

SHAM watt icay efata qayrwnyg

1836. ] Fucsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. 723

gan SNA CHSY A ACH fACHAS BAHAMAAAT:

Para AAAs: WMATA HIga saa: AST

FRAT frqagara arava ararafaaar: fated

we F: qearenta: mraa rear yara pasa aa hrees

<eraa fearsararqqera Falah WHRIa Baz

ama: ACMA MTS: APUSPICIRITHAAT

ceaaaxic: ahaa farracraaa: wag fafeaicec

ufcea: afata: arafafe: afatian: sraaiiea

AINA: VAM ATMA AAT AF a afaqiarata

aa: Vapaaiia: F cfaaa: ufcaefarae Fara

sraqarugaia: auaty uiced Farsacaa aT

aa aTAVTIa ea weufary Hala HicaHy Fhe

arsar arazatefaaarsia || whe varfaaca

BATA RTT AT fauaufcareaaaag

wan wera: TEATS AT aryargrrenty

SI iI areata SI4 Alar Tata tay

ufequaeariu aa areata ufee: | SIU aT ATA

| Alard ACH FAA SSMS AA Br TT

a Aga | Wai MaTSY waecfa Saafate i

Translation.

Of the seal. The irresistible edict (sdsanam) of the illustrious

prince of hereditary lineage, the ornament of Vakdtaka, Raja Pravara

SENA. ‘

Of the copper plates. Drishtamasi nama*, The illustrious Mahardja

Pravara Sena of the race of Visunu-rupRA the rishi, performer of the

several sacrifices of Agnishtoma, Aptoryamekta, Shorasyatirdtra, Véjapé,

Vrishpati, Sadyaskra, and the Chaturasvamédha, ruled over the entire

(province of) Vékdtaka. In his place (succeeded) the superlative lord,

devoted to Bhairava—happy in being the vehicle of the moon-liket Siva.

linga,—the great king of Vékdtaka, Sri Rupra Sena, grandson of

Goramr’, the daughter of the great king Buavana‘eat who was descend-

ed from arace of conquerors entitled to be inaugurated with the unsullied

water of Bhagirathi, (the Ganges,) and who had bathed in the sanctified

water of the Dasasvamédha sacrifice,—the Bharasiva race. To him

succeeded the diligent worshipper of Manesvara§, the just, upright,

benevolent, brave, heroic, moral, humble, high-minded, strict in religious

observances, victorious through faith, of a soul free from blemish,—en-

dowed with all these virtues ;—(who was) blessed with a century’s store

* This might possibly be an invocation in the usual form, but no divinity

of the name of Drishtamasi, of which the letters are quite distinct, is known,

t+ White. The epithet signifies a devoted worshipper of Siva.

t Or Bhavanaétha? § Siva.

730 Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. [Nov.

of treasures, of the benefits of civil polity, of warlike armament, of

children and grand-children—who was as celebrated as Yupuistuira,

the great prince of Vakdtaka, Sri Priruiv1 Sena. To whom succeeded,

the protected of the discus-holding divinity*,—the most opulent Mahé-

raja of Vékdtaka Sri Rupra Szna:—who was followed by the son of

Prapnavati’ Gupta’, the daughter of the conformer to ancestorial cus- _

toms—the upright conqueror of his enemies—The great king of kings

Sri Deva Gupra,—the protected of Siva,—possessing the firmness of the

Rajas of the Satya yuga,—surpassing all of the race of Vékdtaka princes,

Maharaja Sri Pravara Sena ; whose edict is (as follows. sey

Ernna Karyyaratdget...in slid 18th year of his reign{? on the 12th

day of the light half of the month of Pha/guna,—to Deva er cHa'RYA,

chanter of the Sama véda, of the Modgala tribe, and Tuaitriya sect, is

granted with the ceremonies of sprinkling Ganges water, Kérata (?) and

distribution of 100 pans,—the village of Brahmapura, situated to the

north of Vatapura, to the west of Kinauhi-vdétak to the south of Pavarajja-

vatak, and to the east of Kollapur ; demarked by these several boun-

daries, and seated on the banks of Karanja rivulet (?)

Be it known to all our subjects, our functionaries, and agents, to all obe-

dient ryots now and hereafter, soldiery, spies §—That with the usual intent

of such grants, for the increase of our virtue, life, power, wealth, and pros-

perity, here and hereafter, as well as for the divine favor; in the holy dis-

trict recently conquered by us, (the said village is bestowed) free from mili-

‘tary-billeting[(?)—where the raja’s deer and cattle shall not graze**—

not subject to provide flowers and ath: Where shall be neither spy,

nor royal-chair, nor magazine tt. a . §§? in which the

inhabitants shall not be liable to nego or forbed oe 3—along with its

‘buried treasures and such like:—and with all its stock and the like -—as

long as the sun and moon shall endure, to be enjoyed by him, his sons

and descendants. Let none prevent or oppose; but defend (his posses-

sion)—and let him enjoy all increase by cultivation. Whoever shall

disobey this order, or make encroachment or abstraction by himself or

through others, shall be liable to fine or punishment before the judicial

authorities.

Written by the pandit of the general Barra Deva inthis court of

justice ( Dharmadhikarané ). Whatever pious fame has accrued to princes

* Vishnu. + The sense of this passage is obscure—one pandit by altera-

tionto eFC would make it express ‘‘ at a solar eclipse’’

ee for dating similar documents.

} Pravarddhaman rajya Samvat ?

—a common

§ Bhartas’ chhanrdscha.

4 Avatacchatraprdvésya—all the succeeding epithets laudatory of the jagir

are equally far-fetched and obscure.

** Apndramparagobalivarddah. tt Apashpakshirasandoha.

t Achérdsanavarmangara (for dgéra). It was customary with rajas to keep

an ee san or throne, a spy and armour at each village.

§§ Alivanatlinvakrenidhanatra ? Sarvavishti- parihara parihrita ?

1836.] Facsimiles of various Ancient Inscriptions. Vol.

of yore from similar acts should be remembered, and those who come here-

after should uphold them—(?). The holy Vyas has the following two

verses to this effect :—

** He who bestoweth land on brahmans shall enjoy 60000 years’ hap-

piness in heaven; and he who resumeth it shall abide an equal term in

hell. If he take away either by himself or by others, his sin is equal to

that of the slaughter of a hundred thousand cows.”

Inscription No. 6, of the Asiatic Society’s Museum.

I have inserted this inscription in my series because it possesses an

exact date, and because the original was not given in facsimile by

Mr. Cotesrooxe when he transcribed its contents in his notice of va-

rious inscriptions in the ninth vol. of the Researches, page 433. There

are, moreover, several letters misread in that copy from an imperfect

acquaintance with the changes they have undergone in the course of

ages: of these the bf is the most prominent, being taken from an s*.

The Sarnath inscriptions of the same century have taught us its real

value.

Still with these emendations the context hardly bears complete

explanation, though the general object is clear. It states that in

Samvat 1093 (A. D. 1035) on the Ist of the light half of Asdrh, the

paramount sovereign Yaso P&ua of Kate at the village of Payahdsa

in the kingdom of Kausambhé (or Delhi) issues commands to the prin-

cipal persons.... The following is the transcript as recompared with

the original on the stone.

Hag yoes BGS Whe y

BAS MAARS ACCSHAUTANBW UTS HIGGS TYMSWA FIAT

wavafenfa qoruMastsrytiraa were wala waa

wpacrecaqqaciafea wervasaifafa evaaa asfaa creed

TANS... Sz

Inscriptions from Chunar.

The two fragments inserted in Plates XXXI. and XXXIII. were

presented by Capt. Cunnincuam, along with the stone in more per-

fect preservation published in a former plate, All that can be said of

either is, that as the name of Swa/m1-RA’sa appears on one, they pro-

bably relate to similar objects described by the larger one, viz. the

repairs of public buildings in the fort of Chunar.

The Buddha gaya inscription of Plate XX XIII. was alluded to in my

last notice.

* The s of this character enabled me to read some Ceylon coins of the same

century.

732 Some remarks on the development of Pollen. [Nov.

VI.—Some remarks on the development of Pollen. By Wituiam Griv-

VITH, “Assistant Surgeon, Madras Establishment.

Pollen of Pardanthus Chinensis, Kur. Nat. Order Iridee.

At the earliest period submitted to examination, and when the

perianth scarcely exceeds half a line in length, the anthers are sessile

and nearly perfectly formed. The cells, of which (as is perhaps the

case in all bilocular anthers) there are four, contain a solid grumous

semi-opaque mass, which is easily detached from the cell by slight

pressure. This mass under a lens whose focal distance is one-twen-

tieth of an inch, shews evident traces of cellularity, but the outlines

of the cells are very faint. They are entirely filled with exceedingly

minute granular matter. Ata somewhat later period the cellularity

of the mass is more obvious, but no separation of the component parts

has taken place, and the cells are still entirely occupied by the granular

matter.

When the perianth has attained the length of a line and a half, the

mass will be found to have become externally of an orange colour,

and traces of a proper enclosing membrane, the cells of which are

extremely indistinctly marked, are ndw visible. The membrane ap-

pears to have no connection with the interior of the loculus. The

cells composing the mass have undergone some separation. They

consist of a hyaline membrane which appears to be of some thickness ;

it is generally of a globular form, but often attenuate at one or both

ends. The granular molecular matter which originally filled the

whole cavity of the cell, now occupies a portion only, and never ap-

pears to lose its spherical form. When the perianth is two lines

long, the proper membrane of the mass has become more distinct ; its

cells contain a good deal of granular matter of a reddish orange

colour. The cells of the mass have become more separated, but have

otherwise undergone no change; the semi-opaque nucleus presents

traces of division most frequently into four, often into three, and very

rarely into two portions. The division is more distinct towards the

circumference of each cell; it may be observed in the same mass in

every stage, from the commencement of the dividing lines to their

meeting in the centre. The smaller masses or nucelli resulting from

this division are each enclosed in a proper cell, but as yet have under-

gone no Separation.

In the next stage the perianth had increased two-thirds of a line in

length; the mass presented externally the same appearance. The

component cells had increased in size, and the divisions of the nucleus

had in many cases undergone complete separation from each other,

1836.] Some remarks on the development of Pollen. 739

and in all were separable by slight pressure. ach of these divisions

is at this period a young grain of Pollen. On making their escape

they leave their proper cells attached to the interior of the parent cell,

which is’ hence divided into as many cells as there are divisions of

the nucleus. The young grains are oblong-ovate, flattened on their

contiguous or inner faces, and open along the centre throughout the

whole length of their outer faces. They are even at this period reti-

culate, and have rather a papillose appearance; they are lined by an

inner membrane in the form of a hyaline sac which bulges out

slightly along the opening just mentioned.

When the perianth is three lines long, the grains of Pollen have

undergone complete separation ; no traces of their original envelopes

being visible. They vary much in size, are rather opaque, minutely

reticulate, and marked along one side by a longitudinal semi-trans-

parent line, which indicates the situation of the original opening, now

closed up by the inflection of its edges. Immersion in water produces

scarcely any action on them. At a later period, the perianth measuring

five lines in length, the grains are considerably increased in size. Im-

mersion in water causes the inflected margins of the furrow to secede,

until they become widely separate. Through this the inner membrane

bulges out to a considerable extent.

Perianth about six lines in length: the Pollen is now perfectly

formed ; the grains vary much in size, the smaller being probably

abortive, but theya ll undergo the same changes on immersion in

water. This causes the outer coat to be pushed back by the expan-

sion of the inner, which is now nearly filled with minute granular

matter.

At the time of dehiscence of the anthers the grains vary much in

size: the more perfect are lanceolate in outline, of an orange colour,

distinctly reticulate or cellular, and open on one side along the centre.

This, however, is perhaps to be attributed to the excessive moisture of

the climate. Immersion in water causes the very rapid bulging out

of the inner membrane, which pushes back, and at length nearly en-

tirely off, the outer one. This is filled with minute granular matter,

the fovilla and burst of the immersion is somewhat protracted.

Stigmatic action causes the production of a tube or boyau from the

inner membrane, the head of which tube continues to be covered

partially by the outer coat.

This instance is interesting as an example of the development of

Pollen by the division of an originally simple nucleus and of perfect

and almost spontaneous separation of the outer coat, and lastly as

5 ¢

734 Some remarks on the development of Pollen. _—— [Nov.

pointing out clearly the nature of the longitudinal furrows of such

common occurrence in the ordinary forms of Pollen.

In the two other instances which I have selected as demonstrations,

the steps are much the same. Care must be taken not to confound

the appearance presented by the Pollen of Luffa fetida at a late

period of its development, and which evidently arises from the strong

inflection of the outer membrane, with that occasioned by the much

earlier dividing process.

In Hedychium I have been unable to examine the development at

a sufficiently early period, but it appears to me the divisions of

the original or parent cell form the outer coats of the subsequent

grains of Pollen: this is certainly not usually the case. The Pollen

of this plant is remarkably simple, for it is neither provided with fur-

rows nor apparent pores.

The inner coat,—for I am disposed to believe that it has one,—ad-

heres strongly to the outer, and none of the ordinary means are

sufficient to ensure its separation.

As I have, since a portion of the above was written, received num-

bers of the Annales des Sciences Naturelles for March and April 1835,

in which occur extracts of considerable length from the writings of

Mr. Hueco Mont, who has published lately (1834) at full length on

this important organ, it may not be amiss here to state the principal

results to which this botanist has arrived; noticing, however, only

those which relate to development and structure.

After pointing out that in by far the greater number of cases, the

inner membrane, which contains the fovilla, is enclosed in a second

membrane, M. Mout proceeds to a detailed account of the outer

membrane. This is represented as being always finer than the

inner, and as generally determining the form of the grain ; and that it is

to the liquid secreted by it that the colour and viscosity of the grain

is to be attributed.

The punctuation which frequently exist in this membrane are

supposed to be rudimentary cellules ; hence the comparison of this

coat to a simple cellule is altogether inexact ; it should be considered

as an organ composed of cellules or the rudiment of cellules, and a

homogeneous uniting membrane, and hence it should be compared

with compound membranes ; such, for instance, as those of the ovule.

It is only in a small number of plants that this coat presents the

form of a perfectly closed, continuous, spherical sac ; in most cases it

is either furnished with folds or pores, or both.

Up to the period of M. Mout’s publication nothing whatever was

known of the nature, functions, or number of these folds; most bo-

—~ Ss ee eee

1836.] Some remarks on the development of Pollen. 7395

tanists, so far at least as may be judged of from their descriptions,

considering them to be solitary. M. Mout remarks, that in monoco-

tyledones they are generally single, but that in dicotyledones the num-

ber is generally increased, and occasionally exceeds twenty. The

portion that is folded in has always a different structure from the

remainder, and is generally smooth and transparent; and it rarely

ever happens that in cellular Pollen the inflected portion is itself

cellular. He supposes that in all cases the outer membrane forms a

perfectly closed sac, although in some Pollen the inflected portion has

more of a gelatinous than a membranous consistence, and is ruptured

by immersion in water. The apparent pores visible in the Pollen of

many plants, M. Mout states to be in all cases covered over by a thin

membrane—to the existence of this membrane over the larger pores

he speaks positively. In those cases in which the membrane covering

the pore separates in the form of an operculum, it is attenuated alone

along the margin of function or continuation with the remainder of the

outer coat. These statements accord with the author’s views of the

nature of the supposed pores of cellular tissue; views, however, which

have not been generally received, and which in the case of cellular

tissue are open to weighty objections. The inner membrane is repre-

sented as always having the same structure; it is always completely

homogeneous, very thin, and hyaline, and always exists as a shut sac.

It is particularly remarkable for the facility with which it absorbs

water; this M. Mout looks upon as a physical action and as attribu-

table to endosmosis.

The production of tubes (boyaux) by immersion in water, (and

‘which are prolongations in all cases, except perhaps in Conifere, of

the immediate covering of the fovilla) never takes place in those

Pollens, the outer membrane of which is perfectly closed, or the folds

or furrows of which are unprovided with pores. But in every Pollen

they are produced by stigmatic action. The action likewise exerted

on the grains by this portion of the female organ is more energetic

than that of water, producing twelve or fifteen times the diameter of

the grain ; while the longest, M. Mout observed, produced by the ac-

tion of water only exceeded the grain in length once, or once anda

half.

I may here state, that M. Mout has understated the length of the

tubes arising from stigmatic action. The length will depend upon

the distance between the part of the stigma to which the grains are

applied and the foramen of the ovulum to which they have to be ap-

plied. Thus, for example, in Zea mays, the length of the tubes must

be enormous, since the style itself is about a span long. It may be

5 c 2

736 Some remarks on the development of Pollen. [Nov.

objected, that there is no proof of the universal necessity of the appli-

eation of the tube to the foramen, or that portion of the ovulum cor-

responding to this. Still there is ample proof of this necessity in

Asclepiadez ; and, as I have observed it in Solanee, Gentianee,

Nelumboree, and Leguminose, 1 have no doubt that the application of

the tube to the foramen is absolutely necessary to insure fecundation.

And with regard to the length produced by the action of water, I have

seen tubes produced from the grains of Pollen in a species of Impa-

tiens, I believe the Impatiens tripetata of Roxburgh, exceeding six or

eight times the long diameter of the grain; these tubes, however,

never even after protracted immersion contained any granules. Their

growth in the above instance may be actually watched, the apex of

the tube creeping along with an excessively slow vermicular motion.

M. Mout states, that Asclepiadee alone have no outer membrane.

The existence of this membrane as a distinct integument has been

proved by Mr. Brown; although in almost all the species of this

family, the outer coats are in a state of mutual adhesion*.

Conifere are said to have three coats ; the intermediate one resem-

bling the inner membrane of ordinary Pollen, especially in its great

extensibility ; in this property the innermost, although it has the ordi-

nary structure of inner membranes of other Pollens, is deficient.

As I have mentioned before, this author considers the outer mem-

brane as the secretory one, and he denies the possession of secretory

powers by the papillz; an opinion stated to be advanced by Mr.

Brown. M. Mountz proves that the secretion of oil is not limited to

any papillosity of surface ; of this Pardanthus Chinensis' is an instance.

This botanist doubts the proper activity of the molecules or granules

contained in the fovilla, and he adduces the authority of M. Fraun-

HOFER as to the utter impossibility of preventing currents in liquids.

* {find that the cells of the anther of Oxystelma esculentum are at an ex-

tremely early period lined by a free simple sac containing irregular masses of

opaque granular matter ; soon after, this cell appears to be filled entirely with

the granular matter, by which it is rendered somewhat turgid. In this state it

is detachable with extreme difficulty. When the flower bud is two lines long, the

mass has become cellular, and the granular matter correspondingly subdivided.

The subsequent changes consist merely in the increase of size and consistency

of the parts, and perhaps in the development of the inner membrane. We may

hence be allowed to infer that the mass, from which all Pollen grains seem to

be developed, is in Asclepiadee reduced to a single cell: and that the grains

are produced by its indefinite division. The only material objection to this view

exists in the original cell itself entering into the composition of the grains of

_ Pollen; and in its not disappearing, as appears to be generally the case.

1836.] Some remarks on the development of Pollen. 737

Still I conceive it impossible to doubt the inherent mobility of these

granules. In some oily Pollens granules may be observed by the

sides of excessively minute drops of- oil, certainly not exceeding the

larger granules twice in diameter; and yet the granules will be seen in

active motion, and the oil perfectly stationary. M. Mout contradicts

positively the curious fact advanced by M. AvotpHe Bronenrarrt,

that the granules are in some plants of the same size. Of this I cer-

tainly have never met with an instance. He likewise doubts the cur-

vature of some molecules; but as Mr. Brown and M. BroneniartT

speak positively on this point, | should prefer adopting their testimony.

It is, likewise, said, that the idea of the granules nourishing the tubes

is untenable, and founded only on conjectures. But as it invariably

happens that the longer the tube is the fewer the granules are, this

opinion, which was I believe first indicated by the highest of all au-

thorities, Mr. Brown, cannot be said to be destitute of foundation.

With regard to the development of Pollen, M. Mout states that

his observations entirely confirm those of M. Bronentart, and that

the Pollen is formed from the granular matter contained in the cells of

the parenchymatous mass, which exists in each cell of the anther.

But although M. Bronenrart certainly appears to have been the first

to have observed the formation of pollen by division, yet his account

in his ‘‘ Memoire sur la generation et le developpement de l’embry-

on dans les vegetaux phanerogames,” is certainly not characterised by

that precision which exists in the account of the development of the

Pollen in Tradescantia virginica by Mr. Brown, and subsequently in

that of Cucurbita Pepo by M. Mirseu.

This latter, indeed, was the first instance examined by M. Brone-

NIART, who states that what are now known to be lines of division

result from pressure. It still remains to be proved whether in any

instance the formation takes place, as M. Broneniart says it does,

in Cucurbita Pepo, by the cellules of the mass contained in the cavi-

ties of the anthers becoming directly grains of pollen. M. Mout

mentions many instances in which the quaternary division is resorted

to; it is owing to the continuance of the original adhesion that the

pollen of many plants iscompound. The number, however, is not in

every case thus limited: the generality of the species of Mimosa,

Acacia, Inga, have pollen composed of sixteen cellules. But on the

development of these no direct observations have as yet been given.

The number of masses into which the originally simple nucleus may

be divided, is almost as frequently three as four. Of the binary com-

position of the mature Pollen Podostemon affords the only instance as

738 Some remarks on the development of Pollen. [Nov.

yet known to me, but this may obviously arise as well from a quater-

nary as a binary division of the nucleus.

M. Mout rejects very properly as highly improbable the opinion of

M. Bronentart, that the granules of the fovilla are secreted by some

part of the inner surface of the cells of the anther, and that they

reach their destination, the cavity of the inner membrane of each

grain, by absorption. It must, however, be remembered that M.

Bronenianrrt alludes to this mode of formation and transmission with

considerable doubt.

Lastly, M. Mout notices the extreme similarity between the forma-

tion of the pollen and that of the sporules of the more developed

Cryptogamia. Iam not aware who first pointed out this curious

analogy, which cannot well have escaped any one who has examined

both formations at a sufficiently early period. My first knowledge of

it is due to M. Mirseuz, who pointed it out to me early in 1832*.

Explanation of the figures, Plate XLI.

1. Portion of a mass extracted from a loculus; perianth 1 line in length.

2. Ditto ditto ; perianth 14 line in length.

3. Three of the component cells of a mass ; perianth 1} line long.

4. Four similar cells more developed; perianth about 2 lines long.

5. Portion of a mass enveloped in its membrane, extracted from the cell of an

auther ; perianth 2 lines in length.

5a. Two of the component cells detached.

6. Four of the cells detached: (perianth 23 lines long:) viewed in different

aspects :—from one, three nuclei have escaped, and the fourth is half exserted.

* Equisetacee do not, as might be supposed from their late elevation into

an order of Gymnosperma, differ from the higher forms of Cryptogamia in the

development of their sporula. The spiral fibres, as might be expected, are of

comparatively late appearance, and they are developed on or in a loose mem-

branous coat, no traces of which are to be found until the sporula have assumed

their proper form. The fibres subsequently, and about the time of the deve-

lopment of the fibres of the cells of the inner parietes of the capsules, become

free, the membrane to which they were attached remaining as an envelope to

the sporule, from which it subsequently becomes separable with facility. The

granules are of still later appearance.

To the correctness of the chief portions of the above statement I can speak

with tolerable confidence, but I only infer that the hyaline envelope of the per-

fect sporule is the mature state of the tunic, to which the spiral fibres are

originally attached.

There would hence appear to be no foundation whatever for the adoption of

the idea of the sexuality of Equisetacee,—an idea very likely to meet with advo-

cates from its extreme ingenuity. The analogy of the fibres or supposed fila-

ments is to be looked for in the elaters, and of the tunic or envelope in the

tunic of the sporules of many Hepatice.

ise pe bale

ron. if =

eS Rnd ~ P

wg Ot ne

oe , he bad

Ket VFL. XL

‘

> - ee

Oriental Luk Fress. Caleulia.

Vat. V PEXLATL

Orisatal Lith Press. Grlulta-

1836.] Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains of Dédépur. 739

6a. Lateral view of the nuclei or young grains of Pollen.

6b. Vertical view of ditto on its outer face.

7. Pollen immature: the perianth being 3 lines in length.

7a. Represents what was the inner face prior to the escape of the nucleus

from the cell.

8. Pollen viewed variously; perianth 5 lines in length, shewing the various

degrees of expansion of the fissure according to the length of immersion.

9. Pollen: perianth 6} lines long. 9a. Inner membrane escape.

10. Perfect Pollen. 10a. Grain viewed as an opaque object.

Plate XLII. A.

Pollen of Luffa fetida.

1. Portion of a mass extracted from one of the cells of an anther: flower-

bud one and half line long...

2. Portion of a mass more advanced : the component cells adhering toge-

ther firmly. Flower-bud about two lines long.

3. Cells of a mass more advanced : they cohere very slightly. Perianth two

and half lines long.

4. The same submitted to slight pressure, shewing that each nucellus is

contained in a separate cell.

5. Cells more advanced.

6. Pollen perfectly formed, but destitute of granules. Flower-bud about

three and half lines long.

7. Three grains of Pollen considerably more developed ; in the centre of

each fold there exists a pore. . Flower-bud four lines long.

8. Pollen: the folds have disappeared. Flower-bud five lines long,

9. Perfect Pollen.

All more or less magnified, and all examined in water.

Plate XLII. B.

Pollen of a species of Hedychium.

Fig. 1. Five original cells in various states of composition and cohesion.

Perianth three lines long.

2. Grains of Pollen resulting from the complete separation of the above: an

inner disc is visible at this period. One grain has burst by pressure.

3. Two grains of Pollen, one abortive. Perianth one inch long.

4. Perfect Pollen: one grain ruptured by pressure.

All more or less magnified, and all viewed in water.

VII.—Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains of the Dadupur Collection. By

Lieuts. W. E. Baxer and H. M. Duranp, Engineers.

QUADRUMANA.

Lyz.t, when combating the inconclusive evidence advanced in

support of the theory of the progressive development of organic life,

notices the absence of remains of quadrumanous species in a fossil

state, and the hypothesis which this circumstance has by some geo-

logists been considered to countenance. He, however, draws attention

740 . Sub-Himdlayan Fossil Remains of Dddapur. [Nov.

to the fact, that the animals which are found in sub-aqueous deposits,

are in general such as frequent marshes, rivers, or the borders of

lakes, and that such as live in trees are very rarely discovered; he

adds, moreover, that considerable progress must be made in ascertain-

ing the contemporary pachydermata before it can be anticipated that

skeletons of the quadrumanous tribes should occur. . Considering the

great number of relics assignable to the Pachydermata, Ruminantia, and

Fere, which the Sub-Him4layan field has produced, it is not therefore

surprising that at length the half jaw of a quadrumanous animal

should be brought to light: the circumstance, however, being inter-

esting in several respects, we have not deferred its communication

until further research should put us in possession of more perfect

specimens; the chances are against the probability of more being

brought in for some time—in the interval it may be as well at once to

add to the Sub-Himalayan list of fossils one species belonging to the

order of the quadrumana.

The specimen in question was found in the hills near to the Sut-

lej, and it appears from the attached matrix to have been derived

from a stratum very similar in composition to the one described as

occurring at the Maginund deposit. The fragment consists of the

right half of an upper jaw; the molars as to number are complete ;

but the first has lost some of its exterior enamel: and the fifth has

likewise had a portion of the enamel from its hind side chipped off.

The second and third molars are a good deal worn, and the state of

the fourth and fifth such as to indicate that the animal was perfectly

adult. The canine is small, but much mutilated, its insertion into

the jaw and its section being all that is distinct.

From the inspection of the molar teeth, the order to which the

animal belonged is sufficiently evident ; but there is enough of the

orbit remaining to afford additional and very satisfactory proof; the -

lower part of the orbit and the start of the zygomatic arch being very

distinct, would alone remove all doubt from the subject ; the orbits of

the quadrumana being peculiar and not eo to be confounded with

those of other animals.

On comparison with the delineations of the dentition of this order -

of animals given by F. Cuvier, the fossil bears some resemblance to —

the genus Semnopithecus ; the section of the canine and the form

and size of the false molars are very similar to the exemplar taken by

F. Cuvizr froma head of the species Maurus, a species found in

Java: had the drawing been taken from the Hntellus, a species which

inhabits India, the comparison would in this instance have been more

— Jour As. Soe. Vol Vi PIXLVII.

Sub Himalayan fossil Remains

euw ae

Case

ty Tobe

Gee QA2agrunp2zanNa

Baker ces. S Peinsepp loth

Rao oul aca wit

eee 4 bap ii ="

hig ae ie

1836.] ' Land and Fresh-water Shells. 741

satisfactory; the Maurus being chosen as the type, and no mention

made of other difference except length of canines, the various species

may be supposed to present no material departure from the type in

form of molars. The third molar in the fossil is so much worn as not

to admit of being compared with drawings from unworn teeth; the

fourth is like that of the Maurus, but the fifth does not resemble the

analogous molars of any of the existing species as represented by F.

Cuvier, for the fossil tooth possesses a small interstitial point of

. enamel at the inner side, which does not appear to have place in any

of those delineated. The incisors are absent, but the intermaxillary

is clearly distinguishable. F

Were it not for the size of the canine and the fifth molar, the

specimen presents some resemblance to the genus Macacus, given as

the type of the genera Macacus and Cynocephalus ; the smallness of

the canine and the large size of the molars causes the fossil to ap-

proach more nearly to the Semnopithecus than to the Macacus; the

difference is, however, great between the two, for the Hutelius is said

to attain the length of three and a half feet, whereas the length of

the fossil animal, if the space occupied by the molars and their size be

deemed sufficient ground for a conjecture, must have been equal to

that of the Pithecus Satyrus—the space taken up by the molars is

2.15 inches. This circumstance, and the differences before pointed

out, clearly separate the fossil from the species belonging to the genera

Cynocephalus or Semnopithecus. The specimen is imperfect, but it

indicates the existence of a gigantic species of Quadrumanous animals

contemporaneously with the Pachyderma of the Sub-Himéalayas, and

thus supplies what has hitherto been a desideratum in Paleontology—

proof of the existence, in a fossil state, of the type of organization

most nearly resembling that of man.

Note.—Fig. 2 in the Plate is a little foreshortened in order to show the

bottom of the orbit at a, which in an accurate profile view is hidden by the

ascending part of the orbit, the section of which is seen at 6.

Both figures were taken with the camera lucida.

VIII.—Descriptive Catalogue of a collection of Land and Fresh-water

Shells, chiefly contained in the Museum of the Asiatic Society. By

W. H. Benson, Esq. B.C. S.

Part 2.—-FLuviaTitE SHELLs.

(Continued from page 358.)

19. Planorbis umbilicalis, Testa quasi dextra luteo-corne4, polita,

leviter radiato-striata, infra excavato-depress4, anfractibus omnibus

versus umbilicum profundum spectantibus, ultimo interiores pene

_ a

742 Description of Land and Fresh-water Shells [Nov.

tegente ; supra convexa, versts apicem planata, apice concavo, omni-

bus anfractibus satis apparentibus: peripheria obtusé angulata.

Diam. 0.3 poll.

This shell, belonging to the same division of Planorbis as the Bri-

tish species Pl. fonianus, (Pl. nitidus, Lamarcx,) in which the whorls

on the inferior side are nearly covered by the succeeding ones, may

easily be distinguished from that species, which it resembles also in

colour, by the greater convexity of the last whorl towards the peri-

phery, and by the slope towards the penultimate whorl, on the under

side; while in Pl. fontanus the convexity is next to the penultimate

whorl, and the slope tends towards the circumference. The disposi-

tion observed in Pl. umbilicalis occasions a great concavity on the —

under side of the shell. The superior margin of the aperture, as in

most of the depressed Planorbes, projects much behind the inferior

margin, occasioning a great obliquity from the plane ofthe axis. The

North American species Pl. deflecus and Pl. exacuens of Say, more

especially the latter, have an affinity to this shell, which is probably

an inhabitant of the streams of Szlhet.

20. Planorbis trochoideus. Testa quasi dextra diaphana, subtrochi-

formi, supra glabra, rotundato-convexa, apice concavo-depresso quasi

umbilicali ; anfractibus omnibus parim apparentibus, satura excavata

divisis ; infra radiatim striata, truncata, planata, umbilico contracto.

Anfractu ultimo majori reliquos amplectente, supra pene, infra omnino

obtegente ; periphzeria acuta.

The last whorl altogether conceals the other whorls on ite lower

face of the shell, leaving merely a contracted umbilicus in the centre,

towards which the flattened surface declines. On the upper side only

a small portion of the depressed spire is shewn, the whorls being rather

compactly wound. The species differs from all others hitherto de-

scribed in the singular truncated form of the inferior surface, and in

the circumstance of the last whorl winding closely round the axis, as

in many Helices and Trechi, without the intervention of the preceding

whorls, none of which are visible in the very contracted umbilicus.

The only shell of the genus which bears any very near resemblance

to it in the formation of the under side, is Pl. fontanus of British

authors, (PI. nitidus of Lamarcx,) the umbilicus of which is unusually

contracted when compared with other species of the genus, but still

exhibits within its vortex the whole of the preceding whorls, and so

does not deviate from the recorded generic character ; while the spe-

cies now brought to notice renders nugatory, as far as it is concerned,

two important characters of Planorbis, viz. ‘‘ anfractibus omnibus

’

utrinque conspicuis,” and ‘ apertura ab axe remotissima.” For the

1836.] in the Society’s Museum. 748

present, considering that a similar variation of character in Trochus

and Helix has not prevailed to separate species from those genera, I

have not thought it necessary to detach Pl. trochoideus from Planor-

bis, but am inclined to consider it as one of the terminal species ;

merely prefixing to each of the characters above quoted the word

“« crebrius.”

As this form does not belong to the Sil/hef collection, and is an

inhabitant of the neighbourhood of Calcutta, I intended to have in-

cluded it in a paper on some other new Bengal species; but as it is

desirable, in consideration of its interesting and anomalous structure,

that its publication should not be delayed until I can devote leisure to

their description, I seize the present opportunity for making it known.

The only specimens met with were taken by me, in August 1835,

in the gardens of Barrackpur Park, near a tank, on the margin of

which are some artificial ruins. They inhabited large earthen vessels

filled with water, containing aquatic plants, and adhered to the prone

surfaces of the floating leaves ia company with a small Planorbis*,

and a small lengthened Lymnza which approaches in its characters to

L. chlamys of this catalogue.

21. Planorbis compressus, Hurron, J. A. S. vol. iii. p. 91, No. 12.

The Si/het specimens scarcely differ from weathered individuals of

Lieut. Hurron’s shell, in which the extremely delicate carina, which

margins the angular periphery in perfectly fresh specimens, is more

usually found to be obliterated. The depressed whorls are equally

visible on each side, and are highly polished in recent examples.

They occur in great perfection near Bandras, adhering to the floating

foliage of Trapa natans, and occasionally swimming at large on the

surface of jhils. This is the species alluded to by me as Planorbis

B. in. page 264, vol, i. Gleanings in Science, and figured as No. 10,

Plate VIII.

22. Planorbis Indicus. Pl. corneus? Hutton, J. A. 8S. vol. iii. p.

90, and Benson, Gleanings in Science, page 264, Plate VIII. fig. 6.

Testa discoidea, albida vel cornea, superné plano, suturis excavatis,

umbilico depresso ; subtis planato-depressa, laté umbilicata ; anfrac-

tibus ventricosis transversé profundé et eleganter striatis etate vari-

cibus munitis. Apertura rotundata, auriformi, minimeé obliqua.

Pl. Indicus is scattered over the whole of the Gangetic provinces,

and scarcely a pool of water can be found destitute of it. The Silhet

specimens prove to be a small corneous variety occasionally to be

* I omitted to take specimens of this shell, which is either P?, compressus of

HurtTon, or anew Calcutta species, P/. manus mili, which is very similar to the

British species Pl. albus.

5 D2

744 Description of Land and Fresh-water Shelis [Nov.

met with tothe westward. In some waters the species attains a great

size, being 0.9 of an inch in diameter, and nearly equalling in mag-

nitude Pl. corneus, which it resembles in general appearance, but

from which it will be found to differ in the depth and regularity of

the strie, in the comparatively less profound excavation of the sutures

on the upper side, and less profoundly sunk apex, as well as in being

somewhat less ventricose. The animal is most commonly of a black

olive colour, occasionally dark maroon red.

- In the foregoing descriptions of Planorbis I have used the words

upper and lower with reference to the faces of the disc which adjoin

respectively the back and foot of the animal when creeping. The

animal of Planorbis is undoubtedly sinistral, but if the shell be view-

ed as such practically, and placed with the side which would in a

sinistral shell be accounted the apex uppermost, it will be found

that the animal is on its back, and that it will have to twist its body

half round in order to gain the ground with its foot ; and that in order

to creep with any ease, it must reverse the position of its shell. This

will be more especially observable in the flatter and more oblique

mouthed species. I propose, therefore, to consider that face as con-

taining the apex, in discoid shells, which is contiguous to the back

of the animal. This side may invariably be known in Planorbis by

the greater projection of the lip in that part, by the deeper depression

of the central umbilicus, and by the more considerable involution of

the whorls occasioning a greater depth of suture.

Observers have, in general, adhered to no fixed rule on the subject,

and have been guided chiefly by the aspect of the shell. Turtron’s

characters of Pl. fontanus and Pl. contortus afford an instance of the

same side being considered the upper in one species, and the lower

in another. Lamarck was more consistent, and while he rightly view-

ed the shell as sinistral, called, in every species, that side of the shell

which is contiguous to the back of the animal, the lower face. On

the other hand, it is evident, from Say’s description of Pl. deflexus

and Pl. corpulentus, and from his denominating those species dextral,

that, in those shells at least, he has followed the contrary rule.

23. Lymnea chlamys. Testa translucente, cornea aut castanea,

elongato-ovata ; spira gracili, breviore, acuminata; anfractu ultimo

infra preecipué ventricoso; suturis parce depressis; apertura infra

patente, basi leviter evasa.

The Lymnea in the Sv/het collection is the chestnut-coloured variety.

The paler kind is met with in great perfection in Lehtdra jhil, near

Bandras, in company with Planorbis compressus, and another fine

Lymnea which I designate as Lymnea Butta. The Silhet shell has an

1836.] in the Society’s Museum. 745

eroded spire, and consequently wants the graceful appearance of the

western variety. I at first described it as a distinct species, but a

comparison with a good series from Bandras, where the species is very

variable, has led to their reunion.

Lieutenant Hurron has referred the species with a mark of doubt

to L. limosa, which it in no wise resembles. In perfect specimens

the spire occupies about one-fifth of the total length. Greatest length

of the shell 1.4 inches.

24. Paludina owytropis. Testa tenui ovato-conica olivaced, de-

cussatim striata ; anfractibus superné carinis plurimis fuscis ornatis,

ultimi carina media saliente subacuta ; inferné fasciis quibusdam eleva-

tiusculis fuscis ; suturis inconspicuis ; apice acuta; canali umbilicali

‘excavato ; apertura intts violaced, peristomate acuto, nigro. Long.

7 poll. Lat. 1.3.

This is a very remarkable and elegant species. Some of the speci-

mens are, I believe, much larger than the one described.

25. Paludina Lecythis. Testa tenui, globoso-conicé ampullacea,

olivacea, glabra, rugis obsoletis decussata ; spira obtusiuscula; an-

fractibus valdé ventricosis, rotundatis ; suturis excavatis ; apertura

intus violacea spiram longitudine superante; peritremate nigro, subre-

flexo; umbilico evanescente.

The strie of growth, or rather the indications of former lips, are

very frequent and prominent near the back of the outer lip; the rest

of the shell presents that facet-like appearance which is so remark-

able in some Lymnzx. I was at first inclined to consider this shell

to be Gray’s Pal. Chinensis, figured, but not described, in GrirFitH’s

Cuvier; but our shell is much more ventricose, the sutures are

more pronounced, and it is deficient in the angular appearance observ-

able at the base of the aperture in the Chinese species. It is a very

thin shell in proportion to its volume. The epidermis is greenish

olive in young specimens, reddish fuscous in the adult. Long. 2 poll.

Lat. 1.7.

254. Paludina Bengalensis, Lamarcx. Idem. var. balteata, fasciis

elevatiusculis.

26. Paludina crassa, Hutton’s MSS. and J. A. S. vol. iii. p. 90,

No. 5.

Testa ovato-conoidea, ventricosa, solidd, pallidé virente, obsoleté

fasciata, rugis exilissimis decussata ; anfractibus tumidis, suturis exca-

vatis ; spiré obtusa; umbilico subcanaliculato; apertura intus lac-

tescente. Long. 1 poll.

This species varies in configuration even in the same waters, some

specimens approaching to a subglobose form, while others have a

746 . Description of Land and Fresh-water Shells [Nov.

more lengthened conoid spire. It is very abundant in the river

Gimti at Jénpur, where it is paler, and has a more yellowish tinge

than the Silhet variety, which, from having an eroded summit, appears

to have inhabited stagnant water. It has a singular habit, for the

genus, of burying itself in the mud or sand in shallow water, often in

large societies ; other species conceal themselves in the mud in the

season of drought, but P. crassa does so from choice, and is impelled

by no such necessity. The shell of the lately excluded young is so

depressed and globular, that it might be easily mistaken for a young

Ampullaria. The adult shell attains a degree of thickness unusual in

the genus.

27. Paludina pulchella. Valvata, No.9, Hutton, J. A.S. vol. iii.

p- 90.

Testa ovato-conica leviter striata, epidermide olivacea ; anfractibus

rotundatis, suturis depressis. Aperture peritremate nigrescente ;

umbilico arcto. Long. 0.3 poll.

Aperture occupying half the length of the shell.

28. Ampullaria. The specimens of this shell, which is common

in Bengal, are much superior in size to any which I have met with

west of the Brahmaputra. As I have reason to believe that the species

is described, I shall content myself with this allusion to it. I should

have considered it to be A. fasciata of Lamarck, were it not that

that species is said to have a corneous operculum.

29. Melania variabilis. Testi elongato-turrita solida olivaced

vel picea, sub epidermide albida; anfractibus convexis transversé

liratis, longitudinaliter striatis et costatis; costulis anfractis ultimi

superné nodulosis ; apice plerumque truncato ; suturis excavatis. Aper-

tura intus violacea, columelle basi sinuata.

Inhabits the river Gumii at Jénpur, and Tolly’s nullah near

Calcutta.

Var. A. Anfractuum inferiorum liris elevatis, nodulis elevatioribus.

Inhabits river Héighli at Calcutta.

Var. B. Liris, mediand exceptd, obsoletis; nodulis subspinosis

carinam humeralem coronantibus.

Var. C. Levis liris costulisque obsoletis, anfractis ultimi medio

subcarinato, adulti nodulis humeralibus frugaliter sparsis.

Var. D. Anfractuum superiorum costulis obsoletis, ultimi et penul-

timi liris transversis costulis longitudinalibusque superné serie duplici

nodulosis. :

Varieties B, C, and D are in the Silhet collection. The type spe-

cimens of several of these varieties would, if viewed apart, be easily

mistaken for distinct species, but they melt into each other so gradu-

1836.] in the Society’s Museum. 747

ally, occasionally shewing the characters of more than one variety

combined in the same shell, that no doubt remains of their blending

in one species. In Tolly’s Nullah I took larger specimens than any

in the collection; though at least four twists of the spire were defec-

tive, one individual measured 3.4 inches in length. The Giémti spe-

cimens are less liable to truncation, and in young specimens the

apices are nearly perfect. I have not observed more than 12 whorls

present in any specimen. I described the type of the species without

a name as species A* in the 13th No. of the Gleanings in Science. It

was figured as No. 7, in Plate VII. vol. i.

30. Melania Stephanus. Testa ovato-conica, gradata, plerumque

deinde truncata globoso-ovata, olivacea anfractibus obsoleté fasciatis,

transversé sulvatis, superné planulatis, spiris brevibus validis coro-

natis; apertura albida subrotundata, superné feré angulaté; labro

subdenticulato.

This shell, which is very solid, approaches in form to M. Amarula,

but differs from it in the configuration of the aperture, and in the

comparative shortness of the whorls, as well as by the denticulations

on the inner edge of the labrum. Among the numerous specimens

which I had an opportunity of inspecting, only a single individual

was perfect, and the greater number exhibited only two whorls, the

remainder being truncated. This character I find to be an usual indi-

cation of habitation in stagnant water. The sulcations on the whorls

are sometimes obsolete.

31. Melania zonata. Testa ovato-conica, levi, longitudinaliter

striata, olivacea, zonis tribus brunneis fasciaté; anfractibus leviter

convexis, suturis minimé profundis; apertura albid& ovato-oblongé

infra subangulata. Long. 0.85 poll.

This a very distinct and pretty species, with a strong onli

It is generally eroded at the apex.

32. Melania Terebra. Testa elongato-turrita, olivaceo-brunnea,.

levi, polita; anfractibus tumidis ; suturis excavatis; sinu inter basin

labri columellamque nullo. Long. 1.05. Testa truncata.

It is distinguished from the young of the smooth variety of M.

variabilis by the want of angularity at the centre of the lower whorl,.

by its polished epidermis, more tumid whorls and more deeply sunk

sutures, as well as by the absence of the sinuation of the inner lip

which characterizes that species. The apex of the shell is more or

less truncated.

33. Melania conica, Gray? Testa solida, globoso-conica, longitudi-

naliter striata plerumque transverse obsoleté sulcata ; anfractibus, ultimo

ventricoso ceteris rapidé diminutis; suturis bene signatis; apertura

748 Description of Land and Fresh-water Shells [Nov.

ovata, intis albida, fasciis quibusdam castaneis ornaté; labro intus

denticulato.

This species resembles so closely the figure given in GrirFitH’s

Cuvigrr, Pl. 14, f. 3, as Melania conica of Gray, that I am unwilling

to describe it as new, in the absence of a specific character of that

shell. Gray’s figure, however, does not exhibit the obsolete sulcations

of the shell under review,—an omission which may be attributed to the

brown incrustation with which they are ordinarily obscured, nor the

smoothed denticulations which ornament the interior margin of the

right lip in our shell. Should it eventually prove to be distinct, it

may be named M. denticulata from this character, which is also pos-

sessed in a minor degree by M. Stephanus. The spire is eroded in

all the specimens which I have examined. Length one inch.

34. Neritina depressa. Testa solida, sub-convoluta transverse

ovata, gibbosa, olivaced, longitudinaliter purpureo-fusco laté strigata,

strigis versus apicem angulato-flexuosis ; spira depressa; anfractibus

sub-binis; peritremate integro acuto, sub-orbiculari; septo calloso

magno; apertura parva, lunata, aurantia ; labio sub-recto, medio emar-

ginato, ibi denticulato.

Greatest transverse diameter 0.8 inch. The peritreme which sur-

rounds the aperture and shelving callus is nearly free, and occupies

nearly the whole face of the shell. All within it, including the sep-

tum as well as the aperture, is usually of a dull orange colour. When

weathered the shell is whitish, with pink bands and zig-zag lines; the

denticulations of the inner lip are occasionally obsolete. The indivi-

duals in the Society’s collection are probably from the Sundarban

rivers, as the species is common, adhering to wooden piles and brick-

work in the Hughli at Calcutta, as well as in waters which have

periodical communication with it. The following species is so nearly

allied to N. depressa that I shall describe it here for the purpose of

instituting a comparison and pointing out the distinctive characters,

although no example of it occurs in the collection.

35. Neritina cornucopia. ‘Testa solidiuscula, convoluta, subsym-

metrica, transversé ovato-acuta, gibbosa, pallide virente, punctis mi-

nimis nigris, interdum confluentibus, lineis longitudinalibus dispo-

sitis ornata ; spora valdé depressd ; anfractu pone callum compresso,

sub-mediano, minimé obliquo; peritremate acuto, libero, ovato, pene

totam testam circumcludente; callo magno ingrescente ; apertura

lunaté mediocri; labio recto tota longitudine denticulato, medio

emarginato.

Greatest transverse breadth 0.7 inch. At the first glance this shell

would probably be mistaken for the last described species, from

1836.] in the Society’s Museum. 749

which it differs more especially in the greater proportionate size of

the aperture, in the perfect parallelism of the inner lip with the axis

of the shell, its denticulation nearly throughout its whole length, in-

stead of merely in the centre ; in the compression of the whorl at the

back of the callus, and its subcentrical position, thereby occasioning

the approach of the shell to a symmetrical configuration, and finally

in its suite of colours. It is much less frequent than N. depressa. I

have met with only two specimens, in the Hagli at Fort William,

and in Tolly’s Nullah, adhering to piles and bricks. The aperture is

livid white, with blackish shades. The operculum, following the form

of the aperture, is broader than in N. depressa, and its two costate

teeth are more developed.

36. Neritina tigrina. Testa globoso-conoided, cornea vel olivacea,

lineis subtilissimis, fasciis angulato-flexuosis, maculisque nigris longi-

tudinaliter strigata ; suturis obsoletis ; anfractu ultimo ventricoso,

infra suturam excavato-depresso ; apertura obliqua, intus alba; callo

columellari macula luted notato; labio medio emarginato, infra pro-

jecto, emarginatione projecturaque ambabus denticulatis.

The specimens, in the collection, of this very handsome species are

of an ordinary size. A fine individual which I took adhering to the

piles which defend Fort William from the action of the Hugli,

measures 1.35 inches in length. The operculum is very strong, and

besides the two exserted mucrones at the lower part, have two strong

radiating curved ribs on the inner surface, the central one of which

forms, at its termination, a third mucro. In addition to the living

examples which I met with in the River Hugli, I have a beautiful

specimen which I captured in the aqueduct that supplies the old

Course at Calcutta. When decorticated the ground of the shell is

white ; and the black markings assume a purplish hue.

Two other very distinct species of Neritina with oblique apertures

inhabit the waters around Calcutta. I propose shortly to describe

them as N. retifera and N. obtusa.

In all the species of Neritina of which I have seen the operculum,

that accessory piece is smooth and polished, exhibiting only faint

radiating strie or strie of growth; but in a ribbed Nerita which

occurs at the embouchure of the Higli, the exterior surface of the

operculum is granulated like shagreen. Is this latter character per-

manent in the genus Nerita ? if so, it will furnish an additional mark

to distinguish the two genera.

37. Navicella compressa. Testa transversé elongata, compressa,

luted, albida, vel corned, lineis munitissimis se alone diversé colo-

5 E

750 Land and Fresh water Shells. [Nov.

ratis, maculisque alternatis radiantibus decoloratis picti; dorso

elevato; limbi extremitatibus emarginatis. Long. 0. 85, Lat. 0. 45

poll.

From the peculiar form of the aperture of this shell, it is evidently

accustomed to adhere to the convex surfaces.of cylindrical bodies of

small diameter, probably the stems of shrubs growing in the water,

to which the sinuous disk would exactly conform. The numerous

specimens in the collection all possess the same feature, which is

never observable in Navicella tessellata of LamMarcx. The last men-

tioned shell I discovered adhering in abundance to piles in the

Hughli river under Fort William, and more rarely attached to bricks

in Tolly’s Nullah. Ihave retained the name proposed for the new

species by Dr. J. T. Pzarson.

ACEPHALA.

38. Anodonta soleniformis. Testa elongatissima, posticé angus-

tata, extremitate rotundataé; anticé latiore, sub-alata, extremitate

obliqué truncata: Natibus complanatis, imconspicuis, senectute obli-

teratis, decorticatis; epidermide junioris fulvidd, preter angulum

umbonis viridi, salcis illuc vinis impressa, etate fuscd. Long. 6

poll. Lat. prope apicem 1. 2, Lat. prope alam 1.5 poll.

This is a very interesting shell, being, in proportion to its length,

the most elongated of the genus. The pearl! of the interior is bluish,

with a salmon tinge in old specimens, which are likewise much worn

on the exterior surface, and have their posterior muscular impression

very deeply marked, and, as it were, carious. The anterior muscular

impression is considerably elongated under the transverse direction.

With the exception of a minute species which inhabits ponds in Bun-

delkhand, this is the only Anodonta hitherto met with in this Presi-

dency.

39. Unio ceruleus, Lea. Trans. Amer. Phil. Socy. vol. 4.

- A compressed variety of this shell occurs in the collection.

40. Scaphula celor, Testa elongata, tumida, leviuscula, anticé

angulata, inter umbonem extremitatemque anticam subito evasa;

carino umbonali compresso, costula obsoleta contigua.

| Scaphula: Brunson, Zoological Journal, Vol. 5, page 464-5, and

Gleanings in Science, Vol. 1, Plate VII, fig. 2 and 3.

One or two examples of this rare fluviatile genus of Arcacea which

I first discovered in the Jumna, and subsequently met with in the

river Cane, occur among the shells brought from the Eastern

frontier.

1836.] Note on Zoological Nomenclature. 751

IX.—Note on Zoological Nomenclature. By B. H. Hopveson, Esq.

If I revert to the comments of your anonymous correspondent upon

my Cervus Elaphoides, (No. 52 for April,) it is because I think that a

question of some moment hangs upon the judgment pronounced in

this case, viz. the right to designate species, and the consequence of

doing so from very imperfect knowledge.

According to your correspondent’s own shewing, Cuvier never

procured more than the horns of this deer; and, so conscious was

Cuvier, ultimately, of his inability to fix the species upon a just

basis, that, in his last edition of the Regne*, all mention of it is

omitted. Meanwhile, however, he gave it a name, upon retaining

which your correspondent insists, although your correspondent, in

the very same page, exhibits the following practical consequence of

such proceedings.

The first writer of the age upon the tribe of animals to which our

Cervus belongs (H. Sir) is entirely misled by Cuvizr’s insufiicient

definition, or rather designation, and ascribes this deer to the Rusa

group! Now, it is a well known fact, that, although the more skilful

general writers upon zoology have, of late years, omitted half the

recorded species from inability to verify them, yet that, amongst the

species inserted, no careful student can satisfactorily refer to one in

ten! Is this system to go on? and, if not, is there any cure for it

but a general resolution to admit no names of species which the

nomenclator has not, at the time, or subsequently, verified ?

Your correspondent has only to turn to those recent and costly

works upon Indian Zoology, Gouup’s Century and Harpwicxn’s

Illustrations, and he will find that the multiplication of idle names

and of fictitious species is still going on, under the auspices of per-

sons who neither have, nor can have, competent means of at once

undoing past errors and preventing future ones. Press or picture,

it is the same thing. Neither ought to be devoted, in permanent style,

to the propagation of delusion and inconvenience ; nor any ad interim

labours of any man recognised, (except such as he has ultimately

himself completed), if their recognition have that effect, at the same

ime that it interferes with the just reward of the ripe and adequate |

labours of others. Finis coronat opus: and, though it may be rea-

sonable to admit temporarily all names, as an index and stimulus to

discovery, as well as to sustain eventual claims, if advanced, yet

those names alone are entitled to permanence which the affixers,

sooner or later, connect with indisputable species. Cuvier himself

* A new and amended list of all authentic species is given in this edition.

ok 2

752 Note on Zoological Nomenclature. {Nov.

abandoned his name, because he could not eventually so connect it:

and I confess I do not perceive upon what sound principle your

correspondent insists upon the revival and retention of that name.

I beg to acknowledge the courtesy of your own note appended to

the communication in question, and to state my conviction that Du

VauceEL most probably obtained the horns of the Cervus Elaphoides

from me.

The observation of your correspondent—that the “ suborbitar

depression on the skull of our deer is perforated by a very large oval

hole, which is not found in the skull of the Jarai”’—wants, I believe,

confirmation. Such holes are very usually found in the skulls of

both species ; but, so far as my experience goes, they are not proper

to the perfect skull of either*. After considerable inquiry amongst

my friends to the westward, I have determined to retain the name of

Bara Sinha for the Cervus Elaphus ; those of Maha and Bahraiya for

Cervus Elaphoides ; and that of Jarai for the only type of the Rusa

group known to me. This animal is the Cervus Jarai of Hopeson,

precisely because he has found it utterly impossible to fix the shifting

and insufficient specific indications of H. Smirn—a difficulty, by the

way, which your correspondent seems to share, if I may judge by his

somewhat loose allusion to ‘* Cervus Hippelaphus and Aristotelis or

_Rusas’”’ (in the plural.) May I hope for his valuable assistance in

my endeavours to decide, whether there be really more than one spe-

cies of Rusa in the Bengal Presidency? and which of the several

named by H. Smiru it or they be? Let me request your correspon-

dent to test the above remarks on nomenclatare by applying them

to the very difficulty just cited. I am content to abide by the

issue !

[We have to apologize for so long delaying the publication of Mr. Hope-

SoNn’s note, which has been lying in type at the printer’s some months. We

are very sure the correspondent to whom he appeals will assist in the desirable

object of identifying and fixing Indian Species.—Ep.]

* If they were, we should be in the way of ascertaining the probable or pos-

sible truth of that startling assertion, that breathing takes place through the

suborbital sinus. I have examined repeatedly fresh heads of several species

with a view to this assertion: and my conclusion is that it cannot be true,

unless breath can pass through bone and skin too: for, in the perfect skull

there is no solution of continuity in either substance, within the limits of this

sinus. Without and above the sinus, there is something extremely like such a

solution, in the sculls of Elaphus, Ratwa, Jarai and Elaphoides. But, even

here, a perfectly fresh head will exhibit osseous or quasi osseous continuity ;

and the skin-fold is ever uninterruptedly carried through the sinus, though

with much attenuation at the bottom of it.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 753

X.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 7th December, 1836.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

H. Watrter, Esq. C.S., Principal Bramuey, Dr. James Dreummonp,

Nawab Tanawor June Behadtr, Shéh Qasr v’p1'N, and Dr. R. A. Jack-

son, proposed at the last meeting, were balloted for, and duly elected

Members of the Society.

Mr. W. Dent was proposed by Mr. H. T. Prinsup, seconded by the

Secretary.

Mr. Manux, proposed by Dr. Stewart, seconded by Mr. Battie.

Babu HeramBana’tH THakur was appointed to officiate as Collector

to the Society, during the absence of Babu Ram Comut Sen, on a visit to

the Upper Provinces.

The following reply from Government regarding the Alif Leila was

read:

To James Prinsep, Esa.

Genl. Dept. Secretary to the Asiatic Society.

Sir,

I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter, dated the 7th ultimo,

relative to the proposition of Mr. C. BRowNLow, to publish at his own private

risk a complete edition ofthe Unir Lerxa, or Arabian Nights’ Entertainments,

in the original Arabic, from a very complete manuscript purchased by him from

the estate of the late Major Macan, and requesting the same support to this

work as has usually been accorded both by the local Governments, and by the

Honorable Court of Directors to literary undertakings of a similar description.

2. In reply, I am directed to state that in compliance with the recommenda-

tion of the Asiatic Society, and in consideration of the manner in which the

publication of this work has been undertaken, and of the credit that will attach

to its completion in the manner proposed, his Lordship has been induced to

subscribe for fifty copies at the price stated, viz. 48 rupees per copy.

3. The copies when printed will be appropriated for distribution as prizes

in the Seminaries of Education at which the study of Arabic is cultivated, with

the reservation of such number as the Governor of Bengal may present to the

Public Libraries and Institutions of Europe or of this country. Mr. BRowNLtow

may be desired to deliver the fifty copies at this office, where his bill for them

will be discharged.

4. But the Right Honorable the Governor of Bengal cannot close the reply

to this reference from the Asiatic Society, without expressing a strong desire to

learn that the translation of the complete work is likely to be undertaken by

some competent scholar of this Presidency. His Lordship will be glad to be

informed of any scheme for procuring the accomplishment of this desirable

object, that the Asiatic Society may be able to suggest and think deserving of

encouragement.

I have the honor to be,

Sir,

Your most obedient servant,

H. T. Prinsep,

Fort Wiiliam, the 2nd Nov. 1836. Secy. to Govt.

Resolved, that a copy of the reply be transmitted to Mr. C. Browntow,

the publisher of the work in question,

It was intimated that a gentleman in the Civil Service, eminently qualified

for the task, had volunteered to make an English translation of the portions of

the ‘‘ Nights’ Entertainments’’ as yet unedited,

754 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nov.

The following letter from the Asiatic Society of Paris, brought out by

the Chevalier General ALLARD, was also read:

Société Asiatique, Paris, le 1 Mars, 1836.

Messieurs ;

Les encouragemens que le Gouvernement Anglais dans l’Inde a accordés pres-

que en tout temps 4 la publication des ouvrages classiques dans les langues

savantes de l’orient ont toujours été regardés en Europe, comme un de ses plus

beaux titres de gloire. Ces publications ont puissamment aidé au développe-

ment que les études historiques et philologiques ont pris depuis le commence-

ment de ce siecle, et elles ont servi a répandre le gout des lettres orientales.

Ainsi les ouvrages classiques publiés par le Comité d’Instruction publique de

Calcutta, quoique destinés immédiatement aux écoles Indiennes ont rendu aux

écoles de l’Europe les plus grands services. Ils ont commencé a remédier 4

la rareté des manuscrits sanscrits en Europe, et ont facilité l’étude d’une littéra-

ture dont importance pour histoire de l’esprit humain n’a pas cessé de s’ac-

croitre.

Le Comité avait donné, dans les derniers temps, l’espoir quel’on verrait encore

s’aggrandir le cercle de ses entreprises. II avait annoncé que le Mahabharat,

le Raja Tarangini et plusieurs autres ouvrages de la plus haute importance,

étaient sous presse, et qu’il préparait des materiaux pour une édition des Vedas

et des livres sacrés des Bouddhistes. Ces annonces ont été recues en Europe

avec un intérét marqué, et les savans ont suivi avec une grande sollicitude les

progrés deces ouvrages. Mais on a appris derniérement, que le Gouvernement

du Bengale a cru devoir suspendre toutes les impressions en langues Orientales,

et destine les fonds qui devaient y pourvoir, 4 un but différent.

Il n’appartient pas 4 une Société littéraire de juger des raisons politiques ou

financiéres d’un gouvernement étranger, mais la Société Asiatique croit pouvoir

exprimer ses regrets qu’on ait abandonné des entreprises qui auraient servi les

intérets de Ja science, et qui auraient honoré la nation qui les avyaient com-

mencées. Aussi, a-t-elle sincérement applaudi a la détermination que vous avez

annoncée, Messieurs, de reprendre la publication de ces ouvrages, et elle désire

vivement pouvoir vous aider dans l’accomplissement de votre plan. Elle vous

offre en conséquence de servir d’intermédiaire entre vous et les Savans du

Continent. Elle espére pouvoir trouver un nombre plus ou moins considérable

de souscripteurs aux différent ouvrages que vous avez |’intention de faire paraitre.

Si vous agréez ce plan, elle vous prie de lui communiquer la liste des ouvrages

4 publier, et les prix approximatifs de chacun. La Société redigerait alors un

programme et une circulaire, pour faire appel ases membres et aux divers

corps savans, a fin d’exciter autant que possible l’intérét du public pour les im-

portantes publications de la Société.

It est impossible d’apprécier d’avance le resultat de cette démarche, mais la

Société croit ne faire que son devoir en donnant aux savants Européens les

moyens de s’associer a votre généreuse entreprise.

Nous avons l’honneur de vous offrir, Messieurs, l’assurance de notre haute

considération.

P. AmrpE1 JaAusert, Président de la Société.

Eve. Burnour, Secrétairé de la Société.

Resolved, that an appropriate reply be returned in the same form to the

Asiatic Society of Paris, accepting with pride and satisfaction its generous

offer of aid in promoting the completion of the abandoned oriental works,

and of acting as the channel of their circulation and sale on the continent

of Europe.

A letter from Major Troyer, tendered, in the same spirit, his service

as agent to the Society at Paris, and acknowledged receipt of presenta.

tion copies of Sanscrit works.

Extracts of letters from Messrs. Burnour, Jacquet, and Professor

Lassen, connected with the same topic, were read ; also from Messrs. Cas-

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 755

sin, agent and bookseller to the Paris Society, suggesting arrangements

regarding the prices of the several works.

A letter from M. Rovy pe Rocneiie, President of the Geographical

Society of Paris, stated that a resolution of the Society had determined

to present the Asiatic Society with a complete series of their Bulletin,

anterior to the period when its relations with Calcutta had commenced.

Resolved, that the compliment be returned by presenting a copy of such

former volumes of the Researches as are in store.

A letter from Mr. Epwarp Tuomas, C. S. at Almorah, presented three

manuscript volumes in short-hand of the late Mr. Larpuay.

They appear to be private note books, and memoranda of the author’s read-

ing—not in the common form of stenography, and therefore illegible.

Dr. D. Srewarr presented copies of the Proceedings of the Statistical

Society of London for 1835-36, and series of questions and forms for circu-

lation, with a view of extending its information on subjects connected

with the science.

The PresipenT founded upon these documents, a motion for the formation

of a Committee in the Society, which should direct its exclusive attention to

the Statistics of India, both by inviting returns to circulars modified to suit the

circumstances of the country, and by searching, with permission, the records of

Government.

Mr. H. T. Prinsep urged that the magnitude of the object was beyond the

power of a Committee ; the Government had at one time expressly commenced

such a record, and had given it up after spending a lakh and a half of rupees on

three small districts.

Dr. Stewart thought that the materials collected might be examined and

abstracted by the Committee, and, without aiming at minute detail, much useful

information might be obtained on the population and mortality, for instance,

of the principal towns. He had himself lately roughly estimated the mortality

of Calcutta, and was appalled at finding it 1 in 26, the highest rate almost

on record. After some discussion it was

Resolved, that a Statistical Committee be formed, consisting of Sir B.

Matxin, Mr. J. G. Gorpon, Mr. W. Apam, Mr. Batu, and Dr. D.

Srewarrt, the latter gentleman kindly undertaking the duties of Secre.

tary.

Library.

The following books were presented.

The Archaelogia, or Transactions of the Antiquarian Society of London—by

the Society.

Transactions of the Geological Society of London, vol. iii. part 3, and vol.

iv. part l—édy the Society.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of London, No. 5—by the Society.

Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, Nos. 40, 41, 42, 43, 44,

and 45—by the Society.

Sir Puititre Grey Ecrerron’s Catalogue of Fossil fish in = own and Lord

Cotnr’s Collection—dy the Author.

756 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. (Nov.

Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological Society of

London, on the 19th February, 1836, by Cuarues Lyxzun, M. A., F. R. S.

President of the Society—dy the Society.

Memoires de la Société de Physique et D’ Histoire Naturelle de Genéve, tome

vii. pt. 1—bdy the Society.

Two Tibetan block-books, religious tracts, entitled Smon-lam-bischu-tham-ab-

yorbai-smon-bsngo-ba ; and, Bchom-ldan-hdas-ma-sches-rab-kyi-pha-rol-tu-phy-

inpai-sning-po ; printed at Leipsig—sy M. Jacquet.

Glagolita Clozianus ; Codicis Glagolitici Antiquissimi, Leipsanon folioriom

servatum in Bibliotheca Paradis Cloz Tridentini, by Bart. Kopitar, Curator of

the Imperial Library at Vienna—presented by the Author.

Gefchichte der Osmanifshen Dichtlunft—dy the Baron Von Hammer-Purg-

stall.

Lectures on Comparative Anatomy, by Dr. Ropert E. GRant—by the Author.

Bulletin de la Société de Geographie, vol. i. iii. iv. to x. and xvi. to xx. of

the first series ; and vol. iii. iv. of the second series—dy the Society.

Abrégé du Roman Hindustani intitulé La Rose de Bakawali, par M. GARcIN

Dr Tassy—by the Translator.

Mode d’Expression Symbolique des Nombres employés par les Indiens, les

Tibetains et les Javanais—by M. Jacquet.

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, and 96, for 1835, and. Nos.

1, 2, and 3, of the New Series for 1836—dy the Asiatic Society of Paris.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, No. 13—by the Madras Literary

Society.

The Indian Journal of Medical Science and Scientific Review, No. 12 —éy

Dr. F. Corbyn, the Editor.

A copy of the Old Testament, translated into the Burmese language, by the

Rev. A. Jupson—through Rev. Howard Malcom.

Gay’s Fables, translated into Urda Poetry, by Raja Katixissen Behadur—

the Translator.

‘¢ Mashtoz,’”’ or the Ritual of the Armenian Church ; in two volumes, printed

in Calcutta, and presented by the Editor, Mr. Avdail,

The Meteorogical Register for October 1836—dy the Surveyor General.

The following books, selected by Professor Witson, were received from

the Booksellers :

Eichhoff Parallele des langues de L’Inde. Paris, 1836, royal 4to.

Freytag’s Hamasee Carmina, 4to. (in Arabic.)

Amrulkeisi Moallakah, Arab. et Lat, ed. J. A. Hencsrensere, Bonn, 1823.

Kosegarten, Amrui ben Kelthum Taglebitae Moallakam Abn Abdallae, 4to.

Humbert, Arabica Chrestomathia Facilior, 8vo.

Rosenmuller, Institutiones ad Fundamenta Lingue Arabice, 4to.

Bernstein, Hetapadaesi particula, edidit et Glossar. Sanscrit, 4to.

Wustenfuld, Abulfede Tabule quedam, &c. 8vo. Gott. 1835.

Flugel, Corani Textus Arabicus ad fidem lib. MSS. 4to. calf and lettered.

Perticrew’s Egyptian Mummies, 4to. ditto.

Gurz.arr’s Voyage to China, post Svo. ditto.

Avuser’s British Intercourse with China, 8vo, ditto,

De LA Brecue’s Geological Manual, 8vo. ditte.

McCuutocu’s Commercial Dictionary, 8vo. ditto.

1£36.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 757

Moor’s Oriental Fragments, post 8vo. ditto.

Wieut and Arnort’s Prodromus, 1 vol. 8vo. ditto.

Gurzxarr’s History of China, 2 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Bewnnett’s Wanderings in New South Wales, 2 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Smita and Dwieur’s Missionary Researches in Armenia, 8vo. ditto.

RosBert’s Illustrations of Sacred Scriptures, 8vo. ditto.

WILKINSoN’s Topography of Thebes, &c. 8vo. ditto.

Breton’s Scandinavian Sketches, 8vo. ditto.

Hoskin’s Travels in Ethiopia, 4to. ditto.

Rogert’s Scenes &c. of Hindoostan, 3 vols. post 8vo. ditto.

WELLESLEY’S Dispatches, vol. 1. ditto.

Matcoum’s Memoir of Lord Cuivz, 3 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Lagorpe’s Mount Sinai and Petra, 8vo. ditto.

Carry’s Memoir of Dr. Carey, 8vo. ditto.

Ricu’s Koordistan and Nineveh, 2 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Edinburgh Cabinet Library—China, 3 vols. 12mo. ditto.

ABEEL’s Residence in China, 12mo. ditto.

Nala and Damayanti, by Miitman, imperial 8vo. ditto.

AKERMANN’S Catalogue of Roman Coins, 2 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Mavox’s Excursion in the Holy Land, 2 vols. 8vo. ditto.

Lane’s History of New South Wales, 2 vols. post 8vo. ditto.

Sraxe’s Geognosy of the Island of St. Helena, folio, cloth.

Wicur’s Contributions to the Botany of India, 8vo. calf and lettered.

Davis’s Chinese, 2 vols. post 8vo. ditto.

‘Antiquities and Literature.

Mr. Watrer Ewer, in a note, adverted to Mr. Tratu’s drawing, of

the Garhwal tridents.

The proportions of the trident of Barahdt are incorrectly large for the staff,

(see Plate XXIX.)—the edge of the axe should be at right angles to the trident,

and consequently not visible laterally on the sketch :—the letters of the inscrip-

tion also do not project from the surface, but are indented. The words are

sufficiently correct.

Lieut. Barton, on his departure for Europe, begged the Society’s accept

ance of a copy in manuscript of Bamapin’s Life of Sauapin ; also of Napo-

LEon’s acount of the Campaign of 1805, printed in Arabic at Alexandria.

Captain Jenkins forwarded a copy of the Ahom alphabet, compared

with the Bor Khamti, Shyan, Laos, and Burmese, with explanatory notes

by Rev. N. Brown.

This alphabet has been a desideratum for some time, and as very few indeed

of the inhabitants of Assam are now acquainted with this extinct character, pre-

served chiefly on the coins of the indigenous r4jas, an opportunity had been

sought in vain for recovering it, until Mr. Brown’s residence and study brought

him in communication with some pandits who have given the desired infor-

mation. We-hope to publish it in our January number.

Mr. J. G, Heatiy submitted a second paper on Analytic Geometry.

Physical.

Geological specimens from Kemaon, with a descriptive catalogue,—

758 ~ Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Nov.

Also, a list of the rock specimens from the Kasiya range and Assam,

formerly deposited in the Museum, presented by Dr. McCuennanp.

A fine series of butterflies, moths, and insects from Sagur was presented

by the Secretary, being part of a rich collection forwarded to him by

Major Hearsey, Commanding 2nd Local Horse.

Volcanic ashes picked up at sea by Captain Fereusson, of the ship

Henry Tanner, presented by Mr. T. L. Hentey.

‘‘ The position in which these ashes were picked up was 35 miles South lat.

and 15° 50’ west long. The sea was in violent agitation.

On a former voyage by the same commander, in nearly the same place (lat. 1°

35’ S. and long. 20° 45’) much alarm was created on board by a violent rum-

bling noise, the captain and officers believing the ship to have struck and

grating over a coral reef: no bottom, however, was found on sounding.

In the same latitude and about a degree more easterly, there is a shoal laid

bearing the name of some vessel, but considered doubtful.”

The ashes are black, and resemble cinders or pumice in consistence.

A collection of lichens from the Himélaya Mountains, was presented for

the Museum, by Mrs. Srppons.

A specimen of Adjutant, ( Ciconia Argala,) presented by Dr. O’SHauau-

NEssy, and mounted in the Museum.

A specimen of the Modern Crane of Laruam, purchased and mounted

in the Museum.

Note.—The latter of the above specimens is generally considered as the young

bird of the former, although LarHam thinks it a distinct species. The attention

of observers is requested to the point.

A skeleton of the Hindusténi Bullock, presented by Captain Carr-

WRIGHT, and articulated in the Museum.

A ditto ditto, presented by Major Tennant.

A stuffed specimen of Albatros, ( Diomedea exulans,) presented by Mr.

J. W. Linton of Howrah.

A specimen of the Nipal Musk Deer, and of the Ailurus Fulgens or

‘““ Wah” of the Bhotiahs, by Dr. A. Camppexy, of Katmandha.

Papers Communicated.

Notice of Balantium, a genus of Pteropodous Mollusca inhabiting the

Southern Indian Ocean, by W. H. Benson, Esq.

Notice of the Musk deer of Nipal, taken at a postmortem examina.

tion, by Dr. A. CAMPBELL.

Observations on the anatomy of the plants of the order Hepatice, ac-

companied with a series of beautiful Iconographic drawings of specimens

of the three sections. Jangermannia, Marchantia, and Riccioidee, by Dr.

Wm. Grirrirus, Assam.

Remarks on the Silk-worms and silks of Assam, with specimens of the

moth, worm, chrysalis, cocoon and silk, by Mr. Tuomas Hveon, illustrated

with drawings by Mr. Hupson, Deputy Revenue Surveyor, were for-

warded by Major Jenxiys, Governor General’s Agent in Assam.

Having been placed in the hands of Dr. J. H. Hetrer for arrangement

and examination, that gentleman read at the close of the Meeting a paper

on the indigenous silk-worms of India.

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 759

Dr. HetFerR commenced by a series of observations on the importance of silk

as an article of wearing apparel throughout the globe. He stated that the disco-

very of India and China was valuable to the ancient Greeks and Romans, chiefly

on account of the precious web of the Bombykia, called Se or Ser, whence the

newly discovered countries derived their name of Serira. JusTINIAN, said Dr. H.,

obtained an insight into the secret of its manufacture from two Persian monks,

the first silk being fabricated at Byzantium. Dr. Herrer followed up his sub-

ject by stating, that the Sicilians in the time of Roger I. became wealthy by

the introduction of silk into Palermo,—that the Venetians acquired riches by the

trade of silk with the Levant, and that in our days it is an unlimited source of

income to countries cultivating it on alarge scale. France alone exported in

the year 1820, 130 millions of francs worth of silk, and England consumes an-

nually 4,700,000 pounds, for which it is chiefly indebted to foreign countries.

Dr. HELFER considers India particularly suited for the cultivation of silk, and

deems it very interesting and important, that this country possesses already eleven

known different kinds of silk-worms, producing in abundance silk of different

qualities, and having by this the internal means of providing all Europe with this

precious material. He enumerated the eleven different species, of which seven

(though silk from them has been manufactured), never have been mentioned

before. (The subject was illustrated by the exposition of all the different qualities

of silk, the preserved moths, cocoons, chrysalis, and eggs.) Two of the silk-worm

species, the Tusseh and Arrindy, were known in India, and their silk was consi-

dered singular enough in Europe, and regarded as inferior qulity of the mulberry

silk-worm,—though Dr. RoxBureuand Dr, Bucnanan, had longago published an

account of them, which Dr. H. quoted. Two different species were discovered by

Dr. H.; four others were mentioned as problematic, and three other new species

sent from Assam by Capt. JENKINs, accompanied by a very interesting memo-

randum. Dr. H. deems those sent from Assam exceedingly valuable, as the co-

coons which they produce are considered by Mr. W. PRINSEP, exceedingly fine.

Dr. HELFER then, after giving a systematic description of all the new species,

went into the question as to whether the silk of India is naturally inferior to

that of other countries. He regards the question as undecided, and considers that

every thing must depend upon the rearing of the worm in houses—upon the qua-

lity of their food—upon the first chrysalic operations—and upon the manner of

working the silk. He proposed that all moths producing cocoons—which, judg-

ing by analogy, he computed at upwards of 130 kinds in India,—should be exam-

ined, and specimens of raw and wrought silk sent to Europe; and he thinks it

certain, that, by the manufacture of silk on a large scale, a vast revenue will ac-

crue to this country. He referred to the value set in Europe upon the coarsest

material produced by the Arrindy silk worm. The Doctor concluded his very

interesting discourse by narrating a fact communicated by Dr. Guass of Boglipur.

It appeared that Dr. G. had sent specimens of the silk to England : when it was

shewn to the different manufacturers they answered, that the people in India had

been deceiving them by stating that the fine Cashmere shawls are manufactured

from the wool of the goat: it was plain to them that the shawls were composed

of the silk, and they said, that, with that material, they, the English mannfac-

turers, could make better shawls than any which came from India.

The President, on behalf of the Society, acknowledged their obligations to

Dr. Hetrer for his interesting paper.

(We shall hasten to print it when the drawings of Mr. Hupson can be

engraved.)

X1.—Meteorological Register.

suayorq AjayeunjIojuN sem YJUOUI sq} Ja}9WIOSAY IVEY OU

IS WOTJD9IIOD ON *OZ()() JUEUINIYsUT S,AJaID0g [eAOY 9Yy ULI Jamo] ple

(88 1®) 820 ‘0 ‘SUOLJBATASGO ¢ JO URATI v UO MOT 00} pUrys OF punoJ udeq peY YOY rsjowOIL

-mt09 Jo Ajrunj4oddo seyjoue ou papsoye A[SuIstjqo sey JosputAA oy} JO Suiuusyzy ureyden

“YUL ZBO ‘Wd F Ie “E900 “WW “VOT I

purjs plo Aut Sutyeur § Gn0

‘MOT 00} JOUULW d¥I] UI spuLis prepue}s mau ATW

"0 JOMCT “Wd F Je PUL ENN) ‘NW *VO1 IB paepueys pro Aur ueYy} raYySIy pooys aues ayI

@ sUlivuL JUaT[90Ke pue Mou sIy Aq “ejeWOIe prepueys s,Aj0100S [eAOY ay} yIIM uosted

“Your /90'0 "Wd p 3B puL OEO'Y “IW ‘V OT 38 PlO ULY) TaMO] JajoWOIeg PxepuLIS MON,

“Aquieyitdeo roy parydde

*reyjeem auy Arp ‘Ayuj10u yYyS} 8T‘O | 8°66 [oGE 0g Ly FOS P11 \0GI £°08(798° 1966S 9 09 £1968 |°8 |e°9L1F96° |8z6‘6g.“UeaTN

op op *N ‘N 0'%6 \0°9S Le Le O%ZLIS*LP 9 OIL‘ 11) 1°22;996° ete. 6S 09 | ‘2Lig‘celt'Z \6°2 |L*TZios0* |ggo° 0€

op op “ANU “MU O66 |G 98 OS {0‘ELI9OF|FOTIOTTOSLLI896° j968° 19 z9 | ‘LL\8"pS)0°L lo'Z lestZ)Z90% leao* 62

op op ‘u ‘u 0%G lees OF fo‘TL O°S1\6°ST|6‘9L\956° ose‘ Gp | Sel ELUET1\0'1Z/890° + |6c0* 8

op op “MU ‘u 086 00g GE 10°99 BSG FTP EL\0P6. ele‘ cg Or | ‘IZiecpiZ‘llie‘triesolrtos® je66< 1

“rao *1ea]o ul “MU oae \6‘es 9F GB }0°SL\0°6P\S°Z1\6‘e2\e°SZ\0S8* |T6L5 ce OETITSer|ZoZ\276* 806‘ 96

*auy *JSBOI9AO ‘au ul 068 |Pptl¢ 0g Gb 1O'SL|S°2¢6 611 \6'21\2'8L\ 108s | 72< 69 ag OGE|P°6 |e%G |o*ZZ\906° \2Ze° G%

op op ‘ou ‘ou 0*e8 19°29 +g 09 066/08 |8°g |1°BZ\E6L° |eezs LL 09 g‘ac|0'8 |e%s |6*FZig06° joes’ ¥G

op op rau ‘ou 0fo8 \1°F9 ey GS [OPL|0°6|1°6 \OCOT|9°8L|88L° gaz aL 02 8°F9|0°9 |Z°9 |8*bLZ|z06. jog8s | sz

*Apnoja *Apnojo ‘as “a 0°66 \6‘T9 oF OF {[0'SL\0‘9S OTT IF 11|L°6L\998° |ogzé ras) Z | ‘tLicqyola‘Z |L°2 \oseL\og6* |z06. &

“Azey op ‘MI OM SOIL \R°6S 8h 0S j0°&Z|9'9G/9'01\E'11| 1°62|8z8* |aers ay GG | ‘6Liegc|0OT\S6 |Z<9L\eFG* 688° IZ

op op ‘u “MU 8CoL [26S 0g Gh j0‘PL|S*8S\S°IL/9*z1/96LZ\0E8* | 79/5 19 G9 |} “E8)qrag\0°L \0cd |LecLicg6* \ezos 0G

op be (-) (a) u “u 8‘Zor jel Ge LOCTZ SCF e1\Z08\998" |76/5 19 L9 €8\g*6e\8°9 |L°9 |TSLZig/6° 16‘ 6.

op op ‘u u OZOL |2°8S 6 GH j0‘1L/0°62|0°E1 £‘e1 0°18 068° jezgs ec 09 | £08)0°09)9°8 |F8 |Z9L\1965 |oz6° 81

op op ‘au “u ese \g°l¢ 6P Gh 0°SL 0°89 9°2T|L‘e1\S08|628° lgng' 9g Le | “08)9<09)/9'8 |T6 |S*ZZicn6* F165 LT

op op “MU mit 8°46 \¢8S &b GP fOSLI0°CS B°S1 FET /6508/898° Jerg® 9¢ Le | ‘I18)2509/9°8 \6°8 | LZZI226° spot 91

op op “Mm ‘ou 1°96 \0°6S +P GP JOEL/T99/ SST b'e1/6508|L68° epee ce Z| ‘SLieglSOllrorlesZlogo* |Z86° el

op op 0 ul “UIT |8°€9 Lg 6h [0*FL\0°29 B01 o*ZT\S°Z8\0F6" | J88° 6¢ Ze | ‘6LZ)e*e9)O°01\S6 |EGLi9c0° 600° tI

op op "2 ‘u BCOL |1°29 1g 6b jOSPL)S°T9 ETI eZ /9°ZBi9F6* Ingest 19 Le | 08|g*€9|0°6 |6°6 |FeLiceo’ lege. | EL

“read ‘ouy ‘gS ‘au 8°ZOL |0609 oF 6 0'8S|Z°2r\L°a1| 128/888 loge’ 09 f “ZZ L‘6 \0°6 \&*8L16965 |LcG* } at

*IynumMo *I]numo “MUU Brey 9'GOL 18°29 or [0'rl LTP eriLT8i9e8* iLL g¢ cg } ‘9Licogle ‘01/86 |L*eL\ec6° ese’ IL

op op “U u COT 18°09 0g oho] S09 Lert eri6'18|1e8* legs 99 19 OF9\2°9 16°9 |LSLZILF6S § |Z06* Ol

op oe) fa) ‘ou “ah NOIT \8°6S 0g Sp j0°CL 0°09 SIT) Ler 1°18|FO6. |2R2 +9 ZO fO*Eslgspoe’s |Z IGSZZ/466" Iz96* 6

op *Azey “M “a 9OTT |8°8S oF LT oH iL esicies | 2Fe° 8g 9 40°6Lig*zg/P'8 \e°8 |1°6L\0z0" jose. 8

op op “MU °N SOL 18°09 cp GPE OET|PF8iCoB. § |E0gs oy BOLIGOT/9GLIBEGS § |906° Mb,

op *7ea}0 “MU °N o%80T |8°6S OF cole PEO FT/S E8)098" 008° £9 c9 fO*c8loscgle°Z |e°L |TOLZI6L6. \Fres 9

*1ea[o ‘ouy ‘N ‘M'N 890T |8°S9 67 cE 9'9e'B'FT GOLF FB| FEBS \zERs th 89 g°8ciZ'6 IT'6 |G OR\TL6" |ze6s g

‘aug *‘sn|NUIND “310 | “mu ‘ou O'IIT |F‘99 T¢ @9 $69 6'8 [eG \L'rBlueR® eLL 89 99 O'L9\0°2 pL \o6L\Ge6s |Lae* 4

*Apnojo op "mM °S “ASS 0°16 * |6°aL @9 lg ¢*99 gL LEZ {TU T8IGeL® |6L9* LL 68 GZLIOSE IGE letslaug* |egl‘ g

*Alomoys -'Apnop [Mss ‘a “16 Ls 8 18 OIL EE Jo's \E94iZ08" |FOLES 6L 08 ZOLIGE LF 12'08|868* |geg'Ga} TI

ae + A009 Eghe ct 1) + 2 = Saale) | Man) =e So so} 2 va]

E e 5 [2 | 2 | & ees es esse) 2 [ss/og 8s CPS Pa gesieceee alae g (Ss Seszaecisea y

e BS Bits “| =e |g [geisSzegsie |= izSegieg/"su) Polesies|cogle || [relesiss|Ssa]-8 0) 2

=} ° I Eo rt Ge flog Jioaleo| oc ajs |=. moto 2 |oals OL|Soat

oR J o a my Sos Mu SS ete oa py of Bt i Sea 3 °. |e. othlost

. Carl ~ Saas ’ we . Uae) Lad 1 aa D . eo. als U e 2

*SOUOII XG *Alpiuin Fy . -AjIpIUN 5 S)

*IOYIVIM *pulm po nema peyepnoyeg ‘MW *d fF 38 SUOTIVATESYO poze[no[ep "NW *V Of 3% Suot}ZAIesqo

IOIsIsIyY :

“OSS ‘daquanony fo yzuopy ay) 40s ‘njjnaIH_ ‘adQ hossp ay} yo yday ‘saysthaxy 1091b0,0.40a,a fT

ST SS SS iS A AS I SS Ssh eSaresrerns

ae eee ee

——

JourAs, Soo.

SAN

\\ \

VAVALYL.

Fig: 4.

PT, Caulley lithog

JOURNAL

SHE ASLATIC SOCTETY.

No. 60.—December, 1836.

1.—Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan, and a small portion of

Guzerat and Kattywér. By Cuaru.ss Lusu, M. D,

{Communicated by the Medical and Physical Society of Bombay.]

In a paper which recently appeared in the Journal of the Asiatic

Society of Bengal by Dr. Benza, on the Geology of the Nilgherry

hills, it is remarked that “‘ the elevation of this plateau, and probably

the whole chain of the Western Ghats, of which the Nilgherries are

the southern termination, happened at a period long anterior to the

existence of life on our planet.”

This appears, at first sight, a bold and sweeping conclusion: but I

apprehend that those who have travelled in the Dekhan, the Southern

Conkan, and that part of the Carnatic termed with us “ Southern

Maratha country,” will not only be ready to concur in this opinion,

but perhaps to extend it so far as to doubt the existence of any for-

mation containing fossil remains in any part of Western India to

the southward of Cutch.

In that province, it has been stated that oolite occurs. I believe,

however, that no sufficient investigation has been made into this

fact, to entitle us to assume the identity of such shell-stone with the

recognized oolitic formations of other countries, so as to satisfy the

rigorous views of a modern geologist.

There is a new era in geology. It is now in the power of any

person who travels through countries where ‘‘ the crust of the globe

is untouched by the hammer of the geologist,’ to contribute to the

advancement of this, the youngest of the sciences. By avoiding

762 Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. (Dre.

speculations, not even giving a namé to that which is found,—by

carefully noting the site of specimens collected, according to the

directions published by the Geological Society of London,—by for-

warding collections to those persons who are best capable of com-

paring and identifying fossil remains,—materials will gradually be

formed for a geological map of India, as well as for the develop-

ment of sound doctrine regarding the mode and date of deposits.

Let the traveller who goes northward over the plateau of the Dekhan,

or who follows up the coast of the Conkan, conclude with Dr. Benza

that the primary, the trap and the laterite rocks—nay, even the alluvial

covering these, are antecedent to the existence of animal life on our

planet. But, on finding in parts of the Southern Conkan, and espe-

cially in the island of Bombay, horizontal strata of sandstone contain-

ing shells, it would be well to look with more suspicion to the

northward, and to be prepared to doubt the non-fossiliferous charac-

ter of the rocks. The shell-stone of Bombay will, I hope, be investi-

gated agreeably to modern rules, and materials furnished to those

who are capable of deciding whether any, or what proportion of the

shells belong to extinct species. It is easy to name this stone “ coral

rag,” and it would cost no labour to speculate upon its being simply

a deposit actually going on at the bottom of the Bombay harbour; a

deposit here and there brought to light in consequence of portions of

the present island having been gained from the sea since the place

became a settlement. This question can only be determined in one

mode ;—by the examination and comparison of a few hundreds of

species of shells. Decide then whether all are existing, or part

extinct. Leaving this important matter for the investigation of some

persons at the Presidency, I proceed to copy a few notes collected in

a tour through the Northern Conkan, part of Guzerat, and Kattywdr.

The most remarkable geological feature in the Northern Conkan

between Bassein and Surat, is the extensive degradation and partial

reproduction of land at different periods. Occasionally, denuded-

strata are met with, the date of which can alone be determined by

the nature of their organic remains. The first place at which I remark-

ed strata of sandstone similar to those of Bombay, was at Mahim,

(Northern Conkan.) There isa low cliff of from ten to twelve feet in

height, composed of horizontal strata from one to three or four inches

in thickness. On leaving the town of Mahim the road passes over a

tract of some extent formed of these shell strata, which after some

intermediate alluvial, which conceals the nature of the subjacent for-

mation, reappear at the coast under the fort and public bungalow of

Seergaum.

1836. ] Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. 763

As there has been a great destruction of land at this place, the

cliff under the bungalow may be viewed with interest. It averages

about 20 feet in height above the ordinary level of the tides. The

upper five feet is alluvial, the lower fifteen feet consisting of horizon-

tal strata of sandstone in different states of aggregation. Nearly at

right angles with the fort of Seergaum, a point of land runs out

towards the sea, of the same general aspect as the strata just describ-

ed. This seems to have been once continuous with another portion

reaching out from the coast, at a distance of about five miles to the

northward. The natives state that the whole bay was once land.

The destruction seems to have stopped for the present at a Mussul-

man burying ground, where human bones may now be seen exposed ;

and which the fossil seeker must be careful to distinguish from

“organic remains of a former world.” If after another shifting of

place between sea and land, a deposit should be formed above, so as to

press and solidify the sand, containing skeletons, a mistake of this

kind may as easily occur here, as it did at Guadaloupe.

The road through Tarapiéir, Danni and Jyebirdit affords many

opportunities of seeing sections of these strata,—all horizontal and

evidently above the trap. Trap rocks still form the gradually dimin-

ishing hills inland, being the continuation of the Western Ghat

range. Where the trap is exposed, as in some of the numerous

creeks, it presents the same weather and water-worn appearance as

in the rivers of the Dekhan.

It has been assumed (seemingly by Professor Jamuson*) in a late

summary of the geology of India, that the trap formation reaches to

the Nerbudda. I therefore presume that there exists no written

evidence to the contrary. This mistake has probably arisen from

rolled pebbles of trap having been seen in the bed of the Nerbudda,

opposite the Kabbir Bar a few miles above Broach ; or it may have

been a simple conjecture. The fact is, that the trap ceases on the

coast between Balsar and Ganddvie. The last hills being those called

Dingri, a low range near the village so called, scarcely more than

100 feet in height and composed of porphyritic trap. The well known

hill fort of Punera, near the town of Balda Part, is the last trap hill of

any height in this direction. At Ganddvie are strata of clay, contain-

ing kankar, and from this point we take leave of trap, as well as of shell

sandstone : kankar, and clay of various forms now present themselves in

the only sections seen from Ganddvie to Surat. The form and situa-

tion of the kankar at Démus demands future notice. The point of

geological interest about Surat is the constant destruction and partial

* Vide British India, vol. iii. Art. Geology.

5 G6 2

764 Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. [Dec.

renovation of land. But especially we note here destruction and

degradation by freshes and spring tides, where the water is all power--

ful, and there are no “ antagonist forces,’ such as are imagined by

those who are inclined to slight actual causes, and to controvert the

principles so ably developed by Mr. Lyrxt. I cannot avoid here

remarking, as it is a point so apropos to the country under considera-

tion, that a strange assumption has gone forth with regard to the

powers and magnitude of tropical vegetation and its agency on the

crust of the globe; as if it were a general law of nature that the

nearer we approach to the equator, the thicker the vegetation. So

that tropical vegetation must have essentially a greater power of

resistance to the destruction of land than extra-tropical. Such a

position is manifestly untenable on the old continent, whatever ground

there may be for the opinion in the West Indies and South America.

In Guzerat and in the Dekhan bareness of natural vegetation is the

prevailing character; while even in Malabar, where the most rank

vegetation exists, I have been shewn such devastation from the sea

alone,-that I am inclined to think that no “antagonist power” of

vegetation can be worth considering. An eminent geologist*, advert-

ing to the doctrines of Mr. Lyexu, asks, ‘‘ Are there no antagonist

powers in nature to oppose these mighty ravages? no conservative

principles to meet this destructive agency? The single operation of

vegetation is a vast counterpoise to all.” (!)

Should we interrogate nature in Guzerat, especially about the Tapti

and Nerbudda, we shall find that the conservative principles of vege-

tation stand no chance against the destructive agency of water.

On the plateau of the Dekhan, degradation can only be slightly

repaired in one place, by the operation of degradation from a higher

level and subsequent deposit below. At the level of the sea in the

Northern Conkan and in Guzerat the rains carry away vegetable mould

and vegetation with it. The denuded tracts support no vegetation

capable of protecting the land on which it grows from farther loss.

The tides with the small portion of sediment they deposit, bring no

contribution to vegetable soil. Should they throw up a shoal between

the periodical rains, the next fresh would certainly carry it away.

The “‘ antagonist powers” are here freshes and tides, but they both

tend to the destruction of vegetation, and to throw insuperable obsta-

cles in the way of its renewal.

Proceeding from Surat through Oolpar to the Kim river, nothing

but black cotton soil occurs until you cross the Kim, at the village

* Professor SEDGWICK.

1836.] Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. 763

of Kudrama,—there sandstone and conglomerate are exposed at the

surface.

River Kim, section of the right bank at Sawal.

No. 1. Alluvial containing irregularly imbedded masses of con-

glomerate, 6 feet. i

No. 2. Three feet of horizontal strata of sandstone from one to

two inches in thickness.

No. 3. Five feet of sandstone varying in hardness.

No. 4. Bedof the river, consisting of coarse conglomerate, coarser

than the imbedded masses No. 1.

There is no sign of stone of any kind on the left Oolpar bank of

the Kim. ‘This formation of conglomerate and sandstones, is only

known in this tract of country. to extend from the village of Koba,

through Elao and Sawal to Suni.

There is reason to believe that the same rocks form the Raj-pipla

range of hills and portions of the peninsula of Kattywdr. The central

ridge of Kattywar, of which the celebrated hill of Poktana forms a

part, is undoubtedly trap, the usual varieties of which are met with

at Baunagar. The most remarkable part of this formation (of sand-

stone, &c.) is the cornelian deposit at the celebrated mines near the

Nerbudda at Rattanpir. These mines were described by Mr. Copzanp,

Trans. Lit. Soc. Bombay. The general account is correct, but Mr.

C. is in error with respect to the appearance of igneous action upon

the hill of Bawa Gorea, which consists of sandstone and conglomerate

rocks,—but not a trace of trap.

Leaving the town of Ok/leysi7 on the south bank of the Nerbudda*,

on the road to the cornelian mines through Sarapir, Clareville and

Rappalsdri, the flat black cotton soil plain gradually begins to undu-

late; and ina nullah near the new village of Clareville I saw the first

appearance of stone (kankar of course excepted) even in fragments

since crossing the Kim. The masses were sandstone and conglome-

rate. The soil now mixed with sand here gradually loses its tenacity

and fitness for cotton cultivation. At length, under Rattanpir, the

place where the cornelians are brought to undergo the process of

baking, a clear section occurs on the bank of a nullah or small river

of rather saltish water opposite the village, shewing under a superfi-

cial stratum of alluvial, 5 feet thick strata of sandstone, 25 feet deep,

inclined at an angle of about 70°.

* From Hansét to Sugéd (and I presume farther) may be seena deserted bed

of the Nerbudda, the bank varying in height, consisting of clay with regular

horizontal deposits of kankar. The large tank at Sujéd is evidently a portion

of the old bed of the river.

766 Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. | Drc.

The direction of these highly inclined strata is N. E.and S. W.,

corresponding to similar strata on the opposite or Rattanpér side of

the nullah,—dip N. W. The extent of this section, as far as it is

well exposed, is about 40 feet of the bank.

The banks of the nullah above Rattanpiir shew irregularly stratified

masses of a compact earthy rock with dendritic figuring ; also a con-

glomerate containing some appearances, though not quite unequivocal,

of fossil bone. These are not accompanied, as far as I could observe,

by fossil shells, and it is only from having since found undoubted

fossil matter in similar deposits that I have thought them worth for-

warding for comparison.

This nullah contains rolled masses of jaspers, various agates, &c.

&c., but no trace of a rolled piece of any variety of trap as may be

seen in the bed of the Nerbudda near the Kabbér Bar.

In the village of Rattanpur the cornelians are collected and exposed

to the air for a month or two. If on being chipped they are found

likely to be worth working, they are put into earthen pots (the usual

water pots) with some earth and sand, and exposed to a fire for a

day and night. At the end of the hot season they are sent down

the Nerbudda by way of Broach to Cambay, to be cut and polished.

The cornelian mines are about four miles from Rattanpar in a thick

jungle. The people who work them return every night to Rattanpir,

there being no habitations near the mines. From the principal spot

now working the following small hamlets are thus distanced.

Damilde, one mile south.

Ahmod, one and half mile north.

Padwana, 3 miles south-east.

To the eastward all is jungle.

The stones are said to be found over a space of about four miles.

The formation containing cornelians is a deep bed of red gravel,

very like the London gravel: in it are found pebbles of various form

and size, of the different species or varieties of chalcedony,—irregu-

larly imbedded, and not in layers like flints in chalk.

The mines are usually sunk to about thirty feet, but on digging to

sixty feet neither hard rock nor water is met with. I therefore

conclude that this is a partial deposit entirely above the sandstone-

conglomerate formation, whichis denuded at the surface of the nullah

before mentioned, which forms also the Bawa Gorea hill, and 1 believe

the general range of the Raj-piplas.

As far as I could observe, there is no sign of organic remains in

these gravel beds,—but every thing hereabouts should be examined

earefully, as the building stones in several of the villages contain

1836.] Geological Notes on the Northern Conkan. 767

fossil shells; so that if the people could trace them to the quarries,

it might lead to some interesting discoveries in the Raj-pipla range.

I saw no sign of this formation from Broach to the Machi river,

opposite Cambay, nor on the Tankeria Bunder side of the gulf.

The next point at which I found conglomerate rock was at Gogo

in Kattywdr, where masses of rock containing shells are dug out

from the beach, the upper portions having been carried away by the

encroachments of the sea.

This formation will, I hope, be soon traced up the south-eastern to

the western coast of Kattywdr. I before observed that the rocks at

Baunagar are trap. Now these conglomerates appear to contain

fragments of a great variety of mountain rocks, always excepting

trap. This circumstance affords suspicion that the trap was thrown

up subsequently to the deposit of the conglomerates. I say merely

suspicion, as I know of no evidence of upheaving, nor the nature

of the strata at the points of junction. These, between Gogo and

Baunogal, are either obliterated by extensive degradation, or con-

cealed by deposits of mud.

The island of Perim in the gulf of Cambay, afforded me a better

opportunity of examining the conglomerate than the denuded beach

of Gogo.

Perim is about three miles in circumference. About half the island,

proceeding round the western side towards the southernmost point,

consists of strata of conglomerate rock much acted upon, but forming

cliffs in several parts to a height of about 30 feet above the sea, the

upper strata being of compact sandstone,—all perfectly horizontal.

The conglomerate contains shells and other fossils, some undoubted

bones, &c. which have been forwarded for identification to Calcutta.

Fine sand,—partly from the decomposition of these rocks, but

chiefly, perhaps, thrown up by the tides from the opposite coast,

—appears to have been blown by the south-west monsoon, so as to

form dunes of very singular aspect, mostly rounded at the top. In

one place a sand hill has a quadrangular platform-like summit.

These sand-mounts seem to have formed a barrier to the farther

encroachments of the sea. There is a valley to the eastern side of

the island partly in turf, and some part cultivated open to the sea,

where one may walk with a firm footing, while the sandy dunes of

the higher level give way in every direction.

Proceeding from the south point towards the eastward (the open

valley), layers of kankar are met with below the sandstone,—beyond

this is a low cliff of sand,—the valley completing the circuit.

768 Note on Mastodons of the Sewaliks. [Dec.

In the hope that some* of our members stationed in Guzerat will

carry on the investigation of the fossils, not only of Perim, but of

other parts of the formation in Kattywdr, I have hastened to lay

before them this imperfect sketch, without waiting for a report on

the nature of the fossils found, or presuming myself to offer any

opinion, or to draw a conclusion on that part of the subject.

II.—Note on Mastodons of the Sewaliks. By Capt. P. T. Caurtey,

Superintendent of the Doab Canal. Pl. XL.

In the present state of the researches into the fossil remains of

the Sewaliks, it will be interesting to note any discovery of peculiar

interest, without entering upon a description in detail. Such a descrip-

tion may, with propriety, be reserved, until the possession of a more

perfect and a more numerous collection of remains enables us to

enter upon the description with greater confidence: whilst, in the

mean time, to those who are interested in the study, the periodical

announcement of progress made in our operations, cannot be devoid

of interest; under this idea I did myself the pleasure of forwarding

to your Society the note on the dentition of the Mastodon Angusti-

dens (variety of), and now send you one on a skull of another variety

of Mastodon which has been lately received. The sketches are drawn

on transfer paper, and will, I hope, be intelligible.

Fig. 1 and 2, are representations of the fossil skull—Fig. 1 being

the front, and Fig. 2, the profile or side view. Fig. 3 and 4, are simi-

lar outlines of the existing elephant, on a scale of one-eighth on linear

measurement.

The fossil is exceedingly perfect in some respects. The left orbit

and maxillaries are as sharp and well defined as in the recent skull ;

the frontal and nasals are tolerably perfect, the specimen is fractured

obliquely, removing the temporal swellings and diploe of the cranium,

together with the occipital condyles and foramen magnum; the

curve of the occipital on its external surface is however retained, and

although sutures are altogether wanting, and the alveoli of the tusks

are mutilated, the specimen may be considered as sufficient to give a

perfect idea of the form of skull; and, as a form perfectly unique

amongst the proboscidean pachydermata, will be looked upon with

satisfaction by all those who take interest in the additions that have

of late years been so rapidly made to palzontology, and the catalogue

of animals now no longer existing on the globe. The present skull

derives additional interest from its being so different from the only

1836.) Note on Mastodons of the Sewaliks. 769

type of the same genus or co-genus (for it may be permitted so to

designate the elephant) which has been left to us—so different indeed,

as to completely modify the construction of the head, and the

arrangement of the muscular and fleshy matter that must have belong-

ed to it.

Without entering into any minutiz of detail on the peculiarities of

the head, of which the drawings will give a representation, and which

detail will be reserved until our collections enable us to bring under

one view all the varieties of this genus that the Sewaliks may contain,

it will be sufficient, in announcing this very interesting addition to

our cabinet, to draw attention to a few leading points.

In the skull of the existing elephant, the excess of longitudinal

measurement, over that in the contrary direction, owing to the great

development of the superior portion of the cranium, is one of the

most marked peculiarities of its form; the height from the external

_ nasal opening to the top or apex of the cranium is immense, although

undergoing modification from age; this excessive development not

being derived from any increase of size to the cerebral cavity, but to

a wide space composed of cellular bone or diploe, giving an external

and deep covering to all that space occupied by the brain ; the size

of the orbit is small with comparison to the temporal region; the

large external nasal aperture is situated between the orbits; and the

front in the Indian species is slightly depressed :—now in turning to

the fossil, we find that the whole of these peculiarities, are either

reversed, or modified in an extraordinary degree.

The elevated and massive cranium does not exist, the slope towards

the occipital and foramen magnum commencing from the top of the

external nasal opening, and falling off to the rear in an abrupt angle ;

the size of the orbit is large, and its encircling bones massive and

prominent; the space between the orbits to the front continued up

to the nasal opening, is depressed to an enormous extent, and the two

lines of alveoli of the tusks strongly marked; the temporal fosse are

comparatively small with those of the existing elephant, and the

temporal bones; which although broken off in the specimen from

which the drawing is taken, exists in another skull in our possession,

appearing to be large and composed of cellular bone. The angle

formed by the tusks with the grinding surface is more obtuse than in

the existing elephant, and the form of head, instead of possessing the

proportion assimilating the skull of the elephant to that of man, may

be considered as nearly square, or perhaps possessing a breadth in

greater proportion than the length. The height of the maxillary

bones which is great in the elephant, is here much exaggerated, and

5 8

770 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. [Dec.

the form and profile especially is so peculiar, that a glance at the

sketch will, by comparison with that of the existing elephant also

given, be sufficiently striking.

The suborbitary foramen is by no means large; the proportion of

diploe in the upper part of the cranium bears no comparison with

that in the existing elephant, these differences combined with the

peculiarity of form and position of the external nasal aperture, may,

in all probability, modify the extent to which this variety of Mastodon

was provided with trunk; but to forbear from surmises or specula-

tions in the present imperfect state of the inquiry, it will be sufficient

to place this as a second to the angustidens formerly noted.

P. S.—A letter this moment received from Captain CauTLEY an-

nounces the discovery of asuperb specimen of the Mastodon angusti-

dens, a skull with both lines of molars, palate, and one orbit entire:

he adds—‘‘ We have much still to learn of these Mastodons ; with

regard to the Mastodon elephantoides of Curt, there are evidently two

species, of the same character as to dentition, but with a remarkable

difference in the form of cranium, one of which has the flat and the

other the elevated crown.” <A very perfect head of a horse has also

just been extracted by the Sewalik working parties, from the hard

sandstone.—Ep.

I11.—Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. By B. H. Hopason, Esq.

1. Indication of a new Genus of Insessorial Birds.

Conrrostres, Sturnide, Lamprotornine ? DentirostreEs, Merulide,

Crateropodine ?

In the suite of specimens of Nipalese birds forwarded by me, three

years ago, to the Zoological Society of London, were three or four of

the subject of the present article. They were marked in the imper-

fect list obligingly returned to me as “a new form nearly allied to

Pastor.” But, if Pastor roseus be the type of that genus, I confess

I cannot perceive much affinity with our bird, either in structure or

in manners. And, if a strong, arched, solid and compressed bill,

united with gradated wings, and very strong feet, be the marks of

the Crateropodine, to that sub-family, I conceive that our bird should

be referred; the more especially as its shy and retiring habits are

alien to those of the whole Corvide, and in a yet more particular

manner, to those of the Sturnine branch of it. The Indian Stares

seem to have perplexed systematists most wofully, though, I fancy,

there is not one of us exiles ‘in the land of the sun,’ but readily

1836.] Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. 771

recognises the propriety of the native genus Maina. All the Mainas*

have a preponderant similitude of general structure and of habits,

constituting generic unity, if such a thing there be; and placing

these birds, in a natural system, close to the European genus Sturnus

(secundum Linneum); unless indeed that single genus should not

rather embrace the whole of the Mainas sub-generically. Yet, ac-

cording to the latest and most accredited systems, these birds are

scattered at random amongst the Lamprotornine, the Pastorine and

the Coraciane, constituting the Sturnine genera Dilophus, Acrido-

theres, and Pastor, and the Corvine genus Gracula vel Eulabes !

Should we feel disposed to turn from English to French systems, the

matter is no way mended: for Cuvier’s Dentirostral and Meruline

Grakles are sundered, toto celo, from his Conirostral and Corvine

Stares ; and Temminck’s type of the genus Pastor is dissevered

widely from all its congeners! If the first men of the age can so err

for want of local informationt, it is to be hoped that some of them

will, ere long, see the necessity of methodical co-operation with those

who are capable of supplying that information, and who, I will add,

are most anxious to supply it, upon fair and gentlemanly terms of

participation.

* We have seven species, all abundant in Nipal.

1. Religiosa.

2. Cristelloides, (nob.)

3. Tristoides, (nob.)

4. Sylvestris, (nob.)

5. Affinis, (nob.)

6, Communis, (nob.)

7. Terricolor, (nob.)

Of these, 2 and 3 are very nearly allied to Cristatella and Tristis; 4 and 5

to Pagodorum and Malabarica. The 6th inclines much to Sturnus; and the

7th, a very osculant species, has very considerable resemblance in the form of

its wings, tail and legs, to Cinclusoma.

+ So subtile and various are the relations of birds to one another, that no

success can attend the ambitious project of a general classification conformable

to nature, unless, to the intimations derived from external structure be added

those derivable from internal structure and from habits and manners.

But how shall the most able man of science at home procure an adequate

supply of the latter sort of information, unless he will associate to himself some

intelligent and persevering local students? Dried skins are but dried skins!

And why have we Zoological Societies, unprovided with travelling naturalists,

if not to accomplish some sort of adequate union between domestic skill and

foreign opportunity ?

So long as the closet and field departments continue separated, so long will

the multiplication of idle names and vague species go on, whilst no effectual

progress will be made in the noble attempt at a natural classification.

ie: ee

772 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. - ([Dxei

- What adds to my difficulty in attempting to class the birds now in

question is, that the so-called Pastor Traiilit (very abundant in

Nepal) is, in my judgment, a typical Oriole ; whilst the Lamprotornis

spilopterus (also common here) is not easily referable to Temminck’s

genus Lamprotornis.

Mr. Swainson, who has very recently revised the Sturnide of our

modern English school, characterises the sub-typieal or Lamprotor-

nine group of themthus. ‘“‘ Bill more compressed and thrush-like,

its base not angulated; the tip of the upper mandible distinctly

-notched.”” In the above characters I perceive some faint traces of

our bird: but when I turn to the indication of the entire family, those

traces seem obliterated, for “‘ the conie straight bill, naked nostrils,

of the Sturnide, essentially conflict

and lengthened pointed wings,

with the structure of our subject.

With these preliminary remarks I shall now attempt to charac-

terise our bird, as the type of a new genus or sub-genus, either of

the Lamprotornine or of the Crateropodine, as the learned shall please.

Citia nobis. Khutya (quasi Pedatus) of the Nipalese.

Bill equal to the head, at base higher than broad, sub-arched and

much compressed throughout ; strong, entire*, obtuse. Culmen con-

siderably carinated between the nares, but not much produced among

the soft and simple frontal plumes. Tomiz erect, rather obtuse, and

near to the palate. Nares broad-lunate, sub-basal closed above by 2

nude un-arched scale. Rictus moderate, smooth. Orbits and head

plumose. Wings short, but firm; 5th quill usually longest; 2 first

strongly—2 next, slightly gradated up to it. Tail short, quadrate

and firm. Tarsi sub-elevate, very strong, nearly smooth. Toes com-

pressed and ambulatory; lateral fores unequal, connected basally,

the outer one as far as the joint; central not elongated ; hind very

large, sub-depressed and exceeding either of the lateral fores. Nails,

compressed, strong, moderately bent, rather blunit.

* Entire in the majority of my full grown specimens, but in others ines isa

faint notch. This liability to vary perpetually occurs in Cinclus, in Cinclo-

soma, in Cuculus, and in Timalia (not to mention more) ; rendering the task

of characterising justly, a work of time and labour in comparisons.

+ So soon as the family and sub-family of our genus be determined, a great

part of the above generic definition may be omitted relatively to such deter-

mination. At present the larger divisions sadly outrun the characters which

should accompany and designate them. Vide SHaw’s General Zoology, vols.

13 and 14, where few of the larger divisions have any characters attached to

them. Vide also the Regne Animal, Aves. wherein the subdivisions are indi-

cated, passim, by two or three vague words !

1836.] Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. 778

Type Catia Nipalensis, nobis.

Nos. 254, 255, of the new specimens and drawings in the posses-

sion of the Zoological Society. In order to illustrate the affinities of

our bird, I proceed to compare it with Pastor roseus and with Lam-

protornis spilopterus.

In Pastor roseus (as in all the typical Pustors in my possession)

the bill is longer than the head, straight, conico-cylindric, and soft

and feeble towards the base. Its gape is angulated; and the plumes

of the head, carried forwards to the anteal extremity of the oval

nares, are pointed, glossed, and elongated. The ample and pointed

wings, have the Ist quill bastard; the 2nd, very long and nearly

equal to the 3rd, which is always the longest. The tarsi are strong,

elevated and heavily scaled. The toes have the laterals and hind

equal, and the central fore considerably elongated. The outer fore

toe has a basal connexion with the central, but the inner is free.

In Lamprotornis spilopterus the wings have exactly the same form

as in Pastor roseus; and, as this identical form is also found in

Eulabes religiosa, (not to mention more typical Pastors,) it would

seem to be characteristically and extensively significant*. The bill

of Lamp. spilopterus, which is scarcely longer than the head, uni-

formly sub-arcuated and not angulated at the gape, so far agrees

with our Ciitia. - But its base is distinctly depressed, whilst forward

it has a yery slight compression and sub-cylindric outline. It is,

besides, sharply pointed, saliently notched, and its trenchant fine

tomize are deeply interlocked. Carry these peculiarities a little further

and you have the bill of Chloropsis, which genus further agrees with

Lamprotornis spilopterus almost entirely in the nature of the food of

* The generic character of Pastor gives ‘remex prima longissima:’ but it is

not so in my specimen of the type or Roseus: nor in any other typical Pastor,

if Pastor be the equivalent for Maina. On the other hand, if Acridotheres be

held to be that equivalent, the ‘ genz plus minusve nude’ is true of Tristoides,

not true of Cristelloides, which two species are, however, as nearly allied as pos-

sible and perpetually associate together, every large flock of the former having

many individuals of the latter. In other words, these genera are artificial and

false ; neither of them being capable of comprising consistently half a dozen of

the most similar birds. The cheek piece cannot be an influential character, or

one of the above named two species would not have it, and the other want it.

By consequence, I should say, the genus Eulades is purely artificial ; for, bating

the cheek piece, there is nothing left to distinguish the single species ranged

under it, but a greater degree of thickness in a bill of exactly the same essential

character.

Commend me to the old genus Gracula, sub-generically divided.

Our Maina is the prototype of the French Martin and of the English Minor.

774 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. [Dec.

the species, and in the structure of their stomachs. On the other

hand, the harder, blunter, more solid, and uniformly compressed bill

of Cuiia, associated as it is with a subtriturating stomach and a diet

consisting of hard insects and seeds, seems to affine our bird to

Pomatorhinus and its allies. .

In Lamprotornis spilopterus the nares are still short and round,

though there be somewhat more approach to a nude membranous

tect than in Pastor roseus.

In Lamprotornis spilopterus the tarsi are rather low, and the feet

suited more to perching than to walking, the soles being flattish and

the nails very acute. The lateral fores (of which the outer one only

has a basal connexion) are shorter in proportion to the central, and-

longer in relation to the hind, than in our bird, which, by its longer

legs, and full soled stout toes, provided with straighter and blunter

nails, proclaims its more terrestrial habits, notwithstanding the basal

connexion of the fore toes. Lastly, the pointed and burnished fea-

thers upon the head of Spilopterus are wholly wanting in our bird.

In Spilopterus they seem to intimate relationship with the Stares :

nor is the intimation unrequired ; for the habits and essential struc-

ture of this species*, when viewed in relation to whatever hath been, —

or can be justly, alleged of the Sturnide, savour more of contrast

than of similitude. As for our Cidtia, amidst all its anomalies (so to

speak) of external structure, there is certainly something Sturnine in

its aspect; and, by the formation of its feet and wings, as well as by

its variegated plumage, it bears some resemblance to Sturnella; a

genus ‘leading directly to the true starlings.”

Species new. Nipalensis nobis. Nipalese Cutia, nobis.

Habitat, central and northern regions: adheres to the wilds, and

feeds on hard seeds and hard ground insects. .

Colour and Size. Male. Above, brilliant rusty yellow, with jet

black remiges and rectrices: cap, and a large apert central portion

of the wings, slaty; the former, confined all round by a black band

* Quod est, structure of the chylopoetic viscera of the bill, and of the

tongue, taken collectively.

In all these respects there is a strong tendency towards Ixos, Chloropsis,

Hypsipetes, and others of the frugivorous arboreal and short-legged section of

those most anomalous thrushes, the other or long-legged division of which seem

to make some such approximation to the Conirostres, as the short-legged section

does to the Tenuirostres. Cuvrer’s Philedones, of which our Sibia may be

taken as a perfect type—appear to unite these two very opposite sections.

Sibia Picaoides has the tai! and feet of Pica; and the bill and tongue of Chlo-

ropsis! But these are mysteries for the amply stored Museum and Library to

solve!

1836.] Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. 775

proceeding through the eyes and ears from the nares. Below, from

chin to legs pure white, from legs inclusively to tail, flavescent : the

flanks broadly cross-barred with black: a spot of the same hue at

the base of the maxilla: most of the quills and the lateral rectrices,

tipped with white: lining of the wings and quills internally towards

their bases, albescent: bill above blackish, below plumbeous: legs

orange yellow: iris brown, 7 inches long by |1 wide, and 2 oz. in

weight : bill $4: tarsus 1{s: central toe }2: hind toe }3. The female

is a trifle less in size: her mantle is variegated by longitudinal black

drops; and her cheek-band is brown instead of black.

2. Indication of a new Genus of Waders, belonging to the Charadriatic

Family.

Most Indian sportsmen are aware that there are two species of

wader, known to the natives by the common name of Carvdnak or

Carbaénak ; one of which frequents dry sandy plains, and the other,

sandy banks of rivers.

The former bird belongs to the genus Hdicnemus or Thick-knee,

scarcely differing, as a variety, from the European type of that genus.

But the latter, though possessing the same figure (even to the large

head, with abrupt elevated forehead and great staring eye), as the

other ; and though, moreover, resembling the other strictly in the

form of the legs, wings and tail, yet differs from it totally in the

structure of the bill.

This member, which in Gdicnemus has very much of the Plover

form, in the river-haunting Carvdnak exhibits the strength and size

so conspicuous in the Storks and Jabirus.

I find no generic mention of such a form in the works of Ornitho-

logy accessible to me; and I therefore propose to characterise it as

a new genus; subject to the correction of those whose access to

libraries and museums qualifies them to lay down the law in matters

of this sort. :

Order Grauiatores. Family Coarapriap&. Genus Carvdnaca, nobis.

Character.

Bill twice as long as the head, sub-recurved, strong, convex above,

considerably compressed; the base thickish and rounded; the tomiz

very trenchant, locked, and denticulated and notched towards the tip,

as in Ardea. Nares broad-linear and placed forward in a wide

membranous fosse, extending 3 from the base to the tip of the

culmen. Tongue long, narrow, fleshy: towards the point cartilagi-

nous, and the point itself sub-bifid. Form of the head and bedy, of

the feet, wings and tail, as in @dicnemus,

776 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. [Dec.

Type Carvdnaca Grisea, nobis. Cdicnemus Magnirostris, Hard-

wickii ?

Specific character.

Carviénac. Above, asky grey: below, together with the frontal

zone, white. Brows, ear-coverts and mustaches, blackish. Shoulders,

false wing, and coverts next them, together with the quills and tip

of the tail, blackish. Wings and tail irregularly but largely banded

with white, and both white for the most part, below. Length of the

bird 20 inches, width 36, weight 14 lbs.

The marks. This species inhabits the Bengal Presidency, very

generally, being always found on the wide sandy banks of the larger

rivers during the cold months of the year. It migrates to Tibet in sum-

mer, and passes over Népal on its way to and fro. Its food consists

of crabs and other hard-shelled fish. Its intestines are from 22

to 25 inches long, with two ceca, each 34 inches, placed at 5 inches

from the lower end of the gut. The stomach is a strong triturating

gizzard, fitted with the aid of gravel, to grind the hard parts of the

bird’s food.

Manners cannot well be more dissimilar than those of the desert

and ripuary Carvanacs : the former adhering to dry arid plains, very

much like the Indian Bustards* ; and the latter, as exclusively to the

beds of rivers. Whoever will refer to the English Cuvizr, (Aves.

III. 307,) will perceive that our species is probably not unknown to

science. Is it not the @dicnemus Magnirostris of Hardwicke ?

At the place quoted, two other allied species are cited, and these

three may constitute the new genus or sub-genus Carvdnaca, distin-

guished from Cdicnemus by totally different manners, and by a truly

cultirostral bill.

It were well, indeed, if all new genera rested on diversities so

marked as these—the manners so admirably tallying with the struc-

ture of that grand instrument of sustentation, the rostrum. Our

genus, moreover, appears to me to constitute a remarkable and dis-

tinct link of connexion between the Ardetde, by means of Mycteria

and the Charadriade through Cédicnemus. And it would, in my

judgment, be quite as consonant to nature to confound @dicnemus

with Charadrius, as Carvdnaca (nobis) with Gidicnemus.

The only consequence of HARDWICKE’s species proving to be the

same with ours, ought therefore to be—not the rejection of the new

genus, but—the merging of my specific name of Grisea in his of

Magnirostris: unless indeed, the latter term be not held to have lost

* It is frequently called by us the Bastard Florican.

oe ee

1836.] Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. 777

its significance in relation to a genus as much distinguished for the

strength and size of the bill, as any one of the whole order.

3.—Indication of a new Genus of the Falconide.

Fatconinz, Vigors. Genus new. Bdza, nobis.

Generic character. Bill as in Jerax, but somewhat longer: upper

mandible, with two sharp teeth on either side the hook, directed for-

wards: lower mandible with three or four smaller ones, on each side,

correspondent to the former. Nares transverse, long, and linear,

with the cere behind them membranous and free to base of bill. Legs

and feet short and thick. Tarsi low, half plumed, coarsely reticulate.

Toes short, cleft, inner fore and hind somewhat depressed and the

latter large. Aeropodia wholly reticulate. Talons sub-equal, acute,

squared below.

Wings long, equal to tail: 3rd quill longest.

Type. Baza Sydma, nobis.

In addition to the above significant particulars, (some of which may

hereafter be omitted in the generic character,) I may add that the

orbits, lore, and sides of the cere are clad in soft, composed plumage ;

that the cere is short and nude above; that the bill has great breadth

and depth at the base, corresponding with the broad flat head and

large eye of the true Falcons, and, both of which distinguish our bird

no less ; that the first and second quills are but moderately gradated*,

and all three pretty sharply emarginated towards their tips, though

not so near as in Falco or in Jeraw; that the tail is of medial length

and square ; that the tongue is bifid; and that, lastly, the feeble feet

are remarkable for the sub-equality of the toes and talons, the rough-

ness and levelness of the soles, and the size and depression of the

thumbs. The complex affinities of this singular genus are obviously

with Cymindis, Harpagus and Ierax. It is more nearly allied to the

last, and its position (in Vicors’ arrangement of the Falconide) clearly

is at the head of the Falconine, and leading from the genus Gamp-

soniz to the genus Jlerar. It differs from Jerax by its cymindian

nares, its long wings, and its cleft toes, with unballed and depressed

soles.

Species new. Bédza Syama, nobis.

Black, glossed with changeable blue or green: the belly and sides,

rufous white, crossed by five or six broad bars of lake tinged ochreous

red: outer web of the secondaries, the same hue—of the tertials,

* Ist is 15 inches, and the 2nd 4 aninch, less the 3rd: the rest rapidly

fall off; and the primaries exceed the tertiaries by nearly three inches. The

scapulars are of good length.

778 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. [Dzc.

white: scapulars and long coverts nearest them, whitened internally :

a broad white gorget on the breast: remiges and rectrices plumbe-

ous, for the most part, on the lower surface: legs and bill plumbe-

ous: talons and tip of the bill, black: iris brown: a long slender

drooping crest from the occiput: 13 inches long by 30 wide and 7 to

8 oz. in weight: bill, ?¢: tarsus, |,°5: central toe, 1.

Remarks. These birds are peculiar to the great forests of the

lower region, so far as I yet know. The sexes are alike both in size

and colours: both in young and moulting birds the leaden colour of

the legs is lost in fleshy grey—that of the bill, in dusky grey; and

the powerful complex dentation of the bill, (both mandibles) is in the

juniors only traceable as a festoon upon the upper mandible.

4.— Indication of a new Genus of the Picide, with description of the type.

A new species, also, of two new species of the Genus Sitta.

Yunxinz, Swainson. Genus new; Sasia, nobis. Sasya of Nipal.

Generic character. j

Bill equal to the head, conico-compressed, pointed and entire: the

base furnished with tufts of hair as in Bucco.

Nares round, basal, lateral, remote, and concealed. Tail short,

soft and square; wings equal to the tail, full, soft, first quill sub-

bastard, 5 and 6, longest and equal ; tertials sub-equal to primaries.

Feet three-toed, hind toe stoutest, sub-equal in length to outer

fore ; inner fore connected to first joint. Nails somewhat straight-

ened and obtuse.

Tongue as in Picus.

Type, Sasia ochracea, nobis.

Species new. Ochracea ; Ochreous red Sasia.

Form.

we may, however, add that this singular bird has a close relationship

with our Vivia, from which it differs by its rather longer and perfectly

unangulated bill; by its shorter, even tail; by the Bucco-like tufts

of its bill; and, above all, by its three-toed feet, the nails of which

have hardly any of the scansorial falcation and acuteness. Its orbits

are nude, and it has a transverse corneous opercule before the eye.

Colour and Size. Subochreous red, with greenish yellow cap and

wings ; a white streak from behind each eye; and jet black unmark-

ed tail.

Wings, internally, dusky ; on their lower surface towards the bases

of the quills, as well as the lmimg of the wings, buff. Legs fleshy

yellow: bill plumbeous with a dusky ridge: orbitar skin plumbeous :

iris brown: size very minute, 33 inches by 7, and 3 oz. in weight;

It has been described above. In further illustration of it_

ONL Er tlie

1836.] Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. hag

tarsus }¢: anteal outer toe ~,;: its nail ,%: sexes alike: Habitat,

forests of lower region.

Remarks. On arecent occasion I quoted Vivia Nipalensis, (nobis)

as the smallest of the family*. The above singular bird is still

smaller, and both by its extraordinary form, and by its diminutive size,

confirms the assertion then hazarded, that the vast forests of Nipal

yield to none in the world in the number and variety of the Wood-

pecker tribe.

CrertuHiap&. Genus Sitia auctorum. Species new ; Corallina,

coral-billed Sztta, nobis.

Form, as in Castaneoventrist, but considerably smaller in size.

Above, soft sub-cerulean blue, tinged with lilac on the cap: below,

sordid greyish: chin white: forehead black: great quills and lateral

rectrices, blackish ; the latter, white-tipped : legs plumbeous grey : bill

_ intense coral red ; iris straw yellow : 43 inches long by 84 wide, and

2 oz. in weight: sexes alike. Habitat, central and northern regions.

Species 2nd, Nipalensis, nobis.

Above, saturate blue, darker than in Castaneoventris and with a

purplish tinge; below, rufescent deepening as you descend the body,

and showing full rusty on the lower flanks, vent, and inferior tail

coverts: from the nostrils through the eyes to the shoulders, a black

band: quills and lateral tail feathers, blackish: a white spot at the

base of the two central rectrices ; and thé lateral ones blanched to-

wards their tips: legs fleshy grey: bill dusky blue, changing to

fleshy grey towards the base: iris dark brown: sexes alike: size of

the precedent, and habitat the same.

5.—New species of Hirundinide.

CypseLus. Chetura.

Species Ist. Nudipes, nobis.

Form andsize. Bill typically cypseline with large vertical nares,

wings exceedingly firm and long; Ist quill longest, more than two

inches beyond the tail: tail shortish, quadrate, longer than the

coverts, composed of ten very firm square-pointed feathers, the rigid.

straight shafts of which are produced into naked acute spines. Tarsi

longer than any toe, nude, smooth. Toes longer and more unequal

* A mistake, I find: for Picus Minutus is but 34 inches long, or, precisely

the size of our present subject.

+ Also a Nipalese species: and these hills have therefore afforded three

species to a genus previously limited to one—or, at most, two, if Peetoralis

prove to be distinct.

23) 2

780 Additions to the Ornithology of Népal. [Dec.

than in Cypselus, with the hind one distinctly versatile. Talons

strong and scansorial ; 83 inches from tip of bill to tip of tail, and 20

inches between the wings. Weight 44 oz. Tarsus 31, central toe +z.

Colour, head as far as the eyes and ears (inclusive), dorsal neck,

sides, rump, upper tail coverts, wings and tail, dusky-black with a

changeable blue or green gloss: chin, throat, and most part of the

neck in front, confluently white: bottom of the neck, on the anteal

surface, breast, and body below, sooty brown: vent, inferior tail-

coverts, and a lateral stripe from the thighs, backwards to them,

white, more or less picked out with blue glossed black: back and

scapulars, whitey-brown: inner web of the last tertiaries, pure

white : legs purpurescent dusky: bill black : iris dark-brown: sexes

alike. The young want the blue or green gloss of maturity: the clear

whitey-brown of the back and pure sooty brown of the belly are in

them blended into an uniform dusky hue; and their throat is of a very

sordid white.

Remark. This singular species, by the structure of its feet, opens

a passage from Hirundo to Cypselus. Though variously allied to Pelas-

gia, Acuta, Caudacuta, and Gigantea, it exhibits, I believe, a distinct

type of form—being certainly not a Chetura as defined by Stevens,

nor a Cypselus of ILtieER; far less a swallow. It climbs with great

power aided equally by its talons and its tail. Its habitat is the

northern region, whence it sometimes wanders into the mountains of

the central, avoiding however the open and level country. I have

set it down in my note book as the type of a new genus, called Hi-

rund-apus.

Species 2nd. Cypselus Nipalensis, nobis.

Sooty black, glossed with green: chin, throat, and top of the neck

in front, confluently white: a white bar across the rump: talons and

bill, black: iris brown: nude part of toes, dusky-grey. Size small;

54 by 124 inches; and barely one oz. in weight: sexes alike: struc-

ture typical : tail, short and even.

Remark. This is the common Swift of the central region, where it

remains all the year, building under thatched roofs, and against the

beams of flat roofs. It lays two white eggs and breeds repeatedly.

Genus Hirundo. Species lst. Nipalensis, nobis.

Cap, back, scapulars and wing-coverts, brilliant deep blue: quills,

tail feathers, and the longer tail coverts above and below, dusky: a

narrow frontal zone, cheeks, neck, and body below, as well as the

rump and lesser tail coverts above, rusty; paler and striped with |

narrow lines of dusky hue on the whole abdominal surface: dorsal

1836. ] Description of a new Genus of Mollusca. 781

neck, more or less blotched with blue; rump, immaculate : bill,

black: iris, dull brown: legs, fleshy-grey : sexes exactly alike : struc-

ture typical: tail long and deeply forked: size of H. Rustica.

Remark. This is the common Swallow of the central region, a

household creature remaining with us for seven or eight months of

the year.

Species 2nd. Rupicola, nobis.

Earthy grey brown: below, from the chin to the vent (exclusively),

rufescent white: legs fleshy grey: bill black: iris brown: sexes

alike: larger than the last, 63 by 14% inches, and weight 13 oz. :

structure typical: wings exceeding the short and subfurcate. tail.

Habitat, the central and northern regions : not migratory : adheres to

the mountains, preferring rocky situations.

N. B. The remaining Hirundine birds of Népal are Hirundo Rus-

tica and the Sand-Martin; both of which, but especially the latter,

are common.

IV.— Description of the Shell and Animal of Nematura, a new Genus

of Mollusca, inhabiting situations subject to aliernations of fresh and

brackish water. By W. H. Benson, Esq. B.C. S.

Animal.—Caput tentaculis duobus setaceis oculis posticé prope bases

tentaculorum sessilibus ; proboscide elongata, cylindracea, extensili.

Pes ovato-oblongus, medio ventricosus, posticé angustatus, acumi-

natus, processu brevi filiformi subito desinens ; antice expansus, medio

profundé emarginatus; ala utroque latere porrecta laté angustata,

acuminata.

Testa ovata, ventricosa, a latere compressa, ultimo anfractu insuper

aperturam angulato, deflexo. Apertura integra constricta, orbiculari,

supra vix angulata; peritremate acuto leviter intus incrassato. Oper-

culo tenui in spiram planam convoluto.

The snout is capable of great extension, and the animal is able to

lick the summit of the shell with its extremity, which is armed with-

in the mouth with a pair of strong vertical jaws, each apparently

consisting of two pieces: these are constantly in motion in a verti-

cal direction. The centre of the foot has a rounded peltate appear-

ance, occasioned by the adaptation of its form to that of the opercu-

lum, which is visible through the transparent foot when viewed on

the under side. The singular short filiform process attached to the

extremity of the foot appears to be the termination of a nerve or

minute canal, which is seen extending directly up the centre of the

foot until it is lost underthe operculum. The excrement is voided

from the right side of the animal.

782 Nematura, a new Genus of Mollusca. [Dxc.

The shell is compressed laterally in a direction parallel to the

axis and to the plane of the aperture, as in scarabus, but the pro-

minent edges are rounded, and the former lips do not leave a ridge

or keel at each semi-turn as in that genus. The sudden deflexion of

the last whorl above the aperture, and the consequent depression and

constriction of the aperture is a singular feature in the shell, and, in

conjunction with its compressed form, Jed to my pronouncing the

species to be a type of a distinct genus before I became acquainted

with the animal or the operculum.

The first specimens which I saw, were shewn to me by Mr. Cra-

crort, who found them destitute of inhabitant or operculum in the

Sunderbans east of the Jabuna river. He was unable to state whether

they were land or water shells. Their occurrence in the delta of

the Ganges so near to Calcutta, spurred me to diligence in the search

after the species, and, about a couple of months subsequently, I

discovered it alive between high and low water mark in pools, and

on wet mud recently left by the tide in the river Hooghly, immediate-

ly opposite to the Esplanade. Here they were accompanied by

Melania lirata* and Melania pyramis*. Dr. Pearson subsequently

found them in the mud deposited by the aqueduct which passes in

front of the Town Hall. Here we found them accompanied by assi-

minia fasciata, and by small specimens of novaculina gangetica. I

also took specimens attached to a floating bamboo in the Salt-water

Lake in company with Neritina depressa.

Though found between high and low water mark like assiminia

fasciata, nematura does not otherwise resemble it in its habits, as it

never attempts to creep out of the water in which it is placed, but

ascending to the surface swims with the foot reversed in the same

manner as lymnea, planorbis, paludina, and the smaller melania use

to do.

I have named the species on which the genus is founded

Nematurat Delte. Testa ovato-conicaé, a lateribus tumida, lute-

scente, ultimo anfractu ventricoso, majori omnibus obliqué minuté

striatis; spiraé brevi; apice acuto; umbilico evanescente. Long.

0.25 poll.

* Melania lirata, described as species D, and melania pyramis as species B,

in Gleanings in Science, vol. ii. p. 22. Species A of that paper, I have else-

where more fully described as M. variabilis, and I have named species C

M. elegans.

+ Lamarck has a genus of insects named Nemoura from vijua filum and ovpa

canda; hut as he neglected the rules of composition the appellation of the

present genus, while it expresses a singular feature in the animal, will run no

risk of being confounded with that of the eminent naturalist.

1836. ] Note on Pterocyclos of the Straits. 783

V.—WNote on the Genus Pterocyclos of Mr. Bunson and Spiraculum of

Mr. Pearson. By Dr. Wituiam Brianp.

On the 27th of May last, I was fortunate enough to fall in with

a shell of this genus, on the islet of Susson, one of the Boontin group,

opposite to the peak of Queda, and in sight of Pulo-Pinang.

Although the general description of my specimen answers to those

above-mentioned, yet in some particulars it differs from both. The

mouth is circular, its upper half marked inside by a double slightly

raised line, from whence the pterygoid process is sent off which

overhangs and forms the sinus, but the inside edge of this process

does not touch the penultimate whorl as in Mr. Benson’s shell, and

it certainly differs from those of Mr. Pearson. In the specimen of

Pulo-Susson, the sinus is +45 of an inch from the rings above-men-

tioned to the outside arch, and from this arch to the extremity of

the wing which overhangs and forms the sinus is #, th of an inch;

the wing in breadth is 7% th, mouth thickened, which thickening is

carried on to strengthen the wing on its upper part. Shell one

inch in diameter, with dark orange zig-zag lines across the whorls,

and a band of a darker colour running longitudinally on the centre

of the last whorl. Animal recently dead, but in a state of decay, so

that nothing could be made out of it.

As one drawing is worth many descriptions, I have cut a leaf out

of my book, having two figures of the natural size of the shell in

question, No. 1, for your inspection ; and, to assist in elucidating the

history of this genus of beautiful shells, I have added another figure,

No. 2, found at Trincomalee.

This shell has a small pterygoid process bending down, and in

contact with the penultimate whorl, extending §th of an inch in

front of the circular mouth, but no vestige of tube or sinus obtains

in this specimen ; lip thickened and reflected ; the shell having all the

appearance of maturity ; diameter ,’, th of an inch ; operculum convex,

horny-formed, of circular layers.

Note on Dr. Buann’s Paper.

The Susson species appears, from the drawing forwarded with the

description, to belong to the typical group of Pterocyclos, which

“includes P. parvus and rupestris, and to be intermediate between the

latter species and hispidus, to the last of which it exhibits an approach

in the irregular aperture and dilated and thickened wing ; but in the

absence of a specimen for comparison, no specific character can be

assigned with safety.

784 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. [Dre.

The Trincomalee shell is interesting as an arborant form, indicating

the passage to Cyclostoma, which it approaches through the alate

species, C. petiocrianum of Gray. It appears to possess the convex

operculum composed of spirally concentric and exserted laminz which

characterizes the typical species of pterocyclos. This character seems

to be gradually developed in the opercula of the Cyclostomade as the

umbilicus widens, and the shell becomes more discoid ; varying from

the flat operculum of C. elegans through that of C. involvulus, where

the edges of the laminz are partially disengaged, and that of C. ter-

mistriatum, which is thickened and shews a strong spiral keel, to the

convex and spirally laminar structure of the pterocycloid group.

The species of Cyclostoma from Neemuch, described by Lieutenant

Hutton as No. 26, in page 520, vol. iii. J. A. S. I have ascertained

by a comparison of specimens to be C. semistriatum of Sowxmrsy,

whose examples were procured from Poona.

Query. May not the impression of a supposed species of Cirrus

noticed in Dr. Warn’s paper on the geology of the Elephant Rock

in the Queda country, printed in the second part Trans. Phys. Class,

p. 166, be that of one of Dr. Bianp’s species of Pterocyclos from

Pulo-Susson ? A reference to the specimen No. 4 will decide.

VI.—Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. By Jamus

Prinsep, Sec.

Since the arrival of the Arab vessels which annually frequent the

port of Calcutia, I have made diligent inquiries concerning the in-

Strument in use among them for the measurement of the latitude, in

hopes of elucidating thereby the Baron Von Hammer’s translation of

the ‘‘ Mohit” (see p. 442). I have been hitherto unsuccessful, the Eng-

lish quadrant or sextant having generally superseded the more ancient

and clumsy apparatus. One Muallim, however, seemed to recognize the

instrument perfectly by my description, though he could not explain its

construction; and promised to bring me one on his next voyage :—he

stretched out his arms, when I inquired about the tssabah division,

and placing his fingers together horizontally, counted with them the

height of the polar star, just as I guessed must have been the early and

rude method of the Arab navigators.

At length in a vessel from the Maldive islands I met with an in-

tellizent navigator who brought me the primitive instruments with

which he was accustomed to work his way to Calcutta,—and as I do

not think they are generally known, while it is certain they are of

Arabic origin, I hasten to describe them as lithographed in Plate

XLVIII.

| Journal As.Soc.

—_——— re

Arabic

Nautical

instrumends. : Fe

Printed at the oriental LUN Prags.

pati ee ‘

ee cay

5. 3 4

* oes a acta Vat

Meg Mai ae ae a, ¥

Chie Pe Mees oe

LAG y at 2c,

1 aN

¥ 4 be ty Ae

= x “

ire tad re < be h “ a

1836. ] Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. 785

Fig. 1. is the Jus kamal, an instrument for taking the altitude of

the polar and circumpolar stars*, in its most elementary shape.

It consists of a small parallelogram of horn (about two inches by

one) with a string (or a couple of strings, in some instances), inserted

in the centre. On the string are nine knots. To use the instrument

for taking the height of polaris, the string is held between the teeth,

with the horn at such a distance from the eye, that while the lower

edge seems to touch the oceanic horizon, the upper edge just meets

the star: the division or knot is then read off as the required latitude.

The mode of marking off these knots is curious. Five times the

length of the horn is first taken, as unity, and divided into twelve

parts: then at the distance of six of these parts from the horn,

the first knot is made which is called ‘* 12.” Again the unit

is divided into eleven parts, and six of these being measured on the

string from the horn as before, the second knot is tied and denominat.

ed “11.” The unit is thus successively divided into 10, 9, 8, 7, and

6 parts, when the knot tied will of course exactly meet the original

point of five diameters : this point is numbered “ 6.”’ Beyond it one

diameter of the horn is laid off for the ‘‘ 5”’ division, and one and a

half again beyond that for the “‘ 4” division, which usually terminates

the scale.

It is easy to determine by calculation the value of these several

divisions, measured from the centre of the. horn or diameter 6 d, and

at right angles to it. They represent the tangents of the angle c 6 a,

to radius bc, or cotangents to the complementary angle e ba: but eda

is equal to b ac, which is half of da 6, therefore the divisions represent

eotangents of half the angle of observation. To judge then of their

actual value, expressed in altitude, we have but to convert their nu-

merical ratio to radius, by a table of natural cotangents, into degrees

and minutes ; and to take the double as the latitude in each case : thus,

the horn being equal to double radius 6 c, we have

pee at. Diff.’

The first division, No. 12 = 2X 5 + 12x 6 = 5.00 J 22°38" | .,,

11 10-11 X 6 5.45 2 2046 5° *

10 10+ 10X6 6.00% 1854 | 2

9 ot 9X6 6.66 217 4 5 20

8 IG ee Sie 6 4980. 15.12) ke oe

7 102 7X6 8.57 » 1318 ee

6 102 6x6 1000 8 1124 | 25

5 10 + 2 12005 932 5

, 4 [Ogtp ee oso Pag ee

It will be seen by the last column that the harmonic progression

of the divisions obtained by this simple rule, agrees very closely with

* The man assured me it was for taking the longitude, and promised to come

one night and use it in my presence, but failed.

Bak

786 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. [Dezc.

equable increments of the angle of elevation, falling somewhat short of

two degrees for each division. Further the highest number, 12, gives

nearly the latitude of Calcutta, or 22° 38’, the most northerly latitude

for which the Maldive navigators have any occasion; while the lowest

mark, 4, gives the latitude (nearly) of the southern point of Ceylon, or

the average of the Maldive islands.

It is a circumstance worth noting, that if the unit had been assumed

at 6 diameters instead of 5, there would have been obtained a series

of divisions almost identical with the issabah of 1° 36’ used by the na-

vigators of the fifteenth century* according to the Mohit. The series

may also be extended both ways without very much deviating from

the same progression: thus, commencing with

Lat. Diff.

12 x 6 + 16 = 4.50 Cotang. of half angle. 25°04’ 10 32!

15 4.80 23 BE

14) 6) A 2201 4 33

130. ces 20, 28: Sie,

12 6.00 1856 | i

16.54 17 24 ! s

10 7.20 15 48 1 a.

9 8.00 1414 1 an

8 9.00 12 40 1 fa

7 10.29 1106 1 2

6 12.00 932 1 =

5 14.40 756 1 a

Birr op SO hae ek 6 22 1 ae

3 24.00 446 2 Pe

2 36.00 Pe be =

1 72.00 1 36.1 a6

0 infinite 0 1

In this manner a string, or a staff, may be marked off into tangen-

tial divisions, equivalent to the issabah, from zero or sixteen issabah,

or up to an altitude of 25 degrees, within a limit of error by no

means appreciable to the Arab nakhoda, and hardly of consequence

to the refined navigator of modern times. Whether the practical rule

thus developed was or was not resorted to, it is very plain that it

might have been so adapted; and all the latitudes in Sip1’s work

might have been worked thereby ; and the lower series of divisions

might be nothing more than the same divisions numbered inversely

on the lower side of the square staff, as will presently be noticed.

Fig. 2, the bilistyt is an evident improvement upon the original cord;

a square rod of ebony being substituted for the stretching cord, and the

radius being made to slide thereon at right angles. There is economy of

space also,—the four sides of the wooden rod admitting of four series

of divisions, adapted to four sliders of different sizes, so as to increase

the scale without lengthening the rod inconveniently. Still the string

* See page 445. + ghey

1836.] Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. 787

has the advantage in point of portability. The rules for dividing the

wooden bar are the same as for the string, but the marks must be laid

off invertedly, beginning at the eye end, which is in this the fixed

point.

Fig. 3 is an instrument still used by the Arabs for taking the sun’s

altitude. It is exactly the same in principle as the above, but to

obviate the inconvenience of looking at the sun, the eye is directed to

the opposite point of the horizon, from the Jower end of the cross bar,

while it brings the solar shadow of the upper end of the same to meet

the horizon by adjusting the slider d to or fro on the divided arm.

The mode of dividing this arm, as performed in my presence by the

muallim, or pilot, is represented in the plate ; but it is obviously incor-

rect. A space ce is laid off equal to radius ac; from e a perpendi-

cular e f is raised, and with the same radius a quadrant e g is drawn,

which is divided into eighteen equal portions (of five degrees each) ;

through these points are drawn radii to meet the tangential line ;

and the subdivision into simple degrees, and sixths, is either done

by the eye, or by a continuation of the same rule. It will be seen

on inspection of the figure, that as the angle g fd is equal to the sum

of the angles fd 6 and b de, while 6 de is equal to half the angle of

observation, angle g f dcan only be equal to angle of observation when

f 7b and 6 d care equal, and that the 90° point is therefore the only

true one on the scale of divisions. The true mode of division is, as in the

case of the string, to describe a quadrant from centre 6, and to draw radii

through each semi-degree of the arc from 45° downward, because the

angle of observation ad 0 is, as before, equal to twice the angle f 6 d,

of which c d(c 0, ¢10, ¢ 20, ¢ 80, &c.) are respectively cotangents.

To ascertain whether the fault lay with my Arab informant, or

with the instrument, I compared the actual divisions on the latter

with a scale of cotangents, and found the following results, calling

the radius ac = |.00.

Angle of Angle Lengthedor True angle Errorof Error if false mode

altitude. marked. cot. 4 angle. deduced. division. had been used.

90° 0° 1.000 OO Qe oo

85 5 1.096 84 46 —0 14 —0 30

80 10 1.196 79 48 —0 12

75 15 1.308 74 46 —0 14

70 20 1.435 69 44 —0 16 —3 30

65 25 1.557 65 26 +0 26

60 30 Leng 60 22 +0 22

55 35 1.911 55 14 +0 14 —7 27

50 40 2.142 50 04 FO"

45 45 2.418 45 0 0

40 50 2.759 39 50 —0 10 —10 23

It is evident from this comparison, that the instrument was divided on

correct principles, and that the muallim had ventured upon an explana-

5K (2

788 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. [Dzc.

tion without duly qualifying himself by consulting his books. It is also

clear that the same set of divisions may be made to serve for night

observations by placing the eye at d: but as they only embrace alti-

tudes exceeding 40 degrees, the instrument would not be applicable to

the polar star in equatorial latitudes. :

In conversing with the same muallim on the track taken in different

monsoons, I remarked that he always talked of sailing upon different

stars, in lieu of different points of the compass, as we should express

ourselves. It immediately occurred to me, that this might explain some

oi the obscurities of the Mohit, where, for instance, that work directs

the polar altitude to be found 7} inches at the “ setting of Aquila ;” it

might mean that the ship should steer upon the setting point of Aquila,

until the pole should be depressed or raised to the altitude indicated.

I endeavoured therefore to procure an Arabic compass, but not one

could be met with in all the vessels—at length my friend Syep Hoszin

Srp1 found a drawing of it in one of the practical works on navigation,

(the mdjid kitdb*) in possession of a nakhoda, and without ceremony tore

out the leaf to shew it to me, as the captain was afraid of parting

with the volume, without which doubtless he would have been greatly

at a loss on his return voyage. I immediately made a lthograph

drawing of it (fig. 5) exactly as I found it, with the circle of English

numbers, shewing it to have been copied from a European card, around

which the names by which the Arabs ‘‘ box the compass,” had been

entered as more conformable to their own practice.

These names would seem to point to a time anterior to the inven-

tion of the magnetic compass, when indeed the only way of ascertain-

ing the relative position of a ship at night in the broad ocean was by

observing the points of the horizon where prominent stars rose and

set. The system could only have been adapted to intertropical navi-

gation, wherein no very great variation occurs in these azimuths, and

it is necessarily but an approximation to truth, as hardly any of the

prominent stars selected rise or set at the precise azimuth named from

them. By the positions assigned to some of the southern stars, we

must suppose that it was framed rather to suit places northward of the

equator ; but in drawing out the following comparative view, I have

thought it preferable to enter the azimuth of each star on an equato-

rial projection, when of course the azimuth is equal to the polar dis-

tance, and the compass card thus affords to the Arab nakhoda a rude

* s\iS dele or, as my Maldive friend facetiously expressed it, the ‘‘ John

Hamiiton kitdb” of the Arabs. It would be a work of great utility to print an

edition of this volume, with emendations and additions suited to the people, who

depend upon it as we do on our Greenwich Ephemeris |

1836.] Note on the Nautical Instruments of thé Arabs. 789

table of N. P, D. by which he may, if he please, take his latitude, with

the simple instruments above described.

The card may be divided into two great portions, the eastern and

western, in which the same names of stars occur in a direct and inverse

order—on the east with the prefix ib. mutald, or ‘‘ rising place of ;”

on the west with that of _us2~0 maghib, “ setting place of ;” the north-

eastern quarter has written on its circumference,

Hie ! ® (hin J

a2); bl, ds); U8 )% x) hed usttbe zis!) yb sls las?

‘« From the north towards a, “east, Mutaldt Shimdlt,—(the north-eastern

quarter,)—latitude increasing, longitude increasing,’’

The south-eastern in like manner has the words :

uses xthe da] yu}, peu C6 pe bil_s b glib! ,<

‘Brom the east towards the south, Mutaldi Janubt, (or the south-eastern

quarter,) the latitude diminishes, longitude increases.’’

The north-western :

p25 Apbll, da) spell cllad otade ale! ob Cskelly,

‘“‘From the west to the north, the north-western quarter, Maghtbt eee

latitude increasing, longitude decreasing.’’

The south-western :

eld Us) pols clpbS! ust> Lststel Ler bin Jus pb ee bal)

“# ball. Nad endl) olin’, ae

‘¢ From the south towards the a Maghibt Janibt, the south-western

quarter ; longitude decreases and latitude decreases ete you are to the

north of the line.’’

The final words, when you are to the north of the line, apply equally

to the remarks on all four quadrants ; for example, when you sail on

any point of the compass between north and west, you increase

your latitude and longitude—and so forth.

The north point, or pole, is called, as in Srpi Aui’s work tl> jah, a

word not to be found with this acceptation in our dictionaries ; nor

is b3 qutb, generally confined to the south pole, but rather the

contrary. the matld, the rising place, and \A*~ maghib, the

setting place (to wit, of the sun) are the terms used for the east and

west cardinal points. It will be sufficient to enumerate one series of

the intermediate stars in the order of their occurrence on the card.

Pen. OY WW . Geko. D3 I mnrdro, the setting point of fargad,

the calf; one of the two stars known by the name of fargadain, (g et

y urse minoris.) 7 approaches nearest to the required north polar

distance.

790 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. (Dec.

2) NNW 82? 30% PP eer ARO the setting of ndsh, the

bier. This constellation comprises the four stars of the belly, both

of the small and the great bear, but generally and in the present

instance, the name applies to the latter, of which, however, the posi-

tion is nearer 30 degrees than 224 in azimuth.

“pale by N. 30° 45’. AS 20, the setting of ndgeh, the she-

camel, probably the same as Gall, the goat, of Dr. Dorn’s celestial

globe, the middle star of the tail of the great bear, N. P. D. 34°.

aovkt of the Greeks, or capella ; whose north polar distance is in fact

447 degrees.

5. N. W. by W. 56°15’. g5lyerre, the setting of wdgd, the

vulture, wega of our astronomy or a lyre, N. P. D. 51} degrees.

This is the star translated by the Baron Hammer as Aquila; but the

azimuth shews it to be Lyra.

6. W.N. W. 67° 30’. Jaw elkve, the setting of simak, con-

tracted for evel pS Shaw simdk ul rdmd, the spear-bearer, Arcturus,

N. P. D. 70°. It is Ascimech aremeah of the Alphonsine tables. |

PD OW by IN 788245 Lil ale, the setting of suraya, the

Pleiades. The north polar distance of these stars differs so much from

the azimuth here assigned, (being only 67°,) that the name is possibly

applied to Aldebaran, (N. P. D. 73° 50/) although the latter is the

‘true Arabic denomination of « Tauri.

8. W. 90°. bueA%0, the setting place (of the sun), nearly con-

stant in the equatorial regions.

OW iby S.qhOVe: 1b fie llesie, the setting of jozd, a con-

traction for sys! ee -) the giant’s foot, known to Europeans as Rigel

in the right foot of Orion, N. P. D. 98.24.

10. W.S. W. 112° 30. _yalenpie, the setting of tir. Ido

not find any star of this name on the celestial globe described by

Dr. Dorn in the Roy. As. Soc. Trans., nor is the word Arabic. The

similarity of sound and near coincidence of azimuth might incline me

to consider it as Antares, (115° 40’,) were it possible that the word

re) nir, bright, in the passage quoted by Dorn from Espn Munammep,

could be changed to ,43 the name of the star before us: the pas-

sage is as follows :

KS,8 edd jee dic whey Wy p20 5) pyle Le Ral l¥ 5.0,

* pill J Lie wy” Wydal] ul 5 sil] ail pe poms

‘The constellation of the scorpion is known to every one: on the

buttock there is a bright reddish star of the second magnitude,

1836.] Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. 798

which is the scorpion’s heart.” If the Arabic name of this star be

galb ul dgrab, whence was our name of Antares derived ?

The only other resembling ¢ir in sound is oho marked as Atair

on our globes, and comprehending the three bright stars of Aquila ;

but the position of this constellation puts it out of the question.

11. S. W. by W. 128° 45’. SatSliesie, the setting of Axilcil,

the crown. There are several constellations so named. Corona

borealis is called &£25), and is much too far north. There is another

akleil (janibt) the southern crown, situated about azim. 130° which

is nearer the mark: but the constellation intended may possibly be

Wx) QhalS}}, the crown of the scorpion, the 17th lunar mansion

of Unuen Bre; notwithstanding its error of azimuth. In posi-

tion, the bright star Fomalhaut (re le) of Pisces Australis

comes much nearer the mark, (121°) and it seems curious that it

should have been set aside for a less conspicuous group.

pe. SS WV, baa", Lm RE er hRv0, the setting of dgrab, the Scor-

pion. We shall see presently that antares is the star of this constel-

lation here intended, although it is far too northerly for the position.

But for such confirmation we might have suspected dgrab to be a

corruption of wo) a) alghorab : the crow (*epeé) which lies in 134° azi-

muth.

13. S. W.by S. 146°15’. Up amine dR, the setting of Hamdrein

the two asses. This name is not to be found in the globe. The nearest

to it in situation are « and g Gruis.

14. S. S. W. 157° 30’. squire, the setting of Soheil,

the well-known star Canopus in the constellation Argo, Alsafi-

nah of the Arabs. The north polar distance of this star, however, is

only 143% in lieu of 1573. It would set in azimuth 1574 at a place

Situated in north latitude 28°; so that if this be taken as a clue, we

may trace the origin of the compass scheme to Lower Egypt or Syria.

15. S. by W. 168° 45. ble Ws%, the setting of salibdr. As we

proceed southwards it becomes more and more difficult to find the

stars intended, Canopus indeed is almost the only one familiar to us.

Salibdr is not to be found on the globe, nor in the dictionaries: but

it is the very word translated Lyra by the Baron Hammer, a northern

constellation, which would be quite inadmissible in the southernmost

situation of the compass. There is a constellation somewhat similar

in sound on the brass globe described by Dr. Dorn, called geal

Alsabd, the beast, lying close to the Centaur with which its stars are

mixed.—Again, should a Centauri be the starintended, it would be about

the right distance in azimuth from Canopus—but this star is called

792 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. [Dzc

with its fellow in the other leg of the Centaur, y igs jan Hazér-o-

ulwazh on the globe. The only other star of note falling within moder-

ate limit of distance is a Eridani, or Achernar of our globe, which is a

corruption of pel S| akhir-ulnehr, ‘ the end of the river..—What-

ever star may be meant by salibdr, it is surely more southerly than

Canopus, and by nomeans Lyra. The two or three translated passages

from the Mohit equally confirm this, and receive illustration from

it. In the voyage to Guerdt (page 456) the translation says—‘“ In

this measure (the kids, or lat. 16°54’ north) Lyra (salibdr) is five

inches (13° 30’), or Sagitta (sahm awal) six inches (15° 6’), or Canopus

and Lyra are equal to three inches and a half (11° 6’).” The second

paragraph in page 457 is expressed almost in the same words. Now

if for py] ul sakm be read ye) ul nahr (a Eridani), and for sali-

bdr we take » Argonavis, the above conditions may very nearly

be complied with ; for, in north latitude 17°, Canopus and » Argo

will be seen at an altitude of 12° together, on opposite sides of the

south pole at the hour of 10 p.m. in the beginning of March.

The north polar distance of a Centauri (150°) would better suit the

given meridional elevation (13° 30’) than that of Argonavis: but in

this case it must be alnahr and not salibdr which must be coupled with

Canopus at the equal altitude 11° 6’: and the text would need a

second alteration.

Again, in page 456 (the latitude by position being about 1&°) the

translation says—‘ If it be not time for taking the polar star, take the

height at the setting of Aquila (nasr-wdgd) by the Lyra (salibar) which

gives 74 inches (or 17° 30’).” Now first correcting vega, which we

know to be a Lyre, and not Aquila, we shall find that at his setting,

the star above pointed out as akhir-ulnehr, Achernar, comes to the

southern meridian, and bears very nearly the altitude required.

Here then salibdr would seem to be a Eridani, whereas in the other

two cases it may be 7 Argo. Until we get somebody to point out the

actual star in the heavens, it will be impossible to decide between the

two; but a considerable step towards the solution of the Mohit pro-

blem has, at any rate, been made by the discovery that salibdr belongs

to the southern hemisphere.

If the Baron will favor us with a translation of the first chapter

which treats of the names of the stars, the division of the circle of the

skies, and, above all, of the cardinal points of the compass, we shall

doubtless be able to clear up all these points in a satisfactory manner.

The navigators of the Maldive islands follow the Arabs in their di-

vision of the compass which they call samagd \Zaw) a name apparently

1836.] Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. 793

taken from the Malabar word, samoukkd, for which M. Kuarrorn is

ata loss to discover the origin*, though it seems obviously a corrup-

tion of the Sanscrit term qaqa chumbaka, the loadstone. The

Maldivis alter a few of the names, particularly towards the south.

Some of these variations serve to throw light upon the doubt-

ful parts of the Arabic list. The orthography also, as written

in my presence by my intelligent friend Munammap, better known

among his island countrymen as Ustdd-muallim, the master-pilot,

differs considerably, being more of the Malay style: one letter an

é with a dot under it, is, he tells me, peculiar to his islands ; it has the

pronunciation of gh, not of €2 while (5 is pronounced more like g. The

following is his catalogue :

eis, 9 farghadem, a corruption of farkadain.

rs nash, the alif substituted for ain.

By) dyouk, ditto.

U3 — gasil, used for Lyre in lieu of wdgd or Wega.

Glow — simdg, the 5 used for .

theridn, a corruption from suraya.

murgh, the west—derivation unknown, perhaps corrupted

*from maghib,—irua is the east.

}

Vig> = jozd, the star Rigel.

ye tir. Can this be Sirius, which is the next conspicuous star

more southerly than Rigel ? Its Arabic name is Lsyraell,

w,5) agrab, in lieu of akletl, shewing that the crown intended is

the akleil ul dqrab of the globe, which consists, according to ULucu

Bze, of g, 8, 7 and y of Scorpio; & hasa N. P. D. of 112° only, which

would give an azimuth of 115° in latitude 28° north.

ws galb. If this be correct in orthography, it would denote

wyial} Os galb ul dgrab, the scorpion’s heart, or Antares: but if in-

tended for 5 the dog, it may stand for Sirius. The former is, how-

ever, most probable, because it confirms the Arabic name for the same

point which is wyke, or simply the scorpion, of which the princi-

pal star is Antares.

‘e yom hamdrim, the final m substituted for n.

J sil, pronounced si//i, an unknown substitute for sohei/, which

will be seen to be removed further south ; perhaps it is the local name

of Canopus, corrupted from the Arabic.

* KLApPROTH sur l’invention de la boussole, p. 32.

5 L

794 Note on the Nautical Instruments of the Arabs. [Dre.

9) ala siliwdr, the w substituted for 0.

Use soheil, Canopus, is used by the Maldive sailors as the south

cardinal point,—for what reason I-was unable to discover. They also

use the Indian word dakhan.

Note on the Maldive Alphabet.

While conversing with the Ustdd-muallim one day on the above

subject, I got him to write down the names as seen above in the Ara-

bic character: being curious, however, about the modification of the

ain introduced, I inquired whether the Maldive population had any

distinct alphabet of their own, to which he replied in the affirmative,

and gave it me in writing just as I have lithographed it in Plate

XLIX—a most whimsical system, and calculated to puzzle antiquari-

ans egregiously should they chance to stumble upon an inscription in

the Maldives without possessing the key fo it!

At first he told me they had but nine letters, (the second row in the

plate,) m, ph, d,t, lg, n,s, d; but on my observing that he made

use of a letter not in this list for the & of Calcutta, he said—‘‘ Oh yes,

there are the other nine” (the upper row)—meaning, as I presumed,

that they were not indigenous but extraneous signs introduced to ex-

press foreign sounds : they are, in fact, the nine Arabic numerals with

a dash above them to distinguish them from the ciphers. He wrote

with greater fluency in these his native characters than in the Arabic.

The system of vowel marks is partly an imitation of the Arabic and

partly of the Indian method; the long vowels being denoted by dou-

bling the diacritical stroke: the nasal 2 is marked like the Sanscrit

anuswara, but the letter i is also inserted. It was striking to ob-

serve how readily his ear distinguished the sound of a diphthong,

and how correctly he expressed it with a double character. The

order of writing is from left to right, contrary to the Arabic

mode, and none of the letters admit of being joined together or

abbreviated; but I pretend to no more knowledge of the alpha-

bet, or language, than is comprehended in the plate itself, and

need not, therefore, attempt to expand the materials of a short inter-

view between two parties but imperfectly understanding one ano-

ther, into a treatise on the unknown and, perchance, non-existent lite-

rature of these simple islanders.—It will, doubtless, surprise many that

they should have arrived at all at the possession of an alphabet of

their own. Among the specimens in the plate I have introduced the

names of the cardinal points as given above.

Wourn SJ1s.00¢. Vol V PLXLIL

NUaldive Alphabet.

‘ao,

ha tha nae ra ba ba ka @ wa

- salen Bin ly gh eae

ma pha va al tia La

i S7.

ay 9

Yi,

RE PMP BAG? Waly pigeon be

ee AD wOP Dein) I

Ma mad me me Mt€ mre FILL meee Lh We) ED aaa

AA AA AA AKA AF vP

- =

a &@ Zz é 2 < “a & g ang Aing

a ae) ay Aya, if Sf yg

Me IF! 7 9 27

Mahald oo Kalk ata St be ga 774 (2 Chittagong: )

a dil Yi sea? Dad, I, 7 9 | PAR)

Remi ieaty dt rN 19 57

Samuga poe Lr awa! Sa Acd hula gu

: C garur)

compass qorth eask south weskt

5 asia a a

AN a ee YY

oku (2 hsb) dhone (2 sleap )

Inscription on a Cannon aké Lishon , (sent thiler from Goa), wn Janseril& lellers.

a Pasi a2 aa le AS i Oia Se

OR oh

Inscription on an a> a eh ished Jemple on a rock near Atgark , tee Cuatiachy

| NAAR ROSag wr

Siinseh le

Pe See

Ie cl

aa eae

SR Men eattr |

eo (ite Ss ai) — ay =

4 d “4 z P u

ey? of ." FO

1836.] Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions. 795

VII.—Facsimiles of Ancient Inscriptions, lithographed.

(Continued from page 731.)

Inscription on a Cannon from Goa.

At the foot of Plate XLIX. I have inserted the copy of an inscrip-

tion which, it seems has long puzzled the savans of Lisbon. Mr. J.

Gavopart, chief interpreter and sworn translator to the British Govern-

ment at Penang, Singapur, and Malacca, has addressed the Rev.

AnseLmMo YeEGRos, Vicar General of the Singapur Mission, on the

subject, affording, as he conceives, a full explanation of its purport;

but either the characters must be exceedingly perverted in the copy,

or Mr. Gaupart must have a powerful imagination, to convert, as he

does, such hieroglyphics into the following Sanscrit sentence :

SAS US VAR Ts ca

alga LR AF OVA

which he translates, ‘‘ (cette) heureux (et) puissant manufacture

appartient au bon Roi Ram le 12 de Bélier 728.”

The raja here designated as the proprietor of the gun (if the read-

ing be conceded) the translator explains to be Rama varma vira Mar-

tanda Perumal Tamuri, who reigned at Calicut from the year 718,

(A. D. 1542,) to 736 (A. D. 1561,) of the Parasurdma cycle. He

was engaged in severe struggles with the Portuguese, and it is

probable that the piece of ordnance thus fell into the hands of his

enemies.

Of the letters themselves those only that bear resemblance to old

Sanscrit, are the Ist, 3rd, and 4th. The rest appear purely con-

jectural.

Inscription at Kandharpur.

Lieutenant Kirror, already well known to my readers for his

antiquarian and architectural zeal, has, on his recent march with his

regiment towards Gumsur, taken every opportunity of examining

objects of antiquity in his route. The only inscription he has yet

met with is shewn at the foot of Pl. XLIX. “It is (he writes from

Cuttack) contained in two compartments of a very ancient and unfi-

nished temple on a rock in an island near A’égarh ; at a place called

Kandharpur or Kandalpur.” The characters are of the old Bengali

or Gaur type: and may be thus transcribed in modern Deva Nagari ;

mfafaaatea: Afataa Wau : “‘the divine lord of beauteous variety,

the variegated ornament’ > being the epithet, doubtless, given to the

form of Siva, established or intended to be sthdpan’d in Ate temple.

5 L 2

796 Description of Uch-Sharff. [Dec.

VITII.—Description of Ucu-Suari’r. By Munshi Monan Laz.

_ [Dated Sit Pun, on the joint streams of the Panjab.]

Uch, surnamed Uch-Sharif, or holy Uch, which being near the

junction of the united streams Hesudrus, Hyphasis, and Hydraotes,

Acesines, and Hydaspes, attracts the notice of geographers, contains

numerous sepulchres of the Muhammadan saints. The oldest of all

is that of SHdu Sarr ut H&gasni, but it dwindles into obscurity. A

miserable wall without the roof environs the dust of the above saint.

If I write the respective names of the saints of Uch, along with

their incredible miracles, I fear to enlarge my remarks: however,

T presume to lay before you the endeavors of my feeble pen in re-

gard to Suda Sian Jaudz and his reputed descendants. He died

600 years ago, and is said to have lived to the age of 150. His

tomb, which is inside a large but gloomy room, is elevated about

five spans from the surface of the ground. It is a very simple build-

ing, adorned with the poor frail and old canopy. Both of his sides

have ten graves of his offspring. They are distinguished by one

rising above the other, which fill the entire position of the room.

None of them have any kind of inscription.

Saku Siap JaLAu acquired a very great fame by defeating the

Ha.sssv’, and converting his son Boragv’ into Islamism. He was

the ruler of Betiwahi, near Bahawalpur.

Jaudu had three-sons, Aumap Kasir, Baus uppin, and Siap Mu-

HAMMAD. When the first of the three was about ten years old, he

happened to meet a man in the bazar, whose son had died of

some disease. He applied to Anmap Kapsir to restore his dead son

to life. The young saint, after making ablution, turned his face

towards Mecca, and repeated the words ‘* Qum bi izn Allah*,” which

literally means, Get up by the command of God.

Such is the wonderful miracle described of AnMAD Kasir. When

he grew older, he became the father of the two reputed sons, Siap

Jatsu uppin and Siap Munammap R&jv’. The former was called

by the name of Maxupu’m Jananidn JanAn Gasurt, (or the traveller

and the Lord of all beings;) and the latter, RAsu’ QarrAz, (or the

Raji slayer.) Numerous miracles were wrought by these two brothers.

They went to pilgrimage through Persia, &c. &c. &c., marrying a

great number of wives, and leaving children in every country, which,

tradition says, amounted to 12,000; but I doubt the authenticity of

the information.

* The power of raising the dead by saying the above mentioned word, I

hitherto knew was only peculiar to Jesus Christ.

1836.] Description of Uch-Shartf. 797

When the Maxupv’M reached Madina he was suspected to be a com.

mon Musalm4n and not a Siad. On this he stood out of the door,

and, looking at the tomb of Munammnap, cried as follows: ‘‘ Assaldm

alaikiki ya jaddi’”’ (or, Peace be with you, O grandfather) ; when came

the answer ‘“ Va alaiki ussaldm yd valdi,” (or, Peace be with you, O

son) out of Munammap’s tomb, which convinced the men of the shrine

that he was a real Siad. People assert that this proves his being the

respected and first saint of the Musalmans. On receiving the intelli-

gence, I desired to visit the monument of such a renowned holy man

of Uch.

In company with my countryman and school-fellow, Pandit K&-

SHINATH, we proceeded to the town of Uch, and passed through a few

narrow streets on our way to the shrine.

On coming to the door, which has dwindled into the most ruinous

state, we descended towards the west, and turning to the south enter-

ed the room where the body of the Maxupu’M rests. The tomb isa

very poor structure, but raised about seven feet high from the ground,

which is concealed by numerous other graves. There is nothing

admirable in the shrine of the Maxunvu’m. Three small openings give

light inside the apartment.

The following Persian inscription written on the door, presents us

with the date of the Maxupu'm’s death.

‘« TArik gasht jumlah jah4n be jam4l Shah,

Tarikh bad haft sad o hashtad o panj sAl.’’

When the world was covered, by darkness without the countenance of the

_ Shah, (or Makhdam.) The date was 785 of the Hijri era.

The mausoleum of Maxupv’m JanAnidn Janan Gasurt is annually

visited by the pilgrims of the distant country. It is a popular belief

in this region, that a fool can get restored to perfect sense by eating

the earth of this tomb.

It is very odd that thetombs of the saints of the holy Uch, who

possessed such boundless reputation and respect in days of old, have

been not adorned with any kind of architectural beauty, either

by their posterity or believers, except that of ‘‘ Bibi Jind Vadi,” (or

the lady of the long life.) It is situate on the verge of a precipice

which commands the old bed of the Panjdb rivers, and gives a ro-

- mantic view.

The southern part of this magnificent sepulchre has been unfor-

tunately swept away by the late inundation of the above streams,

798 Specimens of the Soil and Salt from [Dec.

Besides this, it suffers a good deal by the neglect of the Musalm4ns,

who do not repair it. The door, which has been entirely eaten by

worms, opens towards the east, and has a sight of the other two

cupolas. They excel in material and handsomeness the others of

Uch, except that of “ Bibi Jind Vadi.”

** Bibi Jind Vadi” was one of the descendants of SaHauw Siap Ja-

LAL, of whom I have already spoken. The dome in which she sleeps

is erected of burnt bricks, which are cemented by mortar. The

whole of the edifice is ornamented by various hues and lapis lazuli

of the celebrated mines of Badakhshin. The size of this grand

building may be estimated at about 50 feet high, and the circum-

ference 25.

Though the clouds had unluckily obscured the light of the day,

still we endeavoured to take a sketch of the Bibi Jind Vadi’s mau-

soleum by means of the camera obscura. I herewith enclose a copy

of it—[which we omit for reasons given on a formar occasion.—Eb. ]

IX.—Specimens of the Soil and Salt from the Sdémar, or Sambhur

lake salt-works. Collected by Lieut. ARTHUR Cono.Ly, and analyzed

by Mr. J. STEPHENSON.

It is now more than a year since I received from my friend Lieut.

A. Conotiy the specimens named at the head of this article. They

were on a very large scale, and packed up so carefully as to exhibit

on arrival, almost as perfect a picture of the process and progress of

the salt manufacture at the celebrated lakes of Sdmar, as could be

obtained by a personal visit to the spot.

At my request, Mr. StepHENson submitted such of the specimens

as seemed to require it, to chemical examination in my laboratory,

and where the results were unexpected, I verified them myself by

re-examination. My sole reason for delaying the publication of

these very interesting memoranda was, that I was in hopes Lieut.

Cono.tty would favor me with a full account of the manufacture,

which, however, public business and subsequently ill health obliged

him to postpone—and thus time has crept on until the specimens

themselves have nearly dissolved away in the damp air of the last

rains ; and unless I place on record what I already possess, there will

hereafter be no means of consulting the perishable materials to pre-

pare another report.

The labels which accompanied the parcel were so full and explicit,

that, when followed by the chemical notes referring to the numbered

specimens, they formed nearly as comprehensive a view of the opera-

1886.] the Samar lake salt-works. 799

tion as could be wished: I will therefore first place these before the

reader.

Note on Sdmar lake salt and earth, by Lieut. A. Conotty.

While acting as Salt Collector for two months at Sambhur, I

employed part of my time in putting together officially some inter-

esting notes, historical (semi-fabulous rather) and statistical, con-

cerning this marvellous spot, collected by my friend N. B. Epmon-

stonx, Esq. Superintendent of Ajmér, when he went to take posses-

sion for the Honorable Company at the beginning of the year (1835).

Connected therewith it would be desirable to have scientific exami-

nation of the produce of the mines, for which purpose I send them

to you under charge of a servant; and will here detail the contents

of the boxes.

-A 1.—A long box containing a quantity of the mud which forms the bed of

Sambhur lake, and which yields as often as it is covered by (a few inches depth

of) water, and acted upon by a hot atmosphere. This mud was dug out before

me from the bed of a ‘‘ kiydr’’ (or vat) just after it had yielded a good crust

of salt crystals, when it was of the consistency of a stiff jelly. The mud near-

est to the surface was put next to the part of the box at which the lid is laid

hold of, (in order that it may be drawn out,) and so on downwards till the box

was filled.

A 2.—A box divided into three parts, containing as many sorts of earth.

ist. Some of the black mud just mentioned, which has the depth of about half

a gaz below the surface of the lake, 2nd. A bluish earth which soon hardens

into a friable cake and seems 4 compound of what lies above and below it. This

has a depth of half a gaz under the black mud. 3rd. A white sandy earth, which

has a depth of from five to six gaz under the second strata. This I learned from

the Sambhur Sherishtahdar who sent the specimens after me to Jaiptr on the

10th July. He wrote ‘‘ under strata No. 3 lies white stone from which chunam

is made.’’ I immediately sent off an express to say that I would make the

fortune of any enterprising digger who would dive for some of this stone, but

the Serishtahdar returned for answer that the attempt had been made in vain,

(rain) water having covered the whole surface of the marsh. He dug on the very

edge of the lake, where there was no black mud, but only the earth No. 2, and

he found nothing but this (he wrote) to the depth of 6 gaz, when the influx of

water obliged the diggers to give over work. He wrote moreover, some of the

‘* oldest inhabitants say that all parts of the lake are not alike; that in some

places you dig and find the three sorts of earth sent; in others, below the mud

only ‘ sang i kuchet’ (?) In others again only mud that has no bottom.”’

I may further mention that the Serishtahdar wrote—‘‘ The people call the

gil i safeid, Pindole (H.) and make whitewash from it.’’? This inducing a belief

that it contained lime, I poured vinegar on a bit which immediately effervesced. I

fancy this sort of earth is used to make the very delicate porous vessels out

of which the better sort of natives drink in summer,

A 3.—Three pieces from the surface of a kiydr (vat) off which a crop (crust)

of salt had just been raked.

800 Specimens of the Soil and Salt from [Dzc.

ey piece of ditto, on which, apparently, the salt did not come out well.

5. A piece of ditto, near the edge on which the salt did not form.

6. <A piece of ditto, the salt of which got mixed with scum while forming,

7- A piece which seems to have heen similarly mixed, but which was cut

from another kiyar, and said to be five or six years old. It has evidently been

rained upon, and it was taken from under a sheet of ‘rain water, by which more

of it would have been melted had it not been old and pakkd.

8 a.—A piece on the scum of which crystals were formed after rain had fallen

upon it.

8 b.—A ditto ditto.

8 c.—A ditto ditto.

9. A piece the salt of which got somewhat mixed with mud when being

formed, (probably from its being agitated by a strong wind) and on which a

crust of scum settled.

10. A piece of crust, chiefly scum, such as is thrown aside as useless.

11. Other refuse pieces taken from a kiyar in which they had been lying

neglected for, perhaps, some years.

12. Pieces of crust of salt from the surface of a kiyar.

13. Ditto ditto. N.B. These have been more or less smoothed and thinned

by having been rained upon.

14. Bits of a fine crust of salt with a little scum on the top. This was cut

with a phaura from the surface of a kiyar.

14a. Three other bits of a different kiyar.

14 b. Another of another.

The above five items are merely varieties to enable you to trace the process

of formation. :

A 15.—* Bacheh,”’ or infant crystals, about the smallest size in which the

mineral particles come to view on the surface of the salt mud, after the partial

evaporation of a body of water covering it. These were taken from under a

sheet of water six fingers (or three inches) deep.

16. Crystals about two days old (after first formation) six fingers’ depth of

water at first, 14 fingers’ depth evaporated when crystals taken out.

17. Ditto about three days old; or when two of six fingers’ depth of water

had evaporated.

18. Ditto about four days after first formation, or when three of six fingers’

water had evaporated.

19. Ditto of a fair (common) size, produced after about eight days’ evapora-

tion of six fingers deep water.—N. B. These crystals were found during the hot

winds, when the day’s heat was intense, and that of the night considerable.

20. Crystals which formed on a stick after it had lain seven days in the six

finger water from which the last mentioned (19) were taken after eight days.

21. Ditto. The concretion is more rapid on a thread, or stick, or any thing

that the water can get round, than on the surface of the mud.

22. Crystals made in a kiyar in 20 days during the hottest season. 12 fingers’

depth of water at first, four remaining when crystals were taken out.

23. Crystals taken from the lake after a complete and uninterrupted evapo-

ration of a body of water five or six, or perhaps more, inches deep.

24. Pink crystals from the surface of the marsh; formed by the rapid eva-

poration of a shallow deposit (or puddle) of water.

Cha Fe ee Oe a

1836.] the Sdmar lake salt-works. 801

A 25.—Good Sambhur salt, such as a byopdért would call pakka, and rea-

dily buy.

26. Superior ditto, such as a byopdrt would covet—a year or so old.

B 1.—‘* The grandfather of all salt’’ (the literal expression of the man

who brought it.) A lump taken out of an old pit eight cubits deep, said to have

been re-opened after a lapse of 100 years. In this may be observed several

layers, but for which I should have been ready to believe that the diggers

had arrived at the top ofan under ground chain of salt mountains, such as those

beyond the Indus, which Enpainstone describes, and that they had just chip-

ped offa peak. You must know that the bed of the Sambhur lake is, for the most

part, as shallow as a dish, and that after the rains it gradually becomes dry;

when dry the natives dig pits a few cubits’ depth in the bed of the marsh, and

pour the salt water that they thus obtain into vats (made with large stakes,

grass, and earth), in which it evaporates in from eight to fifteen days, according

to the depth of its sheet, and the state of the weather. A pit is dug for a few

rupees, so an old one is not usually restored after the rains: the water deposit-

ed in it dries into a cake of salt at its bottom; then a little sand is blown in,

and then another rainy season comes, and a second layer is formed, and so on

for perhaps many seasons, when, the pit becoming filled, all traces of its con-

tents disappear till the sinker of a fresh well hits upon them.

2. Another lump taken out of another pit three or four cubits deep.

B 3.—Another from another.

4. Another bit from another pit—N. B. All four specimens were extracted

when water was above them.

5,6, 7. Lump crystals and intermediate strata of earth from other pits.

8 and 9. Loose crystals from a pit four cubits deep.—Ditto from ditto, eight

cubits deep.—N. B. You will observe that nearly all the Sambhur salt crystals

grow into the shape of a four-sided pyramid. I see in the Cyclopedia that the

cube is given as the ascertained primitive form of 11 minerals, of which salt is

one; please to dissect a crystal till you arrive at its nucleus, and if you have

leisure, tell me the process of structure, for ‘‘ Sakambert jt,” the tutelary

goddess of the Chouhan Rajpits, for one of whom she in the year 608 S. mira-

culously made the lake, appears to reverse the order of architecture in put-

ting together her mineral particles, causing them to rise from a point to a base*.

10. A piece from a pit, the crystals of which are slightly coloured.

Examination of selected Specimens from the above. By J. SruPHENSON.

A No. 1.—Mud from the bed of Sambhur Lake.

An average portion digested in distilled water, and the filtered solution

(which appeared of a reddish brown colour), subjected to the usual tests, gave

the following results.

Witrate of barytes, .. ».« cajos.seinpice cece oe Copious white precipitate.

Nitrate of silver,..............-..++-.. Ditto flambent grey ditto.

Prussiate of potash,.....2.sesse.eeees- No change.

Oxalate of ammonia, ................+.+. Ditto ditto.

Litmus paper, .....- 0+ cesecreree oseeee, Ditto ditto.

Turmeric GittO, .- oe scescseccosecceess Ditto, ditto.

* The pyramidal appearance is merely from truncation of the cube. The solid

angle of the cube seems to resist solution more than the rest of the crystal.—Ep.

5 M

802 Specimens of the Soil and Salt from {Dzc.

300 grains exposed to a gentle heat in order to drive off the moisture lost

107 = 35, 6 per cent.

100 grains of the dry mud was now put into solution, and the insoluble matter

collected on the filter, washed, dried, and weighed, gave 70 grains.

The filtered solution treated with nitrate of barytes threw down a precipitate

of sulphate of barytes, together with the colouring matter, which after washing,

drying, and weighing, gave 17 grains = 10.4 sulphate of soda.

The solution now freed from the sulphate was next treated with nitrate of

silver, from which a precipitate of muriate of silver was obtained, weighing 42

grains = 19.5 muriate of soda.

Insoluble matter,’ {0762502 SPE S.J RR ee ee ee

Sulphate tof 'soday! (Fd. Wi cocles cece 's cee ole Seite gehen ee waltn MRE Dae

Miarlate of soda ies Kosh ese tein eee dats cee cs cillat « gelnete oo nm atom

Rows; aah. weed oh, He Lcd el coma ones HE AOR oe ee

100 0

Examination of the insoluble matter from A No. |, after the separation,

as above, of the sulphates and muriates.

Fifty grains of the insoluble earthy matter now freed from the extraneous

salts was treated with muriatic acid. A strong effervescence took place, and

the digestion was continued for 12 hours, as there was reason to suppose that

carbonate of lime was present. It was now repeatedly washed with pure water,

and the remaining earthy matter, which the acid had not dissolved, separated

and collected on the filter, well dried and weighed’: it amounted to 37 grains.

The muriatic solution was now treated with oxalate of ammonia, which threw

down a copious precipitate of oxalate of lime. This being well washed, and

dried, weighed 11 grains = 8.6 carbonate of lime.

The remaining solution contained a considerable portion of loose muriatic

acid, which being neutralized with pure liquid ammonia, a portion of alumina

(tinged with yellow oxide of iron) was precipitated. This heing separated by

the filter, washed, dried, and weighed, gave 4 grains.

Calculating then for per centage, the composition of this earthy matter will

stand as follows :

Matter insoluble in muriatic acid (silica,) .........es0ee022 74 O

Carbonate oPdiime,. 3 ois ccttictes te sie ote Poe eer cie ie he ares wate be ois or eailieeee

Alumina andpoxldeO£ Ions areriors:ove o amvarere, oluetel aleie ol <.0%cia este. are 8 0

TOS iieiss fo ieve Gate eimtaye a oi% wUnfol sats. ate! ore oistevelouendinld\. lab sve: occ ama eanaS

100 0

A No. 10.—This I found to be chiefly composed of sulphate of soda, with

the carbonate and muriate of soda in considerable proportion.

A No. 15.—This gave a trace of sulphate ; otherwise good salt; though the

crystals are small.

A No. 22.—When tasted gave traces of sulphate.

A No, 24.—Crystals of a pink colour, which disappear in the filtered solution ;

the colouring matter appears to be volatile—sulphate of soda predominates in

this sample; no carbonate of soda present.

1836.] the Sdmar lake salt-works. 803

B No. 1, from an old deep pit re-opened after 100 years. Examination by tests.

Mitrate ofidilver, :csh G)celiiss de edse’s elds cove sale” Copious precipitate.

INitratosot Wary ted is s/cjn'sscje\ale dis oj « sewer sive VERY, Copions Gitte.

Oxalate Of ammonia yc «iis <aysienisrwerse' aie ss «oye soy NOuehange.

Pauasiate Of potashs oi. ceec ccm cess asic cons» wees Litto ditto.

SPEEINTES DANCE Sy <n rao, acalate aint isle sie inpe so 0 tiare) a aveun'o sy SPUELO GACEO.

ARarmenic GittO, “a. Se sereei et sercaciccscctecdccsce, Ditto ditto.

A fair average sample was taken Baeueh the aver thickness of the lump.

100 grains exposed to a gentle heat lost 5.5 grains moisture.

100 grains treated with nitrate of barytes gave a precipitate, which after

having been well washed and dried, weighed 136 = 83 sulphate of soda.

The filtered solution treated with nitrate of silver produced a precipitate of

chloride of silver, which after having been well washed and dried, weighed 22

grains = 10.4 muriate of soda.

The composition of this sample is then as follows :

Insoluble matter, ,.... c 5 ASMC heat

-Moisture,....... PRT etah sis kateb, ol ear elobatanmnotahrs sigh aes 9.65

Sulphate of soda, fond dashanate 2»). siiieilafa alte otgaterh tiScune®

“:_cedhveggid Aa Re Sl Gh aa ean paia te 10 4

oY SOSERAB Be Bere vsbera a encvenoren teelisvet cioraveveietelels evel eraiace 0 1

100 0

A No. 6.—The salt of which got mixed with scum while forming, appeared

very wet.

When tested, this sample appeared to contain a considerable portion of alkali,

especially the reddish coloured part called scwm in the list.

100 grains dissolved, and the insoluble matter separated by the filter, washed

and dried, gave 2 grains.

To the filtered solution was added acetic acid till the alkali became neutralized ;

after which it was treated with nitrate of barytes ; the sulphate of barytes was

precipitated, and having been well washed and dried, weighed 84 grains = 51

sulphate of soda.

Nitrate of silver threw down a precipitate of chloride of silver that weighed

(after washing and drying) 30 grains = 14 muriate of soda.

In order to ascertain the quantity of alkali in this sample, 100 grains were

dissolved in pure water, and treated (drop by drop) with sulphuric acid of speci-

fic gravity 1.116 till the exact point of saturation was ascertained, by frequent-

ly testing with litmus paper. Towards the point of saturation a strong effer-

vescence took place. The solution was neutralized after 96 grains of the acid

test liquor had been used, which is equal to 10 per cent. of carbonate of soda.

This sample being very wet, the moisture was ascertained in the usual way,

and amounted to 23 per cent.

This sample, or rather what is called sewm in the list, is composed of

Sulphate of soda,....

NFuniate\Of SOtdt cite, cute slats Siete ie Bos wltoie: s viele oo's.0 cra. se arene el atO

Carbonate. Of SOda,, sarctete silane cat tele vise wieletle eieleelse tee ais os eel LOM O

Musoluplewmiabtens Teese lola tile lelicine celiac cals moles eloeles 2 0

Piste sce HH Aa ses Fuetidee Maes dele cabee ee vale able eons

100 0

& wu 3

804 Specimens of the Soil and Sait from [Dzc.

Samples A Nos. 25 and 26, called good and superior salt in the list, when

tested, gave traces of sulphate; with this exception the crystals are good and

pure.

The conclusions to be drawn from the preceding details are some-

- what at variance with the general impression regarding the Sambhur

salt lakes. At least my own idea, derived from conversation with

natives engaged in the salt traffic, was, that the lake water was a deep

saturated brine, which left so thick a cake of salt on evaporation in

the hot weather, that it was cut out in blocks on the margin and

brought away on bullocks.

It would seem, however, that the shallow lake, or inundation

would of itself, leave a deposit too thin to be profitably worked ;

and that it is customary to dig reservoirs or kiydrs wherein sever-

al feet depth of water already nearly concentrated to brine, are al-

lowed to deposit their crystals on drying; or the evaporation is

aided by the introduction of sticks, up which the saline incrustation

rapidly creeps.

The velocity of the spontaneous evaporation under the fierce sun

and scorching winds of the western desert, is well exemplified by

specimens A 15, the bacheh or infant crystals of one day’s growth,

through 16, 17, 18, to 19, the 8th day’s produce; in the last the

crystals are cubes of full half an inch base. Again we find crystals

of the same size in No. 22, from the evaporation of 8 out of 12

fingers’ depth of water in 20 days of the hottest season. In No. 28

the crystals from 6 inches depth of water are of 2 inch base. The

size, however, of the crystals depends greatly upon the undisturbed

continuation of the process, and does not give us a clue to the quan-

tity of salt deposited from a given depth of water, whence we might

calculate the saltness of the lake itself at various periods of the sea-

son. The rate of evaporation itself may be estimated from the above

data tolerably well; thus—‘‘ 6 fingersin 8 days’”—“ 12 fingers in 20

days” —will be nearly half an inch in depth per diem! The pits dug

for the reception of the brine seem sometimes to be very deep, 10 or 12

feet ; in these when deserted the deposit proceeds for several years,.

forming solid strata of salt separated by a streak of earth washed in

during the rainy season. The accumulation is then dug out in mass :

but in general the salt for sale is collected as it forms in the brine

pits in a granular state, by which means it is freed from the more

soluble salts with which it is accompanied. The pakka salt of the

byopdris or traders (Nos. 25, 26), is of a large grain—the latter

indeed in half-inch crystals,—and not very clean.

1836. ] the Sdmar lake salt-works. 805

A circumstance of chief importance elicited by Lieut. Cononiy’s

specimens, is the presence of the carbonate and sulphate of soda

in considerable abundance among the saline products of the Sambhur

lake. The greater part of the substance described by the manu-

facturers as refuse or scum, which is stated to be thrown away as

useless, turns out on analysis to be carbonate of soda, contaminat-

ed with sulphate and muriate; and it is well deserving of inquiry,

whether the discovery of so extensive a store of natron in a state of

great purity, may not be turned to profitable account. In all the

strata cut from the neglected kiydrs the carbonate is seen overlying

the mixed sulphate and muriate, of an efflorescent snowy consistence.

Sometimes the formation of the salt is prevented by its abundance as

(in A 4, 5, 6); No. 5,1 find on analysis to contain 40 per cent. of

carbonate, with 80 of each of the other salts—and a little care in

separating the crystals of these“would leave it nearly pure.

Spicular crystals resembling nitre are seen in some of the speci-

mens (A 11); they bear a very small proportion to the general mass.

It is but necessary to refer to Mr. SrspHENsoN’s examination of other

specimens, to form a clear idea of the conditions best suited for the

separation and collection of the different salts; thus in the old desert-

ed pits (B No. 1), the sulphate is obtained nearly pure: in A 6, 10,

it is mixed with carbonate ; in A 5, the latter predominates. As for

the muriate, from its inferior solubility, this salt is readily separated

in a state of purity from the brine.

The small proportion of lime in the earthy residue of A 1, from the

bed of the lake, rather militates against the expectation entertained

by Lieutenant Conouzy from native report, of a subjacent stratum of

this mineral.

The points now wanted to complete Lieutenant Conotiy’s descrip-

tion of the Sambhur salt manufacture, and the questions naturally in-

duced from the information he has already given, are:

1. <A topographical account of the lakes, their extent, general

depth, position relatively to adjacent plains, sands, or hills.

2. The extent of the manufacture, produce, possible increase, price,

and other statistical data.

3. Whether the carbonate and sulphate are worked and used?

the quantity and price of these.

4. The exact process followed by the native manufacturers or

collectors.

5. The specific gravity of the water, both of the lake and of the

brine pits, at different seasons; which may be found in the absence

of the means of determining it on the spot, by bottling off a portion

806 Remarks on a collection of Plants, [Dec.

at stated times. This would also enable us to ascertain whether the

carbonate existed in the water, or whether it was formed during the

evaporation, by the action of the lime or other earths. The presence

of magnesia, of potash, and of iodine also remains an undecided

point, as well as the nature of the pink or amethystine colouring

matter remarked in some of the specimens (A No. 24).

To conclude this hasty note, I may mention that I have found M.

Gay Lussac’s alkalimeter a very convenient instrument for examin-

ing these mixed salts. By preparing three standard bottles of dilute

nitric acid, nitrate of barytes, and nitrate of silver, adapted to his cen-

tesimally-divided dropping glass, the per centage of carbonate, sul-

phate, and muriate, is obtained successively from the same specimen

with great ease and rapidity.

Te.

X.—Remarks on a collection of Plants, made at Sadiya, Upper Assam,

from April to September, 1836. By Wiii1am Grirritu, Assistant

Surgeon, Madras Establishment, on duty in Upper Assam.

The following remarks may not be uninteresting, as they concern

a portion of India of which, especially so far as regards its natural

productions, but little is known. I must beg, however, to point out

that they must be considered as outlines only of a slight sketch;

since the amount of plants collected in Assam does not probably

exceed 1,500, and this can scarcely be considered more than one-

fourth of its whole Flora. .

The greater portion of Assam that I have seen, may be compared

to an extensive plain, intersected in various manners by belts of jungle,

the breadth of which, although extremely variable, does not, except

towards the hills enclosing the valley, seem to be often very great.

But as we approach towards the eastern boundary, the spots unoccu-

pied by jungle become fewer and less spacious: so that between

Kujoo Ghat on the Noa Dehing, and Nungroo on the Booree Dehing, and

in the whole of that direction, the country is almost exclusively oc-

cupied by jungle. The characters of a plain intersected by narrow

belts of jungle is very obvious about Sadiyd, at which place the

collection was almost entirely formed.

The peculiar feature of Assam, especially its lower and central

divisions, consists in the vegetation of its churs, or tracts of sand, very

often of great extent, which are stretched along the Burhampootur.

The breadth of these tracts, taken together, is, in some places, from 8

1836.] made at Sadiyd, Upper Assam. 807

to 10 miles. They may be said to be throughout their whole extent

exclusively clothed with dense grass jungle.

Up to Rungpoor the eye meets nothing but grasses, and an occasion~

al Bombax, a tree remarkable for its ramification, the branches being

nearly approximated in whorls, and forming right angles with the

trunk. About Buggooa Mookh belts of jungle begin to appear, here

and there approaching to the banks of the river. From this place

upwards the belts increase in extent and number, and from Seloni

Mookh, just below the confluence of the Dihong with the Burhampoo-

tur to Sadiyd, they proponderate much over the grassy tracts. Above

Sadiyd these tracts recommence at least on the northern bank, but

they disappear soon entirely: the grasses that clothe the churs are,

especially throughout Lower and Central Assam, of gigantic size,

some of them often measuring 20 feet in height. They consist of

four or five species of Saccharum, the kuggra, mog, (white,) molaha,

(red) and telee, (blackish,) of the Assamese, and a species of Arundo,

which is perhaps the longest of all, the nul (or podomolee*) of the

natives. Towards Sadiyd, however, very large tracts are covered with

Imperata Cylindrica, the ooloo-kher of Assam, which grows to the

height of 5 to 7 feet. As the genus Saccharum far preponderates

over the others, and is perhaps during its inflorescence one of the

most conspicuous genera of the order, the appearance presented by

the churs during the flowering of their occupants, can be more easily

conceived than described.

It may perhaps be convenient to consider the botany of Assans

under the following heads.

I. Botany of the Burhampootur, including the churs.

Of these, Graminez form, as I have said, almost exclusively the

Flora. Of the immediate banks, the predominant order is,—Compo-

site, Polygonex, Scrophularinee, Graminez, (among which is a species

of Alopecurus,) Boraginez, have several representatives : from Jor-

hdth upwards to Diboroo Mookh, a large annual Ranunculus occurs ex-

tensively, and throughout the same distance large patches not un-

commonly occur of a species of Irematodon, (J. sabulosus, mihi,) »

species of Polentilla is also not uncommonly met with.

II. Botany of the plains.

Predominant plants, Graminez ; of these the most common about

Sadiyd are Imperata cylindrica, Saccharum spontaneum, Saccharum

fuscum (Roxb.) in wet places, and a probably new, large and coarse

species of Panicum. Among these may be found two or three Orchi-

dex, Polygoneze, Leguminose, Cyperacez, one Viola, and a species of

Exacum which is particularly conspicuous from its bright blue flowers.

* See BucHanan’s Dindjpur, p. 168.—Eb.

808 Remarks on a collection of Plants, [Dec.

Those parts of the plains which have at a previous period been

cleared for cultivation, but are now unoccupied, present the usual

tropical features; and are occupied chiefly by Cyperacee, among

which occur one or two Graminee, several annual Scrophularinee,

and small Alismacee.

III. Botany of the belts of jungle.

IV. Botany of the foot of the boundary hills.

On this last Iam not able to offer any remarks. ~ It will be found

excessively rich in ferns, and next to these perhaps in Cyrthandracez.

The only opportunity that has hitherto been allowed me of visiting

any portion of these boundaries above Gawahatti, occurred at Gubroo

Purbut ; and I was then fortunate enough to meet with an Alsophila

30 feet high, a Sollyana, (mihi,) and Kaulfussia Asamica. Of the third

division, the botany is very varied; so much so, that no one promi-

nent feature seems to present itself. It is to this section that by far the

greater number of species contained in the collection will be found te

belong; and I shall hence pass in review the orders composing it—

reserving the few observations I have to make on the most interesting

plants to a subsequent part of this paper.

To those orders, the presence of which indicates the climate of

northern latitudes, or of a tropical one at considerable elevations, I have

appended an asterisk ; and to those which, though usually tropical, in-

clude plants which have hitherto only been found at comparatively

high elevations, I have appended a cross.

Dicotyledones.

Dipterocarpere; “..).\:.. ace iene

PUGACC, fa’. sic on eo) se ee Rtneaieene

Elecocarpe®; | «cai disvak )o sehen

Diyt brates 02 5.0.<hj.rtge eee

Meeliacezeia occ. s o'eece ile ereate’s

Aurantiaceey? 2 sch .eepeleto ete

Rhamneee; » 2:0. jovecovelescicssousveonsentencrs

Huphorbiacese, .....2 05 eseemece 4

Hippocrateacessy 5.1.2.2 gees

MRanUnewlaceswss ti) .lorss <vie.0 cries 2

, 1

Mialpiahiac@ere si. «fsts)steael mores: 2

*Magnoliacee,...

Anonacese, cise b. seeves ie cin nigel

*Wanbeliiterse tec conics wislee smack

Avaliacess: «Marge select

Ampelidez,.... pda ete bee

ROAST aRGE eo. ateuis «ie tieissals

TL OWAMEMOCEDS, talkie bie: o.6 <a ce Reler

Adednigte sey. is 6 Fe, ee hin were 0 @ alee

—

etm OO 0 DD DD OO PD OT ee OT =

MiclAStOMAGCEE, tree jeans oierseusie

Memecylex,........ Sialijeie'os 8 eemn's PROUAINE, Fs '- 05 <5 6,0 ieee eet

Miy ntaoens,,..c¥. tees coratels cklestonne Pranthoxylez,. 2/\./ tclelsle ¥etstactale

Cucurbitactes,’.: ines bias ae 12, Balsamimes, |. «/.)s)+:0i5 instal einer

Deponiacewcss. ce vikgs. viene b Oa eS Casvopilleve,. 7. sce sep serene

*Rosacewe hu, 26's hie cetera ote

Leguminosz,....0 oi <jeieane speiciainceett 4

Connaracee,. 2)... sss « «semeisleveleaienere

*Cupultfers,’ 2.00. cons ve neers

Unrticess ne Gas ao hie ieee

ATtOCALPER, «.0 <a). a0 a os iermeiee ae LO

SHUASTHE, S.. Se 0. oe oe went es Me

*Chloranthesx, «i... saerieoveee ma yk

*SAULULER,, WecrstoevetesisteeeretooieeheieuG

Piperacee). ccc secescneccasenes 9

*Crweid arte see's sioussuersvetltnrs lovelies

Capparidee,......

*Violaries yas seneeiasles ces oe

Gunbtifierces ait. ere arte cleitheveles ere

*Temstraemiacee,....

Dapind ae eres eo sae caer we e6 seis

*Hippocastanere, nine se once eee cist

Blercultaeere yi ing 235536 o.. 5) sia. ae

Bythneriacez, .. $a Caan:

Malvageie,’ f..ccmistee rans ¥ eet deere

1836.] made at Sadiyad, Upper Assam. 809

*Phymelee, :.........0....... 1 Acanthacese, .......0e000 eseee 8

Pnpteacess,..+% is s+ +0 . 1 Scrophularinese, ........5.8.4- 20

Laurinee, .. aiedste ve nO, | Orabanchese ny... oy sea 1

INGHARANGHACEE: ccc es ec tese case 0 COMPOSING; | o's ares iso o.cheince oles elem ale

tPolygonee, .........-... . 12. *Plantaginee, 1

+Menispermee,.......-....--.. 19 *Gentianew, ..........0000-- 1

*Primulace®,...ce2esscee ot POR VRE fio aieie ats ao same 6 oie ole sien

Myrsinet,.........se0ee0ee5- 6 Asclepiades, ...........seer000 9

NM eo a a ss 0 sin ins njolnicpetig, BS, hy (VEWDE be ol ahpysiaivigins, isis maps nie @ sige due

IPE ATi fade os eegteaciee OO) | Sboragimerey (i. 27.8 ee eS

MUGHEHACED,, (iein.c.s sie.0lansicpeis <\0).5,0, ¢ 1 WOrdiaCed ye sicrees ate) <icileio tors usrereiclsiette L

*Campanulacee, -........eesse0 2 ie RUNIEOMNACEEE, - aa) aisle-cO's so’ pisces wie! vo ie

*Sambucee, ... 1 SOLANGE tres o Seo el sinelele bistera ssa t) O

PVEIMUMET ES pcos srecispe iste yeissisioltis wisyle & GinetAacere, wi cies) ais c,ols aecllbie ts maple ae

Cyrthandracee,............+--» 7% Incerte sedis, including Roydsia, 31

MemUeNACe ses eee see eee LI ——

HBMIAECE Soto cisie cneiss ae oiels omaesyen apy LA Total,.. 523

Monocotyledones.

Se ea AAUA YORE ha tases cad = eit uh fay eat a i doeirecat fbi fe.” ead UUTECO DE gia Mia ate? aha lovecat the vase owe ke 2

MEME Me Se iss NAA hireie cist de) BUNGE, os cra itc's Salat « age ohatgia's casiee ho

PPV RG ic Se ces ce sc ne 8 Bd, COBAIN Ages tain ass eee a sc te mies wis Le

AAC PVIAE®, 55 sees ase ee... xe 2k ipButomie dy sais hom a mbaretovanw chelate os Mad

Hydrocharidex,..,....... ee Tet GANTSTINA CELE ax) aheireie (eas: sot sisinisuecssiolst ole nui

MILE Aare gh eye aisysielece acieievsiette (OPT YOCAULONERES) ie ieee oe 50 1

MEE EME es e's «ale twelteiet® (Op Gramines, aid ohh of Searels BF

MSCOREIE tes sce toe cece ns ee, 2 ~CYperaceie,«. 45» Satehe ieee ent OG

PGOMICUCTER, ness ce cececcacee 2 eareee

MO@irchimeweteiN «LI wld Mee 28 TLS Total,.. 126

Polamogeton, ....se.eseeeees 1

Acotyledones.

apres rietc ts neues ta) ULICEB Ys <« aaiahe as. sigiicie,n.s pia nie! n aje ede

BIVEOMGMIACCHE, o-'oe's ct os oo. cs soe te snd ee

otal,.. 40

Of Anonacee I shall only notice Sphorostemma, Buums. In this

genus the connectivum is highly dilated, and the cells of the anther at

a considerable distance from each other; and yet from the arrange-

ment of the stamina, bilocular anthers with contiguous loculi result.

It affords another instance of the existence of the peculiar tissue,

until lately supposed to be characteristic of Gymnosperme. In ad-

dition to this singularity, its medulla is traversed longitudinally by

bundles of dense, occasionally branched, woody fibre, which consists

of a superposition or ‘‘ emboitement’’ of several layers.

Cucurbitacee. Among these plants occur two genera which appear

to be new, so far at least as the Prodromus of M. Dz Canpo.uz is con-

cerned ; in which book the article on Cucurbitacee, (by M. SurinGs,)

appears to me to be very unsatisfactory. Of one of the above genera,

I have only seen the male; it is remarkable for the involute, or rather

gyrate involution of the petals. The second I propose calling Actinos-

temma: it is chiefly remarkable for the complete separation of its sta-

+ Chiefly from the foot of the Abor Hills, on the Dihong.

810 Remarks on a collection of Plants, {Dzc.

mina ; for the “‘ dehiscentia cireumcisa” of the fruit ; and, above all, for

the pendulous direction of the seeds. It approaches in some points

to Zanonia. I am not aware whether the peculiar nature of the arillus

of this order has been explained or not; it is a separation of that

portion of the tissue originally surrounding and in close contact with

the ovula. Hence it is a shut sac; and hence, too, it is wanting in

Actinostemma, in which the cavity of the ovarium is not filled by a

production from the placentz.

Conarie. In Conaria, of which I have one species from the Abor

Hills, the raphe is certainly external with regard to the axis. I have

not been able to ascertain whether this depends upon any torsion

of the funiculus, which Mr. Brown has stated to be the case in

other instances of a similar anomalous situation.

Of Saururee Houttuyniais the only example. This plant, which was

originally described by TuunBERG, appears latterly to have been more

misunderstood than by the original describer. I have had no oppor-

tunity, however, of examining the work of THunBere in which the

plant is described. And I ought, perhaps, toexcept M. Meyer, who

has published ‘‘ De Houttuynia atque Saurureis,’”’ with which work

Iam unacquainted. I find each flower throughout the spike, except

perhaps the terminal one, to be subtended by a very small bracte.

Of these, the four lowermost, rarely only three, are highly developed

and petaloid, forming the spatha.

The number of stamina to each flower is, excepting those at the

apex of the spike, almost invariably three, and always equal to the

carpella entering into the formation of the female organ ; and of these

the third is always next the axis. The terminal flower has from five

to seven stamina; the space between this and the uppermost trian-

drous hermaphrodite (?) flowers is occupied by an assemblage of male

flowers, with a variable number of stamina, but never greater than

three, and usually, 1 think, two. That such is the structure of this

portion is proved by the presence of bractea, similar to those of the

lower portion, interspersed among the stamina. Dr. WALLICH says,

in Flora Indica, I. 362—‘‘ In the numerous spadices which I have

examined, I have with Father Lovrztro invariably found three stami-

nas, and as many styles attached to each ovarium : the former above

the base, the latter at the apex of its angles. I have not, therefore,

hesitated continuing this most interesting plant in the very class

and order where it has been placed in the Flora of Cochinchina. As

there is no reason for considering it at all different from the original

Japan plant, I am at a loss to account for the difficulty wore the

celebrated Chevalier Taunsere experienced in determining its

a: 0)

~—

ie a eae = Ye px

1836.) made at Sadiyd, Upper Assam. 811

station in the sexual system; nor can there be at present any doubt

of its neither belonging to Heptandria, Polyandria, or Monecia.”

THUNBERG was, however, so far as I can see, right; for he paid, in all

probability, exclusive attention to the composition of the terminal

flower, on which, in certain cases, the Linnean rules lay much stress.

Taking this into consideration, Houttuynia may be referred to Hep-

tandria, Polyandria, or Monecia; most correctly to the latter, and

least correctly to Polyandria. But as,—so far at least as regards the

Linnean system,—the most obvious characters are the best, it is ad-

visable to keep the plants still in Triandria Trigynia. The structure

of the seed has been likewise totally mistaken. In the Flora Indica,

loc. cit. the embryo is placed at the wrong end of the albumen, and

is mistaken for the embryonary sac. The real embryo is a much

more minute organ contained in this, ‘“ the vitellus,” or membrane

of the amnios of Mr. Brown. Dr. Hooker describes Dr. Waxuicn’s

account as most correct; but he does not define the situation of the

embrvo otherwise than by saying that itis situated at one end of

the seed. Lastly, the plant does not belong to Aroidex, nor even to

Monocotyledones. Notwithstanding the apparent solidity of true em-

bryo, yet the more important nature of the structure of the stem is

sufficient to point out that it is Dicotyledonous, or rather Exogenous ;

and among these, its true place is, beyond doubt, Saururez.

Of Thymelee one species only occurs, which is apparently referrible

to no published species of the order. To this I have attached the MSS.

name of JENKINSIA, in compliment to Captain F. Jenkins, Agent to

the Governor General on the North-East Frontier, to whom Botany,

among other sciences, is considerably indebted.

Of Menispermee the majority are interesting. Cissampelos is the

only genus with which I am acquainted, in which the ventral suture of

the ovarium is anticous, or not next the axis. Iam not certain whether

the most correct way of understanding the curious structure of the

female flowers is not to assume the aggregation of four flowers, which,

in the only species I have examined, appears constant, as a complete

quaternary division of one only. It remains to be ascertained whether

the singular reversion of the situation of the ventral suture is more

uncommon in aggregate than in solitary carpella.

Of the genus Stauntonia, Assam has two species, but only one is

contained in my collection. The anomalous structure of the fruit has

no doubt been explained by Dr. Watuicu in his Tentamen Flore

Nipalensis, in which it is published under the name Holbdllia, but

which I am at present unable to consult. I find that the placenta-

tion of this genus is similar to that of Flacourtianes, with which

5 N 2

812 Remarks on a collection of Plants, &c. [Dze.

order I am not acquainted, and to that of Butomez; and hence the

anomalous situation of the seeds. At the period of expansion of the

flower, the ovula are much less developed than is almost universally

the case: they present indeed the appearance of ovula at the earliest

stages of development. I-refer to this order a plant with long ra-

cemes of ternarily aggregate fruits, notwithstanding that it has milky

juice, and that the Cotyledons are large, foliaceous and obliquely

situated with regard to each other.

Among the Cyrthandracee a species occurs, (Chiliandra obovata,

mihi,) remarkable for the structure of its mature anthers. ‘Fhese de-

hisce in a labiate and incompletely bivalvular manner, the lower and

smaller valve being alone half reflexed. This valve is compound,

and due to the mutual adhesion of the originally distinct inner locel-

lus of each loculus. ‘To this formation 1 have adverted in a short

memoir on Rhizophoree, published in the Transactions of the Me-

dical and Physical Society of Calcutta, although I was at the time

ignorant of the existence. of an example. Assam contains another

interesting species of this family: this, which is remarkable for its

pentangular petaloid calyx, and the ‘‘ dehiscentia cireumcisa,” of its

fruit, in which it approaches to Aikinia of Mr. Brown, I propose

calling Cyananthus.

Scrophularianee afford one new genus, (Synphyllium torenioides,

mihi,) an account of which will appear in the Journal of the Madras

Literary Society, edited by my friend Mr. Cots.

Asclepiadee contain some interesting species, of which one consti-

tutes probably a new genus, unless, indeed, it is referrible to Dr.

Wient’s Heterostemma, from which it would appear to differ in the

valvular estivation of the corolla. This species is remarkable for the

aliform processes running along the larger veins of the under surface

of the leaves.

To this order, or to Apocynee, is to be referred a remarkable plant,

distinguished by the numerous longitudinal foliaceous ale of its

follicles, and, I speak from memory, its serrated leaves. This plant,

which I have seen near Merguit on the Tenasserim coast, seems to

have been sent by Captain Jenkins to Dr. Watticn with many

others, none of which appear, however, to have excited much at-

tention.

Among the Boraginee we find one Myosotis and a species which,

with the habit of some Anchuse, appears to be not referrible to any

genus of the order. The ‘‘ umbilicus” occupies the centre of each

carpellum, and is surrounded by an osseous elevated margin. The

origin of this is totally distinct from that of Myosotis, and is wholly

independent of fecundation. The radicle is in addition inferior.

1836.] Noté on a Remnant of the Hun Nation. 813

The Monocotyledonous forms are chiefly those of other parts of

India. Among the Orchidee two species of Calanthe, and two of Po-

gonia occur, as well as one species of Spiranthes. Among the Grami-

hez the most interesting is a Diandrous species of Alopecurus, which

genus is, I believe, new to India; at least to any portion of the plains.

Of the Cyperacee, I shall only advert to the existence of four

species of Carex, two of which are, however, from the Abor Hills;

a third, which was originally sent by Captain Jenxins to Dr. Wat-

LICH, appears to be widely distributed, extending from Gawahati to

Jorhath ; the fourth ; I have only met with about Sadiyd.

But perhaps the most interesting plants of the whole collection are

contained among those “ incerte sedis,” a division, always to a be-

ginner, of great extent. Most of these are from the lower ranges of

the Abor Hills; and the appearance of these is quite sufficient to

ensure their being of great interest.

XI.—Note on a Remnant of the Hun Nation. [Vide Chap. 26 of the

“* Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire” under the head of * Ori-

ginal Seat of the Huns.” | By Captain W. Fotesy.

““One of the princes of the nation (Hun) was urged by fear and

ambition to retire towards the south with eight hordes, which com-

posed between forty and fifty thousand families ; he obtained under

the title of ‘ Tangov’ a convenient territory on the verge of the

Chinese Empire.” (A. D. 48.)

Now, there are a people located in various parts of the Bama

(Burmese) and Shan (Siamese) empires, who are distinguished by

the appellation of ‘‘ Ton-soo”’ or ‘‘ Ton-dzoo :’’ they have a language of

their own, and differ in feature, dress, and domestic manners from

the inhabitants of the country in which they reside; they never

intermarry with their neighbours,’and assert their descent from “a

people who came from the north ;” they are an ugly, swarthy race ;

both men and women closely resembling the picture of the Huns

drawn by Giszon in his immortal history. Broad faces, flat noses,

small eyes, short, squat (but athletic) figures, are the most prominent

beauties. The men wear their hair long in common with the Bama,

but their dress, which is always of a dark colour, much resembles the

garb of the Chinese: the women have a fillet of dark-coloured

cloth (generally with a red or white border) tastefully arranged as a

head-dress, and falling down over the back; a mantle of the same

colour and material extending from the shoulders to a little beyond

814 Tables of the breadth, depth, [Dzc.

the knee, is the only remaining garment. Their legs, which are

extremely thick, are covered with a number of metal bangles; these,

with the exception of the ear-ring (nad-ddn) are the only ornaments

worn by the females of the Ton-soo race.

I am persuaded that these people are the descendants of the ‘‘ Tan-

you” described by G1iBBon, a remnant of the ancient Huns / ! pre-

served during a lapse of 1788 years uncontaminated with the blood of

strangers !!

Turning over the pages of Grpson very lately, I happened to notice

the subject. I regret exceedingly that I was not aware of this sin-«

gular coincidence during the time of my temporary residence in the

neighbourhood of this people—how much might have been elicited !

XII.—Table shewing the breadth of the river Satlaj and the rate of its

current at different stages from Harrike Pattan to its junction with

the Indus at Mithankot.

[Communicated by Capt. C. M. Wapr*.]

ee Serney.

“=| 5 -2| 8

on | a eee

= wm As = 2 2

Beles apse

Names of the Stages. OF | eS Names of the Stages. o.|/ 23

a) oe a pai

In Tn

F yards. Kts.Ft. yards. |Kts.Ft.

Ate Harries s-teetcleyer (eres S59 Ie Sey At Palas. pases ccccrsys chess 306 | 1 05

3 LETC NG cepa asuboons DIO Nel Wee. Narpaty esses ain oiee 360 | 2 03

7 Firozpir,..o.«. Sesiegy FOOSS line Sonilwes Khyrpar, efi ngrs lochs Bio i 381 | 1. 34

FN amd Op ye ieie cise ier 528.| 1 30},, NarMohamad ki goth,| 176{1 04

Sp EDITS IS eter ieveratale bel A154 1200/8,» Guldera,s 308 | 1 30

Ao LIGAEN. sooo Son boor D202 Bahawalpar, or Bin

jp duadiike, ss. -| 308; 1 40 diriwalaasccny. fone oee 616 | 1 06

9) Jagvaird Salemié poe) 2G | 2 1002) ,, _Nabarwala,sjar.% . <0 220! 2 Ol

PL JUMUN CAEN Aare |) NS leon lst inns Bid UU IKG. se. ern clei = 308 | 2 00

sy CGM is tet eaters «rs ATS lle Se. [ie s) WL pala a epetenni (see 572°). -04

so Bachawali,l:eiideie'| e264 al eleelloals a Wialckchanbelan ivi. afc 605 | 2 00

a5 Jhilna, ee otros ASAMIONG QUE Stipe eat-in a'e cis ple iaen|l sc Tien eee

BARON fs.s aeeteeee Wane B72. > HOON ai shydanht a0°...t2) 2 ooee ene Ok

9> Khajh Page Peele LOS dt eae MCR MCOL yy 6 custo wieeare 858 | 1 13

»» Nunkeh, Resi 200m) 2nO0

* We were in hopes ere this to have been favored with a copy of Captain

Wanve’s journal and survey of the river Satlaj, for publication. Specimens of

the soil and rocks on the banks have been long in our possession, awaiting fur-

ther illustration, which want of leisure has doubtless prevented.— Ep.

1836.] and velocity of the Satlaj river. 815

TABLE, No. 2.

‘Shewing the distance of the Stages in Miles, and the Soundings* of the

River from stage to stage.

Names of Stages. Sounding. Av.

From Harriketo ....

», Bundali to.......| 13 |14 feet.

—— es eee

», Firozpir to .....| 10 |10,8,12,16,12,11,12,10,11,9,12,14,12. 104

», Mamdot to.......| 14 |11,12,14,14,14,12,12,6,5,6,6,7,8,12,11,14,6. 10

», Khiaghgi to .....] 13 |8,8,12,6,6,6,6,5,13,8,5,5,5,12,14,10, 8

ys) ariian tos. ...rs |: 9) |10518, 16,22, 11510, 11,9,12,9, 13

», Ladake to.......| 13 |12,12,12,9,9,7,14,12,9,11,15,6,15,11,15,8,7,15,17,14.|114

ay Uae VAILA tO... s+ <- | 2311750505 13, 5,12,10,12,18,22,14,9,90,9,12,14,12,22,1),

10,14, 1 ,6,6,14, 10,11,5,3, ,10. 11

», Juwunda Biinga, | §3/14,14,14,6,6, 14, 10,5,5,5. 9

Pe Hann COlsa 5; 94) 11 8,10,14,10,12 9,12,9,10,8,7,7,13,6,12,12. 10

», Bachawali to.....}| 13 |8,11,13,12,8,7,6,6,3,5,8, 12, ce 14,14,8,8,8,6. 9

», Jhfiind to .......] 16 |8,8,9,9,6,14,15,14,8,7,12,16,1 1,16, 15,15,16,12,12,14,

9,11,6,7,6,6. 10F

», Akokito .......] 13 |6,14,14,15,12,9,11,11,11,113,8,9,10,7,18,14,18,13. {11

», Khajh Bazidpar, 15 |12,12,9,8,6,7,6,5,9,11,13,12,8,7,6,6,6,5. 8h

», Nainkehto .....] 12 |5,4,6,7,11,12,14,3,3,3,3,4,7,11,11,24,4,4. 8

», Palato .........| 13 |14,14,11,7,16,12,8,11,8,8,9,9,6,7,12,13,18,11. 103

pONUMpUL tO ....... | 24 |1),16,9,7, PERSE 14,15,6,7,9,20,8,6,8, 7,8,12,14,15,6,

7,9,15,9, 10,10,11,7,14, 16,16, 16: 11Z

», Khyrptrto .....} 20 |7,10,6,11,12,18,14,12,18,9,16,12,11,12,11,6,8,12,1],

7,5,12,10,11,11,9,14,11,13. 10¥

«+, Na@rmohamad, ..j 103/9,11,14,15,14,15,11,11,12,16,7,6,15,8,7. 112

sy aulderato ......}] 12 |7,5,11,6,7,13,16,9,12,18,19,11,11,9,7,20,8. 114

oe Bahawalpir to...] 115)11,9,8,16,18,13,9,13,14,18,18,8,9,12. 11g

», Naharwalé to ...} 11 )12,13,7,12,11,9,6,9,8,7,6,9,12,18,9. 10

», Budduketo .....] 53/9,12,16,16,13,7,6,14. 113

», Mirpar to.......| 14 |7,6,14,17,16,13,7,11,20,16,12,13,14,12,12,18,12,11,

14,12. 16

», Makkhanbelé, ..} 13 |9,7,15,9,7,9,12,19,15,9,18,14,18,24,21,19. 14

», sitpr to .......{ 10 114,11,17,18,14,12,14,18,7,9,12. 13

», Shydana to .....] 14 {24,24,15,13,14,9,14,17,24,12,12,12,12,12,12,13. 15

», Mithankot,......1 15 '11,9,8,14,12,12,13,24,17,12,13,14,17,18,15,24,27. 14a

TABLE, No. 3.

Shewing the distances both by water and land from Ropar to the princi-

pal towns on the Satlaj as far as Mithankot.

Akbari Kos, Statute Miles.

Names of places with their distance from

Ropar. By water.| By land.| By water.| By land.

From Ropar to Lodian4 or Filor Ghat, . 37 32 463 40

. Pitta te Erarrike,. 272 020 08 e 863 77 1083 96

sgn Ditto fopHITOZPUr, fee aise ok 1a ~1- 104 95 1324 119

+) . Ditto torGatirjiénd,) steiaies . 174 149 2164 186

Se Ditto tosBatenp iin, tie emieuis acai ia<i- 274 224 342 282

», Ditto to Bahawalpir,............ 307 248 385 333

oy, geet, to COUCH its scapes nts sie'sie «, «3 346 277 433 337

», Ditto to Mithankot, ............ 381 3103 4765 388

* These soundings were taken between the Ist of Jan. and 7th of March, when

the river is at ite lowest depth throughout.

816 Abstract of Meteorological Tables. [Dzc.

XITI.—A Comparative view of the daily range of the Barometer in dif-

ferent parts of India. By James Prinsep, Sec. As. Soc. §c..

The friends who have for the last two years favored me with

copies of their Meteorological Registers, have doubtless accused me

of a most ungracious requital of their labours, in the long slumber

to which they have apparently been devoted in my editorial eseru-

toire! Such is not absolutely the true state of the case; but the num-

ber attached to the accompanying plate* will, I fear, testify against me

to the extent of having kept back for nearly a year, the curious facts

that had been elicited. from the possession of so many valuable re-

cords of the weather. ;

The fact is, that the prompt attention with which my appeal was

answered by observers of the weather in numerous parts of India,

served as a check to the immediate publication of the materials sup-

plied. The very voluminous dimensions of such registers, and-their

dry and unperusable nature, even by the few who would like well to

consult them, set me about contriving some method of condensing

their results into convenient compass, and exhibiting them to the eye

in a manner more perspicuous than could possibly be accomplished

by a mass of mere figures.

The usual form of a diagram of zigzag lines from point to point

would apply tolerably well to a series: of single daily observations,

taken at a particular hour, and would trace out in a gently undulat-

ing curve, the course of annual variation; but if made to embrace the

double daily. oscillation, now well known to be steadily pursued by the

Barometer in intertropical climates, it was evident that the alternations

would be too confused on a small scale to be followed pleasantly by the

eye. A slight modification suggested itself, as calculated to remove

all objections to this mode of displaying the phenomena, without taking

in any degree from the accurate notation of the fixed points of obser-

vation, while it represented more palpably the amount of daily oscil-

lation. The modification to which I allude will be readily understood

by inspection of Plate XIV. It consists in breaking the connection

between the consecutive days, and merely laying off, in short parallel

lines, the interval between the maximum and minimum readings of the

instrument. The proximity of the lines: enables the eye to fancy

an imaginary line drawn centrally through them to represent the

mean course, without the necessity of drawing it, while errors of the

tenth of an inch, so liable to occur, and so difficult of detection in a

series of figures, became at once obvious and remediable. The chief

* It was first printed as Plate IX. subsequently altered to XIV.

: again 18365

3 ess 30.0 25.5 Vol VV PLXIV

Sal SHS we aw SAS ee

fly

SEER Fl

w ae

He SSF

e —

Sis |

h =a

sw —_ 5

lal

Bombay Madras Calcutta, Tirhut Cawnjur

Barometer 1834

«Jnr de See 38

: Le

Bombay Madras Caleta Tirhut — Cannpur Simla Niet Madras tuleutta Trrhut Bombay Madius— Cateithe Tarlac Gavnjrar

1836.] Abstract of Meteorological Tables. 817

advantage, however, of the plan of parallel lines was, that type might

be adapted to express the observations with as much facility as to a

figured statement. Having the brass rules of my calendric scales

already divided according to the days of the year, it only would be

requisite to cast a quantity of rules of the thickness of one day, and

exactly one-tenth of an inch in breadth; the printing surface of some

being retained of the full length, and that of others reduced succes-

sively one hundredth, two hundredths, three hundredths, &c., so that

nine varieties, and a large supply of blanks or quadrates of the same

dimensions, would be sufficient to lay off any series correct to the

hundredth of an inch, which is ample for most purposes. I here give

a sample of this mode of registry in type, although, as I had previous-

ly engraved a copper-plate divided for the purpose, I have not, on the

present occasion, made any use of the typographic plan, in spite of the

far greater expedition and precision of which it is capable.

Madras. Calcutta. Tirhfit. Cawnpore. Simla. Nipal.

39.0 29.5 29.5 29.0 29.0 23.0 25.0

July. =

5 =a

10 ==

20 - tc

25 =

30 = =

It is merely necessary to denote by figures at the top, the value of

the neutral line from which each set of readings is to be estimated right

and left, in some even division of the inch, as 29.50 inch for Calcutta ;

29.00 inch for Tirhut, or 25.00 for Nipal, &c. To reduce the lines into

figures when requisite, an ivory inch scale may be applied, but this

will seldom be necessary if such linear tables are accompanied by

monthly abstracts in the ordinary form: the chief advantage of the

lines being to shew ata glance the variations of pressure or other

phenomena, during the month, in a very small compass, and for many

localities at the same time.

Having thus explained the principles upon which the accompanying

plate was filled up,—a work of no small patience by the way, seeing

that it contains 13 columns of 365 double entries, or nearly 10,000

individual measurements laid off by scale to the hundredth of an inch,—

I will proceed to notice, first, the authorities whence the various

columns are derived ; and, secondly, the instructive and highly curious

facts it discloses. |

The Madras column is extracted from the registers published by

Mr. Taytor, the H. C.’s Astronomer at Madras, in the Journal of the

Literary Society at that place. For the Bombay column I am indebted

818 Abstract of Meteorological Tables. (Dre.

to my brother Assay Master, Mr. Noron, who kindly sent me copies

of some registers made mostly during his absence. The series is broken

in many places, and the observations between June and October,

1834, were evidently taken by an inexperienced hand. The single

line marked Socotra is from the register kept by Captain Haines

while engaged in the survey of the island. As the hours chosen by

him were not those of the maximum and minimum, I thought it best

to confine myself to the noon readings as a mean of the day. The

Calcutta columns are taken from my own registers, published in this

Journal. The Tirhdt diary was kept at my request by my cousin, the

late Mr. Tuomas Dasuwoop, Judge at Mozafferpur, who kept it up

unremittedly for three years and a half, indeed until a very few days

before his sudden and lamented death*. One year of this series has

already been published at length in the 2nd and 3rd volumes of the

Journal. For the Cawnpore register Iam beholden to Colonel G. Pot-

Lock, C. B. of the artillery. This series is unfortunately intermit-

tent, from his having been obliged to send his barometer to Calcutta,

in December, 1834 : which, however, furnished an opportunity of com-

paring it with my own standard. A little to the right of the Cawn-

pore line for 1834, are entered the observations of Mr. RitcHikz at

Bancoora, for April and May, also abruptly terminated by his falling an

untimely victim to the climate.

The last series to the right I owe to Captain Rosinson of the

Nipul Residency ; it was made partly with his own and partly with

Mr. Hongson’s instrument, which will account for the shifting of the

index point in June, 1834. In March also two adjustments were

attempted by boiling the tube. These do not affect the utility of the

from the number of periods during the day they embrace, but these

will be alluded to hereafter in summing up the figured abstracts.

I was disappointed of getting any observations from the western

hills, (the seat of the grand trigonometrical operations still going

forward in those parts,) until after the plate had been long finished

and the whole edition struck off, when Mr. H. S. Bounperson of

Moradabad kindly transmitted me a file of observations taken by his

brother, Mr. S. M. Bou.person, at Simla, between May and Novem-

ber, 1834. Rather than lose the valuable additional evidence which

this register, at a position elevated about 7000 feet, and situated 400

miles to the west of Katmandhu, would afford, 1 have caused it to be

* An apoplectic fit terminated his life of exemplary public service and pri-

vate worth, at the very moment of his quitting employment, and retiring home

to devote his latter days to the education of his family in England.

1836.] Abstract of Meteorological Tables. 819

inserted, under the Bancoora column, heading the index line 23.50,

to correspond with the average range of the barometer at Simla*

and have reprinted the plate.

The first feature in the table that attracts attention is an almost per-

fect parallelism in the march of the barometer at Calcutta, Bancoora,

Mozafferpur, Cawnpore, Nipal and Simla—places situated many hun-

dred miles asunder from 224° to 28° north latitude, and 80° to 88° east

longitude, with altogether differently prevailing winds and climates,

and opposite geographical features. The same parallelism continues

even as far south as Madras, but the excursions are there much sub-

dued in every respect, and occasional deviations are observable, which

seldom or never occur in the three Gangetic lines, except from such a

local hurricane as that experienced in the immediate neighbourhood

of Calcutta on the 3rd August, 1834. Between Bombay and Calcutta,

little conformity of detail can be perceived, though the general direc-

tion is symmetrical. There is, however, considerable accordance

between Bombay and Madras, the former having from its higher

latitude a wider range of oscillation, both annual and intermediate.

The direction of the wind (at least of the lower stratum) alone

seems quite insufficient to account for the barometrical variations, al-

though it is generally true that the mercury rises with the prevalence

of northerly, and falls with that of southerly winds, as might be expected

from the different specific gravity of a warmer or colder atmospheric

column. ‘That the moon also has no regular influence appreciable on

the scale of my table, must be, I think, also granted; for as many

instances occur of a falling as of a rising barometer at the changes of

lunar phases. The course of the thermometer, on the contrary, seems

to have a decided connection with that of the barometer. This is

exemplified in the comparative uniformity of the Madras line, and the

increased curvature at other places. For convenience of division I

assumed the tenth of aninch, as representing 10 Fahrenheit degrees of

temperature. Had I taken double that amount, the general thermome-

* Having the former copy of the plate at hand, I have distributed it detached

along with the other, hoping it may attract notice and procure me a fuller

collection for some future year.

I have been also favored with a daily barometrical series for 1836 at Bangalore,

by Dr. Movar, but 1 have reason to think that the instrument used was sluggish

in its movements. I trust, however, for the ensuing year, the labours of this zeal-

ous observer will be made available by the possession of better instruments, I

have further many other broken series from Assam, Kyouk Phyoo, Candy, &c.

but they are generally wanting in the barometer. A short series was also kept

for me by Lieutenant Monrrion, I. N. at the head of the bay in January and

February, 1833.

5 0 2

820 Abstract of Meteorological Tables. [Dec.

tric curve for the year would have been nearly symmetrical with that

of the barometer, except during the rainy season.

It should be remarked, that the daily undulations of temperature for

Caleutia and Tirhit, are the extremes indicated by a register thermo-

meter exposed to night radiation and noonday sun: those for Madras

are only the variations of morning and afternoon heat in the shaded

air. They both, however, but the former more distinctly, shew to the

eye the influence of clouds and rain in diminishing the diurnal ex-

cursion ; and in this respect a direct accordance is also observable in

the reduced diurnal motion of the barometer; as I long since pointed

out to be the case in regard to the Benares tables published in the

Asiatic Researches, vol. XV.

Another material point to be noticed in the plate is the gale of the

8rd of August, when the Calcutta barometer dropt down to 28.8 inches

passing (on the plate) through the Tirhitcolumn, which is only partially

affected. There is in all the lines a decided fall at the same period, but

only of an ordinary extent, apparently unconnected with the disturbing

cause of the Calcutta storm. Any who have witnessed the gathering of

a north-wester during the calm serenity of a sultry evening, and have

watched the turbulence of the clouds'’and commixture of upper cur-

rents prior to the sudden and furious generation of the whirlwind

below, will be prepared to consider the hurricanes and gales of longer

duration as equally insulated in their origin, only upon a much larger

scale of operation. A sudden condensation of aqueous, or perhaps of

gaseous matter, whether by electricity or simple cold, would, by draw-

ing upwards toward the vacuous space, the under air, cause a fall in

the barometer as certainly as if there were an absolute removal of

superincumbent weight, for which there would be no mode of account-

ing; and this upward current could not take effect without the pro-

duction of a horizontal current of corresponding degree and velocity.

The last poit of instruction to be gained from the present plate,—

and it is a very important one,—is the reliance that may be placed on

the measurement of barometrical altitudes taken by comparing the

observed height at places so distant as Cawnpore, or in the mountain-

ous regions of the Himdlayas with the register of a stationary in-

strument at Caleutia. 1 confess] always had misgivings on the com-

parability izter se of such distant readings, until as it were my hand

refuted the doubts of my mind. The engraving shews that a dozen

contemporaneous observations (that is, observations not made at the

same instant, but at the same relative hour), would be ample for fixing

the altitude of a place within moderate limits. Moreover, it shews that

no reference of an observed height to a fixed unit (as 30 inches), as-

1836.] Abstract of Meteorological Tables. 821

sumed as the barometric zero at the level of the sea, can possibly be

trusted: hence the advantage of maintaining a constant register at

one or several fixed spots; nay, it may be almost regarded as a public

desideratum, where, as in India, the Government has so much to learn

of the physical geography of its vast territories.

Want of space has prevented my including in the plate the thermo-

metric columns for 1838; but the temperature does not require such

minute discussion as the pressure, for obvious reasons. The hygro-

metrical phenomena also are rather unsuitable to graphic illustration.

The monthly averages to which we must now pass will, itis hoped, be

sufficiently comprehensive in these departments to cause no regret at

the unavoidable suppression of the daily registers.

Beginning, then, with the Bombay and Socotra series we have the

following

Abstract of Bombay Observations for part of 1834, by Mr. Hunperson:

Jor 1835, by Mr. S. Frazer.

Barometer uncorrected. Thermometer.

10 A. M. Noon. 3 P.M, 10 A. M. Noon. 3 P.M.

1834.

January, . 30.06 30.03 29.98 76.5 (thee) 79.2

February, . 30.03 30.00 29.95 77-2 78.7 80.0

March, .. 30.01 29.97 29.93 79.5 85.5 $2.0

Barometer reduced to 32°,

1835.

January, .| 29.974 29.939 29.889 -. Sunday Obs. carent.

February, . .898 -907 -BE3 -. ditto.

March, .. .875 837 ,788 ‘, from 12th to 16th carent.

RDEIL, «0p 510 -890 -851 e790 16 to20 ~~ ditto.

May, .... 779 -752 1736 |2,3, 8 to10_ ditto.

SEONG at 's,< .662 -639 612

SEMA «tbe; a,3 .610 605 .579

August, .. .6€8 -663 -630

September -730 +727 -626

October,.. 623 -786 -729 ,

Macemhes, “985 941 “900 } 30th Oct. to 3rd Nov. carent

December, .980 -957 -902 from the 25th carent.

Means, .. 29.824 29.800 29.753

Mr. Norton, fancying I was only in want of the barometrical se-

ries, has omitted to send that of the thermometer or of the weather

in general. His own observations for many years on the climate of

Bombay are, however, published, and will supply the deficiency when

we come to take a general review.

Abstract of Observations taken on the coast of Socotra, on board the

H. C. 8. Palinurus, H. B. Hainss, Commander, in 1834.

Month. | Barometer at 32°. Thermometer, Wind. Weather.

8 A.M. Noon. |8 P.M.|8 A.M.|Noon.}]8 P.M.

January, .|29.429/29.416/29.414] 76.7} 80.7] 79.4| ENE. cloudy, 7 days rain.

February,.| .405] .396] .395! 77.2} 80.5) 78.5| ENE. hazy and squalls.

March, .. 2393) .377| .370} 75.5] 81.0] 80.9| NE. calms—clear,

June, ....| .093] .087] .077/ 86.9] 91.5} 90.0] SW. hard gales.

July, ....1 .089} .082] .082{ 84.0] 87.0] 66.2] SW. hard gales.

The last two months’ journal contains also the readings at 4 A. M. sunrise, 3 P. M,

and sunset ; but necessarily on board a ship in heavy weather, the diurnal oscillations

cannot fairly be estimated.

822 Abstract of Meteorological Tables.

[Dec.

We may now pursue the same course with Mr. Dasuwoon’s tables

for Tirhit, from December, 1838, (prior to which they have already been

inserted,) first only reducing the barometric altitudes to 32°. Mr. Dasu-

woop, following my recommendation of tapping the tube before reading

off, has, as I expected, made the daily oscillation considerably greater than

in his first register. Thus also my new standard barometer is found to

oscillate fulla fifth more than the old, so that the real external change

of pressure during the day is hitherto only approximately known, and

may perhaps be nearer 14 than 1-tenth of an inch.

Monthly Abstract of Meteorological Observations, kept daily at Mozafferpir

in Tirhit, from the 1st December, 1833, to the 31st May, 1836, by the

late Tuomas Dasuwoop, Esq. C. 8S.

Barometer Winds |'s

Month. reduced Thermometer Number |* Weather.

to 32°, indoors. outside. of days. =

: =)

93 a M[i4 P M|93.4 M/|43 P M|Max.|Min.|W.E. N.S. Sg

inch. | inch.

1633. fo) (0) fe) (a)

December, .. |29.662]29.570| 62.0| 64.1] 70.1] 54.8} 18 13 0 0| 8ifogs and showery.

1834,

January, ..|29.670/29.572 58.0] 61.0] 68.5] 48.5} 20 10 1 0} Olclear, cold,

February, ../29.620}29.53]| 64.6) 69.2) 75.5) 56.4) 14 121 1) 1)fair, changing.

March, . 129.550129.439| 72.6] 76.4} 85.4] 63.7} 16 14 1 0} 2)}W.inday,E.at night,

April, ....-. |29.470129.367| 77.4| 78.6] 91.2) 69.4); 11 18 10 ojdo. 4 northwesters.

May, ...... 99.281]29.195| 84.2] 85.5/108.6|] 75.3} O 31 0 Oj 3\windstrongat night,

June, ...... /29.204|29.133} 83.7] 85.4] 95.4] 76.8) 1 29 0 0/14/Cloudy and squally.

July, .....- |29.252/29.167| 84.0} 85.6} 92.3} 77.7 0 30 0 Oj}15/earthquake on 11th.

August, .... /29.280}29.194| 83.8} 85.4] 90.3] 77-9/ 7 21 2 «|12\changeable.

September, |29.373]29.264) 83.5; 81.7/ 89.8) 78.0 3 20 0 Ol10/fair, earthquake.

October,.... |29.525]29.450] 79.5] 81.0) 85.2) 74.0) 9 9 0 0/10/gale on 4th, wet,fine.

November,.. |29.722/29.62}| 71-5] 74.0] 73.8] 57-7| 23 5 2 0/ Ojfine, clear.

December, .. |29.762/29.660| 65.1] 67.8/ 70.7] 53.6] 21 10 0 0) 3;hazy, fogs in morn.

1835.

January,.... |29.775/29-687| 59-5] 63.1) 65.5, 44.5) 22 9 0 0; Ijdo. clear days.

February, .. |29.761/29.672| 65.0) 69.6) 72.8 52.8 12 15 0 1} 4/4 squalls, fine.

March, ..../29.675/29.601) 71.5 76.5| 83.0, 57.7 25 40 0} 2\cloudy, fair.

AN tis sonido 29.659/29.528| 78.4| 80.2] 93.9 66.6} 14 16 0 0} 4)frequent squalls.

May, joss or 29.472,29.365| 82.4! 83.7; 95.3) 74.1} 5 26 0 0) 4/several storms.

June, ...--. 99.377/29.306| 83.0} 84.6] 93.9) 74.1] 9 29 0 1)10\very heavy haill4th.

Sully, oe. aces 29.331/29.268| 81.9] 82.5] 68.8} 73.9] 10 17 1 0/21\constant rain.

August, .... |29.399/29.310) 82.8} 84.1) 88.2) 73.1 12 17 1 0/14/3 storms, fair.

September,.. |29.494/29.380} 81.5} 83.6] 86.8) 71.3 3 25 1 0} 6/6 northwesters, fair.

October, .. ..|29.605/29.518} 78.1) 80.4) 82.0) 64.8 18 11 2 Oj ijlight winds, fair.

November,.. |29.829/29-741] 67-8] 71.7} 72.4) 53.6) 16 5 1 0/ Ojclear, 1 fog.

December, .. |29,772/29.671| 61.0) 64.6) 68.4) 47.0 13 18 0 0} Q\heavy fogs, 1 squall.

1836.

January,. -.|29.775/29.678} 56.8) 60.6) 65.1) 41.4 21 10 0 0} Ijnatural ice 3 nights.

February, .. |29.697/29.598| 61.8} 65.5) 72.2) 48.3 12 17 0 0) 6jchangeable, fair.

March, " 29.499|29.393| 73.6! 77.2] 86.5] 60.2} 7 14 2 0| Q/fair, 2 storms. —

April, .. +--+ 29.409/29.291| 78.9| 80.4] 94.4] 66.8} 11 15 0 0) 1/W. morn, E. night.

May, «+> «= 29.275/29.185} 83.3] 85.1] 97.8] 73.5) 3 22 0 0} 6iclear, squally.

76.0] 79.0] 87,0] 69.1)132 232 ? ?

Means, 1833./29.433/29.348

Means, 1834./29.475|29.383| 75.6| 77.6| 85.5| 67.4|!25 209 8 1/70! The depth of rain

Means, 1835-|29.595)29.503/ 76.1) 77.1) 82.6) 62.8 150 192 6 2/69!was not noted.

Mean of 3 ys.|/29-501|29.411] 75.9] 77-9} 85,4] 66.4

General mean, 29.456 76.9 75.9 2 W. 3 E.

The Tirh&it Barometer had not been compared with my standard.

1836.] Abstract of Meteorological Tables. 823

The Cawnpore table needs no particular remark. The daily notices

of the weather are very full, but unfortunately there is no possibility

of abbreviating them. I have attempted in some measure to meet

this difficulty, as in the Tirhit tables, by numbering the days of each

prevailing wind, and of rain. The predominance of easterly winds

strikes me as rather anomalous during the hot season; but I have wit-

nessed the same irregularity at Benares. The hot westerly wind is

purely a day breeze, and very rarely extends to the night, which is

generally calm, or has a light air in the opposite direction.

Abstract of a daily Register of the Weather at Cawnpore, kept by

Col. G. Potuock, C. B. during the years 1834 and 1835.

10 A.M. 4 P.M.

Thermo- Thermo-|___.

E meter.| <3 meter, |Wind, days. | ,

o —_————| ©. i

Month./ So | . Sa]. ag

Elica Ba | 2 =

loan) 3 5 rey 3 5 =|

Bae} ol] # Bal o}] 4 ‘Ss

al aid | a m | < |N ks S./W./¢4

1834. inches |

Jan,..,

Feb. .. |29.693] —| — — | —] —]|—| 6|—| § | 3 jonly 15 days observed.

March, (|29.50:|77.1| — — | —] —j 4 /12/—/14 | 1 |clear, one storm.

April, .. |29.403/80.0) — — | —| —|] 5 | 9/—/10 | 3 |terrific dust, storm 15th

May, .. /29.217/86.1] — |29.114/86.5| — | —/14) 115 |—|wind chgd.to W.at noon

June, .. |29.129}/36.5/90.4 |29.045/86.7/94.1| 2 |18/—/11 | 7 /do. frequent squalls.

July, .. |29.126/34.8/85.2 |29.053/85.8)87.0] 1 |25/—} 5 | 5 ja few light showers.

Aug. .. |29.180/34.3/54.6 |29.108/86.0/37.1] 4 |14) 1/12 |13 |wind variable, cloudy.

Sept.... |29.271/82,5/82.1 129.189/83.3/83.9/ 3 |20] 1} 6 |17 |much rain, cloudy.

Oct..... |29.469]77.5/77.2 |29.375/80.5/380.7|10 |14/—| 7 | 4|wind strong, 1 storm.

Noy.... |29.640/71.2/72.8 |29.570/76.3/77.7| 3 | 1] 1] 8 |— [13 days obs. clear.

Dec. . — |64.6/64.0| — |69.3/71.0/20 | 5) 1] 5 | 4 {clear ; rain at Xtmas.

1835.

Jan.... — [59.5/58.1}| — {67.7/69.5| 6 | 4|—| 2 |— |strong winds, cloudless.

Feb.. — |64.0)64.3| — /71.0/74.7| 8 | 6) 2/12 | 2]light clouds, 1 squall.

March, — {70.7|72.9| — |73.8|/81.4| 3 | 8! 3/17 | 3 |strong winds & squalls.

April, . — {|77.8)85.0| — |78.3/92.1! 6 |10; 6} 8 | 9 jdust storms, cloudless.

May, — /|82.0/93.0} — |81.8/100.0) 1/18] 3) 9 | 5 junusually hot.

June, .. |29.243|/S2.8/S7.4 (29.237/83.5|93.0) 2 |19/ 2) 7 |13|rains begun 16th.

July, .. }29.285/81.8|86.2 |29.267/83.3/58.2| 1 | 6) 7/17 |11 heavy clouds, rain light.

Aug. .. |29.432/82.4/87.6 |29.360/83.4|90.3/ 3 |13] 4/11 |14|much rain, cloudy.

Sept.... |29.543/81.0/95.5 |29.445/81.7/98.6] 9 {15} 1] 5 | 8 jcleared on the 25th.

Oct.....}| — |—]— =e eS SS See

29.656 29.573 Col. Pollock’s Barom.

Nov. { -922/69.7 -850/74.8 Dr. Dempster’s do.

-870 +75) Mr. Campbell’s do.

: -676 .87 Col. Pollock’s do.

Dec. 1 1955/64.6 -70 |70.0 Dr. Dempster’s do.

(9 dys.) -898 782 Mr. Campbell’s do.

The error of Colonel Pottock’s instrument when compared with

my standard in April, 1835, was only — .059. Itis difficult therefore

to account for its standing so much lower than Dr. DumpstEr’s, and

Mr. CampsE.u’s, unless some accident happened to it on its return to

Cawnpore.

The Bancoora series, being limited to two months, will not admit

of an abstract ; we may therefore pass to the Nipal tables.

824 Abstract of Meteorological Tables. [Dzc.

Abstract of Daily Barometrical Observations, made at Katmandhuin Nepdl, by Capt.

G. H. Ropinson.

e Mean height of Barometer reduced to 32° for the hours in >

<i g E o

eS -“ ‘S hm OD

5 A.M P.M = fsa

s 7 ag a i a | 1 s 12 lhe

In. ||) 2.) nin. | ian | in.

1833

- " mvj Here 25.126) .062).063

July, ..2-

“ -148].083).060 |

ca 064

July, ...-.|25.168].176 | .. |.162].144!.121

Aug....--.| -171].185 | -. |.168].159|.127

Sept. .....| .257|-270] .. 3.259] .. 1.206

088 |

Octess sale” eee ae. ig .310]-279

- |.074

- |-109

- jell

- |.086

Nov. .....| .413].440] .. |,.435].493].328

April, ...2."|) <2403|po.

May; esis | cd 051) os Se

VINE i ecicelonl OS eee oa

July, .....| *.142| .. |.149

Aug.......| *.233| .. |.240

EPC. cree lNtesL bose tes 2

Oct. cece *.084) .. |.407

INOW.) ferets oie abot eer oa e

Dec... etlye 457) oo 8498

: -395] -- +399].323|.074

eo |-292; » +30)).220!.071

oe ThenO'|. es o285'.1121.073

a0 | .149,.072|.074

_.787|.105],.078

+319}.217|.093

+392/.291].092

.539].428),098

-4931.376|.113

Abstract of Thermometrical Observations, made simultaneously with the above.

3 Thermometer inside the house. Thermometer outside.

s E

o |A.M P.M A. | ™M P M. ve

s! 7 Ci. 26 een Peete a pe 4 5] 6 3 7 ao 2 4 en

1833.

July, .| 75.2 . : 79.2 Aa eee - | 69.3 84. 9,517

Aug...| 73-9 76.7) . SG se 69.6 81.8 13,72

Sept. .| 73.4 77.1 > | GT. 78.5] . 3,822

1834, |

July, .| 74.6 |75.4| .. |76.8'77.4177.9| 78.3) 77.9|77.7177.2 177.0 a , «. (14,436

Aug...| 73.7 |74.5| -. |76.3]74.0]77.8| 78.0] 77.4176.7176.9 176.31 .. | .. 3 C 12,380

Sept. .| 73.3 |73.9| .. 176.3] .. |77.9| 78.3] 78.1177.3175.3 (77.6 : ; ‘ 11,292

Oct...| 66.2 66.2} .. |69.2}69.8/70.2] 70.7] 72.4/71°3]70.2 | .. 3% % 9,930

Nov. .| 60.0 {61.7| .. |63.1}63.0/66.1| .. | 65.0 65,2 : : 1,280

1835.

April,.| 64.1] .. | ., ae NOVEM 96 | Ouaml OSeoll <s Ace cou | 54.7

| 74.3) 71.8| 4,352

May, | 69.3 | v0 |ooWieu iyansl .. | 73.4) all... 12. We | eae

78.0] 77.1 | 4,207

PUNE i 7323: sion ee wo W503 .. |*76.91*96.41 .. | .. eI RGORS en 79.9|/*76.9 | 7,941

Suly, .\e7oes ToD MGT) S076 TOLal coe Nat -. (*73.4177.6! 79.5|*74.5 |14,677

Aug.. .|*73.0¢ 0. 74.9400. 975.21... |*76.51*76.0|.. |.» | .. |*69.017621 79.6/*74.9 (12,891

Sept. .|*71.4 ZS il wisia oil ARUN tue cel KOREN CO oie WL Se .. | 66.6/74.0 76.)| 74.0 | 4,416 |

Oct... |*64.0 GaSe isos MO WON ere MODs OxS vee illic *55.0/64.7 |" 71.1] 70.6 | 1.608

Nov. .|*55.4 5O.5 i's. HS8I4! .. INGOUS| G15 63 H 4. «- |*40,5/50.7 63.7] 60.8 | 0,063

Dec... |*50.6 50.8.) scsofS ABs. 15323) 54.5)... 1 2. «» |*34.5'41.9 54.4) 54.1 | 1,211

The items marked with an asterisk were taken half an hour later than the hour indicated at the

top of the column.

In July, August and September, 1833, the register notes only the minima and maxima temperatures,

but to save room I have supposed these to accord with the hours of 7 A.M. and 2 P. M.

1836.] Abstract of Meteorological Tables. 825

Of the two barometers registered at Katmandhu, that of the Resi-

dent has been preferred, for 1834. Capt. Ropinson’s tube for that

year stood a quarter of an inch lower, and was hardly sensible to the

diurnal oscillation. After boiling it in the month of September, however,

it rose to within .02 of H.’s, and exceeded the latter in oscillation by

-03. This and the circumstance of the hour of maximum 9 to 10 a. Mm.

being unfortunately omitted among the numerous periods of the day

selected for register, render not only the absolute amount of diurnal

motion still uncertain for Népd/, but also prevent our calculating

the annual average. I hope the series I am now promised by Dr. A.

Campse ut for 1837 will supply the want.

I reserve for a separate notice the calculated elevations connected

with the Nipdl series, as they are affected by the error alluded to in

the preceding remarks, of assuming 30 inches for the barometric

zero at the level of the sea.

The state of the wind in the valley has not been noted, but the fall

of rain is recorded with precision, the average amount being about

50 inches.

The series for Simla does not comprehend an entire year, and will

not therefore furnish averages. The temperature appears to be that

of the interior of the house.

Abstract of Meteorological Register kept at Simla, from the 15th May to

the 21st November, 1834. By S. M. Boutpsrson, Esq.

)

Barometer at 32°. 3 Thermometer.

Month. 10 A.M.{4 P.M. |10 P.M 4 10 aA. M.j4e.™M. | 10 P.M.

Wier siaiats sods <falee ot 23.816 «lie -802 |.033) 74.0 74.5 73.9

CDE etic GOD GIGEE OBE -784 723 -774 |.061) 70.8 70.6 69.2

UTIL -nalto QaIomCo Beis «794 -729 -784 |.065| 67.4 67.6 66.9

at a ae oe 827°) | 777 .803 |.050| 68.5 67.9 65.9

September, @.).....2- -908 832 -872 |.076) 67.2 66.0 65.4

KOCTQUED Biiis csciss <s 24.013 -942 978 |.071| 62.6 62.7 58.2

November, .:...... .092 O41 2078) [eOalll raged 57.5 54.1

The range at 73 A. M. is also given for the month of May, the mean of the baro-

meter being 23.798 ; which proves the regularity of the nocturnal tide in these

elevated regions.

I must, for want of time, leave to a future opportunity the further

analysis of the above tables, and the deduction of general average re-

sults from the Calcutta tables for the past five years. Meantime, I will

conclude with the insertion of a table of the temperature at Kandy in

Ceylon, obligingly contributed by Captain Orp, R. E., and a note on

the temperature of the Brahmaputra in Assam, compared with that of

the air at the same time by Dr. W. Grirrira.

5 P

826 Abstract of Meteorological Tables. [Dec.

Extract from a Meteorological Journal kept at Kandy, Island of Ceylon,

by Captain Orv, R. E.

(To complete the year 1834, broken off in the Extract published in Journal, No. 48,

December 1835, page 709.)

Date. Thermometric Range. Rain-guage.

1834 Monthly Greatest Range | Least Range Rain |Fallen in

. Range. in 24 hours. in 24 hours. fallen. |24 hours

steabee ls ten og gt celal be. 7 ener Blog oO Spi chair Sing

Max. Max. Max. Temp-|In the| Max.

Min. Min. Min. inches.| Min.

815 $1 “ 67 3 9. 0

Nov. 634 18 635 173 65 2 72 | 30.6] 9

84 763 x 683 3. 3

Dec. ee 27 ue 193 eg OR 70$ | 4.6] 5

N.B. Highest range in the shade during the year 1834, 68°, lowest 579, mean

temp. 73° 1.

Total quantity of rain fallen during the year, 96.7 inches.

Extract from the same Journal for the year 1835.

Date. Thermometric Range. Rain-guage.

1835 Monthly Greatest Range | Least Range Rain |Fallen in

i Range. in 24 hours. in 24 hours. fallen. |24 hours.

y ean) norte!

Max. Max. Max. Temp. |In the | Max.

Month. | and |Range.| and | Range.| and |Range. month and

Min. Min. Min. inches | Min.

: 79 L 783 72 : 0 7

Jan..... 585 204 59 195 675 43 70 | 8°65 0 !

5 84 78 :

Feb..... 60. 25 625 215 a 8 724 0°7 0

845 9 84 78 : 2 8

March, 585 26 625 21k 70 8 134 5:4 a

a 82 82 78 ; 2 3

April, .. 694 ! 163 665 | 155 70 8 74 6'2 0

May, --| 65 18h.) Ge | 16 oe 5 734 3 6

June, .. fee 143 en | 145 : 5 722 | 4°8 ; 8

83 81 75 ‘ 07

July, --| 64 19 64 | 17 70 5 724 27 0

x "

daig od fo BeBe iaigg op 20 16 Teed Ma 723 (| ers?

844 g45 | 5 7133 ; I Ss

Sept. .| g-5 193 | 66 185 60x | 4 72 TB big

82 82 70 : 6 @

Oils slip hil ges Hn Miah tgs | 17 nar ee 7b) [20-6 hes

85 83 76 : 1 2

Nov. .-] 54 31 . 54 29 69 7 72 6°8 0

Dees fe) oo {128 a a 22 ioe 9 Thi) eee ieee

N. B. nh range in the shade aOR the year 1835, 85°, lowest, 584°, mean

TEMP os. cect esc ese cc er cn ss rece ec eres ceecerereseseceecs Usois Reka 72°44

Mean of max. and min. for the 2 years, edlooneooobot Sher ietafersteners cate leitetd 72°125

Ditto of calculated mean temp. for ditto, .......... cece ee seencceee 72°77

(Too high, in consequence of employing the ‘hours of 8 instead of 10.)

Total quantity of rain fallen during the year, 76°2 inches.

i?)

LL L9 cL os | £28 {| $24 L9 £8 +8 £8 Ste | ¥c9 69 cL | $88

LE L9 LL 6L Z8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

sl 89 tL 28 ¥8 0 0 0 0 0 gel L9 GL cL OL

os | £9 94 | £68 | £98 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

os 4 $89 e, | ¥es 98 os | £69 cs 16 | £98 9L L9 tL oh | $c

0s 69 | ZeL as) 98 08 69 L8 16 | $98 OL L9 | $69 tL | $eh

08 69 | Sez | ¥e8 98 0s 69 $8 26 98 “Op J9A0 OL 19 Ta ch | $94

zou | 99 | $4h | oe | ¢8 og | 89 | 98 69 | ¢g (Sox USrs ‘anyoodunyimg Jo Tea] Sh 99 | $F cL el

“ 0 0 0 0 0 AL 89 +8 cg | ¥¢g [3007 JO anjoodumying ulesty} FL 99 | ¥9L GL Ll

& £94 89 | aL 94 | £44 || F92 89 64 | £08 8 94 49 | &tL gL | £92

i= sl 89 tL FL 0 6L 69 €38 og +8 *q 19A0 4SOHIIY} : Sozpetousy| Foy 299 Ik ck 9L

i= 0 0 0 0 0 0s 89 0s L8 £8 FoL L9 GL +L tL

mS Zig OL 6L 98 | £48 || ZI 69 26 +6 | £88 *aStd LL L9 oh |- $44 64

3S 0 0 0 0 0 is | 69 | zs | 26 | 2g |72qmueprsuog op 10A0 Boj 4ySIIS] FoL | 249 | OL | 9h | 9h

= 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

= 08 o£ | cz | Fee | $98 0s oL | $s8 | $16 Lg 94 89 GL gL Le

2 08 OL tL €8 €g 0s 69 98 +8 98 Op J9AO SOJ [eIMMIH| Shp 99 | os | $94 gL

S 8s | 69 9L | #18 | €8 6L 69 | +s | 06 | $68 $cb Lo | Sh | $94 AL

3s 0 0 0 0 0 eL | 89 | 28 | 98 | €8 “Bure OATY) gf, 89 | $2L LL | $94

= gs | #69 | #4 | 18 | 08 |] 64 | 69 | Fos | {98 | o8 "op 19A0 sHoy yeuivd| LL | 89 | eh | 94 | 94

e 0 0 0 0 0 6L 89 | Fe 98 gg | ‘Anjoodumnyang 19A0 SSoj FUSS] LL L9 ray 9L LL

3 08 69 th €8 £8 08 69 98 | $l8 Sg 94 L9 tL tL tL

~ 08 89 +L | £8 0 Fog 49 ys | $88 L8 “yoy OMY UASTI InjooduNYyng) £o4 +9 rad tL 9L

Ss "Atqusepyswoa | $4e s¢9 | #69 | og | 29 uw. | co | €t2 | 98 | #9 | ‘Op 4aa0 sBoy Terjaed paw ysis] ge, | Feg | 89 tL | ¥L

S Busta “A tear} gf | 99 | FOL | 94 | 9b of. |. 99 | Beh 194 | Se4 0 0 0 0 0

Ss LL | €99 ol cs cg || $44 | 299 28 £6 zg |anjoodumying 1900 sSoy [erjed) ¢/ +9 69 gt 92

s LL | 99 | o£ | #te | ¢s |i $42 | c9 | 94 | 98 | ¥e8 cy) +9 | $69 Lh | Lb

F 94 99 L9 18 ras) Gt 99 | ELL ss €8 $eL €9 | ¥89 GL cL

@ AAO SOx WYSIT | ¥oy, #9 eL | ¥o4 | ¥94 g | 9 | SL gL | ¥oL 0 0 0 0 0

6L 99 ts | #28 €8 LL +9 oor | cot} ges 0 0 0 0 0

Ss. .Om sor. or = ° ° Coa | 26 “gX1pes| .. O fe) O| 5

o> gf 2 3 a & # & gz 2 4 & ¢ es a a ae ieee: oat onl a Pere 2 @ 4 if

= “= C= a ta a = ~ oe Be ul teme es Here i] |-nu [jeuis Be si aapunyy oy re Be) “8B Te a

A) Se Sb) A) & | Sel Sal wR] 8 ; ei} Bes Bl B

5 oie wesie,e fo Sh Secale) bee | an . B Tel 5B] 6

' 1 f) ‘ ’ }.. SS 1 ' e ' ly 1 = =

"19IV AA *I1V *10}@ MA “ITV “1978 M SANE

x ao vO

1836.]

*HLIMdIUL) “Wy “AQ Ag “wossp utp

“sue OY} Av9T yey} pue JNO 9d08zSIP

Bq dy} WOIZ DdULISIP SUIOS THe}

QUIS 4e sINjeraduI04 943 WO9M}0q pUNoJ aq 03 st ‘I9AdMOy ‘aduaI0pIp Aue AJooIVOg ‘*spreA OF JnOge je mjoodumying 94} jo syu

1B SISALI Yj0q Jo Sainjesodmay oy, “1ojVM OY} UL pasrouIUET A[IZeU SEM JUOTINAYSUT ay} f YORE Saaidap % JO Sayeos Uy peyenpeas

hapog yo apy ay7 fo pun up ayy fo aanjosaduay,

‘JoJBWOWASYT, & YPM WIHT,

*9E8I ‘Aaquiajdag | WNVTHORAD

828 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Dzc.

XIV.—Postscript to the Memoir on the Depression of the Wet-bulb

Thermometer, published in the July number. By Jas. Prinsep, Sec. &c.

I have only found leisure to repeat the experiments forming the

final section of my former paper, on one more of the simple gases,

namely oxygen; of which the specific heat, calculated from the data

thus supplied, has not been found to differ materially from that of

common atmospherical air. It follows necessarily, that azote must

have the same specific heat, since the mixture of the two causes no

alteration in the observed depression. The experiments were con-

ducted in the same order as before, except that the glass exit tube

was somewhat narrower, and the dry thermometer was fixed in it half

an inch below the wetted bulb. Some trials, with common air, were

first made to ascertain whether this arrangement produced any material

difference of result.

Depressions with Oxygen gas.

Bar. t i d kh Max. dep. Tabular

0 ° a for hyg.q max. dep.

Sept. 21 Commonair, 29.65 92.0 55.0 36.8 6? 39.0 37.2

Oct. 2 Ditto, 29.78 83.8 51.6 32.4 0 32.4 32.7

4 Ditto, 29.75 89.5 54.3 Sone 0 35,2 35,7

11 Oxygen, 29.81 82.0 51.4 30.6 2 31.2 31.8

' 21 Ditto, 30.00 sie. «Ol: 2 5S. 4 eee Oe 28.3 31.4

Nov. 3 Ditto, 29:90: 82S 52.1" “30.7 (0 30.7 32.1

5 Ditto, 29.88 83.4 §2.2 31.2 0 31.2 32.5

In the first experiment it is evident, that the hair hygrometer had

not reached its full contraction for the actual siccity of the air enclos-

ed in the gasometer. The trifling inferiority in the depressions for

oxygen, I am inclined to attribute to the more sparing hand with

which it was expended :—the difference of four per cent. is certainly

larger than ought to be conceded to experimental error, but I feel

sure that a more careful and longer series would have brought out a

nearer approach to the depressions observed in common air.

XV.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Wednesday Evening, the 4th January, 1837.

The Honorable Sir Epwarp Ryan, President, in the chair.

Messrs. W. Dent and M. Mawnux, proposed at the last meeting, were

ballotted for, and duly elected Members of the Society.

Captain Epwarp Sanpers was proposed by Major Tayronr, seconded

by Mr. W. H. Macnacuren.

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 829

Mr. Joun CurNIN was proposed by the Secretary, seconded by Mr.

BagsHaw.

Captain F. Jenkins, proposed by the Secretary, seconded by Sir E.

Ryan.

Mr. Greoree Hity, proposed by Dr. Pearson, seconded by the Secre-

tary.

Mr. Ricuarp WaLkER, proposed by Mr. Bex, seconded by the Pre-

sident.

Babus Ra’mna’tH Tagore and Prasannakuma’R Tagore, proposed

by Babu Rusomoey Dutt, seconded by the Secretary.

Mr. P. A. Lair was proposed a corresponding member by Mr. James

Prinsep ; the nomination was referred to the Committee of Papers.

The meeting then proceeded to the annual election of office-bearers,

when the following gentlemen were elected.

Vice-Presidents.

Sir Jonn P. Grant, Sir B. H. Maxxin, the Rev. Dr. Mint, W. H.

Macnacuten, Esq., H. T. Prinsep, Esq.

Committee of Papers.

J. R. Corvin, Esq., C. E. Trevetyan, Esq., Capt. Pemperton, Capt.

Forses, D. Hare, Esq., J. T. Pearson, Esq., Dr. Wauuicn, Capt. Cun.

NINGHAM, Ramcomut Sen.

The Secretary read minutes from the Report of the Committee of pa-

pers on the Honorable Mr. Turnour’s proposed publication of the Mahd. .

vansi.

Minute by Dr. Miu.

In presenting to the world both the text and the translation of these extensive

historical works—and in thus rescuing them from what is in many respects worse

than total oblivion, the confusion and misapprehension of their real testimony

which a former very erroneous publication on the subject in England was

calculated to produce,—Mr. Turnovur would have conferred a very great bene-

fit on the historical literature of the East, had his merits even stopped at this

point, and had he not further shewn by his comments, how admirably qualified

he is to illustrate the work he edites, and enable every reader to profit by its

contents. The literary benefit is very far from being confined to the single

subject of Ceylon: it extends to the whole of India: and yields in importance

to nothing that has yet been produced on that most perplexed and generally

unproductive subject, the history of India prior to the thousandth year of our

era.

How these documents bear on the general history of the country, will be very

evident to any one who follows the able editor in his preliminary remarks, as

well as in the specimen he has already given us of the first book of his series, the

Mahdwansi. It is enough to remark, that the peculiarly interesting connexion

between the history of Ceylon before the Christian era, with that of Magadha,

or that part of Northern India which we now call Behar, is attested by the

830 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Dre.

very language* in which all these books are written: and that it originates

with what is undoubtedly the most striking and important moral phenomena in

the history of Eastern Asia, the rise of Buddhism from the centre of that great

Gangetic kingdom. And it is observable, that the same dynasty of sovereigns

of that large district, reigning at Pataliputra, or Palibothra, the present Patna,

—from the midst of whom Gautama Bupp#ua arose nearly six centuries before

our Lord,—presents us not two centuries afterwards, in the age of ALEXANDER

and SANDRACOTTUS with the one solitary point in which the history of India

* The Pali in which these historical books are written, and which is the language

of Buddhist literature and religion, as wellin Siam, Ava, Nipdl, and Tibet, as in

Ceylon,—is in fact no other, as Mr. TURNOUR shews, and the text of his originals

exhibits to every Sanscrit scholar, than the Magadha Pracrit,—the classical form in

ancient Behar, of that very peculiar modification of Sanscrit speech which enters as

Jargely into the drama of the Hindus (though in a different way) as did the Doric

dialect into the Attic tragedy in ancient Greece. Now, all the variations of Sanscrit

words that occur in these Pracrit dialects, answer closely to the forms which the

same words exhibit in the vernacular Hindui of that province, and the yet more

northern districts of India, as far as the Himalaya: {e. g. the omission of the 7,

the changing of bh to h, &c. &c.) and are totally unlike the forms of the same words

even in the province of Bengal, or as infused into the languages of the Southern

peninsula, and of Ceylon itself. And whenever corresponding words in the Pdlt and

Singhalese occur, as they do every where, I believe it will be invariably found that

the latter, (the vernacular words of the people of the Kandian and maritime provinces

of Ceylon,) resemble most closely the Sanscrit original of both :—whereas the former,

the sacred language, takes in all words that admit of it, the same sort of peculiar

variation which belongs to the tongues of northernmost India,—shewing evidently

that it was thence, and not from Ceylon, that the peculiar language as well as insti-

tutions of Buddhism came to the island,—as the Mahdvansi itself distinctly asserts.

To take but one out of the many instances that might be alleged, we may give one

of the most remarkable and early names of the island, viz Tamba-pannyo, as the

Péli name is given in p. 35 of this specimen of the Mahdvansi, viz. the ‘‘ copper-

palmed ;’’ in Sanscrit Tamra-pdni. Now this Sanscrit form, so different from

the Pali, is actually the present Singhalese for the same thing, as I was assured by a

competent scholar on the island: and a very convincing proof that it has ever been

s0, may be seen in the name by which the island was universally known to the an-

cients and to Cosmas Indicopleustes when he visited it, viz. tampoBavy. The

Greeks would be just as unlikely to introduce this r where it did not exist, as any

other languages of India beside the northernmost ones would be to drop it where

it before existed: but this is a universal character of the Pracrit and of the present

Hindui, (as seen in this word, ¢amba, copper—kdm ‘‘ work”’ for karm, &c. &c. &c.)

This real origin of the celebrated name Taprobane (whatever may be thought of

the story connected with it in the Mahdvansi, and which may seem with greater

probability to have arisen from the tamra-varna, or copper colour, of its southern

cliffs near Matura, so well known to navigators)—is one ofthe points of curious and

interesting information which we owe mainly to this publication of Mr. TURNOUR.

Whatever had been before suggested as the probable origin of that name, so

little now known except in these Buddhistic books, as one of the proper names of

the great island of Lanca or Singhala-dwipa, was in the highest degree forced and

improbable, (ex. gr. the Hindvi Tépé-Raban, or the island of Ravana.)

1836. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 83

coincides with that of Western Asia and Europe, from which in every other point

(before the Mahometan conquest) it is so remarkably and totally separate.

The great value of these works, as containing correct chronological history, is

well established from this unerring test by Mr. Turnour. And he most

ably vindicates the Buddhist authors of Ceylon at least, from the general censure

passed on them by Professor Horace WiLson,—in reviewing the Tibet docu-

ments of M. Csoma Kériési1,—of being, if possible, more regardless of chro-

nology than even the Brahmans. The degree of accuracy, indeed, with which, in

the midst of this long series of kings, the age of CHANDRA-GuPTA Maurya is

marked,—even admitting an error of sixty years from his proper age, as a con-

temporary of ALEXANDER and SELEUCUS,—1is yet most wonderful, when com-

pared with the only other chronological Indian history yet produced—the his-

tory of Cashmir, called the Raja Tarangint, (which we owe to the eminently

learned orientalist just named,) whose lists would go te antedate that celebrated

king by nearly twelve centuries.—On all these points, Mr. TuRNouR’s observa-

tions are very valuable: and even when they may fail to produce conviction (as

in some parts of the dissertation inserted in the Journal As. Soc. of September

last), the learning and candour with which he prosecutes the inquiry, and the

absence of all undue prepossession in favor of those authors with whom he is

necessarily most conversant, ever entitle them to the utmost consideration.

It would be undervaluing these works to suppose them to be merely a dry

chronological catalogue of sovereigns and dynasties: though this is frequently

all that an inquirer into ancient India is able to meet with ; where, between fable

on the one hand, and the strong national tendency to abstract speculation on the

other, the literature of the country has so little to aid a historical student. These

works apparently contain much that may well be deemed valuable by a philoso-

phical inquirer into history: and the details, in particular, of the contest be-

tween the antagonist principles of Brahmanism and Buddhism, are often curiously

illustrative of the genius of these two systems, which have held, and still hold,

such sway over large portions of mankind.

W. H. Mitt.

Minute by the Secretary.

Fully subscribing to the eulogy recorded by our Vice-President on Mr. Tur-

Nour’s labours, which all who have read his specimen-volume and prelimi.

nary treatise will acknowledge to be most just and well deserved, I have merely

to notice, that the typographical execution of his Pali text in Roman character

has been examined by a competent native scholar residing in Calcutta, and

found to contain but a trifling list of errors, and those chiefly of the accented

letters. There are blanks in the manuscript which it might be possible to re-

store by collation with the copies of the Mahdévansi in the Burmese character,

easily procurable at Ava. I have sent the specimen to Colonel H. Burney,

who will, doubtless, be happy to contribute his collateral aid to this meritori-

ous undertaking.

An opportunity has lately fallen in my way of verifying a portion not of the

great Pali History, but of its Singhalese continuation translated in Mr. Tur-

nour’s Tabular Epitome of Ceylon Dynasties. Captain Orv having lately

832 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Dac.

called my attention to the form of a letter* on one of the ancient coins of

Dambadinna hitherto but imperfectly decyphered, at the moment when I was

transcribing a Delhé inscription of the eleventh century ; the form of other

letters struck me as very similar to that type, and hence, on re-examining all

the coins I possessed, and the drawings of others sent me by Captain Orp, I was

forthwith enabled to recognise the names of no less than six kings, all occurring

in Mr. TuRNovR’s list within the two centuries immediately subsequent to the

Sholian conquestf, and thus forming a chronological link with one of the

dynasties of Southern India, which has been but very imperfectly lifted from ob-

scurity by the researches of Colonel MacKENzIz and otners in India proper.

J. PRINSEP.

The Society concurring entirely in the Committee’s view of the value of

Mr. Turnour’s intended publication, particularly in regard to the light

it throws on the early history of India, it was resolved to advocate its

patronage by the Government of India, to the fullest extent that it may

have been usual for Government to subscribe to private enterprizes of

similar importance in India itself.

Library.

The following books were presented.

Catalogue of 7385 Stars, chiefly in the southern hemisphere, by Mr. W.

Ricuarpson—presented by the Lords of the Admiralty.

Memoires de l’Academie Royale de Caen, 1825—1829.

Annuaire du Calvados for 1833-34-35, 3 vols.

Essai sur les Combustions Humaines, par Pierre-Aimé Lair, 1 vol. (3 copies)

and various tracts, essays, notices, by Mr. Lair and other Members—ypresented

by the Royal Society of Caen.

Memoires sur La Conformité Organique dans L’Echelle Animale par Ant.

Duges—presented by Mons. J. C. Viliaire, Surgeon of the French Corvette Aube.

Warp on the Hindus, 2 vols. (purchased.)

Extract of a letter from Dr. Watne to Captain Crawrurp (recently

arrived from Egypt) was read, expressing a desire to place the Literary

and Antiquarian Society at Cutro, instituted by himself, in correspondence

with the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

The Secretary stated that he had opened the desired intercourse by addressing

to Dr. WALNE copies of the Arabic works printed by the Society, and of the

Ethiopian inscriptions printed in the Journal, in hopes of their being decyphered.

Museum.

A variety of specimens of Native ornaments were presented by Babu

Herampana'to THa’Kur.

* The first letter of the 3rd line in the coin fig. 22 of Pl. L., in vol. iv. which was

read tr, but ought to be A, being joined on the left and open on the right.

+ Sri Vijaya Vahu 1071, Sri Pardékrama Vahu 1153, Sri r4ja Lilavat{ 1197, Sri

Krithi Nikanga 1187, Sri mat Sah4sa Malla 1200, and Sri Lokéswara 1210.

} 1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 833

Physical.

Extracts of letters from Lieutenant G. Funtsames and Captain A.

Burnes were read, announcing the dispatch of further fossils from Perim,

in the gulph of Cambay.

Mr. H. Watters presented a very large fragment of a fossil tree from

Birbhim, upon which there appeared a cut as of a hatchet, made before

the wood was petrified, (?)

A letter was read from M. Jutes Dessarpins, dated Maurice 29th Sep-

tember, 1836, forwarding meteorological observations made from April to

August inclusive, and promising to continue the series if acceptable.

A note from Dr. SprusBury explained that the large fossil acetabulum

of the elephant, presented at a former meeting, was not found at Segounz,

(whence the femur of 1834 was extracted,) but from the hill close to

Jabalpur, which Captain SteEman first brought to notice. The positions,

therefore, of these large fragments were 60 miles asunder.

Another fragment on a still more gigantic scale, the lower end of the

humerus, was now presented: and Dr. S. announces three more large

fossils on their way to Calcutta, from two spots visited by Major OusExey.

The skeleton of the Sumatran Orang-otang which lately died in Cal-

cutta (wanting the hands and feet) was presented by Mr. R. W. Friru.

A large ostraceous shell was presented by the Rev. M. Hitt.

The Secretary read his Report on the past year’s proceedings, of which

the following is the substance.

The number of new Members added to the list in 1836 had been

Pbraimaryy MeEMDErs, scicacs on sviwieee seleedd weeioenegeedacce sence Om

PERM CNMIENDCLES (i niu (si cise oleinvniwin aia cles cas coreelhe sole c oe cleo nek ae oe

RUM MRARM MCTIDOL s wias cuiciole se Gcisisleds de oak one cect eee eR

The loss by death, 2; by departure to Europe, 1; and withdrawal,

Pa MUNI ALL aie ciaiinra sotalol ain ol"hie di'eysia eos 'oeMara le & caielter. « horaetnie, be tay NG

The financial operations of the year were as follows:

Payments.

Receipts.

To house establishment and contin- By balance of past seam account,

gencies, from December, 1835, to Sa. Rs. 38015 2 ~} 406 56

October, 1836, a 2969 11 5 By quarterly coatuittone. and Bees

To salary of the Curator, and muse- sion fees realised, - 6551 99

um contingent, from eee By 3rd Dividend on the Estate of

1835, to 30th November, 1836, ---- 2591 14 0 Mackintosh and Co., 382 137

To copies of the Journal supplied to By Government for extablienmicnt

the Members to 3lst December, -- 1088 00 retained by the Society for keeping

To Sheriff and Co.’s bill for repairs, -- 311 11 8 in custody the Oriental books

To matting the hall and eh of the transferred from the College of

museum with ratan, : -» 155 36 Fort William, from April to No-

To mew eis oxen tables, 533 11 4 vember, 1836, at 78 per month, -- 624 00

*-\ 187 96 | By Interest on Government Securi-

To Orphan Press bill for printing Ist ties deposited with the Government

part, 20th vol., scininn2 athens Agent, 2 ; - 2093 04

enc’: Sc . - ; fa 1871 13 4

o lithogra an prin ing P ates 0 ; :

Physical Eolas xix. -- 524 12 9 | By balancein deficit, = 193 11 4

To freight to Madras, &c. cine 7 fre) (att

Total,-- 10,251 86 Total,:-10,251 86

Outstanding Bills due.

For the XIXth vol. lst patls with au- iy

thors’ extra copies, : -- 1646 88 Contributions due.

For Journal supplied to Members, -» 1284 00 | 3rd Quarterly Subs. to Sept. ++ 1705 15

Seeeteimuent, Caxton, &c. 2 months, 1150 00 | 4th Ditto —— to Dec, . ++ 1280 00

834 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. {Dec.

Oriental Publications.

Payments Recei

: uments, ecemnts.

ae pate several pale for printing By cash balance of last be s+ 118 102

woe nt an Z a ic, . -- 6900 86 | By amount realised from public sub-

ca ae im and Maulavis for correct- Scriptions to the Alarngiri, -- 5786 10 8

To witee and cashier * 150 0 3 Py gusate Hoesen a Or ee

9 : of fo) a 7 .

oe : opens’ Ber removes College By sale of ioe on ue el 3 ;

ibrary, and sundries, -- 181061 By di ‘ati 5 i i

To purchase of four book cases from By eeulchnean oe yhtrnge tithing’

the Education Committee, 59 11 8 allowed by Government for March,

To cash realised by sale of Inaya, i

transferred to Ramdhan Sen, ee EAA: ij ee re mae

his engaging to complete the work, 300 a a o

Tofreight to Europe, packing, &c., 192 1

To postage, cooly hire, &c. «- §655

To balance in hand, - «+ 2174

Co.’s Rs. 10,012 0 1

78 00

Co.’s Rs. 10,012 01

Subscriptions to be realised for works

delivered, say, o -- 1000 00

Outstanding Bills due to the end of

836 - so gee -- 22049 11

‘‘The publications by the Society and under its auspices have been this year

unprecedentedly numerous. Of the Researches, two half volumes have been com-

pleted, one literary and one physical: the latter containing no less than 21

plates. Thirty, indeed, have been engraved, but nine are necessarily kept back,

from the text being yet unfinished. It is my duty to bring to the notice of

Members in what manner I have been enabled to publish so many finished plates,

engraved in a style much superior to those of former volumes, without entailing

an expense much beyond that of the paper on which they are printed.

‘The lithographs of the snakes and some of the botanical plates were kindly drawn

by Dr. Cantor; the remainder of the latter by the artists of Dr. WaLticn’s

establishment: one or two have also been executed by myself: but by far the

greater portion, including nine mezzotinto and six line engravings, have been

executed on holidays and at early leisure hours, by Ka’sina’ru, the chief die en-

graver of the Mint, who most liberally refuses to accept any remuneration for_

them, considering himself under some little obligation to the Society and to myself

for having brought his talents to notice. I trust the Society will testify in an

appropriate manner their acknowledgment of such a disinterested and noble act.

“« Besides these works, the Society has witnessed in the course of the past year,

the completion of the Fatawa Alamgiri, the second volume of the Mahdbhfrata,

(of which the third volume is also far advanced,) the Raja Tarangini, the Susraé-

ta, the Naishadha, and the Anis ul Musharrahin, leaving only the remainder of

the Mababharata and a few pages of the Khazanat ul Ilm, to be accomplished, of

all the works transferred from the Committee of Public Instruction*.

‘Collaterally the Society has taken under its auspices the publication of the

Cochin-Chinese Dictionary, of the Alif Leila, and of an Anglo-Burmese Diction-

ary of which the manuscript ordered to be printed under the patronage of

Government, has been placed in my hands by Mr. Lane its compiler, on his

departure for England; meantime our representative in England, Professor

Witson,.is engaged in passing the Moorcrort journals through the press at the

risk and credit of the Society.

‘“‘Tn this sketch I do not allude to the journal and the appendices published

therewith, although it must be well known to all that this work owes its princi-

pal and most valuable contributions to its acknowledged connection with the

Society.

‘In reference to the expectation held out in last year’s report, the Government

* The Inaya has been transferred to the Editor, Babu RA*MDHAN SEN, under

agreement that he should complete it.

a ee

1836.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 835

has, in the course of the present year, transferred to the Society the two branches

of the Oriental Library of Fort William, manuscripts and printed works, and

has liberally granted a monthly allowance for their preservation. Further dona-

tions of a valuable nature have been made by the French Government; the

Lords of the Admiralty, the Commissioners of Parliamentary Records, (through

the Government,) and by Dr. Lumava and other private individuals, in addition

to the customary tribute from the learned Societies of Europe and America.

‘‘ The Museum has continued to increase rapidly ; but its means of doing justice

to objects presented has been limited for want of funds. The fossils particular-

ly require more cabinets and more space. Captain CunNINGHAM’s present of

Sarnath sculptures forms the chief object of notice in the antiquarian museum.

Depredations to an unfortunate extent have been lately made by some of the ser-

vants of the house, in articles ornamented in silver and gold; which the Libra-

rian partly attributes to the opening of the rooms at so early an hour. Inquiry is

now pending at the police, and measures must be devised for better securing our

increasing property.

‘« Some propositions have to be submitted for the publication of further oriental

works—but the first to which I would beg the Society’s attention are the cata-

logues of the College manuscripts which have been prepared for the purpose by

the Pandit and Maulavi in their respective languages. To the former of these I

would recommend that Mr. Hopason’s revised catalogue of Buddhist works ex-

tant in Nipal/ should be added. :

‘‘ There are in the Society’s portfolios a considerable number of original draw-

ings and inscriptions, (besides several bound MS. volumes of the Mackenzin -

drawings) which it would be extremely desirable to publish at the present time,

when an effort seems to be simultaneously making in India and in Europe

to read the history of ancient India through the medium of her monumental

records. The Ceylon portion would serve to illustrate the great work upon

which Mr. Turnovr is engaged; while those of the peninsula would form an

appropriate appendix to the review of the Mackenzie MSS. at Madras, which

the Society has récommended to be undertaken by Mr. Taytor. Were a single

competent native draughtsman added to the Government Lithographic Esta-

blishment, this object might be attained at a comparatively trifling cost: and I

think it would be worthy the Committee of Papers to suggest some measure of

the sort to the present Ruler of India, who has accepted, not as an idle honor,

the high post of Patron to our Society.

‘The last act of the past year has been the establishment of a Committee for

statistical inquiries, of the success of which it is yet too early to speak, but not

too early to augur well from the known zeal of those who have undertaken the

Herculean task.”

An application signed by all the students of the Sanscrit College, for

the Society to print the Magh kévya (of which the edition published by

Mr. ConeBrooKEe some years ago is now extinct) was referred to the

Committee of Papers.

The same measure was taken regarding an application from Mapuu-

su’pana Gupta pandit, in favor of printing the Sanscrit translation of

Hooprr’s Vade Mecum, suspended by the Education Committee.

Fifty copies of the Susrita (2 vols.) were voted to Mapuusu’pana for

his trouble in correcting the proofs of that work.

XV1.—Meteorological Register.

836

eee

“payenpers Apj0a1109 A19A 44 you YUaUINAIsUT Mou e ST JajautoisAy Iey oY, *paarste sours sey Ajddns ysoiy y “quiod map ay} Jo uoTZAresqo ay} papuadsns

HIUOUL a4} FO BsOT 94} SpleMO} ad UvOTIOWY ay} JO oANTILy ay *ATaatjoedsex yo0]0,0 F pue OT IV HC) Pue geo UeEq sey “JUOW SIy} siojOWLOLRG MOU PUL P[O oY} JO aoUaLayIp oy,

*ploo you 4nq reayo ‘N 9]jued ab £'0G LOT) BSI 1°S2|686‘6a| 186‘6a 6¢ O0s|E*L J9*L \e*69/860° |o90‘0E)}‘ueayy

“Azey sn[nwMnd0.1110| -mu “NI If og | ‘89 oferlz't1z'es|ree lean’ 9g cy ft ‘8 0°6 19°6 \E‘c9\8F0* leo‘ 1€

"L119 op "MU “MUL 08 |0°Eh | oF ce | 69 6°€1 €°€/|666‘62|F°6 63} 9¢ | £9 OS | ‘8L\8'°sslE°9 168 \9‘cOlPRIS lego‘ 0g

op _op “aU ‘N 6 \G°IS | FP LE % "OL GITIPELIG'EL/SL0* lge0. | 9¢ og | ‘BZ L°8 |L°6 |869/e1ss ipa‘ 66

op op “N “N Ges | 8P gb | ‘el 0‘01\6°T1)9°S2Z/090* Ior1ofog} 19 | 29 09 |} ‘18/B*PSI1*Z |e*Z |669|cors lrerS 82

op op ‘u ‘MU 0'86 |0°6S $ 6F | 8b ar | “bLicfzein‘oro'tt|s‘tZ\9F6° lace’ | eg | 9c 09 |} ‘ogie*ecie’Z |6°L \6°69/9F0* logy’ 96

op - op Prag SINT ae sit I'16 |0°0S | 8h | 6P GP} SeLig*eei LOL |PZT/S'S2Z|8F6° {oGBs | 19 | 99 G9 | ‘T8/¢*92)0°2 1669 |T69|9FOF Jeo! GS

op op ‘u “UL OOIL \S*@S | 6b | OF Ly | ¥Lloscela‘orle trie eZi9e6* |o 28° 99 | ze G9 | “FBio1s|e"9 |9°9 |LOLI9F0. |rzoo. | Se

op op ‘ou *N O86 |S°EG | so | bp Zo | ‘9Lio‘1¢/Fo1|P11/8°S2|096* le06. } 99 | e¢ £9 | ‘F8)6°T9|8'9 |8°9 |ZOLIcF0* eqns GS

op op ‘N ‘O'N O‘90T JOSS F Po | Lp OS | ‘LLic'6o'9'G [901|L6cL\1b6* legs | 19 | e¢ 09 | ‘T8ic‘esip'd |L‘Z |P*1Z}190* |z70% 16

“18919 op ‘ou * MAN G96 |OEG f ao | IF GP | 9Le 6h 0 1T/9TT\E'9L|926* 698° } 99 | 9¢ OL } ‘F8/0feS|9% |1°¢ |e69\8F0* {170° 0G

“nuns op ‘uo “MN BBOT |O'%S J 9g | Lb OS | ‘82 aecie’s \€OT6bZ\6e6* {806° | 99 | ¢9 co | ‘PelePSiZ‘S I8°9 |6°Z9/860" Jggn‘ 61

op op “Mu ‘N 8°96 |S'Zb | 8b | 6F Gh | ‘el 0% OBT/RELIOFG. 188° | FS | so Of | °L2)6°8F/6°8 146 |9°L9|\Zg0° azo‘ 81

op op “MU *N 0°28 |O'0S | Sh | ap GE | ‘IL gL l6sroetarliore® {Ze8° | 99 | 19 £9 | ‘Pajofesie®9 je‘9 le‘Z9\Le0° lepo' LT

“1ea[o op “ALLL “MUL $°G6 1089 | P| Ip OS | ‘2 0°8F/8G |9°01\6°E2Z'F96* [906° | OL | 09 £9 | ‘9B/¢°ES/1°9 |e'9 |6°89|F90S | 720° 91

*1ynumMe op ‘uU *u 0.06 j0'FS | ae GP *9L} OT OLTBEL/E26° F165 } g9 | ge 09 } *28ig'sciT<Z |9°Z 10691840" geo‘ cl

op op ‘N “Mu 0°96 |0°6S | Zo | cb Bh | ‘92 coe Lor ofetle'hZ|Z6L° Je1Gs | 19 | 19 go | ‘1Ricecl LZ I1°8 |S°89/9/0* logy’ | FI

op *xea[o ‘MU *N G08 |6I9 | oF | SF OF | ‘el 0GrE TI |Z°SliE‘FZ|896' |9¢6° | Zc | Fo Go | “6L\0%0S/28 12°8 lE's9|egn* legos £1

op op “a “u 0°88 16S | gp | ep GE FEL OPT TOE 1/eFZ|000' jcr6* | Zo | gc ES Py GL OESIE'B J5°8 |L69|O0TS legos IL

op op ‘ud u G16 |G:95 | gp | oF 6E | EL OfIS TTT /9EI\1°SZ|ZE0" J9L6. | go | ec £9 fy C8\C'OS|F'9 |2Z°9 \SOLIFELS | 1606 O1

*1ea[9 op ‘eu ‘u GcG |6to | ep | SF SP | PL LGb/Z°OT/8°11/0°9Z/0F0S | 1866R} g9 | oF £9 fo‘SR/Of0E|9°9 |o°9 \eOZ|9FLS |eor’ 6

‘auy. op “u “u OTOL OFS | ze | FP Gb | OLE OSE OTE ITO FLIZ¢0° 1005 | OL | 6¢ 69 fp‘9R|BFSI0'9 |a°S |OOZIOOT® oat’ 8

op op N ‘u 0°66 ce | 08) EL|O'FI\G‘SL|F90S 1900508 8¢ LO Ho‘lglesla°9 |1°9 |L°0Z|POIS lear‘ 9

op op ‘N ‘N 0°6¢ 0g GP | IBS FS LTT OSIILSL\chOs | 166‘ 69 fo‘ne £9 18%¢ |669/2zT* legns ¢

“ITnwns op GrHegND ey NI 0901 8& Le | €8'8 OF SOLIS TIGSL|F26, {906° oP 09 forceie'Zrlan j6°Z \e*1Z|8°0° |ze0* £

*1%9]9 op "N “N OF6 |o°FS OF OF {0°18 F BPILSTT|O‘ST\S°9Z|/866° {226° $P OF fotrals*Zhl9‘6 1856 |O°@L|P60S zpos G

od = iso} Q Q <270) | - o £ ae = soto (= 3) 2 a

a 3 en PE g fegtssiccssie/s [felsalsgis | wais ols s/ Fa? a128| & jeclec cles P32] =

= = Bae B | & [s/s c/Es8 zie le elbeleB) eo) Baleslecl Solle ly |ESIPSIE ROS isa l &

a 8 2, S Pee | goa Meese) gl Se) aS 4-8[8r| 2 SESE] wzlee S| S

B Sa i 2S of Tloeir5| 9 *2) gat Es ri oy eee a al id ee

*SeUlOI] XY *AVIpruin Ay *AIplumy °

"Idea AA “pulmM Ja}oWIOULIOY,L pezx[noape9 ‘Wd F 38 suolyeAIasqO pey[noaep “WV QT 38 suonvaiesqo =.

1aqsInoy

“9ERT “Haquaseg Jo yjuopy ay] Lof ‘nyynajng ‘eoviQ hvssp ay) 70 jdey ‘wagsthaay qoorhojo.10aja pr :

re lS SE sn Su nS SrENEENnSnore_ umes

™

INDEX.

ABDALLAHS, Story of the two,...

Abors and Mishmis, Pe tae

Address, the Rev. J. Wilson’s, to

the Bombay Society, .........

Adi Buddha,...... nets

—- Prajna, or Dharma, oe

—- Sangha, ......

Aiswarika System, ....

Ajanta, description of Caves at,..

ALEXANDER, Senet on

march of, ......

- place of his passing the

Indus, .....

Alexandria ad Caucasum, conjec-

tures On, ....

-Alif Leila, complete manuscript

of, to be published,

Alphabet of Ahom and Khamti,..

Anahid, distinguished from Na-

SPE OM Ee oiciecavcisie's susie, siete! ereic ele

Antimony, Ores of, at Moulmein, 2

Antiquities of Bamidn, ......

- described, by Bombay

Society,

Arabian Nights’ Entertainments,

Arabic Nautical Instruments, ...

Work on Navigation,

Ardokro Coin, imitations of, ...

Armenian Church, Sketch of, 136,

Armenia, Hindu Colony in, ...

Armenian Era, origin of, ......

Arts of Nepal, .

Asiatic Society, "Proceedings of, 52,

124, 189, 245, 302, 371, 433,

509, 587, 672, 753, :

Asirgarh, seal found at, SE AUER

Asoka, period of his reign,

Assam, Fossil Shells of, ........

-, mountain tribes of,

AvpDALL, J. memoir of Nierses by,

note on Nanaia,......

on Hindu pone.

Armenia, ...... “a

on Memcuian ‘Era, . aenets

Bactrian Coins, new varieties, 11,

20, 537, 548,

BAKER, (Lieut.) « on n Dédapur fos-

sils,

ee etece

ee ee co

eteeeee ee eeee

eoeoewteos

ee ee ee seae

ee ee re

ee eee

—=

on the Fossil Rhinoceros,

on Fossil Carnivora,....

on Fossil Sus,

on Fossil Quadrumana, .,

ee ee 88 ete

Page

590

195

304

557

Page

255

390

188

Balloon, ascent of, at Calcutta, ..

Bamiana, extensive ruins near, ..

-, inscription at, .........

-, antiquities of, ........

Bangalore, climate of, .........

Ry error of new stand-

ard, SBeipere seeieveiow sharsicisus 6 Lad:

-; horary observations

51, 243, 298, 299,

moon’s

metered: ceate 300

=p ner of

«declination on, ..

-, compar: Hove range in

various places,

Barrow, H. aa observations

BID Yisaretcire snottatedere a OL

Basaltic tract near “Nagpur, aie ors

Basilosaurus, a new Fossil, .....

Bauddha i ae cal classified ob-

jects of, . Saye ine Bic .

Beghram, on ancient coins 5 of,. ce ae!

, Tope and City of, . 5

BENSON, W. H. on Silhet Fans

RGIS ee ee

on a Siihet! niavia.

tile arclly, ae Biuyels

, on Nematura,.. ;

, on Pterocyclos, .....

xe cece

Bhitari Lath, inscription on, ....

, description of, ..

Bhopal, copper-plate grant from,

Bhotian Banner ERED trans-

lation of, . aichbns

Buianp, W. on a Trincomali i inserip-

tiON'S;*. << «

on "geological " speci-

on Pterocyclos, ......

BuunvDELL, E. A. on Tenasserim

Statess. ae we sean tee Oils

Bombay Asiatic Society, anni-

versary address to the,........

Books, Chinese list of, ........

Boring for Water, report on, ...

Botanical discoveries in “Ea

Botany of Silhet,.........

Brahmanism older than “Bude

dhism, 42

Bridge, Suspension, at Tribourg,..

Brown tow, C. on fresh water in

the Ocean,......

proposition "repard-

ing Alif Leila, ....

838

Indez.

Page

Buddhas, pert enumeration

Of react fe Pica 2

- Buddhism, quotations from: San-

scrit authors on, .... 28,

Buddhist’ images discovered at

Tagoung, ....... Sento

Burmese Chronicles, extracts ‘from,

— Books, catalogue of, .

Burney, Col. on Tagoung images,

Burier, (Dr.) on preparation of

opium, .....

CAMPBELL, Dr.

sented by, ;

== notes

ae models ‘pre-

on Nepal

arts by,. ;

Cashmir, notice of Vigne's s travels

in, .. Maiele ce U's

-y " Hugel’s vet £05 20 LSA,

Catalogue of Colvin fossils, ....

Caut ey, P. T.on the Sivathe-

Mi, BS Gakuin

———— Mastodon

teeth and head, . 294,

Cavelly Venkata, proposition by,

Census of the town of Gaya,

Cervus Duvaucellii, .........+..

Ceylonese inscriptions, ....

CHANDRA-GUPTA, his epoch fixed,

CuEsneEy, Col., on Se ex-

PCGITIONN. 2 wstee ma Sree aioe e's

Cherotherium, a new ancl Genus,

Chinese Books, catalogue of,

Chronology, Buddhist, ae aanedis :

Cochin Chinese, Dictionary of, 374,

Coins, 2nd memoir on Beghram,

-, Grecian series of Bactria,

, of Nysean Kings, .....«..

-, Indo-Scythic........ 27,

Sassanian,;’<. cs e0 sce cles

of Ardokro reverse, .. 58,

3rd memoir

5 : Bcobloo as Gane wp

-, new Bactren sa ose tOLOe

, new Mithraic,...i..ss6s

——-, Gupta, Hindu series, ....

(See also note in errata.)

Corvin, Lieut.-Col., Fossils pre-

sented (bys) jesse deheleiielo%c dGls

Columba, new species of,...

Compass, division of Arabic, ..

-, used by Maldives,......

Conotty, A. on Sambhur salt,..

Concan, geology of,...........

Conversazioné at Govt. House, ..

Copper, its action onink,......

Cotton, soil suitable to, .......

Cottons, catalogue of Nepalese,

Cotton of Nepal, quality of,.

Court, M. on Alexander’s mane.

on Province of Tah

“y en

aes

. 321

157

163

247

157

165

Page

Csoma pE Kiéris, A. on Bhotian

banner ii... 20% oe eee

————— translation by,

Cunningham, A. on Ardokro coin,

———— , on Bhitari Lath,

——,on Sarnéth Sculp-

TIULES, Giese <\Sele nae

Dawe, Mr., Fossils presented ak

Demetr, a Hindu Idol, a BE

Diamond District of Cute 0

Duranp, Lt. on Daddpur fossils,

on Barometer, ....+.

—-— on Fossil Rhinoceros,..

on Fossil Carnivora, ..

on Fossil Sus, ......

on Fossil Quadrumana,

Dyeing, art of, in Nep4l,........

Elephant’s Tooth, carved, ......

Elk, Gigantic, of Himalayas,..

Era, Armenian, .....

Euphrates Expedition, ‘Report on,

Eurinorynchus ee Speci-

THEM gerelel stale

EVEREST, ey. R. on bey Seon

, on Lunar Influence, .

Fabconer, H. on Fossil Sivathe-

PIV, sic ce vc cles vi cict cl eneenohaerets

on Hippopotamus, ..

Forty, Capt. W. Geology of

Moulmein, stelle oinieoisiie | ='°

on the Huns, ....

Forges, Capt. J. on the Buddhas,

Fossil Genera in Dadaépur Collec-

ELON, (ee tejers wivinsolaie-are

Shells on Minnow reine cointe

—— of Nirmul,

—- Wood of New South Wales:

——~. Shells of Silhet, ....s.....

of Pulo Léda,......

Fossil bones, Sivatherium, ....

Hippopotamus,

— Cheerotherium, ..

= Wiastodgomismist cielels

—— Rhinoceros,......

Felis, ...sccc0cre

——_——— Gulo, ........000-

——————- Canis Vulpes,....

Genus Sus, ......

—— Quadrumana,.....

—— Mastodon, ......

—_—_—_ from the Cape of

Good Hope, ........

Jumna,....

eoeesere

Fossils presented to As. Society,

58, 179, 191,

——- found at Perim, 288, 373,

438, a0 s ojshelaialotele

Freezing Point, "raised in great

altitudes, ....

eoee tee ee ores oe

—— Nerbada, 674,

. 264

384

303

588

184

337

291

301

486

579

661

739

219

248

184

384

675

127

281

585

269

813

321

291

108

121

127

519

573

127

294

486

579

581

582

661

739

768

518

589

828

373, 589, 674, 828

828

187

Index.

Page

Fribourg, Bridge at, ...0..5.. 0.

Gautama, the fourth Buddha, ...

Geological et a from Sheka-

THUG ola SoIgruen 3

Geology of Ava, specimens jot

- of Malay Straits,

Brot VEOULMEIN, . > s/deecne

PROMGhErStratts, |<. .cteeces

- of the Northern Concan,

- of Hyderabad and Nag-

TDLIT s/o cciche BORUOnDEecnet -o9,

Gold Mines of Jompole, ..

Grasses of Silhet Jhils,.........

GrirritH, W. on Assam Botanical

Collection, ........0+00%.

on Naat dallection:

——— on Pollen.. kere feo

— on Silhet Grdsses, ie

Hammer, Purcstauu, Baron,

translation of Mohit by,.. 437,

Hannay, Capt., extract from

Journal of,

Hartuorne, V., on Gaya ‘inscrip-

FLOISSs | ais0ct

HEtrFer, Dr. J. H. on Wiccum Silk,

Hindu Colony in Armenia, ......

History, Chinese, extract on,....

, Sena Dynasty of Vaka-

iba: Biers acres |:

of Rajas of Tagoung, . sao

Hopeson, B. H. on Falconide, .

Synopsis of Mammals,

on Nepal Ornithology,

on Wild Goat,........

on Zoological Nomen-

RSLASIRE sa eyeiaye' sieh vlatelene iiskons.9).s a ie/e

description of Columba,

— Sketch of Buddhism, 28,

on, Urrsitaxus; ....5. 2%

———— 00 new Insessores,.« . nt

—-—— on Charadriade,......

on Falconide,........

ON WYUNXINGE, »...c0 8s

on Certhiade,........

— on Hirundinide,......

Hotsprings of Cuddapah, .......

Hueet, Baron, visit to Cashmir

by,.. .. 184,

————— note on Perim Fos-

Huns, ona remnant of, Eaters neers

ee eeee oe se ee oe ee

318

328

Hurcuinson, Major, Report on -

roof of St. Peter’s Church,....

Hygrometry, experiments in, 396,

Ink, action of Copper on,.. ...

Iskardo, inscriptions found at, 56,

Inscriptions, Tibetan, from Ts.

WALD? a.0."sectess ¢ OY

from Wara i in Con-

58,

can, oo Ce CF eee ee eee eee 6s

839

Page

Inscriptions at Bamfdn, ........ 188

— from Damatha Cave,

Moulmein, .......

from ees (58,347,

on Tib. Standard, 248,

on Bhitari Lith, 303,

, ancient facsimiles of,

, Burmese, from Moul-

TNEUNorsecieetee wo ete terol

from Chunar,..

from Barahat,

from Ajanta caves, 348,

from Piplidnagar, ..

on Tibetan Scarfs, .. 383

from Asirgarh, ..... 482

on Peshawar image, 484

from Trincomali, .. 554

from Buddha Gaya,.. 657

in Society’s Mus. 724, 731

from Seoni,........ 726

on Goa gun, 795

from Cuttack, - 795

Jacquet, E.on Vallabhi Dynasty, 687

JACQUEMONT, V., Journal of,... 190

Jeldlébad, seat of Nysean Kings, 20

; arate: of ruins

near, = 25

JERVIS, Capt. T., "Facsimile ‘of in-

scription in Conchn bys ete

Johéle, account of, in Malacca, ..

Kadphises, variations of the name,

Kakusanda, the first Buddha, ....

Kangtes of Assam, ........ 197,

Karmika System, i

Kashmir, see Cashmir.

Kasyapa, the third romage eee

Keisaney, a Hindu idol,

Kemaon, Tridents in,.... 485

Konagamma, the second Buddha, 325

Labong, Richardson’s visit to,... 618

Lambton’s Tomb, Geology near, 120

Léth at Allahabad, motion re-

specting,...... sees

Library, Fort William, ‘transferred

to Asiatic Society, ...... 125,

, Oriental, transferred, ...

Lumava, Dr., books presented

pele Dr. on : Peril Fossils, is

Mackenzie Papers, Report on, ...

Macnacuten, W. H. on the Alif

Leila manuscript,........ eo.. 990

Madras, Quarterly Journal of, :. 439

Maitri, the expected Buddha, .... 330

Malacca, States in the interior of, 61

——_—_ , Johole, 257

——, description of,

, account of the, ...

——, Policy and Com-

MLLER CON OLa cs ccient siecilble cvdstae

280

485

264

349

340

—

341

731

347

556

377

341,

=——

393

257

553

322

199

. 327

338

518

190

372

246

mgt |

512

626

840

Page

Matcoimson, Dr. on Geology of

Hyderabad, . abo ih cusitsvewed pula,

Manuscripts, Burmese, in Dama-

thay Cavieraniseie siacieys are seca yponehinie aeaa

Masson, C. on Bactrian Coins,.. 1

on Bdmian inscriptions, 188

on Bactrian Coins, 436, 537

on Bémian antiquities, 707

Mastodon, narrow-toothed, ,..... 294

Masop, brief account of, ....... 639

McCreLianp, Dr. discovery of

Fossil Shells in Kasia hills by, 519

McCosu, Dr. J. on Assam Moun-

CAIN TUIDESS depatcudes civic) seteusteusei eee

McLeop, D. M. on Seoni inscrip-

(HOS Ae Sane

Medal, for paper « on in Physics, agi

MEKHARA MeEnG, letter from,..

Meteorology, Horary observa-

tions, .... 51, 243, 298, 299, 300

Meteorological Tables for Cal-

cutta, 60, 128, 192, 256, 320,

376, 440, 518, 600, 684, 760, 836

for Bangalore, ...... 296

726

371

433

abstract of Bombay, .. 821

== SO COMA Ss Kel ctievetaleve-s,ecene 821

ee EMINININTE So ot ap doma noe 822

— Cawnpore, .......-.. 823

Katmandu, ...e..0-d6 824

Simla, ......... Bee 825

Kandy in Ceylon, oo e (826

Gohati in Assam, .. . 827

Mitt, Rev. W. H. on Chunar in-

scription, .... eet clatera mae

on thes Alif Leila, 597

Maris Of ASSaM, Jole clekoeiovc/ses/sicirinur let

126

Models of Nepalese arts, .......

Mohit, extracts from, translated, 441

Mouun LAL, on FaridShakarganj, 635

— on Uch-Sharif, 796

Moon, influence of, on rain,..... 285

-, influence of, on Barometer, 585

Monrriov, Lieut. specimens Bie

sented by,......- 59

Moorcrort, Mr., Papers cary ies

late,....se0.- bei, coee Dae SO

Movat, Dr. A., " Meteorological

observations by, soe . 296, 298

Moulmein, Geology of, . aes - 269

Muamarias or Mattuks of Assam, 206

Muar, a Malacca State, ........ 561

Museum, discussionregarding,..,, 245

———-—,, Report on,..........

Nagarjuna, period of, ..........

Nagas of Assam,...+...-...... 207

Nanaia, temple of, in Armenia,.. 267

Natural History,Columba, sp. nov. 122

, Falconide, Nov. Sp... 227

— , Synopsis of, Nepalese

Mam malsjeiscfo. sale wlan e vitvieklen cone

Inder.

Page

Natural History CervusDuvaucelii, 240

Canis Vulpes Montana, 313

(See ornithology, Shells, &c.)

, presentations of

objects in,.. 59, 191, 304, 374, 438

, wild goat of Nepal, ee 204

NezwsoLp, Lt. on Malacca States,

61, 257, 505, 561, . 626

Biaecaaes SoeSice es Menare of, 130

Nepal, report on products of, .. 365

Nomenclature, on Zoological, 751

Opium, preparation of, 165

Oriental Publications, Fr ench sup-

port of, 754

Ornithology, new Meruline Birds, 358

—————, new Meropide, .... 360

—————,, new Strigide, ..... - 363

Parliamentary Records presented, 673

Parsis, notice respecting the,.... 396

Pasewa, fluid of Opium,.. sins. 168

Pearson, J. T. on Canus Vulpes, 313

Perim, Fossils bones from,...... 766

Peshawar, image found near,.... 484

Peshdwar, geography of, 468, 475

Pérak, a Malacca State,........ 505

Philosophy, Bauddha system of, 29

PippinecTon, H. on Basilosaurus, 254

—— on Cotton Soil,.. 314

Piracy, mode of putting down, .. 634

Pollen, development of,. WAY

Political Relations with Malacca, 626

Population of Mathusa, 216

PRINSEP, JAS. on new Standard

Barometer, .... .

— on Fort Church roof,.

on Damatha cave in-

scription, 2 . 280

action of Coppero on 1 Ink, 317

on Ancient Inscrip-

tions, 340, 482, 554, 657, 724,

on Wet-bulb Thermo-

meter depressions,...... 396,

——— on measurement of

Arabic Quadrant, .. .........-

on new Bactrian

Going cote ca Lae .548,

— on Statue of Silenus, .. 568

on new Mithraic Coins, 639

on Hindu Coins,...... 644

on Vallabhi dynasty,.. 685

on Arabic instruments, 784

on Sdmar Salt, 798

— on Barometric range in

various places, ....

[And all editorial matter. ci

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society,

see As. Soc.

Pulo Tingie, Geology of,........ 575

Rain, on periodical return of, ... 281

RapH, G. on Ajanta Caves, 348, 507

eo ek ee se ee ee ee ee ee oe

ee ee seve

244

208

795

828

448

720

ae seeeee

816

Index.

Page

Remusar, A. doctrineof Triad, 32, 37

Report on the Alif Leila,........ 589

on Euphrates Expedition, 675

on Mackenzie Records, .. 512

on the Mahavanso, .... 829

of Scand of Arts on Wool,

&e. 365

Rice, Nepal, quality nee «ouctaahtada 366

Ricnarpson D. journey to the

Kayens and Shans, . 605, 688

Roof of St. Peter’s Church, 208

Rumbéwe, account of,.......... 61

Sakya Sinha, lineage of, ........ 31

Salt of Sambhur lake, .......

Sanscrit attributes of Adi Buddhs, 91

Sarnath, Statues discovered at, 588

Satlaj River, soundings in the, .. 814

Seal of Johdéle Panghula,........ 263

Seasons, revolution of the, . Souesen!

Silenus, Indian statue of,. ee 567

Silhet, Fossil Shells of,. 519

—-—— recent shells aeaenived., 741

Silk of Assam, note on, ........ 759

Singphos of Assam, Howe! ae 199

Sivatherium, a new Fossil rumi-

nant, 38

Shells, ents aad Fresh-water, ‘of

Silhet, apie . 350, 741

new y genus of Mollusca, ei

Pterocyclos,.-

Sremindnti, a Malacca State, ....

Soil, suitable for cotton, &c.,

Sracy, Col. L. R. on Grecian

Sculpture,..... Bele dion

Statistics of Mathura 0 or ’ Muttra, 216

STEPHENSON on Sambhur salt,.. 798

Sugar, soil suited to, ........... 316

Snakes, notice of new,.......... 439

Swabhavika Doctrine,.......... 71

Table of Annual Rain-fall,...... 286

841

Page

Table of Dédtpur Fossils, ...... 293

-of Wet-bulb Thermometer, 430

Tagoung, images discovered at,.. 126

Taytor’s, Major, report on the

Boring in Fort William, ...... 374

Taxila, on province Ohi sec ucstar encicne tA:

Tenasserim, journey into, .. aie 688

Tea, soil suited to, ....... 314

Tibetan Standard, inseription ‘on, 248

Sacred Scarf, ..- 373, 384

, Soil suited foe Re rone

Trade of Assam with China, .... 203

TRAILL,Mr., Facsimiles of inscrip-

HONS ih eddane caoe 58

Tribes, Hindu, notice respecting, 308

TURNOUR, Hiotoraile G. on Bud-

dhist Chronology,.........-+.

, on Mahawanso,.. 570, 829

Uch-Sharif, notice of, .......... 796

Upham’s work on Buddhism,.... 35

52]

Ursistaxus, note regarding,...... 671

Vallabhi eta Chinese note

Ons. 6s 687

Vigne, Mr. Travels i in UO venmair,: 56

Wane, C. M. soundings of Satlaj, 814

Water, fresh, found at Sea,...... 219

Weaving pr actised in Nepal, . 219

Weights of Malacca, ...... 268

Wet-bulb Thermometer, Research-

es on the, ..... 396,

Wixxkinson, L. translation of ne

scription by,...

Witson, (Rev. John), ‘address to

Bombay Society by,.. ...- 304

Wool, Nepalese quality of,...... 368

WROvGHTON, W. R. table of the

Statistics of Muttra, by ..

Yatnika system, .... c

Yusafzais, tribes of fhe, Ware letelieve

828

377

216

wae vie knee

481

“oe al Py wee we

er i!

yn a Ag /

5 i *

ed AS hat

sev, Boy ate fi i

ae Re

<= ReaD ww ‘wae ry eae

Lepage ta Wj vette aw Wee hen

Geter ees weet Sib es 0%, abt Uli

ae Fi ofa Hi bomsibote rey 2 j i

+ Naas ree se hese se gi ..

as ts

at ae

aoe 5

——_

S oe

jpap ie 7

poet By

h ooh aietie @og

ooh de Beveirde'

WY 45k a zornsaoth

baie wef (spars 7

or . y

ita agin

iv d

yes 2 <n.

ees gate, the Ran

* Be: Fits . ‘ me

PRBBVAE WH BUU0V0000202098

USEFUL TABLES

METROLOGY AND CHRONOLOGY.

COMPILED BY

JAMES PRINSEP,

F. R.S. Sec. As. S., &c.

1835.

PRVRTVVVVTVETBOVGTIDOVATD

Ma HOOIOK

node ia ‘Oa

- wee

ioe

’

mah

Y Paeats

see

5 «She

ees

USEFUL TABLES,

FORMING

AN APPBNDIS

TO THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY.

PART THE SECOND.

CHRONOLOGICAL AND GENEALOGICAL TABLES

Anctent any Mlovern Envta;

INCLUDING A CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL EVENTS OF

BRITISH CONNECTION WITH INDIA.

CALCUTTA :

PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, CIRCULAR ROAD.

1836.

BN ae Com be

met. 4

Pie .? i

ye ara

Oe i

P oan

Li Ps = y oi NP iv. a

BUSTER EE. Tay Th BR:

’ = ¢ f , bi 4 :

EVER SES 4 yr ati :

; poMRR TSA ageaiae

a ere his eid ag WAS gas

CONTENTS AND TABLES OF PART II.

Page

Eras of ancient and modern times, .......... Jdob oobaGssbaGdovaasdobowosar 1

PM EMVCOMAN VEAT, rete eietelsieias cleleieisleleniateisiais <lole)s sfale si viclele s\sisloic/ns/e cialelaisisivie! | 2

The Olympiads of Greece, .... 2.22. sceecrecorcssccvecvsovesores heewe

he Christianvera—Gld and WEw/ Style, cae celeceilecierice ssicisicesscwlaocies | oF

Eras of Constantinople, Alexandria, Abyssinia, ......esecssccvesecsreee 7

Era of Nabonassar—Egyptian,..........+... occ see cns ence 20 necsns Sigil wut!)

Julian Period—era of martyrs—of Alexander, ......c.e0+-eesescveceree 10

Eras of Seleucus—Tyre—Antioch—of Abraham, of the ye ayo dd 11

Prench ixevolutionary Calendar, <jise cle vie «n> slereiainiocls'» > aces vielejeauisisjeeie | Let

PTA Oh cE HeLATMENDIANS,, o:. olcic's c.cisisie.o eisielelinle sisie!s cre siWeprsicielscieictereieus sta eiereiele ail

Mhewklejira, or fioht of Mahammed,, oc nis <a cscoiele veincinisie sisierics oe ciejejioe 13

Chinese and Japanese Cycle,.............. Bedude Pnodidios Sh 4obeen SdbE SS 14

Indian Chronology—Solar or Siderial Year, ........cssecsevessccuse svesee 17

TABLE I.—Seasons, signs, months, and lunar mansions, ........+.eesseeree2 18

II.—Divisions of the day, .......0.-.sseeeeeeee Sameeaadad Agasosage ale

IlJ.—Hindu Planetary System, ...... Suiadocd os AB ood Gis shvooesougds 21

1.—Eras dependent on the Solar Year, ......... smabAboodod stelnvovoreleialcte scoop 922

2.—Luni-solar year, ......... jonboT OUD ON Sd DUHONodOGrduIabe ABOCOoH Aas Boo 24

Era of Vikramaditya, ...., ........+. HodogDogUD gooboOSdDo OU OFOnOeoOD pe

Balabhi and Siva Singha eras, ............. podonnodssdan0000IonDnuC So00 | 2

3.—Cycles, Era of Parasurdma, of Vrihaspati, &c....... ... seoogcoddDodo0 ea

Tibetan Calendar,........ . afencioveretecteeveistete’ ee aimeetsl sis come odsoooue eet!

TABLE IV.—Vrihaspati Chakra, os Gaale of Jupiter,).. sodoséomonodsondo, ail

Eras of Buddha in various countries, ........eeese.e- Rioteveteterd mraverclorctars 566 78H

MATE ATOM VIAN AVILA sn carcietelcinieleie ss aielsisisiesseisv ys slelsiolnercisidsit cape sheicsccejeeeey io

Burmese and Nipalese eras, .......... “So0ae5 Jabastoloads deloodar Adee dd 34

4,—Eras derived from the Hejira ;—Fasli,...... eG SG.S We 6 OBE ATES Banani 34

Bee tarieh MGkt.of Alber, . .5..c.-.cccscece cr cree one pees ore eevee cis 6 37

Shahar or Sar era of Maharashtra,.......... seretetons Je COOBIER cn NOOR Moese 38

Jaliis Suns—RAajabhishék, ....... jdbo vocdedagdaddoedddeors of scaeH bone 39

Tabular View of Eras used in India, ........ MEYe Pe ret zalate’ vole care letters Sogabb8, be 40

Directions for using the Chronological Tables, ........-seccesececscsrecsoces Al

TABLE V.—Subdivision of Mohammedan year, ...... ..... Jc8o bp aounue ar 43

Vi.—Ahargana Chandramana, or luni-solar periods, ...... jHomodcomaga, ley

V1I.—Subdivision of Hindu luni-solar year, .. ......-.eseeseeeeeeees 51

VilI.—Solar Ahargana or lapsed periods, «.......00sccccscevcscoss - 52

IX.— Epochs of Hindu Solar years, in European dates, ............ ae) Ge

X.—Subdivision of Hindu Siderial year,.........ssscscscesscerersss 53

v1 Contents and Tables.

Page

TABLE XI.—To find the Christian day of the week, ...c-cscces sesocececes a

XII.—Scales of Christian Solar year, ......ceccececreccee ceccesee 55

XIII.—General table of the Hejira, an. 1. to an. 1318, ....,0000 ese 57

XIV.—Part I. Hindu Siderial years from A. D, 1600 to A. D. 1900,. 65

Part II1.—Luni-solar years ditto, ........cseccevcccsesesseses TI

Genealogical Tables, Correction of epochs,......0.s06. seescescsecevereves 7879

Utility of coins and inscriptions,........ceevsceccsecue eocsccceeseseses SL

Erroneous equation of Samvat era,..-... 0. cceccceswceessccccrerersssse, S1*

XVI.—Pauranic Genealogies ;— of Swayambhuvd,........e.eee.222. 93

XVII.—The Surya-vansa or Solar dynasty, ...... c.ccccescces sesve 94

XVIII.—The Chandra-vansa or Lunar races,....cccccecseccserevesee OG

XIX.—Pandu dynasty of Indraprestha,.......sccesescsesscccecreres G8

XX.—Lunar Kings of Magadha,........c.esee0 cccses coresescves 99

XXI.—Andhbra dynasty of Telingana, ..... POG OODOOOI6 tho 55 A dias» OND)

XXII.—Raéjas of Cash mit, 65 )ccjecc,- 0,0.» n(ejeiere «injec: 1a, ain felsicne ee eee veh TOL

XXIII.—Chohans of Delhi and Ajmir, ..........cccceeccereserees. 104

XX1V.—Harauti branch of ditto, Kota and Bundi, ............-... 105

XXV.—Raéjas of Malwa, .......0..eeeeeee wlolé alee) aleiviclsieloniete eee eet LOG

XXVI.—Balabhi dynasty of Saurashtra,*.. ....e0.eeeeeees eek. LO

XXVII.—Anhulwaras of Gujerat, .... 2. cescecsccccvercceee eee 10S

XXVIII.—RA4nas of Méwér,..........- eld sre uivssieinre Helees Cee FLOOD

XXIX.—Rahtores Of Kanouj,)scjeiccs, cieitecsices «cise sie seeemteietes 110

XXX.—Ditto of Marwar or Jodhpur, ........0.0+0 ssoscsevcevccees ILL

KXXT-— Ditto) of Bikaneriveeresiectel= cleleteieieislelelamterteesitem reenter LL E

XXXII.—Rénas of Amber or Jaipur, ........0.es ee -eeecesesesoees 111

XXXDUL.—Raos of Jesalmers icc ssieictccivicisiete iniseisitvicte esas. TTS

OX XLV -— R45} aS) Of (OriSSas jars cierele <icies\eialelsielelal clelelsleieleljocjele ometimteres | 113

RXR —Dittov Of NEPA) Fa sietaeiea oi «leisicle’ aalele)eiele/sieveie o10 "ers otsljedeaipieiateixeie’ 114

PXOKRGV AL eS TEEO) OL, STAY OU iote pore els! cvelia’e aie lelotereioie bialelela‘ole ele reimels paises LNG

XXOOV LL —Dittoat Bengal sys. eicls cleieleleieiel olelelelcle! iets aloe sistelaterciela'e Lg

XXXVIII.—Ditto of Assam and Kamrup, ..... ...-.s-00% wielotemiieree, LZ

XK. — Ditto of Manipur cite oie cieniselo'e aualelels|c\e1=\e efelais)elelaieyetsisiereiste's) LO

XL.—Sholan dynasty of Karnata, ......cccccsaccsvscccscsessesecs 119

XLT. —Belal Rajas (Of Ditto, sjere-1e7slelatelolelal ie cfale'e\ eleleieioi wielcie le eueleietsieierere v2

XLII.—Adeva Rajas of Tuluva or Warancal, ........ «0 essecee-ee 120

XLIII.—R&jas of Chola, (Coromandel,) .........ccescececseecceces 12)

XLIV.—Ditto of Chera, (Coimbetore,) ........0.0.+ececcee vovseee 121

XLV.—Pandyan dynasty of Madura, ...........ccecceevcccssaceees 12]

XLVI.—Rajas of Vijayanagar, ............- bddaddsincisocostdconcs0s

XLVII.—Ditto of Maisur,............+.065 sontoodoaddac nodded Sccie ies

XLVIII.—Paligar dynasty of Trichandpali, ........ Ecbodd 550058 pea 2K:

XLIX.—Valugati Rajas of Venkatagiri, .............. shobooooe ce

L.—Indian Princes mentioned in Ferishta’s History,..-...........0. 124

LI.—Marhatta Governments, 1 Sattara, 2 Peshwas, 3 Nagpur, 4 Sindia,

5 EO Kar MOsGNVIGWAlsleleie se ialislee' (cial eleloteleterere ec el ateiclelerereleuatenetaeteer mle

LI1.—Sikh Government of Lahore, .......... ahelevarkus wape cre eletetbeteP alot

LIII.—Chinese, Japanese, and Buddhist Girdnbicey: pes todsacondae UAE

LIV.—Buddhist Chronology of Tibet, ...... cscs. eseeeee > ale aisle lelolatenee IZ

* In the text Surat is put as the modern synonyme of Saurashtra; this is a mistake.

Surastrene of ancient geography is the equivalent term.

Contents and Tables. Vii

Page

TABLE LV.—Kings of Tibet, cc ccserscccccccscven sevscesccvsvcveccsseccs Jal

LVI.—Burmese dynasties, ....0.00+.seesseeecccesecs Meletciclefeiselseins, LGR

LVII.—Chiefs of Labong and Zimmay,............2++.0:> So0dn0006 135

LVIII.—Sovereigns of Ceylon, ........csesesesersccsvececs chikisiane! Lao

LIX.—Greek dynasties of Asia, .......ccccsescccces cesceces Soon ca

LX.—Mythological History of Persia, .... ....... Siclolateleveletaterets Asoo. ak) |

LXI.—Sassanian dynasty of Persia, ......ccscssescscccsescsos ecee LAL

Xe —Khalifs of BaghdAadyy-cp dt -1 se stele sleisicle cle oles cictelelevercicictelclels #'s 143

LXIII.—Samanian dynasty of Western Persia, ..........0sese008 -. 143

LXIV.—Ghaznevides of Persia and India, ............ 3 oden5000c oo. 143

LXV.—Seljiks of Persia, Kirman and Rum, ........ ogcodapde cooee 143

LXVI.—Atabegs of Irak, ....0...eeeseseseseees sis eloVaimislalstsiolere crepe) Aaa

EXVIL—Turcoman Ortokites; 0.500.000 cccs cscs cesses ale eiatetee ete ce vic 145

LXVIII.—Moghel Empire of Tartary, .......... nonooundacuoddoboo. Tle

LXIX.—Ditto or I] Khanian Dynasty of fae alalcisteleteletctieicrctsteiclesc, LAG

LXX.—Ditto of Khorasan, ........ aif clsdociare cole vercr ale leila aintcle tite pares 146

LXXI.—Sufi dynasty of Persia, ......cscssscceccsccvccccvscesecs 146

LXXI11.—Patan or Ghori Sultans of Delhi, ........ RTT S crab eiorsictti ss ace 147

LXXIII.—Ditto ditto of Bengal,....... -..+- aratpiotel sfeietetetetatsisteleietesa) sisi) 147)

LXXIV.—Sharki Dynasty of Jaunpur, ..........scvececscecscseses 148

LXXV.—Musalman Kings of Kashmir, .........ccccsescsesesees se. 149

LXXVI.—Kings of Sind and Tatta, ......scccccscsccevescvccesssee 149

XRT — Jami dynasty of Samana, (sic cistwic.ccacicle cleic slelestensics eielsielse 149

LXXVIII.—Bahmany dynasty of Kalbarga, .........ssesssccveseeee 149

LXXIX.—Berid Shahy dynasty of Beder, ........... abhoooodcbonde Hah

LXXX.—Faruki Dynasty of Kandeish, ........ slailetetants ‘ boladéoe - 150

EXXXI.—Kings of Malwa, ....sccscccecsccesccesccsacccscvcecses 150

LXXXII.—Kings of Gujerat,..........0..- Sloicrejeteletaivete felslels alefelafets -. 150

pROROXL ET. —Dittovof Multan) jc sic;scves aa: cisios vole sie slo Seulech, veamon. os cLSl

LXXXIV.—Imad Shéhy dynasty of Berar, .....cecccecceesevccsees 151

LXXXV.—Adil Shahy dynasty of Bijapur, ......ccceeeseese Soondnod lls)!

LXXXVI.—Nizam Shahy ditto of Ahmednagar, .........eseeeesee0+ ISL

LXXXVII.—Kutb Shahy ditto of Golconda,............ sanbnoonc wee 152

LXXXVIII.—Moghel Emperors of India, ..... ...ccccecseecsccvees 152

LXXXIX.—Nizéms of Hyderabad,.... 2... ...0.- sodonodGucntic “oon BGP

XC.—Nuwabs and Kings of Oude, ..... Sah on08 Sposgedconconens eoee 152

XCI.—Chronological Table of European and British Connection with

UNGIAG wisioiciesic/siclo Siehetetorrate Sin wlalsTaleteloslalelelalolciaial aldishe sislelalciciciicici eat LO

XCII.—Present Political Divisions of India, @eoeeeese Peoeveeeeeoe eve eo :ee 187

ohio tigen pee ov

er pia ‘be ot

sat ” t

rea ee ade oak

“GAs whe

| HAE beak hide, Sovraal

Ai aa pate gt eee ei enya a Gpe pei ieee pi

‘ es ton, pea os ai

seat 1 cen LEU SE Ch Con REN eA

OAL we LITRE piri ass cape

ide ‘a ty ) " we fap

ae aheee eesti san teamed

Qh oid g ee

d vA et

ae ve ‘aal Ries crs oe

a. Ags oe TMS Ae

Fae es aA hese pt} ng ice uae ;

FRO BEES eo aI ‘Sraonetininchdc te od Stir Gi” nyse nies

geet, Spee poke Re ie to, ad tS Bh ie Mon 17

Ficpal ee ry spe fil cae ee

Sth 2 eS eR ~ oy. ++ davinahy D B ha senile

GENEALOGICAL TABLES.

— BH—

Tue purpose of the present division of our Appendix is by no means

to attempt any improvement, nor even a critical adjustment, of the cata-

logues of princes preserved in the legendary records of the brahmans,

but merely to afford a succinct synopsis of the principal ancient and

modern dynasties of India, and of the neighbouring countries, for

reference as to names, and, where accessible, as to dates.

For the early or mythological history of the Hindus, little can be done

beyond enumerating the mere names, and marking the few variations

in the lists of Sir Wm. Jones, Witrorp, Bentiey, Hamitton, Winson,

and latterly, Col. Top, who have endeavoured, successively, to trace the

parallelism of the solar and lunar races, and assign to them more

probable dates than those extravagantly put forth inthe Purdnas. As

the regular succession from father to son is givenin them it was not a

difficult task to apply the ordinary term of human generation, derived

from the authentic histories of other countries, to the adjustment of the

Hindu Chronology. Thus RAma in the solar line, who is placed by the

brahmans between the silver and brazen ages, (867102 B. C.,) was

brought down by Sir Wm. Jonzs to B. C. 2029, and reconciled with the

Rama of Scripture : Prapyora, of the lunarrace, in whose reign the last

Buddha appeared, was brought down to B. C. 1029, the assumed epoch

of Saxya in Tibet and China: and Nanpa to 699, &c. In the case of the

Magadha Rajas this adjustment was the more easy, because the length

of each dynasty is given in reasonable terms from JARASANDHA, the con-

temporary of Yupuisruira, downwards; and the error might be only in

the wrong assumption of the initial date, the epoch of the Kali Yuga,

which the pandits allotted to the year 3101 B.C. After the discovery of

the identity of Caanpracurra with Sanpracortus, pointed out by Sir

Wo. Jonus, (As. Res. iv. 26,) and followed up by Wizrorp, (v. 262,)

a further reduction of 250 years in the position assigned to him in

Sir Wituiam’s first list became necessary ; and the diminished rate of

generations, applied backwards, brought YupuisTurra, and his con-

78 Progressive adjustment of ancient Hindu dates.

temporaries Argun, KrisHna, and JARASANDHA, within the twelfth or

thirteenth century before Christ. A most satisfactory confirmation of the

modified epochs of Nanna, Cuanpracupta, and Asoka has been since

derived from the chronological tables of the Buddhists in Ava, published

in Crawrurp’s Embassy, and again in those of the Ceylon princes,

made known by the Honorable G. Turnour: their near concurrence

with Greek history, in the only available point of comparison, reflects

back equal confidence upon the epoch assigned to the founder of their

religion, (B. C. 544,) in spite of the Chinese and Tibetan authorities,

most (though not all) of which place Buppua 500 years earlier. 1t was

this that misled Sir Wm. Jonzs in the epoch of Prapyora.

There are some discrepancies in the Burmese tables difficult to be ex-

plained, such as the placing of Asarasartru 80 years prior to SisunAGa,

and the occurrence of Cyanpracupta still 50 years too soon : but we

must refer those who would investigate this, and all other branches of

the intricate subject of Hindu and Bauddha chronology, to the learned

authors we have above mentioned, satisfying ourselves here with ex-

hibiting a comparative table of the gradual changes effected by the

progress of research in a few of the principal epochs.

Names. Pauranic date. Jones. Wilford. Bentley. Wilson. Tod. Burmese list.

BACs 7B. 6s BCs aBy ComiaB Cs Bz \C. B. Cs

ee eeya, "" b2183102 3000 2700. 1528 — 2200 —

Buvpera,

Rama, 867102 ] a, 950 —

YUDHISTHIRA, 3102 } 2029 o { 576 ye ve <7

pee NOS Crane: 700 «119° 915 ae 600

PRADYOTA,

SISUNAGA, 1962 870 600 — 777 600 472

NANDA, 1600 699 _ — 415 — 404

CHANDRAGUPTA, 15062 600 350 — 315 320 392

ASOKA,; 1470 640 _ _— 250 — 230

BALIN, 908 149 _ — 21 10 —

CHANDRABIJA,

the last of Me: bo. 498 300 A.D. 428 a. D. 546 A. D.

gadha Rajas,

The aid of astronomy has been successfully called in to fix such

epochs as afforded the requisite data ; thus the situation of the equi-

noctial colure in the time of the astronomer Pardsara, who flourished

under Yupnisturra, is fixed by Davis in 1391 B.C.; by Sir Wm.

Jones, Conesrooxr, and Bentiey, in 1180; which latter closely

accords with the epoch of the Cycle of Parasurdma, used in the Dakhan,

and apparently unknown to these authors, B. C. 1176. Bunrney, on

another occasion, alters this date to 575 B. C.! he also places RAma

in 950 B. C.; but there is great uncertainty and incongruity in many

of his determinations of the dates of native princes and of books,

from the prejudices he exhibits, although he is entitled to every con-

Epochs fixed on Astronomical data. 79

fidence in his ingenious mode of calculating the period at which the

various improvements in astronomy were introduced, and the Sid-

dhdntas written or revised, by the time when the positions of the planets,

as assigned by their tables, accorded best with the more accurate

results of European astronomy. From the minimum errors, and the

precession of the equinoxes, (first applied to such a purpose by Sir

Isaac Nuwron,) we have the following epochs substantially ascer-

tained :

Invention of the Nacshatras or Hindu Lunar mansions,...... B. C. 1425 B.

The Mahabharat war, according to WILFoRD, ...... tsps . ood

The Solar Zodiac formed by PaRAsaRa, (under sae he hin Bn 1180

Era of ParAsuRA’MA commences (see page 26) 7 August ........ 1176

A Lunar Cycle invented, and precession discovered (Rama ”). asic eke

Four Yugas, founded on JupiTeR’s motions, .... sesceceeecesess 2157B,

Seven Manwantaras, founded on SATuRN’s revolutions,...... A. D. 31?B.

The hemeayane, written by: VALMIV EI, 2. te. os sin aiding chen steele ome} GOR te

Vara‘ua Minrra, flourished, according to Telugu astronomers, (also

Sir W. Jones, CoteBrooke, &c. from precession of the equinoxes,).. 499

Tables of the Brahma Siddhdnta, fixation of the sideral Zodiac, and

new system of Chronology, with extravagant antiquity, compiled,...... 538 B.

The Mahabharat written, from Krishna’s janampatra, .. ........ 600?B.

The Javanese translation of ditto, according to RAFFLES, in.. .... 1079

Vishnu Purdna, whence genealogies of Andhra kings, 4955 K. Y.or 954 W.

Origin of the Kala Chakra, or Jovian Cycle, (See prec. sect. p. 29,) 965

Tables of the Surya Siddhdanta, by VARA’HA MIHIRA,.......... 1068-91 B.

The Varaht Sanhita, supposed by the same author, gives its own date, 1049

The Lildvati of Bua’sKAR ACHA‘RYA, bears its own date, ........ 1088

The Bhdsvatis of SATANANDA, pupil of Vara’Ha, Saca 1021, .... 1109

The Bhdgavat, supposed by CoLeBRooKE to be written by a gram-

marian in. a8 Efasiiabe ee tie oie HoO@

The oe ‘Siddhénta, pees by rine eve Rescued Geo: 1322

GANGADHAR’s Comment on Bua’/SKAR A/CHA/RYA,,.+2++ee0++- 0+ 1420

The Works of KESAVA,....5.. Dil, eelka nvelttade Aah ese eal 44g

The Grahd Ldaghava, by Gatley: aie SONS, aaleauore safe ofotohsif ci LOO

Mr. Bentiey would rob the seven last of a Feud Caneee upon very

insufficient grounds ; he also ventures to place the authorship of the

R4mayana in A. D. 291, and that of the Mahabharata in A. D. 600,

on far too slender astronomical data: but his mania for modernizing

renders his testimony of the advanced knowledge of the Hindus in

astronomy, at so remote a period as the fifteenth century before

Christ, the more valuable; and we can have little hesitation in

giving credit to the lines of princes assigned to this space, and even

to further antiquity, although their history has been mixed up with

incredible mythos, and a falsified chronology. The more moderate

and rational dates preserved by the Bauddha priests would lead to a

B 2

80 Kali yuga epoch erroneous—Inscriptions

supposition that the brahmans had purposely antiquated theirs, to

confound their rivals in the contest for ascendancy over the minds of

princes and people. That they should have suspended their histories

with Sumitra of the solar, and Cuanprasisa of the lunar line, in the

fifth century, might be naturally accounted for by the predominance of

the Buddhists at that period, or more probably by the destruction of

the Hindu monarchies by the incursions of: the Huns and Tartars.

The Purdnas, or at least the prophetical supplements describing their

genealogies, must have beencompiled long afterwards, and the relative

dates then falsified. But the principal blame in the business seems to fall

upon the astronomers, who are accused of throwing back the commence-

ment of their era : for, taking the dataof the Paurdnic tables, and allow-

ing, with them, 1015 years from Yupuisruira to Nanpa ; and from

the latter prince to Punrman 836 years, (which name is identified with

Povxtomien of the Chinese by Wizrorp, and placed in the year A. D.

648,) the highest estimate of the Bhdgavat gives 1857 B. C. for

the epoch of the Kali yuga, instead of the 3101 assigned in the astro-

nomical works ; while in the Brakmdnda Purana, it is brought down

to B. C. 1775; and in the Vayu Purdna, toB. C. 1729. The Jains,

it is said, adopt the still more modern epoch of 1078 B. C.; and if

Angsana of Crawrurn’s Burmese chronology, founder of the sacred

epoch, be Arsuna, this contemporary of YUDHISTHIRA is placed by

the Bauddhas so late as 691 B. C.!

The Jains are generally also the most trust-worthy authorities for

the middle ages. To them it is asserted, that Asut Faz is indebted

for the series of Bengal, Malwa, and other princes published in the

Ayin Akbery with every appearance of accurate detail. The Raja

Taringint of Cashmir also, the only Indian history of any antiquity,

begins with Buddhist theogony. The Rdjdvali collection of genea-

logies is quite modern, having been compiled by Srwar Jaya Sinn

of Ambir, in 1650. Neither that nor the native bards and chroniclers,

whence the valuable data for the more modern history of Hindustan

were furnished to Col. Top for his Annals of Rajasthan, are to be

trusted when they trace the ancestry of their princes back, and

to connect them with the latter heroes of the Purdnas ; nor even to

the earlier centuries of the Christian era, in which we find hardly any

of their names confirmed either by grants, coins, or by the historians

of neighbouring countries,

More authentic in every respect are the copper-plate grants, dug

up in many parts of India; and the Sanscrit inscriptions on columns

and temples; of which many have been decyphered and published,

although the subject is by no means yet exhausted. Owing toa

strive

and Grants useful in Historical Research. 81

fortunate pride of ancestry, most of these records of kingly grants recite

a long train of antecedent Rajas, which serve to confirm or to supply

vacuities in the more scanty written records. Of the value of these to

history we cannot adduce a better instance, than the confirmation of

the Bhupdla dynasty of the Rajas of Gaur, as given by Apun Fazu in

the occurrence of the names of Devapdua, DuERMAPALA, RAJAPALA,

&c., on the several monuments at Monghir, Buddal, Dinajpur, Amgdachi,

and Sdrndth near Benares, where also the date and the Buddha reli-

gion of the prince are manifested. It was supposed by Mr. (now Sir

Cuaries) WiLxk1ns, that the two first inscriptions referred to the first

century of the Samvat era ; but, as shewn by Mr. CoteBrookg, as well

as by actual date at Sdrndth, they rise no earlier than the tenth. In-

deed, the occurrence of inscriptions bearing unequivocal dates, anterior

to that period, is very rare. Col. Top adduces one of the fifth cen-

tury (S. 597) discovered near Kota. Mr. Watuen has also recently

produced two of the 4th and 6th centuries, dug up in Gujerat, which

confirm, or rather correct, the early records of the Saurashtra dynasty.

The oldest, however, exist in Ceylon, where they have been brought

to light by Captain Forses and the Honorable Mr. Turnovur:

some of these, of which translations are published by the latter

author in the Ceylon Almanac for 1834, are ascribed, on evi-

dence of facts mentioned in them, to the year A, D. 262; but they

bear no actual date. The period most prolific of inscriptions is

from the 9th to the 13th century ; when an anxiety seems to have

prevailed among the priests to possess graven records of grants from

the reigning or from former sovereigns, in order probably to secure

their temples and estates from spoliation or resumption in those

turbulent times. One of Col. Ton’s inscriptions, translated by Mr.

CoLEBROOKE, in the Roy. As. Soc. Trans. vol. i. expressly declares

a rival grant to be futile, and derived from an unauthorized source.

The value of inscriptions, as elucidations of history, cannot better be

exemplified than by the circumstance of the Burmese inscription in

the Pali character found at Gaya, on the visit of the envoys from

Ava, in 1827, of which a translation was printed in the Journal As.

Soc. ili. 214. It records the frequent destructions and attempts to

repair the Buddhist temple there, and the successful completion of it

in the Sacaraj year 667, A. D. 1306*. Now Col. Ton’s Rajput annals

of Méwar make particular mention of expeditions to recover Gaya

from the infidels, in 1200-50, which might not but for this record

have been capable of explanation.

* Col. Burney reads the date, whichis rather indistinct, 467, or A. p. 1106;

but the above evidence tends to confirm the original reading.

82 Application of Coins in History.

Where dates are not given in inscriptions, the style of the Nagari

character will frequently serve to determine their antiquity. The cave

temples of the west of India exhibit the most ancient form ; the Gujerat

type, above alluded to, of the 4th century, has a part connection with

them, and part with an inscription at Gya, and another on the Allahabad

lath :—these again are linked by intervening gradations to the Tibetan

alphabet, of which we know from Tibetan authors the existing Nagari

of Magadha was taken as the basis in the seventh century. We shall

soon be able to furnish a tolerably accurate paleographical series of

the Devanagari, but can here only allude to the subject.—In the tenth

and eleventh centuries, it undergoes the modification observable on

the Gaur, Sarnath, and Shekdwati inscriptions, resembling very nearly

the Bengali type, of which it is doubtless the parent. The modern

Nagari is found on monuments of the 13th century, when the irruption

of the Moghuls prevented any further change. There is also a still

earlier character on the Delhi, Allahabad, and Tirhut Jdths, which

remains yet undecyphered ; strong reasons have been advanced for its

alliance to the Sanscrit group, if it contain not indeed the original

symbols of that language. (See Journal As. Soc. vols. iii. iv.)

In all other countries, coins and medals have been esteemed the

most legitimate archives and proofs of their ancient history. In India,

little recourse to such evidence has hitherto been available. The few

Hindu coins discovered have been neglected or deemed illegible. The

subject is however now attracting more atterftion, from the recent disco-

very of Bactrian and Indo-Scythic coins in great abundance in the Pan-

jab, bearing names hitherto quite unknown, in Greek, and onthe reverse

side ina form of Pehlevi character. The series is continued down to, and

passes insensibly into, the purely Hindu coins of Kanouj, and some

are in our possession, with Greek and Sanscrit on the same field. This

very circumstance tends to bear out Colonel Top’s supposition of the

Kanouj princes having an Indo-Scythic origin. YAVAN-ASsvA, their pro-

genitor, may indeed be ‘‘ the Greek Azo,” of whose coins we have so

plentiful a supply*. The Sanscrit characters on the Kanouj coins are

‘of the earlier type belonging to the fourth or fifth century :—they will

soon, it is hoped, be read, and put us in possession of several new

names.

Other coins, inastill more ancient character, and nearly resembling

the undecyphered letters of the Jats or the cave-sculpturest, are dug

up in the Delhi district :—they are found in company with Buddhist

relics, and will hereafter, doubtless, lead to historical information.

A third series of coins, with devices of a brahmani bull, and a horse-

* See Journal As. Soc. June 1835. + See Journal As. Soc. vol. iii. p. 495.

Different groups of Indian Coins. 83

man, bears the Gaur Ndgari of the 10th century ; on this several

names have been made out, BurMapzva, &c.; and on some, the Persian

titles of the first Musalman conquerors are impressed.

A fourth series, with a sitting female figure, is in the modern Nagari,

and is probably the latest of the Kanouj coins. The early Muhamme-

dan coins of Sasaxteein, Maumup, &c. frequently havea partial ad-

mixture of Nagari, which will aid in locating the rest ; for while this

provoking dearth exists with regard to Hindu coins, we find coins

with legible names and Hejri dates for the wholeline of their Muham-

medan conquerors, whose history is amply preserved without their aid.

One confirmation of a historical fact from numismatic aid has been

remarked in the discovery of the name of Vasu Deva or Bas- Deo, on a

Sassanian coin. Frrisuta states, that Bas-pro, of Kanouj, gave his

daughter in marriage to Bauram of Persia, A. D. 330 :—the coin marks

exactly such an alliance ; but the Hindu chronicles admit no such name

until, much later, one occurs in the Malwa catalogue of Aput Fazu.

In the dynasties of Nepal and Assam, (at least from the middle of

the seventeenth century,) we have been wholly guided by coins in our

possession ; and it might be possible, by persevering search, to obtain

from the same source the names of many RAjas antecedent to this

period, which are now doubtful or wholly unknown.

From the time of the subversion of the Moghul empire in the middle

of the last century, the historical train of their coins ceases to be avail-

able; all the native states having, in imitation of the English, struck

their money in thename of a nominal sovereign of Delhi, with no regard

to dates, or even to the existence of the monarch; and up to the present

time, we have had the names of MunAmMMeEpD Suan, Auemerr II., and

Suan Aten, issuing simultaneously from the native and the Company’s

Mint, while a second AkBeErR sways the pageant sceptre of the seven

climes ! (See first part of Appendix.)

It must be confessed that a large field still remains open, for the

re-investigation of the middle ages of Hindu history, in judicious

hands; for independently of the new materials now before us in the

numerous coins lately discovered, and in many new inscriptions, we

have the aid of the foreign histories of Ceylon, Ava, Tibet and

China; we have access to the native volumes before only consulted

through interested pandits ; and we have Col. Top’s ample traditions

and real archives of the principal portion of the Indian continent,

the seat of all its important history. To say nothing of the minute.

and circumstantial numismatic histories of Greece and Rome, it is

principally to coins that we owe the history of the Arsacidz of Persia,

84 Errors owing to European Commentators.

through VariLuant’s investigation. The Sassanidan dynasty has

also been illustrated from similar materials by Fraun and Ds

Sacy. Marspren has extended the same principle to the Muham-

medan princes of Persia and India, and to some few Hindu states, in

his Numismata Orientalia ; and its application may be still further

urged in the latter line with the greater success, in proportion to the

greater dearth of other materials for history, as is exemplified in the

coins of the Bactrian provinces. The first thing to be done will be

to expunge and lose sight of the learned but entangled accounts of

Col. Wiirorp and others, which, while they have confused, have

frightened critics at the perplexity of the subject. The three Vixra-

mApiTYAs, and three Raja Buosas, invented to reconcile discrepancies

in dates, will perhaps be found as little needed as the multiplication

of Buppuas, the two principal of which are now seen by the identity

of their biography to be the same personage.

Of the confirmation of the testimony of inscriptions by that of coins,

we have remarkable instance in the CHANDRAGUPTA and SamMupDRA-

Gupta of Kanouj, names first discovered on the Allahabad pillar, and

now fully made out, along with several others of the same dynasty, on

the gold coins found in the ruins of that ancient town. In no other

record have we any mention of these sovereigns*, who must have been

several centuries anterior to Caanpra Deva, the founder of the last

reigning dynasty, which was overthrown by the Muhammedans.

The native dates of events, as has been already stated, are most

vague and uncertain: still there are instances in which they have

undergone further perplexity from their European commentators.

The looseness with which the chronology of the Pauranic genealo-

gies has been investigated, is pointed out in Mr. Witson’s remarks on

the Vishnu Purdna, the authority whence Sir Wm. Jonzs’ list was

furnished by his Pandit (Journal As. Soc. 1.437.) By some mistake

he gave 345 years to the Kanwa dynasty of four Rajas, and in this he

was blindly followed by WiLrorp and BENTLEY, both professing to con-

sult the original. Now all the manuscripts examined by Mr. Witson

give only 45 years! Indeed, when the epoch of CoanpRaGuPTaA is

adjusted, the periods given in this Purana from Parixsuir (B. C. 1400)

down to the termination of the list in A. D. 436, are quite rational.

A more glaring instance of error, sanctioned, nay almost perpetuat-

ed, by the extent to which it has been spread, has originated in blind-

ly following the authority of the pioneers of our Sanscrit researches ;

and it is strange that it has never been detected, that we are aware

of, up to the present day ! We allude to the mode of convertingthe Sam-

* See Journal As. Soc. vol. iii. 141-4.

Erroneous equation of the Samvat era. 8}

vat of VixramApiTya into the Christian era by subtracting 56 instead

of 57, thereby inducing a constant error of one year in all dates of

chronicles, deeds, and inscriptions so read. We have taken some trou-

ble to trace the origin of this mistake, from curiosity, and it shews how

subject we are to rest upon the assertions of others without duly

scrutinizing the data on which they may be grounded.

VixramAonitya died in the Kali yuga year 3044, according to Wi.-

FORD, whose essays in the 9th and 10th vols. of the Asiatic Researches

contain the fullest information on the history of the three supposed

princes of this name, and of their common rival ScutvAnana. The Ist

Samvat, therefore, concurs with the year 3045 K. Y.; and to convert the

latter into the former, 3044 must be uniformly deducted. This calcula-

tion agrees with Waxrren’s Kdla Sankalita, (see prec. Sec., p. 25, and

tab. 71,) also with Anux Fazt’s statement, that <‘ in the fortieth year of

Axser’s reign (A. H. 1003, commencing 5th Dec. 1594, and ending

25th Nov. 1595, A. D.) there had elapsed 4696 years of the era of

Yupuistuira (Kali yuga),’ making its commencement, 310] B. C.

Also 1652 years of the era of VikramAbiTya (1652-1595==57 B. C.)

and 1517 years of the era of S€tivkaana, (1595-1517=78 A. D.)

The Bengali Almanacs, published at Nadiyd, give precisely the same

agreement*. The Almanac of the Sadar Dewdnt, and the statements

at the head of all the regulations of Government, coincide therewith :

thus, the Samvat year 1877 began on the 15th March, 1820 = 57

years difference. If further evidence is required of the knowledge of

the true era in possession of English authors, we have in BucHanan’s

Mysore, vol. iii. 112 :—‘‘ 3786 years of the Kali yuga had now elapsed,

of which the particulars are, 3044 years of YupHIsTHrra.

135 years of ViKRAMA.

607 years of SALIVAHANA.

3786 K. Y., or A. D. 685.”

Here the interval between 3044, whence the Samvat commenced, to

the Saca, is 135, or 57-+-78 vears; (or 185 — 685—607=57).

Again, Dr. Hunter, in his account of the Astronomical labours of

Raja Jar Srnu, dates them in “1750 Samuat, or 1693 A. D.,” mak-

ing the interval 57 years.

Sir Wn. Jones, residing in Calcutta, where the Samvat is not used,

* One Beng4li Almanac, however, printed in Calcutta, which was brought to us

for comparison, had both the Samvat and the Saca era one year in defect! the

Bengali san being the only era now used in Bengal, little care is taken in regard

to the rest. The Kali yuga, the foundation of all, was however correct.

82 Wilford’s erroneous Samvat-epoch—

in his speculations on Hindu chronology only alluded to the Aali yuga.

Davis, in his account of the native method of eclipse calculations,

used the Saca only; but he frequently alluded to the Kali yuga, the

first year of which he correctly placed in 3101 B. C.

Whence then can the now common, nay almost universal, applica-

tion of the subtrahend 56 have proceeded? Simply from Wu1Forp’s

having placed the Kali yuga epoch in 3100, instead of 3101 B. C., in

his essay expressly written to settle the eras of VikraMADITYA and

SAxivéuana, to which too much confidence has been given by subse-

quent writers. Having every where assumed this erroneous datum, it

followed, that the Samvat epoch, which he rightly placed 3044 after

YupDuHIsTHIRA, would concur with 3100—3044—56 B. C.* But whence

did he get his erroneous epoch of the Kali yuga? This also we may

conjecture, having already seen him convicted, on another count, of blind-

ly adopting Sir W. Jonss’ data. Sir Wixutam, in his Essay on Hindu

Chronology, (As. Res. 11. 126,) says, ‘‘ 4888 years of the Kali yuga are

passed up to the present time ;” and his table of comparative epochs is

calculated from 1788 A. D. leaving an obvious difference of 4888—

1788 = 3100 B.C. which Witrorp seems to have adopted. Had

he however looked to the heading of the article, he would have found

the date ‘‘ January, 1788,” consequently the K. Y. year commencing

in April, 1787, had not yet expired: the true difference therefore was

4888—1787=38101, or more exactly 31002 years; or for the Samvat,

—563, in nearest round terms 57+. (See page 25.)

Witrorp is not the only author who was thus led to adopt the wrong

equation. CoLeBrookrand Witson always use 56. Jervis’s Chronolo-

gical Tables have the same interval; and Colonel Top employs it through-

out his voluminous chronicles of the Rajputs ; thereby throwing all his

events forward one year, excepting such as fall inthe months Pausha,

Magha, Phalgun, and half of Chaitra, subsequent to A. D. 1752. He

himself notices here and there a discrepancy of one year with the

Musalm4n historians, which is generally attributable to this cause

alone.

Capt. Fux. always uses the correct formula, having had access to

* In a previous part of the very same volume, p. 47, WiLtrorp had used 57. In

some places he makes the epoch of the Kali yuga 3001 instead of 3101.

+ There is another advantage in adhering to the difference 57 in general terms

rather than the now correcter number 56%, namely, that before the year 1752 it

was customary, in England and most parts of Europe, to commence the year in

the month of March, or on the Easter moon; so that for all dates anterior to

that period the European year may be accounted to have agreed with the Hindu

luni-solar reckoning precisely.

other Samvats—Newar era, &c. 83

native almanacs or to pandits. Mr. Stiruwwe, in his Account of Orissa,

has the right epoch of the Kali yuga ; but he applies a wrong equation

(+77) to the Saca era of his Orissa rajas. It is possible that this may

be the mode of reckoning in that province ; for we find the Saca vary

a year or two also in Burmah and Java, if these variations are not

indeed attributable to our English references; for,as we have seen

above, they are by no means infallible !

The term Samvat does not apply exclusively to the era of Vixra-

ma’pITyA. CoLEeBROOKE first corrected this erroneous supposition in

regard to the Samvat of the Gaur inscriptions, which probably com-

menced with the Bhupdla dynasty, about 1000 A. D. Colonel Top has

also established the fact of a Balabhi Samvat in Gujerat, dating in 318

A. D., anda Siva Singha Samvat, in the same country, coinciding with

1113 A. D. This circumstance must be particularly attended to in

examining ancient documents.

Kirkpatrick mentions, that Racuava Deva introduced the Samvat

era into Nepal; adding, that the Newar era is however generally used

there, its origin being unknown. Now in the list of Nepal rajas, from

Hara Sinua Deva, A. D. 1323, back to Raguava Deva, there are but

three reigns of extravagant lengths, viz. of 88, 85, and 80 years: if

these be cut down to the usual average, the date of Racuava will fall

about 880, which is the epoch of the Newar era, so that in all proba-

bility the term Samvat in this case merely applied to the latter era,

and not to that of VikRAMA’DITYA.

It is frequently the custom in eastern authors to estimate dates

backwards from the epoch of the writer or compiler. Thus, in the

Buddhist chronology of Tibet, translated in M.Csoma’s Tibetan

Grammar, we find ‘“‘ from the incarnation of SHixya 2647 years,”

meaning anterior to A. D. 1686. In these cases, and particularly

where time is estimated in cycles, great caution is necessary in fixing

the initial date, and it is not improbable that from this source has

arisen much of the confusion of Hindu chronology ; as, for instance,

from throwing back the origin of the Kdla chakra system, or Jovian

cycle of 60 years, which is traced (see page 29) to the year A. D. 965,

as far as regards its introduction into India, Individual inaccuracies

are hardly to be wondered at where events Oe ti chronicled

from after-recollection. Thus the bard Cuanp is 160 years out in one

place, according to Top. Amezrr Kuan’s Biography is one year out

for a long period, and endless instances of the same inaccuracy might

be adduced. The Muhommadans are generally very particular in their

dates, and so are the Hindus where they inscribe a deed on brass ;—in

84 Source of tables.

this case they frequently allude to some eclipse or full moon, the act

of donation being more pious for its occurrence on a religious festival.

it is hardly necessary to enumerate the authorities for the different

catalogues to which we may now proceed, since they will be mentioned

under each dynasty: but it may be as well to premise, that A. A.

against a name or date denotes Ayin Akberi; F. Ferishta’s history ;

J. Jones; Wd. Wilford; B. Bentley; T. Tod ; H. Hamilton ; and W.

Wilson.

All dates have, for uniformity sake, been expressed in Christian

years, which can readily be converted into the various native reckon-

ings by the rules given in page 40.

As a convenient preface to the mythological catalogues of the Solar

and Lunar dynasties, a tabular sketch of the Hindu Theogony, with

a few additional memoranda regarding their sacred works, &c. have

been inserted. For more ample details on this subject, Moorn’s Hindu

Pantheon, and Coteman’s Mythology, or the standard work of Warp

on the Hindus may be consulted ; while for the Pauranie genealogies

at length, the elaborate tables published by Dr. Haminron, at

Edinburgh, in 1819, although inconveniently expanded in dimensions,

will be found the most complete and authentic reference. The tables

of Sir Wn. Jonzs, WitFrorp, and Brent Ley, in the Asiatic Researches,

have the addition of dates; but as before remarked, these are hardly

admissible in the earlier periods of fabulous history.

In regard tothe tables of the Muhommadan sovereigns, it has been

thought sufficient, as their history is so readily accessible, to insert

merely their names and titles at length, to facilitate the identification

of coins, &c. where frequently only a part of the title is visible. To

connect the line of these intruders into Hindusthan, it was also una-

voidable to carry back the list to the Persian, the Arsacidan, Syrian,

and Bactrian monarchies ; for, although properly speaking beyond the

limits of India, their history is, from the time of ALEXANDER, continu-

ally mixed up with that of the rich and fruitful country so constantly

the prey to their invasions and plunder.

For the concluding catalogue of important events in the history of

British India, we are indebted to Captain HenpERson’s list, published

in the Calcutta Quarterly Magazine, which has been kindly revised

for our work by the author himself.

Hindu Theogony. 85

Taste XV. Hinpv TueEocony.

1. The Infinite Almighty Creator, of the Vedas, BRAHM.

The Hindu Trinity, or Trimurti; Brana’, VISHNU, Siva.

Saraswati, Lakshmij, Parvati,

Their -CONSOTtS,, 2... 060,05 6 {Sai or Padma, or BhawAat, or

May4, Sri, Durga.

Their attributes, ...... Creator, Preserver, Destroyer.

Their attendant vahan or ' yehicle, hansa, a goose, garuda, bird, nandi, bull.

Wtemsymolsss ms wae nin Sige 0 anes water, fire.

Mifetr WeatiONs,.. 6... 60 es os a erne as Meru, the Sun, Jupiter.

Their common titles, .. AUM. Paraméswara, Narayana, Mahadéva.

‘ Sdligram, the lingam,

Ei Pe chivpe a whichs jeemmar mentally, i and 9 under Hie

’ avataras, million epithets.

Analogues in Western Mythology, Saturn, JUPITER, - JUPITER.

2. Other members of the Hindu Pantheon, and their supposed analogues in

western mythology, according to Sir Wa. Jonus.

SARESWATI, Minerva, patroness of learning, Durea’, .. Juno.

GangEs’a, Janus, god of wisdom. [&c, Na’repa, ..Mercury, music,

INDRA, Jupiter, god of firmament. KrisHna,_ .. Apollo.

VARUNA, Neptune, god of water. Buawa'ntl’,.. Venus.

PRITHIVI, Cybele, goddess of earth. Ka‘.i’ or Pp ‘

ensue, Vulcan, architect of gods, DureGa’, i 7 lad eee

A’/RTIKEYA, : AGNi, .. .. Vulcan, fire.

or SKANDA, } Mars, god of war. Swa’Ha’, . Vesta, (his wife.)

Ka’ma, Cupid, god of love. ASWINI-

Surya, or Sol, dhe Sul KUMA/RA, } Castor & Pollux.

ARKA, Mithra, the same. ARUNA,.. - Aurora.

Hanuma’n, son \ Pain thoomionhey HOR ATAVI DEVI,. . Diana,

of Pavana, Kuvutwn Plutus, god of

Ra’Ma, Bacchus, god of wine. ‘ riches.

YAMA, Pluto or Minos. GAnea’, .- the river Ganges.

HERACULA, Hercules. Va‘yu, .- Avolus.

AswicuLapa, /@sculapius? (genii) SRi’ yy .. Ceres.

VAITARINI, The river Styx. ANNA PURNA, Anna Perenna.

3. Tue TEN Branma’nicas, children of Brahma, or Prasa’patis, lords of

created beings.

1 Marichi, morality. 6 Kritu, piety.

2 Atri, deceit. 7 Daksha, ingenuity.

3 Angirasa, charity. 8 Vasishtha, emulation.

4 Pulastya, patience. 9 Bhrigu, humility.

5 Pulaha, pride. 10 Narada, reason.

4, Tue SEVEN Menus, of the 5. THE SEVEN Ri’sHISs, sprung

present creation. direct from Brahma.

1 Swayambhuva, Adam? 4006 B. C. 1 Kasyapa, Muni.

2 Swarochesha, 2 Atri, ~.. . Muni.

3 Uttama, 3 Vasishtha.

4 Tadmasa, Chaos, Thaumaz of Egypt? 4 Visvamitra.

5 Raivata, 5 Gautama.

6 Chakshusha, § Jamadagni.

7 7 Bharadwaja.

Vaivaswata, or } Noah ? 2950 B. C

Satyavrata, : da

—

6. Tue TEN AVATA’RAS, or he

incarnations of Vishnu.

1 Matsya, the fish. 1

2 Kurma, the tortoise. 2

3 Varéha, the boar. a]

4 Narasinha, the lion. 4

5 Vamana, the dwarf. 5

6 Parasurdma, son of Jamadagni. 6

7 Rama, of the solar race. 7

8 Krishna, of the lunar race. 8

9 Buddha, of the Buddhists. 9

0 Dharma-bhushana or Kalki-avatéar, 10

to appear at the close of the Kali yuga. 11

Hindu Theogony.

THE ELEVEN Rupras, or forms

of Siva. :

Ajaikapada, ..

Ahivradhna, ..

Virupdksha, . .

Sures’wara, ..

Jayanta,

Baburtpa,

Tryambaka, ..

Apardjita,

Savrita, 30

Hara,

Isha,

The names are differently

Mohana.

Bama.

Bhawa.

Aja.

Rawati.

Ugra.

Bhima.

given in the Bhdgavat.

8. THE EIGHT VASUS;

1 Dhava,

2 Druva, le

3 Séma, the moon,

4 Vishnu,

9. THE TEN VISHWAS,

a kind of demi-god.

5 Anila, or wind.

6 Anala, or fire.

7 Prabhisha.

8 Prabhava.

a class of deity worshipped in funeral obsequies.

1 Vasu, 6 Kéma.

2 Satya, 7 Dhriti.

3 Kratu, 8 Kuru.

4 Daksha, 9 Pururava.

5 Kala, 10 Madrava.

10. Tue E1cgHT Dixpa’Las, guardians, and the r1eHT Dixpatis, lords,

of the cardinal points.

1 Indra, east. 1 Surya, the Sun.

2 Agni, (or Vahni,) south-east. 2 Sukra, Venus.

3 Yama, south. 3 Mangala, Mars.

4 Nairrita, south-west. 4 Réhu, asc. node.

5 Varuna, west. 5 Sani. Saturn.

6 Marut,(Vayu, Pavan,) north-west. 6 Chandra, the Moon.

7 Kuvera, north. 7 Budha, Mercury.

8 Isana, (Prithivi,) north-east. 8 Vrihaspati, Jupiter.

1]. THe tTwetve A’pityas; monthly names or emblems of the Sun.

1 Varuna. 5 Indra. 9 Swarnareta.

2 Surya. 6 Ravi. 10 Divakara.

3 Vedanga. 7 Gabhasti. 11 Mitra.

4 Bhanu. 8 Yama. 12 Vishnu.

12. Tue 27 NaxsHatras, daughters of Daksha, or lunar mansions.

1 Aswini. 10 Magha. 19 Mala.

2 Bharani. 11 Purva Phaélguni. 20 Purva Avsarha.

3 Kritika. 12 Uttara Phélguii. 21 Uttara A’sarha.

4 Rohini. 13 Hasta. 22 Sravana.

5 Mrigasira. 14 Chitra. 23 Dhaneshtha.

6 Ardra. 15 Swati. 24 Satabhisha.

7 Punaryasu. 16 Visdkha. 25 Purva Bhadrapada.

8 Pushya. 17 Anuradha. 26 Uttara Bhadrapada.

9 Aslésha. 18 Jayeshtha. 27 Revati.

Hindu Theogony.

la:

THE NAMES OF BubDHA.

Buddha, Sakya-muni or Sinha, Gautama, Tathagata, Mah4-sramana; Sau-

dhodani, from his father Sudhodhana; Arkabandhu, or kinsman of the Sun;

Maya-devi-suta, or child of Maya.

But, of the Musalmans.

Buddas and Sarmanes, of the Greeks.

Mercurius Maye filius, of Horace.

Bud or Wud, of the pagan Arabs.

Woden, of the Scandinavians.

Toth, of the Egyptians.

Fo, Foe, or Fo-hi, and Sa-ka, of the Chinese.

Pout, of Siam.

Sommonokodam, of ditto.

Godama, of Ava.

Xaka, of Japan.

Chakabout, of Tonquin China.

Chom-dan-das é

See tS ee

Bauddha System of Theogony.

Api-BuppHA, the Supreme Being, created by dhyan five divine Buddhas,

who are quiescent :

1 Vairochana Akshobhya.

2 Ratna.

3 Sambhava.

4 Amitabha.

Amogha Siddha.

Each of whom

roduced from

imself his son,

or Bodhisatwa,

OP OD =

viz.

Samanta Bhadra.

Vajra Pani

Ratna Pani,

Padma Pani.

Viswa Pani.

The Buddhist Triad, or mystic syllable A U M, is interpreted :—

A, the Vija mantra of the male Buddha, the generative power.

U, ditto of the female Dharma or Adi Prajni, the type of productive power.

M, ditto of Sanga, the union of the essences of both.

The seven human or earth-born Buddhas.

5 Kanaka Muni.

6 Kasyapa,

7 Sa’Kya SINHA.

A’rya Maitri, the future Buddha.

and

14, Tue 24 Jinas or TIRTHANKARAS, Of the Jains.

where born.

1 Vipasya,

2 Sikhi.

3 Viswa Bhu.

4 Karkut Chand.

1 A/’dindéth or Rishabhanath, ......

2 Ajitanath, nino

3 Sambhunath, Ro radoone

4 Abbinandananath, bematsieralte

DP MSUIMAtIMAD Mite sole. ches wel ee a

6 Padmaprabhunath, ee

7 Suparswandthy sis. 3.. os. eeeels .

8 Chandraprabha, .... Bei ois

9 Suvidhanath or Pushpadanta a id

10 Sitalandth,. 3 56

ie Sri ase Gt his So rich

12 Vasupddya,

erin NAIM ANAL eiiiclers eo .s cteleie sie 3s 0:9

LA AAW TAM AE Meu toustelalsl «ate eisteele

15 Dharmanath,...... Ja bert obo OOOe

16 Santandth,.. 4

Wiame eun Chun Girs yes csaciayciene costeus ae i

Si Aran athise esr. fs ate ee eisaste eyes

LO SMalinagth ye east tests see slotei stereo.

20° SMiumisuivrath, aoc eyes ss am tiatete 6

21 eT ee apicinb 1B

22 Naminath,.

23 Parswandth, ae stebotetelalc a aletaleterets' >

24 Vardhamdéna or Mohdvira Swami,

where died.

Ayodhya, Gujerat.

do. Mt. Sikhar [hod.

Sawanta, Parisnath. ]

Ayodhya, do.

do. do.

Kausambhi, do.

Benares, do.

Chandripur, do.

Kakendrapuri, do.

Bhadalpur, do.

Sindh, do.

Champapurt, Champapuri.

Kumpalapuri, Mt. Sikhar,

Ayodhya. do.

Ratanpuri, do.

Hastinapur, do.

do. do.

Mithila, do.

Rajgriha, do.

Mithila, do,

Dwarika, Mt. Girindra,

Benares, Mt. Sikhar.

Chitrakét. Pawapuri.

15.

Hindu Theogony.

Tue Sapta Dwi’pas or divisions of the ancient world, ruled by the sons of

PriyaBrRatTa, king of ANTARVE’DA.

Cldest division. Newer division.

Jambudwtpa, India. Jambudwipa, India.

Angudwipa, Nipal ? Plakshadwipa, Asia minor, W.

Yamadwipa, Assam, Ava? Salmalidwipa, Ceylon? W.

Yamaladwipa, Malaya. Kushadwipa, Assyria, Persia, &c.

Sankhadwipa, Africa. Karanchadwipa, near the Baltic? W. {abet

Kishadwtpa, Assyria. Sdkadwipa, part of Kushadwipa, Britain? W.

Varadhadwipa, Europe. Puskaradwitpa, ditto Ireland? W.

16. Tue Four Vepas. 17. Toe Four Upave’pas.

1 The Rig véda. 1 The Ayush, medicine.

2 The Yajur véda, 2 The Gandharva, music.

3 The Sama veda, 3 The Dhanush, .. warfare.

4 The Atharva veda. 4 The Sthadpatya, mechanics.

18. Tue Six Aneas, or bodies of learning.

1 Siksha, pronunciation. 4 Khandas, prosody.

2 Kalpa, religious acts. 5 Jyotish, astronomy.

3 Vydkarana, grammar. 6 Nirukti, interpretation of Védas.

19. Tue Four Upa’nGAs.

Purdna,

Nyaya, logic, and the

m CoM =

20.

Brahma-purdna.

Padma, or lotus.

Brahmanda, egg of Brahma.

Aygneya, or Agni, fire.

Vaishnava, or Vishnu-purana.

Garuda, Vishnu’s bird.

Brahmavaivarta, or transformations

of Krishna (as the supreme).

Sativa, or ot Siva.

Linga purana.

21.

Saiva,

Vaisnava,

Sauriya,

Ganapatya,

Sacta,

Bhagavati,

worshippers of

Som GM =

kistory, comprising the 18 puranas.

principles of knowledge.

Miménsd, religious principles and duties.

Dhrma shaéstra, law, human and divine.

THe EIGHTEEN PURA’NAS.

10 Néradiya.

1l Scanda.

12 Méarkandéya.

13. Bhavishya, prophetic.

14 Métsya, or the fish.

15 Védrdha, or boar.

} 16 Kaurma, or Kurma, tortoise.

17 Vamana, or dwarf.

18 Bhagavat, or life of Krishna.

The six Principal Sects of the Hindus.

Siva, in his thousand forms.

Vishnu.

Surya, or the Sun.

Ganesha.

. Bhawd4ni, or Parvatt.

- who recognize all 5 divinities equally.

Descendants of Swayambhuva Manu. 93

PAURA’NIC GENEALOGIES.

Taste XVI. Desscenpants of SwayamsBuuva, the first Manu,

King of Brahmavarta, and progenitor of mankind, ( Adam ? J.)

according to the Bhagavat Purdna, H.

BRAHMA.

SWAYAMBHUVA.

Ge ee Ee

UrramapapA, king of Bha- Priyavrata, king of Antarvéda*,

ratkhanda. AGNIHIDRA, king of Jambudwipa.

(From whom descended the (From whom descended ihe Kings of

Kings of Brahmavarta.) Bharatkhanda.)

Dhruva. Nabhi.

Vatsara. Rishabha-devat.

Pusparna. BuHARATA.

Vyushta. Vridhaséna.

Sarvatajas, Devatajit.

Chaxusha. Devadyumna.

Ulmuka. Purmeshthi.

Angga. Pritiha.

Vena-adharmarata. Pritiharta.

Prithu. Bhuma.

Vijilaswa, or Antardhyana, Udgitha.

Havirdhana. Prastawa.

Varhishata, or Prachinkarhi. Bibhu.

Pracheta, and 9 brothers. Prathusena.

DaxsuHa Prajapati, Nakta.

among whose numerous progeny were, Gaya.

10 daughters, married to DHARMA : Chitraratha.

13 daughters, marriedto Kasyarpa Mount, Sumrata.

the son of Maricut, (see Solar race,) Maricur. (See Solar race.)

progenitors of men, animals, vegeta- Binduma.

bles, &c. Madhu.

Dana, mother of evil genii, comets, &c. Viravrata.

Diti, mother of the Daityas, or Asuras. Manthu.

Aditi, mother of the gods and Suras. Bhauvana.

27 daughters, the Nakshatras, married to Twashtha.

the Moon. Viraja, and 100 sons, whose

1 daughter, mother of the 1] Rudras, names are unknown.

and others of less importance.

* Priyavrata was also father of Idhmajabha, king of Plava dwipa; Yagyabahu,

of Salmala dwipa; Hiranyarita, of Kusa dwipa; Ghritaprishtha, of Karang-

cha dwipa; Medhatithi, of Saka dwipa, and Bitihotra, of Puskara dwipa; of

whom the descendants are not traced farther than the first generation. 5

+ Rishabha-deva was also father of the kings of various other nations, viz. :

Kus-warta, of Kus-warta-dés ; Ila-warta, Brahma-warta, Malaya, Ketu, Bhadra-

séna, Indrasprik, Bidharbha, and Kikata, of désa, or countries, bearing the same

names: besides the nine immortal siddhas, Kabiyaga, Hari, Antarixa, Prabud-

dha, Pippulayana, Abirhotra, Dranila, Chumasa, and Karubhajana: also 81

brahmans, names unknown.

Descendants of the Sun,

Taste XVII. Tue Surya-vansa, or Sorar Dynasty,

collated from the lists of Jones, Wilson, Tod, and Hamilton.

MaricuHi.

Kasyapa Muni, married Apit1’, Daksha’s daughter, (see Table xvi.)

VIVASWANA, or SuryA, the Sun.

SRADHADEVA, or VAIVASWATA, (the sun) king of Ayodhya.

Ixwaku, in the Treta yuga.—B. C. 3500, J.—2200, T.-

From whom sprung the two Solar Dynasties

Of Ayodhya, (Oude.)

Vikuxi, (did not reign, W.)

Kukutst’ha, or Puranjaya.

Anénas eee

Paste. \ An-Ps itha, T.

Viswagandhi, Visvagaswa, W.

Ardra, T. W.

Chandra, Bhadrardray W.

Yuvandswa,

Srdva, Svasava, H.

Vrihadas’wa,

Dhundhumara, Kuvalay4swa, W.

Drid’has’wa,

Haryas’wa,

Nikumbha,

Ciwseaa Varunaswa, T. H.

¥ Sankataswa, W.

Senajit, Prasenajit, W.

Yuvanaswa, H.W. car. J.

2 ; Suvindhu, T.

Bigot, King of Saptadwipa.

Purukutsa,

Trasadasyu, car. T.

Anaranya,

Prishadaswa, W.

Haryas’wa, H. W.

Praruna, Aruna, H. Vosumana, W.

Trivindhana, Tridhanwa, W.

Satyavrata, Trayaruna, W.

Suvritha, T. car. J. H. W.

Tris’anku,

HariscHanpRa, king of India.

Réohita, Kobitaswa, H.

Harita,

Champa, Chunchu, W.

Sudéva, car. T. W.

Vijaya, (his brother; Kurm. Pur.)

Bharuca,

Vrika,

Bdhuka, Bahu, W.

SaGaRA, had 10,000 sons.

Asamanjasa, only survivor.

Ansuman,

Dulipa, W.T.H. car. J.

Bhagirat’ha, brought down Ganges river.

Sruta,

Nabhaga,

Ambarisha, T. W.

Sindhudwipa,

Of Maithila, (Tirhut.)

Nimi.

Janaka, built Janakpur.

Udvasu.

Nandiverdhana.

Suketu.

Dewarata.

Vrihadratha.

Mahabirya.

Sudhrita.

Dbhristaketu.

Haryaswa.

Maru.

Pratipaka.

Kritiratha.

Devamirha.

Visruta.

Mahadhritt

Dhritiratu.

Maharoma.

Swarnaroma.

Haraswaroma.

(father of S1’ra’,

who married

SwapHasa,{ Ra’Ma. (see

the parallel line

of Ayodhya.)

TA the bride of Ra’ma be correctly

of Si”

This list is imperfect in number, if the father

placed.

Kesidhaja.

Dharmadhwaja.

Kritadhwaja.

Kesidhwaja.

Bhanuman.

Satadyumuna.

Suchi.

Sunadhwaja.

Urdhaketu.

Ayu,

Purajit.

Arishtanemi.

Srutayu.

Supanswaka.

Chitraratha.

Kshemadhi.

Samaratha.

Satyaratha.

Upa guru.

Upajupta.

Baswananta.

Yugudhana.

Surya Vansa or Solar races. 95

Ayodhya rdjas, continued. Mithila rdjas, continued.

Ayutayush, Subhasana.

Ritaperna, Sruta.

Nala, T. Jaya.

Sawakama, W. T. } car. J. H. Vijaya.

Saudasa, Ritu.

Kalmashapada, W. Hi. car. J.T. Sunaka.

Asmaka, Bitahalya.

Malaca, Harikavacha, W. Dhriti.

Das/arat’ha, Bahulaswa.

Aidabida, Ilivita, W. Kriti.

Vis’wasaha, Mahabasi.

K’hatwanga, Kharbhanga, T.

Dirghabahu,

Raghu,

Aja,

Das’arat’ha, II. W.

his brothers

Ra’ma, A.C. 2029, J. | Bharata,

950, B. 1100, T. Lakshmana,

Satroghana, SOLAR Line oF Vusara, (also

Dwépar yuga or brazen age._ descended from Sradha-deva.)

Kusha, Lava, T. Dishta, king of Vesala,

Atithi, Nabhaga.

Nishadha, Bhalandana.

Nabhas, or Nala, T. Vatsaprité.

Pundarika, Prangsu. )

Xemadhanwas, Pramati.

Déyanica, Dwarika, W. Khanitra.

Ah/inagu, Ahinaja, W. Hina, H. Chaxusha.

Kuru, W. car. J. H. Bibingsati.

Piriputra, Rambhu.

Dala, W. Bala, H. Khaninetra, Vv ;

Rana-chhala, Dharmika, } car. Vansalata.

Uktha, W. car. J. H. Karandhama.

Vajranabha, . Adixita.

Arca, car. W.T.H. Maruta.

Sugana, Sankhandbhi, W. Dama,

Vidhriti, Vijuthitabhi, W. Rajyavarodhana, } Gers ae

Viswasaha, 11. W. Visitaswa, T. Sudhbriti.

Hiranyanabha, Nara, car. do.

Pushpa, Pushya, H. Kebala.

Dhruvasandhi, car. T. Dhundhumana, or Bandhuman.

Suders’ana, car. W. Begawan,

Agniverna, Apaverma, W. Budha, } car. do.

Sighra, Trinavindhu.*

Manu, Maru, W.T. H. Besabiraja, or Visala, who found-

Prasusruta, ed Vaisali, (Allahabad.)

Sandhi, .. Susandhi, W. Hemachandra,

Amers’ana, Amersha, W. Dhumraxa.

Mahaswat, Avaswana, T. Sangyam.

Vis’wabh4hu, } Viswasava, T. Sahadeva, car. V. L.

Prasénajit, {earn Ww. Krisaswa.

TACSHACA, Somadatta.

Vrihadbala, Sumati, (ends V. L.)

Vribadsan'a, B. C. 1300 Jonss. Janamejaya.

* His daughter, Brabira, married Visvarawa Muni, the father, (by another

wife, Nikax4,) of Ra’vana the demon king of Lanka or Ceylon, afterwards

killed by Ra’mMa.

96 Solar line concluded—Chandra vansa or

Kali yuga—iron, or fourth age, 3101 B.C.

Urukriya, Uruxepa, W. 7]

Vatsa, W. car. J.

Vatsa-vriddha, Vytha, W.

Prativyéma, BENTLEY places these 8 n i i

Bhanu, car. W. r after Raw Bi ita sd

Dévaca. car. T.

Sahadéva,

Vira, car. W. T.

Vrihadas’wa.

Bhanumat, Bahman, Longimanus of Persia? T.

Prat/icés’wa, car. W.

Supratica,

Marudéva,

Sunaxatra,

Pushcara, Kesinara, W.

Antarixa, Rekha, T.

Suta, Sutapas, Suverna, W.

Amitrajit,

Vrihadraja,

Barhi, Dherma, W. 3

Kritanjaya, first emigrant from Kosala, (Oude) and founder of the Suryas in

Saurashtra, T.

Rananjaya,

Sanjaya,

Slécya, Sakya, W. T.

Suddhéda, Kroddhodana, W. Sudipa, T.

Langalada, Sangala, T. Ratula, W.

Prasénajit,

Xudraka, Romika, T.

Kundaka, W. car. J.

Surita, W. car. J.

Sumitra, B. C. 2100, J. 57, T. The last name in the Bhdgavat Purdna, said

to be contemporary with VikrRama’piTya ? T. from this Prince the Mewdr

chronicles commence their series of Rajaés of Saurashtra; see Table xxvyi.

Taste XVIII. Cuanpra-vansa, Inpu-vansa, or Lunar Racz, who

reigned in Antarvéda and Kasi; afterwards in Magadha, ( Behar,}

and Indrapreshtha, ( Dethi.)

Arrr’, Muni.

Soma, (Lunus, the Moon.)

Buppua, (Mercury) married Zé daughter of the Sun.

AILAS, or Purtravas.

AXU, Kings of Kisi also descended from him, (see below.)

NanvusHa, (Devanahusha, Dionysos, Bacckus, Wp.)

Yayati, father of Puru and Yadu, (see next page.)

Kings of Kasi, (Benares.)

Xetravriddha, son of Ayu. Ritadwaja.

Suhatra. Alarka.

K Asi. Santati.

Kasi. Sunitha.

Rashtra. Suketana.

Dirghatama. Dharmaketu.

Dhanwantra. Satyaketu.

Ketumana. Dhrishtaketu.

Bhimaratha. Sukamara.

Divopa’sa, becomes a Buddhist, Bitihotra.

Dyamana. ’ Bharga.

Pratardan. Bhargabhumi, (endin Bhdgavat, P.)

orwWh

Lunar Race—Lines of Puru and Yadu.

Line of Puru.

Puru, king of Pratishthana.

Janamejaya, king of Antarveda.

Prachinwat,

Pravira,

Manasya,

Abhayada,

Sudhyumna,

Bahugava,

Samyati,

Dhamyiti,

Raudrasva,

Ritéya, car. W.

Rantibhara, Rantimara, W.

Sumati, Tansa, W.

Raibhi or Ailina, car. W.

Dushmanta or DusHYANTA,

band of Sakuntald.

Buarata, king of Antarveda and

India.

Vitatba, or Bharadwaja, adopted.

Manya,

Vrihatxetra,

Suhotra,

Hasrt, built Hastinapur.

hus-

Ajamirha, reigned at do.

Rixa, do.

Samvarana.

Kuru, from whom also descended

the Magadha princes, see tab. xx.

Jahnu,

Suratha,

Viduratha,

Sarvabhauma,

Jayatséna,

Radhica, Aravi, W-

Ayutaya, Ajita, H.

Krodhana,

Devatithi, car. W.

Rixa,

Bhimaséna, car. J.

Dilipa,

Pratipa,

SANTANU, incarnation of Varuna,

From whom 2 sons.

Fang ask

Line of Yadu.

Yanu, excluded from succession.

Kroshta,

Vrijinavan,

Swahi,

Rishedyu,

Chitraratha,

SARAVINDU,

Prithusravas,

Tamas, or Dharma.

Usanas,

Siteshu, Siteyas, W. car. H.

Ruchaka, Rukshma, W.

Kavalha, W. car. J.

Pardvrata, line extinct.

Jamodhya, Jyamagha,

W >; from Saravindu

by another line.

Vidarbha,

Krotha,

Kunti,

Drashti, Vrishni, W.

Nirvrati,

Dasharha,

Vyoma, Vijaman, W.

Jimutra,

Vikrati,

Bhimaratha,

Navaratha,

Dasaratha,

Sakuni,

Kusambha,

DEVARATA,

Devaxetra,

Madhu,

Anavaratha,

Kuru-vatsa,

Anuratha,

Purubotra,

Ayu, Angasa, W,

Satwata, (several branches.)

Andhaka, ditto.

Bhajaména,

Viduratha,

Sura,

Sami, Samana, W.

Dhritarishta, Vichitravirya, whose Pratixetra,

daughter

Vya’sa, and bore

Pannvu, whose

bore the five Pandavas, viz:

YupuHISHTHIRA, (see Table xix.)

Duryodhana.

married Swayambhuva,

Hridika, (several branches.)

wife Devamida,

Sura, (numerous progeny by Marusa.)

Vasudeva, the eldest, who had 13 wiyes,

Arsuna, father of Parixita, (seedo.) KrisHna and BALAra’mA, with whom

Bui’/MASENA, no descendants.

NaxuL, and | founded the Maga-

SanaApeva, Jf dhaline, (Tab. xx.)

this line becomes extinct,

by quarrel of the Vddus.

Synchronisms of the Solar and Lunar races, T.

Budha of the Lunar race married I]4, the sister of Ixwaku, s. 1.

T. | Harischandra, s. 1. cotemporary of Parasurdma, of lunar line.

Sagara, cot. of Taljanga, of do.

Ambarisha, cot. of Gadhi, founder of Canauj.

Lunar Line of Indrapreshtha.

TasLE XIX. Panvu Dynasty of InprRaprestHa, or Delhi.

Continued from the line of Puru of the Chandra vansa, or Lunar line, and col-

lateral with the Magadha Princes, descending from JARASANDBA, Of Tab. xx.

According to the Rdjavali, T.

According to the Bhagavat Purdna, H.

YUDHISTHIRA, lst King of Indrapreshta—no issue.

B.C. 3101 J. Parixita, son of ARJUN, succeeds.

1300 W. Janamejaya, W.

1100 T. Satanika,

Sahasranika, car. W.

Aswamedhaja,

Asimakrishna, Nichakra, W.

Nemi, king of Hastinapur, (washed away.) Dehtwana.

Chakia, built Kausambhi.

Ukata, king of Kausambhi, Ushna, W.

Chitraratha,

Kabiratha, car. W.

Vrishnemana, Dhrihtimdén, W.

Susena,

Mahipati, car. W.

Sunitha,

Richa,

Sukhinala, | Nnchae

Sukhavati,

Pariplawa,

Sunaya,

Medhabi,

Nripanjaya,

Durba, Mridu, W.

Timi, Tigma, W.

Vrihadratha,

Sudasa, Vasudana, W.

Satanika,

Durdamana, Udayana, W.

Bahinara, Ahinara, W.

Dandapani,

Nimi, Niramitra, W.

Xemaka, car. W.

Ww.

Parixita.

Janameja.

Asmund.

Adhuna.

Mahajuna.

Jesrita,

Ugarséna.

Surséna,

Sutasshama,

Résmaroja,

Bachil.

Sootpala.

Narhurdéva.

Jesrita.

Bhupata.

Seovansa.

Médavi.

Sravana.

Kikan,

Pudharat.

Dasunama.

Adelika.

Huntavarnu:

Dandapala.

DunsAla.

Sénpala.

Khévanraj, deposed,

and Pandu line

ended. T.

The Rdjavali continues the Indraprestha sovereigns of the Lunar race, through

Second Dynasty, 14 princes,

reigned 500 years.

Viserwa,

with Sisunaga? T.)

Surien.

Sirsah.

Ahangsal,

Vyerjita.

Durbara.

Sodpala.

Sursana.

Singraja.

Amargoda.

Amarpala.

Sérbéhé,

Padharat.

Madpal, slain by his Rajput

minister.

(contemporary Mahraje,

Third Dynasty.

Ferishta? T.

Sriséna.

Mahipala.

Mahavali.

Srupvarti.

Netraséna.

Samukdana.

Jetmala,

Kaélanka.

Kalmana.

Sirmandan.

Jeywanga.

Hergija.

Hiraséna.

Antinai, resigned to

minister.

Maharaje of

his

three more Dynasties, T. viz.:

Fourth Dynasty.

Séndhwaja.

Mahaganga.

Nada.

Jewana.

Udiya.

Jehala.

Ananda.

Rajp4la, invaded Kemaon,

and killed by Sukwanti,

who seized on Indra-

preshtha, whence he was

expelled by Vikraméadi-

tya, T.

Taste XX. Kinas or Macanpua, or Central India, hod. Behar,

Lunar Dynasty of Magadha.

the INpu, or CHanpra Vansa, Capital, Rdjagriha.

Barhadratha Dynasty, (see Tab. xviii.)

Curv. Cushagra.

Sudhanu. Vrishabha.

Suhotra, Pushpavana,

Chyavana. Satyasahite.

Kritadha. Urja.

Visruta. Sambhava.

Uparichara,

Line of Pandu, (brought on from page 97.)

JARASANDHA, cot. of Yudhishthira and Krishna, B. C. 3101? J.

B. C. 1400,

915.

777.

415.

W. Sananpe’vA, Parixita born, great war ends.

Marjéri, or Somapi, W.

Srutaman.

Ayutaya.

Niramitra.

Suxatra.

Vrihat-karma, or -séna.

Senajit.

Srutanjaya.

Vipra.

Suchi.

Xemya.

Suvratha.

Dherma-sutra.

Nribhrata, Wo.

Susrama.

Drirhaséna, Vrihadséna, Wo.

Sumanti.

Suvala, Suddhamva, Wo.

Sunita.

Satyajit.

Viswajit.

LE)

Ripunjaya, 700 Wp.a Buddha born in his reign, As. Rs. II. 138.

Sunaka Dynasty, Kings of Bharatkhanda, reigned 128 years.

Pradyota,-B. C. 700, Wp. 650? Bud. Chron. 2100, Jonzs.

Pélaka.

Visakhyapa.

Janaka, Rajaca or Ajaca, Wo.

Nandiverddhana, or Takshac, T.

Sisundgas or S’esndégs, reigned 360 years.

Sisunaga, 1962, T. 550, Wp. 472, B. Ww

IKaaeVChOId ss) ciclo crete sists setar eka le ATR ae

Xemadherma.

Xetranja.

Vidhisara.

Agata satTrRu, 450 Wo. 551 Bud. Chron. of Ava.

Darbhaka, Dasaca.

Udayaswa, Udasi, Ajaya.

Nandiverddhana.

Maha nandi, Mahabali, Wp. 355.

Sumalya, or Vikhyaat, T.

Nawnpa, 1602 J. 340, W.

The nine Nandas, reigned 100 years.

- 100

Lunar Dynasty of Magadha—of Andhra.

Maurya Dynasty, governed 137 years.

B.C. 315. W. Cuanpracupra, Sandracottus of Greeks, 1502 J.

178.

66.

Varis4ra, Vindusara.

Asoka, patron of the Buddhists, 330, Bud. Chron.

Suyasas, Sujaswa, T. Culata, Wo.

Dasaratha, car. T. Wo.

Sangata, Bandupalita, Wo.

Salisuka, Indrapalita, Wo.

Devadharma, Wo.

Somaserma.

Satadhanwa.

Vrihadratha.

Sunga Dynasty, 110 years.

Pushpamitra, 1365, J.

Agnimitra, - | oss, T.

Suyeshtha,

Vasumitra,

Ardraka, Abhadraca, Wp. Badraka, T.

Pulindaka.

Ghosha-vasa.

Vajramitra, Vicramitra, Wo.

Bhagavata.

Devabhiati.

Kanwa Dynasty, 45 years.

Vasudeva, 1253, J. car. T.

Bhumitra. cot. of Vikramaditya, T.

Nardyana, Parana, T. [Sipraka.)

Susarma, (WiILFoRD supposes interval of 150 years before

Taste XXI. Anpura or Vrispata Dynasty, of Andhra, (Orissa ?)}

or Telingana, in continuation of the Magadha line.

(See WiLrorp’s comparative list from the Bh4gavat, and three other Puranas,

in the 9th Vol. of As. Res.) The 30 generations occupy 456 years.

BoC... 21.

408.

A. D. 428.

Sipraka, Balin, Balihita, B. C. 908, J. A.D. 190, Wo.

Krishna.

Saétakarni.

Purnotsanga, Apeaen ct Se ANE

Satakainas Wr teasers

Lombodara,

Vivilaca, Apilica, Wo.

Megha-Swati.

Putaimén.

Arishtakarna, car. Bhaig. Purana.

Hala.

Puttalaka, Tiluk, T.

Pravillaséna.

Sundara-Sat-karna, IT.

Chakora-Sét-karna, IVI.

Siva-swati.

Gomatiputra, GAurami1, Wp. A. D. 500.

Puliman Purimat.

S4t-karni, IV. car. Bhag. Purana.

Sivasri.

Sivaskanda.

Yajnasri. Yeug nai of Chinese? Wo.

Vijaya.

Chandra-sri, or vijaya, last Magadha king, 300, J. 546, T.

Pulomarchhi, Poulomien of Chinese? Wp. dics, 648, win, ID

Salomdhi, T. cot. of es Rawal of Méwar, A. D. 720 ?

Rdjas of Cashmir. 101

Taste XXII. Rasas of Casumi'r, of the Line of Cunu in the Lunar

race: worshippers of Ndgas or Snakes.

The Rdja Taringini, whence this line is taken, commences with an account of

the desiccation of the valley by Casyarpa Muni: supposed to allude to the

deluge.—Wiuuson, As. Rs. xv. 1.

B. C.

First Period—Caurava race, 1266 years.

3714 Cashmir colonised by Casyapa, B. C. 2666, W..

2448

1709

1664

1660

1600

1573

1537

1477

1471

1394

1332

1302

1277

1217

Fifty-three Princes, names omitted by Hindu writer, but partly

supplied by Muhammedan authority, as follows:

Suliman.

Cassalgham.

Maherkaz.

Bandu-khan, (PAanpvu of the Lunar line?)

Ladi-khan.

Ledder-khan.

Sunder-khan,—Hindu worship established.

Cunder-khan.

Sunder-khan.

Tundu-khan.

Beddu-khan.

Mahand-khan.

Durbinash-khan,

Deosir-khan.

Tehab-khan, dethroned by king of Cabul.

Calju-khan.

Luvkhab-khan.

Shermabaram-khan.

Naureng-khan, conquered China.

Barigh-khan.

Gowasheh-khan.

Pandu-khan, II. extended empire to the sea.

Haris-khan.

Sanzil-khan.

Akber-khan.

Jaber-khan.

Nauder-khan.

Sanker-khan, slain by

Bakra Raja.

an interval ensues, and authentic history commences with

Gonerda, I. Kali Yuga, 653. Gonanda or Agnand, a relation

of Jarasundha, 1400, W. B.C. 1045, P.

Damodara, Ist.

Gonerda, II.

Thirty-five Princes ; names forgotten.

Lava, (Bal-iava) Loo of Muhammedan historians. B.C. 570, P.

Causésaya.

Khagéndra.

Suréndra, cot. with Bahman of Persia.

Godhara, Gowdher, A. A.

Suverna, Suren, do,

Janaca, Jenak, do.

Sachinara, Seijuner, do.

Asoca, established Buddhism. (See pages 78, 100, B.C, 250 2)

Jaloca, adopted castes.

Daémodara, Il. a Saiva ; transformed into a snake.

Hushcea,

Jushea, j tarts Princes, re-established Buddhism.

€anishea,

Abhimanyu, an orthodox Hindu, B. C. 423, W. B.C. 73, P.

102

Rajas of Cashmir.

Second Period, Gonerdiya Dynasty, 1013 years ; or 378 years after adjustment, W.

B.C. 1182 Gonerda, III. Naga worship resumed, B. C. 388 W.108, P.

B, C.

A. D.

1147 Vibhishana, 370

1096 Indrajita, 352

1060-6 Rédvana, 334

1030-6 Vibhishana, IT. 316

993 Nara, (Kinnara) persecuted Buddhists, 298

953-3 Siddha, 280

893-3 Utpalaxa, Adutbulabeh, A. A. 262

862-9 Hiranyaxa, Teernya, o 244

825-2 MHiranyacula, Herenkul, af 226

765-2 VaA4siacula, Ebeshak, a 218

705-2 Mihirdcula, invaded Lanka or Ceylon, 200

635-2 Vaca, 182

572-2 Xitinanda, (Nandana,) 164

542-2 WVasunanda, Vistnand, A.A. 146

490 Nara, IJ. or Bara—Nir, ,, a 128

430 Axa, Aiea 160

370 Gopaditya, a pious brahmanist, Kulvarit, A. A. 82

310 Gokerna, Kurren, ie 64

253 Narendraditya, Nurundrawut, - 46

216-9 Yudhisht’hira, surnamed the blind, (see Lunar race?) 28

Aditya Dynasty, 192 years.

168-9» Pratapaditya, kinsman of Vicramaditya, B.C. 10 W.

136-9 Jalaucas, Juggooh, A. A. A. D. 22

104-9 Tunjina, a great famine, Bunjir, ua 54

66-9 Vijaya, Bejeery, 3 90

60-9 Jayéndra, Chander, a 98

23-9 A/’rya Raja, of miraculous accession, 135 400, P.

Gonerdiya Line restored, 592 years, or 433 adjusted,

23-3 Méghavahana, Megdahen, A. A. invited Bauddhas, and

invaded Ceylon.

57-9 Sréshtaséna, or Pravaraséna.

87-3 Hiranya, contention with Toramadna Yuvardja, contem-

porary with Vicramaditya.

117-5 Matrigupta, a brahman from Ujjain, succeeds by election, 471 W.

122-2 Pravaraséua, invaded Siladitya of Gujerat, (tab. XXVil.) 476

185-2 Yudhisht’hira, II. 499

224-5 Nandravat, Naréudraditya, or Lakshman/a, 522

237-5 Ranaditya, married daughter of Chola Raja, 545

537-5 Vicramaditya, supposed an interpolation (Ujain princes ?) 568

579-5 Baladitya, last of the Gonerda race, 592

Naga or Carcota Dynasty, 260 years, 5 months.

615-5 Durlabhaverddhana, contemporary with Yezdijird.

651-5 Pratépaditya, founded Pratépapur.

Durlabhaca, car. W.

701-5 Chandrapira, or Chandranand, a virtuous prince.

710-1 ‘Tarapira, a tyrant.

714-1 Laxira’pitya, conquered Yasovarma of Canouj, (? Yasovig-

750-8 Cuvalayapira. [raha of inscriptions) and overran India.

751-8 Vajraditya.

758-8 Prithivyapira.

762-10 Sangramapira.

769-10 Jajja, an usurper, deposed by

772-10 Jaya’pi’RA, married daughter of Jayanra of Gaur, encouraged

learning, invaded Bhima Séna of Gujerat, 841?

803-10 Lalitapira.

815-10 Sangr4m4pira, II. or Prithivydpira.

822-10 Vrihaspati, or Chippatajaya, son of a prostitute, whose five bro-

thers governed in his name.

Rajas of Cashmir. 103

834-10 Ajitapira, set up by the same usurpers.

870-10 Anangapira, restored to the succession.

873-10 Utpalapira, last of the Carcota race.

Utpala Dynasty, 84 years, 5 months.

875-10 A’ditya Verma, or Avanti Verma, a severe famine.

904-1

922-9

924-9

926-9

941-9

942-9

952-9

953-9

954-3

954-9

956-3

957-7

959-9

960-3

969-3

969-9

971-3

979-9

993-9

994-10

996-10

1001-1

1024-7

1032

1054

1062

1662

1072

1002

1072

1088

1110

1119

1126

1135

1153

1167

1190

1206

1227

1261

1275

Sancara Verma, invaded Gujjara and Raja Bhoja, (? see Mélwd,)

Cashmir cycle brought into use, 59.

Gopala Verma, killed youth.

Sancatié, last of the Verma race.

Sugandha Rani, recommended the election of

Part’ha.—The Tatris and Ecangas powerful.

Nijita Verma, also called Pangu, the cripple.

Chacra Verma, civil wars.

Sura Verma.

Part’ha, a second time.

Chacra Verma, do.

Sancara Verdhana.

Chacra Verma, a third time.

Unmatti Verma.

Sura Verma, II.

Last or mixed Dynasty, 64 years, 4 months.

Yasascara Déva, elected sovereign.

Sangrama Déva, dethroned and killed by

Parvagupta, slain at Suréswari Xétra.

Xemagupta, destroyed many Viharas of Buddhists.

Abhimanyu, intrigues and tumult.

Nandigupta, put to death by his grand-mother Didda.

Tribhuvana, shared the same fate.

Bhimagupta, ditto.

Didda Rani, assumed the throne herself, adopts

Sangrama Déva, 11. (with whom WILson’s list closes.)

Harirdéja and A’nanta deva,* his sons, (continued from the printed

Taringini.)

Kalasa.

Utkarsha, and Harsha deva.

Udayama Vikrama, son of the latter.

Sankha Raja.

Salha, grandson of Udayama.

Susalha, usurper, do. i d

Mallina, his brother, (end of Kalhana Pandit’s list.)

Jaya Sinh, son of Susalha, (Jona Raja’s list.)

Paramana.

Bandi deva.

Bopya deva.

Jassa deva, his brother, an imbecile.

Jaga deva, son of Bopya.

Raja deva.

Sangrama deva, III. a relation.

Rama deva.

Lakhana deva, adopted. ,

Sinha deva, new line; killed by his brother-in-law

Sinha deva, 11. an usurper, who was himself deposed and killed

by the Milechas under Raja Dullach (?)

* The lengths of reigns only are given in the original: calculating therefore back-

wards from Ala-uddin, it becomes necessary to curtail the reign of Hariraja, (52

years,) by about 30 years, to form a natural link with WILSON’s date of Sangréma

deva. P.

E 2

104 Chohan Dynasty of Delhi.

The Bhota Dynasty.

1294 Sri Rinchana, obtained throne by conquest.

1294 Kota Rani, his wife.

Udydna deva, her second husband. Their minister, Shah Amfr,

killed the whole family, and succeeded under the name of

Sri Shamsh uddfn.

18 Musulman princes succeeded, names not recorded.

Vikhyana Bhatt, overcame the last of these.

1298? Jayansara, his son who was overcome by the Sultan

1300 ALLA uppI‘n, Muhammed Shah.

[The names of the Muhammedan chiefs, who held possession of the valley, some-

times independently, under the Patan and Moghel-Emperors, are so disfigured in

Nagari characters, as to be hardly recognizable. Jona Réaja’s list continues to

Zein-ul-ab-ud-din, 815 Hij. whence Sri Vara Pandit continues it to Fatteh Shah,

A. D. 1477. The Rdjavalt Patdca, brings on the line to Akber’s conquest in 1560,

see Muhammedan dynasties. |

Taste XXIII. Coonan or Cuanuman Dynasty, at Ajmir, Delhi,

and afterwards Kotah and Bundi.

The Chohans, one of the four Agnicula tribes, Chohdns, Purihars, Solanki and

Pramira, said to have been produced by a convocation of the gods on mount

Abu,—supposed of Parthian descent, Tov.

B. C. 700 AwNALA, or Anhul Chouhan, established at Garra Maudela.

Suvacha,

Mallan, source of Mallani tribe ?

Galan Sar.

A.D. 145 <Astea’La, Chakravartti, founder of Ajmir, 202 of Virdt era?

500 Samanta Déva, 7

Maha Déva, |

Ajaya Sinh, ? Ajipala.

Vicaiceaise a

Vindasur,

Vairi Vihanta,

684 Dola Rai, lost Ajmir to Muhammedans.

695 Manixya Rai’, founded Sdmbhar: hence title of SAmbri Rao,

slain by Moslem invaders under Abul Ads; eleven

names only in Jaééga’s catalogue, T.

Mahésinha.

Chandra Gupta, (of Allahabad pillar incription? See Canouj.)

Pratap Sinh.

Mohan Sinh.

Setarai.

Nagahasta.

Lohadh4r.

Vira Sinh, IT.

Vibudh Sina.

Chandra Ray.

770 Harihara Ray, (Hursr4j, T.) defeated Subactegin.

Basanta Rai.

Balianga Rai, (Belundeo? T.) or Dheruca Gaj, slain defending

Pramatha Rai. Ajmir against Sultan Mahmad.

Anga Raja, (Amilla Déva, Delhi inscription.)

1016 W. Vuisauta De’va*, from inscriptions, 1031 to 1095, Top. inter-

polated date in the books of Chand, S. 921.

Saranga Déva, a minor.

Ana Déva, constructed the Anah Sdgar, at Ajmir.

Hispal, (of Ferishta) father of

* The lath of Firoz, bearing Visala Déva’s name, is dated S. 1230, in the

reign of Vigraha Rai Déva.

977

1000

1176

1192

Haravatit Dynasty. 105

Jaya Sinh, (or Jypal of Ferishta, burned himself, 1000, see Malwa)

extended his dominion to Lahore, &c.

Ananda Déva, (or Ajay deo) Anandpal, F.

Soméswara, married daughter of Anangpal of Delhi.

Prithiray, of Lahore, obtained Delhi, slain by Shahabuddin, 1192.

Rainasi, slain in the sack of Delhi, T.

Vijaya Ray, adopted successor of Plithiray, (see Delhi pillar.)

Lakunsi, thence 26 generations to Nonad Sinh, present chief of

Nimrdna, nearest lineal descendant of Ajipal and Prithirdj.

Taste XXIV. Haravati or Harauti branch of the Coonan Dynasty.

The Haras are descended from ANURA’JA, a son Of VISALADE/VA or more

A. D. 1024

1192

1298

1300

1341

1419

1485

1533

1534

1575

1578

1652

1658

1681

1718

1743

1770

1821

1579

1630

1657

1669

1685

probably of Ma’nixya Rat’, T. see preceding table.

Anur4ja, took possession of Asi, or Hansi, in Haridna.

Ishtpéla, obtained Asérgarh, miraculously.

Chand Karna.

Lok Pal.

Hami’RA, (known in Prithiraja wars ;) killed in 1192.

Kalkarna.

Maha Magd.

Rao Bacha.

Rao Chand, slain with all but one son by Alla-uddin.

Rainsi, protected at Chitor, obtained Bhynsror.

Kolan, declared lord of the Pathar, (ceutral India.)

Rao Bango, took possession of the Hun court of Myndl.

Rao Déva, summoned to Lodi’s court, abdicated to his son

Hara Raja, founded Bundi: country called Haravati after him.

Samarsi, (Samara Sinh,) eonquered the Bhils,

Napatji, feud with Solankhi chief of Thoda.

Hama-ji, defied supremacy of Rana of Mewar.

Birsingh.

Biru.

Rao Banda, a famine, 1487, expelled by his brothers

Samarcandi and Amarcandi, who ruled 12 years.

Narain Das, recovers Bundt.

Suraj Mal, assassinated by Chitor Raina.

Soortan, a tyrant, banished.

Rao Arjun, his cousin, killed in defence of Chitor.

Rao Raja Surjan, Chunar, and Benares given to him.

Rao Bhoja, separation of Bundi and Kota.

Bundi branch.

Rao Ratan, built Ratanpur, his son Madha Sinh receives Koté from

Gopinath. (Jehdngir, henceforward separation.

Cuatra Sa’L, took Kalberga, under A’urangzéb, killed with 12

princes in battle of Ujain.

Bhao Sinh, received govt. of Aranydbdd under A’urangzéb.

Anurad Sinh.

Budh Sinh, supported Bahadur Shah, dispossessed by Jypur Rdja.

Omeda, regains Bundi, 1749, with Holkar’s aid, retires 1771, dies

Ajit Sinh, Jugraj, murders Rina of Mewar. (1804.

Rao Raj Bishen Sinh, minor, protects Col. Monson’s flight.

Ram Sinh.

Kotah Branch.

Madhu Sinh, son of Rao Ratan, see above.

Mokund Sinh,

Jagat Sinh.

Keswar Sinh.

Ram Sinh.

106

1707

1719

1723

1765

1770

1819

Haravati Dynasty—Kotah branch—Malwd.

Bhim Sinh, entitled Maharao.

Arjun.

Durjan Sal, without issue, Zalim Sinh, born 1740.

Ajit, grandson of Bishen Sinh.

Chatr Sal, succeeded by his brother.

Goman Sinh,—Zalim Sinh, Foujdar.

Omeda Sinh, 4 Regent.

Kiswar Sinh, Madhu Sinh, do.

TaBLE XXV. Rdsas of Mauwa, Capitals Ujjayana, and Mandor.

This line is taken from Abul Fazl, and is supposed to have heen furnished from

Jain authorities : it agrees nearly with appendix to Agni Purdna, (WiLFoRD.)

In early ages Mahahmah founded a fire Temple, disapproved by the Buddhists, but

B.C. 840

760

670

680

580

400

390

360

271

664

069

674

734

735

745

795

770

restored by

Dhanji, (Dhananjaya, aname of Arjun,) about 785 before Vicrama-

ditya, (see Anjana, Burmese list ?)

Jitchandra.

Salivahana.

Nirvahana.

Putra Rajas, or Vansdvalis, without issue.

Aditya Punwar, elected by nobles, (cot. Sapor, A. D. 191. W.)

Birma or Brahma Raja, reigned in Vidharbanagar.

Atibrahma, at Ujjain, defeated in the north.

Sadhroshana, (Sadasva-Séna*.

Heymert, Harsha Mégha, killed in battle (misplaced, WD.)

Gundrup, Gardabharupa, Bahram-gor? of WiLForp.

VicraMADITYA (3rd of WiLForp. A. D. 441 Yesdejird ?) Tuar tr.

Chandrasén, possessed himself of all Hindustan.

Karaksén, Surya Séna, W. 676.

Chaturkot, (Sactisinka succeeded, W.)

Kanaksén, (see Sawrashtra which he conquered ? 144. T.)

Chandrapal.

Mahendrapal.

Karmchandra.

Vijyananda, adopted asuccessor (his son being aninfant) Sindula, W.

Mupja, killed in the Dekhan, (reigned A.D. 993 according to Top.)

Buosa, (S. 540,) by Top. 567 A. D.+ Kalidas flourished.

Jayachandra, put aside in favor of

Jitpal, of the Tenore (Tudr) caste (Chaitra Chandra, Bavishya P.)

Rana Raja.

Rana Baju.

Rana Jalu.

Rana Chandra.

Rana Bahadur.

Rana Bakhtmal.

Ray Subenpal.

Ray Keyretpal.

Ray Anangapal, (rebuilt and peopled Delhi, 791, T.)

Kunwerpal.

Raja Jagdeva, of the Choh4n tribe.

Jagannath.

Hara deva.

Vasu deva.

* VAsudeva of Witrorp, Basdeo, Fer. A. D. 390, father-in-law of Bahram,

(see Canouj.)

+ The other two R4jas Bhoja, Top fixes in 665 (from Jain MSS.) and 1035,

the father of Udayati.

Rapas of Malwi—of Saurdshtra. 107

786 Suradeva.

801 Dharmadeva.

815 Bhaldeva.

825 Nanakdeva.

834 Keyratdeva.

845 Pithoura.

866 Maldeva, conquered by Shekh Shah, father of Ala-ud-din.

Shekh Shah, from Ghazni.

1037 Dharma Raja Soud, Vizir during minority of

1057 Alla-ud-din, who put him to death.

Kemal-ud-din, murdered by

1069 Jitpal Chohan, (Jaya Sinh of Delhi and Lahore? 977,) a descen-

dant of Manikya Rai?

1089 Harachanidra.

1109 Keyratchand.

1111 Oogersein.

1124 Surajnanda.

1136 ‘Tippersein, or Beersén, dispossessed by

1146 Jelal-ud-din, an Afghan.

1168 A‘lam Shah, killed in battle by

1192 Keraksén, son of Beersén, emigrated to Kadmrup, married the

king’s daughter, succeeded to the kingdom, and regained

Maiwa.

Udaydditya deva, a

1200 Narbahen, Naravarma deva, As

Yasévarma deva, A.D. 1137. 4 (3.2

Jayavarma deva, 1143. 5 9

Lakhan, a

1220 Birsal.

1236 Purenmall.

1268 Haranand.

1330 Sakat Sinh, killed at the invasion of

1390 Bahader Shab, king of Dakhan, killed at Delhi.

On the division of the Delhi monarchy, or Ghidsuddin’s death,

1390 Dil4wer Khan Ghori, viceroy of Malwa, assumed sovereignty.

(See Musalman Dynasties.)

Taste XXVI. Saurdsutra (Surdt and Gujerat). Capital, Balabhipura.

The Balabhi, Balhara, or Bala-rais Dynasty.

The Jain chronicles of Jai-sinha, consulted by Col. Tov, trace the ancestry

of Keneksén, the founder of the Mewar family, up to Sumitra, the 56th

descendant from Rima, (vide the Surya-vansa list.) Solar worship prevailed,

afterwards the Jain.

A.D. 0? Maharitu, follows Sumitra, T. Names according to

Autarita, Grantsdug up in Gujerdt, Waturn.

ebsieéua: Senapati, Bhatdrea, A. D. 144-190.

Dharaséna.

144 KaNAKSENA, emigratesto Maharaja. Dronasinha.

Saurashtra. Dhruvaséna, I.

Maha Madan Sén, Dharapatta.

Sudentu. Grihasena.

318 Vijya,orAsyAsENA, found- Sri’-DHARA SE’NA, 319.

ed the Balabhi era, T.* Sildditya, I.

* This and the Sri Dharasena of the adjoining list, fixed upon as the founders

of the Balabhi era or samvat, may probably be the Suraca of the Purdnas

mentioned as a Vicramaditya to mount the throne An. Kal. Yug. 3290, or A D.

191 or 291, (As. Rs. ix. 135, 203,) Witrorp. Many legends related by him of

the Aditya, belonging to this dynasty.

108 Saurdshtra—Gehlote—Anhulwara Dynasties.

Padmdditya, Charagriha, I.

Sivdditya, (466 Gardha-bhe- Sridbarasena, IT.

la? of Jain MSS.) Dhruvaséna, IT.

Haraditya, Sridharasépa, III.

Surydditya, Siladitya, II.

SomAaditya, (3 names obliterated.)

Charagriha, II.

523 Sildditya, killed and Balabhi de- 523 Siladitya, 111.

stroyed by the Parthians, 524. 559 Siladitya Musalli, IV.

Origin of Gehlote, Grahalote, or Sésodia tribe of Surya-vansis.*

Kaiswa, Goha, or Grahaditya, posthumous son of Siladitya, ]

Nagaditya, of Bhandér. [born in Bhandér forest. | 8 3

Bhagaditya. 5 a

Devaditya. as

AssapiTyA, founded A’spur in Mewar. ‘ts So:

Khalbhoja. 2 a

Grahaditya, (others make Nagaditya, father of a ae

713 Buph, or Barra, seized Chitor, from Mori tribe, A. D. 727, j

and founded the Gohila or Gehlote dynasty of Mewar.

(Continued in Table XXVIII.)

Taste XXVII. Guserdt. Capital Patan. The Anhulwara Dynasty,

a restoration of the dynasty of the Balhdras.

[Ayin Akberi list collated with that of the Agni Purina, of Witrorp.]

See we

696

802 745

806

841

866

895

920

935

910 W.

1025

1038

1039

10506

1094

1209 W.

1250

1260

1281]

1309

Saila-deva, living in retirement at Ujjain, found and educated.

Banar4ja, son of Samanta Sinh, (Chohan;) who founded Anhulpur,

(Nerwaleh or Patan,) called after Anala Chohan, A. A.

Jogaraja,

Bhima Raja, ] Bhunda deva, Wo.

Bheur,

Been ° Srom the Ayin Akbert.

Reshadat, | Raja-Aditya, W.

Samanta, J daughter, married son of Delhi Raja: Bhunda, W.

Rajas of the Solankhi tribe.

Mula Raja, usurped the throne.

Chamund, invaded by Sultan Mahmad, (Samanta, W.)

Vallabba, (Beyser, or Bisela, Ay. Ak.) ancient line restored.

Durlabba, (Dabisalima, F.) usurped the throne.

Bhima raja.

Kaladeva, (Karan, A. A.) Carna-rajendra, or VisALADEVA, WD.

who became Paramount Sovereign of Delhi, (see p. 104.)

Siddha, or Jayasinh, an usurper.

Kumarapala, poisoned.

Ajayapala, son of Jayasinha.

The Bhagéla tribe.

Mala, (Lakhmul, A. A.) Lakhan-raya, W. without issue.

Birdmula, | Baluca-mula, Wo.

Beildena, Jf of Bhagéla tribe.

Bhima Deva, or Bhala Bhima Deva, same as the last, Wop.

Arjun deva,

Saranga ica, bay. Ak.

Karan, Carna the Gohild, fled tothe Dakhan, whenin the year

Gujerat was annexed to Delhi by Ala-ud-din.

* The Persian historians make Ngshizad, son of Noshirvan, or Maha Band,

daughter of Yezdijird, the origin of the Sesodia race of Mewar, 531.

Ranas of Mewdr or Udipur. 109

Taste XXVIII]. RAnas of Mewhkr. Capitals Chitér, Udayapur.

(Continued from Table XXVI.)

After the destruction of the Balhdra monarchy of Saurdshtra, and two cen-

turies’ sojourn of the family in the Bhandér desert, Baru or BAPPA conquered

Chiiér, and founded a new dynasty in A. D. 727.

changed from Gehlote to Aditya.

750

967

1027

1165?

1192

1200

1274

1289

1300

1364

1372

1397

1418

1468

1473

1508

1529

1532

The hereditary title was

Wilson’s list. Tod, from Aitpur inscription.

Guhila, .... 1. Sri Gohadit, founder of Gohila (Gehlote) tribe.

HOAs... 2. Bhoja (Bhagaditya ?)

3. Mahendra.

4. Naga (Nagdditya.)

5. Syela.

6. Aprajit (compare with Tab. XXVI.)

7. Mahendra.

Kalabhoja, .. 8. Kalabhoja.

Bhartribhata, 9

. Kaoman—invasion of Chitér from Cabul 812, A. D.

Samahayika, Mangal, expelled by chiefs.

KuumMan, .. 10. Bhirtripad, founded 13 principalities for his sons in

Malwa and Gujerat.

11. Singhji, whose Rani, Lskshmi, bore

FEDTAEA, ss 5.0 12. SriAllat, whose daughter Haria devi was grandmother of

Naravahana, 13. Nirvahana.

14. Salvahana.

Saktivarma, 15. Saktikumar, resided at Aitpur, 967, or 1068? T,

Suchivarma, Umba Passa.

Naravarma, Narvarma, cotemp. with Sabaktegin.

Kirttivarma, Yasuvarma, do. with Mahmfid. Aitpur destroyed.

Vairi Sinh, (Vira Sinha deva of Canouj? See Bengal.)

Vijaya Sinh.

Ari Sinh.

Vikrama Sinh.

Samanta Sinh, 1209, W.?

Kumara Sinh.

Mathana Sinh.

Padma Sinh.

Jaitra Sink.

Tej Sinh.

Samara Sinh, (Samarsi, T.) born 1149; marries Prithi Rai’s daughter.

Kerna, or Karan, his son-—

Rahup,—attacked by Shemsuddin, 1200.

Nine princes, occupying 50 years, engaged in crusades, to recover

_ Gayd from the infidels, (Buddhists,) T.

Bhtmsi, recovers Chitor.

Lakshman Sinh, (Lakumsi, T.) married Ceylon princess.

(Ramdeo of Ferishta.) Chitérsackedby Allauddin,(1305, F.

Ajaya Sinh, (Ajaysi, T.) resided at Kailwarra.

Hamyi’ra, son of Ursi, recovered Chitér.

Khait Sinh, (Khaitsi, T.) captured Ajmir.

Laxa Rana, (Lakha Rana, T.) rebuilds temples. Expedition to Gayd.

Mokulji, supplants rightful heir Chonda.

Khumbo, (Kumbho, T. Gownho, A. A.) defeats Mahmid of Mdlwa ; pillar

raised in commemoration, 1439.

Oda, murders his father, and is killed by lightning.

Raemal, repels invasion of Delhi monarch Lodi.

Sanea, Singram, or Sinka, the Kalas or pinnacle of Mewér glory, suc-

cessfully resists Baber at Bidna, 1526.

Ratna, fell in duel with Bundi Raja.

Bikramajit, his brother. 2nd sack of Chitér by Bahadur of Gwerar; re-

covered by Hamayun,

110

1540

1583

1396

1620

1627

1653

1680

1699

1715

1733

1751

1754

1761

1771

777

1828

Rdnas of Mewar—Rahtores of Kanouj.

Banbir, the bastard, raised to throne by Rajputs.

Udaya Sinh, (Oody Sing,) 3rd sack of Chitér, 1580, by Akber.

Pertap, (Rana,) reverses at Udipur and Kumaintr.

Amera, (Umra,) succeeds, recovers the ruined capital; defeats Abdulla

Jan. 1610; makes peace with Jehangfr.

Kerna, (Kurn,) last independent Raja; embellished Udipur.

Jagat Sinh, tributary to Shah Jehan ; peaceful reign.

Raj Sinh, bunded Lake Rajsamundra.

Jay Sinh, forms the lake Jay-samund.

Amera, II. triple alliance with Marwdr and Ambér, S. 1756.

Sangram Sinh ; the jezeya tax abolished.

Jagat Sinh, II. pays chouth to Mahrattas.

Pertap, II.

Raj Sinh, II. country desclated by Marhattas.

Arsi, his uncle. Zalim Sinh’s rise.

Hamira, a minor.

Bhim Sinh, his brother. Holkar and Sindia overrun Mewdr. Marriage

feud of Jypur and Jodhpur. Kishna Kumar poisoned, and the race of

Bappa Rawal extinguished, all but

Jewan (Javan) Sinh, the only surviving son.

Taste XXIX. Rantore Dynasty of Kanovs, afterwards continued

in Ma’/rwa’R, or JoDHPUR.

From Top’s genealogical rolls of the Rahtores, preserved by the Jains. vol. ii. 5, 6,7.

A. D.

300?

390

450

469

570?

1016

712

900

1169

(After the usual Theogony.)

YAVANASVA, prince of Parlipur? supposed of Indo-Scythic origin.

Basdeo, (Vasadeva*,) revives Canouj dynasty ; his daugh-

ter marries Bahram Sassan, of Persia. FEeRISHTA.

Ramdeo, fixed in Mérwar—tributary to Feroz Eee |

Nayawa Pa’ta, conquers Ajipala of Canouj—hence called Kéma dhvaja.

Padarat or Bharata, king of Canowj.

Punja, his son.

Dherma Bhumbo, his descendants called Dhanesra Camdhaj, (for 21 ge-

Aji Chandra. [nerations bore the name of Rao, afterwards Raja.)

From in- From coins,

seriptionst. ald Series.

Aparajitadhajaparakrama.

Udaya-chandra. A’patirurha.

Nirpati. Kragiptaparagupta ?

KeENEKSE’NA, see Mal- Gupta, Sri Vikrama.

[wa 400 ? Ghatotkacha, Chandragupta.

Sehesra-sala. Chandragupta, Samudragupta.

Méghaséna, Samudragupta, Kuméragupta.

Virabladra. e+e a SOD. Vikrama Naréndragupta.

Deosen. Sasigupta ?

Vimalasena. Asvamédhaparakrama.

Danasen. 700? Yasovigrahaor Sri- New Series.

Mokunda. 1072. Mahichandra. [p4la.

Bhadu, 1096. -CHANDRA DEVA, cong. Mahipala deva.

Koraor Chandpal, F. es Madana Pala, [Canouj. Kumarap4ladeva.

Rajsen. 1144 “Govinda Chandra, Govinda Chandra.

Tripala, 1168 Vijaya Chandra, Jadjéya deva.

Sri Punja. peg \ Jaya Chandra, Ajaya deva.

(Vira Sinha, see Bengal. died, 1193.

(Yass varmau, see p. 102.

(Sahasanka, see Vis Prak.

Vijayachandra,

Jaya Chandra, (Dal Pangla.)

* Witrorp names this prince Saddpdla, or Sadasvapala. As. Res. ix, 21].

+ See Journal As. Soc. III. 341.

1210

1381

1408

1427

1458

1488

1515

1531

1568

1583

1594

1619

1637

1680

1724

1749

1752

1793

1803

1458

1494

1512

1546

1573

1631

1673

1708

1736

1745

1786

1788

1799

1804

Jodhpur—Bikantr—Jaipur. 111

Taste XXX. Ma/rw&Xr or Jopueur. Continuation of ditto.

Sivaji, grandson of Jayachandra, settled in the desert, Khér.

Ashthama, (Asothama T.)

Doohar, T. Dula Rai, W. made attempt on Kanouj and Mandér.

Raipal.

Kanhul.

Jalhun.

Chado.

Theedo.

Siluk or Silko, (origin of the Silkdwats or Bhomeas.)

Biramdeva.

Cuonpa, assaulted Mandér, and made it his capital.

Rinmal, of Gohila mother, made pilgrimage to Gaya.

Rao Jopa and 23 brothers, had separate fiefs.

founded Jodhpur, and removed from Mandér.

Rao Sajoh, or Surajmal; rape of Rahtore virgins by Pathans.

Rao Ganga.

Rao Matpeo, becomes chief Raja of Rajputs; fortifies capital.

sends his son as hostage to Akber ; marriage alliance.

Udaya Sinh; Chandra Sinh, upheld by clans, installed by Akber.

Soor Sinh ; named Siwai Raja, a general in Mogul armies.

Raja Gaj Sinh, slain in Gujerdt.

Jeswant Sinh, died in Cadul.

Asir Sinu, posthumous. Rahtore conflict at Delhi, 4th July, 1679, (7th Sra-

van, 1716,) 30 years’ war against empire. Murdered by his son

Abhay Sinh ; entitled Maharaja Rajeswar, 1728.

Ram Sinh, son, defeated by his uncle

Bakht Sinh, who was poisoned in 1752.

Vijaya Sinh, (Beejy Sing,) disputed succession with Ram Sinh.

Bhim Sinh, usurps throne on his grandfather’s death, by defeat of Zalim Sinh.

Man Sinh. Feud for Kishna Kumari, the Udipur princess. ;

Taste XXXI. Tue Bixanw rR RA&z, a scion of JoDHPUR.

Bika, son of Joda, settled in the Jz country.

Nunkarna.

Jaet.

Kalidn Sinh.

Ray Sinh.

Karna Sinh.

Anop Sinh.

Sarup Sinh.

Sujén Sinh.

Zurawar Sinh.

Gas SINH.

Raj Sinh, poisoned in 13 days by

Surat Sinh, regent, who usurped the throne.

vanquished Surtan Sinh and Ajib Sinh.

annexed Bhatner to his dominion.

Taste XXXII. R&nas of AmBer or Duunv’HAR. Capital Jaypur.

The Cuchwéha race of Rajputs claims descent from Cusn, second son of Ra’ma,

king of Ayodhya, who migrated and built the fort of Rotas, on the Sén.

A. D. 294 Raja Naua, founded Narwar or Nishida.

Thirty-two princes—having the affix, Pdla.

965 Sura Sinh.

$66 Dhola (Dula) Rai, expelled from Narwar, founded Dhund’hdr dynasty.

Kankul.

Maidul Rao, took Amber from the Meenas.

F 2

112

1185

1550?

1586?

1592

1615

1621

1625?

1698

1742

1760

1778

1803

1818

Amber or Jaipur—Jesalmeér.

Hundeo.

Kuntal.

PusANDEVA, (Pajun,) married daughter of Prithi Raja.

Malési.

Bijal.

Rajdeo (Sahirdeva? of Narwar, defeated by Mahmud, IT. 1251, F.)

Kilan.

Kontal.

Junsi.

Udayakarna—his son Baloji obtained Amritsir, called Shekhavat

from his grandson Shekhji.

Nara Sinh.

Banbir.

Udharao.

Chandrasén.

Prithi Raj, pilgrimage to Dewal on theIndus: murdered by

Bhima, his son. -

Aiskarn.

Baharmal, (Puranmal, W.) paid homage to Baber.

Bhagwan Das, Akber’s general, welded his daughter to Jehangir.

Man Stnu, ditto, governor of Bengal—Dakhan—Cabul.

Bhao Sinh, died of drinking.

Maha Sinh, ditto.

Jaya Sinu, Mirza Raja, poisoned by his son Kerat.

Ram Sinh, reduced to mansab of 4000.

Bishen Sinh, ditto............ 3000. .

Srwat Jay Sinu, founded Jaypur, published Zij Mahomedshéhe- -

Iswari Sinh.

Madhu Sinh.

Prithi Sinh, II. minor.

Pertap Sinh.

Jagat Sinh, an effeminate prince, died without issue.

Jay Sinh, II]. posthumous, believed supposititious.

Taste XXXIII. Raos of Jesaumn’r.

Dynasty of the Buartis, a branch of the Yadu race of the Chandra

B. C: 94?

A. D.15?

730

733

813

Vansa, Top.

N&ba, fled from Dwarica to Marusthali—(Bhayavat.)

Prithibahu—K hira—Jud-bhan, (from Bhatti chroniclers.)

Bahu-bal, espoused daughter of Vijaya Sinh, Malwa.

Bahu, killed by a fall from his horse.

Sabahu, poisoned by his wife, daughter of Ajmir Raja Mund.

Rijh married daughter of Ber Sinh of Mélwé ; invasion of Ferid Sh4h.

Raja Gaja, invaded Kandrupkél, in Cashmir.

Salbahan, 15 sons, all Rajas, conquered Panjab, expelled from Cabul.

Baland, invaded by Yurds—his grandson Chakito, source of Cha-

kit tribe.

Kullur, 8 sons, all became Musalmans.

Jinj, 7 ditto.

Buatti, court at Lahore, gave name to family.

Mangal Rao, expelled by king of Ghazni—settled in Mér.

Majam Rao, his son—

Kehur, invaded by the Barahas, 787, A. D. 731.

Tanno, erected Bijndt.

Biji Rae, continual feuds with the Langas, till 1474. Title Rao,

exchanged for Rawul.

Deoraj, excavated several lakes, one at Tunnote.

Munda.

1008 Bachera, tributary to Anandapal of Delhi; invaded by Mahmiad.

1043

Dusaj.

Jesalmér— Orissa or Cuttack. 113

Bhojdeo conspired against and killed by his uncle

1155 Jesal, slain in defending Lodorva. Removed capital to Jesalmér.

1167 Salivahan, IJ. throne usurped by his son, Bijil.

1200 Kailun, elder brother, repelled the Kh4n of Baloch.

1218 Chachik Deo, extirpated Chunna Rajputs.

1250 Karan, repelled Mozaffer Khan.

1270 Lakhan Sinh, an idiot, replaced by his son

1275 Pinpal, dethroned by nobles.

1275 Jaetsi, recalled from Gujerdt—defended fort for 8 years.

1293 Mulraj, III. great sack of Jesalmér by MabGl Khan, 1294,

Dad, elected Rawul, second sack and immolation.

1306 Gursi, re-establishes Jesalmér.

Kéhar, adopted ; feuds.

Rao Kailan, or Kerore, conquered to the Indus—lived to 80.

Chachik Deo, fixed capital at Marote; continued feuds.

1473 Bersi, conquest of Multan by Baber.

Sabal Sinh, Jesalmér becomes a fief of empire, under Rawuls Jait,

Nunkarn, Bhim, Manohar Das; conversion of Bhattis.

Umra Sinh, predatory incursions.

1701 Jeswant, alliance with Mewd4r—end of Bhatti chronicle,

1722 Akhi Sinh, Sarap Sinh minister potential.

1761 Mulraja, ditto.

1820 Gaj Sinh, ditto, under British protection.

TaBLE XXXIV. Orissa, Or-Desa, or AtKata-Dasa, hod. Cuttack.

From the Vansavali, and Raja Charitra, in the Uria language, preserved in the

temple of Jagannath, a record supposed to have been commenced in the 12th

century.—Stirling’s Account of Cutiack. As. Res, xv. 257.

After the usual detail of the Mythology, and early kings of India, down to

Vicramdditya,

A. D.

142 Bato Kesari.

193 Tirbhoban deo.

236 Nirmal deo.

281 Bhima deva.

318 Subhan deva. Rakta Bahu invades Jagannath by sea, destroyed by an

inundation of the sea, that also formed the Chilka lake.

Indra deva, was captured and displaced by the Yavanas, who

reigned for 146 years.

Kesari-vansa restored.

473 Jajati (Yayati) Kesari, capital Jajepur.

Suraj Kesari.

Ananta Kesari.

617 Laélat Indra Kesari, built the Bhuvaneswar temple, 657.

32 reigns, extending 455 years. Cuttack built, 989.

Ganga-vansa.

1131 Churang, Saranga deva, or Chor Ganga, invaded Orissa.

1151 Gangeswara deva, extended dominions.

1174 Ananca Bui Deo, ascended Gajapati throne ; endowed Jagannath ;

struck coin ; title Rawat Rai,

1201 Raéjeswara deo.

1236 Ra’sa Narsinu Deo, built Kandrak (black pagoda) 1277.

5 Nara Sinhas and 6 Bhdnus, called the Suraj-vansa Rajas.

1451 Kapil Indra deo, adopted by the last Bhanu, assisted Telinga Raja

against Musalmans, 1457. -

1471 (Himber ? Rai of Uria, according to Ferishta.)

1478 Pursottem deo, conquers Conjeveram.

1503 Pertab Rudra deo, left 32 sons, all murdered by

1524 Govind deo, his minister.

1531 Pertab Chakra deo, last of the dynasty.

114 Radjas of Orissa—Nepdl.

1539 Narsinha Jenna, deposed by

1550 Telinga Mukund deo, (Harichandan,) invaded, and sovereignty of

Orissa overthrown, by King of Bengal, 1558.

Khurda Rdjas ; Bhut-vansa, or Zeminddrt race.

1580 Ramchandra deo, titular Raja under Akber.

1609 Pursottem deo. Afghan incursions.

1630 Narsinh deo.

16535 Gangadhar deo.

1656 Balbhadder deo.

1664 Mukund deo.

1692 Dirb Sinh deo.

1715 Harikishen deo.

1720 Gopinath deo.

1727 Ramchandra deo. Boundary much reduced.

1743 Birkishore deo. Marhatta depredations.

1786 Dirb Sinh deo, attached to Ndgpur 1755-6.

1798 Mukund deo, deposed by the English, 1804.

TasLte XXXY. R&sas of Nu‘pAu.

The mythology of Népal commences, like that of Cashmir, with the desiccation of

the valley, for ages full of water, by a Muni called Naimuni, (whence the name

of the country Natpdla,) whose descendants swayed the sceptre for near 500

years.—Kirkpatrick’s Nipdl.

B. C. 3803 Bhurimahagah, (adjusted 3423 Jayagupta, II. overcome

back at 18 years per by Rajputs of the

reign, B. C. 844?) Terai, near Janak-

3795 Jayagupta. pur, B. C. 700?

3722 Permagupta. 3211 Bal Sinha, descendant of

3631 Sri Harkh. Mahipa Gopala.

3564 Bhimagupta. 3302 Jaya Sinha.

3526 Munigupta. 3281 Bhuwani Sinha, over-

3489 Bishengupta. come by the

Kerrdt tribe of eastern mountaineers.

3240 Yellang, adjusted date 2558 Jaigri.

B. C. 646? 2498 Jenneo.

3150 Daskham. 2425 Suenkeh.

3113 Balducha. 2365 Thar.

3081 Kingli. 2294 Thamu.

3040 Hananter. 2211 Barmah.

2990 Tuskhah. 2138 Gunjeh.

2949 Srupast. Kashkin.

2910 Parb. 2065 Tesha.

2854 Jety dastri. 2019 Sungmia.

2794 Panchem. 1950 Jusha.

2723 King-king-king. 1887 Gontho.

2667 Sanand. 1813 Khimbhiam.

2627 Thamia. 1739 Galijang, displaced by

Khetris of the

Surya-vansi race.

1658 Nevesirt, (adjusted date 1385 Bhoskar varma, a great

of conquest, B.C. 178.) conqueror.

1608 Matta Ratio. 1311 Bhumi varma.

1517 Kaikvarma. 1270 Chandra varma.

144] Pasupush deva (founded 1249 Jaya varma.

Paspatnath.) 1187 Vrisha varma.

1130

1081

Rajas of Nepal.

Sarva varma.

Pathi (Prithi) varma.

436 Sankara deva.

386 Brahma deva.

1025 Jist (Jayertha) varma. 335 Man deva, erected Sam-

977 Kuber (Kuvera) varma. bhundth mundil.

901 Hari varma. 297 Mahe deva.

824 Siddhi varma. 247 Vasanta deva.

763 Haridatta varma, (found- 190 Udaya deva.

ed Sapae Narayan 143 Man deva, II. 3 years

temple.) drought.

724 Vasu datta verma. 98 Sukam.

691 Sripatri. 48 Siva deva.

688 Siva vriddi. 6 Narendra deva.

611 Vasanta deva. A. D. 27 Bhima deva, varma, dis-

550 Deva. placed by the

493

117

218

259

301

319

358

Brikh (Vriksha) deva.

Ahirs, or original Sovereigns.

Bishen gupta.

Krishna gupta.

178 Bhadmi gupta, expelled by

The Neverit Dynasty, restored.

Siva deva varma, (adjusted

date, A. D. 470.)

Angh@é varma.

Kirtu varma.

Bhima Arjuna deva.

Nanda deva.

901 Narbhay deva.

908 Bhoj deva bhadra.

917 Lakshmi kam deva datta.

938 Jayadeva, reduced Patan.

958 Udaya deva.

966 Bala deva.

371 Siva deva. 977 Padiem deva.

387 Narendra deva. 981 Nag Arjuna.

424 Bala deva. 987 Sankar deva.

44) Sankara deva. 1004 Bam deva.

453 Bhima Arjuna deva, II. 1006 Sri Harak deva.

469 Jaya deva. 1022 Siva deva.

488 Sri bala deva. 1050 Indra deva.

504 Kondara deva. 1062 Man deva.

531 Jaya deva, IT. 1067 Narendra deva.

574 Bala deva, III. 1073 Rudra deva*.

585 Balanjun deva. 1153 Amrita deva, (a great

622 RAGHABA DEVA,adjusted dearth.)

date, A.D.880f. 1157 Stimesar deva.

985 Sikar deva*. 1164 Baz kam deva.

773 Soho deva. 1195 Anya mall—a famine.

807 Vikrama deva. 1244 Obhaya mall, ditto, and

808 Narendra deva. earthquakes.

$10 Ganakama deva*. 1246 Jaya deva.

895 Udaya deva.

1280 Anwanta mall deva. Kaésias and Tirhut families settled in Nipal,

Sam. 1344. A. D. 1287.

Jayananda deva.

Jaya sinha mall.

Jaya Raera mall, daughter married Hari Chandra, Raja of Benares

—his daughter Raj Lachmi succeeded, but was deposed by

1323 Jaya deva, who was dispossessed of the throne by

_ + This is exactly the first year of the Newdr era. He, itis said, introduced the

Samvat into Nepal, which may apply to this, and not to the era of Vicramaditya,

(With one or two exceptions, marked*, these reigns are of natural lengths,

and require no adjustment.)

116

Neépdl—Gurkhas—Simroun.

1323 HaRa SINHA DEVA, raja of Simroun, who was expelled from his

own dominions by the Patan sovereign of Delhi. (See below.)

Belal Sinha, capital Bhatgoan.

Sri deva mall.

Naya mall.

Asoka mall.

Jestili mall.

Jait mall.

1600? Java Exsua MAut, (or Jye Kush Mull,) divided Patan, Khatman-

du, Banepa, and Bhatgaon between his daughter and three sons.

Bhatgéon.

Raya Malla.

Bhu Bhin malla.

Besson malla.

1669-79 Jaya Chakra mall, 1632

1695

1721

Gurkhali Dynasty, descended from the Udayapur Rajpits,

Trikoka malla? 1656

Jagat Johi malla. 1662

Jay Jeta mitra

malla. 1695

Bhupati Indra 1701

malla. 1715

Ranjit malla,form- 1722

ed alliance with

Gurkhas, which 1724

ended in his1753

subversion, and

finally that of

all Nepal.

Banepa.

Ran Malla.

Khatmandu. 1654

Ratna malla. 1685

Jaya Prakds malla.

Pratap malla.

Jaya Yoga Prakas

malla. 1695

Jaya Prakés malla. 1696

Bhaskara malla. 1706

Mahendra malla.

Jaya Jagat Jayal715

malla. 1716

Jaya Yoga Prakas 1722

mall, from Patan.

1689

Patan.

a daughter.

Siddhi Nara Sinha.

Nirman Indra

malla.

Yoga Narendra

malla.

Mahipat Indra mall.

Jaya viramahendra.

Jaya Indra malla

deva.

Hridiah Narasinha.

Kishi nirmal deva.

Jaya Zughir yoga

malla deva. ~

1729-31 Jaya Vishnu malla.

1742

Jaya Yoga Prakas

malla deva.

1749-5 Jaya Vishnu malla

Agani.

occupied Kemaon

and Noakét, for 6 or 8 generations, prior to conquest of Nepal.

1768

WAZA

1775

1800

1804

1805

1816

PRITHINARAYAN Sah,

Pertab Sinha Sah deva.

Ran Behadur, (Behadur Sah regent,) deposed by nobles, 1800.

Girwan Yudh Vikrama Sah deva.

Ran Behadur, returns from Benares, deposed and assassinated.

Girvan Yudh Vikrama Sah deva, again.

Rajendra Vikrama Sah deva.

The Khatmandu and Patan names, and all tke dates from 1632 downwards, are

confirmed by Nipalese coins in my possession, collected by Dr. Bramley.

TABLE XXXVI.

From Kirkpatrick.

A. D. 844 Nana deva.

Kanak deva.

Narsinha deva.

Rama Sinha deva.

Bhad Sinha deva.

Karm Sinha deva.

Hara Sinha deva.

don his

1323

Ra&sas of SAMANGARHA, or Simroun, in the Tardi,

south of Nepal.

From Hodgson’s List, Journ. As. Soe.

LR ae

Nanyupa deva, founded Simroun, A. D.

1097.

Ganga deva.

Nara Sinha deva.

Rama Sinha deva.

Sakti Sinha deva.

Hara Sinha deva, compelled to aban-

capital and take refuge in the hills, when Simroun

was destroyed by Toghlak Shih, in 1323 A. D. See above for his

connection with the Raj of Népdl.

Rajas of Bengal—Assam.

117

Taste XXXVII. Rasas of Bunaat, capitals, Kanouj ?—Gaur.

Abul Fazl enumerates three Dynasties anterior to the family of Bhupdla, which

last is identified by inscriptions found at Benares, Monghir, Dinajpur, &c. viz.

The family of Bhugrut (Bhagiratha), Xatriya—24 princes, reigned 2418 years-

The family of Bhojgorya, Kaith—9 princes, reigned 250 years.

The family of Udsoor (Adisur), Kaith—11 princes, reigned 714 years.

Then follows the tamily of Bhup4l, to whose 10 reigns 689 years are allotted,

which is evidently too much; the succession of names differs also somewhat from

those of the inscriptions.

From Abul Fazl. Monghir plate*. Dinajpur copper-plate.

Bhopala. Gopala. Locapala.

1027 Dhirpdla. Dhermapala. Dhermapala.

1050 Deopdla. Devapala. Jayapala.

Bhupatipdéla. Budal plate. Devapala.

Dhanpatpala. Rajapala, Narayanpala ?

Bijjenpala. Strapala. (Two names illegible.)

Jayapala. Narayanpala. Réjapala.

Raéjap4la. Sarnath insertpt. Vigrahapala.

Bhogpala. Mahipala, Mahipala, at Benares.

Jagadpala. Sthirap4la, Nayapala.

Vasantapala. 1027 Vigrahapala.

1017 Kumarap4la (Fer.)

Vaidya Rajas of Bengal.

1063 Sukh Sen.

1066 Beat Sen, built the town of Gaur.

1116 Lakshman Sen,

1123 Madhava Sen.

1133 Kesava Sen.

1151 Sura Sen.

1154 N&4rayana—Noujeb, last raja of Abul Fazl’s list.

: Laxmana.

1200 Laxmaniya.

(See Mahomedan dynasties.)

Taste XXXVIII. Rasas of Assam—anciently Kamrup.

The best authority is a Native History, (Assam Buranji,) by Huliram Dhai-

kiydal Phukan, of Gohdti. Beng. era 1236. As. Jour. 1830, p. 297 ; also Mr.

Scott’s MS. Notes, arranged by Dr. McCosh.—Buchanan is not to be trusted

prior to Rudra Sinha.

After bringing down the genealogies to the Xatriya Dynasty of Dravir

(Duarmapa’LA, &c. who invited brahmans from Gaur to his court, north of the

Brahmaputra!)

Brahmaputra Dynasty. 240 years.

Shus4nku, or Arimatu, built fort of Vidyagarh.

Phainguya, an usurper of the race of Kumuteshvar.

Gujanke, former line restored.

Shukaranku.

Mriganku, without issue; died A. D. 1478.

Assam divided into 12 petty states.

invaded by Dulal Ghazi, son of Hosein Shéh.

Musundar Ghazi.

Sultaén Ghidsuddin ; after whom 12 states restored, of which Nara,

east of Saumar, had been gradually rising into power, since

the middle of the 13th century.

1498

* The Monghir plate, dated 23 or 123 Samvat, evidently refers to the Bhupdla

dynasty, and not to the Vikraméditya era as was supposed by WILKiNs.

118

1230?

1268

1281

1293

1332

1364.9

1369

1372

1405.14

1414

1425

1440

1458

1485

1491

1497

1506

1549

1563

1615

1640

1643

1647

1665 ?

1621*

1665

1677

1681

1683*

Rijas of Assam.

Indravansa (Indu) Dynasty.

Chu-kapha, became independent, and spread conquests, surnamed

Asama (unequalled), whence Assam.

Chu-toupha, son, defeated the Raja of Cachdr.

Chu-benpha.

Chu-kangpha,.

Chu-khampha ; valley invaded by Muhammed Shah, 1337.

Interregnum of five years ; when the ministers installed

Chu-taopha, a relation, conquered Chhutiyas.

Chu-khamethepa, a tyrant, killed by his ministers,

Interregnum cf nine years.

Chu-dangpha, conquered as far as the river Kurutoya.

Chu-jéngpha, his son.

Chu-phikpha, ditto.

Chu-singpha, ditto.

Chu-hangpha, ditto.

Chu-simpha, a tyrant, put to death.

Interregnum, and Hosein Shah’s invasion, 1498.

Chu-humpha, a brother, various conquests.

Chu-klunpha, his son, built Gurgram.

Chu-khrunpha.

Chu-chainpha ; introduced reforms ; protected Dharmanarain.

Chu-rampha, a tyrant, dethroned.

Chu-chinpha. ,

Kuku-raikhoya Gohani, dethroned for his brother

Chukum, or Jayadhwaja Sinha, adopted Hindu faith; defeated Au-

rangzeb’s general ?

Chakradhwaja (or Brija) Sinha, built fort of Gohdti; (SA4magrya

deva, Mc. C.); repulsed Aurangzeb’s general ? called Chukum ?

Kodayaditya Sinha, attempted to convert the people.

Parbattia Kunria.

Lorardja ; for some reigns confusion prevailed until

Gadadhara Sinha; his son Kana set aside.

16389-1713* Rudra Sinha, built Rangpur and Jorhat; his coins first bear Ben-

gali inscriptions.

1715-21* Siva Sinha, established Hindu festivals.

1723-26* Phuléswari, his wife, acquires sovereign rule.

1729-30* Pramathéswari devi, ditto.

1732-36* Ambiké4 devi, ditto.

1738-43* Sarvvéswari devi, ditto.

1744*

1751*

Wile

iio

1792*

1793"

1796*

1808*

1824

Zee

1763*

1780*

Pramatha Sinha, made equitable land settlement.

Rajeswara Sinha, embellished Rangpur, allied with Manipur.

Laxmi Sinha Narendra, younger son, raised and deposed by minister.

Gaurinatha Sinha, his son.

Bharata Sinha Mahamari, conquers Rangpur, and

Sarvananda Sinha, usurps power at Baingmara,

Bharata Sinha, again attempts, but is killed.

Gourinatha Sinha, restored by British ; died at Jorhat.

Kamaleswara Sinha, or Kinnaram, not crowned.

R4éja Chandrakanta Sinha Narendra, fled to Ava.

Purandhar Sinha, great grandson of Kajeswara Sinha, expelled by

Burmese, and

Chandrakanta, restored, but deposed again, and

Yogeswar Sinha, raised by Assamese wife of Ava monarch, under

Mengni Maha Theluah, the Burmese general and real governor. F

Burmese expelled by English.

Date of Manipuri square coins.

Persian coins of Raja Mir Sinh of Rangpur.

Bengali coins of Jayantea Raja.

* These dates are confirmed by coins in Marsden’s Num. Or. and others in

Captain

JENKIN’S collectioa,

Rajas of Manipur—Narapatis of Dravira. 119

Taste XXXIX. RaAsas of Manipur, Miethi?, or Mogli. From the

Miehouba or royal geneological roll, Capt. Pampertron’s MS.

A. D.

35? Pakhungba, reigned 140 yrs. 1437 Ninthoukhombo, reigned 35 yrs.

174 Khoi, 90 1472 Keyamba,

264 Tanuthingmang, 100 1512 Koeremba, 5

364 Koening gualba, 15 1517 Lamchaigmanba, 3

379 Pensiba, 15 1520 Nongyilphuba, 9

394 Kanu khangba, 15 1529 Kapomba, 17

411 Nanu khamba, 47 1546 Tangchomba, 4

428 Nanu phamba, 90 1550 Chullamba, 17

518 Samuerang, 50 1567 Mungyamba, 35

568 Kol Thuoba, 90 1602 Khakémba, 55

663 Nanuthinghong, 100 1657 Khulchouba, 14

763 Khongtekcha, 10 1671 Paikhomba, 31

784 Kaereleha, 15 1702 Charairongba, 12

799 Yaraba, 22 1714 Pamhaiba—Gharibnawaz,

821 Ayangba, 89 or Garmitini raja, or

- 910 Ningloucheng, 39 Myanggnumba, 39

949 Eipal lal Thaba, 24 1753 Khakhilalthaba,orOogat

973 Yanglao kai phamba, 8 Shah,

981 Eerengba, 89 1756 Mingthoékhomba—Bha-

1070 Laiyamba, 56 rat Shah, 2

1126 Loitongba, 30 1758 GouriSham—Maramba, 6

1156 Monyoirelba, 14 1764 Chingthangkhomba, or

1170 Eiwaltkaba, 30 ‘ Jaya Sinha, Nong-

1200 Thawdalthaba, 36 nangkhomba, 2

1236 Chingtanglalthaba, 11 1766 Gouree Sham, 1

1247 Thing baisel homba, 5 1767 Jaya Sinha, 31

1252 Puralthaba, 16 1798 Robin chandra, 3

1268 Khumomba, 15 1801 Modu chandra, 5

1283 Moeramba, 24 1806 Charjit Sinha, 6

1307 Thangbilalthaba, Ze 1812 Marjit Sinha, expelled

°1329 Kongyamba, 31 by Barmas, 1819

1360 Telhueba, 19 1824 Gambhir Sinha,brother,

1399 Laizelba, 5 regained possession.

-1409 Pidlseba, 24 1834 KirtiSinha, a minor, son of do.

Taste XL. The Narapati, or SHovan Dynasty of Karniti,

Dravira, and the southern portion of the peninsula. 27 Rdjas,

reigned 534 years.

Contemporary with the Gajapati and Asvapati Dynasties ; from a MS, translated

ie De by BucHANAN.

266? Utinga Sholan, reigned 32 yrs. Arleana Cadamai Canda

Culatunga Sholan, 18 Sholan, 62 yrs.

Rajendra Sholan, ll Jayam Canda Sholan, 12

TiramadiCanda Sholan, 13 Kirimi Canda Sholan, 20

Carical Sholan, 21 Tondaman Sholan, 12

Arundavan Sholan, 13 Buddam Cattam Sholan, 45

Vomyara Sholan, 17 Shomuman Sholan, ll

Shayangana Sholan, 15 Ghingui Canda Sholan, 11

Munalinda Sholan, 12 Sundra Pandia Sholan, 40

Mavanedi Canda Sholan, 15 Pottapa Sholan, 24

Vakula Sholan, 14 Shingu Vullanda Sholan, 14

Alaperinda Sholan, 8 Deva Sholan, 10

Tiraveratu Sholan, 15 Shayanahatti Sholan, 15

Vira Sholan, 30

800? Shayangara Sholan, 24 years; the MS. makes the final date, A. D.

288. After the overthrow of the Narapati dynasty, Karnata

and Dravira seem to have been separated from the southern

districts, in which the Chera, Chola, and Pandava lines were

at first united under one sovereignty.

120 Rajas of Karndta—Telingdna.

13 Mahd Rajas of Madura, Tanjore, and Coimbetore, reigned 239 years.

Udiamara, reigned.. 18 years.

Jeya deva, ......+- 19 ditto.

Lohita,...........- 10 ditto. During this dynasty, the palace of

Ganga dira,........ il ditto. Madura is supposed to have been

Vama deva,........ 13 ditto. erected.

Terupulinda, ...... 34 ditto.

Pattaviran,........ 43 ditto.

Sri Devandtha, .... 38 ditto.

Malik Axjana,...... 7 ditto.

Adi \Raer, 2. .\5 5.0.4 '5°) ho ees

Maha sustra, ...... 16 ditto.

Wistvesvata, _o- </ cle 8 ditto.

950? Chindrabuti, ...... 9 ditto.

After which follow the Beldd Rajas of the Karndta, and the petty Polygér

dynasties of Madura, &c.

Taste XLI. Bexdt RAsas of the Karndta. Capital Dwdrasamudra.

Nine Princes governed above the Ghats 98 years, and afterwards below the

Ghats 111 years. (Bucu. Mysore, iii. 112.)

A. D. Macxenzir’s MS. BucHANAN, ili. 474.

984 Hayasala Belala raya. Raja Belala Raya, reigned .. 18

1043 Vindditya Belala. Vira B. Re isin ceee oe eee

1073 Yareyanga Belala, Chinna B: BR: Age eae ON

1114 Vishnu Verddhana Belala. :~(_ Deva (BRA oe at

3145 Vijaya Narasinha Beldla. 1016 Vishnu verti B. R. ...... 28

1188 Vira Belala. Hari Baa. cee 9

1233 Vira Narasinha deva. ImadicBeR eee ee! TZ

1249 Vira Someswara. Visia B. R.. gre TG

1268 Vira Narasinba, taken by the Buca B. R. Se SD

Mahomedans, and his capital China Buca B. R.. 8

destroyed in 1310-11.

Taste XLII. Aprva Rass of Tutuva, ANDHRA, or TELINGANA. Capital

Woragalla or Warancal.

19 Adeva Rajas reigned 370 years, (211 years ?) supposed to be the 18 princes of

Andhra descent, prior to Pratapa Rudra.

A.D.

800? Sri Ranga A. R,, eee 25 yrs.

Vira Narayana A. R. A660 2S

Wobala A. R. Ghanopoeoo. ll

Siruvayanagada A. R. tedecee 22

Pirungei Endia A. R, .......... 15

Canda Gopala AOR. oo 6c..e hes 32

Nees at Sige soda sagas pono, Ie

Cambuli A. R. a etarere there sD

Bacan A. R. «ae belevetuahee

Vira Nonaka A. ah OF comel 2

Nanasimhavateh. > ..c. ce act ade vem 1S

DA pAcweeMasiae cle sieielsiieti dae be

Si PRAM ay Avy Eo ter er0 0/ln jouer: 0 shelenetoMG

Maswidevay Ac Re, 5s sore. evs. sreve,s.d0 stee

Sinie Wanda) AR. «i. srscvant de) aie LD

Cutia deva, A. Re Ao come alt!

Raja visia Bujinga, . Seapiecs fous cmt:

Salica Nérayana A. Na 10

Pritivadi Bacukera Sadicun, .... 87

1167 Uricandi Prat4pa Rudra, 58 or 54, ended 1221.

Anna Pemma, ........ 7/7 supposed subsequent to Mah. subjection.

Rajas of Chola—Chera or Konga—Mddura, &c. 121

The Mlechhas (Muhamedans) followed, and Pratapa Rudra; whose officers,

Hvcca and Bucca, raised the Vijyanagar dynasty ; the list of which in Bucua-

NAN, iii. 476, differs essentially from that given by inscriptions.

Tasie XLII. Rasas of Cuoxa, ( Chola-mandeloor, Coromandel ; )

Including the country now called the Carnatic below the Ghats, hod. Tansore.

Capitals (in Ptolemy’s time), Arcot; then Wariur, near Trichinopoly; next,

Kumbbahona, and lastly, Tanjore. Witson’s Mackenzie MSS.

i UD.

700-1000 ? Kulottunga—others say 3000 B. C. or 500 A. D., or 1200 A. D.;

Deva Chola. [built temple at Tangapur, or Tanjore.

Sasisekhara. i

Siva linga.

918? Vira chola.

1100? Keri kala, persecutor of Ramanuja.

Bhima.

886? Rajarijendra, subdued various countries.

Vira martanda.

Kirttivardhana.

Vijaya.

Kanaka.

Sundara, killed a Brahman.

Kalakala.

Kalyana.

Bhadra.

1407? Pattira Chola? last according to some accounts,

Kulottunga Chola—last according to others, married his daughter to

48th Pandyan prince, who succeeded

An illegitimate son (Nanda?) founded the Tonda Mandalam (Con-

jeveram) —also annexed to Pandya kingdom.

Taste XLIV. Rézsas of Cuzra or Konea, (comprehending Salem and

Coiméetore.)

The Kongadesa Raja kal enumerates 26 princes. Mackenziz’s MSS.

Vira raya. Durvaniti.

Govinda raya. Pushkara.

Krishna raya. Trivikrama.

Kalivallabha. Bhavikrama.

Govinda, II. Kongani Mahddhiraja.

Chaturbhuja. Govinda, III.

Kumara deva. Sivaga.

Trivikrama deva. Prithivi Kongani Mahddhirdya.

Kongani verma. Raja deva.

Madhava verma. Malla deva.

Hari varma. Ganda deva.

Vishnugopa. Satya vrakya deva.

Krishna varma. A. D. 894 Gauttama deva, subdued by the

Dindikara.

Chola Raja, from whose descendants it passed to the Beldl rajas

of Maisur, and thence to the Vijayanagar dominion.

Tast—E XLV. Panpyan Dynasty of MaApvura.

Tradition ascribes 74 princes, of whom 39 names are extant.

Knlottunga, 2000 B. C.? Pandya Vamsapataké.

Anantaguna. Sundareswara.

KAélabhishana. Padasekhara.

Rajendra Pandya. Varaguna, united Chola and

Rajeswara. Tonda to Madura.

Gambhira. Rajendra.

Vansapradipaka. Suguna.

Puruhutajit. Chitraratha,

122 Rajas of Madura continued—Vijayanagar.

Chitrabhushana. Mahasena,

Chitra dhyaja. Satrunjaya.

Chitra verma. Bhimaratha.

Chitraséna. Bhimaparakrama,

Chitravikrama. Pratapa MArtanda.

Udanta. Vikrama Kunjaka.

Raja Charamani. Yuddha Kolahala.

Raja Sardula. Atula Vikrama.

Kulottunga. Atula Kirtti.

Yodhana pravira. Kirttivibhishana.

Raja Kunjara. Vamsasekhara, founded the

Raja Bhayankara. Madura college.

Ugrasena. Vamsachurdémani.

Ndyak Dynasty—founded by Nagama nayak, an officer of Krishna raya of Vijaya-

nagar. 14 princes.

1530 Viswanath.

Krishnapa.

Virapa.

Visvapa.

Kumara Krishnapa.

Kasturi Ranjapa.

Mutu Krishnapa.

Virapa; died 1623.

1623 Terumala, or Trimal, 1663.

1663 Muta virapa.

Chokanath ; died 1687.

1687 Krishna mutu Virapa.

1695 Vijaya ranga, under regency of Mangamdl.

1731 Vijaya Kumara, do. of Minaxi rant. Fort seized by Muhanapcnias, and

Médura became tributary to Nuwdb of Carnatic, and after-

wards to the British.

Taste XLVI. RAsas of VISAYANAGAR.

From history, inscriptions, and family genealogy, see As. Res. vol. xx. The

latter authority, in the usual manner, deduces a direct line from Pannu, of the

Innar dynasty, imperfectly following the Pauranic lists to CHANDRABIJA, the

last of the Magadha rdjas ; to whom succeeds,

Marru.

Nanda.

Bhutanandi.

Nandili, who has two sons, Seshunandi, and

Yeshanandi, whose 14 sons, ruling over Bylemdesh, are dispersed by two

invaders, Amitra and Durmitra ; and seven fled to Andhradesha, or

A.D. Telingana, where

1034 Nanda, maharaja, erected a kingdom, and founded Nandapur and

Warangol.

1076 Chalik raja.

1118 Vuisaya RA’sA; founded Vijayanagar.

1158 Vimala rao.

1182 Narasinha deva.

1249 Ra&ma deva.

1274 Bhapa raya, died without issue.

1334 Buxxa, son of a neighbouring raja, raised to the throne of the Dekhan

by Vidyaranya, his gurt.

-1367 Harihara rao.

1391 Devarao.

1414 Vijaya rao.

1424 Pundara deva rao, deposed by Sri Rangaraja of Kaliandrig.

1450 Réma chandra rao, son of Sri Ranga.

1473

1490

1524

1565

1693

1704

1721

1734

1741

1756

Taste XLVII. Rasas of Maisur, (Maheswar or Mysore.)

Their genealogy is traced from the Yadu line of Chandravansa.

1530

1600 ?

1638

1659

1704

1713

1796

Rdjas of Mysore—Paligdr Dynasty of Trichanapali.

Narasinha rao.

Vira narasinha raja.

Achyuta rao.

Krishna deva ; extended his sway to Gujerat, &c.

Rama raja, killed j in invasion of Nizam Shah, and Iméd ul mulk.

Sri Ranga rAja.

Trimala raja.

Vira yangat pati.

Sri Ranga JI.

Raémadeva rao.

Venkatapati rao.

Trimala rao.

Ramadeva rao.

Sri Ranga rao.

Venkatapati ; invaded by the Moghuls and fled to Chandragiri.

Rama rao ; recovered a portion of territory.

Hari Das.

Chak Das, his brother.

Chima Das.

Rama raya.

Gopala rao, son of Chak Das.

Yankatapati.

Trimala rao.

123

Sultén Khaén took the country in the name of Tipu; and with Vira Ven-

katapati Rama raya, the dynasty became extinct, A. D. 1829.

Betta Vadiyar.

Chamaraja Vadiyar, son of Yadu.

Timmaraja Vadiyar, son of Betta.

Hiriya Chamarasa Vadiyar, his son.

Bettatha Chamarasa Vadiyar, do, who had three sons,

1 Timmardja Vadiyar.

2 Krishnaraja Vadiyar.

Mcx, MSS.

3 Bola Chamarasa Vadiyar; had two wives, Viryamma and Demayamma.

Raja Vadiyar, son of the former, took Seringapatam, 1610.

Bettada Chamarasa Vadiyar.

Devappa raja Vadiyar,

Chama raja Vadiyar,

Narasa r4ja Vadiyar, son of first wife of Raja Vadiyar.

Chamaraja Vadiyar, his son.

TImadi Raja Vadiyar, son of Radja Vadiyar’s second wife.

}son of Demayamma.

Kanthirao Narsa réja Vadiyar, son of Bettada, acquired great power.

[Chinrayapatan inscript. Bucu. Mysore.

Doda Deva raja Vadiyar, son of Devappa, extended dominion N. W.

Chikka Deva raja Vadiyar, his son, collected family history.

Kanthirao Narsa raja Vadiyar, his son.

Krishna raja Vadiyar, do.

Chamaraja Vadiyar.

Imadi Krishna raja, son of Krishna.

Nanja raja Vadiyar, his son.

Chamaraja Vadiyar, dethroned by Hyder Ali’; Mysore destroyed.

Krishna raja Vadiyar, restored by the British.

Taste XLVIII. Paticar Dynasty of TRICHANAPALI,

Terumala Raya, of Achita tribe, in Tennivelly, founded dynasty.

Panchakhya, ~

Tondaka,

124 Rdjas of Venkatagiri—Indian Dynasties.

Navana Cholddhipa.

Terumala Nrip4élachandra.

Navasauri.

Pachanara pala.

Namana.

Pachamahisu.

Kinkinipati.

Tondaka Nripati.

Tirumala Bhipa.

Padmapta.

Raghunatha, an officer of Vijaya Raghava, of Tanjore.

Terumala raya.

Sri Vijaya Raghunath, conquered Chonda Khan.

Taste XLIX. Vauueuti RAsas of Venxataeiri, or Kali male.

From the Mackrenziz MSS.

Patalmari vetal. Kumara timma naidu.

Damanaidu; aided in giving Padakonda naidu.

Vanamnaidu. Prattpa Rudra the Padakonda naidu IT.

Yaradaxanaidu. throne of Warangol. Chennapa naidu.

Sinha manaidu. Venkatddri naidu; whence name

Madan. of place.

Vedagiri naidu. Rayapa.

Kumar madan. Pennakondapa naidu.

Sinham naidu. Yachama.

Pada sinham. A.D, Kasturi.

Chenna sinham. 1600 Yacham naidu, conquered as far as

Anupota; extended sway to Krishna river. the Madura province.

Sarva sinh. Padayachem.

Dharmanaidu. Kumar yachem.

Timmanaidu. Bengar yachem ; murdered A. D.

Chiti daxa. 1696, by Zulficdrkhan.

Anupota. Kumér yachem ; died 1747.

Madan. Benogar yachem, and

Sura. Padayachem, 1776.

Yachamanaid; founded Valaguti branch. 1804 Kumar yachem, adopted.

Chenna Sinh, under Vijyanagar. Bengar yachem ; ditto.

Nirvan ray appa.

Taste L. Invian Dynastiss, according to Frerisuta, stated to be

taken from Persian and Sanscrit authorities.

[This list is useful for comparison with those already inserted.]

Maurasa ; descended from Krishna ; reigned in Oudh.

Line of Maharajas reigned for 700 years.

B:'C. Feredon; first invasion of India, M4lchand reigned in

1429 Kesvaraja; invaded Ceylon with aid of Persia. [Malwa.

Manérraya, built Manér.

1209 ° Feroz-ra, conquered Panjab.

1072 Suraja dynasty at Kanouj, where worship of sun intro-

786 Baraja. [duced.

Keidar ; tributary to Persia.

731 (died) Sinkol; built Laknauti (Gaur) in Bengal. Persian inva-

sion under Peiranweisa.

586 Mahar4j, Kachawa Rajputs of Amber established.

540 Keda raja, Rustam slain—Rohatray built Rofas.

497 Jaya chand, his minister—a famine.

437 Dehlu, built Delhi.

397 Porus, of Kemaon, usurped throne of Kanouj.

350 Porus II. ; resisted Alexander’s invasion.

330 Sinsar-chand (Sandracottus),

260 Jona, and his line, reigned tranquilly 90 years.

170

483?

330

410

1309

1318

1340

1347

1389

1391

Names of Hindu princes in Ferishta. 125

Kalian chand, a tyrant ; kingdom of Kanouj dismembered.

Vikramajit, (died) reigned in Malwa and Gujerdt; era establish-

ed; anarchy and confusion succeeded.

Raja Boga, (Bhoja,) of the Tudr tribe.

Basdeo, (Vasudeva), revived Kanouj dynasty* ; cot. of Bahramgor,

who married his daughter.

Rémdeo, of Rhatore race, fixed in Médrwar ; tributary to Feroz

Sassa. Civil wars, took Kanouj and Bengal, married daughter of Si-

varay of Vijayanagar.

Pratab Chand his general, of Sesodia tribe, refused tribute to No-

Anand deva ; reigned in Mdalva, built Mandé and Ramgir. {shirvan.

Maldeo; assumed throne of Delhi, and Kanouj empire divided.

Hispal, father of

Jaipal, Raja of Lahore, invaded by Sabektagin and by Mahmid.

Anandpal succeeds, defeated by Mahmiid.

Bachera (Vijaya ray) of Bhattis, invaded by Mahmad, A. H. 393.

Prithirajpal (Jaipal 11 ?) of Delhi and Lahore, fled to Ajmfr.

Korra, (Kunwer ray— Kumarap4l) king of Kanouj, surrendered to

Mahmid, in whose time the country was divided into principali-

Hardat, raja of Merat. [ties.

Chandpal or Calchandra, raja of Mathura.

Jundray ?—Nanda ray of Kalinjar.

Jasuverma ? raja of Ajmir.

Byramdeo, (Brahma deva) of Gujerat deposed; and Sumndth tem-

Dabisalima (Saila deva) enthroned in his stead. [ple plundered.

Daipal, governor of Sanpat, 40 miles from Delhi on read to La-

hore ; in Sewalik, Ram ray, another chief.

, king of Delhi, with other rajas, retake Hassi, Tanesvar, &c.

from Modood Ghiznavi.

Balin, of Lahore ; built Nagore in Sewalik ; upset by Bairam Shah,

Pitter Rai of Ajmir, :

Candi (Chawand) Ra of Delhi, | defeated Muhammed Ghori,

Hindu confederacy of 150 rajas defeated by do.

Jay Chand, of Kanouj, defeated

Hemraj, of Ajmir, expelled Pithiray’s son.

Bhimdeva, of Gujerat ; Goorkhas noticed, under Muhammed.

Sahir deva of Narvar (Patan) defeated by Mahmud II.

Uday-sa, tributary raja of Jdlwar.

Raja Dewbal, of Gualiar, reduced.

Dilleki and Milleki rajas, of Kalinjar.

Diepal, réja of Sitnur; raised rebellion in Sind.

Raja of Rintinpur besieged by Feroz.

Rdémdeo, raja of Deogir, (Doulatabad.)

Shankaldeo, his son, married Dewal devi, daughter of

Ray Karan, of Nehrwala, Gujerat; his wife, Kamla devi.

Bhima deo, raja of Rintinbhore.

Hambar deo, (Hamira,) his son besieged by Alla.

Koka, raja of Malw4, overcome by Ein ul mulk.

Nehr Deo, of Jalwar, surrendered to do.

Ray Ratan Sén, of Chitor, escaped from Alla’s camp.

his nephew confirmed in that principality.

Sital deo, raja of Sewana.

Laddar deo, raja of Warangél, made tributary.

Bilal deo, of Karnata, resists Toghlak 1338, founds Vijyanagar.

Harpaél deo, son-in-law of Ram deo, flayed.

Nag nak, Koly chief of Kondhana.—Prem ray, of Gujerat.

Man deo, raja of Buglana.—Krishna ray of Vijyanagar.

Ray Sarvar, rayrayan, of Behar.—Vinaek ray of Telingana.

Narsinh Bhan of Gualior, Rahtore chief.—Narsinh of Kehrla.

* Wilford names this king Sadapala, or Sadasvapdla. As, Res. ix, 211.

126 Ferishta—Mdrhatia Goveramenis.

1402 Brahma deo, son of ditto, repelled Timur at Gualior.

1405 Ray Davood, and Hubboo of Toolumba.

1425 Ray Bheem of Jummo.—Deva ray, of Vijyanagar.

1446 Pertab Sinh of Patiala and Kampila. 1452 Narsinh, his son.

1452 Prithivy ray and Karan ray.—Bhim r4j of Condapilly.

1471 Amber ray and Mangal ray of Orissa, 1470.

1478 ————— Gualior r4ja resisted Lodi.

~—— Sangat Sinh, expelled from Etawa.—Siva ray of Vijyanagar.

1490 Man Sinh, of Gualior, receives dress of honor.

1518 Vicramajit, his son, killed by Baber, 1526, and Gualior reduced

after 100 years independence.

1491 Saha deo, raja of Katra.

1493 Balbhadra r4y, of Kootumba, near Chunar. Narsinh ray, his son,

Saliva4hana, raja of Panna.

1501 Vinaik deo, of Dholpoor.

1523 Man Sinh, raja of Gualior.

1533 Rana Sanka, of Chitor, (Sangréma Sinh)—finally reduced by Akber,

Rawel deo of Bagur. Medny raja of Chandery. (1570.

Manik chand and others killed.

1540 Maldeo, of Nagore and Ajmir, most powerful rd4ja.

1542 Harkrishna ray, of Rotks—killed by Shér Sh4h.

1554 Ramchandra, raja of Panna and Kalinjar.

1556 Hemoo usurps the throne of Delhi—battle of P4nipat.

— Ram-Sa, a descendant of M4n Sinh.

—— Jugmul and Devi Das, rajas of Marwar, yield to Akber.

1567 Ujaya Sinha, of Udipur—Surjan ray of Rintinbhore.

1570 Chandra Sén, son of Maldeo of Ajmir.

1572 Ray Sinh, appointed to Jodhpur by Akber.

his daughter married to Selim Mirza.

Taste LI. M&ruarra GoveRNMENTS*.

1. Family of Sivaji, rdjas of Sattara.

1644 Shahji, a Subahdar of the Carnatic under Aurangzéb, bestows jagirs on

his sons—Tanjore on Ekoji—dies 1664.

1647 | Siva’si’, his son, commences predatory expeditions,

166 , plunders Surat, and assumes title of raja.

166 , establishes a military government—dies 1680, April.

1680 Raja Ram, set up by minister—imprisoned at Raigarh.

—— SamsuHasi’, assumed the sovereignty—executed at Talapur, August 1689.

Santa, usurped power—murdered 1698.

1689 Réja Ram, again proclaimed at Sattara, died 1700.

1700 Tard Bai, his wife, assumed regency—incursions into Behar.

1707 Sr’va/s1’ II. son of Sambha, nicknamed SHao-s1, released on Aurangzeb’s

death, and crowned at Satara, March 1708-—goes mad.

1749 Ram R4ja, nominal successor—power resting with minister or Peshwa,

1818 Pertab Siva, or Sinh, re-instated at Satara by British, April 11.

2. Hereditary Peshwas of Pind.

1740 Ba’xa’s1’ Baji Rao, succeeds his father—dies after battle of Panipat.

1761 Madhuji Rao Belal, 2nd son, invested as nominal Péshw4é, uncle Raghu-

nath, regent. Nana Farnavis, his karkun—dies Nov. 1771.

1772 Narayan Rao, youngest son of Balaji, murdered.

—— Raghunath Rao (Ragoba), usurped.

1774 Madhorao Narayan, posthumous son of Nardyan, (Nana F. in power,)

committed suicide 1795.

1796 Baéji Rao, proclaims himself; is taken by Sindia.

— Chimnaji, furtively invested at Puna, 26th May.

— Baji Rao, publicly proclaimed, 4th December.

1818 ————-, surrenders to and pensioned by the English, 3rd June.

* The origin of Sivaji is traced in the chronicles of Mew4r to Ajaya Sinh rana

of Chitor, 1300, (T. I. 269,) thus: Ajayasi, Sujunsi, Duleepji, Seoji, Bhoraji,

Deoraj, Oogursén, Maholji, Khailooji, Junkoji, Suttooji, Sambaji, Sivasz1,

Sambaji, Ramraja, usurpation of the Péshwas.

1734

1750

1753

1772

1774

1816

mee

Négpur—Gwalior—Gujerat—Stkhs of Lahore. 127

3. Bhinsla Rajas of Nagpur.

Ragh6ji Bhénsla, nominated ‘‘ Séna Sahib Subdé’’ or general in Marhatta

confederacy.

——_- , received sunud of Berar from Péshwa, dies 1753. °

Januji, eldest son, adopted his nephew

Raghfji, eldest son of Madhoji, removed by Madhorao in favor of

Sabaji (his uncie), killed in action soon after by Mudaji.

Parsaji, succeeded his father Raghuji: an idiot—strangled by

Miadaji (Appa Sahib), acknowledged by English-—deposed 1817-18.

1818 May, Goozur, grandson of Raghuji, seated on musnud by do.

4. The Sindia family, from a village near Satara, now Gwalior Rajas.

1724

1750

1769

1794

1825

1833 .

1724

1750

1767

———s

1797

1805

1811

————

1834

1720

1731

1732

1768

1771

1790

1793

1800

1805

A. D.

1419

1552

1574

1581

1606

1644

1661

1664

1675

1708

Ranuji Sindia, an officer in the Péshwa’s army.

Jyapa, succeeded to his father’s jagir of half of M4lw4, murdered 1759.

Dattaji, 2nd son of Ranuji, engagedin the Panjab wars.

Mahadaji, 3rd, illegitimate, confirmed in jdégir by Madhorao, died 1794,

Doulut Rao, his grand-nephew, adopted: fixed his camp at Gwalior, 1817,

Baiza Bai, his widow, adopted Jankuji, and acted as regent.

Jankuji, assumed the reins of government.

5. The Holkar Family.

Mulhér Rao Holkar, a Sudra, an officer of note in the Péshwa’s army.

eee , obtained jagir in Mdlwd, died 1767.

Mali Rao, grandson, succeeded under regency of

Ahilya Bai, his mother, but died soon after.

Tukaji Holkar, (no relation) appointed to command of troops.

Jeswant Rao Holkar, illegitimate son—maintained predatory rule.

——_—_—_—_—, confirmed in jagir of Indore, &c.—died insane.

Tulsi Bai, widow, adopted his illegitimate child

Mulh4ér Rao Holkar; battle of Mehadpur, December 1818.

_ Martand Rao, adopted son, dispossessed by

Hari Holkar, present chief.

6. Gaikwar family—anow reigning at Baroda, Gujer dt.

Dammaji Gaikwdér (Shamsher Behadur), officer under Khandi Rao

Holkar.

Pilaji Gaikwar, nominated Séna Khas Khei—murédered.

Dammaji, son, occupied east of Gujerat, died 1768.

Govind Rao, 2nd son, succeeded ; but eldest, Syaji, an idiot, supported by

Fatih Sinh, youngest, who held real power at Baroda.

Mannaji Rao, assumed charge of Syaji, as regent—died 1793.

Govind Rao, made regent 19th December, died September 1800.

Ananda Rao, eldest son—disputes with Mulhar and Kanhaji.

———_—, Treaty with British government.

Fatih Sinh.

Tasie LII. Si’kH GoveERNMENT oF LAHORE.

» 7

Na/nax, founder of the Sikh sect, born.

Guru Angad, wrote some of the sacred books.

Amera das, Khetri.

Rm das, beautified Amritsir.

Arjun Mal, compiled the A’di Granth.

Har Govind, first warlike leader.

Har Ray, his grandson.

Har Krishna, died at Delhi.

Tegh Behddur, put to death by Moslems.

Guru Govinp, remodelled the Sikh government.

Bandu, last of the succession of Gurus—put to death by Aurangzeb,

Predatory bands—internal feuds.

12 misals or tribes of Sikhs captured Léhore and occupied Panjdb.

Charat Sinh, of Sukelpaka misal, died 1774.

Mahé Sinh, his son, extended his rule—died 1792.

, his wife, regent, with Lakhpat Sinh minister.

Ransi’r S1nu, (born 1780,) established Lahore independency.

H 2

128 Buddhist Chronology—Chinese.

BUDDHIST GENEALOGIES.

Tasre LILI. Curnasz anp Japanssr Curonotocy.—From M.

Klaproth’s translation, Paris, 1833.

[Tho Japanese names are distinguished by the letter J -]

Ta chen seng wang.

I szu ma wang.

Yeon lo tho wang.

Kio lo wang.

Ni feon lo wang.

Szu tsu kie wang (Sans. Sinhahdna-kabdna.

Tsing fan wang, Suddodana, (and tree brothers, Sans. Suklodana

B.C. Amitidana, and Dhotodana.) t

1027 Si tho to, nan tho, Chykia, (Sa’kya MuNI,) born.

999 Sdkya becomes eminent in Sth year of AJATASVARA of Magadha.

949 Sakya or Buddha (Fo) ; attains nirvana, (dies.)

868 Anan (Ananda), second patriarch, dies.

833 A yu wang (J. A ik 6) (Sans. Asoka), dies.

806 Changna ho sieou, 3rd patriarch, dies.

741 Yeou po kiu to (J. Ou fa kik ta), 4th patriarch, dies.

692 Thito kia (J. Dei ta ka), 5th ditto, dies at Mathurd.

687 Weng chu, disciple of Sdriputra.

660 Commencement of Japanese monarchy.

637 Michu kia (J. Mi sia ka), 6th patriarch of Magadha, dies.

604 Lao tan (J. Ré tan), founder of Tao tsu sect in China, dies.

590 Pho siu mi (J. Fa situ mi), 7th patriarch, dies in N. India.

551 Conrucius, born in the kingdom of Lore.

550 500 arhans of Kashmir (ka sits mi ra) preach the law.

535 Foe tho nan ti (J. Boudz da nan dat), 8th patriarch (Sans. Boudhénandi)

of Canara, dies.

487 Fou tho mito (Sans. Boudhdmita), 9th ditto, dies.

442 Hie, 10th patriarch of Central India, dies.

383 Fo na yeche, 11th ditto of Palibothra, dies.

327 Ma ming ta szu, 12th ditto (Sans. Asvagocha) of Benares, dies.

264 Kia pi mo lo, 13th ditto of West India, dies.

Commencement of the Tsin Dynasty of China.

212 Loung chou, 14th ditto of Central India, dies.

161 Kiana chi pho, 15th ditto of W. India.

130 Ko li nan tho, makes an image of Mi le in India.

113 Lo hoei lo to, 16th patriarch of Kapila, dies.

74 Sang kia nan thi, 17th do., born at Chilo fa, dies.

13. Kia ye che to, of Ma ti, 18th ditto, dies.

2 King hian fetches Buddhist scriptures from the kingdom of Fue #2.

A.D.22* Kieu mo lo to, of Feryhdana, 19th patriarch, dies.

24 to57 Hindus carry Buddhist religion into Java.

65 Buddhism introduced at the court of Ming ti, Emp. of China.

74 Tuye to, 20th patriarch of India, dies.

117. Pho sieou phan theou, 21st ditto, dies.

165 Mo nou lo, of Nati, 22nd ditto, dies.

209 Ho le na, of Ferghdna, 23rd ditto, dies.

259 Szu tsu pi khieu, of Magadha, 24th ditto, dies.

266t0313 The Prajna paremita translated into Chinese.

300 Won lo tchhu, of Khotan, translates the Fang kouang king.

325 Pho che szu to, of Ai pin or Cabul, 25th patriarch, dies.

372 Introduction of Buddhism into Kaoli (Corea.)

382 Kieon mo lo chy, settles in China and translates Mahd Prajna.

384 Introduction of Buddhism into Pe ¢si (in Corea).

388 Pou jou wy to, 26th patriarch of India, dies.

399 Chy fa hian visits India to study.

* The Chinese MS. of the Bibliotheque du Roi ends here.—M. Klaproth

derives the continuation from other Chinese and Japanese authors.

Genealogy of Sa’Kya, according to the

Bauddha works of the Chinese.

407

414

429

457

499

506

528

552

592

606

Japanese—and Tibetan. 129

Introduction of Buddhism into Tibet, under Hlato tori.

Chy fa hian returns to Chang nyan.

Death of Foe fou pha tho lo, of Kapila vdstu, who translated the Hou-

yan king in China.

Pan jo to lo (Prajna dhara) of 8S. E. India, 27th patriarch, dies.

Pou thi ta ma (Bodht dharma), 28th patriarch of N. India, settles in

China, as Ist patriarch of that country, dies in 508.

Sang kia pho lo, of Fou nan, made chief of Chinese Buddhist temples,

by the Emperor Siuan ven ti; dies in 525.

Introduction of Buddhism into Sin lo or Sinra (in Corea).

Ditto into Japan.

Death of Hoei kho ta szu, 2nd patriarch of China.

Seng lin ta szu, 3rd ditto, dies.

629-645 Yuan honang, samanean of the Chhin family, travels in India, and trans-

632

651

675

676

699

713

732

814

854

lates many books.

General introduction of Buddhism into Tibet, under Srong dbzan gampo.

Death of Tao tin ta szu, 4th patriarch of China.

Death of Houng jin ta szu, 5th patriarch of China.

Ti pho ho lo, priest of Magadha, visits China and translates books.

Chy chha nan tho, of Cadul, ditto, dies in 710.

Hoei neng ta szu, last patriarch of China, dies.

Pou koung, a brahman sramana visits China and translates the ques-

tions of Manju Sri, (Kin kang ting king.)

(about) Phan jo, priest of Cdbul, settles in China, and translates the

Houa yan king.

Phan jo, made Fa pao fa szu, grand master of the treasure of religion.

Taste LIV. Buppuist CHronouocy or TIBET.

From the Vaidurya Karpo, written at Hlassa in the year A. D. 1686. Trans-

B. C.

lated in Csoma’s Tibetan Grammar, p. 181.

962 Birth of Saaxya (Chomddndas).

882 The Kdla Chakrasystem taught by him; his death.

881 The Mula Tantra compiled at Shambhala.

879 Death of Zla bzang, king and author of ditto.

878 Padma Sambhava born.

838 Manju Ghosha born in China.

432 Nagarjuna born. ~

278 Rigs-dan-grags-pa, ascended the throne of Shambhala,

252 Nyan-tsan, king of Tibet, (THorHort,) died 371.

618 Doctrine of ‘‘ endeavouring perfection’’ upheld.

622 Nam-gyal, king of Shambhala; epoch of 403 years, called Mekha

gya-tso, commenced.

627 Srong-tsan gam-bo born.

639 Kong-cho, a Chinese princess, arrived in Tibet.

651 Phrul-snang college, or Vihar, built at Lhassa.

728 Khri srong, king of Tibet.

747 Padma Sambhava arrived in Tibet; returned to India, 802.

804 A new astronomical period commenced.

861 Langtarma born; abolished Buddhism, 899.

965 Kala Chakra system introduced into India.

971 Restoration of Buddhism.

980 Atisha born.

1002 Brom-ton, the teacher, born.

1015 Sol-nag thang monastery founded.

1024 Mekha gya-tsho era terminated.

1025 Kala Chakra, or Jovian cycle, established in Tibet.

1038 Milaraspa born.

1052 Lang rithang pa born.

1055 Ragreng college founded.

1057 Lo-dang shesrab, the translator.

1071 Monasteries of Sangphu and Sakya founded.

1077. Tagpo-lha-je born.

130 Buddhist Chronology of Tibet.

1079 Grathang monastery founded.

1082 Ras-chhung pa born.

1090 Kun-gah-nying-po, the great Sdskya Lama, born; died 1156.

1108 Phag-mo-grub-pa born.

1118 Period of ‘‘ deep meditation’? commenced.

1121 Yubrag pa born.

1125 Sua’kya Sri born.

1134 Nyang, the prince, born.

1156 The Thel monastery founded.

1173 The Tshal monastery founded.

1177 The Bri-gung monastery founded.

1178 The Stag-lung ditto.

1180 The great Sakya pandit born.

1185 Gung-tang monastery founded.

1202 Shakya Sri, of Cashmir, arrived in Tibet.

1210 Ter-ton Lama born.

1211 The Lang-tang monastery founded.

1223 The Byang and Dor ditto.

1233 Gro gon phagspa born, mastered Tibet 1251.

1253 The Chhos-lung monastery founded.

1288 Bu-ton born.

1300 Ta-si-byang chhub-gyal tshan born.

1347 Theg-chhen chhos gyal born; became Tari (king) 1347.

1347 Thes-thang monastery founded.

1355 Incarnation of Tsong-khapa ; died 1417.

1383 Thang-tong-gyal-po born.

1389 Ge-dun-grub-pa born.

1403 Shes-rab, the great interpreter, born.

1407 Yearly confession at Lhassa, established by ditto.

1414 Karma pa born; Bras-pungs Vihar founded.

1417 The Sera monastery founded,

1419 The Sang-nags-khar ditto.

1421 Dus-zhabs-nor-zang-gya-tsho born.

1427 The Nor monastery founded by the Sa-skyas.

1429 Ge-legs pal-dan succeeded to the Gal-dan chair.

1433 The Nalenda monastery was founded.

1435 The Chhab-do-byams-gling ditto.

1436 Zha-lu-legs-pa succeeded at Gal-dan.

1437 The Pal-khor chaitya built.

1439 Lotsava chhos-kyong-zang-pa born.

1445 The Pod-kar hal lung, work on Lunations, &c. written.

1447 The Bras-yul monastery founded.

1448 Lo-gros succeeded at Galdan.

1461 Baso ditto.

1462 The Gong-kar Vihar founded.

1467 The Ser-dog-chan ditto.

1470 The Byams-gling ditto.

1471 Logros-tan-pa succeeded at Gah-dan ; died 1473.

1474 Incarnation of Gé-dun gya-tsho; died 1540.

1476 The Ta-nag thub stan-nam gyal monastery founded.

1478 Mon-lam-pal succeeded at Gah-dan.

1500 Tshar chhen born.

1507. The Chhos-khor monastery founded.

1535 Khas grub pal gyi sengeé born.

1541 Snod-nams gya-tsho born ; died 1586.

1575 —————invited by Althun khan, a Mongol prince.

1576 ———— built the Chhos-khor-ling monastery.

1587 Yon-tan gya-tsho born; died 1614.

1615 Nag-vang le zang gya-tsho born.

1618 Period of ‘‘ morality’? commences.

1625 Rigs-dan sengé, succeeds at Gah-dan.

1639 Stan dsin chhos gyal, king of Tibet.

Kings of Tibet. 131

1640 Nag vang lo zang conquered whole of Tibet.

1643 ————— founded the Potala (residence).

1650 ——————- visited China.

1686 This Chronology compiled at Lhassa.

Taste LV. Kines or Tier,

To the subdivision of the country in the tenth century : from the Dep-

ter non po, or ancient Records of Zaonnu Pa/’t, in Tsang, or mid-

dle Tibet ; extracted and translated by M. A. Csoma Koérdst.

gNyah khri dtsanpo—(about two hundred and fifty years B, C.)

Khri dtsanpo hod/dé, These two names may design the same person,

Mukhri dtsanpo, jane to different authorities.

Dingkhri dtsanpo.

So khri dtsanpo.

Mér khri dtsanpo.

gDags khri btsanpo.

Sribs khri dtsanpo.

Grigum dtsanpo.

Spudé gung rgyel.

Esho legs.

Désho legs.

Thiso legs.

Guru legs.

AGrong zhi legs. .

Isho legs.

Za nam za /dé.

Dé hdul-nas gzhung dtsan.

Sé rnol nam /dé.

Sé rnolpo /dé.

7Dé rnol nam.

IDé rnolpo.

1Dé rgyelpo.

1Dé Srin tsan.

rGyel tori long dtsan.

Khi dtsan, or KkridGah.

dPungs dtsan.

Khri thohi vjes grogs dtsan.

Lha Thothori gNyan étsan—(five hundred years after the first king,) A, D.

407, see Chinese list.

KhrigNyan gzugs dtsan.

AGro gNyan /dem-bu.

Stagri gNyan gzigs.

gNam ri srong dtsan.

Srong Stsan sgampo—born A. D. 627.

Gung srong gung dtsan—(died before his father.)

Mang srong mang Jtsan—(son of Srong dtsan, &c.)

hDus sang mangpo 7jé.

kLung nam dsrunggi rgyelpo.

Khri /dé gtsug drtan més ats’hogs.

Khri srong /de Jtsan—(born A. D. 726.)

Muné dtsanpo.

Khri /dé srong dtsan (or Mutig dtsanpo.)

Ralpa chen.

Khri hum /tsan dpal. (or ALangdar ma ?)—A. D. 900.

gNam /dé hod srungs—(in the ith century ; anarchy.)

dPal hkhor btsan—(division of Tibet into several small principalities.)

éKyra shis drtségs dpal.

Skyid /dé Nyima mgon.

dPalgyi mgon—(occupied Maryul or Ladags.

bKrashis /dé mgon--(took possession of Spurangs.)

IDé gtsug mgon—(ditto of

132 Burmese ‘Chronological Table.

Then follow the names of some kings or princes who reigned in Gugé and

Spurangs (or in general, in Nari), above Garhwal and Kamaon, commencing

with the 10thcentury. At Léin Ladags may be found the names of the kings

that successively reigned in that principality ; but I could not procure them.

There is great confusion in the series of the princes that reigned in Néri, and

their enumeration would be of little interest. There are in Tibet several works

containing lists of the descendants of Nya khri tsanpo, the first king, whom they

derive from the Lifsabyi race, in India ; but in different authors, the orthography

sometimes varies, andeven the whole name is differently stated. This, which I

now communicate, has been taken from the Dep-ter hon-po, ‘‘ Ancient records,’”

written by ZHoNnNu Pa’L, a learned religious person, who lived some centuries ago,

and belonged to the Sa-skya religious sect, in gTsang, in middle Tibet.—A. C.

Taste LVI. Burmese CHronotocicaL TABLE, translated in Craw-

ford’s Embassy.

B. C,

691 The grand epoch established by An-ja-na, the grand father of

Gautama.

628 Gautama born.

608 Gautama began to reign.

589 Gautama obtained deification (became a Buddha).

551 Ajatasat began to reign.

544 Gautama died and obtained nib-b’han (annihilation).

543 1 The Sacred Epock established by king Ajatasat.

520 24 Hisson, U-da-ya-bad-da, began to reign.

496 48 Hisson, Muny-da, and after him, his son, Na-ga-da-sa.

485 59 Maha Sam-b’ha-wa.

478 66 His younger brother, Chula Sam-b’ha-wa, began to reign.

472 72 Su-sa-na-ga, in Maj-ji-ma (Central India).

453 91 His son Ka-la-san-ka, in Maj-ji-ma.

443 101 Twat-ta-paong, the founder of Sa-re-k’het-ta-ra, (or Ras-se Myo,

vulgarly called Prome.)

426 118 His son Bat-la-se-na, in Maj-ji-ma.

404 140 Nan-da began to reign, and was followed by eight kings of the

same name, in Maj-ji-ma.

392 162 Chan-ta-kut-ta, in Maj-ji-ma. (Chandragupta.)

376 168 Hisson Bin-tu-sa-ra, in Maj-ji-ma.

373 171 His son Twat-ta-ram, in Prome.

351 193 Hisson Ram-b’haong, in Prome.

330 214 His son D’ham-ma-sau-ka, in Maj-ji-ma.

326 218 D’ham-ma-sau-ka received the sacred affusion (Ab’hi-se-sa).

320 224 Prince Ma-hin-d’ha became a priest, (Rahan,) and his sister,

Princess San-g’ha-mit-ta, a priestess, (Rahan.)

307 237 The period of the third rehearsal of the communications of Gau-

tama. The priest Ma-hin-d’ha went on a religious

mission to Si-ho (Ceylon).

301 243 Ra-han-man, son of D’ham-ma-sau-ka, began to reign in

Prome.

289 255 Death of D’ham-ma-sau-ka, (literally ‘‘ his going to Heaven.’’)

251 293 His son or grandson, Kak-k’han, began to reign in Prome.

219 325 His son Khan-laong, in Prome.

182 362 His sen Lak-k’hong, in Prome.

148 396 His son Si-k’han, in Prome.

118 426 His son Si-ri-rak, in Prome.

111 436 Ta-pa-mang, in Prome,

94 450 The communications of Gautama reduced to writing in Ceylon.

60 484 Ta-pa-man’s son, Pi-ram, in Prome.

39 505 Ram-mak-k’ha, in Prome, and his son.

21 565 Ram-sin-ga, in Prome, and his son.

54 568 His son Ram-mun-cha-lin-da, in Prome.

107

152

167

242

299

324

386

387

412

469

494

516

523

532

547

557

569

582

498

613

639

640

652

660

710

716

726

734

744

753

762

766

785

829

846

864

889

914

930

945

$66

972

997

1030

1056

1081

1151

Burmese Chronology.

5°3 His brother Be-rin-da, in Prome.

598 His son Mun-ja, in Prome.

600 His son Pu-nyan-nya, in Prome.

603 His brother Sa-k’ha, in Prome.

606 Sa-k’hi, in Prome.

609 His younger brother, Kan-un, in Prome,

610 His elder brother, Kan-tak, in Prome,

613 His elder brother, Bin-ja, in Prome.

617 His son Su-mun-dri, in Prome.

Pe.

1 The Prome Epoch, established by king Suemun-dri.

2 His son Ati-tra, in Prome.

5 His brother Su-panya-na-ga-ra-chin-na, in Prome.

16 Death of king Su-parya-na-ga-ra-chin-na.

29 Sa-mud-da-raj began to reign, in Pugan.

74 Ras-se-kyaong, in Pugan.

89 Phru-chau-ti, in Pugan.

164 His son T’himany-rany, in Pugan.

221 His son Rang-mang-pok, in Pugan.

246 His son Pok-san-lany, in Pugan.

503 Bud-d’ha-gau-sa went to Ceylon.

309 Pok-sang-lany’s son, Kyaong-du-rach, began to reign.

334 His son, Sany-t’han.

391 Muk-k’ha-man, and Su-rai.

416 Sany-t’han’s great grandson, Ra-mwan-mya.

438 Sok-ton.

445 His son Sang-lang-kyaung-ngai.

454 His brother Sang-lang-pok.

469 His brother K’han-laong.

579 His brother K’han-lap.

491 His son T’hwan-t’hok.

504 His son T’hwan-prach.

520 His son T’hwan-khyach.

535 Pup-pa-chau-ra-han.

Vv. E.

1 The present vulgar Epoch, established by Pup-pa-chau-raehan.

2 His son-in-law, Shwe-bun-si, succeeded.

14 His brother Pis-sun.

22 His son Pit-~taung.

72 His brother Na-k’hwe.

78 Myang-ka-kywe.

88 Sing-ga.

96 Sing-k’hwan.

106 His son Shwe-laung.

115 His son T’he-wan-twang.

124 His son Shwe-mauk.

128 His son Chau-k’hang-nach.

147. His brother T’hwan-lwat.

191 His son K’hai-lu.

208 His brother Pyany-bya.

226 His son Tan-nak.

251 Sin-chwan, and his brother, Cha-le-nga-kwe-.

276 His son Sing-g’ho.

292 Taung-su-kri, (the mountain chief.)

307 Kwan-chau-Kraung-pru.

328 His son Kraung-cho.

334 His brother Chuck-ka-té.

359 Kraung-p’haus’son Nau-ra-t’ha-chau.

392 His son Chau-lu.

418 Kyan-chach-sa.

443 His grandson Alaun-chany-su.

513 Hisson Ku-la-kya.

133

134

1154 516

1157 519

1190 552

1212 574

1227 589

AEDs

1233

2771

1291

1300

1313

1322

1330

1342

1351

1356

1362

1364

1377

1401

1422

1425

1426

1439

1442

1468

1501

1526

1541

1546

1551

1554

1565

1597

1605

1629

1648

1661

1672

1698

1714

1733

1752

1760

1763

1776

1781

Burmese Chronology.

His son Mang-rai-na-ra-sung-ga.

His brother Na-ra-pa-ti-cbany-su.

His son Je-ya-sing-ga, or Nan-taung-mya-mang.

His

Vs. Ei.

595

639

653

662

675

684

692

704

713

718

723

726

Gon

763

son Kya-chwa.

son Uch-cha-na.

His brother Mang-k’hen-k’hye.

His son Kyany-chwa.

His son Chau-nach.

Ta-chi-shang-si-ha-su, in Panya.

His son Chau-mwan-nach, in Panya.

His son Uch-cha-na. This year Asang-k’ha-ra-chau-rwan

founded Chit-kaing, and began to reign.

His elder brother, Ta-ra-bya-kri, in Chit-kaing Sagaing.

His younger brotherNa-chi-shang-kyany-chwa, in Chit-kaing.

His son Kyany-chwa, in Chit-kaing.

Chau-mwan-nach died, and Pugan was destroyed.

Kyany-chwa’s brother, Mau-pa-na-ra-su, in Chit-kaing.

His elder brotber Uch-cha-na-praung, in Chit-kaing. This

year Sa-to-mang-bya founded Angwa (Ava), and began

to reign; Chit-kaing and Panya were destroyed.

His father-in-law, Many-kri-chwa, in Ava.

His son Ta-ra-bya-kri, in Ava, succeeded the same year by

Mang-kaung Ist.

His son Chany-pru-shang-si-ha-su, in Ava.

His son Many-Vha-gray, in Ava; succeeded the same year by

Ka-le-kye-ngo.

Mo-n’hany-mang-ta-ra, in Ava.

His son Mang-rai-kyany-chwa, in Ava,

His brother Na-ra-pa-ti-kri, in Ava.

His son Mang-k’haung 2nd, in Ava,

His son Shwe-nan-kyany-shang, in Ava, (proper name, Na-

ra-pa-ti.)

Mo-n’hany-so-hau-pwa, in Ava.

Un-b’haung-chan-b’hwa, in Ava.

His son Mo-bya-na-ra-pa-ti, in Ava.

Cha-kong-chany-su kyaoy-taung, or Na-ra-pa-ti gan, in Ava.

Sa-to-mang-chau, in Ava.

Prany-chun-mang-rai-kyany-chwa, in Ava.

Nyaung-ram-man-kri, in Ava.

His son Anauk-pak-lwan-mang-ta-ra-kri, in Ava.

Sa-lwan, in Ava.

His son Na-dat-da-ya-ka, in Ava.

His brother Prung-mang, in Ava.

His son Na-ra-wara, in Ava; succeeded the same year Mang-

rai-kyany-tang, grandson of Sa-lwan.

His son Man-aung-ra-da-nga-da-ya-ka, in Ava,

His son Chang-p’hru-shang, in Ava.

His son K’haung-thit, carried captive to Han-sa-wati.

Alaung-b’hu-ra (Alompra) began to reign at Mut-eho-bo

(Monchabo.)

His son U-pa ra-ja, at Chit kaing.

His brother Chany-p’hru-shang (Sembuen), at Ava.

His son Chany-ku-cha, at Ava.

His cousin Paung-ka-cha, commonly called Maung-mang,

son of U-pa ra-ja, at Ava; succeeded the same year by

his uncle Pa-dun-mang, or Man-ta-ra-kri, son of A-

laung-b’hu-ra, and founder of A-ma-ra-pu-ra.

His present Majesty, grandson of Pa-dun-mang, ascended

the throne at A-ma-ra-pura.

Ava re-built, and made the capital.

Chiefs of Labong—Kings of Ceylon. 135

Taste LVII. Cuiers or Lasone and Zimmay.—(Northern Laos of

Huropeans ; Yeun Shan of the Burmese.)

From the Native Records consulted by Dr. D. Richardson, 1834. MS.

A. D. S. E. Bud.

576 1118 Wathoo daywa (Vasudeva) and Taka danda, founded Labong.

578 1120 Placed Vama on the throne (or Zamma devi), daughter of the

king of Chandapur, widow of Cambodia raja.

35 Kings, or ‘ Lords of the White Elephant.”

Aditza-woon-tha built the Pagoda.

19 kings to

V. E. Bénya men yea (in Burmese, Dolana.)

1289 651 pale men yea, changed the capital ; thrice married into Pegu

amily.

1294 656 founded Zimmay.

1331 693 Nga then patchoon, his son.

1333 695 No tchoon ta yung.

1334 696 Na tchoon tareung,

1336 698 Ngathenpoo.

1345 707 +‘Tso kaupra.

1347 709 Tso boa you.

1369 731 Goona.

1377 739 Gnathen numa.

1380 742 Thambi.

1420 782 Tso Benya.

1455 817 Tso neat.

1463 825 Benya yothee.

1503 865 Tso myn ar.

1537 899 Benya tsay.

1542 904 Tso myne.

1544 906 Zalapaba, his daughter, called there tha Dama mahadevi.

1558 920 Len bue myashee, king of Pegu, took the town.

— His son Narata’tso.

1628 990 Ladong family restored.

1630 992 Thadau dama yaza of Pegu regained it.

1763 1125 Nso oung recovered his independence.

= Lenbu Sheen, sonof Anrompra of Ava, took it.

1774 1136 Benya sa Ban rebelled, threw off Burmese yoke, and joined

Bankok allegiance.

1778 1140 Chou chee weet, present king.

Taste LVIII. Soverziens or Cryton.

From the Ceylon Almanack, the Honorable GEoncr TuRNovuR’s Epitome.

Bec. Names. Relationship of each succeeding sovereign.

543 Wejaya, (Vijaya) ........... The founder of the Wejayan dynasty.

a0g Oopatissa Ist)... ..5.-,-...-. |Minister—regent.

504 Panduwaasa,............... Paternal nephew of Wejaya.

474 Abhaya,...... Son of Panduwaasa—dethroned.

454 Interregnum.

437 Pandukaabhaya, (capital Anu-

HOSTER) mckdon Gocone Habe Maternal grandson of Panduwaasa.

367 Mootaseewa, .............. Paternal grandson.

307 Devenipeatissa, .. Second son.

AH BOO) OLGLYLs eee ct aay sates Fourth son of Mootaseewa.

257 Maha-seewa, Fifth ditto.

2A ie SULALISSA Tints <i teers Sixth ditto—put to death.

237 Sena and Goottika, .......- Foreign usurpers—put to death.

Zio Aselay .- seeeeeeeeceeees Ninth son of Mootaseewa—deposed.

205 Plaala, .. 2.5. face ese aseso ee Foreign usuirper—killed in battle.

136

161

137

119

109

104

103

100

110

125

131

155

173

183

184

209

231

239

241

242

246

248

261

275

302

330

Kings of Ceylon.

Dootoogaimoonoo, ..

Saidaitissa, .... etches

Toohl or Thullatianale,

Laiminitissa lst, or Lajjetissa,

Kaloonna or Khallaata Naaga,

Walagambahoo lst, or Watta-

gaamini, .... stele

Pulahattha, (asurpers) a aligta ole

Baayiha, .. : BE Bi

Panaymaaraa, ....2++++--+ oe

Peliyamaaraa, ......+++sseee

Daathiya, ....

Walagambahoo Ist. an

Mahadailitissa or Mahachoola,

Choora Naaga, BA 5.0

Kooda ye Mr iale iste teria aus wicete

Anoola, .....

Makalantissa or

"RESSA,. "cs, sissies

Baatiyatissa Ist, ¢ or : Baatikaa-

DENS (oo bo oho coeono soe

/— Kollakanni

Mahadailiya mace or Daathi-

ka, .

Addagaimoono | ‘or "‘Aamanda

Gaaminit atid oe ce tee

es og or - Kanijaani

WMSSa; “vec

Kooda Abhaa | or r Choolaabhya,

Singhawallee or Seewalli, ....

Interregnum.

Elloona, or Ila Naaga, ......

Sanda Moohoona, or Chanda

MukhaySeewa;.... ++ sclele

Yasa Siloo, or Yataalakatissa,

SHOE Gono sade WOOOROC

Wahapp, or Wasahba, ao od oo

Waknais, or Wanka Naasika,

Gajaabahoo Ist, or Gaamini,..

Mahaloomaana,or Mallaka Naa-

PA seloiele Geto arvie wttels Cee ta Om

Baatiya Tissa 2nd, or Bhaatika

Tissa, 4

Choola Tissa,or Kanittha Tissa,

Koohoona or Choodda Naaga,

Koodanaama or Kooda Naaga,

Kooda Sirinaa, or SiriNaaga Ist,

Waiwahairatissa or Wairatissa,

Abha Sen, or Abha al Sores

Siri Naaga 2nd.,

Weja Indoo, or Wejaya 2nd,

Sangatissa Ist,

Dahama Sirisanga Bo, or = Siri

sanga Bodhi Ist, 2

Goloo Abhaya, Gotha “Abhaya

or Meghawarna Abhaya,..

Makalan Detoo Tissa ue 5

Maha Sen, 3

Kitsiri Maiwan Ist, or cir

tissri, Meghawarna,

Detoo Tissa 2nd,

@eeoeesvece

Son of Kaawantissa.

Brother.

Younger son—deposed.

Elder brother.

Brother—put to death.

Brother—depos ed.

14. 7 tied usurpers—succes-

[sively deposed and put to death.

Reconquered the kingdom.

Son.

Son—put to death.

Son—poisoned by his wife.

Widow.

Second son of Koodatissa,

Son.

Brother.

Son—put to death.

Brother.

Son.

Sister—put to death.

Maternal nephew of Addagaimoono,

Son.

Brother—put to death.

Usurper— put to death.

Descendant of Laiminitissa.

Son.

Maternal cousin.

Son.

Brother.

Son—murdered.

Nepbew—deposed.

Brother-in-law.

Son—murdered.

Brother.

Son.

Son—put to death.

Descendant of Laiminitissa—poisoned.

Do. do.—deposed.

Do.

Son.

Brother.

do.

Son.

Brother.

339

368

410

432

433

434

439

455

458

459

477

495

513

522

531

534

547

567

586

589

623

633

639

648

649

665

677

686

693

702

718

720

726

729

769

715

795

Kings of Ceylon.

Bujas or Budha Daasa,....

Oopatissa 2nd,

IMiaav Na amar of) cfeeie sie siete cre

Senghot or Sotthi Sena,

Laimini Tissa 2nd, or Chata-

eosorees ed

GeGeIE Beas Sadacooandsc

Mitta Sena, or Karalsora,....

SAAN Ue eel etoiciatacsta viciete.w oe se

Paarinda icouda Se er

Khudda Paarinda, ..........

Daatthiya, . spoenac

Bitthiyayi rice

Daasenkelleya, or Dhaatu ‘Sena,

Sigiri Kasoomboo, or Kaasypa

Isieon dd boas on on ohinc ote

Moogallaana Ist, -

Koomaara Daas, or Koomaars au

DhaatiSena, see. oO ee ete

Kirti Sena, ......

Maidi Siwoo, or Siealal es ae

Laimini Oopatissa Ht PL BPs

Ambaherra Sima or

Silaakaaley ys ONS |e

Daapuloo list, or Daatthaapa

Gane ee wi lS

Dalamagalan or Moogallaana

BAT ec ce Rion Boma Gree

Kuda Kitsiri Maiwan Ist, or

Kirtisri Meghawarna,......

Senewi or Maha Naaga, ....

Aggrabodhi Ist, or Akbo, ....

Aggrabodhi 2nd, or Soola Akbo,

WANS NALI SSAA A acre alsretc lac ce

Boona aioe ne or Laimini

Bonaaya, ....

Abbaseggaaheka,

Hekate se;

Siri Sangabo Qnd, ;

Kaloona Detootissa, or Eine

Katooneyas Was etaclels

Siri Sangabo 2nd, ...

Daloopeatissa lst, or Dhattho-

Pabissa, ih...

Paisooloo Kasdombo' or here

Saya 2G Marie at tel cece creas +

Dapuloo 2nd,

Daloopeatiss 2nd, or Hattha-

Datthopatissa,......

Paisooloo Siri pee Bo 3rd, « or

Aggrabodhi... A

Walpitti Wasidata, | or Danta-

naama, .... Be

Hoonnonara Riandalaor Hat-

tThadathae. sevctetete ener

Mahalaipaanoo, or Maanawam-

AGEL, o'er ss

Kaasiyappa 3rd, or yr Kasoombo,

Agegrabodhi 3rd, or Akbo, ..

Aggrabodhi 4th, or Kuda Akbo,

Mihindoo Ist, or Salamaiwan,

Dappoola 2nd,......

or t Asiggua-

oo pe ee oe

137

Son.

Brother.

Son—poisoned.

Descendant of Laimini Tissa.

Not specified—put to death.

+24. 9—Foreign usupers.

Descendant of the original royal family

—put to death.

Son—committed suicide.

Brother.

Son—immolated himself.

Son—murdered.

Maternal uncle—murdered.

Brother-in-law.

Son-in-law.

Second son— committed suicide.

Elder Brother.

Son—put to death.

Descendant of the Okaaka branch,

Maternal nephew.

Son-in-law.

Brother—decapitated.

Usurper—put to death.

Maternal grandson.

Son—deposed.

Descendant of Laimini Tissa—commit-

ted suicide.

Restored, and again deposed.

Laimini branch—killed in battle.

Brother of Sirisangabo.

Okaaka branch—deposed.

Son of Daloopeatissa Ist.

Brother.

Okaaka branch.

Original royal family —decapitated.

Do.

Son.

Nephew.

Son, (capital Pollonnaroowa.)

Original royal family.

Son.

do. do.

1388

800

804

815

$31

838

858

891

926

937

954

964

974

977

286

994

997

1013

1023

1059

1071

1126

1127

1153

1186

1187

1196

1197

1200

1202

1208

1209

1210

1211

1214

1235

1266

1301

1303

1314

1319

1347

1361

Kings of Ceylon.

Mihindo 2nd, or Dharmika-See-

Jaamalga, (igncle ec TOG

Aggrabodhi 5th, or Akbo, 56

Dappoola 3rd, or Kuda Dap-

POO ies... Pode ee

Aggrabodhi 6th, ete

Mitwella Sen, or ‘Sclaanasgaan

Kaasiyappa 4th, or Siac

Sena, or Mihindoo, ....

Udaya Ist, Bats Cos ina

Udaya 2nd, etatel-aveko's/eeredete

Kaasiyappa ObL,, <5 caeniaeee

Kaasiyappa 6th, ............

DappoolaAth; 5c). aheaieeee

Dappoola 5th,.. eo oo

Udlaya Suid sive hens diee mucins eae

SWE AG eb ba oo one

Udaya 4th,

Semayands ces Gord eric

Mihi do oy oTds nie eae eee

Nena AGN, ce \onsiad/emi deeds

Mihindoo Athy :aects, isis; tattoet

eereece sees eses

Interregnum, ....

Wejayabahoo lst, or - Sirisan-

gabo 4th, . pero detalate

Jayabahoo Ist,

Wikramabahoo Ist,

Gajaabahoo 2nd,

Prakramabahoo Ist, .........

Wijayabahoo 2nd,

Mihindo 5th,or KitsenKisdaas,

Kirti Nissanga,

Werabahoo, .... Poe

Wikr amabahoo eee .

Chondakangay'$) | sic oraerceiae

Leelawati,

Saahasamallawa,

Kalyaanawati,..........

Dharmaasooka, .....

Nayaanga or Nikanga,

Leelawati,

Lokaiswera Ist,

Leelawati,

Pandi Prakrama Bahoo 2nd,

Maagha, ....

Wejayabahoo 3rd, (cap. ‘Dom-

badinia,)

Kalikaala Sahitya Sargwajnya,

or Paandita Prakrama Bahoo

3rd,

Bosat Wejaya Bahoo 4th,

Bhuwaneka Bahoo Ist,

Prakrama Bahoo 3rd,

Bhuwaneka Bahoo Ond (at Has-

tisailapura,) ..

Pandita Prakrama Bahoo ‘4th,

Wanny Bhuwaneka Bahoo 3rd,

Wejaya Bahoo 5th,.

Bhuwaneka Bahoo 4th (at 6 Gam-

ONAL alone

Prakrama Bahoo bth, .

@eescorec

os ee ee es eens

eocee es ee oe oe acove

eeeceee ee wees

Ce ay

eo eeecr ee ee es eo ee

eeoee ee eer ee oe eo oe ones

Son.

Brother.

Son.

Cousin.

Son.

Grandson.

Brother.

Son.

Nephew and son-in-law.

Son-in-law.

Son.

Not specified.

Brother.

Not specified.

Do. do.

Not specified.

Son--minor.

Brother—-carried captive to India

during the Soleean conquest.

Soleean vice-royalty.

Grandson of Mihindoo 4th.

Brother.

A disputed succession.

Son of Maanaabarana.

Nephew—murdered.

Usurper— put to death.

A prince of Kaalinga.

Son—put to death.

Brother of KirtiNissanga—put to death.

Nepbew—deposed.

Widow of Prakramabahoo—deposed.

Okaaka branch—deposed.

Sister of Kirti Nissanga.

Not specified—a minor.

Minister—put to death.

Restored, and again deposed.

Usurper— deposed.

Again restored and deposed a third time.

Usurper—deposed.

Foreign usurper.

Descendant of Sirisangabo Ist.

Son.

Brother.

Son of Bosat Wejayabahoo.

Son of Bhuwenekabahoo.

]

| Not specified.

Kings of Ceylon—adjusting epochs. 139

1371 ‘Wikram Bahoo 3rd, (at Kandy,) Cousin.

1378 Bhuwaneka Bahoo Sth,...... 7)

1398 Wejaya Bahoo 5th, or Weera_ |

BANOO, 9 s/o cies «2 an eatels .-.. > Not specified.

1410 Siri Prakrama Bahoo 6th, (at |

TOULG;) oie e o:m 0 0, ARGC oO

1462 Jayaa Bahoo 2nd, .......... Maternal grandson—put to death.

1464 Bhuwaneka Bahoo 6th,.. .... Notspecified.

1471 Pandita Prakrama Bahoo 7th, Adopted son.

1485 Wira Prakrama Bahoo 8th, .. Brother of Bhuwaneka Bahoo 6th.

1505 Dharma Prakrama Bahoo 9th, Son.

1527 Wejaya Bahoo 7th, ...-.... Brother—murdered.

1534 Bhuwaneka Bahoo/7th, ...... Son.

1542 Don Juan Dharmapaala, .... Grandson.

A Malabar, at Yapahoo.

Portuguese, at Colombo.

Weediye Raja, at Pailainda Nowera.

Raajasingha, at Aiwissawelle.

Idirimaaney Suriya, at Seven Korles.

Wikrama Bahoo, at Kandy.

1581 Raajasingha Ist,............ Son of Maayaadunnai.

1592 Wimala Dharma,............ Original royal family.

1604 Senaaratena, or Senerat, .... Brotner.

WGa5 Raajasingha 2nd, '..2......s3 Son.

Koomaara-singa,.. ......++++ Brother.

Wijaya Paala,...........+.. Brother.

1685 Wimala Dharma Suriya 2nd,.. Son of Raajasingha.

. 1707 Sriwira Prakrama Narendra-

singha, or Koondasaala, .. Son.

1739 Sriwejaya Raajasingha, or Han-

PUEAMKE (TAs. 01 + oso a slovateisls Brother-in-law.

1747 Kirtisri Raajasingha,........ Brother-in-law.

1781 Raajaadhi Raajasingha, ...... Brother.

1798 Sree Vikrama Raajasingha, .. Son of the late king’s wife’s sister, de-

posed by the English, and died in

captivity.

In the native mode of recording the lengths of individual reigns, without refer-

ring them to a fixed epoch, anachronisms are unavoidable: Mr. Turnour has

judiciously applied the following fixed points to correct the foregoing table.

B. C. 543 The landing of Vijaya, in the year of Buddha’s death.

307. The Mission from Dharmasoka to establish Buddhism in Ceylon.

104 The conquest of Ceylon by the Malabars.

90 The founding of Abhayagiri by Wala gaurbahu.

A. D. 209 The date of the Vaitiliya heresy, in Vaivahara’s reign.

252 The revival of ditto, in the reign of Gol Abhaa.

301 Death of Makasen, 4 years anachronism.

545 Another revival of the Vaittliya heresy, in Ambakaira’s reign.

838 Origin of the Vijra waadiya heresy, in Mitwella Sén’s reign.

1153 The accession of Prakrama Bah&, 6 years anachr.

1200 Ditto of Sahasa Mallawa, by Dambulla rock inscription, A. B. 1473.

1266 Ditto of Panditta Prékrama Baha 3rd, error 7 years.

1347 Ditto of Bhuwanika Baht 4th.

In the remaining portion of the history of Ceylon, other materials have not

been wanting for the adjustment of its Chronology.

140 Greeks Dynasties of Syria—Asia Minor—Parthia—Bactria.

Taste LIX. Greex Dynastizs in Asia, founded after the death of

Alexander the Great, by his generals, &c.

B.C.

334

Bea:

310

28)

259

244

226

222

A. D.

118

160

167

195

215

235

ALEXANDER the Great; born 356: died 323.

Syria.

Seleucus I. Nicanor.

Antiochus I. Soter.

Antiochus II. Theos.

Seleucus II. Callinicus.

Seleucus III. Ceraunus.

Antiochus III. Magnus.

Acheus.

Seleucus IV. Philopator.

Antiochus IV. Epiphanes.

Antiochus V. Eupator.

Demetrius I. Soter.

Alexander I. Bala.

Demetrius IT. Nicator.

Antiochus VI. Theos.

Tryphon.

Asia Minor.

Antigonus.

Demetrius Poliorcetes.

Parthia.

Arsaces I.

Tiridates*,

Artabanes.

Phriadatius.

Phrahates.

Mithradates.

Phrahates IT.

Artabanes IT.

Mithradates II.

Mnaskires.

Sinatroces.

Phrahates ITI.

Mithradates III.

Orodes.

Phrahates IV.

Phrahataces.

Orodes II.

Vonones I.

Artabanes IIT.

Gotarces.

Bardanus.

Vonones II.

Vologeses.

Pacorus.

Chosroes.

Moneses.

Vologeses IT.

Vologeses III.

Artabanes IV.

Artaxerxes, King of Persia, Ist

of the Sassanide. See Table

LXVIII.

140

127

121

120

112

B. C.

2595

243

220

195

181

146

125

Antiochus VII. Sidetes.

Alexander II.

Seleucus V.

Antiochus VIII. Gryphus.

Antiochus IX. Cyzicenicus.

Seleucus VI.

Antiochus X. Eusebes.

Antiochus XI.

Philip, and

Demetrius III. Euchares.

Antiochus XII. (Dionysius of

Josephus.)

Tigranes, of Armenia.

Antiochus XIII. Asiaticus.

Syria became a Roman province.

Known Kings of Bactria.

Theodotus I.

Theodotus II.

Euthydemus, of Magnesia.

Apollodotus.

Menander, king of India.

Heliocles. (?)

Demetrius, son of Euth.

Eucratides the Great.

Eucratides IT.

Destruction of the Bactrian Em-

pire by the Tartars and Scy-

thians.

New names discovered on Greek coins

dug up in the Panjab, connecting the

Bactrian with the Hindu dynasties.

Agathocles.

Pantaleén.

Diomedes.

Antilakides.

Lysius.

Philoxenus.

Antimachus.

Nonus.

Mayus.

Kodus.

Azus.

Azilisus.

Hermeus.

Unadpherrus.

Kadaphes Choranus.

Oohemo Kadphises.

Rao Kanerkos.

Rao nanorao oerki korano, (the

series here falls into the Ca-

nouj group.) See Table XXIX.

* The family name Arsaces is applied to all the princes of Parthia. hence called

the Arsacid@, and is almost the only one visible on their coins : their titles are megas,

dikaios, euergetes, epiphanes, zenios, theos, nikator, philellenos, theopator, &c.

Kings of Persia—Peshdadian—Kaianian—Sassanian. 141

Taste LX. Mythological period of Persian history.

Peshdddian dynasty.

Kaiumars, by some supposed Adam, or Noah, reigned at Balkh.

Siamek, his son.

Hoshang.

Thamurath, surnamed Deoband.

Jamshid, reigned at Persepolis.

Zohak, surnamed Alvani, an invader.

“ems restored by Kawa the blacksmith.

raj.

Koshang.

Manuchebhr.

Naudar.

Afrasiab, king of Turkistdn.

Zab, brother of Naudar.

Ghorshasp.

Kaianian dynasty.

Kai-kobad, (fai signifies the mighty.)

Kai-Kavus, son or grandson, Rustem his general.

Kai-Khdésru, grandson. Cyrus the great.

Loharasp, son of Orond Shah. (Cambyses omitted ?)

Gushtasp, his son. Hystaspes of Grecian history.

Isfendiar, his son. Apanda or Astyages of do.

Kai Bahman, or Ardeshir darazdast. Artaxerxes Longimanus.

Homai, daughter and wife of do.

Darab, son of do.

Dara, his son: the Darius overcome by Alexander the Great.

(The Muluk-tawatf, or Petty kings, following Alexander, called by the Per-

sians the Ashkantans and Ashghanians, have been given above as the Arsacide

of the Greeks. ]

Taste LXI. Kinas or Persia, of the Sassanian race.

A. D.

223 1 Ardeshir-Babegdén ben Sasan, or Artaxerxes.

238 2 Shahpihr, Shaptr, or Sapor, captured Valerian.

271 3 Hormuzd or Hormisdas.

273 4 Bahardm or Varanes.

279 5 Baharam or Varanes II.

296 6 Baharam or Varanes III.

297. 7 Narsé or Narses, conquered Armenia and Galerius.

303 8 Hormuzd or Hormisdas II.

310 9 Shahpdhr or Sapor II.

380 10 Ardeshir or Artaxerxes IT.

384 11 Shahpdbhr or Sapor III.

389 12 Bahardm or Varanes IV.

399 13 Yezdegird or Isdegerde.

420 14 Bahardm-gaur or Varanes V. visited India.

440 15 Yezdegird or Isdegerde II.

457. 16 Hormuzd or Hormisdas III.

457 17 Firdz or Perose, allied with Khakan of Huns.

488 18 Balas, Palash, or Balasces.

491 19 Kobad or Cavades.

498 20 Jamasp.

531 21 Khosrd, Kesri, (NusHIRVAN,) or Chosroes.

579 22 Hormuzd or Hormisdas IV. deposed by his general.

589 23 Khosra-Parviz, Kesri, or Chosroes II. put to death by

628 24 KobAd-Shirdyieh or Siroes.

629 25 Ardeshir III. or Adeser. Anarchy.

629 26 Shahridr or Sarbazas.

629 27 Purin-Dokht.

142 Khalifs—of Damascus—of Baghdad.

A. D.

631 28 Azermi-Dokht.

631 29 Ferokh-zad-Bakhtyar. .

632 30 Yezdegird or Isdegerde III, overthrown by Musulmans 641.

Taste LX. Kuautrs, vicegerents or successors of Mauomep or

MvuHAMMED BEN ABD-ALLAH, whose death occurred in the 11th of

Hejra era, or A. D. 682.

[This and the following from Marsden’s Numismata Orientalia.]

Osa a Wea o/s eee) BU

il 632 1 <Abubekr.

U3) 4634 2 Omar.

23 644 3 Othm4n.

DOr O00) mA ANI

40 661° 5 Hasan ben Ali, retired at Medina—Hosein killed at Kerbela.

Race of Ommiah, reigning at Damascus.

41 661 1 Muaéawiah.

60 680 2 Yezid ben Muawiah.

64 684 3 Muawtah II. ben Yezid.

64 684 4 Abdallah ben Zobeir.

84 684 5 Merwdn ben Hul-akem.

65 684 6 Abd-ul-malek ben Merwan.

86 705 7 Walid ben Abd-ul-malek.

96 714 8 Soleim4n ben Abd-ul-malek.

99 717. 9 Omar ben Abd-ul-aziz.

101 720 10 Yezid II. ben Abd-ul-malek.

105 724 11 Hesham ben Abd-ul-malek.

125 743 12 Walid II. ben Yezid.

126 744 13 Yezid III. ben Walid.

126 744 14 Ibr4him ben Walid.

127. 744 15 Merwdn IT. ben Muhammed, deposed and slain.

Race of Al-Abbds, reigning at Baghdad.

132 750 1 AbéGl Abbas al-saffah.

136 754 2 Almansar. °

158 775 3 Al-Mahdi ben al-Mansar.

169 785 .4 Al-Hadt ben al-Mahdi.

170 786 5. Hardn al-Rashid ben al-Mahdi.

193 809 6 Al-Amin ben al-Rashid.

198 813 7 Al-M4mun ben al-Rashid.

Ibrahim ben al-Mahdi, competitor, 817—818,

218 833 8 Al-MOdtasem billah ben al-Rashid.

227 842 9 Al-Wathek-billah ben al-Mdtasem.

232 847 10 Al-Motawakkel ala’llah ben Motasem.

247 $861 11. All-Mostanser billah ben Motawakkel.

248 862 12 Al-Mostain billah ben Muhammed ben Modtasem.

252 866 13. Al-Mdtaz billah ben Motawakkel.

255 869 14 Al-Mohtadi billah ben Wathek.

256 870 15 Al-Mdtamed ala’llah ben Motawakkel, Egypt independent.

Muwaffek billah, his coadjutor, from 871 to 891.

279 892 16 Al-Modtadhed billah ben Muwaffek.

289 902 17 Al-Moktafi billah ben Motadhed ; provinces independent.

295 908 18 Al-Moktader billah ben Modtadhed, murdered by a eunuch.

320 932 19 Al-Kaher billah ben Mdtadhed.

322 934 20 Al-Radhi billah ben Moktader, Amir ul omra powerful.

329 940 21 Al-Motaki billah ben Moktader.

333 944 22 Al-Mostakfi billah ben Motaki.

334 946 23 Al-Moti lillah ben Moktader.

363 974 24 Al-Tai billah ben Moti.

381 991 25 Al-KAder billah ben Ishak ben Moktader.

422 1031 26 Al-Kéim beamrillah Aba Jéfar Abd-Allah ben Kader.

467 1075 27 Al-Moktadi billah Abu’l Kasem Abdallah ben Muhammed

ben Kéim.

Khalifs—Samanians—Ghaznevides—Seljukians. 143

487 1094

512 1118

529 1135

630 1136

255 1160

566 1170

575 1180

622 1225

623 1226

640 1242

28 Al-Mostadher billah ben Moktadi.

29 Al-Mostarshed billah ben Mostadher.

30 Al-Rashed billah ken Mostarshed.

31 Al-Moktafi beamrillah ben Mostadher.

32 Al-Mostanjed billah ben Moktafi.

33 Al-Mostadhi beamrillah ben Mostanjed.

34 Al-Nasar aldin illah ben Mostanjed, professes Shia doctrines.

35 Al-Dhaher beamrillah Muhammed ben Naser.

36 Al-Mostanser billah Aba Jafar Al-Mansar ben Dh4her.

37 Al-Mostasem billah Ab& Ahmed Abd-Allah ben Mostanser.

In the year 656, (1258,) Baghddd was besieged and taken by the Moghul Chief

Huxa’cu, grandson of Jencui1z Kua’n, and tne Khalif Mosrasen put to death.

Taste LXIII. Samanran or Sama/ni’ Dynasty, of Bokhdrd, Khordsdn

A. H.

261

279

295

301

331

343

350

366

387

389

TABLE

Aes AL.

365

387

421

432

433

440

444

451

481

508

512

548

579

Ghaznt.

and Prrsta.

A. D.

874 Nasr ben Ahmed, great grandson of Sam4n, a robber chief, ap-

pointed governor of Bokhara by the Khalif Motamed.

892 Ismail ben Ahmed.

907 Ahmed ben Ismail.

913 Nasr ben Ahmed.

943. Nuh ben Nasr.

954 Abd-ul-malek ben Nuh,

961 Al-Mansir ben Nih.

977. Nuh ben Al-Mansiar.

997 Al-Manstr ben Nih, deposed and blinded.

998 Abd-ul-malek ben Nah, overturned by the Ghaznavis.

LXIV. Guaznevine Dynasty of Parsta and Inp1a, including

Khordsin, Maver-ul-nahr, Bokhdrd, &¢c. Capital Ghaznt.

A. D.

975 Sabactagin, a Turkish slave of Alpteghin, a general in the service

of Sultan Nth ofthe Samanides, held government of Ghazni,

and Khor4san.

997 Ismael appointed successor, but displaced by

997 Sultan yemin ud-daulat abul kasim Maumup.

1030 Muhammed, his son, deposed instantly.

1030 Masaud, another son, deposed and killed.

1041 Muhammed, restored, and again deposed.

1042 Maudud, son of Masaud.

1048 Shams ud-din allah Saif ud-daulah, ABDURRASHID.

1052 Ferokhzad, son of Masaud,

1059 Malek Mouidd Ipra’HIMm.

1088 Julal ud-din Masaud, or Abusaid.

1115 Arslan Shah.

1118 Bahram Shah.

1153 Nizam ud-din Khosru Shah.

1183 Ghazni taken by Shabab ud-din, and the Ghort dynasty establish-

ed. (See Tad. LXXII.)

Taste LXV. Svuura’ns of the Sunsu’K Dynasty.

[The grandsons of Setsu’x, a Turk of the tribe of Khazar or Ghaz on the Cas-

pian, Toghrul-beg and Jafer-beg Daotd, were in the service of Mahmiad of

In A, H. 429 (1036), the former resisted Masaud, and received

investiture as Sult4n of Khorasan from the Khalif. The three branches of

the SeljGk family settled in Hamaddn, Kerman, and Rum or Anatolia.—Mars-

den’s Or. Num. ]

I. Seljuk dynasty of Iran or Persia.

ee He!) A. Dis

429 1037 Rokn ud-din Abuthaleb, Tocure: pecH, Mahmad.

1063 Alp Arslan, Abushajia Azz ud-din.

K 2

455

Seljuks of Persia —K erman—Riim—Atabegs of Irak—

144

465 1072

485 1092

498 1104

498 1105

511 1118

525 1131

926 1131

527 1132

529 1134

547 1152

547° 1152

552 1157

554 1159

955 1160

571 1175

433 1041

465 1072

467 1074

489 1096

494 1100

536 1141

551 1156

565 1169

III.

A. H. A. D.

470 1077

478 1085

485 1092

501 1107

510 1116

551 1156

584 1188

588 1192

596?

600 1203

607 1210

616 1219

634 1236

643 1245

655 1257

666 1267

682 1283

Malekshah, Moaz ud-din abul fateh.

Barkiarok, rokn ud-din abulmozaffer k4sim : in his reign the

empire was divided, he retaining Persia ; Ghids ud-din Muham-

med, Syria and Aderbijén ; and Moaz ud-din burhan sanjiar,

Khorasan and Maveruinahr.

Malek Shah, his son, deposed.

Muhammed, chosen Sultan.

Mahmud, Moghiath ud-din Abul Casem,

Daoud, his son, deposed.

Masaud, Ghiath ud-din, deposed.

Toghrel, son of Muhammed.

Masaud, re-established.

Malek Shah, son of Mahmud, deposed.

Mahmud, grandson of Bograkhan, at Merv.

Muhammed, his son, at Hamaddn.

Suleiman Shah, killed.

Arslan Shah, son of Toghrel, son of Muhammed.

Toghrel Shah, his son.

II. Seljuk dynasty of Kerman.

Kadherd, or Karut begh, installed by Toghrel begh.

Sultan Shah, his son.

Turan Shah.

Iran Shah.

Arslan Shah.

Moghiath ud-din Muhammed.

Toghrel Shah.

Bahram, Arslan, and Turan Shah dispute succession.

Muhammed Shéh, dispossessed by Malek dinar 583-1187.

Seljuk dynasty of Rim or Anatolia. Capital Iconium.

Suleiman ben Kotlumish.

Interregnum of seven years.

Daotid Kilij Arslan ben Suleim4n,

Saisan ben Kilij Arslan.

Mas4ud ben Kilij Arslan.

Azz-ud-din Kilij Arslan ben Masaud, destroyed 1st crusade army.

Kotb-ud-din Malek Shah ben Kilij Arslan, deposed.

Ghiaés-ud-din Kai Khosru ben Kilij Arslan, deposed.

Rukn-ud-din Suleiman ben Kilij Arslan, deposed.

Kilij Arslin ben Rukn-ud-din, deposed.

Ghias-ud-din Kai Khosru, (restored.)

Azz-ud-din Kai Kans ben Kai Khosru.

Ala-ud-din Kai Kobad ben Kai Khosru.

Ghids-ud-din Kai Khosru ben Kai Kobad, invaded by the Moghul .

Princes, descendants of Jenghiz Khan (See Tab.

Azz-ud-din Kai Kaus, in nominal conjunction with his brothers,

Rukn-ud-din and Ala-ud-din, sons of Kai Khosru.

Rukn-ud-din Kilij Arslan. ;

Ghias-ud-din Kai Khosru ben Rukn-ud-din.

Masaud ben Azz-ud-din Kai Kaus, died 708—1308.

Taste LXVI, Arasees of [ra’x, ruling Ministers under the latter

AodH. AnD.

521 1127

540) 1145

544 1149

565

276

1170

1180

Princes of the Seljukian race.

Mosul Branch.

Im4d ud-din Zengi.

Seif ud-din Ghazi ben Zengi.

Kotb ud-din Maudud ben Zengi.

Al-Moaz Seif ud-din Ghazi ben Maudud.

Azz ud-din Masdud ben Maudud.

of Aleppo—Ortokites of Syria—Moghels of Tartary. 145

989 1193 Nar ud-din (Bedrud-din) Arslan Shah ben Masdud.

607 1210 Malek al-Kaher Azz ud-din Masaud ben Nir ud-din.

615 1218 Nar ud-din Arslan Shah ben Kiéher.

616 1219 Nasar ud-din Mahmid ben Kaher.

619 1222 Al-Malek al-Rahim Bedr ud-din Lala.

657 1259 Al-Malek as-Sdlah Ismail ben Lala.

Haleb (Aleppo) Branch.

521 1127 Imad ud-din Zengi.

540 1145 Malek al-Adel Nar ud-din Mahmiid ben Zengi.

569 1174 Al-Malek as-Salah Ism4il ben Nar ud-din Mahmid.

577 1181 Imédud-din Zengi ben Kotb ud-din ben Maudud, delivered

Haleb to Sdlah ud-din or Saladin.

594 1197 Kotb ud-din Muhammed ben Imdd ud-din, at Singdara.

Tasie LXVII. Turcoman OrtoxiTs Princes, reigning in Mardin and

Miafarkin, Syria.

Il Gh4zi ben Ortok, seized Jerusalem and Mardin.

516 1122 Husdm-ud-din Timurtdsh ben ul Ghazi.

547 1152 Nejm-ud-din Abu’l Modhaffer Albi ben Timurtash.

572 1176 Kotb-ud-din Il Ghazi ben Albi (or Alpi).

580 1184 Husdm-ud-din Yiluk Arslan ben Kotb-ud-din.

was ° Malek-ul-Mansar Naser-ud-din Ortok Arslan ben Kotb-ud-din.

637. 1239 Malek us-Said Najm-ud-din Ghazi ben Naser-ud-din Ortok.

653 1255 Malek ul-Modhaffer Kar4 Arslan ben Nejm-ud-din.

691 1291 Shams-ud-din Daoud.

693 1293 Malek ul Mansdr Najm-ud-din Ghazi.

712 1312 Albi Malek al-Adil Imad-ud-din Alf.

712 1312 Malek as-Sdleh Shams-ud-din Salah.

Ortoxitss reigning at A’mid and Kheifa.

ASM. A. D.

490 1097 Sokm4n ben Ortok.

498 1104 Ibrahim ben Sokman.

522? 1128 Rukn ud-din Daoud.

544? Fakhr ud-din Karaé Arsl4n ben Daoud.

562 1166 Nr ud-din Muhammed ben Kara Arslan.

581 1185 Kotb ud-din Sokmaén ben Muhammed.

597 1200 Malek as-Sdlah Naser ud-din Mahmad.

618 1221 Malek al-Masaud ben Malik as-Sdlah Mahmiad.

629 1231 Melek al-Kémel, nephew of Salah ud-din, (Saladin,) took A’mid.

Tarte LXVIII. The Mocou or Mocuut empire of TARTARY. Capital

Karakurm.

A. D. é

1206 Jencuiz Kua’n, or Timugin declared emperor, on the Onon river.

1227 Tuli Kh4n, his son, regent during interregnum.

1241 Oktai Khan, son of Jenghiz.

Tourakina Khatun, his wife, regent for 4 years.

1246 Gaiuk Kh4n, son of Oktai.

1248 Ogoulganmish, his wife, regent on his death.

1251 Mangu Khan, died in 1259.

The Empire of the Mogols was sub

in China, Persia, in Kapchak, &c.

1260 Kublai Khan, succeeded in China, and founded the Yuen dynasty.

1240 Zagatai Khan, son of Jenghiz, founded Zagatai branch in Transoxiana.

1226 Tushi Khén, another son, founded Kapchak dynasty. }

[For these dynasties of the Tartars; and those of the Huns, Chinese, &c. see

De Guignes’ Histoire des Huns.)

sequently divided into different branches,

146

Moghel Khins of Persia—Sultdns of Khordsan—Sufts of

Tasire LXIX. Mocuet-Tarrar or [u-Kaantan Dynasty of Persia.

On the death of Maneu Kua’n son of JENeuiz Kua’n, the sovereignty of

Persia was assumed by his brother

ING Jal sito 1D)

657 1259

663 1264

681 1282

683 1284

690 1291

694 1294

703 «1303

716 1316

736 ~1335

747 «1346

850

853

854

861

805

901

Hulagu or Halaku I1-Khan.

Abaga or Abdka [l-Khan, his son.

Nikudar Oglan, 7th son of Hulaku, on conversion to Muha-

medanism, took the name of Ahmed Khan.

Arghin Kaan, son of Abaga.

Kai-Khatu Kaan, ditto.

Baidu Kaan, son of Targhih, 5th son of Hulaku.

Ghaz4n Kaan Mahm4ad, eldest son of Arghiin.

Ghiis-ud-din Au-gaptu, Khoda bandah Muhammed.

Abu Said Bahadur Kh4n, his son, on whose death in

the dynasty became dependent.

Andshirvan. Invasion of TaimGdr or Tamerlane. (See below.)

Taste LXX. Mocueun Sultdas of Kuora’sa’n.

1393

1404

1447

1449

1450

1456

14706

1505

Kutb-ud-din Ami’r Timvu’r Girgan Sahibkiran ea con-

quered Baghdad, invaded India, &c.

Khalil Sultan, son of Miran Shah, deposed.

Sh4h Rokh, bebadur Sultan.

Uxueu Been, Malak us said, of Khiva.

Abdul Latif Mirza, his son.

Baber Mirza, Sultan Abul Casem.

Mf¥za Shah Mahmud, deposed.

Abu Said, son of Ahmed. (See Moghels of India.)

Jiadighiar, grandson of Shah Rokh.

Sultan Hosein Mirza, grandson of Omar.

Badi ezzaman, his sou, took refuge with the Sufis.

Taste LXXI. Kinas of Persia of the Sophi, Sift, or Safi Race.

Juneid, a descendant of Safi ud-din, a Sophi or mystic philosopher, being

expelled from Aderbijan by the Turcoman ruler Jehan Shah, established himself

in Shirwan.

A. HA. D:

905 1499

932 1525

983 1575

985 1577

994 1535

994 1585

1039 1629

1052 1642

1077 +1666

1106 1694

1135 1722

1137 - 1725

1242 1730

1145 1732

1148 1736

1160 1747

1161 1748

1163 1749

1163

1750

His grandson

Ismail al-Sifi ben Sheikh Haidar, united conquered provinces

and assumed sovereignty of Persia and Khordsdn 908-1502.

Shah Tahmasp ben IsmAil,

Shah Ismail If. ben Tahmasp.

Muhammed Khodabandah ben "Tahmasp.

Hamzah ben Muhammed, or Amir Hams.

Shah Ismail ben Muhammed.

Shah Abbas ben Muhammed.

Shah Saf{ ben Safi Mirza ben Abbas.

Shah Abbas II. ben Shah Safi.

Soleiman ben Shah Abbas.

Shah Husein ben Soleimdn, last of the Sufis.

Shah Tahmasp II. ben Shah Husein, abdicated.

Mahmid, an Afghan, invaded Persia, and usurped.

Ashraf, an Afghan, defeated by Nadir kuli.

Shah Tahmasp, nominally restored, murdered 1737.

Abbas IIT. ben Tahmasp.

Na’ptr Suan or Nadir Sultan, proclaimed king.

Adel Shah, nephew and murderer of Nadir.

Ibrahim, his brother.

Shan Rokh, blinded, driven to Khoras4n.

Soleiman, or Mirza Seid Muhammed.

1750

1759

1779

1785

1789

1794

1797

Persia—Patans of Hindustin—of Bengal. 147

Ismail ben Syed Mustafa, wuder regency of Ali Merdan,

Muhammed Kerim Khan Zendi, held. power under title of

Wakil.

Zeki Khan, usurped on his death, murdered by

Abt’l Fatha Khan, son of Kerim, blinded.

Sadik Khan, brother of do.

Ali Murad Khan assumed title of Wakil.

Jafar Khan, son of Sadik, murdered.

Lutf Ali, his son, defeated by

A’gha Muhammed Khan Kajar, an eunuch,

Fat-ha Ali Shah Kajar, died 1834.

LXXIl. Paran, Afghan or Ghori Sutrans of Hinvusran.

119:

1206

1210

1235

1236

1239

1242

1245

1265

1286

1289

1295

1316

1317

1321

1324

1351

1388

1389

1391

1393

1413

1414

1421

1433

1446

1450

1488

1517

1540

1545

1552

1553

1554

BAS DY

Capital Dehit.

Shahab ed-din Abu’l-Mazaffer Muhammed ben SAm al-Ghéri, ma-

lek Ghiznih.

Kotb ed-din Ibek or Eibek. (1st Turk dynasty.)

Aram Shah ben Ihbek.

Shems ed-din Altemsh, aslave of Ibek.

Rukn ed-din Firtiz Shah ben Altemsh.

Sultaneh Reztah benet Altemsh.

Mdazz ed-din Biram Shah ben Iltemsh.

Ala ed-din Mastid Shah ben Firiz Shah.

Naser ed-din Mahmid ben iltemsh.

Ghiads ed-din Balin Balban.

Moazz ed-din Kai-Kobad.

Jelal ed-din Firtiz Shah Khilji. (2nd Turk, or Khilji.)

Ala ed-din MunammMep Span Sekander Sani.

Shahab ed-din Omar ben Ala ed-din.

Kothb ed-din Mubarik Shah Khilji, murdered by

Naser ed-din Khosru, usurper.

Ghids ed-din TucuLuax Suan. (3rd Turk dynasty.)

Muhammed Shah ben Tughlak.

Moazem Mohedzeb Firaz Shah ben Salar Rajab.

Ghias ed-din Tugblak Shah II. ben Fat-ha Khan.

Abu-bekr Shah ben Ziffer Khan.

Naser ed-din Muhammed Shah ben Firiz Shah.

Alf ed-din Sekander Shah Humaytin ben Muhammed Shah.

Naser ed-din Mahmtid Shah ben Muhammed Shah, overcome by

Daulat Khan Lodi, a Patan. [Taimur Shah; last of Khiljis.

Kiser or Khizer Khan ben Soliman, under Taimur. (4th or Sadat.)

Mdazz ed-din Abu’l Fat-ha Mubarik Shah ben Khizer.

Muhammed Shah ben Ferid Khan ben Khizer Khan.

Ala ed-din ben Muhammed Shah, abdicated in favor of

Behldli Lodi, an Afghan. (5¢h or 1st Afghan dynasty.)

Sekander ben Behldli, made Agra the capital.

Ibrahim ben Sekander, last of the Afghans ; defeated by Baber, 942.

Ferid ed-din Suir Sau, expelled Humayun (see Table LX XX.)

Islam Shah ben Shir Shah.

Muhammed Adil Skah.

Ibrahim Sar.

Sekander Shah, defeated by AkBER.

LXXIII. Paran or Afghan Sultans and Governors of BunGat.

A.D

1203

1205

1208

1212

(Purbi dynasty.) Capital Laknauti or Gaur.

Muhammed Bakhtiar Khilji, governor of Berar under Kuth ud-din.

Muhammed Sheran Azz ed-din.

Ali Merdan Ala ed-din.

Hasam ed-din Ghids ed-din.

148

624

627

654

641

642

644

651

656

657

659

676

681

725

741

743

744

760

769

775

785

787

794

812

Patans of Bengal—of Jaunpur—of Kashmir.

1226-27 Naser ed-din ben Shems ed-din.

1229 Mahmud ben Shems ed-din, became Sultan of Hindust4n.

1237 Toghan Khan, governor under Sultana Rizia.

1243 Tiji or Taji.

1244 Timur Khan Kerdn.

3246 Seif ed-din.

1253 Ikhtiar ed-din Malek Yuzbeg.

1257 Jelal ed-din Khani.

1258 Taj ed-din Arslan.

1260 Muhammed Tatar Khén.

1277 Moazz ed-din Toghrul.

1282 Nasered-din Baghra (by Dow writtenKera),considered Istsovereign

1325 Kader Khan, viceroy of Muhammed Shah. [of Bengal, by some.

1340 Fakhar ed-din Sekander, assumes independence.

1342 Ala ed-din Mubarik.

1343 Shems ed-din Muhammed Sh4h Ilias Bangarah.

1358 Sekander Shih ben Shems ed-din.

1367 Ghias ed-din Azem Shah ben Sekander Sh&h.

1373 Seif ed-din Sultan as-Sulatta ben Ghias ed-din.

1383 Shems ed-din ben Sultan as-Sulatin.

1385 Kansa or Khansa, a Hindu.

1392 Jelal ed-din Muhammed Shah (Chitmul ben Khansa).

1409 Ahmed Sh4h ben Jelal ed din.

830 1426-7 Naser Shah (descendant of Shems ed-din Ilias Bangarah).

862

879

887

&87

896

897

899

900

903

927

940

944

945

946

952

962

968

971

981

TABLE

A. H.

800

803

804

845

856

883

A. H.

715

750

752

765

1457 Barbek Shah ben Naser Sh&h.

1474 Yusuf Shah ben Barbek Shah,

1482 Sekander Shah.

1482 Fat-ah Shah.

1490-1 Shah-zadah, an eunuch.

1491 Firuz Shah Habshi.

1494 Mahmud Sh4h ben Firuz Shah.

1495 Mozaffer Shah Habshi.

1498 Ala ed-din Husen Shah ben Syed Ashraf.

1521 Nasret Shah ben Ala ed-din Husein.

1534 Mahmud Shah ben Ala ed-din Husen, defeated by

1537 ~=Firid ed-din Sure SuHau.

1538 Humayun held court at Gaur, or Jenatabad.

1539 Shir Shah again.

1545 Muhammed Khan.

1555 Khizer-Khan Bahadur Shah ben Muhammed Khan.

1560-1 Jelal ed-din ben Muhammed Khan.

1563-4 Soleiman Karani or Karzani. ;

1573 Bayazid ben Soleiman.

1573 Daud Khan ben Soleiman, defeated by Akber’s forces.

LXXIV. Kings of the East, or Suarxi Dynasty of JAUNPUR.

1397 Khoja Jehan, Subahdar of Kanauwj, Audh, Kora, and Jaunpur,

assumed independence.

1400 Mubarik Sh4h, his adopted son.

1401 Shems ud-din Ibrahim Shan Sherki.

1441 Mahmud Shah ben Ibrahim.

1451 Husen Shah ben Mahmud ben Ibrahim Shah.

took refuge in the Court of Ala ud-din of Bengal, where he

died in 905 A. H.

Taste LXXV. Musauman Kings. of Kasumir.

A.D.

1315 Shams ud-din, Shah Mir, minister of Senadeva.

1349 Jamshid, expelled by his youngest brother. :

1351 Ally Sher, Alla ud-din ; a severe famine. c

1363 Shahab ud-din ; Siamuk invades Sind.

Kashmir—Sind—Bahmany of Kalbarga. 149

785 1386 Kutb ud-din, Hindal; defeats Raja of Lohkote.

799 1396 Sikandar, Butshikan ; subverts Hindu religion.

819 1416 Ameer Khan, Ally Shéh ; civil wars ; expelled by

826 1422 Zein ul Ab-ud-dia, Shady Khan, his brother.

877 1472 Haider Shéh, Hajy Khan.

878 1473 Hasan Shah.

891 1486 Muhammed, a child ; civil wars.

902 1496 Fatteh Shdh, usurps the throne. Chakk tribe converted to Islam.

911 1505 Muhammed, regains the throne; Ibrahim usurps.

942 1535 Nazuk Shah; conquest of Emperor Humayun, 1543.

948 1541 Mirza Haider Doghlat, governor under him; interregnum, and

dissentions.

$60 1552 Ibrahim II., set up by Daulet Chakk : earthquake.

963 1555 Ismael, set up by Ghazi Khan’s party.

964 1556 Habib, raised by Daulet Chakk.

971 1563 Hosein Shah Chakk : embassy from Akber.

986 1578 Yusuf Shah Chakk expelled by Gohar Chakk.

997 1588 - annexation of Kashmir to the Moghel Empire by AKBER.

Taste LXXVI. Krines of Sinp and Tarta.

A. H. A.D.

87 705 Belochistaninvaded by Hijaj, governor of Bassora, and Md. K4sim.

The Ansaries, the Sumeras, and the Sumanas or Jams, successively, gain the

ascendancy, then a Delhi governor.

1203? Nasir ud-din Kabbacha, becomes independent, drowned.

Taste LXXVII. The Jami Dynasty of Sumana, originally Rajputs.

AH.) ASD:

737. 1336 Jdm Afra ; tributary to Toghlak Shah.

740 1339 J&m Choban.

754 1353 Jam Bang; asserted his independence.

732 1367 ‘Timaji, his brother.

782 1380 JAm Salah ud-din; converted to Muhammedanism.

793 1391 Jam Nizam ud-din.

796 1393 Jam Ally Sher.

812 1409 J4m Giran, son of Timaji.

812 1409 Jam Fatteh Khan.

827 1423 Jd4m Toghlak ; invaded Gujerat.

854 1450 Jam Sikandar.

856 1452 Jam Sangar, elected.

864 1460 J&m Nanda, or Nizam ud-din ; cot. of Hasan Langa.

894 1492 J4m Feroz; the Turkhan family become powerful, 1520.

927 1520 Shah Beg Arghun, occupies Sind,

930 1523 Shéh Hosein Arghun.

966 1554 Mahmud of Bhakar.

982 1572 Akber annewes Sind to the Empire.

Taste LXXVIII. Bahmany Dynasty of Kalbarga, or Ahsunabdad.

A.D.

1347. Ala ud-din Hasan Shah ganga Bahmany, servant of a Brahman in Md.

Toghlak’s court, subdued all the Dakhan.

1358 Mahomed Shah B. I. (Ghazi), makes tributary Telingana and Vijya-

nagar.

1375 Mujahid Sk4h B., killed by his uncle.

1378 Dawud Sb4h B., assassinated by his niece.

1378 Mabwud Sh4h I., youngest son of Ala; patron of literature.

1396 Ghias ud-din ; blinded and dethroned.

1396 Shems ud-din Shah; puppet to Lalchin, the Malik Naib or regent.

1397. Feroz Sb4h, married daughter of Vijyanagar raja, Deva Ray.

1422 Ahmed Sh4h Wali (Khan Khanan) ; war with rajas.

150

1435

1457

1461

1463

1482

1518

1520

1522

1525

TABLE

1492

1504

1549

1562

1569

1572

1609

TABLE

A. D.

1370

1399

1443

1441

1457

1503

1510

1520

1535

1566

1576

1596

TABLE

A. D.

1387

1405

1432

1435

1469

1500

1512

1534

1568

A. D.

1391

1411

1443

1451

1459

1511

1526

Kalbarga—Ahmeddbad—Kandeish—M. alwa—Guzerdt.

Ala ud-din Shah II. war with Vijyanagar.

Humayun the cruel; general insurrection.

Nizam Shah; r4jas of Telingana and Orissa powerful.

Mahomed Shah II. ; Malwa power increasing.

Mahmud II.; loses Concan, Bijapur, and Berar.

Ahmed Shah II. ; under control of Amir Berid, minister.

Ala ud-din Shah III. ; deposed by ditto.

Wali Ullah ; murdered by ditto.

Kallam Ullah, Bahmany dynasty of Bidar (Ahmedabad) terminates,

and is succeeded by that of Amir Berid at Ahmedabad.

LXXIX. Berrip SuHany Dynasty of Bider, or AnmEpasBan.

Kasim Berid, a Turki or Georgian slave.

Amir Berid ; held sway on the nominal kings.

Ally Berid Shah ; first who assumed royalty,

Ibrahim Berid Shab.

Kasim Berid Shah.

Mirza Ally Berid Sh&h ; deposed by his relative.

Amir Berid Shah IT,

LXXX. Faruxi Dynasty of Kanprtsu. Capitals Talner

and Burhanpur.

Malik Raja Faruki, receives jagir of Talner, from Feroz.

Malik Nasir or Nasir Khan Faruki, builds Burhanpur.

Miran Adil Khan Faruki, expels Deccanies from Kandeish.

Miran Mubarik Khan Faruki; peaceful reign.

Miran Ghani, or Adil Khan Faruki I. ; tributary to Guzerat.

Daoud Khan Faruki, tributary to Malwa.

Azim Humayun, or Adil Khan F. IJ. ; grandson of Guzerat king.

Miran Muhammed Khan Faruki; succeeds to Guzerat throne.

Miran Mubarik Khan Faruki, brother ; war with Moghals.

Miran Muhammed Khan Faruki, attack from Deccan.

Raja Ally Khan Faruki; acknowledges Akber’s supremacy.

Bahadur Khan Faruki; defies Akber ; is imprisoned at Gualior.

LXXXI. Kines of Mauwa. Capitals Dhar, Mando or Shadiabdd.

Sultan Dilawar Ghori, governor, assumes title of Shah, 1401.

Sultan Hoshang Ghori, or Alp Khan, his son, defeats Narsinha Ray.

Ghizni Khan, or Sultan Muhammed Ghori; poisoned.

Mahmud Khan, or Sultan Mahmud Khilji. Rana of Chitor, Kumbho

presents tankas coined in his own name, 1450.

Sultan Ghias ud-din; peaceful reign.

Sultan Nasir ud-din ; his son, Shahab ud-din, revolts.

Sultan Mahmud II., younger son, last of the Khiljis.

Malwa incorporated with Guzerat kingdom.

annexed as a province of Akber’s Empire.

Taste LXXXII. Kines of Guzerar. Capital Pattan.

Muzaffar Shah I.; appointed viceroy by Feroz Toghlak.

Ahmed Shah J., grandson, builds Ahmedabad and Ahmednagar.

Muhammed Shah, surnamed Karim, the merciful.

Kutb Shah ; opposes Malwa king, and Chitor r4ja Kombha.

Daoud Shah, his uncle, deposed in favor of

Mahmud Shah J. Begarré ; two expeditions to Deccan.

Muzaffar Shah IJ. ; war with Rana Sangrama.

Sikandar Shah, assassinated.

Mulian—Berdr— Bij dpur—Ahmednagar. 151

1526 Nasir Khan, or Mahmud Shéh I1., displaced by

1526 Bahadur Shah, invades Malwa; murdered by Portuguese.

1536 Miran Muhammed Shéh Faruki, his nephew, of Malwa.

1536 Mahmud Shéh, son of Latik Khan ; releasel from prison.

1553. Ahmed Shah II., a spurious heir set up by minister.

1561 Muzaffar Shah III. Habbu, a suppositious son of Mahmud.

1583 Guzerat becomes a province of Akber’s empire.

Taste LXXXIII. Kines of Mutran.

This province was first conquered by Mahomed Kasim, at the end of the Ist

century, Hejira. It was recovered by the Hindus on the decline of the Ghizni

power.

until

A. H.

After Mahomed Ghori’s subjugation, it remained tributary to Delhi

SoD:

847 1443 Shekh Yusuf established an independent monarchy.

849 1445 Ray Sehra, or Kutb ud-din Hosen Langa I.; expelled the Shekh.

908 1502 Mahmud Khan Langa; his minister, Jam Bayezid.

931 1524 Hosen Langa II.; overcome by Shah Hosen Arghun. Under

Humayun, becomes a province of the empire, (see below.)

Taste LXXXIV. Imdpd SuHauny Dynasty of Berar, capital Ellichpur.

A.D.

1484 Fatteh Ullah Imad Shah, Bahmany, governor of Berar, became inde-

pendent.

—— Alla ud-din Im4d Shah, fixed his capital at Géval.

1528? Daria Imad Shah, married his daughter to Hosen Nizam Shah.

Burhan Imad Shah ; deposed by his minister,

1568 Tufal Khan, whose usurpation is opposed from Ahmednagar, and the

family of Imad Shah and Tufal extinguished.

Taste LXXXV. Anit SHauy Dynasty of Br'sapur.

Ac Di

1489 Yusuf Khan, son of Amurath II. of Anatolia; purchased for the body

guard at Ahmedabad.

1501 assumed independent sovereignty as ADIL SHA‘H.

1511 Ismael Adil Shah. Goa taken 2nd time by Portuguese.

1534 Mulloo Adil Shah, a profligate, deposed and blinded by

1535 Ibrahim A. S. J. Minister Ramraj assumes throne of Vijyanagar.

1557 Ally Adil Shah; war against the Hindu raja.

1579 Ibrahim Adil Shah II. Chand beeby regent.

1626 Muhammed.

1660 Ally Adil II.

Taste LXXXVI. Nizam Suauy Dynasty of AHMEDNAGAR.

ALD.

1490 Ahmed Nizam Shah, Bheirg, son of a brahman of Vijyanagar ; throws off

Bahmany yoke.

1508 Burhan Nizam Shah; petty wars with Berar, &c.

1553 Hosen Nizam Shah I.; confederacy against Vijyanagar.

1565 Marteza Nizam Shah, Diwana, conquers Berar ; smothered by

1568 Miran Hosen Nizam Shah, put to death.

1569 Ismael Nizam Shah, raised by Jumal Khan Mehdvy.

1589 Burhan Nizam Sh4h II. ; constructs Korla fort.

1594 Ibrahim Nizam Shah, killed in battle.

1594 Ahmed, son of Shah Tahir, raised by chiefs ; pensioned.

1595 Bahadur Nizam Shéh, proclaimed by Chand beeby’s party ; imprisoned

by Akber.

1598 Marteza N.S. II.; Nizam Shahy dominions fall under the control of

1607 Malik Amber.

L 2

152

Golconda—Moghel Emperors—Hyderabad—Oude.

Taste LXXXVI. Kurs Swany Dynasty of Gouconpa.

ACD:

1512

1543

1550

1581

1611

1672

Aya OAD.

899 1494

937 1531

962 1554

963 1556

1014 1605

1037 1628

1068 1658

1118 1707

1124 1713

1131 1719

Ws Ts7 lg

1131 1719

1132 1720

1161 1749

1167 1754

1173) (1759

1173-1759

1201 1786

1221 1806

1717

1748

1757

1763

1803

A.D.

1756

1775

1797

1798

1814

Sultan Kuly Kutb Shih, a Turkman, assumed title of king.

Jamshid Kutb Shah, leagues with the Nizam Shahis.

Ibrahim Kutb Shah, joins league against Ramr4j.

Mahomed Kuly Kutb Shih, builds Bhagnagar, or Hyderabad, died 1586.

Abdallah Kutb Shah, tributary to Shah Jeh4n.

Abu Hasan, imprisoned at Daulatabad.

Under AuRranGzeB, the southern conquests were formed into six Subahs, viz.

‘1, Kandeish; 2, Aurangabad; 3, Beder; 4, Berar; 5, Hyderabad ; and 6,

Bijapur.

Tastr LXXXVIII. Mocuen Empzrors of Hindustdn.

(Fourth descendant from Taimur or Tamerlane, see Tab. LXX. )

Baser, Zehir ud-din Muhammed, (mounted throne 9th June.)

Huma’yvon, Nasir ud-din Muhammed, (28th Jan.) in 946 defeat-

ed by Shir Shéh.

, founded the Moghel dynasty of Dehli.

AKBER, Abul fateh, Julal ud-din Muhammed, (17th Feb.) con-

solidated empire.

Jenaneir, Abul Muzaffar Nur ud-din Muhammed (7th Oct.)

SHAWJEHAN, Shah4b ud-din Ghazi (9th Feb.)

AURANGZEB A’lamgir, Abul Muzatfar, Mahi ud-din, (24th Feb.)

Azim Shéh, Muhammed Shahid, (3rd March.)

Brna’pur Sau, Shah A‘lem, Abul Muzaffar Kutb ud-din (23rd

JenanpaR Suan, Mdaz ud-din (11th Jan.) Feb.)

Feroxusir, Muhammed Shahid Marbum 11th Jan.)

Rafi-ud-darjat, Shams ud-din (18th Jan.) (Abi berkat.)

Rafi-ud-daulat, Shahjehan S4ni (26th April.)

(Muhammed Nakosir,) (May.)

Mu#HaMMED Sua’n, Abul fateh Nasir ud-din, (28th Aug.)

(Sultan Muhammed Ibrahim,) (4th Oct.)

A’umep Sua’u, Abil Nasr. (20th April.)

Avemerr IJ., Aziz ud-din Muhammed, (2nd June.)

(Shahjehan,) (29th Nov.) . .

Suau A’tem, Julal ud-din (Mirza Abdallah, Ali Goher), (Noy.)

(Muhammed Badar bakit.)

AKBER IJ., Abul Nasir, Moein ud-din Muhammed, (3rd Dec.)

Taste LXXXIX. Nizams of Hyperapap.

Azef Jah, Nizém ul Mulk, usurped power on Aurangzeb’s death.

Nasir Jang, assassinated.

Muzaffar Jang, ditto. Salabat Jang, killed by

Nizam Ali, his brother.

Sikandar Jah. English interference, 1807.

Taste XC. Nuw&ss and Kings of Ovnz.

Sadet Alf Khan of Khorasan, Nuwdb Vizir, under Muhammed Shih.

Sefdar Jang, ditto.

Shuja ud Dauleh, ditto.

Asef ud Dauleh.

Spurious son, Vizir Ali, displaced for

Sadet Ali, brother of Shuja, Vizir of Hindustan.

Ghazi ud-din Haidar Ali, Shah Zeman, king.

Naser ud-din Haidar Ali.

Chronological Table. 153

Taste XCI. Chronological Table of European and British Connection

with India, compiled by Capt. H. B. Henderson.

1204.—After the capture of Constantinople by the Crusaders, in the 4th Crusade,

during their quarrel with the Greek empire, the Venetians, who had always partially

competed with the Greeks for a share of Oriental trade, now obtained a grant of a

portion of the Peloponnesus, with several of the best islands of the Archipelago.

They soon secnred to themselves a monopoly, or, at least, of that portion of the

trade via the Euxine. But in 57 years, the Greeks rose in rebellion, and expelled the

Latin emperor; and having been aided by the Genoese, they bestowed on them the

suburb, Pera, at Constantinople, as a reward. This transferred the overland trade

to the Genoese, and forced the Venetians to revisit Alexandria, and procure Indian

articles by the Red Sea.—Gleig.

1453.—The Turks conquered Constantinople ; and by the expulsion of the Ge-

noese from Pera, the Venetians enjoyed the whole trade : while Constantinople was

no longer a mart for Eastern produce, nor open to the countries of the West.— Gleig.

1497.—The Portuguese navigator, Vasco de Gama, doubled the Cape of Good Hope

on the 20th November, and on the 22nd May of the following year, arrived at Calicut

on the Malabar Coast, returning by the same Cape to Lisbon, in Sept. 1499.—Gleig.

1500.—In consequence of Vasco de Gama’s success, a Portuguese expedition, under

Pedro Alvarez Cabral, arrived at Calicut, on the 13th September ; formed the first

European factory in India at that place, and returned to Lisbon on July Ist, 1501.—

Gleig. Picture of India. Bruce’s Annals of the E. I. C.

1501.—In the homeward voyage, discovered the Island of St. Helena.—Bruce.

1503.—Alphonso de Albuquerque erected the first European fortress in India, at

Cochin, and re-established the Factory at Calicut ; he settled a trade at Coulan, and

a factory at St. Thome.—Bruce.

1506.—Alphonso de Albuquerque, the founder of the Portuguese Eastern Empire,

now commenced a career ona larger scale, with a squadron of 16 ships, having troops

on board. He defeated the Tamorin of Calicut—formed a settlement at Goa, which

he fortified, sailed to the Straits of Malacca, and took the place of that name in Fe-

bruary, 1510, reduced the Molucca and Banda islands, at that time the gardens of

the East for cloves, nutmegs, &c. and at last in 1514, finally reduced Ormus, the

chief seat of Persian commerce. In 12 years, he raised the Portuguese Empire in

India to the greatest height it has ever attained ; all the principal emporia from

the Cape to the China frontier, an extent of 12,000 miles of coast, being in his pos-

session.—Gleig. Bruce.

1517.—-The Portuguese got possession of Point de Galle and Columbo.— Bruce.

1518.—Albuquerque recalled. The decline of the Portuguese Empire may be dat-

ed from this event.— Bruce.

1527.—An English merchant, Robert Thorne, long resident in Spain, asserted the

practicability of a north-west passage to India. His attempt and six others, in the

succeeding reigns, failed.

1530.—Sultan Baber, the eighth in descent from Tamerlane, died near Agra. He

had seized the empire, and re-established the dynasty of the Moguls.—Orme.

.—The Portuguese driven by the natives from Ternate.—Bruce.

1531.—The Portuguese viceroy burned the principal towns from Diu to the Red

Sea.— Bruce.

1536.—They built a strong citadel, at Diu, by permission of the king of Cambaya.

—Bruce.

1538.—The Grand Seignior attacked the Portuguese at Diu from Suez, and failed ;

but at this time the increased military forces sent from Portugal to India evince the

decline of their real power in the East. The natives were recovering from their first

panic, and found their oppressors less formidable.— Bruce.

1542.—The celebrated Father Francis Zavier, the Jesuit Missionary, arrived in

India.— Bruce.

1558.—Mr. Anthony Wilkinson, agent of the Russia Company, crossed the Cas-

pian Sea into Persia, and opened a considerable trade for Eastern produce. In In-

dia, the Portuguese viceroy, Francisco Baretto, was succeeded for 4 years by Don

Constantine Braganza, one of the royal family.— Bruce.

1560.—Don Louis D’Ataide recovered, in great measure, the Portuguese power.—

Bruce.

1563.--Three British agents were employed at the Persian capital, and the traffic

was flourishing. Before this time the Venetians had essayed to undermine and op-

pose the Portuguese ascendancy, but in vain—while the humiliation, at this period,

154 Chronological Table.

of Venice itself, soon left Portugal without a competitor of any consequence.—Bruce.

Gleig.

177-—At length, an Englishman, Francis Drake, son of apoor Kentish clergyman,

with five ships and 164 seamen, sailed from Plymouth on the 13th December, commissi-

oned by queen Elizabeth. He passed the Straits of Magellan, ravaged the west coast

of America, crossed the Pacific, touched at the Moluccas, and stopped at Ternate for

some time, whence, after much friendly intercourse, he steered away for the Cape of

Good Hope, and arrived at Plymouth on the 26th September, 1580. Drake entertain-

ed the queen at Deptford, and was knighted.— Gleig. Mill. Bruce.

1579.—Again, in India, the Portuguese power was almost dissolved, and Don Louis

D’Ataide was a second time sent as viceroy. His exertions were successful once

more, but he soon died—in 1580.—Bruce.

1586.—Thomas Cavendish sailed 21st July, 1586, with three ships, vid Straits of

Magellan, and visited, after capturing a Spanish merchantman, the Ladrones, and

Philippines, acquiring much knowledge of the Indian Archipelago. He returned to

Plymouth 9th September, 1558. This year the Portuguese took possession of Macao,

as a station for the China trade.—Gileig. Bruce.

1589.—Diverse English merchants petitioned the queen for permission to make a

voyage with three ships, and as many pinnaces, by the way of the Cape of Good

Hope.— Gleig.

1591 —A squadron sailed, under Captain Haymond, and from disease and a storm,

it proved an abortive enterprise—only one officer, Captain James Lancaster, and a

few’seamen, returned. Gleiy. Bruce.

1593.—An Englishman, Stevens, went to Goa with the Portuguese by the way of

the Cape of Good Hope. He wrote an account of his voyage.

1595.—In the mean time, the Dutch having gone round the hitherto interdicted

Cape, openly opposed the Portuguese in the Hastern seas. They supplanted the Por-

tuguese in the Spice trade; in a very few years expelled by force their rivals from

the Moluccas ; formed establishments at Java and Sumatra, and swept the Chinese

and Pacific oceans with an overpowering force. During the year 1595, they took pos-

session of the Mauritius, then first occupied, but abandoned it thirteen years after-

wards. Bantam allowed to be occupied that year by the Dutch, as their first factory,

as a reward from the king for their aid against the Portugnese.—Gleig. Mill.

Bruce.

1596.—Elizabeth granted strong letters of recommendation to the Emperor of

China to Richard Adam and Thomas Bloomfield, merchants and citizens of London,

with permission to proceed with one or more ships. The draft of the letter is dated

16th July.— Bruce.

1597.—The Hollanders formed a “‘ society for trade to distant countries.’’—Bruce.

1599.—The English determining to keep pace with their rivals of Holland, an asso-

ciation of ‘‘ Merchant Adventurers,’’ was formed this year, a fund raised to be ma-

naged by a committee of 15 persons, and the queen again more earnestly petitioned

for a charter. Her Majesty referred it to her council, and John Middenhall, a mer-

chant, was sent, via Constantinople, on an embassy to the great Mogul. The first

authentic deed of the Company is preserved, and is entitled ‘‘ The names of such

psons as have written with there owne handes, to venter in the ptended voiage to

the Easte Indias, (the whiche it maie please the Lorde to prosper,) and the somes that

they will adventure, the xxij September, 1599.’’ ‘The fund subscribed was £30,133.

6. 8. divided into 101 shares, varying from £100 to £3,000.— Bruce. Mill.

1600.—A corporation formed in London entitled ‘‘ Governors and Company of mer-

chants of London trading to the East Indies.’’ Their original petition, as now ex-

tant, stated that no ‘* gentleman was to be employed in any place of charge.’’ This

corporation is the origin of the present Company, and of the British empire in India.

Their capital was £70,000. There were 215 sharers, and the Earl of Cumberland at

their head, forming the Company. The first Court of Committees or 17 Directors

was held on the 23rd September, 1600. The number was changed to 24, and then

their first regular meeting was on the 31st October. Their Charter was finally

dated by the queen on the 3ist December of this year. At this era, and at the com-

mencement of the English trade to India, the Portuguese possessions in the East

were as follows :—Muscat, in Arabia; Ormus and Bussora, in the Gulf; Diulon on

the Indus; Diu, in Guzerat; a fortified factory at Daman ; the town and castle of

Chaul, and a factory at Dabul; Bassein, the island of north Salsette, and Tannah 3.

the town and fort of Goa, (their seat of power,) and factory at Onore, Barcelore,

Mangalore, Cananore ; the town of Calicut, a factory at Oranganore, and the port

of Cochin ; and factories at Coulan, Quelon, and Taccatra. They had established

themselves at Ceylon, and fortified Jaffanapatam. On the Corromandel coast they

had stations at Negapatam and St. Thome. In Bengal they had no factories but

Chronological Table. 155

commercial stations, or houses of trade. They had factories at Pegu, traded up the

Martaban river ; had a station at Junkceylon, and possessed the valuable town and

fort of Malacca. They had establishments in the Moluccas, at Amboyna, Manilla,

and Macao, in China. Notwithstanding these valuable possessions, the Portuguese

power in the East had visibly decreased, and was prepared to give way to the Dutch

and English, now entering the field.— Bruce.

1601.—The earliest ship purchased was the Susan of 240 tons, for £1,600, thus

the first Indiaman in the service. The Company fitted her out with three others,

the Malice-scourge of 600 tons, the Hector of 300, the Ascension of 260, and a pin-

nace of 100 tons, freighted with cloth, tin, lead, cutlery, glass, amounting to £6,860,

and with £28,742 in bullion. The fleet was commanded by Captain James Lancas-

ter as ‘‘ General or Admiral,’’? and Captain Davies, 2nd in command, called ‘‘ Pilot

Major ;’’ the latter to have £100 wages, £200 in credit, and if the voyage gave cent.

per cent. £500 at the end, if 200 per cent. £1000, if 400 per cent. £2000. The scale

of remuneration to Captain Lancaster or others does not appear. They sailed on

the 2nd May. The French this year endeavoured to obtain a footing in India, send-

ing out three ships from St. Maloes, but they failed to reach their destination.—

Bruce. Gleig.

1602.—Captain Lancaster, who had been furnished with general letters from queen

Elizabeth ‘‘ to the greate and mightie kinge of our lovinge brother greetinge,”’’

arrived at Acheen, and formed with its king the first treaty of the Company in the

East ; with permission to settle a factory, our first establishment.—Bruce.

1603.—The English fleet returned in September, having made a successful voyage.

After touching at Acheen, they captured in the Straits of Malacca a Portuguese

ship of 900 tons; then put into Bantam in Java, setting there a factory or ‘‘ house

of trade,’’ from whence to England.—Bruce.

1604.—King James granted a license to Sir Edward Michelborne and others, to

trade to the East; the first violation of the exclusive privileges of the Company,

who designated the parties interlopers or private traders. A French East India Com-

pany chartered this year ; it failed, and was afterwards dissolved.—Bruce. Mill. FE. I.

Chronologist.

1605.—Akbar died, after a reign of nearly 50 years.— Orme.

1606.—Cloves purchased at Amboyna for £2,948, 13 ; sold afterwards in England

for £36,287.— Bruce.

1608.—Captain Hawkins visited Agra as Envoy.—Gleig.

1609.—A new charter granted by James to the Company, who now saw the evil

of separate licenses; the privileges rendered perpetual. One of the Company’s

ships this year, called the Trades Increase, was eleven hundred tons.—Bruce.

1610.—Trade attempted with Japan, and the king’s permission obtained to erect

a factory at Ferando.— Bruce.

1611.—The court began to receive regular communications and dispatches from

their factories in India.—Bruce.

1612,—Great efforts by the Company to extend the commerce. Attention was

turned to Western India, and new factories contemplated. After repelling much

opposition from the Portuguese, the English were permitted to avail themselves of

a Firmaun obtained on the 11th January of the following year, to erect factories at

Surat, Ahmedabad, Cambaya, and Goya. —Bruce. Gleig. Mill.

1613.—Up to this year, eight voyages, realising nearly 200 per cent. had been per-

formed by various fleets, only one expedition failing ; the ships of 1607, having been

lost.—Mill.

1614.—Mr. Edwards of the Surat factory went to Ajimere as envoy to the Mogul,

Jehanguire ; was presented on the 7th February, by Asaph Khan, brother of the

beautiful empress Noor-Mahal, and obtained an additional Firmaun. A Portuguese

fleet and powerful armament defeated at Swally, with a loss of 350 men, by the Eng-

lish.—Bruce.

1615.—Sir T. Roe reached Agra, as ambassador from James I., the Company being

at the expense of the embassy.— Bruce.

1617 —An English factory established at Macassar. At this period the Compa-

ny’s chief factories were at Surat and Bantam, but they had establishments at

Acheen, and Tekoo in Sumatra; Jaccatra, Jambee, Potania, Siam, Japan, Succa-

dania, Borneo, and Banda.—-Bruce.

1613.—The Dutch obliged the English to resign all pretensions to the spice islands.

They introduced themselves now as rivals also at Surat, The English Company’s

ship Ann, Captain Shillinge, obtained freedom of trade at Mocha,—Bruce,

1619.—A commission, called the Council of Defence, consisting of four members of

the English, and four of the Dutch Companies, established by treaty between the

nations, to prevent dispute in India. It availed nothing, as the Dutch influence

preponderated. The Dutch this year attacked an English fleet of four ships at Tekoo,

156 Chronological Table.

sunk one, and seized the others. Firmauns were obtained from the Court of Persia,

for facilities to trade in Persia.— Bruce. Mill.

1620.—English Agents deputed from Surat to Agra, two also sent to purchase

cloths at Patna.—Sketches of Bengal. ;

1621.—James I. wrote to Shah Abbas, king of Persia, dated 19th March, thank-

ing him for favor shown to English merchants, and requesting a continuance of

such protection.— Bruce.

1622.—The English joining the Persians, attacked and made themselves masters

of the island of Ormuz, resigning the same to their allies for part of the booty, and

a grant of a moiety of the customs of the port of Gombron.—Gleig. Bruce. Mill.

1623.—In February, Captain Towerson, with nine Englishmen, nine Japanese, and

one Portuguese, were seized by the Dutch, at Amboyna, and accused of conspiracy

to attack the garrison: they were tried, put to the torture, and executed.—Bruce.

This cruel transaction caused much sensation, receiving the name of the Massa-

cre of Amboyna ever after, but the particulars of the case may have been exagge-

rated. The king issued a commission for inquiry, yet the Dutch obstinately main-

tained their ground as the exclusive and rightful possessors of the Moluccas, Banda,

and Amboyna; and strange though it may appear, the English government, in spite

of the popular indignation, seem quietly to haye acquiesced until a partial compensa-

tion, after a delay of 20 years, was enforced by Cromwell.—WMill. Hume.

1624.—The English factories and agencies, unable to cope with the Dutch, nearly

all withdrawn from stations in the Archipelago. The Company obtained, this year, for

the first time, permission to punish their servants abroad by martial as well as munici-

pal law. The factories at Siam, Portania, and Japan withdrawn at the time.—Bruce.

1625.—The English, alarmed at the late massacre at Amboyna, had retired, the

preceding year, from Batavia to the Island of Lagundy, in the Straits of Sunda;

after much mortality, were forced to abandon it, from its unhealthiness.—Bruce.

1626.—In 1621, the factory at Bantam sent to the Coromandel coast, to open a

trade at Pullicat ; but the Dutch effectually opposed the attempt. In the following

year, they seem to have succeeded in establishing a trade house at Masulipatam,

and secured a considerable quantity of coast goods. In February, 1826, the English

erected a small factory at Armagon, under Mr. Johnston, a Factor, which they

slightly fortified, as a subordinate station to Masulipatam, and as a retreat, in case

of need. Thus originated our transactions on the coast of Coromandel. The English

wished to seize the Island of Bombay, and fortify it as a retreat from the native

powers; the plan was not carried into effect, but now also was attention first di-

rected to Bombay.—Bruce.

1627. —Jehanguire died.— Orme.

1628.—In consequence of the oppression of the native Governor of Masulipatam,

it was abandoned for a time by the factory for Armagon, which now mounted 12

pieces of cannon, and had 23 factors and soldiers.—Bruce.

1629.—Bantam reduced to an agency, dependant on Surat; this proving inconve-

nient in its relations to the Dutch, it was again, in five years, restored to a presidency.

—Bruce. Hamilton.

1630.—Armagon reinforced by 20 soldiers, and placed under the controul of Surat.

Off Surat, the Portuguese, with a large fleet, and 200 soldiers, made several fruitless

attempts against the English shipping. They also made violent efforts without

success, to regain their power in the Gulf.— Bruce.

1631.—A proclamation* by Charles I. enumerates, this year, the exports and im-

ports of the Company, viz. exports, ‘‘ perpetuanoes and drapery, (broad cloths,

&c.) pewter, saffron, woollen stockings, silk stockings and gaiters, ribbands, roses

edged with gold lace, beaver hats with gold and silver bands, felt hats, strong

waters, knives, Spanish leather shoes, iron and looking glass ;’’ the imports were

‘‘Jong pepper, white pepper, white powdered sugar, preserved nutmegs and ginger

preserved, myrabolums, bezoar stones, drugs of all sorts, agate beads, blood stones,

musk, aloes Socatrina, ambergris, rich carpets of Persia and of Cambaya, quilts of

sattin, taffety, printed calicoes, benjamin, damasks, sattins and taffaties of China,

quilts of China embroidered with gold, quilts of Potania embroidered with silk,

galls, worm seeds, sugar-candy, China dishes, and porcelain of all sorts.’’—Bruce.

1632.—A Firmaun obtained from the king of Golconda, for the re-establishment

of the factory at Masulipatam.—Bruce,

1633.—The Emperor of Delhi ordered the Soubadar of Bengal, Kassim Khan, to

‘¢ expel the (Portuguese) idolators from his dominions.’’ In consequence, the fort

at Hooghly, under Michael Rodrigues, was seized after a brave defence. The Por-

* The proclamation does not mention Indigo; but about this period there was a large contract

for its supply to the English, at Agra, and much loss was sustained, as it found, at that juncture,

no ready sale either in Persia or England.

Chronological Table. 157

tuguese were spared, but their idols were destroyed. This is the first act of hostility

against Europeans recorded by the native historians.—Dow.

A French Company again attempted, with a fruitless effort, to colonise Madagas-

car.— Gleig.

1634.—On the 2nd February a Firmaun was obtained from the Mogul, for liberty

to trade in BENGAL, without any other restriction, than that the English ships

were to resort only to the port of Pipley. This fixes the precise period in which the

English were first permitted to enter the Ganges, The President and Council at

Surat, in great disgrace with the Court, having been discovered, from quarrels

among themselves, to have been largely carrying on a private trade; they threw

themselves on the mercy of the Court.—Bruce.

Mr. Morris, a factor from Masulipatam, sent to Bengal to avail himself of the

Emperor Shaw Jehan’s Firmaun: he reported from Pipley, that provisions for the

Company’s factories on the coast, and abundance of fine white cloths, were procura-

ble on reasonable terms.— Bruce.

1635.—A new English Company, or association, under Sir W. Courten*, chartered

by Charles, upon the unjust grounds that the London Company had ‘ neglected to

establish fortified factories, or seats of trade, &c.’’ The latter petition against the

infringement, and send orders to their servants in India not to assist or encourage

the interlopers.—Bruce. Anderson.

1636.—Courten’s vessels seized and plundered two jnnks of Surat and Diu. The

Mogul authorities would not comprehend the distinction of Companies, and impri-

soned the president and council of Surat for this aggression of their countrymen.

Pirates also seized the opportunity of infesting the Indian seas. The President

released only on paying 1,70,000 rupees to the Mogul. English Trade depressed at

Surat, while the Dutch brought 22 large ships, with proportionate stock, to Ban-

tam.—Bruce. Mill.

1637.—Captain Weddel, formerly a Company’s servant, but now a leading instru-

ment of Courten, fixed an Agency at Goa, and at Batticolo; he obtained a grant for

a factory at Acheen, and attacked and carried a fort at Canton, collecting many

bales of China goods, but being obliged to quit those seas, he fixed a factory at

Rajahpore, in the king of Vijiapore’s dominions.—Bruce.

1638.—Armagon found unsuited to commerce.—Bruce. Hamilton.

1639.—Mr. Day, one of the council, sent, in consequence, to the vicinity of St.

Thome, who reported Madraspatam as fayorable, and that the Naig of the district

offered land and every aid for building a fort. So important did the situation appear,

that, on their own responsibility, the council at once commenced the fortification,

and it soon became surrounded with thetowa. They named it Fort St. George.—

Bruce. Hamilton.

1640.—The distress of Charles I. made him oblige the Company to sell him

607,522 hogsheads of pepper, at 2s, 1d. per hogshead, for which he gave bonds and

re-sold it for 1s. 8d. ready money. The Company under great difficulty in these un-

settled times. Trade opened to Bussorah froin Surat.—Bruce. Mill.

1641.—Fort St. George made subordinate to Bantam.— Bruce,

1642.—The first regular dispatch from Madras received at home is dated this year,

and it is curious that Mr. Day, who founded Fort St. George, immediately went to

Bengal, and that the first regular dispatch to the Court from the latter place also

bears his signature, and was received the same year: it is dated 3rd November, 1642,

from Balasore.—-Bruce.

1643.—Great competition between the Dutch and English for firmauns from the

Mogul, but the commerce of the Europeans must have been looked upon as inferior

by the Imperial Court, for the ‘‘ profusion of presents,’’ as appears from Surat, was

only 9,000 rupees altogether.— Bruce.

1645.—The sum of £2,294 expended hitherto on the works of Fort St. George.

It required at this date £2,000 farther to complete it for a garrison of 100 men.

This year is memorable for the curious and unexpected extension of our incipient

power in Bengal. Mr. Gabriel Broughton, surgeon of the Hopewell, was sent for

from Surat to attend the Emperor Sua’ JenA’N. His daughter was severely burned,

but Mr. Broughton cured the princess, and in reward for his services was granted,

at his disinterested request, additional and new privileges for his countrymen in

Bengal. In 1646 he rendered professional benefit to prince Shujao, then in the

Government of Bengal, and by his subsequent intercession, factories, on advantage-

ous grants, were established at Balasore and Hooghly.—Bruce. Hamilton. Mill.

1645.—The rigid and austere manners of the republican party at home, injuring

the trade of the Company, the same was officially explained to the king of Persia as

the reason why silks, formerly a luxury, were now less in demand. The civil wars

detrimental to all sales.—Bruce,

* Sir W. Courten died immediately after this ; but the charter was continued to his son.

158 Chronological Table.

This year died Noor Jehén, Empress and favorite Sultana of Jehangir.—Dow.

1646.—The Dutch obtained a decided superiority in the Persian Gulf, almost

ruining the Bussorah and other establishments.—Bruce.

1647.—Courten’s association having established a colony at Madagascar, got into

difficulties, and resorted to the desperate measure of there coining counterfeit pago-

dahs and rials, to the great stain of the English character in India.—Bruce.

1648.—Bengal silk introduced into the investments. The communications this

year, secret, and no despatches forwarded by the Company, in consequence of the

danger and badness of the times.

1649.—Courten’s association now assumed the name of the Assada merchants—

and after much discussion an union took place between them and the London Com-

pany ; but although an ‘‘ United Joint Stock’’ was formed, only two ships and £60,000

were sent to India this season. The agents in Persia ascribe the deficiency in trade

there to the rumours reaching of civil commotion in England, and the ‘ tragicall

storye of the Kinge’s beheadinge, which would cause the Emperor and the Persian

nobles to consider the English as a base, contemptible, unworthy nation.’’

1650.—Captain Jeremy Blackman appointed president at Surat, with a salary of

about 400 rupees per month : private trade disallowed.

1651.—The Dutch officer Van Rubek settled a colony at the Cape of Good Hope.

Outward and homeward ships had hitherto touched here, and journals were secretly

deposited at Robben Island, to give information to friends arriving. The Dutch

relinquished St. Helena, w hich the English took possession of. The residency at

Surat had obtained enlarged privileges throughout the Mogul provinces, through the

agency of a Mr. Davidge, sent to the Mogul’s court.—Hamilton. Bruce.

1652.—Cromwell finding it expedient to employ the fleets and armies of his inse-

cure government, declares war against the Dutch, and the question of the injuries

to the Company made one of the grounds.— Mill. Hume.

The indefatigable Hollanders were now rivalling the English at Bengal in their

own factories.—Bruce.

1653.—The English must have established a factory before this at Lucknow, as it

is stated, to be withdrawn this year. Fort St. George raised to a presidency, but

the garrison, on the 5th February, as per return, had only 26 soldiers. The English

lost four ships to the Dutch in the Gulf.—Bruce. Hamilton.

1654.—Notwithstanding its new rank as a presidency, the Company had ordered

the civil establishment at Fort St. George to be reduced to 2 factors, and its military

force to 10 soldiers! Peace signed with the Dutch, and they agreed, as per separate

article, to pay the London Company £85,000 for losses at the Eastward, and

£3,615 to the heirs of Captain Towerson and others, the sufferers at Amboyna. The

island of Palaroon was also restored.—Hamilton. Bruce.

1655.—The Persian trade suspended, and that of Fort St. George at a stand, prin-

cipally from the opposition of the Dutch. There were difficulties also from fresh

rivals, called ‘‘ Merchant Adventurers,’’ who, on petitioning for free trade, were at

first patronized by Cromwell.— Bruce. Mill.

The following extracted statement of the Company’s ‘‘ United Joint Stock’’ may

not be uninteresting ; it was dated Ist September, 1655.—Bruce.

DEBIT. Ee is.-d.

Salaries of the Merchants in India for 5 years, at £2,066 2 8...... 9,641 19 4

Mariners’ wages forilike term, pAcctiteaule leeches olchtle dinete Meee 4,000 0 0

Two yearns’ expenses in Surat,.......... ACD OrO OPI EOIt. bce 9.00.00 0 00 7,600 0 O

- Coast of Coromandel, ee ae nia ate ecbtote hare ee teteie re teeta 5,000 0 0

6c ERAT A I Fe ya chases so eS ehere eerste S rotae olads Sree ree oer 2,600 0 O

Salary of Merchants on the three Brothers,.. dacogcabacis ade 230 0 0

29,271 19 4

CREDIT.

Balance of estate in England,... ..-......ccse0e> SOE GRD Oc 82,053 12 2

», remain in Surat and Subordinate Factories, oi8 w. ve osc ee OE; S2OMoL AO

At Madraspataim and factories on that Coast,........ sfelele ca) wtatetey ars 22,671 11 3

At Bantam and iSubordimatesy 1.000. si. <2. So oeeiodc che betes tea cemts 26,451 10 7

Voyage to Palaroon, ........ aTeeeehs: talc ‘eile Rcatalaiar abaticretatale wren ole devahemete 1,051 8 0

Fort St. George ANGUCUSTOMIS ee sais ees ais ic wateiosete wie eiseieel daleiee ame 6,000 0 O

Three houses in Agra, Ahmedabad, and Lucknow, with the garden

ati Saale, Paks eae ter rset eee cic a dat a age epee 1,932° 0 O

Five houses at Bantam, Japara, Macassar, Jambee, and Banger

INT ASSGEM wes (sisshet ols ss ibles) S.dta starelats Beate Sats cotstal orate tates Wimmer rarele a aeieeaes 3,600 0 O

Two ships, a sloop, and pinnace,... ,......«- Siam chistes otek ete cles 1, 0000) O

1,85,589 7

Chronological Table. 159

1656.—Reductions in all the establishments abroad ; supernumeraries sent to

England. Columbo taken from the Portuguese by the Dutch, who also, this year,

established Chinsurah as a factory.—Bruce. E. I. Chron. Hamilton.

1657.—The London Company suffered much from the intrigues of rivals. At last

Cromwell failing to open a free trade with advantage to the country, on the opinion

and advice of his council of state ‘* that the trade of East India be managed by a

United Joint Stock, exclusive of all others,’’? consented to grant a new Charter, on

the 10th February, and took the Company under his especial protection. From this

year the Company attempted to settle permanently at St. Helena.—Bruce. Mill.

1658.—The Bengal establishments ordered from home to be continued under the

presidency of Fort St. George, the agencies at Cossim Bazar, Ballasore, and Patna

to be subordinate to the factory at Hoogly. Surat the chief presidency ; new regu-

jations made for the servants in India. The emperor, Shah Jehan, being afflicted

with mortal illness, his four sons contended for the succession. Aurangzebe’s

superior abilities and cunning prevailed. The Dutch completely expelled the Por-

tuguese from Ceylon.— Bruce. Dow.

1659.—In consequence of the new charter, the English trade revived in Jndia.

Aurangzebe became emperor, Shah Jehan lived some years afterwards, confined at

Agra.—Bruce. Dow.

1660.—The uncertainty of public affairs in England, after Cromwell’s death, pre-

vented the Company from making this year any exertions at home. A China Com-

pany attempted in France.—S&ruce. E. I. Chron. :

1661.—The embarrassments of the Company’s funds at the commencement of this

year again so great, it was resolved to relinquish many out stations in India, and

instructions were issued to this effect, but on the 3rd April, Charles II. granted a

new charter ‘‘ for ever,’’ with considerable privileges. The Company were autho-

rized to make peace and war with any prince or people not Christians, erect fortifi-

cations, maintain armies, send home unlicensed Englishmen, and administer justice

as a sovereign state. The Portuguese power in the East now reduced to the pos-

session of Goa and Diu, the Dutch having expelled them from their ports on the

coast of Malabar. The Island of Bombay ceded to the English by Portugal, as a

marriage portion to Charles II. but its final possession withheld for four years, on

various pretences.— Bruce. Gleig. Mill. E. I. Chron.

1662.—The Earl of Marlborough and Sir Abraham Shipman sent by the king with

troops to take possession of Bombay. The Viceroy refused tc deliver up the place.

On the junction of the Assada and the East India Companies, the factories in Africa

had become the property of the latter. They were Fort Cormantine, Fort Wyamba,

Cape Coast Castle, and Benin; but this year the king obliged the whole to be hand-

ed over to the Royal African Company. ‘‘ African Labourers”’ had early been sent

to the Indian Factories as servants and guards ; their descendants were subsequently

a constituent part of the military guards at the Company’s principal establishments.

Sir Geo. Oxinden, an able man, sent out as ‘‘ President and chief director of Surat

and all other factories,’’ in the north parts of India. He received however a salary

only of 250 rupees per mensem, and a yearly gratuity of 2,000 rupees as a compen-

sation for private trade,—Bruce.

1663.—Factories which had been attempted at Patna, Cossim Bazar, and Balla-

sore ordered to be discontinued, and purchases and sales made only at Hooghly.

Major F. Willoughby appointed from home, Governor of the Island of Palaroon, at

a salary of £50 per annum, for five years.—Bruce.

1664.—A French East India Company formed under the minister Colbert.—ZF. I.

Chron.

In January, the town of Surat pillaged by Sevajee, the founder of the Mahrattas.

Sir George Oxinden bravely defended the English factory, and the Mogul granted

an exemption from customs for one year, in token of his admiration.—Bruce.

Sir A. Shipman, the deputed Governor of Bombay, perished by disease at Angede-

vah, with 300 soldiers, the Portuguese refusing to comply with the treaty, and the

English factory of Surat afraid to admit armed men, from apprehension of the

Mogul’s displeasure. About 100 men only survived of four companies, when the Por-

tuguese finally gave up Bombay, but without any of its dependencies.—Bruce.

1665.—The Mogul, jealous of the possession of Bombay by the king, but unable

to comprehend the distinct characters of the King’s and Company’s establishment.

Mr. Foxcroft sent out as president at Fort St. George, when the incumbent, Sir

Edward Winter, seized his intended successor on some pretence of treasonable

speeches, and contumaciously held the fort for nearly two years.—Bruce.

The deposed emperor Shah Jehan died in confinement at Agra.—Fraser.

1666.—By the fire in London the Company’s saltpetre and pepper ware-houses, then

under the exchange, destroyed. Tea imported in England from Holland by the

Lords Arlington and Ossery ; it sold for 60s. per lb. ; but two years previous, small

quantities had reached, as presents to the king.—Bruce. E. I, Chron,

M 2

160 Chronological Table.

Sir Gervase Lucas sent out to Bombay as Governor, by the King; he imprisoned

the acting Governor, Mr. Cooke, Secretary to the late Sir A. Shipman, for extortion

and peculation.— Bruce.

1667.—Palaroon ceded to the Dutch by the treaty of Breda.— Anderson.

Aurangzebe, in his wars with Persia and Sevajee, began to value European mili-

tary talent, and demanded from Surat some artillery men and engineers for his

armies. The request was evaded.— Bruce.

1668.—Bombay ceded by the king (23rd September) to the Company. Its reve-

nues, as per return on cession, were £2,833 per annum. The two companies then

stationed there, of H. M. soldiers, volunteered into the Company’s service, and thus

formed its first military establishment at Bombay*.

This year Tea is first mentioned in the Company's dispatches. A letter to Bantam

from the Court, thus orders the agent, ‘‘ send home by these ships 1001b. weight of

the best tey, that you can gett.’’

Mr. Cooke, ex-Governor of Bombay, who had escaped to Goa, associated him-

self with Jesuits, and endeavoured to assemble a force to repossess himself of Bom-

bay: proclaimed a traitor. The revenue of Bombay more than doubled itself, under

the Company the first year.— Bruce. Hamilton.

1669.—Sir G. Oxinden appointed from home ‘‘ Governor and Commander-in-

Chief’’ at Bombay, but he died on 14th July of the preceding year.

This year also were received orders from home, to institute a pilot establishment

at Hoogly, to build a pinnace to be manned with intelligent seamen from the

Indiamen, to take charge of the shipping up and down. Thus originated the Bengal

Pilot Service.

St. Helena now regularly colonised under Captain Stringer, appointed Governor ;

the Captains of Indiamen touching there to act as members of his council. There

were 22 regular Indiamen then in the service, as appears by a list of those entitled

to act as members of the St. Helena council.

The military regulations in use, to controul the small force at Bombay, founded on

authority vested in the Company, by charter, to levy, embody, and entertain forces,

&c. Their military establishments were thus upheld for years, until king’s troops,

serving in India, questioned their competency to hold courts martial.—Bruce.

1670.—The English trade considerably increased, as apparent from the fact of the

outward investment of bullion and goods being £303,500. But the Dutch influence

predominated ; their ships from Europe this season were 52 in number.— Mill.

1671,.— Bombay rising; in consequence, a mint ordered, andthe building of two ships

and two brigantines commenced upon. Captain Herman Blake, who came round

via Persia, appointed engineer and surveyor general ; the first of that rank.

Surat again attacked, but well defended: its situation now deemed precarious for

a presidency.— Bruce.

1672.—The presidency at Surat, ina letter on military subjects, recommended

that the ‘‘ principle of seniority must be observed in adjusting the rank of the offi-

cers at Bombay.’’ — Bruce.

The French capture St. Thome, it was retaken two years subsequently by the

Dutch and king of Golconda, when the French purchased the village and district of

Pondicherry, which they fortified.—E. I. Chron.

The oldest record of the Company extant in 1792, at the presidency of Fort St.

George, bears the date of this year. It is a letter from Bantam, dated Ist June. Its

recorded ‘‘ abstract’’ was as follows :

‘¢ Mentions that the Company-had ordered Factories to be established at

** Tonkeen, whither was sent Mr. W. Gifford in the Zant.

“ Tywan do. David Stephens, Experiment,

‘¢ Japan, do. Symon Delboet, Return.’’—Dalrymple’s

Orient. Rep.

The Court recommended the Council, for the first time, at Bantam, to open a

direct trade to China, and, at the same time, with reference to the attempt above

alluded to, settle at Tonkeen, Tywan, and Japan; ordered their agents ‘‘ to wear

dresses of English cloth, with gold and silver lace, that their appearance might

convey to the emperor and his officers impressions of their rank.’’—Bruce.

1673.—St. Helena having been several times taken and retaken, recaptured this

year by a naval force from the Dutch, and regranted by charter to the English Com-

pany.—E&. I. Chron.

* Derivation of Bombay doubiful, said to be from Buon Bahia, Portuguese; also from Bomba

Devi, a Hindoo goddess.

+ Mr. Delboe failed, it seems, at Japan, and was ordered away. The English flag had the St.

George’s cross, and thus somewhat resembled the Portuguese flag, which nation was hateful to

the Japanese. The alliance by marriage with the princess of Portugal was also given as another

cause, but Mr. Delboe returning by way of Macao, negotiated for permission to establish a factory

there, and probably to this incident may be traced the origin of the present China Trade.—Bruce.

” Chronological Table. 16}

The outward India fleet divided into three squadrons, under an ‘‘ Admiral, Vice

Admiral, and Rear Admiral.’’

Englishmen sent to Bengal to improve the silks, and dye the green and black

colours, ‘‘ but under an obligation to keep their art secret from the natives.”’

The Dutch fleet so powerful off Bombay and Surat, that 500 Rajpoots were sent

for to defend these places. The French had taken Trincomalee from the Dutch, who

now recovered it by a force from Batavia.— Bruce.

1674.—Bombay mounted 100 pieces of cannon.—Bruce.

1675.—The Court write out that Lahore indigo was undersoJd by West-India

indigo, and that less lac would be required from ‘‘ the new practice of using wafers

instead of wax.’’—Bruce.

Mr. Delboe formed a factory at Siam.—Dalrymple.

The Court, 12th July, framed the following regulations for their civil service.

‘¢ In the advancement of our apprentices, we direct that after they have served the first

five yeares, they shall have £10 per annum for the two last yeares, and having served

those two yeares, to be entertayned one yeare longer as Writers, and have Writer’s

salary ; and having served that yeare, to enter into the degree of factors, which

otherwise would have been ten yeares. And knowing that a distinction of titles is

in many respects necessary, we do order, that when the apprentices have served

their times, they be stiled Writers, and when the Writers have served their times,

they be stiled Factors ; and Factors having served their times, to be stiled Merchants,

and Merchants having served their times, to be stiled Sentor Merchants.’’—Bruce.

Civil Servants were to apply themselves also to acquire a knowledge of military

duties, so that in case of attack, or being better qualified for military than civil

duties, they might receive commissions and have military pay.— Bruce.

1676.—The king’s letters patent, dated 5th October, (28th of Charles II.,) autho-

rised a mint at Bombay to coin ‘‘ Rupees, Pice, and Budgrooks.’’—Bruce.

The Dutch had 6,720 fighting men in Batavia, exclusive of Civilians.—E. I.

Chron.

The new charter now granted enabled the English Company to double their stock,

and raise it to £739,782.— Anderson.

The celebrated Dr. Edmund Halley, by order of the king, sent out ina Company’s

ship to remain two years at St. Helena, for perfecting the knowledge of Astronomy.—

Bruce.

The pay of an European soldier at Madras, in full for provisions and necessaries

of every kind, was 21 shillings per month.—Hamilton.

1677.—The Company’s agent at Bantam, Mr. White, and the principal servants

of the agency, assassinated by the Javanese, on the 2ist April, 1677, and the fac-

tory so ruined by the death of the seniors, that its transactions closed, and no

accounts were conveyed to the Court.—Bruce.

Mr. Aungier, President at Surat, died 30th June, 1677.—Bruce,

1678.—A Judge appointed for the Island of Bombay.— Bruce.

A troop of Horse ordered to be embodied at Bombay, the pay of the Captain not

to exceed £120 per annum.—Bruce.

Sheyntham Master, Esq. succeeded Sir W. Langhorne as Governor of Madras.—

E. I. Chron.

1679.—The Court finding Bombay too expensive, sent out orders for retrenchments

in the military charges. Surat also to be reduced to an agency, but their servants

were unable to obey the Court, from the unsettled state of affairs, and the wars

between Sevajee and the Mogul.—Bruce.

1680.—Captain Keigwin sent to command the military at Bombay with a small

reinforcement ; he was to have Six shillings per diem and to be 3rd in council. Mr.

Smith sent out as assay master on a salary of £60 per annum.

Mr. Gyfford appointed agent and governor at Fort St. George.—Bruce,

1681.—Surat (such the shifting state of the Company’s domestic affairs at thts

period) again ordered by the Court to resume the rank of a presidency. The court

also revoked the order for Captain Keigwin’s having a seat in council. Mr. John

Child, brother of Sir Josiah, the Governor (now called chairman) of the East India

Company, sent out as president at Surat.— Bruce.

Bengal first made separate from Madras. Mr. Hedges, a member of their commit-

tees, (now called director,) sent out with special powers as ‘‘ agent and governor of

their affairs in the Bay of Bengal, and of the factories subordinate to it, or Cossim

Bazar, Patna, Balasore, Malda, and Dacca. A corporal of approved fidelity and

courage, with twenty soldiers, to bea guard to the agent’s person, and the factory at

Hooghly, and to act against interlopers.’’ Such the foundation of our power in Ben-

gal; in thesequel the centre of commerce andthe seat of government in India.— Bruce.

The king of Bantam sent an embassy to England.—Bruce.

1682.—The English Levant Company, deprived of their former portion of the

Indian trade, endeavoured to oppose the East India Company; but in April, the

162 Chronological Table.

king and privy council rejected their scheme. Persian goods at this time compre-

hended silks of all sorts, red and black caramania wool, rhubarb, and drugs.—Bruce.

The Court ordered the institution of a bank at Madras. So violent the feeling

against interlopers, it was enjoined that no Company’s servant should intermarry

with their families.

Opium first ordered from Bengal, Bantam captured by the Dutch, and the king

expelled. This gave a finishing blow to our position in that quarter.— Bruce.

1683.—By letters patent, dated 9th August, the king authorised the Company to

exercise admiralty jurisdiction within their limits. The appointed judge, Dr. St.

John, to have £200 per annum, and allowances at the Company’s table.

Two companies of Rajpoots ordered to be embodied at Bombay.

: vide English fleets sent out to redress the injuries to the Persian and Bantam

rade.

Mr. Hedges dismissed from Bengal for misconduct, and Mr. Gyfford, who was

sent to Madras, (now constituted a presidency,) directed to proceed to take charge

also of Bengal with an escort of a Company, composed of seamen from Indiamen.

A factory established at Tillicherry.

A serious insurrection at Bombay, on the 27th December, the fort was seized by

the troops under Captain Keigwin, in consequence of retrenchments and reductions,

and held in the king’s name, renouncing the authority of the Company. It was

forcibly retained for nearly two years, and then given up, the insurgents having

stipulated for pardon *.— Bruce. :

The Company had to put to death some rebels at St. Helena, but on the petition

Hs the widows, to the House of Commons, the act was declared illegal and ar-

itrary.

India stock sold this year from 360 to 500 per cent. advance.—Chron. Table.

Factories established at Cuddalore and Commerce in the Gingee country.—

Bruce.

1634.—The English formally expelled from Java, and with the Company’s proper-

ty, the establishments went to the Malabar coast.

Sir John Child of Surat made a baronet, and appointed the following year, Cap-

tain General and Admiral in India. Sir John Wyborne, Vice-Admiral and Deputy

Governor of Bombay, witha salary of £250 per annum.—Bruce.

1685.—Seat of government ordered to be transferred from Surat to Bombay. The

Madras government having fixed an agent and council at Priaman, on the Island of

Sumatra, the Court ordered the station to be supported and fortified. Also ordered

an uninhabited island in the Ganges to be obtained and fortified, while the works

at Fort St. George were to be strengthened. The factory at Masulipatam to be

dissolved.-—Bruce.

1686.—Ten ships of war under Vice-Admiral Nicolson sent out to oppose the

pative powers. On its arrival, the agent in Bengal (Mr. Charnock) ordered to act

as Admiral and Commander-in-Chief ; six complete companies were on board with-

out Captains, it being intended that the members in council in Bengal should act in

that capacity. The force to disembark at Chittagong, seize and fortify it, establish

a mint, and five per cent. customs to be levied on the inhabitants. It was wished to

intimidate the Mogul and his officers, who had been arbitrary towards the factories.

The factory at Hoogly was oppressed, and surrounded by parties of native horse and

foot. Surat also had been plundered by Sevajee, and the Company’s possession

injured by the wars of the Mogul and Mahrattas.—Bruce.

Sir John Child appointed what is now called Governor General, with full authority,

in India, and discretionary powers to make war or peace with the Mogul; ordered

to proceed to Madras and Bengal, Mr. Zenzan to act in his absence at Surat, or

rather Bombay. A company from a British regiment of the line sent out under a

Captain Clifton, who as well as all Captains of Infantry was to have seat in council.

— Bruce.

On the 28th October, a part of the fleet under Admiral Nicolson having arrived in

Bengal, an affray took place at Hooghly between three English soldiers and some of the

Nawab’s peons; more soldiers joined, and at last the entire force came in contact,

and after a severe action, the Nawab’s troops were defeated with loss. Hooghly was

cannonaded and 506 houses burnt. Subsequent to this useless affair, the agent and

¥ The officers both in rank and pay had been placedlower, and the militia so much reduced, that

all authority of the officers over the men had ceased. Captain Keigwin applied for subsistence mo-

ney, there being no Company’s table as formerly, and after much discussion the sum of 25 Rs. per

month was granted, pending a reference tothe Court. The Court ‘‘ unhappily ordered the half

allowance for diet to Captain Keigwin to be refunded, and this parsimonious measure produced the

discontents and probably the revolt of the garrison.” Dr. St. John, in his report however to the

King and Council, stated, that the rebellion arose fro the depredations and crimes of the inter-

Jopers, with whom Captain Keigwin was intimately connected ; although he used the King’s name,

bis motives were predatory and repellious.x—Bruce.

Chronological Table. 163

council quitted their open factory at Hooghly on the 20th December 1686, and retired

to Chutanuttee, (afterwards Calcutta,) waiting a negociation with the Mogul. The

shipping, as the whole arrived, wanting repairs, it was deemed unadvisable to

attempt the original object of the expedition, the reduction of Chittagong.—Bruce.

Stewart.

1687.—A settlement made at Bencoolen, and a firmaun obtained for the sole

government of it. A fortification called York fort built.—Bruce.

Bombay constituted a regency with further powers. Sir J. Wyborne and Mr.

Zenzan dismissed for disputing Sir John Child’s authority. To give dignity to the

Governor General he was directed to be attended always with a life guard of 50

grenadiers, commanded by a Captain. Madras also constituted a regency, with a cor-

poration, under His Majesty’s Charter, consisting of a Mayor and ten Aldermen,

(three to be Company’s servants and seven to be natives,) to be justices of the peace,

and ‘‘ to wear thin scarlet gowns.’’ One hundred and twenty burgesses to be

appointed ‘‘ to wear black silk gowns.’’—Bruce.

The Court disapproved of the measures of Mr. Charnock at Bengal, and recom-

mended more active hostility. Sir John Child at Bombay however took most able

measures at this difficult juncture, and determined to uphold the British name and

influence in India, notwithstanding the disastrous appearances at Bengal, where our

remote factories were seized, and the English troops forced to fortify themselves at

Ingellee. Captain Heath had meanwhile been dispatched from home with afresh

force.— Bruce.

1688.—A Post Office ordered at Bombay.

Captain Heath arriving with the reinforcement in October, unwisely recom-

menced hostilities in Bengal ; he plundered and burnt Balasore ; the Mogul Governor

seized the English at thefactory, and sent them prisoners up the country.— Bruce.

1689.—Sir John Child, after capturing some native vessels at Surat, and bravely

Opposing the Mogul power amidst many embarrassing difficulties, died at Bombay

On the 4th February, 1689. His successor, Mr. Harris, being at that time a prisoner

at Surat, the Company’s affairs became more alarming: submission was made to

the Mogul, and a firmaun, or rather pardon, issued as to criminals. A heavy fine

was exacted, on payment of which, the Siddee’s fleet and army withdrew from before

Bombay.

In the mean time, at Bengal, Captain Heath sailed towards Chittagong, which for

some unexplained reason, he failed to attack ; he then proceeded to Arracan, where

he offered to assist a revolted chief against its King, but without waiting for the

reply, set off for Madras, where his fleet, having on board the agent and council of

Bengal, and the Company’s effects, arrived on the 4th March.

The factories at Vizagapatam and Masulipatam were seized by the Mogul, and Mr.

Stables, chief of the former, and four factors, put to death.

At home the Commons recommended the establishment of a new Company, the

present one being little in favor with the King, parliament, or people.

It is singular that the Court, during these humiliating reverses abroad, had writ-

ten out to their servants to obtain dominion; or, as the orders say, to increase

revenue, ‘‘ to make us a nation in India.’’ They had found the insufficiency of fir-

mauns, and were desirous to assume independence and power.— Bruce. Stewart.

1690.—The Mogul authorities invite Mr. Charnock and factory back again to

Bengal. Mr. Harris proclaimed Governor of Bombay, but with no general power

as his predecessor: Mr. Weldon appointed Deputy Governor. The interlopers in

England associated themselves, and made every exertion to obtain a separate char-

ter.— Bruce.

1691.—A new firmaun obtained by Mr. Charnock in Bengal. He had previous-

ly re-settled the establishment at Chutanuttee, protected by 100 soldiers. Ulabariah

had been before tried, but found unsuited.—Bruce.

1692.—Mr. Charnock died 10th January, much respected by many. He was

succeeded by Mr. Ellis.— Bruce.

Mr. Yale dismissed at Madras. Mr. Nathaniel Higgenson succeeded October 13th,

to the government. The latter was superceded in December by Sir J. Goldesborough,

who was appointed ‘‘ Commissary General and Supervisor’’ of the Company’s affairs

in India.—Bruce.

An Attorney General sent to Madras for the better regulation of the Company’s

interests.— Bruce.

At Bombay European pirates had caused much inconvenience to the trade, and

irritation on the part of the Mogul.—Bruce. ,

Tegnapatam had been purchased from the Ram Rajah, and fortified—was called

Fort St. David. — Bruce. ;

1693.—The Company had expended at home £90,000 in influencing the Privy

Council to renew the charter.—Bruce, Mill.

164 Chronological Table.

A mutiny took place at St. Helena, consequent to the temporary relaxation of

martial law as directed from home. The insurgents killed the Governor, and dis-

armed and imprisoned the soldiers of the garrison. Captain Keeling sent out with

a force to reduce the island to obedience.—Bruce.

A new charter granted on the 7th October (5th William and Mary) renewing that

of Elizabeth, with some modified and some extended privileges.— Bruce.

1694.—Bengal, after Mr. Charnock’s death, again made subordinate to Madras.

Sir J. Goldesborough, on his tour of inspection as Commissary General, dissented

from the high eulogium elsewhere passed on the late Mr. Charnock. He describes

him as having been irresolute and indolent. He superseded his successor Mr. Ellis,

and appointed the chief at Dacca, Mr. Eyre, tobe agent. He also removed Captain

Hill, the military commandant, and sent him to Madras. In the midst of several

spirited reforms, Sir J. Goldesborough died, and was succeeded by Sir J. Gayer,

from Bombay.— Bruce.

During this year a Dr. Blackwall, a medical officer, for a bribe agreed to deliver

up Fort St. David to the Mogul General. This treason was fortunately discovered,

and Blackwall seized and punished.—Hamsteer.

A letter from the Court stated that ‘‘ every recruit sent from England cost £30.’’

A fortified settlement was made from Bombay at Anjengo.—Bruce.

1695.—The Parliament of Scotland, on the 26th June, empowered the King (as

King of Scotland) to constitute a Scottish Company. The Governor of the London

Company, (Chairman) Sir T. Cook committed by the commons to the Tower, for re-

fusing to give an account of the money distributed in bribes.—Bruce.

The homeward bound fleet captured by the French.—Ditto.

A large privateer having seized a Mogul ship, the Surat factory was seized upon,

and liberated only after much difficulty on the following year.—Ditto. 2

1696.—Much distress occasioned by the interlopers: the crews of two Indiamen,

stated to have been seduced by them; they rose and murdered their officers, and

turned pirates—such the extent of the contagion, that the Governor at Bombay could

not man a boat, for fear that the crew would desert ; and so low the state of the

garrison, there was nota trust-worthy soldier for promotion to the rank of sergeant

or corporal.— Bruce.

The trade at Madras also similarly crippled, but its revenues and taxes said to

have amounted to 40,000 Pagodahs.—Bruce.

1697.— Mr. Pitt appointed Governor at Madras; to be for 12 months independent

of the Commissary General, Sir J. Gayer.— Bruce.

A rebellion of a Rajah Subah Sing having broken out in Bengal, it gave an opening

to the French, Dutch, and Finglish factories to erect fortifications. But for this, so

jealous were the authorities, it would not have been permitted.— Stewart.

A new and favorable firmaun obtained from the Emperor of Persia.—Bruce.

1698.—An act passed 10th William, cap. 44, incorporating anew ‘‘ general society

trading to the East Indies.’’ It was called the English East India Company, in

contra distinction to the old or London Company.

On the passing of this act for another Company, the old corporation exerted

itself, ‘‘ with a true Roman courage,’’ as one of their mercantile letters states, in

advising their servants of an extensive equipment. They dismissed the President of

Surat, Mr. Annesley, (Mr. Colt to succeed ;) and permitted their establishments,

as an encouragement, to trade in jewels, At Madras all former factories or stations

were to be resumed, so as to exclude the new Company. Bengal was again made

independent of Fort St. George. xk RE:

Captain Kyd, the notorious pirate, formed his ships into squadrons, and fairly

blockaded the coasts : in consequence, the Mogul, who would not understand the

distinction between this outlaw and the other English, put the whole trade under

an embargo. j ’

The new English Company sent Agents to India, chiefly men who had been dis-

missed with disgrace, from the London Company. Sir William Norris was appointed

by the King’s Commission, an Ambassador to the Mogul, to solicit privileges for

the new association.—Bruce.

1699.—Sir Edward Littleton was appointed President and Consul, in Bengal, of

the new Company; he was also empowered to act as King’s Consul. He was order-

ed to report on all the plans and trade of the London Company, to obtain from the

dismissed servants all possible information, copies of firmauns, &c. Sir Nicholas

Waite was appointed their President, at Surat, The new Company, however, at

this early stage, made approaches for an union between the rivals.— Bruce. .

The Mogul Prince Azeem Ooshan granted in 1698-99, the adjacent small villages

of Chutanuttee, Govindpore, and Calicotta, (dedicated to the goddess Calee,) the

whole soon taking the name of the last, or Cancurra. Sir Charles Eyre, recently

knighted, an old servant, was again sent to India, tobe principal servant in Bengal,,

which they now eonstituted a presidency. The instructions to Sir C. Eyre, dated

Chronological Table. 165

December, 1699, directed him to increase the fortifications, to build a strong fort of

pentagonal form, to be called Fort William.—Stewart. Bruce.

1700.—The London Company obtained an act, on the 11th April, for continuance

of their corporation, and the King recommended an union of the two interests.

In India, the new Company’s servants insulted and committed violence on the flag

and factory of the London Company, at Surat, which was resented by the Mogul

Governor, as an affront to himself. The trade was much injured every where.

At Madras, disputes took place between Consul Pitt, and Governor Pitt, the rival

Governors of the two companies; in fact, throughout India, as might be expected,

the hostile rivalry of both companies ruined the trade for all concerned. The

new Company made some progress, in opening a trade with China, though it failed

eventually. —Bruce.

1701.—The disputes of the old and new Company most perplexing and ruinous.

The native rvlers took bribes from both parties. The Ambassador, Sic W. Norris,

seized two of the Council of the London Company, at Surat, and sent them to the

Mogul Governor, ‘‘ with their hands tied.’” Sir John Gayer, the President, subse-

quently was seized by the Emperor’s order, obtained through misrepresentation,

and with the other members of Council, ‘‘ barbarously used.’’

A Committee appointed at home, to endeavour to effect an union between the

Companies.

Sir W. Norris had an audience of the Mogul, on the 28th April, 1701. He was

attended by a splendid European cavalcade, with ordnance, and many followers.

Kyd, the pirate, taken, and hanged at home. He had been supported by some

noblemen, Lord Somers and Orford, who were impeached.—Bruce. EK. I. Chron.

1702.—In January of this year, the preliminaries of the union were settled.

Bengal improved, under the auspices of the Mogul Prince Azeem Ooshan. The

instructions from home directed the Civil Servants to proceed themselves with

small stocks, in the Aurungs, and bargain themselves ‘‘ without the affectation of

pomp and grandeur, and as merchants ought to do.’’

The ambassador abruptly broke off the negotiation at the Mogul’s Court, and de-

parted for Surat, which circumstance, with the depredations of the pirates, so in-

censed the Emperor, that he ordered all the English in his dominions to be seized, im-

prisoned, and their effects confiscated. All the subordinate agencies suffered in con-

sequence, but Calcutta by this time was too strong to be thus dealt with.

In the deed of union by which the two Companies were hereafter to take the name

of ‘‘ the united Company of merchants trading to the Hast Indies,’’ the factories

of the old Company are thus detailed.

Bombay: Surat, Swally, Broach, Ahmedabad, Agra, and Lucknow.

On the Malabar Coast: the forts and factories of Carwar, Tillichery, Anjengo, and

Calicut.

Persia: the factories of Gombroon, Shiraz, and Ispahan.

Fort St. George, Madras, Fort St. David, Cuddalore, Porto Novo, Pettipolee,

Masulipatam, Madapollam, and Vizagapatam. The settlements on the Island of

Sumatra, or York Fort, Bencoolen, Indrapore, Tyamong, Sellebar; also the factory

of Tonquin in Cochin China.

Fort William: Chuttanuttee, (Calcutta not yet specified itseems,) Balasore, Cos-

sim Bazar, Dacca, Hoogly, Malda, Rajhmahl, and Patna; also the Island of St.

Helena.

The new Company specify in the deed only the following settlements. A factory

at Surat, at Masulipatam, at Madapollam, and on the Islands of Borneo and Pulo

Condore.

The Indenture farther sets forth as stock:

INE W COMPamys os. c oc e o ene ce vw vncisicicas ns os 1,662,000 0 0

Separate Trades,......-...sseecr erence rscecece 23,000 0 O

Total .. £2,000,000 0 0.—Bruce.

1703.—On the union above referred to, Sir John Gayer was appointed by the

General Court, ‘‘General and Governor’ of Bombay, and Sir Nicholas Waite’s

commission, under the English Company, of Consul, revoked, President Pitt was

confirmed at Madras, and consul Pitt made chief authority at Fort St. David, his

commission of consul being cancelled. President Beard confirmed at Bengal,

though a commission of eight were appointed to investigate and control all proceed-

ings at Fort William. There was still much dissension between the late rival

authorities throughout India, and much difficulty in the attempts at adjustment.—

Bruce. '

1704.—Sir John Gayer having been imprisoned by the Mogul authorities, Sir

Nicholas Waite, who was appointed to succeed in case of vacancy, basely contrived

166 Chronological Table.

to prolong his detention, by bribes and iniquitous misrepresentations to the natives.

The disputes between the rival servants still kept up in adjusting accounts and out-

standing commercial transactions.— Bruce.

1705.—The treachery of Sir Nicholas Waite fully discovered by the diselosure of

his instrument, Rustum, a native broker ; but in defiance of orders from the Gene-

ral Court, he retained authority, and Sir J. Gayer was still in confinement at Surat.

— Bruce.

1706.—At Bengal the affairs were becoming settled ; Sir Edward Littleton, the

late president of the new Company, having been recalled, and Mr. President Beard

having died. Messrs. Hedges and Sheldon were appointed jointly to succeed and

bring up the accounts of the two Companies.—Bruce.

1707.—Aurungzebe died on the 20th February. His revenues were equal to 38

millions sterling. To shew the general fear entertained of the imperial power by

foreigners then in Endia, it was thought necessary to announce it to the Court in an

allegory. Thus in a letter dated lst March, 1707, Sir J. Gayer (previously released)

represented, ‘‘ that the sun of this hemisphere had set, and that the star of the second

magnitude being under his meridian hadtaken his place, but it was feared the star

of the first magnitude, though under a remoter meridian, would struggle to exalt it-

self,’’ thus conveying the news of the Emperor’s demise, and of the disputes between

his sons for the succession.— Bruce.

The works at Fort William were by this time respectable, with a number of guns,

and 125 soldiers, of whom half were Europeans : many natives began to settle in

its vicinity.— Bruce.

Madras at this period had only 300 European settlers, of whom 200 were mili-

tary.—Hamilton.

1708.—The time drawing on far to final incorpoiation of the accounts and affairs

of the two Companies, which was ordered for this year, their feelings and interests

became identified by a sudden demand from H. M.’s government for £2,200,000,

without interest, All their closing dissentions gave way to avert the common danger,

and on the 29th September, 1708, a final award and charter was adopted. By this

act, 6 Anne, cap. 17, the privileges were to be extended to March, 1726. At this

juncture, the number of directors, their duties, committees, mode of sales, ware-

housing, and home establishments were adjusted, and have remained with little

alteration on the same footing to the present day.

Thus were closed the transactions of the English in establishing a trade with

India, until the act of legislature confirming the corporate capacity of THE UNITED

COMPANY OF MERCHANTS TRADING TO THE EAST INDIES.—Bruce.

1709.—It may be gathered from the following circumstance, how deeply the con-

tentions of the two rival Companies before their union had injured the entire trade,

and the prosperity of the English in India.—The King of Persia just before this

period wished to send an embassy to Bombay, but ashamed to betray the weakness

of its defences and garrison, and the general poverty of the place, the English autho-

rities refused to admit it.— Hamilton.

Thomas Pitt, Esq. Governor of Madras, was succeeded (30th of September) by

Gulston Addison, Esq. brother of the celebrated Addison. His authority lasted but

a month, as Edmund Montague, Esq. relieved him provisionally on the 28th Octo-

ber. While he again was superseded on the 14th November by William Fraser,

Esq.—E. I. Chronologist.

The Company’s grant of perpetuity by writ of privy seal was issued 22nd April.—

Folio state papers. Do.

The exports of this year were £168,357, half as much again as those of the pre-

ceding season.—Mill.

1710.—Sadut Ally Khan commenced his government of the Carnatic.— Orme. E. I.

Chronologist.

1711.—William Fraser, Esq. Governor of Madras, was succeeded (July 22nd) by

Edward Harrison, Esq.— E. I. Chron.

1712.—Shah Aulum, who had succeeded Aurungzebe, died. Azeem Ooshan, the

patron of the English in Bengal, lost his life in the struggle for the succession, end

Feroksere, his son, afterwards gained the throne.— Mill.

1773.—The Bengal Presidency apply home for permission to send an Embassy to

Delhi.— Mill.

1714.—Charles VI., Emperor of Germany, granted commissions to ships to trade

to the East Indies. He afterwards founded the Ostend Company, so injurious to

the interests of the English and Dutch.—Anderson’s Hist. of Com. East India Chron.

Fort Marlborough built near Bencoolen.--Grant. ;

1715.—Messrs. Surman and Stephenson, the ablest factors of Bengal, also an

Armenian, as Interpreter, and Mr. W. Hamilton, as Surgeon, were sent on an

Embassy to Delhi, where they arrived on the 8th July. The Emperor Feroksere,

Chronological Table. 167

being sick, and prevented from marrying a Rajpoot princess, was cured by Mr.

Hamilton, and the Surgeon, with the same disinterested zeal, as shown by Dr.

Boughton on a former occasion, used his influence only to procure the object of the

Embassy, and obtain more favorable terms for the United Company.—Stewart’s

Hist. of Bengal.

The French Company, though their affairs were desperate, obtained a renewal for

ten years.-—Raynal. East India Chron.

1716.—The marriage of the Mogul Emperor intervening, the Embassy could not

deliver their petition until January of this year.—Mill.

The Governor of the French settlement of Pondicherry announced to the British,

at Fort St. David, that there were off the Malabar Coast, two 40-gun vessels, under

imperial colours, from Ostend. The Ostend Company were not regularly chartered

till some years afterwards.— Grant.

1717,—The objects of the Embassy of 1715 attained in July. Thirty-four favora-

ble grants or patents were issued by the Mogul, and the English allowed to purchase

37 towns contiguous to Calcutta, The privileges now granted were long considered

as constituting the great charter of the English in India.—Rennell’s Memoirs.

Grant.

1718.—The Ex-Sultan Guelemot, of Anaksoongay, in Sumatra, raising a force,

destroyed the town of Ippoe, with the British Resident and all his people.—Grant.

1719.—A native force obliged the English to evacuate Fort Marlborough, and

take refuge on their ships.— Grant.

Feroksere deposed and murdered : four successors appeared and passed away in

as many months.—Orme.

1720.—The French took possession of the island, called by the Dutch, Mauritius,

who possessed it fora short time ; but abandoned it for the Cape of Good Hope.

The french peopled it from the Isle of Bourbon, and named it the Isle of France.—

Raynal. Hast India Chron.

Jos. Coilet, Esq., Governor of Madras, succeeded by Francis Hastings, Esq.—

East India Chrons

172).—The natives of the Island of Sumatra, fearing the Dutch more than the

English, whom they had expelled, allowed the latter, in the hope of their counter-

acting the intriguing activity of the Dutch, to resume their Sumatran establish-

ments. The English now remained at peace for many years, increasing in prosperity

and in influence over the natives.—Grant.

Francis Hastings, Esq., Governor at Madras, succeeded by Nat. Elwick, Esq.—

Bast India Chron.

1722.—The Emperor granted this year a regular Charter to the ‘‘ Ostend East

India Company,’’ to the great discontent of all the European maritime powers,

except Spain*.—Salmon and others. East India Chron.

1723.—The Ostend Company had fully established themselves, under the Nawaub’s

patronage, at Bhany Bazar, 15 miles above Calcutta, at the eastern side of the

river.—-Stewart. East India Chronologist. ;

1724.—Shuja Addeen Khan, afterwards Nawaub of Bengal, though of liberal

disposition, about this period, was incensed against the English, in consequence of

their public servants taking advantage of the late grants of the Emperor, and insist-

ing upon passing their own private trade free of duty. The Foujdar of Hooghly,

stopped a boat laden with silks, upon which a party of soldiers was dispatched

from Calcutta, and forcibly released the boat. The English were finally obliged to

pay a heavy fine, and apologise for this act.— Mill. Sketches of Bengal.

-1725.—Nathaniel Elwick, Esq., Governor of Madras, is succeeded by James

Macrae, Esq.— East India Chron. .

During the quinquennial period, from the year 1720 to 1725, the English had ex-

ported to India, £578,155 of goods, and 2,770,238 of bullion.—Grant. ‘4

1726.—By letters patent, dated August, George I., complied with the petition of

the United East India Company, and established, at the three _Presidencies of

Madras, Bombay, and Calcutta, regular Courts of Record, for the discharge of both

Civil and Criminal Justice. The Courts toconsist of a Mayor and nine Aldermen,

of whom seven were to be natural born subjects. The Mayor to be elected by the

Aldermen, and to continue in power for one year. Appeals allowed to the Governor

in Council. The Governors and Senior Members created justices of the Peace, and

empowered to hold quarter sessions.—Grant. ; i =

So flourishing were the affairs of the Ostend Company, in spite of the opposition

and edicts of the rival nations, that this year, one-third of the original subscription

of the proprietors, which remained due, was paid up from the gains alone of the

trade.— Mill.

The East India House erected in Leadenhall-street, London.—E., I. Chron.

% Mill states, that the Charter was granted in August, 1723.

wn 2

168 Chronological Table.

1727.—So much had the country trade increased, in ten years, after the patents

or grants obtained by the Embassy to the Emperor, in 1717, that the private tonnage

employed in Bengal, by this time amounted to 10,000 tons. Many of the Company’s

Servants were concerned in this trade.—Grant. Mill.

The Court at Vienna, after much hesitation, at length yielded to the combination

of the European powers, against the Ostend Company. The Emperor suspended its

charter for seven years, thus virtually abolishing the Company*.—Grant.

1728.—The Danish East India Company, residing at Copenhagen, published pro-

posals for a new subscription, and the following year, they obtained extraordinary

privileges, from the king of Denmark, who declared his intention of making it the

most flourishing Company in Europe.—Anderson. E. I. Chron.

1729.—The Dutch Company had their Charter extended for 23 years, for which

they paid the Republic a large consideration ; at this time, their wealth and power

in India, particularly at Java, equalled those of several monarchs.—Anderson. E.

I, Chron.

1730.—The Charter, after much discussion, renewed to the English United East

India Company, for 33 years. The Charterto expire on Lady Day, 1769, includ-

ing the three years’ grace.— Mill.

Four English China ships arrived this year, with 1,707,000 lbs. of tea, and three

other Indiamen, with 371,000 pieces of calicoes, besides other valuable merchandise.

—Anderson. E. I. Chron.

From 1725 to 1730, the English Company exported goods, £551,234, and bullion,

£2,551,872.— Grant.

1731.—The king of Sweden set on foot an East India Company, for trading from

Gottenburg. A Charter granted for 15 years.

The king of Portugal formed atemporary East India Company, with one ship, to

trade to Surat. Their former Empire in the Hast thus reduced!—Anderson. East

India Chronology.

1732.—The English Company first began to make up annual accounts. This year

their sales amounted to £1,940,996. But their competitors, the Dutch, were far

exceeding them in return and profits ; thus in 1732, the English reduced their divi-

dends, from §$ to 7 per cent. per annum, which thus continued till 1744. The Dutch

during a main portion of that time, realised 25 and 20 percent. upon the capital

stock, and never less than 123.—WMiil.

1733.—Mr. Freke’s government of Fort William commenced.—E. J. Chron.

1734.—Under the able rule of Shuja Addeen Khan, the provinces of Bengal, Be-

har, and Orissa greatly improved. His power was respected by the Europeans.—

Stewart.

M. Mahe dela Bourdonnais, afterwards famous in India, was commissioned to

improve the Isle of France, by the French Company. To this officer the island is in-

dehted for its forts, aqueducts, bridges, hospitals, and granaries. The French

influence and trade fast improving jn the East.—Mill. KE. I. Chron.

1735.—The Mahrattahs had made such progress, that they burned the suburbs of

Delhi, under the Emperor Mahomed Shah, who, (afterthe demise, in 1819-20, of

the two infants, Ruffeh ad Durjaut and Ruffeh ad Doulah,) had succeeded Feroksere

on the Musnud. The Mahrattahs acquired the greater portion of Malwa, anda

grant of the fourth part of the net revenues of the other royal provinces ; thus ori-

ginating the Chout,—Hamilton. Rennell.

From 1730 to 1735 the English Company had exported £717,854 of goods, and

£2,406,078 of bullion.— Grant.

Richard Benyon, Esq. succeeded George Morton Pitt, Esq. as Governor of Mad-

ras. His government lasted nine years.— Dalrymple.

1736.—A proclamation was issued in January, prohibiting British subjects from

trading to the East Indies, contrary to the liberties and privileges granted to the

Company; or from serving in, or being on board any ships unlawfully trading.

This was probably to prevent connexion with foreign Companies.—E. I. Chron.

1737.—Calcutta nearly destroyed by a hurricane and earthquaket.—E. J. Chron.

*1It was afterwards altogether dissolved by the treaty of Seville; but the Germans were not

finally expelled from Bengal, until 1733. In 1730, their factory, at Banhy Bazar, was in existence,

and an English naval force seized one of their ships, and drove another under the factory guns.

The Dutch and English shortly after, by intrigues and misrepresentation, induced the Foujdar at

Hooghly to invest the factory, which made a long and gallant defence, with a garrison reduced to

only 14men. At length, the agent, or chief, being severely wounded, the factory was evacuated,

the little garrison reaching the ships in safety, and the Mogul troops, taking possession of the

empty fort, levelled the works to the ground.—(Stewart. Gladwin’s Nar. of Govt. Bengal.)

+ The following extract is from the Gentl-man’s Magazine, printed in 1738-39. ‘‘ In the night

between the 11th and 12th October, (1737,) there happened a furious hurricane, at the mouth of

the Ganges, which reached 60 leagues up the river, There was, at the same time, a violent earth-

avake, which threw down a great many houses along the river side: ia Galgotta, (i. e. Calcutta,)

alone, a port belonging to the English, two hundred houses were thrown down, and the high and

Chronological Table. 169

1738.—Mr. Freke, Governor of Fort William, was succeeded by Mr. Cruttenden,

-who was succeeded in the following year, by Mr. Braddyth.—Z, I. Chron.

1739.—Nadir Shah entered and plundered Delhi. 120,000 persons were massacred.

—Stewart, Hamilton, and others.

Shuja Addeen Khan, Nawaub of Bengal, died, and was succeeded by his son,

Serferaz Khan.— Stewart.

‘a 1740.—Nadir Shah, after dreadful exactions and tyranny, departed from Delhi.—

tewart.

Serferaz Khan attacked by Ally Verdy Khan, and slain in battle : succeeded by

the latter.— Stewart.

Thirty thousand insurgent Chinese massacred by the Dutch at Java.—E. I. Chron.

From 1735 to 1740, the United East India Company exported £938,970 of goods,

and £2,459,470 of bullion.—Grant.

5 1741.—The Mahrattahs invaded Bengal, to demand the Chout of that province.—

tewart.

1742.—A ditch was dug round a considerable part of the boundaries of Calcutta,

to prevent the incursions of the Mahrattahs.— Hamilton.

1743.—The Mahrattahs, witha new army, under Ragojee Bhosela, again invaded

Bengal. The Nawaub Ally Verdy Khan drove them back, but his loss, in revenue,

was immense, from their plunder, and the devastation they had inflicted during their

incursion.—Stewart.

1744.—Now commences a new era in the affairs of Europeans in India, from the

struggles that ensued between the rival interests of the two nations, on the procla-

mation of war between England and France, on the 2ist May, 1744. Since the

junction of the two English Companies, in 1708, the trade had been progressively

improving, and the establishments in India quietly advancing ; but little had occur-

red politically worthy of remark, for the long period of 36 years. From this date

events crowd on the notice of the chronologist.

Previous to the breaking out of the war, in February, it was agreed, at a general

court of the East India Company, to lend the Government one million of money, at

three per cent., as an equivalent for the prolongation of the charter, for 14 yeurs,

(from 1769 to 1783,) to commence from Michaelmas, 1744, which was confirmed by Act

of Parliament of the 17th of George II.—E. I. Chron.

On the declaration of war, a British squadron, under Commodore Barnett, appear-

ed in the Indian seas.— Orme. ;

Nicolas Morse, Esq., succeeded to the Government of Madras.—Dalrymple.

1745.—The British squadron appeared off Pondicherry ; but the Nawaub of Arcot,

Anwar-ad-deen, at the instigation of Monsieur Dupliex, the French Governor, (who

had succeeded to the supreme commaud of the French settlements, in 1742,) insisted

on no hostilities being then committed.— Orme.

The united East India Company, from 1740 to 1745, exported £1,105,750 of goods,

and £2,529,108 of bullion.— Grant.

1746.—Commodore Barnett died. His successor Mr. Peyton engaged, without

any decisive result, a French fleet, arrived under M. De la Bourdonnais. In Sep-

tember, the French landed a force at Madras, which town, after a bombardinent

of two days, capitulated. Nothing could be lower than the English military power,

spirit, and science, at this period, in India. The Madras garrison consisted only

of 300 men, of whom 34 were Portuguese ‘‘ vagabonds,’’ or deserters and negroes ;

60 were sick and ineffective, and only 200 soldiers fit for duty. The officers were

three lieutenants, of whom two were foreigners ; and seven ensigns, who rose from

the ranks. Only one lieutenant and one ensign were deemed efficient officers. —Mill.

Orme. EE. TI. Chron.

Mr. Braddyll, Governor of Fort William, succeeded by Mr. Forster, who was

succeeded by Mr. Dawson the following year. Fort St. David became the presi-

dency, by the surrender of Madras.— Dalrymple.

1747.—Fort St. David invested by the French, who retired on the return to the

coast of the British squadron, under Capt. Peyton.—Orme. Mill.

1748.—Major Lawrence, subsequently celebrated in the coast army, arrived in Ja-

nuary, from England, with a commission, to command the Company’s forces. Also

Admiral Boscawen, with 13 men of war, and 17 other ships, with a considerable

magnificent steeple of the English church, sunk into the ground without breaking. Itis computed,

that 20,000 ships, barks, sloops, boats, canoes, &c. have been cast away. Of nine English ships,

then in the Ganges, eight were lost, and most of the crews drowned. Barks of 60 tons were blown

two leagues up into land, over the tops of high trees: of four Dutch ships in the river, three were

lost with their men and cargoes. 300,000 souls are said to have perished. The water rose forty feet

higher than usual, in the Ganges.” N. B. The steeple of the church was described to have been

lofty and magnificent, and as constituting, before this period, the chief ornament of the settle-

ment.—Sketches of Bengal.

170 Chronological Table.

force on board. They invested Pondicherry in their turn. Ensign Clive, who came

out in the civil service, but had joined the army here, distinguished himself. The

seige failed, and the British retired in September. The military character of the

French in India, considered at this time as greatly superior to that of the English.—

Orme.

Mr. Dawson, Governor of Fort William, succeeded by Mr. Fetch.

Mahomed Shah, Emperor of Hindoostan, died, after a disastrous reign of thirty

years. He was succeeded by his son, Prince Ahmed Mirza, who took the title of

Ahmed Shah.—East India Chronologist.

1749.— Madras restored to the English, by the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle, signed

on the 18th October, 1748. When evacuated by the French, it was found in a very

improved state ; the space round the works cleared and extended.— Orme.

The English took Devi-cottah, in~supporting the claims of a fugitive Rajah of

Tanjore ; thus commencing to interfere, (in common with their rivals, the French,)

in the quarrels of the native powers. Subsequently, in the Carnatic, the French es-

poused the cause of Chunda Saheb, who set up as Nawaub of the Carnatic; the

English taking the side of Mahomed Ally Khan, second son of Anwar-ad-deen

Khan, on the death of his father.— Mill,

1750.—Mr. Barwell succeeded Mr. Fetch, as Governor of Fort William.—Zast

India Chronologist.

The intrigues of the French and English, with the native powers, assumed some

importance ; but M. Dupleix gained greater advantages than his rivals, from his

greater address, deeper laid schemes, and more unprincipled conduct.—Mill. Orme.

Mr. Saunders took charge, as Governor, at Fort St. David.—Dalrymple.

1751.—On the assassination of Nazir Jung, (who had assumed the title and power

of Subadar of the Dekhan, on the death of his father Nizam ul Mulk,} Mozuffer

Jung was invested as Subadar. He appointed M. Dupleix Governor of the Mogul

dominions, on the coast, from the Kistna to Cape Comorin, and Chunda Saheb, his

deputy, at Arcot; Mahomed Ally, the protegé of the English, fled, and offered to

resign his pretensions.— Mill,

The new Subadar was early killed, during a revolt of his troops; but M. Bussy,

Jung, who promised the same concessions to the French.—Mill. De Bar.

The English, under Captain Gingens, (a Swiss,) had been defeated at Volconda,

but under Capt. Clive were more successful at Arcot.— Mill.

1752.—The seat of Government removed back to Fort St. George from Fort St,

David, 17th April.—Dalrymple.

Mahomed Ally again resolved to oppose Chunda Saheb and the French ; he was

supported by the English. Clive obtained several advantages, and exhibited great

military talents. He was joined by Major Lawrence, when the allied enemies were

completely defeated. The French capitulated, and Chunda Saheb delivered himself

up. This prince was immediately assassinated by the native allies. It is said, that

Major Lawrence might have prevented this lamentable fate, but it would seem he was

wrongfully accused by M. Dupleix of being accessary to it.— Mill.

The new style took place in England, on September 3rd, which day became the

14th.—E. I. Chron.

1753.—Dupleix, not disheartened, again made efforts against his rivals; but the

few English troops under Lawrence and Clive, were fast surpassing the French in

India, in all the qualities of soldiers ; the officers were better—the men more orderly,

The English had 700 Europeans, and 2,000 Sepoys, and 1,500 of the Nawaub’s caval-

ry. The French, 500 Europeans and 60 Horse Infantry, 2,000 Sepoys, and 4,000

Mahrattah Cavalry. The year was passed in fruitless, but bold attempts, on the

part of the French, to seize Trichinopoly, and of the English, toinduce them to

raise the seige.— Mill.

Ahmed Shah, Emperor of Delhi, was deposed and blinded.—Hamilton.

1754.—Great discontent existing in Europe, at the wars carried on by the French

and English, in India, while their respective nations were at peace. Commissioners

were sent out to inquire into, and adjust the dissensions. On the 2nd August, M.

Godheu arrived as Commissary, and settled with Mr. Saunders, Governor of Madras,

a peace between the Companies. The English had succeeded in maintaining their

ally, Mahomed Ally, on the throne; and had effected the ruin of Chunda Saheb ;

which results, added to their military successes, proved, that they had the advantage

in the late operations. M. Dupleix was recalled, and badly received in France; but

must have been an able, although an ambitious man. He left M. Godheu as

Governor, and M. Bussy in great power, at the Court of Salabut Jung, the Subadar

of the Dekhan.— Mill. Orme.

The king gave the royal assent to anact, in March, to punish mutiny and deser-

tion, in the officers and soldiers, belonging to the East India Company.—E. I. Chron.

Chronological Table. 171

1755.—Notwithstanding the late peace, the rivals were still intriguing, and inter-

fering with the native powers. The English proceeded against Madura and Tini-

velly. The French remonstrated and opposed them.—Mill.

1755.—A settlement at Negrais having been two years previous contemplated by

Governor Saunders, Capt. Baker was, this year, sent on an embassy to Ava.—Dal-

rymple,

Mr. Geo. Pigot succeeded Mr. Saunders, as Governor at Madras.—Dalrymple.

1756.—Alumgeer assassinated. Ahmed Shah Abdelli first entered Delhi.—Hamil-

ton.

Fredericksnagore (Serampore) founded by the Danes.—E. I. Chron.

Geriah, the stronghold of the Pirate Angria, attacked by Admiral Watson, and

Clive, (just returned from Europe with the rank of Colonel ;) it was carried on the

13th February, and much plunder obtained. —Mill. Orme.

On the death of Aliverdi Khan, Nawaub of Bengal, his grand nephew, Suraja

Dowlah, succeeded. Immediately taking offence at the English, for their protection

to a native officer, said to have escaped from Dacca, with treasure, he attacked

Calcutta, carried it onthe 20th June, after a poor defence, (Drake, the Governor,

having fled to the shipping,) and allowed his officers to shut up 146 European pri-

soners, in a small military prison room called, the black hole*, in which 123 of the

number perished, during the night.— Stewart.

Suraja Dowlah, on his return from Calcutta, exacted 43 lacs of rupees from the

Dutch, at Chinsurah, and 33 laes from the French, at Chandernagore. The latter

had supplied him with powder.—Stewart.

Colonel Clive and Admiral Watson left Madras on the 16th October, with 900 Eu-

ropeans, and 1,500 Sepoys, to inflict vengeance on the Nawaub ; reached Fulta on

the 20th December.— Stewart.

At this time, there were 70 houses only in Calcutta, and the present site of Fort

William was a complete jungle.—Hami/ton.

1757.—Colonel Clive retook Calcutta on the 2nd January, and forced Suraja Dowlah

into a treaty, offensive and defensive, on the 9th of February.

On the 22nd March, Clive took Chandernagore, against Suraja Dowlah’s wish, war

having been proclaimed anew between the French and English.—Stewart.

Having made a secret treaty with Meer Jaffer, an officer of the Nawaub, Clive

shortly staked every thing in a daring attempt to conquer Bengalitself. Thus refus-

ing to return to Madras, as ordered, he advanced in June, towards Moorshedabad,

the Nawaub’s capital. On the 23rd June, he fought the battle of Plassey, against

18,000 horse and 50,000 infantry, and aided by the treachery of Meer Jaffier, routed

the Nawaub’s troops. Suraja Dowlah fled, but in a few days was seized, and cruelly

assassinated, by order of Meer Jaffier’s son. On the 29th June, Meer Jaffier was

raised to the Musnud, and from that date, the influence of the British may be stated

to have become paramount in Bengal.— Stewart,

During the operations in the Carnatic, on the declaration of war between France

and England, Madura was taken by the English, under Captain Calliaud, on the 8th

August, after that officer had successfully defended Trichinopoly. The French took

Chittaput, Trincomalee, and sundry other forts.— Mill.

Manillah taken from the Spaniards, by the Rnglish.

The English established a Mint in Calcutta, and the first rupee was struck on the

29th of August.— East India Chronologist.

1758.—Count Lally, on the 25th April, landed at Pondicherry, as Governor Gene-

ral, and in three days, the fleet from which he disembarked, had an indecisive engage-

ment with Admiral Pocock.—Mill.

Lally, who was haughty, impetuous, and unconcilating, was not disposed to look

favourably on the successes of M. Bussy, in the Deccan, where the latter had been

powerfully controuling the entire Subah. Bussy had possessed himself of the strong

hold of Dowlatabad, and at the time of Lally’s arrival, his influence was immense.

He was now recalled, while the effects of his measures, and the French supremacy

in the Councils of the Dekhan, were wholly ruined in consequence.—De Bar.

Fort St. David surrendered to Lally, on the 1st June, and onthe 7th Devi-cottah

was abandoned by the English.—Mill.

* It is to be regretted that the indefatigable and able Historian Mill makes this a handle for some

of his wonted sarcastic abuse of the early English in India, and asks, what business had Fort Wil-

liam witha black hole? He might as well inquire, what right has the same fortress now, to possess

solitary cells for the soldiery? ‘Che ‘ black hole’ in question, was simply one of a range of godowns

(warehouses) on the ground floor, built against a four-foot outer wall of the fort, the roof of the

warehouse acting as arampart, on which guns were placed,—the front of the godowns having a small

verandah looking into the fort. There were two small windows to the godown which had simply

been used as a lock-up house, or § Black hole,’ for disorderly soldiers,

172 Chronological Table.

1758.—-Colonel Clive, in Bengal, after much intrigue and difficulty, in realizing

the sums exacted from Meer Jaffier for his exaltation, in October, on an opening

held out by a Polygar Chief, for the expulsion of the French from that quarter,

detached Col. Forde with a force, against the Northern Circars.— Mill.

Lally, in the Carnatic, disgusted every one, and having no funds or assistance,

proceeded unwisely against Tanjore, to recover large sums, asserted to be due on

treaty. He failed in an attack on its capital, and returning to Pondicherry, found

that the French Admiral, after a slight discomfiture by-the English fleet, had deter-

mined to proceed to the Mauritius. In vain a remonstrated, and from that time,

his late high hopes and haughty expectations of success, failed him: still, with

energy and ability, worthy of a better result, on the 14th December, he commenced

the siege of Madras.— Mill. De Bar.

1759.—Lally obliged precipitately to raise the siege of Madras, on the 16th Fe-

bruary ; M. Bussy was taken prisoner during the siege.— Mill. De. Bar.

The troops, under Colonel Forde, sent round from Bengal against the Northern

Circars, took Masulipatam on the 7th April. Salabut Jung, the Subadar, created

by M. Bussy, on the reverses of the French, threw himself in the arms of the Eng-

lish. The power of Europeans in India was, by this time, so firmly rooted, that he

was aware he could not sustain his rule in the Dekhan, without the support of one

or other of the rivals.—De Bar.

The English, after a mutiny of the French troops, successfully attacked and

carried Wandewash.— De Bar.

In Bengal, Col. Clive was threatened with a new enemy, the Emperor Alumgeer

having invested his eldest son with the government of Bengal, and full powers to seize

it; an army was formed, and attacked Patna, in its progress to Moorshedabad; but

the Nawaub of Oude, deserting the Shahzada, and treacherously seizing Allahabad,

in the rear of the royal army, Bengal was saved, and the prince obliged to throw

himself upon Clive’s protection. The Nawaub, Meer Jaffier, in gratitude, gave a

Jaghire to Clive, worth £30,000 per annum.—Mill.

In August, a Dutch fleet, with troops, arrived in the Hooghly. Clive hesitated not

to attack them, on the asserted behalf of Meer Jaffier, although at peace with Hol-

land. This attack was successful, and the Dutch were forced instantly to retire with

much loss.— Mill.

On the Bombay side, the Siddee, during an insurrection against him, resigned his

government of the castle and fleet to the English, whose possession was confirmed by

the Courtof Delhi. This greatly increased ourimportance in that quarter.—Grant.

1760.—On the 22nd January, was fought the battle of Wandewash, by Colonel

Coote, against Count Lally, in person. The Count had determined to make a stand,

not only to restore confidence in his troops, but to save Arcot, if possible. He was

defeated with heavy loss, and retired under the walls of Pondicherry. Arcot also

fell.— De Bar.

Early in February, Clive resigned, meditating to retire with his fortune to Eu-

rope; he was succeeded temporarily by Mr. Holwell, until the arrival of Mr. Vansit-

tart, in July.— Mill.

After Clive’s departure, the Mogul’s eldest son was again induced to invade

Bengal; and on the assassination of the Emperor of Delhi, the prince being pro-

claimed in his stead, continued his advance on Bengal, with the imperial force.

Colonel Calliaud had succeeded to the command of the British troops.— Mill.

An action took place near Patna, and a detachment under Lieut. Cochrane was

cut up; but on the 22nd February, a general engagement was fought between the

English force, with their Bengal allies under Meer Jaffier’s son, and the Emperor :

the latter was defeated. The Emperor next determined to push past the allies and

seize Moorshedabad ; but on the 7th April, he was overtaken by Calliaud, when he

set fire to the imperial camp, and fled.— Mill.

In May, Captain Knox defeated the Naib of Purneah, who intended to have joined

the Emperor.— Mill,

In October, Meer Jaffier was deposed as incompetent, and as guilty of enormities

in his government of Bengal. He could not, however, fulfil his pecuniary and other

engagements to the English, which was the main offence, and the justice of his de-

position has been deeply questioned ; some of Mr. Holwell’s charges were after-

wards entirely disproved.—Mill. Grant.

Mr. Vansittart raised the Ex-Nawaub’s son-in-law, Meer Kasim, to the Musnud,

who promised the fulfilment of all existing pledges, with other grants and advan-

tages. He ceded the districts of Midnapore, Burdwan and Chittagong, to the Com-

pany.— Grant.

The French made a treaty with Hyder Ally, who marched to their aid at Pondi-

cherry; but on the 4th September, the allies were completely beaten by the

English, and Hyder Ally shortly afterwards withdrew.— Mill. De Bar.

Chronological Table. 173

1761.—After the bitterest disputes between the French and Lally, all parties

being exasperated against him, Pondicherry was surrendered on the 16th January,

to Col. Coote.—De Bar.

The English troops and navy wished to retain Pondicherry, for the king ; but Mr.

Pigot, the Governor, insisted on its being delivered over to the Company, or threaten-

ed to withhold all pay to the forces: it was given up to him, and he immediately

destroyed its works and fortifications.— Mill.

The fate of Lally was melancholy. On his return to France, he was sacrificed by

the Ministry ; while the feeling against him aided the attempt of his enemies to

fasten on him alone the obloquy of losing India to France: after four years’ impri-

sonment, he was executed. Posterity have been more lenient, and reversed the opi-

nion against him. Other causes, than the mere pride and rashness of an individual,

were proved to have led to the destruction of the French empire in the Carnatic.--

Mill. De Bar.

Major Carnac, who succeeded Col. Calliaud in the command of the troops in Ben-

gal, arrived at Patna, early in January, and on the 15th, attacked and defeated the

Emperor atGya. M. Law, who, on the taking of Chandernagore, had proceeded up

the country, to seek service with the native powers, was with the Mogul, and here

taken prisoner.—Grant. Miil.

The new Nawab, Meer Kassim Ali, soon began to be impatient of his English

friends, but wanting means to oppose them, he proceeded to Patna, to seize on the

treasures of his deputy, Ramnarain. The vice Nawab solicited the aid of Major

Carnac, and soon after of Col. Eyre Coote, who superseded Carnac; but they were

prevented by the Council from protecting him, and he fell a victim to the rapacity

of the Nawab.—Miil.

Other sources of dispute arose: the servants of the Company contended, that the

firmaun of 1717, and the late treaties, authorised their own private trade to he free

of duty. The Nawab denied this, and apparently with reason and justice; and

strenuously opposed such special immunity to the English. He soon began to organise

troops under Mogul officers, and removed to the Fort at Monghir.— Mill. Grant.

1762.—Messrs. Vansittart and Hastings repaired to the new residence of Kassim

Ali, at Monghir, and the former treaties, relative to private trade, were modified ;

but the Council in Calcutta rejected the new terms, to the great indignation of the

Nawab.— Grant.

The Philipine Islands taken by an expedition, fitted out from Madras.—Grant.

Kassim Ali renewed his remonstrances against the private trade of the Compa-

ny’s servants, and the disputes assumed a serious aspect.— Mill.

1763.—Messrs. Amyatt and Hay, sent on deputation to the Nawab, to insist

upon continued immunity from duties. He refused ; dismissing Mr. Amyatt, but

retaining the other asa hostage. Mr. Ellis, the chief at Patna, at this juncture,

widened the breach by his undisguised feeling of hostility to the Nawab. The lat-

ter had seized some arms on the way to Patna, and refused to deliver them. Mr.

Ellis, on the 24th June, suddenly seized the Nawab’s Fort, at Patna; but neg-

lecting proper precaution and defence, it was retaken the next day, and all the

English at Patna were seized as prisoners. The Nawab, on this act of hostility,

sent after, and murdered Mr. Amyatt, on his way to Calcutta. These events led

the Council at Calcutta, on the 7th July, to proclaim Meer Jaffier again as

Nawab, deposing K4ssim Ali. Meer Jaffier confirmed all existing treaties with

the Company, besides according other advantages. Major Adams, on the 19th July,

defeated a force of Kassim Ali, between Calcutta and Moorshedabad. On the 24th

July, took Moorshedabad. On the 2nd August, routed a large force at Geriah. On

the 5th September, stormed and seized the Fort of Oudenullah, defended by 100

pieces of cannon. KAdssim Ali, incensed to madness at these reverses, and frantic

under accumulated resentments and ruined ambition, fled to Patna, from Mon-

ghir, and there cruelly ordered the massacre of the English in his power: there

were fifty gentlemen, Messrs. Ellis, Hay, Lushington, and others, and one hundred

of lower rank. On the 5th October, they were brought out in parties, and barba-

rously cut to pieces, or shot under the direction of a German, named Sumroo.

Monghir fell to the English early in October. Patna was stormed on the 6th

November, and the Ex-Nawab fled to the Vizier of Oude, with his treasures, and

the remnant of his army.— Grant. {

Peace between France and England had been signed on the 10th February. The

11th article gave back to France all factories, in their then condition, France to

erect no fortifications, and keep no troops in Bengal. To renounce all acquisitions

on the coast of Coromandel and Orissa, and to recognize Mahomed Ali Khan as

Nawab of the Carnatic. The peace honourable ‘and advantageous to the English

in India.—Mill. Grant.

£0)

174 Chronological Table.

About this time, the Madras presidency, finding itself unable to keep up the

armies required in the Carnatic, openly insisted upon possessing from Mahomed

Ali, some districts, with their revenue, for the purpose.— Mill.

Mr. R. Palk succeeded, 14th November, to the Government of Fort St. George.—

Dalrymple.

1764—In the Carnatic, the English gradually assumed the Revenues. The subjec-

tion of Mahomed Issoof, of Madura, cost the Company and their Ally, the Nawab,

a million, before it was finally effected in October.— Mill.

In Bengal, the British Army, in pursuit of Kassim Ali, advanced towards Oude,

which also harboured the young Mogul. Major Carnac defeated the Vizier on the

3rd May, near Patna. Major, afterwards Sir Hector Munro, superseding Major

Carnac, severely punished some mutinous conduct of the soldiery, and caused 24

Sepoys to be blown away in one morning, from the mouths of cannon. On the 23rd

October, he fought the celebrated battle of Buxar, completely routing the Vizier’s

Army. The following day, the Mogul threw himself on the protection of the British,

and joined their camp, with the imperial standard of Hindustan. The Army ad-

vanced to overrun Oude. The Vizier refused to deliver up Kassim Ali, though he

had seized and plundered him; and had offered to assassinate Sumroo.—Grant.

Mill.

Kassim Ali afterwards escaped into the Rohilla country, with a few friends

and some jewels, which he saved from the fangs of his late ally, the Vizier.—

Mill.

1765.—Meer Jaffier, worn out by ill health and affliction at the impossibility of

meeting the pecuniary engagements with the English, sickened and died in January ;

Nujeem ad Doulah, next surviving son of Meer Jaffier, was appointed to succeed

his father.— Mill.

Lord Clive returned to Bengal, being appointed Commander-in-Chief, President

and Governor, in Bengal, with Messrs. Sumner and Sykes, as Members of the

Select Committee. He arrived 3rd May, and assumed the Government on the 7th.

General Carnac and Mr. Verelst, the other Members, were then absent on duty.

The new covenants against presents were signed by the Company’s servants, Civil

and Military. The Bengal Army signed the covenant; but the General delayed

the sicnature, pending a reference to Calcutta, receiving, in the interval, two lacs of

rupees from the Emperor. The new Nawab of Bengal, on a fresh agreement, rati-

fied on the 28th July, handed over all his Revenues, and the management ofthe Su-

baddri; himself to have 50 lacs, subject to the controul of the Company’s servants.

In operations against the Vizier of Oude, Lucknow had been taken by Sir R. Flet-

cher, before General Carnac joined the army. Allahabad had fallen; Chunar

held out: but on the 3rd May, General Carnac attacked the Nawab, at Corah, and

routed him. On the 19th May, the Vizier agreed to come into the British camp,

and was well treated. His dominions were restored. The English authorities did

not insist on private trade or factories, in Oude; but Allahabad and Corah were

retained for the Emperor, who himself was forced to give up all claim to arrears of

Revenue, from Bengal, Behar, and Orissa; and finally, on the 12th August, His

Majesty signed the perwana, granting to the Company, the perpetual Dewannee of

these three Provinces. The private trade, so strongly prohibited by the Court, still

partially retained ; and under a public association, arranged by Clive himself—

that of betel-nut, tobacco, and salt, the most valuable, engrossed by the public

servants.—Mill.

‘The Northern Circars were given to the English in proprietary grant; but the

cession took place on the following year.— Grant. ’

A dak established between Calcutta and Moorshedabad.—E. J. Chron.

1766.—From the year 1757 to 1766, it appeared, from Parliamentary documents,

that £5,940,498 had been distributed to the Company and its servants, by the Prin-

ces and other natives of Bengal. By orders from Home, dated 1764, these presents

were expressly prohibited, and Civil and Military servants were enjoined to pay to

the Company all presents tendered by natives, which exceeded 4000 rupees.— Mill.

Count Lally beheaded, 5th May.—Raynal.

12th November, a treaty concluded with the Nizam, by General Calliaud. The

Company to pay nine lacs for the possession of the Circars, and to furnish troops

to the Nizam, if required, for the affairs of His Highness’s Government.— Grant.

A serious mutiny broke out in the Bengal army, consequent to the reduction of

double full batta. Formerly this allowance was paid by the Nawab; but the Com-

pany refused to continue it fromthe Ist Jan. 1766. Almost every officer resigned.

Lord Clive met the exigency with his usual sternness and spirit: he brought offi-

cers from all directions, for the command and charge of the troops, induced some

to retract, and cashiered others by Court Martial. Amongst the latter, Sir R.

Chronological Table. 175

Fletcher, known for his successes in Oude, was dismissed for not at first repressing

the combination.— Grant. Mill.

1767.—On the 16th January, Lord Clive declared his intention to resign. On the

17th February, Mr. Verelst succeeded.

Presents having been forbidden, Lord Clive gave up a legacy of five lacs from Meer

Jaffier, and adding to it three lacs, from Syeff-ul Dowla, the successor of Nujeem

ad Dowla, formed the fund (called Lord Clive’s fund) for invalided officers and sol-

diers of the Company’s Service, and their widows.— Mill.

Abdulla Shah marched towards Delhi; after overruning some provinces, returned

to his own country.

An expedition sent to Nepaul by the English, and failed.

_ The war with Hyder Ali broke out in the Carnatic, but the Anglo-Indian Govern-

ments were crippled for want of money. Lord Clive’s splendid financial promises,

and the hopes in England, regarding the riches of India, already proving fallacious.

—Mill.

Notwithstanding the growing pressure for funds abroad, the Court of Proprie-

tors at home increased the dividend to 125 per cent. In consequence of this and

other proceedings, the Restrictive Acts of the 7th of Geo. III. cc. 48, 49, and 57,

were passed ; by the last of these, the Sum of £400,000 per annum was to be

paid by the Company to the Crown, for their new territorial acquisitions.—

Grant.

1768.—Early this year, arrived the Company's peremptory order, entirely abo-

lishing their servants’ private trade in salt, and restricting them to the maritime

branches of commerce. A commission of 23 per cent. on the Dewannee reve-

nues to be granted, however, in proportionate shares to the Governor in Coun-

cil, Civil and Military servants of rank, with additional pay to Captains and

Subalterns.

Great scarcity of treasure in Bengal.

On the Coast, the war with Hyder Ali was sustained with difficulty. This adven-

turous soldier, originally a common peon, next a petty officer, soon a commander

of a few horsemen, and in charge of a small fortress—subsequently, a military retain-

er of the minister of the Mysore Sovereign, and leading a division of the royal

troops—next, acting for himself, displacing his patron, and lastly, ejecting the

pageant Hindu Prince of Mysore, and usurping the throne itself—He was, by

this time, the most formidable enemy the English had met with. In September,

after some partial successes of the English, Hyder made overtures of peace; but

the tenders were haughtily and unwisely refused.— Mill. Grant.

1769.—-Atter the display of much military talent, Hyder Ali drew off the English

army to a distance, and suddenly, with 6000 cavalry, appeared at St. Thome, in the

immediate vicinity of Madras. He there imposed his own terms on the Govern-

ment, who were forced, on the 4th April, into a peace, little creditable or advan-

tageous to the British.— Grant.

In April an Act passed, that the territorial revenues should be held for five years

by the Company.

Three commissioners were sent out to India, Messrs. Vansittart, Scrafton, and

Ford; they embarked in September, 1769, on the Aurora frigate, and were never

afterwards heard of.—Grant.

At this time it was proposed to send out a Naval Commander-in-Chief, with full

political powers, on the part of the King; after much opposition, the measure

was carried, and proved, for the short period that it lasted, very inconvenient.

—Mill.

Mr. Verelst resigned in Bengal, 24th December, succeeded by Mr. Cartier.—&.

I. Chron.

1770.—A dreadful famine in Bengal, one-fifth* of the population perished.—

Grant.

On the 10th March, died Nawab Syeff-ul Dowla, of Moorshedabad ; his brother,

Mubarek-ul Dowla, a minor, succeeded. The Court of Directors reduced his al-

lowance to 16 lacs per annum, during his minority.— Mill.

1771.—The Parliamentary restriction on the dividends ceasing in 1769, the Court,

in March and September, notwithstanding their difficulties for money in India,

again raised the dividends to 125 per cent.— Mill.

In May, the Emperor Shah Alum unwisely left the protection afforded him at

Allahabad, and aided by the Vizier and the Mahrattas, re-entered his capital at.

Delhi, on December 25th.

1772.—Mr. Cartier was succeeded (13th April) by Mr. Warren Hastings, in the

Bengal Government.—BE. I. Chron.

* Mill states the loss at § of the population.

e 2

176 ; Chronological Table.

On the 14th May, the collection of the Revenues in Bengal was undertaken ens

tirely by the Company, who now stood forth as Dewan. In 1769, Civil Servants were

appointed as Supervisors of the native revenue officers: and were henceforth to

be denominated collectors. The lands to be let for five years—Mill.

The seat of Revenue business, and the Treasury, removed from Moorshedabad to

Caleutta. The chief seats of civil, and, at first, of criminal judicature, likewise

transferred to the Presidency, under the name of Sudder Dewanee Adawlut, com-

posed of Governor and two councils for civil matters ; and Sudder Nizamut Adawlut,

for criminal proceedings, composed of native law officers, exclusively subject to

review of the Governor and Council. Under these were District Courts, the

Collectors having, at the same time, revenue aud judicial authority.— Grant.

Mr. Hastings deposed Mahomed Reza Khan, from his high situation of Naib

dewan, at Moorshedabad, and Raja Shetab Ray, the same at Patna, bringing both

as prisoners to Calcutta, in April. Munny Begum, originally a dancing girl, appoint-

ed to the charge of the young Nawab, and the controul of the palace of Moor-

shedabad.-—Mill.

The Mahrattas permitted to ravage Rohileund.— Mill.

1773.—The financial distresses of the Company increasing, they applied to the

British Minister for aloan. His Majesty’s Government, finding the feelings of the

country alienated from the East India Company, by their improvidence, and stated

mismanagement, brought in the important Regulating Act of 1773, (13 Geo. III.

c. 63,) appointing a Governor General and four Members of Council, for five years, to

Bengal; Mr. Hastings to be Governor; Mr. Barwell, Senior Member; and Lieute-

nant General Clavering, Colonel Monson, and Mr. Philip Francis, Members. The

constitution of the Court of Directors was altered; an annual election of six Directors

for four years ordained: a year to elapse before an Ex-Director could be eligible.

Qualification for a Proprietor now raised to £1000. The Crown also assumed, form-

ally, a privity and controul in the affairs, financial and political, of the Company. The

Mayor’s Court was abolished at Calcutta, and Supreme Court of Judicature

established. The Judges to be sent from England. Similar steps were subsequently

pursued at the other Presidencies.—Grant.

The English entered into a treaty with the Nawab of Oude, for the destruction of

Rohileund ; the Nawab to support the charge of the British army. A garrison

thrown into Allahabad ; and a Member of Council sent to take charge of the reve-

nues. The Emperor of Delhi left to his fate, amidst the aggressions of the

Mahrattas: and Corah and Allahabad handed over by the English to the Nawab.—

Mill.

In Bengal, in 1773-4, the revenues were £2,451 ,404

The Civil and Military charges were... 1,488,435.

The Army, about this time consisted of Artillery, five Companies; Cavalry, one

Troop; European Infantry, three Regiments ; Native Infantry, 23 Battalions i and

28 Companies of Invalids; total, 27,000 men. a

Fort St. George, revenue and subsidies, £887,302

The Keae Seas) nobaOeed.. nae ae 814,992

The Army—(1772)—European Infantry, 3,486 ; European Cavalr : ;

581; Sepoys, 15,840; total, 19,975. eo : I

Bombay (1773-4), revenues, .......+--. £109,163

Chances ee ecco acess sie.c wiv iwiele aie -»- 347,387

The Army—Artillery, 434; European Infantry, 1,620; Sepoys, 4,346; total

6,400.— Grant. , ,

War anew with Tangier; the English and their Ally, the Nawab of the Carnatic

being dissatisfied with the terms obtained in 1771. On the 16th September Tangier

was carried by storm, and the Rajah and family taken prisoners in the fort. He

was dethroned, eee Se gs ge ae by the Allies.—Mill.

1774.—Colonel Champion, Commander-in-Chief in Bengal, assu =

mand of an army in Feb., destined to act against the Rohillas, ‘tin iene oe

Nawab Vizier. On the 23rd April, (known as the battle of St. George,) he defeated

40,000 Rohillas, uuder their Chief Hafez, near Babul nullah. The Vizier kept aloof ;

but after this victory, (which led to the termination in July, of the first Rohilla

war,) he plundered and despoiled the whole country.

The new Counsellors, General Clavering, Mr. Monson, and Mr. Francis, arrived

in Calcutta 19th October. Mr. Hastings assumed the title of Governor Ganernl

now first authorized ; but discussions immediately arose between himself and col.

leagues. Mr. Hastings and Mr. Barwell were in the minority ; thus the new coun-

sellors wielded the powers of the Government.— Mill.

Collectors’ Courts abolished, and Provincial Councils established at Calcutta

Burdwan, Dacca, Moorshedabad, Dinagepore, and Patna, to superintend the joint

Departments of Revenue, Trade, and Administration of Justice.— Grant.

Chronological Table. 177

93rd November, Lord Clive died in London, aged 49.—E. J. Chron.

1775.—Died Sujah ud Dowla, the Vizier of Oude, succeeded by his only son, under

the title of Assoff ud Dowla.

The Bombay Government, previous to this period, had interested and mingled

themselves much with the politics of the Mahrattas ; and were about this time in

alliance and support of Ragoba, the Ex-Peishwah. On the 28th December, 1774, a

force from Bombay had seized and occupied the Island of Salsette ; and a force un-

der Col. Keating, having effected a junction with Ragoba, the allied army was at-

tacked by their Mahratta enemies, on the 18th May, 1775, at Arras; when the Bri-

tish and their Allies, after much loss, were victorious. At this juncture, the Ben-

gal Government, now supreme, interfered to disapprove of the connection of the

Bombay Presidency with any of the Mahratta powers, and insisted on an immedi-

ate cancelment of the treaty with Ragoba, (by which Salsette, Basseen, and part of

the revenues of Baroach, had been secured to the Company,) and on the withdrawal

of all the British troops furnished for his assistance.

The Court’s despatches of this year, it is curious to state, approve of the acts of

the Bombay Government, at the very time they were ordered to be annulled by the

Supreme Authority in India.— Mill.

The Court in England, displeased at the late war and results, in Tanjore, deter-

mined on the reinstatement of the Rajah; and Lord Pigot was sent out to give

effect to this, and other measures, at Madras. He arrived as Governor, 11th De-

cember, 1775.— Mill.

1776.—The Supreme Government deputed an Envoy of their own, Col. Upton,

to Poona; after much unsatisfactory negotiation, the Council decided on a war

with the Mahratta confederates, and on the support of Ragoba—both of which had

been the subjects of their severe condemnation, the preceding year; but on further

negotiation, by Col. Upton, a new treaty, (called thatof Poorunder,) was obtained,

still leaving Salsette to the English, but not so favorable as that secured at Bombay.

Ragoba was now left to his fate, and retired to Surat with only 200 followers.

Dissensions ran high between the Governor General and his Council ; charges of

bribery and corruption were brought against Mr. Hastings, at the Council Board

itself. He indignantly dissolved the Council on each occasion of their being prefer-

red there. Nuncomar, a native of rank, implicated in preferring these charges,

was convicted of forgery, at the Supreme Court of Judicature, by a Jury of English-

men, and hanged. This act much condemned.

In November, Colonel Monson died, which restored to the Governor General, the

majority in the votes at Council, and gave him again the direction of the Govern-

ment.— Miil.

The Tanjore Rajah restored. Lord Pigot and the Council of Madras had violent

disputes; and onthe 24th August, the Council arrested the Governor, stripping

him of all authority. He died in restraint, on 31st August, of the following year.

The four Members of Council, who committed this violence, were subsequently tried

at home, found guilty, but fined only £1000 each.—Mill.

1777.—The quinquennial settlement at Bengal having expired; and both Mr.

Hastings and Mr. Francis, having meanwhile submitted able revenue plans, (both

differing, and neither of them adopted by the Home Authorities ;) the annual leases

were again put in force, and were continued for four years.— Grant.

1778.—The treaty of Poorunder, (Col. Upton’s,) not proving satisfactory, and

part of the Mahratta confederates having resolved to support Ragoba, the English

were applied to again toaid him. The Governor General assented, and six Battalions

of Sepoys, one Company of Native Artillery, and a Corps of Cavalry, assembled at

Culpee, under Col. Leslie, with orders to march towards Poona, through Berar.

The French, at this period, had much influence at Mysore; attempted, through’

Agents, to obtain footing and influence among the Mahrattas.

Sir Thomas Rumbold succeeded to the Government of Fort St. George, in Febru-

ary. His acts gave much dissatisfaction to the Home Authorities, particularly as re-

garded his alleged corrupt installation of Sitteram Raz, in the Dewanee of the Gun-

toor Sircar.

War breaking out between England and France, the French factories of Chan-

dernagore, Masulipatam, and Carical were occupied without resistance. Sir E.

Vernon, with a British squadron, engaged that of the French, under M. Tronjolly,

10th August, and dispersed the latter. Pondicherry was invested, in September, by

land, under Sir Hector Munro, and by the English fleet, by sea. After a gallant de-

fence, under M. Bellecombe, it surrendered on the 17th October, and its works

were again razed.— Mill.

1779.--A Force from Bombay, in support of Ragoba, impeded by the blunders of

Civil Commissioners placed in controul of it, got into difficulties, and commenced a

disastrous retreat, when only 16 miles from Poona. Negotiation was commenced

under these unfavorable circumstances with the confederates, and a treaty signed,

178 Chronological Table.

by which much of the acquisitions of the English, in that quarter, was relin-

uished.

Col. Leslie, commanding the Bengal force, having died the year before, General

Goddard assumed the command, and after much difficulty, and under conflicting or-

ders, marched 300 miles in 19 days, across India, reaching Surat on the 30th Janu-

ary. He was now invested by the Supreme Government with full powers, to treat

with the Poona Ministry. After much ineffectual discussion, hostilities were re-

sumed at the close of the year.

Sir Eyre Coote succeeded General Clavering, as Commander-in-Chief at Bengal,

and Member of Council in April.

The Supreme Government disapproved of Sir T. Rumbold’s acts at Fort St.

George ; he indignantly repelled the interference.

The French settlement of Mahe taken by Col. Braithwaite, 19th March of this

year, although Hyder Ali remonstrated against the act ; Mahe being useful to him-

self.— Mill.

1780.—General Goddard carried Ahmedabad by storm, on the 15th February; and

on the 3rd April, surprised the camp of the Mahratta confederates, and dispersed

them.

In the rainy season, Scindia and Holcar withdrew into their own countries. But

the most brilliant event of this year was the assault and capture of Gualior, on the

3rd August, by Capt. Popham, with a small detachment, intended to augment the

forces of Goddard.

A duel took place between Mr. Hastings and Mr. Francis, the latter having been

accused of breach of faith—he was wounded : he embarked for England on the 9th

December.

Hyder Ali, who for some time had been regaining his power, consolidating his

means, and disciplining his army, by means of French officers, incensed at the cap-

ture of Mahe, contrary to his wishes, put his troops in motion, in June, and had en-

tered into a treaty with the Mahrattas, against the English. The Government at

Madras were struck with alarm, being without troops, money, or military means.

Hyder’s army now advancing was 100,000 strong ; 20,000 of them disciplined, and

commanded by the French. They spread devastation and ruin, around the precincts

of Madras, while Sir Hector Munro had no force, to make head against them. Ar-

cot was invested by the Mysoreans. Col. Baillie’s detachment was overpowered and

cut to pieces on the 9th September; and Sir H. Munro, who had advanced to his

relief, forced back to the mount, from Conjeveram. The Supreme Government now

interposed. It sent round Sir Eyre Coote, by sea, in October, with treasure and

troops, detaching a body of Sepoys by land. Mr. Whitehill, who had succeeded Sir

T. Rumbold, as Governor, on his removal in April, was suspended by the Bengal

Government, Mr. Charles Smith taking his place, Sth October ; and Sir Eyre Coote,

notwithstanding Arcot had by this time fallen, soon was prepared to enter into ope-

rations against the formidable enemy now opposed to the British.— Mill, and others.

At Bombay, the Government, under considerable financial difficulty, was obliged

to contract new debts, to enable General Goddard, with his contingent force, to act

with efficiency. In October, he moved from Surat, with reinforcements of Europeans

from Madras, against Basseen. On the 10th December, when a practicable breach

was nearly effected, the fort made an offer of surrender, which was carried into

effect on the following morning.— Mill.

This year an act was passed at home, similar to one of the preceding session,

permitting a dividend of 8 per cent. for the year, reserving the surplus profit for

the future disposal of the legislature.

At Bengal, the new Supreme Court, from its constant pretensions and attempts,

for some years, to extend its jurisdiction, had occasioned much inconvenience to

the Government, and subjected the native community to distress, by the introduc-

tion of legal proceedings, affecting the property and persons of inhabitants of re-

mote provinces, never contemplated to be amenable to its power. The situation of

the Company with native princes, and the treaties with the Nswab or others,

were utterly disregarded by the Court. The Cauzee of the Patna Court, in 1777,

was seized for acting upon the regulations of Government ; and the decision of the

Company’s Court reversed. The Cauzee died under imprisonment. In the same

year, a process was violently served on the Dewan of the Foujdaree Court, at Dac-

ca, and some members of the Foujdar’s family dangerously wounded in the affray.

At length, 1779, a suit was commenced against the Rajah of Cassijurah, writs were

issued, and the Rajah’s zenanah forcibly entered, and his effects plundered. The |

Government now summarily interfered; the Military at Midnapore were ordered

to intercept the Sheriff’s party. Matters were thus at once brought to issue. A

summons, on the Governor General and Council, was served on them individually,

and they, of course, refused, by their counsel, to submit to any such proceeding of

Chronological Table. Lag

the Supreme Court. At length, (24th October, 1780,) a means of reconciliation

with the Judges was adopted, by appointing Sir E. Impey, to he Chief Judge, also

of the Sudder Dewannee Adawlut, with an additional salary of 60,000 rupees per

annum. This appointment was deemed most exceptionable on general principles,

notwithstanding the admitted advantage of his professional knowledge, and that

he reformed and methodised the practice of the Dewannee Courts.—Mill. Grant.

1781.—At Bengal, in April, the Dewannee Courts were increased from 16 to 18;

and the Foujdars, or Native Magistrates, were this year removed. In February, Mr.

Hastings had decreed, that a Committee of Revenue should be established at the

Presidency, consisting of four covenanted servants, and Provincial Councils were

abolished. After these changes, the Governor General proceeded, in August, to

Benares, determined to adopt measures against the Rajah Cheyte Sing. Demands

were made upon him for additional tribute to be paid to the Company, as the so-

vereign power now requiring assistance in its exigency. The Rajah declined,

pleading willingness, but inability. He was seized by Mr. Hastings’ order, at Be-

nares: a revolt took place in his behalf, on the 20th August; nearly two compa-

nies of sepoys, and their officers, were destroyed—and the Rajah escaped in the con-

fusion. The Governor General immediately assumed controul of the province ; and

troops were called in to oppose the Rajah, who now headed the numbers flocking to

his support. He was defeated at Lutteefpore—and lastly, his stronghold of

Bidjegur was seized, and his family plundered by a force under Major Popham.

The Rajah had fled, on his reverses at Lutteefpore, to Bundelcund. After these

transactions at Benares, the Governor General proceeded to Oude, to obtain an ad-

justment of the heavy debts due to the Company by the Vizier. ‘The territories of

the Begums, (one, the mother of Sujah ud Dowlah, the late Nawab—the other, the

mother of the present one,) were seized, on a charge of aiding the insurrection

of Cheyte Sing, and in an arrangement with the Nawab Vizier, their revenues

and property were appropriated towards the redemption of the Nawab’s debt to

our Government.

Madras.—On the 17th January, the army, under Sir Eyre Coote, marched from

the Mount, and proceeded to Pondicherry, where the General disarmed the inhabi-

tants. The French fleet was off that town, but being in want of water and necessa~

ries, and unequal to cope with the expected English squadron, it sailed on the 15th

February, for the Isle of France. The English fleet now attacked Hyder’s new

shipping, and destroyed the germs of his maritime power, at Calicut and Mangalore.

On the 1st July, Hyder, emboldened by a partial repulse, suffered by the English

General, at Chellinbram, in June, risked a general engagement at Porto Novo, and

was completely routed. Hyder abandoned now his designs on the southern provin-

ces ; his son Tippoo raised the siege of Wandewash—and both retired to Arcot. On

the 27th August, another battle took place, at the place where Baillie was defeated.

The result was indecisive, though victory was claimed by both armies. The Eng-

lish troops were in great difficulty for pay and provisions. But on the 27th Sep-

tember, Hyder suffered farther loss at the pass of Sholinghur; and in October, his

fortress of Chittore surrendered. On the 21st November, the English returned to

cantonments, having lost one-third of their force in this campaign. During the

year, Lord Macartney had assumed the Government, on the 22nd June ; and putting

himself at the head of the Militia, he took Sadras and Policat, on the breaking

out of war with the Dutch. On the 12th November, Negapatam capitulated to Sir

H. Munro, (who had left Sir Eyre Coote in disgust, and now commanded a force

under the orders of the Governor,) and with it fell all the Dutch settlements on the

coast ;—shortly afterwards, those on Ceylon shared the same fate.

On the 9th April of this year, Lord North brought forward, at home, some propo-

sitions restricting the Company, and bringing their affairs more under the controul

of the Secretary of State. Though not adopted at this period, yet on these were

afterwards based three principal provisions of Mr. Pitt’s East India Bill. Lord

North’s suggestions were modified into the Act 21, Geo. III. cap. 65; and all

former privileges were granted to the Company until the 1st March, 1791. But all

despatches on Revenue or Civil and Military matters were, by this Bill, to be sub-

mitted to the Minister.

Parliamentary attention was now much directed to Indian affairs. Two Committees

were formed: in one of them Mr. Burke became conspicuous—in the other, Mr.

Henry Dundas. By a Bill passed on the 19th June, the Jurisdiction of the Supreme

Court io India was restricted. The Governor General, and Council, with all matters

of Revenue, all Zumeendars, Native Farmers, and Collectors of the Revenue, were

exempted from its jurisdiction.— Mill.

1782.—-Madras.—The campaign against Hyder commenced, by the English throw.

ing supplies into Vellore. The English fleet, under Sir E. Huzhes, and the French

under the famous Suffrien, had an indecisive action on the 17th February. The French

180 Chronological Table.

Admiral contrived, however, to land 2,000 men at Porto Novo. From the 16th to the

18th February, Colonel Braithwaite’s detachment bravely and perseveringly with-

stood incessant attacks from a combined force of French and Mysoreans, under M.

Lally and Tippoo; but was, at length, forced to surrender. Tippoo treated the pri-

soners well. Cuddalore yielded to the same combined force on the 3rd April. On

the 12th April, the French and English fleets again engaged ; and though the fight

commenced under most disadvantageous circumstances for the English, they dis-

abled the enemy, and both fleets lay for seven days within random shot, unable to

assail each other; they then mutually retreated. Hyder, in June, dexterously

maneuvred with a detachment of his army, and carried off his treasure from Arnee,

where it was threatened by Sir E. Coote. On the 29th June, news came of a sepa-

rate treaty with the Mahrattas, made by the Supreme Government at Poona, on

the 17th May, putting an end to all operations in that quarter. A negotiation was

commenced also with Hyder, who again out-manceuvred the General, and was only

prevented from reducing Negapatam, in a plan of combined operations with Suffrien,

by the latter again encountering the English fleet on the 4th July; the French

Admiral was able, however, to retake Trincomalee, on the 31st August, the English

fleet heaving in sight, just two days after its surrender, when a gallant action was

fought,—and Suffrien broke six of his Captains, for not supporting him. Sir Eyre

Coote, by this time, was seriously ill, at Madras ; and the Government there under

much alarm: their means were reduced to the lowest ebb, and their food even limited

to 30,000 bags of grain, lying in the roads, unequal to a month’s supply. At this

crisis, on the 15th October, the Admiral quitted them, and the following day, a storm

either sunk or stranded the craft containing the grain. Famine now raged awfully :

Sir Eyre Coote still sick : no longer equal to command, sailed for Bengal, and General

Stnart succeeded to the head of the army, with provisions only for a few days, and

its pay six months in arrears.

On the 7th December, Hyder Ali died, and Tippoo, (who had been detached against

Colonel Humberstone, whom he vigorously attacked in conjunction with Lally,

though the Colonel bravely withstood and repelled him,) hearing of his father’s

death, joined the main army, and was, in afew days, firmly established on the

throne. He now took the field in December, with 900 Europeans, 250 Topasses,

2,000 Sepoys of the French allies, with countless hosts of Mysoreans—while the

English Carnatic force amounted only to 2,945 Europeans and 11,545 Natives.

In Parliament, Mr. Dundas moved the recall of Mr. Hastings; it came to no re-

sult, but on the 3rd May,an address to the King was carried, that His Majesty

would be pleased to recall Sir E. Impey, to answer for his conduct in accepting a

situation under the Bengal Local Government.—Mill.

1783.—Madras.—The English army early commenced the campaign; but found

that Tippoo was retiring from the Carnatic, being recalled in Mysore, not only to

consolidate his government, but to defend his territories against an incursion of the

English, under General Matthews, in Bednore. The General had reached Bombay,

from home, with reinforcements for India, and immediately advanced as above.

Tippoo suddenly, in April, appeared against him, retook Bednore, cut off the re-

treat of the detachment : their resources ceased—and without food or ammunition,

they surrendered to him on the 30th April. The General and troops were afterwards

cruelly treated. Discussions had arisen at Fort St. George, between General Stuart

and the Government, and the army remained inactive till June, when it attacked

Cuddalore, and failed. The English fleet offered battle on the 22nd June to Suffrien ,

which the latter seemed to have declined, but immediately landed troops at Cud-

dalore, where the French were already more than superior to the English opposed

‘to them. Just as the French were meditating an effective attack, peace was an-

nounced from Europe, between France and England—and the French seceded from

their operations on behalf of Tippoo. At this period, General Stuart was placed in

arrest, by the Government ; but Colonel Fullarton, who, witha separate detachment,

was successfully carrying on operations in the southern provinces, was able to

threaten, in November, even Seringapatam itself. He was checked only in his suc-

‘cessful advances by negotiations for peace entered into with Tippoo.

Bengal.—Mr. Hastings was occupied with measures regarding the Vizier of

Oude. The English residency was experimentally withdrawn, on the 31st Decem-

ber, under much asserted intrigue and cabal. ;

At home, Mr. Fox proposed a Bill for Indian affairs ; it had in view, the abolish-

ment of the Courts of Directors and Proprietors. Seven Commissioners were to

be appointed by the Legislature, to manage the political, and nine Directors, to be

selected by the Proprietors, to conduct the commercial concerns. It created great

alarm, and the King interposed to effect a majority against his Minister.

Sir T. Rumbold, late Governor of Madras, was arraigned before Parliament ; but

the doubtful situation of the Rockingham Ministry prevented the proceeding coming

to a result. —Mill.

Chronological Table. 181

1784.—Madras.—After some delay, peace with Tippoo was signed, (11th March,)

on the general condition of a mutual. restoration of conquests—it was ratified from

Calcutta, Mr. Hastings being then at Luckaow : but no cordiality subsisted between

himself and the Madras Governor, and he afterwards disapproved of the treaty, and

insisted upon other terms. Lord Macartney, on his own responsibility, gave in the

original treaty to Tippoo; nor did the Governor General resent the disobedience

any more than he did that of the preceding year, when Lord Macartney refused to

surrender the Assignment of the Carvatie territory to its Nawab, when ordered by

the Governor General, on a reconsideration of the measure, to give up the Revenues

and Government now formally assumed by the English.

Bengal.—In February, the Governor General again proceeded to the upper pro-

vinces. He imprisoned, at Beuares, the Native Deputy placed over the territories

of the deposed Cheyte Sing, for misconduct in the administration of the province.

At Lucknow, he succeeded in obtaining more of the debt due to the Company ; re-

lieved the Vizier of the burthen of a detachment of the army, under Colonel Sir

John Cummings ; and finally restored ia part to the Begums, as commanded by

the Court of Directors, the Jaghiers which had been taken from those Princesses.

He returned to the presidency in November.

The defeat in Parliament of Mr. Fox’s Bill for India, in the preceding year, hay-

ing been foliowed by the loss of office, Mr. Pitt, his successor, procured, on the 13th

August, 1784, the passing of an Act modelled by himself, but partaking of the pro-

visions suggested by Lord North. Its grand enactment consisted of Ministerial

Commissioners, forming a Board of Controul; its minor features were a secret

Committee of Directors ; less power to the proprietors ; a provision for ascertain-

ing the fortunes amassed by public servants in India ;. and a tribunal for the trial

of offences there committed by them.— Ail,

1785.—Mr. Hastings on the 6th February, resigned the Government, and embark-

ed for England. In 1772, on the commencement of his administration, the Revenues

under Bengal were, £2,373,650; the Civil and Military charges, £1,705,279 ; differ-

ence, £668,371. The debt in India was, £1,850,166; in England, £12,550,166. In

1785, the receipts under Bengal, had increased to £5,315,197; the expences were,

£4,312,519; difference, £1,002,678. But including the Home debts, it appears,

that in 1786, on bringing all arrears to account, 123 millions had been added general-

ly to the Company’s debt during the period under review.—Mill.

1786.—Lord Cornwallis was appointed Governor General and Commander in Chief

September 12. Courts of Dewannee placed under Collectors. Three Bills passed

to amend late Act, a fourth also passed-— Mill.

1787.—Mr. Hastings impeached in Parliament—impeachment of Sir E. Impey

negatived. New Code of Judicial Regulations passed by Lord Cornwallis.—Mill,

1788.—Mr. Pitt’s declaratory Act brought before the House. MHasting’s trial

commenced 13th February. Emperor Shah Aulum dethroned, and afterwards

blinded by Gholam Kadir.— Mill.

1789.-— Lord Cornwallis’ revenue reforms and decennial settlements (afterwards

perpetual) commenced. Tippoo’s operations against Travancore.—Mill.

1790.—Administration of Criminal Justice assumed throughout Bengal provinces.

Tippoo’s aggression in Travancore led to war with the English, and an alliance was

entered into by them with the Nizam and Mahrattahs. General Meadows took

the field—war varied in success. Revenues and Government of Nawab of Car-

natic resumed by the English.— Mill,

1791.—Lord Cornwallis assumed the command at Madras against Tippoo.

Bangalore carried by storm 21st March. Battle of Aukera 15th May. Hoolydroog

taken 19th June, and afterwards Mendry Owog, Savendroog, and Onadroog stormed.

—Miill.

1792.—Tippoo beaten near Seringapatam, 6th February. The place immediately

invested ; operations ceased on preliminary of peace 24th February. Half of Tip-

poo’s territories to be ceded ; two sons given as hostages. Peace concluded 19th

March.—Col. Kirkpatrick’s Embassy to Nepal.—Mill.

1793.—French settlements taken on breaking out of Republican war. Perma-

nent Revenue settlement carried into effect by Governor General. Financial and

Judicial functions disjoined in public officers. Zillah Courts instituted, Provin-

cial Courts of Appeal ditto. Criminal Courts and Circuits appointed. Marquis

Cornwallis resigned 28th October. Sir John Shore succeeded as Governor General.

Charter renewed to East India Company for 20 years.—Mill.

1794.—Sir W. Jones died April 27. Tippoo’s sons restored.— Mill.

1795.—Warren Hastings acquitted April 23, after trial of 7 years—all the Dutch

possessions at Ceylon and on the Indian continent fell to the English, Mahomed

Ali of the Carnatic died.—Mill,

182 Chronological Table.

1796.—The Indian Army re-organised.—Miill.

1797.—East India Judicature Bill passed the Commons 10th July. Lord Mor-

nington appointed Governor General 24th October—Lord Clive to Madras, Decem-

ber 13th.—Mill,

1798.—Vazeer Ali of Oude deposed—Saadut Ali proclaimed. Sir J. Shore resign-

ed March 12th, Lord Mornington arrived May 18th. Treaty with Nizam, who dis-

bands body of French Troops.— Mill.

1799.—Vazeer Ali’s insurrection at Benares, January 14th. War declared

against Tippoo for intrigues with the French, February 22nd. Seringapatam taken

by storm May 4th, and Tippoo killed. Mysore divided. Thanks of Parliament voted

October 4th. Lord Mornington created Marquis Wellesley, December 2nd.— Mill.

1800.—Act passed for regulating Governor of British India, July 28th. Marquis

Wellesley made Captain General andC. C. in India, August 7. College of Fort

William instituted, August 16.—Mill.

1801.—Lord Lake arrived as Commander in Chief. Supreme Court instituted at

Madras, and Charter read, September 4.—Mill.

1802.—Large cessions enforced from Nawab of Oude, with the deposition of

Nawab of Furuckabad. Powers of Arcot, Tanjore and Surat had been deposed.

Subsidiary treaties attempted with the Mahrattahs. Treaty signed with Peshwah

at Bassein.— Mull.

1803.—Possession of Pondicherry, which had been given up on Peace of Amiens,

recovered by the English. Bonaparte had sent out several general officers, and

others with 100,000 in specie. Mahrattah powers opposed to Treaty of Bassein.

War with Scindia and Berar Rajah. Lord Lake marched against M. Perron, who

retired from Scindia. Aligur taken by assault, 4th September. Battle of Delhi

llth. Battle of Saswarie (Lord Lake) 31st October. Battle of Assye (Sir A.

Wellesley) 23rd September. Battle of Argaum (ditto), 29th November. Province of

Cuttack taken possession of in October. Peace with Berar 17th December—Peace

with Scindia 29th December.— Mill.

1804.—War against Holkar. Monson’s retreat July and August, brave defence

of Delhi for 9 days in October. Shah Aulum restored to nominal sovereignty at

Delhi. Battle before Deeg 13th November. General Fraser wounded mortally.

Holkar’s Cavalry pursued during November. Deeg fell 24th December.—Mill.’

1$05.—Bhurtpore invested, assaults failed on the 9th and 22nd January and 20th

February—Siege intermitted, and treaty with Bhurtpore 10th April. Cornwallis

arrived again as Governor General and Commander in Chief 30th July. Policy

toward Native Powers changed. Lord Clive died 5th October. Treaty with Scindiah

23rd November, and with Holkar 24th December.—Mill.

1806.—Shah Aulum dies—succeeded by Akbar Shah.—Mill.

1807.—Mutiny of Native Troops at Vellore, January 31st.—Miil.

1807.—Lord Minto assumes the office of Governor General, on July 31.—(Comp.

to Alm. 1832.)

1808.—War with Travancore occasioned by a misunderstanding between the

British Resident and the dewan of the Rajah. Troops sent from Trichinopoly on

the 30th December. Col. Chambers repulsed a body of Travancore Troops, and

Colonel A another body at Anjuncha on the 3lst December.—(Comp. to

Alm. 1832.

1809.—(Madras.) Travancore Army again defeated, January 15th. The lines of

Travancore stormed on the 10th February. Papanaviram captured on the 17th,

and the whole of the lines on the 21st, which ended the war.

In consequence of offensive regulations, considerable disaffection arose in the

Madras army—on the 5th of August, Lord Minto sailed for Madras to suppress it.

On the 6th August, the Troops at Chottledroog seized the Military Treasure, and

marched to join aforce at Seringapatam, which had seized the garrison. On the

23rd August the disaffected troops at Seringapatam surrendered—Lord Minto pub-

lished an amnesty on the 25th September*.

(Bengal) Adjygurh in Bundlecund stormed 13th February. Bowannee, a Fort

in Hurriana, reduced on the 29th August, the chief having plundered the British.

In October assistance was given to the Rajah of Berar against the exactions of

Ameer Khan, a predatory Mohammedan chief connected with Holkar. Ameer Khan

was expelled from Berar.— (Comp. to Alm. 1832.)

* The compiler of this Table had proceeded thus far when he found his task had been anticipated

in a great measure by ‘* Chronogical account of connexion between England and India,” which was

published at home in the “* Companion to the Almanac” for 1832. As usefulness is the only aim of a

mere compilation such as this professes to be, the compiler has availed himself gladly of the new

Table from 1807, and endeavoured to render his own more correct. This table, however, in earlier

events is much fuller than that in the Companion to the Almanac.

Chronological Table. 183

1810.—Amboyna surrendered to the British, 17th February, followed by other

islands. Banda taken August 9. Ternate August 29th.

Troops under Col. Keating landed at Bourbon July 7th, which fell on the 9th.

The Mauritius surrendered on the 3rd December to an expedition from India

under General Sir R. Abercrombie.— (Comp. to Ali. 1832.)

1811.—Expedition from India under Sir Samuel Auckmuty landed in Java on the

4th August. On the 8th, city of Batavia surrendered—on the 10th followed the

action at Weltervreden. On the 26th the entrenched camp at Cornelis was carried

by assault, and with this action ceased the Dutch sovereignty of Java.

1812—The Pindarees—large bodies of free-booters—began to be independent of

their Mahratta patrons, and plundered part of the district of Mirzapore. Subsi-

diary alliance formed with Anund Rao Guikwar, Rajah of Baroda.—(Comp. to

Alm. 1832.)

1813.—Governor General sends a letter, June 4th, to the Rajah of Nepal, demand-

ing redress for repeated depredations of the Nepalese.

July 21, (Act 53 Geo. c. 155,) passed, renewing the privileges of the Company

for 20 years. By this act the trade to India was thrown open, that to China alone

remaining exclusively with the Company. The territorial and commercial affairs

now separated ; the accounts to be rendered distinct. The king empowered to

create a Bishop of India, and an Archdeacon for each Presidency, to be paid by the

Company.

The Earl of Moira assumed the Government as Governor General and Comman-

der in Chief.— (Comp. to Alm. 1832.)

1814.—On the 29th May, the Nepalese attacked three British Tannahs at Boot-

wooh and murdered the Darogah. For this and other acts the Governor General

declared war on the ist November. The English troops at first beat back at Mol-

lapannee, were repulsed with loss, and General Gillespie killed on the 31st Novem-

ber. Col. Bradshaw attacked and carried the post of Bushurwa, 25th November,

‘and Lieut. Boileau, in personal conflict, killed the Goorka Commander. Major

Ludiow’s detachment was defeated at Jythug at the end of December.—(Prinsep.)

1815.—1st January, Captain Blackney’s and Captain Sibley’s detachments cut up

by the Goorkahs near the Terraee Forest. 3rd January, Major General J. Sullivan

Wood beat back at Jeetgurh. 10th February, Major General Marley suddenly

relinquished his command of the army in the Terrace ; he was succeeded by Major

General Sir G. Wood, who also failed to advance. In February and March, Col.

Gardner with a body of Rohillahs penetrated into Kumaon, and was successful in

retaining a footing. Major Hearsey attempted the same, but was overcome by

numbers and made prisoner. Colonel Nicolls, with a regular sepoy force, proceeded.

to the support of Col. Gardner, and on the 27th April, Almorah and the province of

Kumaon formally surrendered to our arms in consequence of his successes.

The Goorkah General Umar Sing defeated on the 15th and 16th April at Deolul,

by Sir D. Ochterlony ; and on the 15th May, being completely outmancuvred by that

enterprising officer, surrendered Maloun, and all the provinces from Kumaon west-

ward ; this finished the first campaign.— (Prinsep.)

1816—The Nepal General had sued for peace, but in their uncertain councils

withheld the promised ratification, and hostilities re-commenced in February. Sir

D. Ochterlony on the 14th and 15th February turned in person the position of Choo-

reah, and his army passed the first barrier of hills in progress to the capital, Catman-

doo. On the 28th February a general engagement ensued, and the Goorkahs were

defeated with loss. Peace followed, the Nepalese agreeing to receive a Resident,

and sacrificing much territory.

During this war, it was discovered that the Mahrattas were anxious to confe-

derate against the British, while Runjeet Sing hada large army threatening the

protected Seiks. Ameer Khan also had an immense body of Patans ready to act

against our Agrafrontier. In fact a general rising was contemplated, and Lord Hast-

ings prepared accordingly. The Pindarees were now to be extirpated for the imme-

diate safety of our provinces. The Mahratta powers consisted at this juncture of

Scindia, sovereign of the states so called; Bajee Rao, the Peshwah and head of the

Poonah states (who had early betrayed his hostility by murdering, through his minister

Tumbuctjee, an envoy acting under the British guarantee); and Holkar, head of

the dominions called after that family, and the Nagpoor Rajah, Appah Sahib.

(Prinsep.)

1817.—The supposed impregnable Fortress of Hattras fell (February 23rd), after

aheavy bombardment. :

Appah Sahib, notwithstanding a late treaty with the British, was deeply en-

triguing and collecting troops ; Bajee Rao was also arming extensive levies, and sent

off his family and treasures from Poona. Mr. Elphinstone called in a British force

and invested Poona on the 8th May, and Bajee Rao was forced to discard Tum-

pP 2

184 Chronological Table.

buctjee, receive a contingent force, and pay 34 lacs by treaty signed 13th June:

Tumbuctjee for the time escaped.

Lord Hastings left Calcutta for the Upper Provinces 8th July; on the 10th

October the Bengal armies were put in motion, and Lord Hastings assumed com-

mand of the centre division, 20th October, taking up a position near Gualior to

awe Scindiah. Sir T. Hislop with the Deccan army from Madras, and Sir W.

Keir from Bombay advanced against the Mahrattas.

Scindiah soon signed (5th November) the treaty imposed on him, and thus

was rendered harmless in the ensuing struggle.

Ameer Khan followed his example on the 9th November. The Pindarees, the

ostensible primary objects of our movements, were now in three bodies, Ist under

Cheetoo, west of the Kalee Sind ; the 2nd under Kureem Khan, near Bopal; the 3rd

under Wazil Mahomed, to the westward of Saugor.

The Peshwah broke out on the 5th November in an attack on the Residency, but

was repulsed by Mr. Elphinstone with the troops under Col. Burn. The Nagpoor

Rajah Appah Sahib, next attacked the Residency of Nagpoor, on the 25th No-

vember, and on the 27th, Captain Fitzgerald of the 6th Cavalry decided the protract-

ed contest by his celebrated charge. On the evening of the 16th December, Brigadier

General Doveton attacked Appah Sahib at Nagpoor, and next day completely routed

him. Appah Sahib ictimidated came into our Camp.

The different divisions acting under Lord Hastings continued, to the end of the

year, to pursue and destroy the hordes of Pindarees, now flying in all directions.

The Cholera Morbus, which had broken out in this year during the rainy season

in the Delta of the Ganges, travelling westward attacked Lord Hasting’s army,

shortly after the conclusion of the treaty with Scindiah. The deaths were esti-

mated at one-tenth of the army and followers.

Ameer Khan’s treaty finally ratified 19th December, when he went into Sir David

Ochterlony'’s Camp. Sir T. Hislop totally defeated the troops of Holkar at Mahid-

pore on the 21st December.—(Prinsep.) *

1818.—On the Ist January Captain Staunton, with a single Battalion, gallantly

beat off repeated attacks of the whole of the Peshwah’s army, consisting 20,000 men.

Holkar on his defeat at Mahidpore, immediately accepted the terms imposed on him ;

the same were ratified on the 17th January. Sutara takeo by General Smith, 11th

February. Bajee Rao for ever deposed, the Sutara family restored, and Sevajee’s

standard hoisted. The Ex-Peshwah was again defeated by General Smith on the

20th February ; Gokla was slain, the forts of Bajee Rao fell, and himself became

a fugitive. Lord Hastings, finding his plans nearly effected, commenced his march

homewards on the 15th February. Talner attacked by Sir T. Hislop, 27th February,

and carried after the loss of several officers by treachery, the Killadar was hanged.

Mundella, which was to have been given up, was obliged to be stormed 26th April ;

the fort fell the next day: the Killadar was tried but acquitted, having private

orders from his sovereign Appah Sahib*. Saugor surrendered 11th March. On the

17th April Bajee Rao’s army was met at Soonee, and routed by Col. Adams with a

small force. His remaining Infantry was, attacked at Soolapore by Brigadier

General Munro, and completely destroyed. Soolapore fell on the 15th May with

the remains of his Artillery. Chanda was invested by Colonel Adams on the 9th

May, it was stormed and carried on, the 20th. Bajee Rao surrendered himself to

Sir John Malcolm, on terms however very favorable for the Prince. Maligoan,

garrisoned by the Arabs late in the Mahratta service, surrendered on the 13th

June. e

Thus, including the fall of Asseerghur in the following year (April 19th), was

effected the entire subversion of the Mahratta powers. Scindiah became crippled,

and existing only on sufferance. The Sutara family was restored, but subservient to

our power, and restricted to a small domain. The late Peshwah Bajee Rao’s

power utterly destroyed, his dominions occupied, and himself a prisoner. Holkar

submissive, and in complete check. The Nagpoor states new modelled: Bajee Rao

Bhoola placed on the throne, but the government was placed under the controul and

management of the British.—(Prinsep.)

1819.—A settlement made at Singapore by Sir Stamford Raffles, January. In-

western India the Fort at Newah taken, January 31st; that of Newtee February

4th; Raree February 14th ; Booj March 23rd ; Asseerghur March 30th ; Copal Droog

May 14th, An expedition from Bombay sailed October 30th for the Persian Gulph,

and took the fortress of Ras el Khyma, the capital of the Joapmee Pirates, on the

9th December, and the Fort and Town of Zaya, about ten days later. The Spasmodic

Cholera, which had broken out in. India 1817, still raged in various parts Of it.

* Appab Sahib’s treachery being proved, he was placed under arrest : he made his escape again,

13th April,

Chronological Table. 185

‘The Vuzeer of Oude threw off his nominal allegiance to the Emperor of Delhi, and

assumed the title of King*.

1820.—The Prince Azim Jah Bahadur installed Nawab of the Carnatic, Febru-

ary 3rd, vice Azim ul Dowla, who died the preceding August. Spasmodic Cholera

broke out in Manilla, and the natives attributing it to the secret arts of Europeans,

rose upon and murdered many of them, October 9. Dwarka in Okamandel taken,

“November 25th.

1821.—Peace concluded between Imam of Senna and the British Government,

January 15th. The capital of the Arab Tribe of Beni Boo Ali, taken in March, by

‘Colonel Lionel Smith. Napoleon Bonaparte died at St. Helena, March 5th. Revo-

lution at the Portuguese settlement of Goa, September 6th. Cholera raging in

Persia.

1822.—Dr. T. Fanshaw Middleton, the first Bishop of Calcutta, died July 8th.

Severe Fire at Canton November ist. Treaty with the Nizam, December 12.

1823.—January 9th, the Marquis of Hastings resigned his Government of India.

Lord Amherst appointed his successor ; assumed the Government Ist August.

1824.—War declared against the Burmese in consequence of their aggressions,

March 5th. Rangoon taken by the British Forces, under Sir A. Campbell, May

1ith. Island of Negrais taken, May 17th. Cheduba taken May 27th, Tavoy and

Mergui taken, September 15th, and Martaban October 30th. Mutiny at Barrack-

pore ; many Sepoys killed, November 2nd. Kemmendine and Dallah taken, 9th De-

cember. Nawab Mobaruck Ali Khan placed on the musnud of Bengal, Behar

and Orissa, December 23rd.

1825.—Syriam taken from the Burmese, 11th January. Rungpore and Tantabair

on the 2nd and 6th February. Donabew taken and the Burmese General Bundoolah

killed, 2nd April. Ramree and Prome taken 2nd and 25th April. His Highness Azim

Jah Bahadur, Nawab of the Carnatic, died November 12, aged 34. Wallygoun

and Paghammew taken from the Burmese, 11th and 25th November. The Enter-

prise, the first Steam Vessel, sailed for India 16th August, arrived at Saugor Decem-

ber 8th. There was arebellion at Bhurtpore on the Rajah’s Death in February, and

the British Government commenced operations to support the heir.

1826.—Bhurtpore stormed and taken by the Bengal Troops under Lord Comber-

mere, January 18th; the British lost during the siege 45 officers killed and wounded,

and 1500 men ; the enemy lost some thousands, and the Usurper was seized. The

Burmese defeated at Melloon by Sir A. Campbell, January 19th, and forced to con-

clude a peace, on the 24th February. War declared between Russia and Persia.

1827.—Sir T. Munro, Governor of Madras, died July 6th. Natives of India per-

mitted to sit as Jurors, July 9th,

-1828.—Treaty of Peace between Russia and Persia signed, February 22nd. Lord

William Bentinck appointed Governor General of India, arrived in India, and took

his seat in Council July 4th.

1829.—The Act for the Relief of Insolvent Debtors in the East Indies brought

into operation, March Ist. Europeans allowed to, hold lands in their own names on

leases of 60 years in February of this year. The rite of Sutfee abolished by Lord

William Bentinck in December.

1830.—The House of Messrs. Palmer and Co. of Calcutta failed, 5th January,

being the first of a series of failures of the leading houses to the extent of many

millions sterling. H.M. George the 4th died, June 26th.

1$31.—Ram Mohun Roy, a Brahmin, arrived at Liverpool from India, April 8th.

Lord Wi!liam Bentinck met Runjeet Sing at Roopur, October 25th.

1832.—Parsee Riots at Bombay, June 7th. Fire at the Arsenal Fort William,

July 25th. An intended Mutiny discovered at Bangalore, October 28th.

1833.—The East India question debated in Parliament, and leave given to

bring in a Bill for the renewal of the Charter, with some modifications, in March.

The Bill was subsequently passed, August 18th. Its leading new provisions as

follows : The British Indian Territories to remain under the Company till the

30th April 1854. Trade to cease from April 1834. All debts and liabilities made

chargeable on Territorial Revenue. A dividend payable in Great Britain half

yearly on East India Stock, at the rate of £10. 10s. per cent. redeemable after

1874 at £200 for every £100 stock. The Company to pay over to Commissioners

for the reduction of national debt 2 millions, to increase at interest till it shall

reach 12 millions, as a Security Fund of the East India Company. The Presidency

of Fort William to be divided into two Presidencies (since modified). The superin-

tendence and control in India, Civil and Military, vested in a Governor General and

Counsellors to be styled ‘‘ the Governor General of India in Council.’’ To have three

* In the following years the events are quoted on the authority of the Madras and Calcutta

186 Chronological Table. Native States.

Ordinary Members of Council, Servants of the Company (a Military servant eligible)

and a fourth Member, not a servant of the Company. The Governor General in

Council empowered to legislate for India, and his Laws and Regulations to have the

force of Acts of Parliament, subject however to disallowance by the home authorities.

The Council may assemble in any part of India. A Law Commission appointed

to inquire into existing Laws, the Court of Justice, Police, &c. Governors of

other Presidencies to have same powers and immunities as heretofore, bat not to

make laws or grant money. British subjects, allowed to reside without licence in

India with certain exceptions only: allowed to purchase land. Persons of all colours,

religion or country admissible to any office or employment under the Company. His

Majesty empowered to make Bishops for Madras and Bombay. Four candidates

for students to be entered at Hayleybury for each vacancy in the Civil Service. St.

Helena to be transferred to the Crown, &c. &c. Lord Napier appointed H. M.’s

Chief Commissioner at Canton, November, after the ceasing of the Company’s

Factory.

1834-—War declared against the Rajah of Coorg, April 2nd. British Troops march

into the country ; Mercara capital of Coorg, surrendered April 6th, and the Rajah

on the 10th. The China Trade stoppedin consequence of disputes with the Commis-

sioner, September 2nd. H. M. Ships Imogene and Andromache force the passage of

the Bogue. Trade re-opened, September 23rd. Lord Napier died October 11.

1835.—Lord Heytesoury sworn in as Governor Generalin London, January 28th.

Corporal Punishment in the Native Army abolished by Lord William Bentinck,

February 25th. Lord William Bentinck quits Calcutta for Europe, March 20th. Sir

Charles Metcalfe assumes the Government, March 21st. Lord Heytesbury’s appoint-

ment as Governor General revoked by a new Ministry, May 4th. Lord Auckland

appointed at home Governor General, August 12th.

Taste XCII. Classification of Native States, with which the British

Indian Government is in alliance at the present time: with the

approximate area of their territories, ascertained by dissecting and

weighing a map. (See Journal of the Asiatic Society for 1833, page

489.)

The area of the native states in alliance with the British Govern-

Ment Was LOUNG CO IDEs >, sreteieslelatscalssatelcleretekeie lave ole selelo(ersialelasstertionels, 4 ulereets 449,845

That of the territory under British rule with the remaining small

states and jagirdars,..........- SAKE SASS BOR etso 0 HauGae iets 626,746

Superficial area of all India,.......... AA AADOMOOMD Codd Ino doco scda: WC HASFaN

The extent of coast from Cape Negrais to the frontiers of Sinde is 3622 British

miles; the breadth from Surat to Silhet, 1260 miles.

[HAMILTON says, that the superficial area of Hindustan between the latitudes of

8° and 35° north, and the longitudes of 68° and 92° east, cannot be estimated at

more than 1,280,000 English square miles, and the portion belonging to the British

and their allies at 1,103,000; this estimate agrees very nearly with the above result

of weighment. |

_ Captain SUTHERLAND classifies the native states of India under the three follow-

ing heads :

I.—Foreign, viz. Persia, Kabul, Senna, the Arab tribes, Siam, Acheen.

Il.—Ezternal, on the frontier ; viz. Ava, Nepal, Lahore, Sinde.

I1I.—Jnternal, which are those included in the present list. All of these have

relinquished political relations with one another and with all other states. They

are, according to the nature of their relations or treaties with the English, divided

into six classes.

First Cuass. Treaties offensive and defensive : right on their part to claim pro-

tection, external and internal, from the British Government: right on its part to ine

terfere in their internal affairs.

. Square miles. Square miles.

1. Oude, containing, by weighment,.... 23,923 by HAMILTON*, 20,000

DENN SOC sate selel slaetclobetebetotel-telel)-ueletelelstalsie ie} D7 999) we sh ciepte's\ sie Neleislclee eC ROOO

3. Berar or Nagpar,...... .. soos sr odac ROVE) edo cc cispil herals - 70,000

4. Travancore,...... Riorelshevenmoieictevelstsistnietore BOTA. pcierels @isiele teie eltete 6,000

5 tu COCAINE LA can titi takes incest etetoe aetas 1,985 svi -.sig 0 nevesee (broseien ss aR

* This column, and other items marked H., are extracted from HAMILTON’s Hindustan by way

of comparison.

Area of Native States. 187

Seconp CuAss. Treaties offensive and defensive: right on their part to claim pro-

tection, external and internal, from the British Government, and to the aid of its

troops to realize thew just claims from their own subjects: no right on its part to

interfere in their internal affairs.

Square miles. Square miles.

6. Hyderabad, containing, by weighment, 88,884 by HAMILTON, 96,000

vin LBEIOG ae gsooouee adocod necode anoooK 24,9500 stare testes cieltene em tes O0G

Tuirp Cuass. Treaties offensive and defensive: states mostly tributary, ac-

knowledging the supremacy of, and promising subordinate co-operation to, the British

Government; but supreme rulers in their own domains.

8. Indore, containing,............ aictebeistots 4,245 square miles.

Baie Gne States. Square miles. Square miles.

Oudipaér, (H. 7,300,).. 11,784 160) JeSalmirs tee 9,779

- Jeypar,. bocmnon eo00de 13,427 17. Kishengurh,.... 724

His UeGhintiesca. Goce seca So REIS 18. Banswara,.. - .. 1,440

12. Kotah, (H. 6,500,)-. 4,389 19. Pertébgurh,.. .. 1,457

13. Bandi, (H. 2,500,).. 2,291 20. Diangarpuir,.... 2,005

MOA Widiirele wiatelsicieisicltie) ele) p1Sy2G0) IMCLOIN, loci cate MIS STS

ESI ANT Were += (0/4 esieie) ve) 15,000 DOG SCLOW Ss, | cc eareisieve 3,024

Square miles.

23. Bhartpar, (by HAMILTON, 5,000,).. ... me Hes ee 1,946

2, baal, (Givi Sx00U)))so ob dace co conboooed dnadse 6,772

25. Kutch, (H. with the Runn 13,300,)........ ...... 7,396

O85 Dnt Gea DANGERS fog Goda. Go dbooreas OO Sor AB OnaE 1,466

Cis LING NOASE Boe Se ame Gade Gaidiicdiic cotCe eee ame 1,626

Gish TREN IEMs o6c woe do co.o0 05 OO Ac 6d OOS BBD De OEE 10,310

Boghelkhand, Dhattea, }

and 29. {isis ie PH BCOd DOU ROO DO OLY OR~OUC DE 50 16,173

_ Bundelkhand, Terhi,

By SENWC AVE Gece. Gc Gobe So d0n7.00 00, CO CU GUeREGE 935

FourtH Cuass. Guarantee and protection, subordinate co-operation, but eunree

macy in their own territory.

Tonks. os.<tqets 1,103

31. Ameer Khan, | Seren Site cs 4 201 : 1,633 square miles.

Nimbahara, .. 269

Patiala, Keytal,

Be Reread Secud, (penta eee sae. 2 eae a): 16,602

FirtuH Cuass. Amity and sida:

33. Gwalior, containing,...... ve esesaccsrees cove 32,944 Square miles.

SixtH Cuass. Protection, with pe on ‘the part of the British Government to

control internal affairs.

34. Sattara, COMMENTS onob adocoos uv esooe «+++. 7,943 sqnare miles.

Abo LUSGIGTITI Sagoandcandncavcacar Gis) oohelehete estat 3,184

Of the above states, four are Mohammedan ; viz. Hyderabad, Oude, Bhopal, and

Tonk. Ofthe Hindu states, eight are Marhatta ; viz. Sattara, Gwalior, Nagptr,

Indore, Banda, Kolapir, Dhar, and Dewas.

Nineteen are Rajput ; viz. Oudipir, J eypar, Jodhpir, Bandi, Kotah, Kutch,

Alwar, Bikanir, Jesalmir, Kishengarh, Banswara, Pertdbgarh, Dungerpar, Kerolf,

Serowi, Rewah, Dhattea, Jhansi, Terhi.

Six are of other Hindu tribes ; viz. Mysore, Bhartpar, Travancore, SawantwArt,

Cochin, and Dholpar.

Besides these allied states, there are the following inferior Rajships and Jagir-

daris: viz. Chota Nagpur, Sirgajer, SambhalpGr, Singhbhum, Oudipar, Manipar,

Tanjore, the Bareich family, Ferozpir, Merich, Tansgaon, Nepani, Akulkote, and

those of the Sagar and Nerbudda country ; also Sikkim and the states of the nor-

thern hills.

;